MDX 07

@
ACURA
MDX
Servic e Manual 2007
·Generallnforrnation
Chassis and Paint Codes ........................ .......... 1-2
Identification Number Locations ........ ............ 1-3
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations .... 1-4

Under-hood Emission Control Label ............... 1-7
Lift and Support Points .................... ...... .......... 1-8
ToW'ing .............................................................. 1-9
Parts Marking .................................................... 1-10
Precautions for Super Handling All Wheel

Drive (SH~AWD) System ..................... ~ ......... 1-10
I General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes
Vehicle Identification Number En ine Number
2HN Y02 8 2 * 7 H 500001 J37A1 - 1000001
II111III
a b cdefgh
I Ib
a
il. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle a. Engine Type
2NH: Honda of Canada Mfg., J37A1: 3.7 L SOHC V1ECSequential Multiport
Honda Canada Inc., Fuel-injected engine
Acura Multipurpose passenger vehicle b. Serial Number
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
YD2: Acura MDX/J37 A 1 Transmission Number"
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
8: 5-door/5-speed Automatic BYFA - 9000001
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
USA models
2:MDX
I Ib
a
3: TECH
4: TECH with Rear Entertainment System
5: SPORT a. Transmission Type
8: SPORT with Rear Entertainment System .. BYFA: 5-speed Automatic
Canada Model b. Serial Number
2:MDX
5: TECH Paint Code
8: ELITE Code Color USA Canada
e. Check Digit models models
f. Model Year B-533M Steel Blue Metallic 0 0
7:'07 G-525M Aberdeen Green Metallic 0 0
g. Factory Code NH-578 Taffeta White 0
H: Alliston, Ontario Factory in Canada NH-671P A~en White Pearl 0 0
h. Serial Number NH-689M Billet Silver Metallic 0 0
000001-: Canada models NH-705M Nimbus GrClY.. Metallic 0 0
500001-: USA models NH-707 Formal Black 0 0
R-529P Dark Cherry Pearl 0 0
YR-545M Desert Rock Metallic 0
INTERIOR
COLOR CODE
Vehicle Identification Number.

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Certification and Paint
Code.
Vehlclo Identification Number,
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard Certification.
PAINT CODE
CJOCJ _ _ O
.,
PAINT CODE
....
INTERIOR COLOR CODE
1-2 BACK
Identification Number Locations
Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Transmission Number

Number (VIN) Number (VIN)
Engine Number
BACK 1-3
General Information
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations
Front Passenger's Compartment:
HIGHER ROLLOVER
RISK WARNING
USA models
SRS INFORMATION
SRSWARNING USA models
INFOMATION
FRONT PASSENGER
AIRBAG WARNING TAG
(CHILD SEAT)
USA models
~~7~~~~!~-~~~~~~~~
SIDEAIRBAG
MODULE DANGER
STEERING
NOTICE COLUMN ,
FRONT SEAT BELT

MONITOR NOTICE TENSIONER CAUTION
Steering Wheel: Rear Passenger's Compartment:

ROOF SIDE
MODULE DANGER
CABLE REEL CAUTION DRIVER AIRBAG

MODULE DANGER
1-4 BACK
RADIATOR SERVICE INFOMATION TIRE INFORMATION
SRSWARNING INFOMATION (Under-hood Emission
Controllnfomation)
AIR CONDITIONING SIDE AIRBAG CAUTION

BATTERY DANGER Located on driver's and passenger's
INFORMATION
doorjamb (not shown)
RADIATOR CAP DANGER
BACK 1-5
General Information
Under-hood Emission Control Label

Emission Group Identification Test Group and Evaporative Family
Example: Test Group:
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION 7 HNX T 03.7 XKR

THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 2 BIN 5 REQULATIONS
APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR NEW LIGHT-DUTY TRUCKS AND
CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR NEW
LEY II ULEV LIGHT-DUTVTRUCKS.
7HN 0.7
7HNXR0163BBY
OBO .. CERTIFIED
I IcdI Ie I
ab
LOADED 11M TESTING OF THIS VEHICLE MUST BE CONDUCTED

§ a. Model Year
ON AFOUR·WHEEl DRIVE SPEED SYNCHRONIZED DYNAMOMETER.
OTHERWISE, ANON·LOADED TEST PROCEDURE MUST BE RVE-AOO 7: '07
PERFORMED. ACURA
HONDA MOTOR CO .• LTD.
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
FEDERAL in CANADA T:LDT
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 2 BIN 5 d. Displacement Group
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR e. Sequence Characters
NEW LIGHT-DUTY TRUCKS AND CALIFORNIA XKR
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR
NEW LEV" ULEV LIGHT-DUTY TRUCKS.
Evaporative Family:
7 HNX R 0163 BBY
I I I Ie I
abc d
a. Model Year
7: '07
b. Manufacturer Subcode
HNX: HONDA
c. Family Type
R: Refueling
d. Canister Work Capacity
e. Sequence Characters
1-6 BACK
Lift and Support Points
NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components Floor Jack

such as the suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of
the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall 1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking
safety stands. When substantial weight is removed brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the
from the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can gearshift lever in the P position.
change causing the vehicle to tip forward on the lift.
2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
Vehicle Lift
3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking
1. Position the hoist lift blocks (A) under the vehicle's bracket (A) or the rear jacking bracket (B). Center
front support points (B) and rear support points (C). the jacking bracket on the jack lift platform (C) and
jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety
stands under it.
2. Raise the lift a few inches, and rock the vehicle

gently to be sure it is firmly supported.
4. Position the safety stands under the support points
3. Raise the lift to its full height, and inspect the and adjust them so the vehicle is level.
vehicle support points for solid contact with the lift
blocks. 5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.
Safety Stands
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same

support points (B and C) as for a vehicle lift. Always use
safety stands when working on or under any vehicle
that is supported only by a jack.
BACK 1-7
General Information
Towing
If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional Towing Hook Installation

towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another The detachable front towing hook is for towing very
vehicle with just a rope or chain. Itis very dangerous. short distance, such as freeing the car. The hook
mounts to the anchor in the front and rear bumper.
Emergency Towing
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle. INOTICEI
• To avoid damage to the vehicle, use the towing
Flat-bed Equipment - The operator loads the vehicle hook for straight flat ground towing only. Do not
on the back of a truck. This is the only way of tow on an angle.
transporting the vehicle. • The tow hook should not be used to tow the
vehicle onto a flat-bed. Do not use itas a tie
To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is down.
equipped with front tie down hook slots (A), and rear tie
down hook slots (8). 1. Remove the cover (A) from the front bumper.
The tie down hook slots can be used secure the vehicle Front bumper:
to the truck.
Front:
A
Rear bumper:
Rear:
2. Remove the towing hook placed behind a cover

under the cargo area.
3. Screw in the towing hook (8), and tighten it

securely by hand.
1-8 BACK
Wheel Lift Equipment - The tow truck uses two
pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and
lift them off the ground. The other two wheels remain
on the ground. Never tow the vehicle with wheel lift
equipment.
Sling-type Equipment - The tow truck uses metal

cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension, and the cables lift that
end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's
suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this
method of towing is attempted. This method of towing
the vehicle is unacceptable.
The only recommended way oftowing the vehicle is on

a flat-bed truck.
INOTICEI
• Towing the vehicle with only two wheels on the
ground will damage parts ofthe SH-AWD system. If
the vehicle is damaged, it should be towed on a flat-
bed truck or trailer.
• Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not
designed to support the vehicle's weight.
BACK 1-9
General Information
Parts Marking Precautions for Super Handling All
Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) System
To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are
marked with the vehicle identification number (VIN).
Original parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement This vehicle is equipped with the Super Handling All
body parts have generic self-adhesive labels. These Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) system. The SH-AWD system
labels should not be removed. The original engine or distributes driving torque between the front and rear
transmission VIN plates are not transferable to the wheels when accelerating and when wheel spin occurs.
replacement engine or transmission.
The SH-AWD system does not have a manual switch to
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking disable the AWD system. Whenever service work
labels during body repair. Mask the labels before requires spinning the front or rear wheels with the
repairing the part. engine, always lift up and support the vehicle so all four
wheels are off the ground.
1-10 BACK
Specifications
Standards and Service Limits

Engine Electrical .................................................... 2-2
Engine Assembly .................................................. 2-2
Cylinder Head ........................................................ 2-3
Engine Block ...................... ~ .......•........................... 2-4
Engine .Lubrication .................. :............................. 2-5
Cooling System ...................................................... 2-5
Fuel. and Emissions ............................................... 2-5
Automatic Transmission and AfT Differential .... 2-6
. Rear Differential ........................................... ;.~ ...... 2-15
Steering ...............................................................;... 2-15
Suspension· ..... ;...................................................... 2-1·5
Brakes ..........•..~., ........................................... ~ •......... 2-16
Air Conditioning ..... ;.............................................. 2-16
Design Specifications
Dimensions ....... ;•.....................•............................. 2-17
Weight (USA) .... ~.. ~ ..................................;............... 2·-17
Weight (CANADA) ................................................. 2-17
Engine .................................................................... 2-17
Starter .................................................................... 2-17
Automatic Transmission ...................................... 2-17
Steering .................................................................. 2-18
Suspension ............................................................ 2-18
Tires ........................................................................ 2-18
Wheel Alignment .................................................. 2-18
Brakes ..................................................................... 2-18
Air Conditioning .................................................... 2-18
Electrical Ratings ................................................... 2-19
Body Specifications .............................................. 2-20
Engme EI ect·
rica
I
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Ignition coil Rated voltage 12V
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6
Spark plug Type NGK: IZFR6K11 .!'
DENSO: SKJ200R-M11
Gap 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.) --
Ignition timing At idle In N or P position 10±2°BTOC
Check the red mark
Drive belt Tension Autoctensioner
Alternator Output At 13.5 Vand 130A
normal engine
temperature
Coil (rotor) resistance At 68 'f (20 'C) 2.3 -2.7 k Q
Slip ring 0.0. 14.2-14.4 mm(0.56-0.57 in.) 13.8 mm (0.54 in.)
Brush length 10.5 mm (0.41 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Brush spring tension 2.94-3.53 N (0.30-0.36 kgf, 0.66-0.80 Ibf)
Starter Output 1.8kW
Commutator mica depth 0.50-0.90' mm (0.020-0.035 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Commutator runout 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) max. 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Commutator 0.0. 28.9-29.0 mm (1.138-1.142 in.) 28.0 mm (1.102 in.)
Brush length 15.0-16.0 mm (0.59-0.63 in.) 9.0 mm (0.35 in.)
Brush spring tension (new) 22.3"':""27.3 N (2.27-2.78 kgf, 5.00-6.13Ibf)
Engme Assem blIV

Compression Pressure Minimum 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm', 144 psi) --
Check the engine with the starter Maximum 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm', 28 psi) --
cranking variation
2-2 BACK
c;ylln
r der Hea d Standard or New Service Limit
Item Measurement Qualification
Head Warpage -- 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Height 120.95-121.05 mm (4.7618-4.7657 in.) - -
Camshaft End play 0.05-0.20 mm (0.002-0.008 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance 0.050-0.089 mm (0.0020-0.0035 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Total runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
Cam lobe height Intake, primary 35.112 mm (1.3823 in.) --
Intake, mid 36.394 mm (1.4328 in.) --
Intake, 35.112 mm (1.3823 in.) --
, ' secondary
Exhaust 36.389 mm (1.4326 in.) --
Valve Clearance (cold) Intake 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.) --
"
Exhaust 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.) --
StemO.D. Intake 5.485-5.495 mm (0.2159-0.2163 in.) 5.455 mm (0.2148 in.)
Exhaust 5.450-5.460 mm (0.2146-0.2150 in.) 5.420 mm (0.2134 in.)
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0.020-0.045 mm (0.0008-0.0018 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Valve seat Width Intake 1.25-1.55 mm (0.049-0.061 in.) 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
Stem installed height Intake 46.75-47.55 mm (1.841-1.872 in.) 47.80 mm (1.882 in.)
Valve spring Free length Intake 51.48 mm (2.027 in.) --
Exhaust 51.05 mm (2.010 in.) --
Valve guide 1.0. Intake 5.515-5.530 mm (0.2171-0.2177 in.) 5.55 mm (0.219 in.)
Installed height Intake 21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in.) --
Exhaust 20.60-21.60 mm (0.811-0.850 in.) --
Rocker arm Arm-to-shaft clearance Intake 0.026-0.067 mm (0.0010...,.0.0026 in.) 0.067 mm (0.0026 in.)
BACK 2-3
Engme BIock
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Umit
Block Warpage of deck 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. --
Bore diameter 90.000-90.015 mm (3.5433-3.5439in.) --
Piston Skirt 0.0. at 16.0 mm (0.63 in.) from 89.893-89.996 mm (3.5426-3.5431 in.) --
bottom of skirt
Clearance in cylinder 0.004-0.032 mm (0.0001-0.0013 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Ring groove width Top .. '1.240-1.255 mm (0.0488-0.0494 in.) 1.27 mm (0.050 in.)
Second 1.220-1.235 mm (0.0480-0.0486 in.) 1.25 mm (0.049 in.)
Oil 2.805-2.825 mm (0.1104-0.1112 in.) 2.85 mm (0.112 in.)
Piston ring Ring-to-groove clearance Top "', 0.055-0.085 mm (0.0022-0.0033 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Second 0.030-0.060 mm (0.0012-0.0024 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
Ring end gap Top 0.30-0.40 mm (0.012-0.016 in.) 0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
Second 0.40-0.55 mm (0.016-0.022 in.) 0.70 mm (0.028 in.)
Oil 0.20-0.70 mm (0.008-0.028 in.) 0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
Piston pin 0.0. 21.962-21.965 mm (0.8646-0.8648 in.) 21.954 mm (0.8643 in.)
Pin-to-piston clearance -0.0050 to +0.0010 mm . 0.004 mm (0.0002 in.)
(-0.00020 to +0.00004 in.)
Connecting rod Pin-to-rod clearance 0.005-0.014 mm (0.0002-0.0006 in.) \. 0.019 mm (0.0007 in.)
., Small-end bore diameter 21.970-21.976 mm (0.8650-0.8652 in.) --
Large-end bore diameter 60.0 mm (2.36 in.) --
End play installed on crankshaft 0.15-0.35 mm (0.006-0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter 71.976-72.000 mm (2.8337-2.8346 in.) --
Rod journal diameter 56.976-57.000 mm (2.2431-2.2441 in.) --
Rod/main journal taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
End play 0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 in.) 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
Runout 0.0~5 mm (0.0010 in.) max. 0.030 mm (0.0012 in.)
Crankshaft Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance .,0.019-0.045 mm (0.0007-0.0018 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
bearing Rod bearing clearance 0.020-0.044 mm (0.0008-0.0017 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
2-4 BACK
Englne Lb·
u flcatlon
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New ServIce Umlt
Engine oil Capacity Engine overhaul 5.0 i.. (5.3 US qt)
.Oil change. 4.3 L (4.5 US qt)
including filter
Oil change. 4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
without filter
Oil pump Inner-to-outer rotor clearance 0.03-0.09 mm (0.002-0.004 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor clearance 0.10-0.19 mm (0.004-0.007 in.) 0.20 mm (O.OOS in.)
Pump housing-to-outar rotor axial 0.02-0.07 mm (0.001-0.003 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.1
clearance
Oil pressure with oil temperature at At idle 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm'.10 psi)
176 'F (80 "C) At 3.000 rpm 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm'. 71 psi)
c·00rIng Siyst em
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New
Radiator Coolant capacities (including engine. Engine overhaul 9.21 (2.43 US gal)
heater. hoses. and reservoir) Coolant change 7.3 L 11.93 US gal)
Use Acura Long Life Antifreeze!
Coolant Type 2
Coolant reservoir Coolant capacity 0.7L (0.19 US gal)
Radiator cap Opening pressure 93-123 kPa (0.95-1.25 kgf/cm'. 14-18 psi)
Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open 169-176'F (76 -eO "C)
Fully open 194'F (90 "C)
Valve lift atfully open 10.0 mm (0.39 in.) min.
Fuel and Emissions

Fuel pressure Pressure with regulator vacuum hose 390-440 kPa (4.0-4.5 kgf/cm'. 57-64 psi)
regulator disconnected
Fuel tank Capacity 79.5 L (21.0 US gal)
Engine idle Idle speed without load In N or P position 710±50rpm
Idle speed with high electrical load In N or P position 710±50rpm
(AIC switch ON. temperature set to
Max Cool. blower fan on High. rear
window defogger ON. and headlights
on high beam)
BACK 2-5
Sta,ndards and Service Limits
Automatic Transmission and AfT Differential
Item' Measurement' Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Automatic Capacity Fluid change 2.8 L (3.0 US qt)
transmission fluid Use Acura ATF-Z1 Overhaul 7.9 L (8.3 US qt)
ATF pressure Line pressure At 2,000 rpm 960-1,050 kPa 910 kPa
iri N or P position (9.8-10.7 kgf/cm', 139-152 psi) (9.3 kgf/cm', 132 psi)
5th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm' 920-1,000 kPa 870kPa
in D position (9.4-10.1 kgf/cm', 133-145 psi)
' ,
- (8.9 kgf/cm', 126 psi)
4th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 930-1,010 kPa 880kPa
in D position (9.5-10.3 kgf/cm', 135-147 psi) (9.0 kgf/cm', 128 psi)
3rd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 930-1,010 kPa 880 kPa
in D position (9.5-10.3 kgf/cm', 135-147 psi) (9.0 kgf/cm', 128 psi)
2nd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 930-1,010 kPa 880 kPa
in M position (9.5-10.3 kgf/cm', 135-147 psi) (9.0 kgf/cm', 128 psi)
2nd gear
1st clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm ,930-1,010 kPa 880kPa ','

1st gear
1st-hold clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 750-840 kPa 700kPa
1st gear
Torque converter Stall speed 1,950 rpm 1,800-2,100 rpm
Check with vehicle on level ground ;
Clutch Clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance 1st -- 1.15-1.35mm

-,
(0.045-0.053 in.)
2nd -- 1.05-1.25 mm
(0.041-0.049 in.)
" ' 3rd -- 0.9-1.1 mm
(0.035-0.043 in.)
4th -- 0.75-0.95 mm
(0.030-0.037 in.)
5th -'-- 0;75-0.95 mm
(0.030-0.037 in.)
1st-hold -- 0.6-1.0mm
(0.024-0.039 in.)
Clutch return spring free length 1st 68.3 mli1 (2.69 in.) 66.3 mm (2.61 in.)
2nd 48.3 mm (1.90 in.) 46.3 mm (1.82 in.)
3rd 52.0 mm (2.05 in.) 50.0 mm (1.97 in.)
4th 37.4 mm (1.47 in.) 35.5 mm (1.39 in.)
5th 53.7 mm (2.11 in.) 51.7 mm (2.64 in.)
Clutch disc thickness 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) --
Clutch plate thickness 1st 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) When discolored
2nd 1.8 mm (0.07 in.) When discolored
3rd 1.8 mm (0.07 in.) When discolored
4th 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) When discolored
5th 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) When discolored
1st-hold 1.8 mm (0.07 in.) , When discolored
1st clutch end-plate thickness Mark 1 3.1 mm (0.122 in.) When discolored
Mark2 3.2 mm (0.126 in.) When discolored
Mark 5 3.5 mm (0.138 in.) When discolored
1st-hold clutch plate B thickness 5.0 mm (0.197 in.) When discolored
2-6 BACK
Clutch (cont'd) 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch end plate Mark 1 2.,1 mm (0.083 in.) When discolored
thickness Mark2 2.2 mm (0.087 in.) When discolored
Stator shaft 1.0. at needle bearing contact area Torque converter 27.000-27.021 mm (1.063-1.064 in.) When worn or
side damaged
ATF pump side 31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in.) --
1.0. at mainshaft sealing ring contact 31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in.) 31.05 mm (1.222 in.)
area
ATFpump Gear-to-body thrust clearance 0.03-0.06 mm (0.001-0.002 in.) 0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
Gear-to-body clearance Drive gear 0.210-0.265 mm (0.008-0.010 in.) --
Driven gear 0.070-0.125 mm (0.003-0.005 in.) --
Driven gear 1.0. 14.016-14.034 mm (0.5518-0.5525 in.) When worn or
damaged
Driven gear shaft 0.0. 13.980-13.990 mm (0.5504-0.5508 in.) When worn or
damaged
Reverse shift Fork finger thickness 5.90-6.00 mm (0.220-0.236 in.) 5.4 mm (0.213 in.)
fork
Park gear and -- -- When worn or
pawl damaged
Regulator valve Shift fork shaft bore 1.0. 14.000-14.010 mm (0.5512-0.5516 in.) --
body Shift fork shaft/servo valve bore 1.0. 37.000-37.039 mm (1.4567-1.4582 in.) 37.045 mm (1.4585 in.)
Mainshaft sealing ring contact 1.0. 31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in.) 31.05 mm (1.222 in.)
Main valve body Intermediary shaft sealing ring contact 35.000-35.025 mm (1.3780-1.3789 in.) 35.05 mm (1.3799 in.)
1.0.
ATF guide collar Secondary shaft sealing ring contact 29.000-29.021 mm (1.1417-1.1426 in.) 29.05 mm (1.1437 in.)
1.0.
Mainshaft Diameter at stator shaft needle bearing 22.984-23.000 mm (0.9049-0.9055 in.) When worn or
contact area damaged
5th gear collar diameter at needle 39.981-39.991 mm (1.5741-1.5744 in.) When worn or
bearing contact area damaged
5th gear collar length 48.7-48.8 mm (1.917-1.921 in.) --
5th gear collar flange thickness 4.5-4.7 mm (0.177-0.185 in.) When worn or
damaged
5th gear 1.0. 46.000-46.016 mm (1.8110-1.8116 in.) When worn or
damaged
5th gear axial clearance 0.10-0.22 mm (0.004-0.009 in.) --
Sealing ring thickness 1.90-1.96 mm (0.074-0.077 in.) 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
Sealing ring groove width 2.025-2.060 mm (0.080-0.081 in.) 2.08 mm (0.082 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK 2-7
Automatic Transmission and AfT Differential (cont'd)
Item· Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Countershaft Diameter at bearing contact area Torque'converter 40.505-40.515 mm (1.5947-1.5951 in.) When worn or damaged
housing bearing
5th gear 34.975-34.991 mm (1.3770-1.3776 in.) When worn or damaged
Diameter of 2nd gear at needle 61.975-61.991 mm (2.2400-2.2406 in.) When worn or damaged
bearing contact area
Reverse gear collar 0.0. 39.979-40.000 mm (1.5740-1.5748 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse selector hub 0.0. 55.885-55.900 mm (2.200-2.201 in.) When worn or damaged
Cotter thickness 4th gear 1.99-2.02 mm (0.078-0.080 in.) --
2nd gear 7.74-7.52 mm (0.295-0.296 in.) --
1.0. of gears 5th gear 41.000-41.016 mm (1.6142-1.6148 in.) When worn or damaged
Idler gear 70.000-70.019 mm (2.7559-2.7567 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse gear 46.000-46.016 mm (1.8110-1.8116 in.) When worn or damaged
Axial clearance of gears 2nd gear 0.005-0.040 mm (0.0002-0.0016 in.) --
5th gear 0.12-0.27 mm (0.0047-0.0106 in.) --
Idler gear 0.005-0.040 mm (0.0002-0.0016 in.) --
Reverse gear 0.10-0.25 mm (0.0039-0.0098 in.) --
61 mm washer thickness A 1.525 mm (0.0600 in.) When worn or damaged
B 1.505 mm (0.0593 in.) When worn or damaged
C 1.485 mm (0.0585 in.) When worn or damaged
0 1.465 mm (0.0577 in.) When worn or damaged
E 1.445 mm (0.0569 in.) When worn or damaged
F 1.425 mm (0.0561 in.) When worn or damaged
G 1.405 mm (0.0553 in.) When worn or damaged
50.8 mm washer thickness A 1.91 mm (0.0752 in.) When worn or damaged
H 2.05 mm (0.0807 in.) When worn or damaged
I 2.07 mm (0.0815 in.) When worn or damaged
.' J 2.09 mm (0;0823 in.) When worn or damaged
K 2.11 mm (0.0831 in.) When worn or damaged
L 2.13 mm (0.0839 in.) When worn or damaged
M 2.15 mm (0.0846 in.) When worn or damaged
N 2.17 mm (0.0854 in.) When worn or damaged
p 2.21 mm (0.0870 in.) When worn or damaged
Q 2.23 mm (0.0878 in.) When worn or damaged
R 2.25 mm (0.0886 in.) When worn or damaged
S 2.27 mm (0.0894 in.) When worn or damaged
T 2.29 mm (0.0902 in.) When worn or damaged
U 2.31 mm (0.0909 in.) When worn or damaged
V 2.33 mm (0.0917 in.) When worn or damaged
W 2.35 mm (0.0925 in.) When worn or damaged
X 2.37 mm (0.0933 in.) When worn or damaged
Z 2.41 mm (0.0949 in.) When worn or damaged
AA 2.43 mm (0.0957 in.) When worn or damaged
AB 2.45 mm (0.0965 in.) When worn or damaged
35 x 47 mm thrust washer 5.97-6.00 mm (0.2350-0.2362 in.) When worn or damaged
thickness
2-8 BACK
Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Item
Secondary shaft Diameter at bearing contact area 2nd gear 43.986-43.999 mm (1.7317-1.7322 in.) When worn or damaged
Torque converter 32.002-32.015 mm (1.2599-1.2604 in.) When worn or damaged
housing bearing
Torque converter 28.592-28.608 mm (1.1257-1.1263 in.) When worn or damaged
housing bearing
(shaft end side)
Diameter of 1st gear collar at 38.975-38.991 mm (1.5344-1.5351 in.) When worn or damaged
needle bearing contact area
1.0. of gears 1st gear 44.000-44.013 mm (1.7323-1.7328 in.) When worn or damaged
2nd gear 50.00-50.02 mm (1.9685-1.9693 in.) When worn or damaged
Axial clearance of gears 1st gear 0.100-0.145 mm (0.004-0.006 in.) --
2nd gear 0.060-0.228 mm (0.0024-0.0090 in.) --
52 mm thrust washer thickness M 2.405 mm (0.095 in.) When worn or damaged
J 2.480 mm (0.098 in.) When worn or damaged
A 2.705 mm (0.106 in.) When worn or damaged
1st gear collar length 63.3-63.4 mm (2.4921-2.4961 in.) --
Sealing ring thickness 1.91-1.97 mm (0.075-0.078 in.) 1.86 mm (0.073 in.)
Sealing ring groove width 2.025-2.060 mm (0.080-0.081 in.) 2.08 mm (0.082 in.)
ATF feed pipe 0.0. 1st clutch 11.47-11.48 mm (0.4516-0.4520 in.) 11.45 mm (0.4508 in.)
1st-hold clutch 5.97-5.98 mm (0.2350-0.2354 in.) 5.95 mm (0.2343 in.)
Feed pipe bushing 1.0. 1st clutch 11.518-11.530 mm (0.4535-0.4539 in.) 11.545 mm (0.4545 in.)
1st-hold clutch 6.018-6.030 mm (0.2369-0.2374 in.) 6.045 mm (0.2380 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK 2-9
Secondary shaft 65mm thrust shim thickness OA 0.80 mm (0.031 in.) When worn or damaged
(cont'd) A 0.84 mm (0.033 in.) When worn or damaged
D 0.96 mm (0.038 in.) When worn or damaged
F. 1.04 mm (0.041 in.) When worn or damaged
p 1.44 mm (0.057 in.) When worn or damaged
y 1.80 mm (0.071 in.) When worn or damaged
Z 1.84 mm (0.072 in.) When worn or damaged
AB 1.92 mm (0.076 in.) When worn or damaged
AC ~.96 mm (0.077 in.) When worn or damaged
AD 2.00 mm (0.079 in.) When worn or damaged
AE 2.04 mm (0.080 in.) When worn or damaged
AF 2.08 mm (0.082 in.) When worn or damaged
AG 2.12 mm (0.083 in.) When worn or damaged
AH 2.16 mm (0.085 in.) When worn or damaged
AI 2.20 mm (0.087 in.) When worn or damaged
AJ 2.24 mm (0.088 in.) When worn or damaged
AK 2.28 mm (0.090 in.) When worn or damaged
AL 2.32 mm (0.091 in.) When worn or damaged
2-10 BACK
Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Item
Intermediary 1.0. of 3rd gear ~ . 36.000 36.016mm When worn or damaged
shaft ., (1.4173-1.4179 in.)

Axial clearance of 3rd gear 0.005-0.045 mm
(0.0002-0.0018 in.)
Cotter thickness 2.99-3.02 mm
(0.1177-0.1189 in.)
Sealing ring thickness 1.89-1.95 mm 1.84 mm (0.0724 in.)
(0.0744-0.0768 in.)
Sealing ring groove width 2.025-2.060 mm 2.08 mm (0.082 in.)
(0.080-0.081 in.)
53 mm splined washer thickness A 3.995 mm (0.1573 in.) When worn or damaged
." C 4.035 mm (0.1589 in.) When worn or damaged
26.5 mm washer thickness A 1.05 mm (0.041 in.) When worn or damaged
·B 1.13 mm (0.044 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse idler Gear shaft O.D. 13.99-14.00 mm When worn or damaged
gear (0.5508-0.5512 in.)
I.D. oftransmission housing of gear 14.006-14.024 mm --
shaft contact area (0.5514-0.5521 in.)
1.0. 18.007-18.020 mm When worn or damaged
(0.7089-0.7094 in.)
Axial clearance 0.07-0.38 mm --
(0.003-0.015 in.)
Thrust washer thickness Transmission 0.97-1.05 mm --
housing (0.038-0.041 in.)
Holder side 0.97-1.05 mm --
(0.038-0.041 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK 2-11
Wire Diameter 0.0. Free Length No. of Coil
Main valve body Torque converter check valve spring 1.1 mm 8.6mm 35.0mm 12.6
spring (see page (0.043 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.378 in.)
14-347) Lock-up shift valve spring 1.0mm 6.6mm 35.5mm 18.2
(0.039 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.398 in.)
Shift valve E spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 42.4mm 17.6
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.669 in.)
Shift valve A spring 0.9mm 6.6mm 50.5mm 23.3
(0.035 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.988 in.)
Shift valve B spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
Modulator valve spring 1.6mm 10.4mm 33.5mm 9.8
(0.063 in.) (0.409 in.) (1.319 in.)
CPC valve A spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8 mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
Servo control valve spring 0.9mm 9.6mm 30.2mm 8.4
(0.035 in.) (0.378 in.) (1.189 in.)
Lubrication control valve spring 0.9mm 8.7mm 25.0mm 7.2
(0.035 in.) (0.343 in.) (0.984 in.)
Lock-up timing valve spring 0.6mm 6.6mm 30.8mm 11.1
(0.024 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.213 in.)
Relief valve spring 1.0mm 9.6mm 28.1 mm 7.7
(0.039 in.) (0.378 in.) (1.106 in.)
Secondary valve CPC valve C spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8 mm 7.9
body spring (0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
(see page Shift valve D spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 42.4mm 17.6
14-349) (0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.669 in.)
Reverse CPC valve spring 0.8mm 6.1 mm 24.4mm 14.6
(0.031 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.961 in.)
Shift valve C spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
CPC valve B spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8 mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
Reverse control valve spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
Regulator valve 3rd accumulator spring 3.1 mm 19.6mm 41.4mm 5.5
(see page Coolant check valve spring 0.9mm 6.7mm 31.5mm 14.2
14-350) (0.035 in.) (0.264 in.) (1.240 in.)
Lock-up control valve spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 42.9mm 14.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.689 in.)
0.8mm 6.6mm 44.3mm 25.5
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.744 in.)
Regulator valve spring B 1.4mm 8.8mm 44.0mm 12.0
(0.055 in.) (0.346 in.) (1.732 in.)
Regulator valve spring A 1.85mm 14.7 mm 86.9mm 16.2
(0.073 in.) (0.579 in.) (3.421 in.)
Stator reaction spring 5.5mm 37.4mm 30.3mm 2.1
(0.217 in.) (1.472 in.) (1.193 in.)
2-12 BACK
Item Measurement Qualification Stal)dard or New
Wire Diameter 0.0. Free Length No. of Coil
Accumulator 4th accumulator spring 3.3mm 19.6mm 39.1 mm 5.8
(see page 2nd accumulator spring 3.1 mm 19.6mm 53.4mm 7.5
14-351) (0.122 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.102 in.)
1st accumulator spring A 2.3mm 19.6mm 60.8mm 9.7
(0.091 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.394 in.)
1st accumulator spring B 2.5mm 12.8mm 46.0mm 9.5
(0.098 in.) (0.504 in.) (1.811 in.)
5th accumulator spring A 2.4mm 19.6mm 65.5mm 12.0
(0.094 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.579 in.)
5th accumulator spring B 2.4mm 13.2mm 50.5mm 10.1
(0.094 in.) (0.520 in.) (1.988 in.)
1st-hold accumulator spring 2.0mm 13.1 mm 42.9mm 9.8
(0.079 in.) (0.516 in.) (1.689 in.)
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service limit

AfT differential Pinion shaft contact area I.D. 18.000-18.025 mm --
carrier (0.7087-0.7096 in.)
Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.013-0.054 mm 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
(0.0005-0.0021 in.)
Driveshaft contact area I.D. 30.025-30.055 mm --
(1.182-1.183 in.)
Carrier-to-driveshaft clearance 0.045-0.096 mm 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
(0.002-0.004 in.)
Carrier-to-intermediate shaft clearance 0.080-0.126 mm --
(0.003-0.005 in.)
Tapered roller bearing starting torque For new bearing 3.9-5.1 N·m Adjust
(preload) (40-52 kgf·cm, 35-45 Ibf·in.)
For used bearing 3.6-4.8N·m Adjust
(37-49 kgf·cm, 32-43Ibf·in.)
AfT differential Backlash 0.05-0.15 mm --
pinion gear (0.002-0.006 in.)
1.0. 18.042-18.066 mm --
(0.7103-0.7113 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.055-0.095 mm 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
(0.0022-0.0037 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK 2-13
Item Measurement Qualification ' Standard or New Service Limit
Transfer output Diameter at bearing contact area Transmission 21.977-21.990 mm 21.92 mm (0.8630 in.)
shaft housing side (0.8652-0.8657 in.)
Torque converter 40.002-40.018 mm 39.95 mm (1.5728 in.)
housing side (1.5749-1.5755 in.)
Axial clearance 0-0.39 mm (0-0.015 in.) --
28.5 mm thrust washer thickness A 1.82 mm (0.0717 in.) When worn or damaged
C 1.86 mm (0.0732 in,) When worn or damaged
L 2.04 mm (0.0803 in.) ,
When worn or damaged
M 2.06 mm (0.0811 in.) , When worn or damaged
N 2.08 mm (0.0819 in.) When worn or damaged "
P 2.12 mm (0.0835 in.) When worn or damaged
y 2:30 mm (0.0906 in.) When worn or damaged
'Z 2.32 mm (0.0913 in.) When worn or damaged
Transfer Capacity Fluid change 0.43 L (0.45 us qt)
assembly fluid Hypoid gear oil SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 Overhaul 0.45 L (0.48 us qt)
viscosity, API classified GL40r GL5
only
Transfer Diameter oftransfer hypoid drive gear/ Transfer cover 50.002-50.018 mm 49.95 mm (1.9665 in.)
assembly shaft assembly at tapered roller side (1.9686-1.9692 in.)
bearing contact area Transfer gear 24.987-25.000 mm 24.93 mm (0.9815 in.)
side (0.9837-0.9843 in.)
Diameter oftransfer output shaft Transfer gear 40.002-40.018 mm 39.95 mm (1.5728 in.)
(hypoid gear) at tapered roller bearing side (1.5749-1.5755 in.)
contact area Companion 31.975-31.988 mm 31.92 mm (1.2567 in.)
flange side (1.2589-1.2594 in.)
Transfer gear backlash 0.06-0.16 mm Adjust
(0.002-0.006 in.)
Tapered roller bearing total starting 2.64-4.23 N·m Adjust
torque (preload) (26.9-43.1 kgf·cm,
23.3-37.4Ibf·in.)
2-14 BACK
Rear Differential
Rear differential Capacity Fluid change 2.53 L (2.67 US qt)
fluid Use Acura A TF-Z1 Overhaul 2.77 L (2.93 US qt)
Steermg
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New' Service Limit
Steering wheel Rotational play measured at outside 0-10 mm (0-0.39 in.) --
edge with engine running
Starting load measured at outside 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf) If higher, check
edge with engine running gearbox and pump
Gearbox Angle of rack guide screw loosened 15±5°
from locked position
Pump Output pressure with shut-off valve 8,920-9,420 kPa (91-96 kgf/cm', 1,290-1.370 psi)
closed
Power steering Capacity Reservoir 0.34 L (0.36 US qt)
fluid Use Acura Power Steering Fluid capacity
System overhaul 1.03 L (1.09 US qt)
s uspenslon
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New 1 Service Limit
-,
Wheel alignment Camber Front -0030'±1 °
Rear -0 °30 '±45 ,
Caster Front " 4°12'±35'
Total Toe-in Front 0±2 mm (0±0.08 in.)
Rear 2±2 mm (0.08±0.08 in.)
Front wheel turning angle Inside wheel 38 °12 '±20
Outside wheel 31 ° 44' (Reference)
Aluminum wheel Runout Axial 0-0.3 mm (0-0.Q1 in.) 1 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
Radial 0-0.3 mm (0-0.Q1 in.) 11.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Wheel bearing End play Front 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
Rear 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
BACK 2-15
"r

Brakes
Parking brake Number of clicks when pedal pressed 9 to 11 clicks
with 294 N (30 kgf, 66 Ibf) of force
(reference)
Drum 1.0 210.0-210.1 mm (8.268-8.272 in.) 211.0 mm (8.307 in.)
Shoe lining thickness· ,',' 3.9 mm (0.15 in.) 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Brake pedal Pedal height (carpet removed) 178 mm (7 in.)
Free play 1-5 mm (0.04-0.20 in.)
Master cylinder Piston-to push rod clearance Omm(Oin.)
Brake disc . Thickness Front 27.9-28.1 mm (1.10-1.11 in.) 26.0 mm (1.02 in.)
Rear 10.9-11.1 mm (0.43-0.44 in.) . 9.0 mm (0.35 in.)
Runout -- 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
Parallelism -- 0.D15 mm (0.0006 in.)
Brake pad Thickness Front 10.6-11.2 mm (0.42-0.44 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Rear 9.6-10.2 mm (0.38-0.40 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
A"Ir Con dOt"

I lomng
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity of system Dual 600-650 g (20.3-22.0 oz)
Refrigerant oil Type DENSO NO-OIL 8 (PIN 38897-PR7-A01AH or 38899-PR7-A01)
Capacity of components Condenser 35 mL (11/6 fl·oz)
Evaporator 40 mL (1 1/3 fl·oz)
(front) .
Evaporator (rear) 30 mL (1 fI·oz)

Each line and 10 mL (1/3 fl·oz)
hose
Compressor 125-137 mL (42/9-4518 fl·oz)
Compressor Field coil resistance At 68 'f (20 'C) 3.9 --4.3 Q
(DENSO) Pulley-to-pressure plate clearance 0.35-0.60 mm (0.014-0.024 in.)
2-16 BACK
Item Measurement Qualification Specification

DIMENSIONS Overall length 4,844 mm (190.7 in.) ,
Overall width 1,954 mm (77.0 in.)
Overall height 1,733 mm (68.2 in.)
Wheelbase 2,750 mm (108.3 in,)
Track Front 1,720 mm (67.7 in.)
Rear 1,715 mm (67.5 in.)
Ground clearance 207 mm (8.15 in.)
Seating capacity Seven (7)
WEIGHT (USA) Gross Vehicle Weight 5,2921bs
Rating (GVWR)
WEIGHT Gross Vehicle Weight 2,700 kg
(CANADA) Rating (GVWR)
ENGINE Type Water-cooled, 4-stroke SOHC VTEC V6 gasoline engine
Cylinder arrangement 60 °V6-cylinder, transverse
Bore and stroke 90.0 x 96.0 mm (3.54 x 3.78 in.)
Displacement 3,664 cm' (mL) (224 cu in.)
Compression ratio 11.0
Valve train Belt driven, SOHC VTEC 4 valves per cylinder
Ignition system DLI (Distributorless Ignition)
Lubrication system Forced, wet sump, with trochoid pump
Oil pump displacement At 6,000 rpm 58.4 L (61.7 US qt)/minute
Water pump At 6,000 rpm 172 L (182 US qt)lminute
displacement
Fuel required Premium UNLEADED gasoline with 91 Pump Octane
Number or higher
STARTER Type Gear reduction
Normal output 1.8kW
Nominal voltage 12V
Hour rating 30 seconds
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise as viewed from gear end
AUTOMATIC Type BYFA Electronically-controlled automatic, 5-speed forward,
TRANSMISSION 1 reverse
Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio 1st 2.697
2nd 1.606
3rd 1.071
4th 0.766
5th 0.538
Reverse 1.888
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 4.533
(cont'd)
BACK 2-17
STEERING Type Hydraulic power-assisted rack and pinion
Gear ratio 47.4
Overall ratio 17.0
Turns,lock-to-lock 3.29
Steering wheel diameter 380 mm (15.0 in.)
SUSPENSION Type Front Independent strut with stabilizer, coil spring
Rear Independent multi-link with trailing arm, stabilizer, coil
spring
Shock absorber front and Without active damper system Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
rear With active damper system Magent rheological variable active damper
TIRES Size of front and rear tires P255/55R18104H
Size of spare tire T165/80D17 104M
WHEEL Camber Front -0 °30'
ALIGNMENT Rear -0 °30'
Caster Front 4 °12'
Total Toe-in Front Omm(Oin.)
Rear 2 mm (0.08 in.)
Front wheel turning angle Inside wheel 38 ° 12'
Outside wheel 31 °44'
SAl at camber (kingpin 12°48'
axis)
BRAKES Type of service brake Front Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Type of parking brake Foot type mechanical actuating, rear wheels
Pad friction surface area Front 63.5 cm' (9.84 sq in.) x2
(swept area) Rear 25.3 cm' (3.92 sq in.) x2
Parking brake shoe 60.2 cm' (9.33 sq in.) x2
friction surface area
AIR Cooling capacity Front' 3,506 kcal/h (13,910 BTU/h)
CONDITIONING Rear 1,728 kcal/h (6,860 BTU/h)
. Compressor Type/Manufacturer Swash plate/DENSO
Number of cylinders 10
Capacity 177 mL/rev. (10.8 cu in./rev.)
Maximum speed 8,400 rpm
Lubricant capacity 125 mL (4 2/9 f/·oz)
Lubricant type ND-OIL 8 (DEN SO)
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type' Corrugated fin
Blower Type Stabilized swirling flow
Motor input (Front) 245 W/12 V
Motor input (Rear) 115W/12V
Speed control (Front) Infinite variable
Speed control (Rear) Infinite variable
Maximum capacity (Front) 525 m'/h (18,510 cu ft/h)
Maximum capacity (Rear) 275 m'/h (9,695 cu ft/h)
Temperature control Air-mix type
Compressor clutch Type Dry, single plate, Poly-V belt drive
Electrical power consumption at 35 W maximum at 12 V
68'f (20 OC)
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Quantity (Dual) 600-650 g (20.3-22.0 fI oz)
2-"8 BACK
.' '
ELECTRICAL Battery 12 V-76 AH/20 HR, 65 AH/5 HR
RATINGS Fuses Main under-hood fuse/relay box 120 A, 60 A, 50 A, 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 7.5 A
Under-hood fuse/relay box 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15A, 10A 7.5A
Under-dash fuse/relay box 30 A,20 A, 15A, 10A, 7.5A
Rearfuse/relay box 40A,30A,20A,10A,7.5A
Light bulbs Headlight high beam 12 V-60W
Headlight low beam 12 V-35 W (HID)
Daytime running light 12V-60W
Front turn signal lights 12 V-24 CP
Front side turn signal lights LED
Front parking lights 12V-3CP
Front side marker light 12V-3CP
Fog light 12V-55W
Rear turn signaLiights 12V-21W
Brake/taillights LED/LED
Rear side market light 12V-3CP
High mount brake light LED
Back-up lights 12V-18W
License plate lights 12V-3CP
Ceiling light 12V-8W
Cargo area light 12V-5W
Front map lighL
- 12V.,...5W - .
Rear map light 12V-6.2W

Ambient light LED
Vanity mirror lights 12V-2W
Glove box light 12V-3.4W
Door coutesy light 12V-2CP
Gauge lights LED
Indicator lights 14 V-':"1.4 W, 10 V-0.6 W
BACK 2-19
Desi'gn Specifications
Body Specifications
1,720 mm (67.7 in.'

.. 1,954 mm (77.0 in.' •
.. 2,750 mm (108.3 in.'

.. 1,715 mm (67.5 in.' ..
.. 4,844 mm (190.7 in.'
2-20 BACK
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids ....................................... 3-2
Maintenance Minder
General Information· ..................................................... 3-4
Maintenance Main Items ............................................. 3-7
Maintenance Sub Items ............................................... 3-8
Lubricants and Fluids
For details of the lubrication points and type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and various work procedures (such as
Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each section.
I Item
A Engine
Lubrication Points
Acura Motor Oil:

American Honda PIN 08798-9023A (5W-20),
Lubricant
Honda Canada PIN CA66806 (5W-20)

Look for the API certification seal on the oil container as shown below. Make
sure it says "For Gasoline Engines." SAE viscosity: See chart below.
B Automatic transmission Acura Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF-Z1): .

American Honda PIN 08200-9001A,
Honda Canada PIN CA66689
Always use Acura ATF-Z1. Using a non-Acura ATF can affect shift quality.
C Transfer assembly Hypoid gear oil GL4 or GL5

Use a SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API classified GL4 or
GL5 only.
Viscosity SAE 90: above 0 'f (-18 'C)

SAE 80W-90: below 0 'f (""';18 'C)
0 Rear differential Acura Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF-Z1):

American Honda PIN 08200-9001A,
Honda Canada PIN CA66689
E Brake system (including VSA lines) Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid: PIN 08798-9008A
Always use Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid.
Using a non-Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of
the system.
F Brake booster clevis Multipurpose grease

G Battery terminals
H Fuel fill door
I Hood hinges and hood latch
J Door hinges: upper and lower
K Tailgate hinges
L Caliper piston boot, caliper pins, and boots Honda Silicone Grease: PIN 08C30-B0234M
M Power steering system Honda Power Steering Fluid

Acura Power Steering Fluid: PIN 08206-9002A
Always use Acura Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power
steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear and
poor steering in cold weather.
N Air conditioning compressor Compressor oil: DENSO NO-OIL 8 (P/N 38897-PR7-A01AH or 38899-PR7-
A01) for refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a)
0 Cooling system Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
API CERTIFICATION SEAL Recommended Engine Oil

Engine oil viscosity for ambient temperature ranges
-I I If·1 I I•
-20
I I
0 20
I
40
I
60
I
80
I
100'F
I
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40'C
3-2 BACK
NOTE:
• Lubricate the following areas using the recommended lubricants and fluids .
• In corrosive areas, more frequent lubrication is necessary.
M c D
L F J J L H
BACK
3-3
Maintenance Minder
General Information
Multi-Information Display
The maintenance minder is an important feature of the multi-information display. Based on engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine revolutions, the MDX's onboard computer (PCM) calculates the remaining engine
oil and automatic transmission fluid life. The system also displays the codes for other scheduled maintenance items
needing service.
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
SEL/RESET BUTTON
SYSTEM MESSAGE
INDICATOR
BACK
3-4
Service Information 3. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,
and the remaining engine oil life is 1 % to 5 %, the
1. The remaining engine oil life (A) is shown as a maintenal)ce system message "SERVICE DUE
percentage on the multi-information display. NOW" is displayed along with the same
To see the current engine oil life, turn the ignition maintenance item code(s). If the maintenance
switch to the ON (II) position, then push and release system message display is cancelled, a "SERVICE"
the Sel/Reset Button repeatedly until the engine oil message appears.
life displays.
A
SERVICE
I ~ DUE NOW
OIL LIFE 100%
002300 ~- A123456
2. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,

and the remaining engine oil life is 6 % to 15 %, the
remaining engine oil life and other scheduled 4. When the ignition switcll is in the ON (II) position,
maintenance item(s) needing service are displayed. and the remaining engine oil life is 0 %, the
The maintenance system message "SERVICE DUE maintenance'system me~sage "SERVICE PAST
SOON" (A) also come on. To cancel the message, DUE" is di~played along with the same
press the Info Button. The display continues to maintenance item codets).
show the remaining engine oil life (B) and the
message indicator (C) until it is reset.
SERVICE
~
• Complete list of maintenance main items (D)
(see page 3-7) . PAST DUE
• Complete list of maintenance sub items (E)
(see page 3-8).
~- A123456
SERVICE
~ DUE SOON
~- A123456
,,---8
OIL LIFE 15%
SERVICE A 123456
c----+-(J) E
(cont'd)
BACK
3-5
','
Maintenance Minder
General Information (cont'd)

5. If the i'ridicated maintenance is not done, the Resetting the Maintenance-Information
"SERVICE PAST DUE" message shows a negative Display
mileage, for example "-10," on the display. Ifthe
negative mileage is between 0 and ~9, the NOTE:
message, is displayed for only a few seconds when • The vehicle must be stopped to reset the display.
the ighition switch is turned to the ON (II) position. • If a required service is done and the display is not
The negative mileage (A) remains displayed after reset, or if the maintenance display is reset without
the vehicle is driven [l"lore ~han 10 miles (for USA doing the service, the system will not show the
models) or 10 km(fo~ Ca~adifmod~ls) aftl;lr 0 % oil proper maintenance timing. This can lead to serious
life is re~ched, and the display cannot b~ dancelled. mechanical problems because there will be no
This rlT~anstheindi«.ated' mii'intenance Item(s) accurate record of when the required maintenance is
shouldl1ave been done hlorethan 10 miles (or needed.
10 km) a g o . " " ' " • The engine oi/life and the maintenance items can be
reset independently only with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) position.
2. If system message(s) are displayed, press the Info

,button to cancel the display.
3. Push and release the Sel/Reset button repeatedly

until the engine oil life indicator is displayed.
4. Press and hold the Sel/Reset button for about 10

seconds, the "OIL LIFE RESET" mode display
appears.
'~.'
-,
~'.
, ,',
.•.. "
NOTE:
,1.. 't "I .... ··'<~f
;'1:', .
• If you are resetting the display when the engine
oil life is more than 15, %, make sure any
maintenance item(s) requiring s.ervice are done
before resetting the display.
• To cancel the "OIL LIFE, RESET" mode, press the
Info b,utton repeatedly until t!:le :'CANCEL"
indicator is displayed, then press the Sel/Reset
button.
5. Press Info button repeatedly until the "RESET"

indicator is displayed, then press the Sel/Reset
button.
The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and
the engine oil life will resetto "100 %."
_. } R
.!..!....-!..!.
BACK
3-6
Maintenance Main Items
If the message "SERVICE DUE NOW" does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
NOTE:
• Replace the brake fluid every 3 years, independent of the maintenance messages in the multi-information display.
• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
• Adiust the va Ives d ' services
urlng . A , B, 1, 2 or 3'f
I t hey are nOIsy.
Symbol Maintenance Main Items
A Replace engine oil (see page 8-6).
Engine oil capacity without oil filter: 4.0 L (4.2 US qt).
B Replace engine oil and oil filter (see page 8-7).
Engine oil capacity with oil filter: 4.3 L (4.5 US qt).
Inspect front and rear brakes (see page 19-3).
• Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
• Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mounting bolts.
Check parking brake adjustment (see page 19-7).
N umber of clicks (9 to 11 when the parking brake pedal is Qressed with 294 N (30 kgf,66 Ibf) of force.
Inspecttie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and gearbox boots (see page 17-9).
• Check rack grease and steering linkage.
• Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
• Check fluid lines for damage or leaks.
Inspect suspension components (see page 18-3).
• Check bolts for tightness.
• Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
Inspect driveshaft boots (see page 16-4).
Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness.
Inspect brake hoses and lines including VSA (see page 19-35).
Check the master ~ylinder and VSA modulator for damage and leakage.
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids.
• Engine coolant (see page 10-6) .
. • Automatic transmission fluid (ATF-Z1) (see page 14-265).
• Rear differential fluid (see page 15-69).
• Power steering fluid (see page 17-13).
• Brake fluid (see page 19-9).
• Windshield washer fluid.
Inspect exhaust system (see page 9-9)'.
Check catalytic converter heat shields, exhaust pipes, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness.
Inspect fuel lines (see page 11-334)', and connections (see page 11-336)'.
Check for loose connections, cracks, and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace
damaged parts.
NOTE: Accordmg to state and federal regulations, failure to do the mamtenance Items marked With an asterisk ( * ) will
not void the customer's emissions warranties. However, Acura recommends that all maintenance services be done at
the recommended interval, to ensure long-term reliability.
BACK 3-7
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Sub Items
Number Maintenance Sub Items

1 Rotate tires, and check tire inflation and condition.
Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual.
2 Replace air cleaner element (see page 11-364).
Ifthe vehicle is regularly driven in dusty conditions, replace ever~ 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter (see page 21-114).
• Replace the filter at 15,000 miles (24,000 km) intervals ifthe vehicle is driven mostly in urban areas
that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and diesel-powered vehicles.
• Replace the filter whenever airflow from the heating and cooling/climate control system is less than
normal.
Inspect drive belt (see page 4-33).
Look for cracks and damage, and inspect auto tensioner; no adjustment is needed.
3 Replace automatic transmission fluid (see page 14-266) and transfer fluid (see page 14-268).
• Automatic transmission fluid capacity: 2.8 L (3.0 US qt), use Acura ATF-Z1.
• Transfer fluid capacity: 0.43 L (0.45 US qt), use hypoid gear oil GL4 or GL5.
4 Replace spark plugs (see page 4-24).
Use IZFR5K11 (NGK) or SKJ20DR-M11 (DENSO).
Replace timing belt (see page 6-20). If the vehicle is regularly driven in very high temperatures (over
110 'f, 43 "C), or in very low temperatures (under -20 'f, --29 "C), replace every 60,000 miles (USA)/
100,000 km (Canada) and inspect water pump (see page 10-5).
Inspect the valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-8).
• Otherwise adjust only if noisy.
• Intake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.), Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.).
5 Replace engine coolant (see page 10-6).
Capacity (including the reserve tank): 7.3 L (1.93 US gal), use Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2.
6 Replace rear differential fluid (see page 15-69).
• Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher level of
mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the maintenance minder. If the vehicle is regularly driven in these conditions, have
the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
• Capacity: Clutch chambers 2.53 L (2.67 US qt), use Acura ATF-Z1.
3-8 BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If engine electrical maintenance is required)
The Acura MDX SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above
the glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, side curtain airbags in the sides of the roof, and side
airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this Service Manual.
Items marked with an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are located near SRS components. Servicing,
disassembling, or replacing these items requires special precautions and tools, and should be done only by an
authorized Acura dealer.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
or Side collision, all SRS service work should be done by an authorized Acura dealer.
• Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags and/or side airbags.
• Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or roll rate sensor when the ignition
switch is ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF; otherwise, the system may fail in a
collision, or the airbags may deploy.
• SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats,
in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
BACK
BACK
Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical
Special Tools ............................ 4-2 Alternator and Regulator Circuit r--:'III
Troubleshooting ................... 4-30 ~
Starting System Alternator Control Circuit
Component Location Index .... 4-3 Troubleshooting ................... 4-31
Symptom Troubleshooting Drive Belt Inspection ............... 4-33
Index ...................................... 4-4 Drive Belt Replacement ........... 4-33
Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-5 Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
Starter System Circuit Inspection ............................. 4-34
Troubleshooting ................... 4-6 Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
Starter Solenoid Test ............... 4-8 Replacement ......................... 4-35
Starter Performance Test ........ 4-9 Tensioner Pulley
Starter Removal and Replacement ......................... 4-35
Installation ............................ 4-10 Alternator Removal and
Starter Overhaul ...................... 4-11 Installation ............................ 4-36
Alternator Overhaul ................. 4-39
Ignition System
Component Location Index .... 4-18 Cruise Control
Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-19 Component Location Index .... 4-43
Ignition Timing Inspection ...... 4-20 Symptom Troubleshooting
Ignition Coil Removal/ Index ...................................... 4-44
Installation ............................ 4-21 Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-46
Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Cruise Control Input Test ........ 4-47
Troubleshooting ................... 4-21 Cruise Control Combination
Spark Plug Inspection .............. 4-24 Switch Test/Replacement .... 4-49
Charging System Engine Mount Control System

Component Location Index .... 4-25 Component Location Index .... 4-50
Symptom Troubleshooting Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-51
Index ...................................... 4-26 Troubleshooting ...................... 4-52
Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-27
Charging System Indicator
Circuit Troubleshooting ....... 4-28
Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description atv

Q) 07146-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
CD 07149-0010000 Handle driver 1
I
Q)
4-2 BACK
r:-:'I
Starting System I.!!;J
Component Location Index
STARTER CUT RELAY 2

Test, page 22-77
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

Test, page 14-315 .
Replacement, page 14-316
STARTER
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-6
Solenoid Test, page 4-8 GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
Performance Test, page 4-9
Removal and Installation, page 4-10
Overhaul, page 4-11
AUXILIARY
UNDER-DASH
FUSH HOLDER 1
(YEL and LT BLU wires)
AUXILIARY
UNDER-DASH
MULTI-INFORMATION FUSH HOLDER 2
DISPLAY (PNK and BRN wires)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
BACK 4-3
, ! I
Starting System .' ,

1, .
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

Engine does not start 1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections. Poor ground at G101
(does not crank) 2. Test the battery for a low charge (see page 22-76).
3. Check the starter (see page 4-6).
4. Check starter cut relay 1 and starter cut relay 2
(see page 22-77).
5. Check the transmission range switch (see page 14-315).
6. Check the iQnition switch or wire (see page 22-79).
Engine cranks, but does 1. , Check for PGM-FI DTCs.
not start 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-333).
3. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-334).
4. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-345).
5. Check the throttle body (see page 11-362).
6. Check for low engine compression (see page 6-6).
7. a
Check for damaged or broken timinQ belt.
Engine is hard to start 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs.
2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-333).
3. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-334).
4. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see paQe 11-345).
Engine cranks slowly 1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections.
2. Test the battery for a low charge (see page 22-76).
3. Check the starterfor binding (see page 4-11).
4. Check for excessive drag in the enQine.
MID message check 1. Check for a blown STRLD (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary
starting system under-dash fuse holder 2 below the driver's under-dash
fuse/relay box.
2. Check for a faulty starter cut relay 1.
3. Check for a faulty starter cut relay 2.
4. Check for open in the BRN wire between starter cut
relav 1 and starter cut relay 2.
4-4 BACK
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No.1 (120A) No.3 (50 Al
WHT
STARtER
CUT
-t.:-----"- I RELAYI
AUXIUARY
UNDER·DASH
FUSE HOLDER 2
-
_---LI~ BRN
BlK lTBLU
STARTER
CUT
r;-----lJ RELAY2
PNK
10-
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
5 (Closed : Por Nl
IG101
BACK 4-5
Starting System
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 6. Setthe parking brake, then with the shift lever in

o Air temperature must be between 59 and 100 'f the N or P position, turn the ignition switch to
(15 and 38 "C) during this procedure. START (III).
o After the inspection, you must reset the powertrain
control module (PCM). Otherwise, the PCM will Does the starter crank the engine normally?
continue to stop the fuel injectors from functioning.
o The battery must be in good condition and fully YES-The starting system is OK. Go to step 13.
charged.
NO-Go to step 7.
1. Hook up the following equipment:
7. Check the battery condition. Check the electrical
o Ammeter, 0-400 A connections at the battery, the negative battery
o Voltmeter, 0-20 V (accurate within 0.1 volt) cable to the body, the engine ground cables, and
the starter for looseness and corrosion. Then try
cranking the engine again.
Does the starter orank the engine?
YES-Repairing the loose connection corrected the

problem. The starting system is OK. Go to step 13.
NO-Check these items:
o If the starter will not crank the engine at all, go to

step 8.
o If the starter cranks the engine erratically or too
slowly, go to step 10.
o If the starter does not disengage from the torque
converter ring gear when you release the key,
replace the starter, or remove and disassemble it,
and check for the following:
- Starter solenoid and switch malfunction
2. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the - Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). clutch
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle

and the PCM. If it doesn't communicate
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-223).
5. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS

OFF on the HDS.
4-6 BACK
~
~
8. Make sure the shift lever is in the N or P position, 10. While cranking the engine, check the cranking
then disconnect the connector from the starter voltage and the current draw.
solenoid S terminal. Connect a jumper from the
battery positive terminal to the solenoid S terminal. Is the cranking voltage greater than or equal to
8.0 V and is the current draw less than or equal to
375A?
5
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Replace the starter, or remove and

disassemble it, and check for the following:
• Drag in the starter armature

• Shorted armature winding
• Excessive drag in the engine
11. Check the engine speed while cranking the engine.
Is the engine speed above 100 rpm?

Does the starter crank the engine?
YES-Go to step 12.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the starter, or remove and
NO-Remove the starter, and repair or replace it as disassemble it, and check for the following:
necessary.•
• Open circuit in starter armature commutator
9. Check the following items in the order listed until segments
you find the problem: • Excessiv{tly worn starter brushes
• Open circuit in the starter brushes
• A blown STS (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under- • Dirty or damaged helical splines or drive gear
dash fuse holder 1 located below the driver's • Faulty drive. gear clutch
under-dash fuse/relay box.
• A blown STRLD (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under- 12. Remove the starter, and inspect its drive gear and
dash fuse holder 2 located below the driver's the torque converter ring gear for damage. Replace
under-dash fuse/relay box. any damaged parts.
• Check for an open or short in the WHT wire and
connectors between the starter cut relay 1 and 13. Select PCM reset (see page 11-4) to cancel ALL
the main under-hood fuse box. INJECTORS OFF on the HDS.
• Check for an open or short in the BRN wire and
connectors between the starter cut relay 2, the
PCM and the starter cut relay 1.
• Check for an open or short in the WHT wire, BLK/
WHT wire, and connectors between the starter
cut relay 2 and the starter.
• Check for a faulty ignition switch (see page 22-79).
• Check for a faulty transmission range switch and
connector (see page 14-315).
• Check for a faulty starter cut relay 1 and the
starter cut relay 2 (see page 22-77).
BACK 4-7
Starting System
Starter Solenoid Test
1. Make suteyou have the anti-theft codes for the 7. Reconnect the starter cable, S terminal connector,
audio system and navigation syst~m (if equipped). and motor cable.
Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.
8. Connect the positive cable to the battery first, then
2. Remove the battery and battery base (see step 12 connect the negative cable.
on page 5-3).
9. Install the battery and battery base (see step 56 on
3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, page 5-21).
then disconnect the positive cable.
10. Do the steering column position memorization
4. Disconnectthe positive starter cable (A), S terminal (see page 17-28).
connector (B), and motor cable (C).
11. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system and
navigation system (if equipped).
M
12. Set the clock.
8x1.25mm
9.0N·m
(0.9 kgf'm, 7.0 Ibf·ft)
5. Check the hold-in coil for continuity between the

S terminal and the armature housing (ground) (D).
There should be continuity.
• If there is continuity, go to step 6.

• If there is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
6. Check the pull-in coil for'continuity between the

S terminal and the M terminal. There' should be
continuity.
• If there is continuity, the solenoid is OK.

• Ifthere is no continuity, replace the solenoid.
4-8 BACK
r--:'I
~
Starter Performance Test
1. Disconnect the wire from the M terminal. 5. Disconnect the battery from the starter body. Ifthe
pinion retracts immediately, it is working properly.
2. Make a connection fo~ this test using the thickest
(gauge) wire possible (preferably the same gauge
as used on the vehicle). s
NOTE: To avoid damaging the starter, never leave
the battery connected for more than 10 seconds. 12V
BATTERY
s
(£> 8
12V
BATTERY
6. Clamp the starter firmly in a vise.
7. Reconnect the wire to the M terminal.
8. Connect the starter to the battery as shown in the

diagram, and confirm that the motor starts and
3. Connect the battery as shown. Make sure you keeps rotating.
disconnect the starter motor wire from the solenoid.
If the starter pinion moves out, it is working
properly.
4. Disconnect the battery from theM terminal. If the

pinion does not retract, the hold-in coil ofthe
solenoid is working properly.
M s
12V
BATTERY
12V
BATTERY
9. Ifthe electric current meets the specification when

the battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is
working properly.
Specification
Electric Current: 90 A or less
BACK 4-9
Starting System
Starter Removal and Installation
Removal Installation·
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 1. Install the starter (A) using a new gasket (8), then
audio system and navigation system (if equipped). install the harness clamp (C), and positive starter
Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. cable (D) and S terminal connector (E). Make sure
the crimped side of the 8 terminal is facing out,
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, away from the starter.
10x 1.25 mm
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ttl
3. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-363).
4. Remove the battery and battery base (see step 12

on page 5-3).
5. Remove the harness clamp (A).
8x1.25mm
9.0 N·m 10.9 kgf.m, 7.0 Ibf·ttl
2. Install the battery base and battery (see step 56 on

page 5-21).
3. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-363).

6. Disconnect the positive starter cable (8) from the 8 connect the negative cable.
terminal, then disconnect the connector (C) from
the S terminal. 5. Start the engine to make sure the starter works
properly.
7. Remove the two bolts holding the starter.
(see page 17-28).

8. Set the clock.
4-10 BACK
r--:'I
~
Starter Overhaul
DisassemblyIReassembly'
ARMATURE "' •• I
HOUSING
PLANETARY GEAR
END COVER
~. .
. .(Apply molybdenu "'I'f'de)
mdlsu ..I •
ARMA~
r
g
~ .. /
~
(Apply molybdenum
d;,ulftd•.,
'9
~
(Apply molybdenum
disulfide.)
~RLEVER
~. ~HOUSING
~~
(Apply molybdenum
disulfide.)
IDLER GEAR Q IDLER GEAR SHAFT
~ . )
(Applymo Iy bdenum disulfide.
(cont'd)
BACK 4-11
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
Brush Holder Removal Armature Inspection and Test
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-10). 5. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning
of this procedure.
2. Disconnect the wire from the M terminal, and
remove the end cover. 6. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from
contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear
3. Place a plastic pipe with an outside diameter of or damage, replace the armature.
29.4 mm (1.16 in.) on the armature.
7. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is

4. Move the brush holder (A) up to the pipe (B) while dirty or burnt, resurface it with an emery cloth or a
holding the pipe so the brushes do not pop out lathe to the following specifications, or recondition
from the holder. with :1* 500 or :1* 600 sandpaper (B).
4-12 BACK
~
I.:!..I
8. Check the commutator diameter. Ifthe diameter is 10. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (8),
below the service limit, replace the armature. undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to the
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between
Commutator Diameter the commutator segments. The undercut should
Standard (New): 28.90-29.00 mm (1.138-1.142 in.) not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D).
Service Limit: 28.00 mm (1.102 in.)
Commutator Mica Depth
Standard (New): 0.50-0.90 mm (0.020-0.035 in.)
9. Measure the commutator (A) runout.
• Ifthe commutator runout is within the service 11. Check for continuity between the segments of the
limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or commutator. Ifthere is an open circuit between any
brass chips between the segments. segments, replace the armature .
• If the commutator runout is not within the service
limit, replace the armature.
Commutator Runout
Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) max.
(cont'd)
BACK 4-13
Starting System
12. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B). Starter Brush Inspection
Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If
the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while 14. Measure the brush length. If it is shorter than the
the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace service limit, replace the brush holder assembly.
the armature.
Brush Length
13. Use an ohmmeter to check for continuity between

the commutator (A) and the armature coil core (B), Starter Brush Holder Test
and between the commutator and the armature
shaft (C). Ifthere is continuity, replace the armature. 15. Check for continuity between the (+) brush (A) and
(-) brush (B). Ifthere is continuity, replace the
brush holder assembly.
A
4-14 BACK
Brush Spring Inspection Overrunning Clutch Inspection
16. Insert the brush (A) into the brush holder, and bring 18. Slide the overrunning clutch (A) along the shaft.
the brush into contact with the commutator, then Replace it, if it does not slide smoothly.
attach a spring scale (8) to the spring (C). Measure
the spring tension at the moment the spring lifts off
the brush. If it is not within the standard, replace
the brush holder assembly.
Spring Tension
Standard (New): 22.3-27.3 N
, (2.27-2.78 kgf, 5.00-6.13Ibf)
19. Hold the drive gear (8), and turn the overrunning
clutch in the direction shown to make sure it turns
freely. Also make sure the overrunning clutch locks
in the opposite direction. If it does not lock, replace
the overrunning clutch assembly.
c
20. If the starter drive gear is worn or damaged,
replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear
is not available separately.
Check the condition of the torque converter ring
gear. Replace it if the starter drive gear teeth are
Planetary Gear Inspection damaged.
17. Check the planetary gears (A) and internal gear (8).
Replace them if they are worn or damaged.
(cont'd)
BACK 4-15
Starting System
Starter Reassembly 24. Install the armature housing (A) and armature (8)
by aligning the slotted point (e) to the projection (D).
21. When you replace the brush holder or the armature
housing, you need to seat the new brushes. Slip a
strip of :1* 500 or :1* 600 sandpaper, with the grit side
up, between the commutator and each brush, and
smoothly turn the armature. The contact surface of
the brushes will be sanded to the same contour as
the commutator. D
22. Pry back each brush'sp~ihg with a screwdriver, then

position the brush on the brush holder about
halfway out of its holder. Release the spring to hold
it in place.
25. Install the armature into the housing.
26. Place the brush holder assembly on the armature,

then move the brush holder (A) down to the
armature.
23. Push each brush down until it seats against the

commutator, then release the spring against the
end of the brush.
4-16 BACK
r--:'I
~
27. Install the end cover to retain the brush holder.
BACK
4-17
'.
Ignition System
t•.
IGNITION COIL RELAV

(In the under-hood fuse/relay box)
Test, page 22-78
v v
SPARK PLUG IGNITION COIL

Inspection, page 4-24 Ignition Timing Inspection, page 4-20
Removal/Installation, page 4-21
4~18
BACK
Circuit Diagram
I I
MAIN UNDER HDOD RJSE BOX UNDER·HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
C±)'----+,___N~O._I(1_20_A_I
SATrERY
r .
_ _N_O._31_30_AI--J C2 NO,91ISAI
~--~-------------G~--------------~~~~o-------~
• ~,,-IIS)J"():Alr==t-_-I-'"
IGNITION
COIL
RELAY
~---·~·~1
PCM ES H6
GN WHT
BRN rvHT
IGPLS6
BI2
BLK/RED
IGPLSS
BI1
BRN
IGPLS4
B23
IGPLS3
B22
WHT BLU
IGPLS2
830
BLU/IlED VELJGRN
~
IGPLSI
B29
MRLY
A6
B
I C'O'
10
,....I-o-IG_PLS6
____--cr-,3 I IGPLSS 3 I IGPLS4 3 I IGPLS3 3 I IGPLS2 '. 3 I IGPLSI
I ~M I ~M I ICM I
t--1--4H-- +--1--4\ I-- +-+--111-- t--1--4\ I-- IGNmON
COILS
L
J ~II
--..l _~
~
LW LW
BLI<
T T T i
SPARK
PLUGS
..JL. _.1<_
-'"- ..JL. ..JL.
GIOI
ICM : Ign~ion Control Module
BACK 4-19
Ignition System
Ignition Timing Inspection
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 9. Aim the light toward the pointer (A) on the timing
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). belt cover. Check the ignition timing under a no
load condition (headlights, blower fan, rear window
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). defogger, and air conditioner are turned off).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle Ignition Timing:
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it 10 0±2 0BTDC (RED mark (B)) at idle in Park or
doesn't communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit Neutral
(see page 11-223).
4. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is present, diagnose and

repair the cause before inspecting the ignition
timing.
5. Start the engine. Hold the engine at 3,000 rpm with

no load (in park or Neutral) until the radiator fan-
comes on, then let it idle.
6. Check the idle speed (see page 11-310).
7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
8. Connect the timing light to the service loop.
10. If the ignition timing differs from the specification,

check the cam timing. If the cam timing is OK,
update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
ignition system works properly, replace the original
PCM (see page 11-244).
11. Disconnect the HDS and the timing light.
4-20 BACK
r--:'I
~
Ignition Coil Removal/Installation Ignition .Coil Relay Circuit
Troubleshooting
1. Remove the engine cover (A).
1. Check the No.8 (15 A) fuse and No.9 (15 A) fuse in

the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse. If the fuse continues to blow,

locate and repair the short in the circuit between
the under-hood fuse/relay box and the ignition
coils.•
2. Remove the relay control module from the under-

hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-78).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Replace the relay control module in the

under-hood fuse/relay box.•
2. Disconnect the ignition coil connector (A), then 3. Measure the voltage between the relay control
remove the ignition coils (8). module connector C terminal No.2 and body
ground.
RELAY CONTROL MODULE 2P CONNECTOR C
6x1.0mm
12N·m
=
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft) Wire side offemale terminals
3. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of

removal. Is there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair open in the wire between relay control

module connector C terminal No.2 and the main
under-hood fuse box.•
(cont'd)
BACK 4-21
Ignition System
Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
4. Check for continuity between the relay control 5. Check for continuity between the relay control
module connector H terminal No.6 and No.1 module connector E terminal No.5 and body
ignition coil 3P connector terminal No.3. ground.
RELAY CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR H

RELAY CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR E
Wire side of
female terminals
1 .Q
Wire side of
female terminals 2
31----'
Wire side of female terminals
No.1 IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
Is there continuity? Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 5. YES-Repair short in the wire between the relay

control module connector E terminal No.5 and the
NO-Repair open in the wire between the relay powertrain control module (PCM) (A6).•
control module connector H terminal No.6 and
ignition coil 3P connector terminal No.3•• NO-Go to step 6.
6. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the

data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).

and the PCM. If it doesn't communicate,
9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the
ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM from

damage.
10. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
4-22 BACK
r--:'I
~
11. Check for continuity between relay control module

connector E terminal No.5 and PCM connector
terminal A6.
RELAV CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR E
Terminal side of male terminals
Is there continuity?
YES-The system is OK at this time. Check for

loose or poor connections at the relay control
module connector E and the PCM (A6) .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the relay

control module connector E terminal No.5 and the
PCM (A6) .•
BACK 4-23
Ignition System
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Remove the spark plugs and inspect the electrodes 3. Do not adjust the gap (A) of iridium tip plugs;
and the ceramic insulator. replace the spark plug if the gap is out of
specification .
• Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by:
- Advanced ignition timing Electrode Gap
- Loose spark plug Standard (New): 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.)
- Plug heat range too hot
- Insufficient cooling A
• Fouled plugs may be caused by:

- Retarded ignition timing
- Oil in combustion chamber
-Incorrect spark plug gap
- Plug heat range too cold
- Excessive idling/low speed running
- Clogged air cleaner element
- Deteriorated ignition coils
Worn or deformed ~
.
electrodes
.Improper gap
iT {
• Oil-fouling
Carbon deposits
• Cracked center
electrode insulator
4. Replace the plug at the specified interval, if the
center electrode is rounded (A). Use.only the listed
spark plugs.
~ Spark Plugs
NGK: IZFR6K11
DENSO: SKJ20DR-M11
2. Ifthe spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated,

clean the electrode with a plug cleaner.
NOTE:
• Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium
electrode since this will damage the electrode. 5. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to
• When using a sand blaster spark plug cleaner, do the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the
not clean for more than 20 seconds to avoid cylinder head, finger-tight. Torque them to 18 N·m
damaging the electrode. (1.8 kgf·m, 13Ibf·ft).
4-24 BACK
~
Charging System .I.!:!.I
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

(In the gauge~ontrol module)
MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX .
(Has built-in ELECTRICAL
LOAD DETECTOR (ELD) UNIT)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
Test, page 22-76
ALTERNATOR
Removal and Installation, page 4-36
Overhaul, page 4-39
DRIVE BELT
Inspection, page 4-33
AUTO-TENSIONER Replacement, page 4-33
BACK 4-25·
Charging System

Charging system Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit
indicator does not come (see page 4-28).
on with the ignition
switch ON (II)
Charging system 1. Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit
indicator stays on (see page 4-28).
2. Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-33).
3. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-34).
Battery discharged 1. Check for a poor connection and for open or shorted
wire(s) in the charging system.
2. Check for excessive parasitic electrical current draw
with the ignition switch OFF, and the key removed. The
multiplex control unit may take up to 10 minutes to turn
off (sleep mode) for some models.
3. Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-33).
4. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-34).
5. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit
(see page 4-30).
6. Check for a poor connection at the battery terminal.
7. Test the battery (see page 22-76).
Battery overcharged 1. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit
(see page 4-30).
2. Test the battery (see page 22-76).
4-26 BACK
r--:'I
~
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX IGNmON svirrcH
t<~..r-6_ _ _-
BAnERY
No.1 1120 AI UNDER-DASH
\J)-t-- WHT _ _ _.;..3
PNK FUSE/RELAY
~
A6 BOX
IGI HOT in ON IIlIand

STARTIDQ No. 21
(7.5 AI
Al C6
VEL
VEL
A2 A3 GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
A12
A7
A6
ALlERNATOR B 4 3 2 1
FR L C IG
-1 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
I
RECT1FIER
~'" . ~'"
r-
~
.~ ~ .",
~'"
...JL.
BACK 4-27
Charging System
Charging System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does the charging system indicator come on? 8. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to step 14.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it
2,000 rpmfor 1 minute. doesn't communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit
(see page 11-223).
Does the charging system indicator go off?
YES-Charging system indicator circuit is OK. Go ignition switch OFF.
to the alternator and regulator circuit
troubleshooting (see page 4-30) .• NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM
from damage.
NO-Go to step 3.
12. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
3. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic
function procedure (see page 22-315). 13. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C42 and body ground.
Does the charging system indicator flash?
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
YES-Go to step 4. Ir '1
11 I 2 3 4151617 8 9110 I
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page 11 12 1/ 1/115 1617118 19 20 21
22-337) .• ~ 1/1/ 24 X 25X 26 27 28
1/1/1/ 32133 341/1/ 3788 39
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 140 41 4Z 43144145146 47 461491
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. ~':"TL IWHT/BlUI

6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). =
Does the charging system indicator go off?
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), or Is there continuity?

repair the alternator (see page 4-39) .•
YES-Repair short in the wire between the
NO-Go to step 7. alternator and the PCM .•
NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

software (see page 11-7), or substitute a k.nown-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-244).•
4-28 BACK
r--:'I
I..:!J
14. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic 19. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see step 2 on page
function procedure (see page 22-315). 11-3).
Does the charging system indicator flash? 20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES-Go to step 15. 21. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-223).
22-337) .•
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. ignition switch OFF.
16. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM
from damage.
17. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No.3 and
body ground with a jumper wire. 23. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR 24. Check for continuity between PCM connector


L
2
(WHT/BLU) 3
4
JUMPER WIRE
=
Wire side of ferriale terminals

=
Does the charging system indicator come on?
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), or
repair the alternator (see page 4-39) .• YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-7), or. substitute a known-
NO-Go to step 19. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe
NO-Repair open in the wire between the

alternator and the PCM .•
BACK 4-29
Charging System
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Make sure the battery connections are good and 6. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine
the battery is fully charged (see page 22-76). idle.
2. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-21). 7. Turn off all the accessories. Select the charging test
on the tester.
3. Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and turn
the selector switch to position 1 (starting). 8. Remove the inductive pickup, and zero the
ammeter.
LOAD ADJUSTER
(CARBON PILE) I FULL FIELD TESTER
LEAD (BLU)
____ VOLTMETER 9. Place the inductive pickup over the B terminal wire
NEGATIVE of the alternator so the arrow points away from the
LEAD (BLK) alternator.
VOLTMETER 10. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it
/ POSITIVE there.
1fU'~"=:::::::,~ LEAD (RED)
Is the voltage less than 13.5 V?
FIELD
SELECTOR YES-Go to alternator control circuit
~
NEGATIVE troubleshooting (see page 4-31) .•
TERMINAL
CABLE (BLK)
NO-Go to step 11.
POSITIVE
TERMINAL 11. Apply a load with the VAT-40 until the battery
CABLE (RED) voltage drops between 12-13.5 V.
Is the amperage 87.5 A or more?
YES-The charging system is OK.•

BTERMINAL
INDUCTIVE NOTE: If the charging system indicator is still on,
PICKUP
replace the alternator (see page 4-36).
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at NO-Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), or
3,000 rpm, with no load, until the radiator fan repair the alternator (see page 4-39) .•
comes on, then let it idle.
5. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it

there.
Is the voltage over 15.1 V?
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-36) or rear

housing assembly (see page 4-39) .•
NO-Goto step 6.
4-30 BACK
~
~
Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). terminal C43 and body ground.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

Ir 11
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it -' 1 1 2 3 4151617 8 191101
11 12 / /116 16 17118 1920 21
doesn't communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit
17 / 24>< 26X 2627 28
(see page 11-223). 1/ / IV 32133 34VV 3738 39
, 140 I 41 42 43144145146 47/461491
4. Check for DTCs. If a DTC is present, diagnose and
repair the cause before continuing with this test. ~TC (WHT/GRN)
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the
alternator.
6. Start the engine, and turn on the headlights to high
beam. Is there continuity?
7. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P YES-Repair short in the wire between the
connector terminal No.2 and the positive terminal alternator and the PCM .•
of the battery.
BATTERY
C(WHT/GRN)
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM
ALTERNATOR
4P CONNECTOR from damage.
Wire side of female terminals 12. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
Is there less than 1 V?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 11.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM

from damage.
(cont'd)
BACK 4-31
Charging System
Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector

terminal C43 and alternator 4P connector terminal
No.2.
PCM CONNECTOR C (49PI
Ir II
.I 1 2 3 4 1 5 I 6 7 8 I 9 110 I
111 12 VV 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Terminal side of
VV 24 X 25 X 26 27 2B female terminal
VV V 32 33 34VV 37 38 39
140 141 42 43144145 46 471481491
ALTC
(WHT/GRNI ..c:::l &vHT/GRNI
1 21- ALTERNATOR
3 4 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), or

repair the alternator (see page 4-39) .•

alternator and the PCM .•
4-32 BACK
r:-:'I
I!:!..I
Drive Belt Inspection Drive Belt Replacement
1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damage. If the belt is Special Tools Required
cracked or damaged, replace it. Belt tension release tool Snap-on YA9317 or ,equivalent,
commercially available
2. Check that the auto-tensioner indicator (A) is within
the standard range (B) as shown. If it is out of the 1. Move the auto-tensioner (A) using the belt tension
standard range, replace the drive belt (see page release tool to relieve tension from the drive belt
4-33). (B), then remove the drive belt.
___ B __
2. Install the new belt in the reverse order of removal.
BACK 4-33
Charging System
Drive Belt Auto~tensioner Inspection
Special Tools Required 6. Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).

Belttension release tool Snap-on YA9317 or equivalent,
commercially available 7. Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using a 10 mm bolt
(B),8 r'nm bolt (C), and a vise (D) as shown. Do not
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), then make sure to clamp the auto-tensioner itself.
turn the AlC switch OFF.
2. With the engine OFF, check the position of the auto-

tensioner indicator's pointer (A). Start the engine,
then check the position again with the engine idling.
Ifthe position ofthe indicator moves orfluctuates a
lot, replace the auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).
8. Attach a torque wrench (A) to the pulley bolt.

Measure the torque when the tensioner is turned
counterclockwise. If the torque is less than the
specified value, replace the auto-tensioner.
Auto-tensioner Spring Torque:

50.5 N·m (5.15 kgf·m, 37.2Ibf·ft)
3. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley.
If you hear any abnormal noise, replace the auto-
tensioner pulley.
4. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-33).
5. Move the autoctensioner within its limit using the

belt tension release tool in the direction shown.
Check that the tensioner moves smoothly and
without any abnormal noise. If the tensioner does
not move smoothly or you hear abnormal noise, ,
replace the auto-tensioner.
4-34 BACK
~
~
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner TensionerPulley Replacement
Replacement
1. Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).
1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-33). 2. Remove the pulley bolt (A) (left-hand threads), and
remove the tensioner pulley (B).
2. Remove the splash shield (see step 31 on page 5-5).
A
10x 1.5 mm
3. Remove the auto-tensioner.
----
80 N·m 18.2 kgf·m, 59 Ib!:..,tt)
10 x 1.5 mm
~8x1.25mm 22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·tt)
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·tt)
3. Install the tensioner pulley in the reverse order of
4. Install the auto-tensioner in the reverse order of removal.
removal.
BACK
4-35
Charging System
Alternator Removal and:ln$tal.lation
Removal 7. Remove the harness bracket (A), then disconnect

the Ale compressor clutch connector (B).
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the .
audio system and navigation system (if equipped).
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first,

3. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-21).
5. Remove the Ale suction line from brackets (A).
A 8. Disconnect the alternator connector (e) and the

BLK wire (D) from the alternator.
9. Remove the mounting bolt (A) and alternator

bracket mounting bolt (B), then remove the
alternator.
6. Remove the coolant reservoir (A), then remove

power steering fluid reservoir (B) from the bracket.
BACK
r--:'I
I.!:!.I
Installation 4. Install the power steering fluid reservoir (A) to the

bracket, then install the coolant reservoir (B).
1. Install the alternator, and tighten the mounting bolt
(A) and bracket mounting bolt (B).
5. Install the AlC suction line to the brackets (A).

A
10x 1.25 mm A
45N·m B
(4.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibf·ft) 8x1.25mm
22N·m
(2.2 kgf.m, 16Ibf·ft)
2. Connect the alternator connector (A), BlK wire (B)

to the alternator.
8x 1.25 mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
3. Install the harness bracket (C), then connect the AlC

compressor clutch connector (0).
(cont'd)
BACK 4-37
Charging System
Alternator Removal and Installation (cont'd)
6. Install the drive belt (see page 4-33).
7. Install the engine cover (see step 1 on page 4-21).

connect the negative cable.

(see page 17-28).
navigation system (if equipped). '
11. Set the clock.
4-38 BACK
~
I.!:!.I
Alternator Overhaul
Exploded View
PULLEY
BRUSH HOLDER
ASSEMBLY
REAR HOUSING ASSEMBLY
ROTOR
(cant'd)
BACK 4-39
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the end cover (A) and the insulator (8) .
• Handle driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during

this procedure.
Alternator Disassembly
1. Test the alternator an9 regulator before you

remove them (see page 4-28).
2. Remove the alternator (see page 4-36).
3. If the front bearing needs replacing, remove the

pulley locknut with a 10 mm wrench (A) and a
22 mm wrench (8). If necessary, use an impact
wrench.
/
6. Remove the brush holder.
4. Remove the three flange nuts.
4-40 BACK
7. Remove the four bolts, then removethe rear 9. Inspect the rotor shaft for scoring; and inspect the
housing assembly (A) and washer (8). bearing journal surface in the drive end housing for
seizure marks .
• If the rotor is damaged, replace the rotor

assembly .
• If the rotor is OK, go to step 10.
10. Remove the front bearing retainer plate.
8. If you are not replacing t!le front bearing, go to

step 13. Remove the rotor .fJ:'()m the drive end.
housing.
11. Drive out the front bearing with a brass drift and
hammer.
(cont'd)
BACK 4-4·',
,Cbargi'ng System
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
12. With a hammer,'driver handle, and attachment, Rotor Slip Ring Test
install a newfrontbearing in the drive "end housing.
14. Check for continuity between the slip rings (A).
• Ifthere is continuity, go to step 15.

• If there is no continuity, replace the rotor
assembly.
Alternator Brush Inspection

B
13. Measure the, length of both brushe,s (A) with a
vernier caliper (B). 15. Check for continuitybetweeri each slip ring and the
rotor (B) and the 'r'otorshaft (C):
• If either brush is shorter than the service limit,
replace the brush holder assembly. • If there is no continuity, replace the rear housing
• If the brush length is OK, go to step 14. assembly, and go to step 16.
',. • If there is continuity, replace the rotor assembly.
Alternator Brush Length
Standard (New): 10.5 mm (0.41 in.) 16. Assemble the alternator in the reverse order of
Service Limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) disassembly, and note these items:
• Be careful not to get any grease or oil on the slip

rings.
• If you removed the pulley, tighten its locknut to
110 N·m (11.2 kgf.m, 81.0 Ibf·ft) when you
reinstall it.
4-42
BACK
r--:'I
Cruise Control I!!!..I
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

(Built into gauge control module)
CRUISE CONTROL COMBINATION SWITCH

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH Test/Replacement, page 4-49
Test, page 22-214
Pedal Height Adjustment, page 19-6
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX

Test, page 14-315
UNDER-HOOD Replacement, page 14-316
FUSE/RELAY BOX POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Cruise Control Input Test, page 4-47
BACK 4-43
Cruise Control

Cruise control cannot be 1." Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs.
set 2. Check the No. 11 (15 A) fuse in the main under-hood
fuse box, and the No. 18 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay. box.
3. Do the cruise control inputtest (seepage 4-47).
4. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function to
test the switch.
5. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-49).
Cruise control can be set, 1. Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs. Faulty gauge control
butthe cruise control 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-47). module
main switch indicator 3. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
does not come on 4-49).
Cruise control can be set, 1. Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs. Faulty gauge control
but the cruise control 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-47). module
indicator does not come
on
Vehicle does not 1. Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs. Open circuit, loose or
decelerate or accelerate 2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function to disconnected
accordingly when the set! test the switch. terminals:
decel or resume/accel 3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-47). YELJREO or
switch is pressed . 4. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page LT GRN/BLK wire
4-49).
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs. Short to power in BRN
cancel when the brake 2. Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment wire
pedal is pressed (see page 19-6).
3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-47).
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs. Short to ground in PNK
cancel when the cruise 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-47). wire
control main switch is 3. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
turned off 4-49).
Set speed ~oes not 1. Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs. Open circuit, loose or
cancel when the cancel 2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function to disconnected
switch is pressed test the switch. terminals:
3. Do the crl;lise control input test (see page 4-47). YELJREOor
4. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page LT GRN/BLK wire
4-49).
4-44 BACK
~
~

Set speed will not 1. Check for PGM-FI and body OTCs. • Open circuit, loose or
resume when the 2. Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment disconnected
resume/accel switch is (see page 19-6). terminals:
pressed (with the cruise 3. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function to LT GRN/BLK wire
control main switch test the switch. • Faulty brake pedal
turned on, and set speed 4. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-47). position switch
temporarily canceled by 5. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
Rressing the brake pedal) 4-49).
BACK 4-45
Cruise Control
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY -1:1G
'2:R/Bl
MAlNUNDEJl.llOOD fUSE BOX
7
1°_ ---- --- --- --- ---- ---- --- ___ ~T~~.-\ABLE
No.3'2~OAJ
No.3-'
.
--- -- --- --- - - -- - --- - - -- - --- --- --'"
.
:~
,
I50AJ
GRN/YEL RED/BLK
$-
WItT WHT GRN ORN
11
SWITCH
BAT
IGI
IGI HDTln ON IIQ
6 .nd STARr lID)
WItT UNlJEll.HOOD
fUSEJRELAY
C2 BOX
UNDSI.oASH
IUSEJIIELAY
BOX
WItT YEL
LTGRN
7
HORN
BRAICE
PEDAL
POSmoN
SWITCH
E5 E14 HI
LTGRN BRN GRN BLU
CRUIlECON11lOl.INDICATOR
AS GAUGE CONtROL MODULE
I'CM A7 III A29

M1U.Y ETCSRLY
5V 12V
Ne A11'fWD ETCSM- VCC5 TPSA TPS8 SG5

B38 Cl8 B18 B17 B26 B33
BLU BLU/YEL BW GRN BLU RED/BLK IEDIBLU GRN
7 7 t;J I:~-:II~-
~!'~'
1=
0U1PUT SHAfT TRANSMISSION
ICOUNml SHAF1) RANGE SWITCH
SIEEDSENSGR
4-46 BACK
~
I!:!..I
Cruise Control Input Test
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the Data Link Connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the PCM. If it doesn't communicate, troubleshootthe DLC
circuit (see page 11-223).
4. Do the following tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS.
NOTE: Intermittent failures are often caused by loose circuit connections. While monitoring cruise control inputs,
flex their circuits, and note if any of the test results change.
Signal to be Test condition Parameter: Desired resutt Possible cause if resutt is not obtained
tested
Cruise control Cruise control CRUISE CONTROL MAIN SW • Faulty cruise control combination switch
main switch main switch should indicate ON when the • An open in the wire between the gauge
signal ON and OFF cruise control main switch is control module and the cruise control
turned on and OFF when the combination switch
cruise control main switch is • A wire shorted to ground between the
turned off. gauge control module and the cruise
control main switch
• An open in the wire between the cruise
control combination switch and the
, ground
Brake switch Cruise control CRUISE BRAKE SW should • Faulty brake pedal position switch
signal main switch indicate OFF when the brake • Blown No. 10 (18 A) fuse in the
ON, brake pedal is pressed and ON under-dash fuse/relay box
pedal pressed, should be indicated when the • An open in the wire between the PCM
then released brake pedal is released. and the brake pedal position switch
• A wire shorted to ground between the
PCM and the brake pedal position switch
Set switch Set/decel CRUISE CONTROL SET SW • Faulty cruise control combination switch
signal switch pressed should indicate ON when the • An open in the wire between the gauge
and released set/decel switch is pressed control module and the cruise control
and OFF when the set/decel combination switch
switch is released. • A wire shorted to ground between the
gauge control module and the cruise
control combination switch
• An open in the wire between the cruise
control combination switch and ground
Resume Resume/accel CRUISE CONTROL RESUME • Faulty cruise control combination switch
switch signal switch pressed SW should indicate ON when • An open in the wire between the gauge
and released the resume switch is pressed control module and the cruise control
and OFF when the resume combination switch
switch is released. • A wire shorted to ground between the
gauge control module and the cruise
control combination switch
(cont'd)
BACK 4-47
Cruise Control
Cruise Control Input Test (cont'd)
Signal to be Test condition Parameter: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
tested
Cancel switch Cancel switch CRUISE CONTROL CANCEL. Faulty cruise control combination switch
signal pressed and SW should indicate ON when
released the cancel switch is pressed
and OFF when the cancel
switch is released.
Cruise control Start the CRUISE INDICATOR should Faulty gauge control module
indicator engine, turn indicate ON when the cruise
signal the cruise control is set and OFF when
control main the cruise control is cancelled.
switch on, and
drive the
vehicle to
above 25 mph
(40. km/h). Set
and cancel the
cruise control
Transmission Shift in D SHIFTfTRANS RANGE SW • Faulty transmission range switch

range switch position should indicate ON in D, D3 • An open in the wire between the PCM
signal and OFF in P, R, N. and the transmission range switch
• A wire shorted to ground between the
PCM and the transmission range switch
• Poor ground G101
4-48 BACK
~
~
Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the switch position according to the table.
precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) in the SRS
before doing repairs or service. • Ifthere is continuity, and it matches the table, but
switch failure occurred on the cruise control
1. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-137). input test, check and repair the wire harness on
the switch circuit .
2. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22). • If there is no continuity in one or both positions,
replace the switch.
3. Remove the six screws, then remove the cruise
control combination switch. 1\ Terminal
3 4 5 6 7
Position \
Cruise control 0- -0
main switch (ON)
Cruise control
main switch (OFF)
Set/decel 0 -0
(PRESSED)
Resume/accel ,...
....,
,...
....,
(PRESSED)
Cancel ...., ....,
(PRESSED) t..;;... k:)
BACK
Engin~ Mount Control System
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
Troubleshooting. page 4-52
FRONT ENGINE MOUNT
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
4-50 BACK
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER·HOOD FUSE BOX

BATTERY
No.1 (120AJ NO.3150AJ
JGNmON
SWITCH
UNDER·DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL
VALVE SOLENOID
BLUIVEL
t C10l
12
BLU
BACK 4-51
Engine Mount Control System
Troubleshooting
Special Tools Required 6. Measure the voltage between engine mount

Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg Snap-on YA4000A or control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No.2
equivalent, commercially available and body ground.
NOTE: Check the vacuum hoses and lines for damage ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL
and proper connections before troubleshooting. SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
Follow this procedure if the engine vibrates excessively

when idling.
1. Start the engine, and let it idle (see page 11-310).
2. Raise the engine speed from idling to 2,000 rpm.

=
3. Check the MOUNT CTRL SOL in the PGM-FI DATA
LIST with the Honda Diagnostic Systel\l (HDS). Wire side offemale terminals
Is ON indicated at idling and OFF indicated at

2,000 rpm? Is there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 4. YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Update the powertrain control module (PCM) NO-Repair open in the wire between engine
if it does not have the latest software (see page mount control solenoid valve 2P connector
11-7), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page terminal No.2 and No. 18 (10 A) fuse in the under-
11-8), then recheck. If the engine mount control dash fuse/relay box .•
system works properly, and the PCM was updated,
the troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM was
substituted, replace the original PCM (see page
11-244).•
4. Disconnect the engine mount control solenoid

valve 2P connector from the engine mount control
solenoid valve.
4-52 BACK
7. Measure the voltage between engine mount 8. Raise the engine speed above 1,000 rpm.
control solenoid valve 2P connector terminals No.1
and No.2, with the engine at idle. 9. Measure the voltage between engine mount
control solenoid valve 2P connector terminals No.1
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL and No.2.
SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL
MCS SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
(BLU/VEL)
IG 1
(BLK/YEL) MCS
(BLU/VEL)
IG 1
(BLK/YEL)
'------I':/..l-----'
Wire side of female terminals '------I ':/.. l-------.J

Is there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 8. Is there battery voltage?
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM (A 12) YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire
and the engine mount control solenoid valve 2P between PCM (A 12) and the engine mount control
connector. If the wire is OK, update the PCM if it solenoid valve. If the wire is OK, update the PCM if
does not have the latest software (see page 11-7), it does not have the latest software (see page 11-7),
or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8),
and recheck. If the engi ne mount control system and recheck. If the engine mount control system
works properly, and the PCM was updated, the works properly, and the PCM was updated, the
troubleshooting.is complete. If the PCM was troubleshooting is complete. Ifthe PCM was
substituted, replace the original PCM (see page substituted, replace the original PCM (see page
11-244).• 11-244) .•
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
BACK 4-53
Engine Mount Control System
Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) that is closest to 11. Release the vacuum, then apply vacuum again.
the solenoid connector from the engine mount
control solenoid valve (8), and connect a Is there a noticeable change in idle smoothness
commercially available vacuum pump/gauge, with and without vacuum applied?
0-30 in.Hg, to the hose. Apply about 20 in.Hg of
vacuum, and wait for 20 seconds. YES-Go to step 12,
NO-Replace the front engine mount.•
12. Connect a commercially available vacuum pump/

gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the engine mount control
solenoid valve (A) that is closest to the solenoid
connector.
Do the engine mount hold vacuum?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Either the vacuum hose or one of the engine

mount has a vacuum leak. Repair as needed .•
Is there manifold vacuum at idle, and a decrease

in manifold vacuum when you raise the engine
speed above 1,000 rpm?
YES-The system is OK.•
NO-Replace the engine mount control solenoid

valve .•
4-54 BACK
Engine Mechanical
Engine Assem bly

Engine Removal ........................................................... 5-2
Engine Installation ........................................................ 5-12
Engine Mount Replacement ........................................ 5-23
Cylinder -Head ..............................................,..... 6-1

Engine Block ...................•................................. 7-1
Engine Lubrication .... .................. .... ................. 8-1
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System ............. 9-1

Engine Assembly
Engine Removal
Special Tools Required 5. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the
• Front subframe adapter EQS02BMDXSBO audio system and navigation system (if equipped).
• Engine support hanger A and Reds AAR-T-12566
• Engine hanger balance bar VSB02C000019 6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first,
• Engine hanger adapter set VSB02C000031 then disconnect the positive cable.
These special tools are available through the American
Honda Tool and Equipment program, 1-888-424-6857. 7. Remove the battery.
NOTE: 8. Remove the engine cover.
I • Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted

surfaces.
• To avoid damaging the wiring and terminals, unplug
the wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.
• Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring,
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
1. Remove the support struts from the engine hood.

Move the engine hood to a vertical position, then
reinstall the support strut as shown.
9. Remove the breather pipe (A), then remove the air

intake duct (B).
2. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-330).
3. Drain the power steering system fluid, then plug

the fluid reservoir and return hose (see page 17-13).
4. Remove the bulkhead cover (see page 20-203).
5-2 BACK
11. Remove the main under-hood fuse box (A), then 13. Remove the positive starter cable (A).
remove the harness clamps (B).
/ B
12. Remove the harness clamps (A), then remove the

battery base (B). 14. Remove the shift cable (see page 14-309).
15. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then

disconnect the fuel feed hose (B) (see page 11-338).
(cont'd)
BACK 5-3
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
16. Remove the brake booster vacuum hose (A), and 21. Remove the alternator cable (A) from the main
evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (8). under-hood fuse I:)ox.
A
17. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP)

canister purge valve connector (e). 22. Remove the coolant reservoir from the bracket.
18. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22). 23. Remove the bracket (A), then remove the
powertrain control module (peM) cover (8).
19. Remove the steering joint cover (A).
20. Make a reference mark (8) across the steering joint

and steering gearbox pinion shaft. Remove the
steering joint bolt (e), and loosen the steering joint
bolt (D), then disconnect the steering joint from the
steering gearbox pinion shaft (E).
5-4 BACK
24. Remove the harness clamps (A), then disconnect 30. Remove the front wheels.
the two PCM connectors (B) and engine wire
harness connector (C). 31. Remove the splash shield.
26. Remove the power steering (PIS) pump inlet hose

(A) and PIS pump outlet hose (B) from the PIS
pump, then plug the PIS lines and PIS pump.
32. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, and drain the
engine coolant (see page 10-6).
33. Drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF)

(see page 14-303).
34. Drain the engin~ oil (see page 8-6).
35. Remove the front subframe stiffener.
27. Remove the PIS hose clamp (C) from the cylinder
head cover.
28. Remove the radiator cap.
29. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height.
(cont'd)
BACK 5 ..5
Engine Assembly
36. Remove exhaust pipe A. 44. Remove the PIS hose (A), then plug the line and
hose.
45. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch

connector.
37. Separate the stabilizer links from the dampers

(see page 18-20).
38. Separate the tie-rod end ball joints from the.

knuckles (see step 4 on page 18-15).
39. With active damper system: Remove the

suspension stroke sensors from the lower arms.
40. Separate the knuckles from the lower arms (see

step 7 on page 18-15).
41. Remove the driveshafts (see page 16-4). Coat all

precision-finished surfaces with new engine oil. Tie
plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.
42. Remove the propeller shaft from the transfer shaft

flange (see page 16-39).
43. Remove the transfer assembly (see page 14-270).
5-6 BACK
46. Remove the transmission lower mount bolts (A) 49. Disconnect the Ale compressor clutch connector
and ground cable (8). (A), then remove the Ale compressor (8) without
disconnecting the Ale hoses.
47. Remove the rear mount bolts (A), and power

steering line bracket (8).
50. Remove the heater hoses.
48. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
(cont'd)
BACK 5-7
Engine Assembly
51. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and lower 53. Remove the radiator (see page 10-10).
radiator hose (8).
54. Remove the connector bracket from the front
cylinder head; use the bracket bolt hole to attach
the engine balancer bar front arm.
52. Remove the ATF cooler hoses from the

transmission, then plug the ATF cooler hoses and
lines.
55. Remove the bracket from the rear cylinder head;
use the bracket bolt hole to attach the engine
balancer bar rear arm.
5-8 BACK
56. Remove the service caps (A) for the front damper 59. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height.
flange nuts from the cowl cover (B). Position the
engine hanger adapters (VSB02e000031) with the 60. Disconnect the front engine mount control solenoid
"FRONT"mark facing forward over the damper valve tube (A), then remove the front engine mount
flange nuts. bolts (B).
61. With active damper system: Disconnect the front

suspension stroke sensor connectors (A), then
remove the harness clamps (B).
57. Install the engine hanger balance bar(VSB02e

000019); attach the front arm (A) to the front
cylinder head with a spacer (B) and 10 x 1.25 mm
bolt (e), attach the rear arm (D) to the rear cylinder
head with 8 x 1.25 mm bolt (E).
58. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T-12566) to

the vehicle, and attach the hook to the slotted hole
in the engine hanger balance bar. Tighten the wing
nut (F) by hand to lift and support the engine/
transmission.
(cont'd)
BACK 5-9
Engine Assembly
62. Make reference marks (A) on the body across the 64. Lineup the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on
marks (B) on the edge of the front subframe (e). the corner of the jack base, then attach the front
subframe adapter (A) to the jack base with the bolts
(B) that came with the jack. Tighten all bolts
securely.
63. Loosen the four bolts (A) holding the adjustable

arms (B) ofthe front subframe adapter (EQS02 A
BMDXSBO) to its center plate. 10x 1.25 mm EOS02BMDXSBO
54N·m
(5.5 kgf.m, 40 Ibf·ft)
EOS02BMDXSBO
~ 65. Raise the jack to vehicle height, then attach the

front subframe adapter to the front subframe using
B~
the subframe stiffener mounting bolts (e) and bolt
holes.
66. Remove the six 12 x 1.25 mm bolts (A) securing the

subframe stiffeners (B), the four subframe
mounting bolts (e), and the stiffeners, then lower
the front subframe (D).
A
5~10 BACK
67. Lower the vehicle and attach a chain hoist (A) to the 69. Check that the engine/transmission is completely
engine hook (B) and transmission hook (C). Lift up free of vacuum hoses, fuel and coolant hoses, and
on the engine/transmission until it's securely electrical wiring.
supported by the chain hoist, and remove the
engine support hanger from the engine and vehicle. 70. Slowly lower the engine/transmission about 150
mm (6 in.). Check once again that all hoses and
electrical wiring are disconnected and free from the
engine/transmission;then lower it all the way.
B
71. Disconnect the chain hoist from the engine/
transmission.
72. Raise the vehicle all the way on the lift, and remove
the engine/transmission from under the vehicle.
68. Remove the mounting bolts from the upper half of

the side engine mount bracket.
BACK 5-11
En'gine Assembly
Engine Installation
Special Tools Required

• Front subframe adapter EQS02BMDXSBO
• Engine support hanger A and Reds AAR-T-12566 '
• Engine hanger balance bar VSB02C000019
• Engine hanger adapter setVSB02C000031
These special tools,areavailable through the American Honda Tool and Equipment program, 1-888-424-6857.
1. Install the engine mount bracket and accessory brackets, and tighten their bolts to the specified torque.
12x1.25mm
88N·m
" (9.!> kgf·m, 65 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
10x1.25mm
44N·m
(4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
10x1.25mm
38N·m
(3.9 kgf'm, 28 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
10x 1.25mm
AIC COMPRESSOR 44N·m
BRACKET (4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
5-12 BACK
2. Position. the engine/transmission underthe.vehicle. 3. Remove the service caps (A) for the front damper
Be sure that they are properly aligned. Carefully flange· nuts from the cowl cover (B). Position the
lower the vehicle until the engine.andtransmission engine hanger adapters (VSB02C000031) with the
are properly positioned in the engine compartment. "FRONT"mark facing forward over the damper
Make sure the vehicle is not resting on any part of flange nuts~
the engine or transmission. Lift and support the
engine with a chain hoist (A), and carefully raise the
engine/transmission into place.
NOTE: Reinstall the mounting bolts/support nuts in

the sequence given in the following steps. Failure
to follow this sequence may cause excessive noise
and vibration, and reduce engine mount life.
4. Install the engine hanger balance bar (VSB02C

000019); attach the front arm (A) to the front
cylinder head with a spacer (B) and 10 x 1.25 mm
bolt (C), attach the rear arm (D) to the rear cylinder
5. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T-12566) to

in the engine hanger balance bar. Tighten the wing
nut (F) by hand to lift and support the engine/
transmission.
(cont'd)
BACK 5-13
Engin.e Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
6. Install new mounting bolts into the upper half of 10. Align all reference marks (A) on the front subframe
the side engine mount bracket. Tighten the bolts to (B) with the body, then tighten the bolts on the front
the specified torque. subframe to the specified torque.
B·
11. Remove the j~ck and front subframe adapter.

7. Remove the chain hoist, then raise the vehicle on
the lift to full height. 12. With active damper system: Connect the front
suspension stroke sensor connectors (A), then
8. Using the subframe adapter (EQS02BMDXSBO) and install the harness clamps (B).
a jack, raise the front subframe upto the body.
C
12x 1.25 mm
74N·m
(7.5 kgf·m,
54Ibf·ft)
c
E
E
B
/!
D ~ ~2x1.25mm
/
B 117N·m
14 x 1.5 mm (11.9 kgf·m, 86.1 Ibf·ft)
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 75.9Ibf·ft)
Replace.
9. Loosely install the new front subframe mounting
bolts (four) (B), the 12 x 1.25 mm bolts (six) (C) (D),
and the stiffeners (E).
5-14 BACK
13. Tighten the transmission lower mount bolts (A) and 15. Tighten the front mount bolts (A), then connect the
ground cable (B). front engine mount control solenoid valve tube (B).
A A
10x 1.25 mm 12x 1.25mm
38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 Ibf·ftl 38N·m
(3,9 kgf·m, 28 Ibf·ftl
Replace.
6x1.0mm
~~~~~==-
,
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ftl
14. Tighten the rear mount bolts (A) and power
steering line bracket (B). 17. Loosen the mounting bolts for the upper half of the
side engine mount bracket, then retighten them to
6x1.0mm the specified torque.
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl
10x 1.25mm
44N·m
(4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ftl
Replace.
A
10x 1.25 mm 10x 1.25mm
42N·m 42 N·m (4.3 kgf·m, 31 Ibf·ftl
(4.3 kgf·m, 31 Ibf·ftl Replace.
18. Remove the engine support hanger and engine

hanger balance bar.
(cont'd)
BACK 5-15
Engine' Assembly
19. Install the AlC compressor (A), then connect the 23. Connect the power steering pressure switch
AlC compressor clutch connector (8). connector.
24. Install the transfer assembly (see page 14-21'2).
20. Install the radiator (see page 10-10). 25. Install the propeller shaft on transfer shaft flange
(see page 16-39).
21. Raise the vehicle on the Hftlo full height.
26. Wipe the driveshaft clean. Install a new set ring on
22. Install the power steering (PIS) hose (A). the end of each driveshaft, then install the
driveshafts. Make sure each ring "clicks" into place
in the differential and intermediate shaft.
27. Connect the suspension lower arms to the knuckles

(see step 9 on page 18-18).
28. Connect the tie-rod end ball joints to the knuckles

(see step 4 on page 18-17).
29. Connectthe stabilizer links (see page 18-20).
30. With active damper system: Connect the suspension

stroke sensors to the lower arms.
5-16 BACK
31. Install exhaust pipe A using new gaskets (B) and 33. Install the splash shield.
new self-locking nuts (C).
c~ C
10x 1.25 mm
10x 1.25 mm 54N·m
33N·m 8x1.25mm (5.5kgf·m,
(3.4 kgf.m, 25 Ibf·ft) 22N·m 40Ibf·ft)
Replace. (2.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·ft) Replace. 34. Install the front wheels.
32. Install the front subframe stiffener using new bolts. 35. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
36. Install the upper radiator hose (A) and lower

radiator hose (B).
~---10x 1.25 mm
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
(cont'd)
BACK 5-17
Engine Assembly
37. Install the heater hoses. 39. Install the connector bracket to the front cylinder
head.
38. Install the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) cooler

hoses to the transmission, and secure the hoses
with the clamps.
10x 1.25mm
NOTE: Check the installation location of the clamps 45 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
(see page 14-302).
40. Install the bracket to the rear cylinder head.
6x 1.0 mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
8x 1.25mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
5-18 BACK
41. Install the power steering (PIS) pump outlet hose 45. Install thePC;M cover (A), then install the bracket
(A) with a new O-ring (8), and install the PIS pump (8).
inlet hose (C).
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf.ft)
46. Install the coolant reservoir to the bracket.

42. Install the PIS hose clamp (D) to the cylinder head
cover. 47. Install the alternator cable (A) to the main under-
hood fuse box.
A
44. Connect the powertrain control module (PCM)
connectors (A) and engine wire harness connector
(8), then install the harness clamps (C).
(cont'd)
BACK 5-19
Engine Assembly
48. Align the reference mark (A) on the steering joint 53. Connect the fuel feed hose (A) (see page 11-340),
and steering gearbox pinion shaft. Connect the then install the quick-connect fitting cover (8).
steering joint (8) to the steering gearbox pinion
shaft (C). Tighten the steering joint bolt.
8x 1.25mm
28N·m
(2.9 kgf.m, 21 Ibf·ttl
54. Install the shift cable (see page 14-309).
55. Install the positve starter cable (A).
49. Install the steering joint cover (D).
50. Install the steering wheel (seepage 17-24).
51. Install the br;:tke booster vacuum hose (A) and

evaporative emission (EVAP) canister hose (8).
A
8x1.25mm
9.0N·m
(0.9 kgf·m, 7.0 Ibf·tt)
52. Connectthe evaporative emission (EVAP) canister

purge valve connector (C).
5-20 BACK
56. Install the battery base (A), then install the harness 59. Install the air intake duct (A), then install. the
clamps (8). breather pipe (8).
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·ttl
60. Install the engine cover.
57. Install the harness clamps (A), then install the main
under-hood fuse box (8).
58. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-363).
(cont'd)
BACK 5~21'
Engine Assembly
61. Install the bulkhead cover (see page 20-203).
62. Install the service caps on the cowl cover.
63. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and

cable terminals, then assemble them and apply
grease to prevent corrosion.
64. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that
the AfT gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch.
65. Check for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)
(do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump runs
for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line.
Repeat this operation two or three times, then
check for fuelleak~ at any point in the fuel line.
66. Refill the engine with engine oil (see step 4 on page
8-6).
67. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-266).
68. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed

air from the cooling system with the heater valve
open (see step 10 on page 10-7).
69. Install the return hose to the power steering fluid

reservoir. Refill the power steering system fluid
(see page 17-13).
70. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP

pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
71. Inspectthe idle speed (see page 11-310).
72. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-20).

(see page 17-28).
74. Do the headlight intial position learning procedure

(see page 22-231).
76. Set the clock.
BACK
Engine Mount Replacement
10x 1.25mm 12 x 1.25 mm

38N·m 74N·m
(3.9 kgf·m, 28 Ibf·ft) (7.5 kgf.m, 54 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
10x 1.25 mm
54N·m
Replace.
10x 1.25mm
38N·m
Replace.
12x1.25mm
54N·m
12x 1.25mm
74N·m
(7.5 kgf.m, 54Ibf·ft) 10x 1.25mm
Replace. 42N·m
(4.3 kgf·m, 31 Ibf·ft) 10x 1.25 mm
Replace. 42N·m
10x1.25mm
10x 1.25mm 38N·m
38N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
10x 1.25 mm 10x 1.25mm

54 N·m FRONT MOUNT 54N·m
(5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ft) (5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ft)
Replace. Replace.
BACK 5-23
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Cylinder Head
Special Tools .................................................................. 6-2
Component Location Index ......................................... 6-3
Engine Compression Inspection ................................. 6-6
VTEC Rocker Arm Test ................................................. 6-7
Valve Clearance Adjustment ....................................... 6-8
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation .............. 6-11
Timing Belt Inspection ................................................. 6-13
Timing Belt Removal .................................................... 6-13
Timing Belt Installation ................................................ 6-16
Timing Belt Replacement ............................................ 6-20
Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement ............................. 6-24
Timing Belt Drive Pulley Replacement ....................... 6-25
Cylinder Head Cover Removal .................................... 6-26
Cylinder Head Cover Installation ................................ 6-27
Cylinder Head Removal ............................................... 6-29
Camshaft Replacement ................................................ 6-32
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage ...................... 6-34
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal ................................. 6-34
Rocker Arm and Shaft
Disassembly/Reassembly ........................................ 6-35
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection ............................... 6-36
Camshaft Inspection .................................................... 6-38
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal ..................... 6-41
Valve Inspection ........................................................... 6-42
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection ............... 6-42
Valve Guide Replacement ........................................... 6-43
Valve Seat Reconditioning .......................................... 6-45
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation ................. 6-47
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Camshaft Seal,
and Pulley Installation .............................................. 6-48
Cylinder Head Installation ........................................... 6-49
Camshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car ........................ 6-54
Sealing Bolt Installation ............................................... 6-54
BACK
Cylinder Head
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Descrip'tion Qtv

CD 07 AAJ-PNAA 101 AirPresslire Regulator 1
® 07HAH-PJ7A100 Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 1
® 07JAA-001020A Socket, 19 mm 1
CD 07 JAB-001 020A Holder Handle 1
@ 07 MAB-PY30 1OA Holder Attachment, 50 mm, Offset 1
® 07 PAD-OO 10000 Stem Seal Driver 1
(j) 07 PAF-0030 100 Camshaft Oil Seal Driver 1
® 07VAJ-P8A010A VTEC Air Adapter 1
I ®
@
®
070AJ-0030100
07742-0010100
07757-PJ1010A .,
VTEC Air Stopper
Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 rnm
ValveSpi-ing Compressor Attachment
1
1
1
d CD ®
I) B ~.
®
/ CD
r @
®
e (j)
p
® ®
/ @
6-2 BACK
RUBBER SEALS
REAR UPPER COVER / SIDE ENGINE MOUNT

BRACKET
PULLEY BOLT
Replacement,
page 6-11
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
Replacement,
page 6-11
RUBBER SEALS
TIMING BELT ADJUSTER TIMING BELT

Replacement, DRIVE PULLEY
page 6-24 Replacement,
page 6-25
TIMING BELT
Removal, page 6-13
Installation, page 6-16
TIMING BELT
GUIDE PLATE
Installation, step 10 on page 6-18
(cant'd)
BACK 6-3
Cylinder Head
Component Location Index (cont'd)
CYLINDER HEAD COVERS

Removal, page 6-26
CVUN~BOlTS
"jAD COVER GASKET
HEAD COVER
GASKET
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
DOWEL PINS
OIL CONTROL ORIFICES
6-4 BACK
VALVE COTTERS ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY
VTEC Rocker Arm Test,
SPRING RETAINER / page 6 - 7 ·
SPRI~
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal,
page 6-34
INTAKE VALVE .
~Qg
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/
Reassembly, page 6-35
--:: Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection,
INTAKEVALVESEAl. ~i . page 6-36
O-RING
VALVES~ ..
~\sl
INTAKE VALVE GUIDE ~
CAMSHAFT
CYLINDER HEAD
Removal, page 6-29
EXHAUST VALVE
Removal, page 6-41
Installation, page 6-47 INTAKE VALVE
Removal, page 6-41
BACK 6-5
Cylinder Head
Engine Compression Inspection
NOTE: After the inspection, you must reset the 11. Open the throttle fully, crank the engine with the
powertrain control module (PCM). Otherwise, the PCM starter motor and measure the compression.
will continue to stop the fuel injectors from functioning.
Compression Pressure:
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm 2, 135 psi)
temperature (cooling fan comes on).
12. Measure the compre$sion on the remaining
2. Turn the ignition switchOFF. cylinders.
3. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the Maximum Variation:

data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi)
. c.
4. Turn the ignition sWitch ON (II). 13. If the compression is not within specifications,
check the following items, then remeasure the
5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle compression.
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-223). • Damaged or worn valves and seats
• Damaged cylinder head gasket
6. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, thEm ALL INJECTORS • Damaged or worn piston rings
OFF function on the HDS. • Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Select PCM reset (see page 11-4) to cancel the ALL
INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS.
8. Remove the six ignition coils (see page 4-21).
9. Remove the six spark plugs.
10. Attach the compression gauge to a spark plug hole.
6-6 BACK
VTEC Rocker ,Arm Test
Special Tools Required 9. Remove the No.1 and No.6 intake rocker shaft
-VTEC air adapter07VAJ-P8A010A . mounting bolts, then install the VTEC air adapter
- VTEC air stopper 070AJ-0030100 and VTEC air stopper, and connect the air pressure
-Air pressure regulator 07AAJ-PNAA101 regulator as shown.
1. Start the engine and let it run for 5 minutes, then FRONT:
turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3).
3. Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-26).
4. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC) (see

5. Push on the intake mid rocker arm (A) for the No.1
cylinder. The mid rocker arm should move
independently of the primary rocker arm (8) and
secondary rocker arm (C).
- If the mid rocker arm moves freely, go to step 6.

- If the intake mid rocker arm does not move,
remove the mid, primary, and secondary intake REAR:
rocker arms as an assembly, then check that the
rocker arm pistons in the mid and primary rocker
arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm needs
replacing, replace the mid, primary, and
secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and
retest.
07AAJ-PNAA101
070AJ-0030100
10. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the

specified air pressure.
c A Specified Air Pressure:

440-540 kPa (4.5-5.5 kgf/cm2, 64-78 psi)
6. Repeat step 5 on the remaining intake mid rocker
arms with each piston at TDC. When all the mid NOTE: If the rocker arm pistons do not move after
rocker arms pass the test, go to step 7. applying air pressure; move the primary or
secondary rocker arm up and down manually.
7. Check that the air pressure on the shop air
compressor gauge indicates over 690 kPa
(7.0 kgf/cm2, 100 psi).
8. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-8).
(cont'd)
BACK 6-7
Cylinder Head
VTEC Rocker Arm Test (cont'd) Valve Clearance Adjustment
11. Make sure that the intake primary rocker arm (A) NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head
and intake secondary rocker arm (B) are temperature is less than 100 "F (38 "C).
mechanically connected by the piston and that the
mid rocker arm (e) does not move when pushed 1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3).
manually. If any intake mid rocker arm moves
independently of the primary and secondary rocker 2. Remove the cylinder head covers (see page 6-26).
arms, replace the rocker arms as a set.
3. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center (TDe).
Align the pointer (A) on the front upper cover with
the No.1 piston TDe mark (B) on the front camshaft
pulley.
12. Remove the special tools.
13. Tighten the rocker shaft bolts to 24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m,

17 Ibf·ft)
14. Install the cylinder head covers (see page 6-27).
15. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-5).
6-8 BACK
4. Select the correct thickness feeler .gauge for the 5. Insert the feeler 9aoge (A) between the adjusting
valves you're going to check. screw and the end of the valve stem on No.1
cylinder and slide it back and forth; you should feel
Valve Clearance a slight amount of drag.
Intake: 0.20-0.24 mm (0.008-0.009 in.)
Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
REAR:
EXHAUST
No.1 No.2 No.3
6. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the

No.1 No.2 No.3 locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (8) until
the drag on the feeler gauge is correct.
INTAKE
FRONT:
No.4 No.5 No.6
No.4 No.5 No.6 A

7xO.75mm
EXHAUST 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 Ibf·ttl
7. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance.

Repeat the adjustment, if necessary.
(cont'd)
BACK 6-9
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
8. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer 12. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer
(A) on the front upper cover with the No.4 piston (A) on the front upper cover witMhe No.5 piston
TOC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. TOC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
B B ,
9. Check and, if necessary, adjustthe valve clearance 13. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on No.4 cylinder. on No.5 cylinder.
10. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer 14. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer
(A) on the front upper cover with the No.2 piston (A) on the front upper cover with the No.3 piston
TOC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. TOC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley.
B. B
11. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance 15. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance
on No.2 cylinder. on No.3 cylinder.
6-10 BACK
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and,
Installation
16. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the pointer
(A) on the front upper cover with the No.6 piston
TDC mark (B) on the front camshaft pulley. Special Tools Required
• Holder handle 07JAB-001020A
B • Holder attachment, 50 mm, offset 07MAB-PY3010A
• Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A, or a commercially
available 19 mm socket
Removal
1. Remove the right front wheel.
2. Remove the splash shield.
17. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance

on No.6 cylinder.
18. Install the cylinder head covers (see page 6-27).
4. Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and

holder attachment (B).
B
07MAB-PY3010A
/
A C
07 JAB-001 020A 07JAA·001020A
(or commercially available)
5. Remove the bolt with a heavy duty 19 mm socket
(C) and breaker bar, then remove the crankshaft
pulley.
(cont'd)
BACK 6-·11
Cylinder Head
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation 2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and tighten the bolt.

00 not use an impactwrench.
1. Remove any oil and clean the pulleys (A)~
crankshaft (8), bolt (C), and washer (0). Lubricate -1 Hold the pulley with the holder handle (A) and
with new engine oil as shown. holder attachment (8). Torque the bolt to 65 N·
m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ft) with a torque wrench
X: Remove any oil and heavy duty 19 mm socket (C).
Q:Clean
. : Lubricate with new engine oil -2 Mark the bolt head (0) and crankshaft pulley (E)
as shown, then ti.ghten the bolt an additional
A
60 0 (The mark onth~ bolt head lines up with
/ A 'A' the mark on the crankshaft pulley).
~~~_ooooox_l:J :" . ;~
,\0' c :»: :~~ ......
r ----ggg
C
07 JAA-001 020A
(or commercially available)
o
E
4. Install the splash shield.
5. Install the right front wheel.
6-12 BACK
Timing Belt Inspection Timing Belt Removal
1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-33). 1. Turn the crankshaft so its white mark (A) lines up
with the pointer (B).
2. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page
4-35). B
3. Remove the front upper cover.
2. Check that the No.1 piston top dead center (TOC)

mark (A) on the front camshaft pulley and the
----6x1.0mm pointer (B) on the front upper cover are aligned.
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m. 8.7 Ibf·ttl NOTE: If the marks are not aligned, rotate the
crankshaft 360 degrees, and recheck the camshaft
4. Inspect the timing belt for cracks and oil or coolant pulley mark.
contamination. Replace the belt if it is cracked. or is
contaminated with oil or coolant. Wipe off any oil
or solvent that gets on the belt.
A
(cont'd)
BACK 6-13
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Removal (cont'd)
3. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-33). 8. Raise the vehicle on the lift, then remove the right
front wheel.
4. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page
4-35). 9. Remove the splash shield.
5. For ease of removing the side engine mount,

support the engine with a jack and wood block
'under the oil pan.
6. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the

upper half of the side engine mount bracket (8).
10. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-11).
11. Remove the lower cover.
7. Remove the front upper cover (A) and rear upper

cover (8).
6-14 BACK
12. Remove one of the battery clamp bolts from the 15. Remove the lower half of the side engine mount
battery tray, and grind the end of it as shown. bracket.
13. Thread the battery clamp bolt in as shown to hold

the timing belt adjuster in its current position.
Tighten it by hand; do not use a wrench. 16. Remove the idler pulley bolt (A) and idler pulley (8),
then remove the timing belt. Discard the idler
pulley bolt.
14. Remove the timing belt guide plate (A).
BACK 6-15
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation
NOTE: The following is the installation procedure for a 3. Set the camshaft pulleys to TOC by aligning the
used belt. If you are installing a new belt, refer to the TOC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the
timing belt replacement procedure (see page 6-20). pointers (8) on the back covers.
1. Clean the timing belt pulleys, timing belt guide FRONT:

plate, and the upper and lower covers.
2. Set the timing belt drive pulley to top dead center

(TOC) by aligning the TOC mark (A) on the tooth of
the timing belt drive pulley with the pointer (8) on
the oil pump.
REAR:
A
6-16 BACK
4. Loosely install the idler pulley with a new idler 8. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover.
pulley bolt so the pulley can move but does not
come off.
5. If the auto-tensioner has extended and the timing

belt cannot be installed, do the timing belt
replacement procedure (see page 6-20).
6. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise

sequence starting with the drive pulley. Take care
not to damage the timing belt when installing it.
-1 Drive pulley (A)

-2 Idler pulley (8)
-a Front camshaft pulley (e)
-4 Water pump pulley (D)
-6 Rear camshaft pulley (E) 9. Install the lower half ofthe side engine mount
-6 Adjusting pulley (F) bracket.
-----
6x 1.0 mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ftl
~
E
c
F
7. Tighten the idler pulley bolt.

-::;..----10 x 1.25 mm
45N·m
(4.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibf·ftl
10x 1.25mm
45N·m
(cont'd)
BACK 6-17
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Installation (cont'd)
10. Install the timing belt guide plate as shown. 12. Install the front upper cover (A) and rear upper
cover (B).
11. Install the lower cover.
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
13. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12).
14. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns

clockwise so the timing belt positions itself on the
pulleys.
15. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A)

lines up with the pointer (B).
/~
6x1.0mm
12N·m A
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf.ft)
6-18 BACK
16. Check the camshaft pulley marks. 17. Install the upper half of the side engine mount
bracket, and tighten the new mounting bolts (A),
NOTE: If the marks are not aligned, rotate the then tighten the mass damper mounting bolt (B).
pulley mark. A
10x1.25mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
• If the camshaft pulley marks are at TOC, go to
step 17 . Re.~
• Ifthe camshaft pulley marks are not at TOC,
remove the timing belt and repeat steps 2
through 16. B
12x 1.25 mm
54N·m
FRONT:
\40
(5.5 ... ~"f").
"'"/ift",,)
6x1.0mm
12N·m
(1.2kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
C
18. Install the ground cable (C).
19. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).

REAR:

BACK
t'-" ,
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Replacement
NOTE: The following procedure is for the installation of 4. Set the camshaft pulleys to TOC by aligning the
a new timing belt. If you are installing a used belt, refer TOC marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the
to the timing belt installation procedure (see page 6-16). pointers (8) on the back covers.
1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-13). FRONT:
2. Clean the timing belt pulleys, timing belt guide


the oil pump.
REAR:
5. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover.
6. Remove the auto-tensioner.
6-20 BACK
7. Align the holes on· the rod and housing of the 10. Thread the battery clamp bolt in as shown to hold
auto-tensioner. the timing belt adjuster. Tighten it by hand; do not
use a wrench.
8. Use a hydraulic press to slowly compress the auto-

tensioner. Insert a 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) pin through the
housing and the rod.' . 11. Loosely install the idler pulley with a new idler
pulley bolt so the pulley can move but does not
NOTE: The compression pressure should not come off.
exceed 9,800 N (1,000kgf, 2,200 Ibf).
12. Install the timing belt in a counterclockwise
9. Install the auto-tensioner. sequence starting with the drive pulley.
NOTE: Make sure the pin stays in place. -1 Drive pulley (A)
-.2 Idler pulley (B)
-a Front camshaft pulley (C)
-4 Water pump pulley (D)
-5 Rear camshaft pulley (E)
6x1.0mm -6 Adjusting pulley (F)
12N·m
11.2 kgf.m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
\ E
(cont'd)
BACK 6-21
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Replacement (cont'd)
13. Tighten the idler pulley bolt. 16. Install the lowerhalf ofthe1side engine mount
bracket.
6x1.0mm
.12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
~ ------
10x1.25mm
45N·m
(4.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibf·ft)
14. Remove the pin from the auto-tensioner.

~10x1.25mm
45N·m
17. Install the timing belt guide plate as shown.
~~~
/~.
~
15. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover.
6-22 BACK
18. Install the lower cover. 22. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its white mark (A)
lines up with the pointer (8).
~~ 23. Check the camshaft pulley marks.

6x 1.0 mm
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl NOTE: If the marks are not aligned, rotate the
19. Install the front upper cover (A) and rear upper pulley mark.
cover (8).
• If the camshaft pulley marks are at TOC, go to
step 24 .
• Ifthe camshaft pulley marks are not at TOC,
remove the timing belt and repeat steps 3
through 22.
FRONT:
6x1.0mm
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ftl
20. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12). REAR:
21. Rotate the crankshaft pulley about five or six turns

clockwise so the timing belt positions itself on the
pulleys.
(cont'd)
BACK 6-23
Cylinder Head
Timing Belt Replacement (cont'd) Timing Belt Adjuster Replacement
24. Install the upper half ofthe side engine mount 1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-13).
bracket, and tighten the new mounting bolts (A),
then tighten the mass damper mounting bolt (8). 2. Remove the battery clamp bolt from the back cover.
A 3. Remove the auto-tensioner.

10xi.25mm
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·tt)
R.P~, 4. Remove the bolt (A), then remove the timing belt
adjuster (8) and collar (e).
B
12x 1.25mm
54N·m
'5.5 k",\40 'bf.tt/,,),____.1/.•0
6x1.0mm
12N·m
11.2kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·tt)
5. Replace the timing belt auto-tensioner and timing

25. Install the ground cable (e). belt (see page 6-20).
26. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-35).
30. Do the crankshaft position (eKP) pattern clear/eKP

6-24 BACK
Timing Belt Drive Pulley Replacement
1. Remove the timing belt (see page.6~13). "
2. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor

(see page 11-242).
3. Remove the timing belt drive pulley (A) and key (B).
4. Inspect the timing belt drive pulley and key for

damage. If it is cracked or damaged, replace the
timing belt drive pulley.
5. Install the new timing belt drive pulley.
6. Install the CKP sensor (see page 11-242).
7. Install the timing belt (see page 6-16).
8. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn

procedure (see page 11-4).
BACK 6-25
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Cover Removal
1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3). 6. Remove the power steering hose bracket mounting
bolt (A), the harness holder mounting bolts (B), and
2. Remove the six ignition coils (see page 4-21). the engine ground cable bolt (e).
3. Remove the dipstick.
4. Remove the two bolts (A) securing the harness

holder, and disconnect the front air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor connector (B), front secondary heated
oxygen sensor (secondary H02S) connector (e),
exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector (D)
and engine coolant temperature (EeT) sensor 1
connector (E).
D
7. Remove the engine ground cable (D) and breather

hose (E).
c
5. Disconnect the three injector connectors from the
injectors on the rear side cylinder head.
BACK
Cylinder Head Cover Installation
8. Remove the cylinder head cover. 1. Check the spark plug seals and head cover' gasket
for damage and deterioration. If any seal or gasket
FRONT: is damaged, replace it.
2. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket and the

groove ofthe cylinder cover.
3. Install the head cover gasket (A) in the groove of

the cylinder head cover (8). Make sure the head
cover gasket is seated securely.
REAR:
4. Clean the head cover contacting surfaces with a

shop toweL
(cont'd)
BACK
Cylinder Head
Cylinder ,Head Cover Installation ,(cont'd)
5. Set the spark plug seals (A) on the spark plug tubes, 7. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final
and install the cylinder head cover (B). step tighten all bolts, in sequence, 12N·m (1.2 kgf.m,
8.7 Ibf.ft).
FRONT:
® ®
8. Tighten the harness holdermounting bolts (A) and

the power steering hose bracket mounting bolt (B).
REAR: A
6x1.0mm
, _____ c
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
11.2kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
6. Inspect the cover washers (C). Replace any washer
that is damaged or deteriorated. 9. Install the engine ground cable (C) and breather
hose (0).
6-28 BACK
Cylinder Head Removal
10. Connectthe three injector connectors. NOTE:

• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
11. Tighten the two bolts (A) securing the harness surfaces.
holder, and connect the engine coolant • To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors
temperature (ECT) sensor 1 connector (B), exhaust carefully while holding the connector portion.
gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector (C), front • To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the
secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary H02S) engine coolant temperature drops belQw 100."F
connector (D) and front air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (38 OC) before loosening the cylinder head bolts.
connector (E). • Mark all wiring and hoses to· avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
c B hoses, or interfere with other parts.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the

A 3. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

6x1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibf·ft) 4. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
E/r D
6. Remove the power steering (PIS) pump (A), and PIS

12. Install the dipstick. hose clamp (B).
13. Install the six ignition coils (see page 4~21).
(cont'd)
BACK 6-29
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal.(cont'd)
7. Remove the alternator (see page 4-36). 13. Remove the two nuts securing the purge joint.
8. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-13).
10. Remove the six ignition coils (see page 4-21).
11. Remove the upper radiator hose (A) and lower

radiator hose (B).
14. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and

wire harness clamps from the cylinder head.
• Six injector connectors

• Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1
connector
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector
• Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector
• Rocker arm oil control solenoid connector
• Rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
• Oil pressure switch connector
• Two air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connectors
12. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then • Two secondary heated oxygen sensor
disconnect the fuel feed hose (B) (see page 11-338). (secondary H02S) connectors
15. Remove the front warm up three way catalytic

converter (front WU-lWC) (see page 11-370) and
rear warm up three way catalytic converter (rear
WU-lWC) (see page 11-371).
6-30 BACK
16. Remove the connector bracketfrom the front 20. Remove the front and rear camshaft pulleys (A) and
cylinder head. back covers (8).
21. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-26).
22. Remove the. cylinder head bolts. To prevent

17. Remove the bracketfrom the rear cylinder head. warpage, loosen the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a
time; repeat the sequence until all the bolts are
loosened.
18. Remove the fuel rails (see page 11-312).
19. Remove the water passage (see page 10-9).. 23. Remove the cylinder head.
BACK 6~31
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Replacement
Front 10. Remove the thrust cover (A), then remove the
camshaft (8).

3. Remove the battery and battery box.
4. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
5. Remove the upper radiator hose.
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m, 16lbf·ft}
11. Install the camshaft in the reverse order of removal.

Always use a new O-ring (C). Apply new engine oil
to the journals and cam lobes.
12. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft

pulley mounting bolt, then install the front
camshaft pulley (see step 11 on page 6-49).
13. Install the rocker arm assembly; then tighten the

mounting bolts (see step 8 on page 6-48).
6. Remove the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve 15. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-8).
(see page 11-388).
16. Install the upper radiator hose.
17. Install the battery and battery box. Clean the
8. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-34). battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper,
then assemble them and apply grease to prevent
9. Remove the front camshaft pulley. corrosion.
18. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the
air out from the system (see step 10 on page 10-7).


(see page 17-28).
22. Set the clock.
6-32 BACK
Rear 7. Remove the thrust cover (A), then remove the
camshaft (8).
1. Remove the intake ma nifold (see page 9-3).
2. Remove the two nuts securing the purge joint.
8x 1.25mm
22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
8. Install the camshaft in the reverse order of removal.

Always use a new O-ring (e). Apply new engine oil
3. Remove the brake lines from the master cylinder to the journals and cam lobes.
(see page 19-18).
4. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-13). pulley mounting bolt, then install the rear camshaft
pulley (see step 11 on page 6-49).
5. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-34).
10. Install the rocker arm assembly, then tighten the
6. Remove the rear camshaft pulley. mounting bolts (see step 8 on page 6-48).
12. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-8).
13. Install the brake lines (see page 19-18) and do the
brake system bleeding procedure (see page 19-9).
14. Do the eKP pattern clear/eKP pattern learn

BACK 6-33
....,.
"
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Inspection for Rocker Arm Assembly Removal

Warpage
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-29). 2. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-26).
2. Inspect the camshaft (see page 6-38). 3. Loosen the locknuts and adjusting screws (A).
A
3. Check the cylinder head for warpage. Measure
along the edges, and three ways across the center.
• If warpageis',less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.),

cylinder h.ead resurfacing is not required.
• If warpage is between 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) and
0.2 mm (0.008 in.);resurface the cylinder head.
• Maximum resurface limit is 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
based on a height of 121 mm (4.76 in.).
Cylinder Head Height

Standard (New): 120.95-121.05 mm
(4.7618-4.7657 in.)
4. Remove the bolts and the rocker arm assembly.
-1 Loosen the rocker shaft mounting bolts two

turns at a time, to prevent damaging the valves
or rocker arm assembly.
-2 When removing the rocker arm assembly, do
not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts.
The bolts will keep the springs and the rocker
arms on the shafts.
® CD ® @ ®
® @ ®
6-34 BACK
Rocker Arm and Shaft DisassemblyIReassembly
NOTE:
• Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original locations.
• Inspect the rocker shafts and rocker arms (see page 6-36).
• If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in their original locations.
• When removing or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the rocker shaft mounting bolts. The bolts will
keep the springs and rocker arms on the shaft.
• Bundle the intake rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set.
• Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them and apply new engine oil to any contact points.
• When replacing the intake rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware from the new intake rocker arm
assembly.
INTAKE ROCKER SHAFT
INTAKE ROCKER
ARM ASSEMBLY
e e
[Q] 0 0 [Q] [Q]
e
0 0
e
[Q] [Q] 0 0 [Q]
e
/
e
rwM
B
SPRING
1 A
EXHAUST ROCKER [Q]o o [Q] 0 o [Q] 0

EXHAUST ROCKER
ARMB ARM A
\~ \
EXHAUST ROCKER SHAFT
Letter B is stamped Letter A is stamped

on rocker arm. on rocker arm.
BACK 6-35
Cyl,inder Head
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection
1. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-34). 5. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and
check it for an out-of-round condition.
2. Disassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
6-35). Intake Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance
3. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker (0.0010-0.0026 in.)
location. Service Limit: 0.067 mm (0.0026 in.)'
Exhaust Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance

(0.0010-0.0030 in.)
4. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.
Inspect rocker arm

face for wear.
6. Repeat for all rockers and both shafts. If the

clearance is beyond the service limit, replace the
rocker shaft and all rocker arms that are beyond the
service limit. If any intake rocker arm needs
replacement, replace all three rocker arms in that
set (primary, mid, and secondary).
6-36 BACK
VTEC Rocker Arms
7. Inspect the rocker arm synchronizing pistons (A).

Push them manually. If they do not move smoothly,
replace the rocker arm set.
NOTE:
• Apply new engine oil to the pistons when
reassembling .
• When reassembling the primary rocker arm (8),
carefully apply air pressure to the oil passage of
the rocker arm.
8. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page

6-35).
9. Install the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-48).
BACK 6-37
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-29). 4. Seat the camshaft by pushing it toward the rear of
the cylinder head.
2. Remove the rocker arms (see page 6-34).
5. Zero.the dial indicator against the end of the
3. Put the rocker shafts on the cylinder head, then camshaft. Push the camshaft back and forth and
tighten the bolts to the specified torque. read the end play. If the end play is beyond the
service limit, replace the thrust cover and recheck.
NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the threads and If it is still beyond the service limit, replace the
flange of the exhaust rocker shaft mounting bolts. camshaft.
Specified Torque Camshaft End Play.

8 x 1.25 mm: 24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 17Ibf·ft) Standard (New): 0.05-0.20 mm
(0.002-0.008 in.)
6. Remove the camshaft thrust cover (A), then pull out

the camshaft (8).
6-38 BACK
7. Wipe the camshaft clean, then inspect the lift 10. Clean the camshaft bearing sIJrfaces in the cylinder
ramps. Replace the camshaft if any lobes are pitted, head. Measure the inside diameter of each
scored, or excessively worn. camshaft bearing surface, and check for an out-of-
round condition.
8. Measure the diameter of each camshaft journal.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within the
service limit, go to step 12. .
• If the camshaft-to;holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 11.
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance

(0.0020-0.0035 in.)
9. Zero the gauge to the journal diameter.
(cont'd)
BACK 6-39
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
11. Check the total runout with the camshaft supported 12. Measure the cam lobe height.
on V-blocks.
Cam L0 be Helgl
. ht Stan d ard (New:
• If the total runout of the camshaft is within the INTAKE EXHAUST
service limit, replace the cylinder head. PRI 35.112 mm 36.389 mm
• Ifthe total runout is beyond the serVice limit, (1.3824 in.) (1.4326 in.)
replace the camshaft and recheck the oil MID 36.394 mm
clearance. Ifthe oil clearance is still out of (1.4328 in.)
tolerance, replace the cylinder head. SEC 35.112 mm
(1.3824 in.)
Camshaft Total Runout PRI: Primary MID: Mid SEC: Secondary
Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. IN: Intake EX: Exhaust T/B: Timing Belt
SEC MID PRI
FRONT BANK
EX IN EX
+-T/B
PRI MID SEC
REAR BANK
EX IN EX
+-T/B
6-40 BACK
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal
Special Tools Required 5. Install the valve guide seal remover (A).
Valve spring compressor attachment
07757-PJ1010A
Identify the valves and valve springs as they are

removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-29).
2. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic

mallet (B), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen
the valve cotters.
6. Remove the valve seal.
3. Install the valve spring compressor attachment and

valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and
remove the valve cotters.
7. Remove the valve spring seat and valve.
4. Remove the valve spring compressor, valve spring

compressor attachment, spring.retainer, and.spring.
BACK 6-41
Cylinder Head
Valve Inspection Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

Inspection
1. Remove the valves (see page 6-41).
2. Measure the valve in these areas. 1. Remove the valves (see page 6-41).
Intake Valve Dimensions 2. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 mm
A Standard (New): 35.90-36.10 mm (0.39.in.), then measure the guide-to-stem
(1.413-1.421 in.) clearance with a dial indicator while rocking the
B Standard (New): 116.55-117.15 mm stem in the direction of normal thrust (wobble
(4.589-4.612 in.) method).
C Standard (New): 5.485-5.495 mm
(0.2159-0.2163 in.) • If the measurement exceeds the service limit,
C Service Limit: 5.455 mm (0.2148 in.) recheck it using a new valve.
• If the measurement is now within the service
Exhaust Valve Dimensions limit, reassemble using a new valve.
A Standard (New): 29.90-30.10 mm • If the measurement with a new valve still
(1.177-1.185 in.) exceeds the service limit, go to step 3.
B Standard (New): 113.90-114.50 mm
(4.484-4.508 in.) Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
C Standard (New): 5.450-5.460 mm Standard (New): 0.04-0.09 mm
(0.2146"'-0.2150 in.) (0.002-0.004 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.420 mm (0.2134 in.) Service Limit: 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

......1 - - - - - - - B - - - - - - . . . ,...1 (0.004-0.006 in.)
C
t
A
I\'------'---'+_ _ -,..,-,l
U
+
If t
3. Subtract the valve stem 0.0. (measured with a

micrometer) from the valve guide 1.0. (me'asured
with an inside micrometer or ball gauge).
Take the measurements in three places along the
valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
should not exceed the service limit.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

(0.0008-0.0018 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide .Clearance

(0.0022-0.0031 in.)
6-42 BACK
Valve Guide Replacement
Special Tools Required 5. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and
• Valve guide driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100 an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm
• Valve guide reamer, 5.5 mm 07HAH-PJ7A100 (0.1 in.) towards the combustion chamber. This will
knock off some of the carbon and make removal
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page easier. "fold the air hammer directly in line with the
6-42). valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Wear
safety goggles or a face shield.
2. As illustrated, use.a commercially available ~ir
impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the 6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out toward
diameter ofthe valve g~ides. In most cases, the the camshaft side of the head.
same procedure can be done using the special tool
and a conventional hammer.
I
I A 5.3mm
(0.21 in.' t
['L-I ~nD I~
1- i'i~o;:.jl~ r;.m.JI ! 10.Smm
(0.42 in.'
3. Selectthe proper replacement guides, and chill

them in the freezer section ofa refrigerator for
about an hour.
4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder

head to 300 Of (150 "C). Monitor the temperature
with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head
hotter than 300 Of (150 "C); excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
7. If a valve guide still won't move, drill it out with a

8 mm (5/16 in.) bit, then try again.
NOTE: Drill guides only in extreme cases; you

could damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks.
8. Take out the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a

time, as you need them.
(cont'd)
BACK 6-43
Cylinder Head
Valve Guide Replacement (cont'd)
9. Apply a thin coat of new engine oil to the outside of 10. Coat both the reamer and the valve guide with
the new valve guide. Install the guide from the cutting oil.
camshaft side ofthe head; use the valve guide
driver to drive the guide to the specified installed 11. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the
height(A) of the guide (B) •.lf you have all 12 guides valve guide bore.
to do, you may have to reheat the head.
Valve Guide Installed Height

Intake: 21.20-22.20 mm (0.835-0.874 in.)
Exhaust: 20.60-21.60 mm (0.811-0;850 in.)
12. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while

drawing it from the bore.
13. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water

to remove any cutting residue.
14. Check the clearance with a valve (see page 6-42).

Verify that a valve slides in the intake and exhaust
valve guides without being stuck.
6-44 BACK
Valve Seat Reconditioning
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page 5. Make one more very light pass with the 45 ° cutter
6-42). If the valve guides are worn, replace them to remove any possible burrs caused by the other
(see page 6-43) before cutting the valve seats. cutters.
2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a Valve Seat Width
valve seat cutter. Standard (New): 1.25~1.55 mm (0.049-0.061 in.)
6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect it for even valve

seating. Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the
seat several times.
3. Carefully cut a 45 ° seat, removing only enough A

material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.
4. Bevel the upper edge of the seat with the 30 ° cutter

and the lower edge of the seat with the 67.5 ° cutter
(intake seat) or the 60 ° cutter (exhaust seat). Check 7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by
the width of the seat and adjust accordingly. the blue compound, should be centered on the seat.
• If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you

must make a second cut with the 67.5 °cutter
(intake seat) or the 60 ° cutter (exhaust seat) to
move it down, then one more cut with the 45 °
cutter to restore seat width .
67.5 0 (intake seat) • If it is too low (closer to the valve edge), you must
60 0 (exhaust seat) make a second cut with the 30 ° cutter to move it
up, then one more cut with the 45 ° cutter to
restore seat width.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made with

the 45 ° cutter.
(cont'd)
BACK
Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning (cont'd)
8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head,

and measure the valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height

(1.841-1.872 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height

(1.838-1.869 in.)
Service Limit: 47.73 mm (1~879 in.)
9. If the valve stem installed height is beyond the

service limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is
still beyond the service limit, replace the cylinder
head; the valve seat in the head is too deep.
6.. 46 BACK
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation
Special Tools Required 5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the
• Stem seal driver 07 PAD-OO 10000 end of the valve spring with closely wound coils
• Valve spring compressor attachment toward the cylinder head.
07757-PJ1010A
6. Install the valve spring compressor attachment and
1. Coat the valve stems with new engine oil. Install valve spring compressor. Compress the spring and
the valves in the valve guides. install the valve cotters.
2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly.
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the stem seal
driver (8).
NOTE: Exhaust valve seals (C) have a black spring

(D) and intake valve seals (E) have a white spring
(F); they are not interchangeable.
7. Remove the valve spring compressor and valve

spring compressor attachment.
8. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three

E c times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
seating of the valve and valve cotters. Tap the valve
stem only along its axis so you do not bend the
B stem.
07PAD-0010000
NOTE: Use 5.5 mm side.
BACK 6-47
Cylinder Head
Camshaft, Rocker Arm Assembly, Camshaft Seal, and Pulley Installation
1. Apply a light coat of new engine oil around the 5. Install the solid dowel pins (E) and the hollow
camshaft oil seal. dowel pins (F).
2. Gently tap the new camshaft oil seal (A) into the 6. Loosen the valve adjusting screws.
cylinder head.
7. Ifthe rocker arm assembly is disassembled,
-1 Tap the camshaft oil seal in squarely. reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
-2 Install the oil seal about 0.5 -1.5 mm 6-35).
(0.02-0.06 in.) below the surface of the
cylinder head. 8. Set the rocker arm assembly in place, and loosely
install the bolts. Make sure that the rocker arms are
FRONT: properly positioned on the valve stems.
8x1.2Smm 9. Tighten each bolt two turns at a time in the

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
sequence as shown to ensure that the rockers do
o ~
-----
not bind on the valves.
NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the threads and

c flange ofthe exhaust rocker shaft mounting bolts.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 24 N·m (2.4 kgf.m,17Ibf.ft)
® ® CD ®
REAR:
8x 1.2Smm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf.m, 16Ibf·ft)
~i)m'))IlJO""-
~ '"C
---WIJJ/JU-
® ®
E
10. Install the front injector base and rear injector base.
Always use a neW gasket (see page 9-7).
3. Insert the camshaft (B) into the cylinder head, then

install the camshaft thrust cover (C). Always use a
new O-ring (D).
4. Check that the oil seal lips are not distorted.
6-48 BACK
Cylinder Head Installation
11. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the camshaft 1. Clean the cylinder head and engine block surface.
pulley mounting bolt (A). Install the back cover (8),
then install the camshaft pulley (C). 2. Clean and install the oil control orifices (A) with
new O-rings (8).
8x 1.2Smm
12.2 \61...81
22N·m
~---D
'A 12x 1.2Smm

91 N·m (9.2 kgf·m, 68 Ibf·tt)
3. Install the dowel pins (C) and new cylinder head

gaskets (0).
4. Clean the timing belt pulleys, timing belt guide


the oil pump.
(cont'd)
BACK 6-49
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
6. Set the camshaft pulleys to TDG by aligning the 8. Measure the diameter of each cylinder head bolt at
TDG marks (A) on the camshaft pulleys with the point A and point B.
pointers (B) on the back covers.
B 50 mm 12.0 in.)
FRONT: A 45 mm 11.8 in.)
9. If either diameter is less than 11.3 mm (0.44 in.),

replace the cylinder head bolt.
REAR: 10. Apply new engine oil to the threads and under the
bolt heads of all cylinder head bolts.
11. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in sequence to

30 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 Ibf·ft). Use a beam-type
torque wrench. When using a preset-type torque
wrench, be sure to tighten slowly and do not
overtighten. If a bolt makes any noise while you are
torquing it, loosen the bolt and retighten it from the
first step.
7. Putthe cylinder head onto the engine block.
6-50 BACK
12. After torquing, tighten all cylinder head bolts in two 13. Install the timing belt (see page 6-16).
steps (90 0 per step). If you are using a new cylinder
head bolt, tighten the bolt an extra 90 o. 14. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-8).
NOTE: Remove the cylinder head bolt if you 15. Install the cylinder head covers (see page 6-27).
tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go
back to step 8 of the procedure. Do not loosen it 16. Install the water passage (see page 10-9).
back to the specified angle.
17. Install the front warm up three way catalytic
converter (front WU-TWC) (see page 11-370) and
rear warm up three way catalytic converter (rear
WlJ-TWC) (see page 11-371).
18. Install the fuel rails (see page 11-312).
19. Install the connector bracket to the front cylinder

head.
10x1.25mm
45 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·tt)
(cont'd)
BACK 6-51
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
20. Install the bracket to the rear cylinder head. 22; Connect the fuel feed hose (A) (see page 11-340),
then install the quick-connect fitting cover (8).
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m.
8.7Ibf·ft)
8x 1.2Smm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf.m. 16Ibf·ft)
23. Connect the engine wire harness connectors, and
21. Install the purge joint. install the wire harness clamps to the cylinder head.
• Six injector connectors

• Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1
connector
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor connector
• Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve connector
• Rocker arm oil control solenoid connector
• Rocker arm oil pressure switch connector
• Oil pressure switch connector
• Two air fuel ratio (NF) sensor connectors
• Two secondary heated oxygen sensor
(secondary H02S) connectors
6x1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m. 8.7Ibf·ft)
6-52 BACK
24. Install the upper radiator, hose (A) and lower 29. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals then
radiator hose (8). connect them to the battery. Apply grease to the
battery terminals to prevent corrosion.
30. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses and

connectors are. installed correctly.
31. Check for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)
(do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump runs
for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel line.
Repeat this operation two or three times, then
check for fuel leaks at any point in the fuel line.

air from the cooling .system with the heater valve
open (see step 10 on page 10-7).

34. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-310).

26. Install the alternator (see page 4-37).
27. Install the power steering (PIS) pump (A) and PIS (see page 17-28).
hose bracket (8). '
6x1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft) navigation system (if equipped).
38. Set the clock.
8x1.25mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16lbf·ft)
BACK 6-53
,Cylinder Head
Camshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Sealing Bolt Installation

Car
NOTE: When installing the sealing bolt (A), always use
a new washer (B).
Camshaft oil seal driver 07 PAF-0030 100 FRONT:

B
R\"
2. Remove the camshaft pulley and back cover (see
step 20 on page 6-31). :
3. Remove the camshaft oil seaL
4. Dry the camshaft oil seal housing.

~~
5. Apply a light coatof mUltipurpose grease to the lip
of the camshaft oil seal.
6. Using the special tool (A), washer (B), and a 12 x 75

"'A 28x 1.5 mm
80N·m
(!J.O kgf'm, 58 Ibf·ft)
x 1.25 mm bolt (C), press in the camshaft oil seal
(D) about 0.5-1.5 mm (0.02-0.06 in.) below the REAR:
surface of the cylinder head.
A
16x 1.5 mm
40N·m
B
A
07PAF-0030100

pulley mounting bolt. Install the back cover, then
install the camshaft pulley (see step 11 on page
6-49).
6-54 BACK
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
Special Tools ................................................................. 7-2
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play
Inspection .................................................................... 7-6
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-7
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-9
Oil Pan Removal ........................................................... 7-11
Crankshaft and Piston Removal .................................. 7-12
Crankshaft Inspection .................................................. 7-14
Block and Piston Inspection ........................................ 7-15
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement ......... 7-18
Piston Ring Replacement ............................................. 7-21
Crankshaft and Piston Installation .............................. 7-23
Oil Pan Installation ....................................................... 7-28
Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car ... 7-30
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal
Installation - In Car ...................................................... 7-30
Drain Bolt Installation ................................................... 7-31
BACK
Engine Block
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Oty

CD 070AD-RCAA 100 Oil Seal Driver, 64 mm 1
® 070AD-RCAA200 Driver Attachment, 106 mm 1
® 07749-0010000 Driver 1
I
~ CD ® ®
7-2 BACK
. TRANSMISSION END
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
Installation,
step 23 on page 7-26
Installation-in car,
page 7-30
.~\
PULLEY END
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
Installation,
step 2 on page 8-13 \ DRIVE PlA1UOLl
Installation-in car,
page 7-30
WASHER
ROCKER ARM OIL

CONTROL SOLENOID
OIL PUMP FILTER
Overhaul, page 8-10 AfT DRIVE PLATE
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOIDI
OIL FILTER ASSEMBLY
(cont'd)
BACK 7-3
Engine Block
CRANKSHAFT
End Play, page 7-6
/ Runout, page 7-15
Out-of-Round, page 7-14
Removal, page 7-12
MAIN BEARINGS
Oil Clearance, page 7-7
Selection, page 7-8
~~ THRUST WASHERS
- - - OIL JET BOLTS

DOWEL PINS Inspection, page 8-9
~ - - - - - O I L JETS
~~
Do not reuse oil jet,
after removing it.
DRAIN BOLT
DRAIN BOLT
7-4 BACK
, ,'I,:'
',';' ,
~,
~ISTON RINGS '
eplacem,ent. page 7-21
PISTON PIN
Removal
Inspectio'rfage 7-18
Installatio
, • page
n. page7-19
7-20
I,
~N~INE BLOCK
w;"nder Inspe~~i~~ction.
arpageBore I
• pagepage
7-15 7-15
/ J
f""NECTING R
~
CONNECTI
BEARING
Oil Cleara npce. page 7-9
Selection
g; ROD
• age 7-10
nspection. step ?J>onBOLTS

page 7-24
BACK '·5
, ~; .
.:r;
Engine Block
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection
1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-11). 5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial
indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 10 on page 7-12). crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back
toward the indicator; the dial reading should not
3. Measure the connecting 'rod end play with a feeler exceed the service limit.
gauge (A) between the conn~ctin'grod (B) and
crankshaft (e). ' ',' ' Crankshaft End Play
Connecting Rod End Piay , Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
(0.006-0.014 in.)
Service Limit:, O.45~m (0.018 in.)
..
'~
B 6. If the end play is excessive, replace the thrust

washers and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance,
4. If the connecting rod end
:play is,out-of-tolerance, replace th~ crankshaft (see page 7-12).
install a new connecting rod and recheck. If it is still
out-of-tolerance, replace the crankshaft (see page '
7-12).
':' •• j
, .... '
7-6 BACK
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacem~nt
Main Bearing. Clearance Inspection 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half
1. Remove the main bearing caps and bearing halves ofthe bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with
(see page 7-12) .. the same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do
not file, shim, or scrape the bearings· or the caps to
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a adjust clearance. , ,
clean shop towel;
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main incorrect, try the next larger .or smaller bearing (the
journal. color listed above OJ below that one), and check
again.lf the proper clearance cannotbe obtained
NOTE: If the engine is still.in the vehicle when you by using the appropriate larger or smaller be.arings,
bolt the main cap down to·check the clearance, the replace the crankshaft and start over (see page
weight of the crankshaft anc;l drive plate will flatten 7-12).
the plastigage further than just the torque on the
cap bolt and give you an incorrect reading. For an
accurate reading, support the crank with a jack
under the counterweights, and check only one
bearing at a time. '
4. Reinstall the bearings and caps, then torque the

bearing cap bolts to 74 N'm (7.5 kgf.rri, 54Ibf.ftj~'
and the bearing cap side bolts to 49 N·m (5.0 kgf'm,
36 Ibf·ft) in the proper sequence (see step 22 on
page 7~26).·
NOTE:
• Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges .
• Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
5. Remove the cap and bearing half, and measure the

widest part ofthe plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance

(0.0007:-0.0018 ill.)
(cont'd)
BACK 7-7
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement (cont'd)

Main Bearing Selection - - - - - - I... Larger crank bore
Bearing Identification
Crankshaft Bore Code Location Color coda is on the
Letters or bars have been stamped on the end of the edge ofthe bearing
block as a code for the size of each of the fou r ma i n - - - I... Smaller bearing (Thicker)
journal bores.
10rl Red! Pink Pink!
Use them, and the numbers stamped on the crankshaft Pink Yellow Yellow
(codes for main journal size), to choose the correct
bearings~ Ifthe codes are indecipherable because of an 20rll Pink Pink! Yellow Yellow!
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a Yellow Green
wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or
3 or III Pink! Yellow Yellow! Green
detergent. Yellow Green
40rlill Yellow Yellow! Green Green!

Green Brown
Yellow! Green Green! Brown

50rllill Green Brown
60rllllll Green Green! Brown Brown!

Brown Black
NOTE: When using bearing halves
Smaller Smaller of different colors, it does not
main bearing matter which color is used in
jourmil (Thicker) the top or bottom.
Main Journal Code Locations (Numbers or Bars)
No.1 JOURNAL No.4 JOURNAL

(Pulley end) (Transmission end)
7-8 BACK
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement
Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
remove the upper half of the bearing, then install a
1. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half new, complete bearing with the same color code,
(see page 7-12). . and recheck theclearante. Do not file, shim, or
scrape the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
2. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half
with a clean sho.p towel. 7. Ifthe plastigage shows the clearance is still
incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
3. Place a strip of plastigage across the rod journal. color listed above or below that one), and check
clearance again. If the proper clearance cannotbe
4. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and to-rque the obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller
bolts. .. bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over
(see page 7-12).
NOTE:
• Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges. ..
• Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
Tightening Torque: .
20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14Ibf.lt) + 90 0
5. Remove the rod cap and bearing half al'Jd measure

the widest part of the plastigage.
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal:OilClearance

Standard (New): 0.020-0.044 mm ."
(0.0008-0.0017 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK ·7-9
Engine Block
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Rod Bearing Selection

Bearing Identification
Each rod falls into one of four tolerance ranges, from 0 Color code is on the
to 0.024 mm (0.0009 in.), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 in.) edge ofthe bearing
increments, depending on the size of its big end bore. ----1~. Smaller bearing (Thicker)
It's then stamped with a number or bar (1,2,3, or 4/1, II,
III, or 1111) indicating the range. You may find any , Aorl Pink Pink! Yellow Yellow!
Yellow Green
combination of 1, 2, 3, or 4/1, II, III, or 1111 in any engine.
Borll Pink!' Yellow Yellow! Green
Normal Bore Size: 60.0 mm (2.36 in.) . Yellow Green
Cor III Yellow Yellow! Green Green!

Inspectthe connecting rod for cracks and heat damage. Green Brown
Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations Dorllli Yellow! Green Green! Brown
Green Brown
Numbers or bars have been stamped on the side of
each connecting rod as a code for the size of the big end. Green! BrownJ
Eorlllll. Green Brown
Use them, and the letters or bars stamped on the crank Brown Black
(codes for rod journal size) to choose the correct
bearings. If the codes are indecipherable because of an Forllllli Green! Brown BrownJ Black
Brown Black
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a
wire brush or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or NOTE: When using bearing halves
Smaller Smaller of different colors, it does not
detergent. rod bearing matter which color is used in
journal (Thicker) the top or bottom.
Connecting Rod Journal Code Locations

(Letters or Bars)
Half of the number or bar

is stamped on bearing cap
and the other half is
stamped on rod.
No.1 JOURNAL No.6 JOURNAL

(Pulley end) (Transmission end)
7-10 BACK
Oil Pan Removal
1. If the engine is already out of the vehicle, go to 8. Remove the bolts securing the oil pan.
step 6.
9. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the oil pan
2. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height. from the block in the places shown.
3. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-6).
5. Remove exhaust pipe A (see step 36 on page 5-6).
6. Remove the rear warm up three way catalytic

converter (rear WU-TWC) bracket.
10. Remove the oil pan.
7. Remove the torque converter cover (A) and the four

bolts (8) securing the transmission.
BACK 7-11
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
1. Remove the engine assembly (see page 5-2). 10. Remove the oil screen (A), baffle plate (B), and oil
pump (C).
2. Remove the transmission (see page 14-275).
3. Remove the drive plate.
4. Remove the cylinder heads (see page 6-29).

(see page 11-242).
6. Remove the timing belt drive pulley from the

crankshaft.
7. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11).
8. Remove the engine block end cover.
9. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid/oil filter

assembly.
7-12 BACK
11. Remove the connecting rod caps after setting the 12. Remove the bearing from the cap. Keep all caps/
crank pin at bottom dead center (BOC) for each bearings in order.
cylinder. Remove the piston/connecting rod
assembly by pushing on the connecting rod. Take 13. Remove the upper bearing halves from the
care not to damage the crank pin or cylinder with connecting rods, and set them aside with their
the connecting rod. respective caps.
CORRECT 14. After removing a piston/connecting rod assembly,

reinstall the cap on the rod.
15. To avoid mix-up during reassembly, mark each

piston/connecting rod assembly with its cylinder
number.
16. Loosen the bearing cap bolts and bearing cap side
bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time; repeat the
sequence until all bolts are loosened.
INCORRECT
(cont'd)
BACK 7-13
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal Crankshaft Inspection

(cont'd)
Out-of-Round and Taper
17. Remove the bearing cap bolts (A) and bearing cap 1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block
side bolts (8), then remove the bearing cap (C). (see page 7-12).
2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe

cleaners or a suitable brush.
3. Check the keyway and threads.
4. Measure out-of -round at the middle of each rod

and main journal in'two places. The difference
between measurements on each journal must not
be more than the service limit.
Journal Out-of-Round
18. Lift the crankshaft (A) out of the engineblock, being

carefui not to damage the journals.
A
, '
. EB
o
1.+ L
Iff'
19. Reinstall the main caps and bearings on the engine
block in the proper order. 5. Measure taper at the edges of each rod and main
journal. The difference between measurements on
each journal must not be more than the service
limit.
Journal Taper
7-14 BACK
Block and PistonbAlspection
Straightness 1. Remove the piston from 1he engine block (see page
7-12).
6. Place the engine block on the surface plate.
2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks;
7. Clean and install the bearings on the No.1 and
No.4 journal ofthe engine block. 3. Measure the piston diameter at a point 16.0 mm
(0.63 in.) from the bottom of the skirt.
8. Lower the crankshaft into the engine block.
Piston Diameter
9. Measure the runout on all of the main journals. Standard (New): 89.983-89.996 mm
Rotate the crankshaft two complete revolutions. (3.5426-3.5431 iri.)
The difference between measurements on each
journal must not be more than the service limit. SKIRT
~I--------~ DIAMETER
Crankshaft Total Runout

16.0mm
(0.63 in.1
(cont'd)
BACK 7-15
Engine'/ Block
Block and Piston ,Inspection· (,cont'd)
4. Measure wear and taper'in direction Xand Y at.
three levels in each cylinder as shown. 5. Check the top of the engine block for warpage.
Measure along the edges and across the center as.
Cylinder. Bore Size ' '"" shown.
(3;5433-3.5439 in.)· Engine Block Warpage
6 mm (0.2 in.)
l~=;.;~==~~. . '. First Measurement
Second Measurement
--L-%~----<~~Third Measurement
PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE
7-16 BACK
6. Calculate the difference between cylil1der bore
diameter and piston diameter. If the clearance is
near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the piston
and cylinder bore for excessive wear.
Piston-to-Cylinder Bore Clearance

(0.0002-0.0013 in.)
Service Limit: 0.08mm (0.003 in.)
SERVICE LIMIT
0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
BACK 7-17
· :.,
Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement
Disassembly 4. Heat the piston and connecting rod assembly to

about 158 "F (70 "e), then remove the piston pin.
1. Remove the piston from the engine block (see page
7-12).
2. Apply new engine oil to the piston pin snap rings

(A) and turn them in the ring grooves until the end
gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin
bores (B).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.
3. Remove snap rings (A) from both sides of the

piston. Start at the cutout in the piston pin bore.
Remove the snap rings carefully so they do not go
flying or get lost. Wear eye protection.
7~1·8 BACK
Inspection 3. Check the difference between the piston pin
diameter and piston pin hole diameter on the
NOTE: Inspect the piston, piston pin, and connecting piston.
rod when they are at room temperature.
Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. Standard (New): -0.0050 to +0.0010 mm
. ("""',0.00020 to +0.00004 in.)
Piston Pin Diameter Service Limit: ". 0.004 mm (0.0002 in.)
(0.8646-0.8648 in.)
4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.
2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance
(0.0002-0.0006 in.)
Service Limit: . 0.019 mm (0.0007 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK 7-19
Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont'd)
Reassembly 4. Assemble the piston (A) and connecting rod (8)

with the embossed marks (C) on the same side.
1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A) only on one side. Install the piston pin (D).
NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the piston pin.
2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in

the connecting rod, and the piston pin with new
engine oil.
3. Heat the piston to about 158 Of (70 "C).
5. Install the remaining snap ring.
7-20 BACK
Piston Ring Replacement
1. Removethe piston fror:nthe engine block (see page 4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the
7-12). cylinder bore 15~20 mm (0.6-0.8 in.). from the
bottom. ,
2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston
rings (8).
3. Clean all the ring grooves thoroughly with a

squared-off broken ring, or a ring groove cleaner
with a blade to fit the piston grooves. File down the
blade, if necessary. The top ring and second ring 5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (8) with a feeler
grooves are 1.2 mm (0.05 in;) wide, and the oil ring gauge:
groove is 2.8 mm (0.11 in.) wide. Do not use a wire
brush to clean the ringgroQves, or cut the ring • If the gap is too small,check to see if you have
grooves deeper with the cleaning tool. . the proper rings for your engine.
• If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
NOTE: Ifthe piston is to.be separated from the diameter against the wear limits (see step 4 on
connecting rod, do not install new rings yet. page 7-16).
Piston Ring End-Gap
Top Ring:
, .', (0.012-0.016 in.)
Service Limit: .0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
Second Ring:
(0.016-0.022 in.)
Oil Ring:
(0.008-0.028 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK 7-21
:.,,' ',:
Engine, Block
Piston Ring Replacement (cont'd) ",', '.
6. Install the rings as shown. The top ring,(A)hasa 1E 7. After installing a new set ofrings, measure the
mark and the second ring (B) has a 2E mark. 'The ring-to-groove clearance:
manufacturing marks (e) must be facing upward.
Top Ring Clearance
(0.0022-0.0033 in.)
Second Ring Clearance.

Standard (Newr:O.030-0.060 mm
(0~0012-0.0024 in.)
8. Rotate the rings intheir.grooves to make sure they

do not bind.
9. Position the ring end gaps as shown:
About90·
OIL RING GAP SECOND RING GAP
"
....
Piston Ring Dimensions:

Top Ring' (Standard)
A: 3.1 mm (0.12 in.)
,B: 1,2 mm (Q.05. in.)
Second Ring (Standard)
A: 3.4 mm (0.13 in.)
B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in.)
TOP RING GAP and OIL RING GAP

SPACER RING GAP
PISTON PIN
7-22 BACK
Crankshaft and Piston Installation
Special Tools Required 7. Install the bearings (A) and bearing caps (8) with
• Driver 07749-0010000 the arrow (C) facing the timing belt end of the
• Driver attachment, 106 mm 070AD-RCAA200 engine.
1. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with

0
N
0 ...,.
plastigage (see page 7-9).
'"
0 0 0 0
2. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage
(see page 7-7).
3. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and

connecting rods.
Y- . - _._.
4. Apply new engine oil to the inside of the main

bearings and rod bearings.
5. Lower the crankshaft (A) into the engine block.
6. Apply new engine oil to the side with the thrust

washer groove. Install the thrust washers (A) in the
No.3 journal.
E
10x80 mm 10x60mm
8. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and

flanges, then loosely install the bearing cap bolts
(D) and bearing cap side bolts (E).
(cont'd)
BACK 7-23
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
9. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for 15. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt
the cylinder you are installing the piston in. at point A and point B.
10. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the 3Smm
(1.38in.1 A
ring compressor, and the cylinder bore.
11. Attach the ring compressor to the piston/

connecting rod assembly, and check that the
bearing is securely in place.
12. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly with 20mm

(0.79 in.1
the arrow (A) facing the timing belt side of the
engine.
A
16. Calculate the difference in diameter between point

A and point B.
Point A-Point B =Difference in Diameter

13..Position the piston/connecting rod assembly in the Difference in Diameter
cylinder, and tap it in using the wooden handle of a Specification: 0-0.1 mm (0-0.004 in.)
hammer (A). Maintain downward force on the ring
compressor (B) to prevent the rings from 17. Ifthe difference in diameter is out oftolerance,
expanding before entering the cylinder bore. replace the connecting rod bolt.
14. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and

check the connecting rod-to-crank journal
alignment before pushing the piston into place.
7-24 BACK
18. Line up the mark (A) on the connecting rod and cap, 22. Tighten the bearing cap bolts, and then the bearing
then install the cap. cap side bolts to the specified torque in the
sequence as shown. Repeat the torque sequence
again to measure the bolts are properly torqued.
NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and

flanges.
11 x 1.5 mm 10 x 1.25 mm
nN~ ~N~
17.5 kgf·m, 54lbf·ttl 15.0 kgf·m, 36lbf·ttl
~\~~
19. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and

flanges. Torque the bolts (8) to 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m,
14Ibf·ft).
20. Mark the connecting rod (A) and bolt head (8) as
shown.
Ot
21. Tighten the bolt until the mark on the bolt head
lines up with the mark on the connecting rod (turn
the bolt 90 ").
NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you

tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go
back to step 15 of the procedure. Do not loosen it
back to the specified angle.
(cont'd)
BACK 7-25
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation (cont'd)
23. Apply a light coat of multipurpose grease to the 27. Apply liquid gasket, PIN 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
crankshaft and to the lip of the seal. 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine
block mating surface of the engine block end cover.
24. Drive the new crankshaft oil seal until the driver Install the component within 5 minutes of applying
attachment bottoms on the engine block end cover. the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
• If you apply liquid gasket PIN 08718-0012, the
component must be installed within 4 minutes .
• Iftoo much time has passed after applying the
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.
25. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the engine
block end cover mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt
holes.
26. Clean and dry the engine block end cover mating
surfaces.
Apply liquid gasket
along the broken line.
28. Install the dowel pins (A), new O-ring (8), and the
engine block end cover (C) on the engine block.
29. Clean the excess grease off the crankshaft, and

check the seal for distortion.
7-26 BACK
30. Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the oil pump (see 34. Grease the lip of the oil seal, and apply oil to the
step 2 on page 8-13). new a-ring (A).
31. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil 6x1.0mm 6x1.0mm
pump mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
32. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces.

) f /E,,/m.8.71bf.
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ftl 12 N·m
ftl
33. Apply liquid gasket, PIN 08717-0004,08718-0001,

08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine
F-----...~ 0 -0 / "
block mating surface ofthe oil pump. Install the

component within 5 minutes of applying the liquid
. gasket.
NOTE:
component must be installed within 4 minutes .
• If too much time has passed after applying the
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.
35. Install the dowel pins (8), then align the inner rotor
with the crankshaft, and install the oil pump (C).

check the seal for distortion.
37. Install the baffle plate (0), then install the oil screen
(E) with new a-ring (F).
38. Install the rocker arm oil control solenoid/oil filter

assembly (A), with a new rocker arm oil control
solenoid filter (8).
(cont'd)
BACK 7-27
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Installation Oil Pan Installation

(cont'd)
1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil pan
mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
39. Install the oil pan (see page 7-28).
2. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces.
40. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
(see page 11-242). 3. Apply liquid gasket, PIN 08717-0004,08718-0001,
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the oil pan
41. Install the cylinder heads (see page 6-49). mating surface ofthe engine block. Install the
42. Install the drive plate. gasket.
43. Install the transmission (see page 14-287). NOTE:

44. Install the engine assembly (see page 5-12). component must be installed within 4 minutes .
NOTE: When any crankshaft or connecting rod liquid gasket,. remove the old liquid gasket and
bearing is replaced, after assembly it is necessary residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.
to run the engine at idling speed until it reaches
normal operating temperature, then continue to
run it for about 15 minutes.
Apply liquid gasket

along the broken line.
4. Install the oil pan on the engine block.
7-28 BACK
5. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final 7. Install the rear warm up three way catalytic
step, tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N·m converter (rear WU-lWC) bracket.
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft).
8x1.25mm
22N·m
NOTE: After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes (2.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·ft)
before filling the engine with oil.
® ® Q) ® (j) ®
6. Tighten the four bolts (A) securing the transmission,

then install the torque converter cover (8). 8. If the engine is still in the vehicle, do the following
steps.
A
12x 1.25 mm
74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54Ibf·ft) 9. Install exhaust pipe A using new gaskets and new
self-locking nuts (see step 31 on page 5-17).
10. Install the splash shield (see step 33 on page 5-17).
11. Refill the engine with engine oil (see step 4 on page
8-6).
BACK 7-29
. ..
Engine Block
Pulley End Crankshaft Oil Seal Transmission End Crankshaft Oil
Installation - In Car Seal Installation - In Car
Special Tools Required Special Tools Required

Oil seal driver, 64 mm 070AD-RCAA100 • Driver 07749-0010000
• Driver attachment, 106 mm 070AD-RCAA200
1. Remove the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor,
timing belt, and timing belt drive pulley (see page 1. Remove the transmission (see page 14-275) and
6-25). the drive plate.
2. Remove the pulley end crankshaft oil seal. 2. Remove the transmission end cral")kshaft oil seal.
3. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing. 3. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
4. Apply a light coat of mUltipurpose grease to the 4. Apply a light coat of mUltipurpose grease to the
crankshaft and to the lip of the seal. crankshaft and to the lip of the seal.
5. Using the seal driver, drive in the crankshaft oil seal 5. Using the special tools, drive in the crankshaft oil
until the driver bottoms against the oil pump. When seal until the driver attachment bottoms against the
the seal is in place, clean any excess grease off the engine block end cover. Align the hole in the driver
crankshaft, and check that the oil seal lip is not attachment with the pin on the crankshaft.
distorted.
6. Install the timing belt drive pulley, timing belt, and 070AD-RCAA200
CKP sensor (see page 6-25).
6. Clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and
check that the oil seal lip is not distorted.
7. Install the drive plate, and the transmission

(see page 14-287).
7-30 BACK
Drain Bolt Installation
NOTE: When installing the drain bolt, always use a new

washer.
/
~~~mm
9.8N·m
28x1.0mm
80N·m
BACK 7-31
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools ................................................................. 8-2
Component Location Index .~ ....................................... 8-3
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............................... 8-4
Oil Pressure Switch Test .............................................. 8-5
Oil Pressure Switch Replacement ............................... 8-5
Oil Pressure Test ........................................................... 8-6
Engine Oil Replacement .............................................. 8-6
Engine Oil Filter Replacement ..................................... 8-7
Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement ................................ 8-8
Oil Jet Replacement ..................................................... 8-9
Oil Jet Bolt Inspection .................................................. 8-9
Oil Pump Overhaul ....................................................... 8-10
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty

CD 07HAA-PJ70100 Oil Filter Wrench 1
® 07 OAD-RCAA 100 Oil Seal Driver, 64 mm 1
I
CD
8-2 BACK
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

Test page 8-5 6
Oil Pressure Test, page 8- O-RINGS OIL CONTROL
Replacement, page 8-5 ORIFICES
O-RING
~~i~G
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
FILTER
ROCKER ARM OIL

CONTROL SOLENOID
-~
OIL FILTER
FEED PIPE
Replacement,
page 8-8
OIL FILTER
Replacement,
page 8-7 OIL SCREEN
""
OIL PUMP
Removal, page 8-11
Inspection, page 8-12 OIL PAN
Installation, page 8-13 Removal, page 7-11
BACK 8-3
Engine Lubrication

Excessive engine oil consumption 1. Check for a loose engine oil fill cap, oil drain
bolt, or oil filter.
2. Check for oil leaks.
3. Check for worn valve guide(s) (see page 6-42) or
worn valve stem seal(s) (see page 6-42).
.' 4. Check for damaged or worn piston ring(s)
(see page 7-21).
5. Check for damaged or worn engine internal parts
(cylinder wall, pistons, etc.) (see page 7-15).
Low oil pressure indicator does not 1. Do the g~uge control module self-diagnostic An open in the
come on with the ignition switch function (see page 22-315). wire between the
ON (II) 2. Test the oil pressure switch (see page 8-5). gauge control
module and the oil
pressure switch
Low oil pressure indicator stays on 1. Check the engine oil level. A wire shorted to
2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic ground between
function (see page 22-315). the gauge control
3. Test the oil pressure switch (see page 8-5). module and the oil
4. Check the engine oil pressure (see page 8-6). pressure switch.
5. Check the oil filter for clogging.
S. Check the oil screen for clogging.
7. Check the relief valve.
8. Testthe oil pump (see page 8-12).
8-4 BACK
"~~ ~
Oil Pressure Switch TeSt ',r"'>', ,,' Oil Pressure Switch,:Replaee1fteld
1. Remove the BLUNEL wire (A) frOm the:engineoir . ,1. ,:Disc(jmi~ct the oil pr(:)ssure'swittShconriector;:then
pressure switch (B). remove the oil ~ressure,switch. :. " ~, ,' ,
I' ;'
18N·m
11.8 kgf·m, 13 Ibf·ftl
T~' -'1 '':.:: :/
""
/-
2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal 2. RemoveanyOld Iiquid'gaskeffromtAe switch and
(e) and the engine (ground). There should be no . , switch mOimtirilg,hole:' " , ; I . : : , .. \
. (' , ~ ~
continuity with the engine stopped. There should .i . . !.'., ; ..
be continuity with the engine running';' 3. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the
oilpres8ure sWitch threads~ then install the oil
. .'
pressure switch, ;. .. "
NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause

...... ,' liquid gasketto enterthe'oil passage or the snd of
the new oil pressure switch. . " "
f'f' ~ " L ... , : . ' • ~" • • 1,:; I.
• ".' "I I •.• ~ •.

" Jr.' " l \.>.1.,.
• ;~ : I. : , I ' .;- , : ~ • I .. ~ :J" . "'. .~ .
; ' ; ",I 1 ::...;!~. I
'. "., .
", '"
BACK
E,rigl(u~ Lubrication
Oil·P.reS$ure .Test .. Engine Oil Replacement
Ifthelow oilpr.e~sUore"indicator stays on with the engine 1. Warm up th.;t engine.

running, check the engine oil level. If the. oil level is
correct: 2. Remove the drain bolt (A)( and drain the engine oil.
1. Remove the engine oil pressure ~witch,theh install

an oil pressure gauge (A) ..
B
/:.?'
39N.m
(4.0 kgf.m, 29 Ibf·ttl
Do not overtighten.
3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B).
2. Start;the e,ngine.Shutitoff irnmediatelylfthe" . 4. Refill with the recommended oil (see page 3-2).
gauge registers no oil pressure. Rep!:lir the problem
before continuing. .,Capacity
, , At Oil Change:
3. AIIQwtheengineto reach operatingtemper~ture 4.0 L (4.2 US qt)
(fan comes on at least twice). The· pressure should At Oil Change including Filter:
be: 4.3 L (4.5 US qt)
; ~.., ,...t. I " After Engine Overhaul:
Engine Oil Temperature: ·,176 "F (80' "C) ".' 5.0 L (5.3 US qt)
Engine Oil Pressure: .' . i' ,', • ., ,
At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2, 10 psi) min.
At 3,000 rpm: 490 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) min.
4. If oil pressure is out of specifications, inspect these

items:
• Inspect the oil pressure relief valve (see page

8-10).
• Check the oil screen for clogging.
• Inspect the oil pump (see page 8-12).
8-6' BACK
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
5. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the Special Tools Required
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). Oil filter wrench 07HAA-PJ70100
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1. Remove the oil filter with the oil filter wrench.
7. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle 2. Inspect the filter to make sure the rubber seal is not
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it stuck to the'oil filter seating surface of the engine.
(see page 11-223). 3. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the
new filter. Clean the seat on the engine block, then
8. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS. apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter
rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass
9. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with system.
the HDS.
10. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with

the HDS.
11. Select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE with the

HDS.
NOTE: If you changed the ATF at the same time

with the engine oil, select RESETTING THE ENGINE
OIL LIFE AND ATF with the HDS instead.
12. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check
for oil leakage.
13. Resetthe multi-information display (see page 3-6).
4. Install the oil filter by hand.
5. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter

clockwise with the oil filter wrench.
Tighten: 3/4 Turn Clockwise

Tightening Torque: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
07HAA-PJ70100
(cont'd)
BACK 8-7
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Filter Replacement Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement

(cont'd)
.. 1. Remove the oil filter (see page 8-7).
6. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or ..... to ....................) 2. Remove the oi I filter feed pipe.
are printed around the outside of the filter, you can
use the following procedure to tighten the filter .
• Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against

the block, and note which number or mark is at
the bottom •
• Tighten the filter' by turning it clockwise three
numbers or marks from the one you noted. For
example, if mark ..... is at the bottom when the
seal is lightly seated, tighten the filter until the
mark .................... comes around to the bottom.
3. Install two 20 x 1.5 mm nuts (A) onto the new oil

filter feed pipe, and hold one nut with a wrench,
then tighten the other nut.
___- - " 7 ' A
Mark when rubber seal

is seated.
8
Mark after tightening.
Number or 1 2 3 4
Mark when or or or or
rubber seal ..... .......... ............... ....................
is seated
Number or 4, 1 2 3
Mark after or or. or or
tightenina .................... ..... .......... ...............
7. After'installation, fill the engine with oil up to the 4. Tighten the oil filter feed pipe to 49 N·m (5.0 kgf.m,
specified level, run the engine for more than 36 Ibf·ft), then remove the nuts from the oil filter
3 minutes, then check for oil leakage. feed pipe.
8-8 BACK
Oil Jet Replacement Oil Jet Bolt Inspection
1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block 1. Remove the oil jet bolt (see page 8-9).
(see page 7-12).
2. Inspect the oil jet bolt as follows.
2. Remove the oil jet bolt (A), then remove and
discard oil jet (8). • Make sure that a 0.6 mm (0.02 in.) diameter drill
will go through the oil intake (0.7 mm [0.03 in.]
A
--16N.m diameter). Make sure the check ball (A) moves
(1.6 kgf·m, 12 Ibf·ftl smoothly and has a stroke of about 4.0 mm
Apply new engine oil (0.16 in.)
• Check the oil jet bolt operation with an air nozzle.
It should take at least 120 kPa (1.2 kgf/cm, 17 psi)
to unseatthe check ball.
3. Carefully install the new oil jet and tighten the oil
jet bolt.
4. Install the crankshaft (see page 7-23).
BACK 8-9
En glne
· Lubrication
Oil Pum p 0 verhaul

Exploded V·lew
PUMP COVER·
O-RING
Replace.
OUTER ROTOR
INNER ROTOR
/~
I
/J
CRANKSHAFT
OIL SEAL
~~~P ~OUSING
Replace S.
to y IIqu!d gasket
e matmg
~:~!':nVALV~
the engine bl surface of
hou~~i~lIde installi~g~
i~ s~o;r~d. /~
in the freely A when
Replace if it ~X1.0mm
2N·m
SPRING (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl
~:~~~GBOLT
14.0 kgf.m, 29 Ibf·ftl
8-10 BACK
Special Tools Required 5. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T-12566) to
• Oil seal driver, 64 mm 070AD-RCAA 100 the vehicle, and attach the hook (A) to the engine
• Engine support hanger A and Reds AAR-T-12566 hanger (B). Tighten the wing nut (C) by hand, and
• Engine hanger adapter set VSB02C000024A support the engine.
HondaTool and Equipment program, 1-888-424-6857.
Removal
1. Remove the bulkhead cover (see page 20-203).
3. Remove the power steering (P/S) pump and PIS

line bracket (see step 6 on page 6-29).
4. Remove the service caps (A) for the front damper

engine hanger adapters (VSB02C000024A) with the
"FRONT" mark facing forward over the damper
flange nuts. AAR-T-12566

(see page 11-242).
8. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid/oil filter

assembly (see step 9 on page 7-12).
9. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11).
10. Remove the oil screen (A), then remove the oil
pump (B).
(cont'd)
BACK 8-11
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Inspection· 4. Check the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance

between the outer rotor (A) and pump housing (8).
1. Remove the screws from the pump housing~ then If the housing-to-outerrotor radial clearance
separate the housing and cover. exceeds the service limit, replace the oil pump
assembly.
2. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the inner rotor (A) and outer rotor (8). If Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
the inner-to-outer rotor clearance exceeds the Standard (New): 0.10-0.19 mm
service limit, replace the oil pump assembly. (0.004-0.007 in.)
Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance
Standard (New): 0.04-0.16 rom B
(0.002-0.006 in.)
5. Inspect both rotors and pump housing for scoring

or other damage. Replace the parts, if necessary.
6. Apply liquid thread lock to the pump housing

3. Check the housing-to-rotor axial clearance between screws, then install the oil pump cover.
the rotors (A) and pump housing (8). Ifthe housing-
to-rotor axial clearance exceeds the service limit, 7. Check that the oil pump turns freely.
replace the oil pump assembly.
Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance

(0.001-0.003 in.)
8-12 BACK
Installation 6. Grease the lip oftheoil seal, and apply oil to the
new a-ring (A).
1. Remove the old oil seal from the oil pump.
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
2. Gently tap in the new oil seal until the oil seal driver (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ftl
bottoms on the pump.
~
070AD-RCAA100
C
6x1.0mm
12N·m
(1.2kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ftl
/
3. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the oil
pump mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes. 7. Install the dowel pins (8), then align the inner rotor
with the crankshaft, and install the oil pump (C).
4. Clean and dry the oil pump mating surfaces.
5. Apply liquid gasket, PIN 08717-0004,08718-0001, check the seal for distortion.
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine
block mating surface ofthe oil pump. Install the 9. Install the oil screen (D) with new a-ring (E).
gasket. 10. Install the rocker arm oil control solenoid/oil filter
assembly, with a new rocker arm oil control
NOTE: solenoid filter (see step 38 on page 7-27).
component must be installed within 4 minutes. 11. Install the oil pan (see page 7-28) .
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and 12. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
residue, then reapply new liquid gasket. (see page 11-242).
14. Remove the engine support hanger, and engine

hanger adapters.
(cont'd)
BACK 8-13
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
16. Install the power steering (PIS) pump and PIS line
bracket (see step 27 on page 6-53).
18. Install the bulkhead cover (see page 20-203).
8-14 BACK
,Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold and ExhaustSystem

Intake Manifold .Removal and Installation ...'~ ............. 9-2'
Injector Base Removal and Installation ................ ;..... 9-7
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement ..................... 9-9
BACK
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
Exploded View
J ~.
/
6 X1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf.m. 8.7Ibf·ft)
/
UPPER COVER
Replace if it is cracked or ifthe
mating surface is damaged.
I
,J\,\.",
-:; . } .
GASKET
~
<a
~~G>6l::;::::::":;:7
.! 8x 1.2l1 mm
. 22 N·n'I'(2.2 kgf~m; 16Ibf·ft)
~~ I ~:~:~i1~ kgf·m. 8.7 Ibf·ft)
L
~XHAUSTGAS
~
INTAKE MANIFOLD . . . .'
Replace intake manifold as \ RECIRCULATION
an assembly only if it is cracked " ~
, , (EGR)PIPE
., .... metin...... ~. .,~~. ~ IF

. . GASKET
Replace. 6 x 1.0 mm
1'7m.,1-7 ...
12N·m
·ftl
EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE VALVE
THROTTLE
BODY
FRONT INJECTOR BASE
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
11.0 kgf.m. 7.2Ibf·ft) GASKET
Replace.
9-2 BACK
Removal 3. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV)
hose (A), brake boostervacuum hose (B), vacuum
1. Remove the engine cover. hose (C), and disconnect the intake manifold tuning
(lMT) actuator connector (D).
4. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister

2. Remove the breather pipe (A), then remove the hose (A), and disconnect the EVAP canister purge
intake air duct (B). valve connector (B), throttle actuator connector (C),
and manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
connector (D).
5. Remove and plug the water bypass hoses (E).
(cont'd)
BACK 9-3
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
6. Remove the upper cover mounting bolts and nuts 7. Remove the intake manifold mounting bolts and
sequentially in two or three steps, then remove the nuts sequentially in two or three steps, then
upper cover. remove the intake manifold.
® (j) @ ® ® CD (j) ® ® ®
® ® ® @ ®
9-4 BACK
Installation 4. Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
hose (A) and water bypass hoses (B).
1. Install the gasket on the injector base.
2. Install the intake manifold. Tighten the bolts and A

nuts sequentially in two or three steps. Always use
a new intake manifold gasket.
Specified Torque
8 x 1.25 mm: 22 N·m (2.2kgf·m, 16 Ibf·tt)
® CD @ (j)
5. Connect the manifold absolute pressure (MAP)

sensor connector (C), throttle actuator connector
(D) and EVAP canister purge valve connector (E).
3. Install the upper cover. Tighten the bolts and nuts

sequentially in two or three steps. Always use a
new gasket.
Specified Torque
6 x 1.0 mm: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·tt)
@ (j) ® ® CD ®
(cont'd)
BACK
9-5
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
6. Install the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose 8. Install the engine cover.
(A), brake booster vacuum hose (8), vacuum hose
(C) and connectthe intake manifold tuning (IMT)
actuator connector (0).
9. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.

7. Install the intake air duct (A), then install the
breather pipe (8). 10. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and
connectors are installed correctly.

air from the cooling system with heater valve open
(see step 100npage 10-7).
9-6 BACK
Injector Base Removal and Installation
Removal Installation
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-330). 1. Install the front injector base (A) and rear injector
base (8) with new gaskets (C), and tighten the bolts/
2. Remove the power steering (P/S) pump and power nuts (D). ina crisscross pattern in two or three steps,
steering line bracket (see step 6 on page 6-29). beginning with the inner nuts.
3. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3). NOTE: Front injector base gasket is different from
rear one. Do not mix injector base gasket types.
4. Remove the injectors (see page 11-236).
D
. 8x 1.25 mm
5. Remove the harness bracket mount bolt (A) and the 22N·m
knock sensor connector (8). 12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
6. Remove the injector base mount bolts/nuts (A),

then remove the front injector base (8) and rear 2. Install the knock sensor connector (A) and harness
injector base (C). bracket mount bolt (8).
B
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK
9-7
Injector Base Removal and Installation (cont'd)
3. Install the injectors (see page 11-236).
5. Install PIS pump and PIS line bracket (see step ·27
on page 6-53).
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate

the starter. After the fuel pump runs about 2
seconds, the fuel pressure in the fuel line rises.
Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel
leaks.
BACK
9-8
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
o 0 ~HEATSHIELD
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
11 ......m~
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10x 1.25 mm
33 N·m (3.4 kgf·m, 25 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
GASKETS
Replace.
~~GASKET
V--, ~ Replace.
, THREE WAY
CATALYTIC
CONVERTER (TWC)
SELF-LOCKING NUTS
10 x 1.25 mm
54N·m
(5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ft) SELF-LOCKING NUT
Replace. 10x 1.25mm
33 N·m (3.4 kgf·m, 25 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
BACK
9-9
BACK
Engine Cooling
Cooling System
Radiator Cap Test ......................................................... 10-3
RadiatorTest ................................................................. 10-3
Fan Motor Test .............................................................. 10-4
Thermostat Test ........................................................... 10-4
Water Pump Inspection ............................................... 10-5
Water Pump Replacement ........................................... 10-5
Coolant Check ............................................................... 10-6
Coolant Replacement ................................................... 10-6
Thermostat Replacement ............................................ 10-8
Water Passage Replacement ....................................... 10-9
Radiator and Fan Replacement ................................... 10-10
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 10-15
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting .. , 10-16
Cooling System
I
WATER PUMP
RADIATOR CAP
Test,page 10-3
WATER PASSAGE
THERMOSTAT
Test, page 10-4
RADIATOR RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY

Test, page 10-3 Replacement, page 10-10
Replacement, page 10-10 Fan Motor Test, page 10-4
10-2 BACK
Radiator Cap Test Radiator Test
1. Remove the radiator cap (A). Wet its seal with 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
engine coolant, then install it on a commercially the radiator cap, and fill the radiator with engine
available pressure tester (8). coolant to the top of the filler neck.
2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A)

B to the radiator, and apply a pressure of 93-123 kPa
(0.95-1.25 kgf/cm2, 14-18 psi).
2. Apply a pressure of 93-123 kPa (0.95-

1.25 kgf/cm2, 14-18 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.

3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in
4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap. pressure.
4. Remove the tester, then reinstall the radiator cap.
BACK
Cooling System
Fan Motor Test Thermostat Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connectors from the radiator fan Replace the thermostat if it is in the stuck open position
motor (A) and condenser fan motor (B). at room temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.

Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of
the hot container.
_____ B
B A
A
2. Test each motor by connecting battery power to

No.2 terminal and ground to No.1 terminal.
3. If either motor fails to run or does not run smoothly.

replace it (see page 10-10).
2. Heat the water and check the temperature with a

thermometer. Note the temperature at which the
thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is

fully open.
Standard Thermostat
Lift Height: Above 10.0 mm (0.39 in.)
Starts Opening: 169-176"F (76 -80 'CI
Fully Open: 194 "F (90 "C)
10-4 BACK
Water Pump Inspection Water Pump Replacement
1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-13). 1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
2. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise. 2. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-13).
Check that it turns freely. If it doesn't turn smoothly,
replace the water pump (see page 10-5). 3. Remove the timing belt adjuster (see page 6-24).
NOTE: When you check the water pump, you may 4. Remove the water pump (A) by removing the five
see a small amount of "weeping" from the bleed bolts.
holes (A). This is normal.
6x1.0mm
~~B A
12N·m
5. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and the mating

3. Install the timing belt (see page 6-16). surface of the engine block.
6. Install the water pump with a new O-ring (8) in the

reverse order of removal.
8. Install the timing belt adjuster (see page 6-24).
10. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed

the air from the cooling system (see step 10 on
page 10-7).
BACK 10-5
CooUng System
Coolant Check Coolant Replacement
1. Look at the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. 1. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control
Make sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and MIN dial to maximum heat, then turn off the ignition
mark (B). switch. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool
to the touch.
2. Remove the radiator cap.
4. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.
2. Ifthe coolant level in the cpolant reservoir is at or

below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it
between the MIN and MAX marks, then inspect the
cooling system for leaks.
5. Install a rubber hose (A) on the drain bolt (B)

located atthe rear ofthe engine block, then loosen
the drain bolt.
B
9.8N·m
6. When the coolant stops draining, tighten the drain

bolt. Remove the rubber hose.
7. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.
8. Install the splash shield (see step 33 on page 5-17).
10-6 BACK
9. Remove, drain, and reinstall the coolant reservoir. 12. Loosely install the radiator cap.
10. Fill the coolant reservoir to the MAX mark (A) with 13. Start the engine, and let it run until it warms up (the
Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2(P/N radiator fan comes on at least twice).
OL999-9001 ).
14. If the maintenance minder required to replace the
engine coolant, reset the maintenance minder
(see page 3-6), .and this procedure is complete. If
the maintenance minder did not require to replace
the engine coolant, go to step 13.
15. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the


and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it
(see page 11-223).
11. Pour Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 18. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS.
into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck.
19. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with
NOTE: the HDS.
• Always use Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2 (P/N o L999-900 1). Using a non-Acura 20. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with
coolant can result in corrosion, causing the the HDS.
cooling system to malfunction or fail.
• Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a 21. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 5 RESET with the
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do HDS.
not add water.
22. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator,
Engine Coolant Capacities (Including the coolant and add Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2,
reservoir capacity of 0.7 L (0.19 US gal)): if needed.
At Coolant Change: 7.3 L (1.93 US gal)
After Engine Overhaul: 9.2 L (2.43 US gal) 23. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine
',again, and check for leaks.
25. Reset the multi-information display (see page 3-6).
BACK 10-7
Cooling System
Thermostat Replacement
1. Make sure you have the anti~theft codes for the audio system and navigation system (if equipped) •. Make sure the
ignition switch is OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative cable.from the battery first, then disconnecUhe positive cable.
3. Remove the air intake duct (see step 9 on page 5-2):
4. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10~6).
5. Remove the thermostatcover, then remove the thermostat.
_ _ _ _ _ THERMOSTAT COVE~
" . '-.'
6x1.0mm .. .
________ 12 N·m .
(1.2 kgf.m, 8. 7Ibf·ft) .
g
6. Install the new thermostat with a new rubber seal in the reverse order of removal.
7. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply
grease to prevent corrosion. .
8. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed air from the cooling system (see step 10 on, pag'~ 10-7).
10. Do the steering column position memorization (see page 17-28).
11. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system and the navigation system (if equipped).
12. Set the clock.
10-8 BACK
Water Passage Replacement
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the audio system and navigation system (if equipped). Make sure the
ignition switch is OFF ..
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first, then disconnect the positive cable.
3. Remove the air intake duct (see step 9 on page 5-2).
5. Remove the upper r~diator hose, lower radiator hose, heater hoses, and water bypass hoses from the water
passage. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1 connector and the exhaust gas recirculation
(EGR) valve connector.
6. Remove thewater passage.
~ IEGRIVALVE
EXHAUSTGAS
RECIRCULATION
ENGINECOOLANT
TEMPERATURE IECTI
/ SENSOR 1
. 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl
!/ O-RING
Replace.
/
/8x1.25mm
22N'm
~ (2.2 kgf.m, 16 Ibf·ftl
O-RING
Replace.
7. Install the water passage in the reverse order of removal.
8. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble them and apply
grease to prevent corrosion.
9. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed air from the cooling system (see step 10 on page 10-7).
11. Do the steering column position memorization (see page 17-28).
12. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system and navigation system (if equipped).
13. Setthe clock.
BACK 10-9
Cooling System
Radiator and Fan Replacement
NOTE: 6. Disconnect the fan motor connectors (A), harness

• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted clamp (B), engine coolanttemperature (ECT) sensor
surfaces. 2 subharness connector (C) and coolant reservoir hose
• To avoid damaging the wire and terminals, unplug (D).
the wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion. B
• Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact any other
wiring or hoses, or interfere with any other parts.
1. Make sure you have the anti"theft codes for the


3. Remove the battery and battery base (see step 12

on page 5-3).
8. Remove the upper radiator hose.
5. Remove the front grille cover, then remove the
front grille.
10-10 BACK
9. Disconnect the hose clamps (A) and remove the 12. Disconnectthe hood latch switch connector (A),
ATF cooler hoses (8), then plug the line and hoses. clamps (8), then remove the hood latch (e).
C F
6x1.0mm 6x1.0mm 6x 1.0mm
B 7.1 N·m (0.72 kgf·m, 5.2Ibf·ft) 7.1N·m 9.8N·m
(0.72 kgf·m, 5.2 Ibf·ft) (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 Ibf·ft)
B
~D~~~~
'l i
C D
6x 1.0 mm
7.1 N·m (0.72 kgf.m, 5.2 Ibf·ft)
10. Remove the ATF cooler pipe mount bolts (e), then
remove the ATF cooler pipe (D). F
6x1.0mm 6x1.0mm
11. Remove the lower radiator hose (A) and disconnect 9.8 N·m 7.1 N·m
(1.0 kgt.m, 7.2Ibf·ft) (0.72 kgt·m, 5.2Ibt·ft)
the EeT sensor 2 connector (8) and loosen the two
bolts (e). 13. Remove the bulkhead bracket (D), and radiator and
Ale condenser mount upper bracket/cushion (E),
then remove the fan shroud mount bolts (F).
C
6x 1.0mm
7.1 N·m (0.72 kgf·m, 5.2 Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 10-11
Cooling System
Radiator and Fan Replacement (cont'd)
14. Displace the fan shrouds to the engine side, then 15. Remove the fan shroud assembly.
pull up the radiator assembly (A).
16. Install the radiator and fans in the reverse order of
removal.
17. Install the bulkhead bracket in the reverse order of

removal. Apply body paintto the bulkhead bracket
mounting bolts.
18. Set the upper and lower cushions securely.
19. Fill the radiator with engine coolant and bleed the
airfrom the system (see step 10 on page 10-7).
20. Fill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-266).
21. Adjustthe engine hood latch (see page 20-194).
22. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and

cable terminals with sandpaper, then assemble
them and apply grease to prevent corrosion.

(see page 17"28).
25. Set the clock.
10-12 BACK
Fan Controls
A/CCONDENSER FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-77
• ',1. -
, RADIATOR FAN RELAY

Te~t, page 22-77
FAN CONTROL RELAY

Test, page 22-77
,;.
: '" . I
'- i
AIC CONDENSER FAN RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY Motor Test; page,' 0-4
Motor Test, page' 0-4 -,"
ENGINE COOLANT ENGiNE COdLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT) , TEMPERATURE (Ect) "
SENSOR 1 SENSOR 2
Replacement, page "-239 Replacement, page "-239
BACK 10-13
".,;
,.,'
,;,.,'.
~i:· r;.
Fan:CQhtrols
Symptom Diagnostic Procedure Also check for

Engine overheats 1. ·"Cl'\e'~kt~e coolant level.
2. Check for engine coolant leaks (from gaskets,
,
hoses~ O-rings, etc.).
"
3: Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on the radiator

and condenser.
4. Check for det~riorated coolant.
5. Check for a damaged or deformed fan shroud.
6. Inspectthe fan motors (see page 10-4) orfan
relays (see page 22-77).
7. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3).
8. Check the thermostat (see page 10-4).
9. Inspect the water pump (see page 10-5).
10. Check for clogged or deteriorated radiator
hoses.
11. Checkfor a clogged heater core or hoses.
12. Check for a damaged cylinder head gasket.
The radiator fan runs at low speed, Radiator fan high speed circuit troubleshooting Cleanliness and
but it does not run at high speed (see page 10-16). tightness of all
when the engine coolant connectors
temperature is above 206 "F
(97 "C)
With the AlC off and the engine Remove the fan control relay, and test. Cleanliness and
coolant temperature at206 "F ., If the relay is faulty, replace it. tightness of all
(97 "C) or below, the Ale • If the relay is OK, check for a short in the wire connectors
condenser fan runs at high speed between fan control relay 5P socket terminal No.1
and the radiator fan does not run. and condenser fan motor 2P connector terminal
When the engine coolant No.1.
(97 "C), both fans run at high
sReed
The radiator fan runs at high Check for a short in the wire between radiator fan ,Cleanliness and
speed with the ignition switch ON relay 4P socketterminal No.3 andPCM connector tightness of all
(II), the AlC off, and the engine terminal Aq; connectors
I
coolant temperature below 204 "F "
,'.
(95 "C)
Both the radiator fan and the AlC Check for a short in the wire between AlC condenser Cleanliness and
condenser fan run at low speed fan relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and PCM connector tightness of all
with the ignition switch ON (1) terminarA4. connectors
and the AlC off
Both the radiator fan and the AlC Radiator and AlC condenser fans low speed circuit Cleanliness and
condenser fan do not run at low troubleshooting (see page 21-94). tightness of all
speed with the AlC on connectors
The AlC condenser fan does not AlC condenser fans high speed circuit Cleanliness and
run at all. The radiator fan does troubleshooting (see page 21-98)" tightness of all
not run at low speed, but it runs at connectors
high speed . '.,'
Both the radiator fan and the AlC Check for an open inthe wire between radiator fan' Cleanliness and
condenser fan do not run at high ,. , relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and PCM connector tightness of all
speed when the engine coolant terminal A5. connectors
(97 "C)
10-14 BACK
Circuit Diagram
'1 :IG
MAIN UNDER·HOOD FUSE BOX '2:R/B1
BATTERY '3: R/B3
No. 1(120 No.3 '2 (30 AI
A)
+ )---+--<:n...o-....... . . . - c r u c = - - - - - - - - - + - G R N - - -___~=~----___,
""~
~ ..,."'.
No.3 '1(50 AI
UNDER·HOOD
No.3 '3 C2 FUSE RElAY BOX
(GOAl .
ORN
GRN +
A4
UNDER·HooD
FUSE/RElAY BOX
No. 16 (30 AI No. 15(30AI RADIATOR
FAN DIODE
.....----+---- ORN ----tt~
..- - - P U R - - - t - - - - t - - -.....
PUR
~CONDENSER
bld FAN DIODE
LTBLU GRN
FAN
It------- CONTROL
RElAY
BLI<
~
BLU
G201
~------r_--mrr·---------___,
PUR----,
A4 A6 PCM
FANL MRLY
BRN
RED---....
5V
SG2 SG4
C16 A2J
GRN PUR
t~05 t~05
RADIATOR
FAN
MOTOR GRN BLU
BLI< ~
1
ENGINE COOlANT ENGINE COOlANT
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR 1 (ECTI SENSOR 2
G301
BACK 10-15
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No.7 (7.5A), No.8 (15A) and No.16 4. Connect radiator fan relay 4P socket terminals
(30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire.
Are the fuses OK? RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse{s) and recheck.•
2. Remove the radiator fan relay from the under-hood

ffi=J JUMPER WIRE
fuse/relay box and test it (see page 22-77).
Is the relay OK?

~
YES-Go to step 3. Terminal side of female terminals
NO-Replace the radiator fan relay.•

Does the radiator fan run at high speed?
3. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P
socket terminal No.1 and body ground. YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Repair open in the BRN wire between radiator

RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
fan relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and radiator fan
motor 2P connector terminal No.2.•
6. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P

socket terminal No.4 and body ground.
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
Terminal side of female terminals
2
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair open in the RED wire between radiator =

fan relay 4P socket terminal No.1 and the No.3
fuse in the main under-hood fuse box.• Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Repair open in the PUR wire between

radiator fan relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and the
powertrain control module (PCM) (A5) .•
NO-Repair open in the PUR wire between radiator

fan relay 4P socket terminal No.4 and the under-
hood fuse/relay box.•
10-16 BACK
Fuel and Emissions
Fuel and Emissions Systems Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
Special Tools ................................................... 11-2 Precautions .................................................. 11-336
General Troubleshooting Information ........• 11-3 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
DTC Troubleshooting Index .......................... 11-10 Removal ....................................................... 11-338
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 11-14 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
System Description ........................................ 11-16 Installation ................................................... 11-340
How to Set Readiness Codes ........................ 11-66 Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation ............ 11-343
Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement ......... 11-345
PGM-FI System Fuel Filter Replacement ................................. 11-345
Component Location Index ....................•...... 11-69 Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-71 Replacement ............................................... 11-346
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting ..................... 11-208 Fuel Tank Replacement ................................. 11-347
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting .......................... 11-222 Fuel Fill Pipe Removal/Installation ................. 11-348
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting ......................... 11-223 Fuel Pump Control Module Replacement .... 11-349
Injector Replacement ..................................... 11-236 Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test ...................... 11-350
MAP Sensor Replacement .............................
MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement .........
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ...........................
ECT Sensor 2 Replacement ...........................
AlF Sensor Replacement ...............................
11-238
11-238
11-239
11-239
11-240
Low Fuel Indicator Test ..................................
Intake Air System

Component Location Index ...........................
DTC Troubleshooting .....................................
11-351
11-352
11-353
I'ii1
~ 1
Secondary H02S Replacement ..................... 11-241 Throttle Body Test .......................................... 11-362
CKP Sensor Replacement .............................. 11-242 Throttle Body Cleaning .................................. 11-363
CMP Sensor Replacement ............................. 11-242 Air Cleaner Removal/Installation .................. 11-363
Knock Sensor Replacement .......................... 11-243 Air Cleaner Element
PCM Replacement .......................................... 11-244 Inspection/Replacement ............................ 11-364
Resonator Removal/Installation .................... 11-365
Electronic Throttle Control System IMT Actuator Replacement ............................ 11-365
Component Location Index ........................... 11-246 Throttle Body Removal/Installation .............. 11-366
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-247
APP Sensor Signal Inspection ....................... 11-285 Catalytic Converter System
Accelerator Pedal Module Component Location Index ........................... 11-367
Removal/Installation .................................. 11-286 DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-368
Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation ........... 11-370
VTEC Under-Floor TWC Removal/Installation ....... 11-372
Component Location Index ........................... 11-287
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-288 EGRSystem
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Test ................. 11-298 Component Location Index ........................... 11-373
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Replacement .... 11-299 DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-374
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch EGR Valve Replacement ................................ 11-388
Removal/Installation ....................................... 11-299
PCVSystem
Idle Control System Component Location Index ........................... 11-389
Component Location Index ........................... 11-300 DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-390
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-301 PCV Valve Inspection ..................................... 11-391
AlC Signal Circuit Troubleshooting .............. 11-304 PCV Valve Replacement ................................ 11-391
Alternator FR Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting ......................................... 11-305 EVAPSystem
PSP Switch Signal Circuit Component Location Index ........................... 11-392
Troubleshooting ......................................... 11-306 DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-393
Brake Pedal Position Switch Fuel Cap Warning Message System
Signal Circuit Troubleshooting ................. 11-308 Troubleshooting ......................................... 11-421
Idle Speed Inspection ..................................... 11-310 FTPSensor Replacement .............................. 11-423
PCM Idle Learn Procedure ............................. 11-311 EVAP Canister Purge Valve
Replacement ............................................... 11-423
Fuel Supply System EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Component Location Index ........................... 11-312 Replacement ............................................... 11-424
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-314 EVAP Canister Replacement ......................... 11-425
Fuel Pressure Relieving ................................. 11-330 EVAP Canister Filter Replacement ................ 11-426
Fuel Pressure Test .......................................... 11-333
Fuel Tank Draining ......................................... 11-333
Fuel Line Inspection ....................................... 11-334
Fuel and Emissions Systems
Special Tools

CD 07 AAA-SOXA 100 Fuel Sender Wrench 1
® 07 AAJ-S6MA 150 Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Set 1
® 07JAZ-001000B Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0-4 in.Hg 1
CD 07NAJ-P07010A Pressure Gauge Adapter 1
® 07ZAJ-S5AA200 Oil Pressure Hose 1
@-1 07406-0020201 AfT Pressure Hose 1
@-2 07406-0070301 AfT Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 1
@-3 07MAJ-PY 4011A AfT Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 1
@-4 07MAJ-PY 40120 AfT Pressure Hose, Adapter 1
(J) 07406-004000B Fuel Pressure Gauge 1
I
CD ®
® @-1, @-2, @-3, @-4
(J)
11-2 BACK
General Troubleshooting Information
Intermittent Failures 2. If the MIL stays on, connect the HDS to the data link
connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side
The term "intermittent failure" means a system may of the dashboard.
have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the dash does not
come on, check for poor connections or loose pins at all
connectors related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting. If the MIL was on but then went out,
the original problem may have been intermittent.
Service Information
Some DTCs or symptoms can be caused by a

combination of PCM software and specific driving
habits. Periodically, new PCM software or new service
procedures may become available. Always check
online for the latest software or service information.
related to the DTCs or symptoms you are 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
troubleshooting.
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM
Opens and Shorts and other vehicle systems. If it does not, go to DLC
Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 11-223).
"Open" and "short" are common electrical terms. An
open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is 5. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
an accidental connection of a wire to ground or to Also check the freeze data and/or on-board
another wire. In simple electronics, this usually means snapshot data, and download any data found. Then
something won't work at all. With complex electronics refer to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and
(such as PCMs) this can sometimes mean something begin the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
works, but not the way it's supposed to.
NOTE:
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic • Freeze data indicates the engine conditions when
System) the first malfunction, misfire, or fuel trim
malfunction was detected.
H the MIL (maHunction indicator lamp) has come on • The HDS can read the DTCs, freeze data,
on-board snapshot, current data, and other
1. Start the engine, and check the MIL (A). powertrain control module (PCM) data.
• For specific operations, refer to the user's
NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and manual that came with the HDS.
the engine is not started, the MIL stays on for
15-20 seconds (see page 11-66). 6. If no DTCs are found, go to MIL circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-222).
If the MIL did not stay on

If the MIL did not stay on but there is a driveability
problem, do the symptom troubleshooting ..
If you can't duplicate the DTC

Some of the troubleshooting requires you to reset the
PCM and try to duplicate the DTC. If the problem is
intermittent and you can't duplicate the code, do not
continue through the procedure. To do so will only
result in confusion and possibly, a needlessly replaced
PCM.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-3
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
HDSClear Command PCM Reset
The PCM stores various specific data to correct the 1. Reset the PCM with the HDS while the engine is
system even if there is no electrical power such as stopped.
when the battery negative terminal or No. 81GP (15 A)
fuse are disconnected. Stored data based on failed 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
parts should be cleared by using the "CLEAR
COMMAND" ofthe HDS, if parts are replaced. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and wait for
30 seconds.
The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet
this purpose. They are DTC clear, PCM reset, and CKP 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all stored DTC HDS from the DLC.
codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and readiness
codes. This must be done with the HDS after 5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting.
The PCM reset command erases all stored DTC codes, Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP)
freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and Pattern Learn
all specific data to correct the system except CKP
pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the PCM was cleared, Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS)
you must do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP
pattern clear command erases only CKP pattern data. 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
This command is for repair of a misfire or theCKP (A) located under the driver'S side of the dashboard.
sensor.
Scan Tool Clear Command
If you are using a generic scan tool to clear commands,

be aware that there is only one setting for clearingthe
PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time (CKP
pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes, freeze data,
on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you clear all
commands, youthen need to do these procedures, in
this order: PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311);
CKP pattern learn procedure;
Test-drive to set readiness codes to complete (see page
11-66).
DTC Clear
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
stopped.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. and other vehicle systems. If it does not, go to the
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-223).
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and wait for
30 seconds. 4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT
MENU with the HDS.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
HDS from the DLC. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS,
and follow the screen prompts.
BACK
11-4
Learn Procedure (without the HOS) How to End a Troubleshooting Session
(required after any troubleshooting)
1. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the 1. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
radiator fan comes on.
2. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate
(with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the
transmission in D position. 4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate NOTE: The PCM is part of the immobilizer system.
(with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed If you replace the PCM, it will have a different
of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm with the immobilizer code. In order for the engine to start,
transmission in D position. you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the
HDS.
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for

30 seconds.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-5
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM 4. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is made at the

Connectors PCM connector, use the measurement hole (A)
above the terminal you need to check.
NOTE:
• The PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP
system for up to 15 minutes after the ignition switch
is turned OFF. Jumping the SCS line after turning the
ignition switch OFF cancels this function.
Disconnecting the PCM during this function, without
jumping the SCS line first, can damage the PCM .
• PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols (A=D.
B=D., C=O) embosed on them for identification.
2. Remove the bracket (D), then free the AlC discharge

line (E) from the clip (F) and remove the AlC suction
line mounting bracket bolt (G). 5. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminals to
a commercially available digital multi meter (B),
and connect the other side of the patch cord
terminals to a commercially available banana jack
(Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent)
(C).
0 [CJ
E
®
© @)
B
/
6. Gently contact the pin probe (male) at the terminal
test port from the terminal side. Do not force the
B tips into the terminals.
3. Remove the cover (H), then disconnect the PCM INOTICEI

connector A, B, and C. • For accurate results, always use the pin
probe (male).
• To prevent damage to the connector
terminals, do not insert test equipment
probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as
they can damage the terminals. Damaged
terminals cause a poor connection and an
incorrect measurement.
• Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.
BACK
11-6
Updating the PCM 1. Turn the ignition switch ON-(II), but ddnot start the
engine.
o Honda diagnostic system (HDS) 2. Connect thEr HDS to the data Ii nk connector (DLC)
o Honda interface module (HIM) (Allocated under the driver's side of the' dashboard.
o HDS pockettester
NOTE:
o Use this procedure when you need to update the PCM
during troubleshooting procedures.

o Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software
version.
o Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery in
the vehicle is fully charged.

o Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update.
If there is a problem with the update, leave the

ignition switch ON.
o To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything
electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, AlC,

power windows, door locks, etc.) during the update.
o To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM
update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. i:
o You cannot update a PCM with a program it already 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM
has. It will only accept a new program. and other vehicle systems. If it does not, go to the
o High temperature in the engine compartment might DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-223). If
cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If . you are returning from-the DLC circuit
the engine has been running before this procedure, troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5 and clean the
open the hood and cool the engine compartment. throttle body after updating the PCM.
o If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red (#3) lamp came on or 4. USA, Canada models: Select the INSPECTION
was flashed during the update, leave the ignition MENU with the HDS. --
switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the
HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will 5. USA, Canada models: Select the ETCS TEST, then
prevent PCM damage. select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the
screen prompts with the HDS.
NOTE: USA, Canada models: Ifthe TP POSITION

CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure.
6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system (USA, Canada

models), then select the update mode, and follow
the screen prompts to update the PCM.
(cont'd)
BACK
11~7
,~", ;

7. IfthesoftWareinthe P,CMistheiatest, disconnect Substituting the PCM

the HDS/HIM from the DLC, and go back to tile
procedure that you were doing. If the software in Special Tools Required
the PCMis not the latest, follow the instructions on o Honda diagnostic system (HDS)
the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI , o Honda interface module (HIM)
system or the AfT system, make sure you update o HDS pocket tester
both.
NOTE: Use this procedure when you need to substitute
NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to a known-good PCM during troubleshooting procedures.
cool the PCM, follow the screen prompts. If you run
into a problem (programming takes over 1. Connect the HDS to the data lirik connector (DLC)
15minutes, status bar goes over 100 %, D or (A) located under the driver's side ofthe dashboard.
immobilizer light flashes, HDS tablet freezes, etc.)
during the update procedure, follow these steps to
minimize the chance of damaging the PCM: "
/',"
o Leave the ignition switch in the "ON (II)" position.
o Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a 7~

battery charger). '
o Shut down the HDS.
o Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
o Reboot the HDS.
o Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the
; ,'update procedure again. ""
8. USA, Canada models: If the TPPOSITION CHECK

failed in step 6, clean the throttle body (see page A
11-363).' '

,'\. 2. Turnthe ignition switch ON (11).
10. Do the CKP learn procedure.
... , ..., ....
and other vehicle systems. If it does not, go to the
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see, page 11-223). If
you are returning fromDLC circuit troubleshooting,
skip step 4 to 9, then clean the throttle body after
substituting the PCM (see page 11-363).
4. USA, Canada models: Select the INSPECTION

MENU with the HDS.
5. USA, Canada models: Select the ETCS TEST, then

select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the
screen prompts.
NOTE: USA, Canada models: If the TP POSITION

CHECK indicates FAILED, continue this procedure.
BACK
8. Remove the bracket (D), then free the AlC discharge 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
line (E) from the clip (F) and remove the AlC suction
line mounting bracket bolt (G). NOTE: USA, Canada models: DTC P0630 "VIN Not
Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because
the VIN has not been programmed into the PCM;
ignore it, and continue this procedure.
14. USA, Canada models: Manually input the VIN to

the PCM with the HDS.
15. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

software.
16. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
17. Enter the immobilizer code with the PCM

replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to
start the engine.
18. Resetthe PCMwith the HDS.
19. USA, Canada models: Ifthe TP POSITION CHECK

failed in step 6, clean the throttle body (see page
11-363).

9. Remove the cover (H), then disconnect the PCM
connectors A, B, and C. 21. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure.
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols OBD Status

(A=D, B=.6.., C=O) embosed on them for
identification. The OBD status shows the current system status of
each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
10. Remove the bolts (I), then remove the PCM (J). used to see if the repair was successfully completed.
The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed
11. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. as:
12. Open the SCS with the HDS. • PASSED: The on board diagnosis is successfully
finished.
• FAILED: The on board diagnosis has finished but
failed.
• EXECUTING: The vehicle is in enable criteria
conditions for the DTC and the on board diagnosis is
running.
• NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
• OUT OF CONDITION: The vehicle has stayed out of
the enable conditions for the DTC.
BACK
11-9
OTe Troubleshooting Index
DTe Two Drive Cycle Detection Item MIL Note

(MIL indication ") Detection
P0101 (50) 0 Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem ON (see paae 11-71)
P0102 (50) Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see paae 11-73)
P0103 (50) -- Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see paae 11-76)
P0107 (3) -- Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-78)
P0108 (3) -- Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Hiah Volta_g~ ON (see page 11-80)
P0111 (10) 0 Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Sensor Circuit Ranae/Performance Problem ON (see DaDe 11-83)
P0112 (10) Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Sensor Circuit Low Voltaae ON (see Daae 11-84)
P0113 (10) Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Sensor Circuit Hiah Voltaae ON (see paae 11-86)
P0116 (86) 0 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance ON (see page 11-89)
Problem
P0117 (6) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage ON (see paDe 11-90)
P0118 (6) Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Hiah Voltaae ON (see paae 11-92)
P0122 (7) Throttle Position !TP) Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage ON (see paae 11-247)
P0123 (7) Throttle Position !TP) Sensor A Circuit High Voltage ON (see paae 11-249)
P0125 (86) 0 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow Response ON (see paae 11-95)
P0128 (87) 0 Cooling System Malfunction ON (see page 11-96)
P0133 (157) 0 Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Circuit Slow Response ON (see page 11-98)
P0134 (151) 0 Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Heater System ON (see page 11-99)
Malfunction
P0135 (151) -- Rear Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Heater Circuit ON (see page 11-102)
Malfunction
P0137 (161) 0 Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 1, ON (see page 11-106)
Sensor 2» Circuit Low Voltaae
Sensor 2» Circuit High Voltaae
Sensor 2» Circuit Slow Response
P0141 (163) Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 1, ON (see page 11-112)
Sensor 2» Heater Circuit Malfunction
P0153 (158) 0 Front Air Fuel Ratio (A!F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit Slow ON (see page 11-98)
ResDonse
P0154 (152) 0 Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Heater System ON (see page 11-99)
Malfunction
P0155 (152) -- Front Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Heater Circuit ON (see page 11-102)
Malfunction
P0157 (162) 0 Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 2, ON (see page 11-106)
Sensor 2» Circuit Low Voltaae
Sensor 2» Circuit High Voltage
Sensor 2» Circuit Slow Response
P0161 (164) -- Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Bank 2, ON (see page 11-112)
Sensor 2» Heater Circuit Malfunction
P0171 (153) 0 Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel SYstem Too Lean ON (see paae 11-116)
P0172 (153) 0 Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel SYstem Too Rich ON (see paae 11-116)
P0174 (154) 0 Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System Too Lean ON (see paae 11-116)
P0175 (154) 0 Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System Too Rich ON (see page 11-116)
P0222 (7) -- Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-252)
P0223 (7) -- Throttle Position !TP) Sensor B Circuit Hiah Voltage ON (see page 11-254)
P0300 (77) 0 Random Misfire Detected ON (see page 11-118)
and any
combination ot
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304(74)
P0305 (75)
P0306(76) .
NOTE: The aboye DTCs are indIcated when the PGM-FI system IS selected In the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. Ifthe MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the AfT
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs.
* 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS.
1'1-10 BACK
DTC· Two Drive Cycle Detection Item MIL Note
(M(L indication "1 Detection
P030l (711 0 No.1 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see oaoe 11-1211
P0302 (721 0 No.2 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see oaoe 11-1211
P0303(731 0 No.3 CYlinder Misfire Detected ON (see oaoe 11-121)
P0304(74) 0 No.4 Cvlinder Misfire Detected ON (see oaoe 11-121)
P0305 (75) 0 No.5 Cvlinder Misfire Detected ON (see oaoe 11-121)
P0306J761 0 No.6 Cvlinder Misfire Detected ON (see oaoe 11-121)
P0325 (23) -- Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see oaoe 11-130)
P0335 (4) -- Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor A No Sional ON (see oaoe 11-133)
P0339 (4) -- Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor A Circuit Intermittent Interruotion ON (see oaoe 11-136)
P0340 (9) -- Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor No Signal ON (see page 11-137)
P0344 (9) Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Circuit Intermittent Interruption ON (see page 11-140)
P0385 (54) -- Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor B No Signal ON (seeMge 11-133)
P0389 (54) -- Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor B Circuit Intermittent Interruotion ON (see oaoe 11-136)
P0401 (80) 0 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Insufficient Flow ON (see oaoe 11-374)
P0404 (12) .0 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Control Circuit Range/Performance ON (see page 11-376)
Problem
P0406 (12) -- Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Position Sensor Circuit High ON (see page 11-379)
Voltq~e
P0420 (165) 0 Rear Bank Catalvst Svstem Efficiencv Below Threshold (Bank 1) ON (see oaoe 11-368)
P0430 (166) 0 Front Bank Catalvst Svstem Efficiencv Below Threshold (Bank 2) ON (see paoe 11-368)
P0443 (92) -- Evaoorative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 11-393)
P0451 (91) 0 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-397)
P0452 (91) 0 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-398)
P0453 (911 0 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-401)
P0455 (90) 0 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Very Large Leak Detected ON (see page 11-404)
P0456 (90) 0 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Very Small Leak Detected ON (see page 11-404)
P0457 (90) -- Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Leak Detected/Fuel Fill Cap Loose OFF (see page 11-407)
orMissin~
P0461 (121) -- Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge Sending Unit) Circuit Range/Performance OFF (see page 11-314)
Problem
P0462 (121) -- Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gau~e Sendin~ Unit) Circuit Low Voltaoe OFF (seeMg~ 11-315)
P0463 (121) -- Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gaug~ Sendil'llt Unit) Circuit High Volta~e OFF (seeMge 11-317)
P0496 (92) 0 Evaoorative Emission (EVAP) Svstem Hioh Pur~e Flow ON (see oaoe 11-409)
P0497 (90) 0 Evaoorative Emission (EVAP) Svstem Low Pur~e Flow ON (see oaoe 11·410)
P0498 (117) -- Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Control Circuit ON (see page 11-414)
Low Voltage
P0499 (117) -- Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Control Circuit ON (see page 11-417)
High Voltage
P0506 (14) 0 Idle Control System RPM Lower than Expected ON (see page 11-3011
P0507 (14) 0 Idle Control System RPM Higher than Expected ON (see page 11-303)
P050A(167) 0 Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance Problem ON (seepage 11-141)
P050B (167) 0 Cold Start Ignition Timing Performance Problem ON (see page 11-143)
P0562 (34) -- Charging SYstem Low Voltage OFF (seepage 11-146)
P0563 (34) -- Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Power Source Circuit Unexpected OFF (see page 11-147)
Voltaoe
P0602 (196) -- Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Pro~rammin~ Error ON (see oaoe 11-150)
P060A (131) -- Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (AfT System) Internal Control Module ON (see page 11-150)
Malfunction
P0615 (198) -- Starter Cut Relav STRLDCircuit Malfunction OFF (see page 11-1511
P0627 (165) -- Fuel Pump Control Module System Malfunction ON (see page 11-320)
P062F (131) -- Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Internal Control Module Keep Alive ON (see page 11-153)
Memory (KAM) Error
P0630 (139) -- VIN Not Programmed or Mismatch ON (see page lF153)
P0685 (135) 0 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Power Control Circuit/Internal Circuit ON (see page 11-155)
Malfunction
NOTE: The above DTCs are mdlcated when the PGM-FI system IS selected m the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. Ifthe MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the AfT
system, and check for automatic transmission DTCs .
• 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS.
* 2: The D indicator and the MIL may come on at the same time.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-11
OTe Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
are system
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the AfT
• 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS.
11-12 BACK
DTC Two Drive Cycle Detection Item MIL Note
(MIL indication ") Detection
P2251 (155) -- Rear Air Fuel Ratio (NF) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VS Circuit High ON (see page 11-192)
Voltaoe
P2252 (155) -- Rear Air Fuel Ratio (NF) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low ON (see page 11-194)
Voltaoe
P2254 (156) Front Air Fuel Ratio(NF) Sensor.(Bank 2, Sensor 1) VS Circuit High ON (see page 11-192)
Voltaoe
P2255 (156) -- Front Air Fuel Ratio (NF) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low ON (see page 11-194)
Voltage
P2270 (161) 0 Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Bank 1, ON (see page 11-196)
Sensor 2) Circuit Signal Stuck Lean
P2271 (161) 0 Rear Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Bank 1, ON (see page 11-196)
Sensor 2) Circuit Signal Stuck Rich
P2272 (162) 0 Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Bank 2, ON (see page 11-196)
Sensor 2) Circuit Sional Stuck Lean
P2273 (162) 0 Front Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) (Bank 2, ON (see page 11-196)
Sensor 2) Circuit Sional Stuck Rich
P2279 (109) 0 Intake Air System Leak ON (see paoe 11-390)
P2413 (12) 0 Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Malfunction ON (see paoe 11-381)
P2422 (117) 0 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Close Malfunction ON (see paoe 11-418)
P2610 (132) Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Internal Power Off Timer Malfunction ON (see page 11-197)
P2646 (22) -- Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-288)
P2647 (22) -- Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-291)
P2648 (21) -- Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-294)
P2649 (21) -- Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-296)
P2AOO (157) 0 Rear Air Fuel Ratio (NF) Sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) Circuit Rangel ON (see page 11-198)
Performance Problem
P2A03 (158) 0 Front Air Fuel Ratio (NF) Sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) Circuit Rangel ON (see page 11-198)
Performance Problem
U0028 (126) -- F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF) ON (see paoe 11-199)
U0114 (126) -- F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-SH-AWD Control OFF (see page 11-200)
Unit)
U0122 (126) -- F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-VSA Modulator- OFF (see page 11-203)
Control Unit)
U0155 (126) F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-Gauge Control ON (see page 11-205)
Module)
U0300 (131) -- PGM-FI System and AfT System Program Version Mismatch ON (see page 11-207)
NOTE: The above follOWing DTCs are Indicated when the PGM-FI system IS selected In the HDS.
Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the AfT
* 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS.
BACK 11-13
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the HDS. If there is no.
DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.
S-'lI1!~tom . Diagnostic procedure Also check for

El)gine will not start 1. Test the battery (see page 22-76). • Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Test the starter (see page 4-9). • No ignition spark
3. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-333). • Intake air leaks
• Locked up engine
• Broken timing belt
• Contaminated fuel
Engine will not start Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see page 11-222).
(MIL comes on and stays on,
or never comes on at all, no
DTCs set)
MIL comes on and stays on, Troubleshootthe MIL circuit (seepage 11-222).
or nevercomes onat all, no
DTCsset
Engine will not start Check the immobilizer system.
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes) , '
Engine starts but stalls Check the immobilizer sy~tem. • Jumped timing
<
immediately belt
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set, • Intake air leaks
immobilizer indicator stays • Contaminated fuel
on or flashes) • Weak spark
Engine is hard to start, 1. Test the battery (see page .22-76). • Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) , 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-333). • Intake air leaks
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363). • Contaminated fuel
• Weak spark
.< • Restricted exhaust
Cold fast idle too low 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). • Correct valve
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the idlespeed (see page 11-310). adjustment
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363). • Fuel contamination
Cold fast idle too high 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). Intake vacuum leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-310).
3. Do the throttle position learning check (see page
11-362).
Idle speed fluctuates 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). Intake vacuum leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-310).
3. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-362).
After warming up, idle speed 1. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit Correct valve
is below specification without (see page 11-305). adjustment
load 2. Troubleshoot the AlC signal circuit (see page 11-304).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 3. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-362).
After warming up, idle speed 1. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit Intake vacuum leaks
is above specification without (see page 11-305).
load 2. Inspect the APP sensor (see page 11-285).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 3. Troubleshoot the alternator AlC signal circuit
(see page 11-304).
4. Troubleshoot the power steering switch signal circuit
(see page 11-306).
11-14 BACK
Symptom Diagnostic procedure . Also check for
After warming up, idle speed 1. 00 the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). Power steering
drops when steering wheel is 2. Troubleshootthe PSP switch signal circuit (see page system
turning 11-306).
(MIL works OK, no OTCs set) 3. 00 the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-362).
Low power Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-333). • Low compression
(MIL works OK; no OTCs set) • Incorrect camshaft
timing
• Incorrect engine oil
level
• Restricted exhaust
• Fuel contamination
Engine stalls 1. 00 the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). • Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no OTCs set) 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-333). • Faulty harness and
3. Check the idle speed (see page 11-310). sensor
4. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal connections
circuit (see page 11-308). • Fuel contamination
Oifficultto refuel 1. Check the fuel vent tube between the EVAP canister • Malfunctioning gas
(MIL works OK, no OTCs set) and the fuel tank. station filling
2. Check the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube between nozzle.
the fuel pipe and the fuel tank. • Filler neck
.. 3. Inspect the fuel filler neck for restrictions. restriction
4. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-347). • Fuel tank vapor
control valve
Fuel overflows during 1. Inspect the fuel filler neck for restrictions. Malfunctioning gas
refueling 2. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-347). station filling nozzle.
(No OTCs set)
HOS does not communicate Troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page 11-223).
with the PCM or the vehicle
Fuel cap warning message Troubleshoot the fuel cap warning message system
comes on and stays on (see page 11-421).
(MIL works OK, no OTCs set)
BACK 11-15
System Description
Electronic Control System

The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the powertrain control module (PCM).
Self-diagnosis
ThePCM detects a signal failure from a sensor or from another control unit and stores a Temporary DTC or a DTC in
erasable memory (RAM). Depending on the failure, a DTC is stored in either the first or the second drive cycle (for DTC
P0457, the DTC is set in the beginning ofthe third drive cycle). When a DTC is stored, the PCM turns on the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) by sending a command to the gauge control module .
• One Drive Cycle Detection Method

When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit, the PCM stores a DTC for the
failure and turns on the MIL immediately .
• Two Drive Cycle Detection Method

When an abnormality occUrs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit in the first drive cycle, the PCM
stores a Temporary DTC for the failure. The MIL does not come on at this time. If the failure continues in the second
drive cycle, the PCM stores a DTC in erasable memory and turns on the MIL.
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit, the PCM ignores that signal and
substitutes a pre-programmed value that allows the engine to continue running. This causes a DTC to be stored and
the MIL to come on.
MIL Bulb Check and Readiness Code Condition

When the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the PCM turn on the MIL by sending a command to the gauge control
module to check the bulb condition. If any readiness codes are not set to complete, the MIL flashes five times. If all
readiness codes are set to complete, the MIL goes off.
Self Shut Down (SSD) Mode

After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the PCM stays on (up to 15 minutes). If the PCM connector is disconnected
during this time, the PCM may be damaged. To cancel this mode, disconnect the negative cable from the battery or
jump the SCS line with the HDS after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
11-16 BACK
PCM Electrical Connections
® IGNITION COIL
"V® :::::::t RELAY
-I
1
ELD J.V'
(j) 'W,
~
<3~
~
11<1
"--"
®
.lJ..
- PGM-FIMAIN
RELAY 2 (FUEL PUMP)
AlC COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY
~
10-1
Lo~
'W
t::11
<!l PGM-FIMAIN
RELAY 1
®
10-1
fW'I
RADIATOR
-'- FAN RELAY
--
t~
~
rw
®
®
~
IG~__ >1
IG2//+ B
@)
CONDENSER
FAN RELAY
'-0-- r-- H'
ST
1.
-- Lor- B IGNITION
SWITCH
r' w IG1 HOT in ON (II)
and START (III)
M AIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
@t
CDI No. 31G MAIN
(50 AI
®No. 3 R/B1
(30 AI
®No. 11 +B STOP & @
HORN (15AI
®No.1 BATIERY
¥-l
'w..,
:~c6
(120 AI
®5 No.4 +B BACKUP/ ~ ~ ~ @)
ACC MAIN(40 AI C D E F
PGM·FI
UNDER-HOOD SUBRELAY
~,
PCM
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
@6 No. 91GN COIL+ '--- B31GP IMOFPRA11
(15A)
(j)
7 No. 81GP (15 AI
PG1 B40
@
@No. 11 A/F SENSOR ~ roJ
@
(AFHT+I
3 No. +B FAN TIMER
B421G1 PG2B1
~
(7.5 AI MRLYA6
@No. 10 THROTILE :>--- ~ ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CONTROL CONTROL
(DBW+U15AI A10 ELD SUBRLY A40 SYSTEM
(ETCS) CONTROL
A13 ACC ETCSRLY A29 RELAY
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX: @
@8 No. 19 FUEL PUMP
:-<r-~
ASFANH PGMETCSC1
(20 AI
no ~
~
9 No. 18 ACG AI
10 No. 10 IGN SOL (15 AI A1VBSOL2 STSA31 'W
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH A4FANL IG1ETCSC4 I
IG2
cb~
FUSE HOLDER 1 CUT RELAY
®
liSTS (7.5 A)
./
(cant'd)
BACK
11-17
System Description (cont'd)
PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)
r ./
C MAP SENSOR
No.1 INJECTOR VCC1 B36
r vv
B41NJ1 MAPB35
~1
SG1 B34
No.2 INJECTOR
roo B81NJ2
N
VCC2C12
No.3 INJECTOR
r'w B71NJ3 SG2C16
No. 4 INJECTOR
roo
~c±J~
B61NJ4
No. 5 INJECTOR
rw B51NJ5
No. 6 INJECTOR
ECTSENSOR 1
r' w B91NJ6 ECT1 C32
~
'''''
CMPSENSOR
R S KNOCK SENSOR
-----~~:~~:
KSC47 -.---- ----_._-
--
B46CMP
EGRPC34
B45CKPA
'00,
EGRC10 I~ EGRVALVE
-
~
n"""
ECT2A21
~ ECT SENSOR 2
B44CKPB ,---
>-- VCC6C11
I
CKPSENSOR
AlB
,. IMTMB19
'--
V W IMT+C48
IMT-C49 ~
IMT
./ ACTUATOR
X
BACK
11-18
E J Q K
VSB1 B13 ---------------------- ----- ----- ------------ '1

EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
l~ C40PCS
VCENTB1 B15
IPB1831
AFSHTCB1 C6
tJ I REAR A/F SENSOR
1
(BANK 1, SENSOR 1
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
rr rw A22VSV
ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL VSB2B14 ---------------------- ----- ----- ------------ ........

SOLENOID VALVE '1
T
I~.l
ALTERNATOR
A12MCS
VCENTB2B24
IPB2B32
AFSHTCB2C8
tJ I FRONT A/F SENSOR
-.J
~ (BANK2,SENSOR 11
B2VBSOL
@ C42ALTL SH02SB1 B25 ---------------------- ----- ----- ------------ -,

C44ALTF S02SHTCB1 C5 ,
T0"- ~
'-
~
C43ALTC
SH02SB2B16
T
-----------------1---- ------------ ------------
REAR SECONDARY H02S
(BANK 1, SENSOR 21
I~I
SPARK B29IGPLS1 S02SHTCB2 C7
PLUG ICM I
FRONT SECONDARY HO2S
No.1 IGNITION COIL IBANK 2, SENSOR 21
~.
S~A1.<
T
PLUG I~I ICM I
830IGPLS2
W T V
No. 2 IGNITION COIL po. F • po.
T0 - t--Ilr
I~I
S PARK B22IGPLS3
PLUG ICM I
LG1 C41
No.3 IGNITION COIL
..!.
LG2B41
-
T0 -
..!.
S PARK
PLUG
~I ICM I
B231GPLS4
- ROCKER ARM OIL
PRESSURE SWITCH
No. 4 IGNITION COIL • ___ w_
VTPSWB20
T0- t--Ilr 'J
I~I
S PARK B11IGPLS5
PLUG ICM I
ROCKER ARM OIL
No. 5 IGNITION COIL CONTROL SOLENOID
+~-
T0- t--Ilr
I VTS839
I~
S PARK B121GPLS6
PLUG ICM I I
No. 6 IGNITION COIL
... l... .-'
(cont'd)
BACK 11-19
· .' ~ ~ .
FTPSENSOR
~
H
BRAKE PEDAL
=r?f A39FTP
BKSWA8
POSITION SWITCH
--:oJ
~ Z
BKSWNCA7
-------- I
V"
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE VSSOUTA30 To

NAVIGATION UNIT
------------------------------- ------.-. A48CANH
I I ~ ---_._ .... _.. _..... _.... _. --- ......... A49CANL
E
,
- S-NETSVA46 ~
To
IMMOBIUZER UNIT
A44WEN
DATAuNK
CONNECTOR
A32SCS
To
LG3A41 IMMOBIUZER UNIT
I
PSPSWITCH
- ~ PSPSWA38
- --------v -I
- C4S0PSW -4-
-
1 -
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
TPSENSOR
An
B18VCCS
B17TPSA VCC3A24
t:' Z
~A
B[h
B26TPSB APSAA18
B33SGS SG3A26 I
I
~
C2ETCSM+ VCC4A25
~B
C3ETCSM- APSBA19
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR APPSENSOR
SG4A27
THROTTLE
BODY
11-20 BACK
".,-
~
~I
...
A16ATPP
ATFTC33
"'
ATFTEMPERATURESENSOR
l
C25ATPR 1 I
SHAC20
M T
• R II C26ATPN SHIFT SOLENOID
I
-'--
'-
VALVE A
~~ r- C17 ATPD
SHBC28
r
--- ~a-@
~o-§
r-- C46ATPD3
T
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEB
I
-'--
SHCC39
j
, uu
~ 1
J
C19ATPRVS SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEC
-'--
C18ATPFWD 1 I
T rolf'
SHDCS
I
J..
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH 1- SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVED -
4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID A/TCLUTC H
PRESSURE SWITCH LSAC21
-...- ~ PRESSURE
CONTROL
C370P4SW SOLENOID
.1. .lJ.... VALVE A
- 3RDCLUTCH LSBB10 A/TCLUTC H

TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH ~ PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
-...- C380P3SW
.lJ.... VALVEB
J.. T LSCB21 A/TCLUTC H
- 2ND CLUTCH ~ PRESSURE

CONTROL
SOLENOID
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH .lJ.... VALVEC
-...- 1 -
C270PZSW
J..
- A47SMODE o~
,.....c-.. I
~~~
r~_ ~
k
A36SUP
NMB37
A37SDN
INPUT SHAFT
~ ~
IMAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
SHIFT LEVER
-
....
~
To
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID AZSLS
NCB38
- ~
I SG6C15
OUTPUT SHAFT
IATSENSOR ICOUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
AZ1IAT
~
I
AZOVG+
I
'-----'
A9VG-
MAFSENSOR
(cant'd)
BACK 11-21
L M A
./
STARTER CUT
RELAY 2
To STARTER
MOTOR
~
il!V FUEL PUMP
CONTROL MODULE
FPCDA42
FPCA43
A3STRLY
~ A28STRLD
SENSOR
IBARO
(Built Into the
,I
.....~
- -
10
PCM)
B AA
FUEL PUMP
STARTER CUT
RELAY 1
Lol
rw ,
AUXILIARY UNDER·DASH
FUSE HOLDER 2
CDSTRLD (7.5 A)
/r------------------------------------------------~------------------------~~
PCM A (O)(49P) PCM B (.6.)(49P) PCM C (O)(49P)
111 2 3 4151617 8 9110'- J1 2 3 4 I 5 I6 I7 8 9110 '- J1 2 3 4 I5 I 6 I7 8 9 110 I

111 f213 VVI16VI18 19201211 111 1213 14115116117118 19 201211 12V /115116117118191201211
111
122 V 24 ><125IX 26 271281 ~ 122 2324 ><.1251>< 26VVI VV 24 ><.1251>< 261271281
129 30 31 321/1/1/36 37361391 129 30 31 32133134135136 37361391 ~ 1/1/1/321331341/1/37361391
1140 41 42 43144VI46 47 461491 140 41 42 VI 44 I 45J45 / // 140 41 42 43144145146 47 46 49
~ L...--..I L...--..I
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
11-22 BACK
Vacuum Hose Routing
ilL
INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING
ACfUATOfI EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAP) CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
.,
FRONT OF VEHICLE
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
(MAP) SENSOR
(cont'd)
BACK 11-23
Vacuum Distribution
®
@
•
ATMOSPHERE
(j)
~~r-
+
ENGINE
COOLANT
CD FRONT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 2 (BANK 2, SENSOR 1) @ AIR CLEANER
® REAR AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 (BANK 1, SENSOR 1) @ EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE and
® FRONT SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 POSITION SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S) (BANK 2, SENSOR 2) ® POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
® REAR SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 @ FRONT WARM UP THREE WAY
(SECONDARY H02S) (BANK 1, SENSOR 2) CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WU-TWC) (BANK 2)
® MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR @ REAR WARM UP THREE WAY
® ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 1 CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WU-TWC) (BANK 1)
(j) MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR/ @ UNDER-FLOOR THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC)
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (lAT) SENSOR ® EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE VALVE
® KNOCK SENSOR @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
® THROTTLE BODY @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER VENT SHUT
@ INJECTOR VALVE
® FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ® FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR
@ FUEL FILTER @ FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
@ FUEL PUMP @ INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING (lMT) VALVE
@ FUEL TANK ® RESONATOR
11-24 BACK
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (0) (49P)
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is about 12 V.
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal

number
1 WHT VBSOL2 (POWER SOURCE Power source for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
FOR SOLENOID VALVES) valve
2 PNK SLS (SHIFT LOCK Drives shift lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II), in the P position, brake
SOLENOID) pedal pressed and accelerator released: about 0 V
3 LTGRN STRL¥.(STARTER RELAY) Drives starter cut relay 2 With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
4 WHT FANL(RADIATOR FAN Drives condenser fan relay With condenser fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) With condenser fan stopped: battery voltage
5 PUR FANH (RADIATOR FAN Drives radiator fan relay With radiator fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) With radiator fan stoDDed: battery voltaae
6 GRN MRLYIPGM-FI MAIN Drives PGM-FI main relay 1 With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
RELAY 1) power source for the DTC With ignition switch OFF: battery voltage
memory)
7 BRN BKSWNC(BRAKEPEDAL Detects brake pedal With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal released: battery voltage.
With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
pressed: about 0 V
8 LTGRN BKSW (BREAK PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: about 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal With brakep!!dal pressed: battQry voltage
(cont'd)
BACK 11-25


number
9 BLK VG- (MASS AIR FLOW Ground for MAF sensor
(MAF) SENSOR -SIDE) signal
10 ORN ELD (ELECTRICAL LOAD Detects ELD signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1-4.8 V
DETECTOR (ELD)) (deoendina on electrical load)
11 BRN IMOFPR (IMMOBILIZER Drives PGM-FI main relay 2 oV for 2 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
FUEL PUMP RELAY) (II) then battery voltaae
12 BLU MCS (ENGINE MOUNT Drives engine mount At idle: about 0 V
CONTROL SOLENOID control solenoid valve About idle: battery voltage
VALVE)
13 RED ACC (AIC CLUTCH RELAY) Drives AlC clutch relay With compressor ON: about 0 V
With comoressor OFF: battery voltaae
16 GRN ATPP (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In P position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH P switch P position signal In any position other than P position:
POSITION) battery voltage
18 PUR APSA(ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor A signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
PEDAL POSITION (APP) pressed: about 4.7 V
SENSOR A) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
released: about 1.0 V
11-26 BACK

number
19 LTGRN APSB(ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor B signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
PEDAL POSITION (APP) pressed: abOut 2.3 v
SENSOR B) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
released: about 0.5 V
20 RED VG+ (MASS AIR FLOW Detects MAF sensor signal At idle: about 1.1 1.6 V (between VG+ terminal
(MAF) SENSOR +SIDE) and VG- terminal)
21 PUR ECT2 (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor 2 signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.BV
TEMPERATURE SENSOR (depending on engine coolant temperature)
(ECn SENSOR 2)
22 LTGRN VSV (EVAPORATIVE Drives EVAP canister vent With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
EMISSION (EVAP) shut valve
CANISTER VENT SHUT
VALVE)
24 RED VCC3 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
25 ORN VCC4 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltaae
26 WHT SG3 (SENSOR GROUND> Sensor around Less than 1.0 V at all times
27 GRN SG4 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor around Less than 1.0 V at all times
(cont'd)
BACK 11-27
Terminal side offemale terminals

number
28 PNK STRLD Detects starter cut relav 2 With starter ON: batterv voltaae
29 BLU ETCSRLY (ELECTRONIC Drives electronic throttle With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
THROTTLE CONTROL control system (ETCS)
SYSTEM (ETCS) CONTROL control relay
RELAY)
30 BLU VSSOUT (VEHICLE SPEED Sends output shaft Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
SIGNAL OUTPUT) (countershaft) speed sensor
sianal
31 LTBLU STS (STARTER SWITCH Detects starter switch signal With starter switch ON (II): battery voltage
SIGNAL> With starter switch OFF: about 0 V
32 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check signal With the service check signal shorted with the HDS:
SIGNAL) abootOV
With the service check signal opened: about 5.0 V
36 BLU SUP (UPSHIFT SWITCH) Detects upshift switch In M position and shift lever pushed toward upshift
signal position: about 0 V
In M positio'n and shift lever in N position:
batterv voltaoe
37 GRN SON (DOWNSHIFT SWITH) Detects downshift switch In M position and shift lever pushed toward
signal downshift position: about 0 V
In M position and shift lever in N position:
batterv voltaae
11-28 BACK
. ;,Terminal side of female· terminals
Terminal Wire color Terminal name . Description Signal . ,

number "
38 PNK PSPSW'(POWER STEERING Detects PSP switch signal At idle with steering wheel in straight ahead
PRESSURE SWITCH position: about 0 V
-
SIGNAL) ,. At idle with steering wheel at full lock:
.I ~ battery voltage
39 LTGRN FTP (FUEL TANK Detects FTP sensor signal With 'ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill cap
PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR removed: about 2.5 V
40 RED SUBRLY (PGM-FI Drives PGM-FI subrelay Wrthignition switch~N (II): aboutO V
SUBRELAY)
41 BRN LG3 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for the PCM Less. than 1.0 V at all time
42 LTBLU FPCD (FUEL PUMP Detects fuel pump control With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
CONTROL MODULE diagnosis At idle: about 10.0 V
DIAGNOSIS)
43 PNK FPC (FUEL PUMP Detects fuel pump control With ignition switch ON: pulses
CONTROL) signal With ignition switch OFF: about 0 V
44 GRY WEN (WRITE ENABLE Detects write enable signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SIGNAL)
46 LTGRN S-NET5V (SERIAL Sends serial With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
COMMUNICATION FOR communication signal With ignition switch OFF: about 5.0 V
IMMOBILIZER)
(cont'd)
BACK
,'0, :0v.': .. "
FIiI~lo.nd Emissions Systems

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (0) (49P). ' ~. ,
Tenninel Wirecolori j'" Terminal name Description Signal .'

number
47 ·PU.R' , , SMODE (SEQUENTIAL Detects sequential In M position:a:bout O. V .
SPORT SHIFT MODE) sportshift mode switch In any position ,other than M position:
:;,:' .,= ' sianal batterY voltaae
48 WHT CANH(CAN. ., Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
. COMMUNICATION SIGNAL sigl'lal ;
HIGH) •
49 RED,· ,CANL(CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL signal
LOW)' ",
iii . ~'.,.:
',I !'
i('
BACK
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (.6.) (49P)

number
1 BlK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than ·1.0 V at all times
circuit
2 BlK/YEl VBSOl (POWER SOURCE Power source for solenoid With ignition switch ON {II): battery voltage
FOR SOLENOID VALVES) valve
3 YEL/BlK IGP (POWER SOURCE) Power source for PCM With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
circuit
4 BRN INJ1 (No. 1 INJECTOR) Drives No.1 injector At idle: duty controlled
5 BlK/RED INJ5 iNo. 5 INJECTOR) Drives No.5 iniector With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
6 VEL INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR) Drives No.4 iniector
7 BlU INJ3 (No. 3 INJECTOR) Drives No.3 iniector
8 RED INJ2 (No.2 INJECTOR) Drives No.2 iniector
9 WHT/BLU INJ6 (No. 6 INJECTOR) Drives No.6 iniector
10 BRN/WHT LSB (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control,solenoid valve B
SOLENOID VALVE B) .
(cont'd)
BACK 11-31
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is about 12 v.
Terminel Wire color Terminal name Description Signal

number
11 BLK/RED IGPLS5 (No. 5 IGNITION Drives No.5 ignition coil With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
COILPULSEI With engine running: pulses
12 BRN/WHT IGPLS6 (No. 6 IGNITION Drives No.6 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
13 BLU +
VSB1 (VS CELL BANK 1) Detects the rear A/F sensor With engine running: about 3.4 4.8 V
(BANK 1, sensor 1) VS SELL
signal
14 RED/BLU VSB2 (VS CELL + BANK 2) Detects front A/F sensor With fully warmed up engine running:
(BANK 1, sensor 1) VS SELL about 3.4-4.8 V
signal
15 RED VCENTB1 (VIRTUAL Reference voltage supply With fully warmed up engine running:
GROUND BANK 1) for rear A/F sensor (BANK about 3.4-3.8 V
1 sensor 1)
16 WHT SH02SB2 (FRONT Detects front secondary With throttle fully opened from idle with fully
SECONDARY HEATED H02S (Bank 2, sensor 2) warmed up engine: about 0.6 V
OXYGEN SENSOR (FRONT signal With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V
SECONDARY H02S) BANK
2 SENSOR 2)
17 RDE/BLK TPSA (THROTTLE Detects TP sensor A signal With throttle fully open: about 3.9 V
POSITION ITP) SENSOR A) With throttle fullv closed: about 0.9 V
11-32 BACK

number
18 BLU ' VCC5 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch·ON (II): about 5.0 V
volt~e -,
19 WHT/BLK IMTM (INTAKE MANIFOLD Detects IMT valve position With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
TUNING (lMT) VALVE With engine speed above 3,800 rpm: about 5.0 V
MONITOR)
20 BLU/WHT VTPSW (ROCKER ARM OIL Detects rocker arm oil With engine at low speed: about 0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) pressure switch With engine at high speed: battery voltaae
21 GRN/RED LSC (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With 'ignition switch ON (II): current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve C
SOLENOID VALVE C)
22 WHT/BLU IGPLS3 (No.3 IGNITION Drives No.3 ignition coil With ignition slivitch ON (II): about 0 V
COILPULSEI With engine running: pulses
23 BRN IGPLS4 (No. 4 IGNITION Drives No.4 ignition coil
COILPULSEI
24 RED/WHT VCENTB2 (VIRTUAL Reference voltage supply With fully warmed up engine at idle:
GROUND BANK 2) for front NF sensor (Bank 2, about 3;4-4,8 V
sensor 1) , '.
. ..
(cont'd)
BACK
11-33
Fuel 'and Emissions Systems
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is about 12 v.

Terminal Wire color . Terminal name Description Signal
number
25 GRN SH02SB1 (REAR Detects rear secondary With throttle fully opened from idle with fully
SECONDARY HEATED H02S (Bank 1, sensor 2) warmed up engine: about 0.6 V
OXYGEN SENSOR (REAR signal With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V
SECONDARY H02S) BANK
1 SENSOR2)
26 RED/BLU TPSB (THROTTLE Detects TP sensor B signal With throttle fully open: about 4.1 V
POSITION (TP) SENSOR B) With throttle fully closed: about 1.7 V
29 YEL/GRN IGPLS1 (No.1 IGNITION Drives No.1 ignition coil With ignition sWitch ON (II): about 0 V
COIL PULSE) With engine running: pulses
30 BLU/RED IGPLS2 (No.2 IGNITION Drives No.2 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
31 GRN IPB1 (lPCELL+ BANK 1) Detects rear A/F sensor With engine running: about 2.0-5.6 V
(Bank 1 sensor 1) oumo cell
32 GRN/RED IPB2 (lP CELL+ BANK 2) Detects front A/F sensor With engine running: about 2.0-5.6 V
(Bank 2 sensor 1) oumo cell
33 GRN SG5 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
34 GRNIWHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
35 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 3.0 V
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE At idle: about 1.0 V (depending on engine speed)
(MAP) SENSOR)
11-34 BACK
NOTE: Standard battery voltage is about about 12 V.

number
36 YELJRED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference Ignition switch ON: about 5.0 V
voltage
37 RED NM (INPUT SHAFT Detects input shaft With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V or about 5.0 V
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED (mainshaft) speed sensor With engine at idling in N position: about 2.5 V
SENSOR) signals
38 BLU NC (OUTPUT SHAFT Detects output shaft With ignition switch ON (II) and front wheels rotated
(COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED (countershaft) speed sensor by hand: pulses
SENSOR) signal
39 GRN/YEL VTS (ROCKER ARM OIL Drives rocker arm oil At idle: about 0 V
CONTROL SOLENOID) control solenoid
40 BLK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
41 BRN/YEL LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
42 BLK/YEL IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
44 BLU/RED CKPB (CRANKSHAFT Detects CKP sensor B signal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
B)
45 BLU CKPA (CRANKSHAFT Detects CKP sensor A signal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CKP) SENSOR
A)
46 YEL CMP (CAMSHAFT Detect CMP sensor signal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CMP) SENSOR)
(cont'd)
BACK
11-35
Fuel'and Emissions Systems

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (0) (49P)

number
1 BLK PGMETCS (POWER Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
GROUND ETCS) circuit
2 BLU ETCSM+ (THROTTLE Drives throttle actuator With ignition'switch ON (II): about 0 V
ACTUATOR +SIDE)
3 GRN ETCSM- (THROTTLE Ground for throttle actuator With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
ACTUATOR -SIDE) ,
4 YEL/GRN IG1ETCS (IGNITION Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SIGNAL ETCS)
5 BLK/WHT S02SHTCB1 (REAR Drives rear secondary With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SECONDARY HEATED H02S heater (Bank 1, With fully warmed up engine running:
OXYGEN SENSOR(REAR sensor 2) duty controlled
SECONDARY H02S)
HEATER)
6 BLK/WHT AFSHTCB1 (REAR AIR FUEL Drives rear A/F sensor With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
RAITO (REAR A/F) SENSOR heater (Bank 1, sensor 1) , With fully warmed up engine running: about 0 V or
HEATER CONTROL BANK pulses
1 SENSOR 1)
11-36
BACK

number
7 GRN/RED S02SHTCB2 (FRONT Drives front secondary With ignition switch ON (Ill: battery voltage
SECONDARY HEATED H02S heater (Bank 2, With fully warmed up engine running:
OXYGEN SENSOR sensor 2) duty controlled
(SECONDARY H02S)
HEATER)
8 GRN/WHT AFSHTCB2 (FRONT AIR Drives front A/F sensor With ignition switch ON (Ill: battery voltage
FUEL RATIO (FRONT A/F) heater (Bank 2, sensor 1) With fully warmed up engine running: about 0 V or
SENSOR HEATER pulses
CONTROL BANK 2,
SENSOR 1)
9 GRN/RED SHD (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve With engine running in N position, and in D position
VALVED) D during no lock-up condition: about 0 V
With engine running in P and R positions, and in D
position during no lock-up condition:
battery voltage
10 BLU/RED EGR (EXHAUST GAS Drives EGR valve With EGR operating: duty controlled
RECIRCULATION (EGR) With EGR not operating: about 0 V
VALVE)
11 YEL/BLU VCC6 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltaae
12 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (Ill: about 5.0 V
voltaae
15 GRNIYEL SG6 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor around Less than 1.0 V at all times
(cont'd)
BACK 11-37

Terminal side affemale terminals
Terminal Wire color Terminal name . Description Signal

number
16 GRN/YEL SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
17 YELJGRN ATPD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D) switch D position signal In any position other than D position:
input battlill' voltage
18 BLU/YEL ATPFWD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D and D3 positions: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D/D3 switch D, D3 position signal In 'any position other than D and D3 positions:
POSITION) batterv voltaae
19 RED/WHT ATPRVS (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In p, R, N positions: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R switch P, R, N position In any position other than P, R, N positions:
POSITION) signal input batterY voltaae
20 ·BLU/YEL SHA (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve With engine running in D3 position, and D position
VALVE A) A (in 1st, 2nd, or 5th gears): battery voltage
With engine running in P, R, N positions, and D
position (in 3rd and 4th gears): about 0 V
21 RED LSA (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid va lYe A
SOLENOIDVALVEA)
24 RED/YEL IAT (INTAKE AIR Detects IAT sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1-4.8 V
TEMPERATURE (IAT) (depending on intake air temperature)
SENSOR)
25 WHT ATPR (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R) switch R position signal In any position other than R position:
input battery voltaae
BACK
11-38
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (0) (44P) ',-;\.', ,.. ,

'. , ,
number '.
26 RED/BLK ATPN (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In N position: about 0 V "
RANGE SWITCH N) switch N position signal In any position other than N position:
input batterv ·voltaae. ;
27 BLU/BLK' OP2SW (2ND CLUTCH Detects 2nd clutch Witl\ ignition·switch ON.(II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 2nd clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch inout • With 2nd clutch oressura: about 0 V
28 GRN/WHT SHB (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve With engine running in p, R, N, D3 positions, and D
VALVE B)
,
B - position (in 1st, 2nd; or 3rd gears): battery voltage
With engine running in D position (in 4th and 5th
gears): about 0 V .. ..
32 RED/WHT ECT1 (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor 1 signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.8V
TEMPERATURE SENSOR (depending on engine coolant temperature)
(ECT) SENSOR 1)
33 BLUIVEL ~TFT (ATF TEMPERATURE Detects AFT temperature' With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.2-4.0 V (about
.. . SENSOR) signal 1.8 V at operating temperature) (depending on ATF
temperature) .
34 WHT/BLK EGRP (EXHAUST GAS' Drives EGR valve position With engine running: about 1.2-3.0 V (depending
RECIRCULATION (EGR) sensor signal on 'EGR valve lift)
)
VALVE POSITION'SENSOR)
37 BLUIVEL OP4SW (4TH CLUTCH Detects 4th clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Witho.ut 4th clutch pressure: about 5.0V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch inout • With 4th clutch pressure: about 0 V
(cont'd)
BACK 11-39
:-:1:
,,~-
, , ",' ,
F.UC;d.hd Emissions Systems
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (0) (49P)"
Terminal side of,female terminals

number
38 BLU!WHT OP3SW (3M CLUTCH ,Detects,3rd clutch .
With ignitionswitch ON (II):
,
, TRANSMISSION FLUID ;. transmission fluid pressure • Without3rd clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch il'lQut • With 3rd clutch~essure: about 0 V
39 GRN SHC (SHIF.lSOLENOID . Drives shift solenoid valve With engine running in o position (in 1st, 3rd, and
VALVEC)- .C I" <1 5th gears}: battery voltage
, , With engine running in P, R, N, 03 positions, and 0
.-, ., position (in 2nd and 4th gears): about 0 V
40 I"~ REDNEL PCS (I;VAPORATIYE Drives EVAP canister purge With engine running, engine coolant below 140 'f
EMISSION (EVAP) valve (60 'C): battery voltage
CANISTER PURGE VALVE) With engine running, engine coolant above 140 'f
\ (60 'C): duty controlled
41 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
42.: \, WHT/BLU ALTL (ALTERNATOR L Detects alternator L signal With ignition switch ON (Iff: about 0 V
, . -SIGNAL) "
With eflgine running: battlillL voltage
43 WHT/GRN ALTC (ALTERNATOR Sends alternator control With fully warmed up engine running battery
,CONTROL) sianal voitqge (d~endill9. on electrical load)
44 WHT/RED ALTF (ALTERNATORFR Detects alternator FR signal With engine' running: about 0 5.0 V (depending on
SIGNAL) electrical load}
45 BULNEL ' OPSW(OIL PRESSURE Detects engine oil pressure With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SWITCH) signal With engine running:. battery voltage
11-40 BACK

number
46 RED ATPD3 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission switch In D3 position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D3) D3 signal input In any position other than D3 position:
battery voltaae
47 RED/BLU KS (KNOCK SENSOR) Detects knock sensor sianal With enaine knockina: Dulses
48 WHT/BLU IMT+ (INTAKE MANIFOLD Drives IMT actuator With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
TUNING (lMT) ACTUATOR
+SIDE)
49 WHT/RED IMT- (INTAKE MANIFOLD Drives IMT actuator With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
TUNING (lMT) ACTUATOR
-SIDE)
(cont'd)
BACK 11-41
PGM-FI System Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor

The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by
The programmed fuel injection (PGM-FI) system is a the PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for
sequential multiport fuel injection system. fuel injection of each cylinder, as well as detecting
engine misfire.
Alternator Control
The alternator signals the PCM during charging.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay

When the PCM receives a demand for cooling from the
AlC system, it delays the compressor from being
energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth CKP
SENSOR A
transition to the AlC mode. .
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor

The AlF sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The
AlF sensor is installed upstream ofthe TWC, and sends
signals to the PCM which varies the duration of fuel CKP SENSOR SUBHARNESS
injection accordingly ..
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1/Engine
Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2
ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent
resistors (thermistors). The ~esistance decreases as the
engine coolant temperature increases.
TERMINAL THERMISTER
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor

The BARO sensor is inside the PCM. It converts
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that is used
by the PCM to modify the basic duration of the fuel O-RING
injection discharge.
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Ignition Timing Control

The CMP sensor input is used by the PCM to determine The PCM contains the memory for basic ignition timing
ignition timing at start up (cranking) and when crank at various engine speeds and manifold absolute
angle is abnormal. pressures. It also adjusts the timing according to engine
coolant temperature.
Injector Timing and Duration

The PCM contains the memory for basic discharge
duration at various engine speeds and manifold
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being
read out from the memory, is further modified by
signals sent from various sensors to obtain the final
discharge duration.
By monitoring long term fuel trim, the PCM detects long
term malfunctions in the fuel system and sets a
MAGNET diagnostic trouble code (DTC).
11-42 BACK
Knock Sensor Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor·
The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure
minimize knock. into electrical signals to the PCM.
TERMINAL
PIEZO CERAMIC
ELEMENT
DIAPHRAGM
O-RING
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation (lAT) Sensor
to Readiness Codes) .;. The mass airflow (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature
The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part (lAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is·
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. located in the ihtake air passage. The resistance ofthe
Ifthe vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air
dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF
been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set
of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the
set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, comrol ci'rcuit, then output to the PCM.
the vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be
finished.
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete,

turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the
engine. The MIL will come on for 15-20 seconds. If it
then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it HOT WIRE
flashes five times, One or more readiness codes are not
set to complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or IATSENSOR
(THERMISTOR)
run the engine as described in the procedures (see page
11-66).
(cont'd)
BACK 11-43
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Electronic Throttle Control System

This sensor detects countershaft speed.
.1 : The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic
TERMINAL throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to
see a functional layout of the system.
Idle control: When the;e,ngine is idling, the PCM

controls the throttle a'qtuatbr to maintain the proper idle
speed according to engi'ne loads.
Acceleration contr<;)I: WheQ;the accelerator pedal is

pressed, the PCM opens the throttle valve depending
on the acceleratorpedal position (APP) sensor signal.
Cruise control: The PCM controls the throttle actuator to

maintain the set speed when cruise control is operating.
The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise
Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) control actuator.
The secondary H025 detects the,:oxygen content in the
exhaust gas downstream of the warm up three way ,Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
catalytic converter (WU-TWC)., andseods signals to the As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor
PCM. To stabilize its output, the sensor I)~s an internal varies the signal voltage to the PCM.
he,ater, The PCM compares the H025 output with the,
A/F sensor output to determine catalyst efficiency; The
secondary H025 is on the WU-TWC.
SENSOR
TERMINALS
HEATER HEATER
TERMINALS
11-44 BACK
Throttle Body , " Fuel Supply System
The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The
lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine Fuel Cutoff Control
coolant from the cylinder head to prevent icing of the During deceleration with the throttle valve closed,
throttle plate. current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel
economy at engine speeds over 850 rpm. Fuel cutoff
THROTTLE VA(VE control also occurs when the engine speed exceeds
6,600 rpm, regardless of the position of the throttle
valve, to protect the engine from over-rewing. When
the vehicle is stopped, the PCM cuts the fuel at engine
speeds over 5,000 rpm. Engine speed of fuel cut is
lower on a cold engine.
Fuel Pump Control

When the' ignition switch is turned on, the PCM grounds
PGM-FI main relay2 which feeds current to the fuel
~ pump control module. The PCM sends a .signal to the
THROTTLE POSITION fuel pump control module to operate the fuel pump for
(TP) SENSOR AlB and 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. With the
THROTTLE ACTUATOR
engine running, the fuel pump speed is controlled in
four levels by the fuel pump control module. The PCM
Idle Control System decides the fuel pump speed by.the calculation of the
injector activation time and engine speed and sends a
When the engine is cold, theA/Gcompressor is on, the operation command signal to the fuel pump control
transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the module. This operation made ppssible to decrease fuel
power st~ering load is high,orthe alternator is pump noise at low engine speed.
charging,'th~ rCM controls current to the throttle
actuator to maintain the correct idle speed. ,', PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2
PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition
Brake Pedal Position Switch switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the PCM,
The brake pedal position switbh signals the PCM when power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main'
the brake pedal is pressed. relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply
power'to the fuel pump for 2 seconds when the ignition
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch switch is tur'ned ON (11), and when the engine is
The PSP switch signals the PCM when the power cranking or running.
steering load is high. "
(cont'd)
BACK 11-45
Catalytic Converter System Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System·

Warm Up/Three Way Catalytic Converter (WU-TWCI Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout
and Under-Floor Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWCI of the system ..
The WU-TWCrrwCconverts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon
monoxide (CO); and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the EGRValve
exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C02), nitrogen (N2), and The EGR valy,e .Iowers peak combustion temperatures
water vapor. and reduces oxides of nitrogen emissions (NOx) by
recirculating exhaust gas through the intake manifold
WU-TWC and into the combustion chambers.
Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System

The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses from escaping
into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake
manifold.
t# WARM UP THREE WAY

CATALYST REAR
FRONT OF (Bank 1) ..
VEHICLE
TWC
\
BREATHER PIPE
HOUSING.
. . . : BLOW-BY VAPOR
¢:FRESHAIR
,
FRONT OF
VEHICLE
11-46 BACK
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
System The EVAP canister vent shut valve is on the EVAP
canister.
Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout The EVAP canister ventshutvalve controls the venting
of the system. of the EVAPcanister.
EVAP Canister VALVE

The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from
the fuel tank until it can be purged from the EVAP
canister into the engine and burned.
EVAP Canister Purge Valve

When the engine coolant temperature is below 140 "F
(60 "e), the PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge valve
which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister.
...
OUT
O-RING
MOVING
CORE
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor

The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure
into an electrical input to the PCM during the EVAP leak
check.
SENSOR UNIT
(cont'd)
BACK
System Description (co nt'd)
Fuel Cap Warning Message To make_,themessagego off (with the HOS)
The PCM will detect a loose or missing fuel fill capas an Procedure
evaporative system leak, and alerts the driver by , 1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
showing a warning message in the gauge display.
2. Clear the Temporary DTC with the HDS.
First drive cycle
The first time a leak is detected a "TIGHTEN FUEL CAP" 3. Verify there is no leak by doing the EVAP
message in the gauge display (A). To scroll to another FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
message, press the select/reset,button. The "TIGHTEN the HDS.
FUEL CAP" message willapp'ear.each time you restart
the engine until the system tu~'ns the message off. Turn To make the message go off (without the
the engine off then replace ortightenthe fuel fill cap HOS)
until it clicks at least once. The message should go off
after several days of normal driving after the.fuel fill Procedure
cap has been tightened or replaced. 1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
.. 2. The message should go off after several days

normal driving .
Shows ''TIGHTEN FUEL CAP"

in the multi-information displav
11-48 BACK
Electronic Throttle Control System Diagram
The electronic.throttlecontrolsystem consists ofthethrottle actuator, throttle position (TP) sensor AlB, accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor AlB, electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay, and the PCM.
From
J-------<:::r--- RED 0 - - - - -..... ETCS CONTROL
f---1J-- PUR RELAY
,------,..r--WHT /'1---, VARIOUS

~SENSORS
f---1J-- ORN
LTGRN
J-------<:::r--- GRN
BLU
PCM GRN
BLK THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
..L
o TP SENSOR A
o
THROTTLE
TPSENSORB
BODY
(cont'd)
BACK 11-49
Intake Manifold Tuning (lMT) Valve System
Engine power is adjusted by opening and closing the intake manifold tuning (IMT) actuator. When the valve is closed,
there is high torque at low engine speed. When the valve is open, there is high torque at high engine speed.
The intake manifold tuning (IMT) valve actuator contains a sensor that detects the IMT valve position and sends it to
the PCM.
IMTVALVE
11-50 BACK
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram
The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR valve and
the intake manifold into the combustion chambers. The PCM memory contains the ideal EGR valve position for
various operating conditions.
The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift, and sends it to the PCM. The PCM then compares
it with the ideal lift in its memory (based on signals sent from other sensors). If there is any difference between the two,
the PCM cuts current to the EGR valve.
EGRVAlVE YEl/BLU
POSITION
SENSOR VARIOUS
GRN/YEl PCM SENSORS
WHT/BlK
BlK
BLU/RED 1-
- EGRVAlVE
\ INTAKE
MANIFOLD
(cont'd)
BACK
11-51
Fuel:and Emissions Systems
System Description (co nt'd)
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram

The,EVAP controls minimize the amount of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor from the fuel tank is .
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged from the canister into the engine and burned .
• The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold.
The purging vacuum is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, which operates whenever engine coolant
temperature is above 140 "F (60 "C) •
• During refueling, the fuel tank vapor control valve opens with the pressure in the fuel tank, and feeds thefueLvapor
to the EVAP canister.
,. FTPSENSOR r----f--....{II'-- ORN---¢
~
r-----.'----'TI'--LT GRN
EVAP CANISTER GRN---¢ VARIOUS
VENT SHUT VALVE PCM SENSORS
FUEL TANK RED/

VAPOR VEL
RECIRCULATION
TUBE BLK
EVAP
~ 1
CANISTER
PURGE
VALVE
/
FUEL FILL ~
CAP ATMOSPHERE
No. 18ACG (10A)
L-._ _ BLK/VEL - -......... FUSE (in the under-dash
fuse/relay box)
BACK
11-52
PCM Circuit Diagram
PCM
5V
836
VCC1 VEL/RED --r-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_"1+-+-________..;..~ ~~~:::~~
r----------+-+-----------GRN~H~~
!: 8 24P MAP SENSOR
J;" """" . ...........

11 JUNCTION
SG1
C32
MD~HT-------------------------· RED~HT~~
ECT1
r---------------- GRNIYEL-~..U::~~=::!J
ECTSENSOR1
1 r-
VEL/BLU VEL/BLU
-8
3
JUNCTION
24P
2 .. CONNECT OR
WHT/BLK
EGRVALVE
POsmON
SENSOR
. g].
3
VEL/BLU
. cr-
12V 1
WHT/BLK
GRN/VEL
C10 4
BLU/RED BLU/RED
EGR 6
BLICI
VEL/
BLU EGRVALVE
~
C45
OPSW
BLU/VEL BLU /VEL ......!..(P;:- a
I1
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH _.
C16
GRN/VEL
SG2
D E F G H
(cont'd)
BACK 11-53
PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
3 -
C20
SHA
,BLU/VEL --~~--~~----BLU/vEL RED -~-U-·'~+'
SHIFT~
VALVE A
..t
_
GRN/WHT,~~~~~------GRN/WHT---4~
ORN~Eth
C28
SHB
;VALVEB -
GRN~~
C39 2
GRN --------------GRN-------~
SHC
SHIFT~.J
VALVEC
..t
-
C9
SHD
GRN/RED - - - - - - - - - - - - G R N / R E D
24P
------l
JUNCTION CONNECTOR
I , ,
-
VEL
s:JEtth
VALVED
I I
22 13 14 15
~C2:=.:..1--RED
LSA
::: -----..:::'-1[0]
A/TCLUTCH
PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A
B10
BRN/WHT~~
,!
t-:L~S-:-B-- BRN/WHT
- ,
BLK ----2.l~
A/TCLUTCH
,. PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B
B21
r:L==S=-C- - GRN/ RED GRN/RED~~
BLK ---!.l~
A/TCLUTCH
... ..... PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C
G101
C27
OP2SW
BLU/BLK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B L U / B L K -..!.{ ----O:~I_..,
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
C37
OP4SW
BLU/VEL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B L U / V E L ---L( --o-+--..
4TH CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
C38
OP3SW
BLU/WHT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - B L U / W H T ---L( --O:~I_..,
1
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
C33
ATFT
BLU/VEL BLU/VEL~~
L-------GRN/VEL -.l..U=:~J
ATFTEMPERATURE
SENSOR
11-54 BACK
~
- 1-
B4
BRN
VEl/BlK
BRN
~ INJ1
No.1 INJECTOR
VEl/BlK
88
I-- RED RED
~ INJ2
No. 2 INJECTOR
VEl/BlK
B7
BlU BlU
r--;; INJ3
No; 3 INJECTOR
"
,VEl/BlK
B6
VEL VEL
r--;; INJ4
, No. 4 INJECTOR
VEl/BlK
B5
BLK! RED. BLK/RED
f---h INJ5
No.5 INJECTOR
'.
VEl/BlK
B9
WHT/BLU WHT/BlU
~ INJ6
No. 6 INJECTOR
,
.---
11
10
9
8
7
24P
6 JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
.... B3 3
.... IGP
VE l/BLK
VEl/BlK.!...
VEl/BlK..!...
TdJrr==G,
VEl/BlK...L.
VEl/BlK.l....
.~,:,,'I',"',
'.",n.", [OJ
~ rb~
'---
T 837
,-------1I---+----Y.:l.:::=J~.
RED
--------GRN/V:=4~
NM
......
T B38
BLU
_ _ VE:::=r~
GRN/V:=l~
1_ NC
] C15
GR N/VEl - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
J;""" SG6
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
'-
(cont'd)
BACK 11-55
F'uel and Emissions Systems
PCM Circuit Diagram (cant' d)

24P C
JUNCTION
C~NN ECTOr IIIIII .......
24 23 2021 22 19h BLK/SHT 3

...,B:;:29::'-_ _ VEL/
GRN VEL/GRN 1 I-Q---o.+-__.-'To
'IGPLS1
BLK 2 ~=:=~~::::~~~r~t~~oK
No. 1IGN,mON COIL
B30
1-:'=G=PLS:-::::2-- BLU IRED, Q---':>+---"'To
SPARK
, ... -" PLUG
, No. 21GNmON COIL
1-:8=.:-::::
22 __. WHT,/BLU' Q--'~~"~'To
IGPLS3 SPARK
. ,. .-'. PLUG
No.3 IG,NIT/ON COIL
B23 BLK/w~T
3
~'G~P;"LS4~- BRN BRN 1 I-Q:-:::-:-:-~+..,-.-'To
BLK . 2 ~=i=~~::::~~~r~t~~oK
No. 4 IGNITION COIL
BLK/WHT
Io=B;.;1..;.1_ _ _ BLK
IRED BLK/RED Q ______c~~ ..~'To
IGPLS5 SPARK
BLK---~ ~==~;::==~PL~U~GCJ
No. 5 IGNITION COIL
B12
t-:"G:'P~L-:S~6-- BRN/WHT Q---':>+---+'I',o
SPARK
PLUG
B1
jo,;;P~G"'2--BLK
..
C BLK~8§ BLK
BLK
19
20
;
No. 61GNmON COIL
24P
JUNCTION
'CONNECTOR
BLK 22 ,
"!..!:-
.,
I
G101 24
'G1()1 BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK/WHT
24P
BLK/WHT JUNCTION
BLK/WHT CONNECTOR
BLK/WHT
cr- WHT
_ _ ~lil1.,O
~
C101
BLK/WHT
f--~--'I J~?h.'.' RED/BLU umhh~'.hmhhmmh 'm RE,D/BLU ~I-I----".~w 48 0I 11 KNOCK SENSOR =
11-56 BACK
~g~RARMOIL
GAN,<a ---'{~
------!f -
--2.f.~
BLU/WHT
BRN/VEL
~~:J~.fERSMWOIL
ITCH
BRN/VEL ~B
o!:::~ 24P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
VEL
BLU,
BLU/REO
CKP SENSOR A/B
(cont'd)
BACK 11-57
Fuel",ilild Emissions Systems
EVAP CANISTER
~_"'y---, J~
~BLU
RED/YEL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - R E D I V E L
-----------ll
. c10f .-----BLK/Y~L u65
~rn
12 BLUIVEL
JMCS
...---BLKlYEL
~
ENGINE MOUNT
CONTROL SOLENOID
1-------1 ]:'SOL BLK/YEL VALVE
2 24P
~~""'"
6 ',JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
5
4
~
R
......--BLK/YEL 1
HCff42;;'---WHT/BLU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - W H T / B L U 3
ALn
j.;C44;;:;',.....-WHT/RED WHT/RED 4
ALTF
HC43~,.....-WHT/GRN
ALTC
WHT/GRN 2
ALTERNATOR
Q
C6
AFSHTCB1 BLK/WHT _-+__-..1 .............•....•......................•..•..... BLU ......• ~
C8 6
AFSHTCB2 GRN/WHT --+---, ~~-------------RED
5
C5 ~~-------------GRN
S02SHTCB1 BLK/WHT --+----. ~-------------BLKlWHT 2
C7
S02~HTCB2 GRN/RED - - r- ,..--------WHT/BLK
REAR A/F SENSOR

(BANK 1. SENSOR 11
B13
vsaf - -- .BLU "".-",-",-".-".-,...,.j~-*,-+'-."-.,,..-.
831 •............ . .................................. RED/BLU .. .
H,P~B~1--GRN---+_~~--~ ~~-+-------RED/WHT
B15
VCENTB1 RED ----1-4-+----..1
B14
V582····· ... RED/BLU ..,.".""....!.h-.""
........,." .•""•• ""
••."., ••.".,••""'••""'••"'••~
••."., ••.•
832
(PB2 GRN/RED
CD !T
...-------WHT/BLK
FRONT A/F SENSOR

(BANK 2. SENSOR 11
;:--- ::"'~.".,.~"'"'._." ._.;,. -_-:._." .~.:":.~~._." ._." ._." '._.",._.",._.",._.",._.,."._.,."._.,."._." ._." ._." ._." .:."
•• •• •• ••"" ""."".10-:
••.,.,j. .."""..,....,.".."".."..."".""
..""
..""
.."" =G~-_ ~
.."'"
..
REAR SECONDARY H02S

(BANK 1. SENSOR 21
~~~2Sii2···WHT"...."".."".""..""...,.;......."'..+.,."..,.".."".."".."...""..""."".."".....".,...".,""..""'.."'.."'.."'.."'..,."..,."..,.".."".."""'.............·""··"'··"'··,."··,.,,··,.,··""··,,.··""··=-EE; ~
l....!!
r-'""
C101 r-@FRONTSECONDARYH02S
--.Jir--1J3 14 (BANK 2. SENSOR 21
I ......__
.:.:!17:...j ~trNCTION
_____15""1 CONNECTOR
WHT/BLK -1!
-
1.1-58 BACK
~~~~~4~--------RED----------------------------------RED------~3~
A18
~M$~A~--------PUR----------------------------------PUR------~ A
~6 2
HS~G~3~---------WHT-----------------------------------WHT----~~
12P
JUNCTION I
~ I
CONNECTOR 10 112 11 1
H~=5":""""--------ORN ~--------ORN------~6~
VCC4
~:~~~9~B~--------LTGRN ---------;:::;:::;=;----t"-----------LT GRN ____.;.4~ B
]~NCTlON 111111
~7 CONNECTOR 12111 5 ' 6 I
~S~G~4----------GRN - - - - - - - - - - ' L---+-----------GRN ______~5_1
,. APP SENSOR A/B

V
TPSENSOR
B18 2
-------------------------. BLU ............................ ········································BLU ...•. -.-.....
vccs
B17
HTP=SA:-------- RED/BLK ------------+--------------- RED/BLK
826
i'iT=P=-SB=-------- RED/BLU
B33
------------+------------------ RED/BLU
4
865--------------------· GRN ---••••••... -•.....•.•...... ········································GRN·········•••.
J C2
l-:g=CS=M::"+'i'""""----- BLU
ET=CS~M:-:--------- GRN
1-:.
-------------r-----------------BLU---~6~
____________~~----~------------GRN----__
5~
THROTTLE BODY
Jt-:~=1
ECT2
::----------- PUR
WHT/BLK J t H
~~~~~--------YE~BLU -----1---+---------+---------------------YE~BLU
L-----+-------------------WHT/BLK
3
ECT SENSOR 2
2
GRN/VEL
5
~::::=-+-:---------WHT/BLU -------------------------------WHT/BLU
4
t?::::=---------WHT/RED -------------------------------WHT/RED
IMT
ACTUATOR
(cant'd)
BACK 11~59
24P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
In"~
13 14
P
r-
C101 10
BLU/w HT
5 I 4
1-....--111---1 ] A 16 GRN BLU/BLK -rp~
ATPP ...!.J 3 i-i-6,,
WHT -R
~C~2=5::---WHT RED/BLK
8
-"Nrc> '"
ATPR
I VEL/G RN
2
7
-~f'u
t-- .
-D3~'
...
-~.~.
~C~2=6=:-_ RED/B LK RED

'--
ATPN
9
RED/W HT
~C=-::1=7::--_ YEL/G RN BLU/YE L
6
ATPD
5
BLK
~C~4=6~_ RED 4
C101
'-
ATPD3 TRANSMISSION RANGE
T
PNK
SWITCH
C19
ATPRVS RED/WHT
rbT C207
PNK
C18 BLU/YEL
ATPFWD
C201
...,....
A47
SMODE
PUR
28
PUR
3
- --
A36 30 7
BLU BLU
SUP
,,
A37 31 8
GRN GRN
SDN
-
2
BLK
1
G503
SHIFT LEVER
A46
S.NET5V LTGRN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -•• To IMMOBILIZER UNIT
BACK
11-60
1-:A38
r '
==--PNK - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - · p B N L K K ---l..f21
..PSPSW
G202
~
~
t::::::::::U
PSP SWITCH
C201
A2
SLS
PNK----~I ~1~5------~~---i_i_-----PNK~D
......- - - - Y E L -1..{
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID
A30 To
BLU ~ NAVIGATION UNIT
VSSOUT
~M' C204
3
12
18 ... ~~
LTGRN 2
GRN GRN 3
A39
LTGRN
FTP FTPSENSOR
A22 7
VSV
LTGRN
2
.LTGRN~g]
PUR PUR 2,
EVAP
CANISTER VENT
C201 SHUT VALVE
Y
A41 To IMMOBILl2ER
, BRN TI27 ~ UNIT
LG3
F S
A20 IATSENSOR"
l--'"'I7'lfll:-....".:..
RED~-
GRN/YEL
VG+ C101 2
RED/YEL,
8 3
RED/GRN
~A~9=-- ____ BLK 2
VG- BLK/RED
-'- BLK/YEL
MAFSENSOR
~---l JC24
~IA;;;'T;:""--RED/YEL
...
(cont'd)
BACK 11-61
UNDER·HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
ORN
GRY
---
-2-
1 - .'
i
L---~-i----~--i--PUR ---!..
~~------~-+--~--~---WHT --!...
ECTOR
-
1H~1-
LTBL
C206
~A:;:;4___ WHT ------~-----h,..._WHT

FANL
.ORN. 4PCONN ECTOR CONDENSER
24P
FAN RELAY
~
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
rtJ
.....,
<D
®
E§]
4 I
'
'PUR
- PGM·FIMAIN
L-----~----PUR RELAY 1
C2071~1 ,.
E§]
2PCONN ECTOR ® f0-
YEL
'------.;....-------------PU.R
~
~r-
t":A,,=13~__ RED ------------------RED

A(:C =:1 H~1- r-r-
i-r-
ETCS CONTROL
RELAY
- E§]
4PCONN ECTOR A/C COMPRESSOR ®
CLUTCH RELAY
A5 PUR _ _ _ _ _ _....,
FANH ... PGM·FISUB
As
MRLY GRN - - - - - - - - - - ,
.-II--ORN RELAY
A29
ETCSRLY BLU - - - - . ,
r::A':':40=~RED _ _--,
SUBRLY
PUR =:1 W~1-
4PCONN ECTOR RADIATOR
®
I-
E§] IGNITION
FAN RELAY COIL RELAY
UNDER-ROOD
FUSE/R~LA YBOX: .....,
4
'----ORN
CD No.7' +B FAN TIMER(7.5 Al I
® No. 81GP (15 Al
---
ECTOR
® No. 10 THROTTLE ACTUATOR 6 -

CONTROLJDBW+) (15 Al
® No. 11 A/F SENSOR ~---GRN ---L
(AFHT+I (15 AI
'------BLU ---1!.
® No.9 IGN COIL+ (15 AI
C206
rijl
3
'-------RED .......!!.
14P CON NECTOR
-
~ ~-------GRN --L[
~ 2P CONNECTOR
1(1~62" BACK
AB
~A;;:;8_____ LT GRN BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
BKSW
A7
LTGR~N1 ~ Brake
WHT
pedal pressed: closed
~
Brake pedal released: open .
r=B~K~SWN=~C-BRN
YEL L---:--+-+-YEL 3 _______ Brake pedal pressed: open
.....-------ir-------ir-+_ BRN 4 Brake pedal released: closed
C207 MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

r -......-IJ:~ ORN --{t~RN GRN (i)
.....- - - - - - - - - - W H T ~---o~®~-----.,
J~~ BLK/yEL--[E~ ~-------WHT +---~~~~-----f----+
~----------WHT ~---o~®~4o-----_+ _. -"_ . _. _. _._ . _. r-:._ . _. :;,
~_ _ _-I A1
C101
C201
BRN
~++-i----ORN
r-,...---YEL
fBLK
:it I-----J""~~l\ r·_··r-··_·· ~
ELD
.. _ .. _ .. -".. .. _ .. _ .. J
~:
@;
3P CONNECTOR
l~L
G302
7P CONNECTOR UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX.,

~t::::T
@
T[
..
r-- (j)
-IHh L++-H-f---[..
~~PNK L-_ _ _ _~~-~--~
STARTERCUT:E~yG1:N+t-------~f-t ;;~NT.t U
r-
@
®
@
~~::: ~~9PCONNECTOR
®
~jtTGRN--------HH ~
....._ _ _ _ _'--_.,
::~
.
-i~
STARTER CUT RELAY 2* ' 33 I- r-r-
ORN :·~.~;:LU:8.
~~ I- r-
::;
1 GRN L-_ _-++. C202 ~45P CONNECTOR

5 LTGRN---!I=12 WHT ~ . PGM-FI MAIN
RELAY 2
----\J:11 r- (FUEL PUMP)
IG2CUTRELAY
, 3 PNK
. C304 .r . BRN----!!..t.
I
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX:
No- 3 R/B1 (30 Al
2 No. 11 +B STOP & HORN (15 Al
3 No. 31G1 MAIN (50 AI...
4 No.4 +B BACKUP/ACC MAIN (40 Al
5 No.1 BATTERY (120 Al
~
r5."
.
AI
16P CONNECTOR
VEL ~3
"T BLU 16
6PCONNECTOR
r--
:::±:[
i
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX:
NO. 30 A/C (10AI
7 No. 18 ACG (10 Al
8 No. 19 FUEL PUMP(20 Al
9 No. 10 IGN SOL (15 Al
No. 21 METER (7.5 Al
I No.7 BACKUP (10 Al
r--------,
1i1tl=l-~=~WHT
L-+-.....
~-----PNK
+-_.-WHT
6P CONNECTOR
GRN
~
4
6
f0-
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH FUSE HOLDER 1 "'-__---:--WHT 2

@STS (7.5 Al r r-
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH FUSE HOLDER 2 IGNmON SWITCH 7P CONNECTOR
@STRLD (7.5 Al IG1 HOlin ON (II)
and START (III)
*: AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH RELAY BOX A
(cont'd)
BACK 11-63
El
C204 L- YEL
"~}1[LTBLU
A42
FPCD
_
t-=FP~C~--PNK ~ PNK ---..I r

G604
BLK
WHT
6
FP+
FUEL PUMP
CONTROL MODULE
0
12P RED
JUNCTION FP-
C0J:jlTOR jD
1 2 C206
AE
:::j{
.... 5[.... 1£-""
12P L.._ _ _ _ P
A32
JUNCTION 12P
SCS CONNECTOR . JUNCTION CONNECTOR
n n n
f.L
FUEL PUMP
BRN
1 . .__. .;. .
A44
I ~
DATA LINK CONNECTOR
WEN
GRY
_ 7 i}-GRY _
78 WHT10_8_
__ WHT 16
6
C201
A48 9
WHT BRN ---:s:,::c,=="s-i
CANH
12
A49
CANL
RED ---f-------..., L..-------------GRY--~W~E~N-i
6
12P ~------WHT--~C~A~N~H-i
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR 14
~----RED -~C::-::A~N:::-L-i
3 4 7
7 8 LT BLU -~K_':":LI~N=-E-i
f BLK
5
D
TPMS CONTROL UNIT BLK
I-::~:-::~":':N:":'H--WHT----+--'
20P
CANL RED ---+-----....._--f-+--....J G503
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
L..----1---1
~-UNE LTBLU - - - - - - .
LTBLU ~~-+ _________-J
To IMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
To AUDIO UNIT
BACK
11 . . 64
~~~[§ 8~§]
D
,....----WHT 3
7 WHT - - - . . CANH
9 WHT
8
I W~T
~
T T
RED
WTHT
RED WHT
T RED
LTBLU
T ...----RED 2
CANL
12P
W~- I I YAW RATE-LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
JUNCTION
D
CONNECTOR WHT A12
RED -Ir--I-H...I1 .---'---------4--I--J-.....J CANH
A6
...---RED
RED -+---+... CANH
12P GAUGE CONTROL
JUNCTION CONNECTOR MODULE
I rTl rTl I c...E....
!J
13 C605
D
,....--+-'+--WHT 4
71819112 3 CANH
WHT I WHT ,....1---4--RED
2
llW~_ RED CANL
STEERING ANGLE
W~ ++-_-+++-1.......... SENSOR
7
8 U RED C304
o
~ I r~10::.-----4-+---WHT
9 W~+--+-t-J WHT
10 rl-t-+-+-+---+-~ 9 RED 38
W~+---++-......++~ CANL
12 WHT + _ _++--1-++-+-_....1 - L T BLU 15
l2P 5 ~~
JUNCTION RED VSA MODULATOR-
CONNECTOR CONTROL UNIT
RED - - - t - + + - I - '
2 RED - - - 4 - + + - I - - I - . J
3 RED
RED-
A16
D
L--------RED
CANL
.....- - - - - - - - W H T A6
D J~"
CANH
W",- ACURAUNK CONTROL
A12 RED- UNIT IXM RECEIVER)
CANL
0
l2P
SRSUNIT JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
10
CANH
20
WHT i.... ••
WHT RED
-- ~-- -- ---
I
I T pOi I , PL
RED
W~......:.J i
T
CANL I I l1 3 j j8 17 9j
5
I WHTj Ij RED
K-UNE LTBLU -
I
i j
R~D ! i
SH-AWD CONTROL
UNIT j j LTBL U
iO
1.---- - - - - -
I
!-
---------
~ANH
CANL
3
K-LINE
*2
WHT
._.. -- -- -- -- -- --
RED _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
UBLU-------------------------------------~I
-- -- -- -- -- --
_________________ ...J
WHT-
: : !!
IL ______ J IL ____ -
-.J
RED
f-
LTBLU
-
--,
IL..SYSTEM
_ _ _ _ _ _ _.. _ _ .. _ _ .. _.. _.,_.
ACTIVE DAMPING
CONTROL UNIT
" - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - , . _ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
*1: With Navigation system

*2: With Active damping system
BACK
11-65
How to Set Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness
(In relation to Readiness Codes) Code
The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part NOTE:
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. • Do not turn the ignition switch off during the
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone procedure.
dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has • All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is
been reset, these readiness codes are reset to disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
incomplete. In some states, part of the emissions PCM is reset with the HDS.
testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. • Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go
If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may traffic may increase the drive time needed to switch
fail the emission test, or the test cannot be finished. the readiness code from incomplete to complete.
• The readiness code will not switch to complete until
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, all the enable criteria are met.
turn the ignition switch ON (11), but do not start the • If a fault in the secondary H02S system caused the
engine. The MIL will come on for 15-20 seconds. If it MIL to come on, the readiness code cannot be set to
then goes off, the readiness codes are set to complete. complete until you correct the fault.
If it flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are
not set to complete. To set readiness codes from Enable Criteria
incomplete to complete, do the procedure for the
appropriate code. • ECT SENSOR 1 at 158 "F (70 "C) or more.
• IAT SENSOR at 20 "F ( -7 "C) or more.
To check the status of a specific DTC system, check the • Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) above 25 mph (40 km/h).
OBD status in the DTC MENU with the HDS (see page
11-9). This screen displays the code, the current data list Procedure
of the enable criteria, and the status of the readiness
testing. 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link
connector (DLC), and bring up the READINESS
CODEs screen for Catalyst in the DTCs MENU.
2. Start the engine.
3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions

with short periods of steady cruise. After about
5 miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch to
complete.
4. If the readiness code is still not set to complete,

check for a Temporary DTC with the HDS. If there is
no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were
probably not met; repeat the procedure.
BACK
11-66
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor and
System Monitor and Readiness Code Readiness Code
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery NOTE:
is disconnected, ifthe DTCs have been cleared, or if the • Do not turn the ignition switch off during the
PCM is reset with the HDS. procedure .
• All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is
Enable Criteria disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
PCM is reset with the HDS.
• Battery voltage is more than 10.5 V.
• Engine at idle. Enable Criteria
• ECT SENSOR 1 and 2 between 176 "F (80 "C) and
212"F (100 'C). ECT SENSOR 1 at 140 "F (60 'C) or more.
• MAP sensor less than 46.6 kPa (14 in.Hg, 350 mmHg).
• VSS 0 mph (0 km/h). Procedure
• IAT SENSOR between 32 "F (0 "C) and 212 "F (100 'C).
Procedure
2. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. with short periods of steady cruise. Durihg the
drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for
2. Start the engine. 5 seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the
readiness code should switch from incomplete to
3. Select EVAPTEST in the INSPECTION MENU with complete.
the HDS, then select the FUNCTION TEST in the
EVAPTESTMENU. 3. Check the readiness codes screen for the AIR FUEL
RATIO (A/F) SENSOR in the DTCs MENU with the
• If the result is normal, readiness is complete . HDS .
• If the result is not normal, go to the next step.
• If the screen shows complete, readiness is
4. Check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one complete.
or more of the enable criteria were probably not • If the screen shows not complete, go to the next
met; repeat the procedure. step.
4. Check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the

enable criteria was probably not met. Select the
DATA LIST Menu. Check the ECT in the ALL DATA
LIST with the HDS. If the ECT is less than 140 "F
(60 'C), run the engine until it is more than 140 "F
(60 "C), then repeat the procedure.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-67
How to Set Readiness Codes (cont'd)
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor EGR Monitor and Readiness Code
Readiness Code
NOTE:
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery • Do notturnthe ignition switch off during the
is disconnected, ifthe DTCs have been cleared, or ifthe procedure.
PCM is reset with the HDS. • All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is
disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
Procedure PCM is reset with the HDS.
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The Enable Criteria
readiness code should switch from incomplete to
complete. ECT SENSOR 1 at 176 "F (80 "C) or more.
2. Ifthe readiness code is still not set to complete, Procedure

check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC,
repeat the procedure. 1. Connectthe HDS to the DLC.
Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code 2. Start the engine.
• This readiness code is always set to available 3. Drive at a steady speed with the transmission in
because misfiring is continuously monitored. D position, at 50-62 mph (80-100 km/h) or above
• Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if for more than 10 seconds.
the vehicle is driven over a rough road.
• Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter 4. With the transmission in D position, decelerate
holds at its current value, if the throttle position from 62 mph (100 km/h) or above by completely
changes more than a predetermined value, or if releasing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the
driving conditions fall outside the range of any engine is stopped during this procedure, go to
related enable criteria. step 3 and do the procedure again.
Fuel System Monitor and Readiness Code 5. Check the OBD status screen for DTC P0401 in the
DTC's MENU with theHDS.
• This readiness code is always set to available
because the fuel system is continuously monitored • If it is passed, readiness is complete.
during closed loop operation. • If it is not passed, go to step 3 and retest.
• Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter,
EVAP control system, and A/F sensor monitors are
active.
• Monitoring also pauses when any related enable
criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes when
the enable criteria is again being met.
Comprehensive Component Monitor and

Readiness Code
This readiness code is always set to available because

the comprehensive component monitor is continuously
running whenever the engine is cranking or running.
11-68 BACK
PGM-FI System
INJECTORS
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
Includes: (MAP) SENSOR
• PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 Replacement, page 11-238
• PGM-FI SUBRELAY
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR/
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT)
SENSOR
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

(PCM) ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
General Troubleshooting Information, (ECT) SENSOR 2
page 11-3 Replacement, page 11-239
Update, page 11-7
Substitution, page 11-8 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
Replacement, page 11-244 (ECT) SENSOR 1
CAMSHAFT POSITION KNOCK SENSOR

(CMP) SENSOR Replacement, page 11-243
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(CKP) SENSOR
(cant'd)
BACK 11-69
PG'M-FI System
Component Location Index (co nt'd)
REAR AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) REAR SECONDARY

SENSOR (BANK 1, SENSOR 1) HEATED OXYGEN
Replacement, page 11-240 SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S)
(BANK 1, SENSOR 2)
Replacement,
page 11-241
FRONT AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) FRONT SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN

SENSOR SENSOR (SECONDARY H02S)
(BANK 2, SENSOR 1) (BANK 2, SENSOR 2)
Replacement, page 11-240 Replacement, page 11-241
STARTER CUT
RELAY 2
~
PGM-FIMAIN
RELAY 2
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)

General Troubleshooting Information,
STARTER CUT page 11-3
RELAY 1 Circuit Troubleshooting, page 11-223
BACK
"'-70
DTC Troubleshooting
DTe P0101: MAF Sensor Circuit Rangel 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Performance Problem
5. Check theMAF SENSOR in the DATA LlSTwith the
NOTE: HDS .
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general Is there about 0.2 gm!s' or 0.5 V? •
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3) .
• If DTC P1128, P1129, P2228, and/or P2229 are stored YES-Go to step 6.
at the same time as DTC P01 01, troubleshoot those
DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P0101. NO...,....Go to step 12.
1. Check for poor connections or damage to these 6. Start the engine.

parts:
7. Vary the engine speed between 2,000 rpm and
• PCV hose 3,000 rpm.
• Intake air duct
• Air cleaner 8. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
• Purge (PCS) line HDS. ..'
• Brake booster hose
Does the reading change?
Are the parts OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to step 12. ,.
NO-Repair or replace the damaged parts, then go ....
to step 16. 9. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load
(in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on,
2. Check for damage or looseness at the air duct in then let it idle.
the air cleaner.
10. Test-drive theVehicle fOr several minutes in the
Is it OK? range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
YES-Go to step 3. •ENGINE SPEED,'

•VSS
NO-Reconnect or replace the air duct in the air •MAP SENSOR
cleaner, then go to step 14. •MAFSENSOR '
-. , .
3. Check for a dirty air cleaner element. 11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0101 in the
DTCs MENUwiththe HDS.
Is it dirty?
Does the screenindicate FAILED? , ,
YES-Replace the air cleaner element (see page
11-364), then go to step 14. YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 4. NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent

failure, system is OK at this time. Check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor
and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 10 and recheck.
(cont'd)
BACK
PGM~FI System
OTe Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page

11-238).
15. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
17. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the

range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• MAP SENSOR
• MAFSENSOR
18. Check for Temporary DTCsor DTCswith the HDS.
Is DTC P0101 indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the MAF sensor and the PCM, then go
to step;1.
NO-Go to step 19.
19. Monitor the OBDSTATUS forDTC POJ01 in the

DTCs MENUwiththeHDS.
Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete: lfany other

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated .in step 18,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor

connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor
and the PCMj then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 17.
11-72 BACK
DTC P0102: MAF Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 7. Measure voltage between MAFsensor/IAT sensor
5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and wait 2 seconds.
2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is about 0 gm/s, or 0.1 V or less indicated?

=
YES-Go to step 3..
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the MAF sensor and the PCM .• Is there battery voltage?
3. Check the No. 18 ACG (10 A) fuse in the under-dash YES-Go to step 8.
fuse/relay box.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 18
Is the fuse OK? ACG (10 A) fuse and the MAF sensor, then go to
step 20.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair short in the wire between the MAF
sensor and the No. 18 ACG (10 A) fuse. Also replace 9. Measure resistance between MAF sensor/IAT
the No. 18 ACG (10 A) fuse, then go to step 20. sensor 5P connector terminal No.3 and body
ground.
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
5. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P
connector.
Is there 190-210kQ?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-73
PGM-FI System
DTe Troubleshooting (cont'd)
10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 13. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector terminal No.3 and PCM
11. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). connector termihal A20.
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR SP. CONNECTOR
terminal A20 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
VG+(RED)
Terminal side of female terminals Is there continuity?
Is there continuity? YES-Go to step 26.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(A20) and the MAF sensor, then go to step 21. (A20) and the MAF sensor, then go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 13.
11-74 BACK
14. Substitute a known-good MAF sensor/IATsensor 26. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
(see page 11-238). software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8).
15. Reconnect all connectors.
27. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
Is ore P0102 indicated?
17. Clear the OTC with the HOS.
18. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the
2,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral). PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM(see page 11-8), then recheck.lfthe PCM
19. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS. was substituted, go to step 1.
Is ore P0102 i(ldicated? NO-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
YES-Go to step 26. original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the
NO-Replace the original MAF sensor/IAT sensor indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•
(see page 11-238), then go to step 20.
23. Reset the PCM with the HOS.
24. 00 the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
Is ore PO 102 indicated?

terminals at the MAF sensor/IATsensor and the
PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•
BACK 11-75
PGM-FI System
DTC P0103: MAF Sensor Circuit High Voltage 7'. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector terminal No.4 and PCM
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data connector terminal A9.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11"3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and wait 2 seconds.
2. Check the MAF SENSOR inthe DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is about 202 gm/s, or 4.89 V or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Intermittent failure, the systern is OK at this

at the MAF sensor and the PCM .• Terminal side of female terminals
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is there continuity?
4. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. YES-Go to step 8.
5. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P NO-Repair open in the wire. between the PCM (A9)
connector. and the MAF sensor, then go to step 15.
11-76 BACK
8. Reconnect PCM connector A (49P). ' , 19. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with th,e HOS.
9. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector Is DTCP0103 indicated?,

terminals No.3 and No.4 with a jumper wire.
YES-Check for pOOr connections or loose
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR SP CONNECTOR terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the
',. I PCM, then go to step ,..
N07"'"Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

'I', ',' indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
VG+ (RED/GRN) VG- (BLK/RED)
JUMPER WIRE 21. Reconnect all connectors.
Wire side of f~inale terminals 22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
., software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
23. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs yvith the HOS.
11. Clear the OTC with the HOS:
Is DTOP0103 indicated?
12. Check for Temporary OTCsor OTCs with the HOS.
Is DTC PO 103 indicated? .' terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the
PCM.lfthe,PCM was updated"substitute akr:1own-
YES-Go to st~p 20. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM
was substituted, go to step 1.
NO":'" Go to step'13. , " ~ ..
NO-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-2.44). If any other
14. Replace the MAF sensor/IATsensor (see page Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the
11-238). indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•
15. Reconnect allconnectprs.! ' --t'o·
17. Resetthe PCM with the HOS.
BACK 11-77
PGM-FI System
DTCP0107: MAP Sensor CircuitL.:ow Voltage Is there about 5 V?
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data YES-Go to step 16.
troubleshooting infor'mation (see page 11-3). NO-Go to step 8.
1. Turn the ignition switch 0N (II). 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LlSTwith the 9. Jump the SCS line wit!l the HDS.
HDS.
10. Disconnect PCM connector.S (49P).
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 Vor
less indicated? 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal B36 and MAP sensor 3P connector
YES-Go to step 3. terminal No.1.
NO...,. Interm itte nt failure, the system is OK at this MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
at the MAP sensor and thePCM .•
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. '

4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector. PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
6. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LlSTwith the

HDS.'
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 Vor

less indicated? ' ' , Terminal side offemale terminals
YES-Gotd step 12~ Is there continuity?
NO-Go to step 7. "~, I

YES-Go to step 23.
7. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P NO-Repair open in thewirebetween the PCM
connector terminals No.1 and No.3. (B36) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18.
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
mfuJ
VCC1 (VEL/RED) ~ SG1 (GRN/WHT)
11-78 BACK
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Is DTC PD107 indicated?
14. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (49P). YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go
15. Check for continuity between MAP .sensor 3P to step 1.
connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•

= 25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Wire side of female terminals Is DTC P0107 indicated?

Is there continuity? terminals atthe MAP sensor and the PCM.lfthe
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was
(835) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18. substituted, go to step 1.
. '. ..
' '
NO-Go to step 23. NO-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
17. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-238). indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
BACK
11-79
PGM:-FI System
DTCP0108: MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 8. Remove the jumper wire from the MAP sensor 3P
connector.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P
troubleshooting information (see.page 11-3). connector terminals No.1 and No.3.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

HDS..
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or

4.49 V or more indicated?
~
VCC1 (VEL/RED) ~ SG1 (GRN/WHT)
YES~Go.to step 3.

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Wire side of female terminals
atthe MAP sensor and the PCM .•
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is there about 5 V?
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector. YES- Go to step 14.
5. Connect MAP sensor 3P connector terminals No.2 NO-Go to step 10.

and No. '3 with a jumper wire.
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
~
.
" ,". 1.2 3

MAP (GRN/RED) SG1 (GRN/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE

HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or

4.49 V or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 18.
BACK
11-80
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
12. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (49P). 16. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (49P).
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector 17. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal 834 and MAP sensor 3P connector terminal 835 and MAP sensor 3P connector
terminal No.3. terminal No.2.
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR MAP SENSOR 3PCONNECTOR

A.
1 12131
SG1 (GRN/WHT) I MAP (GRN/RED)
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

Ir 11
-' 1 2. 3 4161617 8 19110 L

Q 111 12. 13 14116116 17118 1920 211
Q
Izz 2.324 ><126 >< zsV /I
J29 30 31 32.L33] 34 36]36 3736 391
1401 41 42. /1441 4>148 V VVI·
I MAP (GRN/RED)
Terminal side offemale terminals Terminal side of female terminals
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM NO~Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(834) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 20. (835) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 20.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-81
PGM-FI System
19. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-238).
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P010B indicated?

to step 1.



terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the
(see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.

original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
11-82 BACK
DTC P0111: IAT Sensor Circuit Rangel 9. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor from the 5P
Performance Problem connector.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 10. Using a heat gun, blow hot air on the MAF sensor/
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general IAT sensor for a few seconds. Do not apply the heat
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). longer than a few seconds or you will damage the
sensor.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1/2 and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor. 11. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to its 5P
connector, but do not install the sensor onto the air
Are the connections and terminals OK? cleaner.
YES-Go to step 2. 12. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then go
to step 15. Does the IAT SENSOR change 58 of (32°C) or
more?
2. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-238). YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
3. Allow the IAT sensor to cool to ambient at the IAT sensor and the PCM .•
temperature.
NO-Go to step 13.
4. Note the ambient temperature.
5. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to its 5P
connector, but do not install the sensor onto the air 14. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
cleaner. 11-238).
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Note the value ofthe IAT SENSOR quickly in the 16. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
DATA LIST with the HDS.
17. Dothe PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
8. Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR to the
ambient temperature. 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR differ 5.4 of Is DTC P0111 indicated?
(3 OC) or more?
YES-Go to step 13. terminals at the IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Go to step 9.
BACK 11-83
PGM-FI System
Ole P0112: IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector terminal No.2 and body
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data ground.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
2. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
/s about 356 of (180 °C) or more, or 0.08 V or less

indicated?
=
YES-Go to step 3.
at the IAT sensor and the PCM .• /s there continuity?
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES-Repair short in the wire between the IAT
sensor and the PCM (C24), then go to step 13.
connector. NO-Go to step 18.
6. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 12. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
HDS. 11-238).
/s about 356 of (180 °C) or more, or 0.08 V or less 13. Reconnect all connectors.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Goto step 11.
/s DTC P0112 indicated?
terminals at the IAT sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

11-84 BACK
• jr


terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM

BACK 11-85
".
PGM-FI System
DTC P0113: IAT Sensor Circuit High Voltage 7. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general Is about -40°F (-40°C) or tess, or 4.92 Vor
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). more indicated?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES-Go to step 8. ,
2. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the NO-Go to step 20.
HDS.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF,
Is about -40 OF (-40°C) or less, or 4.92 Vor
more indicated? 9. Remove the jumper wire from the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector.
YES-Go to step 3.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 11. Measure voltage between MAF sensor/IAT sensor
at the IAT sensor and the PCM .• 5P connector terminal No.1 and body ground.

MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5PCONNECTOR

connector.
5. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector

SG2 (GRN/YEL) IAT (RED/YEll Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.

JUMPER WIRE
NO-Go to step 16.
Wire side offemale terminals
11-86 BACK
13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Jump.the SCS line with the HDS.
14. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). 18. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
terminal C16 and MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P terminal C24 and MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P
connector terminal No.1. connector terminal No.1.
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(C16) and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to (C24) and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to
step 22. step 22 ...
(cont'd)
BACK 11-87
',. '
"
PGM-F'I System
21. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page

11-238).

"::;"" I' ,', .
26. Check for Temporary OTCsor OTCs with the HOS.
Is OTC P0113 indicated?
YES-Check fot poor connections 'or loose

PCM, then g<> to step 1.
: . ., .
indicated OTC's trQubleshooting ••

good PCM (see page 11-8). " ;,~,

good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM

11,-88 BACK
Ole P0116: ECl Sensor 1 Circuit Rangel 10. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
Performance Problem HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 of (10OC) or
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general more?
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at EeT sensor1 and the PCM .•
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. NO-Go to step 11.
Is about 176 of (80°C) or more, or 0.78 V or less 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
indicated?
12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-239).
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 inthe DATA LIST
with the HDS. 15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure.(see page 11 ..311).
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. Is DTC P0116 indicated?
5. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the YES-Check for poor connections or loose
HDS. terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 OF (10 °C) or
more? NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
YES-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK at this indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 11.
6. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST

with the HDS.
7. Tl.Irn the ignition switch OFF.
8. Open the hood, and let the engine cool for 3 hours.
BACK 11-89
PGM-FI System
DTe P0117: EeT Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR
1.. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

HDS.
Is about 356 OF (180 "C) or more, or 0.08 V or less

indicated?
YES-Go to step 3. Wire side of female terminals
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between ECT
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. sensor 1 and the PCM (C32), then goto step 13.
4. Disconnect theECT sensor 1 2P connector. NO-Go to step 18.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), , 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the 12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-239).
HOS. ,'1'

Is about 356 OF (180 "C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
indicated? 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES-Go to step 7. 15. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 11. 16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Is DTC P0117 indicated?
9. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). YES-Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

indicated DTC's troubleshooting.•
11-90 BACK


terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM

BACK 11-91
PGM-FI System
DTC P0118: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit High 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Voltage
9. Remove the jumper wire.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11. Measure voltage between ECT sensor 1 2P
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR
HDS.
Is about - 40 OF ( -40°C) or less, or 4.92 V or

more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.

4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector. Is there about 5 V?
5. Connect ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminals No.1 YES-Go to step 12.

and No.2 with a jumper wire.
NO-Go to step 16.
ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR
ECn (RED/WHTI
~
U SG2 (GRN/YEl)
JUMPER WIRE

HDS.
Is about -40 OF (-40°C) or less, or 4.92 Vor

more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.
11-92 BACK
:! I:
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF;,",',,;
13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Jump theSCSline with the HDS;:c
14. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). 18. Disconnect PCM connector'C (49P)."
15. Check for continuity between PCM connector 19. Check for continuity between PCMconnector
terminal C16 and ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminal C32 and ECT sensor 1 2P connector
terminal No.2. terminal N o . 1 . ; , '
ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR -ECT SEN$OR:12P CONNECTOR, '
Wire side of female t~rmilials
-"PCM CONNECTORC (49PI

,.l
. :!li
Terminal side of female terminals L -_ _ _ _- l ECT1 (RED/WHTI

YES-Go to step 27.
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(C16) and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22. ~::NO~Repairopen in the wire between thePCM'
(C32) and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22.
,,',
" ~f
" :.'
I', "
• ','. I~. -
:','1
(cont'd)
BACK
21. Replace ECT sensor 1 (seepage 11~239).
22. Reconnect aU connectors .. -
23. Turn the ignition switch, ON (II).
26. Check for TemporarY DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.

" '.'.' . ., ;)';-,
Is OTC P0118indicated?
,. :-:1 .",

terminals at.ECT sensor 1 and t~e PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Troubleshootirig is~omplete.lf any other

indicated DTC's-troubleshooting..·'
27. Reconnectallconnectors.
28. Update the PCM if it does not havetheJatest· .'


(see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was

BACK
DTC P0125: ECT Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Response
10. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-239),
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot) record alUreeze data
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Start the. engine, and let it idle for 5 minutes or·
more. 13. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the 14. Allow the engine to cool to the ambient
HDS. temperature.
Is about 10 of (-12°C) or less, or 4.45 V or more 15. Start the engine, and let it idle 20 minutes.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
Is DTC PO 125 indicated?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Allow the engine to cool to 104 "F (40 "C) or less. terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
4. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT
SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. NO-Go to step 17.
5. Start the engine, and let it idle. 17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0125 in the
DTCs MENU.with the HDS.
6. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up
49 "F (27 "C) or more from the recorded Does the screen indicate PASSED?
temperature.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
7. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 16,
with the HDS. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
8. Compare ECT SENSOR 2 and the recorded NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
temperature. connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
Did ECT SENSOR 2 change 17 of (9.5 pC) or screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 15.
more?
YES-Intermittent failure;the system is OK atthis

at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM .•
NO-Test the thermostat (see page 10-4). If the

thermostat is OK, go to step 9. If you replaced the
thermostat, go to step ,11.
BACK 11-95
PGM ..,FI System
DTC P0128: Cooling System Malfunction 12. Compare the recorded value of ECT SENSOR 2 and
the present value of ECT SENSOR 2.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general Did temperature rise 17 of (9.5 °C) or more?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NO-Test the thermostat (see page 10-4), then go
3. Turn the blower switch OFF. to step 13.
4. Turn the AlC switch OFF. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
5. Check the FAN CTRL in the DATA LIST with the 14. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
HDS.
15. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
Is it OFF? between 21 "F (-6 "C) and 104 "F (40 "C).
YES-Go to step 6. 16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
NO-Wait until the FAN CTRL is off, then go to step 17. Test-drive at a steady speed between 15-75 mph
6. (24-120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
6. Check the radiator fan operation. 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Does the radiator fan keep running? Is Drc P0128 indicated?
YES-Check for symptoms in the cooling system. If YES-Check for poor connections or loose
the cooling system is OK, go to step 20. terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
PCM. then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 19.
104"F (40 "C) or less. 19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0128 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS.
8. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT
SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
9. Start the engine, and let it idle. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 18,
10. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
49 "F (27 "C) or more from the recorded
temperature. NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
11. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
HDS. screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 17.
11-96 BACK
softwa re (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-

between 21 "F (-6 'C) and 104 "F (40 "C).

radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
23. Test-drive at a steady speed between 15-75 mph

(24-120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
Is DTC PO 128 indicated?

terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 21. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 25.
25. Monitor the OBO STATUS for OTC P0128 in the

OTCs MENU with the HOS.
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

Temporary OTCs or OTCs were indicated in step 24,
go to the indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•

connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8). then
go to step 21. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 21.
BACK 11-97
PGM-FI System
OlC P0133: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Sensor 1) Circuit Slow Response
OTC P0153: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) Circuit Slow Response 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
NOTE: 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
• If DTC P0139 and/or P0159 ' is stored at the same time 12. Test-drive under these conditions:
as DTC P0133 and/or P0153', troubleshoot DTC P0139
and/or P0159' first, then recheck for DTC P0133 and/ • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
or P0153'. above 158 'F (70 "C)
• Information marked with an asterisk ( ') applies to the • Transmission in D position
front bank (Bank 2). • Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed between
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 26-81 mph (41-130 km/h)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at Is DTC P0133 and/or PO 153' indicated?
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
4. Test-drive under these conditions: then go to step 1.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) NO-Go to step 14.

above 158 'F (70 "C)
• Transmission in D position 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 and/or
• Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for P0153' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed between
26-81 mph (41-130 km/h) Does the screen indicate PASSED?
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 and/or YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
P0153' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13,
Does the screen indicate FAILED?
YES-Go to step 6. connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F CONDITION, go to step 12.
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck.
7. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page

11-240).
11-98 BACK
DTC P0134: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction 6P connector terminal No.4 and PCM connector
terminal B13 (B14)'.
DTC P0154: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR
Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction r--
NOTE:
1 2 /
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 4 5 6
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general VSB1 (BLU) I I VSB2 (RED/BLU)
~ ~
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). Wire side of female terminals
• If DTC P2251 and/or P2254 ' is stored at the same time
as DTC P0134 and/or P0154', troubleshoot DTC P2251 PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
and/or P2254' first, then recheck for P0134 and/or VSB1 (BLU) VSB2 (RED/BLU)*
P0154' . Ilr ,I
• Information marked with an asterisk (') applies to the J 1 I 2 3 4161617 8 9110 I.
111 1213 14116116117118 1920 211
front bank (Bank 2).
122 23 24 .><J26L>< 26/ VI
129 30 31 32133134136136 3736 391
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 140 I 41 42 /144146146 / VVI
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Terminal side of female terminals
3. Start the engine, then let it idle 1 minute. Is there continuity?
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. YES-Go to step 10.
Is DTe PO 134 and/or P0154' indicated? NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(B13 (B14) ') and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
YES-Go to step 5. to step 14.

at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the under-hood fuse/
relay box (PGM-FI subrelay) and the PCM .•
7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector.
8. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
(cont'd)
BACK
11-99
PGM-FI System
10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P). 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is DTC P0134 and/or P0154' indicated?
12. Measure voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P YES-Check for poor connections or loose
connector terminal No.4 and body ground. terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the under-
hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay), and the
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 11 6P CONNECTOR PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 19.

.1 2
19. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for DTC P0134 and/or
456 P0154' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
VSB1(BLUI
VSB2 (RED/BLUI*
'Y
= YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Wire side offemale terminals go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•

Js there about 0.2 V or Jess? connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1), the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI
YES-Go to step 20. subrelay), and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
NO-Go to step 13;' until a result comes on.
13. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 11 (see page 20. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11-2401.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). software· (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
23. Start the engine, then let it idle 1 minute.
Is DTC P0134 and/or P0154' indicated?

terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the under-
hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay), and the
NO-Go to step 25.
11-100
BACK
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0134 and/or
P0154' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is


connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
subrelay), and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then
step 23.
BACK 11-101
PGM-FI System
OTC P0135: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 8. At the sensor side, measure resistance between A/F
Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction sensor (Sensor 1) SP connector terminals No.1 and
No.2.
Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 11 6P CONNECTOR
NOTE:
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
• Information marked with an asterisk (.) applies to the
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Terminal side of male terminals

Is there 2.5- 3.2 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 9.
Is OTe P0135 and/or P0155' indicated?
NO-Go to step 21.
YES-Go to step 5.
9. At the sensor side, check for continuity between
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this each terminal at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals connector and body ground.
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the under-hood fuse/
relay box (PGM-FI subrelay), and the PCM .•
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 116P CONNECTOR
S. Check these fuses:
• No. 11 A/F sensor (AFHT+) (15 A) fuse in the

under-hood fuse/relay box
• No.3 R/B 1 (30 A) fuse in the main under-hood
fuse box.
Q
• No.7 +B FAN TIMER (7.5 A) fuse in the under- = -- -- --
hood fuse/relay box Terminal side of male terminals
Are any of the above fuses blown?

YES-Repair short in the wire between the A/F
sensors, the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI YES-Go to step 21.
subrelay), then replace the blown fuse(s), and go to
step 23. NO-Go to step 10.
NO-Goto step 7.
7. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) SP connector.
11-102 BACK
10. At the sensor side, check for conti'nuity between 14. Check for continuity betwee'nA/F sensor (Sensor 1)
A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector terminals No.1 6P connector terminal No.2 and PCM connector
and No. '4; No. 1 and No.,5, No.1 and No.6 terminal C6 (C8)· .
individually. . . . ' . . . , '. ' ' ;1 ,
A/F SEN~OR,ISENSOR 1),6P CO~N"ECTOR
AFSHTCB1 IBLK/WHT) AFSHTCB2 IGRNfWHT)*
A/F SENSOR ISENSOR 1) 6PCONI\IECTOR
~. I
rW-
" . " '," r' •
",", ",
1 2 V>
'4 5 .6..
Q
Wire side offemale,terminals
n
PC""'~ONNECTOFt C 149P),
AFSHTCB1IBLK/WHTI I· ' 1AFSHTCB2'IGRN/WHT)*
II II
Terminal side of male ter""inals LI,l 2 3 . 4'1 6 16,1 7 8 9110'1

111 121/ 1/110116117118 19201211' '
~VV 24 ><1261>< 26 271281 1
V V ./I 321 331 34!yv 37381391
Is there continuity? 1\40 41 42 43144146148 47 481491
NO-Go to step,11. Is there continuity?
12. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(C6 (C8)') and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector step 22.
terminal C6 (C8)· and body ground. .. ..1\
PCM CONNECTOR C I49P)

AFSHTCB1 IBLK/WHT) AFSHTCB2 IGRN/WHn*
n n
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM

(C6 (C8)') and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to
step 22.
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
BACK
,-,,;.~. .~
, -'~; ~ :'" '
15. Disconnecttheunder-hood fuse/relay box9p· 17. Disconnect PCMconnectorA(49P) .. /

connector. " ,1'.",[, .
18. Disconnect the under.~hoodfuse/relaybox 14P

16. Check for continuitybetween A/F sensor (Sensor 1) connector. ,.
6P conne~tofterrliinal No.' 1 aneiunder-hood fuse/
relay bo>t9Pconnector No.9., 19. Check for continuity petween under-hoo,d fusel
rela~/box"4P ~o'rlliec1:or terminal No. 13' and PCM
A/F SENSOR IS"ENSOR 116P CONNECTOR: connector terminal A40.
+B IWHT/BLK) PCM CONNECTOR A 149PI I
Q
wi'ifj'side ;()ffiimsle terminals
. UNDER.HOOQ ,PUSE/RELAYBOX9PCONNECTOR
+BIPUR)
~~~~~T-~~~~~~
9 l'ermirial side 'offemalEi terminals
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
Wire .sid~ pf f~~le:ie~mi(l/iIS " 14P CONNECTOR
" ,',".'.' .. : I , ,,"1 ,,'
; '.' '~' t '..;., '
Is there continuity? , ", 7
YES-Go to step 17.

NO-Repair open in the wire between theA/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the under-hood fuse/relay Is there continuity?
box, then go to.step22. , , ' , " ' ..• '
, ,:. YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Repair open in,thewire between the PCM

(A40) and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to
step 2 2 . ' " 1. . . ' , , ' .
,\, ~ ,i
':';-':,;
:-.'" .
" :'/
i "
1'~-104
BACK
20. Test the PGM-FI subrelay in the under-hood fuse/ 28. Reconnectall connectors.
relay box (see page 22-77).
Is the PGM-FI subrelay OK? software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
YES-Go to step 28.
NO-Replace the relay control module (under-hood
fuse/relay box) (see page 22-71), then go to step 22. Is DTC P013S and/or P01SS· indicated?
21. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page YES-Check for poor connections or loose
11-240). terminals atthe A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the under-
hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay) and the
22. Reconnect all connectors. PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). was substituted, goto step 1.
24. Reset the PCM with the HDS. NO-Go to step 31.
25. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). 31. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0135 and/or
26 .. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P013S and/or P01SS· indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the under- original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay) and the Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 30,
PCM, then go to step 1. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-Go to step 27. NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
27. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0135 and/or (Sensor 1), the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI
P0155' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. subrelay) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
Does the screen indicate PASSED? recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other until a result comes on.

subrelay) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
until a result comes on.
BACK 11-105
PGM-FI System
DTC P0137: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1, 12. Check for continuity between secondary H02S
Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground.
DTC P0157: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,
Sensor 2) Circuit Low Voltage SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
NOTE: SH02SB1 (GRN)

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 1..,.........2.....
SH02SB2 (WHT)* .........
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 3 4
• Information marked with an asterisk (') applies to the
Q
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals
3. Start the engine, then let it idle without load (in

Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. Is there continuity?
4. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(B25 (B16)') and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2),
Does the voltage stay at 0.05 V or less? then go to step 15.
YES-Go to step 5. NO-Go to step 23.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM .• 14. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-241).
6. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector. 16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 17. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
8. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 18. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
Does the voltage stay at 0.05 V or less? 19. Start the engine, then let it idle without load (in
Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 13.
11-106 BACK
20. Test-drive under these conditions: 23. Reconnect all connectors.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) 24. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
above 158 'f (70 "C) software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
• Transmission in D position good PCM (see page 11-8).
• Engine speed at 1,500-3,000 rpm
• Drive 1 minute or more 25. Start the engine, then let it idle without load (in
26. Test-drive under these conditions:
Is DTC P0137 and/or PO 157' indicated?
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
YES-Check for poor connections or loose above 158 'f (70 "C)
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and • Transmission in D position
the PCM, then go to step 1. • Engine speed at 1,500-3,000 rpm
• Drive 1 minute or more
NO-Go to step 22.
P0157' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. Is DTC P0137 and/or PO 157' indicated?
Does the screen indicate PASSED? YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 21, known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• 25. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor NO-Go to step 28.
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If 28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0137 and/or
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until P0157' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 20. Does the screen indicate PASSED?

NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor

H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-8), then go to step 25. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 25.
BACK 11-107
'PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
OlC P0138: Rear SecondaryH02S (Bank 1, 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage
9. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
OlC·P0158: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,
Sensor 2) Circuit High Voltage Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?
NOTE: YES-Go to step 10.

anyon-board snapshot, and review the general NO-GO'to step ,19.
• Information marked with an asterisk ( .) applies to the 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Remove the jumper wire from the secondary H02S
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (Sensor 2) 4P connector.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 12. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminal No.1 to body ground with a, jumper VIIire.
3. Start the engine, then let it idle without load (hi
Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. SECONDARY H02S(SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
4. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. SH02SB1 (GRN)
SH02SB2 (WHTI* ~-,--1-...,
Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?
1 2
3.4
YES-Go to step 5.
JUMPER WIRE
at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM .•
'., Wire side of female terminals
6. Disconnect the sEicondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
connector.
14. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
7. Connect secondary H02S (Sehsor2) 4P connector
terminals No.1 and No.2 with ajumper wire. Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?
SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4Ft CONNECTOR YES-Go to step 15.

JUMF'ER WIRE (C16) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go
to step 21.
1 2
SHO~SB1 (GRN) 3 4 SG2 (GRN/YEl)
SH02SB2 (WHT)*
L...-..J..--.;.I
11-108 BACK
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 26. Test-drive under these conditions:
16. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158"F (70."C)
17. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (49P). • Transmission in D position
18. Check for continuity between PCM connector • Drive 1 minute or more
terminal 825 (816)' and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR B (49PI
SH02SB1 (GRNI SH02SB2 (WHTI* Is DTC P0138 and/or P0158' indicated?
Ir YES-Check for poor connections or loose

111 2 3 41 617 8 91101 terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
111 1213 14116 617118 1920 211 the PCM, then. go to step 1.
r22 2324 X 25'5< 2617 171 I
129 3031 32133 3436136 3736 391
1140 41 42 1/144146146 1/ 1/1/1 NO-Go to step 28.
~
28. Monitor the 08D STATUS for DTC P0138 and/or

n Q P0158' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
= Does the screen indicate PASSED?

Is there continuity? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27,
YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM connections or loose terminals at the secondary
(825 (816)') and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
then go to step 21. the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. CONDITION, go to step 25.
20. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page

11-241).
25. Start the engine, then let it idle without load (in
(cont'd)
BACK 11-109
PGM-FI System
30. Update the pcM if it does not have the latest

31. Start the engine, then let it idlewithout load (in


above 158 "F (70 "C)
• Transmission in 0 position
• Drive 1 minute or more

the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
32. Ifthe PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 34.
34. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTCP0138 and/or

Does the screen indicate 'PASSED?


H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-8), then go to step 32. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 32.
11-110 BACK
DTC P0139: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1, 11. Start the engine, then let it idle without load (in
Sensor 2) Circuit Slow Response Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
DTC P0159: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2, 12.. Test-drive onderthese conditions:
Sensor 2) Circuit Slow Response
• Engine coolant temperature above 176 "F (80 "C)
NOTE: • Transmission in 0 position
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and • Vehicle speed between 35-55 mph
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general (56-88 km/h)
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Drive 5 minutes or more
front bank (Bank 2). 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is DTC P0139 and/or P0159* indicated?
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES-Check for poor connections or loose
3. Start the engine, then let it idle without load (in the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 14.
• Engine coolanttemperature (ECT SENSOR 1) P0159' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
above 158 "F (70 "C)
• Transmission in 0 position Does the screen indicate PASSED?
• Vehicle speed between 35-55 mph
(56-88 km/h) YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
• Drive 5 minutes or more Temporary DTCs or DTCs we're indicated in step 13,
5. Monitor theOBD STATUS for DTC P013.9 and/or
P0159' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
Does the screen indicate FAILED? H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
YES-Go to step 6. a result comes on. If the Screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 12.
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF

11-241).
BACK 11-111
PGM-FI System
OTC P0141: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1, 8. At the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) side, measure
Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction resistance between secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector terminals No.3 and No.4.
OTC P0161: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2,
Sensor 2) Heater Circuit Malfunction SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 21 4P CONNECTOR
NOTE:
• Information marked with an asterisk ( ") applies to the
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Terminal side of male terminals

Is there 5.4- 6.6 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 9.
Is DTC P0141 and/or P0161° indicated?
NO-Go to step 20.
YES-Go to step 5.
9. At the secondary H02S (sensor 2) side, check for
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this continuity between body ground and secondary
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No.3 and
at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the under-hood No.4 individually.
fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay) and the PCM .•
SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 214P CONNECTOR
6. Check these fuses:
• No. 11 A/F sensor (AFHT +) (15 A) fuse in the

under-hood fuse/relay box
• No.3 R/B 1 (30 A) fuse in the main under-hood
fuse box. Q Q
• No.7 +B FAN TIMER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box
Are any of the fuses blown?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the A/F Is there continuity?

sensors, the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI
subrelay) and the fuse, then go to step 21. YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 7. NO-Go to step 10.
7. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P

connector.
11-112 BACK
10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 13. Check for continuity between secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No.3 and PCM
11. Discon nect PCM connector C. (49P). connector terminal C5 (C7)·.
SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
terminal C5 (C7)' and body ground.
1 2
3 4
S02SHTCB1 (BLK/WHT) S02SHTCB2 (GRN/RED)* S02SHTCB2 (GRN/RED)*
12 12
= Terminal side of female terminals
= Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 14.
(C5 (C7)') and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
go to step 21. (C5 (C7)') and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then
go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-113
PGM-FI System
14. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box 9P 16. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
connector.
17. Disconnectthe under-hood fuse/relay box 14P
15. Check for continuity between secondary H02S connector.
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No.4 and under-
hood fuse/relay box 9P connector No.9. 18. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/
relay box 14P connector terminal No. 13 and PCM
SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
connector terminal A40.
1 2 PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
3 4
Wire side of female terminals Q

9P CONNECTOR
14P CONNECTOR
Q
Is there continuity? 7
YES-Go to step 16.

secondary H02S(Sensor 2) and the under-hood Is there continuity?
fuse/relay box, then go to step 21.
YES-Go to step 19.

step 21.
11-114 BACK
19. Test the PGM-FI subrelay in the under-hood fuse/ 27. Reconnect all connectors.
relay box (see page 22-77).
Is the PGM-FI subrelay OK? software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
YES-Go to step 27.
fuse/relay box) (see page 22-71). then go to step 21. Is DTC P0141 and/or P0161' indicated?
20. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page YES-Check for poor connections or loose
11-241). terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the
under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay), and
21. Reconnect all connectors. the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If
22. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
23. Reset the PCM with the HOS. NO-Go to step 30.
24. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). 30. Monitor the OBO STATUS for OTC P0141 'and/or
P0161 , in the OTCs MENU with the HOS.
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), the original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI subrelay), and Temporary OTCs or OTCs were indicated in step 29,
the PCM, then go to step 1. go to the indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-Go to step 26. NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
26. Monitor the OBO STATUS for OTC P0141 and/or H02S (Sensor 2), the under-hood fuse/relay box
P0161' in the OTCs MENU with the HOS. (PGM-FI subrelay), and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was
Does the screen indicate PASSED? 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was substituted, go
to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other keep idling until a result comes on.
Temporary OTCs or OTCs were indicated in step 25,
go to the indicated OTC's troubleshooting.•

H02S (Sensor 2), the under-hood fuse/relay box
(PGM-FI subrelay), and the PCM, then go to step 1.
If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
idling until a result comes on.
BACK
11-115
PGM~FI System
OTe P0171: Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System 1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-333).
Too Lean
Is the fuel pressure OK?
OTe P0172: Rear Bank (Bank 1) Fuel System
Too Rich YES-If you are troubleshooting OTC P0171 or
P0174, go to step 2. If you are troubleshooting OTC
OTe P0174: Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System P0172 or P0175, check the valve clearances, and
Too Lean adjust if necessary. Ifthe valve clearances are OK,
replace the injectors (see page 11-236), then go to
OTe P0175: Front Bank (Bank 2) Fuel System step 2.
Too Rich
NO-Check these items:
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and • If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general pressure regulator (see page 11-345), then go to
troubleshooting information· (see page 11-3). step 2.
• If some of the OTCs listed below are stored at the • If the pressure is too low, check the fuel pump,
same time as OTC P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or the fuel pressure regulator, the fuel filter, and the
P0175, troubleshoot those OTCs first, then recheck for fuel lines for restrictions, then go to step 2.
P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175.
P0101, P0102, P0103: Mass air flow (MAF) sensor
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129:Manifold absolute 3. Reset the PCM with the HOS.
pressure (MAP) sensor
P0133,P0153,P1172,P1174,P2195,P2197,P2237, 4. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
P2238,P2240,P2241,P2243,P2245,P2247,P2249,
P2251,P2252,P2254,P2255,P2AOO,P2A03:Airfuel 5. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
ratio (A/F) sensor (Sensor 1) 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
P0134, P0135,P0154, P0155: Airfuel ratio (A/F) sensor radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
(Sensor 1) heater
P0137,P0138,P0139,P0157,P0158,P0159,P2270, 6. Test-drive under these conditions:
P2271, P2272, P2273: Secoodary H02S (Sensor 2)
P0141, P0161: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
P2646, P2647-, P2648, P2649: VTEC system above 158 "F (70 "C)
P0401, P0404,P0406,P2413: Exhaust gas ' • Transmission in 0 position
recirculation (EGR) system • Drive at a steady speed between, 15 -75 mph
P2279: Intake air leakage (24-120 km/h) for 15 minutes.
NOTE: OTC P0171, P0172, P0174, and/or P0175 may

take up to 80 minutes of test driving to set. Using
the HOS, monitor the long term fuel trim (LT FUEL
TRIM) or the air fuel feed back average (AF FB AVE).
If the long term fuel trim/air fuel feed back average
stays within 0.84-1.18, there is noproblem at this
time.
BACK
11-116
Is DTe P0171, P0172, P0174, or P0175

indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.

8. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at

the PCM.
Are the connections and terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair the connections or terminals, then step

2.
9. Check the fuel quality.
Is the fuel quality OK?
YES-Replace the injectors (see page 11-236), then

goto step 2.
NO-Drain the fuel tank (see page 11-333), replace

the fuel, then go to step 2.
BACK
11-117
PGM-FI System
OTe P0300: Random Misfire and Any 1.. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Combination of the Following:
OTe P0301: No.1 Cylinder Misfire Detected
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
OTe P0302: No.2 Cylinder Misfire Detected or neutral).
OTe P0303: No.3 Cylinder Misfire Detected 4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU
OTe P0304: No.4 Cylinder Misfire Detected with the HDS.
OTe P0305: No.5 Cylinder Misfire Detected Does the screen indicate FAILED?
OTe P0306: No.6 Cylinder Misfire Detected YES-Go to step 9.
Special Tools Required NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If

• Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A the screen indicates EXECUTING, let it idle until a
• AfT low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301 result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
• AfT pressure hose 07406-0020201 CONDITION, wait for several minutes,then recheck .
• AfT pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A
• AfT pressure adapter 07MAJ-PY40120 5. Check the CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
• Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200 MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or
CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LlSTfor 10 minutes
NOTE: with the HDS.
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general Does CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE,
• If the misfire is frequent enough to trigger detection and/or CYL6 MISFIRE show misfire counts?
of increased emissions during two consecutive
driving cycles, the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300 YES-Go to step 9.
(and some combination of P0301 through P0306) will
be stored. NO-Go to step 6.
• If the misfire is frequent enough to damage the
catalyst, the MIL will blink whenever the misfire 6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
occurs, and DTC P0300 (and some combination of range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
P0301 through P0306) will be stored. When the
misfire stops, the MIL will remain on. • ENGINE SPEED
• Troubleshoot the following DTCs first, if any of them • VSS
were stored along with the random misfire DTC(s) • REL TP SENSOR
(Because parts can sometimes fail without setting • CLV (calculated load value)
DTC's you should also do a physical inspection ofthe • ECT SENSOR 1
below systems.): • APPSENSOR
P0101, P0102, P0103: Mass air flow (MAF)

P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold absolute
pressure (MAP) sensor
P0171,P0172,P0174,P0175:Fuelsystem
P0335, P0339, P0385, P0389: Crankshaft position
(CKP) sensor NB
P0506, P0507: Idle control system
P0340, P0344: Camshaft position (CMP) sensor
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system
P0401,P0404,P0406,P2413:Exhaustgas
recirculation (EGR) system
BACK
11-118
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS forDTC P0301, P0302, 13. Check the CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or
with the HDS. CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes
with the HDS.
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
YES-Go to step 9. MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYLS MISFIRE,
and/or CYL6 MISFIRE show misfire counts?
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, goto step 8. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until YES-Go to step 14.
a result comes on. If the Screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION; go to step 6 and recheck. NO-Go to step 20.
8. Check the CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE,CYL3 14. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-333).
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or
CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes Is the fuel pressure OK?
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 15.
Does CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE,CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYLS MISFIRE, NO-
and/or CYL6 MISFIRE show misfire counts? • If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel
pressure regulator (see page 11-345), then go to
YES-Go to step 9. step 20.
• If the'pressure is too low, check the fuel pump,
NO-Intermittent failure, the system isOK at this the fuel feed lines, and the fuel filter. If they are
time .• OK, replace the fuel pressure regulator (see page
11-345), then go to step 20.
10. Check the fuel quality. '.
Is the quality good?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Drain the tank, and fill it with a known-good

fuel, then go to step 20.
11. Inspect the spark plugs (see page 4-24). If the spark
plugs are fouled or worn, replace them.
12. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the

• ENGINE SPEED
~ VSS
~ RELTP SENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value)
• ECT SENSOR 1
• APPSENSOR
(cont'd)
BACK
11-119
PGM-FI System
16. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (A), and 20. Turn 'the ignition switch ON (II).
install the special tools as shown, then install the
rocker arm oil pressure switch in the pressure· 21. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
gauge adapter (B).
22. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.
NOTE: Install the parts in the reverse order of
removal with a new O-ring. 23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
24; Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).

O'40""0Z0201 ., ,
07MAJ-PY4011A and
A 25. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes inthe
07MAJ-PY40120 \
\
22N·m range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
12.2 kgf·m,
16lbf·ft) ....../ .
....-.. - .. - 07406-0070301 • 'ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• REL TP SENSOR
• ECT SENSOR 1
• APPSENSOR
26. Check for Temp0rary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0300 and any combination of DTC P0301,

07ZAJ-S5AA200 P0302,P030~P0304,P0305,orP0306
indicated?
17. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector. YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the ignition coil, the injector, and the
18. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at PCM, then go to DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304,
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the P0305, or P0306 (see page 11"121) troubleshooting.
radiator fan comes on.
NO-Go to step 27.
19. Check the oil pressure at engine speeds of 1,000
and 2,000 rpm. Keep the measuring time as short 27. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
as possible (less than 1 minute) because the engine P0303, P0304, P0305, or P0306 in the DTCs MENU
is running without load. with the HDS.
Is the oil pressure below 49 kPa (0.5 kgflcrri', Does the screen indicate PASSED?
7 psi)?
YES-Remove the oil pressure gauge, and reinstall Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 26,
the rocker arm oil pressure switch, then go to step go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. II
20.
NO-Inspect the VTEC system (see page 6-7), then connection or loose terminals at the ignitions coil,
go to step 20. the injector, and the PCM, then go to step1. Ifthe
result comes on. Ifthe screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 25.
BACK
11-120
. !'iii
DTC P0301: No~ '1 Cytinder Misfire Detected" S. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
DTC P0302: No.2 Cylinder Misfire Detected
• ENGINE SPEED
DTC P0303: No.3 Cylinder Misfire Detected • VSS
• REL TP SENSOR
DTC P0304: No.4 Cylinder Misfire Detected • CLV (calculated load value)
,j
• GEAR POSITION
DTC P0305: No.5 Cylinder Misfire Detected • ECT SENSOR 1
DTC P0306: No.6 Cylinder Misfire Detected 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P030S in the DTCs MENU
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot; record all freeze data with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). Does the screen indicate FAILED?
1. Turn the 'ignition switch ON (II) .. YES-Go to step 9.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load for a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
2 minutes (in Park or neutral). CONDITION, go to step S.
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, 8. Check the CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3'
P0303, P0304, P0305, or P030S in the DTCs MENU,. MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or
with the HDS. CYLS MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes
with the HDS.
Does CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
YES-Go to step 9. MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE,.
and/or CYL6 MISFIRE show misfire counts?
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until YES-Go to step 9.
CONDITION, wait for several minutes, and recheck. NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis
time. Check the fuel and ignition system circuit
5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE,CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 connectors for loose wires or poor connections.•
CYLS MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
with the HDS.
10. Exchange the ignition coil from the problem
Does CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 cylinder with one from another cylinder.
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE,
and/or CYL6 MISFIRE show misfire counts? 11. Reconnect all connectors.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step S.
(cont'd)
BACK
PGM-FI System
12. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 18. TeSt.,drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range ofthese recorded freeze data parameters: range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
• ENGINE SPEED • ENGINE SPEED

• VSS • VSS
• REL TP SENSOR • REL TP SENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value) • CLV(calculated load value)
• GEAR POSITION • GEAR POSITION
• ECT SENSOR 1 • ECT SENSOR 1
13. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 19. Check the CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, and/or
CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LlSTfor 10 minutes CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST for 10 minutes
with the HDS. with the HDS.
Does CYLt MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 Does CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE, MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE,
and/or CYL6 MISFIRE show misfire counts? and/or CYL6 MISFIRE show misfire counts?
NO-Intermittent failure due to poor contact at the NO-Intermittent failure due to.spark plug fouling
ignition coil contactor (no misfire at this time). (no misfire at this time) ••
Make sure that the ignition coil connectors are
secure •• 20: Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
14. Determine which cylinder had the misfire. Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the
spark plug was moved?
Does the. misfire occur in the cylinder where the
ignition coil was moved? YES-Replace the faulty spark plug, then go to step
53.
YES-Replace the faulty ignition coil (see page
4-21), then go to step 53. NO-Go to step 21. .
NO-Go to step 15. 21. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
15.· Turn the ignition switch OFF. 22. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector from the
problem cylinder.
16. Exchange the spark plug from the problem cylinder
with the one from another cylinder. 23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
BACK
11-122
24. Measure voltage between ignition coil 3P 27. Jump the SCS linewith the HDS.
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
29. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table).
2 PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE

3 IG (BLK/WHT) CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No.1 P0301 B29 YELJGRN
No.2 P0302 B30 BLU/RED
No.3 P0303 B22 WHT/BLU
No.4 P0304 B23 BRN
= No.5 P0305 B11 BLK/RED
Wire side of female terminals No.6 P0306 B12 . BRN/WHT
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ignition

coil and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to IGPLS1 (VEL/GRN)
step 53. IGPLS3 (WHT/BLU)
IGPLS5 (BLK/RED)
26. Check for continuity between ignition coil 3P

IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
2 GND(BLK)
Q
=
Wire side of female terminals -- -- --
YES-Go to step 27. YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
and the ignition coil, then go to step 53.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ignition
coil, G101, then go to step 53. NO-Go to step 30.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-123
PGM-FI System
30. Check for continuity between appropriate ignition

coil 3P connector terminal No.1 and the IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
appropriate PCM connectorterminal of the IGPLS~
problem cylinder (see table).
-1
2
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE r---
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR 3
No.1 P0301 B29 YEL/GRN
QQQ '---
No.2 P0302 B30 BlU/RED PCM CONNECTOR B (49PI
No.3 P0303 B22 WHT/BLU
No.4 P0304 B23 BRN IGPLS& (BRN/WHTI
II II
No.5 P0305 B11 BLK/RED
No.6 P0306 B12 BRN/WHT IGPLS4 -' 1 2 3 4161617 8 9110 I
(BRNI 111 1213 14116116117118 1920 211
IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR 122 2324 .><J261>< 26/1VI
29 30 31 32133134136136 3736 391 •
IGPLS '---' IGPLS2 140 41 42 1/44146146 / 1/1/1
1 (BLU/REDI
2- Terminal side of female terminals
3 Is there continuity?
QQQ -
Wire side offemale·terminals
PCM CONNECTOR B (49PI YES-Go to step 31.
IGPLS5 (BLK/REDI NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
II II
the ignition coil, then go to step 53.
IGPLS3 LI 1 2 3 14161617 8 9110 L
(WHT/BLUI 111 1213 14116116117118 1920 211
122 2324 ><.1261>< 26/1VI.
29 30 31 32133134136136 3736 391
IGPLS1 140 41 421/144146146 ,,/ VVI
(YEL/GRNI
11-124
BACK
31. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3). 35. Disconnect the injector 2P connector from the
problem cylinder.
36. Turn'the ignition switch ON (II).
33. Measure voltage between body ground and the
appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table). 37. Measure voltage between injector 2P connector
terminal No.1 and body ground.
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE
CYLINDER . ·TERMINAL COLOR INJECTOR 2PCONNECTOR
No.1 P0301 84 8RN
No.2 P0302 88 RED
No.3 P0303 87 8LU
No.4
No.5
No.6
P0304
P0305
P0306
a6'
85
89
VEL
8lK/RED
WHT/8lU
~!.
':i.
IIYEL/BLKI
PCM CONNECTOR B I49PI

-= . .
INJ61WHT /BLUI
YES-Go to step 38.
NO-Repair open. in the wire between the injector

and under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI main relay
= - = 1), then go to step 51.
=
Terminal side of female termirials
YES-Go to step 41.
NO-Go to step 34.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-125
39. Check for continuity between body ground and the 40. Check for continuity between appropriate injector
appropriate PCM connector terminal (see table). 2P connector terminal No.2 and the appropriate
PCM connector terminal ofthe problem cylinder
PROBLEM DTC ReM WIRE (see table).
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No.1 " P0301 B4 BRN PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE
No.2 P0302 B8;. RED CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No.3 P0303 B7 BlU No.1 P0301 . B4 BRN
No.4 P0304 .B6 VEL No.2 P0302 ,B8 RED'
No.5 P0305 B5 BlK/RED No.3 P0303 B7 BlU
No.6 P0306 B9 WHT/BlU No.4 P0304 B6 . YEL
No.5 P0305 B5 BlK/RED
PCM CONNECTQR B (49P)
No.6 P0306 B9 WHT/BlU
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
Q
=
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
INJ

PCM .CONNECTOR B (49PI .
INJ4 (YEll

and the injector, then go to step 53.
NO-Go to step 40.

terminals at the injector and under-hood fuse/relay
box (PGM-FI main relay 1), then go to step 41.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM and

the injector, then go to step 53.
BACK
11-126
41. Measure resistance between injector 2P oonnector 47. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
terminals No.1 and No.2. range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR • ENGINE SPEED

• VSS
• REL TP SENSOR
·CLV (calculated load value)
~
• GEAR POSITION
• ECT SENSOR 1
'GP~'NJ 48. Check the CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
CYL6 MISFIRE in the DATA LlSTfor 10 minutes
with the HDS.
Does CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, CYL4 MISFIRE, CYL5 MISFIRE,
Is there 10-13 Q ? and/or CYL6 MISFIRE show misfire counts?
NO-Replace the injector (see page 11-236), then NO-Intermittent failure due to poor contact in the
go to step 53. injector connector (no misfire at this time). Check
for poor connections or loose terminals at the
42. Exchange the injectorfrom the problem cylinder injector..
with the one from another cylinder. Also check the
injector fuel inlet screen for debris, and clean if 49. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
needed.
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the
43. Reconnect all connectors, and install the intake . injector was moved?
manifold (see page 9-2).
YES-Replace the faulty injector (see page 11-236),
44. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). then go to step 53.
45. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. NO-Go to step 50.
46. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park 50. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
or neutral) for 2 minutes.
51. Do an engine compression and a cylinder leakdown
test (see page 6-6).
Did the engine pass both tests?
YES-Go to step 52.
NO-Repair the engine, then go to step 53.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-127
PGM-FI System
52. Do the VTEC rocker arm test (see page 6-7). 60. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
Did the engine pass the test? with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 61. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
NO-Repair the VTEC rocker arm, then go to step YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
53. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 59,
54. Reset the PCM with the HDS. connections or loose terminals at the ignition coil,
the injector, and the PCM, then go to step 1. Ifthe
55. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS. screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
56. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). CONDITION, go to step 58.
57. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4). 61. Reconnect all connectors.
58. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 62. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS 63. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
• REL TP SENSOR range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
• GEAH POSITION • ENGINE SPEED
• ECT SENSOR 1 • VSS
• REL TP SENSOR
59. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. • CLV (calculated load value)
• GEAR POSITION
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or • ECT SENSOR 1
P0306 indicated?
terminals atthe ignition coil, the injector, and the Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, or
PCM, then go to step 1. P0306 indicated?
NO-Go to step 60. YES-Check for poor connections or loose

NO-Go to step 65.
BACK
11-128
65. Monitor the OBDSTATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
with the HDS.

Temporary DTCs orDTCs were indicated in step 64,

connections or loose terminals at the ignition coil,
the injector, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT
OF CONDITION, go to step 63.
BACK
11-129
PGM-FI System
DTe P0325: Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C47 and body ground. '

=
4. Hold the engine speed at 3,000-4,000 rpm for at
least 10 seconds. Terminal side of female terminals
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is there continuity?
Is DTC P0325 indicated? YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(C47) and the knock sensor subharness, then go to
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO-Go to step 11.

at the knock sensor and the PCM .• 11. Connect the knock sensor subharness 1P connector
terminal to body ground with a jumper wire.
KNOCKSENSORSUBHARNESS1PCONNECTOR
8. Disconnect the knock sensor subharness 1P

connector.

ERs (RED/BLUI
lJUMPER WIRE
=
BACK
11-130
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector 16. Check for an open in the knock sensor subharness.
Is the harness OK?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Repair open in the knock sensor sUbharness,

then go to step 19.
17. Replace the knock sensor (see page 11-243).
18. Install the injector base (see page 9-7), and the
intake manifold (see page 9-2).

21. Resetthe PCM with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 13.
(C47) and the knock sensor subharness, then go to 23. Hold the engine speed at 3,000-4,000 rpm for at
step 19. least 10 seconds.
13. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3), and the 24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
injector base (see page 9-7).
14. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector.
15. Check for continuity between the knock sensor terminals at the knock sensor and the PCM, then go
subharness 1P connectorterminal and body to step.26.
ground.
NO-Go to step 25.
KNOCK SENSOR SUBHARNESS 1P CONNECTOR
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0325 in the

fS IRED,BLU) YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

Wire side of female terminals connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
YES-Repair short in the knock sensor subharness,

then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-131
PGM-FI System

good PCM (see page 11-8). .

28. Hold the engine speed at 3,000-4,000 rpm for at

least 10 seconds.

PCM.lfthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
NO-Go to step 30.



connections or loose terminals at the ignition coil,
the injector, and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
go to step 28. If the PCM was su bstituted, go to step
step 28.
11-132 BACK
DTC P0335: CKP Sensor A No Signal 8. Measure voltage between CKP sensor AlB 6P
connector terminal No.6 (No.3)' and body ground.
DTC P0385: CKP Sensor B No Signal
CKP SENSOR AlB 6P CONNECTOR
NOTE:
• Information marked with an asterisk (.) applies to
CKP sensor B.

=
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is there battery voltage?
Is DTC P0335 and/or P0385 indicated? YES-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 5. NO-Repair open in the wire between CKP sensor

AlB and the under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this main relay 1), then go to step 18.
at CKP sensor AlB and the PCM .• 9. Measure voltage between CKP sensor AlB 6P
connector terminal No.5 (No.2)' and body ground.
6. Disconnect CKP sensor AlB 6P connector (see page
11-242).
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-133
PGM~FI System
10. Measure voltage between CKPsensor NB 6P 14. Check for continuity between PCM connector
. connector terminals No.4 (No.1)' and No.6' terminal B45 (B44) , and CKP sensor NB 6P
(No.3)'. connector No.5 (No.2) •.


LG (BRN/YEL)*

YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Repair open inthe wire between CKP sensor
NB and G101, then go to step 18. YES-Go to step 15.
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF .. NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(B45 (B44)') and CKP sensor NB, then go to
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. step 18.
13, Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
11-134 BACK
15. Check forcontinuity'between PCM connector 24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. '
terminal B45 (B44)' and body ground.
terminals at CKP sensor AlB and the PCM, then go
to step 1.

Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated; go to the

"

Terminal side of female terminals software (see page 11-7), ot substitute a known'-
27. Check for Temporary DTCs orDTCswith the HDS.
(B45 (B44)') and CKP sensor AlB, then go to Is DTC P0335 and/or P0385*indicated?
step 18. "
NO-Go to step 25. terminals at CKp sensorAlBand.the PCM.lfthe
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (see page11~8)ithen rec'heck.lfthe PCMwas
17. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-242).
NO-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
18. Reconnect all connectors. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
origin'al PCM (see page 11:.244); If any other
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Temporary DTCs or DTCs arefndibated,'go to the
23. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
BACK 1'1,-135
~G:I\II~FI System
OTCP0339;CKP Sensor A Circuit Intermittent 6. Check for damage to the CKP sensor AlB pulse
Interruption plate on the timing belt drive pulley (see page 6-25).
OTC P0389: CKP Sensor B Circuit Intermittent Is there damage?

Interruption
YES-Replace the CKP sensor AlB pulse plate/
NOTE: timing belt drive pulley (see page 6-25), then go to
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and step 9.
anyon-board ,snapshot, and review the general,
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). NO-Go to step 7~
• Information marked with an asterisk ( ') applies to
CKP sensor B. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Replace CKP sensor AlB (see page 11-242).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Test-drive the vehicle for 10 minutes in the range of 10. Reset the PCM with the HDS .
. these recorded freeze data param!'lters:
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS 12. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
4. Checkfo'r Temporary DTCs orDTCswith the HDS. 13. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
Is DTC P0339 and/or P0389indicate.d? 14. Test-drive the vehicle for 10 minutes in the range of
these recorded freeze data parameters:
YES-Go to step 5.
• ENGINE SPEED
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this • VSS
time. Check for. poor connections or loose terminals
at CKp'sensQr AlB and thePCM .• 15. Check for Temporary DTCs orDTCs with the HDS.
5. Check for poor or loose connections at these Is DTC P0339 and/or P0389' indicated?
connectors and terminals:
• CKP sensor AlB terminals at CKP sensor AlB and the PCM, then go
• PCM to step 1.
• Engine ground
• Body ground NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Are the connections OK? indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Reconnect the connectors or terminals, then

goto step 9.
11~136 BACK
DTC P0340: CMP Sensor No Signal 9. Measure voltage between CMP sensor 3P
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general CMPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. =
Is OTe P0340 indicated? Wire side offemale terminals
YES-Go to step 5.
Is there about 5 V?
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals YES-Go to step 10.
at the CMP sensor and the PCM.•
NO-Go to step 11.
10. Measure voltage between CMP sensor 3P
6. Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector. connector terminals No.2 and No.3.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (11). CMP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

8. Measure voltage between CMP sensor 3P
CMP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
= Is there battery voltage?
Wire side offemale terminals YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the CMP

Is there battery voltage? sensor and G101, then go to step 18.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the CMP

sensor and under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI
main relay 1), then go to step 18.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-137
PGM-FI System
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Check for continuity between CMP sensor 3P
CMPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR
13. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (49P).

terminal 846 and CMP sensor 3P connector
terminal No.1.
CMP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
A
1 1213 =
iCMP(YEl)
Ir II Is there continuity?
11 2 3 4L6J6J7 8 9~10J.
111 1213 14116116117118 1920 211
Q
122 23 24 ><1261>< 26 VIVI
129 30 31 32133134136136 3736 391
(846) and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18.
140 41 42 /144I46J46 L lLJLL
NO-Go to step 26.
ICMP(YEl)
Terminal side of female terminals 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is there continuity? 17. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11-242).
YES-Go to step 15. 18. Reconnect all connectors.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM 19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(846) and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18.
23. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
11-138 BACK

terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.



terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM. If the
(see page 11-8), then recheck. If thePCM was

BACK
11-139
PGM-FI System
DTe P0344: CMP Sensor Circuit Intermittent 6. Check for damage to the CMP sensor pulse
Interruption projection on the front camshaft pulley (see page
11-242).
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general Is there damage?
YES-Replace the front camshaft pulley (see page
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 6-11), then go to step 9.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO.....,Goto step 7.
3. Test-drive the vehicle for 10 minutes in the range of 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11-242).
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS 9. Tum the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 10. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
Is DTC P0344 indicated? 11. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5. 12. Dothe PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 13. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
at the CMP sensor and the PCM .• 14. Test.drivethevehicle for 10 minutes in the range of
5. Check for poor or loose connections at these
connectors and terminals: .• ENGINE SPEED '.
• VSS
• CMPsensor
• PCM 15. Check fOT Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• Engine ground
• Body ground Is DTC P0344 indicated?
Are the connections OK? YES-Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM, then go
YES-Go to step 6. to step 1.
NO-Reconnect or repair the connectors or NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

terminals, then go to step 9. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
BACK
11-140
DTC P050A: Cold Start Idle Air Control 6. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
System Performance Problem 1 is 122 'f (50 'C) or less.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
and any on~board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 8. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds or more.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs other than
P050A indicated? YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.• NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
NO-Go to step 3. indicates EXECUTING, let the engine idle until a
3. Check for poor connections or blockage at the CONDITION, go to step 6 and recheck.
intake air duct.
10. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
Is it OK? the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4. Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL

VALVE normal?
NO-Reconnect or repair the intake air duct, then
go to step 20. YES-Go to step 11.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing. NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-366),
then go to step 20.
Is it OK?
YES-Go to step 5. 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
NO-Replace the air cleaner housing (see page
5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element.
Is it dirty?
YES-Replace the air cleaner element or remove

the debris (see page 11-364), then go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-141
PGM-FI System
12. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED inthe DATA LI ST with 20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm
for at least 30 seconds. 21. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
13. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm, check 22. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS; 1 is 122"F (50 "C) or less.
Is there about 9.8~12 gmls or about 1.70 V? 23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
YES-Go to step 14. 24. Check forTemporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page IsDTC P050A indicated?
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. terminals atthe throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT
sensor, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
15. -Allow the engine to cool to ambient temperature.
NO-Go to step 25.
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (11).- DTCs MENU with the HDS.
18. Note the value of IAT SENSOR quickly in the DATA Does the screen indicate PASSED?
LIST with the HDS.
19. Compare the value ofthe IAT SENSOR and the Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated instep 24,
ambient temperature. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR differ 5.4 OF NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
(3°C) or more? connections or loose terminals at the throttle body,
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the PCM, then go
YES-Replace the MAF sensor/IATsensor to step 1. Ifthe screen indicates EXECUTING, let
(see page 11-238), then go to step 20. the engine idle until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 20.
NO-Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the
throttle bore. If there is dirt or carbon, clean the
throttle body (see page 11-363), then go to step 20.
If there is damage in the throttle bore, replace the
throttle body (see page 11-366), then go to step 20.
BACK
DTe P050B: Cold Start Ignition Timing 6. Letthe engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
Performance Problem 1 is 122 "F (50 "C) or less.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 8. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds or more.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs other than
P050B indicated? YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
NO-Go to step 3. indicates EXECUTING, let the engine idle until a
3. Check for poor connections or blockage at the CONDITION, go to step 6 and recheck.
intake air duct.
Is it OK?
Is the ignition timing OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Reconnect or repair the intake air duct, then
go to step 25. NO-Go to step 11.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing. 11. Check for damage at the CKP sensor (see page
11-242) and the timing belt drive pulley (see page
Isit OK? 6-25).
YES-Go to step 5. Is the CKP sensor and/or the CKP sensor pulser
plate damaged?
NO-Replace the air cleaner housing (see page
11-363), then go to step 25. YES-Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-242)
and/or the timing belt drive pulley (see page 6-25),
5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element. then go to step 6.
Is it dirty? NO-Go to step 31.
YES-Replace the air cleaner element or remove

the debris (see page 11-364), then go to step 25.
NO-Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-143
PGM-FI System
12. Oothe ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with 24. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
the HOS. ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature
Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL individually.
VALVE normal?
Does either sensor differ more than 5.4 OF (3°C)
YES-Go to step 13. from the ambient temperature?
NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-366), YES- Replace the sensor that differed more than
then go to step 25. 5.4"F (3 "C) from the ambient temperature, then go
to step 25.
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the NO-Check and repair any problems with the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. following items, then go to step 25.
14. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST with • Engine compression and cylinder leakdown
the HOS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm • VTEC system
for at least 30 seconds. • Engine oil
• AlC system
15. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm, check • Power steering
the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HOS.
Is there about 9.8 -12 gm/s or about 170 V?
YES-Go to step 16.
27. Letthe engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page 1 is 122 "F (50 "C) or less.
17. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).
18. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-239), and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-239). YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the
19. Allow the sensors to cool to ambient temperature. MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor
2, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 30.
21. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, and ECT
sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do not install them
on the engine.
23. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR

2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HOS.
11-144 BACK
30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B inthe 35. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 29, complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
TemporaryDTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 34,
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor,
the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor,
step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT
driving until a result comes on. Ifthe screen sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go.to step 27 .. was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-8), then go to step 32. Ifthe PCM was
31. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
good PCM (see page 11-8). the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to
step 32.
32. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
1 is 122 "F (50 "C) or less.

terminals at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the
MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor
2, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute
a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
32. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 35.
BACK
11-145
PGM-FI System
OTe P0562: Charging System Low Voltage 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NOTE: 8. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
• If any high currenHoad accessories are installed, this 10. Start the engine.
DTC can be set.
• If DTC P16BB and/or P16BC is stored at the same time 11. Check under these conditions:
as DTC P0562, troubleshoot DTC P16BB and/or P16BC
first, then recheck for DTC P0562. • NCon
• Temperature control at maximum cool
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • Blower fan at maximum speed
• Headlights on high beam
12. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in Park or
3. Start the engine. neutral) for 1 minute.
4. Check under these conditions: 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• NCon Is orc P0562 indicated?

• Blower fan at maximum speed YES-Check for poor connections or loose
• Headlights on high beam terminals at the alternator and the main under-
hood fuse box, then go to step 1.
neutral) for 1 minute. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
Is orc P0562 indicated?

YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), then
goto step 7.

at the alternator and the main under-hood fuse box,
and check the battery performance (see page
22-76) .•
BACK
11-146
DTC P0563: PCM Power Source Circuit 10. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
Unexpected Voltage A6 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A I49PI
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general MRLYIGRNI
4. Wait 10 seconds.
=
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Terminal side of female terminals
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is there battery voltage?
Is OTe P0563 indicated? YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box 14P
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals connector.
under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI main relay 1)
and the No. SIGP (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box and the PCM .•
S. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-147
PGM~FI System
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector 14. Disconnect PCM connectorS (49P).
15. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
83 and bo'dy.ground.
MRLV (GRN)
llGP (VEL/BLK)
~ ~
J1 2 3 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 8 9110 I.
l11 1213 1~1~1611n18 1920 211
122 2324 ><J25/.>< 26 VIVI,
129 30 31 32133134135136 3736 391
1 40 41 42 JLl44J 45J46 IL JLJL1
Q
= 'Y
Terminal side offemaleterminals
Is there continuity? Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM Is there battery voltage?
(A6) and under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI main
relay 1), then go to step 19. YES-Go to step 16.
13. Reconnect PCM connector A (49P). 16. Disconnectthe under-hood fuse/relay box 9P
connector.
11-148 BACK
17. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal 22. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
83 and body ground.
23. Wait 10 seconds.

terminals at under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI
main relay 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1.

Terminal side of female terminals Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
/s there battery voltage?
YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
the PCM (83) and under-hood fuse/relay box 27. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
(PGM-FI main relay 1), then go to step 19.. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
NO-Go to step 18.
18. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 in the under-hood fuse/
relay box (see page 22-77) /s DTC P0563 indicated?
/s PGM-F/ main relay 10K? YES-Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at under-hood fuse/relay box (PGM-FI
YES-Go to step 26. main relay 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
NO-Replace relay control module (under-hood recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
fuse/relay box) (see page 22-71), then go to step 19.
19. Reconnect all connectors. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
BACK 11-149
PGM-FI System
OTC P0602: PCM Programming Error OTC P060A: PCM (AfT system) Internal
Control Module Malfunction
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• This DTC is indicated when a PCM update is not
completed. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
• Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while' updating
the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
completion, the PCM can be damaged.
1. Do the PCM update procedure (see. page 11-7).
Is DTC P060A indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Replace the original PCM (see.page 11-244). time .•
• 4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
NO-The update is complete.• software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
Is DTC P060A indicated?
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-

NQ-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

11~150 BACK
Dle P0615:Starter Cut Relay STRLD Circuit 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Malfunction
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Remove starter cut relay 1 (A) from auxiliary
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). under-dash relay box A.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. A
Is DTe P0615 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

at starter cut relay 1, starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM .•
10. Connect starter cut relay 1 4P connector terminal
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. No.2 to body ground with ajumper wire.
6. Check the STRLD (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under- STARTER CUT RELAV 1 4P CONNECTOR
dash fuse holder 2.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the STRLD (7.5 A) fuse in the

auxiliary under-dash fuse holder 2, then go to step
12.
=
(cont'd)
BACK 11-151
PGM-FI System
11. Check for continuity between PCM connector 17. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
terminal A28 and body ground. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
PCM CONNECTOR A (49PI
18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with theHDS.
STRLD Is DTC P0615 indicated?

(PNKI

terminals at starter cut relay 1 and the peM, then
go to step 1. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
.Q
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

Terminal side of female terminals complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Is there continuity? Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
YES-Go to step 17.

(A28) and starter cut relay 1, then go to step 12.

terminals at starter cut relay 1 and the PCM, then
go to step 1.

11-152 BACK
. !'a
DTC P062F: PCM Internal Control Module DTC P0630:NIN Not Programmed or
Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Error Mismatch
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data NOTE:
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11~3) .
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • This DTC is stored only when the PCM does not have
the VIN information olthe vehicle. Use the HDS to
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. input the missing VIN information,
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON '(II).
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated? 2. Check the VIN with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4. Does theHDS show the vehicle's VIN?
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Go to step 5. .j
time.•
NO-Go to step 3.
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- 3. Input the VIN to the PCM with'the HDS.
Does the screen show COMPLETE?" ,
YES-Go to step 5.:
Is DTC P062F indicated?
NO-Go to step 4.
YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the YES-Do the troubleshooting for P062F (see page
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other 11-153).•
indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• NO-Go to step 9.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 5 seconds.
(cont'd)
BACK 11,-153
YES-Go to step.9.
NO-Intermittent failure, the'system is OK at this

time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting .•
9. Update the PCM if it'does not have.the latest "

good PCM (see page 11-8k
YES-If the PCM was updated; substitute a known-


original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other '
indicated DTC's troubleshooting ••
11~154 BACK
DTC P0685: PCM Power Control Circuit! DTC P1109: BARO Sensor Circuit Out of
Internal Circuit Malfunction Range High
NOTE: NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If the problem does not return after clearing the DTC, 1. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
or if this DTC is stored intermittently, check for loose
terminals at the IGP line connectors before you 2. Start the engine.
replace the PCM.
Is OTe P1109 indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
Is OTe P0685 indicated? time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
YES-Go to step 4. troubleshooting .•
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
indicated, go to the indicated DTC's good PCM (see page 11-8).
software {see page 11-7), or substitute a.known- Is OTe P1109 indicated?
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM
YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
was substituted, go to step 1. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
BACK 11-155
PGM-FI System
DTC P1116: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Rangel 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Performance Problem
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 8. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-239).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 9. Allow ECT sensor 1 to cool to ambient temperature .
• If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P1116,
troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC 10. Note the ambient temperature.
P1116.
11. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, but do
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at not install it on the engine.
ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
Are the connections and terminals OK?
13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 quickly in the
YES-Go to step 2. DATA LIST with the HDS.
NO-Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to 14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
step 27. ambient temperature.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Does the value of ECT SENSOR 1 differ 5,4 OF
(3°C) or more?
YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-239), then
Are DTC P1116 and P2183 indicated at the same go to step 27.
time?
YES-Go to step 15. time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
NO-Go to step 4.
15. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 minutes.
4. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 minutes.

HDS.
Is about 129 OF (54°C) or less, or 1.54 V or more

indicated?

go to step 27.
NO-Go to step 6.
11-156 BACK
16. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA-LIST with the 25. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1, and ECT
HDS. SENSOR 2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is about 118 of (48°C) or less, or 1.75 V or more 26. Compare thevalue of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
indicated? - ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
SENSOR 2and the ambienttemperature,
YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-239), then individually.
go to step 27.
Does one of the sensors differ more than 5.4 of
NO-Go to step 17. (3 OC) from the ambient temperature?
17. Let the engine idle 10 minutes. YES-Replace the sensorthafdiffered mbrethan
5.4 ~ (3 'C) from the ambient temperature, then go
18. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the to step 27.
HDS.
Is about 131°F (55 OC) or less, or 1.50 V or more time. Check for poor connections'or loose terminals
indicated? at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then
reconnect all connectors, and refill the cooling
YES-Replace ECTsensor 2 (see page 11-239), then system (see page 10-6) .•
go to step 27:
27; Turn the ignition switch ON (IIY;
NO-Go to step 19.
21. Remove ECTsensor 1 (see page 11-239), and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-239). Is DTC P0116 indicated?
22. Allow the sensors to cool to ambient temperature. YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at ECT se'nsor1,ECT sensor2, and the
23. Note the ambient temperature. PCM, then go to step 1.
24. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, and ECT NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do not install them TemporaryDT.cs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
on the engine. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
BACK 11-157
PGM~FI System
OTe P1128: MAP S-ensor Signal Lower Than 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Expected,
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the generaL 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
troubleshooting information, (see page 11-3).,
1. Inspect the air cleaner element (see page 11-364).
Is it OK?,
YES':""'"Go to step 2., 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiatorfan comes on, then let it idle.
NO-Clean or replace the air cleaner element
(see page 11-364) . 14. Test-drive under these conditions:
. - ].'
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11)., • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158 'f (70 "C)
3. Check the MAP'SENSOR inthe DATA LIST with the • Engine speed between 1,200 and 5,500 rpm
HDS. " Transmission in D position
• Vehicle speed accelerated from 16-31 mph
Is there less thar154.1 kPa (16.0 in.Hg, 406mmHg) (25-50 km/h) under halfthrottle
or 1.61 V held for more than 5 seconds?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. , terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
3,000.rpm without load On Park or, neutral) until the NO-Go to step 16.
radiato~ fan come's on, then let it idle.
6. Test-drive under these conditions: DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• Engine- coolant temperature (ECr SENSOR 1) Does the screen indicate PASSED?
above 158 'f (70i "C), !
• Engine speed between 1,200 and 5,500 rpm YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
• Transmission in D position Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 15,
• Vehicle speed accelerated from 16-31 mph go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. II
(25-50 km/h) under halfthrottle
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1128 in the connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor
DTCs MENU with the HDS. and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
YES-Go to step 8.

poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP
sensor and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
11-158 BACK
DTC P1129: MAP Sensor Signal Higher than 5. Test-drive under these conditions:
Expected
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data above 158 "F (70 "C)
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general • Engine speed between 1,400 and 6,500 rpm
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Transmission in D position
• Drive at a steady speed between 55-75 mph
1. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts: (88-120 km/h) for 10 seconds.
• During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle
• PCV valve fully closed) for 2 seconds.
• PCV hose
• EVAP canister purge valve 6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC Pl129 in the
• Throttle body DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• Intake manifold
• Brake booster hose Does the screen indicate FAILED?
Are there any vacuum leaks? YES-Go to step 7.
YES-Repair or replace the part(s) with vacuum NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
leaks, then go to step 9. failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP
NO-Go to step 2. sensor and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
HDS. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Is there more than 36.9 kPa (11.0 in.Hg, 10. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
277 mmHg) or 1.14 V held for more than
5 seconds? 11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
YES-Go to step 7. 12. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
NO-Go to step 4. radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-159
PGM-FI System
13. Test-drive underthese conditions:

above 158 "F (70 "C)
• Engine speed between 1,400 and 6,500 rpm
• Transmission in D position
(88-120 km/h) for 10 seconds.
fully closed) for 2 seconds.

to step 1.
NO-Go to step 15.



connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor
11-160 BACK
DTC P1172: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 11. Check forTemporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High
[sDTe P1172 and/or P1174' indicated?
Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Range High YES-Check for poor connections or loose
NOTE: then go to step 1.
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general NO-Go to step 12.
• Information marked with an asterisk ( 'j applies to the 12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1172 and/or
front bank (Bank 2). P1174' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Does the screen indicate PASSED?
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1172 and/or P117 4 . (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. screen indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF
CONDITION, keep idling until a result comes on.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent

failure, the system is OK at this time, Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the screen
6. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page

11-240).

BACK 11-161
PGM-FI System
OTe P1297: ELD Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS..
Is 72 A or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this =

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Terminal side of female terminals
at the ELD and the PCM.•
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector. (A10) and the ELD, then goto step 13.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NO-Go to step 20.
6. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is 72 A or more indicated? 12. Replace the left side engine compartment wire
harness (see page 22-24).
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 11.
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDs.
18. Turn on the headlights.
11-162 BACK

terminals at the ELD unit and the PCM, then go to
step 1.


software (see page 11-7), 'or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8). ..
23. Turn on the headlights.

terminals at the ELD unit and the PCM. If the PCM
(see page 11-8), then go to step 22. If the PCM was

BACK
11-163
PGM-FI System
OTC P1298: ELD Circuit High Voltage 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record al\ freeze data 8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A10 and ELD 3P connector terminal No.3.
2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
ELD 3P CON!\IECTOR
Is 0.2 A or less indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.

at the ELD and the PCM .•
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.

Terminlll side of female terminals
6. Measure voltage between ELD 3P connector Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 11.
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
(A10)"and the ELD, then go to step 13.
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 181G

ACG (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box
and the ELD, then go to step 13.
BACK
11~164
11. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector 18. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
terminal No.2 and body ground. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HOS.
/s DTC P1298 indicated?
~ §NDIBLKI
terminals at the ELD unit and the PCM. If the PCM
= substituted, go to step 1.
Wire side of female terminals NO-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ELD and

G302, then go to step 13.
12. Replace the left side engine compartment wire

harness (see page 22-24).
YES-Go to step 18.

BACK 11-165
PGM-FI System
OTC P1549: Charging System High Voltage 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCswith the HDS.
NOTE: Is DrC P1549 indicated?

anyon-board snapshot, and review the general YES-Check for poor connections or loose
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). terminals at the alternator and the main under-
• If a high voltage battery (24 V, etc.) is connected to hood fuse box, then go to step 1.
the vehicle, this DTC can be stored.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
4. Check under these conditions:
• AlC switch off

• Headlights off

neutral) 1 minute.
Is DrC P1549 indicated?

goto step 7.

at the alternator and the main under-hood fuse
box.•
• AlC switch off

• Headlights off

neutral) 1 minute.
11-166
BACK
.r.
DTC P16BB: Alternator B Terminal Circuit: 8. Check for an open in the wire betweeAthe .
Low Voltage alternator and main under:hood fuse box at the
starter subharness.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general Is the harness OK?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). go to.step 9.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO-Repair open in the wire between the
alternator and the main under-hood 'fuse box, then
3. Start the engine. go to step 9.
4. Check under these conditions: 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
• AlC switch on 10. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

• Blower fan at maximum speed 11. Dothe PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
neutral) 1 minute: 13. Check under these conditions:
6. Check for Temporary DTCsor DTCs with the HDS. • AlC switch on
Is DTC P16BB indicated?: • Blower fan at maximum speed
YES-Go to step 7. '/ ..
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this neutral) 1 minute~ ,
at the alternator and the main under-hood fuse box, 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
and check the battery periqrmance (see page
22-76) .• Is DTC P16BB indicated?
7. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at YES-Check for poor connections or loose
the alternator and the main under-hood fuse box terminals at the alternator and the main"under-
(+B line). hood fuse box, then go to step 1.
Are the connections and terminals OK? . NO~ Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go·to the
YES-Go to step 8. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to

step 9.
BACK
1·1-167
'"
OTC P16BC:Alternator FR Terminal Circuit! 11. Measure voltage between alternator 4Pconnector
IGP Circuit Low Voltage terminal No.1 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). IG1.
(BLK/YE l) r-'-1--.--'2--'
1. Check for poor connections at the alternator 4P
connector. 3 4
Are the connectionsOK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair the connections, then go to step 18. Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 12.
5. Check under these conditions: alternator (lG1 line) and the No. 18 ACG (10 A) fuse
in under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 17.
• AlC switch on
• Temperature control at maximum cool 12. Measure voltage between. alternator 4P connector
• Blower fan at maximum speed terminal No.4 and body ground.
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
neutral) 1 minute.
1 2 ALTF
7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 3 4 (WHT/RED)
Is DTC P16BC indicated?
YES-Go to step ,8.

=
time. Check for poor .connections or loose terminals Wire side of female terminals
at the alternator.•..'.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is there about 5 V?
9. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector. YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-36), then
go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 13.
11-168 BACK
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 17. Reconnect all connectors.
14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
15. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). 19. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
16. Check for continuity between alternator 4P 20. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
connector terminal No.4 and PCM connector
terminal C44. 21. Start the engine.
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR 22. Check under these conditions:

II
1 2 • AlC switch on
3 4 • Temperature control at maximum cool
IALTF (WHT/REDI • Blower fan at maximum speed
PCM CONNECTOR C (49PI 23. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in Park or
Ir II neutral) 1 minute.
111 2 3 4151617 8 19110 I
111 12V V115116117118 19201211
Q
V V 24><.1251>< 26271281
IV IV IV 32133I34VV 37361391
140 41 42 43144 45146 471461491 Is DTC P16BC indicated?
IALTF (WHT/REDI YES-Check for poor connections or loose
Terminal side of female terminals terminals at the alternator and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
YES-Go to step 25. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
(C44) and the alternator, then go to step 17.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-169
PGM-FI System

• AlC switch on
• Blower fan at maximum speed

neutral) 1 minute.
Is DTC P16BC indicated?

terminals at the alternator and the PCM. If the PCM

complete. Ifthe PCM was substituted, replace the
11-170 BACK
DTC P16BD: Starter Cut Relay 2 Malfunction DTC P16BE: Starter Cut Relay 1 Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3)~ troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
2. Clear the OTC with the HOS and wait 5 seconds. 2. Clear the OTC with the HOS and wait 5 seconds.
3. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS. 3. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
Is OTe P16BO indicated? Is OTe P16BE indicated?
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at starter cut relay 2 and the PCM .• at starter cut relay 1 and the PCM .•
4. Replace starter cut relay 2. 4. Replace starter cut relay 1.
5. Reset the PCM with the HOS. 5. Reset the PCM with the HOS.
6. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). 6. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
7. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS. 7. Check for Temporary OTCs or DTCs with the HOS.
Is OTe P16BO indicated? Is OTe P16BE indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at starter cut relay 2 and the PCM, then terminals at starter cut relay 1 and the PCM, then
go to step 1. go to step 1.
NO- Troubleshooting is complete. If any other NO- Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated OTC's troubleshooting .• indicated OTC's troubleshooting.•
BACK 11-171
PGM-FI System
OTe P16BF: Starter CutRelay STRLY Circuit 9. Reconnect all connectors.

Malfunction
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 11. Reset the PCM with the HOS.
2. Clear the OTC with the HOS and wait 5 seconds.
Is DTC P16BF indicated?
Is DTC P16BF indicated? terminals at starter cut relay 1, starter cut relay 2,
and the PCM, then go to step 1.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system isOK at this Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•
at starter cut relay 1, starter cut relay 2, and the
PCM .• 14. Reconnect all connectors.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
5. Jump the SCS line with the HOS. good PCM (see page 11-8).
6. Remove starter cut relay 1 and starter cut relay 2. 16. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
7. Oisconnect PCM connector A (49P). Is DTC P16BF indicated?
8. Check for continuity between PCM connector YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminal A3 and body ground. . terminals at starter cut relay 1, starter cut relay 2,
and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the PCM was
STRLV (LT GRN) 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go
to step 1.

Q
=

(A3) and starter cut relay 1 or starter cut relay 2,
then go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 14.
11-172 BACK
DTC P2183: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Rangel 11. Connect ECT sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do
Performance Problem not install it on the engine.
NOTE: 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) .

• Before y.ou troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 quickly in the
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). DATA LIST with the HDS .
• If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P2183,
troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC 14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the
P2183. ambient temperature.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at Does ECT SENSOR 2 differ 5.4 OF (3 "C) or
ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2. more?
Are the connections and terminals OK? YES-Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-239), then
go to step 27.
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
step 27. at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM .•
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 minutes.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 16. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Are DTC P1116 and P2183 indicated at the same
time? Is about 118°F (48°C) or less, or 1.75 V or more
indicated? -;
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 4. go to step 27.
4. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 minutes. NO-Go to step 17.
5. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the 17. Letthe engine idle 10 minutes.
HDS.
Is about 131°F (55 "C) or less, or 1.50 V or more HDS.
indicated?
Is about 131°F (55 °C) or less, or 1.50 V or more
YES-Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-239), then indicated?
go to step 27.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO-Go to step 19.
8. Remove ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-239).
9. Allow ECT sensor 2 to cool to ambient temperature.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-173
PGM .. FI System
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
20. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6). 28. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
21. Remove ECTsensor 1 (see page 11-239), and ECT 29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
sensor 2 (seepage 1.1-239)..
22. Allow the sensors to cool to ambient temperature.
24. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, and ECT terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do not install them PCM, then go to step 1.
on the engine.
25. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 arid ECT Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
SENSOR 2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
26. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the

ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature
individually.
Does one of the sensor differ more than 5.4 OF

(3°C) from the ambient temperature?
YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than

5.4 ~ (3 "C) from the ambient temperature, then go
to step 27.

at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then
reconnect all connectors, and refill the cooling
system (see page 10-6).•.
11-174 BACK
DTC P2184: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR

HDS.
Is about 356 of (180°C) or more, or 0.08 V or less

indicated? =

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between ECT
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. sensor 2 and the PCM (A21), then go to step 13.
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector. NO-Go to step 18.
6. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the 12. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-239).
HDS.
Is about 356 of (180°C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
indicated? 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES-Go to step 7. 15. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 11. 16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Is OTC P2184 indicated?
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). YES-Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

(cont'd)
BACK
11-175
PGM-FI System


substituted, go.to step 1.

11-176 BACK
OTC P2185: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit High 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Voltage
9. Remove the jumper wire from the ECT sensor 2 2P
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data connector.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Measure voltage between ECT sensor 2 2P
HDS. ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR
Is about -40 of (-40°C) or less, or 4.92 Vor

more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Intermittent failure; the system is OK at this

at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM .• =
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Wire side of female terminals
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector.

Is there about 5 V?
5. Connect ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminals No.1
and No.2 with a jumper wire. YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 16.

ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR
~
U
ECT2 (BLU) SG4 (GRN) 14. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
JUMPER WIRE

HDS.
Is about - 40 OF ( -40°C) or less, or 4.92 Vor

more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-177
PGM-FI System
terminal A27 and ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminal A21 and ECT sensor 2 2P connector
ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR
(A27) and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22. (A21) and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22.
17. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 21. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-239).
18. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 22. Reconnect all connectors.
11-178 BACK

terminals at ECT sensor 2 andthe PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO- Troubleshooting is complete. If any other



terminals at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM. Ifthe PCM

BACK
11-179
PGM~FI System
DTC P2195: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean
7. Reinstall the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
DTC P2197: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2, 11-240).
Sensor 1) Signal Stuck Lean
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 9. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
front bank (Bank 2). 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS;
• If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled
before this DTC was stored, refuel, and clear the DTC Is DTC P2195 and/or P2197' indicated?
with the HDS.
• If DTC P2101, P2118, P2135, P2138, P2176 or a YES-Check for poor connections or loose
combination of P2122 and P2127, P2122 and P2138 or terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
P2127 and P2138 is stored at the same time as DTC then go to step 1.
P2195 (P2197)', troubleshoot those DTCs first, then
recheck for DTC P2195 (P2197)'. NO-Go to step 12.
1. Check the installation of the A/F sensor (Sensor 1). 12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2195 and/or
Is the AlF sensor loose or disconnected from the
exhaust pipe? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES-Go to step 6. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

NO-Go to step 2. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. III
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at A/F sensor
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
4. Start the engine, then let it idle. until a result comes on.
Is DTC P2195 and/or P2197* indicated?

then go to step 13.

at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If any
other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to
the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
BACK
11-180
13. Update the PCM if it does not:have the latest DTC P2227: BARO Sensor Circuit Rangel
a
software (see page 11-7), or substitute known- Performance Problem
NOTE:
14. Start the engine, then let it idle for 2 minutes. • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
'-'.'
15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3) .
• If DTC POl 07, P0108, Pl128, and/or Pl129 are stored
Is DTe P2195 and/or P2197* indicated?· at the same time as DTC P2227, troubleshoot those
DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P2227.
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and wait 2 seconds.
If the PCM was updated, substitute a known"good
PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 14. If the PCM 2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
was substituted, go to step 1. the HDS.
NO-Go to step 16. Is about 101 kPa (29.9 in.Hg, 760 mmHg), or about
2.9 Vat sea level indicated?
P2197" in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. YES-Go to step 3.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other PCM, replace the originalPCM (see page 11-244).•
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor 4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
(Sensor 1) and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated, radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If 5. Test-drive under these conditions:
until a result comes on. • Engine coolanttemperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158 1= (70 OC)
• Transmission in 0 position
• Throttle position between 17 degrees and
33 degrees for 3 seconds


time.•
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 7. If

the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
5.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-.181
PGM-F'I System
7. Check the condition of the air cleaner element. 14. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for DTC P2227 in the
Is the air cleaner element OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the air cleaner element (see page complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
11-364), original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
8. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
good PCM (see page 11-8), NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the
9. Reset the PCM with the HDS. PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 11.

above 158 'f (70 "C)
'. Transmission in 0 position
• Throttle position between 17 degrees and
33 degrees for 3 seconds

good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 11.lfthe
PCM was substituted, goto step 1.
NO-Go to step 14.
11-182 BACK
DTC P2228: BARO Sensor Circuit Low Voltage DTC P2229: BARD Sensor Circuit High
Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record'alUreeze data
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data'
troubleshooti'ng information (see page 11-3). and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. 2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Is about 53 kPa (15.6in):'g,397 mmHg), or 1.58 V
or less indicated? C Is about 160 kPa (47.2 in.Hg, 1,200 mmHg), or
4.49 V, or more indicated?
YES-Go to st~p 3.
YES-Go to step 3.
time.• NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.•
3. Update the PCM if itdoes not have the latest
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- 3. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
good PCM (see page 11-8). software (see page 11~7), or substitute a known- .
terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, YES-Check for poor connections ,or loose
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, .
recheck. If the PCM was substituted in step 3, go to substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then
step 1. recheck. If the PCM was substituted in step 3, go to
step 1.
complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are NO-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
indicated, go to the indicated DTC's .'complete; If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
troubleshooting .• indicated, go to the indicated DTC's
BACK
PGM-FI System
DTC P2237: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
Sensor 1) IP Circuit High Voltage 6P connector terminal No.5 to and PCM connector
terminal B31(B32)' .
DTC P2240: Front AlFSensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) IP Circuit High Voltage A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 11 6P CONNECTOR
NOTE: 1 2l(
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 456
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general IPB1(GRNI IIIPB2(GRN/REDI*
front bank (Bank 2). PCM CONNECTOR B (49PI
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). .Q LLI 2 3 4~6~617 819(101.

.Q
111 1213141161161171181920 211
~ L22 23 2.4.2SJ~ 28lL.1LJ
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ~29 30 31 32133134~36~36 37 36 391
1140 41141 '144146146I/VVI
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at IPB1 (GRNII ~GRN/REDI*
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. Terminal side of female terminals
4. Check forTempofary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is there continuity?
Is OTe P2237 and/or P2240' indicated? YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 5. NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM

(B31 (B32)') and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this to step 14.
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM .•
11-184 BACK
10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P). 19. Monitor the OBD STATUS forDTC P2237 and/or
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the Does the screen indicate PASSED?
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes.
12. Measure voltage between'A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 18,
connector terminal No.5 and body ground. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting;.
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 6P CONNECTOR NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
4

=
Wire side of female terminals software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
Is there about 0.2 V or less? 23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 20. Is DTC P2237 and/or P2240' indicated?

terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.
13. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
11-240). PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was
NO-Go to step 24.
16. Reset the PCM with the HDS. P2240' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). Does the screen indicate PASSED?
18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Is DTC P2237 and/or P2240' indicated? original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
YES-Check for poor connections or loose go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
then go to step 1. NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
NO-Go to step 19. (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If
BACK
11-185
PGM-FI System
DTC P2238~ Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low Voltage ' terminal B31 (B32)' and body ground.
Sensor 1) IP Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
• Information marked with an asterisk ( ') applies to the
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). '
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at Is there continuity?

radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. to step 14.
Is DTC P2238 and/or P2241' indicated? NO-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 5. 10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P).
NO-Intermittent failure, the system. is OK at this 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 'and the PCM .• radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes.
s. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
7. Disconne'ct the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) SP connector.
BACK
11-186
12. Measure voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P 19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2238 and/or
connector terminal No.5 and body ground. P2241 , in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.


4
= screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
Is there about 0.2 V or less? 21. Reconnect all connectors.
YES-Go to step 20. 22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
NO-Go to step 13. good PCM (see page 11-8).
13. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
11-240).
Is DTC P2238 and/or P2241* indicated?
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.
Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
16. Reset the PCM with the HDS. PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck.lfthe PCM was
NO-Go to step 24.
24, Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2238 and/or
Is DTC P2238 and/or P2241* indicated? P2241 , in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose Does the screen indicate PASSED?
then go to step 1. YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO-Go to step 19. original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other

(Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
BACK
11-187
PGM-FI System
OlC P2243: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit High Voltage SP connector terminal No.6 and PCM connector
OlC P2247: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit High Voltage roo--
NOTE:
1 2 V
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general VCENTB2 (REDIWHT)*I I VCENTB1 (RED)
~ ~
front bank (Bank 2). PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
VCENTB2 (REDIWHT)* VCENTB1 (RED)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). J'
J 1 12
"
41 6 I 6 17 8 I 9110 L
111 12 1 14116116117118 1920 211
122 23 24 Xl26L>< 26 VI VI
I
129 30 31 32133134136136 3738 391
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 140 I 41 421/144146146 / 1/1/1
'-----'
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. Terminal side offemale terminals
Is ore P2243 and/or P2247* indicated? YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 5. NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM

NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this to step 14.
S. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
BACK
11-188
10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P). 19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2243 'and/or '
P2247· in the DTCsMENU with the HDS.
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the Does the screen indicate PASSED?
12. Measure voltage between A!F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step "8,
connector terminal No.6 and body ground. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshootiAg .•
NO-If the scre~m indicates FAILED, check for poor

A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1)6P CONNECTOR
connecti,ons or loose terminals at the A/F sensor,
(Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. Ifthe
2
until a result comes on. ' "
4 5
VCENTB1 (RED) 20. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
VCENTB2 (RED/WHT)*
Y. 21. Reconnect all connectors.,
=
22. Upclate the PCM ifitdoes,not have the latest
Wire side offemale terminals software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
Is there about 0.2 V or less?' • 23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 20. Is DTC P2243 and/or P224T indicated?

terminalsatthe A/Fsensor (Sensor 1)and the PCM.
13. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page " If the PCMwas updated, substitute a known-good
11-240). PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck.lfthe PCM was
NO-Go to step 24.
24. MonitortheOBD STATUSforiDTC P2243 and/or
16. Reset the PCM with the HDS. P224T in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
17. Dothe PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). Does the screen indicate PASSED?
18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Is DTC P2243 and/or P224T indicated? original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
YES-Check for poor connections or loose go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
then go to step 1. NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
NO-Go to step 19. (Sensor 1) and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
BACK 1,1'-189
<I'.
8GM-FI System
DTC P2245: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit Low Voltage terminal B15 (B24)' and body ground.
DTC P2249: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2, PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

Sensor 1) VCENT Circuit Low Voltage VCENTB1 (RED)
NOTE: '
front bank (Bank 2);' , "
Q
= =
2. Clear the DTC with the'HDS .. Terminal side of female terminals
3. Start the engine. Hold the 'engine speed at Is there continuity?

radiator fan comes on,thenlet it idle 2 minutes. YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(B15 (B24) ') and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go
4. Check for Temporary DTCs orDTCs with the HDS. to step 14.
IsDTC P2245 andlorP2249* indicated? NO-Go to step 10.
NO-Intermittentfailure"thesystem is OK atthis 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
time. Check for poor connections or: loose terminals 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
attheA/F sensor (Sensor1tand the PCM .• radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes.
7. Disconnect the AlF sensor (Sensor 1) 6P connector.
ii,
11,'-190 BACK
connectorterminal No.6 and body ground. P2249' in the DTCsMENU with ~he HDS.


1 2 Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 18,
456
VCENTB1 (RED) NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
VCENTB2 (RED/WHT)
"Y (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
13. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (seepage 23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
11-240).
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.
If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
16. Reset the PCM with the HDS. PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
NO-Go to step 24.
Is DTC P2245 and/or P2249' indicated? P2249' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.

(Sensor 1) and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
BACK 11-191
PGM-FI System
OTC P2251: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
Sensor 1) VS Circuit High Voltage 6P connector terminal No.4 and PCM connector
Sensor 1) VS Circuit High Voltage r--
NOTE:
1 2 V
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general VSB1 (BLU) I I VSB2 (RED/BLU)
~ ~
• If DTC P2251 and/or P2254 • is stored at the same time
as DTC P0134 and/or P0154 0, troubleshoot DTC P2251 PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
and/or P2254° first, then recheck for P0134 and/or VSB1 (BLU) VSB2 (RED/BLU)*
P0154 '. Ilf "11
• Information marked with an asterisk ( 0) applies to the J 1 I2 3 4161617 8 9jWI.

front bank (Bank 2). 111 12 131 4116116117118 1920 211
122 23 24 ><1261>< 26 ViVI
129 30 31 32133(34136136 3736 391
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 140 141 42 VI44I46I46 'VVI
V
~

radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes. YES-Go to step 10.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
Is DTe P2251 and/or P2254' indicated? to step 14.

11-192 BACK
11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2251 and/or
3,000 rpm without load (in .Park or neutral) until the P2254' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
12. Measure voltage between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 6P
connector terminal No.4 and body ground. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 11 6P CONNECTOR go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•

1 2
456 screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
VSB1 (BLUI until a result comes on.
VSB2 (RED/BLUI*
':i.. 20. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

Is there about 0.2 V or less? good PCM (see page 11-8).
YES-Go to step 20. 23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Go to step .13. If DTC P2251 and/or P2254· indicated?
13. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor1) (see page 11-240). YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.
14. Reconnect all connectors. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). substituted, go to step 1.
16. Reset the PCM with the HDS. NO-Go to step 24.
17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). 24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2251 and/or
Is DTC P2251 and/or P2254· indicated?
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
then go to step 1. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 23,
NO-Go to step 19.
BACK
11-193
PGM-FI System
OTC P2252: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low Voltage terminal B13 (B14)' and body ground.
OTC P2255: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2, PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)

Sensor 1) VS Circuit Low Voltage VSB1 (BLU) VSB2 (RED/BLU)
III -II
NOTE: U1 2 3 4161617 8 I 9 110 I

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 111 1213 14116116117J18 1920 21J
122 2324 ><1261>< 28V VI
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 129 30 31 32133134136136 3738 391
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 1140 41 42 1/144146148 1/ 1/1/1
.Q .Q
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Terminal side offemale terminals

radiator fan comes on, then let it idJe 2 minutes. YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. to step 14.
Is DTC P2252 and/or P2255" indicated? NO-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to. step 5. 10. Reconnect PCM connector B (49P).
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM .• radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 2 minutes.
BACK
11-194
connector terminal No.4 and body ground. P2255' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.


2
456
VSB1 (BLU) NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
VSB2 (RED/BLU)* connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
'Y. (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
13. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
11-240).
Is DTC P2252 and/or P2255" indicated?
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminals atthe A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.
If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
16. Reset the PCM with the HDS. PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
NO-Go to step 24.
Is DTC P2252 and/or P2255' indicated? P2255' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.

BACK 11-195
PGM-FI System
DTe P2270: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1, 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Sensor 2) Circuit Signal Stuck Lean
DTe P2271: Rear Secondary H02S (Bank 1,
Sensor 2) Circuit Signal Stuck Rich 10. Dothe PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
DTe P2272: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2, 11. Start the engine, then let it idle without load (in
Sensor 2) Circuit Signal Stuck Lean Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
DTe P2273: Front Secondary H02S (Bank 2, 12. Test-drive under these conditions:
Sensor 2) Circuit Signal Stuck Rich
NOTE: above 158 "F (70 "C)
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and • Vehicle speed between 35-55 mph
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general (56-88 km/h)
troubleshooting information (seepage 11-3). • Drive 1 minute or more
front bank (Bank 2). 13. Check for Temporary DTCsorDTCs with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is DTe P2270, P2271, P2272', and/or P227S'
indicated?
3. Start the engine, then let it idle without load (in terminals atthe secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. the PCM, then go to step 1.
4. Test-drive under these conditions: NO-Go to step 14.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2270, P2271,
above 158 'f (70 "C) P2272', and/or P2273' in the DTCs MENU with the
• Vehicle speed between 35-55 mph HDS.
(56-88 km/h)
• Drive 1 minute or more Does the screen indicate PASSED?
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2270, P2271, YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
P2272 , , and/or P2273 , in the DTCs MENU with the Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13,
HDS. go to the indicated DTC'stroubleshooting .•
Does the screen indicate FAILED? NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
YES-Go to step 6. H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for CONDITION, go to step 12.
poor connections or loose terminals at the
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the

11-241).
11-196 BACK
DTC P2610: PCM Internal Power Off Timer
Malfunction
YES-Go to step 4.

time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
troubleshooting.•



BACK 11-197
PG.M-FI System
DTC P2AOO: Rear A/F Sensor (Bank 1, 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Sensor 1) Circuit Range/Performance
Problem 7. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-240).
DTC P2A03: Front A/F Sensor (Bank 2,
Sensor 1) Circuit Range/Performance 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Problem
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311) .
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 11. Test-drive under these conditions:
front bank (Bank 2). • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158 "F (70 "C)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • Transmission in D position
• Vehicle speed between 25-55 mph (40-
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 88 km/h) for 5 minutes.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at (88-120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the (with the throttle fully closed) for 4 seconds.
/s DTe P2AOO and/or P2AOS' indicated?
above 158 "F (70 "C) YES-Check for poor connections or loose
• Transmission in D position terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
• Vehicle speed between 25-55 mph (40- then go to step 1.
88 km/h) for 5 minutes.
• Drive at a steady speed between 55-75 mph NO-Go to step 13.
(88-120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate
(with the throttle fully closed) for 4 seconds. 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2AOO and/or
P2A03· in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2AOO and/or
P2A03· in the DTCs MEN U with the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Does the screen indicate FA/LED? YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

YES-Go to step 6. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If it is EXECUTING, screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
keep driving until a result comes on. Ifthe screen result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3 and CONDITION, go to step 11.
recheck.
11-198 BACK
DTC U0028: F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF)

Is DTC U0028 indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.

time .•

good PCM (see page 11-8).·

NO-If the PCM was updated, troobleshooting is

Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, g(jto the
BACK 11-199
~;}':~ -'.,,;,:
~GM"F.I System
OTC U0114: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM- 7. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
SH-AWD Control Unit) 20P connector terminals No.1 0 and No. 20' .
NOTE: SH-AWDCONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

• If DTC U0028 is stored at the same time as DTC
U0114, troubleshoot DTC U0028 first, then recheck
for DTC U0114.

3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Substitute a known-good SH-AWD control
YES-Go to step 4. unit (see page 15-71), then go to step 15 and
recheck. If DTC U0114 is not indicated, replacethe
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this original SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71), then
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals go to step 15.
at the gauge control module, the SH-AWD control
unit, and the PCM .• NO-Repair open in thewire between the SH-AWD
control unit (No. 10 (No. 20)") and the PCM (A48
4. Check for DTCs in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. (A49)'), then go to step 15.
Is SH-AWD system DTC 41 indicated? *: CANL line
YES-Go to step 5. 8. Check for a poor connections at the SH-AWD

control unit 20P connector and 8P connector.
NO-Go to step 8.
Are the connections OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
6. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit 20P connector.
NO-Repair the connections, then go to step 15.
11-200 BACK
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
20P connector terminals No.9 and body ground,
10. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit 20P connector. and between SH-AWDcontrol unit 8P connector
terminal No.2 and No.3 and body ground
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). individually.
12. Measure voltage between SH-AWD control unit 20P SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT 8P CONNECTOR
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
=
=
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Check the No. 20 SVTM-4, ARC, ODS (7.5 A)

fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is
OK, repair open in the wire between the No. 20 Q
STVM-4, ARC, ODS (7.5 A) fuse and the SH-AWD
control unit, then go to step 15.
YES-Substitute a known-good SH-AWD control

unit (see page 15-71), then go to step 15 and
recheck. If DTC U0114 is not indicated, replace the
original SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71), then
go to step 15.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the SH-AWD

control unit and body ground (G603), then go to
step 15.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-201
PGM-FI System
19. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs in the OTCs

MENU with the HOS.

terminals at the gauge control module, the
SH-AWO control unit, and the PCM, then go to step
1.

Temporary OTCs or OTCs indicated, go to the
11-202 BACK
DTC U0122: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-VSA 7. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
Modulator-Control Unit) control unit 46P connector terminals No. 38' and
No. 39.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
• If OTC U0028 is stored at the same time as OTC
U0122, troubleshoot OTC U0028 first, then recheck e 8 101112 16
282980 383940
for OTC U0122.
3. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS. Wire side of female terminals
Is orc U0122 indicated?

YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this control unit (see page 19-102), then go to step 15
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals and recheck. If OTC U0122 is not indicated, replace
at the gauge control module, the VSA modulator- the original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
control unit, and the PCM.• 19-102), then go to step 15.
4. Check for OTCs.in the OTCs MENU with the HOS. NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA
modulator-control unit (No. 39 (No. 38)') and the
Is VSA orc 86 indicated? PCM (A48 (A49)'), then go to step 15.
YES-Go to step 5. *: CANL line
NO-Go to step 8. 8. Check for a poor connection at the VSA modulator-

control unit 46P connector.
Are the connections OK?
6. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector. YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair the connection(s), then go to step 15.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-203
PGM~FI System
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Check for contim.iitybetween VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector terminals No. 43 and
10. Oisconnectthe VSA modulator-control unit 46P No. 46 and body ground.
connector.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
12. Measure voltage between VSA modulator-control

unit 46P connector terminal No. 40 and body
ground.
8 8 10 II 12 16
2120 8888 Wire side of female terminals
IG1 (ORN)
':i. Is there continuity?
= YES-Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-

control unit (see page 19-102), then go to step 15
Wire side of female terminals and recheck. If OTC U0122 is not indicated, replace
the original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA
YES-Go to step 13. modulator-control unit and body ground (G303),
then go to step 15.
NO-Check the No. 29 VSA (10 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in 15. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
the wire between the No. 29 VSA (10 A) fuse and connector.
the VSA modulator-control unit, then go to step 15.
19. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs in the OTCs

MENU with the HOS.
Is OTe U0122 indicated?

terminals atthe gauge control module, the VSA
modulator-control unit, and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

11-204 BACK
DTC U0155: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-Gauge 10. Connect gauge control module connector terminal
Control Module) A 12 to body ground with a jumper wire.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (12P)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CANH(WHT)

JUMPER WIRE

YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals terminal A48 and.body ground.
at the gauge control module and the PCM .•
4. Check for body electrical DTCs in the DTCs MENU
with the HDS.
Is DTC 81168,81169, and/or 81178 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Do the gauge control module input test

(see page 22-334) .•

7. Remove the gauge control module (see page
22-337). YES,-Go to step 12.
8. Disconnect gauge control module connector A NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(12P). (A48) and the gauge control module, then go to
step 14.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-205
PGM-FI System
12. Connect gauge control module connector terminal 14. Reconnect all connectors.
a
A6 to body ground with jumperwire.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR 'A (12P)
Is OTe U0155 indicated?

JUMPER WIRE
= terminals at the gauge control module and the PCM,
Wire side of female terminals then go to step 1.

13. Check for continuity between PCM connector Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
terminal A49 and body ground. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
=
Tetminal side of female terminals
YES-Substitute a known-good gauge control

module (see page 22-337), then go to step 14 and
recheck. If DTC U0155 is not indicated, replace the
original gauge controlrhodule (see page22~337),
then go to step 14.

(A49) and the gauge control module, then go to
step 14.
11,-206
BACK
DTC U0300: PGM-FI System and AfT System
Program Version Mismatch
NOTE:
• Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating
the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before
completion, the PCM will be damaged.
1. Do the PCM update procedure (PGM-FI system)

(see page 11-7).
2. Do the PCM update procedure (AfT system)

(see page 14-8).
3. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs withthe HOS.
YES-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-244) .

•
NO-The update is complete .•
BACK
11-207
PG;M-FI System
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part 1)
NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk (.) applies 8.. Disconnect the TPMS unit 20P connector (see page
to the CANL line. 18-162).
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal

acceleration sensor 4P connector (see page 19-100).
10. Disconnect the.steering angle sensor 5P connector
3. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P), then disconnect (see page 19-99).
the HDS.
11. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit 20P connector
4. Measure resistance between PCM connector (see page 15-71).
terminals A48 and A49.
12. With active damper system: Disconnect the active
damper control unit 14P connector (see page
18-118).
13. With AcuraLink: Disconnect the AcuraLink control

unit (XM receiver) connector A (20P) (seepage
23-96).

.. terminals A48 and A49·.
Is there about 333- 408 Q ?
YES-Go to F-CAN circuit troubleshooting (Part 2)
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Disconnect gauge control module connector A

(12P) (see page 22-337).
connector (see page 19-102). Is there continuity?
7. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) (see page YES-Repair short in the wires between PCM
24-152). connector terminals A48 and A49' .•
NO-Go to step 15.
11-208 BACK
15. Connect PCM connector terminal A48 to body 17. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
. ground with a jumper wire. control unit 46P connector terminal No. 39 and
body ground.
CANH(WHT) CANH(WHT)
JUMPER WIRE .Q
=
=
Terminal side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
16. Check for continuity between gauge control

module connector terminal A 12 and body ground. Is there continuity?
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (12P)

YES-Go to step 18.

(A48) and the VSA modulator-control unit.•
18. Check for cdntinuity between SRS unit connector

terminal A 11 and body ground.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)

=
Wire side of female terminals CANH

(WHT) b
~~~.;:..J
YES-Go to step 17. .Q

(A48) and the gauge control module.• Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 19.

(A48) and the SRS unit.•
(cont'd)
BACK
11-209
PGM-FI System
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part 1) (cont'd)
19. Check.for continuity between TPMS control unit 21. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor
20Pconnector terminal No.1 and body ground. 5P connector terminal No.4 and body ground.
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
Q =
=
(A48) and the TPMS control unit.• (A48) and the steering angle sensor.•
20. Check for continuity between yaw rate-Iateral/

longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P connector
YAW RATE-LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 21.

(A48) and the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor.•
11-210 BACK
22. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 24. Check for continuity between AcuraLink control
20P connector terminal No. 10 and body ground. unit (XM receiver) connector terminal A6 and body
ground.
ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER)
CONNECTOR A (20P)
CANH(W~I
1 2 3 4 V 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Q
Q
=
Wire side of female terminals =
YES-
• With active damper system: Go to step 23. YES-Go to step 25.
• Without active damper system: Go to step 24.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A48) and the AcuraLink control unit (XM
(A48) and the SH-AWD control unit.• receiver) .•
23. Check for continuity between active damper control

unit 14P connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR B (14P)
Q
=
YES-
• With AcuraLink: Go to step 24.
• Without AcuraLink: Go to step 25.

(A48) and active damper control unit.•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-211
PGM-FI System
25. Remove the jumper wire from PCM connector A 28. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
(49P). control unit 46P connector terminal No ..38 and
body ground.
26. Connect PCM connector terminal A49 to body
ground with a jumper wire. VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
16
888840
CANL(RED)
CANL(RED) =
JUMPER WIRE
=
Terminal side of female terminals Is there continuity?
27. Check for continuity between gauge control YES--:Go to step. 29.
module connector terminal A6 and body ground.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A (12P) (46P) and the VSA modulator-control unit. III
29. Check for continuity between SRS unit connector

terminal A12and body ground.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
CANL(RED)
Q
=
Q
=

(49P) and the gauge control module .• Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 30.

(49P) and the SRS unit..
11-212 BACK
····.riiJ
, ;'
30. Check for continuity between TPMScontrol unit 32.· Check for continuity between steering angle sensor
20P connector terminal No.11 and body ground. 5P connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5PCONNECTOR
=
Wire side offemale terminals Wire side offemale terminals
(A49) and the TPMS control unit.• (A49) and the steering angle sensor.•
31. Check for continuity between yaw rate-lateral!

~~~~ CANL (RED)
Q
=
YES-Go to step 32.

(A49) and the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
(cont'd)
BACK 11-213
PGM-FI System
33. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 35. Check for continuity between AcuraLink control
20P connector tElrminal No. 20 and body ground. unit (XM receiver) connector terminal A16 and
body ground.
, SH-AWD CONTROL IJNIT 20P ,CONNECTOR
ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER)
CONNECTOR A (20P)
.----.
1 2 3 .4 V 6 7 8 9 10
CANL(RED) 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
~CANLIREDI
=
=
YES-
• With active damper system: Go to step 34. YES-Go to step 36.
• Without active damper system: Go to step 35.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A49) and the AcuraLink control unit (XM
(A49) and the SH-AWD control unit.• receiver) .•

unit 14P connector terminal No.8 and body ground.
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR B (14P)
YES-
• With AcuraLink: Go to step 35.
• Without AcuraLink: Go to step 36.

(A49) and active damper control unit.•
11-214 BACK
36. Reconnect the gauge control module 12P connector. 40. Measure re~stance betwean PCM connector
terminals A48 and A49. '
37. Measure resistance between PCM connector
Terminal side of female terminals Is there about 2.34-2.86 kQ? ,
Is there about 2.34- 2.86 kQ ? YES-Go to step 41.
YES-Go to step 38.- NO~SubstitiJte a known-good VSA modulator-

control unit(see page 19-102).lfthe HDS identifies
NO-Substitute a known-good gauge control the ve/)icle"replace the original VSA modulator-
module (see page 22-337). If the HDS identifies the control unit(see page 19-102).•
, vehicle, replace the original gauge control module
(see page 22-337).• ,- 41. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector.
(12P). 42. Reconnect SRS unit connector A (28P).
39. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P

connector.
(cont'd)
BACK "'-215
PGM~FI System
43. Measure resistance between PCM connector 44. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P).
45. Reconnect the TPMS control unit 20Pconnector.
terminals A48 and A49 ..
.Terminal side of female terminals
Is there about 2.34-2.86·kQ?
NO-Substitute a known-good SRS unit (see page Is there about 2.34-2.86 kQ?
24-152). If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace
the original SRS unit (see page 24-152) .• YES-Go to step 47 .• , .
NO-Substitute a known-good TPMS control unit

(see page 18-162). Ifthe HDS identifies the vehicle,
replace the original TPMS control unit (see page
18-162);.
11-216 BACK
47. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector. 50. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit 20P connector.
48. Reconnect SH-AWD control unit 20P connector; 51. Reconnectthe active damper control unit14P
connector.
terminals A48 and A49. 52. Measure resistance between PCM connector

Is there about 2.34-2.86 kQ?
Is thereabout 2.34-2.86 kQ?
YES-Go to step 50.
YES-Go to step 53.
NO-Substitute a known-good SH-AWD control
unit (see page 15-71). If the HDS identifies the NO-Substitute a known-good active damper
vehicle, replace the original SH-AWD control unit control unit (see page 18-118). Ifthe HDS identifies
(see page 15-71).•. the vehicle, replace the original active damper
control unit (see page 18-118).•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-217
','
PGM-FI System
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part

1) (cont'd) 2)
53. Disconnect the active damper control unit 14P 1. Disconnect the gauge control module connector A
connector. (12P) (see page 22-337).
54. Reconnect Acur'aLink control unit (XM receiver) 2. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 25P
connector A (20P). connector (see page 19-102).
55. Measure resistance between PCM connector 3. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) (see page
terminals A48 and A49. 24-152).
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) 4. Disconnect. TPMS control unit connector A (20P)

(see page 18-162).
5. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal

acceleration sensor 4P connector (see page 19-100).
6. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector

(see page 19-99).
7. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit connector A

(20P) (see page 15-71).
Terminal side offemale terminals 8. With active damper system: Disconnect the active
damper control unit 14P connector (see page
Is there about 2.34- 2.86 kQ ? 18-118).
YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest 9. With AcuraLink: Disconnect the AcuraLink control
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- unit (XM receiver) connector A (20P) (see page
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the 23-96).
NO-Substitute a known-good AcuraLink control

unit (XM receiver) (see page 23-96). Ifthe HDS
identifies the vehicle, replace the original
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) (see page
23-96) .•
11-218 BACK
terminal A48 and body ground. terminal A49 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
= =
Terminal side of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Repair short in the wire betweenPCM YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal A48 and the gauge control connector terminal A49 and the gauge control
module, the VSA modulator-control unit, the SRS module, the VSA modulator-control unit, the SRS
unit, the TPMS control unit, the yaw rate-Iateral/ unit, the TPMS control unit, the yaw rate-Iateral/
longitudinal acceleration sensor, the steering angle ,Iongitudinal'acceleration sensor, the steering angle
sensor, the SH-AWD control unit, the active damper sensor, the SH-AWD control unit, the active damper
control unit (with active damper system), the control unit (with active damper system), the
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver (with AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver (with
AcuraLink)) or the DLC .• AcuraLink)) or the DLC .•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-219
PGM-FI System
12. Reconnect all connectors. 24. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
13. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3). 25. Reconnect the SRS unit connector A (28P).
14. Disconnect gauge control module connector A 26. Disconnect the TPMS control unit connector A (20P).
(12P).
27. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and read the HDS.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
Does the HOS identify the vehicle?
YES-Replace TPMS control unit (see page 18-162).
YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page
22-337) .• •
NO-Go to step 28.
NO-Go to step 16.
29. Reconnect the TPMS control unit connector A (28P).
17. Reconnect gauge control module connector A (12P).
18. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P acceleration sensor 4P connector.
connector.
YES-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit

(see page 19-102) .•
NO-Go to step 20.

connector.
22. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P).
YES-Replace the SRS unit (see page 24-152) .•
NO-Go to step 24.
11~220 BACK
31. Turn the ignition sWitch'ON (II), and read the HDS. 40. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does the HDS identify ~I]e vehic'e? 41. Reconnect the SH-AWD 'control unit 20P connector.
YES-Replace the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal 42. Disconnect the active damper control unit 14P
acceleration sensor (see page 19-100).• connector.
NO-Go to step 32. 43. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and read the HDS.
32. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Odes the HDS identify the vehicle?
33. Reconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal YES--Replace the ,active damper control unit
acceleration sensor 4P connector. (see page 18-118).•
34. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector. NO-Go to step 44.
35. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS. 44. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does the HDS identify the vehicle? 45. Reconnect the active damper control unit.
YES-Replace the steering angle sensor (see page 46. Disconnect AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver)
19-99). connector A (20P).
NO-Go to step 36. 47. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
36. Turn the ignition switch OFF; Does the HDS identify the vehicle? "
37. Reconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector. YES-Replace the AcuraLink control unit (XM
receiver) .•
38. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit connector A
(20P) NO-Update the PCM if it does not havethe'latest
39. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and read the HDS. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
Does the HDS identify the vehicle? PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-244).•
YES-Replace the SH-AWD control unit (see page

15-71).•
NO-Go to step 40.
BACK 1'1~221
.,
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (ll) ..•. 7. Check for continuity between PCM connector
2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
22-315). PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
Does the MIL indicator flash?
YES-Go to step 3;' .
NO-Substitute a known-good gauge control

module, and recheck. Ifthe MIL circuit is OK,
replace the original.gauge control module .
(see page 22-337) .•
=
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see,page 11-3),
4. Check the SCS in the DATA LlSTwith.the HDS.
Is a short. indicated?
YES-.Go to step 5; ,. (A32) and the SRS unit, theDLC .•
NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see.page11~7), or substitute a known- software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-244) .• PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-244) .•
6. Disconnect PCM connector A (.49P), then disconnect

the HDS.
11:~222 BACK
OLC Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Make sure the HDS and the DLC cable of the 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
HDS is normal.
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. immobilizer indicator.
2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3). Does the immobifizer indicator stay on or flash?
NOTE: Make sure the HDS is properly connected to YES-Go to the immobilizer system's
the DLC. troubleshooting (see page 22-402) .•
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS. NO-Go to step 11.
Does the HDS identify the vehicle? 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES-Go to step 4. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the
SH-AWD indicator.
NO-Go to step 21.
Does the SH-AWD indicator stay on?
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI
system with the HDS ... YES-Go to the SH-AWD system's general
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4) .•
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 13.
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and watch the SRS

indicator.
Does the SRS indicator stay on?
YES-Go to the SRS system's general

NO-Go to step 7.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the VSA

indicator.
Does the VSA indicator stay on?
YES-Go to the VSA system's general

NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-223
PGM-FI System
OLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page 18. Continue to check for continuity between DLC
22-315) to make sure the gauge is known-good. If terminal No.7 and body ground, while
the function test is OK, go to step 14. disconnecting these parts, one at a time:
14. Check for 8-CAN system DTCs without the HDS • SRS unit connector A (28P)
(see page 22-81). • VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
• Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector
Are any 8-CAN DTCs indicated? • Audio unit 17P connector
• SH-AWD control unit 20P connector
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• • Active damper control unit 14P connector
• TPMS control unit 20P connector
NO-Go to step 15. • MICU connector P (30P)
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Does continuity go away when one of the above
components is disconnected?
16. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
YES-Replace the part that caused an open when it
17. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No.7 was disconnected .•
and body ground.
NO-Repair short in the wire between the DLC (K-
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) line) and the VSA modulator-control unit, the
immobilizer-keyless control unit, the audio unit, the
SH-AWD control unit, the active damper control
unit, or the TPMS control unit.•
.Q
=
Is there 5 Q or less?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 19.
11~224 BACK
19. Connect DLC terminal No.7 to body ground with a 21. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
jumper wire. 22-315) to make sure the gauge is known-good. If
the function test is OK, go to step 22.
22. Check for B-CAN system DTCs without the HDS
(see page 22-81).
Is DTC 81168,81169, and/or 81178 indicated?
YES-Go to step 35.

JUMPER WIRE
NO-Go to step 23.
= 23. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
20. Check for continuity between body ground and 25. Measure voltage between DLC terminal No. 16 and
these connector terminals: body ground.
Connector Terminal DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)

SRS unit A (28P) No. 24 (LT BLU)
VSA modulator-control unit No. 15 (LTBLU)
46P
Immobilizer-keyless control No.5 (LT BLU)
unit 7P
Audio unit 17P No.6 (LT BLU)
SH-AWD control unit 20P No.5 (LT BLU)
Active damper control unit No.3 (LT BLU)
14P
TPMS control unit 20P No.7 (LT BLU)
MICU 30P No.6 (LT BLU) Terminal side of female terminals
Is there continuity between the DLC terminal and

each of the terminals in the chart? Is there battery voltage?
YES-Replace the unit that does not communicate YES-Go to step 26.
with the HDS .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal
NO-Repair open in the wire between the DLC (K- No. 16 and the No.7 BACK UP (10 A) fuse in the
line) and the appropriate connector.• under-dash fuse/relay box.•
(confd)
BACK 11-225
PGM-FI System
26. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No.4 and 32. Check for continuity between PCM connector
No. 16. terminal A48 and body ground.
=
Is there battery voltage? Is there continuity?
NO-Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
No.4 and G503 .• (A48) and DLC terminal No.6.•
27. Connectthe HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3). 33. Connect DLC terminal No. 14 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
31. Connect DLC terminal No.6 to body ground with a

jumper wire.
JUMPER WIRE

=
JUMPER WIRE
=
11-226 BACK
34. Check for continuity between PCM connector 35. Try to start the engine.
Does the engine start and idle smoothly?
YES-Go to F-CAN circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-208).•
NO-Go to step 36.
37. Check the No. 31G1 MAIN (50 A) fuse in the main
under-hood fuse box.
=
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the No.3
Is there continuity? IG1 MAIN (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. If the
wire is OK, go to step 38.
YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- NO-Repair short in the wire between the No. 31G1
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe MAIN (50 A) fuse and the main under-hood fuse
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good box. Also replace the No. 31G1 MAIN (50 A) fuse .•
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-244) .•

(A49) and DLCterminal No. 14.•
(cont'd)
BACK
11-227
PGM-FI System
38. Inspect the No.8 IGP (15 A) fuse in the under-hood 43. Disconnect each of the components or connectors
fuse/relay box. below, one at a time, and check for continuity
between PCM connector terminal 83 and body
Is the fuse OK? ground. '
YES-Go to step 44. • PGM-FI main relay 2

• Each injector 2P connector
NO-Go to step 39. • Camshaft position (CMP) sensOr 3P connector
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 6P connector
39. Remove the blown No. 81GP (15 A) fuse from the • Under-hood fuse/relay box 9P connector
under-hood fuse/relay box.
Does continuity go away when one of the above
40. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. components is disconnected?
41. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (49P). YES- Replace the component that made the short
to body ground go away when disconnected. If the
42. Check for continuity between PCM connector item is the PCM, update the PCM if it does not have
terminal 83 and body ground. the latest software (see page 11-7), or substitute a
the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
IGP (YEL/BLK) good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page
11-244). Also replace the No. 81GP (15 A) fuse .•
NO-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (83)

and the PGM-FI mainrelay 2, the injector, the CKP
sensor, or the under-hood huse/relay box. AlsO
replace the No, 8 IGP (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.•
Q
=
YES-Go to step 43.

PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-244).
Also replace the No. 81GP (15 A) fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box.•
BACK
11 ..228
44. Inspect the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in the 48. Check for continuity between PCM connector
under-dash fuse/relay box. terminal 842 and body ground.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 51.
NO-Go to step 45.
45. Remove the blown No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse

in the under-dash fuse/relay box.

=
YES-Go to step 49.
NO-Replace the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in

the under-hood fuse/relay box, and update the PCM
if it does not have the latest software (see page
11-7), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-8), then recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes
away with a known-good PCM, replace the original
PCM (see page 11-244).•
49. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (G) from the under-

dash fuse/relay box.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-229
PGM-FI System
50. Check for continuity between PCMconnector 54. Measure voltage between PCM connectorterminal
terminal B42 and body ground. B42 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
= =
Terminal side offemale terminals Terminal side offemale terminals
Is there continuity? Is there battery voltage?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the No. 19 YES-Go to step 55.
FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and the PCM (B42),
between the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 19
PGM-FI main relay 2, or between the No. 19 FUEL FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and the PCM (B42) .•
PUMP (20 A) fuse and the immobilizer control unit.
Also replace the No. 19FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in 55. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
the under-dash fuse/relay box.• A6 and body ground.
NO-Go to step 51. PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)

MRLY(GRN)
52. Disconnect PCM connectors A (49P) and B (49P).
=
YES-Go to step 59.
NO-Go to step 56.
BACK
11-230
;r,
57. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box14P 59. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
connector.
60. DisconnecUhe under-hood fuse/relay box9P
58. Check for continuity between PCM connector connector.
terminal A6 and under-hood fuse/relay box 14P
connector terminC!1 No.5. 61. Check for contin!Jity!:>etyveen PCM connector
terminal 83 and. under-hoodfLise/relay box 9P
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) connector terminal Nq. 1.
PCM (;ONNECTOR A (49P)

,---------,
Q

Q
14P CONNECTOR Terminal side of female terminals
MRLY(GRN)
.--or-L-r--'l ,UNDER-HOOD FUSE/REI.AY BOX 9P CONNECTOR
4 .5 6
7

Wire t;lde'of female terminals
YES- YES-Go to step 62.

• Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box .
• Update the PCM if it does not have the latest NO-Repair open inthe wire between the PCM (83)
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- and the under-hoc)tHuse/relay box.•
symptom/indication goes away with a known- 62. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 in the under-hood fuse/
good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page relay box (see page 22-77).' ;.. .
11-244).
"
Is PGM-FI main r~/,ay 10K?
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A6)
and the under-hood fuse/relay box.• YES-Go to step 63.

fuse/relay box) (see page 22~71')..'
(cont'd)
BACK
11':'231
PGM-FI System
63. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). 65. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal B36 and body ground.
64. Checldor continuity between body ground and
PCM connector terminals A41, B1, B40, B41, C1, PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
and C41 individually.
PCM. CONNEctORS
, \
A (49P)
Bl49P)
YES-Go to step 66.
NO-Go to step 67.
66. Continue to check for continuity between PCM

connector terminal B36 and body ground, while
disconnecting these parts, one at a time:
= • MAP sensor3P connector

• Output shaft (co,untershaft) speed sensor 3P
C(49P) ",.' connector


was disconnected .•
NO-Repair short in the wire between the PCM

(B36) and the MAP sensor, the output shaft
Terminalside
. '
of female, 'terminals (countershaft) speed sensor.•
YES-Go to step 65.

(A41, B1, B40, B41, C1, C41) and G101 .•
11~232
BACK
terminal C12 and body ground. terminal A24 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
=
=
68. Continue to check for continuity between PCM 70. Continue to check for continuity between PCM
connector terminal C12 and body ground, while connector terminal A24 and body ground, while
disconnecting these parts, one at a time: disconnecting the APP sensor 6P connector.
• EGR valve 6P connector Is there continuity?

• Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 3P
connector YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(A24) and APP sensor A..
components is disconnected? NO-Replace the accelerator pedal module
(see page 11-286) .•

(C12) and the EGR valve or the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor.•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-233
PGM-FI System
terminal A25 and body ground. terminal 818 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
VCC5 (BLU)
Q
=
72. Continue to check for continuity between PCM 74. Continue to check for continuity between PCM
connector terminal A25 and body ground, while connector terminal 818 and body ground, while
disconnecting these connectors one ata time. disconnecting the throttle body 6P connector.
• APP sensor 6P connector Is there continuity?

• FTP sensor 3P connector
Does continuity go away when One ofthe above (818) and the throttle body.•
NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-366).•

(A25) and the APP sensor 8 or the FTP sensor.•
11-234 BACK
VCC6
(VEL/BLU)
.Q
=
Terminal side of female termin'als
YES-Go to step 76.

76. Continue to check for continuity between PCM

connector terminal C11 and body ground, while
disconnecting the IMT actuator.

(C11) and the IMT actuator.•
NO-Replace the IMT actuator (see page 11-365).•
BACK 11.;.235
'! !,
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement
1. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-333).
3. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors (A).
4. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (B).
5. Remove the fuel rail mounting bolts (C) from the fuel rail (D).
6. Remove the injector clip (E) from the fuel rail.
7. Remove the injectors from the rails.
11-236 BACK
8. Coat the new O-ring (A) with clean engine oil, and insert the injectors (8) into the fuel rail (C).
9. Install the injector clip (D).
10. Coat the new injector O-ring (E) with clean engine oil.
11. Install the injectors in the injector base.
12. Install the fuel rail mounting bolts.
13. Install the connectors on the injectors.
14. Connectthe quick-connect fitting (see page 11-340).
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about 2 seconds, the
fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel leakage.
16. Install the intake manifold.
BACK 11;.237
PGM-FI System
MAP Sensor Replacement MAF SensorIIAT Sensor

Replacement
2. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector (A). 1. Disconnectthe MAF sensor/IAT senor 5P connector
. (A).
3. Remove the screw (8).
4. Remove the MAP sensor (C).

2. Remove the screw (8).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
with a new O-ring (D). 3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT senor (C).

with a new O-ring (D).
11-238
BACK
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ECT Sensor 2 Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6). 1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
2. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 9-3). 2. Remove the splash shield.
3. Remove the main under-hood fuse/relay box. 3. Disconnect the EeT sensor 2' 2P connector (A).
4. Disconnect the EeT sensor 1 2P connector (A).
c c
4. Remove EeT sensor 2 (B).

with a new O-ring (e), then refill the radiator with
5. Remove EeT sensor 1 (B).

with a new O-ring (e), then refill the radiator with
BACK
11-239
PGM-FI System
A/F Sensor Replacement
Special Tools Required Rear Bank(,Bankt)

02 sensor socket wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools
93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the rear A/F sensor 6P connector (A),
then remove the rear A/F sensor (8).
Front Bank (Bank 2)
1. Disconnect the front A/F sensor 6P connector (A),

then remove the A/F sensor (8).
B
44N·m
14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ttl
2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
11-240
BACK
Secondary. H02S Replacement
Special Tools Required Rear Bank (Bank 1)

02 sensor socket wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools
93750, or equivalent, commercially available 1. Disconnect the rear secondary H02S 4P connector
(A), then remove the rear secondary H02S (8).
Front Bank (Bank 2)
1. Disconnect the front secondaryH02S 4P connector

(A), then remove the front secondary H02S (8).
B
44N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
33Ibf·ft)
BACK 11-241
PGM-FI System
CMP Sensor Replacement CKP Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the timing belt (see page 6-13). 1. Move the auto-tensioner to remove tension from
the drive belt, then remove the belt (see page 4-33).
2. Remove the front camshaft pulley (CMP sensor
pulse plate) (A). 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-11).
3. Remove the upper and lower front covers from the

engine (see page 6-13).
4. Remove the CKP sensor (A) from the oil pump.
22N·m
92 N·m (9.2 kgf.m, 67 Ibf·ft)

Apply engine oil to the bolt threads.
3. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector (8), then

remove the back cover (C).
4. Remove the CMP sensor (A) from the back cover.
~4N.m procedure (see page 11-4).
(0.4 kgf·m, 2.9 Ibf·ft)

Install the timing belt (see page 6-16).

11-242 BACK
Knock Sensor Replacement
2. Remove the injector rails and the injector base

(see page 9-7).
3. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector (A), then

remove the knock sensor (B).
BACK
11~243
PGM-FI System
PCM Replacement
NOTE: 4. USA, Canada models: Selectthe PGM-FI system

• Make sure the HDS is loaded with the latest software with the HDS.
version.
• If you are replacing the PCM after substituting a 5. USA, Canada models: Selectthe INSPECTION
known-good PCM, reinstall the original PCM, then do MENU with the HDS.
this procedure.
• USA, Canada models: During the procedure, is any 6. USA, Canada models: Select the ETCS TEST, then
READ DATA, WRITE DATA, or other data checks fail, select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the
note the failure, then continue. screen prompts.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) NOTE: USA, Canada models: If the TP POSITION
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. CHECK indicates FAILED, continue with this
procedure.
7. usA, Canada models: Select the REPLACE PCM

MENU, then select READ DATA and follow the
screen prompts.
NOTE:
• USA, Canada models: Doing this step copies
(READS) the engine oil life data from the original
PCM so you can later download (WRITES) it into
the newPCM.
• USA, Canada models: If READ DATA indicates
FAILED, continue with this procedure.
8. USA, Canada models: Select the NT system with

the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. USA, Canada models: Select the REPLACE TCM/
PCM MENU, then select READ DATA and follow the
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM screen prompts.
DLC circuittroubleshooting (see page 11-223). If NOTE:
you are returning from DLC circuit troubleshooting, • USA, Canada models: Doing this step copies
skip steps 4 through 9,18 through 23, and 26 (READS) the ATF life data from the original PCM
through 28, and do the following procedures after so you can later download (WRITES) it into the
replacing the PCM; newPCM.
• USA, Canada models: If READ DATA indicates
• USA, Canada models: Replace the engine oil FAILED, continue with this procedure.
(see page 8-6) and the engine oil filter (see page
8-7). 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
• USA, Canada models: Replace the ATF (see page
14-266). 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
• USA, Canada models: Clean the throttle body
(see page 11-363).
11-244
BACK
. riiJ
12. Remove the bracket (D), then free the AlC discharge .20., USA, Canada models: Select the REPLACE PCM
line (E) from the clip (F) and remove the AlC suction , MENU, then select WRITE DATA and follow the
line mounting bracket bolt (G). " screen prompts.
NOTE: USA, Canada models: If the WRITE DATA

indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure.
21. USA, Canada models: Ifthe READ DATA (ATF life)

failed in step 9, go to step 24. Otherwise go to step
22.
22. USA, Canada models: 'Select the AfT SYSTEM with

the HDS.
23. USA, Canada models: Select the REPLACE TCM/

PCM MENU, then select WRITE DATA and follow
the screen prompts.
NOTE: USA, Canada models: If the WRITE DATA

indicates FAILED, continue with this procedure.
24. Select IMMOBI system with the HDS.
25. Enter the immobilizer code with the PCM

replacement procedure in the HDS; it allows you to
start the engine.
13. Remove the cover (H), then disconnect the PCM
connectors A, B, and C. 26. USA, Canada models: If the TP POSITION CHECK
failed in step 6 clean the throttle body (see page
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols 11-363), then go to step 27.
(A=D, B=.6., C=Q) embossed on them for
identification. . 27. USA, Canada models: If the READ DATA failed in
step 7 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 20, replace
14. Remove the bolts (I), then remove the PCM (J) .. the engine oil (see page 8-6) and engine oil filter
28. USA, Canada models: If the READ DATA failed in
16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). step 9 orthe WRITE DATA failed in step 25, replace
the ATF (see page 14-266), then go to step 29.
17. USA, Canada models: Manually input the VIN to
the PCM with the HDS. 29. Select PGM-FI system and reset the PCM with the
HDS.
NOTE: USA, Canada models: DTC P0630 "VIN Not
Programmed or Mismatch" may be stored because 30. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
the VIN has not been programmed into the PCM; software (see page 11-7).
ignore it, and continue this procedure.
18. USA, Canada models: If the READ DATA (engine oil
life) failed in step 7, go to step 21. Otherwise, go to 32. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
step 19.
19. USA, Canada models: Select the PGM-FI system

with the HDS.
BACK 11-245
Eleetftonic Throttle Control System
ONDER-HOOD FUSE RELAY BOX

Includes:
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL
SYSTEM (ETCS) CONTROL RELAY
,I
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) THROTTLE ACTUATOR

Update, page 11-7 . CONTROL MODULE
Substitution, page 11-8 (Contains THROTTLE ACTUATOR and
Replacement, page 11-244 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR)
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
POSITION lAPP) SENSOR
Signal Inspection, page 11-286
ACCELERATOR PEDAL MODULE

11-246 BACK
DTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0122: TP Sensor ACircuitLow Voltage 9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P
NOTE: 8eforeyou troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
troubleshooting information·(see page 11-3).
3. CheckTP SENSOR A in ,the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is there about 0.3 V or less?

YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there continuity,?

at the throttle body and the PCM .• YES-Repair short in the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM (817), then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 23.
Are DTC PO 122 and P0222 indicated at the same
time? 10. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
YES-Go to step 10. 11. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P

connector terminal No.2 and body ground. ,
NO-Go to step 5.
THROTTLE BODY6P CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector ....
7. Jump theSCS line with the HDS.
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
BACK 11~247
Electronic Throttle Control System
Ole Troubleshooting (cont'd)

13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-366).
14. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (49P). 18. Reconnect all connectors.
15. Check for continuity between PCM connector 19. Turn the ignition swiichON (II).
terminal 818 and throttle body 6P connector
terminal No.2. 20. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR 21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).

terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go
to step 1.

YES,.-Go to step 23. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
NO-Repair open in the wire ~etween the throttle
body and the PCM (819), then go to step 18. 25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.

terminals at the throttle body and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated,substitute a known-good PCM

11~248
BACK
Dle P0123: TP Sensor A Circuit High VOltage 8. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P
connector tern1inal No.1 and body ground.
2. Clear the DTCwith;the HDS •.
3. CheckTP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is there about 4.8 V or more?

Wir.. side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there about 5 V? .'

time. Check for poor connections· or loose terminals
at the throttle body and the PCM •• YES-Go to step 18.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. NO-Go to step 9.
Are DTC PO 123 and P0223 indicated at the same 9. Turn the ignitiorrswitch OFF.
time?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-249
ElectliQnic Throttle Control System
12. Check for continuity betweenPCM conn~or 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
terminal B1J and throttle. body6Pconne~or
terminal No.1. 14.. DisconneqUhe throttle.pody 6P connector.
THROTTLE BODY6P CONNECTOR 15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
16. Disconnect PCM connectorB (49P).
17. Check for continuity between PCM connector·

terminal B33 and throttle body 6P connector
terlTlh'lal No. .4.'
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
/'\.
1 12 31'41 516
I SG5(GRN)
Terminal side of femai·e termirials· . PCM CONNECTORB (49P)
If .1
LI 1 2 3 4161617 819110L
Q 111 1213 14 16116117116 1920 211
YES-Go to step 25. ~ 122 2324 ><1261>< 26 Vi /I
129 3031 32 38134136136 3736 391
NO-Repair open in the wire I:>~tween the throttle, 1140 41 42V1144146146 1/ ·VVI
body and the PCM (B17), then go to step 20. SG5(GRN)
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the throttle

body and the PCM(B33), then go to step 20.
BACK
'·'-250
19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-366).
Is OTC PO 123 indicated?

terminals at the throttle body and the PCMf then go .i
to step 1.
NO- Troubleshooting is complete. If any oth.er



substituted, go to st~p 1.

BACK
11-251
DTC P0222: TP Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage 9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P
3. CheckTP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
=
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there continuity?

at the throttle body and the PCM .• YES-Repair short in the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM (B26), then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 23.
Are Dre PO 122 and P0222 indicated at the same
time? 10. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 5.

=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 11.
BACK
11-252
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Replace the throttle body (see page 11,366);
13. Disconnect PCM'connector 8 (49P). 18. Reconnect all connectors.'.
14. Disconnect the throttle bo~y 6P connector. 19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). '
15. Check for continuity betweenPCM connector 20. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
terminal 818 and throttle body 6P connector
terminal No.2. 21. Dothe RCM idle learn procedure (seepage 11-311).
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.

terminals at the throttle body. and the PCM,then go
to step 1.

Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated~ go to the

Terminal side offemaleterminals
24. Update the PCM if it does not;have the latest
Is there continuity? software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM (818), then go to step 18. Is DTe;, P0222 indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose ., I


BACK 11'-253
Elttctronic Throttle Control System
DTC P0223: TP Sensor B Circuit High Voltage 8. Measure voltage between throttle body SP
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) ..
3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.

YES-Go to step 4.
NO..-lntermittent failure, the.system is OK at this Is there about 5 V?

at the throttle body and the PCM .• YES-Go to step 18.
4. Check for Temporary. DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. NO-Go to step 9.
Are DTC P0123 and P0223 indicated at the same 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
time?
YES-Go tostep~3.
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Turn the-ignition switch Of;F.
S. Disconnect the throttle body SP connector.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) ..
11-254 BACK
terminal 826 and throttle body 6P connector terminal 833 and throttle body 6P connector
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

A
112 3141516
.--_ _ _ _ _--', SG5 (GRNI
Wire side of female terminals Wire side offemale terminals
PCM CONNECTOR B (49PI PCM CONNECTOR B (49PI

If "11
Q Q .I 1 2 3 4 I 5.1 6 1 7 8 9 110 I.
11111213141151161171181920211
122 23 24 XJ25/X 26/1/1
129130 31 3233134135136 37 36 391
1140 41 42 1/11441451461/ 1/1/1
TPSB (RED/BLUI '--_ _ _ _--' SG5 (GRNI

Terminal side offemale terminals Terminal side offemale terminals
NO-Repair open in the wire between the throttle NO-Repair open in the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM (826), then go to step 20. body and the PCM (833), then go to step 20.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-255

to step 1.




11-256 BACK
DTC P1658: ETCS Control Relay ON 4. Test the ETCS control relay in the under-hood fuse/
Malfunction relay box (see page 22-77).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data ETGS control relay OK?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES-Go to step 5.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NO-Replace the relay control module (under-hood
the HDS. 5. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Is the RELAY circuit OK? 6. Disconnect PCM connectorA (49P).
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 7. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box 14P
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals connector.
at the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS control
relay) and the PCM .• 8. Check for continuity between PCM connector
NO-Go to step 3.
=

(A29) and the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS
control relay), then go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
BACK
1.1-257
Electro'nic Throttle Control System
9. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box 9P 14. Reconnect all connectors.
connector.
12. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
C4 and body ground. 17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.

terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS
control relay) and the PCM, then go to step 1.

= Terminal side of female terminals 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is there battery voltage? 20. Reconnect all connectors.
YES-Repair short to powerinthe wire between 21. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
the PCM (C4) and the under-hood fuse/relay box software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
(ETCS control relay), then go to step 13. good PCM (see page 11-8).
NO-Go to step 19. 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.

terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS
control relay) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
recheck. Ifthe PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

BACK
11-258
OTC P1659: ETCS Control Relay OFF 6. Test the ETCS control relay in the under-hood fuse/
Malfunction relay box (see page 22-77).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is the ErGS control relay OK?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES-Go to step 7.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NO-Replace the relay control module (under-hood
Is DrG P1659 indicated?
9. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box 9P
YES-Go to step 4. connector.

at the under-hood fuse/relay box (ETCS control
relay) and the PCM .•
5. Check the No. 10 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL

(DBW+) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay
box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-259
10. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/ 11. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
relay box 9P connector terminal No.7 and PCM
connector terminal C4. 12. Disconnect under-hood fuse/relay box 14P
connector.
13. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/

relay box 14P connector terminal No. 14 and PCM
connector terminal A29.
PCM CONNECTOR A. (49P)
Q
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX 9P CONNECTOR
ETCSRLY (BLU)
Wire side of female terminals UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
14P CONNECTOR
Q
YES-Go to step 11. 7
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C4)

and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step .Wire side of female terminals
21.
YES-Go to step 27.

step 21.
11-260 BACK
14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 18. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box 9P connector,
and replace the No. 10 THROTTLE ACTUATOR
15. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). CONTROL (DBW+) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
relay box.
16. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box 9P
connector. 19. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
C4 and body ground.
terminal C4 and body ground. PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
=
=
Terminal side of female terminals Is there battery voltage?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM NO-Replace the right side engine compartment
(C4) and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to wire harness. Also replace the No. 10 THROTTLE
step 21. ACTUATOR CONTROL (DBW+) fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 18.
20 .. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-261

terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box and the
PCM, then goto step 1.



terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box and the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute' a known-

BACK
11-262
. .!'i.iJ
DTC P1683: ThrottleValve Default Position 9. Push tlie throttle valve closed as shown.
Spring Performance Problem
ACAUTION
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle
body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve
is activated.


10. Release the throttle valve.
Does the throttle valve return?
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the YES--Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363),
radiator fan' comes on,then let it idle. then go to step 12 and recheck.lfDTC P1683 is
indicated, go to step 11.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 7.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 15. Turn the ignitionswitchOFF,and wait 10 seconds.
at the throttle body and the PCM .•
8. Disconnect the intake air duct from the throttle
body. Is DTC P1683 indicated?

to step 1.

BACK
11-263
:#1',",'
&ili.,~tr'6nic Throttle Control System

OTC P1684:ThrottleValve RetumSpring 9. Push the throttle valve open as, shown.
Performance Problem
ACAUTION
is activated.

troubleshooting information(see page 11-3).

10. Release the throttle valve.
Does the throttle valve return?
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the YES-Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363),
radiator fan comes on, then let iti,dle. ' then go to step 12 and recheck. If DTC P1684 is
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 7.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
body. Is DTC P1684 indicated?
'I i' YES-Check for poor connections or loose

to step 1.

BACK
11-264
DTC P2101: ETCS Malfunction 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

ACAUTION body.
body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve 10. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
is activated.
the HDS.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 12. Visually check the throttle valve operation.
Does the throttle valve operate smoothly?
YES-Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363),
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. then go to step 21 and recheck. If DTC P2101 is
the HDS. NO-Go to step 13.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is DTC P2101 indicated? 14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
YES-Go to step 7. 15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 5. 16. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
5. Test-drive the vehicl,e for several minutes in the 17. Connectthrottle body 6P connector terminals No.5
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: and No.6 with a jumper wire.
• ENGINE SPEED THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

• VSS
• APP SENSOR A

ETCSM- (GRN) ETCSM+ (BLU)
YES-Go to step 7. JUMPER WIRE

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Wire side of female terminals
at the throttle body and the PCM, then clean the
throttle body (see page 11-363).•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-265
, , .
. , '
18. Check for continuity between PCM connector 24. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
terminals C2 and C3. , range of these recorded freeze data parameters:

• ENGINE SPEED
• VS'S
• APP SENSOR A

terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then
clean the throttle body (see page 11-363), and go to
step 1.
Is there continuity? Temporary OTCs or DTCs are indicated, goto the
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Repair open in the wires between the throttle
body and the PCM (C2, C3),' then go to step 20. 27. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. good PCM (see page 11-8).
20. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-366). 28. Check for Temporary OTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is OTC P2101 indicated?
22. Reset the PCM with the HDS. YES-Check for poor connections or loose
23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM

11-266 BACK
DTC P2118: Throttle Actuator Current Rangel 4. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
Performance Problem
5. At the throttle body side, measure resistance
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data between throttle body 6P connector terminals No.5
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general and No.6 with the throttle fully closed.

terminals C2 and C3.
Is there about 1.0 Q or less?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair short in thewires between the PCM

connector terminals C3 (ETCSM-line) and C4
Terminal side offemale terminals (ETCSM+line), then go to step 7.
Is there about 1.0 Q or less? 6. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-366).
NO-Go to step 15. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(cont'd)
BACK
11-267
13. Slowly press the accelerator pedarto the floor.

to step 1.


good PCM (see page 11-8)..
17. Check for TemporaryDTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
Is DTCP2118 indicated? .
YES-Check for poor connections .or loose


BACK
11-268
DTe P2122: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit Low Voltage
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3)..
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P
2. CheckAPP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the APPSENSOR 6P CONNECTOR

HDS.
YES-Go to step 3.

at APP sensor A and the PCM .•
4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.

6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector (A 18) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24.
terminals No.2 and No.3.
NO-Go to step 11.
APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
11. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No.1 to
body ground with a jumper wire.
APP SENSOR6P CONNECTOR
APSA(PUR)
Wire side of female terminals JUMPER WIRE
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-269
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
16. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
APSA(PUR)
Is there about 0.2 V or less? .
YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Go to step 22.

Q
=
Terminal side of female terminals 19. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
Is there continuity? 20. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No.3 to

YES-Go to step 13.
(A 18) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24.
13. Reconnect PCM connector A (49P).

VCC3 (RED)
14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No.1
and No.3 with a jumper wire. JUMPER WIRE

=
APSA(PUR) VCC3 (RED)
JUMPER WIRE
11-270 BACK
21. Check for continuity between PCM connector 29. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM
= was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
Terminal side offemale terminals (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
YES-Go to step 30. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the
(A24) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24. indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•
23. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page

11-286).

terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

BACK 11-271
DTC P2123: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit High Voltage
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). body ground with a jumper wire.
2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the APPSENSOR6PCONNECTOR

HDS.
YES-Go to step 3..

SG3(WHT)
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this JUMPER WIRE

at APP sensor A and the PCM .• =

5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal A26 and body ground.
6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector
=
Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 19.

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12. (A26) and APP sensor A, then go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 7.
11-272 BACK

11-286).

terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO- Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

indicated OTC's troubleshooting ••


terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM

BACK
11-273

DTC P2127: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E) 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit Low Voltage
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
HDS.
YES-Go to step 3.

at APP sensor B and the PCM .• =

6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector (A19) and APP sensor B, then go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 11.
APSB ILT GRN)
Wire side of female terminals JUMPER WIRE
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 17.
BACK
11-274
16. CheckAPP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
APSB (LT GRN)
YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Go to step 22.
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF .

.Q
=
Terminal side of female terminals 19. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
Is there continuity? 20. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No.6 to

YES-Go to step 13.
(A 19) and APP sensor B, then go to step 24.
13. Reconnect PCM connector A (49P).

VCC4(ORN)
14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No.4
and No.6 with a jumper wire. JUMPER WIRE
=
APSB (LT GRN) VCC4(ORN)
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
BACK 11-275
good PCM,(see page 11-8).

terminals at APP sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM
= was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
Terminal side of female terminals (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
YES-Go to step 30. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
(A25) and APP sensor B, then go to step 24. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•

11-286).

terminals at APP sensor B and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

11-276 BACK
DTC P2128: APP Sensor 8 (TP Sensor E) 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). body ground with a jumper wire.
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
HDS.
YES-Go to step 3. SG4(GRN)
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this JUMPER WIRE

APP sensor B and the PCM .•

5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal A27 and body ground.
6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector
Terminal side of female terminals·
YES-Go to step 19.

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12. (A27) and APP sensor B, then go to step 1.4.
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-277

11-286).
16. Reset the .PCM with the HDS.

terminals at APP sensor B and the PCM, then go to
step 1.



terminals at APP sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM

11-278 BACK
' ....
DTC P2135: TP Sensor AlB Voltage Incorrect 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Correlation
ACAUTION 11. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you terminals B17 and B26.
will seriously injure your' fingers if the throttle valve
is activated. PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)


the HDS. Terminal side of female terminals
Is DTC P2135 indicated? YES-Go to step 13.


body.
8. Visually check the throttle valve operation while

you clear the DTC with the HDS.
Does the valve temporarily move to the fully

closed position?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-279
EI~ctr()nic Throttle Control System
13. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. 22. -Beconnect.all connectors.
14. Check for continuity between PCM connector 23. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
terminals 817 and 826. , software {see pag&"11-7),or substitute a known-
good PCM '(see page 11-8).

substituted, go tp step 1.

Terminal side of female terminals complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM {see page 11-24:4>. If any other
817 (TPSA line) and the 826 (TPS8 line), then go to
step 17.
NO-Go to step 15.

to step 1.

11-280 BACK
DTC P2138: APP Sensor NB (TP Sensor DIE) 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Incorrect Voltage Correlation terminals A 18 and A 19.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
2. Clear the DTC with HDS.
3. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
/s DTC P2138 indicated? , Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 5. /s there continuity?
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals terminals (A18, A19), then go to step 13.
at APP sensor and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 21.
5. Check APP SENSOR A and APP SENSOR B in the
DATA LIST with the HDS. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Are they the same voltage? 12. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page
11-286).
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
BACK
20. Check for Temporary· OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.

terminals at the APP sensor and the PCM, then
clean the throttle body (see page 11-363), and go to
step 1.

Temporary OTCs or O"rCs are indicated, go to the
indicated OTC's troubleshooting."


terminals at the APP sensor and the PCM. If the

indicated OTC's troubleshooting ••
11-282 BACK
DTC P2176: Throttle Actuator Control System 10. Visually check the throttle valve operation while
Idle Position Not Learned doing the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
ACAUTION Does the throttle valve move to its fully closed

Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle position?
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you YES-Go to step 11.
is activated. NO-Go to step 12.
11. Check for sludge or carbon on the throttle valve.

NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and Is there sludge or carbon on the throttle valve?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES-Clean the throttle body (see page 11-363),
• If DTC P2135 is stored atthe same time as DTC P2176, then go to step 21.
troubleshoot DTC P2135 first, then recheck for DTC
P2176. NO-Go to step 18.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 13. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 15. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
10 seconds.
16. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No.5
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. and No.6 with a jumper wire.
Is DTC P2176 indicated? THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 6.

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals ETCSM- (GRN) ETCSM+ (BLU)
at the throttle body and the PCM, then clean the
throttle body (see page 11-363).•
JUMPER WIRE
7. Disconnect the intake air duct from the throttle Wire side of female terminals
body.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-283
17. Check for continuity between PCM connector 26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
terminals C2 and C3.
to step 1.


. Terminal side of female terminals software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Repair open in the wires between the throttle
body and the PCM (C2, C3), then go to step 20. YES-Check for poor connections or loose
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-366). substituted, go to step 1.
20. Reconnect all connectors. NO-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
22. Reset the PCM with the HDS. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
24. Turn the ignition switch OFF .....
25. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and wait

10 seconds.
11-284 BACK
APP Sensor Signal Inspection
NOTE: 5. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pfessed;

• This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully then check the APP SENSOR in the DATAUST with
closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor the HDS.
stores DTCs which are covered in other
troubleshooting procedures. • If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.
• Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS • If it is not 0 %,replace the accelerator pedal
before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are module (see page 11 ~286), then go to step 1.
indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do this
procedure.
• Press the accelerator pedal several times to check its
operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the
pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator
pedal module (see page 11-286).
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)

(A) located under the driver's side ofthe dashboard.

4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed,

then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS .
• If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK .

• If it is not 0 %, update the PCM if it does not have
the latest software (see page 11-7), or substitute
a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to
step 5.
BACK 11~285
Accelerator Pedal Module Removal/Installation
1. Disconnect the accelerator pedal position (APP)

sensor6P connector (A).
2. Remove the accelerator pedal module (8).
NOTE: The APP sensor is not available separately.

Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal module.
3. Insta" the parts in the reverse order of removal.
11-286 BACK
VTEC
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

Update, page 11-7 Removal/Installation, page 11-299
Substitution, page 11-8
BACK 11-287
c,'
VTEC,
OTe Troubleshooting
OTe P2646: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit Low Voltage
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
Special Tools Required connector.
• Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
• AfT low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
• AfT pressure hose 07406-0020201
• AfT pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A 8. Check the VTEC PRES SW in the DATA LIST with
• AfT pressure adapter 07MAJ-PY40120 the HDS.
• Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
Is ON indicated?
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 9.
1. Check the engine oil level.
Is the engine oil level OK?
10. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (A),
YES-Go to step 2. install the special tools as shown, then install the
rocker arm oil pressure switch on the oil pressure
NO-Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then gauge adapter (B).
go to step 19.
NOTE: Install the parts in the reverse order of
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). removal with a new O-ring.
4. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with

the HDS.
Is the result OK?

A
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft)
,
07406·0020201 or
07MAJ·PV4011Aand
07MAJ·PV40120
\ \ ..-"--"--"
/
07406·0070301

at the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker
arm oil control solenoid, and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 5.
07ZAJ-S5AA200

the HDS.
11-288 BACK
13. Check the oil pressure. 18. Reconnect all connectors.
Does the oil pressure increase to at least 392 kPa 19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(4.0 kgflcrrf, 56.9 psi)?
YES-Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch
(see page 11-299), then go to step 18. 21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
NO-Inspect the VTEC system. If it is OK. Replace 22. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the rocker arm oil control solenoid (see page the HDS.
16. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (49P). terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch and
the PCM, then go to step 1.
terminal 820 and body ground. NO-Go to step 24.
24. Monitor the 080 STATUS for DTC P2646 in the
VTPSW (BLU/WHTI DTCs MENU with the HDS.
If 11
-' 1 2 3 4 I6 I6 I7 8 9 110 L Does the screen indicate PASSED?

111 1213141161161171181920 211
~ 122 23 24 ><1261>< 26/V1
129 30 31 32133134136136 :f1 38 391 • YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
J40 41 42 VI44I46L46 / VVI TemporaryDTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 23,
.Q NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor

connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
= pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
Terminal side of female terminals the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling

(820) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch, then
go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 25.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-289
VTEC

27. Do the VTECTEST in the INSPECTION MENU with

the HDS.

terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch and
NO-Go to step 29.



pressure switch and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go
to step 1.lfthe screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
keep idling until a result comes on.
BACK
11-290
DTC P2647: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch 8. At the rocker arm oil pressure switch side, check for
Circuit High Voltage continuity between rocker arm oil pressure switch
2P connector terminals No.1 and. No.2.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 2P CONNECTOR
1. Check the engine oil level.
Is the engine oil level OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then

go to step 16.
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Is there continuity?
4. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with YES-Go to step 9.

the HDS.
NO-Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch
Is the result OK? (see page 11-299), then go to step 15.
YES-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK atthis 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

at the rocker arm oil pressure switch and the 10. Measure voltage between rocker arm oil pressure
PCM .• switch 2P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground.
NO-Go to step 5.
ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
5. Check the result of step 4. 2P CONNECTOR
• VTEC Switch Failure

• VTEC Switch Open
• VTEC Switch SIG Line Open
• VTEC Switch GND Line Open
Is the test result any of the above?
YES-Go to step 6. =
NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the rocker arm oil pressure switch. If it is OK,
replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid Is there battery voltage?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the rocker
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. arm oil pressure switch and G101, then go to step
15.
7. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector. NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-291
VTEC
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 20 .. Monitorthe,08D STATUS for DTC P2647 in the
14. Check for continuity between PCM connector Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 19,
terminal 820 and rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
connector terminal No.1.
ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
2P CONNECTOR connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
1-----1 VTPSW until a result comes on.
(BLU/WHT)
Wire side of female terminals· 21. Reconnect all connectors.
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) 22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
VTPSW (BLU/WHT) .--------' software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-

the HDS.

YES-Go to step 21. terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch and
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If
(820) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch, then the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 25.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose .

terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch and
NO-Go to step 20.
BACK
11-292

Temporary DTCs or DTCswere indicated in step 24,

pressure switch and the PCM. If the PCM was
to step 1. Ifthe screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
BACK
11-293
VTEC
DTC P2648: Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Circuit Low Voltage terminal B39 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data PCM CONNECTOR B (49P)
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general II Jl
Ll1 2 3 4~ 51617 819~10J.
111 1213 14115116117118 19 20 21
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). l22 23 24 .2Sl25~ 26L L
129 30 31 32ja3~34J35J 36 3736 39
1140 41 42 VI44I45I46 V '[/1
VTS (GRN/VEL)
.Q
the HDS.
Is the result OK?

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Is there contiiwity?
at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and the
PCM .• YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(B39) and the rocker arm oil control solenoid, then
5. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 1P 10. Replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid
connector. (see page 11-299).
6. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between 11. Reconnect all connectors.
the rocker arm oil control solenoid 1P connector
terminal and the solenoid valve body. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 13. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
1P CONNECTOR

the HDS.
= Is ore P2648 indicated?
Terminal side of male terminals YES-Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and
Is there 14- 30 Q at room temperature?
NO-Go to step 17.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 10.
11-294 BACK
17. Monitor the OBDSTATUS for DTC P2648 in the 22. MonitortheOBD STATUS for DTC P2648 in the

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated instep 16, complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
control solenoid and the PCM, then go to step 1. If NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
until a result comes on. control solenoid and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was
18. Reconnect all connectors. 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go
to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest keep idling until a result comes on.

the HDS.

terminals atthe rocker arm oil control solenoid and
NO-Go to step 22.
BACK
11-295
VTE.C
DTC P2649:Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid 8. Jump the SCS line With the HDS.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). terminal B39and the rocker arm oil control
solenoid 1P connector terminal.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) ...
1P CONNECTOR
3. Start the engine .. Hold the engine speed at

. Wire side of female terminals
4. Check for Temporary DTCs orDTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Terminal side of female terminals

at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and the Is there continuity?
PCM .•
YES-Go to step 19.
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 1P (B39) and the rocker arm oil control solenoid, then
connector. go to step 12.
7. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between

the rocker arm oil control solenoid 1P connector
terminal and the solenoid valve body.

1P CONNECTOR
=
Is there 14-30 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 11.
BACK
11-296
11. Replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid 19. Reconnect all connectors.
(see page 11-299).
12. Reconnect all connectors. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
16. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If
NO-Go to step 22.
22. Monitor the OBO STATUS for OTC P2649 in the
YES-Check for poor connections or loose OTCs MENU with the HOS.
terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and
the PCM, then go to step 1. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
NO-Go to step 18. YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

18. Monitor the OBO STATUS for OTC P2649 in the original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
OTCs MENU with the HOS. Temporary OTCs or OTCs were indicated in step 21,
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
Temporary OTCs or OTCs were indi.cated in step 17, control solenoid and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to the indicated OTC's troubleshooting .• updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil keep idling until a result comes on.
control solenoid and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
BACK 11-297
VTEC
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Test
1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 3. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid/oil filter
connector. assembly (A) from the oil pump, and check the
rocker arm oil control solenoid filter (B) for a
2. Measure resistance between the rocker arm oil restriction. If there is a restriction, replace the
control solenoid 1P connector terminal (A) and rocker arm oil control solenoid filter, the engine oil
body ground . filter, and the engine oil.
• If the resistance is as specified, go to step 3 .

• If the resistance is not as specified, replace the
rocker arm oil control solenoid.
Resistance: 14-30 Q
22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft)
4. If the filter is not restricted, remove the rocker arm

oil control solenoid (A), and push the valve (B) with
your finger to check its movement. If the valve
moves freely, it is normal; check the engine oil
pressure (see page 8-6). If the valve binds or sticks,
replace the rocker arm oil control solenoid
assembly.
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
11-298
BACK
Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch
Replacement Removal/Installation
1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch
connector (A). connector (A), then remove the rocker arm oil
pressure switch (8).
22N'm
(2.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft)
c
2. Remove the rocker arm oil control solenoid (8). 2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
with a new O-ring (C).
BACK 11-299
Idle .Control System
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH

Signal Circuit Troubleshooting, page 11-306
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)

Update, page 11-7 ALTERNATOR
Substitution, page 11-8 FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting,
Replacement, page 11-244 AIC COMPRESSOR
Signal Circuit Troubleshooting, page 11-304 page 11-305
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

Signal Circuit Troubleshooting, page 11-308
11-300 BACK
Ole Troubleshooting
OTC P0506: Idle Control System RPM Lower 8. Remove the intake air duct from the throttle body.
Than Expected
9. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data bore.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). /s there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
bore?
YES"'-/fthere is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. body (see page 11-363). Also check for damage to
the air cleaner element (see page 11-364), then go
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at to step 13. Ifthere is damage in the throttle bore, go
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the to step 12.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 20 seconds.
NO-Go to step 10.
4. Check for these conditions in the DATA LIST with
the HDS: 10. Recheck with different load conditions (turn on the
headlights, blower motor, or AlC; change the gear
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) position, etc~).
above 158 "F (70 "C)
• Intake air temperature (lAT SENSOR) above 32 "F 11. Monitor the aBO STATUS for DTC P0506 in the
(0 "C) orcs MENU with the HDS.
• Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
• ST FUEL TRIM between 0.73 and 1.47 Does the screen indicate PASSED?
• FSS is CLOSED
5. Monitor the aBO STATUS for DTC P0506 in the time~.
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check the AlC
Does the screen indicate FA/LED? system and/or power steering system, then go to
step 1 and recheck. If the screen indicates
YES-Go to step 6. EXECUTING, let the engine idle until a result comes
on. If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If to step 10 and recheck.
the screen indicates EXECUTING, let the engine
idle until a result comes on. If the screen indicates
OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 4 and recheck.
6. Remove the intake air duct from the throttle body.
7. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle

bore.
/s there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle

bore?
YES-Ifthere is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle

body (see page 11-363). Also check for damage to
the air cleaner element (see page 11-364), then go
to step 13. Ifthere is damage in the throttle bore, go
to step 12.
NO-Check the AlC system or power steering

system, then go to step 10.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-301
Idle Control System
12., Replace the throttle body (see page 11-366).

16. Check for these conditions in the DATA LIST with

the HDS:

above 158 'f (70 "C)
• Intake air temperature (lAT SENSOR) above 32 'f
(0 "C)
• Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
• ST FUEL TRIM between 0.73 and 1.47
• FSS is CLOSED
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with theHDS.

NO-Go to step 18.



connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF CONDITION,
11-302 BACK
DTC P0507: Idle Control System RPM Higher 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Than Expected
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the Is DTC POS07 indicated?
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0507 in the terminals at the throttle body and the PCM. If the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
Does the screen indicate FAILED? substituted, go to step 1.
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent 11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0507 in the
failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen DTCs MENU with the HDS.
indicates EXECUTING, let the engine idle until a
result comes on. Ifthe screen indicates OUT OF Does the screen indicate PASSED?
CONDITION, recheck with different load conditions
(electrical, AlC, gear position, etc.), then go to YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
step 3. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
5. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts: Temporary OTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 10,
• PCVvalve
• PCV hose NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
• EVAP canister purge valve connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
• Throttle body and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
• Intake manifold known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If
• Brake booster hose the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
Are there any leaks? keep idling until a result comes on.
YES-Repair or replace the leaking part(s), then go

to step 6.
NO-Go to step 6.
BACK
11-303
Idle Control System
AIC Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine. 13.' Momentarily connect PCM connector terminal A 13

to body ground with a jumper wire several times.
2. Turn the blower switch on.
3. Turn the AlC switch on. ACC(RED)
If II
4. Check the AlC CLUTCH in the DATA LIST with the 11 I 2 3 4151617 8 19110 I.
HDS. 111 1213 /1/1161/116 19201211
122 1/ 24 XJ25IX 28271281
129 30 31 32VVVI36 37361391
Does it indicate ON? .140 I 41 42 43144VI46 471481491
'----'
YES-Go to step 5. JUMPER WIRE
NO-Do the AlC pressure switch circuit _....

troubleshooting (see page 21-81). =
5. Check the AlC system.
Is there a clicking noise from the Ale compressor
Does the Ale system operate? clutch?
YES-The air conditioning system circuit is OK.• YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
NO-Go to step 6. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-244) .•
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the AlC cl utch relay and the PCM. If the
8. Activate the AlC CLUTCH in the INSPECTION connections are OK, check the AlC clutch relay
MENU with the HDS. (see page 22-77), repair open in the wire between
the PCM (A 13) and the AlC clutch relay and the
Is there a clicking noise from the Ale compressor other AlC systems.
clutch?
YES--Do the AlC system test (see page 21-134).
NO-Go to step 9.
11-304 BACK
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine, and let it idle.
2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR inthe DATA LIST with

the HDS.
3. Check if the indicated percentage varies when the

headlight switch is turned on.
Does the percentage vary?
YES-The alternator signal circuit is OK.•
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Turn the headlight switch and ignition switch OFF.
6. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.
8. Check for continuity between body ground and

PCM connector terminal C44.
=

(C44) and the alternator.•

BACK 11-305
Idle Control System
PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 13. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P
2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead.
PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does it indicate ON?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 14. Q

=
4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position.
5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does it change to OFF?
YES-The PSP switch signal circuit is OK.• (A38) and the PSP switch .•
NO-Go to step 6. NO:--Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe
7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-244) .•
8. Start the engine. 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the 15. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector.
HDS.
16. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1
Does it change to OFF? and No.2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine.
YES-Replace the PSP switch .• PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 10.
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. JUMPER WIRE
BACK
11-306
17. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the 23. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P
HDS. connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
Does it change to ON? PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Replace the PSP switch .•
NO-Go to step 18.
19. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P

connector.
=
20. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals

terminal A38 and PSP switch 2P connector terminal YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
No.1. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
I - - - - l PSPSW (PNKI
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PSP
switch and G202 .•
Q
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PSP

switch and the PCM (A38) .•
BACK
11-307
Idle Control System
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). S. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal AS and body ground.
2. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Does it indicate OFF?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Inspect the brake pedal position switch

(see page 19-6).•
3. Press the brake pedal, and check the BRAKE Q

SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
=
Does it change to ON? Terminal side of female terminals
YES-The brake pedal position switch signal circuit Is there continuity?

(BKSW line) is OK.•
NO-Go to step 4. (AS) and the No. 11 +B STOP & HORN (15 A) fuse.
Replace the No. 11 +B STOP & HORN (15 A)
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. fuse .•
5. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. NO-Go to step 9.
6. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P

connector.
BACK
11-308
9. Connect brake pedal position switch 4P connector
terminal No.2 to body ground with a jumper wire.
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

4P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
=

=
YES-Repair open in the wire between the brake

pedal position switch and the No. 11 +8 STOP &
HORN (15 A) fuse. Inspect the brake pedal position
switch (see page 19-6).•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A8)

and the brake pedal position switch .•
BACK
11-309
Idle Control System
Idle Speed Inspection
NOTE: 5. Start the engine. Hold the 'engine speed at

• Before checking the idle speed, check these items: 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
- The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
reported on, and there are no OTCs.
-Ignition timing 6. Check the idle speed without load conditions:
- Spark plugs headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air
- Air cleaner conditioner off.
- PCVsystem
• Apply the parking brake. Idle speed should be:
710±50 rpm (in Park or neUtral)
1. Oisconnectthe evaporative emission (EVAP)
canister purge valve connector. 7. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with high electric
load (NC switch ON, temperature set to max cool,
2. Connect the HOS to the data link connector (OLC) blower fan on high, and headlights on high beam).
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
Idle speed should be:
710±50 rpm (in Park or neutral)
NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification,

dothe PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
If the idle speed is still not within specification, go
to symptom troubleshooting.
8. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve

connector.
4. Make sure the HOS communicates with the PCM

OLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-223).
11-310
BACK
PCM Idle Learn Procedure
The idle learn procedure must be done so the PCM can

learn the engine idle characteristics.
00 the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of

these actions:
• Replace PCM.
• ResetPCM.
• Update PCM.
• Clean or replace the throttle body.
NOTE: Erasing OTCs with the HOS does not require you·
to do the idle learn procedure.
Procedure
1. Make sure all electrical items (AlC, audio, lights, etc.)

are off.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and wait iseconds.

3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the·
radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant
temperature reaches 194 'f (90 "C).
5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the

throttle fully closed.
NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include

its running time in the 5 minutes.
BACK
11-311
Fuel Supply System
FUEL TANK i .,
Draining, page 11-333
FUEL
,FILL CAP
FUEL FILL PIPE

Removal/Installation,
page 11-348
FUEL TANK UNIT

page 11-343
FUEL PUMP
FUEL LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTING Replacement, page 11-346
Precautions, page 11-336 FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
Removal, page 11-338 ' Test, page 11-350
Installation, page 11-340 Replacement, page 11-346
FUEL LINE/QUICK-CONNECT FITTING FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Precautions, page 11-336 Replacement, page 11-345
Removal, page 11-338 FUEL VAPOR LINE FUEL FILTER
Installation, page 11-340 Replacement, page 11-345
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2
11-312
BACK
/ FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE
/ ! Rep'e.....",. pe.e 11-349

Update, page 11-7
BACK
11-313
";t.
Fuel S.upply System

OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0461: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge

Sending Unit) Circuit Range/Performance
Problem . .
NOTE:
• Because it requires 162 miles (260 km) of driving
without refueling to complete this diagnosis, this DTC
P0461 cannot be duplicated during this
troubleshooting.
1. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-350).
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?

terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the
gauge control module.•
NO-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page

5. Check for Temporary. DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.

gauge control module, then go to step 1.

BACK
11-314
DTC P0462: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge 14. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 4P
Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). SIGNAL
lORN) ..--'1L...,-J2'-,
3 4
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.

Q
=
YES-Go to step 4.

time; Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the gauge control module and the fuel gauge YES-Repair short in the wire between the gauge
sending unit.• control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge
sending unit, then go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 15.
5. Remove the second row seat (see page 20-156).
15. Reconnect the gauge control module 12P connector.
6. Remove the access panel from the floor.
16. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-343).
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
17. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
YES-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit

NO-Go to step 11.

22-337).
13. Disconnectthe gauge control module 12P

connector.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-315
Fuel Supply System
OTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)

20. Set the float (A) to the E position; 29. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

E YES-Check for poor connections or loose

O.Bin.
(19.1 mm) r------'--....;:;....-----' gauge control module. If the PCM was updated,
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
21. Check the fuel gauge.
Does the fuel gauge move to the empty position? complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
YES-Go to step 29. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page

gauge control module, then go to step 1.

BACK
11-316
. riiJ
DTCP0463: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge 9. Remove the gauge control. module (see page
Sending Unit) Circuit High Voltage 22-337).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 10. Disconnect the gauge control module 24P
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general connector.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). module 24P connector terminal No. 15 and body
ground.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 24P CONNECTOR
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.

at the gauge control module and the fuel gauge =
sending unit.• Wire side offemale terminals

YES-Go to step 12.
6. Remove the access panel from the floor.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the gauge
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector. control module (GND line) and the fuel gauge
8. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No.3
to body ground with a jumper wire.
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
r--l.
1 2
3 4
GND (LTGRN)
JUM PER WIRE

-'-
(cont'd)
BACK
11-317
Fuel' Supply System
12. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No.1 14. Remove the jumper wire from the fuel tank unit 5P
to body ground with a jumper wire. connector.
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR 15. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-343).
SIGNAL 16. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-350).
lORN) ..............,........-,
1 2
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?
3 4
YES-Go to step 17.
JUMPER WIRI;
NO-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page
= 11-346), then go to step 24.
Wire side offemale terminals 17. Connectthe fuel tank unit 4P connector.
18. Reconnect the gauge control module 12P connector.

module 12P connector terminal No. 11 and body 19. Turnthe ignition switch ON (II).
ground.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A 112P)
21. Set the float (A) to the F position.

8.4 in.
1214.2mm)
YES-Go to step 14.

control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge 22. Check the fuel gauge.
Does the gauge move to the full position?
YES-Go to step 30.
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page

BACK
1,'-318

to step 1.



gauge control module. If the PCM was updated,

BACK 11-319
fdel Supply System
DTC P0627: Fuel Pump Control Module 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure
System Malfunction voltage between fuel pump control module 10P
connector terminals No.3 and No.8 within
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 2 seconds.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR
3. Turn the ignition switch to the start (III) position.
NOTE: This vehicle has an auto control mode

starting system. It keeps the starter motor running
after the ignition switch is released for 15 seconds,
or until the engine starts. Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 27.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 9.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
at the fuel pump control module, PGM-FI main
relay 2, the fuel tank unit, and the PCM .• 10. Remove the left kick panel (see page 20-76), then
remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (G) from the under-
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. dash fuse/relay box.
6. Check the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in under-

Is the fuse blown?
YES-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. Also

replace the No. 19 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse, then go
to step 73.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the fuel pump control module 10P

11.-320 BACK
11. Test PGM-FI main relay 2 (see page 22-77). 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is PGM-FI main relay 2 OK? 15. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box 9P
connector.
YES-Go to step 12.
16. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector
NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 2, then go to step terminal No.4 to body ground with a jumper wire.
73.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR
13. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 4P

PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR

IGP
JUMPER WIRE
1 2
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-321
Fuel Supply System
17. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/ 18. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 4P
relay box 9P connector terminal No.1 and body connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
ground.
PGM·FI MAIN RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR
UNDER·HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX 9P CONNECTOR
= =

YES-Go to step 19.
YES-Replace the relay control module (under-
hood fuse/relay box) (see page 22-71), then go to NO-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box
step 74. (see page 22-72), then go to step 73.
NO- 19. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

• Repair open in the wire between the under-hood
fuse/relay box and the under-dash fuse/relay box, 20. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector
then go to step 74 . terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire.
• If needed, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box
(see page 22-72), then go to step 74. PGM·FI MAIN RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR
IG1
FUEL PUMP
JUMPER WIRE
BACK
11-322
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure 25. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector
voltage between fuel pump control module 10P terminal No.3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
connector terminal No.3 and body ground within
2 seconds. PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR
FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR IMOFPR
JUMPER WIRE
=

terminal A 11 and body ground.
YES-Go to step 22. IMOFPR (BRN)
NO-
• Repair open in the wire between the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the fuel pump control module,
then go to step 73 .
• If needed, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box
Q
=
23. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Terminal side of female terminals
24. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 79.

(A 11) and PGM-FI main relay 2, then go to step 73.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-323
Fuel Supply System
27. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 36. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
28. Reconnect the fuel pump control module 10P 37. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
29. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal A42and body ground.

32. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and check for

sound from the fuel pump within 2 seconds.
Does the fuel pump operate?
YES-Go to step 33.
NO-Go to step 53.

connector. " YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
. . (A42) and the fuel pump control module, then go to
35. Check for continuity petween fuel pump control step 73.
module 10P connector terminal No.4 and body
ground. . NO-Go to step 79.
FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR 39. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
41. Connect fuel pump control module 10Pconnector

terminal No.4 to body ground with a jumper, wire.
FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR

=

FPCD (LT BLU)
Is there continuity? JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 36. =

NO-Go to step 39. Wire side of female terminals
11-324 BACK
42. Check for continuity between PCM connector 46. Measure voltage between fuel pump control
terminal A42 and body ground. module 10P connector terminal No.4 and body
ground.
=
=
Terminal side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
Is there about 8 V or more?
YES-Go to step 43.
YES-Go to step 47.
(A42) and the fuel pump control module, then go to NO-Replace the fuel pump control module
step 73. (see page 11-349), then go to step 73.
43. Remove the jumper wire from the fuel pump 47. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
control module 10P connector.
48. Remove the second row seat (see page 20~156).
44. Reconnect the fuel pump control module 10P
connector and PCM connector A (49P). 49. Remove the access panel from the floor.
45. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 50. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
51. Disconnectthe fuel pump control module 10P

connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 11~325
Fuel Supply System
52. Check for continuity between fuel pump control 55. Check for continuity between fuel pump control
module 10P connector terminal No.7 and body module 10P connector terminal No.8 and body
ground. ground.
FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between the fuel YES-Go to step 56.
pump control module (FP- line) and the fuel tank
unit, then go to step 73. NO-Repair open in the wire between the fuel
pump control module (GND line) and G604, then go
NO-Substitute a known-good fuel pump control to step 73.
recheck. If DTC P0627 is not indicated, replace the 56. Check for continuity between fuel pump control
original fuel pump control module (see page module 10P connector terminal No.5 and body
11-349), then go to step 73. If DTC P0627 is ground.

=
YES-Go to step 57.
NO-Go to step 60.
11-326 BACK
57. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 61. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure
voltage between PCM connector terminal A43 and
58. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). body ground within 2 seconds.

59 .. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A43 and body ground. .
=
= /s there battery voltage?

YES-Go to step 62.
/s there continuity?
NO-Replace the fuel pump control module
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (see page 11-349),then go to step 73. ;
(A43) and the fuel pump control module, then go to
step 73. 62. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO-Go to step 79. 63. Remove the second row,seat(see page. 20-156).
60. Reconnect the fuel pump control module 10P 64. Remove the access panel from the fl.oor.
connector.
65. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.

, .
67. Connect between fuel tank unit 4P connector
1 2 FP+ (WHT)
3 4
JUMPER WIRE
=
(cont'd)
BACK 11-327
,I,
. ;!-.
Fuel Supply System
68. Check for continuity between fuel pump control 70. Check for continuity between fuel pump control
module10Pconnectorterminai No.6 and body module 1OP connector terminal No.7 and body
ground. ground.
FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR
Wire side offemale terminals Wire side of female terminals
NO-Repair open in the wire between the fuel NO-Repair open in the wire between the fuel
pump control module (FP+ line)and the fuel tank pump control module (FP- line) and the fuel tank
unit, then go to step 73. unit, then go to step 73.
69. Connect between fuel tank unit 4P connector 71. Reconnectthe fuel pump control module 10P
terminal No.4 to body ground with a jumper wire, connector.
1 2
FP- (RED)
3 4
JUMPER WIRE
=
11-328 BACK
72. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure 79. Reconnect all connectors.
voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector
terminal No.2 and body ground within 2 seconds. 80. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

terminals at the fuel pump control module, PGM-FI
main relay 2, the fuel pump, and the PCM. If the
= PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
Wire side of female terminals substituted, go to step 1.

Is there battery voltage? complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
YES-Replace the fuel tank unit (see page 11-343), Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
then go to step 73. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-Substitute a known-good fuel pump control

recheck. If DTC P0627 is not indicated, replace the
original fuel pump control module (see page
11-349), then go to step 73. If DTC P0627 is

terminals at the fuel pump control module, PGM-FI
main relay 2, the fuel tank unit, and the PCM, then
go to step 1.

BACK 11-329
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Relieving

Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve 7. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in
pressure from the system by disabling the fuel pump the fuel tank.
and then disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect
fitting in the engine compartment. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
With the HOS 9. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select
Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the until it stalls.
audio system and the navigation system (if
equipped). 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE:

• Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm
3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) or the PCM will continue to operate the fuel
(A) located under the driver's side ofthe dashboard. pump .
• A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during
this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them
as needed (see page 11-4).
12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
13. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A).

,·'-330 BACK
14. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and 17. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check
clean it if needed. it for dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-339).
15. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect 18. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then
fitting (A). do this: .
• Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and

the navigation system (if equipped) .
• Set the clock.
Without the HOS
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the

equipped).
2. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (G) from the under-

16. Disconnectthe quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the

connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the G
retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release
them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector
off.
NOTE:
• Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other
parts.
• Do not use tools.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push 3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls.
the connector until it comes off easily.
• Do not remove the retainer from the line; once NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore
removed, the retainer must be replaced with a them.
new one.
c
E
(cont'd)
BACK
11-331
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Relieving (cont'd)
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the
connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the
5. Remove the fuel fill cap. retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release
them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector
6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. off.
7. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). NOTE:

• Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other
parts.
• Do not use tools.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.
• Do not remove the retainer from the line; once
removed, the retainer must be replaced with a
new one.
8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and E

clean it if needed.
9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect

fitting (A).
A 11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check

it for dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-339).
12. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then

do this:
• Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and

the navigation system (if equipped).
• Set the clock.
11-332 BACK
Fuel Pressure Test Fuel Tank Draining
Special Tools Required 1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-343).
o Fuel pressure gauge 07406-0040008
o Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07 AAJ-S6MA 150 2. Using a hand pump, a hose, and a container
suitable for fuel, draw the fuel from the fuel tank.
3. ReinstafJ the fuel tank unit (see page 11-343).
2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting. Attach the fuel
pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge.
o If the engine starts, go to step 5.

o If the engine does not start, go to step 4.
4. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: Listen to

the fuel fifJer port with the fuel fill cap removed.
The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the
ignition switch is first turned on.
o If the pump runs, go to step 5.

o If the pump does not run, refer to the DTC
troubleshooting (see page 11-320).
5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should

be 390-440 kPa (4.0-4.5 kgf/cm 2, 57-64 psi).
o If the pressure is OK, the test is complete.

o If the pressure is out of specification, replace the
fuel pressure regulator (see page 11-345) and the
fuel filter (see page 11-345), then recheck the fuel
pressure.
BACK
11-333
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line Inspection
Check the fuel system lines and hoses for damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts.
Make sure the connections are

secure and the quick-connect
fitting covers are firmly locked in place.
BACK
11-334
Check all clamps, and retighten if necessary.
BASE GASKET
Replace.
FUEL TANK UNIT LOCKNUT
Rep,lace.
To FUEL
RAIL
To EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
A:
TOP
SIDE~
~50Q
~~ Make sure that the clamp is

in position within the lever
end of it the range shown.
There should be
no clearance.
BACK
11-335
.;..
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions
The fuel line/quick-connect fittings (A), (8), (e), (0), (E),

(F), (G), (H), (I), (J) connect the fuel feed hose (K) to the
fuel feed hose (L), the fuel feed hose to the fuel feed line
(M), the fuel feed line to the fuel feed tube (N), the fuel
feed tube to the fuel tank unit (0), the breather tube (P)
to the breather pipe (Q), the breather pipe to the
breather tube (R), the breather tube to the breather pipe
(S), the EVAP canister (T) to the fuel vapor tube (U), the
fuel vapor tube to the fuel vapor line (V), the fuel vent
tube (W) and the vent shut float tube (X). When
removing or installing the fuel feed hose, fuel tank unit,
fuel tank or breather tube, it is necessary to disconnect
or connect the quick-connect fittings.
Pay attention to the following:
• The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect

fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful not to
damage them during welding or other heat-
generating procedures.
• The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect
fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch them with a
shop towel that was used for wiping battery
electrolyte. Replace them if they came into contact
with electrolyte or something similar.
• When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed
hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings, be careful
not to bend or twist them excessively. Replace them
if they are damaged. D
M
R Q
A E
BACK
11-336
Place Manufacturer Retainer Line
color diameter
A Tokai Blue green 0.31 in.
(8.0 mm)
B Tokai Blue green 0.31 in.
(8.0 mm)
C TI Automotive Gray 0.31 in.
(8.0 mm)
D TI Automotive Blue 0.37 in.
(9.5 mm)
E Tokai Orange 0.37 in.
(9.5 mm)
F Tokai Orange 0.37 in.
(9.5 mm)
G Tokai Natural 0.47 in.
(12 mm)
H TI Automotive Blue 0.37 in.
(9.5 mm)
I TI Automotive Natural 0.47 in.
(12 mm)
J Tokai White 0.31 in.
(8.0 mm)
J
A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be
reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot
be reused once it has been removed from the line.
Replace the retainer when:
• replacing the fuel rail.

• replacing the fuel line.
• replacing the fuel pump.
• replacing the fuel filter.
• replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
• replacing the EVAP purge pipe.
• replacing the EVAP canister.
• replacing the breather pipe.
• it has been removed from the line.
• it is damaged.
BACK
11-337
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal
NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings,

read the "Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions"
(see page 11-336).
2. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings (A) for dirt,

and clean them if needed.
BACK
11-338
4. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
damage.
• If it is dirty, clean it.

• If it is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel pump,
fuel filter, or fuel feed line.
3. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect

fitting. Hold the connector (A) with one hand, and 5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out,
squeeze the retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to cover the disconnected connector and line ends
release them from the locking tabs (C). Pull the with plastic bags (A).
connector off.
NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has
NOTE: been removed from the line.
• Be careful not to damage the line (D) or other Replace the retainer when:
parts. Do not use tools. • replacing the fuel rail.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer • replacing the fuel feed line.
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push • replacing the fuel pump.
the connector until it comes off easily. • replacing the fuel filter.
• Do not remove the retainer from the line; once • replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
removed, the retainer must be replaced with a • replacing the EVAP purge pipe.
new one. • replacing the EVAP canister.
• it has been removed from the line.
• it is damaged.
BACK 11-339
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation
NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings, 3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect
read the "Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions" fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer from
(see page 11-336). the mating line.
1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
damage, and clean it if needed.
2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) ifthe

retainer is damaged, or after:
• replacing the fuel rail.

• replacing the fuel feed line.
• replacing the fuel pump.
• replacing the fuel filter.
• replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
• replacing the EVAP purge pipe.
• replacing the EVAP canister.
• removing the retainer from the line.
• Use the same manufacturer retainer and the
same size retainer when the replacing the
retainer (see page 11-336).
11-340 BACK
4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the line (A),
and align the retainer locking tabs (S) with the
connector grooves (e). Then press the quick-
connect fittings onto the line until both retainer tabs
lock with a clicking sound.
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of

A new engine oil on the line end.
Connection with new retainer
Connection to new fuel line

TI Automotive-made
1"-"-"-"-'
i
A Tokai-made
Reconnection to existing retainer
(cont'd)
BACK 11-341
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation (cont'd)
5. When you are reconnecting the connector with the

old retainer, make sure the connection is secure
and the tabs (A) are firmly locked into place; check
visually and also by pulling the connector (B).
When you are replacing the fuel line with a new
one, make sure you remove the ring pull (C)
upwards after you confirm the connection is secure.
NOTE: Before you remove the ring pull, make sure

the fuel line connection is secure. If the connection
is not secure, the ring pull could break when you try
to remove it.
Reconnection to existing retainer
Connection to new fuel line
6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and

turn the ignition switch ON (II) (but do not operate
the starter motor). The fuel pump will run for about
2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat two
or three times, and check that there is no leakage in
the fuel supply system.
11-342 BACK
Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 8. Remove the locknut (A), locknut plate (8), and fuel
Fuel sender wrench 07 AAA-SOXA 100 tank unit (C).
Removal
2. Remove the fuel fill cap.
4. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor.
5. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (8).
6. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (C) from the

fuel tank unit.
7. Using the fuel sender wrench, loosen the locknut

(A).
(cont'd)
BACK 11-343
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation (cont'd),
Installation 4. Using the fuel sender wrench, tighten the fuel tank
unit locknut (A).
1. Install a new base gasket (A) and locknut plate (B)
on the fuel tank (C).
\~iiiiiii;;;"""'-J
....--F
B
A
70N·m
17.1 kgf·m,51Ibf·ftl
5. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (A).
2. Insert the fuel tank unit (D) into the fuel tank. Be
careful not to bend the fuel gauge sending unit.
3. Align the marks (E) on the tank and the fuel tank
unit, then tighten a new locknut (F) by hand. A
NOTE:
• After tightening, make sure the marks are aligned.
Check the circumference of the base gasket
visually or by hand and be sure that it is not
pinched.
• Do not coat the base gasket with the engine oil.
• After installation, check the base gasket visually
or by hand to be sure it is not pinched.
6. Install the access panel (B) to the floor.
7. Install the second row seat (see page 20-156).
11-344 BACK
Fuel Pressure Regulator Fuel Filter Replacement
Replacement
The fuel filter should be replaced whenever the fuel
pressure drops below the specified value (see page
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-343). 11-333), after making sure that the fuel pump and the
fuel pressure regulator are OK.
2. Remove the bracket (A).
2. Remove the fuel filter set (A).
3. Remove the clip (B).
4. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (C).

with new O-rings (D).
NOTE: Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil. Do

not use any other type of oil or fluid.
Do not pinch the O-rings during installation.
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank
unit:
• When connecting the wire harness, make sure

the connection is secure and the connectors (B)
are firmly locked into place .
• When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (C),
make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful
not to bend or twist it excessively.
4. Install the fuel filter set in the reverse order of

removal with new O-rings (D). When installing the
fuel tank unit, align the marks on the unit and the
fuel tank (see page 11-344).
NOTE: Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil.
BACK 11-345
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pump/Fuel GaugeSending Unit Replacement
2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel sending unit) (A)

from the fuel tank unit (B).
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank .
• When connecting the wire harness, make sure

the connection is secure and the connectors (C) is
firmly locked into place .
• When installing the fuel gauge sending unit,
make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful
notto bend or twist itexcessively.

When installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks
on the unit and the fuel tank (see page 1J-344).
11-346 BACK
Fuel Tank Replacement
1. Drain the fuel tank (see page 11-333).
2. Jack up the vehicle, and support it with jackstands.
3. Remove the exhaust pipe (see page 9-9).
4. Remove the propeller shaft (see page 16-38), and support it with jackstands.
5. Remove the fuel tank guard (A) and fuel tank protector (8).
6. Loosen the clamp (C), and disconnect the tube (D).
7. Open the clamp (E).
8. Disconnect the hoses (F). Slide back the clamps, then twist the hoses as you pull to avoid damaging them.
9. Disconnect the hose (G).
10. Place a jack or other support under the tank (H).
11. Remove the strap bolts and the straps (I).
12. Remove the fuel tank.
BACK
11-347
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Fill Pipe Removal/Installation
2. Drain the fuel tank (see page 11-333).
3. Remove the fuel fill cap.
4. Remove the rear fender cover (see page 20-221).
5. Disconnect the fuel fill tube (A) and the quick-connector fittings (B).
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m. 7.2Ibf·ft)
-------------
I
c
6. Remove the fuel fill pipe (e).
11-348 BACK
Fuel Pump Control Module Replacement
1. Remove the cargo floor lid (see step 1 on page

20-90).
2. On models with active suspension, remove.the

active damper control unit (see page 18-118).
3. Disconnect the fuel pump control module

connector (A).
4. Remove the fuel pump control module (B).
BACK 11-349
: "h
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test
NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer 7. Measure voltage between fuel tank unit 4P
to the Gauges Circuit Diagram (see page 22-318). connector terminals No.1 and No.3 with the
ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery
1. Check the No. 21 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under- voltage.
dash fuse/relay box before testing.
• If the voltage is OK, go to step 8.
2. Check for body electrical system DTCs (see page • If the. voltage is not as specified, check for:
22-3). - a short in the YELjBLK wire to ground.
- an open in the YELjBLK or BLK wire .
• If no problem is found, go to step 3.
• If DTC B 1175 (see page 22-328) or B1176 FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
(see page 22-329) is indicated, go to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting.
5. Remove the access panel (A) from the floor.
B 9. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank

(see page 11-343).
6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B).
11~350 BACK
Low Fuellndicato.r Test
10. Measure resistance between fuel tank unit 4P 1. Do the gauge self-diagnostic test (see page 22-315).
connector terminals No.1 and No.3 with the float
at E (EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2 • If the low fuel indicator flashes, go to step 2.
(HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions. • If the low fuel indicator does not flash, replace
If you do not get the following readings, replace the the gauge control module (see page 22-337).
fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-346).
2. Check for body electrical system DTCs.
Float F 1/2 LOW E
Position 8.4 in. 5.9 in. 2.0 in. 0.8 in. • If any DTCs are indicated, do the indicated DTC's
(214.2 mm) (149.4 mm) (50.8 mm) (19.1 mm) troubleshooting.
Resistance 19to 203.3 to 516.4 to 772 to • If no DTCs are indicated, go to step 3.
(Q) 21 213.3 629 788
3. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page
~ Terminal side of
~ male terminals
11-350).
11. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
12. Remove the No.7 BACK UP (10 A) fuse from the

under-dash fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds,
then reinstall it.
14. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates

"F" with the float at F.
• Ifthe pointer ofthe fuel gauge does not indicate

"F", replace the gauge assembly.
• If the gauge is OK, the test is complete.
NOTE:
• The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the
bottom of the gauge dial when the ignition switch
is OFF, regardless ofthe fuelleve/.
• Remove the No.7 BACK UP (10 A) fuse from the
under-dash fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds
after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it
may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to
indicate the correct fuelleve/.
BACK 11-351
InfakeAir System
THROTTLE BODY
Test, page 11-362
Cleaning, page 11-363
AIR CLEANER
Element Inspection/Replacement,
page 11-364
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Update, page 11-7 RESONATOR
Substitution, page 11-8 Removal/Installation, page 11-365
INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING

(IMT) ACTUATOR
11-352 BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
Ole P1077: IMT Valve Stuck in High RPM 10. Measure voltage between IMT actuator 5P
Position connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you trouble!;lhoot, record all freeze data IMT ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR
3. Start the engine, and then let it idle without load (in
4. Start the engine, and hold the engine speed above Wire side of female terminals
3,800 rpm.
5. Check the IMTVALVE CMD in the DATA LIST with Is there about 5 V?
the HDS.
YES-Go to step 11.
Is OPEN indicated?
YES-Go to step 6. (C11) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 26.
NO-Go to step 35. 11. Measure voltage between IMT actuator 5P

6. Check the IMTVALVE SW in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. IMT ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR
Is CLOSE indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.

at the IMT actuator and the PCM .•
7. Let the engine idle, then turn the ignition switch =

OFF. Wire side of female terminals
8. Disconnect the IMT actuator 5P connector.

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-353
Intake Air System
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 19. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal 819 and IMT actuator 5P connector
13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. terminal No.3.
14. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). IMT ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR

terminal C16 and IMT actuator 5P connector
terminal No.2. Q
IMT ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals

. IMTM (WHT/BLKI .----_ _ _-----l
Q
YES-Go to step 34.
Terminal side offemale terminals NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(819) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 26.
YES-Go to step 20.

(C16) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 26.
18. Disconnect PCM connector 8.(49P).
11-354 BACK
terminal C48 and body ground. terminal C49 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
= =
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(C48) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 26. (C49) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 26.
NO-Goto step 21. NO-Go to step 23.

terminal C48 and IMT actuator 5P connector
terminal No.5.
IMT ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 22.

(cont'd)
BACK
11-355
Intake Air System
23. Check for continuity between PCM connector 25. Move the IMT valve by hand.
terminal C49 andlMT actuator 5P connector
terminal No.4. Does it move smoothly?
IMT ACTUATOR 5P CONNECTOR YES-Substitute a known-good IMTactuator
(see page 11-365), then go to step 26 and recheck. If
DTC P1078 is not indicated, replace the IMT
actuator (see page 11-365), then go to step 26. If
DTC P1078 is indicated, go to step 35.
NO-Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) 9-3), and repair the stuck valve. If necessary,
replace the intake manifold (see page 9-2), then go
to step 26.
Q
Terminal side of female terminals 28. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
Is there continuity? 29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
YES-Go to step 24. 30. Start the engine, and then let it idle without load (in
(C49) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 26. 31. Start the engine, and hold the engine speed at
3,800 rpm for 10 seconds, then let it idle.
24. Remove the IMT actuator (see page 11-365).

terminals at the IMT actuator and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
NO-Go to step 33.
11-356 BACK
33. Manitar the OBD STATUS far DTC P1077 in the 39. Manitarthe OBD STATUS far DTC P1077 in the
YES-Traubleshaating is camplete. If any ather YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshoating is

Temparary DTCs arDTCs were indicated in step 32, complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
go. to. the indicated DTC's traubleshaating .• ariginal PCM (see page 11~244). If any ather
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check far paar go. to. the indicated DTC's traubleshaating .•
cannectians ar laase terminals at the IMT actuatar
and the PCM, then go. to. step 1. If the screen NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check far paar
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go. to. step 31. cannectians ar laase terminals at the IMT actuatar
34. Recannect all cannectars. knawn-gaad PCM (see page 11-8), then go. to. step
37. If the PCM was substituted, go. to. step 1. If the
35. Update the PCM if it daes nat have the latest screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go. to. step 37.
saftware (see page 11-7), ar substitute a knawn-
gaad PCM (see page 11-8).
36. Start the engine, and then let it idle withaut laad (in
Park ar neutral) until the radiatar fan cames an.
37. Start the engine, and hald the engine speed at

3,800 rpm far 10 secands, then let it idle.
38. Check far Temparary DTCs ar DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Check far paar cannectians ar loase

terminals at the IMT actuatar and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a knawn-gaad PCM
(see page 11-8), then go. to. step 37. If the PCM was
substituted, go. to. step 1.
NO-Go. to. step 39.
BACK
11.,357
Intake Air System
OTC P1078: IMT Valve Stuck in Low RPM 13. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Position terminal B19 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data PCM. CONNECTOR B (49P)
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general IMTM (WHTIBLK)
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). '11
J1 2 3 4151 6 I 7 8 9110 I.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 111 1213 14115116117118 1920 211
~ 122 2324 .><J25LX 26/ VI
129 3031 32133134135135 3738 391
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 140 41 42 1/144145146 / 1/1/1

Q
4. Check the IMT VALVE CMD in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. =
Is CLOSE indicated?
Is there continuity?·
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 29. (B19) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 23.
5. Check the IMTVALVE SW in the DATA LIST with NO-Go to step 30.
the HDS.
Is OPEN indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 17. Check for continuity between PCM connector
at the IMT actuator and the PCM .• terminal C48 and body ground.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
7. Disconnect the IMT actuator 5P connector.
9. Check the IMTVALVE SW in the DATA LIST with

the HDS.
Is CLOSE indicated?
YES-Go to step 14.

=
NO-Go to step 10.
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. (C48) and the IMT actuator, then go to step 23.
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P). NO-Go to step 18.
BACK
11-358
terminal C48 and IMT actuator 5P connector terminal C49 and body ground.
terminal No.5.

Q =
Terminal side of female terminals YES-Repair short inthe wire between the PCM
NO-Go to step 20.
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM terminal C49 and IMT actuator 5P connector
(C48) arid the IMTactuator, then go to step 23. terminal No.4.

(cont'd)
BACK
11-359
Intake Air System
YES-Go to step 21. 27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM Is DTC P1077 indicated?
21. Remove the IMT actuator (see page 11-365). terminals at the IMT actuator and the PCM. If the
22. Move the.IMT valve by hand. (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was
Does it move smoothly?
NO-Go to step 28.
YES-Substitute a known-good IMT actuator
(see page 11-365), then go to step 23 and recheck. If 28. Monitor theOBD STATUS for DTC P1078 in the
DTC P1077 rsnot indicated, replace the IMT DTCs MENU with the HDS.
actuator (see page 11-365), then go to step 23. If
DTC P1077 is indicated, go to step31. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
NO-Remove the intake manifold cover (see step 1 YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
on page 9-3), and repair the stuck valve. If complete. Ifthe PCM was substituted, replace the
necessary, replace the intake manifold (see page original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
9-2), then go to step 23. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27,
23. Reconnect all connectors ..
24. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connections or loose terminalsat the IMT actuator
and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a
25. Reset the PCM with theHDS. known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.

11 .. 360 BACK

terminals at the IMT actuator and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 33.



connections or loose terminals at the IMT actuator
result comes on.
BACK 11-361
hltakeAir System
Throttle Body Test
Carbon Accumulation Check Throttle Position Learning Check
NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been
reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. (A) located under the driver's side ofthe dashboard.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM 3. Make sure theHDScommunicates with the PCM
and other vehicle systems. If it does not, go to the and other vehicle systems. If it does not, go to the
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-223). DLC circuittroubleshooting (see page 11-223).
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 5. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST. If
needed, clean the throttle body (see page 11-363).
5. Check the REL TP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. The reading should be below 4.3 deg. If it
is not, clean the throttle body (see page 11-363).
11 ..362 BACK
Throttle Body Cleaning Air Cleaner Removal/Installation

~CAUTION connector (A).
is activated.
1. Check for damage to the air cleaner. If the air

cleaner is damaged, replace it (see page 11-363).
2. Remove the throttle body (see page 11-366).
3. Clean off the carbon from the throttle valve and

inside the throttle body with a paper towel soaked
in throttle plate and induction cleaner.
NOTE:
o Remove the throttle body to clean it.
o Be careful notto pinch your fingers.
o To avoid removing the molybdenum coating~ do
not clean the bearing area of the throttle shaft (A) .

• Do not spray throttle plate and induction cleaner 2. Remove the bolts (B).
directly on the throttle body .
• Use Acura genuine throttle plate and induction 3. Remove the air cleaner (C).
cleaner.
4. Install the throttle body (see page 11-366).
5. Reset the PCM with the HDS (see page 11-4).

2 seconds.
BACK 11-363
Intake Air System
Air Cleaner Element Inspection/Replacement
1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 7, ,;Connec~ the, HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
'(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
A

2. Remove the air cleaner element (B) from the air and other vehicle systems. If it does not, go to the
cleaner housing (C). DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-223).
3. Check the air cleaner element for damage or 10. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS.
clogging. If there is damage or clogging, replace
the air cleaner element. 11. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with
the HDS.
NOTE: Do not use compressed airto clean the air
cleaner element. 12. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with
the HDS.
4. Clean and remove any debris from inside the air
cleaner housing. 13. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 2 RESET with the
HDS.
6. If the maintenance minder required to the air

cleaner element, reset the maintenance minder
(see page 3-4) and this procedure is complete. Ifthe
maintenance minder did not require to replace the
air cleaner element, go to step 8.
11-364 BACK
Resonator Removal/Installation IMTActuator Replacement .
1. Make sure you have anti-theft codE!s for the audio 1. Remove the en,gi'ne cover (seE) step 1 .on page 9-3k
. -" ,,'
system and the navigation system (if equipped).
2. Disconnect the IMT actuator.5P connector·(A).
2. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-363).
D
3. Remove the battery.
4. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-188).
5. Remove the left side headlight (see page 22-205).
6. Remove the clips (A) and cover (B).
3. Remove the bolts (B) and the IMT actuator (C).

with a new O-ring (D) .
./ I !
D
c
7. Remove the bolts (C), and resonator (D).
9. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then

do this:
• Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system

and the navigation system (if equipped) .
• Set the clock.
10. Adjustthe headlight to local requirements

(see page 22-204).

(see page 17-28).
BACK
11-365
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Removal/Installation
ACAUTION
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or while the
ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you will seriously injure your fingers.if the throttle valve is activated.
NOTE: If you are replacing the throttle body, begin at step 1. If you are removing the throttle body temporarily, begin
at step 4.
. ,
1. Connect the HDS while the engine is stopped.
2. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
3. Do the TP LEARNING CHECK in the ETCS TEST.
4. Disconnectthe MAP sensor connector (A).
F~/
E
5. Remove the intake air duct (8).
6. Disconnect the throttle body connector (C).
7. Disconnect and plug the water bypass hoses (D).
8. Remove the throttle body (E).
9. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new gasket (F).
NOTE:
• Do the PCM idle learn procedure after the throttle body has been replaced (see page 11-311) .
• Refill the radiator with engine coolant (see page 10-6).
11-366 BACK
Catalytic Converter System
UNDER·FLOOR THREE WAY

CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC)
FRONT WARM UP THREE WAY REAR WARM UP THREE WAY

CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WU·TWC) CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WU·TWC)
(BANK 2) (BANK 1)
Removal/Installation, page 11-370 Removal/installation, page 11-370

Update, page 11-7
BACK
11-367
OTe Troubleshooting
OTC P0420: Rear Bank Catalyst System 5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 and/or
Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1) P0430' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
OTC P0430: FrontBank Catalyst System Does the screen indicate EXECUTING?
Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 2)
YES-Go to step 6.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and NO-Go to step 4 and recheck.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 6. Continue test driving until a result comes on.
• If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the
same time as DTC P0420 and/or P0430', troubleshoot 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 and/or
those DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P0420 and/or P0430' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
P0430·.
P0137,P0138,P0157,P0158,P2270,P2271,P2272', Does the screen indicate FAILED?
P2273': Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
P0141, P0161: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater YES-Go to step 8.
• Poor quality fuel can cause these DTCs.
• Information marked with an asterisk ( ') applies to the NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
front bank (Bank 2). failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the 9. Replace the WU-TWC:
• For DTC P0420, replace the rear WU-TWC
4. Test-drive under these conditions: (Bank1) (see page 11-371).
• For DTC P0430, replace the front WU-TWC
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) (Bank 2) (see page 11-370).
above 158 'f (70 'C)
• Transmission in 0 position 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(72-120 km/h) for 5 minutes or more 11. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
• Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)
for 1 minute or more with cruise control set 12. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
11~368
BACK
13. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 and/or
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the P0430' in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
14. Test-drive for about 10 minutes, continually
changing the vehicle speed. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
15. Check the CAT MONITOR CONDITION B1 (B2)' in go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is the condition OK? connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
YES-Go to step 16. the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
NO-Go to step 13 and recheck. CONDITION, go to step 16.

above 158 'f (70 'C)
(72-120 km/h) for 5 minutes or more
• Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)
for 1 minute or more with cruise control set.

Does the screen indicate EXECUTING?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 16 and recheck.
18. Continue test driving until a result comes on.

terminals at the secondary H02S (sensor 2) and the
NO-Go to step 20.
BACK 11-369
Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation
FRONT
1. Remove the radiator and A/C condenser fan assemblies (see page 10-10).
2. Disconnect the front air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector and front secondary heated oxygen sensor
(secondary H02S) connector.
3. Carefully remove the front WU-TWC.
FRONT A/F SENSOR

(BANK 2, SENSOR 1)
44N·m
SELF-LOCKING NUT
8x1.25mm
31 N·m
Replace.
FRONT SECONDARY
H02S (BANK 2, SENSOR 2)
44N·m
COVER
~
~6x1.0mm
12N·m
FRONT (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
WU-TWC
4. Carefully install the front WU-TWC, and tighten the nuts in a crisscross pattern in two or three steps.
11-370 BACK
REAR
1. Remove exhaust pipe A (see page 9-9).
2. Remove the intermediate shaft (see page 16-21).
3. Disconnect the rear air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector and the rear secondary heated oxygen sensor (secondary
H02S) connector.
4. Remove the rear WU-TWC bracket, then remove the rear WU-TWC.
REAR A/F SENSOR

(BANK 1, SENSOR 11
44N·m
SELF-LOCKING NUT
8x1.25mm ~----
31N·m
Replace.
COVER
6x 1.0 mm
12N·m REAR
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf.ft) WU-TWC COVER
REAR SECONDARY
H02S (BANK 1, SENSOR 2)
44N·m
5. Install the rear WU-TWC, and tighten the nuts in a crisscross pattern in two or three steps.
BACK
11-371
Under-floor TWC Removal/Installation
1. Remove the under-floor TWC (A).
--'--'I-~. D
~~~ 33N·m
~~~ (3.4 kgf.m,
'f. 25Ibf·ft)
2. Remove the converter cover (B).

with new gaskets (C) and new self-locking nuts (0).
11-372
BACK
EGRSystem
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCMI

Update, page 11-7 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGRI VALVE
Substitution, page 11-8 Replacement, page 11-388
BACK 11-373
EGRSystem
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0401: EGR Insufficient Flow 10. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 12. Test-drive under these conditions:
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158 'f (70 "C)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. • Transmission in D position
• Vehicle speed at 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, and
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at engine speed between 1,100 rpm and 3,000 rpm
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the • During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. fully closed) for 5 seconds
4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Go to step 5. terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to
step 15.
NO-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 14.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) DTCs MENU with the HDS.
above 158 'f (70 "C)
• Transmission in D position Does the screen indicate PASSED?
engine speed between 1,100 rpm and 3,000 rpm YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
• During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13,
fully closed) for 5 seconds go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0401 in the NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
DTCs MENU with the HDS. connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
Does the screen indicate FAILED? indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
YES-Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page CONDITION, go to step 12.
9-3), clean the intake manifold, and EGR ports with
throttle plate and induction cleaner, then go to step
9.

8. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-388).
11 . .374 BACK

above 158 'f (70 "C)
engine speed between 1,100 rpm and 3,000 rpm
fully closed) for 5 seconds
17. Check for Temporary DTCsor DTCs with the HDS.

terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM. If the PCM
NO-Go to step 18.



connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
known-good PCM (see page 1.1-8), then go to step
16.lfthe PCM was substituted, go to step 1. Ifthe
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 16.
BACK
11-375
EGRSystem
DTC P0404: EGR Control Circuit Rangel 8. Measure re$istance between EGR valve 6P
Performance Problem connector terminals Np. 1 and No.3.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR

Terminal side Of male terminals
4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
Is there 100 kQ or more?
Is the result OK?
YES-Go to step 25.
time. Clean any carbon build-up on the EGR valve NO-Go to step 9.
with throttle plate and induction cleaner.•
9. Check for continuity between EGR valve 6P
NO-Go to step 5. connector terminal No.6 and body ground.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
7. Atthe sensor side, measure resistance between

EGR valve 6P connector terminals No.1 and No.2. 4
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.
Terminal side of male terminals NO-Repair open in the wire between the EGR
valve and G101, then go to step 26.
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Go to step 8.
11-376 BACK
10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 14. Remove the EGR valve (see page 11-388).
11. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). 15. Clean the intake manifold EGR port and the
passage inside the EGR valve with throttle plate
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector and induction cleaner.
16. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-388).
17. Reconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
18. Reconnect PCM connector C (49P).
Q 21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
= 22. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at

Terminal side of female terminals 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM the HDS.
(C10) and the EGR valve, then go to step 26.
Is the result OK?
NO-Go to step 13.
YES--Go to step 32.
terminal C10 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal NO-Go to step 24.
No.4.

Is there continuity? the HDS.
YES-Go to step 14.

(cont'd)
BACK
11-377
EGRSystem
32. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 37. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0404 indicated? Is DTC P0404 indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM. If the PCM
step 34. was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-8), then go to step 35. If the PCM was
NO-Go to step 33. substituted, go to step 1.
33. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0404 in the NO-Go to step 38.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Does the screen indicate PASSED?

go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other
connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 37,
and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. II
comes on.lfthe screen indicates OUT OF NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
CONDITION, go to step 30. connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
34. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- 35. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
good PCM (see page 11-8). screen indicates NOT COMPLETI:D, go to step 35.


the HDS.
11-378 BACK
DTC P0406: EGR Valve Position Sensor 9. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data terminal C16 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general No.2.
. . EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). r+.-SG2 (GRN/VELI
2. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 1 2 3
.Q 4/ 6
Is 4.88 V or more indicated? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 3. PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

SGZ (GRN/VEL)
If II
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals J1 2 3 41.6 617 8 9110 I
at the EGR valve and the PCM .•
12V /116 16117118 191 201211
111
~V V 24 X 261>< 261 271281 I
V 1/ 1/ 32133 341/V 371 381391
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 140 41 42 43144146146 47 461491
4. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector. Terminal side of female terminals
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there continuity?
6. Measure voltage between EGR valve 6P connector YES-Go to step 18.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the EGR
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR valve and the PCM (C16), then go to step 13.

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-379
EGRSystem
YES-Check for poor connections or loose·

terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

18. Reconnect all connect8rs.
19. Update the PCM+f'it does not have the latest

good PCM (~ee page 11-8).
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DT~s with the HDS.


BACK
11-380
DTC P2413: EGR System Malfunction . 11. Measure voltage between EG.R valve SP connector
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 'j. •
1. Turn the ignition switch ON. (11).

3,000 rpm without load (in Park o-r neutral) until the
radiator fan' comes on, then let it idle.
4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with Wire side of female terminals
the HDS.
Is the result OK? Is there about 5 V? .
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Go to step i6.

at the EGR valve and the PCM .• NO-Go to ~tep'12 ..
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Turn the ignition, switch OFF.' "
S. Turn the ignition switch ON (11).
7. Check the EGRVLS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 21.
9. Disconnect the EGR valve SP connector.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-381
E'GRSystem
12. Turn the ignition sWitch OFF. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.·
13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Jumpthe SCS lihe with the HDS.
14. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). 18. Disconnect PCMconnector C (49P).
terminal C12 and EGRva]ve 6P connector terminal terminal C34 and body ground.
No.3.
Q
PCM CONNECTOR C (49PI.

VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
l...-_ _----,
Terminal side of female terminals YES-Repair short inthe wire between the PCM
NO-Go to step 20.
YES-Go to step 52.

valve and the PCM (C12), then go to step 44.
BACK
11-382
20. Check for continuity between PCM connector 23. At the EGR valve side, measure resistance between
terminal C34 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal EGR valve 6P connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
No.1.
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
EGRP (WHTIBlK)

Q

Terminal side of female terminals YES-Go to step 43.
Is there continuity? NO-Go to step 24.
YES-Go to step 21.

22. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-383
EGRSystem
24. At the EGR valve side, measure resistance between 27. Check for continuity between PCM connector
EGR valve 6P connector terminals No.1 and No.3. terminal C10 and body ground.
EGRVALVE 6PCONNECTOR
EGR (BLU/RED)
Terminal side of male terminals =

. Terminal side of female terminals
Is there 100 kQ or more? Is there continl)ity?
YES-Go to step 43. YES-Repair short in thewire between the PCM

NO-Go to step 25.
NO-Go to step 28.
11-384 BACK
28. Check for continuity between PCM connector 29. Check for continuity between EGR valve 6P
terminal C10 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal connector terminal No.6 and body ground.
No.4.
EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR EGR VALVE 6P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 30.
YES-Go to step 29. valve and G101, then go to step 44.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM 30. Reconnect PCM connector C (49P).
31. Connect the battery positive terminal to EGR valve
6P connector terminal No.4 with a jumper wire.
(cont'd)
BACK
11.-385
EGRSystem
32. Start the engine and let it idlei then connect the 42. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
battery negative terminal to EGR valve 6P
connector terminal No.6 with a jumper wire. 43. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-388).
Does the engine stall or run rough? 44. Reconnect all connectors.
YES-Go to step 51. 45. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO-Go to step 33. 46. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
33. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 47. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
34. Remove the EGR valve (see page 11-388). 48. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
35. Clean the intake manifold EGR port at the passage
inside the EGR valve with throttle plate and 49. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
induction cleaner.
36. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-388).
37. Reconnect all connectors. terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO-Go to step 50.
40. Do the PCMidie learn procedure (see page 11-311). DTCs MENU with the HDS.
41. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with Does the screen indicate PASSED?
the HDS.
YES- Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Is the result OK? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 49,
YES-Go to step 49.
NO-Go to step 42. connections or loose terminals atthe EGR valve
BACK
11 ..386


the HDS.

NO-Go to step 54.



connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
BACK 11-387
EGRSystem
EGR Valve Replacement
2. Remove the main under-hood fuse box.
3. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector (A).
4. Remove the EGR valve (8).

with a new gasket (e).
BACK
11-388
PCVSystem

Update, page 11-7
Substitution, page 11-8 PCVVALVE
Replacement, page 11-244 Inspection, page 11-391
BACK
11-389
PCVSystem
DTe Troubleshooting
DTC P2279: Intake Air System Leak 7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
NOTE: Is DTC P2279 indicated?

anyon-board snapshot, and review the general YES-Check for vacuum leaks at the PCV valve, the
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). PCV hose, the purge (PCS) line, the throttle body,
• If DTC P0443 is stored at the same time as DTC P2279, the intake manifold, and the brake booster hose,
troubleshoot DTC P0443 first, then recheck for DTC then go to step 1.
P2279.
NO-Go to step 8.
1. Check for vacuum leaks .at these parts:
8. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for DTC P2279 in the
• PCV valve DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• PCV hose
• Purge (PCS) line Does the screen indicate PASSED?
• Throttle body
• Intake manifold YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
• Brake booster hose Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 7,
Are the parts OK?
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If
YES-Go to step 2. the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
NO-Repair or replace any damaged parts, then go
to step 4.

radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 1 minute.

YES-Check the camshaft timing (see page 6-16),

then go to step 4.

indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 2 and
recheck.

radiator fan comes on, then let it idle 1 minute.
11 ..390 BACK
PCV Valve Inspection PCV Valve Replacement
1. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 9-3). 1. Remove the engine cover (see step 1 on page 9-3).
2. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (8), and 2. Remove the bolt (A).
connections for leaks or restrictions.
NOTE: Take care not to spill oil on the hot exhaust
manifold.
3. At idle, listen to the PCV valve (A) with a

stethoscope as you lightly pinch the PCV hose (8)
with your fingers or pliers several times. Each time 3. Remove the PCV valve (8).
the hose is pinched, the valve should click.
If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve
grommet for cracks or damage. If the grommet is NOTE:
OK, replace the PCV valve and recheck. • When installing a new PCV valve, make sure the
O-rings (C) are in place .
• When installing a used PCV valve, use new
O-rings.
BACK 11-391
EVAPSystem
Component Location Index·
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Update, page 11-7 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
Substitution, page 11-8 CANISTER PURGE VALVE
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAP) CANISTER
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAPI EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAPI

CANISTER FILTER CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
11-392 BACK
DTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0443: Evap Canister Purge Valve Circuit 7. Start the engine, and let it idle.
Malfunction
Is there vacuum?
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A YES-Go to step 8...
or equivalent, commercially available
NO-Go to step 14.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 10. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge
valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 5.

at the EVAP canister purge valve and the PCM .• Wire side of female terminals
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and allow the engine

to cool below 140 'f (60 'l::). Is there continuity?
6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the purge YES-Go to step 11.
joint (B) in the engine compartment, and connect a
vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the hose. NO-Go to step 23.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-393
EVAPSystem
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Measure voltage between EVAP canister purge
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
13. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge
EVAP CANISTER P~RGE VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
=
PCS (RED/YEll
=
YES-Go to step 18.
Is there continuity? NO-Repair open in the wire between the EVAP

canister purge valve and the No. 18 ACG (10 A) fuse
YES-Repair short in the wire between the EVAP in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step
canister purge valve and the PCM (C40), then go to 24.
step 24.
NO-Go to step 30.
15. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
11-394 BACK
21. Check for continuity between PCM connector 22. At the valve side, measure resistance between
terminal C40 and EVAP canister purge valve 2P EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector terminals
connector terminal No.2. No.1 and No.2.

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
,--_ _ _ _ _ _-' PCS (RED/YEL)

Terminal side of female terminals Is there about 33 Q at room temperature?
NO-Repair open in the wire between the EVAP 23. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
canister purge valve and the PCM (C40), then go to 11-423).
step 24.

terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the
NO-Go to step 29.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-395
EVAPSystem
29. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0443 in the 33. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0443 in the

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 28, complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister·
purge valve and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling connections or loose terminals at the EVAPcanister
until a result comes on. purge valve and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
30. Reconnect all connectors. recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If
31. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest until a result comes on.

terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the
NO-Go to step 33.
11-396 BACK
DTC P0451: FTP Sensor Circuit Rangel 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Performance Problem
Is DTCP0451 indicated?
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and YES-Check for poor connections or loose
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). to step 1.
• If DTC P2422 is stored at the same time as DTCP0451,
troubleshoot DTC P2422 first, then recheck for DTC NO-Go to step 12.
P0451.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). DTCs MENU with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated instep 11,
DTCs MENU with the HDS. NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals atthe FTP sensor
Does the screen indicate FAILED? and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent

poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP
sensor and the PCM.lfthe screen indicates NOT
6. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-423).
10. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
BACK 11-397
EVAPSystem
DTC P0452: FTP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
troubleshooting information (seepage 11-3); 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.15 in.Hg, 54.7 mmHg), or
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 4.90 V indicated?
4. Remove the fuel fill cap. YES-Go to step 24.
6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 14. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector
HDS. terminal No.1 and body ground.
Is about - 7.3 kPa (- 2.16 in.Hg, - 55 mmHg), or FTPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR

0.3 V or less indicated?
YES-Gotostep 10.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Install the fuel fill cap.
8. Start the engine. =
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0452 in the Wire side of female terminals
Does the screen indicate FAILED? Is there about 5 V?
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent NO-Go to step 15.

sensor and the PCM. Ifthe screen indicates NOT
11-398 BACK
17. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 22. Disconnect PCM connector A(49P).
18. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No.1 to 23. Check for continuity between FTP sensor 3P
body ground with a jumper wire. connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
VCC4(ORN)
JUMPER WIRE
= =
19. Check for continuity between PCM connector Is there continuity?

(A39) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 26.
NO-Go to step 32.
25. Replace the FTPsensor (see page 11-423).
= 27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Terminal side of female terminals 28. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 32.

(A25) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 26.
(cont'd)
BACK
11-399
EVAP·;System
30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 35. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0452 in the
Is DTC P0452 indicated? '.
YES-Check far poor connections or loose
terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
to step 1. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO-Go to step 31. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 34,
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
Does the screen indicate PASSED? and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 30, indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• result comes on.

result comes on.


terminals at the FTPsensor and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 34.
BACK
11-400
DTC P0453: FTP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 12. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminals No.2
and No.3 with a jumper wire.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

~
U
FTP (LT GRN) SG4 (GRN)
4. Remove the fuel fill cap. JUMPER WIRE
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wire side of female terminals
6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

HDS. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
/s about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V 14. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
or more indicated? HDS.
YES-Go to step 10. /s about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V
or more indicated?
NO-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 26.
15. Measure voltage between FTPsensor3Pconnector
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0453 in the terminals No.1 and No.3.
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
Does the screen indicate FA/LED?
YES-Go to step 10.

failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for VCC4 (ORN)
~
LwJ SG4 (GRN)
sensor and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.

/s there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-401
EVAPSystem
18. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). 23. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
19. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No.3 to 24. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No.2 to
body ground with a jumper wire. body ground with a jumper wire.
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR FTPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR
SG4(GRN) FTP(LTGRN)
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE
= =
terminal A27 and body ground. terminal A39 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
FTP
~iiiG1~7t71~~~~~(L:;T GRN)
Q
= =
(A27) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 28. (A39) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 28.
BACK
11-402
27. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-423). Is DTC P0453 indicated?
28. Reconnect all connectors. YES-Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM. If the
29. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
30. Reset the PCM with the HDS. substituted, go to step 1.
31. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). NO-Go to step 37.
32. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 37. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0453 in the
terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
to step 1. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO-Go to step 33. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 36,
connections or .Ioose terminals at the FTP sensor
Does the screen indicate PASSED? and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 32, indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• result comes on.

result comes on.

BACK
11-403
EVAPSystem
DTC P0455: EVAP System Very Large Leak 2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe
Detected mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap.
DTC P0456: EVAP System Very Small Leak
Detected
INOTICEI·
The fuel system is designed to allow specified
maximum vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not
deviate from the vacuum and pressure tests as
indicated in these procedures. Excessive pressure/
vacuum would damage the EVAP components or
cause eventual fuel tank failure.

·Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
• Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0-4 in.Hg, 07JAZ-001000B
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is the
NOTE: fuel fill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and under the cap?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES-Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe
• Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that will create (see page 11-348), then go to step 22.
greater pressure/vacuum. The optimum condition for
testing is less than a full tank of fresh fuel. If possible, NO-Go to step 3.
to assist in leak detection, add 1 gallon of fresh fuel to
the tank (as long as it will not fill the tank), just before 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
starting these procedures.
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say "TIGHTEN
TO CLICK"). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight, 5. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
then it clicks. MENU with the HDS.
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly Is the result OK?
tightened?
YES-Go to step 2. time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
NO-Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 22. the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 6.
11-404
BACK
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Disconnect the vacuum hose (purge line) (A) from
the EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the engine
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). compartment, and connect a T-fitting (C) from the
vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump/gauge,
8. Check for a poor connection or damage at the fuel 0-30 in.Hg, to the vacuum hose'(A) as shown.
tank vapor recirculation tube.
/s the tube OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-
• Replace the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube,
then go to step 22 .
• If necessary, replace the fuel tank (see page
9. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube

(A) from the EVAP canister (B), and plug the EVAP
canister port (C).
11. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU

with the HDS.
12. Apply vacuum to the hose until the FTP reads

1.90 V --'2.0 kPa (-0.59 in.Hg, -15.1 mmHg).
A NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If you

do, the FTP sensor can be damaged.
13. Monitor the FTPSENSOR in the DATA LlSTfor

1 minute with the HDS.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V 0.3 kPa

(0.1 in.Hg, 2.5 mmHg)?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 19.
(cont'd)
BACK
'·:1. ..405
EVAP,System
14. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU 19. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HOS. with the HOS.
15. Oisconnectthe fresh air hose (A) from the EVAP 20. Check these parts for looseness or damage:
canister vent shut valve (B), and plug the EVAP
canister vent shut valve port (C). • Fuel fill pipe
• Fuel vapor return pipe
Are the parts OK?
YES-Check the fuel tank unit base gasket

(see page 11-343), and check the fuel tank, then go
to step 21.
NO-Repair or replace the damaged parts, then go

to step 21.
21. Reconnect all hoses and connectors.

16. Apply vacuumto the EVAP system until the FTP
reads 1.90 V -2.0 kPa (-0.59 in.Hg, -15.1 mmHg). 24. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If you 25. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
do, the FTP sensor can be damaged. MENU with the HOS.
17. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LlST.for Is the result OK?
1 minute with the HOS.
YES-Go to step 26.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V 0.3 kPa
(0.1 in.Hg, 2.5 mmHg)? NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve,
YES-Go to step 18.. the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve,
then go to step 21. 26. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
18. Check for a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge Is OTe P0455 and/or P0456 indicated?
line between the EVAP canister and the EVAP
canister purge valve. YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister
Is the line OK? purge valve, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and
YES-Replace these parts, then go to step 21:
• FTP sensor O-ring Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the
• EVAP canister vent shut valve case and O-ring indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•
• EVAP canister
NO-Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge

hose, then go to step 21.
11-406 BACK
DTC P0457: EVAP System Leak Detected/Fuel 5. Oothe EVAP FUNCTION TEST inthe INSPECTION
Fill Cap Loose or Missing MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is the result OK?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say "TIGHTEN at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut
TO CLICK"). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight, valve, and the PCM .•
then it clicks.
NO-Go to step 6.
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly
tightened? 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES-Go to step 2. 7. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve from the
EVAP canister (see page 11-424).
NO-Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 19.
8. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe shut valve.
mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
10. Select EVAPCVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU

with the HDS.
11. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)

operation.

fuel fill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught
under the cap?
YES-Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe

Does the valve operate?
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Check the routing ofthe EVAP canister vent
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). tube, then go to step 18.
4. Clear the OTC with the HOS. NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-407
EVAPSystem
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 21. Do the PCM idle. learn procedure (see page 11-311).
13. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve 22. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
(see page 11-424). MENU with the HDS.·
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the result OK?
15. Reset the PCMwith the HDS. , .YES-Go to step 23.
16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut
17. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals termina.ls at theFTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut shut valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
18. Reinstall the EVAP canister vent shut valve. , Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
11-408 BACK
OTC P0496: EVAPSystem High Purge Flow 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is DTC P0496 indicated?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). purge valve, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and
3. 00 the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the
MENU with the HOS. indicated OTC's troubleshooting.•
Is the result OK?

the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page

11-423).
9. 00 the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION

MENU with the HOS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Go to step 10.

the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
BACK
11-409
EVAP'System
DTC P0497: EVAP System Low Purge Flow 5. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP
canister purge valve (B).
·Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
• Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0-4 in.Hgj 07JAZ-001000B
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data A

B
3. Select EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION

MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?

at the FTP sensor and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check for poor connection, blockage, or damage at

the EVAP canister purge line between the throttle
body and the EVAP canister.
Is the line OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge

line, then go to step 23.
11-410 BACK
6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the purge 10. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP
line (at the EVAP canister side), and connect the canister purge valve (8). Connect the T-fitting (C)
vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the hose as from the vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump/
shown. gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the hose (D) as shown.
07 JAZ-001 0008
07JAZ-0010008
7. Apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of vacuum 11. Apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of vacuum
to the hose. to the hose.
8. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
with the HDS.
13. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
Does the vacuum release immediately? with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 14. Does the vacuum release immediately?
NO-Go to step 9. YES-Check for blockage in the vacuum hose

between the EVAP canister purge valve and the
9. Select EVAP PCS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU EVAP canister, then go to step 23.
with the HDS.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister purge valve
(cont'd)
BACK 11-411
E\IAP System
14. Connectthe vacuum pump/gauge;'0-30 in.Hg, to 18. Connect a T-fitting (A) from the vacuum pump/
the vacuum hose (A) as shown. gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, and the vacuum pump to the
FTP sensor (B) as shown.
07JAZ-001000B

19. Check and record the FTP SENSOR reading in the
Is there vacuum? DATA LIST with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 16. 20. Slowly apply about 1.3 kPa (0.4 in.Hg, 10 mmHg) of
vacuum to the hose.
NO-Check for blockage in the vacuum hose
between the EVAP canister purge valve and the NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If you
throttle body, then goto step 23. do, the FTP sensor can be damaged.
17. Remove the FTP sensor with its connector

connected (see page 11-423).
11-412 BACK
21. Check the FTPSENSQR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does the value change?
YES-Check for debris or blockage at the EVAP

canister port, then go to st~p 23.
NO-Go to step 22.
22. Replace the FTPsens()r (see page 11-423).
23. Reconnect all hose.
27. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION

MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete.•

at the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
BACK 11~413
EVAPSystem

DTC P0498: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve 9.:Measure voltage between EVAP canister vent shut
Control Circuit Low Voltage valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE 2P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 4. Is there battery voltage?
4. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU YE,S,-Go to step 10.

with the HDS.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the EvAp
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. canister vent shut valve and the under-hood fuse/
relay box (PGM-FI relay), then g'o to step 18. '
YES-Go to step 6.
11. At the valve side,' measure resistance between
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals terminals No.1 and No.2.
at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the
PCM .• EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
7. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P

connector.
Is there about 25- 30 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 17.
11~414
BACK
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 16. Check for continuity between PCM connector
VSV
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) (LTGRN)
VSV
(LTGRN)
Q
=
Q
= Is there continuity?
Terminal side of female terminals YES-Go to step 24.
Is there continuity? NO-Repair open in the wire between the EVAP

canister vent shut valve and the PCM (A22), then go
YES-Repair short in the wire between the EVAP to step 18.
canister vent shut valve and the PCM (A22), then go
to step 18. 17. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
(see page 11-424).
NO-Go to step 15.
15. Connect EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector terminal No.1 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
VSV(LTGRN}
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
BACK 11-415
EVAPSystem

with the HDS.

terminals atthe EVAP canister vent shut valve and

24. Update thePCM if it does not have the latest

softWare (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-

with the HDS.

terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and

11-416 BACK
DTC P0499: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Control Circuit High Voltage

with the HDS.

terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and

TemporaryDTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•.
BACK
EVAPSystem
DTC P1454: FTP Sensor Circuit Rangel 10. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Performance Problem
DTC P2422: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Close Malfunction 12. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve from the
EVAP canister (see page 11-424).
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 13. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). shut valve.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 15. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
16. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)
4. Remove the fuel fill cap, and wait 1 minute. operation.
5. Check the FTP SE NSOR in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is it between - 0.67 and 0.67 kPa (- 0.2 and

0.2 in.Hg, -5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 17.
8. Start the engine, and then let it idle without load (in Does the valve operate?
Park on neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
YES-Check for a blockage in the EVAP canister,
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1454 in the canister filter, vent hoses, and drain joint, then
DTCs MENU with the HDS. install the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and go to
step 23.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
YES-Go to step 10. (see page 11-424), then go to step 23.

sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the
PCM. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
to step 8 and recheck.
11-418 BACK
17. Disconnect the air tube (A) from the FTP sensor (B). 21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
22. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is it between - 0.67 kPa and 0.67 kPa (- 0.2 and

0.2 in.Hg, - 5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YES-Check for debris or clogging at the EVAP

canister and the FTP sensor port, then go to
step 23.
NO-Replace the FTPsensor(seepage 11-423),

then 'go to step 23.
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (If).
18. Check the FTPSENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 25. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311).
HDS.
26. Start the engine, and then let it idle without load
Is it between - 0.67 and 0.67 kPa (- 0.2 and (in Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
0.2 in.Hg, - 5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YES-Check for a blockage in the FTP sensor air
tube or vent, then go to step 23. Is OTe P1454 and/or P2422 indicated?

terminals at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. shut valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
20. Remove the FTP sensor (A) from the EVAP canister NO-Go to step 28.
with its connector connected (see page 11-423).
P2422 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.

A

connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor,
the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM,
then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
BACK
11-419
EVAPSystem
OlC P145C: EVAP System Purge Flow

Malfunction
NOTE:
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
• If DTC P145C is indicated alone, do the
troubleshooting for DTC P0496 andP0497 using
freeze data from P145C.
• If DTC P0497 and P145C stored at the same time,
check for poor connection, blockage, or damage at
EVAP canister purge line between the EVAP canister
purge valve and the EVAP canister, and EVAP
canister purge valve closed stuck.
• If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the
same time as DTC P145C, troubleshoot those DTCs
first, then recheck for P145C.
P0496, P0497: EVAP system purge flow
11-420 BACK
Fuel Cap Warning Message System Troubleshooting
Special Tools Required 3. Reinstall and tighten the fuel fill cap.
• Vacuum pump/gauge, 0 -30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
or equivalent, commercially available 4. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
• Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0-4 in.Hg 07JAZ-001000B
When the fuel fill cap warning message does not go off 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
after fuel fill cap tightened, or the message turned on radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for 1 minute.
frequently, do this troubleshooting procedure.
6. Test-drive at 45 mph (72 km/h) 1 minute or more.
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say "TIGHTEN
TO CLICK"). It should turn 1/4 after it's tight, then it Does the fuel cap message come on?
clicks.
YES-Go to step 7.
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly
tightened? NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.•
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 13.
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe
mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap.

fuel fill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught
under the cap?
YES-Replace the fuel fill cap orthe fuel fill pipe

NO-Go to step 3.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-421
EVAP·System
Fuel Cap Warning Message System Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from th.e EVAP 11. Select the EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
canister purge valve (B) in the engine compartment. with the HDS.
Connect the T-fitting (C) from the vacuum gauge
and the vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the Release the vacuum immediately?
vacuum hose (D) as shown.
YES-Check for vacuum hose blockage between
the EVAP canister purge valve and the EVAP
canister, then go to step 12.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister purge valve


radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for 1 minute.
17. Test-drive at 45 mph (72 km/h) for 1 minute or more.
Does the fuel fill cap message come on?
YES-Go to step 1 and recheck.

9. Apply vacuum to the hose about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg,
15 mmHg). NO-Troubleshooting is complete .•
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If you

do, the FTP sensor can be damaged.
11-422 BACK
FTP Sensor Replacement EVAP Canister Purge Valve.
Replacement
1. Remove the EVAP canister cover (A).
1. Disconnect the hoses (A) and EVAP canister purge

valve 2P connector (8).
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m. 16lbf·ft)
2. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector (A) and
tube (8). 2. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve and the
bracket (C).
3. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve (A) from the

bracket (8).
3. Remove the FTP sensor (C).

with a new O-ring (D).
BACK 11-423
EVAPSystem
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve Replacement
1. Remove the EVAP canister (see page 11-425).
2. Pry the lock tabs outward (A), then remove the

EVAP canister vent shut valve (B).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the lock tabs.

NOTE: Do not coat the O-ring with oil.
11-424
BACK
EVAP Canister Replacement
1. Remove the fuel tank guard (A). 5. Remove the EVAP canister bracket (A).
I~~~~
~, 6
22N·m 6. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
12.2 kgf.m, 16lbf·ft)
2. Remove the hoses (A), the FTP sensor 3P connector

(8), and the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector (e).
A B
o
9.8N·m
11.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
3. Remove the bolts (D).
4. Remove the EVAP canister assembly (E).
BACK
11-425
EVAPSystem
EVAP Canister Filter Replacement
1. Disconnect the hoses (A).
, ~9.8N.m
!
B
V" (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
2. Remove the EVAP canister filter and bracket (8).
3. Remove the EVAP canister filter (A) from the

bracket (8).
_____ 9.8 N·m
~ (1.0kgf·m,
~ 7.2 Ibf.ft)
11-426 BACK
Transaxle
Automatic Transmission .................................. 14-1
Rear Differential ................................................ 15-1
Driveline/Axle ................................................... 16-1

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If automatic transmission maintenance is
required)
The Acura MDX SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub,a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above
airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included inthis Service Manual,. ,
Items marked with an asterisk( ","j on the cont,ants page inciude or are located near SRS components. Servicing,
disassembling, or replacing these items requires special precautions andtools, and should be done only by an
authorized Acura, dealer.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, whiyh could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
or side collision, all SRS service work s\1ould be done by an autho~ized Acura dealer.
caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags and/or side airbags.
collision, or the airbags may deploy. "
• SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related componentsare located in the steering
in the roofside, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission AfT Gear Position Indicator
Special Tools·: ................... ;..... ~ ........................ 14-2 Component Location Index ........................... 14-313
General Troubleshooting Information ......... 14-4 Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-314
DTCTroubleshooting Index .......................... 14-11 Transmission Range Switch Test ................. 14-315
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 14-15 Transmission Range Switch
System Description ........................................ 14-28 Replacement ............................................... 14-316
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 14-84 Transmission Gear Selection Switch
Road Test .......................................................... 14-235 Test ............................................................... 14-319
Stall Speed Test .............................................. 14-.237 Replacement .................................'.............. 14-319 .
Pressure Test .............................................. :... 14-238 AfT Gear Position Indicator Panel
Shift Solenoid Valve Test, Replacement ...... 14-242 Light Harness Replacement .: ................. 14-320
Shift Solenoid Wire Harness . AfT Gear Position Indicator Panel'
Replacement ... ,........................................... 14-242 Light Bulb Replacement ......................... 14-320
AfT Clutch Pressure Control AfT Gear Position Indicator Panel
Solenoid Valve A Replacement ............................................ 14-308
Test ............................................................... 14-246
Replacement ............... :............................... 14-252 AfT Interlock System
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Component Location Index ........................... 14-321
Solenoid Valve B . Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-322
Test ............................................................... 14-249 Shift Lock System Circuit
Replacement ............................................... 14-252 Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-323
I
AfT Clutch Pressure Control * Key Interlock System Circuit
. Solenoid Valve C Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-328
. ,,'> . Test ............................................................... 14-254 Shift Lock Solenoid Test ................................ 14-330
Replacement ............................................... 14-257 Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement ................. 14-330
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Shift Lock Stop, Shift Lock Stop Cushion
Replacement ............................................... 14-259 Replacement ............................................... 14-331
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Shift Lock Release Replacement ................... 14-331
Replacement ............................................... 14-260 Park Pin Switch Test ....................................... 14-332
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Park Pin Switch Replacement ....................... 14-332
Switch Replacement .................................. 14-261
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Transmission Housing
Switch Replacement .................................. 14-262 Reverse Idler Gear
4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Removal/Installation .................................. 14-339
Switch Replacement .................................. 14-263 Reverse Idler Gear Disassembly/
ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement ....... 14-264 Inspection/Reassembly .............................. 14-339
ATF Level Check ............................................. 14-265 Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap
ATF Replacement ........................................... 14-266 Removal ....................................................... 14-340
Transfer Assembly Fluid Replacement ........ 14-268 Installation ................................................... 14-340
Transfer Assembly Inspection ...................... 14-269 Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap,
Transfer Assembly Removal ......................... 14-270 Feed Pipe Replacement .............................. 14-341
Transfer Assembly Installation ..................... 14-272 ATF Filter Removal/lnspection/
Transfer Breather Hose Replacement .......... 14-274 Installation ................................................... 14-341
Transmission Removal .................................. 14-275 Mainshaft Bearing
Transmission Installation .............................. 14-287 Removal ....................................................... 14-342
ATF Cooler Cleaning ...................................... 14-300 Installation ................................................... 14-342
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement ..................... 14-302 Intermediary Shaft Bearing
ATF Cooler Replacement ............................... 14-303 Replacement ............................................... 14-343
Shift Lever Removal ....................................... 14-304 Park Lever Shaft Bearing Replacement ........ 14-343
Shift Lever Installation ................................... 14-305 Selector Control Shaft Bearing
Shift Lever Knob Replacement ..................... 14-305 Replacement ............................................... 14-344
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly .......... 14-306 Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal
Shift Lever Bracket Base Replacement ........ 14-307 Replacement ............................................... 14-344
Shift Lever Boot Replacement ...................... 14-308
Shift Cable Replacement ............................... 14-309
Shift Cable Adjustment .................................. 14-311
Transmission Disassembly ........................... 14-333
Transmission Reassembly ............................ 14-401
BACK
Valve Body AfT Differential
Valve Body Repair .......................................... 14-345 Component location Index .............. ~ ............. 14-412
Valve Body Valve Installation ........................ 14-346 Backlash Inspection ........................................ 14-412
Main Valve Body Disassembly, . Differential Carrier" Final Driven Gear, and
Inspection, and Reassembly ...........•........ ,. 14-347 Transfer Drive Gear Replacement ............. 14-413
ATF Pump Inspection ..................................... 14-348 Carrier Bearing Replacement ........................ 14-414
Secondary Valve Body Disassembly,' . Oil Seal Replacement ................................... ~. 14-415
Inspection, and Reassembly ..................... : 14-349 Carrier Bearing Outer Race .
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Replacement ............................................... 14-416
Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-350 Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection ..............: 14-418
Accumulator Body Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-351 Transfer Output Shaft
Shift Solenoid Valve Component Location Index ........... :............... 14-421
Removal and Installation ........................... 14-352 Transfer Output Shaft Bearing
Replacement ......................... :.:................... 14-421
Torque Converter Housing Oil Seal Replacement ..................... :............... 14-422
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Transmission Housing Bearing
Replacement ............................................... 14-353 Replacement .............................. ~ ................ 14-423
Countershaft Bearing Replacement ............. 14-354 Transfer Output Shaft Installation Height
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement ....... 14-355 Inspection/Adjustment ............. ~ ................. 14-424
Intermediary Shaft Bearing
Replacement ............................................... 14~357 Transfer Assembly
Park Lever Shaft Bearing Replacement ........ 14-358 Inspection ........................................'................. 14-425
Disassembly .......... :.....\.................................... 14-426
Shafts and Clutches Transfer Hypoid Drive Gear Bearing
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, Replacement ............................................... 14-429
and Reassembly ......................................... 14-359 Transfer Output Shaft (Hypoid Gear)
Mainshaft 4th Gear Replacement ................. 14-360 Bearing Removal/Installation .................... 14-430
Countershaft Disassembly ............................ 14-361 Transfer Housing Tapered Roller Bearing
Countershaft Idler Gear and 4th Gear Outer Race Replacement ........................... 14-431
Axial Clearance Inspection ........................ 14-363 Transfer Cover Tapered Roller Bearing
Countershaft Reassembly ............................. 14-365 Outer Race Removal/Installation ............... 14-433
Secondary Shaft Disassembly ...................... 14-367 Transfer Cover Oil Seal Replacement .......... 14-434
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance Reassembly ..................................................... 14-435
Inspection .................................................... 14-370
1st Gear One-way Clutch Inspection ............ 14-372
1st Clutch Hub Replacement ......................... 14-373
Secondary Shaft Reassembly ....................... 14-374
Secondary Shaft Installation Height
Inspection/Adjustment ............................... 14-375
Intermediary Shaft Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-379
Intermediary Shaft 4th Gear
Removal ....................................................... 14-380
Installation ................................................... 14-380
Intermediary Shaft 3rd Gear Axial Clearance
Inspection .................................................... 14-381
Intermediary Shaft Installation Height
Inspection/Adjustment ............................... 14-383
Clutch Disassembly ........................................ 14-384
Clutch Inspection ............................................ 14-389
Clutch Wave-Plate Phase Difference
Inspection .................................................... 14-390
Clutch Clearance Inspection .......................... 14-391
Clutch Reassembly ......................................... 14-396
BACK
Special Tools

CD 07GAB-PF50101 Mainshaft Holder 1
® 07GAD-PG40100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
® 07GAD-SD40101 Attachment,78 x 90 mm 1
<D 07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly 1
® 07HAD-SG00100 Attachment, 83 mm .1
@ 07JAD-PH80101 , ,Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
(j) 07JAD-SH30100 , i·' . Attachment, 65 mm . 1
® 07 LAD-PW5060 1 . ,
..
Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 1
® 07LAE-PX40100· I.
Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment 2
®> 07MAD-PR90100
' O~. , . -,';'
Attachment, 45 x 55 mm 1
® 07MAF-SP0011A ';
Tapered Bearing Race Installer A 1
@ 07MAF-SP0013A Installer Shaft 1
@ 07MAJ-PY4011A AfT Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 3
@ 07MAJ.-PY40120 AfT Pressure Hose Adapter 3
@ 07NAD-PX40100 Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 1
@ 07XAA-002010A Wrench, 40 x 42 mm 1
,
® 07XAB-0010101 Companion Fiange Holder 1
I '·"
@ 07ZAE-PRPO 100 Clutch Compressor Attachment 1
@ 070AG-SJAA 1OS Frame Positi,oning Guide Pin 1
" .
®> 070AJ-0020101 Preload Inspection Tool 1
07HAE~PL50101 may also be used to substitute one of 07 LAE-PX40 100.
"
~ ·,e. @ ~ , , ~1)1lI))1lI))
~
CD ® ® <D ®
© @ ® ~ 8 ;;@:>6
@ (j) ® ® ®>
0 Q ~ 0 ~
® @ @ @ @
~ ~ / r
@ ® @ @ ®>
14-2 BACK
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Cltv
® 07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401 AfT Clutch Pressure Gauge Set/Panel 1
@ 07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25-40 mm 1
@ 07741-0010201 Sliding Hammer Weight 1
® 077 46-0010200 Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 1
@ 077 46-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
@ 077 46-0010400 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
® 077 46-00 10500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 1
® 077 46-00 10600 Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 1
@ 077 46-0010800 Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 1
@) 077 46-0030 100 Driver, 40 mm 1.0. 1
® 077 46-0030300 Attachment, 30 mm 1.0. 1
@ 077 49-00 10000 Driver 1
@) 07936-1660101 Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 12 mm 1
@ 07936-3710100 Bearing Remover Shaft Handle 1
@ 07936-3710600 Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 20 mm 1
® 07936-8890300 Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 30 mm 1
® 07936-GE00100 Bearing Remover Shaft, 10 mm 1
@ 07936-GE00200 Bearing Remover Head, 10 mm 1
@ 07947-6340500 Driver Attachment 1
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A must be used with commercially available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer.
~
[~~~J
~
® @ ®@@®®@ @)
S ® @ @)
~
@ @
.~
® fJ
® ® @ @
BACK 14-3
How to Check for DTCs with the Honda Ifthe D indicator or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
Diagnostic System (HDS) has been reported on, or if a driveability problem is
suspected, follow this procedure:
When the powertrain control module (PCM) senses an
abnormality in the input or output system, the D 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's
indicator (A) in the gauge assembly (8) will usually manual for specific instructions.)
blink.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), select NT system,
B and observe the DTC in the DTCs MENU on the
HDS screen.
3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs, and NT DTCs,

and freeze data.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the

fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC
(except for DTC P0700, DTC P0700 means there is
one or more NT DTCs, and no problems were
detected in the fuel and emissions circuit of the
PCM).
5. Clear the DTC and data.

When the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) is connected
to the data link connector (DLC) (A) (located behind the 6. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
driver's dashboard lower cover), it will indicate the same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) when the ignition switch data, and then recheck for a DTC. If the NT DTC
is turned ON (II) and the appropriate menu is selected. returns, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
If the DTC does not return, there was an
intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure
all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
Symptom Troubleshooting Versus DTC

Troubleshooting
Some symptoms will not trigger diagnostic trouble

codes (DTCs) or cause the D indicator to blink. If the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) was reported ON or
the D indicator has been blinking, check for DTCs. If the
vehicle has an abnormal symptom, and there are no
DTCs stored, do the symptom troubleshooting. Check
the list of probable cause(s) for the symptom, in the
sequence listed, until you find the problem.
14-4 BACK
How to Check for DTCs with the SCS Mode If the D indicator and the MIL come on at the same time,
(retrieving the flash codes) or if a driveability problem is suspected, follow this
procedure:
NOTE: The preferred method is to use the HDS to
retrieve the P-code. 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's
manual for specific instructions.)
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or
output system, the D indicator (A) in the gauge 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select SCS mode,
assembly (8) will usually blink. then observe the D indicator in the gauge assembly.
B Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short

blinks. Code 10 and above are indicated by a series
of long and short blinks. One long blink equals
10 short blinks. Add the long and short blinks
together to determine the code.
Example: DTC 1-1
Short blink (once)
OFF~~·---------------- ___________
Example: DTC 15-5

When the D indicator has been reported on, connect the Long blink Short blinks (five)
HDS to the DLC (A) (located behind the driver's
dashboard lower cover). Turn the ignition switch ON (II),
select SCS mode, then the D indicator will indicate flash
the DTC.
10
lfUliiJ1Jl_
+ 5 = 15
3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs and AfT DTCs.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the

fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC
(except DTC 70, DTC 70 means there is one or more
AfT DTCs, and no problems were detected in the
fuel and emissions circuit ofthe PCM).
5. Clear the DTC and data.
6. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the

same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
data, and then recheck for DTC. If the AfT DTC
returns, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
If the DTC does not return, there was an
intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure
all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-5
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM 4. Check the connector inspection port (A) size, and
Connectors select a suitable pin probe.
NOTE: The PCM overwrite data and monitors the EVAP

system for up to 15 minutes after the. ignition switch is
turned OFF. Jumping the SCS line after turning the
ignition switch OFF cancels this function. Disconnecting
the PCM during this function, without jumping the SCS
line first, can damage the PCM.
1. Connect the HDS to the .oLC (A), and jump the SCS
line with the HDS.
5. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminal to a

digital multi meter (8), and connect the other side of
the patch cord terminals to a commercially
available banana jack (Pomona Electronics Tool
No. 3563 or equivalent) (C).
2. Inspect the circuit on the PCM, according to the

DTC troubleshooting, with a commercially
available digital multimeter, patch cords, and pin
probes at PCM harness connectors.
3. Remove the bracket (A), then free the AlC discharge

line from the clip (8). Remove the AlC suction line
mounting bracket bolt (C), then remove the PCM
cover (D) and disconnect PCM connectors (E).
c
6. Gently slide the pin probe into the inspection port

at the connector terminal side. Always use the
inspection port. Do not slide the probe into the
connector terminals.
INOTICE I
• For accurate result, always use the pin
probe (male).
• To prevent damage to the connector
terminals, do not insert test equipment
probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as
they can damage the terminals. Damaged
c
terminals cause a poor connection and an
incorrect measurement.
• Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
B
Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.
14-6 BACK
Clear AfT DTCs Procedures How to End·a Troubleshooting Session
(required after any troubleshooting)
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
1. Reset the PCM with the HDS while the engine is
stopped;
2. Turn the ,ignition switch :OFF.

30 seconds.

HDS from the DLC.
5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311 )'.

! •.
6. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it

. up to normal operating temperature (the. radiator
fan comes on).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. To verify that the, problem is repaired, test-drive the
vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph
3. Clear the DTC(s) on the HDS screen. (50 km/h) or. under the same conditions as those
indicated by the fr:ee~e data.
NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the
PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-223).
OBDStatus
The OBD status shows the current system status of:

each DTC and all ofthe parameters. This function is
used to see if the technician's repair was successfully
finished. The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are
displayed as:
• PASSED: On board diagnosis is succesSfully finished.

',1
• FAILED: On board diagnosis has finished but failed.
• NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-7
..... ,
..: .
'
PCM Updating and Substitution for Testing 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), but do not start the
engine.
• Honda diagnosis system (HDS) TDSGD2200 2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
• Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570
• HDS pockettesterTDSS3557011401
Honda Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857.
Use this procedure when you have to update the PCM

during troubleshooting procedures.
How to Update the PCM
NOTE:
• Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software
version.
• Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery in
the vehicle is fully charged.
• Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update.
If there isa problem with the updatei leave the .
ignition switch ON. ' 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If
• To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, AlC; (see page 11-223). If you are returning from the
power windows, moonroof, door locks, and whatnot) DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, and
during the update. clean the throttle body after you update the PCM
• To ensure the latest program is installed, do a PCM (see page 11-363).
update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced.
• You cannot update a PCM with a program it already 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
has. It will only accept a new program.
• High temperature in the engine compartment might 5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts.
the engine has been running before this procedure,
open the hood and cool the engine compartment. NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
• If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module continue this procedure.
(HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) lamp came on or
was flashed during the update, leave the ignition 6. Exit the HDS diagnosis system, then select the
switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the update mode, and follow the screen prompts to
HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will update the PCM.
prevent PCM damage.
14-8 BACK
7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect How to Substitute the PCM
the HDS/HIM from the DLC, and go back to the
procedure that you Were doing. If the software in 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the
the PCM is notthe latest, follow the instructions on audio system and the navigation system (if
the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI equipped).
system or the AfT system, make sure you update
both. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to 3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
cool the PCM,foliow the instructions on the screen.
If you run into a problem during the update
procedure (programming takes over 15 minutes,
status bar goes over 1000/0, D or immobilizer light
flashes, HDS tablet freezes, and whatnot), follow
these steps to minimize the chance of damaging
the PCM:
o Leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position.

o Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a
battery charger).
o Shut down the HDS.
o Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
o Reboot the HDS.
o Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and try the
update procedure again.
8. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts. If the
TP POSITION CHECK failed, clean the throttle body 5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If
(see page 11-363). it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-223). If you are returning from the
9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-311). DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 5 to 6, and
clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM
10. Do the CKP learn procedure (see page 11-4). (see page 11-363).
6. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS;
7. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION

CHECK, and follow the HDSscreen prompts.
NOTE: Ifthe TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,

continue this procedure.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-9
A\ltomatic Transmission
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF .. 16. Selectthe.lMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
9. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, 17. Enterthe immobilizer codeusJng the PCM
then disconnect the positive cable. replacement procedure in the HDS; this allows you
to sta~ the engine.
10. Remove the bracket (E), then free the AlC discharge
line from the clip (F). Remove~he AlC suction line 18. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
mounting bracket bolt (G).
19.. Selectthe ETCS TEST, thenselectthe TPPOSITION
CHECK, and follow,the HDSscreen prompts. Ifthe
6x1.0mm TP POSITION CHECK failed, clean the throttle body
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) (see. page 11-363).
\ 20. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page .11-311).

,.
21. Do the CKP learn procedure (see page 11-4).
the navigation system (if equipped). Set the clock.
E
(see page 17-28).
G 24. Do the power window control unit reset procedure

(see page 22-259).
11. Remove the PCM cover (D), disconnect PCM

connectors A, B,and C, and remove the mounting
bolts, then remove the PCM.
12. Install the PCM and pattery cables in the reverse

order of removal.
NOTE:. If DTC P0630"VIN not Programmed.or

Mismatch" will be stor!~d because the VIN has not
been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and
continue this procedure.
14. Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS.

software.
14-10 BACK
DTC Troubleshooting Index
NOTE: Record all freeze dataandreview,General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4) before you
troubleshoot.
Ole' 111 0 MIL Detection Item, Page

Indicator 0
P0107 (12-7) Blinks OFFor Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor circuit (see page 14-84)
ON'I31 low voltage input
P0108 (12-8) Blinks OFFor Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor circuit (see page 14-85)
ON'I31 high voltage input
P0335 (88-2) Blinks OFF or Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A no signal (see page 14-86)
ON'I31
P0339 (88-6) Blinks OFFor Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A intermittent (see page 14-87)
ON'I31 interruption
P0340 (126-2) Blinks OFFor Camshaft position (CMP) sensor no signal (see page 14-88)
ON',I31
P0344 (126-6) Blinks OFFor Camshaft position (CMP) sensor intermittent (see page 14-89)
ON'(3) interruption
P0385 (125-2) Blinks OFF or Crankshaft position (CMP) sensor B no signal (see page 14-90)
ON'I31
P0389 (125-6) Blinks OFFor Crankshaft position (CMP) sensor B intermittent (see page 14-91)
ON'I31 interruPtion
P062F (0-7) Blinks OFF or Powertrain control module (PCM) internal control (see page 14-92)
ON'(3) module keep alive memory (KAM) error
P0705 (5-2) '121 Blinks ON Transmission range switch (see page 14-93)
(multiple shift-position input)
P0706 (6-2) '121 OFF ON Transmission range switch (open) (see paQe 14-99)
P0711 (28-5)' 121 Blinks OFF ATF temperature sensor (range/performance) (see page 14-103)
P0712 (28-3)'121 Blinks OFF ATF temperature sensor (short) (see page 14-104)
P0713 (28-4),121 Blinks OFF ATFtemperature sensor (open) (see paQe 14-106)
P0716 (15-5)'121 Blinks ON Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (see page 14-109)
(ranQe/performance)
(no siQnal input)
(intermittent failure)
P0721 (9-5)'121 Blinks ON Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (see page 14-120)
(rangeL~erformance)
P0722 (9-3) '121 Blinks ON Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (see page 14-120)
(no signal input)
P0723 (9-6)' 121 Blinks ON Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (see page 14-126)
(intermittent failure)
NOTE:
* (1): The DTC in parentheses is the Honda code that you will see when you use the SCS mode. The first number(s)
before the - (hyphen) is the flash code the D indicator indicates when the data link connector (DLC) is connected
to the HDS, and in the SCS mode.
* (2): This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
* (3): The MIL comes on when the PGM-FI control system detects a failure simultaneous with the AfT DTC.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-11
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4) before you
troubleshoot.
DTe'"1 0 MIL, Detection Item Page

Indicator a
P0731 (64-1) Blinks OFF 1st gear incorrect ratio (see page 14-131)
P0732 (64-2) Blinks OFF 2nd gear incorrect ratio (see page 14-132)
P0733 (64-3) Blinks OFF 3rd gear incorrect ratio (see page 14-133)
P0734 (64-4) Blinks OFF 4th gear incorrect ratio (see page 14-134)
P0735 (64-5) Blinks OFF 5th gear incorrect ratio (see page 14-135)
P0741 (40-3) OFF OFF Torque converter clutch circuit performance or (see page 14-136)
stuck OFF
P0746 (76-3) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-137)
stuck OFF
P0747 (76-4) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-138)
stuck ON
P0751 (70-3) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A stuck OFF (see page 14-139)
P0752 (70-4) Blinks, ON Shift solenoid valve A stuck ON (see page 14-140)
P0756 (71-3) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B stuck OFF (see page 14-141)
P0757 (71-4) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B stuck ON (see page 14-142)
P0761 (72-3) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C stuck OFF (see page 14-143)
P0762 (72-4) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON (see page 14-144)
P0766 (73-3) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve D stuck OFF (see page 14-145)
P0767 (73-4) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve D stuck ON (see page 14-146)
P0776 (77-3) Blinks ON AfT clutch preSsure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-147)
stuck OFF
P0777 (77-4) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-148)
stuck ON
P0796 (78-3) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (see page 14-149)
stuck OFF I
P0797 (78-4) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (see page 14-150)
stuck ON
P0812 (65-2)'121 Blinks ON Transmission range switch ATP R switch (see page 14-151)
P0815 (24_2)'121 Blinks ON Transmission gear selection switch upshift (see page 14-154)
switch (short or stuck ON)
P0816 (24-6)'121 Blinks ON Transmission gear selection switch downshift (see page 14-156)
switch (short or stuck ON)
NOTE:
transmission.
14-12 BACK
troubleshoot.
Ole-I" 0 MIL Detection Item Page

Indicator to
P0842 (25-3) -12' Blinks ON 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see page 14-158)
(short or stuck ON)
P0843 (25-4) -12' Blinks ON 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see page 14-160)
(open or stuck OFF)
P0847 (26-3) -12} Blinks ON 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see page 14-163)
(short or stuck ON)
P0848 (26-4) -12' Blinks ON 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see page 14-165)
(open or stuck OFF)
P0872 (27-3)'12' Blinks OFF 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see page 14-168)
(short or stuck ON)
P0873 (27-4) -12, Blinks OFF 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see page 14-170)
-
(open or stuck OFF)

P0957 (27-4) -12, Blinks ON Transmission gear selection switch (see page 14-173)
(short or stuck ON)
P0958 (24-4) -12, Blinks ON Transmission gear selection switch (see page 14-175)
(short or stuck OFF)
P0962 (16_3)-12) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-178)
(open/short)
P0963 (16-4) -12} Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-182)
P0966 (23-3) -12' Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-184)
(open/short)
P0967 (23-4) -12' Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-188)
P0970 (29-3) -12, Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (see page 14-190)
(open/short)
P0971 (29-4) -12, Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (see page 14-194)
NOTE: '
transmission.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-13
troubleshoot.
DTC'(l) D MIL Detection Item Page

Indicator to
P0973 (7-3) '(2) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A (short) (see page 14-196)
P0974 (7-4)'12) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A (open) (see page 14-199)
P0976 (8-3)' (2) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B (short) (see page 14-202)
P0977 (8-4)'12) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B (open) (see page 14-206)
P0979 (22-3)' (2) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C (short) (see page 14-209)
P0980 (22-4)' (2) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C (open) (see page 14-213)
P0982 (60-3)' (2) . Blinks ON Shift solenbid valve D (short) (see page 14-216)
P0983 (60-4)'12) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve D (open) (see page 14-219)
P16CO (99-1)'12) OFF· ·ON PCM AfT control system incomplete update (see page 14-222)
P1717 (62-1)'12) Blinks ON Transmission range switch ATP RVS switch (see page 14-223)
(open or short)
P1743 (45-11) Blinks OFF Hydraulic control system (see page 14-226)
(Shift valve E stuck OFF)
(Shift valve E stuck ON)
(Servo control valve or servo valve stuck OFF)
P1780 (49-1) Blinks OFF Shift control system .(transmission default mode) (see page 14-229)
P2122 (20-3) Blinks ON Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor A (see page 14-230)
(throttle position sensor D) circuit low voltage
P2123 (20-4) Blinks ON Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor A (see page 14-231)
(throttle position sensor D) circuit high voltage
U0028 (107-1) Blinks OFF or F-CAN malfunction (F-CAN bus OFF) (see page 14-232)
ON ,(3)
U0122 (107-4) Blinks OFFor F-CAN malfunction (see page 14-233)
ON '(3) (PCM-to-VSA modulator-control unit)
U0155 (107-3) Blinks OFF or F-CAN malfunction (see page 14-234)
ON'(3). (PCM-to-gauge control module)
NOTE:
* (1): TheDTC in parentheses is the Honda code that you will see when you use the SCS mode. The first number(s)
transmission.
* (3): The MIL comes on when the PGM-FI control system detects a failure simultaneous with the AfT DTC.
14-14 BACK
Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes

When yeu turn the .... • F-CAN cemmunicatien line errer • Check the F-CAN cemmunicatien line fer a DTC
ignitien switch ON • Gauge centrel medule defective (see page 22-325).
(11), the 0 indicater • PCM defective • Check the F-CAN cemmunicatien line by gauge
cemesen and centrel medule self-diagnestic functien (see page
stays en in all shift 22-317).
lever pesitiens, er • Check indicater drive circuit in the gauge centrel
it never cemes en medule by gauge centrel medule self-diagnestic
at all functien (see page 22-315).
AfT gear pesitien • F-CAN cemmunicatien line errer • Check the F-CAN cemmunicatien line fer a DTC
indicater dees net • Gauge centrel medule defective (see page 22-325).
ceme en while the • PCM defective • Check the F-CAN cemmunicatien line by gauge
shift lever is in that • Transmissien range switch centrel medule self-diagnestic functien (see page
pesitien defective 22-317).
• Check indicater drive circuit in the gauge centrel
medule by gauge centre I medule self-diagnestic
. -~ functio.n (see page 22-315).
• Inspect the transmissien range switch (see page
.. 14-315).
M indicater dees • F-CAN cemmunicatien line errer • c:heck the F-CAN cemmunicatien I.ine fer a DTC
net ceme en in M • Gauge centrol medule defective (see page 22-325).
pesitien • PCM defective • Check the F-CAN cemmunicatien line by gauge
centrel medule self-diagnestic functien (see page
22-317).
• Check indicater drive circuit in the gauge centre I
medule by gauge centrel medule self-diagnestic
functien (see page 22-315).
• Inspect the transmissien gear selectien switch
(see page 14-319).
Shift indicater • F-CAN cemmunicatien line errer • Check the F-CAN cemmunicatien line fer a DTC
dees net werk in • Gauge centrel medule defective (see page 22-325).
sequential • PCM defective • Check the F-CAN cemmunicatien line by gauge
spertshift mede centrel medule self-diagnestic functien (see page
22-317).
• Check indicater drive circuit in the gauge centrel
medule by gauge centrel medule self-diagnestic
functien (see page 22-315).
• Inspect the transmissien gear selectien switch
(see page 14-319).
(cent'd)
BACK 14-15
i.'
',~, '
'.
Auto'matic Transmission
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)

Shift"lever cannot • Accelerator pedal position sensor • Troubleshoot the shift lock system circuit
be moved from P circuit . , (see page 14-323).
while you are • Accelerator pedal position sensor • Test the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-330).
pressing on the defective • Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
brake pedal • Brake pedal position switch circuit 14-315).
• Brake pedal position switch
'. defective
• Shift lock solenoid ,defective
• Shift lock solenoid control circuit
• Shift lock solenoid mechanism
• Throttle body defective
• Transmission range switch ATP P
switch stuck OFF
• Transmission range switch ATP P
switch line opened .
Ignition switch • Interlock control system circuit • Troubleshoot the key interlock system circuit
cannot be moved • Key interlock solenoid stuck ON (see page 14-328).
from ACC (I) to • Park pin switch stuck ON • Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
LOCK (0) (key is • Transrnission range switch ATP P 14-315).
pushed in, shift line opened
lever in P)
HOS does not OLC circuit Troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page 11-223).
communicate with
the PCM or the
vehicle
14-16 BACK
Engine runs, but 1. Low ATF level • Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler
vehicle does not 2. Shift cable broken or out of lines for leakage and loose connections. If
move in any gear adjustment necessary, clean theATF cooler lines.
3. Connection between shift cable • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
and transmission or body is the transmission control lever.
worn • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
4. ATF pump worn orbinding converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
5. Regulator valve stuck or spring The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
worn noise or a high pitched squeak.
6. ATF strainer clogged • Check the line pressure.
7. Foreign.material in separator • Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
plate orifice clogged, find the damaged components that
8. Mainshaft worn or damaged caused the debris.
9. Countershaft worn or damaged • Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If
10. Final gears worn or damaged the differential pinion gears are worn, replace the
11. Park mechanism defective differential assembly,. replace. the ATF strainer,
12. Drive plate worn or damaged and thoroughly clean the transmission, and clean
13. Torque converter worn or the cooler and lines. Replace the torque
damaged converter.
14. Tra nsm ission-to-engi ne • Be careful not to damage the torque converter
assembly error housing when replacing the main ball bearing.
15. Axle disengaged You may also damage the ATF pump when you
torque down the main valve body. This will result
in ATF pump seizure if not detected. Use the
proper tools.
• Install the main seal flush with the torque
converter housing. If you push it into the torque
converter housing until it bottoms out, it will
block the fluid return passage and result in
: damage.
Vehicle moves in R, 1. 1st accumulator defective • Check the 1st and 5th clutch pressures.
but not in D, D3, or 2. Idler gears wOrn or damaged • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold
1st in M 3. 1st clutch defective clutch assembly for wear and damage.
4. 5th clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
to-top disc clea ra nce. If the clea ra nce is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and also inspect the clutch
wave-plate height. If the discs and plates are
worn or damaged, replace the discs and plates as
a set. If the wave-plate height is out of tolerance,
replace the wave-plate. If the discs and plates are
OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end-plate.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-17

Vehicle moves in • 1st gear one-way clutch defective • Check the 1st clutch pressure .
M and R, but not in • 1st gears worn or damaged • Inspect the 1st gears and one-way clutch for wear
DorD3 • 1st clutch defective and damage .
• Inspect the 1st clutch for wear and damage.
• Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
a set. Ifthe wave-plate height is out oftolerance,
Vehicle moves in D, 1st-hold clutch defective • Check the 1st-hold clutch pressure.
D3, 2nd in M, and • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold
R, but notin 1st in clutch assembly for wear and damage.
M • Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
Vehicle moves in D, 1. 2nd accumulator defective • Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
D3, 1st in M, and R, 2. 2nd clutch defective • Inspect the secondary shaft and 2nd clutch
but notin 2nd in M assembly for wear and damage.
• Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
14-18 BACK
Vehicle moves in 0, 1. Shift fork shaft stuck • Check the 5th clutch pressure.
03, and M, but not 2. 5th accumulator defective • Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift
in R 3. 5th clutch defective fork shaft.
4. Reverse gears worn or damaged • Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers,
5. Reverse idler gear shaft/holder and inspect the engagement teeth chamfers of
worn or damaged the countershaft 5th gear and reverse gear.
Replace the reverse gears and the reverse
selector ifthey are worn or damaged. Ifthe
transmission makes clicking, grinding, or
whirring noises, also replace the mainshaft 5th
gear, reverse idler gear, and countershaft 5th
gear.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer·for
to-top disc clearance. Ifthe clearance is out of
Poor acceleration; 1. Low ATF level • Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler
flares when 2. Shift cable broken or out of lines for leakage and loose connections. If
starting off in 0, adjustment necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
03, and R 3. Torque converter one-way clutch • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
defective the transmission control lever.
4. Stator shaft defective • Check the line pressure.
5. ATF pump worn or binding • Check the ATF strainer for debris. Ifthe strainer is
6. Regulator valve,stuck or spring clogged, find the damaged components that
worn caused the debris.
7. ATF strainer clogged • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
8. Torque converter check valve converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
defective The symptom is mostly an rpm-related ticking
9. Shift valve E defective noise or a high pitched squeak.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing when replacing the main ball bearing.
You may also damage the ATF pump when you
torque down the main valve body. This will result
in ATF pump seizure if not detected. Use the
proper tools.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-19

Poor acceleration; 1. 1st accumulator defective • Check the 1st clutch pressure.
flares when 2. 1st clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
starting off in 0, valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
03, and R; stall wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
speed high in 0 to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
and 03 tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wave-plate height. Ifthe discs and plates are
Poor acceleration; 1st-hold clutch defective • Check the 1st-hold clutch pressure.
flares when • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold
starting off in 0, clutch assembly for wear and damage.
03, and R; stall • Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
speed high in 1st in valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
M wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end-plate .
Poor acceleration; • 2nd accumulator defective • Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
flares when • 2nd clutch defective • Inspect the secondary shaft and 2nd clutch
starting off in 0, assembly for wear and damage.
03, and R; stall • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
speed high in 2nd valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
inM wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
14-20 BACK
Poor acceleration; 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
flares when adjustment the transmission control lever.
starting off in 0, 2. 5th accumulator defective • Check the 5th clutch pressure.
03, and R; stall 3. 5th clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
speed high in R valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
to-top disc clearance. Ifthe clearance is out of
a set. Ifthewave-plate height is out oftolerance,
Poor acceleration; 1. Engine output low Replace the torque converter.
flares when 2. Torque converter clutch piston
starting off in 0, defective
03, and R; stall
speed low
Engine idle 1. Low ATF level • Adjust the engine and transmission mounts.
vibration 2. Engine output low • Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler
3. Torque converter clutch piston lines for leakage and loose connections. If
defective necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
• Replace the torque converter.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-21
Symptom Probable cause(s) ,~ . Notes

Vehicle moves in N 1. Excessive ATF • .Check the ATF level, and drain theATF if
2. ATF temperature sensor necessary.
defective· • Check all clutch pressures.
3. 'Foreign material in separator • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check ~
plate orifice valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
4. Relief valve defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
5. Lubrication control valve to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
defective tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
6. 1st-hold clutch defective wear and damage, and also inspect the clutch
7. 1st cI utch defective wave-plate height. If the discs and plates are
8. 2nd clutch defective worn or damaged, replace the discs and plates as
9. 3rd clutch defective a set. If the wave-plate height is out of tolerance,
10. 4th clutch defective replace the wave-plate. If the discs and plates are
11. 5th clutch defective OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end-plate.
12. Clutch end plate clearance
incorrect
13. Needle bearing seized up, worn,
or damaged
Late shift after 1. Shift solenoid valve A defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
shifting from N to 2. Shift solenoid valve B defective connectors.
D or D3,or 3. Shift solenoid valve C defective • Inspect the O-ring', and check the shift solenoid
excessive shock 4. AfT clutch pressure control valve for seizure ..
when shifting . solenoid valve C defective • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
5. Shift cable broken or out of valve body gasket andATF feed pipes for wear
adjustment and damage. Ifthe AfT clutch pressure control
6. Connection between shift cable solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
and transmission or body is • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
worn the transmission control lever.
7. ATF temperature sensor • Check the 1st clutch pressure.
defective • Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
8. CPC valve C defective clogged, find the damaged components that
9. Foreign material in separator caused the debris.
plate orifice • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
10. Shift valve A defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
11. Shift valve D defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
12. Shift valve E defective to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
13. ATF strainer clogged tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
14. 1st accumulator defective wear and damage, and also inspect the clutch
15. 2nd accumulator defective wave-plate height. Ifthe discs and plates are
16. 1st check ball stuck worn or damaged, replace the discs and plates as
17. 1st clutch defective a set. If the wave-plate height is out of tolerance,
18. Clutch end plate clearance replace the wave-plate. If the discs and plates are
incorrect OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end plate.
14-22 BACK
Symptom Probable causels) Notes
Late shift after 1. AfT clutch pressure control • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
shifting from N to solenoid valve C defective connectors.
R, or excessive 2. Shift cable broken or out of • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid
shock when adjustment valve for seizure.
shifting 3. Connection between shift cable • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
and transmission or body is worn valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
4. ATF temperature sensor defective and damage. Ifthe AfT clutch pressure control
5. Reverse CPC valve defective solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
6. Foreign material in separator • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
plate orifice the transmission control lever.
7. ATF strainer clogged • Check the 5th clutch pressure.
8. 5th clutch defective • Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
9. Clutch end plate clearance clogged, find the damaged components that
incorrect caused the debris.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end plate~
Transmission does 1. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
not shift sensor defective connectors.
2. Output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor defective
Excessive shock or 1. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on all sensor defective connectors.
upshifts and 2. Output shaft (countershaft) speed
downshifts sensor defective
3. ATF temperature sensor defective
4. Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
(cont'd)
BACK 14-23

Excessive shock or 1. Shift solenoid valve A defective • Check fora stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on 1-2 2. Shift solenoid valve B defective connectors.
upshift or 2-1 3. Shift solenoid valve C defective • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
downshift 4. AfT clutch pressure control valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
solenoid valve A defective and damage. If the AfT clutch pressure control
5. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
solenoid valve B defective • Check for clogged orifice in the transmission
6.. .AfT clutch pressure control fluid pressure switch connector. If the orifice is
solenoid valve C defective clogged, remove itand clean the connector.
7. 2nd olutchtransmission fluid • Check the 1st and 2nd clutch pressures.
pressure switch defective • Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
8. CPC valve A defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
9. CPC valve B defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
10. CPC valve C defective to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
11. Shift valve C defective tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
12. Shift valve D defective wear and damage, and also inspect the clutch
. 13. Foreign material in separator wave-plate height. If the discs and plates are
plate orifice worn or damaged, replace the discs and plates as
14. 2nd accumulator defective a set. If the wave-plate height is out oftolerance,
15. 2nd clutch defective replace the wave-plate. If the discs and plates are
16. Clutch end plate clearance OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end plate.
incorrect
Excessive shock or 1. Shift solenoid valve D defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on 2-3 2. AfT clutch pressure control connectors.
upshift or 3-2 solenoid valve A defective • Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
downshift 3. AfT clutch pressure control valve for seizure.
solenoid valve B defective • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
4. AfT clutch pressure control valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
solenoid valve C defective and damage. If the AfT clutch pressure control
5. 3rd clutch transmission fluid solenoid valve is stuck, inspectthe CPC valves.
pressure switch defective • Check for clogged orifice in the transmission
6. Shift fork shaft stuck fluid pressure switch connector. If the orifice is
7. CPC valve A defective clogged, remove it and clean the connector.
8. CPC valve B defective • Check the 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
9. Foreign material in separator • Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
plate orifice valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
10. Servo control valve defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
11. Lock-up shift valve defective to-top disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
12. 2nd accumulator defective tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
13. 3rd accumulator defective wear and damage, and also inspect the clutch
14. 2nd check ball stuck wave-plate height. Ifthe discs and plates are
15. 2nd clutch defective worn or damaged, replace the discs and plates as
16. 3rd clutch defective a set. If the wave-plate height is out of tolerance,
17. Clutch end plate clearance replace the wave-plate. If the discs and plates are
incorrect OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end plate.
14-24 BACK
Excessive shock or 1. AfT clutch pressure control • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on 3-4 solenoid valve A defective connectors.
upshift or 4-3 2. AfT clutch pressure control • Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoiq
downshift solenoid valve B defective valve for seizure. ~ .
3. AfT clutch pressure control • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
solenoid valve Cdefective valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
4. 4th clutch transmission fluid and damage. If the AfT clutch pressure control
pressure switch defective solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
5. Shift fork shaft stuck • Check for clogged orifice in the transmission
6. Foreign material in separator fluid pressure switch connector. Ifthe orifice is
plate orifice clogged, remove it and clean the connector.
7. Servo control valve defective • Check the 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
8. 3rd accumulator defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
9. 4th accumulator defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
10. 3rd clutch defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
11. 4th clutch defective to-top disc clearance. Ifthe clearance is out of
12. Clutch end plate clearance ' tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
incorrect wear and damage, and also inspect the clutch
wave-plate height. If the discs and plates are ..
replace the wave-plate. Ifthe discs and plates are
OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end plate.
Excessive shock or 1. AfT clutch pressure control • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on 4-5 solenoid valve A defective connectors.
upshift or 5-4 2. A/tclutch pressure control .'. Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
downshift solenoid valve B defective valve for seizure. ' ,.
3. AfT clutch pressure control • Inspectthe AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
solenoid valve C defective valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
4. Foreign material in separator and damage, If the AfT clutch pressure control
plate orifice solenoid valve is stucki inspect the CPC valves.
5. 4th accumulator defective • Checkthe 4th and 5th clutch pressures.
6. 5th accumulator defective • Inspect the clutch piston, cI!,Jtch piston check
7. 4th clutch defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
8. 5th clutch defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
9. Clutch end plate ch~arance to-top disc clearance. If the clearance iSQut of
incorrect tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wave-plate height. Ifthe discs and plates are
OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end plate.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-25
Sym~om Probable cause(s) Notes

Noise from 1. ATF pumpworn or binding • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
transmission in all 2. ATF strainer clogged converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
shift lever 3. Idler gears worn or damaged The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
positions 4. Bearings on mainshaft, noise or a high pitched squeak.
cbuntershaft, secondary shaft, • Check the ATF strainer for debris. If the strainer is
and intermediary shaft worn or clogged, find the damaged components that
damaged caused the debris:
5. . Thrust washer seized up, llliorn, or • Be careful not to damage the torque converter
damaged housing when replacing the main ball bearing.
You may also damage the ATF pump when you
torque down the niain valve body. This will result
, in ATF pump seizure if not detected. Use the
proper tools. '
Vehicle does not' Torque converter one-way clutch Replace torque converter.
accelerate above' defective
31 mph (50 km/h)
Vibration in all 1. ATF pumpworn or binding • Adjust the engine and transmission mounts.
shift lever 2. Torque converter worn or • Check the stall speed.
positions damaged • Check the ATF strainer for debris. Ifthe ATF
3. Drive plate defective or strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
transmission misassembled aluminum, inspectthe ATF pump. Ifthe ATF
pump is OK, find the damaged components that
caused the debris. If no cause for the
contamination is found, replace the torque
converter.
Shift' lever does 1. Transmission range switch • Check for a storedDTC, and check for loose
not operate defective or out of adjustment connectors.
smoothly 2. Shift cable broken or out of • Inspect the transmission range switch. If the
adjustment transmission rantje switch is faulty, replace it. If
3. Connection between shift cable the transmission range switch is out of
and transmission or body is worn adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
4. . Manual valve defective • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
5• Selector control shaft worn or the transmission control lever.
. damaged
Transmission does 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
not shift into P adjustment the transmission control lever.
2. Connection between shift cable • Check the park pawl, control shaft, and park lever
and transmission or body is worn link for wear and damage. Check if the control
3. Park mechanism defective shaft lever pin is disengage from the manual
4. Secondary ,shaft 2nd gear worn or valve guide.
damaged
Torque converter 1. Torque converter clutch piston • Replace the torque converter.
clutch does not defective • Check the lock-up control valves.
disengage 2. Lock-up control valve defective
3. Lock-up timing valve defective
14-26 BACK
Torque converter 1. Torque converter clutch piston • Replace the torque converter.
clutch does not defective • Check the lock-up control valves.
operate smoothly 2. Torque converter check valve
defective
3. Lock-up control valve defective
Torque converter 1.. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
clutch does not adjustment the transmission control shaft.
engage 2. Connection between shift cable • Replace the torque converter.
and transmission or body is worn • Check the lock-up control valves.
3. Foreign material in separator
plate orifice
4. Torque converter clutch piston
defective
5; Torque converter check valve
defective
6. Lock-up control valve defective
AfT gear position 1. Transmission range switch • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
indicator does not defective or out of adjustment connectors.
indicate shift lever 2. Shift cable broken or out of • Inspect the transmission range switch. If the
positions adjustment transmission range switch is faulty, replace it. If
3. Connection between shift cable the transmission range switch is out of
and transmission or body is worn adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
• Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
the transmission control lever.
Speedometer and Output shaft (countershaft) speed Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
odometer do not sensor defective connectors.
work
Engine does not Engine rocker arms defective Check the engine rocker arms.
rev to high rpm,
and the
transmission
upshifts at low rpm
(engine at normal
operating
temperature)
BACK 14-27
System Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission isa combination of a three-element torque converter and a four-shaft electronically
controlled unit which provides five forward speeds and reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line with the engine.
Torque Converter, Shafts, Gears, and Clutches

The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. The converter housing (pump)
is connected to the engine crankshaft and turns as the engine turns. Around the outside of the torque converter is a
ring gear which mesheswith the starter pinion when the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly
serves as a flywheel, transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft. The transmission has four parallel shafts: the
mainshaft, the countershaft, the secondary shaft, and the intermediary shaft. The mainshaft is in line with the engine
crankshaft. The mainshaft includes the 4th and 5th clutches, and gears for 3rd, 4th, 5th, and reverse (reverse gear is
integral with the 5th gear). The countershaft includes gears for the final drive, 2nd, idler, 1st, 4th, 5th, and reverse (the
final drive gear is integral with the countershaft). The secondary shaft includesthe 1st, 1st-hold, and 2nd clutches, and
gears for park, 2nd, idler, and 1st. The intermediary shaft includes the 3rd clutch, and gears for 3rd and 4th. The
countershaft 5th gear and the counters haft reverse gear can be locked to the countershaft at its left end, providing 5th
gear or reverse, depending with which way the selector is moved. The gears on the mainshaft, secondary shaft, and
intermediary shaft are in constant mesh with those on the countershaft. When certain conditions of gears in the
transmission are engaged by the clutches, power is transmitted through the mainshaft, and/or to the secondary shaft,
intermediary shaft, then to the countershaft to provide drive.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and seven solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located in
the engine compartment.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the secondary valve body, and the
accumulator body. They are bolted to the torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve,
the modulator valve, the torque converter check valve, shift valves A, 8, E, CPC valve A, the relief valve, the servo
control valve, the lock-up shift valve, the lock-up timing valve, the lubrication control valve,;;the lubrication check valve,
and the ATF pump gears. The secondary valve body contains shift valves C, D, CPC valves 8 and C, the reverse CPC
valve, and the reverse control valve. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the cooler check valve, the
lock-up control valve, and the 3rd accumulator. The accumulator body contains the 1st, 1st-hold, 2nd, 4th, and 5th
accumulators, shift solenoid valves A, 8, C, and D. Fluid from the regulator valve passes through the manual valve to
the various control valves. All the clutch receive fluid from the internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism

To shift gears, the PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, 8, C and D, and automatic transmission (AfT) clutch pressure
control solenoid valves A, 8, and C, while receiving input signals from various sensors and switches located
throughout the vehicle. The shift solenoid valves shift the positions of the shift valves to switch the port to send
hydraulic pressure to the clutches. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, 8, and C control the CPC valves
A and 8, and reverse CPC valve to shift smoothly between lower and higher gear. This pressurizes a line to one ofthe
clutches, engaging the clutch and its corresponding gear.
14-2·8 BACK
Lock-up Mechanism
The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the D position, and in 2nd and 3rd gears in the D3
position. The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a fluid passage, causing the
torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place, the mainshaft rotates
at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the timing and
volume of the lock-up mechanism. When shift solenoid valve D is turned on by the PCM, shift solenoid valve D
pressure switches the lock-up shift valve lock-up on and off. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, the lock-up
control valve, and the lock-up timing valve control the amount of the lock-up conditions. Shift solenoid valve Dis
located on the accumulator body in the transmission, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C is mounted on
the transmission housing.
Gear Selection
The shift lever has five positions; P: PARK, R: REVERSE, N: NEUTRAL, D: DRIVE 1st through 5th gear range with
automatic shift and sequential sportshift in M (sequential sportshift mode) position, and D3: DRIVE 1st through 3rd
gear range with automatic shift.
Position Descr~tion
P: PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on secondary shaft. All
clutches are released.
R:REVERSE Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 5th
clutch engaged.
N:NEUTRAL All clutches are released.
D:DRIVE Automatic General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, then 5th,
(1st through 5th) shift depending on vehicle speed and accelerator pedal position. Downshifts
through 4th, 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism
operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears.
M: Manual gear shift driving; vehicle can start off in 1st gear, and does not upshift
Sequential automatically. Vehicle can also start off in 2nd gear, and does not upshift and
sportshift downshift automatically. Downshifts automatically to 1st on deceleration to
mode stoP. The 10ck-uQmechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears.
D3: DRIVE Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving, up-hill and
(1st through 3rd) down-hill driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, then 3rd,
depending on vehicle speed and accelerator pedal position. Downshifts
through 2nd and 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates
in 2nd and 3rd gears.
Starting is possible only in the P and N positions because of a slide-type neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transmission (AIT) Gear Position Indicator

The AfT gear position indicator in the gauge control module (located between speedometer and tachometer) shows
which shift lever position has been selected without having look down at the console.
Shift Indicator and M indicator

When the shift lever is shifted into the M (sequential sportshift mode) position, the M indicator next to the D indicator
comes on, and the shift indicator at the bottom of the tachometer displays the gear selected.
Transfer Assemblv
The transfer assembly consists of the transfer drive gear on the differential, the transfer output shaft in the
transmission, the transfer drive gear (hypoid gear), the transfer shaft, the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear), and the
companion flange. The transfer assembly is on the rear side of the transmission, beside the differential. The transfer
drive gear on the differential drives the transfer output shaft in the transmission. The transfer output shaft in the
transmission is connected to the transfer drive gear (hypoid gear) by splines. Power is transmitted from the transfer
drive gear on the differential to the rear differential via the transfer assembly and the propeller shaft.
BACK 14-29
Clutches and Gears

The 5-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduc.ed into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch
pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise; when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases
the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
Transmission Cutaway View
REVERSE IDLER GEAR

5TH CLUTCH
REVERSE IDLER
GEAR SHAFT
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT 4TH GEAR

COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
JIC---- MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
5TH GEAR
r.c:.-I4~t::=:st::tIfP\Ui mrnr"--_ COUNTERSHAFT 2ND GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT IDLER GEAR
REVERSE DRIVE PLATE

SELECTO~ HUB
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
2ND CLUTCH
PARK GEAR
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY (HYPOID GEAR)
14-30' BACK
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the left end of the secondary shaft. The 'Ist clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the secondary shaft.
1st-hold Clutch
The 1st-hold clutch engages/disengages 1st-hold in 1st gear in the M position. The 1st-hold clutch is located in the 1st
clutch drum, and is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the secondary shaft.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the right end of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure through the secondary shaft by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rd Clutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd'gear, and is located at the end of the intermediary shaft. The 3rd clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure through the intermediary shaft by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 4th clutch is joined
back-to-back tothe 5th clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the mainshaft by a circuit
connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
5th Clutch
The 5th clutch engages/disengages 5th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
5th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 5th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the mainshaft
by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
One-way Clutch
The one-way clutch is positioned between the 1st clutch hub and the secondary shaft 1st gear. The secondary shaft 1st
gear is splined to the 1st-hold clutch hub, with the 1st-hold clutch hub splined to the secondary shaft. The secondary
shaft 1st gear provides the outer race surface, and the 1st clutch hub provides the inner race surface. The one-way
clutch locks when power is transmitted from the secondary shaft 1st gear to the countershaft 1st gear. The 1st clutch
and gears remain engaged in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gear ranges in the D position, and in the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd
gear ranges in the D3.
However, the one-way clutch disengages when the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, or 5th clutches and gears are applied in the D or D3
position. This is because the increased rotational speed of the gears on the secondary shaft causes the one-way clutch
to free-wheel with the 1st clutch still engaged.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-31
Clutches and Gears (cont'd)
Gear operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
o 4th gear is engages/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
o 5th gear is engaged/disengages with the mainshaftby the 5th clutch.
o Reverse gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft. by the 5th clutch.
o 3rd gear is splined with the mainshaft and rotates with the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft:

o Final gear is integral with the countershaft.
o 1st gear, 2nd gear, and 4th gear are splined with the countershaft, and rotate with the countershaft.
o 5th gear and reverse gear rotate freely from the countershaft. The reverse selector engages 5th gear and reverse
gear with the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined to the countershaft so 5th gear and reverse
gear engage with the countershaft.
o Idler gear is located over the 2nd gear, and rotates freely from the countershaft.
Gears on the secondary shaft:

o 1st gear is engaged with the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch and the one-way clutch when accelerating, and 1st
gear is disengaged from the 1st clutch at the one-way clutch when decelerating ..1st gear is engaged with the
secondary shaft by the 1st-hold clutch when decelerating for engine braking.
o 2nd gear is engaged/disengaged with the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
o Idler gear is splined with the secondary shaft, and rotates with the secondary shaft.
o Park gear is integral with the 2nd gear.
Gears on the intermediary shaft:

o 3rd gear is engaged/disengaged with the intermediary shaft by the 3rd clutch.
o 4th gear is splined with the. intermediary shaft.
14-32 BACK
Power Flow
P Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear, secondary shaft 2nd gear, and countershaft 2nd gear.
N Position
Engine power transmitted from the mainshaft drives the mainshaft 3rd gear, the intermediary shaft 3rd gear, but
hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. In this position, the
position of the reverse selector differs according to whether the shift lever shifted from the 0 or R position:
• When shifted from the 0 position, the reverse selector engages with the countershaft 5th gear and the reverse
selector hub, and the 5th gear engages with the countershaft.
• When shifted from the R position, the reverse selector engages with the countershaft reverse gear and the reverse
selector hub, and the reverse gear engages with the countershaft.
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT 3RD GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
(cont'd)
BACK 14-33

Power Flow (cont'd)
D and D3 Positions
In the D and D3 positions, the optimum gear is automatically selected from the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the D
position; and 1st, 2nd, and,3rd gears in the D3 position according to conditions such as the balance between the
accelerator pedal opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed.
In 1st gear
• Hydraulic pressure is appliedto the 1st clutch; then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft by the one-way clutch.
• The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
• The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear and the transfer drive gear.
• The transfer output shaft drives the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft and the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
COUNTERSHAFT 1ST GEAR ~
~
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
ONE·WAY CLUTCH
SECONDARY
1ST GEAR
TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
\,~-~ OUTPUT SHAFT
IHYPOID GEAR)
14-34 BACK
In 2nd gear
o Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear with the
secondary shaft.
o The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
o The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
o Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven'gear and the transfer drive gear.
o The transfer output shaft drives the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft and the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
o Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 2nd gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
power from 1st gear is cut off at the one-way clutch.
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
~_~ TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
2ND CLUTCH
___- TRANSFER HYPOID

DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
TRANSFER OUTPUT SHAFT (HYPOID GEAR)
(cont'd)
BACK 14-35
Power Flow (cont'd)
In 3rd gear
o Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the intermediary shaft 3rd gear with the
intermediary shaft.
o The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the intermediary shaft 4th gear via the intermediary shaft 3rd gear and the 3rd clutch.
o The intermediary shaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft via the mainshaft 4th gear.
o Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear and the transfer drive gear.
o The transfer output shaft drives the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft and the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
o Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 3rd gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
3RDCLUTCH
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT 3RD GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
1ST CLUTCH
~_- TRANSFER HYPOID

DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
___-TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
TRANSFER OUTPUT SHAFT IHYPOID GEAR)
14-36 BACK
In 4th gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 4th gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
MAINSHAFT 4TH GEAR

4TH CLUTCH
TORQUE CONVERTER
_ _--FINAL DRIVE GEAR
1ST CLUTCH
_ _- TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
TRANSFER OUTPUT SHAFT (HYPOID GEARI
(cont'd)
BACK 14-37
Power Flow (cont'd)
In 5th gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft 5th gear while
the shift lever in the D position.
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft 5th gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 5th gear drives the countershaft 5th gear, which drives the reverse selector hub and the countershaft.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 5th gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
5TH CLUTCH
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
1ST CLUTCH
TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
TRANSFER OUTPUT SHAFT IHVPOID GEAR)
14-38 BACK
Acceleration in 1st gear in M (sequential sportshift mode) position
In 1st gear in the M (sequential sportshift mode) position, hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch and the 1st-
hold clutch. The power flow when accelerating is as follows:
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft by the one-way clutch.
• The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft. idler gear.
• The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st-hold clutch, and the 1st-hold clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st
gear with the secondary shaft.
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINS HAFT
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
1ST-HOLD CLUTCH
SECONDARY
1ST GEAR
"'"""' __--TRANSFER HYPOID

DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
TRANSFER OUTPUT SHAFT (HYPOID GEAR)
(cont'd)
BACK 14-39
Power Flow (cont'd)
Deceleration in 1st gear in M (sequential sportshift mode) position

The power flow in 1st gear inthe M (sequential sportshift mode) position when decelerating is as follows:
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch and the 1st-hold clutch.
• Rolling resistance from the road·surface goes through the front wheels to the final driven gear, then to the
countershaft idler gear.
• The one-way clutch disengages because the application of torque is reversed.
• The force conveyed to the secondary shaft idler gear turns the mainshaft 3rd gear via the countershaft idler gear. As
a result, engine braking can be obtained with 1st gear.
'.
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
ONE-WAY CLUTCH
SECONDARY SHAFT
1ST GEAR
14-40 BACK
RPosition
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft reverse gear
while the shift lever is in the R position.
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
• The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector which drives the reverse selector hub.
• The rotation direction of the countershaft is changed by the reverse idlefgear.
REVERSE IDLER GEAR 5TH CLUTCH
_ _- - TORQUE CONVERTER
~- FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
~_-TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
1lI. _ _ _- - OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
BACK 14-41
Auto,matic Transmission
Electronic Control System

Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists ofthe powertraincontrol module (PCM), sensors, and seven solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions.
Functional Diagram
The PCM receives input signals from the sensorsiswitches, and other control units, processes data, and O\ltputs
signals for the engine control system and AfT control system. The AfT control system includes shift control, clutch
pressure control, and lock-up control. The PCM switches the shift solenoid,v,alves and the AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valves to control shifting transmission gears and lock-up torque converter clutch.
PCM
Engine RPM Signal,
~
~
Accelerator Pedal Position PGM-FI Control System
Sensor Signal
~
Throttle Position Sensor
Signal (ETCS)
J ~
~ ,.
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sensor Signal
~
~
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
A/T Control System
~
Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal Shift Solenoid Valve A
~
ATF Temperature Shift Control
Sensor Signal
·· Grade Logic Control
Shift-Hold Control t
,
Shift Solenoid Valve B
~ · Cruise
SH-AWD Control Unit Sequential Sportshift Shift Solenoid ValveC
Signal Control
· Downshift
Control
Requ~ -. Shift Solenoid Valve D Autometic
~
VSA Modulator-control
Unit Signal 5-speed
and
Reverse
rp ----. A/T Clutch Pressure
'Ii ----. Control Solenoid yalve A
Transmission
Range Switch 'iii ----. Clutch Pressure
.(;
"
I A/T Clutch Pressure I
Signal
1> ----. Control
I
Control Solenoid Valve B
I
li3 ----. AfT Clutch Pressure
f
Control Solenoid Valve C
l
""-
Lock-up
~
Transmission Gear Lock-up C~ntrol ON/OFF
Selection Switch Signal
Input Shaft (Mainshaft)

Speed Sensor Signal r--. • AfT Gear Position
Indicator
• D Indicator
'--+ Lock-up
Condition
r--.
Indicator Control
Output Shaft (Countershaft) • Shift Indicator
Speed Sensor Signal
· M Indic~~)f
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Signal r--. I
J--. I
Shift Lock Control " Shift Lock Solenoid
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid
I
Pressure Switch Signal
.. Vehicle Speed Signal
r--.
• Self-diagnosis/
4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Fail-safe Function
Pressure Switch Signal • Communication and Data Link Connector
Output function
Brake Pedal Position
Switch Signal r--.
14-42 BACK
Electronic Control System Component Locations
~
DATAUNK
/ hl PARK PIN SWITCH
CONNECTOR SHIFT LOCK - - - - TRANSMISSION GEAR

(DLC) SOLENOID SELECTION SWITCH
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION A/T CLUTCH PRESSURE

FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVEC
4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
A/TCLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
VALVEB
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
(cont'd)
BACK 14-43
Electronic Control System (cont'd)
Shift Control
The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent from sensors and switches, and
it actuates the shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D to control shifting transmission gear.
There are two types of shift solenoid valves:

• Shift solenoid valves A and D use the ON-OPEN/OFF-CLOSE type; the shift solenoid valve opens the port of shift
solenoid valve pressure while the shift solenoid valve is turned ON by the PCM, and closes the port when shift
solenoid valve is OFF .
• Shift solenoid valves Band C use the ON-CLOSE/OFF-OPEN type; the shift solenoid valve closes the port of shift
solenoid valve pressure while the shift solenoid valve is turned ON by the PCM, and opens the port when shift
solenoid valve is OFF.
The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D are shown in the table.
Position Gear position Shift solenoid valves

A B C D
D and D3 Shifting from the N position OFF ON OFF OFF
Stays in 1st OFF ON ON OFF
Shifting gears between 1st and 2nd ON ON ON OFF orON
Stays in 2nd ON ON OFF OFF orON
Shifting gears between 2nd and 3rd ON ON ON OFF orON
Stays in 3rd ON OFF ON OFF orON
D Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th ON OFF OFF OFF orON
Stays in 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF orON
Shifting gears between 4th and 5th OFF OFF ON OFF orON
Stays in 5th OFF ON ON OFForON
M 1st OFF ON ON OFF orON
2nd ON ON OFF OFF or ON
3rd ON OFF ON OFF or ON
4th OFF OFF OFF OFF orON
5th OFF ON ON OFF or ON
N Neutral OFF ON OFF OFF
R . Shifting from the P and N positions OFF ON OFF ON
Stays in reverse ON ON OFF ON
Reverse inhibit control OFF ON OFF OFF
P Park OFF ON OFF ON
14-44 BACK
Shift Control· Grade Logic Control
The grade logic control system has been adopted to control shifting in the D and D3 positions. The PCM compares
actual driving conditions with memorized driving conditions, based on the input from the throttle position sensor, the
engine coolant temperature sensor, the barometric pressure sensor, the brake pedal position switch signal, and the
shift lever position signal, ,to, control shifting while the, vehicle is ascending or descending a slope.
I
PCM
Engine RPM Signal

I
I ,I Engine RPM Control
J
ITransmission Range
Switch Signal Shift Position
I
Control
Accelerator Pedal
+l Fail·safe Control
rr-
Position Sensor
Signal
IThrottle Position
Sensor Signal
I
I
Actual
r- +!:Drivin
g
I-
Shift Position
IRead of ATF I
I Output Shaft
(Countershaft)
I
ITemperature I
l!; Comparison
-
Shift Solenoid Valve A
Shift Solenoid Valve B
Speed Sensor Signal I Master Target of
with
Signals ~ Shift Solenoid Valve C
I Shifting Position Shift Solenoid Valve 0
II~ut Shaft
( ainshaft)
I
Speed Sensor Signal I ,-,
IATFTemperature
Sensor SIgnal
I
I
Selection
lE oof n?!
Shifting mode
Grade Logic Control
-
IBarometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
?
::
Calculation of
Gradient
I
~
Engine Coolant
Correction of Engine
r
Temperature ~
Sensor Signal " " Coolant Temperature
IBrake Pedal Position

Switch Signal
Sensor Signal Data
Correction of Cruise
IVSA Modulator-
control Unit Signal
I
I
Control Sienal Data
byDowns ift
Request Signal
(cont'd)
BACK 14-45
Grade Logic Control: Ascending Control

When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in the 0 and 03 positions,the system extends the
engagement area of 2nd gear, 3rd gear, and 4th gear to' prevent the transmission from 'frequently shifting between
2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th and 5th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and
have more power when needed.
NOTE: Shift commands stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th
and 5th gears, enable the PCM to automatically select the most suitable gear accordinq to the magnitude of a gradient.
ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule

1000/0
Q
C
·S ---- : FLAT ROAD MODE
CD
C.
e
CD .- - - - - - - - - - : GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE
50
~ _ .._to_to_to. : MEDIUM ASCENDING MODE
~
_._._._.- : HEAVY STEEP ASCENDING MODE
o
Vehicle speed
Grade Logic Control: Descending Control

When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in the 0 and 03 positions, the shift-up speed from 4th
to 5th gear, 3rd to 4th gear, and from 2nd to 3rd (when the throttle ls closed) becomes faster than the set speed forflat
road driving to widen the 4th gear, 3rd gear, and 2nd gear driving areas. This, in combination with engine braking
from the deceleration lock-up, achieves smooth driving when the vehicle is descending. There are three descending
modes with different 4th gear driving areas, 3rd gear driving areas, and 2nd gear driving areas according to the
magnitude of a gradient stored in the PCM. When the vehicle is in 5th or 4th gear and you are decelerating while
applying the brakes on a steep hill, the transmission will downshift to a lower gear. When you accelerate, the
transmission will then return to a higher gear.
DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule

100%
1ST
·sC
CD
----- : FLAT ROAD MODE
c.
e . - - - - - - - - - - : GRADUAL DESCENDING MODE
CD
50
i....
.c
_ .._ .._ .._to. : MEDIUM DESCENDING MODE
.. : STEEP DESCENDING MODE
o
Vehicle speed
14-46 BACK
Deceleration Control
When the vehicle goes around a corner and needs to decelerate first and then accelerate, the PCM sets the data for
deceleration control to reduce the number oftimes the transmission shifts. When the vehicle is decelerating from
speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h), the PCM shifts the transmission from 4th to 3rd earlier than normal to cope with
upcoming acceleration.
Shift-Hold Control
When negotiating winding roads, the throttle is suddenly released and the brakes are applied, as is the case when
decelerating at the entrance of a corner, Shift-Hold Control keeps the transmission in its current (lower) ratio as it
negotiates the corner and accelerates out.
When the vehicle is driven aggressively on a winding road, the PCM will extend the engagement time of 3rd gear and
4th gear to prevent the transmission from frequently shifting between 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears. This allows the driver to
have more control for both acceleration and deceleration. ,
The PCM monitors the average change in vehicle speed and throttle over time. When these values exceed those for,
normal driving conditions, the shift-up from,3rd to 4th gear and 4th to 5th gear is delayed. This gives more control
over power, and engine braking when the driver is driving aggressively around winding roads. The transmission will
resume the normal shift-up pattern after the PCM determines that normal driving has resumed.
Nf : Throttle ~eleased and brakes applied ..

t#~
,.
m .........m . . .
................ -ff:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . crr::oJ

11t4.. . . . . . . .
Operation pattern of ON
accelerator
Shift pattern of 3rd

conventional
automatic transmission
4 h .:.5t~h=--__
Shift pattern of
Shift-Hold Control
_..:.:.;=--______________
3rd
---I~-
.
automatic transmission
(cont'd)
BACK 14-47
Shift Control.; Sequential Sportshift Mode

The MDX transmission is provided a sequential sportshift mode in the D position. In the D position, the transmission
has two shifting modes; the automatic shift mode and the sequential sportshift mode. In the automatic shift mode
used for general driving, the transmission upshifts and downshifts automatically from 1st through 5th gear. In the
automatic shift mode, the shift indicator and the M indicator in the gauge control module do not come on.
The transmission is switched to the sequential sportshift mode by moving the shift lever into the M position from the
D, the automatic shift mode is canceled and the sequential sportshift mode comes into operation. The shift indicator
displays the number of the selected gear,and the M indicator'comes on. In the sequential sportshift mode, the driver
can shift up and down manually froh11stthrough 5th gear byusing the shift lever, much like a manual transmission,
and the transmission must be shifted up and down by using the shift lever. However, the transmission cannot
downshift'aridstays in the current gear ifthe shift lever is pulled while the vehicle is coasting at a speed that would
cause the engine to overcrev by downshifting the transmission, and the shift indicator blinks the number ofthe
selected gear several times, then returns to the number of the current gear. If the vehicle speed reaches an appropriate
speed while the shift indicator is blinking the number ofthe selected gear, the transmission downshifts and the shift
indicator displays the selected gear. The transmission also cannot upshift and stays in the current gear if the shift lever
is pushed while driving below an appropriate upshifting speed, the shift indicator blinks the number of the selected
gear several times, then returns to the nurTlber ofthe current gear. If the vehicle speed reaches the an appropriate
upshift speed while the shift indicator is blinking the number of the selected gear, the transmission upshifts and the
shift indicator displays the selected gear.
When the transmission decelerates to a stop, the transmission shifts to 1st gear automatically. The transmission can
be shifted to 2nd gear by pushing the shift lever while the vehicle is stopped, and the vehicle can start off in 2nd gear.
The sequential sportshift mode is canceled when moving the shift lever to any position other than M.
14-48 BACK
Clutch Pressure Control
The PCM actuates AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, 8, and C to control the clutch pressure. When shifting
between gears, the clutch pressure regulated by AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, 8, and C engages and
disengages the clutch smoothly.
The PCM receives input signals from the various sensors and switches, performs processing data, and outputs current
to AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valvesA,.s, and C.
PCM
\ Input Shaft
(Mainshaft) I
Speed Sensor Signal I Actual
Driving
Shift
\ Output Shaft
(Countershaft) I Position
Speed Sensor Signal I
I Accelerator Pedal I
IDecision of
Shifting Mode
I
Position Sensor
Signal I
I Throttle Position
Sensor Signal
I
I
+
Master Target of
--. Current AIT Clutch Pressure
r- Controlling Current feedback Control Solenoid

Valve A, B, and C
I Manifold Absolute
l-M::-r
Pressure Sensor Signal
I
I Engine RPM Signal

Correction of
Engine Torque
I Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
I Signal Data I
I
I2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid
Correction of
Hydraulic Pressure
Pressure Switch Signal Application
Timing
l3rd Clutch
Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Signal Correction of
Engine Coolant
14th Clutch
Transmission Fluid
I Temperature
Sensor Signal Data
Pressure Switch Signal I
I Engine Coolant
Temperature
I Correction of ATF
Temperature
Sensor Signal I Sensor Data
I ATFTemperature
Sensor Signal
I
I
(cont'd)
BACK 14-49
Lock-up Control
The shift solenoid valve D controls the hydraulic pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up ON and OFF.
The PCM actuates the shift solenoid valve D and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C ON, the condition of
lock-up starts. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C regulates and applies hydraulic pressure to the lock-up
control valve to control the volume of the lock-up.
The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the D position, and in 2nd and 3rd gears in the D3
position.
PCM
Engine Coolant I Engine Coolant

Temperature 'I Temperature Control
Sensor Signal
I Shiftin~ Position
I Contro
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
Gradient Control
by Magnitude
f+ '-
Transmission Range I Fail·safe Control

Switch Signal
Accelerator Pedal
Position Sensor Signal Actual
Driving
..... r+ Shift
Position
~
Throttle Position
Sensor Signal Master Target
~ f-+ of Controlling
Current
Lock-up Control
Output Shaft
(Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
Driving
Shift
f---+
Lock-up ON/OFF
Control
Lock·up Condition
! I Shift Solenoid
Position ValveD
Input Shaft Information Control
(Mainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal Current
Feedback
A/TClutch
Engine RPM Signal Pressure Control
Solenoid Valve C
Correction of
ATF Temperature I ATF _I Lock·up Condition
Sensor Signal I Temperature
Sensor Data
I Learning Control
14-50 BACK
PCM AfT Control System Electrical Connections
KiNmON SWITCH PCM

ATTERY AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONtROL
SOlENOID VAlVE A
B42 C21
+ ~
~BAT 1G1
B2
1G1 LSA
AffClUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
1G1HOTinONlill
~ VB SOL SOlENOID VAlVE B
810
Al LSB 00'
~
,mlSTARTIIIIJ VBS012
AffClUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SHlFTlOCK SOlENOID VAlVE C
~
B21
LSC 00'
-<f"'......r SLS
BRAKE PEDAl
I'OSIIlON SWIItH
liT
SHIFT SOlENOID VAlVE A
M C20
-<::f"' BKSW SHA
BRAKE lIGHTS ---l C28
SHIFT SOlENOID VAlVE 8
SHB
L
I PGM-A MAIN RElAY #1
I
B3
IGP
SHC
C39
SHIFT SOlENOID VAlVE C
SHIFT SOlENOID VAlVE D

C9
SHD
I
I DATAlINKCONNECTOR
I
A32
scs
VCCl
B36
liT
GAUGE CONTROL MODUlE NC

838 I OUTPUTSHAFT
ICOUNlBlSHAFIl
SG5
Cli I SPEED SENSOR
A48
[J~nsceNer
CANH
CANContJOlier
A49
CANL
MAP
835 1 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE '
PRESSURE IMAPI
SGl
B34 J SENSOR
- ¢¢¢¢$$
C33
= I
Sequential Am ATflEMPERATURE
A/TIndIca1orDriver
,---I SENSOR
Driver C12
VCC2
B37 I INPUTSHAFT
@
MN IMAINSHAfT)
SG2
C16 I SPEED SENSOR
0:0 I I DimmlngCIraJ~
C34
~
EGRP
P A16 Cl0 - EGRVAlVE
POSII1ON SENSOR
ATPP EGR
TRANSMISSION R C25
RANGE
SWITCH N
D
C26
C17
ATPR
ATPN
ATPD cn
fr 2ND ClUTCH TRANSMISSION
~ A.UID PRESSURE SWITCH
! D3 C46
C1S
C19
ATPD3
ATPFWD
ATPRVS
OP2SW
OP3SW
C9
3RD ClUTCHTRANSMISSION
~ A.UID PRESSURE SWITCH
?h-
TRANSMISSION GfAR SElECI10N SWIlCH
OP4SW
C20 I
4TH ClUTCHTRANSMISSION
~ A.UIDPRESSURE SWITCH
?h-
?h-
-
S-MODE SWITCH A47
S-MOOE B40
A36 PGl
S-UP 81
SHIFT SWITCH PG2
A3T C41
S-ON LGl
841
LGZ
liT liT
PCM HamessCoM_T.rmlnallDcatlons
, 2 3 ·101
·1' 8 9 '0 1234156178910 II, 2 3 • I_ I • I' • 91'01
1"1" 13 'VI'. VI'· ,aj20j2' 1"1" 13 "1"1'.1"1" "1 20 1"1 I" "V VI'-~· '~8 '9120 1"1
I22V 2.Xj20 IX 28127j2a L22J23 2' X 25 X 28 1/24 X" X
...
26 27 28
29 30 31SZV
AI49PI 0
V38 373338
, 42 .. 44 V" .7 48 49
2930313233343536373839
. . .,
BI49P1 Il
42 IV .. 45 .. vl/l/ II ..
CI49PI 0
V
., 42
323334
"44 ....
I/VI 37 38 39
47 48 49
Tenninalside offemaJetenninals
(cont'd)
BACK 14-51

PCM AfT Control System Inputs and Outputs
PCM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
I
11 2 3 4151617 8 9 1101 111 2 3 4151617 8 9 101 111 2 3 4151 6 1 7 8 9 10 1
1112 13VV
16,1118 192021 1112 1314115 1617118 92021 1112 1/115
1617118 92021
221 24X 25X 2627 2B 2223 24X 25X 26 1 I I I 24X 25 IX 2627 2B
2930 3132VV ,1136 3736 39 2930 3132133 3435136 3736 39 I I / 32133 34 ,IV 373639
140 41 42 43 I44 VI 46 47 461491 l40 41 421/144145146 1/ /1/1 1401 41 42 43144145146 4748 491
A(49P)D B(49P) L::,. C(49P) 0

PCM CONNECTOR A (49PI D

number
Al WHT VB SOL2 (POWER SOURCE Power source for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
FOR SOLENOID VALVES) valves With ignition switch OFF: About 0 V
A2 PNK SLS (SHIFT LOCK Drives shift lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II), in the P position, brake
SOLENOID) pedal pressed and accelerator released: About 0 V
A8 LTGRN BK SW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: About 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal With brake pedal pressed: Batterv voltage
A16 GRN ATP P (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the P position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH P switch P position signal In any position other than P: Battery voltage
POSITION) .'
A32 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check signal With service check signal shorted with the HDS:
SIGNAL) AboutOV
With service check signal opened: About 5.0 V
A36 BLU S-UP (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission gear In the M position:
GEAR SELECTION SWITCH selection switch upshift • Shift lever pushed toward upshift position: About
UPSHIFT SWITCH) switch signal OV
• Shift lever in neutral position: BattE!ry voltage
A37 GRN S-DN (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission gear In the M position:
GEAR SELECTION SWITCH selection switch downshift • Shift lever pushed toward downshift position:
DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) switch signal About 0 V
• Shift lever in neutral position: Batterv voltaae
A47 PUR S-MODE (SEQUENTIAL Detects transmission gear In M position: About 0 V
SPORTSHIFT MODE) selection switch S mode In any position other than M: Battery voltage
switch signal .
A48 WHT CAN H(CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
HIGH)
A49 RED CAN L(CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
LOW)
14-52 BACK
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) L::,.
number
B1 BlK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
B2 BlK/YEl VB SOL (POWER SOURCE Power source for solenoid With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
FOR SOLENOID VALVES) valves With ianition switch OFF: About 0 V
B3 VEL/BlK IGP (POWER SOURCE FOR Power source for PCM With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
PCM) circuit With ianition switch OFF: About 0 V
B10 BRN/WHT lS B (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve B
SOLENOID VALVE B)
B21 GRN/RED lS C (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve C .
SOLENOID VALVE C)
B34 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor around less than 1.0 V at all times
B35 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE At idle: About 1.0 V depending on engine speed
(MAP) SENSOR)
B36 VEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
With ignition switch OFF: About 0 V
B37 RED NM (INPUT SHAFT Detects input shaft With ignition switch ON (II): About 0 V or about
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED (mainshaft) speed sensor 5.0V
SENSOR) signal With engine running in N position: About 2.5 V
B38 BLU NC (OUTPUT SHAFT Detects output shaft With ignition switch ON (II): About 0 V or about
(COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED (countershaft) speed sensor 5.0V
SENSOR) signal With drivina: Pulses
B40 BlK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM less than 1.0 V at all times
. circuit
841 BRN/YEl lG2 (lOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM less than 1.0 V at all times
B42 BlK/YEl IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
.1 With ianition switch OFF: About 0 V
(cont'd)
BACK 14-53

PCM AfT Control System Inputs and Outputs (cont'd)
PCM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
111 12 3 4151el7 8 91101 1

11\11 2 3 41 5 e1 7 8 911 oj ·11112 34151617 8 91101
111213W16!11819 20 21 1 11 1213 1~51e r~J18 920 21 I 11121L1LJ15161~8 92021
22V 241>< 25X 26 27 2B 2223 24l)<::: 251>< 26V V ILIL 24~ 25lX 26 27 2B
29 30 31 32V V Vi36 37 38 39 Iz9 30 31 32133 34 35136 37 3839 ILILIL 3~33 34~ 373839
1140 141 42 43144VI46 47 481491 11401 41 42VI44I45I 46 V I/VI Li40141 42 43144J45[46 47 46149\
A (49P) D B (49P) b. C(49P) 0

PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) 0

Terminal Wire color Terminal name . Description Signal
number
C9 GRN/RED SH D (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In N position, In D and D3 positions during no lock-
VALVED) valve D up condition: About 0 V
In P and R positions, and D and D3 positions during
10ck-l!Q. condition: Batt~volt~e
C10 BLU/RED EGR (EXHAUSTGAS Drives EGR valve With EGRoperating: Duty controlled
RECIRCULATION (EGR) with EGR not operating: About 0 V
VALVE)
C12 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): About 5.0 V
Withjgnition switch OFF: About 0 V
C16 GRN/YEL SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor Qround Less than 1.0 V at all times
C17 YEL/GRN ATP D (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D switch D position signal In any position other than D: Battery voltage
POSITION) input
C18 BLU/YEL ATP FWD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D and D3 positions: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D AND S) switch D and D3 signal In any position other than D and D3: Battery voltage
input
C19 RED/WHT ATP RVS (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In P, R, and N positions: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R switch P, R, and N position In any position other than P, R, and N: Battery
POSITION) signals voltage
C20 BLU/yEL SH A (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In R position, and 2nd and 3rd in D and D3
VALVE A) valve A positions: Battery voltage
In P and N positions, 1st in D and D3 positions, and
4th and 5th in D~osition: About 0 V
C21 RED LS A (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve A
SOLENOID VALVE A)
C25 WHT ATP R (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R switch R position signal In any position other than R: Battery voltage
POSITION)
14-54 BACK
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) 0
number
C26 RED/BLK ATP N (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In the N position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH N switch N position signal In any position other than N: Battery voltage
POSITION)
C27 BLU/BLK OP2SW (2ND CLUTCH Detects 2nd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 2nd clutch pressure: About 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch sianal • With 2nd clutch pressure: About 0 V
C28 GRN/WHT SH B (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In P, R, and N positions, and 1st and 2nd in 0 and 0
VALVE B) valve B 3 positions, and 5th in 0 position: Battery voltage
In 3rd in 0 and 03 positions, and 4th in 0 position:
About 0 V
C33 BLU/YEL ATFT(ATFTEMPERATURE Detects ATF temperature With ignition switch ON (II): About 0.2-4.0 V
SENSOR} sensor signal depending on ATF temperature
With ianition switch OFF: About 0 V
C34 WHT/BLK EGRP (EXHAUST GAS Detects EGR valve position With engine running: 1.2-3.0 V depending on EGR
RECIRCULATION (EGR) sensor signal valve lift
VALVE POSITION SENSOR)
C37 BLU/YEL OP4SW (4TH CLUTCH Detects 4th clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 4th clutch pressure: About 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch sianal • With 4th clutch pressure: About 0 V
C38 BLU/WHT OP3SW (3RD CLUTCH Detects 3rd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 3rd clutch pressure: About 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch signal • With 3rd clutch pressure: About 0 V
C39 GRN SH C (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In 1st and 3rd in 0 and 03 positions, and 5th in 0
VALVE C) valveC position: Battery voltage
In P, R, and N positions, 2nd in 0 and 03 positions,
and 4th in 0 position: About 0 V
C41 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
C46 RED ATP 03 (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In 03 position: About 0 V
RANGE SWITCH 03) switch 03 sianal input In any position other than 03: Batterv voltaae
BACK 14-55
Hydraulic Controls.
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the secondary valve body, and the
accumulator body. The ATF pump is driven by splines on the end of the torque converter which is attached to the
engine. Fluid flows through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the .main valve body to the
manual valve, directing pressure to eai:'h of the clutches. Shift solenoid valves A,B', Cand D are mounted on the
accumulator body. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C are mounted on the transmission housing.
____ AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE

____ CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
- - - AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
ACCUMULATOR BODY . . .______

. SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D
~
~ ~ SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
~o.-r-D"1-l _____ SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

JFi"~~()..l'
.0
1.-..-+-- SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
/
REGULATOR VALVE BODY
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
~
~MAINVALVEBODV
14-56 BACK
Main Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve, the torque converter check valve, shift valve A,
shift valve B, shift valve D, shift valve E, CPC valve C, the relief valve, the lock-up shift valve, the lock-up timing valve,
the lubrication control valve, the lubrication check valve, and the ATF pump gears. The primary function of the main
valve body is to switch fluid pressure on and off to control hydraulic pressure going to the hydraulic control system.
LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE'
TORQUE CONVERTERCHECK VALVE
/ MANUAL VALVE,'
/ SHIFTVALVEE
SHIFT VALVE A
SHIFT VALVE B
LUBRICATION
CONTROL VALVE
MODULATOR VALVE
LUBRICATION SERVO CPC VALVE A MAIN VALVE BODY

CHECK VALVE CONTROL VALVE
Regulator Valve Body

The regulator valve body is located on the main valve body. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the
cooler check valve, the lock-up control valve, the servo valve, and the 3rd accumulator.
o
COOLER CHECK VALVE
o
LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE
SERVO VALVE/SHIFT FORK SHAFT
(cont'd)
BACK 14-57
Auto:matic Transmission
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)

Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure from the ATF pump to the hydraulic control system, while
also furnishing fluid to the lubrication system and torque converter. Fluid from the ATF pump flows through Band B'.
Fluid entering from B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the regulator
valve to the spring side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque converter and
the relief valve. The fluid flows out tothe torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve returns under
spring force. According ro the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator valve changes.
and the amount of fluid from B' through the torque converter changes. This operation is continued, maintaining the
line pressure.
From ATF PUMP
VALVE
To TORQUE CONVERTER
t jt To LUBRICATION
VALVE SPRING
ORIFICE
REGULATOR VALVE
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are provided by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction.
The stator shaft is splined to the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap.
When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (torque converter range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft,
and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to the reaction. The
stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by
the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its maximum when the stator torque reaction reaches its maximum.
/ TORQUE CONVERTER
STATOR SHAFT
REGULATOR VALVE BO~ STATOR
STATOR SHAFT ARM
REGULATOR SPRING CAP
14-58 BACK
Secondary Valve Body
The secondary valve body is on the main valve body. The secondary valve body contain shift valve C, shift valve D,
CPC valve B, CPC valve C, the reverse control valve, and the reverse CPC valve.
SHIFT VALVE D
REVERSE CPC VALVE
SHIFTVALVEC
CPCVALVEB
REVERSE CONTROL VALVE SECONDARY VALVE BODY
Accumulator Body
The accumulator body is on the secondary valve body, and contains the 1st, 1st-hold, 2nd, 4th, and 5th accumulators.
The 3rd accumulator is in the regulator valve body.
o
3RD ACCUMULATOR

ACCUMULATOR
BODY
\)
\j 2ND ACCUMULATOR
1ST-HOLD ACCUMULATOR 1ST ACCUMULATOR
4TH ACCUMULATOR
BACK 14-59
Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure
As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing from the ATF pump becomes line pressure
that is regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure from the regulator valve enters the torque
converter through the lock-up shift valve and lock-up control valve, and it is discharged from the torque converter. The
torque converter check valve prevents torque converter pressure from rising.
The PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, 8, C, and D ON and OFF, and the shift solenoid valves control shift solenoid
pressure to the shift valves. Applying shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift valve,
and switches the port of hydraulic pressure. The PCM also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, 8
and C. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves regulate hydraulic pressure, and apply the pressure to CPC
valves A and 8, and reverse CPC valve.
When shifting between gears, the clutch is engaged by pressure from the CPC pressure mode. The PCM controls one
of the shift solenoid valves to move the position of the shift valve. This movement switches the port of CPC pressure
and line pressure. Line pressure is then applied to the clutch, and CPC pressure is released. Engaging the clutch with
line pressure mode happens when shifting is completed.
Hlyedrau rIC Pressureatth e P0 rtfor use "thhd

In e lye rau rIC circuit
Port Hydraulic Pressure Port Hydraulic Pressure
1 Line SC Shift solenoid valve C
2 Line - SC' Shift solenoid valve C
3 Line SD Shift solenoid valve D
3' Line 10 1st clutch
3" Reverse CPC or Line 15 1st-hold clutch
3A Line 20 2nd clutch
38 Reverse CPC 30 3rd clutch
4 Line 40 4th clutch
4' Line 50 5th clutch
4" Line 51 5th clutch
4A CPCA 56 AfT clutchm-essure control solenoid valve A
48 CPC8 57 AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve 8
4C CPCC 5R AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve 8
5A CPCA 58 AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
58 CPC A or Line 90 Torque converter
5C CPC 8 or Line 90' Tor'gue converter
5D CPC 8 91 Torque converter
5E CPCC 91' Torque converter
5F CPCC 92 Torque converter
5G CPCC 93 ATF cooler
5H CPC 8ar Line 94 Torque converter
5J CPC 8 or Line 95 Lubrication ..
5K CPCA or Line 95' Lubrication
5L CPCAor Line 96 Torque converter
5M Line 99 Suction
5N CPCC X Drain
6 Modulator HX High position drain
SA Shift solenoid valve A AX Air drain
S8 Shift solenoid valve 8 -- --
14-60 BACK
N Position
Line pressure (1) regulated by the regulator valve flows to shift solenoid valves. The PCM controls the shift solenoid
valves ON and OFF. The conditions ofthe shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valves are as follows:
• Shift solenoid valve A is OFF, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA); shift valve A stays on the
left side.
• Shift solenoid valve 8 is turned ON, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve 8 pressure (58); shift valve 8 and shift
valve E stay on the left side.
• Shift solenoid valve C is OFF, and opens the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC); shift valve C and shift
valve D move to the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve D is OFF, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve D pressure (SD).
Line pressure (1) also flows to the modulator valve and becomes modulator pressure (6). Modulator pressure (6) flows
to the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The manual valve covers the port leading pressure to the clutches,
and hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE: When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-61
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
o and 03 Positions: 1st gear shifting from the N position

When shifting to the' D position or S position from the N position, the condition of the shift solenoid valves remain the
same as in the N position. The manual valve is moved to the D position, and uncovers the port of line pressure (4)
leading to CPC valves A and C. The PCM controls the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and C, AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (56) flows to the CPC valve A, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C pressure (58) flows to the CPC valve C. CPC valves A and C regulate line pressure (4), line pressure (4)
becomes CPC C pressure (4C) at the CPC valve C, and becomes CPC A pressure at CPC valve A. CPC C pressure (4C)
becomes 1st clutch pressure. (10) at shift valve D, and 1st clutch pressure flows to the 1st clutch. CPC A pressure (4A)
becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20) at shift valve B via shift valves A and C. The 1st clutch and 2nd clutch engage gently
with the CPCpressure mode.
NOTE: When used, "Ieft" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-62 BACK
D and D3 Positions: Driving in 1st gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and shift solenoid valve C covers the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure
(SC) to shift valve C, and shift valve 0 via shift valve E. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and shift solenoid valve B
remains ON. Shift valves C and 0 are moved to the left side, shift valve 0 switches the port of line pressure (4) and
CPC C pressure (4C) leading to the 1st clutch, and shift valveC switches the port of CPC A pressure (5A) releasing 2nd
clutch pressure. Line pressure (4) becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve 0, and flows to the 1st clutch. The 1st
clutch is engaged securely with the line pressure mode.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-63
D and D3 Positions: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, and shift
solenoid valve A uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) to shift valve A. Shift solenoid valves Band
C remain ON. Shift valve A is moved to the right side to uncover the port of CPC A pressure (4A) leading to the 2nd
clutch. The PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A pressure (56) is applied to CPC valve A. CPC valve A regulates line pressure (4), and line pressure (4) becomes
CPC A pressure (4A). CPC A pressure (4A) flows to shift valve B via shift valves C and A, and becomes 2nd clutch
pressure (20) at shift valve B. The 2nd clutch is engaged in the CPC pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but
no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
14-64 BACK
D and D3 Positions: Driving in 2nd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and shift solenoid valve C uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve C
pressure (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valves A and B remain ON. Shift valve C is moved to the right side to
switch the port of line pressure (4) and CPC A pressure (4A) leading to the 2nd clutch. CPC A pressure (5B) (5K)
changes to line pressure (5B) (5K) and 2nd clutch pressure (20) is changed to line pressure mode, and the 2nd clutch is
engaged in the line pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-
way clutch.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-65
D and D3 Positions: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and shift
solenoid valve C covers the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valves A and B
remain ON. Shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure (4) and CPC A pressure (4A)
leading to the 2nd clutch. Shift valve C also uncovers the port of CPC B pressure (4B) leading to the 3rd clutch. The
PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
pressure (56) is applied to CPC valve A, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valverB pressure (57) is appliedto
CPC valve B. CPC valve B regulates line pressure (4"), and line pressure (4") becomes CPC B pressure (4B). CPC B
pressure flows to shift valve A via shift valves C and B, and becomes 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve A. The 2nd
clutch pressure (20) is changed to CPC pressure mode, and the 3rd clutch is engaged with the CPC pressure mode. The
1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
14-66 BACK
D and D3 Positions: Driving in 3rd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve B OFF, and shift solenoid valve B uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve B
pressure (SB) to shift valve B. Shift solenoid valves A and C remain ON. Shift valve B is moved to the right side to
switch the port of line pressure (5C), CPC B pressure (5J) leading to the 3rd clutch, and 2nd clutch pressure (20)
releasing 2nd clutch pressure. CPC B pressure (5J) changes to line pressure (5J) and 3r.d clutch pressure (30) is
changed to line pressure mode, and the 3rd clutch is engaged with the line pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also
engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-67
o Position: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear

As the speed ofthe vehicle reaches the programmed value,thePCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and shift
solenoid valve C uncovers the port.of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valve A
remains ON, and shift solenoid valve B remains OFF. Shift valve C is moved to the right side to switch the port of line
pressure (4) and CPC B pressure (4B) leading to the 3rd clutch. Shift valve C also uncovers the port of CPC A pressure
(4A) leading to the 4th clutch. The PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (56) is applied to the CPC valve A, and AfT clutch pressur~ control solenoid
valve B pressure (57) is applied to CPC valve B. CPC valve A regulates line pressure (4), and line pressure (4) becomes
CPC A pressure (4A). CPC A pressure (4A) flows to shift valve B via shift valves C and A,and becomes 4th clutch
pressure (40) at shift valve B. The 3rd clutch pressure (30) is changed to CPC pressure mode, and the 4th clutch is
engaged in the CPC pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because ofthe one-
way clutch.
14-68 BACK
D Position: Driving in 4th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, and shift solenoid valve A covers the port of shift solenoid valve A pressure
(SA) to the shift valve A. Shift solenoid valves 8 and C remain OFF. The shift valve A is moved to the left side to switch
the port of pressure (58), CPC A pressure (5A) (5L) leading to the 4th clutch, and 3rd clutch pressure (30) releasing 3rd
clutch pressure. CPC A pressure (5L) changes to line pressure (5L) and 4th clutch pressure (40) is changed to line
pressure mode, and the 4th clutch is engaged with the line pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no
power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-69
D Position: Shifting between 4th gear and 5th gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and shift
solenoid valve C covers the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valve A remains
OFF, and shift solenoid valve B remains OFF. Shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure
(4) and CPC A pressure (4A) leading to the 4th clutch. Shift valve C also uncovers the port of CPC B pressure (4B)
leading to the 5th clutch. The PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A pressure (56) is applied to the CPC valve A, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
pressure (57) is applied to CPC valve B. CPC valve B regulates line pressure (4"), and line pressure (4") becomes CPC B
pressure (4B). CPC B pressure (4B) flows to shift valve A via shift valves C and B, and becomes 5th clutch pressure (51)
at shift valve A. The 4th clutch pressure (40) is changed to CPC pressure mode, and the 5th clutch is engaged in the
CPC pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
14-70 BACK
D Position: Driving in 5th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve 8 ON, and shift solenoid valve 8 covers the port of shift solenoid valve 8 pressure
(S8) to shift valve 8. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and shift solenoid valve C remains ON. Shift valve 8 is
moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure (5H), CPC 8 pressure (50) leading to the 5th clutch, and 4th
clutch pressure (40) releasing 4th clutch pressure. CPC 8 pressure (5H) changes to line pressure (5H) and 5th olutch
pressure (51) (50) is changed to line pressure mode, and the 5th clutch is engaged in the line pressure mode. The 1st
clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-71
I, .JP-
Driving in 1st gear (engaged with 1st and 1st-hold clutches) in the sequential sportshift mode
Line pressure (1) regulated by the regulator valve flows to shift solenoid valves. The PCM controls the shift solenoid
valves ON and OFF. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valves are as follows:
left side.
• Shift solenoid valve B is turned ON, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve B pressure (SB); shift valve B and shift
• Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC); shift valve C and shift
valve 0 stay on the left side.
• Shift solenoid valve 0 is OFF, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve 0 pressure (SO).
Line pressure (4) becomes 1st clutch pressure (10)'at shift valve 0, and flows to the 1st clutch. The 1st clutch is
engaged. The PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C pressure (58) is applied to CPC valve C,via the lock-upshift valve. CPC valve C regulates line pressure (4), and
line pressure (4) becomes CPC C pressure (4C). CPC C pressure (4C) flows to shift valve B via shift valves 0, E, and C,
and becomes 1st·hold clutch pressure (15) at shift valve B. 1st-hold clutch pressure (15) is applied to the 1st-hold
clutch, and the 1st-hold clutch is engaged.
14-72 BACK
R Position: Shifting to the R position from the P or N position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions
of the shift valves are as follows:
left side.
valve E stay on the left side;
valve D move to the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve D is turned ON, and opens the port of shift solenoid valve D pressure (SD); reverse control valve
moves to the right side.
The manual valve is moved to the R position, and line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve. Line
pressure (3) passes through the reverse control valve, and becomes line pressure (3A), then flows to the servo valve.
Line pressure (3A) pushes the servo valve to the reverse position. Line pressure·(3) also flows to the reverse CPC valve,
and becomes reverse CPC pressure (3B) (3"). Reverse CPC pressure (3") becomes 5th clutch pressure (50) at the
manual valve, and 5th clutch pressure (50) flows to the 5th clutch. The 5th clutch is engaged with reverse CPC pressure
mode.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-73

R Position: Driving in reverse gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, and shift
solenoid valve A uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) to shift valve A. Shift valve A is moved to
the right side to switch the port of line pressure (3') and reverse CPC pressure (3B) leading to the 5th clutch. Line
pressure (3) flows to the manual valve via the servo valve and shift valve A, and becomes 5th clutch pressure (50) at
the manual valve. The 5th clutch pressure (50) flows to the 5th clutch, and the 5th clutch is engaged with the line
pressure mode.
Reverse Inhibitor Control

When the: R position is selected while the vehicle is moving forward at a speed over 6 mph (10km/h), the PCM
commands shift solenoid valve 0 to remain OFF so that shift solenoid valve o pressure (SO) is not applied to the
reverse control valve. Line pressure (3) stops.at the reverse control valve, and is not applied to the servo valve. No
power is transmitted to the reverse direction.
14-74 BACK
P Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions
of the shift valves are as follows:
left side.
valve 0 move to the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve 0 is turned ON, and opens the port of shift solenoid valve 0 pressure (SO); reverse control valve
moves to the right side.
The manual valve is moved to the P position, and line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) atthe manual valve. Line
pressure (3) passes through the reverse control valve, and becomes line pressure (3A), then flows to the servo valve.
Line pressure (3A) pushes the servo valve to the reverse position. Line pressure (3) flows to the manual valve via the
reverse CPC valve and shift valve A, and stops at the manual valve. Hydraulic pressure is not applied the clutches.
BACK 14-75
Lock-up System
The lock-up mechanism ofthe torque converter clutch operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the D position, and in
2nd and 3rd gears in the D3 position. The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter through a
fluid passage, causing the torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As this takes
place, the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with the hydraulic control, the PCM
optimizes the timing and amount of the lock-up mechanism. When shift solenoid valve D is turned on by the PCM, shift
solenoid valve D pressure switches the lock-up shift valve lock-up on and off. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C, the lock-up control valve, and lock-up timing valve control the amount of lock-up.
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up ON (Engaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston is drained off, and
fluid entering from the chamber between the pump and stator exerts pressure through the torque converter clutch
piston against the torque converter cover. The torque converter clutch piston engages with the torque converter cover;
the torque converter clutch lock-up is ON, and the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine.
I Power flow I TORQUE CONVERTER

CLUTCH PISTON
DAMPER SPRING
The power flows by way of:
TURBINE
Engine
l
Drive plate
l TORQUE CONVERTER To ATF cooler
Torque converter cover COVER
l
Torque converter clutch piston
l
Damper spring
l
Turbine
l
Mainshaft
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up OFF (Disengaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid entered from the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston passes
through the torque converter and goes out from the chambers between the turbine and the stator, and between the
pump and the stator. As a result, the torque converter clutch piston moves away from the torque converter cover, and
the torque converter clutch lock-up is released; the torque converter clutch lock-up is OFF.
IPower flow I TURBINE PUMP
The power flows by way of:
Engine
l
Drive plate TORQUE CONVERTER
l COVER
Torque converter cover.
l
Pump
l
Turbine
l
Mainshaft
MAl NSHAFT
14-76 BACK
No Lock-up
The PCM commands shift solenoid valve D to remain OFF, and shift solenoid valve D covers the port of shift solenoid
valve D pressure (SD) to the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve is in the right side, and uncovers the port
leading torque converter pressure (92) to the left side'of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (92) from
regulator valve becomes torque converter pressure (94) at the lock-up shift valve, and enters into the left side of the
torque converter to disengage the torque converter clutch. The torque converter clutch is OFF.
ll3lllll·,I·I·---- - - UNEPRESSURE (11
(cont'd)
BACK 14-77
Lock-up System (cont'd)
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve 0 ON, and shift
solenoid valve 0 uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve 0 pressure (SO) to the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift
valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port of torque converter pressure (91) leading to the right side of the
torque converter to engage the torque converter clutch. The PCM also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and lock-
up timing valve. When AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58) is low, torque converter pressure
(91) from the lock-up timing valve is low. The torque converter clutch is engaged partially. AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C pressure (58) increases, and the lock-up timing valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port
leading torque converter pressure to high. Under this condition, the torque converter clutch is engaged by pressure
from the right side of the torque converter; this condition is partial lock-up.
IIGlj):j~·H---- ____ UNE PRESSURE (1)
rU~:t.!~~1~*L- ---- A/TCLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE C PRESSURE 158)
14-78 BACK
Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C to increase
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58). AfT clutch pressure ,control solenoid valve C pressure (58)
is applied to the lock-up control valve and lock-up timing valve, and the lock-up control valveaod lock-up timing valve
are moved to the left side. Torque,converter pressure (94) from the left side of the torque converter, rele~sesat the
lock-up control valve, and lock-up timing valve uncovers the port of torque converter pressure (91) leading to the right
side of the torque converter~ Torque converter back press\Jre is released fully, and torque converter clutch is engaged
fully.
'i: .. ,.
11t:l1-1.1---- _ _ UNE PRESSURE (1)
.'",
_ _ AfT CLUTCH pRESSURE CONTROL VALVE C PRESSURE (58)
BACK 1:4-79
Shift Lever Mechanism
The shift lever has five positions; P, R, N, 0, and 03 positions. The 0 position has two modes; automatic shift mode
and sequential sportshift mode with the shift lever moved to the M position. The shift lever shifts out of the P position
and into the R position with pressing the shift lever button, and the shift lever shifts into the 03 position from the 0
with pressing the shift lever button. The shift lever is engaged with the shift lever link in the P, R, N, 0, and 03
positions. This unit shifts the transmission using the shift cable connected between the shift lever link and the
transmission control shaft.
In the M position, the shift lever is disengaged from the shift lever link, and the shift lever can be used to shift gears
manually between 1st though 5th, much like a manual transmission.
~ SHIFT LEVER KNOB

SHIFT LEVER BUTTON
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

SHIFT LEVER LINK
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION SWITCH
14-80 BACK
Shift Lever Mechanism in M Position
When the shift lever shifts to the M position, the shift lever is disengaged from the shift lever link/shift lever pivot, and
the shift lever link lock pops up to engage with the shift lever bracket base; the shift lever link and shifting position in
the transmission are held in the D position. The shift lever link lock is spring loaded, it pops up in the M position, and
does not engage the shift lever link in any position except M.
SHIFT LEVER
LINK LOCK
SHIFT LEVER
SHIFT LEVER L1NKI

SHIFT LEVER PIYOT
The shift lever fits into the M position by using a detent plunger with a spring. When shifting to upshift and downshift
position, the d~tent plunger is depressed by the detent bracket wall, and detent plunger spring puts the shift lever back
into the neutral position. The detent plunger also works in the P position.
DETENT PLUNGER
DETENT SPRING
BACK 14-81
Circuit Diagram - PCM AfT Control System
UNDER-HOOD RJSEJRELAY BOX UNDER-DASH RJSEJRELAY BOX

BATTtHY
No.1 1120 AI NoJllGlf50AI BAT ill No.l0IlSAI
+ No.lil10Al
WHT
IGNITION SWITCH -0'"' VEL

No.lll1SAI No.1S 120 AI
-""" """ eRN
No211l.5A1
~
I
POWERlllAIN CONTROL
MODULE IPCMI
TOr
ill IloI2
BIJ({YEl
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

-r- vaSOl B2
BIJ(fYEL
I vaSOL2 Al
WHT
~YEL-
~mM
C1S
---®---- RED/WHT
AfT
GEAR
POSITION
INDICATOR
=:=
-@----
ATPFWO
ATPD3
ATPD
Cli
C46
Cll
BLU/YEL
RED
YEL/GRN
CAN
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
=:: TO~V
~
ATPN
ATPR
ATPP
C26
C25
A16
REDIBIX
STARTER
CUTRELAY
CONTROllER DIMMING CIRCUIT I G~N
+J .il ±
A48 CANH
SEQUENIIAl.
SPORTSHIFT
MODE SHIFT
INDICATOR
CIRCUIT -m 0:0
rr W "F J.
~ ~D
WHT
CANl B~UiBLK
WHT
ST
BLK
F-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
SG
~D
A2
P 1
PO
n..
K
BLK BIJ(
11
1 ~~tm~
WHT - TRANSMISSION GEAR
SHIFT SELECTION SWITCH
LOCK G501
---I -j}-- A2 SLS
,l'
=:t
SOLENOID BLK 2 PNK PNK S-MODE
7 All
:::~3:-:l::
t
S-MODE
PUR
BRAKE PEDAL S-UP
POSmON SWITCH
W H T - - ® - - - lTGAN V lTGRN
Ai BKSW rys-~
A3S
BLU
~J= ~
MUlTJPLEXJNTEGRATEO
l
V-
S-DN A:iI
GRN
~BLK
GRN : BLU/YEl
~BLK---+----~
CONTROL UNIT IMICUI
- G503
PCM HamessConnectorTermlnaI Locatfons
, 2
111213
3
••
•1/,.
VI"
7
••"
192021
, 2
•••7 •,
"'2 13141516 1718 192021 "
3 , 2 3 . •7 ••
,',2[/ 1518 1716 192021 "
5
22V 24 X 25 X 26 21 28 2223 24 X 25 X 2• V 24X25 X 26Z128

....
2930 3132V 1/38 37383B
424344 / 41 48 49 .. .... ....
1291.. 31 32133 34 3638 31 38 39
421/44 1/1/1/ . .. 424344 ....
1/1, 1/ 321333'1/ 37383B
47 48 49
AI48PIO BI48PJ " CI48P1 0

TermJnol side of_~1ennlnsb
14-82 BACK
POWER11!AIN CONTROL
MODULE IPCMI
ToSV To12V
B~~r-
DATAUIiX SCS
<J--BrfI~BafI
A32 LSA CZl
CONNECTOR
IDlCI PRESSURE
CONTROl
2 SOLENOID
BLK VALVE A
OUlM'SHAFT
ICOUNlBlSIfAFTJ [gt.- 2 BLU
B36
B38
VCC1
NC
LSB Bl0
---=t~r-
PIIESSURE
CONTROL
..
SPEED SENSOR 2 SOLENOID
el5 SG6 BLK VALVEB
. 3 GRN/YEL
[}- -~~r-
LSC 821
PRESSURE
CONTROl
MANIFOLD 2 SOLENOID
ABSOLUlE 2 GRN/I!EII B36 MAP BLK VALVEC
PRESSURE
SENSOR 3 GRN/WHT B34 SG1
2NO a.UTCH llIANSMISSlON
RlJID PllfSSURE SWITCH
ATf
tEMPERATURE
SENSOR D=~h PNJ(---1 '
C33 Am
OI'ZSW CZI
BLUJBU(
Gl0l
B
3RD a.UTCH TRANSMISSION
1
INPUTSHAFT
IMAINSIfAFTJ ~- 2 RED - el2
B37
vccz
NM
OP3SW C38
BLU/WHT
B
4l1t a.UTCH TRANSMISSION
RlJIDPRESSURE SWITC1t
1
SPEED SENSOR
3 GRN/YEL C16 SGZ
OI'4SW C31
BLU/YEL
B 1
YELJBLU
WlfTJBU(
SHA czo BLU/YEL 31--RED
EGRVALVE
POSIIION GRN/YEL
SENSOR
BLU/PIiD
SHB CZ8
4 I-- ORN
BLK~
GRN/WHT
Glo,
BLK
B40 PGl SHC C39
GRN 2 I-- GRN
81 PG2
BLK
C41 LGI SHD C9 ll--va

BRN/YEL GRNIRED
841 LGZ
BRN/YEL
Glo,
PCM IIamess Connector T"",lnalloca1lons
11,1·
",213
3 • I.
1/1611
• 1 8
18 " 20
• 1•
211
, • 3 . 5 .-r, • • ,.
I" 1213 "1"1'· 171'8 '.20121
12345678910
1"I12V 11>.". ,,1,8,.201.,

22
2930
24X 25
31321/
40" 42 43 .. 1/
..
>< .,282128
..
3839
47 48 49
2223 24 X
2930 31 32 33 34
40 ., 421/
25
,.
44 45 48
.
">< ••
373839
1/1/1/
24 ">< 25 X 28 XI 28
40 4' 42 43 44 46 46 47 48 49
AIISP) 0 811SPI '" CI4SP) 0
BACK 14-83
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0107: Manifold Absolute Pressure 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0107 in the DTCs/
(MAP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage Input Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the result indicate PASSED?
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs
were indicated on step 7, go to the indicated DTC's
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) troubleshooting .•
again.
NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
3. Check whether DTC P0107 is indicated in the DTCs/ connections and loose terminals at the MAP sensor
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. and the, PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
Is ore P0107 iildicated in the PGM-FI system? the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If,the HDS
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P0107 in the PGM-FI result comes on.
System (see page 11-78).•
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check whetherDTC P0107 is indicated in the DTCs/

Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu with the HDS.

YES-Go to step 5.

time.•
5. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not

have the latest software (see page 14-8), or
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9).
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II).
7. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT

Mode Menu with the HDS.
Is ore PO 107 indicated?

YES-Check for poor connections and loose
(see page 14-9), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was;
substituted, go to step 1. .
NO-Go to step 8.
14-84 BACK
DTC P0108: Manifold Absolute Pressure 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0108 in the DTCs/
(MAP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage Input Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the result indicatePASSED?
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4), . YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troublesho,Oting is
1. Clear the DrC with the HDS .. original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then tlJrnit OrN·(l1) troubleshooti ng .•
again.
NO-If theHDS. indicates FAILED, check for poor
3. Check whether DTC P0108. is indicated in the DTCs/ ponnections and loose terminals at the MAP sensor
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with theHDS. and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
Is DTC P010B indicatedjn the PGM-Flsystem? the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P01Q8 in ,the PGM-FI result comes on.
System (see page 11-80).•
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check whether DTC P0108 is indicated in the DTCs/

YES-Go to step 5.

time .•

6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II).


NO-Go to step 8.
BACK 14-85
DTC P0335: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS·forP0335 in the DTCs/
A No Signal Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record a\l freeze data Does the result indicate PASSED?
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). . YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
2. Start the engine. troubleshooting .•
3. Check whether DTCP0335 is indicated in the DTCs/ NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
Freeze Data ih PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. connections and loose terminals at the CKP
sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
Is DTe P0335 indicated in the PGM-Flsystem? substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9), then
YES-Troubleshoot for· DTC P0335 in the PGM-FI the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
System (see page 11-133).• until a result comes on.
NO-Go to step 4.

YES-Go to step 5.

time.•



terminals at the CKP sensor A and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 8.
14-86 BACK
DTC P0339: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0339 in the DTCs/
A Intermittent Interruption Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14~4). YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
2. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds. troubleshooting .•
3. Check whether DTC P0339 is indicated in the DTCs/ NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with. the HDS. connections and loose terminals at the CKP
sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
Is DTe P0339 indicated in the PGM-FI system? substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9), then
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P0339 in the PGM-FI the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
NO-Go to step 4.

YES-Go to step 5.

time.•

6. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.


terminals at the CKP sensor A and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 8.
BACK 14-87
A'utomatic Transmission
DTCP0340: Camshaft Position ·(CMP) Sensor R Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0340 in the DTCs/
No signal Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
2. Start the engine. troubleshooting .•
3. Check whether DTC P0340 is indicated in the DTCs/ . NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. connections and loose terminals at the CMP sensor
. Is DTC P0340indicated in the PGM-FI system? known-good PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck. If
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
VES~ Troubleshoot for DTC P0340'in the PGM-FI indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
System (see page 11-137).• result comes on.
NO-Go to step 4.

YES-Go to step 5.

time .•



NO-Go to step 8.
14-88 BACK
DTC P0344: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor R Monitor the OBD STATUSforP0344 inthe DTCs/
Intermittent Interruption Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data . Does the result indicate PASSED?
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES-Ifthe PCMwas updated, troubleshooting is
3. Check whether DTC P0344 is indicated inthe DTCs/ NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. connections and loose terminals at the CMP sensor
Is Dre P0344 indicated in the PGM-Fl system? known-good PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck. If
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P0344 in the PGM-FI indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
System (see page 11-140).• result comes on.
NO-Go to step 4.

Is Dre P0344 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

time .•


Is Dre P0344 indicated?

NO-Go to step 8.
BACK 14-89
Autorliatic Transmission
DTCP0385:Crranksha:ft Position (CKP).Sensor 8. Monitor the OBDSTATUS for P0385 in the DTCs/
B No signal. .., Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze··data Does the result indicate PASSED?
Troubleshodting Information (seepage14~4). YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
1. Cleartne DTC with the HDS. original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs
2. Start the engine. troublesh()oting..· ..
3. Check whether DTC P0385 is indicated inthe DTCs/ . NO-If theHDS indicates FAILED,check for poor
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. connections and loose terminals at the CKP
, .,'." sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
Is DTO P0385iridicated in the PGM-FI system? substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9), then
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P0385in the;PGM-FI . the HDSindicates NOT COMP,,"ETED, keep idliAg
NO-Go to step 4.

YES-Go to step 5.

time.•



terminals at the CKP sensor B and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 8.
BACK
DTC P0389: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0389 in the DTCs/
B Intermittent Interruption Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
3. Check whether. DTC P0389 is indicated in the DTCs/ NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. connections and loose terminals at the CKP
sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
Is DTe P0389 indicated in the PGM-FI system? substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9), then
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P0389 in the PGM-FI the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
NO-Go to step 4.

YES-Go to step 5.

time .•



terminals at the CKP sensor B and the PCM. If the
(see page 14-9), then recheck.lfthe PCM was
NO-Go to step 8.
BACK 14-91
DTCP062F: Powertrain Control Module 6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P062F in the DTCs/
(PCM) Internal Control Module Keep Alive Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Memory (KAM) Error
Does the result indicate PASSED?
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. were indicated on step 5, go to the indicated DTC's
2. Check whether DTC P062F is indicated in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections and loose terminals at the PCM. Ifthe
Is DTC P062F indicated in the PGM-FI system? PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P062F in the PGM-FI substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
System (see page 11-153).• COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check whether DTC P062F is indicated in the DTCs/

Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.

time .•
4. Update the NT software in the PCM if it does not

5. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in NT


terminals atthe PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
NO-Go to step 6.
14-92 BACK
DTC P0705: Short in Transmission Range 7. Measure the voltage between transmission range
Switch Circuit (Multiple Shift-position Input) switch connector terminals No.4 and No.5.
NOTE: TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR

anyon-board snapshot, and review General
~,
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the ATP P (BLU/BLK) NO (BLKI
transmission.

I 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
3. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position, and monitor the OBD STATUS for Is there battery voltage?
P0705 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu
for a pass/fail. YES-Go to step 13.
Does the result indicate FAILED? NO-Go to step 8;
YES-Go to step 4. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
time. Check for an intermittent short in the wire
between the transmission range switch and the 10. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
to step 2 and recheck. 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector
5. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page ATPP(GRN)
14-315).
Is the switch OK?
YES-With the switch connector disconnected, go

to step 6.
NO-Replace the transmission range switch Q

=
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM

connector terminal A 16 and the transmission range
switch, then go to step 49.
NO-Go to step 12.
(confd)
BACK 14-93
12. Check fer centinuity between transmissien range 13. Measure the veltage between transmissien range
switch cennecter terminal No.5 and bedy greund. switch cennecter terminals Ne. 3 and Ne. 5.
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITC"! CONNECTOR

GNDIBLKI
1 234 5
GND IBLKI
678910 (;:;=:::;=l,J.,--.J-,
9 10
Q
Wire side offemale terminals Wire side of female terminals
YES-Ge te step 43. YES-Ge te step 18.
NO-Repair .open in the wire between transmissien NO-Ge te step 14.

range switch cennecter terminal Ne. 6 and greund
(G101), .or repair peer ground (G101), then ge te 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
step 49.
16. Discennect PCM cennector C (49P).
17. Check for centinuity between PCM connecter

terminal C25 and body greund.
PCM CONNECTOR C 149PI
=
YES-Repair shert in the wire between PCM

connecter terminal C25 and the transmissien range
switch, then ge te step 49.
NO-Ge te step 43.
14,·94 BACK
18. Measure the voltage between transmission range 23. Measure the voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No.5 and No.8. switch connector terminals No.2 and No.5.
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
GND(BlK)
GND(BlKI
123
678
ATP N (RED/BlK) '--_ _ _- '
6 7
Is there battery voltage? Is there battery voltage?
PCM CONNECTOR C (49PI PCM CONNECTOR C (49PI
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal C26 and the transmission range connector terminal C17 and the transmission range
switch, then go to step 49. switch, then go to step 49.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-95
28. Measure the voltage between transmission range 33. Measure the voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No.5 and No.7. switch connector terminals No.5 and No.6.
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
GND(BLK) GND(BLK)
2 3 234 5
6 7 8 7 8 9 10
ATP D3 (RED) L -_ _ _ _ _- ' ' -_ _--' ATP FWD (BLU/VEL)
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of.female terminals
Is there battery voltage? Is there battery voltage?
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
ATP FWD (BLU/VEL)
.Q
=
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal C46 and the transmission range connector terminal C18 and the transmission range
switch, then go to step 49. switch, then go to step 49.
14-96 BACK
38. Measure the voltage between transmission range 43. Reconnect all connectors.
switch connector terminals No.5 and No.9.
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
1 2 3 46. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all position. Stop for at least 1 second in
678 each position.
ATP RVS (RED/WHT) L . -_ _----'
Is there battery voltage? YES-Check for poor connections and loose

terminals at the transmission range switch and the
YES-Go to step 43. PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck.lfthe PCM
NO-Go to step 39. was substituted, go to step 1.
40. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 48. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0705 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
terminal C19 and body ground. YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
ATP RVS (RED/WHT) were indicated on step 47, go to the indicated DTC's

connections and loose terminals at the
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the PCM
Q substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, return to step 45 and recheck.
=

connector terminal C19 and the transmission range
NO-Go to step 43.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-97
51. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all position. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position.

Is DTC P070S indicated?
YES-Replace the transmission range switch

(see page 14-316), then return to step 49 and
recheck.
NO-Go to step 53.
53. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0705 in the DTCs/


DTCswere indicated on step 52, go to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting .•

transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
return to the step 50 and recheck.
14-98 BACK
DTC P0706: Open in Transmission Range· 7. Install the transmission range switch correctly, and
Switch Circuit adjust the shift cable (see page 14-311).
NOTE: 8. Clear the DTe with the HDS .

any on-board,snapshot, and review General 9. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off (the light on
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4k the VSA OFF switch comes on). Run the engine in
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem the D position until the vehicle speed reaches
and cannot be caused:by a.fT1~chanical probl~m in the 25 mph (40 km/h), then slowdown and stop the
transm ission. wheels.
1. Clea r the DTC with the HDS. 10. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0706 in the DTCs/
2. Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it is securely
supported, and allow all four wheels to rotate freely. Does the result indicate FAILED?
3. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off (the light on YES- Go to step 11.
the VSA OFF switch comes on). Run the engine in
the D position until the vehicle speed reaches NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
25 mph (40 km/h), then slow down and stop the time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
wheels. at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0706 in the DTCs/ 9 and recheck.
11. Shift to the D position, and verify the ATP FWD and
Does the result indicate FAILED? ATP D inputs with the HDS in the AfT data list.
YES-Go to step 5. Is ATP FWD and ATP 0 ON?
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis YES-Go to step 12.

at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If NO-Go to step 16.
3 and recheck. 12. Shift to the D3 position, and verify the ATF FWD
and ATP D3 inputs with the HDS in the AfT data list.
IsATP FWD and ATP 03 ON?
6. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-315). YES-Go to step 13.
Is the switch OK? NO-Go to step 16.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the transmission range switch

(coni'd)
BACK 14-99
13. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
14. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off (the light on 17. Disconnect the transmission range switch
the VSA OFF switch comes on). Run the engine in connector.
the 0 position until the vehicle speed reaches
25 mph (46 km/h), then slow down and stop the 18. Check for continuity between transmission range
wheels. switch connector terminal No.5 and body ground.
15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0706 in the DTCs/ TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
GND(BLK)
Does the result indicate FAILED?
1 234 5
YES-Go to step 16. 6 7 8 9 10.
at the transmission range switch and the PCM. If
Q
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step =
14 and recheck. Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 19.

transmission range switch and ground (G101), or
repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 30.
14-100 BACK
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 22. Measure the voltage between transmission range
20. Measure the voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No.5 and No.6. TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR

GND (BLK)
~---.
r;::;::::;:::=:Jr---r--.,.J..:,GND (BLK)
1 2 3
234 5 6 7 8 9 10
7 8 9 10 ATP 03 (RED) '---_ _ _ _ _-'
'--_---' ATP FWD (BLU/VEL)


Is there voltage?
Is there voltage? YES-Go to step 23.
YES-Go to step 21. NO-Repair open in the wire between the

transmission range switch and PCM connector
NO-Repair open in the wire between the terminal C46, then go to step 30.
terminal C18, then go to step 30.

GND(BLK)
r;:;=:;::tJ.--,-,...L,
6 7
Is there voltage?
YES-Go to step 22.

terminal C17, then go to step 30.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-101
23. Reconnect all connectors. 30. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
24. Update the NT software in the PCM if it does not 31. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
have the latest software (see page 14-8),or
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9). 32. Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it is securely
supported, and alloll)l all four wheels to rotate freely.
33. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off (the light on
26. Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it is securely the VSA OFF switch comes on). Run the engine in
supported, and allow all four whe'els to rotate freely. the D position until the vehicle speed reaches
25 mph (40 km/h), then slow down and stop the
27. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off (the light on wheels.
the D position until the vehicle speed reaches 34. Check for DTC(s.) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in NT
25 mph (40 km/h), then slow down and stop the Mode Menu with the HDS.
wheels.
Mode Menu with the HDS. YES-Check for poor connections and loose
Is DTC P0706 indicated? PCM, then go to step 1.
YES-Check for, poor connections and loose - NO-Go to step 35.

PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- 35. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0706 in the DTCs/
good PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck.lfthe PCM Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NO-Go to step 29.
29. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0706 in the DTCs/ DTCs were indicated on step 34, go to the illdicated
Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. DTC's troubleshooting.. '
Does the result indicate PASSED? NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections and loose terminal~at the
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs return to step 31 and recheck.

transmission range switch and the PCM. Ifthe PCM
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
14-102 BACK
DTC P0711: Problem in ATF Temperature 4. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR with the HDS.
Sensor Circuit
Does the ATF temperature read about the same as
NOTE: the ECT SENSOR?
anyon-board snapshot, and review General YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM .•
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission. NO-Replace the ATF temperature sensor
1. Check the ATFtemperature with the HDS in theA{f
data list. 5. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Does the ATF temperature exceed the ambient-air 6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
temperature? .. position through all five gears.
YES-Record the ATF temperature. Leave the 7. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A{f
engine off for more than 30 minutes, and go to step Mode Menu with the HDS.
2.
NO-Record the ATF temperature. Test the stall
speed RPM (see page 14-237) three times. Go to YES-Check for poor connections and loose
step 2 after stall speed testing. terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the
2. Check the ATF temperature with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 8.
Does the ATF temperature change?
YES-Leave the engine off for more than Freeze Data in A{f Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
30 minutes, and go to step 3.
NO-Replace the ATF temperature sensor
(see page 14-264), then go to step 5. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
DTCs were indicated on step 7, go to the indicated
3. Check the ECT SENSOR with the HDS. DTC's troubleshooting ••
Is the ECT SENSOR equal to the ambient-air NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
temperature? connections and loose terminals at the ATF
temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
YES-Go to step 4. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
step 6 and recheck.
NO-Leave the engine off until the ECT SENSOR
reads the same as ambient-air temperature, then
go to step 4.
BACK 14-103
DTC P0712: Short in ATF Temperature Sensor 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 6. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P) .
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 7. Check for continuity between ATF temperature
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem sensor connector terminal No.2 and body ground .
transmission. ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Check the ATF temperature sensor voltage with the

HDS in the AfT data list.
Is theATF TEMP SENSOR voltage 0.07 Vor

less? 4TFr
cITP. ,OLU/YEW
YES-Go to step 2.
=
time. Check for an intermittent short in the ATFT Wire side of female terminals
wire between the ATF temperature sensor and the
PCM .•
2. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector
at the transmission end cover. YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal C33 and ATF temperature
3. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR voltage with the sensor connector terminal No.2, then go to step 13.
HDS.
NO-Go to step 8.
Is theATF TEMP SENSOR voltage 0.07 Vor
less?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the ATF temperature sensor

14-104 BACK
8. Reconnect all connectors. 13. Clear the DTC with theHDS.
9. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not 14. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
have the latest software (see page 14-8), or position through all five gears.
10. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D Mode Menu with the HDS.
position through all five gears.
terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the
Is DTC P0712 indicated? PCM, then go to step 1.
YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- NO-Goto step. 16..
was substituted, go to step 1. 16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0712 in the DTCs/
NO-Go to step 12.
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Does the result indicate PASSED? DTC's troubleshooting .•
YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs 14 and recheck.

connections and loose terminals at the ATF
temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
14-9), then recheck.lfthe PCM was substituted, go
to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
return to step 10 and recheck.
BACK 14-105
DTC P0713: Open in ATF Temperature Sensor 6. Measure the voltage between ATF temperature
Circuit sensor connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
NOTE: ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR

anyon-board snapshot, and review General.
~
SG21GRN/VEl) ~TFT lBLU/YEl)
transmission.
1. Check the ATFTEMP SENSOR voltage with the

Does theATF TEMP SENSOR voltage exceed Wire side of female terminals
4.93 V?
YES.-Go to step 2. Is there about 5 V?
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Replace the ATF temperature sensor
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals (seepage 14-264), then go to step 16.
at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. connector terminal C16 and the ATF temperature
sensor connector, then go to step 16.
3. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector
at the transmission end cover.
5. Measure the voltage between ATF temperature

sensor connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
cITP.
41FT lBLU/YEl)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 7.
14-106 BACK
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Connect all connectors.
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 12. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
9. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). substitute a known~good PCM (see page 14-9).
10. Check for continuity between PCM connector 13. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
terminal C33 and ATF temperature sensor position through all five gears.
ATF TEMPERATURE PCM CONNECTOR C (49PI Mode Menu with the HDS.
SENSOR CONNECTOR

ATFT was substituted, go to step 1..
(BlU/YElI
NO-Go to step 15.
L--_---<Q}--_------'
Wire side of Terminal side of Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
female terminals female terminals
YES-Check for poor connections and loose complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the original PCM (see page .11-244). If any other DTCs
PCM. If the connections are OK, go to step 11. were indicated on step 14, goto the indicated DTC's
, troubleshooting .•
connector terminal C33 and the ATF temperature NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
sensor, then go to step 16. connections and loose terminals at the ATF
temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
(cont'd)
BACK 14-107
16. Connect the ATF temperature sensor connector.
18. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D

19. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data.in AfT


terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the
PCM, then go to step 1..
NO-Go to step 20.


DTC's troubleshooting ••

connectioAsand loose terminals at the ATF
temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
step 18 and recheck;
14-108 BACK
DIC P0716: Problem in Input Shaft 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
7. Jump the SCSline with the HDS.
DIC P0717: Problem in Input Shaft
(Mainshaft) Speed Sensor,Circuit (No Signal 8. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
Input)
NOTE: terminals B41 and body ground, and between C41
• Before you troubleshoot, record aU f~eeiedata and and body ground.
anyon-board snapshot, and review General .
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.

supported, and allow all four wheels to rotate freely.
3. Check for proper input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor installation (see page 14-259). If the sensor
was installed improperly, correct the problem, then Terminal side of female terminals
go to step 37.
4. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off (the light on
the VSA OFF switch comes on). Run the engine in YES-Go to step 10.
the D position, and hold the vehicle at speeds ·over
30 mph (48km/h) for more than 10 seconds. Slow NO-Repair open in the wires between PCM
down and stop the wheel. connector terminals B41, C41 and ground (G101),
or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 38.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0716 or P0717 in the
DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES-Go to step 6.

time. Check for loose or poor connections at the
PCM and input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connectors. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
(cont'd)
BACK 14-109
10. Connect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P). 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed 15. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P).
sensor connector.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal C12 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No.1.
13. Measure the voltage between input shaft
INPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No.1 (MAINSHAfT)
and body ground. SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)

.--------{Q}-------,
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
VCC2
(YEL/BLU)
Wire side of Terminal side of

YES-Go to step 17.

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 18. connector terminal C12 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 38.
NO-Go to step 14..
14-110 BACK
VCC2 (YEL/BLU) 20. Check for continuity between input shaft

(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No.2
and body ground. .

SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR

~ ~MIREDI
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM Wire side of female terminals
connector terminal C12 and the input shaft
NO-Check for poor connections and loose
terminals at the PCM. If the connections are OK, go YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
to step 33. connector terminal B37 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector, then go to
step 38.
NO-Go to step 21.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-111
21. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P) .. 23. Connect PCM connectors B (49P.) and C (49P).
terminal C16 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No.3.. 25. Measure the voltage between input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminals
INPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
(MAINSHAFT) No.2 and No~.3 •..
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
.----'-{QJ-------,SG2 SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
(GRN/YEL)
SG2
(GRN/YELl
SG2 (GRN/YEL)

YES-Go to step 23. Is there about 5 V?
NO-Repair open in the wire between the input YES-Go to step 29.
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector and PCM
connector terminal C16"then go to step 38. NO-Go to step 26.
14-112 BACK
26. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 29. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connector.
terminal B37 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed 31. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position,
sensor connector terminal No.2. and hold the vehicle at speeds over 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 10 seconds.
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR 32. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0716 or P717 in the
CONNECTOR DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES-Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor (see page 14-259), then go to step 38.
NO-Go to step 33.
Terminal side of Wire side of

YES-Go to step 33.

connector terminal B37 and the input shaft
(cont'd)
BACK 14-113
34. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not 39. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position,
have the latest software (see page 14-8), or and hold the vehicle at speeds over 30 mph
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9). (48 km/h) for more than 10 seconds.
35. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position, 40. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 30 mph Mode Menu with the HDS.
(48 km/h) for more than 10 seconds.
Is DTC P0716 or P0717 indicated?
terminals at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
Is DTC P0716 or P0717 indicated? sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
YES-lfthePCM was updated, substitute a known- NO-Go to step 41.

was substituted, go to step 1. 41. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0716 or P0717 in the
NO-Go to step 37.
DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at the input shaft
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to
were indicated on step 36, go to the indicated DTC's step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
troubleshooting .• return to step 39 and recheck.

connections and loose terminals at the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
1.4-114 BACK
DTC P0718: Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed 6. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
Sensor Intermittent Failure connector.
NOTE: 7. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes .in.the D

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and position through all five gears.
anyon-board snapshot; and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0718 in the DTCs/
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
and cannot be caused by a mec.hanical problem in the
transmission. .. .... . , Does the result indicate FAILED?
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES-Go tostep 9.
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If the HDS
position through all five gears. indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 7 and
recheck.
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does the result indicate FAILED? 10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4. 11. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals terminals B41 and body ground, and between C41
at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the and body ground.
PCM.lfthe HDSindicates NOTCOMPLETED, return
PCM CONNECTORS
B (49P) C (49P)
'11 2 8 4 I 6 I 6 I 7 6 9 10 I 11 2 3 4 I 616 I 7 6 9 10 I
111121814116116~7118 92021 f1112/VI16~6~7118 920211
5. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
~1211 X. 26IXf2e / /I IIV~ x 1251 X IZll Z7l261
sensor connector, and inspect the connector and f29f8c 81 89 IIV/~I88WVI3T 361891
connector terminals to be sure they are making 1140 41 42VI44I46I46 / '1 1140 41 42 48144146146 4746 491
good contact. ~GZ IBAN/VEl) ~GlIBRN/vEl)
Are the connector terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
= =
NO-Repair the connector terminals, then go to
step 6. Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Repair open in the wires between PCM

connector terminals B41, C41 and ground (G101),
(cont'd)
BACK 14-115
13. Connect PCM connectors 8 (49P) C (49P). 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
14. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed 18. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (49P).
sensor connector.
19. Check for continuity between input shaft
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No.2
and body ground.
16. Measure the voltage between input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No.1 INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
and body ground. SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
~
~M'REDl
=
=

Is there about 5 V? connector terminal 837 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector, then go to
YES-Go to step 17 .. step 35.
BACK
20. Connect PCM connector 6 (49P). 23. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 24. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (49P).
22. Measure the voltage between input shaft 25. Check for continuity between PCM connector
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No.2 terminal 837 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
and body ground. sensor connector terminal No.2.
PCM CONNECTOR B (49PI INPUT SHAft
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFTI (MAINSHAFTI
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
~ ~MIREDI NM(REDI
Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of Wire side of

Is there about 5 V? Is there continuity?
YES-Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed YES-Go to step 30.

sensor (see page 14-259), then go to step 35.
NO--,Repair open in the wire between PCM
NO-Go to step 23. connector terminal 837 and the input shaft
(cont'd)
BACK 14-117
',-!; .
Autom"atic Transmission
26. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 29. Check for continuity between PCMconnector
27. Disconnect PCM conn'ector C (49P).
28. Check for continuity between PCM connector VCC2(VEL/BLU) -
terminal C12 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connectorterminal No.1.
INPUT SHAFf PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)

(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
,-----{Qf-------,
VCC2 (VEL/BLU)
Q
VCC2
(VEl/BLU) =
Wire side-of Terminal side of YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
female terminals -female terminals connector terminal C12 and the input shaft
YES-Go to step 29. terminals atthe input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor and the PCM. If the cohnections' areOK,go
NO-Repairopenin'the wire between PCM to step 30.
connector terminal C12 ahd the input shaft
14-118 BACK
terminals at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
Is DTC P0718 indicated'l sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- NO-Go to step 38.
NO-Go to step 34.
YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at the input shaft
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to
were indicated on step 33, go to the indicated DTC's step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,

connections and loose terminals at the input shaft
(mains haft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
BACK 14-119
Autom,atic Transmission
DTC P0721: Problem in Output Shaft 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
DTC P0722: Problem in Output Shaft
(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (No 8. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
Signal Input)
NOTE: terminals B41 and body ground, and between C41
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and and body ground .
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4) . PCM CONN\:CTORS
transmission.

3. Check for proper output shaft (counters haft) speed

sensor installation (see page 14-260). Ifthe sensor
is installed improperly, correct problem, then go to Terminal side of female terminals
step 38.
4. Start the engine, run the vehicle in theD position
with engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for more YES-Go to step 10.
than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0721 or P0722 in the connector terminals B41, C41 and.ground (G101),
DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 38.
YES-Go to step 6.

PCM and output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor
connectors. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
14-120 BACK
10. Connect PCM connectors 8 (49P) and C (49P). 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Disconnect the outputshaft (countershaft) speed· 15. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (49P).
sensor connector.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal 836 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
13. Measure the voltage between output shaft
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) OUTPUT SHAFT
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal (COUNTERSHAFT)
No.1 and body ground. SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)

VCC1 (VEL/RED)

= female terminals female terminals
YES-Go to step 17.

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 18. connector terminal 836 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step 38.
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-121
terminal B36 and body ground.
20. Check for continuity between output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal
No.2 and body ground.

=
~
r1J.>IC I"LUI
Is there continuity? =
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM Wire side of female terminals
connector terminal B36 and the output shaft
terminals at the PCM. If the connections are OK, go YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
to step 33. connector terminal B38 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector, then go to
step 38.
NO-Go to step 21.
14-122 BACK
21. Disconnect PCM connector C (49P). 23. Connect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
terminal C15 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No.3. 25. Measure the voltage between output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminals
OUTPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
(COUNTERSHAFT) No.2 and No.3.
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
SG6 (GRN/YEL)
SG6 (GRN/YEL)
~
Ne IBLUI ~06 lORN/YEU

YES-Go to step 23. Is there about 5 V?
NO-Repair open in the wire between the output YES-Go to step 29.
shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector and
PCM connector terminal C15, then go to step 38. NO-Go to step 26.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-123
26. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 29. Connect the output shaft (counter'shaft) speed
sensor connector.
terminal 838 and output shaft (countershaft) speed 31. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the 0 position
sensor connector terminal No.2. . with engine speed 2,000 rpm orhigherfor more
PCM CONNECTOR B (49PI OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFTI
SPEED SENSOR 32. Monitorthe 080 STATUS for P0721 or P0722 in the
CONNECTOR DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES-Replace the output shaft (countershaft)

speed sensor (see page 14-260), then go to step 38.
NO-Go to step 33.

YES-Go to step 33.

connector terminal 838 and the output shaft
14-124 BACK
34. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not 39. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
have the latest software (see page 14-8), or with engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for more
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9). than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
35. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position 40. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
with engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for more Mode Menu with the HDS.
Is DTC P0721 or P0722 indicated?
terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed
Is DTC P0721 or P0722 indicated? sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known- NO-Go to step 41.

was substituted, go to step 1. 41. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0721 or P0722 in the
NO-Go to step 37.
DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at the output shaft
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs (countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go
were indicated on step 36, go to the indicated DTC's to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
troubleshooting .•. return to step 39 and recheck.
NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor

connections and loose terminals at the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the
BACK 14-125
OTC P0723: Output Shaft (Countershaft) 6. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
Speed Sensor Intermittent Failure sensor connector.
NOTE: 7. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and position through all five gears.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0723 in the DTCs/
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
transmission. Does the result indicate FAILED?
1. Clear the DTCwith the HDS. YES-Go to step 9.
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If the HDS
position through all five gears. indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 7 and
recheck.
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does the result indicate FAILED? 10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4. 11. Disconnect PCM connectors 8 (49P) and C (49P).
NO-:-Intermittentfailure, the. system is OKat this 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
time. Check for poor connections and loose terminals 841. and body ground, and between C44
terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed and body ground.
sensor and thePCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, return to step 2 and recheck. PCM CONNECTORS
5. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed

sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making
good contact.
Are the connector terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
= =
NO-Repair the connector terminals, then go to
step 6. Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 13.

connector terminals 841, C41 and ground (G101),
14-126 BACK
13. Connect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P). 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
14. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed 18. Disconnect PCM connector B (49P).
sensor connector.
19. Check for continuity between output shaft
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal
No.2 and body ground.
16. Measure the voltage between output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
No.1 and body ground. SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERS HAFT)

23
NC (BLU)
' .Q

=

Is there about 5 V? connector terminal B38 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector, then go to
(cont'd)
BACK 14-127
Aut()matic Transmission
OTe Troubleshooting (co nt'd)
20. Connect PCM connector 8 (49P). 23. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
21. Turn the ignition sWitch ON (II). 24. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (49P).
22. Measure the voltage between output shaft 25. Check for continuity between PCM connector
(countershaft) speedsensor connector terminal terminal 838 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
No.2 and body ground. sensor connector terminal No.2.
PCM CONNECTOR B (49PI OUTPUT SHAFT

OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFTI (COUNTERSHAFTI
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
1 23
. NC(BLUI
':i.
=
Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of Wire side of
Is there about 5 V? Is there continuity?
YES-Replace the output shaft (countershaft) YES-Go to step 30.

speed sensor (see page 14-260), then go to step 35.
NO-Go to step 23. connector terminal 838 and the output shaft
14-128 BACK
26. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 29. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal 836 and body ground.
terminal 836 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
PCM CONNECTOR B (49P) OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
Terminal side of Wire side of YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
female terminals female terminals connector terminal 836 and the output shaft
YES-Go to step 29. terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor and the PCM. If the connections are OK, go
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM to step 30.
connector terminal 836 and the output shaft
(cont'd)
BACK 14-129
30. Reconnectall connectors. 35. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
31. Update the NT software in the PCM if it does not 36. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed
Is DrC P0723 indicated? sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.,
Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NO-Go to step 34.
Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
YES.....,. If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at the output shaft
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs (countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go
were indicated on step 33, go to the indicated DTC's to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,

connections and loose terminals at the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the
14-130 BACK
DTC P0731: Problem in 1st Clutch and 1st 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0731 in the DTCs/
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the result indicate FAILED?
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES-Repair the 1st clutch, or replace the
transmission, then go to step 9.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating
temperature (the radiato~ fan comes on). NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.lfthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the to step 7 and recheck.
proper level, and check for fluid leaks.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-266) through a
'strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or 10. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
excessive clutch material. same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
data, or drive in 1st gear in the M position at speeds
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive over 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 secor:lds. Slow down
clutch material? and stop the wheels.
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 9. 11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0731 in the DTCs/
NO-Replace the ATF (see step 7 on page 14-266),
then go to step 4. Does the result indicate PASSED?
4. Measure the line pressure (see page 14-238). YES-Troubleshooting is complete.•
Is the line pressure within the service limits? NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 1
and recheck. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
YES-Go to step 5. return to step 10 and recheck.
NO-Repair the ATF pump and the regulator valve,

or replace the transmission, then go to step 9.
5. Measure the 1st clutch pressure (see page 14-238).
Is the 1st clutch pressure within the service

limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves Band C are stuck. Repair these

valves and hydraulic circuit, or replace the
7. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes under the

data, or drive in 1st gear in the M position at speeds
over 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds. Slow down
and stop the wheels.
BACK 14-131
DTC P0732: Problem in 2nd Clutch and 2nd 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0732 in the DTCs/
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES-Repair,the 2nd clutch, or replace the
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or 10. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
data, or drive in 2nd gear in the M position at
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive speeds over 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds. Slow
clutch material? down and stop the wheels.
4. Measure the line pressure (see page 14-238). YES- Troubleshooting is complete .•
Is the line pressure within the. service limits? NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 1
and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,

5. Measure the 2nd clutch pressure (see page 14-238).
Is the 2nd clutch pressure within the service

limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves A, B, and C are stuck. Repair

these valves and the hydraulic circuit, or replace
the transmission, then go to step 9.

data, or drive in 2nd gear in the M position at
speeds over 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds. Slow
down and stop the wheels.
14-132 BACK
DTC P0733: Problem in 3rd Clutch and 3rd 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0733 in the DTCs/
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu fora pass/fail.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES-Repair the 3rd clutch, or replace the
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the to step7 and recheck.
data, or drive in 3rd gear in the M position at
4. Measure the line pressure (see page 14-238). YES-Troubleshooting is complete .•
Is the line pressure within the service limits? NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 1

5. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure (see page 14-238).
Is the 3rd clutch pressure within the service

limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves A, B, and C are stuck. Repair


data, or drive in 3rd gear in the M position at
BACK 14-133
DTC P0734: Problem in 4th Clutch and 4th 8. Monitor. the OBD STATUS for P0734 in the DTCs/'
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit· Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/faiL
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the result indicate FAILED? . ,
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES-Repair the 4th clutch, or replace the
temperature (the radiator fan comes' on). NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
_.J. " time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
data, or drive in 4th gear in the M position at
, Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive speeds over 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds. Slow
4. Measure the line pressure (see page 14-238). YES-Troubleshooting is complete.•
Is the line pressure within the service limits? NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 1

5. Measure the 4th clutch pressure (see page 14-238).
Is the 4th clutch pressure within the service

limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves A, B, C, and 0 are stuck. Repair


14-134 BACK
OTC P0735: Problem in 5th Clutch and 5th 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0735 in the DTCs/
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES-Repair the 5th clutch, or replace the
time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or 10. Test-drive the-vehicle for several minutes under the
4. Measure the line pressure (see page 14-238). YES-Troubleshooting is complete .•
Is the line pressure within the service limits? NO-Ifthe HDSindicates FAILED, return to step 1
NO-Repair the ATFpump and the regulator valve,

5. Measure the 5th clutch pressure (see page 14-238).
Is the 5th clutch pressure within the service

limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves A, B, C, and D are stuck. Repair

these valves and the hydraulic circuit, replace the

speeds over 10 mph (16 km/hl for 20 seconds. Slow
BACK 14-135
DTC P0741: Torque Converter Clutch 8. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road with a steady
Hydraulic Circuit Stuck OFF throttle at 60 mph (100 km/h) for 30 seconds.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0741 in the DTCs/
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). YES-Repair the faulty torque converter clutch
mechanism, torque converter clutch hydraulic
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the circuit, lock-up shift valve, or lock-up control valve,
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. or replace the transmission, then go to step 11.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-266) through a NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
excessive clutch material. to step 8 and recheck.
Does the. strainer have metal debris or excessive 10. InspectAfT clutch pressure control solenoid
clutch material? valve C (see page 14-254).
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. Does AlT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
work properly?
then go to step 4. YES-Repair the hydraulic system related to the
lock-up shift valve, lock-up control valve, and
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. lock-up timing valve, or replace the transmission,
then go to step 11.
5. Choose Shift Solenoid E in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve D NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
operates with the HDS. valve C (see page 14-257), then go to step 11.
Is a clicking sound heard? 11. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6. 12. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
same conditions as those'indicated by the freeze
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page data.
6. Run the engine until the engine coolant Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
temperature reaches 176 Of (80 "C).
7. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch YES-Troubleshooting is complete .•
pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS.
NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 1
Is the result NORMAL? and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS

by the test result, but if the HDS has not determined
the cause of the failure, go to step 10. If any part is
replaced, go to step 11.
14-136 BACK
OTC P0746:A(T Clutch Pressure Control 9. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A
Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General Is the result NORMAL?
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating time. If the HDS indicates NOTCOMPLETED, return
temperature (the radiatorfan comes on). to step 9 and recheck.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the NO-Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. by the test result, but if the HDS has not determined
3. Drain the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-266) through a replaced, go to step 11. .
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or
excessive clutch material. 10. Inspect AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A (see page 14-246).
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive
clutch material? Does AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
work properly?
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 11.
YES-Repair the hydraulic system related with shift
NO-Replace the ATF (see step 7 on page 14-266), valve A, or replace the transmission, then go to
then go to step 4. step 11.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A (see page 14-252), then go to step 11.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all
five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for 11. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
6. Test-drive the vehicle again in the Dposition five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
(20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
down to a stop. 13. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0746 in the DTCs/ (20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. down to a stop.
Does the result indicate FAILED? 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0746 in the DTCs/
YES-Go to step 8.
time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return YES-Troubleshooting is complete.•
8. Clear the DTC with the HDS. and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
BACK 14-137
DTC P0747: AfT Clutch Pressure Control 9. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A
Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General Is the result NORMAL?
1. Warm up the. engine to normal operating time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). to step 9 and recheck.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the NO-Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. by the test result, but if the HDS has not determined
3. Drain the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-266) through a replaced, go to step 11.
excessive clutch material. 10. Inspect AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A (see page 14-246).
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive
clutch material? Does AlT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
work properly?
YES-Repair the hydraulic system related with shift
NO-Replace the ATF (see step 7 on page 14-266), valve A, or replace the transmission, then go to
then go to step 4. step 11.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for 11. Clearthe DTC with the HDS.
6. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
down to a stop. 13. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0747 in theDTCs/ (20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. down to a stop.
. Does the result indicate FAILED? 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0747 in the DTCs/
YES-Go to step 8.
time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return . YES-Troubleshooting is complete.•
8. Clear the DTC with the HDS. and recheck. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
14-138 BACK
DTC P0751: Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF 9. Choose ShiftSolenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve A
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data operates with the HDS.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14~4). Is a clicking sound heard?
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating YES-Go to step 10.

temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the 14-242), then go to step 13.
10. Test-drive the vehicle in the 0 position through all
3. Drain the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-266) through a five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
excessive clutch material.
11. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph
clutch material? (20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
down to a stop.
12. Monitor the aBO STATUS for P0751 in the DTCs/
NO-Replace the ATF (see step 7 on page 14-266), Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve A, or replace the
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the 0 position through all transmission, then go to step 13.
five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop. NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
6. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position to step 10 and recheck.
(20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow 13. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the aBO STATUS for P0751 in the DTCs/ five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
Does the result indicate FAILED? 15. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
through a" five gears at speeds over 12 mph
YES-Go to step 8; (20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
down to a stop.
time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor the aBO STATUS for P0751 in the DTCs/
to step 5 and recheck; Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
8. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Does the result indicate PASSED?

BACK 14-139
DTC P0752: Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON 9. Choose Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve A
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). Is a clicking sound heard?

NO-Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the 14-242); then go to step 13.
Does the strainer have metal.debris or excessive through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph
down to a stop.
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve A, or replace the
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all transmission, then go to step 13.
6. Test-drive the vehicle again .in the D position to step 10 and recheck.
(20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow. 13. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
down to a stop.
7. Monitortt'Je OBD STATUS forP0752 in the.DTCs/ five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
YES-Go to step 8. (20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
down to a stop.
time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0752 in the DTCs/
to step. 5 and recheck. Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete .•
NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 1

14-140 BACK
Ole P0756: Shift Solenoid Valve 8 Stuck OFF 9. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve B

NO-Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
3. Drain the ATF (see-step 5 on page 14-266) through a five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
strainer. Inspect the strainer for me-tal debris or more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
11. Test-drive the vehicle again in the 0 position
Does the strainer haV(~ metal debris or excessive through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph
down to a stop.
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve B, or replace the
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the aBD STATUS for P0756 in the DTCs/ five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
YES-Go to step.8. (20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
down to a stop.
time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor tbe aBO STATUS for P0756 in the OTCs/
to step 5 and recheck. Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.

BACK 14-141
OTC P0757: Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON 9. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve B

NO-Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
3. Drain the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-266)through a five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
down to a stop.
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve B, or replace the
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0757 in the DTCs/ five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
down to a stop.
time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0757 in the DTCs/

14-142 BACK
DTC P0761: Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF 9. Choose Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve C

NO-Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
strainer.lnspectthe strainer for metal debris or more than 20 seconds,then .slow down to a stop.
down to a stop.
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve C, or replace the
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop. . NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis
down to a stop.
down to a stop.
time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0761 in the DTCs/

BACK 14-143
DTC P0762: Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON 9. Choose Shift Solenoid C inthe Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve C

NO-Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the 14-242), then go to step 13.,
3. Drain the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-266) through a five gears atspeedsover 12 mph (20 km/h) for
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive . through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph
clutch material? (20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds; then slow
down to a stop.
NO-Replace the ATF(see step 7 on page 14-266), Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve C, or replace the
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop. NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis
(20 km/h) for more tMn 20 seconds, then slow 13. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0762 inthe DTCs/ five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
down to a stop.
time. If the HDS. indicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0762 in the DTCs/
to step.5 and recheck. Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.

14-144 BACK
DTC P0766: Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck OFF 9. Choose Shift Solenoid D'in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve 0

NO-Replace shift solenoid valve 0 (see page
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or more than 2o..seconds,then slow down to a stop.
down to a stop.
12. Monitor the aBO STATUS for P0766 in the DTCs/
NO-Replace the ATF (see step 7 on page 14-266), FreezeData in AfT ModeMenu for a pass/fail.
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve 0, or replace the
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the 0 position through all transmission, then go to step 13.
6. Test-drive the vehicle again in the 0 position to step 10 and recheck.
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the aBO STATUS for P0766 in the DTCs/ five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
Does the result indicate FAILED? 15. Test-drive the vehicle again in the 0 position
down to a stop.
time. Ifthe HDSindicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor the aBO STATUS for P0766 in the DTCs/

BACK 14-145
Ole P0767: Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck ON 9. Choose Shift Solenoid D in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve D

NO-Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page
down to a stop.
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve D, or replace the
down to a stop.
down to a stop.
time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0767 in the DTCs/

14-146 BACK
Ole P0776: NT Clutch Pressure Control 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS;
Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF
9. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General pressurecpntrol solenoid valve B with the HDS.
Is the result NORMAL?
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis
3. Drain theATF (see step 5,on page 14-266) through a by the test result, but if tha.HDS has not determined
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or the cause of the failure, go to step 10. If any part is
excessive clutch material. replaced, go to step 11.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive 1O.lnspectAfT clutch pressure control solenoid
clutch material? valve B (see page 14-249).
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. Does AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
work properly?
then go to step 4. YES-Repair the hydraulic system related with shift
valve B, or replace the transmission, then go to
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. step 11.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the 0 position through all , NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for valve B(see page 14-252), then go to step 11.
through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph 12. Test-drive the vehicle in theD position throughall
(20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
down to a stop. more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0776 in the DTCs! 13. Test-drive the vehicle again in the 0 position
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph
Does the result indicate FAILED? down to a stop.
YES-Go to step 8; 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0776 in the DTCs/
time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return Does the result indicate PASSED?

. " ' return to step 12 and recheck .
BACK 14~147
DTC P0777: AfT Clutch Pressure Control 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
3. Drain the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-266) through a by the test reSUlt, but ifthe HDS has not determined
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or the cause of the failure, go to step 10. If any part is
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive 10. Inspect AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
clutch material? valve B (see page 14-249).
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. Does AlT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
work properly?
valve B, or replace the transmission, then go to
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for valve B (see page 14-252), then go to step 11.
through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph 12. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0777 in the DTCs/ 13. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
YES-Go to step 8. 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0777 in the DTCs/

14-.148 BACK
Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
3. Drain the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-266) through a by the test result, but if the HDShas not determined
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or the cause ofthe failure, go to step 10. If any part is
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. Does AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
work properly?
valve C, or replace the transmission, then go to
five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for valve C (see page 14-257), then go to step 11.
through all five Qearsat speeds over 12 mph 12. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all
7. Monitor the OBDSTATUS for P0796 in the DTCs/ 13. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position

BACK 14-149
Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data - in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch
and an/dn-board snapshot, and review General' pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS.
, .
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). ('

temperature (the radiator fan 'comes on). YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the to step 9and recheck.
3. D(ain thEi ATF (see step 5 onpage14-266) through a by the test result, but if the HDS has not determined
strainer. Inspectthe strainer for metal debris or the cause of the failure, go to step 10. If any part is
YES-'-Replace the transmission~ then go to step 11. Does AlT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
work properly?
then go to step 4, YES-Repair the hydraulic system related with shift
valve C, or replace the transmission, then go to
five gears at speeds over:12 mph (20 km/h) for valve C(see page 14-257),then go to step 11.
through alHive gears at speeds over 12 mph 12. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all
(20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds', then slow five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20km/h) for
down to a stop. " more than 20 seconds, then slow,down to a stop.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0797 in the DTCs/.· 13. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
Freeze Data in A/TMode Menu for a pass/faiL,' through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph

14-150 BACK
DTC P0812: Open in Transmission Range 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Switch ATP R Switch Circuit
4. Disconnect the transmission range switch
NOTE: connector.
anyon-board snapshot, and review General 5. Check for continuity between transmission range
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). switch connector terminal No.5 and body ground .
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
transmission.
GND (BLK)

1 2 345
2. Shift to the R position, and verify the AfT R SWITCH 6 7 8 9 10
signal with the HDS in the AfT data list.
Is the AfT R SWITCH ON? Q

YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this =
time .• Wire side of female terminals
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair open in the wire between transmission

range switch connector terminal No.5 and ground
(G101), or repair poor ground (G101), then go to
step 14.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-151
Auto:matic Transmission
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Check for continuity between transrnission range
switch connector terminals No.3 and No.5 while
7. Measure the voltage between transmission range the shift lever is in each position.
switch connector terminals No.3 and No~ 5.
. Tl:tANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
. TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
7 8 9 10

. Is there continuity while the shift lever is in the P,

Is there voltage? R, and N positions, and no continuity while the
shift lever is in the D and D3?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM terminals at the transmission range switch and the
connector terminal C25 and the transmission range PCM. If the connections are OK, go to step 9.
NO-Replace the transmission range switch
14-152 BACK
9. Reconnect the transmission range switch 14. Clearthe DTC with the HDS.
connector.
15. Test-drive the vehicle in the R position at speeds
10. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not below 3 mph (5 km/h) for more than 2 seconds,
have the latest software (see page 14-8), or then increase the speed and test-drive at speeds
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9). over 3 mph (5 km/h) for more than 2 seconds. Slow
11. Test-drive the vehicle. in the R position at speeds
below 3mph (5 km/h) for more than 2 seconds, 16. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
then increase the speed and test-drive at speeds Mode Menu with the HDS.
over 3 mph (5 km/h) for more than 2 seconds. Slow
down and stop the wheels. Is DTC P0812 indicated?
12. Check for DTC(s)in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT YES-Check for poor connections and loose
Mode Menu with the HDS. terminals at the transmission range switch and the
NO-Go to step 17.
good PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck. If the PCM 17. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for P0812 in the DTCs/
was substituted, go to step 1. Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NO-Go to step 13. Does the result indicate PASSED?
13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0812 in the DTCs/ YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. DTCs were indicated on step 16, go to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting .•.
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is connections and loose terminals at the
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
were indicated on step 12, go to the indicated DTC's return to step 15 and recheck.

transmission range switch and the PCM. Ifthe PCM
BACK 14-153
DTC P0815: Short in Transmission Gear 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Selection Switch Upshift Switch Circuit, or
Transmission Gear Selection Switch Upshift 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Switch Stuck ON
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 11. Check for continuity between transmission gear
anyon-board snapshot, and review General selection switch/park pin switch/AfT gear position
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). indicator panel light connector terminal No.7 and
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem body ground.
transmission. TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION SWITCH/
PARK PIN SWITCH/AfT GEAR POSITION
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR
2. Shift to the P position.

4
3. Verify the transmission gear selection switch
upshift switch signal input with the HDS in the AfT
data list.
Is UPSHIFT SW ON? =
YES-Go to step 4.

time. Check the S-UP (BLU) wire for an intermittent
short to ground between the transmission gear YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
selection switch and the PCM .• connector terminal A36 and the transmission gear
selection switch, then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 12.
5. Disconnect the transmission gear selection switch/
park pin switch/AfT gear position indicator panel
light connector at the shift lever bracket.

upshift switch signal input with the HDS in the AfT
data list.
Is UPSHIFT SW ON?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the transmission gear selection

switch (see page 14-319), then go to step 19.
14-154 BACK
13. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not 20. Start the engine in the P position, wait for more
have the latest software (see page 14-8), or than 10 seconds, then shift to the M position.
21. Push the shift lever toward the upshift position (+)
14. Start the engine in the P position, waitfor more slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times or
than 10 seconds, then shift to the M position. more.
15. Push the shift lever toward the upshift position (+) 22. Pull the shift lever toward the downshift position
slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times or (-) slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times
more. or more.
16. Pull the shift lever toward the downshift position 23. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
(-) slowly, and release it; repeatthis test 10 times Mode Menu with the HDS.
or more.
terminals at the transmission gear selection switch
Is DTC P0815 indicated? and the PCM, then go to step 1.
was substituted, go to step 1. 24. Monitor the OBD status for P0815 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in AfT M()de. Menu for a pass/fail.
NO-Go to step 18.
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at the
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs transmission gear selection switch and the PCM,
were indicated on step 17, go to the indicated DTC's then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
troubleshooting.• COMPLETED, return to step 20 and recheck.

transmission gear selection switch and the PCM. If
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck.lfthe PCM was
BACK 14-155
Selection Switch Downshift Switch Circuit, or
Transmission Gear Selection Switch 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Downshift Switch Stuck ON
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record a" freeze data and 11. Check for continuity between transmission gear
anyon-board snapshot, and review General selection switch/park pin switch/Aff gear position
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). indicator panel light connector terminal No.8 and
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem body ground.
transmission. TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION SWITCH/
1. Turn the ignition switch ON ("). INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR

4
downshift switch signal input with the HDS in the
Aff data list.
Is DOWNSHIFT SW ON? =
YES-Go to step 4.

time. Check the S-DN (GRN) wire for an intermittent
short to ground between the transmission gear YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire between
selection switch and PCM .• PCM connector terminal A37 and the transmission
gear selection switch, then go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 12.
5. Disconnect the transmission gear selection switch/
park pin switch/Aff gear position indicator panel

downshift switch signal input with the HDS in the
Aff data list.
Is DOWNSHIFT SW ON?
YES-Go to step 8.

14-156 BACK
13. Update the Aff software in the PCM ifit does not 20. Start the engine in the P position, wait for more
21. Push the shift lever toward the upshift position (+)
14. Start the engine in the P position, wait for more slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times or
15. Push the shift lever toward the upshift position (+) 22. Pull the shift lever toward the downshift position
slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times or (-) slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times
more. or more.
16. Pull the shift lever toward the downshift position 23. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in Aff
(-) slowly, and release it; repeatthis test 10 times Mode Menu with the HDS.
or more.
17. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in Aff
Is DTC P0816 indicated? and the PCM, then go to step 1.
was substituted, go to step 1. 24. Monitor the OBD status for P0816 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in Aff Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NO-Go to step 18.
Freeze Data in Aff Mode Menu for a pass/fail. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
troubleshooting .• COMPLETED, return to step 20 and recheck.
NO-lftheHDS indicates FAILED, check for poor

PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was
BACK 14-157
DTC P0842: Short in 2nd Clutch Transmission 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 7.. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
ON pressure switch connector.

anyon-board snapshot, and review General 9. Check the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). HDS in the AfT data list.
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the Is the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH OFF?
transmission.
YES-Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. .pressure switch (see page 14-261), then go to step
19.
2. Check the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
HDS in the AfT data list when not in 2nd gear. NO-Go to step 10.
Is the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH OFF? 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal 13. Check for continuity between PCM connector
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). terminal C27 and body ground.
4. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the M position for PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 3rd gear, and
drive in 3rd gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
down and stop the wheels ..

Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.·
YES...,.Go to step 6. =
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Terminal !>ide of female terminals

time. Check the OP2SW wire for an intermittent
short to ground between the 2nd clutch Is there continuity?
transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM·
4 and recheck. connector terminal C27 and the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to step
19.
NO-Go to step 14.
14-158 BACK
15. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not 20. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the M position for
have the latest software (see page 14-8), or more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 3rd gear, and
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9). drive in 3rd gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
16. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the M position for
more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 3rd gear, and 21. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
drive in 3rd gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow Mode Menu with the HDS.
Mode Menu with the HDS. . YES-Check for poor connections and loose
terminals at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
Is DTC P0842 indicated? pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 18.
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM,

connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch
BACK 14-159
DTC P0843: Open in2nd Clutch Transmission 5. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear inthe M position for
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 3rd gear, and
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck drive in 3rd geador more than 5 seconds. Slow
OFF down and stop the wheels.
freeze data and anyon-board snapshot, and review Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4)...
YES-Go to step 7.
2. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for poor connections and loose
3. Shift the shift lever into the M position while terminals atthe 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressing the brake pedal, upshift to 2nd gear by pressure switch and the PCM.lfthe HDS indicates
pushing the shift lever to upshift position, and NOT COMPLETED, return to step 5 and recheck.
verify with the HDS in the AfT data list that the
SHIFT COMMAND indicates 2nd.
4. Check the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the

Is the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH ON?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
14-160 BACK
8. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
pressure switch connector.
10. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch terminal C27 and the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
transmission fluid pressure switch connector pressure switch connector terminal.
terminal and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) 2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR SWITCH CONNECTOR
OP2SW
(BLU/BLK)
OP2SW (BLU/BLK)
'-------{Q)-----'
=
Wire side of female terminals female terminals female terminals
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid terminals at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch (see page 14-261), then go to step pressure switch and the PCM. If the connections
20. are OK, go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 11. NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM

connector terminal C27 and the 2nd clutch
20.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-161
16. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not 21. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the M position for
17. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the M position for·
more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 3rd gear, and 22. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
drive in 3rd gear for more than 5 seconds. SI·ow Mode Menu with the HDS.
18. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT , "
terminals at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid

NO-Go to step 19.
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch

connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch
14-162 BACK
Ole P0847: Short in 3rd Clutch Transmission 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 7. Disconnectthe 3rd clutch transmission fluid
ON pressure switch connector.
NOTE: 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

anyon-board snapshot, and review General 9. Check the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the Is the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH OFF?
transmission.
YES-Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. pressure switch (see page 14-262), then go to step
19.
2. Check the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
HDS in the AfT data list when not in 3rd gear. NO-Go to step 10.
Is the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH OFF? 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
operating temperature'(the radiator fan comes on). terminal C38 and body ground.
4. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the M position for PCM CONNECTOR C (49P)
more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 4th gear, and
. drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
down and stop the wheels:

YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Terminal side of female terminals

short to ground between the 3rd clutch Is there continuity?
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
4 and recheck. connector terminal C38 and the 3rd clutch
19.
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-163
Auto,matic Transmission
15. Update the AfT software in the PCM if. it does not 20. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the M position for
16. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the M position for
more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 4th gear, and 21. Check for DTC(s) intheDTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
drive in 4th gear for more than5 seconds. Slow Mode Menu with the HDS.
terminals at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- NO~Go to step 22.
NO-Go to step 18.
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS ,for P0847 in the DTCs/
Does the result indicate PASSED? DTC's troubleshooting;.
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO-:-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch

connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch
substituted, go to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT
14-164 BACK
DTC P0848: Open in3rd Clutch Transmission 5. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the M position for
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 4th gear, and
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
Troubleshooting ,Information (see page 14.4).
YES-Go to step 7.
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
3. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the M position, and atthe 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
verify with the HDS in the AfT data list that the and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
SHIFT COMMAND indicates 3rd. COMPLETED, return to step 5 and recheck.
4. Check the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the

Is the Srd PRESSURE SWITCH ON?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
BACK 14'·165
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Turn the, ignition switch OFF.
8. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
14. Check for continuity betwe.en PCM connector
10. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch terminal C38 and the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
PCM CONNECTOR C I49P) 3RDCLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
OP3SW
IBLU/WHT)
OP3SW IBLU/WHT)
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid terminals at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch (see page 14-262), then go to step pressure switch and the PCM. Ifthe connections

connector terminal C38 and the 3rd clutch
20.
14-166 BACK
16. Update the AfT" software in the PCM if it does not 21. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the M position for
17. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the M position for
more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 4th gear, and 22. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT"
drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow Mode Menu with the HDS.
IsDTCP0848 indicated?
18. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT"
terminals at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
Freeze Data in AfT" Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NO-Go to step 19.
Freeze Data in AfT" Mode Menu for a pass/fail. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Does the result indicate PASSED? DTC's troubleshooting.•
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch
were indicated on step 18, go to the indicated DTC's then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT,

connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch
BACK 14-167
DTC P0872: Short in 4th Clutch Transmission 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. "
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 4th Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 7. Disconnect the 4th clutch transmission fluid
ON ' pressure 'switch connector.

anyon-board snapshot, and review General 9. Check the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the Is the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH OFF?
transmission.
YES-Replace the 4th clutch transmission fluid
1. Clearthe DTC with the HDS. pressure switch (see page 14-263), then go to step
19.
2. Check the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
HDS in the AfT data list when not in 4th gear. NO-Go to step 10.
Is the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH OFF? 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes, on). terminal C37 and body ground.
4. Drive the vehicle in 4th gearilil the M position,for
more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 5th gear,and
drive in 5th'gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow

YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Termin~1 side of female termina'is

short to ground between the 4th clutch Is there continuity?
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
4 and recheck. connector terminal C37 and the 4th clutch
19.
NO-Go to step 14.
14-168 BACK
15. Update the A!f software in the PCM if it does not 20. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the M position for
have the latest software (see page 14-8), or more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 5th gear, and
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9). drive in 5th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
16. Drive·thev.ehicle in 4th gear in theM position for
more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 5th gear, and 21. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A!f
17. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A!f
terminals at the 4th clutch transmission fluid
Freeze Data in A!f Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NO-Go to step 18.
Does the result indicate PASSED?'
Freeze Data in A!f Mode Menu for a pass/fail. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at the 4th clutch

connections and loose terminals at the 4th clutch
substituted, go to step 1.lfthe HDS indicates NOT
BACK 1-4-169
OTC P0873: Open in 4th Clutch Transmission 5. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the Mposition for
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 4th Clutch more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 5th gear, and
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck drive in 5th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
YES-Go to step 7.
operating temperature (the radiator fan, come.s on). NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
3. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the M position, and at the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
verify with the HDS in the AfT data list that the and the PCM. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT
SHIFT COMMAND indicates 4th. COMPLETED, return to step 5 and recheck.
4. Check the,4th PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the

Is the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH ON?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
14-170 BACK
8. Disconnectthe 4th clutch transmission fluid 12. 'Jump the SCSline'with the HDS.'
10. Measure the voltage between the 4th clutch terminal C37 and the 4th clutch transmission fluid
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) 4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
4TH CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
QP4SW
(BLU/YEL)

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the 4th clutch transmission fluid terminals atthe 4th clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch (see page 14-263),'then go to step pressure switch and the PCM. If the connections

connector terminal C37 and the 4th clutch
transmission fluid presSure switch, then go to step
20.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-1l1
15. Reconnect all connectors. 20. Clear the DTC with the HDS .. ·
16. Update the AfT software in theP.CM i.f it does not 21. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the M position for
have the latest software (see page 14-8), or more than 5 seconds, then upshift to 4th gear, and
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9). drive in 4th gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow
down and stop the wl:leels.
17. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the M position for
more than 5 seconds, them upshift to 5th gear, and 22. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
terminals at the 4th clutch transmission fluid

goo<;l PCM (see page 14-9), then 'recheck. If the PCM
NO-Go to step 19.
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and .Ioose terminals at the 4th clutch
troubleshooting •• COMPLETED, return to step 21 and recheck.

connections and loose terminals at the 4th clutch
substituted, go to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT
14-172 BACK
Selection Switch Circuit, or Transmission
Gear Selection Switch Stuck ON 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
NOTE: 10. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).

anyon-board snapshot, and review General 11. Check for continuity between transmission gear
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4)., selection switch/park pin switch/AfT gear position
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem indicator panel light connector terminal No.3 and
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the body ground.
transmission.
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION SWITCH/
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). PARK PIN SWITCH/AfT GEAR POSITION
IND,ICATOR PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR

sequential sportshift mode switch signal input with
the HDS in the A/T,data list.
Is sequential sportshift mode switch ON?

=

time. Check the S-MODE wire for an intermittent Is there continuity?
short to ground between the transmission gear
selection switch and the PCM •• YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal A47 and the transmission gear
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. selection switch, then go to step 19.
5. Disconnect the transmission gear selection switch/ NO-Go to step,12.

7. Verify the transmission gear, ~election switch

the HDS in the AfT data list.
Is UPSHIFT SW ON?
YES-Go to step 8.

(cont'd)
BACK 14-173
Auto'matic Transmission
12. Reconnect all connect()rs. 19. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
21. Push the shift lever toward upshift position (+)
14. Start the engine in the Pposition, wait for more slowly, and release it; repeatthis test10times or
15. Push the shift lever toward upshift position (+) 22. Pull the shift lever toward downshift position ("'-)
slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times or slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times or
more. more.
16. Pull the shift fever toward downshift "position (-) 23. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times or Mode Menu with the HDS.
more.
Is DTC P0957 indicated? and thePCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 18.
Does the result indicate PASSED? DTC'stroubleshooting.. "
YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED; check for poor
were indicated on step 17, go to the indicated DTC's then go to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT

14-174 BACK
DTC P0958: Open in Transmission Gear 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Selection Switch Circuit, or Transmission
Gear Selection Switch Stuck OFF 5. Disconnect the transmission gear selection switch/
NOTE: light connector at the shift lever bracket.
anyon-board snapshot, and review General 6. Check for continuity between transmission gear
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). selection switch/park pin switch/AfT gear position
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem indicator light harness connector terminals No.2
and cannot be caused by a.mechanical problem in the and No.3.
transmission.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). PARK PIN SWITCH/AfT GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR
2. Shift to the M position.

the HDS in the AfT data list.
Is sequential sportshift mode switch OFF?

time. Check for poor connections and loose Is there continuity while the shift lever is in the M
terminals at the transmission gear selection switch position, and no continuity when the shift lever is
and the PCM .• in any position other than M?
YES-Go to step 7.

(cont'd)
BACK 14-175
8. Measure the voltage between transmission gear 10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
selection silVitch/park pin switch/AfT gear position
indicator light connector terminal No.3 and body 11. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
ground.
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION SWITCH! terminal A47 and transmission gear selection
PARK PIN SWITCH!AfT GEAR POSITION switch/park pin switch/AfT gear position indicator
INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR panel light connector terminal No.3.
TRANSMISSION GEAR
SELECTION SWITCH!
PARK PIN SWITCH!
PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) A!T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT CONNECTOR
=

YES-Repair open in the wire between female terminals female terminals
transmission gear selection switch/park pin switch/
AfT gear position indicator panel light connector Is there continuity?
and ground (G503), or repair poor ground (G503),
then go to step 20. YES-Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal A47 and the transmission gear
NO-Go to step 9. selection switch/park pin switch/AfT gear position
indicator panel light connector, then go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 13.
14-176 BACK
13. Reconnect all connectors. 20. Clear theDTC with the HDS.
22. Push the. shift lever toward upshift position (+)
15. Start the engine in the P position, wait for more slowly, and release it; repeatthistest 10times or
than 10 seconds, then shift to the M position. more ..
16. Push the shift lever toward upshift position (+) 23. Pull the shift lever toward downshift position (-)
slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times or slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times or
more. more.
17. Pull the shift lever toward downshift position (-) 24. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
slowly, and release it; repeat this test 10 times or Mode Menu with the HDS.
more.
Is DTC P0958 indic~ted? and the PCM, then go to step 1.
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known- NO-Go to. step 25:
NO-Go to step 19.
19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0958 in theDTCs/
complete. Ifthe PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals aUhe
were indicated on step 18, go to the indicated DTC's . then go to step;1.' IftheHDS indicates NOT

BACK
DTC P0962: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit
7. Disconnectthe AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
NOTE: valve A connector.
anyon-board snapshot, and review General 8. Measure the resistance between AfT clutch
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). pressure control solenoid valve A connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminals No.1 and No.2 .
transmission. AIT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
2. Check that DTC P0962 recurs.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS. Is there 3- 10 Q ?
Is the result NORMAL? YES-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 4. NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid

NO-Go to step 6.
4. Choose Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control

in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and command AfT
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A at 1.0 A
with the HDS.

YES-Go to step 6.

terminals at AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
14-'178 BACK
9. Check for continuity·between AfT olutch pressure 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
control solenoid valve A connector terminal No.2
and body ground. 11. Measure the voltage between AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A connector terminals No.1
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL and No.'2.
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
~~~
cITM,'
~
(BlK)
~' LS A (RED) ~ND (alX)
, Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 10. Is there momentarily battery voltage when the

ignition switch is turned ON (II)? .
NO-Repair open in the wire between AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and ground YES-Go to step 19.
step 24. NO-Check for open or short in the wire between
PCM connector terminal C21 and AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A, ifthe wiring is
OK, go to step 12.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-179
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF~ 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
terminals B41 and body ground, and between C41
14. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C(49P). and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
15. Turn the)gnition switcl) ON (II).
16. Measure the voltage between PCM connector

terminals B2 and B41 or C41.
PCM CONNECTORS
~B SOL (BlK/YEL)
';i
II B (49P) C (49P)
11 2 3 4151611 8 9 101 11 2 3 4151811 8 9 101

111 ~213 1~5~6111118 ~9 20 21, 111 12V Vl15~6111118 920 211 =
j22j2.l24 XI25IX 126VVI VV 124 XI25IX 26 2112BI Terminal side of female terminals
j2!l1~31 82133184~ 373639 VVV ~133I84VV 137 361391
1140 4142 Vl44I45I48V VI 140 4142 43144145148 4148 491
I lG2 (BRN/YEl) IlG1 (BRN/YEl) Is there continuity?
YES-Check for a blown No. 18 fuse in the under-

Terminal side of female terminals dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in
the wire between PCM connector terminal B2 and
Is there battery voltage? the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 24.
YES-Go to step 19. NO-Repair open in the wires between PCM

NO-Go to step 17. or repair poor ground (G101), then goto step 24.
14.. 180 BACK

20. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not 25. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0
substitute a known-goodPCM (se,e page 14-9).
26. Check for DTC(s) inthe DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT,
Is DTC P0962 indicated? valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 23.
OTCs were indicated on step 26, go to the indicated
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at AfT clutch
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM,
troubleshooting.• COMPLETED, return to step 25 and recheck.

connections and loose terminals at AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If
BACK 14-181
Ole P0963: Problem in' AfT Clutch Pressure 8. Measure the resistance between AfT clutch
Control Solenoid Valve A pressure control solenoid valve A connector
terminals No.1 and No.2. '
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
anyon-board snapshot, and review General SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
transmission.
Is DTC P0963 indicated? Terminal side of male terminals
YES-Go to step 6.
Is there 3- 10 Q ?
NO-Go to step 3...
YES-Go to step 9..
3. Choose Clutch Pressure ControHLinear) Solenoid A
. in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A/f clutch NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS. valve A (see page 14"252); then go to step 15.
Is the result NORMAL? 9. Check for continuity between AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A connector terminal No.2
YES-Go to step 4. .and body ground.
NO-Go to step 6. AIT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL

clutch pressure control solenoid valve A at 0.2 A
with the HDS.

1.'
Q
.
=
2
. ~ND (BLK) .
-'
'.
.

YES-Go to step 6.

terminals at AfT clutch pressure control solenoid YES-Go to step 10.
valve A and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, return to step 3 and recheck. NO-Repair open in the wire between AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and ground
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (G101), or repair poor ground (G101), then go to
step 15.
7. Disconnect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector.
14~182 BACK
10. Reconnect the NT clutch pressure control solenoid 15. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
valve A connector.
11. Update the NT software in the PCM if it does not position through all five gears.
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9). 17. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in NT
position through all five gears. Is DTC P0963 indicated?
13. Check for DTC(s) inthe DTCs/Freeze Data in NT YES-Check for poor connections and loose
Mode Menu with the HDS. terminals at NT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 18.
good PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck. If the PCM 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0963 in the DTCs/
was substituted, go to step 1. Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. DTCs were indicated on step 17, go to the indicated
YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is connections and loose terminals at NT clutch
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM,
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
were indicated on step 13, go to the indicated DTC's COMPLETED, return to step 16 and recheck.

connections and loose terminals at NT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If
BACK 14-183
.j' •• j
OTC P0966: Problem i-nA/TClutch Pressure 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF ..
Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit
NOTE: valve B connector.
anyon-board snapshot, and review General 8. Measure the resistance between AfT clutch
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). pressure control solenoid valve B connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminals No.1 and No.2 .
and cannot be caused by amechanical problem in the
transmission. AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
YES""":'Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear)Solenoid B
inthe MiscelianeousTest Menu, andtest AlTCiutch
pressure control solenoid-valve B with the HDS. Is there 3- 10 Q ?
. Is theresult NORMAL? YES-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 4. -' NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid

valve B (see page 14-252), then go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 6.

clutch pressure control solenoid valve B at 1.0 A
with the HDS.

YES-Go to step 6.

valve B and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
14~184 BACK
9. Check for continuity between AfT clutch pressure 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
control solenoid valve B connector terminal No.2
control solenoid valve B connector terminals No.1
and No; 2.
1
2
., GND (BLK)
Q . ~
LS B IBRN/WHT) ~ND IBLKI
=
Wire side.of female terminals


ignition switch is turned ON (II)?
pressure control solenoid valve B and ground YES-Go to step 19.
PCM connector terminal B10 and AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B, if the wiring is
OK, go to step 12.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-185

14. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P). and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS

terminals B2 and B41 or C41.
PCM CONNECTORS
!YYll~ SOL (BLK/YEL) y..

II B (49P) ~~~~~C~(~49~P~)
~ll~2~3~4~15~16~i1~7~8~9~10~)1~ 11 2 3 4151617 8 9 101
= =
11112 1314115116~7118 92021 111121/1/115~6117118 9201211
J2.2J2B 2A X/25IX 26 //1 VVI~X/25IX 26 27128J Terminal side of female terminals
J29 30 81 ~38\84135136 37 36 39 lIIL V 2138\84VIL 36139J
37
140 41 421/1441451461/ 1/1 140 4142 43144145146 4746 491
L---II LG2 (BRN/YEl) ILG1 (BRN/YEL) Is there continuity?
YES-Check for a blown No. 18 fuse inthe under-

Terminal side of female terminals dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in
the wire between PCM connector terminal B2 and

NO-Go to step 17. or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 24.
14-'186 BACK
Is DTC P0966 indicated? valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1.

good PCM (see page 14-9), then r~check. Ifthe PCM
NO-Go to step 23.
DTCs were indicated. on step 26, go to the indicated
YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM,
troubleshooti ng .• COMPLETED, return to step 25 and recheck.

pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If
BACK 14~187
DTC P0967: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure 8. Measure the resistance between AfT clutch
Control Solenoid Valve B pressure control solenoid valve B connector
NOTE:
anyon-board snapshot, and review General SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14~4) .
transmission.
Is DTC P0967 indicated? Terminal side of male terminals '
YES-Go to step 6.
Is there 3- 10 Q ?
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 9.
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS. valve B (see page 14-252), then go to step 15.
control solenoid valve B connector terminal No.2
YES-Go to step 4. and body ground.
NO-Go to step 6.
~
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B at 0.2 A
with the HDS.
~ND(BlJ()

YES-Go to step 6.

valve B and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
pressure control solenoid valve C and ground
step 15.
valve B connector.
14-188 BACK
10. Reconnect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid 15. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
valve B connector.
11. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not position through all five gears.
substitute a known-good PCM(see page 14-9). 17. Check for DTC(s)in the DTCs/Freeze Data hAfT
13. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT YES-Check for poor connections and loose
Mode Menu with the HDS. terminals at AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 18.
good PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck. If the PCM 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0967 in the DTCs/
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0967 in the DTCs/ YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any.other
YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is connections and loose terminals at AfT clutch
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM,

pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If
BACK 14-189

DTC P0970: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Control Solenoid Valve C Circuit
7. Disconnect the A{f clutch pressure control solenoid
NOTE: valveC connector.
anyon-board snapshot, and review General, 8. Measure the resistance between A{f clutch
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). pressure control solenoid valve C connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminals No.1 and No.2.
transmission. AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
in the MiscelianeousTest Menuiand test A{f clutch
pressure control solenoid valve'C with the HDS. Is there 3- 10 Q ?
Is the result NORMAL? YES-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 4. NO-Replace NT clutch pressure control solenoid

valve C (see page 14-257), then go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 6.

in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and command A{f
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C at 1.0 A
with the HDS.

Freeze Data in A{f Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES-Go to step 6.

terminals at A{f clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
14-190 BACK
9. Check for continuity between AfT clutch pressure 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
control solenoid valve C connector terminal No.2
control solenoid valve C connector terminals No.1
and No.2.
~ ~ND'Bu(]
.~
LS C ,GRNIRED' ~ND ,BU(]
Wire side ·of female terminals


ignition switch is turned ON (/I)?
pressure control solenoid valve C and ground YES-Go to step 19.
PCM connector terminal 821 and AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C, if the wiring is
OK, go to step 12.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-191
terminals 841 and body ground, and between C41
14. Disconnect PCM connectors 8 (49P) and C (49P). and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
B(49P) C (49P)
terminals 82 and 841 or C41. L
I 1 2 3 4 I 61617 8 9 10J III 2 3 4\61e17 8 9101
11112 131411511el17118~9 20 21 111112V v11611el17118 920211
PCM CONNECTORS 122 28 24 X126\X 28vvl VV 24 X126\X 26 27 281
\29\& 31 32133134136I36lfT 36 39 WV 32133I34W lfT 36 391
1140 41 42VI44I46I48V ." '1 1140 41 42 43144146148 47 481M11
~B SOL (BLK/VEL)
'::/..r---------, ~G21.RN/YEU ~Gll.RN/YEU
II B (49P) C (49P)
1112 341616178 9101 111 2 3 4161817 8 91101

111121314116116117118 92021 \1112V
V115116117118 92021 1 = =
J22 23 24XlzsIX 2eV /I I/V 24IXI26IX 2627281 Terminal side of female terminals
\2lI 30 31 32133134\36\36 lfT 36 39 VVV~I33I34VVI~36391
1140 41 42 V\44I461 48 / 1 1140 41 42 43144146148 47 481M11
,-------,I LG2 (BRN/VELI 1LG1 (BRN/VELI Is there continuity?
YES,-Check for a blown No. 18 fuse in the under-

Terminal side of female terminals- dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in
the wire between PCM connector terminal 82 and

NO-Go to step 17. or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 24.
14-192 BACK
Is OTC P0970 indicated? valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1.

NO-Go to step 23.
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM,

pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If
BACK 14-193
DTC P0971: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure 8. Measure the resistance between AfT clutch
Control Solenoid Valve C pressure control solenoid valve C connector
NOTE:
any on-board.snapshot, and review General SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR
transmission.
Is DTe P0971 indicated? Terminal side of male terminals
YES-Go to step 6.
Is there 3- 10 Q ?
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 9.
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS. valve C (see page 14-257), then go to step 15.
control solenoid valve C connector terminal No.2
YES-Go to step 4. and body ground.
NO-Go to step 6. AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL

~
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C at 0.2 A
with the HDS.
~NDIBLKI

YES-Go to step 6.

valve C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
pressure control solenoid valve C and ground
step 15.
valve C connector.
14-194 BACK
10. Reconnect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid 15. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
valve C connector.
11. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not position through all five gears.
have the latest software (seepage 14-8), or
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9). 17. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
Mode Menu with the HDS. terminals at AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 18.
good PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck.lfthe PCM 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0971 in the DTCs/
was substituted, go to step'1. Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is connections and loose terminals at AfT clutch
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM,

pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If
BACK 14-195
DTC P0973: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve A 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 9. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). " 10. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminals C20 and C41 or B41.
transmission. PCM CONNECTORS
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. .---------{Q SH A (BLU/VEl)-@-
B (49P) C (49P)
position through all five gears. 111 2 3 4 I 51 617 6 9 10] III 2 3 4151617 8 IS 1101
111~21314115~6~7118~9 20 21 11112VVi15116117118 920211
122~ 2A XJ25JXI2E VVI VVj24XJ25JX 26271281
3. Check that DTC' P0973 recurs.
1291311 81 2Iaala4j3513E ~ 36 39 Wl/I32laala4lN ~ 36 391
114ll 41 4ZVI44I46I48I/ '1 14ll 41 42 43144146148 47 48 4911
Is DTC P0973 indicated? ,---------,I LG2 (BRN/VEl) ILG1 (BRN/VEl)
YES-Go to step 7.
Terminl;ll side of female terminals
NO-Go to step 4.
Is there less than 12 Q ?
4. Choose Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve A with the HDS. YES-Go to step 11.
Is a clicking sound heard? NO-Go to step 19. '
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.


YES-Go to step 7.

time. Check the SH A wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve A and the
PCM. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
14-196 BACK
11. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness co·nnector. 16. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals A 1 and B41 or C41.
PCM CONNECTORS
terminals C20 andC41 orB41.
PCM CONNECTORS
SH A IBLU/YELI-@-
.---------{Q
BI49P) C149P)
112 8 4161al7 8 9101 1\1 2 a 4161al7 8 1101

111121314~6~a~7118 9(2c: 21 11112Vl/I16~a~7118 9120(211
122(23 Z4iX.126IX(2EV / I; I2A X 121>1 X 1Z1I28I
(29(30 31 ~(83184 VIJ V 182(aa1a41/(/ 137 (saIagl
140141421/1441461461/ 'I 1140 41 42 48144146148 47 481491
,-------,I LG2 IBRN/VEL) 'LG1 IBRN/YEL)
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM NO-Go to step 17.

connector terminal C20 and the shift solenoid
harness connector, then go to step 24. 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO-Go to step 13. 18. Check for continuity between PCM connector
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-242). and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
Is shift solenoid valve A OK?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve A or the shift

solenoid harness (see page 14-242), then go to step
18.

dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, repair open in
the wire between PCM connector terminal A1 and
the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 24.

connector terminals 841, C41 and ground (G 101),
(cont'd)
BACK 14-197
20. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not 25. Test-drive the vehic.le for several minutes. in the D
position through all five gears..
terminals at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM,
Is DTC P0973 indicated? then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 23.
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
were indicated on step 22, go to the indicated DTC's indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 25 and
troubleshooting •• recheck.

connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid
valve A and the PCM. IfthePCMwas updated,
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,. return to step
21 and recheck.
BACK
DTe P0974: Open,in Shift Solenoid Valve A 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 10. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminals C20 and C41 or B41 .
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. SH A IBLU/YELI-@--

.----------{Q
BI49PI CI49PI
position through all five gears. 111 2 8 4151817 8 9 101 111 2 34151817 8 101
111~213 4116118~7118 92021 111~21/~6 8~7118p9 20 211
I22I2I!I2A '><: 26IXI2E I/VI rl x~LX ~1Z11i!111
3. Check that DTC P0974 recurs. 1291& 31 1/11 1/1S21&134J/1/I37~1
1140 41 421/1441461481/ '1 1140 41 42148144146148 ~ 48 491
Is DTC P0974 indicated? L------li LG2 IBRN/YELI l LG1 IBRN/YELI
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Is there 12-25 Q?
4. Choose Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve A with the HDS. YES-Go to step 15.
Is a clicking sound heard? NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.


YES-Go to step 7.

at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM. Ifthe HDS
indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 4 and
recheck.
(cont'd)
BACK 14..;199
11. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 13. Remove the shift solenoid harness (see page
14-242).
terminal C20 and shift solenoid harness connector 14. Check for continuity between shift solenoid
terminal No.3. harness connector terminal No.3 and the shift
solenoid valve A connector terminal.
PCM CONNECTOR ,C (49P) SHIFT SOLENOID
HARNESS SOLENOID HARNESS SHIFT SOLENOID
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR VALVE A CONNECTOR
SH A (BLU/YELI
SHA
(BLU/YEL)

female terminals female terminals Terminal side of Wire side of
male terminals female terminals
YES-Go to step 13.
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM 14-242), then go to step 20.
harness connector, then go to step 20. NO-Replace the shift solenoid harness (see page
14-200 BACK
terminals at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM,
NO-Go to step 19.
.'
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
troubleshooting .• recheck.

valve A and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
17 and recheck.
BACK 14-201
DTC P0976: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve B 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 9. DisconnectPCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P).
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
B(49PI C (49PI
1. Clear the DTCwith the HDS.
111 2 3 4161617 8 9 1101 111 2 3 4161617 8 9 10]
1111 213 14116116~7118 92021 111 12V /116116117118 92021
122 23204 Xi26 1X 26V
VI V
V 204 Xi261X 261211
position through all five gears. I2S 3081 32133134136/36 373639 V vV 32133I34W 13736
1140 4142 VI44I46I46 V '[,'1 1140 4142 43144146146 4746 'I
~
3. Check thatDTC P0976 recurs. LG2 (BRN/VELI
Is DTC P0976 indicated? Q

SHB GRN / WHT
YES-Go to step 7.
. NO-Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve B with the HDS. YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.


YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK atthis

time. Check the SH B wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve B and the
PCM. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
14-202 BACK
11. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector.. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector 15. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals C28 and C41 or 841. terminals 83 and 841 or C41.
PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS
B (49P) C (49P)
111 2 3 4161617 6 91101 111 2 3 4161617 6 9 101

111~21314~6116~7118 92021 11112V /115~6~7118 92021
j22j2J1Z4.xJ26lX 26 lLlLI 1/ IZ4 X (2! X 2621128
/29/3C 31 82133134/36138 3 as 89 WV82I33/34WI37 as
1140 41 42VI44I46I46V ." '1 1140 41 42 43144146146 47 46 191
~
LG2 (BRN/YEL)
'---------{Q SH B GRN/WHT
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM YES-Go to step 18.

harness connector, then go to step 23. NO-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve 8 (see page 14-242).
Is shift solenoid valve B OK?
YES-Gato step 14.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve 8 or the shift

23.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-203
17. Check for continuity between PCM connector 19. Update the AfT software in the PCM ifit does not
terminals 841 and body grouhd, and between C41 have the latest software (see page 14-8), or
and body ground. substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9).
PCM CONNECTORS

Is DTCP0976 indicated?

goodPCM (see page 14-9), then recheck. If the PCM
= =
Terminal side of female terminals NO-Go to step 22.
Is there continuity? 22. Monitor the 08D STATUS for P0976 in the DTCs/
dash fuse/relay box, and check the PGM-FI main Does the result indicate PASSED?
relay 1.lfthe fuse and relay are OK, repair open in
the wire between PCM connector terminal 83 and YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
the under-dash fuse/relay box via the main relay, complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
then go to step 23. original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs
NO-Repair open in the wires between PCM troubleshooting .•
or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 23. NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
valve 8 andthe PCM.lfthe PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14"9), then
20 and recheck.
BACK



terminals at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM,
then go to step 1. .
NO-Go to step 26.



valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1.lf the HDS
recheck.
BACK 14-205
... ' .
DTC P0977: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve B 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS;
NOTE:
transmission. PCM CONNECTORS
B(49P) C(49P)
1112 34161811 89101 11123416181189101
I" 12 13 14115~8~1118 9 20 21 III 12V~6~8~1118 92021
122~ Z4iX.1261X 28V /1 VVlZ4lX.1261X ~~12lI
position through all five gears. 1291& 31 371811 39 J[VV32I.VVI37~
1<10141.o12VI44I-46I048/ 'I 11<10 41 .012 431441-461048 'iT 48 91
~
3. Check that DTC P0977 recurs. LG2 (BRN/YEL)

'----------{Q SH B GRN/WHT
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Is there 12-25 Q ?
4. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve B with the HDS. YES-Go to step 15.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.


YES-Go to step 7.

at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
14-206 BACK
14-242).
solenoid valve B connector terminal.
PCM CONNECTOR C (49PI SHIFT SOLENOID
HARNESS SOLENOID HARNESS SHIFT SOLENOID
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR VALVE B CONNECTOR
.--------1 Ql-----.
SH B (GRN/WHTI
SH B (GRN/WHTI
'---iQ}-------l

female terminals female terminals Terminal side of Wire side of
male terminals female terminals
YES-Go to step 13.
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
(cont'd)
BACK 14-207
16. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not 21. Test-drive the vehicle·for several minutes in the D
terminals at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM,

NO-Go to step 19.
YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
complete. Ifthe PCM was substituted, replace the connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid
original PCM (see page 11-244).lfany other DTCs valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS

valve B and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
17 and recheck.
14-2G8 BACK
DTC P0979: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve C 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
8. Jumpthe SCS linewith the HDS.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 9. Disconnect PCM connectprs B (49P) and C (49P).
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
B(49P) C(49P)
; 11 23 41 6T 617 B 9 10 r rTl 2 3 4T51617 B 9101
111i121314li5liB1i7118 92021 111121111115~ 6117118 920121
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D \2$124 X\26rx 281/111 1/1/\24 X 126IX 28 27\
position through all five gears. /291& 31 32\33\34136\311 lSi 3B 39 W1/I32133I24Vl1 ~~39
1140 41 42I/144r46l48 1/ 1/1/1 1140 41 42 43144146148 47 48 \91
~
3. Check that DTC P0979 recurs. LG2 (BRN/VEL)
Is DTe P0979 indicated? L -_ _ _----4Q}-_--::---=_----l

SHC(GRN)
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve C with the HDS. YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.


YES-Go to step 7.

time. Check the SH C wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve C and the
(cont'd)
BACK 14-209
11. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector 15. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals C39 and C41 or 841. terminals 83 and 841 or C41.
PCM CONNECTORS PCM CONNECTORS
~I~ (YEL/BLK) 'Y.. )---------,

B(49P) C(49P)
IL1 2 3 4151617 8 9 1'!J ILl 2 3 4151617 8 91'!J

111121314115116117118 92021 lll121L1L11~1~!l!8
9 20 ~
122~ 241XJ25(2<; 281L1/1 ltV 24 X!25IXl28fZTI2IlI
~31~~~~~3839 JL'IL1L~~~38~
114014142VI44I45I45V 'I U40J41 42 ~~45145 47 46 ~
,--------,I LG2 (BRN/YELI l LG1 (BRN/YELI
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM YES-Go to step 18.

harness connector, then go to step 23. NO-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve C (see page 14-242).
Is shift solenoid valve C OK?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve C or the shift

23.
14-210 BACK
17. Check for continuity between PCM connector 19. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
terminals B41 and body ground, and between C41 have the latest software (see page 14-8), or
and body ground. substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9).
PCM CONNECTORS


= =
Terminal side of female terminals NO-Go to step 22.
Is there continuity? 22. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0979 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu fora pass/fail.
dash fuse/relay box, and check the PGM-FI main Does the result indicate PASSED?
relay 1. If the fuse and relay are OK, repair open in
the wire between PCM connector terminal B3 and YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
the under-dash fuse/relay box via the main relay, complete. If the PCM was sl,lpstituted, replace the
then go to step 23. original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs
NO-Repair open in the wires between PCM troubleshooting .•
or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 23. NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
valve C and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
20 and recheck.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-211
Alitomatic Transmission



terminals at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 26.



"alve 0 and the PCM,thengo to step 1. If the HDS
indicates NOTCOMPLETED, returnto step 24 and
recheck.
14..212 BACK
DTC P0980: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve C 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
8. Jump the SCSline with the HDS.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 9. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) andC (49P) .
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 10. Measure the resistance between PCMconnector
• This code i.s caused by an electrical circuit problem terminals C39 and C41 or B41.
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
B(49P) C(49P)
111 2 3 4151617 8 9 101 111 12 3 41516·17 6 9 101
111~21314115~6117118 92021 11112VVI15~6117118 92021
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0
J2212.!1Z4 lXi25LX 25VVI VVZ4IXJ251X12B27J
position through all five gears. 1291& 81 37 38 39 W VJ32133[34V11137 33 39
11<10 41 42//1441451481/ 'I 11<1014142 43144145148 4748 191
~
3. Check that OTC P0980 recurs. LG2 (BRN/VEl)
Is DTe P0980 indicated? ~~------~r2~---S~H-C~G~R-N~
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Is there 12-25 Q ?
4. Choose Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve C with the HOS. YES-Go to step 15.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Goto step 7.


YES-Go to step 7.

at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
(cont'd)
BACK
DTC Troubleshooting (co nt'd)
14-242).
12. Check for continuity betweenPCMconnector .'
solenoid valve C connector terminal.
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) S~IFT
SOLENOID
HARNESS SHIFT SOLENOID ' SOLENOID .HARNESS
CONNECTOR VALVE C CONNECTOR CONNECTOR

female terminals female terminals Wire side of Terminal side of
female terminals male terminals
YES-Go to step 13.
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
14-214 BACK
16. Update the Aff software in the PCM if it does not 21. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
terminals at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM,

was substituted, go to step 1.. 23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0980 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in Aff Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NO-Go to step 19.
Freeze Data in Aff Mode Menu for a pass/fail. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS

valve C and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
17 and recheck.
BACK 14-215
OTe P0982: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve D 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 9. Disconnect PCM connectors B (49P) and C (49P) .
Troubleshooting Information (seepage 14-4) .. 10. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. SH D (GRN/RED)-@-

.----------1Q
B(49P) C(49P) II
position through all five gears. 111 123 4 Isl617 8 9110 I
111121314115116117118 92021
3. Check that DTC P0982 recurs. 122\21 24 XI26IX 28V!/
\29 30 31 32133184135\38 '61 38 39
114014142V\44I45I46/VL 1
Is OTe P0982 indicated? L-----li LG2 (BRN/YEL)
YES-Go to step 7.
NO'7""Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid D in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve Dwith the HDS. YES-:-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.


YES-Go to step 7.

time. Check the SH D wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve D and the
14-216 BACK
11. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 16. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminals A 1 and 841 or C41.
PCM CONNECTORS
terminals C9 and C41 or 841.
PCM CONNECTORS
VB SOL2 (WHT)
-II A (49P) B(49P) C(49P)
.---------{Q SH D (GRN/REi(©-
~ .... ~r ~~ ~
12846878910 12346678810 1284&878910
B(49P) C (49P) II '-" 11 8 '118

LX
9 21
1"'1
11 2 Wf16 8 8 9 21 112 f~68~1J189 21
.,42 1<81" 1.. 47 4142 'I....... «>41 42 .. ..... 474849

111 J
2 3 4 61611 8 9110 I 111 2 3 4 161 6 J7
8 9110 I
ILG2 (BRN/YEL)
~
111121314116116~1118 92021 11112VVl16~6111118 920211
J22 23 2A Xi2SiX ~6VV VV 2AlXJ2SJX 26 211261 '::f..
j29 30 31 2133j34136j36 31 36 39 _Wl!'~33j34WI~36 391
1140 41 421/144146146 / 'L 'I 1140 41 42 43144146146 41 461491
,------,I LG2 (BRN/YEl) 1LG1 (BRN/YEl)
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM NO-Go to step 17.

harness connector, then go to step 24. 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO-Go to step 13. 18. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminals 841 and body ground, and between C41
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve D (see page 14-242). and body ground.
PCM CONNECTORS
Is shift solenoid valve D OK?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve D or the shift

24.


dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in
the wire between PCM connector terminal A 1 and
the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 24.

(cont'd)
BACK 14-217
terminals at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM,

NO-Go to step 23.
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. YES- Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs valve D and thePCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
troubleshooting .• ' recheck.

valve D and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
recheck. If the PCM was su bstituted, go to step 1. If
21 and recheck.
14-218 BACK
DTe P0983: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve D 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
anyon-board 'snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 10. Measure the resistance between PCM con'nector
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. SH 0 (GRN/RE~~

~-------IQ

B(49P) C(49P) , II ~
position through all five gears. 111 234161617 89101 1112 34161617 8 9101
1111121314116118~7]i8 92021 liI121717li6~6~7118 920211
122~ 241'Xl261X12E 1/111 1/1/ 24JX 1261>< 28 21128J
3. Check that DTC P0983 recurs. 1291& 31 32133134I36jae ~ 38 38 1/I/I/~133J34VV I~ 381 391
1140 41 4217l44T46148V 1/ 1/1 Ir40 41 42 4sT44146148 47 48 491
Is DTC P0983 indicated? L-_-' TLG2 (BRN/YEL) -rLG1 (BRN/YELl
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Is there 12-25 Q ?
4. Choose Shift Solenoid D in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve D with the HDS. YES-Go to step 15.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.


YES-Go to step 7.

at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-219
11. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 13. Remove the shift solenoid harness (seepage
14-242).
12. Check for continuity between PCMconnector
terminal No. 1. harness connector terminal No.1 and the shift
solenoid valve D connector terminal.
PCM CONNECTOR C (49P) SHIFT SOLENOID.
HARNESS SHIFT SOLENOID SOLENOID HARNESS
CONNECTOR· VALVE D CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
SH D (GRN/RED)
Terminal side of . Wire side of

female terminals female terminals Wire side of Terminal side of
female terminals male terminals
YES-Go to step 13.
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page
14-220 BACK
16. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not 21. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0
17. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0 Mode Menu with the HDS.
terminals at shift solenoid valve 0 and the PCM,
NO-Go to step 19.
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs valve 0 and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS

valve 0 and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
17 and recheck.
BACK 14-221
DTC P16CO: PCM AfT Control System

Incomplete Updated
NOTE:
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4) .
• This code is indicated when PCM updating is
incomplete.
1. Update the AfT software in the PCM (see page 14-8).
2. Check whether the DTC P16CO is indicated in the

DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu with the HDS.
Is DTC P16CO indicated?
YES-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-244).

•
NO-PCM updating is complete.•
14-222 BACK
OTC P1717: Open in Transmission Range 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Switch ATP RVS Switch Circuit
NOTE: connector.
anyon-board snapshot, and review General 6. Check for continuity between transmission range
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). switch connector terminal No.5 and body ground.
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
transmission.
GND(BLK)
234 5
2. Shift to the R position, and check the A/T R SWITCH 6 7 8910
signal with the HDS in the A/T data list.
Is the AlT R SWITCH ON? Q

YES-Go to step 3.. =
NO-Check for proper transmission range switch
installation (see page 14-315), adjust the shift cable
(see page 14-311), then recheck.• Is there continuity?
3. Check the REVERSE SWITCH signal with the HDS. YES-Go to step 7.
Is the REVERSE SWITCH ON? NO-Repair open in the wire between transmission
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this (G101), or repair poor ground (G101), then go to
time .• step 15.
NO-Go to step 4.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-223
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Check for continuity between the No.5 and No.9
terminals at the transmission range switch.
switch connector terminals No.5 and No.9. TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
1 2 3
123 678
678 ATPRVS ' - -_ _-----l
ATP RVS (RED/WHT) '-----_ __


Is there continuity when the shift lever is in the P,
R, and N positions, and no continuity when the
Is there voltage? shift lever is in the D and D3 positions?
YES-Go to step 9. YES.,....Check for poor connections and loose

NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM PCM. Ifthe connections are OK, go to step 10.
connector terminal C19 and the transmission range
switch, then go to step 15. NO-Replace the transmission range switch
14-224 BACK
10. Reconnect the transmission range switch 15. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
connector.
16. Start the engine, and shift the shift lever slowly into
11. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not the P and R positions, then into the N position.
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9). 17. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
12. Start the engine, and shift the shift lever slowly into
the P and R positions, then into the N position. Is DrC P1717 indicated?
Mode Menu with the HDS. terminals at the transmission range switch and the
NO-Go to step 18.
good PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck.lfthe PCM 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1717 in the DTCs/
YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is connections and loose terminals at the
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
were indicated on step 13, go to the indicated DTC's return to step 16 and recheck.

transmission range switch and the PCM. If the PCM
BACK 14-225
DTC P1743: Problem in Shift Control System; 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Shift Valve E Stuck OFF
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data position through all five gears, then slow down to a
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General stop.
10. Test-drive the vehicle again for several minutes in
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating the D position through all five gears, then slow
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). down to a stop.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the 11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P17 43 in the DTCs/
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-266) through a Does the result indicate PASSED?
excessive clutch material. YES-Troubleshooting is complete .•
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 8
clutch material? and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
NO.,-Replace the ATF (see step 7 on page 14-266),

then go to step 4.

position through all five gears, then slow down to a
stop.

the D position through all five gears, then slow
down to a stop.

YIES-Repair shift valve E in the main valve body

(see page 14-347), replace the main valve body, or
replace the transmission, then go to step 8.

14-226 BACK
DTe P1744: Problem in Shift Control System; 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS:
Shift Valve E Stuck ON
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data position through all five gears, then slow down to a
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General stop.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating the D position through all five gears, then slow
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). down to a stop.
2. Make sure thatthe transmission is filled to the 11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1744 in the DTCs/
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-266) through a Does the result indicate PASSED?
excessive clutch material. YES-Troubleshooting is complete .•
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 8
clutch material? and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,

then go to step 4.

stop.

down to a stop.

YES-Repair shift valve E in the main valve body

(see page 14-347), replace the main valve body, or

BACK 14-227
DTC P1745: Problem in Shift Control System; 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Servo Control Valve Stuck OFF or Servo
Control Valve Stuck ON 9. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
. position through all five gears, then slow down to a
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data stop.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 10. Test-drive the vehicle again for several minutes in
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating down to a stop.
11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P17 45 in the DTCs/
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or YES-Troubleshooting is complete .•
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
clutch material? return to step 9 and recheck.

then go to step 4.

stop.

down to a stop.

YES-Repair the servo control valve in the main

valve body (see page 14-347), servo valve in the
regulator valve body (see page 14-350), or replace
the main valve body, regulator valve body, or

14-228 BACK
OTC P1780: Problem in Shift Control System 5. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
have'the latest software (see page 14-8), or
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. stop.
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0 7. Test-drive the vehicle again for several minutes in
position through all five gears, then slow down to a the 0 position through all five gears, then slow
stop. down to a stop.
3. Test-drive the vehicle again for several minutes in 8. Check forDTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
the 0 position through all five gears, then slow Mode Menu with the HDS.
down to a stop.
Is DTC P1780indicated?
4. Check for other DTCs indicated simultaneous with
the code P1780. YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
NOTE: DTC P1780 means there is one or more AfT was substituted, go to step 1.
DTCs about the shift control system.
NO-Go to step 9.
Are there other DTCs?
YES-Troubleshoot a problem as indicated by the Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
DTC.•
NO-Go to step 5.

connections and loose terminals at the PCM. If the
BACK 14-229
DTC Troubleshooting (co nt'd)
DTC P2122: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) 5. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
Sensor A (Throttle Position Sensor D) Circuit have the latest software (see page 14-8), or
Low Voltage Input substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 7. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
Is DTC P2122indicated?
3. Check whether DTC P2122 is indicated in the DTCs/ good PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck.lfthe PCM
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. was substituted, go to step 1.
Is DTC P2122 indicated in th.e PGM-FI system? NO-Go to step 8.
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P2122 in the PGM-FI 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P2122 in the DTCs/
System (see page 11-269).•. Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
4. Check whether DTC P2122 is indicated in the DTCs/ YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu with the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Is DTC P2122 indicated? were indicated on step 7, go to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting ••
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this connections and loose terminals at the PCM. If the
time •• PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
14-230 BACK
DTC P2123: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) 5. Update the A!f software in the PCM if it does not
Sensor A (Throttle Position Sensor D) Circuit have the latest software (see page 14-8), or
High Voltage Input substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 7. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A!f
3. Check whether DTC P2123 is indicated in the DTCs/ good PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck. If the PCM
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. was substituted, go to step 1.
Is DTC P2123 indicated in the PGM-FI system? NO-Go to step 8.
YES-Troubleshootfor DTC P2123 in the PGM-FI 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P2123 in the DTCs/
System (see page 11-272)•• Freeze Data in A!f Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
4. Check whether DTC P2123 is indicated in the DTCs/ YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Freeze Data in A!f Mode Menu with the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Is DTC P2123 indicated? were indicated on step 7, go to the indicated DTC's
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK at this connections and loose terminals at the accelerator
time.• pedal position sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM
BACK
DTC U0028: F-CAN Communication Circuit 5. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
Error (F-CAN Bus OFF) have the latest software (see page 14-8); or
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Mode Menu with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is DTe U0028 indicated?
3. Check whether DTC U0028 is indicated in the DTCs/ YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. good PCM (see page 14-9), thEm recheck.·lfthe PCM
Is DTe U0028 indicated in the PGM-FI system?
NO-Go to step 8.
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC U0028 in the PGM-FI
System (see page 11-199).• 8. Monitor the. OBD STATUS for U0028 in the DTCs/
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check whether DTC U0028 is indicated in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu with the HDS; YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Is DTe U0028 indicated? original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs
YES-Go to step 5. troubleshooting .•
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
time.• connections and loose terminals-at the PCM and
the connectors on the F-CAN circuit. If the PCM was
14-9), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was substituted, go
14-232 BACK
DTC U0122: Lost Communication with VSA 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0122 in the DTCs/
Modulator-Control Unit Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General' .'.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). troubleshooting .•
3. Check whether DTC U0122 is indicated in theDTCs/ NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. connections and loose terminals at the VSA
modulator-control unit the PCM. If the PCM was
Is DTC U0122 indicated in the PGM-FI system? updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC U0122 in the PGM-FI to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
System (see page 11-203).• return to step 6 and recheck.
NO-Go to step 4. 9. Check the communication line between the VSA

modulator-control unit and the gauge control
4. Check whether DTC U0122 is indicated in the DTCs/ module with the HDS.
Is there malfunction in the F-CAN line between the
Is DTC U0122 indicated? VSA modulator-control unit and gauge control
module?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Repair open in the wires between the VSA
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis modulator-control unit connector and the CAN
time.• communication lines.•
5. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not NO-Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-
have the latest software (see page 14-8); or control unit (see page 19-102), then recheck. Ifthe
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9). symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
VSA modulator-control unit, replace the original
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). VSA modulator-control unit••


NO-Go to step 8.
BACK 14-233
DTC U0155: Lost Communication with Gauge 5. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
Control Module have the latest software (see page 14-8), or
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Mode Menu with theHDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is DTe U0155 indicated?
3. Checkwhether DTC U0155 is indicated in the DTCs/ . VES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. good PCM (see page 14-9), then recheck. If the PCM
Is DTC U0155 indicated in the PGM-FI system?
NO-Go to step 8.
VES-Troubleshootfor DTC U0155 in the PGM-FI
System (see page 11-205).•. 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0155 inthe DTCs/
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check whether the DTC U0155 is indicated in the
DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu with the HDS. VES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Is DTC U0155 indicated? ' original PCM (see page 11-244). If any other DTCs
VIES-Go to step 5. troubleshooting .•
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO-Ifthe. HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
time .• connections and loose terminals at the gl:\uge
control module and the PCM.lfthe PCM was
14-234 BACK
Road Test
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating 5. Prepare the HPS to take a HIGH SPEED SNAPSHOT
temperature (the. radiator fan comes on). (refer to the HDS user's guide for more details if
needed):
2. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels.
Start the engine, then shift to the D position while .• Select High Speed icon.
pressing the brake pedal. Press the accelerator • Select these parameters:
pedal, and release it suddenly. The engine should - VSS veh speed
not stall. - Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed
- InputShaft (Mainshaft) Speed (rpm)
3. Repeat step 2 in all shift lever positions. - RPM engine speed
- Relative TP Sensor
4. Connect the HDS to the DLe (A), and go to the AfT - APP Sensor A
data list. If the HDS does not communicate with the - ATF Temp sensor
PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page - Battery voltage
11-223). - Shift control
- Brake Switch
• Set the Trigger Type to Parameter.
• Adjust the Parameter setting to APP Sensor A
aboveO.8V.
• Set the recording time to 60 seconds.
• Set the trigger point to -30 seconds.
6. Find a suitable level road. When you are ready to

do the test, press OK on the HDS.
7. Monitor the HDS and accelerate quickly until the

APP Sensor A reads 0.8 V. Maintain a steady
throttle until the transmission shifts to 5th gear,
then slow the vehicle and come to a stop.
8. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded

or increase the recording time setting as necessary
and repeat step 7.
9. Adjust the parameter setting to 2.25 V. Test-drive

the vehicle again. While monitoring the HDS,
accelerate quickly until the APP Sensor A reads
2.25 V. Maintain a steady throttle until the
transmission shifts to 5th gear (or reasonable
speed), then slow the vehicle and come to a stop.
10. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded

or increase the recording time setting as necessary
and repeat step 9.
11. Accelerate quickly until the accelerator pedal is to

the floor. Maintain a steady pedal until the
transmission shifts to 3rd gear, then slow to a stop,
and save the snapshot.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-235
Road Test (cont'd)
12. Review each snapshot individually, and compare Downshift· D Position (reference)
the Shift Command, the APP Sensor A voltage, and Accelerator pedal position sensor v.oltage:
the Vehicle Speed to the table below. 0.8 V
Lock-up OFF 44-50 mph (71-80 km/h)
UIpSh·ft
I : D Position
., ! , . 5th-+4th 35-41 mph (56-66 km/h)
Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage: 4th-O:3rd, 17-21 mph (27-34 km/h)
O.8V .
3rd-+2nd 7-11 mph(11-18 km/h)
1st-+2nd 9-:-13 mph (14-21 km/hf Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
2nd-+3rd 1i7~21·mph (27-34km/h) 2.25 V
3rd-+4th 25-31 mph ·(40...,...50 km/h) Lock-up OFF 65-73mph (105-117 km/h)
4th-+5th 40-48 mph (64-77 km/h) Fully-opened throttle
Lock-up ON 47-53 mph (76-85 km/h) Accelerator-pedal position sensor voltage:
Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage: 4.5 V
2.25 V 5th--4th 128-140 mph (206-225 km/h)
1st-+2nd 22-26 mph (35-42 km/h) 4th-+3rd 78-88 mph (126-142 km/h)
2nd-+3rd 45-53 mph (72-85 km/h) 3rd-+2nd 54-58 mph (87-93 km/h)
3rd-+4th 70""::'78 mph. (113,-126· km/h) 3rd-+1st 26-32 mph (42-51 km/h)
4th-+5th 99,-109 mph (159,175 km/h)
Lock-up ON 100-110 mph (161--'-177 km/h) 13. Drive the vehicle in 4th or 5th gear in the sequential
Fully-opened throttle ~. r
sportshift mode in the M position, then downshift
Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage: to 2nd gear. The vehicle should immediately begin
4.5 V to slow down from engine braking.
1st-+2nd 36-42 mph (58-.68 km/h)
2nd-+3rd 65-73 mph (105-117km/h) 14. Shift to the R position, accelerate from a stop at full
3rd-+4th 99-109 mph (159-175 km/h) throttle, and check for abnormal noise and clutch
slippage.
15. Park the vehicle on a slope (about 16 degrees),

apply the brake, and shift into the P position.
Release the brake; the vehicle should not move.
NOTE: Always use the brake to hold the vehicle,

when stopped on an incline in gear. Depending on
the grade of the incline, the vehicle could roll
backwards if the brake is released.
14-236 BACK
Stall Speed Test
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the 8. Ifthe measurements are out ofthe service limit, the
proper level (see page 14-265). possible problems and probable causes are listed
in the table.
2. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels.
Problem Probable causes
3. Connect the HOS to the OLC (A), and go to the AfT Stall speed rpm high • ATF pump output
data list. If the HOS does not communicate with the in the OaAd R low
PCM, troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page positions • Regulator valve stuck
11-223). • Slipping clutch
Stall speed rpm high Slippage of 5th clutch
in the R position
Stall speed rpm low • Engine output low
in the 0 and R • Engine throttle valve
positions closed
• Torque converter
one-way clutch
slipping
4. Make sure the AlC switch OFF.
5. After the engine has warmed up to normal

operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on),
shift to the 0 position.
6. Firmly press the brake pedal and accelerator pedal

for 6 to 8 seconds, and note engine speed. Do not
move the shift lever while raising engine speed.
7. Allow 2 minutes for cooling, then repeat the test in

the R position.
NOTE:
• Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds
ata time.
• Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic
purposes only.
• Stall speed should be the same in the 0 and R
positions.
• Do not test stall speed with the AfT pressure
gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm:

Specification: 1,950 rpm
Service Limit: 1,800-2,100 rpm
BACK 14-237
Pressure Test
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the damper from the front subframe.
• AfT clutch pressure gauge set
8x 1.25mm
07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401 22N·m
• AfT pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A 12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
~
• AfT pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY401'20
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the

proper level (see page 14-265).
2. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely

supported.
3. Allow all four wheels to rotate freely.
4. Remove the transmission undercover (A) and

splash shield (B).
6. Connect the HOS to the OLC (A), and go to the AfT

data list. If the HOS does not communicate with the
PCM, troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page
11-223).
a~!::::="""6 x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
(1.0kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
14-238 BACK
7. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the line pressure 10. Turn the. engine off, then disconnect the oil
inspection hole (A). Do not allow dust or other pressure gauge from the line pressure inspection
foreign particles to enter the hole while connecting port.
the gauge.
11. Install the sealing bolt to the line pressure
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE inspection port with a new sealing washer, and
GAUGE SETW/PANEL
07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401 tighten the bolt to 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13Ibf·ft). Do
not reuse the old sealing washer.
12. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 1st clutch

pressure inspection port (B) and the 1st-hold clutch
pressure inspection port (C).
AfT PRESSURE AfT PRESSURE
HOSE, 2,210 mm HOSE ADAPTER
07MAJ-PV4011A 07MAJ-PV40120
13. Remove the air cleaner housing and intake air duct,
and connect the oil pressure gauge to the 2nd
clutch pressure inspection port (D). Then
temporarily install the air cleaner housing and
intake air duct.

operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
9. Measure the line pressure at the line pressure

inspection port (A) in the P or N position while
holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm. D
NOTE: Higher pressure may be indicated if

measurements are made in the shift lever position
other than P or N.
Pressure Fluid Pressure

Standard Service Limit
Line (A) 950-1,010 kPa 900 kPa
(9.7-10.3 kgf/cm2, (9.2 kgf/cm2,
140-146 psi) 130 psi)
(cont'd)
BACK 14-239
Pressure Test (cont'd)
14. Start the engine, and shift into the M position. 20. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 3rd clutch
pressure inspection port (E) and the 5th clutch
15. Shift into 1st gear, and measure the 1st clutch pressure inspection port (G).
pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection port
(8) and 1st-hold clutch pressure at the 1st~hold
clutch pressure inspection port (C) while holding
. the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
16. Upshift to 2nd gear by pushing the shift lever, and

measure the 2nd clutch pressure at the 2nd clutch
pressure inspection port (D) while holding the
engine speed at 2,000 rpm.

1st clutch 940-1,020 kPa 890 kPa
(8) (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm2, (9.1 kgf/cm2,
2nd clutch 140-148 psi) 130 psi)
(D)
1st-hold 680-760kPa 630 kPa
clutch (C) (6.9-7.7 kgf/cm2, (6.4 kgf/cm2,
98-110 psi) 91 psi) 21. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 4th clutch
pressure inspection port (F).
17. Turn the engine off, remove the air cleaner housing
and intake air duct, then disconnect the oil pressure F
gauges from the 1st clutch pressure, 1st-hold clutch
pressure, and 2nd clutch pressure inspection ports.
18. Install the sea Ii ng 'bolts in the 1st clutch pressure,

1st-clutch hold clutch pressure, and 2nd clutch
pressure inspection. ports with new sealing
washers, and tighten the bolts to 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m,
13 Ibf·ft). Do not reuse the old " sealing washers.
19. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct.
14-240 BACK
22. Cancel the transmission 2nd-hold control mode 31. If the measurements are out of the service limit, the
with the HDS; choose Pressure Assistance Mode in possible problems and probable causes are listed
the Miscellaneous Test Menu of the AfT Mode in the table.
Menu.
Problem Probable causes
23. Start the engine, and shift to the D3 position. No or low line • Torque converter
pressure • ATF pump
24. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure at the 3rd clutch • Regulator valve
pressure inspection port (D) while holding the • Torque converter
engine speed at 2,000 rpm. check valve
• Clogged ATF strainer
25. Shift to the D position, and measure the 4th clutch No or low 1st clutch • 1st clutch
pressure at the 4th clutch pressure inspection port pressure • O-rings
(E) while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm. No or low 2nd clutch • 2nd clutch
pressure • O-rings
26. Measure the 5th clutch pressure at the 5th clutch No or low 3rd clutch • 3rd clutch
pressure inspection port (F) while holding the pressure • O-rings
engine speed at 2,000 rpm. No or low 4th clutch • 4th clutch
pressure • O-rings
Pressure Fluid Pressure No or low 5th clutch • 5th clutch
Standard Service Limit pressure • O-rings
3rd clutch 940-1,020 kPa 890 kPa No or low 5th clutch • Servo valve
(E) (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm2, (9.1 kgf/cm2, pressure in the R • 5th clutch
4th clutch 140-148 psi) 130 psi) position • O-rings
(F) No or low 1st-hold • 1st-hold clutch
5th clutch clutch pressure • O-rings
(G)
32. Install the damper on the front subframe.
27. Bring the engine back to an idle, then apply the
brake pedal to stop the wheels from rotating. 33. Install the splash shield and transmission
undercover.
28. Shift to the R position, then release the brake pedal.
Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and measure
the 5th clutch pressure at the 5th clutch pressure
inspection port (G).

5th clutch 940-1,020 kPa 890 kPa
(G) in R (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm2, (9.1 kgf/cm2,
140-148 psi) 130 psi)
29. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the oil

pressure gauges from the 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch
pressure inspection ports.
30. Install the sealing bolts in the 3rd, 4th, and 5th
clutch pressure inspection ports with new sealing
washers, and tighten the bolts to 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m,
13 Ibf·ft). Do not reuse the old sealing washers.
BACK 14-241
Shift Solenoid Valve Test, Replacement, and Shift Solenoid Wire Harness
Replacement
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 10. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket
(A).
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf.ft)
~e
2. Choose Shift Solenoid A, B,C, and D in the

Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.

11-223).
3. Check that shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D

operate with the HDS. A clicking sound should be
heard.
11. Remove the spring clip/washer (B) and control pin
• If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK. (C), then separate the shift cable end (D) from the
The test is complete, disconnect the HDS . control lever (E).
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4, and
test the solenoid valves. 12. Check the synthetic resin bushing (F) in the shift
cable end for a proper fit and wear. If the bushing is
4. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the loose or worn, replace the shift cable (see page
audio system and the navigation system (if 14-309).
equipped).
5. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery,

then disconnect the positive terminal.
6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and

remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray.
7. Remove the under-hood subfuse box from its

bracket, and remove the bracket from the battery
base.
8. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing.
9. Remove the battery base and battery base bracket.
14-242 BACK
13. Disconnect the transmission range switch 17. Remove the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
connector (A), input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor valve A and 8, ATF pipes (e), and gasket (D).
connector (8), output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector (e), 3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (D), and ATF
temperature sensor connector (E).
6x 1.0 mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
18. Replace the gasket and O-rings (E) with new ones
when installing the AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A and 8.
14. Remove the harness clamp (F) from the clamp
bracket (G). 19. Remove the solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins
(8), and gasket (e).
valve A connector (A), AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve 8 connector (8), and shift solenoid
harness connector (e).
A
E
.bl.":'---{--- B
r----o
6X1.0mm 6x 1.0 mm
/ 12N·m 12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
o 11.2 kgf.m,
8.7Ibf.ft)
20. Replace the gasket with new one when installing
16. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (D), the solenoid valve cover.
and disconnect the 4th clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (E).
(cont'd)
BACK 14-243
'.;'
Shift Solenoid Valve Test, Replacement, and Shift Solenoid Wire Harness
Rep~acement (cont'd)
21. Disconnect the connectors from shift solenoid 24. Remove the shift solenoid harness connector (A),
valve A. shift solenoid valve 8, shift solenoid valve and replace it. Install a new O-ring (8) on the shift
C, and shift solenoid valve D. solenoid harness connector, and install the
connector in the transmission housing, then go to
c step 31.
6x 1.0 mm
12N·m
(1.2kgf.m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
22. Measure the resistance of each shift solenoid valve 25. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the
between the connector terminal and body ground. solenoid valves.
Standard: 12-25 Q
• If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 25

and replace shift solenoid valve.
• If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
23 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound.
23. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery

terminal to the body ground, and connect another
jumper wire from t.he positive battery terminal to
each solenoid valve terminal individually. E
• If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 24 and

replace the shift solenoid harness.
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 25 and
replace shift solenoid valve.
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m. 8.7Ibf·ft)
14-244 BACK
26. Install new O-rings (twQ O-rings per solenoid valve) 31. Connect the harness terminals to the solenoids:
(E) on the reused solenoid valves.
• YEL wire connector to shift solenoid valve A.
NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new • GRN wire connector to shift solenoid valve C.
O-rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the • RED wire connector to shift solenoid valve B.
O-rings provided on it. • ORN wire connector to shift solenoid valve D.
27. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) by 32. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins,
holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure and a new gasket.
the mounting bracket contacts the accumulator
body. 33. Install the new solenoid valve body gasket on the
solenoid valve cover, and install the ATF pipes with
NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the their filter side into the transmission housing.
connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be Install the new O-rings over the ATF pipes.
sure to hold the solenoid valve body.
34. Install AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
28. Install shift solenoid valve A (black connector) by and B.
holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure
the mounting bracket contacts the accumulator 35. Secure the harness cover with the bolt.
body.
36. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or
29. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by repair if necessary, then connect the connectors
holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure securely.
the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift
solenoid valve A. 37. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole of the
synthetic resin bushing in the shift cable en~, and
NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve C before attach the shift cable end to the control lever, then
installing shift solenoid valve A. If shift solenoid insert the control pin into the control lever hole
valve C is installed before installing shift solenoid through the shift cable end, and secure the control
valve A, it may damage the hydraulic control pin with the spring clip/washer.
system.
38. Secure the shift cable bracket with the nuts.
30. Install shift solenoid valve B (brown connector) by
holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure 39. Install the battery base bracket and battery base.
the mounting bracket contacts the accumulator
body. 40. Install the air cleaner housing and intake air duct.
41. Install the under-hood subfuse box on the battery

base, and install the subfuse box on its bracket.
42. Install the battery tray, battery, battery cover, and

battery hold-down bracket, then connect battery
terminals.

(see page 17-28).
45. Do the power window control unit reset procedure

(see page 22-259).
BACK 14-245
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 10. Disconnect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector.
2. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A

in the Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.

11-223).
11. Measure AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
3. Test AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A A resistance at the connector terminals.
with the HDS.
Standard: 3-10 Q
• If the valve tests OK, the test is complete.
Disconnect the HDS. • If the resistance is out of standard, replace AfT
• If the valve does not test OK, follow the clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
instructions on the HDS. (see page 14-252).
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does • If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
not determine the cause, go.to step 4. 12.
4. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
audio system and the navigation system (if terminal to the solenoid valve A connector terminal
equipped). No.2, and connect another jumper wire from the
positive battery terminal to the connector terminal
5. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, No.1.
• If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK.
6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and . Reconnect the connector, and install all removed
remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. parts.
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 13.
base.
14-246 BACK
13. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket 16. Disconnect the transmission range switch
(A). connector (A), input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connector (B), output shaft (countershaft) speed
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m sensor connector (C), 3rd clutch transmission fluid
11.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) pressure switch connector (D), and ATF
~e
D ~--F

14. Remove the spring clip/washer (B) and control pin bracket (G).
(C), then separate the shift cable end (D) from the
control lever (E). 18. Disconnect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
15. Check the synthetic resin bushing (F) in the shift solenoid valve B connector (B), and shift solenoid
cable end for a proper fitand wear. Ifthe bushing is harness connector (C).
loose or worn, replace the shift cable (see page
14-309).
_--8
»1....
""'---0
6X1.0mm
/ 12N·m
o 11.2 kgf.m,
8.7Ibf.ft)
19. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (D),

(cont'd)
BACK 14-247
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test (cont'd)
20. Remove the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid 23. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check
valve A and B, ATF pipes (C), gasket (D), and valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body
O-rings (E). mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
replace AlTclutch pressure control solenoid valve
Aand B.
24. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of

the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover.
25. Install the new solenoid valve body gasket on the

the filter end in the transmission housing. Install
the new O-rings over the ATF pipes.

and B.
27. Secure the harness cover with the bolt.
6x1.Omm
28. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft) repair if necessary, then connect the connectors
securely.
21. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for
contamination. 29. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole of the
synthetic resin bushing in the shift cable end, and
22. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery attach the shift cable end to the control lever, then
terminal to AfT clutch pressure control solenoid insert the control pin into the control lever hole
valve A connector terminal No.2, and connect through the shift cable end, and secure the control
another jumper wire from the positive battery pin with the spring clip/washer.
terminal to the connector terminal No.1. Make sure
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A moves. 30. Secure the shift cable bracket with the nuts.
31. Install the battery base bracket and battery base.


terminals.
A
(see page 17-28).

(see page 22-259).
14-248 BACK
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid, Valve B Test
valve B connector.

in the Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.

11-223).
3. Test AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B 11. Measure AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
with the HDS. B resistance at the connector terminals.
• If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Standard: 3-10 Q

Disconnect the HDS.
• If the valve does not test OK, follow the • If the resistance is out of standard, replace AfT
instructions on the HDS. clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does (see page 14-252).
not determine the cause, go to step 4. • If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
12.
audio system and the navigation system (if 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
equipped). terminal to the solenoid valve B connector terminal
No.2, and connect another jumper wire from the
5. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, positive battery terminal to the connector terminal
then disconnect the positive terminal. No.1.
6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and • If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK.
remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed
parts.
7. Remove the under-hood subfuse box from its • If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 13.
base.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-249
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test (cont'd)
13. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket 16. Disconnect the transmission range switch
(A). connector (A), input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connector (B), output shaft (countershaft) speed
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m sensor connector (C), 3rd clutch transmission fluid
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) pressure switch connector (D), and ATF
~e
, A-

bracket (G).
14. Remove the spring clip/washer (B) and control pin 18. Disconnect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
(C), then separate the shift cable end (D) from the valve A connector (A), AfT clutch pressure control
control lever (E). solenoid valve B connector (B), and shift solenoid
harness connector (C).
15. Check the synthetic resin bushing (F) in the shift
cable end for a proper fit and wear; If the bushing is
14-309).
.»!..r r - - - f - - B
6X1.0mm
; 12N·m
o ~V,~f.~i'
19. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (D),
14-250 BACK
20. Remove the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid 23. Disconnect one of the jumper·wires and check
valve A and B, ATF pipes (C), gasket (D), and valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body
O-rings (E). mounting surface. Ifthe valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
Aand B.

the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover.

A,B the filter end in the transmission housing. Install

and B.
6x1.0mm 28. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft) repair if necessary, then connect the connectors
securely.
21. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for
contamination. 29. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole of the
22. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery attach the shift cable end to the control lever, then
terminal to AfT clutch pressure control solenoid insert the control pin into the control lever hole
valve B connector terminal No.2, and connect through the shift cable end, and secure the control
another jumper wire from the positive battery pin with the spring clip/washer.
terminal to the. connector terminal No.1. Make sure
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B moves. 30. Secure the shift cable bracket with the nuts.


terminals.

(see page 17-28).

(see page 22-259).
BACK 14-251
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 10. Disconnectthe transmission range switch
audio system and the navigation system (if connector (A), input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
equipped). connector (B), output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector (C), 3rd clutch transmission fluid
2. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, pressure switch connector (D), and ATF
then disconnect the positive terminal. temperature sensor connector (E).

4. Remove the under-hood subfuse boxfrom its

base.

. L--I-~-G
7. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket

(A).
c
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
~@ 11. Remove the harness clamp (F) from the clamp

bracket (G).

solenoid valve B connector (B), and shift solenoid
harness connector (C).
8. Remove the spring clip/washer (B) and control pin

control lever (E).
9. Check the synthetic resin bushing (F) in the shift 13. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (D),
cable end for a proper fit and wear. If the bushing is and disconnect the 4th clutch transmission fluid
loose or worn, replace the shift cable (see page pressure switch connector (E).
14-309).
14-252 BACK
14. Remove the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid 24. Install the under-hood subfuse box on the battery
valve A and B, ATF pipes (C), gasket (D), and base, and install the subfuse box on its bracket.
O-rings (E).
terminals.

(see page 17-28).

(see page 22-259).
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m. 8.7Ibf·ft)
15. Check the fluid passage of the AfT clutch pressure

control solenoid valve for dustor dirt, and clean the
passage.

the filter end in the transmission housing. Install
17. Install AfT clutch presslJre control solenoid valve A

and B.
19. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean,

then connect the connectors securely.
20. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole of the

attach the shift cable end to the control lever, then
insert the control pin into the control lever hole
through the shift cable end, and secure the control
pin with the spring clip/washer.
BACK 14.. 253

AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test
valve C connector.

in the Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS. 11. Measure AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
C resistance at the connector terminals.
PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page Standard: 3-10 Q
11-223).
• Iftlie resistance is out of standard, replace AfT
3. Test AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
with the HDS. (see page 14-257).
• If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
• If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. 12.
Disconnect the HDS.
• If the valve does not test OK, follow the 12. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
instructions on the HDS. terminal to the solenoid valve C connector terminal
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does No; 2, and connect another jumper wire from the
not determine the cause, go to step 4. positive battery terminal to the connector terminal
No.1.
audio system and the navigation system (if • If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK.
equipped). Reconnect the connector, and install all removed
parts.
5. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, • If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 13.


base.
14~254 BACK
13. Remove AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve 16. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
C. terminal to AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C connector terminal No.2, and connect
another jumper wire from the positive battery
terminal to the connector terminal No.1. Make sure
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves.
0*0
o
~~~ 0
17. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check

valve movement atthe fluid passage in valve body
mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or ifthe solenoid valve does not operate,
replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
14. Remove the ATF joint pipes, O-rings, ATF pipe, and C.
gasket.
15. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for the solenoid valve body and transmission housing.
contamination.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-255
Alitomatic Transmission
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test (cont'd)
19. Installthe 8 x 53 mm ATF joint pipe (A) with the 21. Install the new gasket (A) on the transmission
filter end into its mounting hole (B). housing, and install the 8 x 34.5 mm ATF joint pipe
(B) with the filter end into the transmission housing
A and 8 x 25.2 mm ATF pipe (D).
6x 1.0 mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ftl 0
~
20. Check the height (A) of the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint

pipe (B) between the top (C) of the pipe and
solenoid valve body mounting surface (D). The
height is about 7 mm (0.3 in.) If the height is over·
7 mm (0.3 in.), push the pipe until it bottoms in the
accumulator body.
22. Install the new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes.
23. Install AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C.
24. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then

connect the connector securely.


terminals.

(see page 17-28).

(see page 22-259).
14-256 BACK
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid ValveCReplacement
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 11. Installthe 8 x53 mm ATF joint pipe (A) with the
audio system and the navigation system (if filter end into its mounting hole (8).
equipped).
A


base.

valve C connector. 12. Check the height (A) of the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint
pipe (8) between the top (C) of the pipe and
solenoid valve body mounting surface (D). The
height is about 7 mm (0.3 in.) If the height is over
7 mm (0.3 in.), push the pipe until it bottoms in the
accumulator body.
8. Remove AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve

C.
9. Remove the ATF joint pipes, O-rings, ATF pipe, and
gasket.
10. Clean the mounting surface and the fluid passage

of the solenoid valve body and transmission
housing.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-257
A'Utomatic Transmission
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement (cont'd)
13. Install the new gasket (A) on the transmission

housing, and install the 8 x 34.5 mm ATF joint pipe
(8) with the filter end into the transmission housing
and 8 x 25.2 mm ATF pipe (D).
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft) 0
~
14. Install the new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes.
15. Install AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C.



terminals.

(see page 17-28).

(see page 22-259).
14-258 BACK
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking 4. Disconnectthe inputshaft (mainshaft) speed
brake, block both rear wheels, and raise the front of sensor connector, and remove the input shaft
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. (mainshaft) speed sensor (A).

splash shield (B).
A B
B
5. Install the new O-ring (B) on the new input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then install the input
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor.

d~~=""'6x1.0mm
9.8N·m 7. Install the damper on the front subframe.
(1.0kgf·m,
7.21bf.ftl 8. Install the splash shield and transmission
3. Remove the damper from the front subframe. undercover.
8x1.2Smm
22N·m
BACK 14-259
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking 4. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
brake, block both rear wheels, and raise the front of sensor connector, and remove the output shaft
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. (counters haft) speed sensor (A) and sensor washer
(8).
6x1.0mm
splash shield (8). 12N·m
(1.2 kgf.m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
~o
B
c
5. Install the new O-ring (C) on the new output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor (8), then install the
output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and
sensor washer;
~_~!:===-~6 x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m 6. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then
(1.0 kgf·m, connect the connector securely.
7.21bJ.ft)
3. Remove the damper from the front subframe. 7. Install the damper on the front subframe.
8x1.2Smm 8. Install the splash shield and transmission

22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft) undercover.
1'4-260 BACK
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 13. Install the under-hood subfuse box on the battery
audio system and the navigation system (if base, and install the subfuse box on its bracket.
equipped).
2. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, battery hold-down bracket, then connect battery
then disconnect the positive terminal. terminals.
3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and 15. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system and
remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. the navigation system (if equipped). Set the clock.
4. Remove the under-hood subfuse box from its 16. Do the steering column position memorization
bracket, and remove the bracket from the battery (see page 17-28).
base.
5. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. (see page 22-259).
7. Disconnectthe 2nd clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch connector, and remove the switch.
A
20N·m
(2.0 kgf·m, 14lbf·ftl
~~
8. Install the new 2nd clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch (A) and a new sealing washer (B),
and tighten the switch.
9. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign

particles inside the connector.
10. Connect the connector securely.
BACK 14-261
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking 4. Disconnectthe 3rd clutch transmission fluid
brake, block both rear wheels, and raise the front of pressure switch connector, and remove the switch.
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported.
2. Remove the transmission undercover. (A) and

splash shield (B).
B A
20N·m'·
5. Install the new 3rd clutch transmission fluid


A
~lW::~=~ 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m 8. Install the damper on the front subframe.
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf.ftl 9. Install the splash shield and transmission
3. Remove the damper from the front subframe. undercover.
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
14-262 BACK
4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement ..
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 13. Install the under-hood subfuse box on the battery
audio system and the navigation system (if base, and install the subfuse box oh its bracket.
equipped).
2. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, battery hold-down bracket, then connect battery
then disconnect the positive terminal. terminals.
3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and 15. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system and
remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. the navigation system (if equipped). Set the clock.
4. Remove the under-hood subfuse box from its 16. Do the steering column position memorization
bracket, and remove the bracket from the battery (see page 17-28).
base.
5. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. (see page 22-259).
7. Disconnect the 4th clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch connector, and remove the switch.
8. Install the new 4th clutch transmission fluid


BACK 14-263
ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking 5. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector
brake, block both rear wheels, and raise the front of (A), then remove the connector from the connector
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. bracket (8).
B
splash shield (8).
c
A
6x 1.0 mm
<Bt_!i:~=~ 6 x 1.0 mm 12N·m
9.8N·m F E 11.2 kgf·m,
(1.0 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf.tt)
7.2Ibf.tt)
3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic 6. Remove the harness clamp (C) from its bracket (D).
transmission fluid (ATF).
7. Remove the ATF temperature sensor (E), and
replace the sensor.
8. Install the new O-ring (F) on the new ATF

temperature sensor, and install the ATF
temperature sensor.
9. Check the connector for rust; dirt, or oil. Connect

the connector securely, and install it on its bracket.
10. Install the harness clamp on its bracket.
11. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 7 on page

A 14-266).
18x1.5mm
49N·m 12. Install the splash shield and transmission
15.0 kgf.m, 36 Ibf·tt) B
undercover..
4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer

(8).
BACK
ATF Level Check
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 6. If the level is below the lower mark, check for fluid
leaks at the transmission, and hose and line joints.
1. Park the vehicle on the level ground. If a problem is found, fix it before filling the
transmission.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn NOTE: Ifthe vehicle is driven when the ATF level is
the engine off. Do not allow the engine to warm up below the lower mark:
longer than the time it takes for the radiator fan to • Transmission damage will result.
come on twice. • Vehicle does not move in any gear.
• Vehicle accelerates poorly, and flares when
NOTE: Check the fluid level within 60-90 seconds starting off in the D and R positions.
after turning the engine off. Higher fluid level may • The engine vibrates at idle.
be indicated if the radiator fan comes on twice or
more. 7. If the level is above the upper mark, drain the ATF
to proper level (see step 5 on page 14-266).
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the
dipstick guide tube, and wipe it with a clean cloth. NOTE: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is
above the upper mark, the vehicle may creep
forward while in the N position, or have shifting
problems.
8. If necessary, fill the transmission with the ATF

through the dipstick guide tube opening (A) to
bring the fluid level midway between the upper
mark and lower mark of the dipstick. Do not fill past
the upper mark. Always use Acura ATF-Z1
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-
Acura ATF can affect shift quality.
4. Insert the dipstick into the guide tube.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It

should be between the upper mark (A) and lower
mark (8).
9. Insert the dipstick back into the dipstick guide tube.
BACK 14-265
ATF Replacement
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 7.' Refill the transmission with the recommended fluid
into the filler hole (A). Always use Acura ATF-Z1
1. Park the vehicle on the level ground. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-
Acura ATF can affect shift quality.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:
the engine off. 2.8,L (3.0 US qt) at change
7.9 L (8.3 US qt) at overhaul
3. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking
brake, block both rear wheels, and raise the front of
4. Remove the transmission undercover.
8. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) and a new sealing

washer (C).
5. Remove the ATF filler bolt and drain plug (A), and
drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
NOTE: If a cooler cleaning is done, refer to ATF

Cooler Cleaning (see page 14-300).
A
18x1.5mm
49N·m
(5.0 kgf·m. 36 Ibf·ttl B

(B).
1,4-266 BACK
9. Remove the dipstick (A). 13. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A), and go to the
BODY ELECTRICAL. Ifthe HDS does not
communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC
10. Make sure the fluid level is between the upper mark
(B) and lower mark (C) on the dipstick.
14. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with
11. Install the transmission undercover. the HDS.
15. Select RESET inthe MAINTENANCE MINDER with

the HDS.
16. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 3 RESET, and

reset the ATF life with the HDS.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
12. Ifthe maintenance minder required to replace the

ATF, resetthe maintenance minder (see page 3-6),
and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance
minder did not require to replace the ATF, go to
step 10 and reset the ATF life with the HDS.
BACK 14-267
Transfer Assembly Fluid Replacement
1. Bring the transmission up to normal operating 7. Remove the filler plug (A) and sealing washer (B).
A
20x1.5mm
2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
~
engine off.
3. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking

brake, block both rear wheels, and raise the front of
s. Refill the transfer assembly with the recommended

fluid (hypoid gear oil) through the filler hole (e)
until the fluid flows out. Use an SAE 90 or SAE
SOW-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API classified GL4
or GL5 only.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) Viscosity:
SAE 90: Above 0 Of ( -18 'Cl
5. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the transfer SAE 80W-90: Below 0 Of (-18 'Cl
fluid (hypoid gear oil).
Transfer Fluid (Hypoid Gear Oil) Capacity:
0.43 L (0.45 US qtl at fluid change
9. Install the filler plug with a new sealing washer.
10. Install the transmission undercover.
A
20x1.5mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
(B).
14-268 BACK
Transfer Assembly Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported 7. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the
securely. transfer assembly, and adjust the transfer gear
backlash (see page 14-435).
2. Shift the transmission into the N position.
8. Check for fluid leaks between the mating faces of
3. Make a reference mark (A) across the propeller the transfer assembly and transmission.
shaft (B) and the transfer companion flange (C).
9. If there is leak, remove the transfer assembly,
10x 1.25mm , remove the transfer cover, and replace the O-ring.
72 N·m 17.3 kgf·m, 53 Ibf·ft)
10. Check for fluid leaks between the transfer

companion flange and transfer oil seal.
11. If there is leak, remove the transfer assembly from

the transmission, and replace the transfer oil seal
and O-ring on the transfer output shaft (hypoid
gear). If oil seal and O-ring replacement is required,
you will need to check and adjust the transfer gear
tooth contact, transfer gear backlash, the tapered
roller bearing starting torque, and the total starting
torque (see page 14-435). Do not replace the oil seal
with the transfer assembly on the transmission.
4. separate the propeller shaft from the transfer

companion flange.
5. Set a dial indicator (A) on the transfer companion

flange (B); position dial indicator tip (C) on the
direct extension of the bolt hole center (D).
D B C
6. Measure the transfer gear backlash.
Standard: 0.06-0.16 mm (0.002-0.006 in.)
BACK 14-269
Transfer Assembly Removal
1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported 6. Remove the front subframe stiffener.
securely.
2. Shift the transmission into the N position.
7. Remove the exhaust pipe A.
4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic

transmission fluid (ATF).
A
18x 1.5 mm
49N·m
(5.0 kgf·m, 36 Ibf·ft) B

(8).
14-270 BACK
8. Remove the bolt securing. the transfer breather 11. Remove the transfer assembly from the
hose bracket (A), and disconnect the breather hose transmission.
(8) from the breather pipe (C) on the transfer
assembly.
9. Make a reference mark (A) across the propeller

shaft (8) and the transfer companion flange (C).
c
10. Separate the propeller shaft from the transfer
companion flange.
BACK 14-271
Transfer Assembly Installation
1. Clean the areas where the transfer assembly 3. Install the propeller shaft (A) to the transfer
contacts the transmission with solvent, and dry companion flange (8) by aligning the reference·
with compressed air. Then apply transmission fluid mark (C).
to the contact area.
./"'" 10 x 1.25 mm
~ 72 N·m (7.3 kgf·m, 53Ibf·ft)
2. Install the dowel pin (A) in the transmission, and [:jj
install the transfer assembly (8) on the
transmission.
B
4. Secure the transfer breather hose bracket (A) on
the transfer assembly with the bolt, and install the
breather hose (8) over the breather pipe (C) with
the dot (D) facing out.
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
B~/"""V'-""'~l
14-272 BACK
5. Install the exhaust pipe A with the new self-locking 6. Install the front subframe stiffener with the new
nuts, its mount (B), and new gaskets (e) (0). mounting bolts.
10 x 1.25 mm
54N·m
(5.5kgf·m,
40Ibf·ft) 10x 1.25mm
Replace. 54 N·m (5.5 kgf.m, 40 Ibf.ft)
Replace.
10x 1.25 mm
·54N·m 7. Refill the transfer with transfer fluid (hypoid gear
(5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ft) oil), if necessary (see page 14-268).
Replace.
8x 1.25mm 10x 1.25 mm
22N·m 33 N·m (3.4kgf·rn, 25Ibf·ft) 8. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 7 on page
(2.2kgf·m, Replace. 14-266).
16Ibf·ft)
9. Install the transmission undercover.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·mi7.2Ibf·ft)
BACK 14-273
Transfer Breather Hose Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported 5. Disconnect the breather hose (A) from the transfer
securely. breather pipe (B), and remove the breather hose
from the hose clamp (C).
2. Remove the transfer breather (A) from its bracket
(B).
6. Install the breather hose over the breather pipe

with the dot (D) facing out, and install the hose on
the hose clamp at the dot (E).
3. Remove the breather hose clamp (A) from the hose
. clamp (B), and remove the hose clamp (C) from the 7. Install the breather hose clamp on the hose clamp,
vacuum hose (D). and install the hose clamp on the vacuum hose at
the mark.
D
8. Install the harness clamp on the engine harness.
9. Install the transfer breather on its bracket.
4. Remove the harness clamp (E) on the breather

hose from the engine harness (F).
14-274 BACK
' ..
~
~
Transmission Removal
Special Tools Required ." 11. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely'
• Eng·ine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566 supported.
• Engine hanger balancer bar VSB02C00001.9
• Engine hanger adapter set VSB02C000031 12. Remove the transmission undercover and splash
• Front subframe adapter EQS02BMDXSBO shield.
NOTE:
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
• Special tool Reds engine support hanger AAR-T12566
must be used with the side engine mount installed:

equipped).
2. Disconnect the support strut from the pivot ball on

both sides (bolted to the hood). Raise and secure
the hood in a vertical position. Remove the left side
pivot ball and install it into the lowerthreaded hole,
then reattach the support strut.
NOTE: Do not attempt to close the hood with the

support strut in the vertical position; it will damage
the support strut and the hood.
13. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic
3. Set the wheels inthe straight ahead position, and transmission fluid (ATF).
lock the steering wheel.
4. Drain the power steering system fluid from the

reservoir (see page 17-13).
5. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. Disconnect

the negative terminal from the battery, then
disconnect the positive terminal from the battery.

7. Remove the intake manifold cover, intake air duct,

and air cleaner housing. A
18x1.5mm
8. Remove the under-hood subfuse box from its 49N·m
(5.0 kgf·m, 36 Ibf·ft) B
base.
9. Remove the battery base and battery base bracket. (B).
10. Remove the front bulkhead cover. 15. Disconnectthe steering joint (see page 17-25).
(cont'd)
BACK
Autom'atic Transmission
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
16. Remove the power steering pump outlet line (A) 19. Disconnect the starter cables (A) from the starter,
from the power steering pump, and remove the and remove the harness clamp (8) from the clamp
hose clamp bolt (8). bracket (C).
B
20. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector (D).
17. Disconnect the transmission breather hose (A) from 21. Remove the dipstick, then remove the starter (A)
the breather pipe (8) at the transmission housing. and gasket (8).
18. Disconnect the vacuum hose (C) from the vacuum

line (D), and remove the vacuum line bolt.
14-276 BACK
.'
22. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket 25. Disconnect the Aff clutch pressure control solenoid
(A). . valve A connector (A). Aff clutch pressure control
solenoid valve 8 connector (8). and 4th clutch
. 6x1.0m~
9.8N·m transmission fluid pressure switch connector (C).
, (1.0 kgf·m. 7.2 Ibf.ft) and remove the harness cover mounting bolt (D).
~e
c
26. Disconnect the Aff clutch pressure control solenoid

valve C connector (A).
23. Remove the spring clip/washer (8) and control pin

(C). then separate the shift cable end (D) from the
control lever (E).

loose or worn. replace the shift cable (see page
14-309).
27. Remove the bolts securing the harness cover (8).
(cont'd)
BACK
· t,.,-·
28. Disconriectthe'transmission range switch 30. Diseonnectthe input shaft (mainshaft) speed
connector (A), and remove the harness clamp (8) sensor connector (A), output shaft (countershaft)
from theclamp bracket(C); speed sensor connector (8), ATF temperature
sensor connector (e), an'd 3rd clutch transmission
fluid pressure switch connector (D).
29. Remove the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF "
cooler lines (8). Turn the ends of the cooler hoses
up to prevent ATF from flowing out, then plug the 31. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
cooler hoses and lines. pressure switch connector (A), and remove the
vacuum line bolt (8).
B "
)~..-'----- B
14-278 BACK
32. Remove the bolt securing the engine mount control 34. Remove the transfer breather bracket from the
solenoid valve mounting bracket. engine rear cylinder head; use the bracket bolt hole
to attach engine hanger balancer bar rear arm.
33. Remove the connector bracket from the engine

front cylinder head; use the bracket bolt holeto
attach engine hanger balancer bar front arm.
engine hanger adapters (VSB02C000031) over the
damper flange nuts.
VSB02C000031
-----
(cont'd)
BACK
36. Install the engine balance bar (VS802C000019); 39. Remove the front subframe stiffener.
attach the front arm (A) to the front cylinder head
with a spacer and the 10 mm bolt, and attach the
rear arm (8) to the rear cylinder head with the
8 mm bolt.
40. Remove the exhaust pipe A and its mount (8).
37. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T12566) to

in the engine balance bar. Tighten the wing nut (C)
by hand, and to lift and support the engine.
38. Remove the front mount stop (A) and front mount
bolt (8).
14-280 BACK
41. Disconnect the headlight adjuster leveling sensor 45. Remove the bolt securing the transfer breather
connector (A) on both lower arms, and remove the hose bracket (A), and disconnectthe breather hose
harness clamps (8) from the front subframe for (8) from the breather pipe (e) on the transfer
model equipped with the headlight adjuster assembly.
leveling system.
46. Make a reference mark (A) across the propeller

42. Remove the lock pins (A) and castle nuts (8), and shaft (8) and the transfer companion flange (e), and
separate the lower arms (e) from the knuckles (D) separate the propeller shaft from the transfer
(see stepS on page 18-15). companion flange.
43. Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench (E) in the top of the ball

joint pin (F), and remove the nuts (G), then separate
the stabilizer link (H).
44. Remove the cotter pins (I) and nuts (J), and
separate the tie-rod end ball joints (K) from the
knuckles (see step 5 on page 18-15).
(cont'd)
BACK 14-281
47. Remove the transfer assembly from the 49. Disconnect the power steering pressure switch
transmission. connector.
50 .. Loosen the hose clamp bolt, then disconnect the

power steering fluid hose from the fluid line atthe
left front of the subframe.
48. Remove the torque converter cover (A), and
remove the drive plate bolts (8) (8) while rotating
the crankshaft pulley.
14-282 BACK
51. Remove the transmission lower mount bolt. 53. Remove the bolt securing the power steering fluid
line clamp bracket (A) on the rear mount bracket,
and turn the bracket away from the rear mount
bracket.
52. Remove the four rear mount bracket bolts.
54. Loosen the four bolts (A) holding the adjustable

arms (B) of the front subframe adapter
(EQS02BMDXSBO) to its center plate.
NOTE: The adapter is designed to be used with a

commercially available transmission jack.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-283
55. Line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on 57. Remove the six bolts securing the front stiffeners
the corner of the jack base, then attach the adapter (A) and rear stiffeners (B), and four bolts securing
(EQS02BMDXBO) to the jack base with the bolts (A) the front subframe (C), and lower the front
that came with the jack. Tighten the bolts securely. subframe.
EOS02BMDXBO
B------
10 x 1.25 mm
54N·m
15.5 kgf·m,
40lbf.ttl
56. Raise the jack to the vehicle height, then attach the
adapter to the front subframe using the subframe
stiffener mounting bolts (B) and bolt holes.
58. Remove the transmission lower mount (A).
59. Remove the transmission ground terminal (B).
14-284 BACK
60. Remove the driveshafts from the differential and 63. Remove the upper transmission housing mounting
the intermediate shaft. Coat all precision machined bolts.
surfaces with clean engine oil, then put plastic bags
over driveshaft ends.
61. Remove the exhaust manifold bracket (A) and heat

shield (8).
64. Remove the lower transmission housing mounting

bolts.
62. Remove the intermediate shaft (C). Coat all

precision machined surfaces with clean engine oil,
then put the plastic bags over intermediate shaft
ends.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-285
;,
65. Remove the harness clamp bracket (A) from the 70. Slide the transmission away from the engine to
front mount bracket (8), and remove the mount remove it from the vehicle.
bracket.
71. Remove the torque converter and dowel pins.
72. Remove the drive plate (A) and washer (8) from the
engine crankshaft, and replace the drive plate
66. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolt whenever the transmission is removed from the
(C) using a socket 22 mm in length. engine.
67. Remove the rear transmission housing mounting

bolts.
68. Place a jack under the transmission.
69. Lower the transmission by loosening the wing nut

of the engine support hanger, and tilt the engine
just enough for the transmission to clear its end
from the side frame.
14-286 BACK
Transmission Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Install the torque converter (A) on the mainshaft (B)
• Frame positioning guide pin 070AG-SJAA10S with the new O-ring (C).
• Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566
• Engine hanger balancer bar VSB02C000019
• Engine hanger adapter set VSB02C000031
• Front subframe adapter EQS02BMDXSBO
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted

surfaces.
1. Clean the ATF cooler (see page 14-300).
2. Install the new drive plate and washer on the

engine crankshaft, and tighten the eight bolts in a
crisscross pattern in two or more steps.
4. Install the 14 mm dowel pin (D) and 10 mm dowel

pin (E) in the torque converter housing.
5. Place the transmission on the jack, and raise it to

engine level.
6. Attach the transmission to the engine, and install

the lower transmission housing mounting bolts.
12x 1.0mm
74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54Ibf·ft)
12.x1.25mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ftl
(cont'd)
BACK 14-287
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
7. Install the rear transmission housing mounting 9. Install the transmission housing mounting bolt (A).
bolts.
10X1.25mm
/ 38N·m
(3.9 kgf.m, 28 Ibf·tt)
Replace.
C
B
8. Install the upper transmission housing mounting
bolts. 12x 1.25mm
64N·m
(6.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·tt)
10. Install the front mount bracket (8) with the new
mounting bolts.
11. Secure the harness clamp bracket (C) with the bolt.
12x 1.25 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m;47 Ibf·tt)
14-288 BACK
12. Install the new set ring (A) on the intermediate shaft 15. Install the new set ring (A) on the left driveshaft (8).
(8).
8x1.25mm
22N·m
(2.2kgf·m.
16Ibf·ft)
16. Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts

the transmission (differential) with solvent, and dry
with compressed air. Then install the left driveshaft,
be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the transmission. Turn the steering knuckle
fully outward, and slide the driveshaft into the
differential until you feel its set ring fully engage
the side gear.
17. Apply the recommended grease to the right

driveshaft inboard-joint splines.
8x1.25mm 18. Slide the right driveshaft over the intermediate

26 N·m (2.6 kgf·m. 20 Ibf·ft) shaft splines until you feel the driveshaft fully
engage the intermediate shaft set ring.
13. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft
contacts the transmission (differential) with solvent,
and dry with compressed air. Apply ATF to
intermediate shaft splines (C), then install the
intermediate shaft, be sure not to allow dust or
other foreign particles to enter the transmission.
14. Install the exhaust manifold bracket (D) and heat

shield (E).
(conrd)
BACK 14-289
19. Install the transmission lower mount (A). 22. Loosely install the new subframe mounting bolts:
front (A), rear (B), rear stiffeners (e) and mounting
6x 1.0mm
12N·m bolts (D), and front stiffeners (E) and mounting
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft) bolts (F).
20. Install the transmission ground cable (B).
21. Support the front subframe (A) with the front
~
subframe adapter (EQS02BMDXBO) and a jack, and D
A D
lift it up to the body. B 12x1.25mm
14x1.5mm
103N·m 14x1.5mm 117N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 103N·m (11.9 kgf·m,
75.9 Ibf·ft) (10.5 kgf·m, 86Ibf·ft)
Replace. 75.9 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
EQS02BMDXBO
14-290 BACK
23. Loosely-tighten the right rear subframe mounting 32. Install the two mount braCket bolts (A) on the rear
bolt (A); insert the frame positioning guide pin of the bracket, and install the new bolts (B) on the
(070AG-SJAA10S) through the positioning hole (B) front.
on the rear stiffener, through the positioning hole
(C) on the subframe, and into the positioning hole
(0) on the body, then tighten the subframe
mounting bolt.
070AG-SJAA10S
12x 1.25mm
117N·m
A (11.9 kgf·m, B
14x 1.5 mm 86lbf·ftl A--------o~ 10x 1.25 mm
103 N·m (10.5 kgf.m, 75.9 Ibf·ftl 10x1.25mm 42N·m
42N·m (4.3 kgf·m,
31lbf·ftl Replace.
24. Loosely tighten the left rear subframe mounting
bolt in the same manner in step 23. 33. Install the new transmission lower mount bolt.
25. Loosely tighten the right and left front subframe

mounting bolts.
26. Loosen the right rear mounting bolt, then tighten

the bolt to the specified torque.
27. Tighten the left rear mounting bolt to the specified

torque.
28. Tighten the right and left front mounting bolts to

the specified torque.
29. Check that the positioning holes and slot are 10x 1.25 mm
aligned using the frame positioning guide pin. 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ftl
Replace.
30. Tighten the rear and front stiffener mounting bolts

to the specified torque.
31. Remove the jack and front subframe adapter.
(cont'd)
BACK 14'~291
34. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate (A) 37. Turn the power steering fluid line clamp. bracket (A)
with eight bolts (B). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as to seat on, the rear mount bracket (B), and secure
necessary to tighten the bolt to 1/2 of the specified the bracket on the rear mount bracket.
torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross
pattern. After tightening the last bolt, check that the »x 1.0 mm
crankshaft rotates freely. 12N·m
11.2 kgf.rri, 8.7 Ibf·ftl
I
B
6x1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ftl
38. Connect the power steering pressure switch

connector.
6x1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf.ftl
35. Install the torque converter cover (C).
36. Connect the power steering fluid hose (A) to the

line (B), and secure the hose with its hose clamp (C).
14-292 BACK
39. Install the dowel pin (A) in the transmission, and 41. Install the propeller shaft (A) to the transfer
install the transfer assembly (8) on the companion flange (8) by aligning the reference
transmission. mark (e).
.../10x1.25mm
~ 72 N·m (7.3 kgf·m, 53Ibf·tt)
rsl
B
42. Install the ball joints on each lower arm (A) to each
knuckle (8) with new castle nuts (e), and secure the
castle nuts with the lock pins (D).
40. Secure the transfer breather hose bracket (A) on

the transfer assembly with the bolt, and install the
breather hose (8) over the breather pipe (e) with
I J12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·tt)
I
//~
the dot (D) facing out. .
14x1.5mm
c88-98N·m ~ B
(9.0:-10.0 kgf·m,
65-72.3Ibf·ttl A
43. Install the nuts (E) to the ball joint pins(F) on each
stabilizer link (G). Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench (H) in
the top of the ball joint pins, and tighten the nuts to
44. Install the tie-rod end ball joints (I) to each knuckle
with the nuts (J) and new cotter pins (K).
(cont'd)
BACK 14-293
45. Connect the headlight adjuster leveling sensor 47 . Install the front subframe stiffener .with the new
connector (A) on both lower arms" and install the mounting bolts. ,
harness clamps (B) on the front subframe for
model equipped with the headlight adjuster
leveling system.
46. Install the exhaust pipe A with the new self-locking 10x 1.25mm
nuts, its mount (B), and new gaskets (C) (D). 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ftl
Replace.
48. Install the new front mount bolt, and install the
front mount stop (A) with new nuts and vacuum
hose clamp (B).
10x 1.25mm ~12x1.25mm

54N·m @ 74N·tn
(5.5 kgf·m, (7.5 kgf·m,
40Ibf·ft) 54Ibf·ft)
Replace. Replace.
12x 1.25 mm\

74N·m
(7.5 kgf·m,
54lbf·ftl
e R'PI"~
I
10x 1.25mm
54N·m
(5.5 kgf·m,
40 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
10x 1.25mm
54N·m
(5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ftl B
Replace.
8x1.25mm 10x 1.25mm
22N·m 33 N·m (3.4 kgf·m, 25 Ibf·ftl
(2.2 kgf·m, Replace.
16Ibf·ft)
49. Remove the engine support hanger, engine support

hanger stands, and engine balancer bar.
14-294 BACK
50. Install the connector bracket on the engine front 52. Securing the engine mount control solenoid valve
cylinder head. mounting bracket (A) with the bolt.
6x1.0mm .
12 N·m 1~.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
51. Install the transfer breather bracket on the engine

rear cylinder head, and connect the breather hose
over the breather pipe. 53. Connect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch connector (A), and secure the vacuum line
(B) with the bolt.
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf'm, 7.2Ibf·ft) A
8x1.25mm
26 N·m 12.7 kgf·m, 20 Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 14~295
Autonlatic Transmission
54. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 56. Connect the transmission range switch connector
connector (A), output shaft (countershaft) .speed (A), and install the harness clamp (B) on the clamp
sensor connector (B), ATF temperature sensor bracket (C).
connector (C), and 3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (D). Do not allow water,
fluid, oil, dust, or other foreign particles to enter
any of the connectors.
57. Secure the harness cover (A) with the bolts.
55. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler
lines (B), and secure the hoses,with the clips (C)
(see page 14-302).
58. Connect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid

valve C connector.
14~296 BACK
59. Secure the harness cover (A) with the bolt. 61. Apply molybdenum grease tothe bore hole ofthe
synthetic resin bushing (A) in the shift cable end (B),
and attach the shift cable end to the control lever
(C), then insert the control pin (0) into the control
lever hole through the shift cable end, and secure
the control pin with the spring clip/washer (E).
o
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
~@
-M."=--+--- C
/""I---A
6X1.0mm
; 12N·m
Q ~~l,~r.~i'
60. Connect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector (8), AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve B connector (C), and 4th clutch
transmission pressure switch connector (0).
62. Secure the shift cable bracket (F) with the nuts.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-297
:,': .
,
63. Install the starter (A) and new gasket (8) (see page 66. Install the transmission breather hose (A) over the
. 4-10). breather pipe (8) with the dot (C) facing up.
12x1.25mm
74N·m
(7.5 kgf·m, 54 Ibf.ft)
67. Secure the vacuum line (D) with the bolt, and
connect the vacuum hose (E) to the line.
68. Install the power steering pump outlet line (A) with
64. Install the starter cables. (A), and install the harness the new O-ring (8) to the pump, and secure the
clamp (8) on the clamp bracket (C). hose clamp (C) with the bolt.
9N·m 6x 1.0 mm
(0.9 kgf·m, 6.5 Ibf·ft) 9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibf.ft) c
~
65. Connect the solenoid harness connector (D).
69. Connect the steering joint (see page 17-27).
14-298 BACK
70. Refill the power steering fluid reservoir with fluid to 79. Set the parking brake, run the engine at fast idle,
the upper level line. and turn the steering wheel from lock-to-Iock
several times to bleed airfrom the system. Recheck
71. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 7 on page the fluid level, and refill if necessary.
14-266).
80. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift
72. Install the battery base bracket and battery base. the transmission through all positions three times.
Check the shift lever operation, AfT gear position
73. Install the air cleaner housing, intake air duct, and indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.
intake manifold cover.
81. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment
74. Install the under-hood subfuse box on the battery (see page 18-5).
82. Check the ATF level (see page 14-265).
battery hold-down bracket, then connect the 83. Perform the road test (see page 14-235).
battery terminals.
76. Install the bulkhead cover. the navigation system (if equipped). Set the clock.
. ".
77. Install the splash shi~ld (A) and transmission 85.00 the power steering column position
undercover (8). memorization (see page 17-28).

(see page 22-259).
~_~~=~6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
BACK 14-299
ATF Cooler Cleaning

Special Tools Required 2; Plug.fhe cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded
• ATF cooler cleaner GHTTTCF6H· electrical outlet.
• Magnetic nonbypass spin·on filter GTHGNBP2
These special tools are available through the American INOTICEI
Honda Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857. Make sure the outlet has no other appliances
(light fixtures, drop lights, extension cords)
Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured plugged into it. Also, never plug the cooler
automatic transmission, you mustthoroughly clean the cleaner into an extension cord or drop light;
ATF cooler to prevent system contamination. Failure to you could damage the unit.
do so could cause a repeat automatic transmission
failure.
The cleaning procedure involves heated ATF-Z1

delivered under high pressure (100 psi). Check the
security of all hoses and connections. Always wear
safety glasses or a face shield, along with gloves and
protective clothing. If you get ATF in your eyes or on
BLUE HOSE
your skin, rinse with water immediately.
110V
AWARNING \~-~OUTLET
ELECTRICAL
• Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result .SHOP

in burns and other serious injuries . AIRLINE
• Always wear eye protection and protective
clothing, and follow all instructions in this 3. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to ON; the green
manual. indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Wait
1 hour for the cooler cleaner to reach its operating
temperature. (The cooler cleaner is ready to use
1. Check the fluid in the cooler cleaner tank. (The fluid when the temperature gauge reads 140 °to 150 "F.)
level should be 4.5 inches from the top of the filler
neck.) Adjust the level if needed; do not overfill. NOTE: If the red indicator above the HEATtoggie
Use only Acura ATF-Z1; do not use any additives. switch comes on, the fluid level in the tank is too
R/ FILLER/BREATHER
~ / / TUBE TANK
low for the tank heater to work (see step 1 of this
procedure) ..
4. Select the appropriate pair of fittings, and attach

them to the radiator, to the hoses, or to the banjo
bolts for flow through the ATF cooler cleaner.
14-300 BACK
5. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the 12. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the
line that normally goes to the external filter on the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running,
transmission). open and close the air purge valve periodically.
Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the
6. Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line. 5-minutes cleaning period, leave the air purge
valve open.
7. Connect a shop air hose (regulated to 100 to
125 psi) to the air purge valve. NOTE: While the pump is running with the air
purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming
INOTICE I from the filler/breather tube vents.
The quick-connect fitting has a one-way
check valve to keep ATF from entering your 13. With the air purge valve. open, flip the MOTOR
shop's air system. Do not remove or replace toggle switch to OFF. Leave the air purge valve
the fitting. Attach the coupler provided with open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines and
the cooler cleaner to your shop air line if hoses of residual ATF, then close the valve.
your coupler is not compatible.
14. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF
8. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON; the green cooler lines.
indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Let the
pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, 15. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other.
open and close the air purge valve periodically to
cause agitation and improve the cleaning process. 16. Disconnect the shop air from the air purge valve.
Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the Disconnect and stow the coupler if used.
5-minutes cleaning period, leave the air purge
valve open. 17. Disconnect and stow the fittings from the ATF
cooler inlet and outlet lines.
NOTE: While the pump is running with the air
purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming 18. Unplug the cooler cleaner from the 110 V outlet.
from the filler/breather tube vents.
Tool Maintenance
Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner

working properly:
• Replace the two magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters
once a year or when you notice a restriction in the
ATFflow.
• Check the level and condition of the fluid in the tank
before each use.
• Replace the ATF in the tank when it looks dark or dirty.
9. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR

toggle switch to OFF; the green indicator goes off.
Leave the air purge valve open for at least
15 seconds to purge the lines and hoses of residual
ATF, then close the valve. HEATER
10. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF TANK
cooler. Now connect the red hose to the cooler inlet
line.
11. Now connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line.
BACK 14-301
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement
1. Slide the ATF cooler hoses (A) over the ATF cooler
lines (8) until the hose ends contact with the bulge
(C) ofthe ATF cooler line, and secure the hoses
with the clips (D) at 2-4 mm (0.1-0.2 in.) (E) from
the hose end.
B C
2. Slide the ATF cooler outlet hose (F) over the ATF
cooler outlet line (G) at the transmission until the
hose end contacts with the bulge (H) ofthe ATF
cooler line. Secure the hose with the clip (I) facing
tab (J) up at 6-8 mm (0.2-0.3 in.) (K) from the
hose end.
3. Slide the ATF cooler hoses (L) over the ATF cooler
lines (M) until the hose ends contact with the bulge
(N) of the ATF cooler line, and secure the hoses
with the clips (0) at 6-8 mm (0.2-0.3 in.) (P) from
the hose end.
14-302 BACK
ATF Cooler Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported 5. Remove the power steering fluid hose clamp (A)
securely. from the ATF cooler mounting bracket.

splash shield (B).
6x1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl
6. Remove the ATF cooler (B), and replace it. Install

A
the new ATF cooler.
~.~~===..... 6 x 1.0 mm 7. Install the power steering fluid hose clamp on the
9.8N·m bracket.
(1.0kgf·m,
7.2Ibf.ftl
8. Slide the ATF cooler inlet hose over the ATF cooler
3. Remove the front bulkhead cover, and remove the line until the hose end contacts with the bulge, and
front bumper (see page 20-188). secure the hose with the clip at 6-8 mm
(0.2-0.3 in.) from the hose end.
4. Remove the hose clamp (A), and remove the ATF
cooler inlet hose (B) and outlet hose (C) from the 9. Slide the ATF cooler outlet hose over the ATF
hose clamps (D), then disconnect the hoses from cooler line until the hose end contacts with the
the ATF cooler lines. bulge, and secure the hose with the clip at 2-4 mm
c (0.1-0.2 in.) from the hose end.
10. Secure the cooler hoses with the hose clamps at

the marks on the hoses.
11. Install the hose clamp atthe mark.

A
12. Install the front bumper (see page 20-188), and
install the front bulkhead cover.
13. Install the splash shield and transmission

undercover.
14. Check the ATF level (see page 14-265).
BACK 14-303
Shift Lever Removal
1. Remove passenger's center console trim (see step 7. Disassemble the center console by removing the
6 on page 20-107). following:
2. Remove the beverage holder inner case (see step • Console a rmrest (see page 20-112)
10 on page 20-108). • Center console latch panel (see page 20-113)
• Center console panel (see page 20-113)
3. Shift the transmission into the R position. • Center console beverage holder (see page
20-114)
4. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end. • Center console box (see page 20-115)
8. Remove the shift lever assembly from the console

frame.
5. Press the holder lock release (A), and pull out the
socket holder (8) to remove the shift cable (C) from
the shift lever bracket base (D). Do not remove the
shift cable.by pulling the shift cable guide (E) and
damper (F).
F
6. Remove the center console (see page 20-107).
14-304 BACK
Shift Lever Installation Shift Lever Knob Replacement
1. Install the shift lever assembly on the console 1. Grasp the shift lever boot ring, and slip it out of the
frame. shift lever knob cover.
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 161bf.ftl
2. Remove the screws (A), and remove the shift lever

knob (B).
2. Assemble the center console by installing the

following:
• Center console box (see page 20-115)

• Center console beverage holder (see page
20-114) 3N·m
• Center console panel (see page 20-113) (0.3 kgf·m, 2lbf·ftl
• Center console latch panel (see page 20-113)
• Console armrest (see page 20-112)
3. Install the center console (see page 20-107).
4. Install the shift cable on the shift lever, and adjust

the shift cable (see step 6 on page 14-31.1).
5. Install the beverage holder inner case (see step 10

on page 20-108).
3. Apply non-hardening thread lock sealant to the
6. Install the passenger's center console trim (see screw threads.
4. Install the new shift lever knob, and secure it with
the screws.
5. Slide the shift lever boot ring over the shift lever
knob until it snaps on.
BACK 14..305
Shift Lever DisassemblyIReassembly
Apply silicon grease to movable joints of the shift lock mechanism and shift lever.
SCREW 5 x 0.8 mm
3 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 2 Ibf.ft)
Apply non-hardening
thread lock sealant.
ACTIVE DAMPER
SYSTEM SWITCH
SHIFT LOCK
RELEASE LID
~
SHIFT LEVER ROD
/
~
SILICONE GREASE
A/T GEAR POSITION

INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT BULB
&l
"SHIFT LEVER
\~:~~WCK
BRACKET BASE
STOP
SHIFT LOCK ~-
SHIFT LOCK SHIFT LOCK PLUNGER SOLENOID ~
SOLENOID STOP CUSHION SPRING PLUNGER SILICONE GREASE
14-306 BACK
Shift Lever Bracket Base Replacement
NOTE: Refer to the Shlft Le.ver Disassembly! 6. Remove the shift lock solenoid and harness
Reassembly (see page 14-306) during the following connector.
procedures.
7. Remove the shift lock stop and stop cushion as an
1. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-304). assembly.
2. Grasp the shift lever boot ring, and slip it out of the 8. Replace the shift lever bracket base.
shift lever knob cover.
9. Apply silicone grease to mounting pin of the shift
lock stop, and install the shift lock stop and stop
cushion over the pin.
10. Apply silicone grease to joint of the shift lock

solenoid plunger and shift lock stop.
11. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger and plunger

spring in the shift·lock solenoid.
, .f
12. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of

the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the
shift lock stop, then push the shift lock solenoid into
the·shift lever securely. ',' ,
13. Install the shift lock release.
3. Remove the screws (A), and remove the shift lever 14. Install the AfT gear position indicator panel light
knob (8). bulb in its socket.
15. Install the AfT gear position indicator panel on the

B
shift lever bracket ,base, and install the indicator
panel light socket in the indicator panel.
16. Apply non-hardening thread lock sealant to the

screw threads, install the'shift lever knob, and
secure it with the screws.
3N·m 17. Slide the shift lever boot ring over the shift lever
(0.3 kgf·m, 2 Ibf·ft) knob until it snaps on.
18. Install the shift lever (see page 14-305).
4. Remove the AfT gear positi.on indicator panel light

socket from the indicator panel, and remove the
indicator panel from the shift lever bracket base.
5. Remove the shift lock release.
BACK 14~307
.,,'
'-,
'.
Shift Lever Boot and AIT Gear Positionlndicator'PanelReplacement
1. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-304). 5. Release the lock tabs retaining the shift lever boot
using a screwdriver. "
2. Grasp the shift lever boot ring, and slip it out of the
shift lever knob cover.
6. Replace the shift lever boot or AfT gear position

3. Remove the screws (A), and, remove the shift lever indicator panel, and install the boot in the indicator
knob (8). panel.
3N·m
(0.3 kgf·m, 2Ibf,ft)
7. Install the AfT gear position indicator panel on the

shift lever bracket base, and install the indicator
4. Remove the AfT gear position indicator panel light panel light socket in the indicator panel.
socket from the indicator panel, and remove the
indicator panel from the shift lever bracket base. 8. Apply non-hardening thread lock sealant to the
screw threads, install the shift lever knob, and
secure it with the screws.
9. Slide the shift lever boot ring over the shift lever
knob until it snaps on.
14-308 BACK
Shift Cable Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported 7. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the
securely. audio system and the navigation system (if
equipped).
2. Remove passenger's center console trim (see step
6 on page 20-107). 8. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery,
3. Remove the beverage holder inner case (see step
10 on page 20-108).; 9. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and
4. Shift the transmission into the R position.
10. Remove the und~r-hood subfuse box from its
5. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end. bracket, and remove the bracket from the battery
base.

(A).
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
~e
socket holder (8) to remove the shift cable (C) from
the shift lever bracket base (D).

control lever (E).
15. Remove the heat shield under the shift cable

grommet.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-.309
·;"t
;
Autom~atic Transmission
Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)
16. Removethe drain hose clamp (A) from the shift 27. Install the battery tray, battery, battery cover, and
cable bracket (8). battery hold-down bracket, then connect battery
terminals.
28. Install the shift cable on the shift cable, and adjust
the shift cable (see step 6 on page 14-311).

(see page 17-28):

(see page 22-259).
17. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket.
18. Removethe shift cable grommet (e), and pull out

the shift cable (D).
19. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet

hole (E), and install the grommet in its hole. Do not
bend the shift cable excessively.
20. Install the shift cable Dtacket, and install the drain
hose clamp on the bracket.
21. Install the heat shield.
22. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole of the

attach the shift cable end to the control lever, then
through the shift cable end, and secure the control
25. Install the air cleaner

, housing and intake air duct.
26. Install the under-hood subfllse box on the battery

base, and install the subfuse boxan its bracket.
14-310 BACK
Shift Cable Adjustment
1. Remove passenger's center console trim (see step 6. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it.
6 on page 20-107). Pull the shift cable back one step so that the shift
position is in R. Do not hold the shift cable guide (B)
2. Remove the beverage holder inner case (see step and damper (C) to adjust the shift cable.
10 on page 20-108).
3. Shift the transmission into the R position.
4. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify that the

R position indicator comes on.

socket holder (B) to remove the shift cable (C) from 9. Place the shift lever in the R position, then insert
the shift lever bracket base.(O). Do not remove the tapered tip 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) through the
shift cable by pulling the shift cable guide (E) and positioning hole (B) on the shift lever bracket base,
damper (F). through the positioning hole (C) on the shift lever,
and into the positioning small hole (D) on the shift
lever bracket base. The shift lever is secured in the
R position.
F
c
(cont'd)
BACK 14-311
Shift Cable Adjustment (cont'd)
10. Align the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (8) 12. Ifimproperlyinstalled, remove the shift cable from
with the slotin the bracket base (C), then slide the the bracket base, and reinstall the shift cable. Do
holder into the base. Install the shift cable end (D) not install the shift cable end on the mounting stud
over the mounting stud (E) by aligning its.square while the shift cable is on the bracket base.
hole (F) with the square fitting (G) at the bottom of
the stud. Push the holder until it snaps securely in 13. Install and tighten the nut.
place. Do not install the shift cable by holding the
8x1.25mm
shift cable guide (H) and damper (I). 22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
~
14. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
to hold the shift lever.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
to each position, and verify that the AfT gear
position indicator follows the transmission range
switch.
16. Shift to the P position, and check that the shift lock
11. Verify that the shift cable end (A) is properly works properly. Push the shift lock release, and
installed on the mounting stud (8). verify that the shift lever releases, and also check
that the shift lever locks when it is shifted back to
Properly Installed: the P position.
@I)= T 17. Install the beverage holder inner case (see step 10
on page 20-108).
A
I \ B
18. Install the passenger's center console trim (see
Improperly Installed:
Cable end rides on the bottom

ofthe mounting stud.
14-312 BACK
AIT Gear Position Indicator
AfT GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

MINDICATOR
SHIFT INDICATOR
F-CAN Communication Circuit Troubleshooting, page 22-325
Gauge Control Module Self-diagnostic Function
Indicator Drive Circuit Check, page 22-315
Communication Line Check, page 22-317
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (D~
.. ,.., ~IJ AfT GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
PANEL LIGHT HARNESS
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION SWITCH PANEL LIGHT BULB
Test, page 14-319 Replacement, page 14-320
----------- I~~ ~
~,
r- ~ TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

Test, page 14-315
BACK 14-313
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD RJSE/llELAY BOX UNDEII-DASH RJSE/RELAY BOX
No.III20AI NolIIG1I5OAl
07~~~'__-t__~N_Oa·'0~1~'5~Al____--f---------Mrr---------------------'
IGNmON SWITCH
NO.':::::;;:::::8
110 AI
No.19I2OAl
~BRNYEL ~~ ~
L..::::::
IGI B42
VBSDL B2
T05V VBSOL2 AI
ATPRVS CI9
CAN
CONTROLLER ATPFWD CI8
ATPD3 C46
ATPD cn
ATPN C26
ATPR C25
STARTEII
ATPP AI6 CUT RELAY
~----------------~ ~
.1.11 BLK
A/TGEAR
POSmON
INDICATOR
PANEL~HT
so P2
I'G
PASSENGER'S
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.22 17.5 AI
t>-- LTBLU I-- RED/BLK ~ A{fGEAR
POsmON
DATAUNK
CONNECTOR
IDLCI
<J---- BRN
G501
----ij--- BRN __-,-A32~,.:.SCS'-'---f+-+-\ GAUGE CONTROL

MODULEB2
<1- RED I-- RED/BLK
INDICATOR
PANEL ~HT
S-MODE
"'1..r-"'
, - - - - - - - - - - - BLK __---=:B40"-<f'-I'G=-''--, 1.47
S-MDDE
I-- ORN --+--0
L1
S-UP
, -_______ BLK __--'B'-"~P=G2'--,
Al6
S UP BLU---I BLU I-- BLU/WHT
-
BRN/YEL --,C~41~L",G,--I---,
S-DN Al7
GRN---I GRN I-- BLU/YEL
BRN/YEL --,B4,,-I~L==G2=---,
BLK I-- BLK -t::::~.J
TRANSMISSION GEAR
SELECTION SWITCH
mill G503
PCM Harness Connector Terminal locations
'" '1_1'1' .1 9 1'0 , I' , '1'1'1' 8 9 10 , I', • I • I 61' a I 9 10

'**' 1"1" 13 "1"1"1"1'. 19 201"1 1" "V '1"1'6 17 1'8 '"1>01>'
1"1" 13 'VI"VI'.
I22 V" XI" X
129130 31 "WVI" 37I'sj3o
,**. 122 123 "Xi"IX "VL'I
1'01 30 31 "1"1"1'01>' 37 381391
V V" Xi" X 26 1"1 28
VVV "1"1" VVI 37 1"139
.041 42 "1"1/1" " ...0 "1 41 "VI"I"I" VI/I/ 11"1 " " 43 44 "I" 41 4849
1 1
AI49P) 0 BI49P1 " CI49P) 0

Terminal side of femaletennlnals
14-314 BACK
Transmission Range Switch Test
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 8. Check for continuity between terminals at the
audio system and the navigation system (if switch connector. There should be continuity
equipped). between the terminals in the following table for
each switch position.
then disconnect the positive terminal. Transmission Range Switch Connector
3. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and Position/Connector Terminal/Signal Connections

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4. Remove the under-hood subfuse box from its - D R P GND ~TP

FWD D3
ATP ATP
N RVS NP
base.
P 0 k) Q~
r"""\
R 0 '-J D
5. Remove the intake air duct and air cleaner housing. N 0 0 ro- -0
6. Remove the battery base and battery base bracket. D 0 0-k)
D3 0 ~ k)
connector. 9. Transmission range switch test has finished ifthe
test results are OK.
Ifthere is no continuity between any terminals,
check that the transmission range switch
installation. If the switch installation is OK, replace
the switch (see page 14-316).
BACK 14-315
Transmission Range Switch Replacement '
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the 10. Disconnectthe transmission range switch
audio system and the navigation system (if connector.
equipped).
11. Pry the lock tab of the lock washer (A) on the
2. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, control lever (8), and remove the nut (C), lock
then disconnect the positive terminal. washer, spring washer (D) and control lever.


base.

(A).
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
11.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf.ft) 12. Pry the lock tabs of the lock washer (E) on the
~@
transmission range switch (F), hold the control
shaft (G) with a 6.0 mm wrench, and loosen the
locknut (H).
13. Remove the locknut and lock washer, then remove

the transmission range switch (two bolts).
14. Set the new transmission range switch (A) to the N

position. The transmission range switch clicks in
the N position, and the control shaft hole (8) aligns
with the N position line (C).
c
control lever (E).
B
14-309).
14-316 BACK
15. Set the control shaft to the N position by turning 17. Install the new lock washer (A) over the control
the control shaft with a 6.0 mm wrench. shaft (8) with aligning the projection (e) of the lock
washer with the N positioning line (D) on the
transmission range switch (E), and install the
locknut (F).
16. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently

over the control shaft (8), and install the bolts
loosely.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-31.7
AfT Gear Position Indicator
Transmission Range Switch Replacement (cont'd)
18. Push the locknut againstthe transmission housing 21. Check the connectors for rust; dirt, or oil, clean,
to seat the transmission range switch into the then connect the connector securely.
control shaft, and tighten the locknut (A) to 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft) while holding the controLshaft 22. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole ofthe
(B) with a 6.0 mm wrench (C), then bend the lock synthetic resin bushing in the shift cable end, and
tabs (D) of the lock washer against the locknut. attach the shift cable end to the cont~ol lever, then
D through the shift cable end, and secure the control
25. Install the air cleanerhousing and intake air duct.


c battery hold-down bracket, then connect battery
terminals.
28. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
through all positions, and check the transmission
19. Tighten the bolts (E) to 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft) range switch synchronization with the AfT gear
securing the transmission range switch. position indicator.
20. Install the control lever (A), spring washer (B), lock 29. Check that the engine will start in the P and N
washer (C), and locknut (D) on the control shaft (E). positions, and will not start in any other shift lever
position.
30. Check that the back-up lights come on when the

shift lever is in the R position.
31. Allow the all four wheels to rotate freely, then start
the engine, and check the shift lever operation.

(see page 17-28).

(see page 22-259).
16N·m
11.6 kgf·m, 12Ibf·ft)
14-318 BACK
Transmission Gear Selection Transmission Gear Selection
Switch Test Switch Replacement
1. Remove the driver's center console trim (see step 5 NOTE: The transmission gear selection switch is not
on page 20-107). available separately from the shift lever bracket base;
replace the transmission gear selection switch
2. Disconnect the transmission gear selection switch/ (including park pin switch and AIT gear position
park pin switch/AIT gear position indicator panel indicator panel light harness) and select lever bracket
light harness connector. base as an assembly.
Replace the transmission gear selection switch and

shift lever bracket base assembly (see page 14-307).
3. Check for continuity between connector terminals

No.3 and No.2.
There should be continuity when the shift lever is in
the M position, and no continuity when the shift
lever is in any position other than M.

No.7 and No.2.
There should be continuity when the shift lever is
pushed toward the upshift position (+), and no
continuity with the shift lever released to the
neutral position.

No.8 and No.2.
There should be continuity when the shift lever is
pulled toward the downshift position (-), and no
continuity with the shift lever released to the
neutral position.
6. If the switch fails to work properly, replace the

transmission gear selection switch and shift lever
bracket base as an assembly (see page 14-307). The
transmission gear selection switch, park pin switch,
and AIT gear position indicator panel light harness
are not available separately from the shift lever
bracket base.
7. Install the driver's center console trim (see step 5

on page 20-107).
BACK 14-319
AIT Gear Position Indicator Panel AIT Gear Position Indicator Panel
Light Harness Replacement Light Bulb Replacement
NOTE: The AfT gear position indicator panel light 1. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-304).
harness is not available from separately the shift lever
bracket base; replace the AfT gear position indicator 2. Remove the AfT gear position indicator panel light
panel light harness (including transmission gear . socket from the indicator panel.
selection switch and park pin switch) and select lever
bracket base as an assembly. 3. Remove the indicator panel light bulb from the
socket, and replace the bulb with a new one.
Replace the AfT gear position indicator panel light
harness and shift lever bracket base assembly 4. Install the new bulb in the socket, and install the
(see page 14-307). socket in the indicator panel.
14-320 BACK
AIT Interlock System
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID PARK PIN SWITCH

Shift Lock System Circuit Key InterlockLock System Circuit
Troubleshooting, page 14-323 Troubleshooting, page 14-328
Test, page 14-330 Test, page 14-332
SHIFT LOCK STOP STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY
SHIFT LOCK STOP CUSHION KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID
Replacement, page 14-331 Key Interlock Lock System Circuit
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE Troubleshooting, page 14-328
BACK 14-321
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HODD RJS£/RB.AY BOX

No,1111SAl
r-~~--------~----------------------------------MIT---------------------------.
IGNmON SWITCH
No,1U20Al NoJ(lGllSOAl BAT IGl
ot~----1r~~"~----~-------W~------------------,
GAUGE CONlllOL MDDULE
rr==t~~~~i1 A7 VEL
AfT
T
GEAR
POSmoN
INDICATOR
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
MIT
CAN
CONIlIOLLER
BRAKE
__ ~ _ .----"".. DATAUNX
I/--+--t+---=~=-- BRN ~ BRN ----v ~~rECTOR PEDAL
POSmON
SWITCH
~~~~--~D---------~
~-----"'-"'~""'---- PUR ------------''-1

r-~~=-----MIT---------~ ACCELERATOR LTGRN
PEDAL
POsmON
'---'=4"""---- ORN - - - - - - " - 1 I SENSOR
h---"=~""----LTGRN -----~
r-~~~---GRN------~
~---"'=-~-- LTGRN ----------~==~--------~
SHIFT
LOC1(
SOLENOID rm ~D
BLI(
-IJ:=
-I 2
YEL
PNK
-{jr--
GSOl
~
B44
S~
PNK --...:..:..¢-==----"
PGl
--"'=~=-- RED/WHT - - - - - - - - - - - ,
--"!=~=-- BLU/YEL - - - - - - - - - ,
~~~~----~D-------_.
-~~~--~WGRN
---'=-"~=----~JBLK
STARTER
LTGRN
~ BLK---tM F_;-L-C4-=.B:'-<)-~'-'G=-1
CUT RELAY
PARK
---t
I ill
PIN ' GRN GRN
SWITCH BLK 1
--,
~~
T MIT
~~N/yEL
LTBLU I
GRN BLU/BLK BLI(
B41 LG2
G503 Gl0l
:=:===~
MULTIPLEX
~---------IP-~N
ATPP
INTEGRATED
----<:J CONlllOL
[g:'
UNDER-DASH UNITIMICUI
PUR fUSE/RELAYBOX
KEY No.3Z110AI
INTERLOCK
SOLENOID
BRN - - - - - - - - - - I K E Y S O L
[C,
PNK ---------~IGKEYSW
IGNmoN
BLI(~
KEY BKSW
SWITCH
G502 PCM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
11' , 3 4 I 5.1 6J 7 'l.JloJ

I" 12 13VVL16UI'6 19 2~21
12345878910
" 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
1
"
,
12
3 .• • 7
•
1616 17 1a 192021
• 10
["V 2. X 25 X 26 27126 X X X
...,
222324 25 26 Z4X 25 '62"8
129 30 31 32VVVI'6 '7 ,&[>_
II" ., .. 43144JLI" 471" ..
129 13031 32 133 1"1"1"" 381391
.. ., "1/ 44 •• 461/1/1/1 .. 43 44 ....
VII V 32 1,,1 34VlLI 37 138 [39
47 48 49
AI4SPI 0 BI4SPI b CI49P1 0

Terminal sida of female terminals
14-322 BACK
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting .
1. Connect the HOS to the OLC. 7. Shift the shift lever into the P position, and press
the brake pedal. Do not press the accelerator.
2. Choose Shift Lock Solenoid Test i'n the
Misce"aneous Test Menu, and check that the shift 8. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid
lock solenoid operates with the HOS. connector terminals No.1 and No.2 while pressing
the brake pedal.
NOTE: If the HOS does not comrtlUhicate with the
PCM, troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
11-223).
Does the shift lock solenoid work properly?
YES-Go to step 14.

1G1lVELI~
l.§> .UHPNI<]
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Remove driver's center console trim (see step 5 on

page 20-107).
4. Oisconnectthe shift lock solenoid connector.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there battery voltage?
6. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid YES-Go to step 9.

connector terminal No.1 and body ground ..
NO-Go to step 10.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENO,D CONNECTOR
.; ,.
cfm·
i'IYEl'
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check for a blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the

under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, repair
open or short in the wire between the shift lock
solenoid connector terminal No.1 and the under-
dash fuse/relay box.•
(cont'd)
BACK 14-323
AfT Interlock System
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd),
9. Release the brake pedal, and measure the voltage 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
between shift lock solenoid connector terminals
No.1 and No.2. The shift lever must be in the P 11. JumptheSCS line with the HDS.
position.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
terminal A2and shift lock solenoid connector
terminal No.2.
~
IG1IYEU ~LS IPNO'
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID CONNECTOR
SLS(PNK)
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM Wire side of Terminal side of
connector terminal A2 and the shift lock solenoid .• female terminals female terminals
NO-Check the shift lock mechanism. If the /s there continuity?

mechanism is OK, replace the shift lock solenoid
(see page 14-330) .• YES-Substitute a knoyvn-good PCM (see page
14-9) and recheck.. '

connector terminal A2 and the shift lock solenoid .•
14-324 BACK
14. Press the brake pedal. 19. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A8 and brake pedal position switch 4P
Are the brake lights ON? connector terminal No.2.
YES-Go to step 15. BRAKE PEDAL PCM CONNECTOR A 149Pl

POSITION SWITCH
4P CONNECTOR
NO-Repair faulty brake light circuit .•

BK SW II..i GRNI

terminalA8 and body ground while pressing the Wire side of . Terminal side of
brake pedal and when the brake pedal is released. female terminals female terminals
PCM CONNECTOR A 149PI Is there continuity?
YES-Substitute a known-good PCM (see page

14-9) and recheck.•

connector terminal A8 and the brake pedal position
switch .•
Is there battery voltage while the brake pedal is

pressed, and no voltage when the pedal is
released?
YES-Go to step 20; !
NO-Go to step 19.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-325
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
20. ConnectPCM connector A (49P). 26. Check for continuity betweenPCM connector
connector.
ATPP(GRN)

.0.,
~
=
ATP P (BLU/BLK) NO (BLK) Terminal side of female terminals
I 1 2 3 4 5 Is there continuity?
6 7 8 9 10 YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
Wire side of female terminals switch connector.. .
NO-Go to step 27.

YES-Go to step 28. terminal A 16 and transmission range switch
NO-Go to step 24.
TRANSMISSION RANGE PCM CONNECTOR A (49P)
SWITCH CONNECTOR
,------{.o.l-------,
ATP P (BLU/BLK) I ATP P (GRN)
11 2 3 415 617 691101

I 1 2 3 4 5 1111213/VI 6VI16 9 20 211
I22V~X 25IX 26~26J
6 7 8 9 10 J29 30 31 2V /VJ36 37 361391
J40 41 42 43J44VI46 47 46 49L

YES-Go to step 28.

switch connector.•
14-326 BACK
28. Check for continuity between transmission range 29. Test the transmission range switch (see page
switch connector terminal No.5 and body ground. 14-315).
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR Is the switch OK?

GND(BLKI
YES-Go to step 30.
1 234 5 NO-Replace the transmission range switch
6 7 8 9 10 (see page 14-316).•
30. Connect the HOS to the OLC .

.Q
31. Check the accelerator pedal position sensor 1 in the
data list with the HOS. 00 not press the accelerator.
Is the accelerator pedal position sensor 1 opening
11 % and above, or the sensor 1 voltage 0.90 V
Is there continuity? and above?
YES-Substitute a known-good PCM (see page YES-Check the throttle body (see page 11-362).•
14-91 and recheck .•
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-9)
NO-Repair open in the wire between transmission and recheck .•
(G101), or repair poor ground (G101) .•
BACK 14-327
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 7. Remove driver's center console trim (see step 5 on
SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the page 20-107).
precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
doing repair or service. 8. Disconnect transmission gear selection switch/park
pin switch/AfT gear position indicator panel light
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC()). The shift· lever connector;
must be in the P position.
9. Check for continuity between transmission gear
2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly connector. selection switch/park pin switch/AfT gear position
indicator panel light connector terminal No.4 and
3. Check if the ignition switch can be turned to the body ground.
LOCK (0) position.
Can the ignition switch be turned the LOCK (0) PARK PIN SWITCH/A/T GEAR POSITION
position? INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock

assembly (see page 17-29) .•

=
5. Shift the shift lever into any position other than P. Wire side of female terminals
6. Check for continuity between steering lock

assembly connector terminal No.3 and body Is there continuity?
ground.
YES-Repair short in the wire between
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR
transmission gear selection switch/park pin switch/
AfT gear position indicator panel light connector
terminal No.4 and the MICU .•
NO-Go to step 10.
YES-Repair a short in the wire between key

interlock solenoid and the MICU .•
NO-Go to step 7.
14-328 BACK
10. Shift the shift lever into the P position. 12. Disconnectthe multiplex integrated control unit
30P connector.
11. Check for continuity between transmission gear
selection switch/park pin switch/A/T gear position 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
indicator panel light connector terminals No.1 and
No.4. Do not push the shift lever button. 14. Measure the voltage between multiplex integrated
control unit 30P connector terminal No. 16 and
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION SWITCH/ body ground.
INDICATOR PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR
MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED CONTROL UNIT
30P CONNECTOR
Terminal side of female terminals =

YES-Replace the park pin switch (see page 14-332) Is there battery voltage when the shift lever is in
and shift lever bracket base (see page 14-307). The any position other than the P position, and no
park pin switch, transmission gear selection switch, voltage when the shift lever is in the P position?
and A/T gear position indicator panel light harness
are not available separately from the shift lever YES-Substitute aknown"90od multiplex
bracket base.• integrated control unit (MICU) and recheck .•
NO-Go to step 12. NO-Repair open or short in the wire between the
MICU and the transmission range switch .•
BACK 14~329
Shift Lock Solenoid Test Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement
1. Connect the HOS to the OLC (A). 1. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-304).
2. Remove the shift lock release (A).
2. Choose Shift Lock Solenoid Test in the

Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift
lock solenoid operates with the HOS.
NOTE: If the HOS does not communicate with the 3. Remove the shift lock solenoid (B) and harness
PCM, troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see pag.e connector (C), and replace the shift lock solenoid.
11-223).
4. Apply silicone grease to joint of the new shift lock
3. Check that the shift lever can be moved out ofthe P solenoid plunger (0) and shift lock stop (E).
position when Shift Lock Solenoid: ON. Move the
shift lever back in the P position, and make sure it 5. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger and plunger
locks with Shift Lock Solenoid: OFF. spring (F) in the shift lock solenoid.
4. Check that the shift lock releases when the shift 6. Install the new shift lock solenoid by aligning the
lock release is pushed, and check that it locks when joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip
the shift lock release is released. of the shift lock stop, then push the shift lock
solenoid into the shift lever bracket base securely.
5. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly,
perform shift lock system troubleshooting 7. Install the shift lock solenoid connector on the shift
(see page 14-323). lever bracket base.
14-330 BACK
Shift Lock Stop, Shift Lock Stop Shift Lock Release Replacement
Cushion Replacement
1. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-304).
1. Remove the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-330). 2. Remove the shift lock release, and replace it.
2. Remove the shift lock stop (A) and stop cushion (B),
and replace the shift lock stop or stop cushion.

3. Install the shift lock stop cushion on the shift lock
stop.
4. Apply silicone grease to the pin (e) on the shift

lever bracket base, and install the shift lock stop
overthe pin.
5. Install the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-330).
BACK 14-331
Park Pin Switch Test Park Pin Switch Replacement
1. Remove the driver's center console trim (see step 5 NOTE: The park pin switch is not available separately
on page 20-107). from the shift lever bracket base; replace the park pin
switch (including the transmission gear selection switch
2. Disconnect the transmission gear selection switch/ and AfT gear position indicator panel light harness) and
park pin switch/AfT gear position indicator panel select lever bracket base as an assembly.
light connector.
Replace the park pin switch and shift lever bracket base
assembly (see page 14-307).
3. Shift the shift lever into the P position, and check

for continuity between transmission gear selection
switch/park pin switch/AfT gear position indicator
panel light connector terminals No.1 and No.4.
There should be no continuity.
4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity

between connector terminals No.1 and No.4.
5. If the park pin switch fails the test, replace the park
pin switch and shift lever bracket base as an
assembly (see page 14-307). The park pin switch,
transmission gear selection switch, and AfT gear
position indicator panel light harness are not
available separately from the shift lever bracket
base.
6. Install the driver's center console trim (see step 5

on page 20-107).
14-332 BACK
Transmission Disassembly

Mainshaft holder set 07GAB-PF50101
1. Remove the ATF dipstick (D) and the dipstick tube (E).
W V
2. Remove AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B (six bolts), ATF feed pipes (F) (three), O-rings (three),
and gasket.
3. Remove the solenoid valve cover (G) (seven bolts), dowel pins (two), and gasket.
4. Disconnect the solenoid valve connectors, then remove the solenoid harness connector (H).
5. Remove AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (four bolts), ATF feed pipes (I) (three), O-rings (two), and
gasket.
6. Pry the lock tab of the lock washer (J) on the control lever (K), and remove the nut, lock washer, spring washer,
and control lever.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-333
Transmission Disassembly (cont'd)
7. Pry up the lock tabs of the lock washer (K) on the 18. Cut the lock tab (A) of the mainshaft locknut (8)
transmission range switch (L), hold the selector using a chisel (C).
control shaft (M) with a 6.0 mm wrench, and loosen
the locknut (N). NOTE: Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
transmission.
8. Remove the locknut and lock washer, then remove
the transmission range switch (two bolts).
9. Remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor

(0), output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (P),
and sensor washer (Q).
10. Remove the ATF temperature sensor connector

from the connector bracket (R) and the harness
clamp from the clamp bracket, then remove the
ATF temperature sensor (5).
11. Remove the connector bracket (R) and 6.0 mm bolt

(T), then remove the line bolts (U), ATF cooler lines
(V), and sealing washers (W).
19. Remove the locknut (A) from the mainshaft (8).
12. Remove the end cover (X) (three bolts), snap ring
cap (V) (two bolts), sealing plug (Z), and washer
(AA).
13. Remove the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch (88) and sealing washer.
14. Remove the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch (CC) and sealing washer.
15. Removethe 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch (DD) and sealing washer.
16. Remove the transmission ground terminal (EE).
17. Slip the mainshaft holder onto the mainshaft. 20. Pry the lock washer (C), and remove it.
07GAB-PF50101
14-334 BACK
21. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts (A) (23 bolts), special bolt (8), transmission hanger (C), and
ground terminals bracket (D).
6x 1.0mm
I~
J ~
p
(cont'd)
BACK 14-335
22. While expanding the snap ring ofthe countershaft 29. Remove the park pawl stop (K), park pawl (L), pawl
bearing using the snap ring pliers, lift the spring (M), and pawl shaft (N).
transmission housing.
30. Remove the mainshaft (0), countershaft (P), shift
fork (J), and secondary shaft (Q) together, and
remove the needle bearing (R) from the torque
converter housing.
23. Release the pliers( and. remove the transmission

housing (E), two dowel pins (F), and gasket.
24. Remove the ATF feed pipes (G) (four) from the
accumulator body.
25. Remove the ATF feed pipes (H) (two) from the
torque converter housing.
26. Remove the mainshaft holder from the mainshaft.
27. Pry the lock tab of the lock washer (I) on the shift
fork (J), then remove the bolt and lock washer.
R
28. Unlock the detent spring from the detent arm.
31. Remove the selector control shaft and park lever
link (S).
32. Remove the baffle plate (T).
33. Remove the differential assembly (U).
34. Remove the transfer output shaft (V).
35. Remove the baffle plate (W).
36. Remove the intermediary shaft (X).
14-336 BACK
37. Remove the ATF .
. . stramer (A) (one bolt).
(cont'd)
BACK 14-337
38. Remove the accumulator body (8) (11 bolts), dowel 50. Clean the inlet opening (A) ofthe ATF strainer (8)
pins (two), detent arm (C), arm shaft (D), and thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it
separator plate (E). is good condition and that inlet opening is not
clogged.
39. Remove the ATF feed pipe (F) from the main valve
body.
40. Remove the secondary valve body (G) (one bolt),

dowel pins (two), and separator plate (H). Do not let
the check balls (I) (two) fall out.
41. Remove the regulator valve body (J) (seven bolts),

stator shaft (K), stator shaft stop (L), dowel pins
(two), and separator plate (M).
42. Remove the main valve body (N) (8 mm: three bolts,
6 mm: seven bolts). Do not let the lubrication check
valve (0) fall out.
A
43. Remove the torque converter check valve (P) and
valve spring (Q). 51. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through
the inlet opening, and replace if it is clogged or
44. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft (R), then damaged.
remove the ATF pump gears (5).
45. Remove the dowel pins (two) and main separator

plate (T).
46. Remove the ATF passage pipe (U).
47. Remove the ATF magnet (V), clean it, then reinstall.
48. Remove the O-ring (W) from the ATF strainer, and
replace the new O-ring when reassembling the
transmission.
49. Remove the O-ring (X) from the stator shaft, and
replace the new O-ring when reassembling the
transmission.
14-338 BACK
Transmission Housing
Rever$e Idler ,Gear Removal! Reverse Id~er,Gear Disassemblyl

Installation ,,' Inspection/Reassembly
. 1. Remove the reverse idler gear assembly (A) from 1. Remove tl;1~, snap r.ifl9 ,(~), then remove the thr!Jst
the transmission housing. washer (8), reverse idler gear (C), needle bearings
(0), and thrust washer (E) from the reverse idler
8x1.25mm
26N·m ,.gearsha:fl/holder (F). . . '.
12.7 kgf·m, 20 Ibf·ft)
2. Install the reverse idler gear assembly with the two 2. Inspect the reverse idler gear and gear shaft for
dowel pins (8) in the transmission housing. excessive wear and damage.
3. Inspect the needle bearings for galling and rough

movement.
4. Install the thrust washer and needle bearings over

the gear shaft.
5. Install the reverse idler gear in the direction shown.
6. Install the thrust washer, then install the snap ring

to secure the idler gear.
BACK 14-339
Tran$mission Housing
Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap Secondary Shaft ATF'Feed Pipe Cap
1. Coverthe tip of the ,1 st-holdclutch ATF feedpipe 1. Install the new O-rings (A) on the ATF feed pipe cap
. with 'a shop rag. ; ';)':" (8).
2. Apply air pressure to the ATF feed pipe hole ofthe

1st-hold clutch pressure circuit, and remove the
ATF feed pipe cap from the transmission housing.
2. Install the ATF feed pipe cap in the transmission

housing. Do not pinch the O-rings.
14-340 BACK
Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pip,e Cap, ATF Filter ,Removal/Inspection/
Feed Pipe Replacement Installation
1. Remove the ATFfe.~d pipe cap from the 1. Remove the three 6.0 mm bolts securing the ATF
transmission housing (see page 14-340). filter cover (A) and ATF pipe (B).
2. Remove the snap ring (A) from the feed pipe cap F ,.
6x 1.0mm
(B), then remove the feed pipe guide (C), O-rings 12N·m E ,"
(0) (E), and 1st clutch ATF feed pipe (F). 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf.ft) 6x 1.0mm
12N·m
~ _ _- D
2. Remove the ATF pipe from the ATF filter cover, and
3. Replace the 1st clutch ATF feed pipe or 1st-hold remove the ATF filter (C) from the cover.
ch,ltch ATF feed pipe/ATF feed pipe cap assembly.
The 1st-hold clutch ATF feed pipe/ATF feed pipe 3. Clean the ATF filter, then check that it is in good
cap is not available separately. condition, and is not clogged. Replace the ATF filter
if it is clogged or damaged.
4. Install the new O-ring (0) ·over the 1st clutch ATF
feed pipe, then install the feed pipe over the 1st- 4. Install the ATF filter with the new O-ring (0) in the
hold clutch ATF feed pipe (G) while aligning the filter cover, and, install the ATF pipe in the cover,
feed pipe tabs (H). with the guide in the cap. then install them in the transmission housing.
5. Install the new O-ring (E) in the cap and feed pipe 5. Secure the ATF filter cover with the two bolts (E),
guide, then secure the guide with the ~nap ring. then secure the ATF pipe with the bolt (F).
BACK 14-341
Tran'smission Housing
Mainshaft BearingRemova,~ - , MainshaftBearing Installation '

• Driver 07749-0010000 • Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 ' • Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD~PX40100
1. To remove the mainshaft bearing, expand the snap 1. Install the bearing in the direction shown.
ring with the snap ring pliers, then pusl1 ,the bearing
out. Do not remove the snap ring unless' it~s"
necessary to ci~an ihe groovefl'1 the housing.
077_'~
07NAD-~
f
07NDA-PX40100
2. Expand the snap ring with the snap ring pliers, and
insert the bearing part-way into the housing.
3. Release the pliers"then push the bearing down into

housing until the snap rlhg snaps in place around it.
4. After installing the bearing, verify that the snap ring

(A) is seated in the bearing' and housing groove,
'and that the ring end gap (B)'is :0-7 mm (0""'0.28 in.).
, ..
~
B
" i
14-342 BACK
Intermediary Shaft Bearing Park Lever Shaft Bearing
Replacement Replacement

• Bearing remover shaft set, 20 mm 07936-3710600 • Bearing remover shaft, 10 mm 07936-GE00100
• Bearing remover shaft handle 07936-3710100 • Bearing remover head, 10 mm 07936-GE00200
• Sliding hammer weight 07741-0010201 • Sliding hammer weight 07741-0010201
• Driver 07749-0010000 • Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 • Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800
1. Remove the intermediary shaft bearing from the 1. Remove the park lever shaft bearing from the
transmission housing using the bearing remover transmission housing using the bearing remover
shaft set (20 mm), the bearing shaft handle, and the head (10 mm), the bearing remover shaft (10 mm),
sliding hammer weight. and the sliding hammer weight.
07936-3710100
07936-GE00100
07741-0010201
2. Install the new bearing until it bottoms in the 2. Install the new bearing until it bottoms in the
transmission housing using the driver and the transmission housing using the driver and the
attachment (37 x 40 mm). attachment (22 x 24 mm).
07749-0010000
BACK 14-343
Transmission Housing
Selector CQntrol Shaft Bearing Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal


• Bearing remover shaft, 10 mm 07936-GE00100 • Driver 07749-0010000
• Bearing remOver head, 10mm 07936-GE00200 • Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800
• Sliding hammer weight 07741-0010201
• Driver 077 49-0010000 1. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing.
• Attachment, 22 x 24 rnm07746-0010800
1. Remove the control shaft bearing from the

transmission housing using the bearing remover
head (10 mm), the bearing remover shaft (10mm),
and the sliding hammer weight.
2. Install the new oil seal in the transmission housing

using the driver and the attachment (22 x 24 mm).
07936-GE00200 ~ 'Z:~~""N>fI'"
~S9
2. Install the new bearing in the transmission housing
using the driver and the attachment (22 x 24 mm).
07749-0010000 ~
14-344 BACK
Valve Body
Valve Body Repair
NOTE: Valve body repair is only necessary if one or 6. Coat the valve with ATF, then drop it into its bore. It
more ofthe valves in a valve body do not slide should drop to the bottom of the bore under its
smoothly in their bores. Use this procedure to free the own weight. If not, repeat steps 4 and 5, then retest.
valves. If the valve still sticks, replace the valve body.
1. Soak a sheet of # 600 abrasive paper in ATF for

about 30 minutes.
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve

drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a
small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful
not to scratch the bore with the screwdriver.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-
soaked # 600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and
dry it with compressed air.
4. Roll up half ofthe ATF-soaked #600 paper and

insert it in the valve bore of the sticking valve. Twist
the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits the bore
tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the paper
as you push it in and out. 7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the
valve body with solvent. Dry all parts with
NOTE: The valve body is aluminum and doesn't compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
require much polishing to remove any burrs. lubricant.
5. Remove the # 600 paper. Thoroughly wash the

entire valve body in solvent, then dry it with
compressed air.
BACK 14-345
Valve Body
Valve Body Valve Installation
1. Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence

shown forthe main valve body (see page 14-347),
secondary valve body (see page 14-349), regulator
valve body (see page 14-350), and accumulator
body (see page 14-351). Refer to the following
valve cap illustrations, and install each valve cap so
the end shown facing up will be facing the outside
of the valve body, then secure the valve cap with
the valve cap clip.
3. Install the valve (A) and valve spring (8) in the valve
body. Push the valve spring in with a screwdriver,
then install the spring seat (C).
14-346 BACK
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Blowout all passages.
2. Inspect the main valve body for scoring and damage.
3. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to valve body repair (see page 14-345).
4. Coat all parts with ATF during assembly.
5. Replace the filter with new one, and install it and the lubrication check valve inthe direction shown.
TORQUE CONVERTER LOCK-UP

CHECK VALVE SHIFT VALVE SHIFT
~
VALVEE
A~
B MANUAL
LUBRICATION
,~
~. \J
V\ALVE
,~c L~~~FJEA
~i\J /.
CHECK VALVE
$V~ E
~"'
RELIEF VALVE'
K \
J} ~~6
~y~~~ I
\
\~F
MODULATOR
\J ~ H
1
VALVE
LOCK-UP
TIMING VALVE
6 ®
\~ ~~"- SHIFT
LUBRICATION \J ~" G
MAIN VALVE BODY VALVEB
CONTROL VALVE \J ~
SERVO
CONTROL VALVE CPC VALVE A
VALVE SPRING SPECIFICATIONS

Valve Springs Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)
Wire Diameter 0.0. Free Length No. of Coils
A Torque converter check valve spring 1.1 (0.043) 8.6 (0.339) 34.3 (1.350) 10.1
B Lock-up shift valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 6.6 (0.260) 35.5 (1.398) 18.2
C Shift valve E spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 42.4 (1.669) 17.6
D Shift valve A spring 0.9 (0.035) 6.6 (0.260) 50.5 (1.988) 23.3
E Shift valve B spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
F Modulator valve spring 1.6 (0.063) 10.4 (0.409) 33.5 (1.319) 9.8
G CPC valve A spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
H Servo control valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 9.6 (0.378) 30.2 (1.189) 8.4
I Lubrication control valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 8.7 (0.343) 25.0 (0.984) 7.2
J Lock-up timing valve spring 0.6 (0.024) 6.6 (0.260) 30.9 (1.217) 11.1
K Relief valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 9.6 (0.378) 28.1 (1.106) 7.7
BACK 14-347
Valve Body
ATF Pump Inspection
1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B), 2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive
and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main gear (A) and driven gear (B).
valve body (0). Lubricate all parts with ATF, and
install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance
and chamfered side facing up. Standard (New):
ATF Pump Drive Gear:
0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083-0.00104 in.)
ATF Pump Driven Gear:
0.070-0.125 mm (0.0028-0.0050 in.)
3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure

the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven
gear (A) and the valve body (B) with a straight edge
(C) and a feeler gauge (0).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial)

Clearance: . .
Service Limit: 0.Q7 mm (0.003 in.)
c
14-348 BACK
Secondary Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls, it may magnetize the check baHs.
3. Inspect the secondary valve body for scoring and damage.
i1D
SHIFT VALVE C
CHECK BALL
~
/~~
~
REVERSE
CONTROL VALVE
F",,) E
CpCVALVE.
@~,;/
SECONDARY VALVE BODY
\J
A CPC valve C spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
B Shift valve 0 spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 42.4 (1.669) 17.6
C Reverse CPC valve spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.1 (0.240) 24.4 (0.961) 14.6
0 Shift valve C spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
E CPC valve B spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
F Reverse control valve sprino 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
BACK 14-349
Valve Body
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly·
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry them with compressed air. Blow outall passages.
2. Inspect the regulator valve body for scoring and damage.
3. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded.
Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop out.
6. Align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the stop bolt hole, then press the spring cap into the valve body,
and tighten the stop bolt.
7. Install the servo valve with the new O-ring, and 3rd accumulator piston with the new O-ring.
ACCUMULATOR COVER 6x 1.0 mm

12 N·m (1.2 kgf.m, 8.7 Ibf·ttl
------... occ-
e VALVE SPRING CAP
------
3RD ACCUMULATOR A B
~
PISTON ""-
~0 COOLER CHECK VALVE
Q-~D
~~ E1 / . - - - - - VALVE CAP
6x1.0mm
Replace.
___ I:) £I\)~_VALVECAPCUP
.<.~\ \ ~VALVE
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ttl
SLEEVE
LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE

C
¥~ AIR CHECK VALVES

~ 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m,14Ibf.ttl
"'- ~ SEALING WASHER

. ""- Replace.
~~ REGULATOR VALVE
~D
SERVO VALVE/
SHIFT FORK SHAFT
~
~E
/
O-RING
~ F
Replace. ~REGULATOR SPRING CAP
A 3rd accumulator spring 3.1 (0.122) 19.6 (0.772) 41.4 (1.630) 5.5
B Cooler check valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 6.7 (0.264) 31.5 (1.240) 14.2
C Lock-up control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 42.9 (1.689) 14.2
0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 44.3 (1.744) 25.5
D Regulator valve spring B 1.4 (0.055) 8.8 (0.346) 44.0 (1.732) 12.0
E Regulator valve spring A 1.85 (0.073) 14.7 (0.579) 86.9 (3.421) 16.2
F Stator reaction sprinQ 5.5 (0.217) 37.4 (1.472) 30.3 (1.193) 2.1
14-350 BACK
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
2. Inspect the accumulator body for scoring and damage.
4. Replace the O-rings with new ones.
______ SNAP RING
O-RING
Replace.
~_SPRING CAP
SPRING SEAT ~_ A
~.~ ~ ~ 4TH ACCUMULATOR PISTON
:/
1ST-HOLD ACCUMULATOR PISTON
E---: 1
1 :
: I ___ B
F _____ ~
~ 1 :--
U ~ ~ 2ND ACCUMULATOR PISTON

~~ C A ____ O-RING
lITH ACCUMULAT~ 0-
~
0
Replace.
. O~SNAPRING
___ 1ST ACCUMULATQR PISTON
~.--O-RING
O-RING /
Replace.
SNAP RING
Replace.
0--- SNAP RING

Valve Springs Standard: (New)-Unit mm (in.)
A 4th accumulator spring 3.3 (0.130) 19.6 (0.772) 39.1 (1.539) 5.8
B 2nd accumulator spring 3.1 (0.122) 19.6 (0.772) 53.4 (2.102) 7.5
C 1st accumulator spring A 2.3 (0.091) 19.6 (0.772) 60.8 (2.394) 9.5
D 1st accumulator spring B 2.5 (0.098) 12.8 (0.504) 46.0 (1.811) 9.5
E 5th accumulator spring A 2.4 (0.094) 19.6 (0.772) 65.5 (2.579) 12.0
F 5th accumulator spring B 2.6 (0.102) 13.2 (0.520) 50.5 (1.988) 10.1
G 1st-hold accumulator sprinQ 2.0 (0.079) 13.1 (0.516) 42.9 (1.689) 9.8
BACK
14-351
Valve Body
Shift Solenoid Valve Removal and Installation
NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve connector to 5. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by
remove and install the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure to
the solenoid valve body. position the mounting bracket on top ofthe bracket
of shift solenoid valve A.
1. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the
solenoid valves by holding the solenoid valve body. NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve C before
installing shift solenoid valve A. If shift solenoid
2. Install the new O-rings (E) on each solenoid valves. valve C is installed before installing shift solenoid
valve A, it may damage to hydraulic control system.
NOTE: If you are installing a new solenoid valve, it
comes with new O-rings already installed. 6. Install shift solenoid valve B (brown connector) by
holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure the
mounting bracket contacts the accumulator body.
3. Install shift solenoid valve 0 (black connector) by

holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure to
install mounting bracket contacts to the
accumulator body.
4. Install shift solenoid valve A (black connector) by

holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure to
install mounting bracket contacts to the
accumulator body.
14-352 BACK
Torque Converter Housing
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install the new oil seal flush to the housing using
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm the driver and the attachment (72 x 75 mm).
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
1. Remove the mainshaft bearing and oil seal using

the adjustable bearing puller (25-40 mm) and a
commercially available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
2. Install the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in

the housing using the driver and the attachment
(62x68 mm).
BACK
14-353
Countershaft Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install the bearing (A) in the housing using the
• Adjustable bearirig puller, 25-40 mm driver and the attachment (78 x 80 mm); install
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A bearing outer notch-cut (B) in depth (e) of
• Driver 07749-0010000 0-0.03 mm (0-0.001 in.) below the housing
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 surface (D).
07749-0010000
1. Remove the countershaft bearing from the torque
converter housing using the adjustable bearing
puller (25-'40 mm) and a commercially available
3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
07NAD-PX40100
07736-A01000B or
07736-A01000A
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A) into the housing,

then install the new bearing (B) in the direction
shown.
BACK
14-354
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the ATF guide collar from the torque
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm converter housing.
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
• Bearing remover shaft set, 30 mm 07936-8890300
• Bearing remover shaft handle 07936-3710100
• Sliding hammer weight 07741-0010201
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Remove the bolt, then remove the lock washer (A)

and bearing set plate (B).
4. Remove the 29 x 39 x 9.5 mm secondary shaft

bearing from the torque converter housing using
the bearing remover shaft set (30 mm), the bearing
remover shaft handle, and the sliding hammer
weight.
2. Remove the secondary shaft bearing from the

torque converter housing using the adjustable
bearing puller (25-40 mm) and a commercially
available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
(cont'd)
BACK 14-355
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
5. Install the 29 x 39 x 9.5 mm bearing into the torque 7. Install the bearing in the direction shown in the
converter housing using the driver and the housing using the driver and the attachment
attachment (37 x 40 mm). (62x68 mm).
077 46-0010200
07746-0010500
6. Install the new a-rings (A) on the ATF guide collar

(8), then install the guide collar in the torque
converter housing.
8. Check that the bearing groove aligns with the set
plate mounting surface, then install the set plate (A)
by aligning it with the bearing groove.
9. Install the new lock washer (8) and bolt, then bend
the lock tab of the lock washer against the bolt head.
14-356 BACK
Intermediary Shaft Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Drive the bearing into the housing using the driver
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm and the attachment (52 x 55 mm).
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
• Driver 077 49-0010000
• Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
07749-0010000
1. Remove the intermediary shaft bearing from the
torque converter housing using the adjustable
bearing puller (25-40 mm) and a commercially
available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
07746-0010400
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A), then install the new
bearing (B) in the housing.
BACK
14-357
Park Lever Shaft Bearing Replacement

• Bearing remover shaft set, 12 mm 07936-1660101
• Sliding hammer weight 077 41-0010201
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 97746-0010800
1. Remove the park lever shaft bearing from the

torque converter housing using the bearing
remover shaft set (12 mm) and the sliding hammer
weight.
07741-0010201
07936-1660101
2. Install the new bearing until it bottoms in the

housing using the driver and the attachment
(22 x24 mm).
077 49-001 0000 077 46-0010800
14-358 BACK
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the thrust needle bearing (A), mainshaft 2. Inspect the condition ofthe sealing rings (I). Ifthe
5th gear (B), needle bearing (C), thrust needle sealing rings are worn, distorted, or damaged,
bearing (D), mainshaft 5th gear collar (E), 4th/5th remove the set ring (J) and needle bearing (K),
clutch (F), and O-rings (G) from the mainshaft (H). and replace the sealing rings with new ones.
3. Inspectthethrust needle bearing and needle

bearing for wear and rough movement.
B
4. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
5. Inspect the 4th gear for wear and damage, and

inspect the 4th gear bearing for wear and rough
rotation.
6. Replace the mainshaft 4th gear (L) if the 4th gear is

worn or damaged, or the bearing is worn or
damaged.
7. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and

excessive wear.
8. Lubricate all parts with ATF during reassembly.
9. Wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent O-ring

damage, install the new O-rings on the mainshaft,
then remove the tape.
10. Install the 4th/5th clutch.
11. Install the mainshaft 5th gear collar, thrust needle

bearing, needle bearing, mainshaft 5th gear, and
thrust needle bearing .
• .....____K
~
---J
BACK 14-359
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft 4th Gear Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Slide the new mainshaft 4th gear (A) over the
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 mainshaft (B), then press it into place using the
hmo,o,
driver (40 mm I.D.) and the press.
1. Remove the mainshaft 4th gear (A) with the press.
Place a shaft protector (B) between the press and
maiJ"lshaft (e) to prevent damaging the mainshaft.
"4-360 BACK
Countershaft 0" -""""""--------
Isassembly
Exploded V'lew
167 N.m ~ (FLANGE NUT
~ePlace.
LOCKNU
( 7.0 kgf·m, 1231bf.ftl
.I eft-hand th
reads
~
~
NEEDLEBEARINj-e
REVERSE
WASHER
R.pl.".
=~L
R SELECTOR ""
BALL BEARING
~ j~~~nW
6 mm
ASHER,
'@ IDLER GEAR
/
COUNTERSHAFT
~ COTTERS, 40.5 mm
(cont'd)
BACK 14-361
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Disassembly (cont'd)
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 3. Place the countershaft 5th gear (A) on press bases
following procedure. (8), and place a shaft protector (C) between the
countershaft (D) and the press to prevent damaging
1. Cut the locktab (A) off the countershaft locknut (8) the countershaft.
using a chisel (C).
NOTE: Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the

countershaft.
4. Press the countershaft out of the press-fitted

bearing (E) and the press-fitted reverse selector
2. Hold the countershaft with a wrench and a vise hub, and remove the countershaft while holding
securely, loosen the locknut, and remove, it. The the underside of the countershaft. The countershaft
locknut has left-hand threads. falls down when pressing the countershaft out of
the press-fitted reverse selector hub. Some reverse
selector hubs are not press-fitted, and the
countershaft falls down when pressing the
countershaft out of press-fitted bearing.
5. Remove the remaining parts from the countershaft.
6. Inspect the bearing for galling and rough

movement.

excessive wear, and check the shaft splines for
excessive wear and damage.
8. Check the idler gear axial clearance and 4th gear

axial clearance (see page 14-363).
14-362 BACK
Countershaft Idler Gear and 4th Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
1. Install the 40.5 mm cotters (A), 2nd gear (8), thrust 3. Set the dial indicator (A) on the idler gear (8).
needle bearing (C), needle bearing (D), idler gear
(E), thrust needle bearing (F), 61 mm washer (G),
1st gear (H), 4th gear (I), 50.8 mm collar (J),
50.8 mm washer (K), 42.2 mm cotters (L), cotter
retainer (M), and snap ring (N) on the countershaft
(0). Install the 40.5 mm cotters, idler gear, 1st gear,
and 4th gear in the direction shown.
4. Measure the idler gear axial clearance in at least

three places while moving the idler gear. Use the
average as the actual clearance.
Standard: 0.005-0.040 mm (0.0002-0.0016 in.)
2. Insert a feeler gauge blade (A) as thick as possible

between the 50.8 mm collar (8) and 50.8 mm 5. Ifthe measurement is outof standard, remove the
washer (C). 61 mm washer and measure its thickness.
B
/ \ C
------A
(cont'd)
BACK
14-363
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Idler Gear and 4th Gear Axial Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
6. Select and install anew washer, then recheck the 8. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the
clearance. 50.8 mm washer and measure its thickness.
WASHER, 61 mm 9. Select and install a new washer, then recheck the

No. Part Number Thickness clearance.
A 90582-RJF-TOO 1.525 mm (0.0600 in.)
B 90583-RJF-TOO 1.505 mm (0.0593 in.) WASHER, 50.8mm
e 90584-RJF-TOO 1.485 mm (0.0585 in.) No. Part Number Thickness
0 90585-RJ F-TOO . 1.465 mm (0.0577 in.) A 90519-RJ F-TOO 1.91 mm (0.0752 in.)
E 90586-RJF-TOO 1.445 mm (0.0569 in.) B 90520-RJF-TOO. 1.93 mm (0.0760 in.)
F 90587 -RJF-TOO 1.425 mm (0.0561 in.) e 90521-RJ F-TOO 1.95 mm (0.0768 in.)
G 90588-RJ F-TOO 1.405 mm (0.0553 in.) 0 90522-RJF-TOO 1.97 mm (0.0776 in.)
E 90523-RJ F-TOO 1.99 mm (0.0783 in.)
7. Measure the clearance between the 50.8 mm collar F 90524-RJF-TOO 2.01 mm (0.0791 in.)
(A) and the 50.8 mm washer (B) with a feeler gauge G 90525-RJ F-TOO 2.03 mm (0.0799 in.)
(e) in at least three places. Use the average as the H 90526-RJF-TOO 2.05 mm (0.0807 in.)
actual clearance. I 90527 -RJ F-TOO 2.07 mm (0.0815 in.)
J 90528-RJ F-TOO 2.09 mm (0.0823 in.)
Standard: 0.005-0.040 mm (0.0002-0.0016 in.) K 90529-RJ F-TOO 2.11 mm (0.0831 in.)
L 90530-RJ F-TOO 2.13 mm (0.0839 in.)
M 90531-RJ F-TOO 2.15 mm (0.0846 in.)
N 90532-RJF-TOO 2.17 mm (0.0854 in.)
0 90533-RJ F-TOO 2.19 mm (0.0862 in.)
p 90534-RJ F-TOO 2.21 mm (0.0870 in.)
Q 90535-RJ F-TOO 2.23 mm (0.0878 in.)
R 90536-RJ F-TOO 2.25 mm (0.0886 in.)
S 90537 -RJ F-TOO 2.27 mm (0.0894 in.)
T 90538-RJ F-TOO 2.29 mm (0.0902 in.)
U 90539-RJ F-TOO 2.31 mm (0.0909 in.)
V 90540-RJ F-TOO 2.33 mm (0.0917 in.)
W 90541-RJ F-TOO 2.35 mm (0.0925 in.)
X 90542-RJF-TOO 2.37 mm (0.0933 in.)
y 90543-RJ F-TOO 2.39 mm (0.0941 in.)
Z 90544-RJ F-TOO 2.41 mm (0.0949 in.)
AA 90545-RJ F-TOO 2.43 mm (0.0957 in.)
AB 90546-RJ F-TOO 2.45 mm (0.0965 in.)
I \
A B
-------c
14-364 BACK
Countershaft Reassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Slide the reverse selector hub (A) over the
Driver, 40 mm I.D, 07746-0030100 counters haft (8), then press it into place using the
driver (40 mm I. D.) and the press.
1. Install the 40.5 mm cotters (A), 2nd gear (8), thrust
needle bearing (e), needle bearing (D), idler gear NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not press-
(E), thrust needle bearing (F), 61 mm washer (G), fitted, and can be installed without using the
1st gear (H), 4th gear (I), 50.8 mm collar (J), special tool and a press.
50.8 mm washer (K), 42.2 mm cotters (L), cotter
retainer (M), and snap ring (N) on the countershaft
(0). Install the 40.5 mm cotters, idler gear, 1st gear,
and 4th gear in the direction shown.
4. Install the reverse selector, reverse gear collar,

needle bearing, and reverse gear over the reverse
selector hub.
2. Install the thrust washer (P), needle bearing (Q) and

5th gear (R).
(cont'd)
BACK
14-365
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Reassembly (cont'd)
5. Install the ball bearing (A) over the countershaft, 7. Hold the countershaft securely with a wrench and a
then press it into place using the driver (40 mm 1.0.) vise, and tighten the locknut to 167 N·m
and the press. (17.0 kgf·m, 123Ibf·ft).
NOTE:
:11-07746-0030100
~.
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
not use an impact wrench.
• The locknut has left-hand threads.
6. Install the conical spring washer (A) in the direction

shown, and install the new locknut (8).
8. Stake the locknut into its shaft in depth (A) of

0.7-1.3 mm (0.03-0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch
(8).
BACK
1,4.·366
Secondary Sh aft Disassembly
Exploded View
LOCKNUT .
178 N.m 1 (FLANGE NUT)
Replace. ( 8.2 kgf·m; 132 Ibf·ft)
Left-hand th rea d s "
THRUST NEEDLE
NEEDLE DI:A>RINln
~LB~I~_ER
"\NG
C1STI1ST-HOLD
, LUTCH
___ 2ND GEARI

PARK GEAR
1ST-HOLD·
CLUTCH HUB
@l ~ 2ND CLUTCH SECONDARY SHAFT
~ SNAPRING,32mm
SEALING RINGS, 29 mm
(cont'd)
BACK 14-367
,of 'I, ,,'
"'r,·'
Shafts and Clutches

Secondary Shaft Disassembly (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 4. Place the idler gear (A) on press bases (8), and
Wrench, 40 x 42 mm 07XAA-002010A place a shaft protector (C) between the secondary
shaft (0) and the press to prevent damaging the
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the secondary shaft.
following procedure.
1. Cut the lock tab (A) off the secondary shaft locknut
(8) using a chisel (C).
NOTE: Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the

secondary shaft..
5. Press the secondary shaft out of the press-fitted

bearing (E), and remove the secondary shaft while
2. Pl.ace a V-block (A) on a vise (8), and put the holding the underside of the secondary shaft. The
secondary shaft (C) on the V~block and vise. secondary shaft falls down when pressing the
secondary shaft out of the press-fitted bearing.
6. Remove the 1st/1st-hold clutch, 52 mm washer,

thrust needle bearing, 1st gear assembly, needle
bearings, 1st gear collar, thrust needle bearing, and
idler gear.
7. Remove the 32 mm snap ring, and remove the 2nd

clutch, splined washer, thrust needle bearing,
needle bearing, 2nd gear/park gear, and thrust
needle bearing.
3. Attach the wrench (40 x 42 mm) onto the 1st clutch

guide, and secure the wrench (40 x 42 mm) with the
vise to hold the secondary shaft. Loosen the
locknut, and remove it. Remove any burrs from
splines on the shaft and splined washer.
14-368 BACK
8. Inspect the bearings for galling and rough
movement.
NOTE: The needle bearing (A) on the 1st gear collar

contains the only two no-roller cavities (8); this is
normal.

excessive wear, and check the shaft splines for
10. Check the 1st gear axial clearance (see page

14-370), 1st gear one-way clutch (see page 14-372),
and secondary shaft installation height (see page
14-377).
BACK 14-369
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
Special Tools Required 2. Install the ball bearing (A) over the 1st/1st-hold
• Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 clutch guide using the driver (40 mm I.D.), the
• Attachment, 30 mm I.D. 07746-0030300 attachment (30 mm I.D.), and the press .
1. Install the idler gear (A), thrust needle bearing (B),

07746-0030100
1st gear collar (e), needle bearing (D), 1st gear
assembly (E), thrust needle bearing (F), 52 mm
washer (G), and 1st/1st-hold clutch (H) on the
secondary shaft (I). Install the idler gear and 52 mm
washer in the direction shown. Do not install the
O-rings during inspection.
A
F
3. Install the splined washer with the marked side up
over the ball bearing in the same manner as
E installing the ball bearing using the driver (40 mm
I.D.), the attachment (30 mm I.D.), and the press.
4. Install the old locknut and tighten it to 29 N·m

(3.0 kgf·m, 22 Ibf·ft).
5. Set the dial indicator (A) on the 1st clutch hub (B).
14-370 BACK
6. Measure the 1st gear axial clearance in at least 8. Select and install a new washer, then recheck the
three places while moving the 1st gear. Use the clearanc~.
WASHER, 52mm
Standard: 0.100-0.145 mm (0.004-0.006 in.) No. Part Number Thickness
A 90502-RWE-000 2.705 mm (0.107 in.)
B 90503-RWE-000 2.680 mm (0.106 in.)
C 90504-RWE-000 2.655 mm (0.105 in.)
D. '90505-RWE-000 2.630 mm (0.104 in.)
E' 90506-RWE-000 2.605 mm (0.103 in.)
F 90507 -RWE-OOO 2.580 mm (0.102 in.)
G 90508-RWE-000 2.555 mm (0.101 in.)
H 90509-RWE-000 2.530 mm (0.100 in.)
I 90510-RWE-000 2.505 mm (0.099 in.)
J 90511-RWE-000 2.480 mm (0.098 in.)
K 90512-RWE-000 2.455 mm (0.097 in.)
L 90513-RWE-000 2.430 mm (0.096 in.)
M 90514-RWE-00O 2.405 mm (0.095 in.)
7. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the

washer and measure its difference.
BACK
14-371
Shafts and Clutches
1st Gear One-way Clutch Inspection
1. Hold the 1st-hold clutch hub (A), and turn the 1st
gear (8) in the direction shown to be sure it turns
freely. Also make sure the 1st gear locks in the
opposite direction.
2. If any problem occurs on the 1st gear one-way

clutch, replace the 1st clutch hub (C). The 1st gear
one-way clutch is not available separately from the
1st clutch hub.
3. Also check the 1st gear and the 1st-hold clutch hub
for wear and damage. Ifthe 1st gear and 1st-hold
clutch hub are worn or damaged, replace the
damaged part, refer to 1st Clutch Hub Replacement
(see page 14-373).
BACK
14-372
1st Clutch Hub Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install the new 1st clutch hub (A) over 1st gear (B),
• Driver 07749-0010000 and install the 1st-hold clutch hub (C) in 1st gear.
• Driver attachment 07947-6340500
• Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 07GAD-SD40101
1. Remove the 1st-hold clutch hub (A) from 1st gear

(B) using the driver, the driver attachment, and the
press.
~'!"O"000'
07947-6340500
4. Install the 1st-hold clutch hub (A) in 1st gear (B)

using the driver, the attachment (78 x 90 mm), and
the press.
~""'"''
c
2. Remove the 1st clutch hub (C) from 1st gear.
BACK 14-373
Shafts, and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Reassembly
Special Tools Required 4. Install the idler gear (A) in the direction shown,
• Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 thrust needle bearing (8), 1st gear collar (C), needle
• Driver attachment, 30 mm I.D. 07746-0030300 bearing (D), 1st gear assembly (E), thrust needle
• Wrench, 40 x 42 mm 07XAA-002010A bearing (F), and 52 mm washer (G) in the direction
shown on the secondary shaft (H).
1. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle
bearings (8), 2nd gear/park gear (C), thrust needle NOTE: The needle bearing contains the only two
bearing (D), and splined washer (E) in the direction no-roller cavities (I); this is normal.
shown on the secondary shaft (F).
B~ _____
2. Wrap the shaft splines with tape, and install the

new O-rings (G) in the 2nd clutch O-ring grooves, 5. Wrap the shaft splines with tape, and install the
then remove the tape. new O-rings (J) in 1st/1st-hold clutch O-ring
grooves, then remove the tape.
NOTE: To prevent damaging to the O-rings, be
sure to install the O-rings after installing the NOTE: To prevent damaging to the O-rings, be
splined washer. sure to install the O-rings after installing the 1st
gear collar and 52 mm washer.
3. Install the 2nd clutch (H) on the secondary shaft,
and secure the 2nd clutch with the snap ring (I). 6. Install the 1st/1st-hold clutch (K).
14-374 BACK
7. Install the ball bearing (A) over the 1st/1st-hold 9. Install the new locknut.
clutch guide (8) using the driver (40 mm 1.0.), the
driver attachment (30 mm I.D.), and the press.
~4"'0301"
B
10. Place a V-block (A) on a vise (8), and put the
secondary shaft (e) on the V-block and vise.
8. Install the new splined washer (A) with the marked

side (8) up over the ball bearing using the driver
(40 mm I.D.), the driver attachment (30 mm 1.0.),
and the press.
11. Attach the wrench (40 x 42 mm) onto the top of the
1st clutch guide, and secure the wrench
B (40 x 42 mm) with the vise to hold the secondary
shaft. Tighten the locknutto 178 N·m (18.2 kgf·m,
132Ibf·ft) with the torque wrench (D).
NOTE:
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
not use an impact wrench .
• The locknut has left-hand threads.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-375
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Reassembly (cont'd)
12. Stake the locknut to a depth (A) of 0.7-1.3 mm

(0.03-0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch (8).
14-376 BACK
Secondary Shaft Installation Height Inspection/Adjustment
1. Install the thrust needle bearing (A) in the torque Secondary Shaft Cutaway View
converter housing (8) in the direction shown, and
install the secondary shaft assembly (C). 0--.----"...-'9
c
A
3. Measure the height (8) of the secondary shaft

installation between the surface (C)ofthe gasket
2. Install the new gasket (A) on the torque converter and the top ofthe ball bearing outer race (D), then
housing. note the measurement.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-377
<i~
Shafts'"and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Installation Height. Inspection/Adjustment (co nt'd)
4. Remove the 65 mm thrust shim (A) from the 6. Select the 65 mm thrust shim from the following
transmission housing, and measure its thickness. table.
THRUST SHIM, 65 mm
No. Part Number Thickness
OA 90460-RDK-000 0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
A 90461-RDK-010 0.84 mm (0.033 in.)
A B 90462-RDK-010 0.88 mm (0.035 in.)
C 90463-R DK-010 0.92 mm (0.036 in.)
D 90464-RDK-010 0.96 mm (0.038 in.)
E 90465-RDK-010 1.00 mm (0.039 in.)
F 90466-RDK-010 1.04 mm (0.041 in.)
G 90467-RDK-010 1.08 mm (0.043 in.)
H 90468-RDK-010 1.12 mm (0.044 in.)
I 90469-RDK-010 1.16 mm (0.046 in.)
J 90470-RDK-010 1.20 mm (0.047 in.)
K 90471-RDK-010 1.24 mm (0.049 in.)
5. Calculate the thickness of the 65 mm thrust shim L 90472-RDK-010 1.28 mm (0.050 in.)
using the formula. M 90473-RDK-010 1.32 mm (0.052 in.)
N 90474-RDK-010 1.36 mm (0.054 in.)
Formula: 0 90475-RDK-010 1.40 mm (0.055 in.)
65 mm Thrust Shim Thickness p 90476-RDK-010 1.44 mm (0.057 in.)
.=
Secondary Shaft-Installation Height Standard Q 90477-RDK-010 1.48 mm (0.058 in.)
- Measurement R 90478-RDK-010 1.52 mm (0.060 in.)
S 90479-RDK-010 1.56 mm (0.061 in.)
Secondary Shaft Installation Height T 90480-R DK-010 1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
Standard: U 90481-RDK-000 1.64 mm (0.065 in.)
228.04-228.13 mm (8.9779-8.9815 in.) V 90482-RDK-000 1.68 mm (0.066 in.)
W 90483-RDK-000 1.72 mm (0.068 in.)
X 90484-RDK-000 1.76 mm (0.069 in.)
y 90485-RDK-000 1.80 mm (0.071 in.)
Z 90486-RDK-000 1.84 mm (0.072 in.)
AA 90487 -RDK-OOO 1.88 mm (0.074 in.)
AB 90488-RDK-000 1.92 mm (0.076 in.)
AC 90489-RDK-000 1.96 mm (0.077 in.)
AD 90490-RDK-000 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
AE 90491-RDK-000 2.04 mm (0.080 in.)
AF 90492-RDK-000 2.08 mm (0.082 in.)
AG 90493-RDK-000 2.12 mm (0.083 in.)
AH 90494-RDK-000 2.16 mm (0.085 in.)
AI 90495-RDK-000 2.20 mm (0.087 in.)
AJ 90496-RDK-000 2.24 mm (0.088 in.)
AK 90497-RDK-000 2.28 mm (0.090 in.)
AL 90498-RDK-000 2.32 mm (0.091 in.)
7. Install the thrust shim in the transmission housing.
14~378
BACK
Intermediary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the 26.5 mm washer, snap ring, cotter 4. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and
retainer, and cotters from the third shaft. excessive wear, and check the shaft splines for
5. Check the sealing rings for excessive wear and

damage.
6. Check the 3rd gear axial clearance (see page

14-381), and intermediary shaft installation height
(see page 14-383). .
7. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines

with tape to prevent damage to the O-rings.
8. Lubricate all parts with ATF, and reassemble the

shaft and gears.
~~""'f------NEEDLE BEARING 9. Install the press-fitted 4th gear using the driver
(40 mm I.D.) and the press (see page 14-380) in the
i-~---THRUST NEEDLE direction shown.
BEARING
~~:<ii::!;;;~SPLINEDWASHER,
53mm
Selective part
- - - - - 3RD CLUTCH
- - - - - - - - O-RING
Replace.
INTERMEDIARY
SHAFT
SEALING RINGS,
35mm
2. Remove the intermediary shaft 4th gear using the

press (see page 14-380), and disassemble the shaft
and gears.
3. Inspect the bearings for galling and rough

movement.
BACK 14-379
Shafts'and Clutches
Intermediary Shaft'4th Gear Intermediary Shaft 4th Gear

1. Place 4th gear (A) on press bases (B), and place a Special Tools Required
shaft protector (C) between the intermediary shaft Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
(D) and the press to prevent damaging the
intermediary shaft. 1. Wrap the shaft splines with tape, and install the
new O-rings in the 3rd clutch O-ring grooves, then
remove the tape.
2. Install the 3rd clutch, 53 mm splined washer, thrust

needle bearing, needle bearing, 3rd gear, thrust
needle bearing on the intermediary shaft.
3. Install 4th gear (A) using the driver (40 mm I.D.) and
the press.
2. Press the intermediary shaft out of the press-fitted

4th gear, and remove of the intermediary shaft
while holding the underside the intermediary shaft.
The intermediary shaft falls down when pressing
the intermediary shaft out ofthe press-fitted gear.
3. Remove the remaining parts from the intermediary

shaft.
4. Install the 19.8 mm cotters, cotter retainer, and

snap ring.
5. Install the 26.5 mm washer on the top ofthe

intermediary shaft.
14-380 BACK
Intermediary Shaft 3rd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection

Driver, 40 mm J.D. 07746-0030100
1. Install the 3rd clutch (A), 53 mm splined washer (8),

thrust needle bearing (e), needle bearing (D), 3rd
gear (E), and thrust needle bearing (F) on the
Intermediary shaft (G). Do not install the O-rings
during inspection.
2. Install 4th gear (H) using the driver (40 mm I.D.) and
the press.
3. Install the cotters (I), cotter retainer (J), and snap

ring (K).
4. Set the dial indicator (A) on 4th gear (8).
(cont'd)
BACK 14-381
Shafts and Clutches
Intermediary Shaft 3rd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
5. Measure the 4th gear axial clearance in at least

three places while moving 4th gear. Use the
Standard: 0.005-0.045 111m (0.0002-0.0018 in.)

splined washer and measure its'thickness.
7. Select and install a new splined washer, then

recheck the clearance.
SPLINED WASHER, 53 mm
A 90546-RDK-000 3.995 mm (0.1573 in.)
B 90547-RDK-000 4.015 mm (0.1581 in.)
C 90548-RDK-000 4.035 mm (0.1589 in.)
D 90549-RDK-000 4.055 mm (0.1596 in.)
E 90550-RDK-000 4.075 mm (0.1604 in.)
F 90551-RDK-000 4.095 mm (0.1612 in.)
G 90552-RDK-000 4.115 mm (0.1620 in.)
H 90553-RDK-000 4.135 mm (0.1628 in.)
I 90554-RDK-000 4.155 mm (0.1636 in.)
J 90555-RDK-000 4.175 mm (0.1644 in.)
K 90556-RDK-000 4.195 mm (0.1652 in.)
L 90557-RDK-000 4.215 mm (0.1659 in.)
M 90558-RDK-000 4.235 mm (0.1667 in.)
N 90559-RDK-000 4.255 mm (0.1675 in.)
BACK
Intermediary Shaft Installation Height InspectionlAdjustment
1. Install the intermediary shaft (A) in the torque 4. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the
converter housing, and install the 26.5 mm washer 26.5 mm washer and measure its thickness.
(8) on the intermediary shaft.
5. Select and install a new washer, then recheck the
Intermediary Shaft Installation Height: installation height.
Standard:
137.285-137.385 mm (5.40491-5.40885 in.' WASHER, 26 5 mm
A 90564-RDK-000 1.05 mm (0.041 in.)
8 90565-RDK-000 1.13 mm (0.044 in.)
C 90566-RDK-000 1.21 mm (0.048 in.)
D 90567 -RDK-OOO 1.29 mm (0.051 in.)
E 90568-RDK-000 1.37 mm (0.054 in.)
F 90569-RDK-000 1.45 mm (0.057 in.)
G 90570-RDK-000 1.53 mm (0.060 in.)
H 90571-R DK-OOO 1.61 mm (0.063 in.)
I 90572-RDK-000 1.69 mm (0.067 in.)
J 90573-RDK-000 1.77 mm (0.070 in.)
F K 90574-RDK-000 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
L 90575-RDK-000 1.93 mm (0.076 in.)
D M 90576-RDK-000 2.01 mm (0.079 in.)
N 90577 -RDK-OOO 2.09 mm (0.082 in.)
Intermediary Shaft Cutaway View
Ir-....----~F
2. Install the new gasket (C) on the torque converter

housing.
3. Measure the height (D) of the intermediary shaft

installation between the surface (E) ofthe gasket
and the surface of the 26.5 mm washer (F).
BACK 14-383
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the 1st clutch end plate (A), 1st clutch discs
• Clutch spring compressor attachment (B) (5), 1st clutch wave-plates (C) (5), disc spring (D),
07LAE-PX40100 or 07HAE-PL50101 1st-hold clutch plate B (E), 1st-hold clutch discs (F)
• Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly (3), 1st-hold clutch wave-plates (G) (2), and 1st-hold
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A clutch flat-plate (H) from the 1st/1st-hold clutch
drum (I).
1. Remove the snap ring (A) with a screwdriver. (B).
3. Make reference marks on the clutch wave-plates.
14-384 BACK
4. Remove the clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (8) (7), 8. Remove the clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (8) (5),
clutch wave-plates (C) (3), and clutch flat-plates (0) clutch wave-plates (C) (2), clutch flat-plates (0) (3),
(4) from the 2nd clutch drum (E). and disc spring (E) from the 4th clutch drum (F).
{~~n---C
10. Remove the clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (8) (5),
clutch wave-plates (C) (2), clutch flat-plates (0) (3),
5. Make reference marks on the clutch wave-plates. and disc spring (E) from the 5th clutch drum (F).
6. Remove the clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (8) (6), A
clutch wave-plates (C) (3), and clutch flat-plates (0)
(3) from the 3rd clutch drum (E). B
C
o
F
o
(cont'd)
BACK 14-385
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
12. Install the clutch spring compressor attachments 14. If either end of the clutch spring compressor·
and the clutch spring compressor bolt assembly. attachment is set over an area ofthe spring retainer
that is unsupported by the return spring, the
07LAE-PX40100
retainer may be damaged.
07LAE-PX40100 or
07HAE-PL50101
15. Set the clutch spring compressor attachment (A) on
the spring retainer (B) ofthe 3rd and 5th clutches so
07GAE-PG40200 or the clutch spring compressor attachment works on
07GAE-PG4020A the clutch return spring (C).
13. Be sure the clutch spring compressor attachment

(A) is adjusted to have full contact with the spring
retainer (B) on the 1st, 2nd, and 4th clutches.
14-386 BACK
16. If either end of the clutch spring compressor 18. Remove the snap ring with the snap ring pliers.
attachment is not set over the clutch return spring
end (A), the retainer may be damaged.
19. Remove the clutch spring compressor attachments

and the clutch spring compressor bolt assembly.
17. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can
be removed. 20. Remove the snap ring (A), spring retainer (8), and
return spring (C).
(cont'd)
BACK 14-387
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
21. Wrap a shop rag around the clutch drum, and apply 23. Remove the 1st-hold clutch piston (A)from the 1st
air pressure to the fluid passage to remove the clutch piston (8), and remove the O-rings from the
piston. Place a finger tip on the other passage while 1st-hold clutch piston.
applying air pressure.
24. Remove the clutch piston, and remove the O-rings

from the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch pistons.
22. Remove the 1st/1st-hold clutch piston (A) from the

clutch drum (8), and remove the O-rings from the
1st clutch piston.
14-388 BACK
Clutch Inspection
1. Inspect the clutch pistons and clutch piston check 6. If the clutch discs are worn or damaged, replace
valves (A). them as a set. If the clutch discs are replaced,
inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top disc clearance.
A
7. If any plate is worn, damaged, or discolored,
replace the dama,ged plate with a new plate, and
inspect the other wave-plates for a phase
difference. Ifthe clutch plate is replaced, inspect
the clutch end-plate-to-top disc clearance.
8. If the clutch end plate is worn, damaged, or

discolored, inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top disc
clearance, then replace the clutch end plate.
2. If the clutch piston check valve is loose or damaged,

replace the clutch piston.
3. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
4. Ifthespring retainer is worn or damaged, replace it.
5. Inspect the clutch discs, clutch plates, and clutch

end plate for wear, damage, and discoloration.
Clutch Discs:
Standard Thickness: 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
Clutch Flat-plates and Clutch Wave-plates

Standard Thickness:
1st clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
1st-hold clutch: 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
2nd clutch: 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
3rd clutch: 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
4th clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
5th clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
BACK
14-389
Shafts:and Clutches
Clutch Wave-plate Phase Difference Inspection
1. Place the clutch wave-plate (A) on a surface plate, 4. Measure the phase differences of 4th and 5th clutch
and set a dial indicator (B) on the wave-plate. wave-plates.
c -1 Rotate the clutch wave-plate 5-tooth or 4-tooth

while holding the wave-plate by its
circumference. The dial indicator should be at
the top of a phase difference. Do not rotate the
wave-plate while holding its surface, always
rotate it by holding its circumference.
-2 Read the dial indicator. The dial indicator reads

the phase difference of the wave-plate between
the bottom and top.
Standard Phase Difference:

4th clutch: 0.07-0.20 mm (0.003-0.008 in.)
5th clutch: 0.07-0.20 mm (0.003-0.008 in.)
2. Find the bottom (C) of a phase difference ofthe -a Rotate the wave-plate 5-tooth or 4-tooth. The
wave-plate, zero the dial indicator and make a dial indicator should be at the bottom of a
reference mark on the bottom of the wave-plate. phase difference, and zero the dial indicator.
3. Measure the phase differences of 1st, 1st-hold, 2nd, . -4 Measure the phase difference at the other two
and 3rd clutch wave-plates. tops of the wave-plate by following steps -1
thru -3.
-1 Rotate the clutch wave-plate a bout 60-degrees
while holding the wave-plate by its 5. If the two values of the three measurements are
circumference. The dial indicator should be at within the standard, the wave-plate is OK. If the two
the top of a phase difference. Do not rotate the values of the three measurements are out of the
wave-plate while holding its surface, always standard, replace the wave-plate.
rotate it by holding its circumference.
-2 Read the dial indicator. The dial indicator reads

the phase difference of the wave-plate between
the bottom and top.
Standard Phase Difference:

1st clutch: 0.17-0.30 mm (0.007-0.012 in.)
1st-hold
clutch: 0.07-0.20 mm (0.003-0.008 in.)
2nd clutch: 0.07-0.20 mm (0.003-0.008 in.)
3rd clutch: 0.07-0.20 mm (0.003-0.008 in.)
-a Rotate the wave-plate a bout 60-degrees. The

dial indicator should be at the bottom of a
phase difference, and zero the dial indicator.
-4 Measure the phase difference at the other two

tops of the wave-plate by following steps -1
thru -3.
BACK
14-390
Clutch Clearance Inspection
Special Tools Required 3. Install the 1st-hold clutch flat-plate (A), alternately
Clutch compressor attachment 07ZAE-PRP0100 install the clutch discs (B) (3) and the 1st-hold clutch
wave-plates (C) (2), then install the 1st-hold clutch
1. Inspect the clutch piston, discs, plates, and end plate B (D) with the flat side down in the direction
plate for wear and damage (see page 14-389), and shown.
inspect the clutch wave-plate phase difference
(see page 14-390), if necessary.
2. Install the 1st-hold Clutch piston in the 1st clutch

piston, and install the 1st/1st-hold clutch piston (A)
in the 1st/1st-hold clutch drum (B). Do not install
the O-rings on the .clutch pistons during inspection.
4. Measure the 1st-hold clutch plate B-to-top-disc
-----8 clearance with a feeler gauge (A) while pressing the

1st-hold clutch plate B down. Take measurements
in at least three places, and use the average as the
actual.clearance.
1st-hold Clutch Plate B-to-Top-Disc Clearance:

Service Limit: 0.6-1.0 mm (0.024-0.039 in.)
5. If the clearance is out of standard, replace the 1st-

hold clutch plates and discs as a set, and recheck.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-391
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
6. Install the disc spring (A) on the 1st-hold clutch 8. Starting with the 2nd clutch flat-plate, alternately
plate 8 in the'direction shown. Starting with the 1st install the flat-plates (A) (4) and discs (8) (4) in the
clutch wave-plate, alternately installthe wave- 2nd clutch drum (e), and alternately install the
plates (8) (5) and discs (e) (5) in the 1st clutch drum wave-plates (D) (3) and discs (8) (3). Install the
(D), then install the clutch-end-plate (E) with the flat clutch-end-plate (E) w,th the flat side down on the
side down. top disc.
7. Install the clutch pistons in the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and

5th clutch drums. Do not install the O-rings on the
clutch pistons during inspection.
9. Starting with the 3rd clutch flat-plate, alternately
install the flat-plates (A) (3) and discs (8) (3) in the
3rd clutch drim (e), and alternately install the wave-
plates (D) (3) and discs (8) (3). Install the clutch-end-
plate (E) with the flat side down on the top disc.
BACK
14-392
10. Install the disc spring (A) in the 4th clutch drum (8) 12. Install the snap ring with a screwdriver to secure
in the direction shown. Starting with the 4th clutch the clutch-end-plate.
flat-plate, alternately install the flat-plates (e) (3)
and discs (0) (3), and alternately install the wave-
plates (E) (2) and discs (0) (2). Install the clutch-end-
plate (F) with the flat side down on the top disc.
13. Set a dial indicator (A) on the clutch-end-plate (8).
11. Install the disc spring (A) in the 5th clutch drum (8)
in the direction shown. Starting with the 5th clutch
flat-plate, alternately install the flat-plates (e) (3)
14. Zero the dial indicator with the clutch-end-plate

lifted up to the snap ring (e).
(cont'd)
BACK
14-393
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont'd)

15. Release the clutch-end-plate to lower the clutch- 18. Ifthe clearance is out ofthe service limit, select a
end-plate, then put the clutch compressor new clutch-end-plate from the following table.
attachment on the end-plate (A).
07ZAE-PRP0100
1ST CLUTCH END PLATES

Plate Part Number Thickness
No.
1 22551-RDK-003 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
16. Press the clutch compressor attachment down with 2 22552:..RDK-003 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
150-160 N (15-16 kgf, 33-35Ibf) (B) using a 3 22553-RDK-003 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
force gauge, and read the dial indicator (e). 4 22554-RDK-003 3.4 mm (0.134 in.)
5 22555-RDK-003 3.5 mm (0.138 in.)
17. The dial indicator reads the clearance (D) between 6 22556-RDK-003 3.6 mm (0.142 in.)
the clutch-end-plate and top disc (E). Take 7 22557-RDK-003 3.7 mm (0.146 in.)
measurements in at least three places, and use the 8 22558-RDK-003 3.8 mm (0.150 in.)
average as the actual clearance. 9 22559-RDK-003 3.9 mm (0.154 in.)
Clutch End-Plate-to-Top Disc Clearance: 2ND CLUTCH END PLATES

Service Limit: PI,ate Part Number Thickness
1st clutch: 1.15-1.35 mm(0.045-0.053 in.) No.
2nd clutch: 1.05-1.25 mm (0.041-0.049 in.) 1 22561-RDK-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
3rd clutch: 0.9-1.1 mm (0.035-0.043 in.) 2 22562-RDK-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
4th clutch: 0.75-0.95 mm (0.030-0.037 in.) 3 22563-RDK-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
5th ,clutch: 0.75-0.95 mm (0.030-0.037 in.) 4 22564-RDK-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22565-RDK-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22566-RDK-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22567 -RDK-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22568-RDK-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22569-RDK-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
BACK
14-394
3RD CLUTCH END PLATES
No.
1 22591-RYF-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22592-RYF-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22593-RYF-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22594-RYF-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22595-RYF-003. 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22596-RYF-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22597 -RYF-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22598-RYF-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22599-RYF-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
4TH and 5TH CLUTCH END PLATES

No.
1 22571-RYF-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22572-RYF~003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22573-RYF-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22574-RYF-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22575-RYF-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22576-RYF-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22577 -RYF-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22578-RYF-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22579-RYF-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
19. Install the new clutch-end-plate, and recheck the

clearance. If the thickest clutch-end-plate is
installed, but the clearance is still over the service
limit, replace the clutch discs and plates.
BACK
14-395
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Install the new O-rings (A) on the 1st clutch piston
• Clutch spring compressor attachment (B), and install the 1st/1st-hold clutch piston in the
07 LAE-PX40 100 or 07HAE-PL50101 1st/1st-hold clutch drum (C) while applying
• Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly pressure and rotating to ensure proper seating. Do
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A not pinch the O-ring.
1. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a

minimum of 30 minutes.
2. Install the new O-rings (A) on the 1st-hold clutch

piston (B), and install the 1st-hold clutch piston in
the 1st clutch piston (C).
A
---- . C
4. Install the O-rings (A) on the 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th
clutch piston (B).
5. Install the clutch pistons in the clutch drums (C)

while applying pressure and rotating to ensure
proper seating. Do not pinch the O-ring.
BACK
14~396
6. Install the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B), 8. Be sure the clutch spring compressor attachment
and position the snap ring (C) on the spring retainer. (A) is adjusted to have full contact with the. spring
retainer (B) on the 1st, 2nd, and 4th clutches.
C
B
9. If either end of the clutch spring compressor

attachment is set over an area ofthe spring retainer
7. Install the clutch spring compressor attachments that is unsupported by the return spring, the
and the clutch spring compressor bolt assembly. retainer may be damaged.
07LAE-PX40100 or
07HAE-PL50101
07GAE-PG40200 or
07GAE-PG4020A
-----------
(cont'd)
BACK
14-397
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
10. Set the clutch spring compressor attachment (A) on 12. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can
the spring retainer (B) ofthe 3rd and 5th clutches so be installed.
the clutoh spring compressor attachment works on
the clutch return spring (e).
c 13. Install the snap ring with the snap ring pliers.
11. If either endofthe clutch spring compressor

attachment is not set over the clutch return spring
end (A), the retainer may be damaged.
14. Remove the clutch spring compressor attachments

and the clutch spring compressor bolt assembly.
BACK
14-398
15. Install the 1st-hold clutch flat-plate (A), alternately 17. Starting with the 2nd clutch flat-plate, alternately
install the clutch discs (8) (3) and the 1st-hold clutch install the flat-plates (Al (4) and discs (8) (4) in the
wave-plates (e) (2) in the 1st/1st-hold clutch drum 2nd clutch drum (e), and alternately install the
(0), then install the 1st-hold clutch plate 8 (E) with wave-plates (0) (3) and discs (8) (3). Install the
the flat side down in the direction shown. clutch-end-plate (E) with the flat side down on the
top disc.
18. Starting with the 3rd clutch flat-plate, alternately

16. Install the disc spring (F) on the 1st-hold clutch install the flat-plates (A) (3) and discs (8) (3) in the
plate 8 in the direction shown. Starting with the 1st 3rd clutch drum (e), and alternately install the
clutch wave-plate, alternately install the wave- wave-plates (0) (3) and discs (8) (3). Install the
plates (G) (5) and discs (H) (5), then install the clutch-end-plate (E) with the flat side down on the
clutch-end-plate (I) with the flat side down on the top disc.
top disc.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-399
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
19. Install the disc spring (A) in the 4th clutch drum (8) 21. Install the snap ring with a screwdriver to secure
in the direction shown. Starting with the 4th clutch the· clutch-end-plate.
flat-plate, alternately install the flat-plates (C) (3)
20. Install the disc spring (A) in the 5th clutch drum (8)
in the direction shown. Starting with the 5th clutch
flat-plate, alternately install the flat-plates (C) (3)
BACK
14-400
Transmission Reassembly
Exploded View
Bolt Tightening Torque
6 x 1.0 mm: 12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ftl
8 x 1.25 mm: 18 N·m 11.8 kgf·m, 13.lbf·ftl
~ 6x 1.0 mm, One Bolt
o ~ 6 x 1~0 mm, Seven Bolts
6x1.0mm,
11 Bolts
/ REGULATORVA[VE BODY
O·RING
\ Replace.
O·RING
Replace.
~STATORSHAFT
ATF PUMP DRIVEN

CHECK BALLS, . GEAR SHAFT
Two Balls
DOWEL PINS,
Two Pins
~ TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING

ATF PASSAGE PIPE
(cont'd)
BACK
14-401
Transmission Reassembly (cont'd)
Special Tool Required 5. If the ATF pump drive gear and ATF pump driveh
Mainshaft holder 07GAB-PF50101 gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main
valve body bolts. Realign the ATF pump driven
1. Make sure that the ATF magnet is cleaned and gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified
installed in the torque converter housing. Clean torques, then recheck. Failure to align the ATF
and install the ATF magnet, if necessary. pump driven gear shaft correctly will result in a
seized ATF pump drive gear or ATF pump driven
2. Install the main separator plate and the two dowel gear shaft.
pins on the torque converter housing. Then install
the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B), and. 6. Install the lubrication check valve, cooler check
ATF pump driven gear shaft (C). Install the ATF valve and cooler check valve spring in the main
pump driven gea.r with its grooved and chamfered valve body. Install the lubrication check valve in the
side facing down. direction shown in the exploded view.
7. Install the secondary separator plate and the two

dowel pins on the main valve body, and install the
secondary valve body (one bolt).
8. Install the two check balls in the secondary valve

body.
9. Install the accumulator separator plate and the two

dowel pins on the secondary valve body.
A 10. Position the detent arm on the accumulator

separator plate, and install the detent arm shaft into
the detent arm through the separator plates to the
main valve body.
3. Install the torque converter check valve spring and
valve in the torque converter housing. 11. Install the 8 x 62 mm ATF feed pipes in the main
valve body, and install the accumulator body
4. Install the main valve body (seven 6 mm bolts and (11 bolts).
three 8 mm bolts). Make sure the ATF pump drive
gear (A) rotates smoothly in the normal operating 12. Install the regulator separator plate and the two
direction, and the ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) dowel pins on the main valve body.
moves ,smoothly in the axial and normal operating
direction. 13. Install the stator shaft with the new O-ring, and
install the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
14. Install the stator shaft stop in the main valve body.
15. Install the ATF strainer with the new O-ring (two
bolts).
16. Install the ATF passage pipe (one bolt) in the torque
converter housing.
BACK
14-402
17. Install the intermediary shaft (A) into the main 24. Install the needle bearing (A) on the secondary
valve body, and install the 26.5 mm washer (B) on shaft roller bearing in the torque converter housing.
the top of the intermediary shaft.
18. Install the transfer output shaft (C) in the torque A

converter housing, and instali the thrust shim (O)
on the top of the transfer output shaft. 25. Turn the shift fork shaft (B) so the large chamfered
hole is facing the fork bolt hole of the shift fork.
19. Install the differential assembly (E) in the torque
converter housing. 26. Engage the shift fork (C) with the reverse selector
on the countershaft, and join the mainshaft (0),
20. Install the baffle plate (F), and make sure the countershaft (E), and secondary shaft (F), then
differential is clear ofthe baffle plate. install them in the torque converter housing and
shift fork on the shift fork shaft.
21. Install the baffle plate (G), and make sure the
intermediary shaft is clear of the baffle plate.
22. Install the selector control shaft and the park lever
link (H).
23. Assemble the mainshaft, countershaft, and

secondary shaft.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-403
Aut~l11atic Transmission
27. Secure the shift fork (A) to the shift fork shaft with 29. Align the control lever pin with the manual valve
the lock bolt and the neW lock washer (B), then guide.
bend the lock tab of the lock washer againstthe
bolt head.
30. Hook the detent arm spring to the detent arm.
6x1.0mm
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 Ibl·ftl
28. Install the park pawl shaft (A), pawl spring (B), park
pawl (e), and park pawl stop (0);
BACK
14-404
31. Install the 8 x 85 mm ATF feed pipe (A), the 33. Install the two dowel pins (A) and the new gasket
8 x 151.5 mm pipes (8), and the 8 x 40 mm pipe (C) (8) on the torque converter housing (C).
in the accumulator body.
·_ _ _ A
B-.;:,-__ _
c
32. Install the 8 x 57.5 mm ATF feed pipe (A) and the
10 x 123 mm pipe (8) in the torque converter
housing. 34. Place the transmission housing (D) on the torque
converter housing.
35. Wrap a screwdriver tip with tape to prevent

damage to the reverse idler gear teeth. Engage the
reverse idler gear with reverse gears by rotating
the idler gear using the screwdriver.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-405
36. While expanding the snap ring of the countershaft 39. Install and tighten the special bolt (E) to 64 N·m
bearing using snap ring pliers, install the (6.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ft).
transmission housing onto the bearing part-way.
Then release the snap ring pliers, and push down 40. Install the mainshaft holder onto the mainshaft.
on the housing until it bottoms and the snap ring
snaps into place in the transmission housing snap
ring groove.
07GAB-PF50101
41. Install the new lock washer (A) with the marked
side (8) up over the mainshaft (C), and apply ATF to
surfaces of the lock washer and old locknut (D).
37. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts
(21 bolts) and the bolt (A) along with the A
transmission hanger (8) and the transmission
ground terminal bracket (C), and tighten the bolts in
two or more steps in a criss-cross pattern to 44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft).
A D
B 10x1.25mm 10x 1.25mm B
44N·m 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 Ibf·ft)
\ (4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft) Two Bolts
42. Install the old locknut, and tighten it to seat the lock
washer to 178 N·m (18.2 kgf·m, 132 Ibf·ft) , then
remove the old locknut.
10x 1.25mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
21 Bolts
38. Install and tighten the two mounting bolts (D) to

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 Ibf·ft). Keep the mounting
bolts free of grease or oil.
14-406 BACK
43. Install the new locknut and tighten it to 176 N·m 47. Install the new O-ring (E) on the solenoid harness
(18.2 kgf·m, 132 Ibf·ft), then stake the locknutto a connector (F).
depth (A) of 0.7-1.3 mm (0.03-0.05 in.) using a
3.5 mm punch (B).
48. Route the solenoid harness through the

44. Install the end cover (A), dowel pin (B), and new transmission housing, and install the solenoid
O-ring (C). harness connector.
F 49. Connect the harness terminals to the solenoids:

49N·m
(5.0 kg'·m, 36 Ib'·ftl
• VEL wire connector to shift solenoid valve A.
• GRN wire connector to shift solenoid valve C.
• RED wire connector to shift solenoid valve B.
A • ORN wire connector to shift solenoid valve D.
50. Secure the solenoid harness connector with the

bolt on the transmission housing.
45. Install the snap ring cap (D) with the new O-ring (E).
46. Apply thread lock sealant to the threads of the

sealing plug (F), and install the sealing plug and the
new sealing washer (G).
(cont'd)
BACK 14-407
51. Install the solenoid valve cover (A) with the two 54. Install the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint pipe (A) with the
dowel pins (B) and the new gasket (C), and secure it filter side into its mounting hole (B).
with the seven bolts.
6x 1..0 mm A
12N·m
(1.2kgf·m,
8.7Ibf.ft)
55. Check the height (A) ofthe 8 x 53 mm ATF joint

pipe (8) between the top (C) of the pipe and the
solenoid valve body mounting surface (0). The
height is about 7 mm (0.3 in.) If the height is over
7 mm (0.3 in.), install the pipe securely until it stops
the accumulator body.
52. Place the new gasket (A) on the solenoid valve
cover, then install the 8 x 105.8 mm ATF feed pipes B
(B) and the 8 x 58.3 mm pipes (C) with their filter
side into the transmission housing.
E
6x1.0mm
12N·m
(1.2kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
53. Install the new O-rings (0) over the ATF feed pipes,
and install the NT clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and 8 (E).
14-408 BACK
56. Install thenew gasket (A) on the transmission 60. Set the transmission range switch (A) to the N
housing. Install the 8 x 34.5 mm ATF pipe (B) with position. The transmission range switch clicks in
the filter end in the transmission housing, and the N position, and the selector control shaft hole
install the 8 x 25.5 mm ATF pipe (0). (B) aligns with the N positioning line (C).
B
6x 1.0mm
12 N·m(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ttl
,
57. Install new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes. 61. Install the transmission range switch gently over
the selector control shaft (0), and install the bolts
58. Install the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid loosely.
valve C.
62. Install the new lock washer (A) over the selector
59. Set the control shaft to the N position by turning control shaft (B) by aligning the projection (C) ofthe
the selector control shaft with a 6.0 mm wrench. lock washer with the N positioning line (0) on the
transmission range switch (E), and install the
locknut (F).
F
12N·m
o
I
c
VA B
(cont'd)
BACK 14-409
63. Push the locknut againstthe transmission housing 66. Install the new O-ring (A) on the input shaft
to seat the range switch into the selector control (mainshaft) speed sensor (8), and install the input
shaft, and tighten the locknut to 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor.
8.7 Ibf·ft) while holding the selector control shaft
with a 6 mm wrench, then bend the lock tabs
against the locknut.
6x1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
~
67. Install the new O-ring (C) on the output shaft
64. Tighten the range switch mounting bolts to 12 N·m (countershaft) speed sensor (0), and install the
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft). output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the
sensor washer (E).
65. Install the control lever (A), spring washer (8), lock
washer (C), and locknut (0) on the selector control 68. Install the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
shaft (E). switch (A) with the new sealing washer (8). Tighten
the switch with the metal part.
/~6N.m A
C ~. (1.6 kgf.m; 12 Ibf·ft) /20N.m
------""'ro
B~: O ____ A Q (2.0 kgf·m, 14Ibf·ft)
14-410 BACK
69. Install the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure 73. Install the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch (A) with the new sealing washer (B). Tighten switch (A) with the new sealing washer (B). Tighten
the switch with the metal part. the switch by the metal part.
G
6x1.0mm -
/ 12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
o F /6x1.0mm
H 12N·m
o / E '" B 11.2 kgf·m,
'\ '" W 8.7Ibf·ft)
G
6x 1.0mm A
12N·m 20N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 12.0 kgf·m, 14Ibf·ft)
8.7Ibf·ft)
74. Install the ATF dipstick tube (A) with the new O-ring
(B).
'A
\
20N.m
12.0 kgf·m,
10x 1.25mm
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
\
14Ibf·ft) a
70. Install the ATF cooler lines (C) with the new sealing
washers (D) and the line bolts (E).
71. Install the connector bracket (F), and secure the

ATF lines with the 6.0 mm bolts (G) on the
transmission housing.
72. Install the ATF temperature sensor (H) with the new
O-ring (I). Install the connector on the connector
bracket and the harness clamp on the bracket.
75. Install the ATF dipstick (C) in its tube.
76. Install the transmission ground terminal (D).
BACK 14-411
All Differential
Component Location Index Backlash Inspection
1. Remove the final driven gear and transfer drive

~=="'I~ _ _ _ _ THRUST SHIM, 85 mm
Preload Inspection~ gear from the differential carrier.
page 14-418
2. Install both axles into the differential assembly (A)
and place the axles on V-blocks (B).
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

0° ______ B
~~~ DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection, 3. Measure the backlash of the pinion gears (e) with a
page 14-412
Replacement, page 14-413 dial indicator (D).
------
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR
4. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the

differential carrier.
------ CARRIER BEARING
)\.\l\-;="""'I11k.. Replacement, page 14-414
5. Install the final driven gear and transfer drive gear
- - - - - BEARING OUTER RACE on the differential carrier (see page 14-413).
14-412 BACK
Differential Carrier, Final Driven Gear, and Transfer Drive Gear Replacement
NOTE: Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever

the carrier is replaced.
1. Remove the final driven gear (A) and transfer drive

gear (8) from the differential carrier (e).
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand

threads.
-=--126N.m
" 112.8 kgf·m, 92.6Ibf·ft)
, 14 Bolts
-@)
2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfered side

on the inner bore facing the differential carrier.
3. Install the bolts through the differential carrier to

the transfer drive gear.
4. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a

crisscross pattern.
BACK
AIT Differential
Carrier Bearing Replacement.
Special Tools Required 2. Install the new carrier bearing using the attachment
Attachment, 45 x 55 mm 07MAO-PR90100 (45 x 55 mm) and the press.
NOTE: NOTE:
• The bearing and outer race should be replaced as a • Press the bearing on until it bottoms.
set. • Use the small end of the attachment
• Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever the (45 x 55 mm),to install the bearings.
bearing is replaced. • Press the bearing on securely so there is no
• Check the bearing for wear and rough rotation. If the clearance between the bearing and the
bearing is OK, removal is not necessary. differential carrier.
:IJ.-~07MAI).PR901"
1. Remove the carrier bearing (A) with a commercially
available bearing puller (B), bearing separator (C),
and stepper adapter (0).
c
o
D
14-414 BACK
Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install the new oil seal flush to the transmission
• Driver 077 49-0010000· housing using the drive and the oil seal driver
• Oil seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40100 attachment.
• Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
1. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing.
4. Install the new oil seal to the torque converter

housing using the drive and the oil seal driver
attachment.
2. Remove the oil seal from the torque converter
housing.
BACK 14-415
AlT. Differential
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement
Special Tools, Required 2. Install the 85 mm thrust shim (A), spacer (8), and
• Driver 07749-0010000 outer race (C) in the transmission housing (D).
• Attachment, 83 mm 07HAD-SG00100
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
NOTE:
• Replace the bearing with a new onewhenever the A
outer race is replaced.
• Do not use shim(s) on the torque converter housing
side.
• Adjust the preload after replacing the bearing and the
outer race.
• Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), spacer (8), and

85 mm thrust shim (C) from the transmission
housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212 "F
(100 "C) with a heat gun (E). Do not heatthe 3. Using the driver and the attachment (83 mm), drive
housing more than 212 "F (100 "C). the outer race securely in the housing so there is no
clearance between the outer race, spacer, shim,
and housing.
07749-0010000 07HAD-SG00100
14-416 BACK
4. Remove the plate (A), and remove the bearing
outer race (8) and spacer (C)from the torque
converter housing (D).
5. Install the spacer and the new outer race in the

torque converter housing.
6. Drive the bearing outer race securely in the

(78x80 mm).
07NAD-PX40100
7. Install the plate over the outer race in the torque

converter housing.
BACK
14-417
AIT,Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
Special Tools Required 4. Install the 85 mm thrust shim (A) in the

• Driver 07749-0010000 transmission housing (B). If you replace the 85 mm
• Attachment, 83 mm 07HAD-SG00100 thrust shim with a new one, use the same thickness
• Preload inspection tool 070AJ-0020101 shim as the old one.
NOTE: If the transmission housing, torque converter

housing, differential carrier, tapered roller bearing,
bearing outer race, or thrust shim were replaced, the
bearing preload must be adjusted.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), spacer (B), and

85 mm thrust shim (C) from the transmission
housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212 'f
(100 'C) with a heat gun (E). Do not heat the
housing more than 212 'f (100 'C).
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room

temperature before adjusting the bearing preload.
5. Install the spacer (C), and the bearing outer race (D)
in the transmission housing.
6. Drive the outer race securely in the housing using

the driver and the attachment (83 mm) so there is
no clearance between the outer race, spacer, shim,
and housing.
c~
B---
A
2. Replace the tapered roller bearing when the outer

race is to be replaced.
07749-0010000 07HAD-SG00100
3. Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing
side.
BACK
14-418
7. Install the differential assembly (A) in the torque 9. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions
converter housing (8), and install the gasket (e) and to seat the bearings.
the two dowel pins (D) on the housing.
10. Measure the starting torque ofthe differential
assembly with the preload inspection tool, a torque
wrench (A), and a socket (8). Measure the starting
torque at normal room temperature in both
directions.
Standard
New bearings:
3.9-5.1 N·m (40-52 kgf·cm, 35-45 Ibf·in.)
Reused bearings:
3.6-4.8 N·m (37-49 kgf.cm, 32-43lbf·in.)
070AJ-0020101

thrust shim and measure its thickness.
8. Install the transmission housing (E), and install the

mounting bolts (24 bolts) with the transmission
hangers (F) and the ground terminal bracket (G),
then tighten the bolts.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-419
AfT Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection (cont'd)
12. Select a new thrust shim. To increase the starting THRUST SHIM, 85 mm (cont'd)
torque, increase thickness of the thrust shim. To No.· Part Number Thickness
decrease the starting torque, decrease the AA 41466-RG R-OOO 2.000 mm(0.0787 in.)
thickness of the thrust shim. AB 41467-RGR-000 2.025 mm (0.0797 in.)
Changing the shim to the next size will increase or AC 41468-RGR-000 2.050 mm(0.0807 in.)
decrease the starting torque about 0.5-0.6 N·m AD 41469-RGR-000 2.075 mm (0.0817 in.)
(5-6 kgf·cm, 4-5 Ibf·in.). AE 41470-RGR-000 2.100 mm (0.0827 in.)
AF. 41471-RGR-000 2.125 rrim (0.0837 in.)
THRUST SHIM, 85 mm AG 41472-RGR-000 2.150 mm (0.0846 in.)
No. Part Number Thickness AH 41473-RGR-000 2.175 mm (0.0856 in.)
A 41440-RGR-000 1.350 mm (0.0531 in.) AI 41474-RGR-000 2.200 mm (0.0866 in.)
B 41441-RGR-000 1.375 mm (0.0541 in.) AJ 41475-RGR-000 2.225 mm (0.0876 in.)
C 41442-RG R-OOO 1.400 mm (0.0551 in.) AK 41476-RGR-000 2.250 mm (0.0886 in.)
D 41443-RGR-000 1.425 mm (0.0561 in.) AL 41477-RGR-000 2.275 mm (0.0896 in.)
E 41444-RGR-000 1.450 mm (0.0571 in.) AM 41478-RGR-000 2.300 mm (0.0906 in.)
F 41445-RGR-000 1.475 mm (0.0581 in.) AN 41479-RGR-000 2.325 mm (0.0915 in.)
G 41446-RGR-000 1.500 mm (0.0591 in.) AO 41480-RGR-000 2.350 mm (0.0925 in.)
H 41447-RGR-000 1.525 mm (0.0600 in.)
I 41448-RGR-000 1.550 mm (0.0610 in.) 13. Install the new thrust shim, then recheck the
J 41449-RGR-000 1.575 mm (0.0620 in.) starting torque.
K 41450-RGR-000 1.600 mm (0.0630 in.)
L 41451-RGR-000 1.625 mm (0.0640 in.)
M 41452-RGR-000 1.650 mm (0.0650 in.)
N 41453-RGR-000 1.675 mm (0.0659 in.)
0 41454-RG R-OOO 1.700 mm (0.0669 in.)
p 41455-RGR-000 1.725 mm (0.0679 in.)
Q 41456-RG R-OOO 1.750 mm (0.0689 in.)
R 41457-RGR-000 1.775 mm (0.0699 in.)
S 41458-RGR-000 1.800 mm (0.0709 in.)
T 41459-RGR-000 1.825 mm (0.0719 in.)
U 41460-RGR-000 1.850 mm (0.0728 in.)
V 41461-RGR-000 1.875 mm (0.0738 in.)
W 41462-RGR-000 1.900 mm (0.0748 in.)
X 41463-RGR-000 1.925 mm (0.0758 in.)
y 41464-RGR-000 1.950 mm (0.0768 in.)
Z 41465-RGR-000 1.975 mm (0.0778 in.)
BACK
14-420
Transfer Output Shaft
Component Location Index Transfer Output Shaft Bearing

Replacement
___ THRUST SHIM, 28.5 mm
a ~ Adjust Installation Height,

page 14-424 Special Tools Required
Driver, 40 mm 1.0. 07746-0030100
1. Remove the transfer output shaft bearing (A) with a

commercially available puller (8), bearing
separator (C), and shaft protector (D). Place a shaft
protector between the transfer output shaft and the
~TRANSFER
puller to prevent damaging the shaft.
OUTPUT SHAFT
TRANSFER OUTPUT
SHAFT BEARING
2. Install the new bearing on the transfer output shaft

with the using the driver (40 mm 1.0.) and the press.
~077""03010'
BACK 14-421
Oil Seal Replacement

• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 65 mm 07JAD-SH30100
1. Remove the oil seal from the torque converter

housing.
2. Install the new oil seal flush to the torque converter

(65mm).
14-422 BACK
Transmission Housing Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Install the new bearing in the housing in the
• Driver 07749c0010000 direction shown .
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
1. Remove the transfer output shaft bearing (A) from

the transmission housing (8) by heating the
housing to about 212 'f (100"Cl with a heat gun (C).
Do not heat the housing more than 212 'f (100 "C).
3. Drive the new bearing until it bottoms in the

(72x75 mm).
07749·0010600
BACK 14-423
Transfer Output Shaft Installation Height Inspection/Adjustment
NOTE: If the transfer output shaft, transfer output shaft 4. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the
bearing, transfer output shaft transmission housing 28.5 mm thrust shim and measure its thickness.
bearing, transmission housing, or torque converter
housing were replaced, adjust the transfer output shaft 5. Select and install a new thrust shim, then recheck
installation height with the 28.5 mm thrust shim. the installation height.
1. Install the transfer output shaft (A) in the torque THRUST SHIM, 28 5 mm
converter housing, and install the 28.5 mm thrust No. Part Number Thickness
shim (8) on the top of the shaft. If you replace the A 29031-RDK-000 1.82 mm (0.0717 in.)
28.5 mm thrust shim with a new one, use the same 8 29032-RDK-000 1.84 mm (0.0724 in.)
thickness shim as the old one. C 29033-RDK-000 1.86 mm (0.0732 in.)
D 29034-RDK-000 1.88 mm (0.0740 in.)
E 29035-RDK-000 1.90 mm (0.0748 in.)
F 29036-RDK-000 1.92 mm (0.0756 in.)
G 29037-RDK-000 1.94 mm (0.0764 in.)
H 29038-RDK-000 1.96 mm (0.0772 in.)
I 29039-RDK-000 1.98 mm (0.0780 in.)
J 29040-RDK-000 2.00 mm (0.0787 in.)
K 29041-RDK-000 2.02 mm (0.0795 in.)
L 29042-RDK-000 2.04 mm (0.0803 in.)
M 29043-RDK-000 2.06 mm (0.0811 in.)
N 29044-RDK-000 2.08 mm (0.0819 in.)
a 29045-RDK-000 2.10 mm (0.0827 in.)
p 29046-RDK-000 2.12 mm (0.0835 in.)
Q 29047-RDK-000 2.14 mm (0.0843 in.)
R 29048-RDK-000 2.16 mm (0.0850 in.)
S 29049-RDK-000 2.18 mm (0.0858 in.)
2. Install the new gasket (C) on the torque converter T 29050-RDK-000 2.20 mm (0.0866 in.)
housing. U 29051-RDK-000 2.22 mm (0.0874 in.)
V 29052-RDK-000 2.24 mm (0.0882 in.)
3. Measure the height (D) of the transfer output shaft W 29053-RDK-000 2.26 mm (0.0890 in.)
installation between the surface (E) of the gasket X 29054-RDK-000 2.28 mm (0.0898 in.)
and the top (F) of the 28.5 mm thrust shim in at y 29055-RDK-000 2.30 mm (0.0906 in.)
least three places. Use the average as the actual Z 29056-RDK-000 2.32 mm (0.0913 in.)
height. AA 29057-RDK-000 2.34 mm (0.0921 in.)
Standard: 46.31-46.35 mm (1.823-1.825 in.)
Transfer Output Shaft Cutaway View
E ----..------------.1
14-424 BACK
Transfer Assembly
Inspection
Transfer Gear Backlash Measurement Total Starting Torque Measurement
1. Set a dial indicator (A) on the transfer companion 3. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (8)
flange (8); position dial indicator tip (C) on the with soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer
direct extension of the bolt hole center (0). housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
materials between the transfer housing and the
o c vise.
2. Measure the transfer gear' backlash.
Standard: 0.06-0.16 mm (0.02-0.06 in.'
4. Rotate the companion flange several turns to seat

the tapered roller bearings.
5. Measure the starting torque at the companion

flange (C) with a torque wrench (0) and a socket (E).
Standard: 2.64-4.23 N·m

(26.9-43.1 kgf·cm, 23.3-37.4Ibf·in.)
6. If the measurements are out of standard,

disassemble the transfer assembly and repair it.
BACK 14-425
Transfer Assembly
Disassembly
Exploded View
TAPERED ROLLER
BEARING
[
TRANSFER
SPACER
RT~
~~ - ~
TRA:;"ROUTPUT
SHAFT (HYPOID GEAR)
'" THRUST SHIM, 40 mm

TAPERED ROLLER BEARING ~ Selective part
OUTER RACE
o \ TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
OUTER RACE
COMPANION FLANGE
THRUST WASHER
TAPERED ROLLER
• BEARING
CONICAL SPRING \
WASHER
Replace.
~~!iY ~~'J~ 'J

\3
\
~ ~TRANSFERHOUSING
TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
/ 1 ~~~\
BACK-UP
\)
:::~;.
OIL SEAL
Replace.
OUTER RACE
LOCKNUT,
22x1.25mm
Replace.
14-426 BACK
Special Tools Required 5. Cut the lock tab on the locknut using a chisel.
Companion flange holder 07XAB-0010101
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the

1. Remove the transfer cover (A) from the transfer

housing (B).
6. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)

with soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer
housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
vise.
2. Remove the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft

assembly (C), 25 mm thrust shim (D), and tapered
roller bearing (E).
3. Remove the O-ring (F) from the cover.
4. Drain the transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil) from the

transfer housing.
7. Install the companion flange holder on the

companion flange, then loose the locknut.
8. Remove the companion flange holder.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-427
Transfer Assembly
Disassembly (cont'd)
9. Remove the locknut (A), conical spring washer (8), 11. Remove the oil seal (A) and tapered roller bearing
back-up ring (e), O-ring (D), and companion flange (8) from the transfer housing (e).
(E) from the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (F).
10. Remove the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (A)

from the transfer housing (8), then remove the
thrust washer (e) and transfer spacer (D) from the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
14-428 BACK
Transfer Hypoid Drive Gear Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Install the new tapered roller bearing (A) on the
• Driver 07749-0010000 transfer hypoid drive gear (B) using the driver, the
• Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 attachment (42 x 47 mm), the attachment
I
• Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 07LAD-PW50601 (40 x 50 mm), and the press.
1. Remove the tapered roller bearing (A) from the 07749-0010000

transfer hypoid drive gear (B) using the driver, the
attachment (42 x 47 mm), bearing separator (C) and ~
the press.
07746-0010300
07746-0010300
Sectional View
BACK 14-429
Tra,nsfer Assembly
Transfer Output Shaft (Hypoid Gear) Bearing Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Install the 40 mm thrust shim (A) over the transfer
Driver, 40 mm I.D.07746-0030100 output shaft (hypoid gear) (B) .
1. Remove the tapered roller bearing (A) from the

transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (B) with a
bearing$eparator (C) and the press. Place a shaft
• " .......'00 l
protector (D) between the transfer output shaft
(hypoid gear) and the press to prevent damaging
the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
3. Install the tapered roller bearing (C) over the

transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) using the driver
(40 mm I. D.) and the press.
14-430 BACK
Transfer Housing Tapered Roller Bearing Outer RaceR~placement'
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the press-fitted bearing outer race (A) from
- Driver 07749-0010000 the transfer housing (B) by heating the,housing to
- Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400 about 212 "F (100 "C) with aheatgun:{C). Do not
- Attachment, 65 mm 07JAD-SH30100 ,heat the housing rtlore than 212"F (100 "C).
- Tapered bearing race installer A 07MAF-SP0011A
-Installer shaft 07MAF-SP0013A
NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one whenever

the outer race is replaced.
1. Remove the 52 mm bearing outer race (A), 75 mm

outer race (B), and 65 mm outer race (C) from the
transfer housing (D).
NOTE: Some bearing outer races (52 mm, 65 mm,

and 75 mm) are press-fitted in the housing and
must be removed by heating the housing.
3. Install the 52 mm bearing outer race (A) until it

bottoms in the transfer housing (B) using the driver
and the attachment (52 x 55 mm).
~0100"
B
(cont'd)
BACK 14~431,
Transfer Assembly
Transfer Housing Tapered RoUer Bearing Outer Race .Replacement .(cont'd)

. 4. Install the75 mm bearing outer race (A) and 65 mm
.. bearing outer race (B) in the transfer housing (C),
set the attachme'nt(65 mm) and the tapered
bearing race installer A over the races, and install
the installer shaft through the attachment and
installer.
07MAF·SP0011A t:?
\ ~W"
A-----.,. \) / ~~P0013A
07JAD-SH30100
\
07MAF·SPOO,13A
5. Tighten the installer shaft nut (A) to install the races

(B) (C) into the transfer housing (D) securely.
A c B A 07MAF.SP0013A
\
07MAF·$P0011A
14~432
BACK
Transfer Cover Tapered Roller Bearing Outer Race Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Install the 80 mm thrust shim (A) and bearing outer
• Driver 077 49-0010000 race (8) in the transfer cover (C) .
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one whenever

the outer race is replaced.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A) and 80 mm

thrust shim (8) from the transfer cover (C). If the
bearing outer race is press-fitted, remove the outer
race by heating the cover to about 212"F (100 "C)
with a heat gun (D). Do not heat the housing more
than 212"F (100 "C).
3. Drive the outer race securely in the cover using the

driver and the attachment (78 x 80 mm) so there is
no clearance between the outer race, thrust shim,
and cover.
f- 07749-0010000
07NAD-PX40100
BACK 14-433
Transfer Assembly
Transfer Cover Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Install the new oil seal (A) in the transfer cover (B)
• Driver 07749-0010000 in height (C) of 0-1 mm (0-0.04 in.) above the
• Attachment, 65 mm 07JAD-SH30100 cover surface using the driver and attachment
(65 mm).
1. Remove the oil seal from the transfer cover.
14-434 BACK
Reassembly

EXAMPLE
• Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
• Driver 07749-0010000 A: Existing transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)
• Attachment, 65 mm 07JAD-SH30100 Number: +2
B: Replacement transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)
• Companion flange-holder 07XAB-0010101 Number: -1
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 C: Existing 40 mm thrust shim
thickness: 1.05 mm
X: Replacement 40 mm thrust shim thickness
NOTE:
• While reassembling the transfer assembly: X: AI100-BI100+C
- Check and adjust the transfer gear tooth contact. : 21100-(-111100+1.05
: 0.02+0.01+1.05: 1.08 (mm)
- Measure and adjust the transfer gear backlash.
- Check and adjust the tapered roller bearing starting Select No. M 40 mm thrust shim of 1.08 mm (0.043 in.)
torque.
• Coat all parts with transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil)
during reassembly.
• Replace the tapered roller bearing and the bearing
outer race as a set if either part is replaced.
• Replace the transfer hypoid drive gear and the A B
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) as a set if either
part is replaced.
1. Select the 40 mm thrust shim if the transfer output

shaft (hypoid gear) is replaced. Calculate the
thickness of the 40 mm thrust shim using the THRUST SHIM, 40 mm
formula below, and select the shim from the Shim Part Number Thickness
following table. No.
A 29361-RDK-000 0.72 mm (0.028 in.)
FORMULA: A/100-BI100+C : X B 29362-RDK-000 0.75 mm (0.030 in.)
A: Number on the existing transfer output C 29363-RDK-000 0.78 mm (0.031 in.)
shaft (hypoid gear) D 29364-RDK-000 0.81 mm (0.032 in.)
E 29365-RDK-000 0.84 mm (0.033 in.)
B: Number on the replacement transfer output
shaft (hypoid gear) F 29366-RDK-000 0.87 mm (0.034 in.)
G 29367-RDK-000 0.90 mm (0.035 in.)
C: Thickness of the existing 40 mm thrust shim
H 29368-RDK-000 0.93 mm (0.037 in.)
X: Thickness needed for the replacement 40 mm I 29369-RDK-000 0.96 mm (0.038 in.)
thrust shim J 29370-RDK-000 0.99 mm (0.039 in.)
NOTE: The number on the transfer output shaft K 29371-RDK-000 1.02 mm (0.040 in.)
(hypoid gear) is shown in 1/100 mm. L 29372-RDK-000 1.05 mm (0.041 in.)
M 29373-RDK-000 1.08 mm (0.043 in.)
N 29374-RDK-000 1.11 mm (0.044 in.)
0 29375-RDK-000 1.14 mm (0.045 in.)
2. Select the 40 mm thrust shim if the tapered roller

bearing on the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) is
replaced. Measure the thickness of the replacement
bearing and the existing bearing, and calculate the
difference of the bearing thickness. Adjust the
thickness of the existing 40 mm thrust shim by the
amount of difference in bearing thickness, and
select the replacement 40 mm thrust shim.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-435
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
3. Install the 40 mm thrust shim (A) on the transfer 5. Drive the oil seal securely in the transfer housing
output shaft (hypoid gear) (8), then install the using the driver and the attachment (65 mm).
tapered roller bearing (C) using the driver (40 mm
1.0.) and the press.
I- 07749-0010000
077 46-0030100
/
~. 07JAD-SH30100
B
Sectional View
6. Install the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (A) in
the transfer housing (8). Do not install the transfer
spacer and thrust washer on the transfer output
4. Place the tapered roller bearing (A) on the bearing shaft (hypoid gear).
outer race of the companion flange side of the
transfer housing, and install the new oil seal (8).
14-436 BACK
7. Install the companion flange (A), conical spring 10. Tighten the locknut while measuring the starting
washer (B) in the direction shown, and locknut (C) torque of the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) so
on the transfer outputshaft (hypoid gear) (D). Do the starting torque is within 1.15-1.71 N·m
not install the O-ring and back-up ring. (11.7-17.4 kgf·cm, 10.2-15.1 Ibf·in.). Do not stake
the locknut in this step.

A
12. Apply Prussian Blue to both sides of the transfer
hypoid drive gear teeth lightly and evenly.
C \ 13. Install the tapered roller bearing (A), 25 mm thrust

shim (B), and transfer drive gear/shaft assembly (C)
in the transfer housing (D).
·D
8. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B) c~

------~.
with soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer
housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
vise. A-----...O~
Q
14. Install the transfer cover (E) and secure the cover
with the bolts. Do not install the O-ring on the
transfer cover.
15. Rotate the companion flange in both directions

9. Install the companion flange holder on the until the transfer gears rotate one full turn in both
companion flange. directions.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-437
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
16. Set adial indicator (A) on the transfer companion 19. Ifthe backlash measurement is out of standard,
flange (B); position dial indicatbrtip (C) on the adjust the backlash with the 40 mm thrust shim and
direct extension of the bolt hole center (D). recheck. Do not use more than two 40 mm thrust
shims to adjust the backlash.
20. If the transfer gear tooth contact is incorrect, adjust

the tooth contact with the 25 mm, 40 mm, or 80 mm
thrust shim. Do not use more than two of each
thrust shim to adjust the tooth contact.
• Toe Contact
Use a thicker 40 mm thrust shim to move the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) away from the
transfer hypoid drive gear. Because this
movement causes the transfer gear backlash to
change, move the transfer hypoid drive gear
toward the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) to
adjust the transfer gear backlash as follows:
17. Measure the transfer gear backlash. - Reduce the thickness of the 25 mm thrust shim.
- Increase the thickness of the 80 mm thrust
Standard: 0.06-0.16 mm (0.02-0.06 in.) shim by the amount you reduced the thickness
of the 25 mm thrust shim.
18. Remove the transfer cover, transfer hypoid drive
gear/shaft assembly, and check the transfer hypoid • Heel Contact
drive gear tooth contact pattern. Use a thicker 40 mm thrust shim to move the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) toward the
CORRECT TOOTH CONTACT PATTERN transfer hypoid drive gear. Because this
movement causes the transfer gear backlash to
change, move the transfer hypoid drive gear
away from the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)
to adjust the transfer gear backlash as follows:
INCORRECT TOOTH CONTACT PATTERN - Increase the thickness of the 25 mm thrust
shim.
~ TOECONTACT
- Reduce the thickness of the 80 mm thrust shim
by the amount you increased the thickness of
the 25 mm thrust shim.
• Flank Contact
~HEELCONTACT Use a thicker 25 mm thrust shim to move the

transfer hypoid drive gear away from the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear). Flank contact must be
adjusted within the limits of the transfer gear
backlash. If the backlash exceeds the limits,
adjust as described under Heel Contact.
FLANK CONTACT
• Face Contact
Use a thinner 25 mm thrust shim to move the
transfer hypoid drive gear toward the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear). Face contact must be
~ FACE CONTACT
adjusted within the limits of the transfer gear
backlash. If the backlash exceeds the limits,
adjust as described under Toe Contact.
BACK
14-438
THRUST SHIM, 25 mm 22. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)
Shim Part Number Thickness with soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer
No. housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
1.70 29411-P1C-OOO 1.70 mm (0.067 in.) materials between the transfer housing and the
1.73 29412-P1 C-OOO 1.73 mm (0.068 in.) vise.
1.76 29413-P1 C-OOO 1.76 mm (0.069 in.)
1.79 29414-P1 C-OOO 1.79 mm (0.070 in.)
1.82 29415-P1 C-OOO 1.82 mm (0.072 in.)
1.85 29416-P 1C-OOO 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
1.88 29417 -P1 C-OOO 1.88 mm (0.074 in.)
1.91 29418-P1 C-OOO 1.91 mm (0.075 in.)
1.94 29419-P1 C-OOO 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
1.97 29420-P1 C-OOO 1.97 mm (0.078 in.)
2.00 29421-P1C~000 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
2.03 29422-P1 C-OOO 2.03 mm (0.080 in.)
2.06 29423-P1 C-OOO 2.06 mm (0.081 in.)
2.09 29424-P1 C-OOO 2.09 mm (0.082 in.)
2.12 29425-P1 C-OOO 2.12 mm (0.083 in.)
2.15 29426-P1 C-OOO 2.15 mm (0.085 in.)
2.18 29427 -P1 C-OOO 2.18 mm (0.086 in.)
2.21 29428-P1 C-OOO 2.21 mm (0.087 in.)
2.24 29429-P1 C-OOO 2.24 mm (0.088 in.)
23. Install the companion flange holder on the
21. Remove the transfer cover (A), transfer hypoid companion flange, then loose the locknut.
drive gear/shaft assembly (B), 25 mm thrust shim
(C), and tapered roller bearing (D) from the transfer 24. Remove the companion flange holder.
housing (E) after adjusting the transfer gear
backlash or transfer gear tooth contact. 25. Remove the locknut (A), conical spring washer (B),
and companion flange (C) from the transfer output
shaft (hypoid gear) (D).
A
C
A \
26. Remove the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)

from the transfer housing.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-439
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
27.· Install the thrust washer (A) and the new transfer 30. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)
spacer (B)on the transfer output shaft (hypoid with soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer
gear) (C) in the direction shown, and install them in housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
the transfer housing (D). materials between the transfer housing and the
vise.
28. Coat the threads of the locknut and transfer output

shaft (hypoid gear) with transfer fluid (hypoid gear
oil). 31. Install the companion flange holder on the
companion flange.
29. Install the companion flange (A), new O-ring (B),
back-up ring (C), new conical spring washer (D), 32. Tighten the locknut while measuring the starting
and new locknut (E) on the transfer output shaft torque of the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) so
(hypoid gear) (F). Install the conical spring washer the starting torque is within 1.15-1.71 N·m
in the direction shown. (11.7-17.4 kgf·cm, 10.2-15.1 Ibf·in.).
Tightening Torque:
108-294N·m
(11.0-30.0 kgf·m, 79.6-217Ibf·ft)
Starting Torque:
1.15-1.71 N·m
(11.7-17.4 kgf·cm, 10.2-15.1Ibf·in.)
NOTE:
• Rotate the companion flange several turns to
seat the tapered roller bearings, then measure
the starting torque.
• Ifthe starting torque exceeds 1.71 N·m
(17.4 kgf·cm, 15.1Ibf·in), replace the transfer
spacer and reassemble the parts. Do not adjust
the torque with the locknut loose.
D • If the tightening torque exceeds 294 N·m
(30.0 kgf·m, 217 Ibf·ft), replace the transfer spacer
and reassemble the parts.
14-440 BACK
34. Stake the locknut into the transfer output shaft 37. Secure thetransfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)
(hypoid gear) in depth (A) of 0.7-1.2 mm with soft jaws. To prevent'damage to the transfer
(0.03-0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch (B). housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
vise.
35. Install the tapered roller bearing (A), 25 mm thrust

shim (B), and transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft
assembly (C) in the transfer housing (D). 38. Rotate the companion flange several turns to seat
the tapered roller bearings.
39. Measure the starting torque at the companion

flange (C) with a torque wrench (D) and a socket (E).
Standard: 2.64-4.23 N·m

(26.9-43.1 kgf·cm, 23.3-37.4Ibf.in.)
40. Remove the transfer cover from the transfer

housing.
41. If the measurement is within the standard, go to

step 47.
36. Temporarily install the transfer cover (E) without

the O-ring, and secure the cover with the bolts.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-441
,'Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
42. If the measurement. is out 0f standard, remove the 43. Measure the thickness of the 75 mm thrustshim,
bea~ing outer race (A) and.80 mm thrust shim (B) and select the new 75 mm thrust shim.
from the transfer covei' (e); If the bearing outer race
is press-fitted, remove the outer race by heating the THRUST SHIM, 80 mm
cover to about 212 "F (100 "C) with a heat gun (D). Shim Part Number Thickness
Do not heatthe housing more than 212 "F (100 "C). No.
A 41401-RDK-000 1.52 mm (0.060 in.)
B 41402-RDK-000 1.55 mm (0.061 in.)
e 41403-RDK-000 1.58 mm (0.062 in.)
0 41404-RDK-000 1.61 mm (0.063 in.)
E 41405-RDK-000 1.64 mm (0.065 in.)
F 41406-RDK-000 1.67 mm (0.066 in.)
G 41407-RDK-000 1,70 mm (0.067 in.)
H 41408-RDK-000 1.73 mm (0.068 in.)
I 41409-RDK-000 1.76 mm (0.069 in.)
J 41410-RDK-000 1.79,mm (0.070 in.)
K 41411-RDK-000 1.82 mm (0.072 in.)
L 41412-RDK-000 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
M 41413-RDK-000 1.88 mm (0.074 in.)
o N 41414-RDK-000 1.91 mm (0.075 in.)
0 41415-RDK-OOO 1.94 mm(0.076 in.)'
C ---------- p 41416-RDK-000 1.97mrn (0.078 in.)
, ' , Q 41417-RDK-000 2.00 mm(0.079,in.)
R 41418-RDK-000 2.03 mm (0.080 in.)
S 41419-RDK-000 2.06 mm (0.081 in.)
T 41420-RDK-000 2.09 mm (0.082 in.)
, ' U 41421-RDK-000 2.12 mm (0.083 in.)
V '41422~RDK-000 2.15 mm (0.085 in.)
W 41423-RDK-000 2.18 mm (0.086 in.)
X 41424-RDK-000 2.21 m'm (0.087 in.)
y 41425-RDK-000 2.24 mm (0.088 in.)
Z 41426-RDK-000 2.27 mm (0.089 in.)
AA 41427-RDK-000 2.30 mm (0.091 in.)
AB 41428-RDK-OOO 2.33 mm (0.092 in.)
Ae 41429-RDK-000 2.36 mm (0.093 in.)
AD 41430-RDK-000 2.39 mm (0.094 in.)
AE 41431-RDK-000 2.42 mm (0.095 in.)
AF 41432-RDK-000 2.45 mm (0.096 in.)
AG 41433-RDK-000 2.48 mm (0.098 in.)
AH 41434-RDK-000 2.5,1 mm (0.099 in.)
AI 41435-RDK-000 2.54 mm (0.100 in.)
AJ 41436-R DK-OOO 2.57 mm (0.101 in.)
AK 41437-RDK-000 2.60 mm (0.102 in.)
AL 41438-RDK-000 2.63 mm (0.104 in.)
AM 41439-RDK-000 2.66 mm (0.105 in.)
14-442 BACK
44. Install the 80 mm thrust shim (A) and bearing outer 47. Install the new O-ring (A) on the transfer cover (8),
race (8) in the transfer cover (C). If you heated the then install the transfer cover on the transfer
cover, let it cool to room temperature before housing (C).
installing the thrust shim.
45. Drive the outer race securely in the cover using the
driver and the attachment (78 x 80 mm) so there is
no clearance between the outer race, thrust shim,
and cover.
~ 07749-0010000
~ 48. Remove the filler plug (A), then refill the transfer
assembly with transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil). Use a
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil,
API classified GL4 or GL5 only.
Viscosity:
SAE 90: Above 0 "F ( -18 'C)
SAE 80W-90: Below 0 "F (-18 'C)
Hypoid Gear Oil Capacity: 0.45 L (0.48 US qt)
46. After replacing the 80 mm thrust shim, recheck and

make sure that the total staring torque is within the
specification.
49. Install the filler plug with the new sealing washer
(8).
BACK 14-443
BACK
Rear Differential
Rear Differential
Special Tools ................................................................. 15-2
General Troubleshooting Information ....................... 15-4
SH-AWD Differential Clutch Torque Memorization ... 15-7
Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration
Neutral Position Memorization ................................ 15-7
SH-AWD Control Unit Initialization ............................. 15-8
DTC Troubleshooting Index ........................................ 15-9
System Description ...................................................... 15-11
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 15-20
DTC Troubleshooting ................................................... 15-22
Symptom Troubleshooting ......................................... 15-66
SH-AWD Function Test ................................................ 15-68
Rear Differential Fluid
Inspection and Replacement ................................... 15-69
Rear Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor
Replacement ........................................................ ..... 15-70
SH-AWD Control Unit Replacement ........................... 15-71
SH-AWD Relay Replacement ...................................... 15-71
Rear Differential Mount Replacement ........................ 15-72
Rear Differential Breather Box and Hose
Replacement .............................. .......................... ..... 15-73
Rear Differential Removal ............................................ 15-74
Rear Differential Installation ........................................ 15-75
Rear Differential Disassembly/Reassembly ............... 15-77
Center Case Oil Seal Replacement ............................. 15-78
Side Case Oil Seal Replacement ................................. 15-86
Center Case Replacement ............................................ 15-87
Side Case Replacement ............................................... 15-89
BACK
Rear Differential
Special Tools

CD 070AD-STK0110 Oil Seal Driver A 1
® 070AD-STK0120 Oil Seal Driver B 1
® 070AD-STK0130 Oil Seal Driver C 1
® 070AJ-SJAA130' Nut, 14 x 1.5 mm 5
® 070AJ-SJAA112' Adapter, Torque Wrench 1
@ 07SAZ-001000A Backprove set 2
(j) 07XAB-001A101 Companion Flange Holder 1
® 07 AAD-S3VA 100 Driveshaft remover 1
® 07747-0010100 Fork Seal Driver Weight . 1
* Part of Adapter, Torque Wrench Set, 070AJ-SJAA102
15-2 BACK
SH-AWD INDICATOR SH-AWD RELAY

Test, page 22-77
Replacement,page 15-71
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSAI REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
MODULATOR- Inspection and Replacement,
CONTROL UNIT' page 15-69
ACCELERATION SENSOR
Neutral Position Memorization,
page 15-7 REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT

Initialization, page 15-8
REAR DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY
SH-AWD Differential Clutch Torque
Memorization, page 15-7
Removal, page 15-74
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 15-77
Center Case Oil Seal Replacement, page 15-78
Side Case Oil Seal Replacement, page 15-86
Center Case Replacement, page 15-87
Side Case Replacement, page 15-89
BACK 15-3
Rear Differential
SH-AWD Indicator
The SH-AWD indicator comes on under certain conditions even if the AWD system is working normally. Here are some
examples:
• When you use high-powered wireless equipment such as a CB or Ham radio in the vehicle.
• When you keep spinning the rear wheels while the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, snow, etc.
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops below 10 volt.
After the SH-AWD indicator comes on, it stays on until you turn the ignition switch off.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
• The SH-AWD control unit can memorize up to eight different DTCs. The system displays the DTCs by blinking the
SH-AWD indicator. Multiple DTCs are displayed in the order they occurred, beginning with the most recent.
• If the same DTC is detected more than once, the most recent DTC is written over the earlier one. Therefore, when the
same problem is detected more than once, it is memorized as a single DTC.
• The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-volatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs are not cleared
when the battery is disconnected or the SH-AWD control unit is disconnected.
• If there is a problem in the central processing unit (CPU) ofthe SH-AWD control unit, the SH-AWD indicator comes
on, but no DTC is memorized.
Self-diagnosis
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the system does the following:
• Turns the SH-AWD indicator on.

• Memorizes the DTC.
• Stops AWD control and puts the vehicle back in FWD.
• Reduces engine torque to suit the driving conditions when the abnormality was detected.
15-4 BACK
How to Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the SH-AWD
(DTCs) Control Unit
When the SH-AWO control unit senses an abnormality Special Tools Required
in the input or output systems, the SH-AWO indicator in Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (two required)
the gauge assembly will usually come on, and the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), the 05 indicator, and! 1. Remove the left side trim panel cover (see page
or the ABS indicator may also come on. 20-92).
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HOS to 2. Remove the cargo floor lid and the cargo box
the data link connector (OLC) (A) behind the driver's (see page 20-90).
dashboard lower cover.
3. Remove the SH-AWO control unit (A).
4. Inspect the circuit on the SH-AWO control unit

according to the OTC Troubleshooting using the
2. turn the ignition switch ON (II), and follow the special tools and a digital multi meter or an analog
prompts on the HOS to display the OTC(s) on the circuit tester.
screen. After determining the OTC(s), refer to the
OTC Troubleshooting.
NOTE: See the HOS help menu for specific

instruction.
3. Ifthere are fuel and emission OTCs, AfT OTCs, and

VSA system OTC's at the same time, troubleshoot
the fuel and emission OTCs first.
4. After recording the OTCs, clear all OTCs.
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in AWO

mode, and check for OTCs. If the OTC returns, refer
to the OTC Troubleshooting. If the OTC does not B
07SAZ-001000A
return, there was an intermittent problem within
the circuit. Make sure all connectors and terminals 5. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking
in the circuit are tight. patch cords (B), and connect the cords to the
multimeter or an analog circuit tester (C). Using the
wire insulator as a guide for the contoured-tip of
the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the
connector from the wire side until it comes in
contact with the terminal end of the wires.
(cont'd)
BACK 15-5
Rear Differential
Updating the SH-AWD Control Unit 1. Select the update program, and follow the screen
prompts to update the SH-AWD control unit.
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) 2. If the software in theSH-AWD control unit is the
• Honda interface module (HIM) latest, disconnect the HDS/HIM from the DLe, and
• HDS pocket tester go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the
software in theSH-AWD control unit is not the
NOTE: latest, follow the instructions on the screen.
• Use this procedure when you need to update the
SH-AWD control unit in a troubleshooting procedure. 3. Do the SH-AWD control unit initialization (see page
• Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software 15-8).
version.
• Before you update the SH-AWD control unit, make 4. Do the SH-AWD differential clutch torque
sure the battery in the vehicle is fully charged. memorization (see page 15-7).
• Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update.
If there is a problem with the update, leave the 5. Do the yaw rate - lateral/longitudinal acceleration
ignition switch ON. neutral position memorization (see page 15-7).
• To prevent SH-AWD control unit damage, do not
operate anything electrical (headlights, audio system,
brakes, Ale, power windows, moonroof, door locks,
etc.) during the update.
• To ensure the latest program is installed, do an
SH-AWD control unit update whenever the SH-AWD
control unit is substituted or replaced.
• You cannot update an SH-AWD control unit with a
program it already has. It wi" only accept a new
program.
• If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) lamp came on or
was flashed during the update, leave the ignition
switch in the ON (") position when you disconnect the
HIM from the data link connector (DLe). This will
prevent SH-AWD control unit damage.
15-6 BACK
SH-AWD Differential Clutch Torque Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal
Memorization Acceleration Neutral Position
Memorization
Whenever the side clutch set is replaced, the differential
clutch torque memorization must be done. Whenever the yaw rate sensor or the lateral
acceleration sensor is replaced, its neutral position
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to memorization must be done.
the 16P DLC (A) behind the driver's dashboard
lower cover. 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to
the 16P DLC (A) behind the driver's dashboard
lower cover.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), go to the

miscellaneous test menu/neutral menu/differential
torque and follow the prompts on the HDS screen. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), go to the
miscellaneous test menu/neutral menu/all sensor
NOTE: See the HDS help menu for specific and follow the prompts on the HDS screen.
instructions.
NOTE: See the HDS help menu for specific
instructions.
BACK
15-7
Rear ,Differential
SH-AWD Control Unit Initialization
Whenever the SH-AWO control unit is replaced, it must

initialized.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HOS to

the 16P OLe (A) behind the driver's dashboard
lower cover.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), go to the

miscellaneous test menu/neutral menu/all sensor
and follow the prompts on the HOS screen.
NOTE: See the HOS help menu for specific

instructions.
15-8 BACK
DTC Troubleshooting Index
DTC' SH-AWD Detection Item Page

Indicator
Light
12-1 ON Lateral Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-22)
15-1 ON Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-22)
16-3 ON Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position Incorrect (see page 15-23)
33-2 ON Yaw Rate Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-24)
33-3 ON Yaw Rate Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-24)
41-1 ON Lost of Communication with Power Control Module (PCM) (see page 15-24)
41-2 ON Lost ofCommunication with VSA (see page 15-26)
41-4 ON Lost of Communication with AfT Control Unit (see page 15-27)
41-5 ON Lost-of Communication with Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal (see page 15.29)
Acceleration Sensor
41-6 ON Lost of Communication with Steering Angle Sensor (seepage 15-30)
42-1 ON Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor (Short·to power) (see page 15-31)
42-2 ON Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor (Open/GND Short) (see page 15-32)
43-1 ON Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Malfunction (see page 15-35)
44-11 ON SH-AWD Control Unit (see page 15-36)
44-12 ON SH-AWD Relay Stuck ON (see page 15-37)
44-32 ON SH-AWD Control Unit Power Supplv Stuck ON (see page 15-38)
44-41 ON SH-AWD Control Unit Power Supply Stuck OFF (see page 15-38)
44-50 ON . SH-AWD Control Unit Power Supply Stuck Voltage Low (see page 15-39)
49-1 ON SH-AWD Control Unit (PG Line Open) (see page 15-41)
52-3 ON Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Current Malfunction (see page 15-42)
53-1 ON Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Malfunction (see page 15-45)
53-2 ON Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil (Short) (see page 15-47)
53-3 ON Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Malfunction (see page 15-45)
56-3 ON Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Current Malfunction (see page 15-49)
57-1 ON Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Malfunction (see page 15-52)
57-2 ON Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil (Short) (see page 15-54)
57-3 ON Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Malfunction (seej)age 15-52)
76-1 ON Rear Differential Fluid·Overheats (see page 15-56)
77-1 ON Communication Error with the Power Control Module (PCM) (see page 15-57)
77-2 ON Communication Error with the VSA Modulator-Control Unit (see page 15-57)
77-4 ON Communication Error with the Automatic-Transmission Control (see page 15-58)
Unit
77-5 ON Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-59)
77-6 ON Steering Angle Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-59)
78-xx ON SH-AWD Control Unit Self-diagnostic Malfunction (see page 15-60)
81-1 ON Left Search Coil Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-60)
82-1 ON Right Search Coil Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-63)
91-1 ON SH-AWD Control Unit Programming Error (see page 15-65)
*: DTCs are indicated by the SH-AWD indicator when the 16P data link connector (DLC) IS connected to the HDS.
BACK 15-9
Rear Differential
NOTE: Most problems in the unit are to be diagnosed by identifying noises from the gears or bearings. Care should be
t aken during diaanosis not to con f use d·ff . InOIses
I erentla · . h t hose f rom other d·
WIt • components.
rJvetraJn
Symptom Diagnostic Procedure Also check for
The SH-AWD indicator does not Symptom troubleshooting (see page
ao off, and no DTCs are stored 15-66).
The SH-AWD indicator does not Symptom troubleshooting (see page
come on 15-67).
Gear or bearing noises o Fluid level too low.
,. o Add fluid
o Incorrect or worn out fluid o Drain and fill the differential
o Damaged or chipped gears. o -Replace the differential carrier
o Side case clearance incorrect. assembly

o Incorrect tire size (rolling o Side case clearance adjustment
circumference).
Rear differential overheats o Fluid level too low. ,-, o Add fluid
o Incorrect fluid type. o Drain and fill the differential
Rear differential leaks fluid o Fluid level too high. o Lower to proper level
o Clogged breather hose. ,0 Clean or replace
, 0 Worn or damaged oil seal. o Replace the sealing washer
o Damaged sealing washer. o Replace the oil seal
o Loose mounting bolts or inadequate o Recheck torque or apply sealant
sealing.
Rear differential screeches, o Fluid level too low. o Add fluid
whines, moans, or squeaks o Incorrect or worn out-fluid o Drain and fill the differential
o Incorrect tire rolling circumference. o Adjust tire pressure or replace
o Damaged oil pump. tires

o Replace the differential carrier
assembly
Noise during acceleration, or o Incorrect of side case clearance. o Pre-load adjustment.
when accelerating from a full o Incorrect of pre-load. o Side case clearance adjustment
stop o Incorrect of backlash of hypoid gear. o Replace the differential carrier
o Damaged or chipped gears. assembly

o Incorrect tire size (rolling
circumference).
HDS does not communicate Troubleshooting DLC circuit (see page
with the SH-AWD control unit or 11-223).
the vehicle
15-10 BACK
System Description
SH-AWD System
Outline
This vehicle is equipped with a Super Handling All-wheel Drive (SH-AWD) rear differential system. This system uses
electromagnetic clutches and the SH-AWD control unitto control front to rear torque distribution and independent left
to right rear torque distribution. This allows the system to function as a limited slip differential and as a torque
distribution system to improve standing start performance, straight-line stability, climbing, and.comering ability.
SH-AWD features include

• Independent torque distribution to the front and rear wheels, and to the left and right wheels for neutral handling
when cornering.
• Controls differential (inside/outside) wheel speed in a turn to increase cornering stability.
• Limited slip differential function for better acceleration.
Operation
When driving in a straight line, the front and rear wheels are traveling at the same speed. In a normal turn, the
distance traveled by the front wheels is longer than that of the rear wheels. The SH-AWD system monitors the speed
of the front wheels, and increases torque to the outside rear wheel proportionally. This improves stability and steering
response, and on slippery surfaces it provides improved traction ofthe 4-wheel drive system.
FRONT WHEEL RADIUS
TURNING MOMENT
t
DIRECT ELECTROMAGNETIC REAR WHEEL RADIUS
CLUTCH SYSTEM
(cont'd)
BACK 15-11
Rear Differential
Construction
1. The differential assembly has a conventional hypoid ring and pinion gear set.
2. The direct electromagnetic clutch system consists ofthe coils, the planetary gear sets, and the multi-plate clutches
that are installed in the side cases on either side of the differential carrier. When driving straight ahead, both rear
wheels rotate atthe same speed. When turning, c.urrent is applied to the appropriate outside wheel main coil to
engage the clutch. The amount of current passed through the electromagnetic clutch controls the amount of
driving force to the outside wheel.
RIGHT SIDE COIL
HVPOID RING GEAR
15-12 BACK
SH-AWD 4WD Control System
Control System
The SH-AWDcontrol system consists of a SH-AWD control unit, the PCM, the VSA modulator-control unit, along with
various sensors and switches that detect the steering angle, the lateral G force, the yaw, and the vehicle speed. A fluid
temperature sensor is located on in the rear differential. The control units exchange information via the F-CAN
communication lines. The SH-AWD control unit has a self-diagnostic function. If a malfunction is detected, the SH-
AWD control unit turns on the SH-AWD indicator in the gauge assembly and the system goes into fail-safe mode.
When in fail-safe mode~ the vehicle disables the SH-AWD differential. The vehicle defaults to front wheel drive,
reduces engine torque to suit the driving conditions.
Driving Force Control

The driving force control distributes the power based on the driver's inputs. It distributes torque to the front and rear
wheels based on the throttle opening and the available engine torque output. When turning, torque is applied to the
rear wheels independently based on the lateral G input and the direction of the turn. This generates an inward yaw
movement to help steer the vehicle around the turn.
Steering angle sensor 1---......- -
Yaw rate-lateral,
Longitudinal
acceleration sensor
Left clutch
PCM
Right clutch
(cont'd)
BACK 15-13
Rear',Differential
Electromagnetic Clutch System
Construction
The electromagnetic clutch system is incorporated into the side case assemblies on both sides of the differential case.
The system consists of the mUlti-plate clutches, the planetary gears, the pressure guides, the solenoid coil assembly
(the search coil and,the main coil), the armature assembly (the slider and the armature), and the yoke.
Components Purpose -'

Multi-plate clutches' Convert thrust into torque, absorb whe,el speed differences
Planetary Qears MaQnify and convey clutch torQue --
Pressure guides Reduce fluctuations in pressure

Search coils Detect magnetic flux
Main coils Generates magnetic fields
Slider ,Centers the armature ,
Armature Generates magnetic flux to generate thrJ,lst

Yoke Generates maQnetic flux to clamping force
PRESSURE GUIDE
MAIN COIL
YOKE
ARMATURE
15-14 BACK
Operation
The SH-AWD control unit receives inputs from the PCM and the VSA modulator-control unit on the driving conditions
via the F-CAN. The SH-AWD control unit sends signals to the main coils, which engage the electromagnetic clutches
that connect the planetary gear set. This increases the torque applied to the rear wheels. The amount of current sent to
the clutch is continuously varied as driv.ing conditions change.
t
FRONT
(Propeller shaft)
MULTI-PLATE CLUTCHES
MAIN COIL
ARMATURE
YOKE
WHEN THERE IS NO THRUST WHEN THRUST IS GENERATED
(cont'd)
BACK 15-15
Rear Differential
Search Coil Detection System
As the clutch discs wear, the air gap between the pressure guides and the multi-plate clutches increases. The increase
in air gap changes the magnetic field generated by the main coil and the yoke. The search coil detects these changes
in the magnetic field. The SH-AWD control unit uses predetermined maps to compensate for the changes to maintain
precise control and smooth clutch engagement.
THRUST
ARMATURE
SEARCH COIL
... ~
AIR GAP
YOKE
15-16 BACK
Electric Control System
SH-AWD Control Unit Electrical Connections
BATlSIY
lOA
+
SH-AWDCON11IOlUNII
No.9PDAI
lOA I8IIIvIeI
IllayIlOl
SH-AWD
RELAY
YAWRATE-LA1ERALI
LONIlIIIJDINAL
At:CBEJIAlIONSiNSOR
PWR
··
H:. ._~_+--o--RCH___---T:_-_---,~~-- --,
CLUTQI
EI.ECIROMAGNE1I
COlI.
VIA
r-1 .:-~--~~~--~-,
. ~
MODUlATOR • CLUTQI
CONIROL I lCI. ~
lIM!
10M DD'IERENTIAL
TOl R.UID
--------o-----~-~ ~WRE
L _______ ~______ _
DATA
1M K-LIiE
CONNECJIIR
WEN
(cont'd)
BACK 15-17
; ,"
Rear Differential
SH-AWD Control Unit Inputs and Outputs

The SH-AWD control unit terminal voltages and the measuring conditions for,the SH-AWD control system.
Do the SH-AWD inputs and outputs test with the SH-AWD connectors connected.
SH-AWD Control Unit Connector Terminal Locations
Terminal Wire Signal Description Measuring'

number color , Conditions/Terminal Voltage
A1 BlK lFH Detects left search coil signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V
(positive)
A3 BlU RFH Detects right search coil signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V
(positive)
A5 lTBLU K-LiNE Communication line SH-AWD With ignition switch ON (II): 0 v or battery
control unit~to-DlC voltage
A7 GRN IG1 Power supply for SH-AWD With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
control unit
A8 GRN TOl Detects differential fluid With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.2 V to 4.7 V
temperature sensor (negative) (Depending on ATF temperature)
A9 BlK lG1 Unit ground With ignition switch ON (11):0 V
A10 WHT CANH F-CAN communication signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V or
'.
3.5V
A11 RED lFl Detects left search coil signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V
(negative)
A12 RED RFl Detects right search coil signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V
(negative)
A17 ORN FSR Drives SH-AWD relay With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V or battery
voltage
A18 WHT TOH Power supply for differential With ignition switch ON (II): about 4.7 V to 5 V
fluid temperature sensor
A19 GRY WEN Detects write enable signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
A20 RED CANl F-CAN Communication signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V or
1.5V
15-1,8 BACK
.' .. 'I~ •
SH-AWD Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
The SH-AWD control unit terminal voltages and the measuring conditions for t~e SH-Awqclonfrol system.
Do the SH-AWD inputs and outputs test with the SH-AWD connectors connected.
SH-AwPControl Unit ConneCittir Terrilinal Locati~ns
Sl8PI
Terminal Wire Signal Description Measuring·

number color Conditions/Terminal Voltage
B1 WHT PWR Power supply for SH-AWO With engine running: battery voltage
actuator
B2 BLK PG Actuator ground With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
B3 BLK LG2 Unit ground With'ignition switch ON (II): OV .
B4 RED LCH Drives left clutch With clutch off: 0 V ;
electromagnetic coil (positivEt). With clutch on: batteryvoltage

B5 BLU LCL Drives left clutch With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
electromagnetic coil (negative)
B6 ORN RCH Drives right clutch With clutch off: 0 V
electromag'netic coil.,(positive) With clutch on: battery voltage
B7 GRY RCL Drives right clutch With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
., ., .... electromagnetic coil (negative) ". ' .
BACK 15~19
Rear Differential
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER-HOOD RISE BOX

NojRlSE
No.3IRR F/BII60 AI
-v GRN • RED
UNDER-DASH
. IGNmON SWITCH RlSE/RELAY BOX
TTERY
---&--
REARRISEI
No.lIBATJ 1120 AI No.3 061 150 AI B17 A2 RELAY BOX
+ -v WHT
IGI
PNK
BLK
G603
1
G604 as B33
BLK GRN ORN WHT
"
B2 A7 A17 Bl
PG 101 FSR PWR
SH-AWDCONlR9LUNIT
~
lir
,fA A H
..
CANH .CANL K-UNE WEN
AID A20 A5 A19
WHT RED
RED WHT RED WHT RED WHT WHT RED WHT RED WHT RED LTBLU GRY
IA6 IA12 12 14 12 13 139 138 1A46 lAG
14 15
~-
CONTROL ABSOLUTE YAW RATE- VSA POWERTRAIN
MODULE
SH-AWD
INDICATOR
STEERING
ANGLE
SENSOR
LATERAL!
LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION
MODULATOR-
CONTROL
UNIT
CONTROL
MODULE
IPCM)
I DATA UNK CONNECTOR
\
SENSOR
15-20 BACK
I£FTCLUTCH
El£CTROMAGNETIC I£FT
COIL SEARCH COIL
IA RED
~I
8LK
AI
8LUIVEL
~3
GRN/WHT
8LK
LEFT SOI£NOID
4P CONNECTOR I
I I I I I
1
latre.r
\z \1 \4 \3 dIfferential)
RED 8LU 8LK RED
C613 I I
1
15 Is 114 122
1
16
RED 8LU 8LK RED 8LK
1--
84 85 AI All G651
LCH LCL LFH LFL
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT
PWR
L[
I
~ J
?
PWR ~t A tL RCH RCL
&
RFH RFL TOH TOL LGI LGZ
Jr
86 87 A3 AIZ AIS AS AS 83
ORN GRY 8LU RED WHT GRN
\1 \9 \17 \11 \Z \10

C613 I I
I
ORN
I
GRY 8LU
I I
RED
I
WHT
I
GRN
8LK 8LK
RIGHT SOI£NOID I
Iz II 14 13
U
~
4P CONNECTOR
I \
lJI g
RED 8LK GRN 8LU
RIGHT CLUTCH RIGHT DIFFERENTIAL FLUID

El£CTROMAGNETIC SEARCH COIL TEMPERATURE
COIL SENSOR
G603
BACK 15-21
Rear.Differential
OTe Troubleshooting
OTC 12-1, 12-2, 12-3: Lateral Acceleration OTC 15-1: Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor
Sensor Malfunction Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general
2. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Are any Lateral acceleration sensor orcs 3. Test-drive the vehicle with an assistant. When
indicated? accelerating, check the LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• the HDS.
NO-Go to step 3. Does the sensor Value change when acceleration?
3. Test-drive the vehicle with an assistant. Drive in a YES-Go to step 4.

left and right zig-zag pattern at about 13 mph
(20 km/h) and check the LATERAL ACCELERATION NO-Replace the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. acceleration sensor (see page 19-100) .•
Does the sensor value change when turning? 4. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
YES-Go to step 4. 5. Check the LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION

SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
NO-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
have the latest software (see page 15-6), or Is there 0.1 G or less?
substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
recheck (see page 15-71). If the symptom/indication YES-Go to step 6.
goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
troubleshooting is complete. Ifthe symptom/ NO-Do the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD acceleration neutral position memorization
control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control (see page 15-7).lfthe DTC returns, replace the
unit (see page 15-71).• SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71).•
4. Park the vehicle on a level surface. 6. Test-drive the vehicle for 2 minutes in a vehicle
speed is kept constant at 19 mph (30 km/h).
5. Check the LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR in
the DATA LIST with the HDS. 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is there O.1G or less? Is orc 15-1 indicated?
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Replace the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal

time. If the DTC returns, replace the SH-AWD acceleration sensor (see page 19-100).•
NO-Do the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal time. If the DTC returns, replace the SH-AWD
acceleration neutral position memorization control unit (see page 15-71) .•
(see page 15-7). If the DTC returns, replace the
SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71).•
15-22 BACK
DTC 16-3: Steering Angle Sensor Neutral 5. Test-drive the vehide in a straight line at 19 mph
Position Incorrect (30 km/h) or more.
NOTE: 6. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and center the

• Before you troubleshoot, review the general steering wheel.
troubleshooting information {see page 15-4h .:
• Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5). 7. Check the STEERING ANGLE SENSOR in the DATA
• Check for installation df the steering angle sensor. LIST with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). It is Within ±25 deg of center?
2. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS. YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. If the DTC returns, replace the SH-AWD
Are any steering angle. sensor DrCs indicated? control unit (see page 15-71).•
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.• NO-Do the steering angle sensor center point
writing (see page 19-100). Ifthe DTC returns,
NO-Go to step 3. replace theSH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71).

•
4. Check the STEERING ANGLE SENSOR.in the DATA
LIST with the HDS.
When the steering wheels is turned slowly, does

the value change?
YES-Go to step 5.

recheck (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication
goes away with the updated SH-AWDcontrol unit,
troubleshooting is complete. Ifthe symptom/
indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control
unit (see page 15-71)••
BACK 15-23
Rear Differential
DTC 33-2, 33-3: Yaw Rate Sensor Malfunction DTC 41-1: F-CAN Malfunction (Lost
Communication With Power Control Module
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general (PCM))
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). troubleshooti'rlginformation (seepage 15-4).
2. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS. 1. Turn the, ignition switch ON (II).
Are any yaw rate sensor OTCs indicated? . 2. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
YES-Go to the indicated DTC'stroubleshooting .• Are there any PGM-FIDTC's indicated?
NO-Go to step 3. ' YES-Go to,the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
3. Test-drive the vehicle with an assistant. Drive in a NO-Go to step 3.

left and right zig-zag pattern at about 13 mph
(20 km/h) and check the YAW RATE SENSOR in the 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Does the sensor value change when turning?
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.
Is OTC 41-1 indicated?
have the latest software (see page 15-6), or YES-Go to step 6.
recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/indication NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit, time. Check for intermittent open between the
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/ SH-AWD control unit connector terminals A 10 and
indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD A20 and the PCM connectorterminals A48 and
control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control 'A49 .•
unit (see page 15-71).•
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF ..
4. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
5. Check the YAW RATE SENSOR in the DATA LIST

with the HDS.
Is there 3.5 degls or less?

time. If the DTC returns, replace the SH-AWD
NO-Do the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal

acceleration neutral position memorization
(see page 15-7). Ifthe DTC returns, replace the
SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71).•
15-24 BACK
7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 11. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminals A 10 and A20 to body ground.
NOTE: This step must be done to prevent PCM
damage. SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
8. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P). .,
9. Connect PCM connector terminals A 48 and A 49 to

body ground with jumper wires.
111128416161769101 =
11112 181/V116V116 19 201211
I22V 24 ><1261>< 26 271261 Wire side of female terminals
129180 81 32lasVVlqu 87 asl8l1
II 40 I 41 42 48 I 44.1/146 47 46 49 I
'----'
JUMPER JUMPER Is there continuity?
WIRE WIRE
YES-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
-'--- have the latest software (see page 15-6), or
Terminal side offemale terminals recheck (see page 15-71). If the symptom/indication
10. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P). troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
unit (see page 15-71.).•
NO-Repair open in the wires between the

SH-AWD control unit and the PCM .•
BACK 15-25
Rear Differential
DTC 41-2:F-CAN Malfunction (Lost 8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
Communication withVSA) connector.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general 9. Connect VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). terminals No. 38 and No. 39 to body ground with
jumper wires.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT46P CONNECTOR
2. Check for PGM-FI DTC's with the HDS.
Are there any PGM-FI DrCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. = =

4. Start the engine. Wire side offemale terminals

10. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P).
Is DrC 41-2 indicated?
YES-"'Go to step 6.

time. Check for intermittent open between SH-AWD
control unit connector terminals A 10 and A20 and
VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
terminals No. 38 and No: 39 .•.

damage.
15-26
BACK
11. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit DTC 41-4: F-CAN Malfunction (Lost
connector terminals A 10 and A20 to body ground. Communication With AfT Control Unit)
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general
2. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system with theHDS.
Are there any PGM-FI DTC's indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting .•
Wire side of female terminals NO-Go to step 3.
3. Clear the DTC witH the HDS.

have the latest software (see page 15-6), or 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
recheck (see page 15-71). If the symptom/indication Is DTC 41-4 indicated?
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/ YES-Go to step 6.
control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
unit (see page 15-71).• time. Check for intermittent open between the
SH-AWD control unit connector terminals No. A 10
NO-Repair an open in the wires between the and A20 and the PCM (49P) connector terminals
SH-AWD control unit and the VSA modulator- No. A48 and A49.
control unit..
(cont'd)
BACK
15-27
Rea·r Differential
7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 11; Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminals A 10 and A20 to body ground.
damage. SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
8. Disconnect the PCM connector A (49P).
9. Connect PCM connector terminals A 48 and A 49 to

body ground with a jumper wires.
11112 S 4151617691101
111112 13/1/1161/116 19 2!1 21
I22V 24 ><.1251>< 26 27 26 Wire side of female terminals
129130 S1 S2lssVVI'l6 37 as 89
1140 I 41 42 <IS 1441/146 47 46 1491
'-----'
JUMPER JUMPER Is there continuity?
WIRE WIRE
_'--L... have the latest software (see page 15-6), or
Terminal side of female terminals recheck (see page 15-71). If the symptom/indication
10. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit connector A troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
(20P). indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
unit (see page 15-71) .•
NO-Repair an open in the wires between the

SH-AWD control unit and PCM .•
15-28 BACK
DTC 41-5: F-CAN Malfunction (Lost 9. Connect yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration
Communication With Yaw Rate-Lateral! sensor 4P connector terminals No: 3 and No.2 to
Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor) body ground with jumper wires.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general ACCELERATION SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
2. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS.
Are any yaw rate rate-lateral/longitudinal JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE

acceleration sensor DrCs or F-CAN indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.• =

3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 10. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit connector
A (20P).
11. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. connector terminals A 10 and A20 to body ground.
Is DrC 41-5 indicated? SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
YES-Go to step 6.

time. Check for intermittent open between the
SH-AWD control unit connector terminals A 10 and
A20 and the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor (4P) connector terminals No.3
and No.2.•

damage. YES-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
8. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
acceleration sensor 4P connector. recheck (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the

SH-AWD control unit and the yaw rate-lateral/
longitudinal acceleration sensor.•
BACK 15-29
,I: :.
Rea'r Differential
DTC'41-6: F-CAN Malfunction (Lost 9. Connect stee6ng angle sensor 5P connector

Communication with Steering Angle Sensor) terminals No; 4 and No.2 to body ground with a·
jumper wires.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review,the general
troubleshooting information (seepage 15-4). STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR

JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE
Are any steering angleseOsor DrCs of F-CAN
indica.ted?: '

'; "
11. Check for continuity between SH-AWDcontrol unit
5. Check for Dl'Cswiththe HDS. connector terminals A 10 and A20 to body ground.
Is Drc 41-6 indicated? SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-:-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

• I
time .•.
6. Turn the ,gritiol1sWltch OFF:
7. Jumpthe'SCS line with the HDS.
NOTE: This step must be done to prevent PCM Wire side of female terminals
damage.
8. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector. Is there continuity?
YES':" Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not

recheck (see page 15-71).:lfthe symptom/indication
. ':'" goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,

SH-AWD control unit and the steering angle
, . ';
~
sensor.•
1.5-30 BACK
DTC 42-1: Differential Fluid Temperature 7. Connectthe rear differential fluid temperature
Sensor (Short to Power) sensor 2P connector.
NOTE: S. Measure the differential housing temperature with

• Before you troubleshoot, review the general an infrared temperature gauge near the mounting
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). location ofthe rear differential fluid temperature
• If the vehicle has been driven, allow the rear sensor. The temperature should be below 176 "F
differential to cool for about an hour or more before (SO"C) before proceeding to the next step.
doing this troubleshooting procedure.
9. Measure resistance between SH-AWD control unit
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector terminals and AS and A 1S.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
Is DTC 42-1 indicated?
YES-Go to st~p 4.

time .•
5. Disconnect the rear differential fluid temperature

sensor 2P connector and SH-AWD control unit Is there 260 Q or more?
connector A (20P).
6. Check for continuity between rear differential fluid have the latest software (see page 15-6), or
temperature sensor 2P connector terminals No.1 substitute a known-good SH-AWDcontrol unit and
and No.2. recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/indication
goes away with the updated SH-AWD c.ontrol unit,
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE troubleshootingjs complete. If the symptom/
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
control unit, replace the origin.al SH-AWD control
unit (seepage 15-71).•
NO-Replace the rear differential temperature

TOL(GRN) TOH(WHT) sensor (see page 15-70).•
Wire side of male terminals
YES-Repair short in the wire between rear

differential fluid temperature sensor 2P connector
NO-Go to step 7.
BACK 15-31
Rear Differential
OTe 42·2: Differential Fluid Temperature 9. Disconnect the rear differential fluid temperature
Sensor (Open/GND Short) sensor 2P connector.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general 10. Check for continuity between rear differential fluid
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No.2 to
body ground.
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
3. Raise the vehicle, make sure it is securely

4. Start the engine and turn the VSA off (the light on TOH (WHT)
the D position until the vehicle speed reaches
35 mph (56 km/h) and keep running for 10 minutes,
then slow down and stop the wheels. =
Is DTC 42-2 indicated? Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 6. YES- Go to step 11.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO-Repair open in the wire between SH-AWD
time .• control unit connector A and the rear differential
fluid temperature sensor connector.•
8. Connect SH-AWD control unit connector terminal

A 18 to body groundwith jumper wire.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
JUMPER WIRE
=
15-32 BACK
11. Connect SH-AWD control unit connector terminal 13. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
A8 to body ground with jumper wire. connector terminals A9 and A 18.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
=
12. Check for continuity between rear differential fluid Is there continuity?
temperature sensor 2P connector No.1 to body
ground. YES-Repair short in the wire between SH-AWD
control unit connector A and the rear differential
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE fluid temperature sensor connector.•
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 14.

connector terminals A8 and A9.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Repair open in the wire between SH-AWD Wire side of female terminals
fluid temperature sensor connector.•
YES-Repair short in the wire between SH-AWD

fluid temperature sensor connector .•
NO-Go to step 15.
(cont'd)
BACK 15-33
Rear Differential
15. Reconnect the rear differential fluid temperature

sensor 2P connector and SH-AWD control unit
connector A (20P).
. , .

connector terminals A8 and A 18.
Is there 12.67 kQ or less?

recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/indication
troubleshooting is. complete. If the symptom/
NO...."Replace the rear differential fluid temperature

sensor (see page 15-70) .•
15-34 BACK
DTC 43-1: Differential Fluid Temperature 11. Check for continuity between rear differential fluid
Sensor Circuit Malfunction temperature sensor 2P connector terminals No.1
andNo.2.
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
Is DTC 42-1 or 42-2 indicated? TOL(GRN) TOH(WHT)
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Start the engine. Is there continuity?
5. Letthe engine idle 1 minutes. YES-Repair short in the wire between rear
differential fluid temperature sensor 2P connector
6. Test-drive the vehicle for 5 minute. terminals No.1 and No.2.•
7. Check for DTCs with the HDS. NO-Go to step 12.
Is DTC 43-1 indicated? 12. Reconnect all connectors.
YES-Go to step 8. 13. Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not have
the latest software (see page 15-6), or substitute a
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this known-good SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71).
time .•
15. Letthe engine idle 1.
10. Disconnect the rear differential fluid temperature
sensor 2P connector. Is DTC 43-1 indicated?
YES-Replace the rear differential fluid

temperature sensor (see page 15-70).•
NO-Replace the original SH-AWD control unit

(see page 15-71).•
BACK 15-35
Rear Differential
Dle 44-11: SH-AWD Control Unit

Is DTe 44-11 indicated?

unit (seepage 15-71).•

time .•
15-36 BACK
DTC 44-12: SH-AWD Relay Stuck ON 9. Measure voltage between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminal A 17 and body ground.
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). SH·AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this the SH-AWD control unit and SH-AWD relay (FSR
time .• line) .•
6. Remove the SH-AWD relay (see page 15-71), then 10. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector B (8P).
test the SH-AWD relay (see page 22-77).•
11. Measure voltage between SH-AWD control unit
Is the SH-AWD relay OK? connector terminals B1 and B2.
YES-Go to step 7. SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BPI
NO-Replace the SH-AWD relay (see page 15-71).

•


the SH-AWD control unit and SH-AWD relay (PWR
line) .•

BACK 15-37
, .'.
Rear Differential

DTC 44-32: SH-AWD Control Unit Power DTC 44-41: SH-AWD Control Unit Power
Supply Stuck ON Supply Stuck OFF
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Start the engine. 3. Start the engine.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC 44-32 indicated? Is DTC 44-41 indicated?
YES-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not YES-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
have the latest software (see page 15-6), or have the latest software (see page 15-6), or
substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
recheck (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/indication
goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit, goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/ troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control
unit (see page 15-71) .• unit (see page 15-71).•
time.• time.•
15-38 BACK
DTC 44-50: SH-AWD Control Unit Power 9. Measure voltage between SH-AWD relay 4P
Supply Voltage Low connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general .SH·AWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
1. Make sure the battery is fully changed and the

charging system is working properly.
- 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Check these fuse:

=
• No.3 (RR F/B) (60 A) fuse in the main under-hood Wire side of female terminals
fuse/relay box .
• No.9 (30 A) fuse in the rear fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.1
NO-Replace the blown fuses and recheck. If the fuse in the under-hood fuse relay box and the
No.3 (60 A) and No.9 (30 A) fuses blows again, SH-AWD relay .•
repair short to ground in the wire between the fuse
and the SH-AWD relay, then replace the fuse and 10. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P)
recheck .• and connector B (SP).
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 11. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminal B1 and SH-AWD relay 4P
5. Start the engine. connector terminal No.2.
SH·AWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS ... Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 7.

time .•
s. Remove the SH-AWD relay (see page 15-71), then

testthe SH-AWD relay (see page 22-77) .• SH·AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BPI
Is the SH-AWD relay OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Replace the SH-AWD relay (see page 15-71).
• NO-Repair open in the wire between SH-AWD
control unit connector B and the SH-AWD relay
connector.•
(cont'd)
BACK
15-39
Rear Differential
12. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 13. Check for continuity between SH-AWD relay 4P
connector terminal A 17 and SH-AWD relay 4P connector terminal No.4 and body ground.
SH-AWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
SH-AWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals GND
2
Q
=
YES-Go to step 14.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) NO-Repair open in the wire between the SH-AWD
relay and body ground .•
Is there continuity?,.
14. Check for continuity betweenSH-AWD relay4P
YES-Go to step 13. connector terminals No.1 and No. 3 to body
ground (G604).
NO-Repair open in the wire between SH~AWD
control unit connector A and the SH-AWD relay SH·AWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
connector.•
Wire side of female terminals·
Is there battery continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between SH-AWD

relay and body ground .•
NO-Check for loose connector terminals at the

SH-AWD control unit. If the connections are OK,
update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not have
the latest software (see page 15-6), or substitute a
known-good SH-AWD control unitand recheck
(see page 15-71). If the symptom/indication goes
away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
15-40
BACK
DTC 49·1: SH-AWD Control Unit (PG Line
Open)

YES-Go to step 4.

time.•
4. Check for voltage between SH-AWD control unit

connector terminal B2 and body ground.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BP)
Is there less than 0.5 V?

NO-Repair open in the wire between SH-AWD

control unit connector B and body ground or poor
ground (G603) .•
BACK 15-41
Real' D,ifferential
DTC 52-3: Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil 8. Connect a jumper wire between SH-AWD control
Current Malfunction unit connector terminals B4 and B5. Disconnect the
left solenoid 4P connector, then check for
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general continuity between left solenoid 4P connector
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). terminals No.1 and No.2.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)
3. Do the clutch function test with the HDS (see page

15-68).
Is DTC 52-3 indicated? JUMPER WIRE

time .•
LEFT SOLENOID 4P CONNECTOR
connector terminal B2 and body ground.
LCL (BLU)
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)
= Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 9.
Is there less than 0.5 V? NO-Repair open in the wires between the
SH-AWD control unit and the left clutch
YES-Go to step 6. electromagnetic coil..
NO-Repair open in the wire between SH-AWD 9. Removethe jumper wire from the SH-AWD control
control unit connector B and body ground or poor unit connector terminals B4 and B5.
ground (G603) .•
7. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector B (8P).
15-42 BACK
10. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 11. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminals 82 and 84, then check for connector terminals 84 and 85.
continuity between SH-AWD control unit connector
terminals 82 and 85. , SH"AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 18P)
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 18P)

. YES-Repair short in the wires between the SH-

. AWD control unit and the left clutch
electromagnetic.•
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Tu~nthe ignition switch ON (II).
13. Measure voltage between SH-AWD control. unit

connector terminals 82 and 85.

YES-Repair short to ground or short to the ground

wire between the SH-AWD control unit and the left
clutch electromagnetic coil..
NO-Go to step 12.

Is there more than 0.5 V?
YES-Repair short to power in the wires between

the SH-AWD control unit and the left clutch
electromagnetic.•
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
BACK 15-43
Rear Differential

SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTORB (BP)

the SH-AWD control unit 'connector terminal 84 and
left clutch electromagnetic coil .•
NO-Substitute a known-good SH-AWD control

unit and recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/
indication goes away with the updated SH-AWD
control unit, replace the rear differential left side
case .•
15-44 BACK
DTC 53-1, 53-3: Left Clutch Electromagnetic 8. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
Coil Malfunction connector terminal B5 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 18P)

15-68).

Is DTC 53-1 or 53-3 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5. Is there continuity?
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Go to step 9.

time .•
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. SH-AWD control unit and the left clutch
electromagnetic coil..
6. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector B (8P)
and the left solenoid 4P connector. 9. Remove the jumper wire from the left solenoid 4P
7. Connect a jumper wire between left solenoid 4P
connector terminal No.1. 10. Connect a jumper wire between left solenoid 4P
3 4
JUMPER WIRE
3 4
JUMPER WIRE
=
=
(cont'd)
BACK 15-45
Rear Differential
11. Check for continuity between.SH-AWD control unit 17. Disconnect the left solenoid 4Pconnector..
connector terminal 84 and body grQund.
18. Measure the resistance between left solenoid 4P
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B IBP) connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
tr==r.="'~ LCH (BLK)

YES-Go to step 12. Is there 1.8Q or more?
NO-Repair open in the wires betw!;len the YES-Replace the rear differential left side case
SH-AWD control unit and the left clutch (see page 15-89).•
NO-Update the $H-AWD control unit if it does not
12. Remove the jumper wire from the left solenoid 4P have the latest software (see page 15-6), or
connector terminal No.1. substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
recheck (see page 15-71) . .lfthesymptom/indication
13. Reconnect all connectors. goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom!
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
15. Check the REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID unit (see page 15-71).•
TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST is above 68 'f
(20 'C) with the HDS before proceeding to the next
step. If the temperature is below 68 'f (20 'C), drive
the vehicle to warm up the rear differential until the
fluid temperature becomes above 68 'f (20 'C).
15-46 BACK
DTC 53-2: Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(Short)
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general connector terminal B4 and body ground.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BPI

15-68).

=
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there more than 0.5 V?

time.•
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. SH-AWD control unit connector terminal B4 and left
clutch electromagnetic coil..
6. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector B (8P)
and the left solenoid 4P connector. NO-Go to step 10.
7. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
connector terminals B4 and B5.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8PI
YES-Repair short in the wires between SH-AWD

control unit connector terminals B4 and B5.•
NO-Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
BACK 15-47
Rear Differential
13. Check the REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID

TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST is above 68 "F
(20 "C) with the HDS before proceeding to the next
step. If the temperature is below 68 "F (20 "C), drive
fluid temperature becomes above 68 "F (20 "C).
15. Disconnect the left solenoid 4P connector.
16. Measure resistance between left solenoid 4P

Is there 0.45 Q or less?
YES-Replace the rear differential left side case

(see page 15-89).•

15-48 BACK
Ole 56-3: Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil 8. Connect a jumper wire between SH-AWD control
Current Malfunction unit connector terminals B6 and B7. Disconnect the
right solenoid 4P connector, then check for
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the. general continuity between right solenoid 4P connector
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). terminals No.1 and No.2.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). SH-AWD CONTROL UNrr CONNECTOR B (8P)

15-68).
Is DTe 56-3 indicated? JUMPER WIRE

time.•
RIGHT SOLENOID 4P CONNECTOR
connector terminals B2 and body ground.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNrr CONNECTOR B (8P)
=
YES-Go to step 9.
Is there less than 0.5 V? NO-Repair open in the wire between the SH-AWD
control unit and the right clutch electromagnetic
YES-Go to step 6. coil..
NO-Repair open in the wire between SH-AWD 9. Remove the jumper wire from SH-AWD control unit
control unit connector B and body ground or poor connector terminals B6 and B7.
ground (G603) .•
7. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector B (8P).
(cont'd)
BACK 15-49
Rear Differential
10. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 11. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminals 82 and 86, then check for connector terminals 86 and 87.
continuity between SH-AWD control unit connector
terminals 82 and 87. . SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)

,i!' Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wires between the

SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P) SH-AWD control unit and the right clutch
NO-Go to step 12.
YES-Repair short to ground or short to the ground

wire between the SH-AWD control unit and the·right
clutch electromagnetic coil. •
1,:,1
NO-Go to step 11.
15-50 BACK
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 14. Measure voltage between SH-AWD control unit
connectorterminals B2 and B7. . SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BP)
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BP)

Is there more than 0.5 V? YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
the SH-AWD control unit connector terminal 86 and
YES-Repair short to power in the wire between right clutch electromagnetic coil..
SH-AWD control unit and the right clutch
electromagnetic coil.. NO-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
NO-Go to step 14. substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
recheck (see page 15-71). If the symptom/indication
BACK
15-51
Rear Differential
DTC57-1, 57-3: Right Clutch Electromagnetic: 8. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
Coil Malfunction connector terminal B7 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you ~roubleshoot, review the genl:lral SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)
troubleshooting information (seepage 15-4).

15-68).
=
Is Dre 57-1 or 57-3 indicated?
NO-Intermittentfailure; the system is OK at this YES-Go to step 9.

time.. ,.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. SH-AWD control unit and the right clutch
.,
6. Disconnect SH-AWD'controlunit connector B (8P)
and the right solenoid 4P connector. 9. Remove the jumper wire from the right solenoid 4P
7, Connect a jumper wire' between right so'lenoid4P
connector terminal No.1. 10. Connect a jumper wire between right solenoid 4P
r·- connector terminal No.2.
JUMPER WIRE
JUMPER WIRE
=
=
BACK
15-52
11. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 16. Disconnect the right solenoid 4P connector.
connector terminal 86 and body ground.
17. Measure resistance between right solenoid 4P
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P) connector terminals No.1 and No.2.

YES-Go to step 12. Is there 1.8 Q or more?
NO-Repair. open in the wires between the YES-Replace the rear differential right side case
SH-AWD control unit and the right clutch (see page 15-89) .•
12. Remove the jumper wire from the right solenoid 4P have the latest software (see page 15-6), or
connector terminal No.1. substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
13. Reconnect all connectors. goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
15. Check the REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID unit (see page 15-71) .•
BACK
15-53
Rear. Differential
DTC 57-2: Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(Short)
NOTE: 8efore you troubleshoot, review the general connector terminal 86 and body ground.

15-68).

=
Is OTe 57-2 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there more than 0.5 V?

time .•
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. the SH-AWD control unit connector terminal 86 and
right clutch electromagnetic coil..
6. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector 8 (8P)
and the right solenoid 4P connector. NO-Go to step 10.
7. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

control unit connector terminals 86 and 87 .•
NO-Go to step 8.
15-54 BACK
13. Check the REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
(20 'C) with the HDS before proceeding to the next
step. If the temperature is below 68 "F (20 'C), drive
fluid temperature becomes above 68 "F (20 'C).
14; Turn the ignition switch OFF.
15. Disconnect the right solenoid 4P connector.
16. Measure resistance between right solenoid 4P

connector terminals No.1 and No.2. '
RCL(BLK) t!'==F",,\\ RCH (RED)
Is there 0.45 Q or less?
YES-Replace the rear differential right side case

(see page 15-89).•

BACK 15-55
Rear Differential
DTC 76-1: Rear Differential Fluid Overheats 8. Check for rear brake drag.
NOTE: Are the rear brakes OK?

• Before you troubleshoot, review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). YES-Update theSH-AWD control unit if it does not
• When the temperature ofthe rear differential fluid is have the latest software (see page 15~6), or
abnormally high, the SH-AWD indicator comes on. substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
This is not necessarily a problem, but DTC 76-1 will recheck (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication
be stored. goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
• Check the rear differential fluid level (see page 15-69). troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
If it's low, refill it, clear the DTC, and recheck. indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). unit (see page·15-71) .•
2. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS. NO-Repairthe rear brakes(see p~ge 19-4) .•
Are any VSA System OTCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 3.
5. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h).
6. Check for WHEEL SPEED in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Are aI/ wheel speed the same?

time .•
NO-Goto step 7.
15-56 BACK
DTC 77-1: Communication Error with the DTC 77-2: Communication Error with the VSA
Power Control Module (PCM) Modulator:..Control Unit
3. Start the engine. 3. Start the engine.
Is orc 77-1 indicated? Is orc 77-2 indicated?
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO--:-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time .• time.•
5. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS. 5. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS.
Are any PGM-F I system orcs indicated? Are any VSA system DrCs indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not NO-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
have the latest software (see page 15-6), or have the latest software (see page 15-6), or
substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and substitute a known-goodSH-AWD control unitand
recheck (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication recheck (see page 15-71). If the symptom/indication
goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit, goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/ troubleshooting is complete.lfthe symptoml
indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control control ,unit, replace the original SH-AWD control
unit (see page 15-71).• unit (see page 15-71).•
BACK 15-57
Rear Differential
77-4: Communication Error with the

Automatic-Transmission Control Unit
YES-Go to step 5.

time .•
5. Check for DTCs inthe AfT system with the HDS.
Are any AlT system OTCs indicated?

substitute a known-goodSH-AWD control unit and
15-58 BACK
DTC 77-5: Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal DTC 77-6: Steering Angle Sensor Malfunction
Acceleration Sensor Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general troubleshooting information (see page 15-4).
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time .•
time.•
Are any steering angle sensor OTCs indicated?
Are any yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor
OTCs indicated? YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• NO-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
NO-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
have the latest software (see page 15-6), or recheck (see page 15-71). If the symptom/indication
substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
recheck (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit, indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/ control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control
indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD unit (see page 15-71).•
BACK 15-59
Rear Differential
OTC 78-xx: SH-AWD Control Unit Self- DTC 81-1: Left Search Coil Sensor
Diagnostic Malfunction Malfunction
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 1. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminals A 1 and A 11.
Is OTe 78-xx indicated?

have the latest software (see page 15"6), or
indication goes away with. a known-good SH-AWD
unit (see page 15-71) .• Wire side of female terminals
NO.,...lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this

time .• Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 6.
3.. Check the REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID

15-60 BACK
4. Measure resistance between SH-AWD control unit 6. Connect a jumper wire between SH-AWDcontrol
connector terminals A 1 and A 11. unit connector terminals A 1 and A 11. Disconnect
the left solenoid 4P connector, then check for
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) continuity between ·Ieft solenoid 4P connector·
JUMPER WIRE
Is there 2.0 Q or more?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
connector terminal A 1 and body ground.

LFL (RED)
.Q Wire side offemale terminals
=
YES-Replace the rear differential left side case

Is there continuity? (see page 15-89).•
YES-Repair short in the wire between SH-AWD NO-Repair open in the wire between left solenoid
control unit connector terminal A 1 and body 4P connector terminals No.3 and No.4 .•
ground .•

SH-AWD control unit and repair if necessary. If the
connections are OK, update the SH-AWD control
unit if it does not have the latest software (see page
15-6), or substitute a known-good SH-AWD control
unit and recheck (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/
indication goes away with the updated SH-AWD
control unit, troubleshooting is complete. If the
SH-AWD control unit, replace the original SH-AWD
control unit (see page 15-71) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 15-61
Rear Differential
7. ,Disconnect the left solenoid 4P connector.
8. Check for continuity between left solenoid 4P

lEFT SOLENOID 4P CONNECTOR
lFl (RED) lFH (BlK)

control unit connector A and the left search coil
connector.•
NO-Replace the rear differential left side case

(see page 15-89).. .
15-62 BACK
DTC 82-1: Right Search Coil Sensor 5. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
Malfunction connector terminal A3 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)

connector terminals A3 and A 12.
SH·AWD CONmOL UNIT CONNECTOR A 120P)
=
Wire side of female terminals YES-Repair short in the wire between SH-AWD
control unit connector terminal A3 and body
ground .•
YES-Go to step 3. SH-AWD control unit and repair if necessary. If the
connections are OK, update the SH-AWD control
NO-Go to step 6. unit if it does not have the latest software (see page
15-6), or substitute a known-good SH-AWD control
3. Check the REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID unit and recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/
TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST is above 68 'f indication goes away with the updated SH-AWD
(20 "C) with the HDS before proceeding to the next control unit, troubleshooting is complete. Ifthe
step. If the temperature is below 68 'f (20 "C), drive symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
the vehicle to warm up the rear differential until the SH-AWD control unit, replace the original SH-AWD
fluid temperature becomes above 68 'f (20 "C). control unit (see page 15-71).•

connector terminals A3 and A12.
SH-AWD CONmOL UNIT CONNECTOR A 120P)
Is there 2.0 Q or more?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
BACK 15-63
Rear Differential
6. Connect a jumper wire between SH-AWD control 7. Disconnect the right solenoid 4P connector.
unit connector terminals A3 and A12. Disconnect
the right solenoid 4P connector, then check for 8. Check for continuity between right solenoid 4P
continuity between right solenoid 4P connector connectorterminals No.3 and No.4.
RFL (RED) 1--1-----1 RFH (BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
RIGHT SOLENOID 4P CONNECTOR YES-Repair short to ground in the wires between

SH-AWD control unit connector A and the right
search coil sensor connector.•
NO-Replace the rear differential right side case

RFL(RED)
(see page 15-89).•
YES-Replace the rear differential right side case

(see page 15-89).•
NO-Repair open in the wires between right

solenoid 4P connector terminals No.3 and No.4.•
15-64 BACK
DTC 91-1: SH-AWD Control Unit
Programming Error
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, review the general
• DTC 91-1 is stored when the SH-AWD system update
is not completed.
• Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating
the SH-AWD system. If you turn the ignition switch
OFF before completion, the SH-AWD system can be
damaged.
1. Do the SH-AWD system update procedure

(see page 15-6).

NO-Update is complete.
BACK 15..65
Rear Differential
Symptom Troubleshooting
The SH-AWO indicator does not go off, and 4. Start the engine.
no OTCs are stored
5. Check the SH-AWD indicator value with the HDS.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, review the general Is the SH-AWD indicator value OFF?
• Make sure the No.3 (RR F/B) (60A) fuse in the main YES-Go to the gauge control system DTC
under-hood fuse box is OK. troubleshooting (see page 22-322) .•
• Make sure the No.9 (30A) fuse in the rear fuse/relay
box is OK. NO-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
• Make sure there are on loose connector terminals at have the latest software (see page 15-6), or
the SH-AWD control unit. substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
• Make sure charging system is OK. recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/indication
• Make sure the PGM-FI system and the AfT system is goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
not in the middle of updating. troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
1. Testthe battery (see page 22-76). Charge or replace control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control
the battery if necessary. unit (see page 15-71) .•
2. Check the COMPLETE MEMORIZATION in the

Does the data list show "complete"?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Do the SH-AWD system memorization

procedure (see page 15-7), then go to step 3.
Are any steering angle sensor DTCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 4.
15-66 BACK
The SH-AWD indicator does not come on

2. Check the SH-AWD indicator.
Does the SH-AWD indicator come on and go off?

time.•
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P)

and B (8P).
6. Check the SH-AWD indicator.
Does the SH-AWD indicator come on?

NO-Go to the gauge control system

troubleshooting (see page 22-322) .•
BACK 15-67
Rear Differential
SH-AWD Function Test
Special Tools Required 6. Do the direct electromagnetic clutch test with the
• Adapter, torque wrench 070AJ-SJAA 112 HDS. Go to Miscellaneous test menu/functional,
• Nut, 14x 1.5 mm 070AJ-SJAA130 select tests/direct electromagnetic clutch test, then
follow the screen prompts.
Direct Electromagnetic Clutch Test
7. Install a torque wrench on the. special tool as
NOTE: shown on the HDS. Write down the torque value
• No DTC was detected. while slowly rotating the rear hub with the torque
• The shift lever is in N. wrench as shown. (Turn the hub no more than
• The SH-AWD control unit had been initialized. 90 degrees in 7 to 10 seconds).
• The tire pressures are at the specified value.
• Tire size and were are the same between the left and NOTE: Use a torque wrench capable of measuring
right tires. up to 80 kg·m (580 Ibf·ft) such as a commercially
available Snap-on torque wrench TE352FUE.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
2. Check that the differential fluid temperature is over

68 "F (20 "C) with the HDS. If it is below 68 "F
(20 "C), raise the temperature by driving the vehicle
in circles or by constantly turning.
3. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely

supported.
4. Remove the rear wheels.
5. Install the adapter, torque wrench (A) and the nut

(8) on the rear wheel hub.
A
070AJ-SJAA 112
I 8. Enter the torque value into the HDS, and wait for
the test to finish.
~~~
\~
• Ifthe result shows the clutch driving force is
normal, the clutch assembly is OK.
B--------
070AJ-SJAA 130
• If the result shows the clutch driving force is
abnormal, replace the differential fluid; and
retest. Ifthe result still shows the clutch driving
force is abnormal, replace the right and left
differential side case (see page 15-89).
15-68 BACK
Rear Differential Fluid Inspection and Replacement
Inspection Replacement
1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the 1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the
ignition switch to LOCK (0). ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Use solvent and a brush to wash any oil and dirt off 2. Remove the filler plug (A) and the sealing washer
the differential fluid inspection oil filter plugs. (8).
3. Remove the filler plug (A) and the sealing washer Fluid Capacity
(8), then check the condition of the fluid, and make 2.53 L {2.67 US qt) at fluid change
sure the fluid is at the proper level (C). 2.77 L (2.93 US qt) at overhaul
Recommended fluid: Honda ATF-Z1
/
4. The fluid level must reach up the bottom of the
filler plug hole. If it is below the hole, add the
recommended fluid until it runs out, then reinstall
the filler plug with a new sealing washer.
3. Remove the drain plug (C) and the sealing washer

(D), and drain the fluid.

(D).
5. Add fluid until it reaches the bottom of the filler

plug hole.
6. Reinstall the filler plug with a new sealing washer.
BACK
15-69
Rear Differential
Rear Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement
1. Drain the differential fluid (see page 15-69).
2. Remove the differential fluid temperature sensor

cover (A) and the differential fluid temperature
sensor harness stay (B), then disconnect the
. differential fluid temperature sensor connector (e).
6x1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 8.9 Ibf·ft)

(D).
4. Install the differential fluid temperature sensor with

a new O-ring (E) in the reverse order of removal.
5. Refill the differential fluid (see page 15-69).
BACK
15-70
SH-AWD Control Unit Replacement SH-AWD Relay Replacement
NOTE: The SH-AWD control unit must be initialized 1. Remove the rear left side trim panel cover
(see page 15-8). after replacement, other wise the (see page 20-92).
SH-AWD system will not function.
2. Remove the SH-AWD relay (A).
1. Remove the rear left side trim panel cover
(see page 20-92). A
2. Remove the cargo floor lid and the cargo box

(see page 20-90).
3. Remove the SH-AWD control unit (A).
3. Install the SH-AWD relay in the reverse order of

removal.
4. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit connectors (B).
5. Install the SH-AWD control unit in the reverse order

of removal.
BACK
15-71
Rear Differential
Rear Differential.Mount Replacem·ent
14x1.5mm
85N·m
REAR DIFFERENTIAL 18.7 kgf·m.
MOUNTING RUBBER 63lbf·ftl
Replace.
~
REAR DIFFERENTIAL
RUBBER MOUNT
14x1.5mm
74N·m
17.5 kgf·m. 53.5 Ibf·ftl ------ 10x 1.25 mm
Replace. 38N·m
13.9 kgf·m. 28 Ibf·ftl
REAR DIFFERENTIAL
FRONT MOUNTING BRACKETS
BACK
15-72
Rear Differential Breather Box and Hose Replacement
1. Remove the cargo floor lid and the cargo box (see page 20-90).
2. Remove the breather hose clips (A), then disconnect the breather hose (8).
3. Remove the breather box clips (e) and the breather box (D).
4. Install the breather box then connect the breather hose and the breather hose clips.
5. Align the point mark (E) on the breather hose as shown.
6. Make sure that all the hoses are properly routed, clipped into place, and not pinched.
7. Install the cargo floor lid and the cargo box (see page 20-90).
BACK
15-73
Rear Differential
Rear Differential Removal
Special Tools Required 5. Place the transmission jack (A) under the rear
Driveshaft remover 07 AAD-S3VAOOO differential (8).
1. Drain the differential fluid (see page 15-69). 6. Using the driveshaft remover (e) and the hammer,
and disconnect the left rear inboard joint (D) from
2. Remove the exhaust pipe (A). the rear differential.
C
D 07AAD·S3VAOOO
A
! E
7. Remove the rear differential mounting bolts (E).
3. Remove the right rear driveshaft (see page 16-26). 8. Lower the rear differential a little on the
transmission jack, then remove the left rear
4. Make a reference mark (A) across the propeller driveshaft inboard joint from the rear differential.
shaft (8) and rear differential companion flange (e).
Separate the propeller shaft from the rear NOTE: Make sure not to over extend the harness
differential. and the tube.
NOTE: Suspend the propeller shaft with an 9. Disconnect the right clutch solenoid 4P connector
appropriate size wire. (A) and the rear differential fluid temperature
sensor 2P connector (8), then remove the harness
clip (e).
c E
10. Disconnect the breather tube (D) from the breather

pipe (E).
BACK
15-74
Rear Differential Installation
11. Slowly lower the rear differential a little on the 1. Raise the rear differential with the transmission
transmission jack. jack.
NOTE: Make sure not to over extend the harness. 2. Ifthe original differential is being reinstalled,
replace the set rings.
12. Disconnect the left clutch solenoid 4P connector (A),
then remove the harness clips (B). 3. Raise the rear differential a little on the
transmission jack.
A
I
B
4. Connect the ground cable (A) to the rear differential.
6x 1.0 mm B
12.0N·m C
~';2Zt;·~Ft
c
A
13. Disconnect the ground cable (C) from the rear
differential.
5. Connect the left clutch solenoid 4P connector (B),
14. Lower the rear differential on the transmission jack. then install the harness clips (C).
6. Raise the rear differential a little on the

transmission jack.
7. Connect the breather tube (A) to the breather pipe

(B) and the clip (C).
8. Connect the right clutch solenoid 4P connector (D)

and the rear differential fluid temperature sensor
2P connector (E), then install the harness clip (F).
(cont'd)
BACK
15-75
Rear Differential
Rear Differential Installation (co nt'd)
9. Install the left rear driveshaft inboard joint(A) to 14. Attach the propeller shaft (A) to the rear differential
the rear differential. (B) by aligning the reference marks (C) you made
during the removal procedure.
B
14x1.5mm
85'N·m
18.7 kgf·m,
A 63lbf·ftl
Replace.
D
14x1.5mm
85N·m 10x1.25mm ~
18.7 kgf·m, 72N·m
17.3 kgf.m,
~
63lbf·ftl
Replace. 53 Ibf·ftl _~"="'''''
A
C B
10x 1.25mm
38N·m
13.9 kgf·m, 28 Ibf·ftl 15. Install the right rear driveshaft (see page 16-26).
10. Raise the rear differential to the mounting level, 16. Install the new exhaust pipe gasket (A) and exhaust
then hand tighten the new rear differential rear pipe (B).
mounting bolts (B) and rear differential front
mounting bracket bolts (C);
11. Loosen the differential front mounting bolts (D).
12. Tighten the new rear differential rear mounting bolt

then tighten the rear differential front mounting
bracket bolts.
13. Tighten the rear differential front mounting bolts.
10x 1.25 mm
54N·m
15.5 kgf.m, 40 Ibf·ftl A
Replace.
18. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if

necessary (see page 18-5).
BACK
15-76
Rear Differential DisassemblyIReassembly
A \A
@
®
\~A
A
CD REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY ® REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS BRACKET A

® REAR DIFFERENTIAL FRONT MOUNTING BRACKETS @ REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS BRACKET B
® DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR ® REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS BRACKET C
evO-RING @ REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS BRACKET D
Replace.
® DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR COVER
® FILLER PLUG A:6x 1.0mm
47 N·m /4.8 kgf.m, 35 Ibf.ftl 12.0 N·m /1.2 kgf·m, 8.9Ibf·ttl
CD DRAIN PLUG B:14x1.5mm
47 N·m /4.8 kgf·m, 35 Ibf·ttl 85 N·m /8.7 kgf·m, 63 Ibf·ttl
® SEALING WASHER Replace.
Replace.
BACK 15-77
Rear Differential
Center Case Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the left side case (A), the right side case (B),
• Companion flange holder 07XAB-001A 101 the four 10 x 12 mm dowel pins (C).
• Oil seal driver C 070AD-STK0130
• Fork seal driver weight 07747-0010100
1. Remove the rear differential (see page 15-74).
2. Remove the rear differential front mounting

brackets (A) from the rear differential (B).
5. Remove the mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross

pattern in several steps, then remove the bearing
set plate (B) and the 83 mm shim (C).
3. Remove the differential oil temperature sensor

cover (A), differential fluid temperature (B), O-ring
(C), and rear differential harness bracket (D).
15-78 BACK
6. Remove the six mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross 8. Raise the locknut tab (A) from the groove ofthe
pattern in several steps, then remove the input shaft, making sure that the tab completely
differential housing assembly (8) and dowel pins clears the groove to prevent damaging the input
(C). shaft.
9. Install the companion flange holder (A) on the

companion flange. Loosen the 27 mm locknut (left-
hand threads).
7. Remove the ring gear assembly (A), bearing outer

races (8), 75 mm shim (C), and the 8 x 14 mm
dowel pins (0).
(cont'd)
BACK 15-79
Rear Differential
Center Case Oil Seal Replacement (cont'd)
10. Loosen the locknut (A) clockwise so that its tab (8) 13. Remove the 27 mm locknut (A), the 27 mm spring
comes out from the groove (e) in the inputshaft. washer (8), the 28 mm back-up ring (e), and the
28 mm O-ring (D).
11. Tighten the locknut (A) until its tab (8) aligns with
the groove (e).
14. Make a reference mark (A) across the input shaft

(8) and companion flange (e), then remove the
companion flange.
o ~c
12. Remove any dirt from inside ofthe groove in the

input shaft, then loosen the locknut.
15-80 BACK
15. Remove the drive pinion (A), pinion spacer (B) and 17. Apply ATF to the tapered roller bearing (A), then
the thrust washer (C)by tapping on the drive pinion install the new front case oil seal (8) with the oil
with a plastic hammer. seal driver C and fork seal driver weight (0).
NOTE: Support it by hand nottodamage the drive

pinion.
18., Apply ATF to the tapered roller bearing (A), then

install the drive pinion (B), pinion spacer (C) and
the thrust washer (0) into the differential carrier (E).
NOTE: Be sure to install the pinion spacer in the

16. Remove the front case oil seal (A) with a direction shown.
commercially available tool.
NOTE: Remove the oil seal with care so you do not

damage the inside surface of the differential carrier
seal surface.
(cont'd)
BACK 15-81
Rear Differential
19. Install the companion flange (A) on the input shaft 21. Install the companion flange holder (A) to the
(8) by aligning the reference mark (C), companion flange, then tighten the locknut (Ieft-
hand threads).
______ A
A
07XAB-001A101
20. Apply ATF to the new 28 mm O-ring (A), then install

the new 28 mm O-ring, the 28 mm backup ring (8), 22. Rotate the drive pinion several times to assure
the 27 mm spring washer (C), and the new 27 mm proper tapered roller bearing contact. Measure the
10cknut(D). drive pinion turning torque .
• If the drive pinion turning torque exceeds the

standard, replace the pinion spacer.
• If the drive pinion turning torque is less than the
standard, adjust by tightening the locknut a little
at a time, but keep the torque within 186-
353 N·m (19.0-36.0 kgf·m, 137-260 Ibf·ft). Ifthis
is not possible, replace the pinion spacer.
o Turning Torque:
93.2-181.4 N·m
(9.5-18.5 kgf.cm, 69.0-134.0 Ibf·in)
15-82 BACK
23. Stake the locknut tab (A) into the groove in the 25. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surfaces .
. input shaft. Apply liquid gasket (P/N08718-0001) to the sealing
surface. Make sure you seal the entire
circumference of the bolt holes to prevent oil
leakage.
NOTE:
• You must assemble the housings within do in
5 minutes after applying the liquid gasket. If not,
the sealing surface must be cleaned, and the
liquid gasket reapplied.
• Allow it to cure at least 30 minutes after
assembly before filling the differential with fluid.
• Remove the overflowing liquid gasket, when
joining side case.
24. Apply ATF to the tapered roller bearings, then

Install the ring gear assembly (A); bearing outer
races (8), 75 mm shim (e) and the 8 x 14 mm dowel
pins (0).
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
.. _._._.- Apply liquid gasket along the broken

line and around all bolt holes.
(cont'd)
BACK 15-83
Rear Differential
26. Install the dowel pins (A), the differential housing 30. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surfaces.
assembly (8) and the six mounting bolts (C). Apply liquid gasket (PIN 08718-0001) to the sealing
surface. Make sure you seal the entire
C circumference of the bolt holes to prevent oil
10x 1.25mm leakage.
44N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
32lbf·ftl NOTE:
• You must assemble the housings with you do in
5 minutes after applying the liquid gasket. If not,
B
liquid gasket reapplied .
• Allow it to cure at least 30 minutes after
assembly before filling the differential with fluid.
Left side case/right side case
27. Tighten the six mounting bolts in a crisscross

pattern in several steps.
28. Install the 83 mm shim (A), the bearing set plate (8)
and the six mounting bolts (C). .._._._.- Apply liquid gasket along the broken
line and around all bolt holes.
NOTE: Install the bearing set plate, check to
identification marks (0).
c
ax 1.25mm
27N·m (2.a kgf·m, 20 Ibf·ftl
o
I
29. Tighten the six mounting bolts in a crisscross

pattern in several steps.
15-84 BACK
31. Install the 8 x 12 mm dowel pins (A), the rear 34. Install the rear differential front mounting brackets
differential right side case (8), the rear differential (A) from the rear differential (B).
left side case (e) and the mounting bolts (0).
NOTE: Install a lower surface of the guide (e)
D
8x1.2Smm horizontally as shown, then tighten the rear
27N·m differential front mounting bracket bolts (0).
(2.8 kgf·m, 20 Ibf·ttl
/'
D
8x 1.25 mm
27N·m
(2.8 kgf·m,
.. 201bf·ttl
D
14x 1.5 mm
32. Tighten the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern 8SN·m
(8.7 kgf·m, 63 Ibf·ttl
in several steps. Replace.
33. Install the differential fluid temperature s~hsor

cover (A), rear differential fluid temperature sensor 35. Install the rear differential (see page 15-75).
(B), new O-ring (e), and rear differential harness
bracket (0). 36. Refill the differential fluid (see page 15-69).
6x1.0mm
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ttl
BACK 15-85
Rear' Differential
Side Case Oil Seal Replacement
Special TOQlsRequired 5. Install the new 34.7 x54 x 9 mm oil seal (A) into the
• Oil seal driver A 070AD-STK0110 rear differential side case (B) with the fork seal
• Oil seal driver B 070AD-STK0120 driver weight (C) and oil seal driver A (D).
• Fork seal driver weight 077 47 -0010100
1. Remove the rear differential (see page 15-74).
2. Remove the 40 x 55 x 7.5 mm dust seal (A) with a

commercially available tool.
A B
D
070AD-STK0110 A
6. Install the thrust washer (A), then install the new

40 x 55 x 7.5 mm dust seal (B) with the fork seal
driver weight (C) and oil seal driver B (D).
3. Remove the thrust washer.
4. Cut a slit at each position (4 place, 90 degrees

apart) (A) on the 34.7 x 54 x ,9 mm oil seal (B), then
install 6 mm screw (C) (PIN 93901-16580) into the
oil seal at each location. Remove the oil seal with
pliers (D) and screw driver (E) as shown.
NOTE: Do not thread the 6 mm screws into the oil

seal more than 5 mm (0.197 in.)
7. Install the rear differential (see page 15-75).
15-86 BACK
Center Case Replacement
1. Remove the rear differential (see page 15-74). 4. Remove the rear differential left side case (A), the
rear differential right side case (8), the 10 x 12 mm
2. Remove the rear differential front mounting dowel pins (C) from the rear differential center case
brackets (A) from the rear differential (8). (0).
A
5. Replace the rear differential center case.
cover (A), rear differential fluid temperature sensor
(8), O-ring (C), and rear differential harness bracket
(0).
(cont'd)
BACK 15-87
Rear Differential
Center Case Replacement (cont'd)
6. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surfaces. 7. Install the 8 x 12 mm dowel pins (A), the rear
Apply liquid gasket (P/N08718-0001) to the sealing differential right side case (8), the rear differential
surface. Make sure you seal the entire left side case (C) and the mounting bolts (D) on to
circumference of the bolt holes to prevent oil the rear differential center case (E).
leakage.
D
8x1.25mm'
NOTE: 27N·m
(2.8 kgf·m, 20 Ibf,ftl
• You must assemble the housings with you do in
5 minutes afterapplying the liquid gasket. If not, /
liquid gasket reapplied .
• Allow it to cure at least ;30 minutes after D
8x1.25mm
assembly before filling the differential with fluid. 27N·m
(2.8kgf·m.
20lbf·ftl
Left side case/right side case
~
8. Tighten the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern
in several steps.
9. Install the differential fluid temperature sensor

cover (A), rear differential fluid temperature sensor
.. _._._.- Apply liquid gasket along the broken (8), new O-ring (C), and rear differential harness
line and around all bolt holes. bracket (D).
6x1.0mm
12N'm
---
(1.2 kgf.m.
8.7Ibf·ftl
1.5-88 BACK
Side Case Replacement
10. Install the rear differential front mounting brackets 1. Remove the rear differential (see page 15-74).
(A) from the rear differential (B).
2. Remove the rear differential front mounting
NOTE: Install a lower surface of the guide (C) brackets (A) from the rear differential (B).
horizontally as shown, then tighten the rear
differential front mounting bracket bolts (D).

D
14x1.5mm cover (A), rear differential fluid temperature sensor
85N·m (B), O-ring (C), and rear differential harness bracket
18.7 kgf·m, 63 Ibf·tt)
Replace.
(D).
(cont'd)
BACK 15-89
Rear Differential
Side Case Replacement (cont'd)
4. Remove the rear differential left side case (A) or the 7. Measure distance CD between the end of the rear
rear differential right side case (8), the 10 x 12 mm differential side case (A) and 60.2 mm shim contact
dowel pins (C) from the rear differential center case area of planetary gear (8) with a straight edge (C)
(D). and depth gauge (D). Measure at three locations,
and average the reading.
NOTE:
• Carry out the measurement at normal room
temperature.
• Clean all the parts thoroughly before measure.
5. Replace the rear differential left side case or the

differential right side case.
B
6. Remove the ring gear (A), needle bearing (8), and
the 60.2 mm shim (C) from the rear differential side
case (D). 8. Measure distance ® between theerid ofthe rear
differential center case (A) and ring gear contact
area oftapar roller bearing (8) with a straight edge
(C) and depth gauge (D). Measure at three locations,
and average the reading.
NOTE:
temperature.
A B
15-90 BACK
9. Measure the distance @between the needle (For example)
bearing (A) and tapper roller bearing contact area CD = 6.12mm (0.241 in.)
ohing gear (B) with a depth gauge (C). Measure at ® = 15.3 mm (0.602 in.)
three locations, and average the reading. ® = 19.5 mm (0.770 'in.)
NOTE: 6.12+15.3-(19.5+0.19) = 1.73 mm

temperature . Select the 1;70 mm shim from the table.
6O.2mmShim
Part Number Thickness
A 48701-RWG-000 1.10 mm (0.043 in.)
B 48702-RWG-000 1.20 mm (0.047 in.)
C 48703-RWG-000 1.30 mm (0.051 in.)
A 0 48704-RWG-000 1.40 mm (0.055 in.)
E 48705-RWG-000 1.50 mm (0.059 in.)
F 48706-RWG-000 1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
G 48707 -RWG-OOO 1.70 mm (0.067 in.)
H 48708-RWG-000 1.80 mm (0.071 in.)
I ' 48709-RWG-000 1.90 mm (0.075 in.)
J 48710-RWG-000 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
K 48711-RWG-000 2.10 mm (0.083 in.)
L 48712-RWG-000 2.20 mm (0.087 in.)
Shim Selection Formula
10. Select the proper 60.2 mm shim from the table.

Follow the example below, and use the
measurements you made in steps 7 to 9.
(Basic Formula)
CD+®-(®+0.19) = shim thickness
0.19 mm (0.007 in.): "

middle ofthe clearance standard.
Clearance Standard:
0.14-:0.24 mm (0.006-0.009 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK 15-91
, ~l
Rear Differential
11. Place one strip of plastigage (A) on 60.2 mm shim 12. Install the 8 x 12 mm dowel pins (A), the rear
contact area of planetary gear (B). Install the differential right side case· (·B) or the rear.,
60.2 mm shim (C), needle bearing (0) and the ring differential left side case (C) and the mounting bolts
gear (E). Measure at three locations, and average (0).
the reading.
D
8x1.25mm
NOTE: ZlN·m
• Carry out the, measurement at normal' room 12.8 kgf·m, 20 Ibf·ft)
temperature .
• Clean all the parts thoroughly bef~re measure.
13. Tighten the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern

in several steps.
14. Remove the rear differential left side case (A) or the
rear differential right side case (B), the 10 x 12 mm
dowel pins (e) from the rear differential center case
(0).
15-92 BACK
-"
15. Remove the ring gear (A), needle bearing (8), and 18. Install the 60.2 mm shim (A), needle bearing (8)
the 60.2 mm shim (C) from the rear differential side and the ring gear (C) onto the rear differential side
case (0). case (0).
16. Measure the widest part of the plastigage.
Clearance Standard:
0.14-0.24 mm (0.006-0.009 in.)
17. Ifthe clearance is more than the standard, go to

step 7. Ifthe clearance measured in step 16 is
within the standard, go to step 18.
(cont'd)
BACK
15-93
" <" I "
Rear 'Differential
19. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surfaces. 20. Install the 8 x 12mm dowel pins (A), the rear
Apply liquid gasket (P/N.08718-0001) to the sealing differential right side case (8) or the rear '
surface. Make sure you seal the entire differential left side case (C) and the mounting bolts
circumference of the bolt holes to prevent oil (D) onto the rear differential center case (E).
leakage.
o
8x 1.25 mm
NOTE:.. 27N·m
• You must assemble the housings within do in (2.8 kgf·m, 20 Ibf·ft)
5.,minutes after applying the liquid gasket. If not, /'
. the sealing s.urface must bech~aned, and the
· liquid gasket reapplied. ;
• Allow it to cure at least 30 minutes after o
assembly before filling the differential with fluid. 8x1.25mm
27N·m
(2.8kgf·m,
Left side case/right side case 20Ibf·ft)
~
21. Tighten the, mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern
in several steps.
.. _._._.- Apply liquid gasket along the broken 22. Install the differential fluid temperature sensor
line and around all bolt holes. cover (A), rear differential fluid temperature sensor
(8), new O-ring (C), and rear differential harness
bracket (D).
6x1.0mm
B 12N·m
11.2 kgf.m,
;. 8.7Ibf·ftl
-------
15-94 BACK
23. Install the rear differential front mounting brackets
(A) from the rear differential (8).
NOTE: Install a lower surface of the guide (C)

horizontally as shown, then tighten the rear
differential front mounting bracket bolts (D).
o
14x 1.5mm
85N·m
Replace.
BACK
15-95
BACK
DrivelinelAxle I
Special Tools ................................................................. 16-2

Driveshaft Inspection ..... :............................................. 16-4
Front Driveshaft Removal ............................................ 16-4
Boot.Band Removal ........................................................16-6
Front Driveshaft Disassembly ..................................... 16-8
Boot Band Installation .................................................. 16-11
Front Driveshaft Reassembly ...................................... 16-14
Front Driveshaft Installation ........................................ 16-19
Intermediate Shaft Removal ........................................ 16-21
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly ............... ~ ................. 16-21
Interm~diate Shaft Reassembly .................................. 16-23
Intermediate Shaft Installation .................................... 16-26
Rear Driveshaft Removal ............................................. 16-26
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly ...................................... 16-29
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly ....................................... 16-31
Rear Driveshaft Installation ......................................... 16-35
Propeller Shaft Inspection ........................................... 16-37
Propeller Shaft Removal .............................................. 16-38
Propeller Shaft Installation .......................................... 16-39
BACK
DrivelinelAxle
Special Tools

CD 07 AAD-S3VAOOO Driveshaft Remover 1
® 07JAD-PH80101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
® 07 LAF-S M 40300 Support Base Attachment 1
@) 07MAC-SLOA202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
@ 07XAC-001020A Threaded Adapter, 24 x 1.5 mm 1
@ 07XAC-001030A Threaded Adapter, 26 x 1.5 mm 1
CD 077 46-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
® 077 49-0010000 Driver 1
® 07946-MBOOOOO Inner Handle, 30 mm ' . :"'1 '".' L
"
1
@ 07947-4630100 Fork Seal Driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x 15 mm 1
® 07965-SD90100 Support Base 1
I ® ®
~ 9 .' ..
@)
.
~ , .
@,@
~ CD ® ® @
0
®
, ,.
BACK
16-2
BOOT BAND
Removal, page 16-6
Installation, page 16"'1 REAR DRIVESHAFT
Removal, page 16-26
Disassembly, page 16-29
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT Reassembly, page 16-31
Removal, page 16-21 Installation, page 16-35
Reassembly, page 16-23 PROPELLER SHAFT
Installation, page 16-26 Inspection, page 16-37
Removal, page 16-38
FRONT DRIVESHAFT
Removal, page 16-4
BACK
16-3
DrivelinelAxle
Driveshaft Inspection Front Driveshaft Removal
1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and remove the front
(8) on the driveshaft (C) for cracks, damage, leaking wheels (see page 1-7).
grease, and loose boot bands (D). If any damage is
found, replace the boot and boot bands.
l B
I
D
2. Turn the driveshaft by hand, and make sure the 2. Lift up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (8),
splines (E) and joint are not excessively loose. then remove, and discard the nut.
3. Make sure the driveshaft is not twisted, bent, or 3. If you need to remove the left driveshaft, drain the
cracked; if it is, replace it. transmission fluid (see page 14-266). It is not
necessary-to drain the transmission fluid when the
right drives haft is removed.
4. Remove the suspension stroke sensor (with active

damper system) (see page 22-229).
BACK
16-4
5. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball 8. Pull the knuckle outward, and remove the
joint castle nut (B), and remove the nut. driveshaft outboard joint from the front wheel hub.

6. Separate the ball joint from the knuckle (e) with the
special tool (see page 18-11).
NOTE:
• To avoid damaging the ball joint, install the ball
joint thread protector onto the threads of the ball
joint.
• Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
installing the remover.
7. Disconnect the driveshaft outboard joint from the

front wheel hub using a plastic hammer.
(cont'd)
BACK 16-5
DrivelinelAxle
Front Driveshaft Removal (cont"d) Boot Band Removal
10. Pry (left driveshaft)/tap (right driveshaft) the NOTE: When removing the boot bands, be careful not
inboard joint(A), and remove the driveshaftfrom to damage the boot and dynamic damper.
the differential case or bearing support as an
assembly. Do not pull on the driveshaft (B); the Welded Type
inboard joint may come apart. Pull the driveshaft
straight outto avoid damaging the differential oil 1. Cut the boot band (A), then remove the boot band.
seal or the intermediate shaft outer seal.
Left drivesh,ft
A A
Double Loop Type
1. Lift up the band end (A), then push it intothe clip

(B), then remove the boot band.
Right driveshaft A
BACK
Low Profile Type Locking Tab Type ; :;.
1. Pinch the boot band using a commercially available 1. Pry up the locking tab (A) with a screwdriver, and
boot band pliers (A), then remove the boot band. lift up the end of the band, then remove the boot
band.
Ear Clamp Type
1. Lift up the three tabs (A) with a screwdriver, then

remove the boot band.
BACK
D~:iv~linelAxle
Front Driveshaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Make a mark (A) on each roller (B) and inboard joint
Threaded adapter, 26 x 1.5 mm 07XAe-001030A (e) to identify the locations of rollers and grooves
in the inboard joint. Then remove and place the
Inboard Joint Side inboard joint on a shop towel (D). Be careful not to
drop the rollers when separating them from the
1. Remove the set ring (A) from the inboard joint. inboard joint.
A
2. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage
the boot and dynamic damper (see page 16-6). 4. Make marks (A) on the rollers (B) and spider (e) to
identify the locations of the rollers on the spider,
then remove the rollers.
5. Remove the circlip (D).
6. Mark the spider and driveshaft (E) to identify the

position of the spider on the shaft.
7. Remove the spider.
BACK
8. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape Outboard Joint Side
(A) to prevent damage to the boot.
the boot and dynamic damper (see page 16-6).
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially to the inboard

joint side. Be careful not to damage the boot.
9. Remove the inboard boot. Be careful not to damage

the boot.
..
10. Remove the vinyl tape.
(cont'd)
BACK 16-9
DriveUnelAxle
Front Driveshaft Disassembly (cont'd)
3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and 8. Remove the stop ring (A) from the drives haft.
the outboard joint inner race.
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same

level as of the outboard joint rim (C).
A
9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape

(A) to prevent damaging the boot.
5. Securely clamp the driveshaft in a bench vise with

a shop towel.
6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the threaded

adapter (B) and a commercially available 5/8"-18
UNF slide hammer (C).
B
07XAC-001030A
~~
10. Remove the outboard boot. Be careful not to
damage the boot.
C
7. Remove the driveshaft from the vise.
16-10 BACK
Boot Band Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
• Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent, commercially section of a commercially available boot band tool
available KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on the
• Boot band pliers, Kent-Moore J-3591 0 or equivalent, winding mandrel (B) .
commercially available 'i"
Double Loop Type

1. Fit the boot ends onto the drives haft and the
inboard joint, then install the neW double loop band
(A) onto the boot,
NOTE: Pass the end of the new double loop band c

through the clip (B) twice. Make sure the loop faces
forwards on the driveshaft, towards the front of the
vehicle.
5. Using a wrench on the winding mandrel of the boot

band tool, tighten the band until the marked spot
(C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.
6. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of

the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the
clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
r
2. Pull up the slack in the band by hand. 90 degrees
3. Mark a position (A) on the band 10-14 mm

(0.4-0.6 in.) from the clip (B).
(cont'd)
BACK 16-11
Oriveline/Axle
Boot Band Installation (cont'd)
7. Unwind the boot band tool, and cut off the. excess Ear Clamp Type
free end of the band to leave a 5-10 mm
. (0.2-0.4 in.) tail protruding from the clip. 1. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with
commercially available boot band pliers Kent-
Moore J-35910 or equivalent (8).
8. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down with a

hammer.
NOTE:
• Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with 2. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion
anything on the vehicle and thatthe band does· of the band. If the clearance is not within
not move . specifications, close the ear portion of the band
• Clean any.grease remaining on the surrounding tighter.
surfaces.
Front Driveshaft
A A: 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) MAX.
B: 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) MAX.
Rear Driveshaft
A: 3.0 mm (0.12 in.) MAX.
B: 6.0 mm(0.24 in.) MAX.
16-12 BACK
Locking Tab Type Low Profile Type
1. Install a new locking tab type boot band on the 1. Install the new low profile band (A) onto the boot
inboard joint side of the inboard boot. Fold down (8), then hook the tab portion (C) of the band.
the locking tabs.
c
2. Lightly tap on the doubled-over portions to flatten 2. Close the hook portion of the band with
them. commercially available boot band pliers (A), then
hook the tabs portion (8) of the band.
BACK
16-13
Otiveline/ Axle
Front Driveshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
SET RING INBOARD JoiNT

ROLLER
.I
j
j
.:.......... ~ INBOARD BOOT
.........
~
.
Right driveshaft ................
. ........:j ~ Use the grease included
Use the grease included Q in the inboard boot set.
in the inboard boot set.
LOW PROFILE BANDS

Replace.
DRIVESHAFT
EAR CLAMP BANDS

Replace.
OUTBOARD BOOT (TPE)
~
Use the grease included
in the outboard boot set.
16-14 BACK
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during 3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning
this procedure. the marks (B) you made on the spider and the end
of the driveshaft.
Inboard Joint Side
B
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent
damaging to the inboard boot.
4. Install the circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove.

Rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure it is
2. Install the inboard boot onto the drives haft, then fully seated.
remove the vinyl tape. Be.careful not to damage the
inboard boot. 5. Fit the rollers (A) onto the spider (B) with their high
shoulders facing outward, and note these items:
• Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on

the spider by aligning the marks (C) you made .
• Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the
rollers from falling off.
(cont'd)
BACK 16-15
DrivelinelAxle
Front Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease 8. Adjust the inboard joint so the rollers are in the
included in the new inboard boot set. middle of the joint, bleed the excess air from the
boot, then adjust the driveshaft length to the figure
Grease quantity as shown. Doing this prevents a vacuum ortoo
Inboard joint: 190-210 9 (6.7-7.4 oz) much air in the boot, preventing it from
compressing or extending properly.
~ Right driveshaft: 570-575 mm (22.44-22.64 in.1

in the inboard boot set.
Left driveshaft: 571-576 mm (22.48-22.68 in.1
7. Fit the inboardjointonto the driveshaft, and note

these-items:
• Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by , 9. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the
aligning the marks (A) you made on the inboard inboard joint, then install the new low profile band
joint and the rollers. or the new double loop band onto the boot
• Hold the drives haft so the inboard joint is (see page 16-11).
pointing up to prevent itfrom falling off.
10. Repeat step 9 for the ba nd on the other end of the
A boot, then go to step 11.
11. Install the new set ring (A).
16-16 BACK
Outboard Joint Side 4. Pack about half of the grease included in the new
outboard boot set into the driveshaft hole inthe
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent outboard joint. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the
damaging to the outboard boot. outboard joint (B) until the stop ring (e) is close to
the joint.
A
2. Install the new ear clamp bands (B) and outboard

boot, then remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to
damage the outboard boot.
5. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the
3. Install the new stop ring (A) in the driveshaft driveshaft and joint, and tap or hit them from a
groove (B). height of about 10 cm (4 in.) onto a hard surface. Do
not use a hammer as excessive force may damage
the driveshaft. Be careful not to damage the
threaded section (A) of the outboard joint.
(cont'd)
BACK 16-17
DrivelinelAxle
Front Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) you 8. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure
made with the outboard joint end (8). below, then adjust the boots to halfway between
full compression and full extension. Make sure the
ends of the boots seat in the groove of the
driveshaft and joint. Doing this prevents a vacuum
or too much air in the boot, preventing it from
Right driveshaft: 570-575 mm(22.44-22.64 in. I
Left driveshaft: 571-576 mm (22.48-22.68 in.1
7. Pack the outboard joint (A) with the remaining joint

grease included in the new outboard boot set.
Grease quantity (total)

Outboard joint: 115-135 9 (4.0-4.7 oz)
9. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (8) and
outboard joint (C).
~ A
B
10. Install the new ear clamp band onto the boot
(see page 16-11).
11. Repeat step 10 for the band on the other end of the
boot.
16-18 BACK
Front Driveshaft Installation
1. Apply grease to the contact area (A) of the outboard 3. Apply 2.0-3.0 g (0.07...,...0.10 oz) of grease to the
joint and front wheel bearing. entire splined surface (A) of the right driveshaft.
After applying grease, remove the grease from the
NOTE: Failing to apply grease may cause excessive splined grooves at intervals of 2-3 splines and
noise and vibration. from the set ring groove (B) so that air can bleed
from the intermediate shaft.
A B
2. Install a new set ring (A) in the set ring groove (B)
of the driveshaft (left driveshaft). 4. Clean the,areas where the driveshaft contacts the
differential thoroughly with brake cleaner, and dry
with compressed air. Do notwashthe rubber parts
with solvent.Jnse~the inboard end (A).ofthe
driveshaft into the differential (B) or intermediate
shaft (C) until the set ring (D) locks in the groove (E).
I A
I'..I-~
A
.~~...I~
~
D
E
B
A
D
~
I
c
om .. I
(cont'd)
BACK 16-19
0,
Drlve:.linelAxle
Front Driveshaft Installation (cont'd)
5. Install the splash shield'(see step 32 on page 5-17). 10. Install a new spindle nut (A), then tighten the nut.
After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
6. Install the outboard joint (A) into the front hub (B). shoulder (B) against the driveshaft.
7. Install the knuckle (A) onto the lower arm (B). Be

careful not to damage the ball joint boot (C). Wipe 11. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
ofUhe grease before tightening the nut at the ball front wheel, then install the front wheel with the
joint. Torque the new castle nut (0) to the lower wheel nuts.
torque specification, then tighten it only far enough
to alignthe slot with the ball joint pin hole. 00 not 12. Turn the front wheel by hand, and make sure there
align thetnutby loosening it. is no interference between the driveshaft and
surrounding parts.
NOTE: Make sure the ball joint boot is not damaged
or cracked. 13. Tighten the flange bolts and the self-locking nut
with the vehicle's weight on the damper.
E~'
, ~
____ ~4x2.omm
93N·m
14. Refill the transmission with recommended fluid
®, (9.5 kgf·m, (see page 14-266).
69Ibf·ft)
15. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if
8. Install the new lock pin (E) into the pin hole as
shown.
9. Install the suspension stroke sensor (with active

damper system) (see page 22-229).
16-20 BACK
Intermediate Shaft Removal Intermediate Shaft· Disassembly
1. Drain the transmission fluid (see page 14-266). Special Tool~ Required
• Driver 077 49-0010000
2. Remove the right driveshaft (see page 16-4). • Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300
• Support base 07965-SD90100
3. Remove the exhaust pipe A (see step 7 on page • Attachmenti ,42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
14-270.).
1. Remove the heat shfeld.
4. Remove the exhaust pipe bracket (A).
2. Remove the intermediate shaft outer seal (A) from

5. Remove the flange bolt (A), and two dowel bolts (8). the bearing support (8).
3. Remove the set ring (C) and external snap ring (D).
6. Remove the intermediate shaft (C) from the

differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontally
until it is clear of the differential to prevent
damaging to the differential oil seal.
(cont'd)
BACK
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly (cont'd)
4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the . 6. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) out of the
intermediate shaft bearing (B) using the support bearing support (B) using the support base
base attachment (C), support base (0) and a press. attachment (C), support base (0), driver (E),
Be careful not to damage the beanng support ring attachment (F) and a press.
(E) on the intermediate shaft during disassembly.
5. Remove the internal snap ring.
"6-22 BACK
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly
Exploded View
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT,RING
\
FLANGE BOLTS
DOWEL BOLTS 10x1.25mm
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT 10x1.25mm 39N·m
39N·m (4.0 kgf·m,29 Ibf·ft)
'@
/
INTERMEDIATE
SHAFT BEARING
Replace.
OUTER SEAL
Replace.
. ~
Pack the interior of the outer seal.
(cont'd)
BACK 16-23
DrivelinelAxle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the shaft
• Driver 07749-0010000 bearing (8) using the fork seal driver (C) and a
• Support base attachment 07LAF-SM40300 press.
• Support base 07965-SD90100
• Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
• Fork seal driver, 39.2 x 49.5 x 15 mm 07947-4630100
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during

this procedure.
1. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry

them with compressed air. Do not wash the rubber
parts with solvent.
I ,'I
2. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the

bearing support (8) using the driver (C), oil seal
driver attachment (D) and a press.
PRESS
~7749-0010000 ..
5. Install, then seat the external snap ring (A) in the

groove of the intermediate shaft (8).
3. Install, then seat the internal snap ring in the

groove of the bearing support. B
16-24 BACK
6. Install the outer seal (A) into the bearing support (8) 8. Install the set ring.
using the fork seal driver (e), support base
attachment (0), support base (E) and a press.
PRESS
C
07947-4630100 ...
,~ofthe
Pack the interior
D
outer seal.
07LAF-SM40300
o
E
07965-5D90100
7. Install the heat shield onto the bearing support.
8x1.25mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
BACK 16-25
, ::11
D'riveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Installation Rear Driveshaft Removal
1. Use solvent or brake cleaner to thoroughly clean Special Tools Required

the areas where the intermediate shaft (A) contacts • Oriveshaft remover 07AAO-S3VAOOO
the transmission (differential) and dry with • Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-Sl0A202
compressed air. Insert the intermediate shaft
assembly into the differential. Hold the 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and remove the rear
intermediate shaft horizontally to prevent damage wheels.
to the differential oil seal.
2. lift up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B),
then remove and discard the nut.
10x1.25mm
39N·m A
C
39N·m
(4.0kgf·m,
8x 1.25mm 29Ibf·ft)
26 N·m (2.6 kgf·m, 20 Ibf·ft)
2. Install the flange bolt (B), two dowel bolts (C), and 3. Remove the VSA rear wheel sensor (A) and harness
exhaust pipe bracket (0). clip (B).
3. Install the exhaust pipe A (see step 5 on page

14-273).
4. Install the right driveshaft (see page 16-19).
5. Refill the transmission with recommended fluid

(see page 14-266).
BACK
4. Remove the lock pin (A) from the upper arm ball 7. Place a transmission jack under lower armB and
joint castle nut (B), and remove the nut. remove the flange bolt (A) ..
D
07MAC·SL0A202
8. While pulling the knuckle outward, use a plastic

hammer to lightly tap on the rear driveshaft
outboard joint disconnecting it from the rear wheel
hub.
5. Separate the ball joint from the upper arm (C) with
the ball joint remover (D) (see page 18-11).
6. Remove the special self-locking nut (B), washer and

flange bolt (C), then remove the lower arm A.
(cont'd)
BACK 16-27
DriveUnelAxle
Rear Driveshaft Removal (cont'd)
9. Pull the knuckle (A) outward, then remove the rear 11. Remove the rear driveshaft.
driveshaft outboard joint (8).
NOTE: When removing the outboard joint, continue

supporting both the knuckle and lower arm with the
transmission jack. Make sure not to over extend the
brake hose. .
10. Using the driveshaft remover (A) and the hammer,

pry out the inboard joint (8) from the rear
differential (e).
1.6-28 BACK
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the circlip (A).

Threaded adapter, 24 x 1.5 mm 07XAe-001 020A
~A
Inboard Joint Side D o
the boot (see page 16-6). ~B
2. Make a mark (A) on each roller (B) and inboard joint
(e) to identify the locations of the rollers and the c
grooves in the inboard joint. Then remove the
inboard joint and place it on a shop towel (D). Be
careful not to drop the rollers when separating
them from the inboard joint.
c 4. Make a mark on the spider (B) and driveshaft (e) to

A
identify the position of the spider on the shaft.
5. Remove the spider and rollers using a

commercially available bearing remover (D).
6. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft (A) with vinyl

tape (B) to prevent damaging to the boot.
7. Remove the inboard boot (e) and ear clamp type

boot band (D). Be careful not to damage the boot
(see page 16-6).
(cont'd)
BACK 16-29
DrivelinelAxle
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly (cont'd)
Outboard Joint Side 5. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise with a shop
towel.
the boot (see page 16-6). 6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the threaded
adapter (B) and a commercially available 5/8"-18
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially to the inboard UNF slide hammer (C).
joint side. Be careful not to damage the boot.
B
A~
07XAC-001020A
7. Remove the driveshaft from the bench vise.

3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and
the outboard joint inner race. 8. Remove the stop ring (A) from the driveshaft (B).
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same

level as the outboard joint end (C).
16-30 BACK
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
CIRCLIP
LOW PROFILE BAND
INBOARD BOOT
~
SPIDER AND in the inboard boot set.
ROLLERS
EAR CLAMP BAND

Replace.
LOW PROFILE BAND
TOO.
OUTBOARD BOOT
~
(cant'd)
BACK 16-31
""
DrivelinelAxle
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 5. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease
Inner handle, 30 mm 07946-MBOOOOO included in the new inboard boot set.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during Grease quantity

this procedure. Inboard joint: 120-140 9 (4.2-4.9 oz)
Inboard Joint Side ~

Use the grease included in the
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent inboard boot set.
damage to the inboard boot.
6. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft, and note

these items:
• Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by

aligning the marks (A) you made on the inboard
2. Install the new ear clamp bands (B) and inboard joint and the rollers .
boot, then remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to • Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint is
damage the inboard boot. pointing up to prevent it from falling off.
3. Install the spider and rollers (A) onto the driveshaft

by aligning the marks (B) you made, install it using
the inner handle (e). A
C
07946-MBOOOOO 7. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the
inboard joint, then install the new boot band onto
4. Install the circlip (D) into the driveshaft groove. the boot(see page 16-11).
Rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure it is
fully seated. 8. Repeat step 8 for the band on the other end of the
boot.
16-32. I:
BACK
Outboard Joint Side 4. Pack about half of the grease included in the new
joint boot set into the driveshaft hole in outboard
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent joint. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard
damaging to the outboard boot. joint (B) until the stop ring (e) is closed.
2. Install a new ear clamp band (B) and the outboard

boot, then remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to
damage the outboard boot. 5. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the
driveshaft and joint, andtap them on a .hard surface.
3. Install a new stop ring (A) in the driveshaft groove Do not use a hammer as excessive force may
(B). damage the driveshaft. Be careful not to damage
the threaded section (A) of the outboard joint.
\
\)
(cont'd)
BACK
,·6-33
Drivelinel Axle
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) you 8. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure as
made with the outboard joint end (8). shown, then adjust the boots to halfway between
full compression and full extension. Make sure the
ends ofthe boots seat in the groove ofthe
driveshaft and joint. Doing this prevents a vacuum
or too much air in the boot, preventing itfrom
Left driveshaft: 592.5-593.5 mm

(23.33-23.37 in.)
Right driveshaft: 621.5-622.5 mm
(24.47-24.51 in.)
7. Pack the outboard joint (A) with the remaining joint

grease included in the new outboard boot set.
Grease quantity (total)

Outboard joint: 85-105 g (3.0-3.7 oz)
9. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (8) and
outboard joint (C).
~
10. Install the new low profile band and ear clamp
band onto the boot (see page 16-11).
11. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot,
and repeat step 10.
16-34 BACK
Rear Driveshaft Installation
NOTE: Before starting installation, make sure the 4. Pull the knuckle (A) outward, and install the rear
mating surfaces of the joint and the splined section are driveshaft outboard joint (B) into the rear hub.
free from dirt or dust.
NOTE: When installing the outboard joint continue
1. Apply 1.5-2.0 g (0.05-0.07 oz) of grease to the supporting both the knuckle and lower arm with the
whole splined surface (A). After applying grease, transmission jack. Make sure not to over extend the
remove the grease from the splined grooves at brake hose.
intervals of 2-3 splines and from the set ring
groove (B) so that air can bleed from the differential.
2. Seat a new set ring in the set ring groove ofthe 5. Install the flange bolt (A) onto lower arm (B).
differential.
3. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the

differential thoroughly with solvent or brake
cleaner, and dry with compressed air. Insert the
inboard end (A) of the driveshaft into the
differential (B) until the set ring (C) locks in the
groove (D).
A
14x 1.5 mm
113 N·m
111.5 kgf·m,
83lbf·tt}
B
c B
(cont'd)
BACK 16-35
Drivelinel Axle
Rear Driveshaft Installation (cont'd)
6. Install the lower armA. 9. Install the VSA rear wheel sensor (A) and harness
clip (B).
---6x1.0mm
9.3N·m
A
7. Install the upper arm (A). Be careful not to damage 10. Install a new spindle nut (A), then tighten the nut.
the ball joint boot (B). Wipe off the grease before After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
tightening the nut at the ball joint. shoulder (B) against the drives haft.
14x 1.5 mm
127 N·m
(13.0 kgf·m,
94lbf·ftl
A
i
Iltb~
IlG$
24x 1.5 mm
245N·m
125.0 kgf·m, 1811bf·ftl
11. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
rear wheel, then install the rear wheel with the
8. Torque the new castle nut (C) to the lower torque wheel nuts.
specification, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not 12. Turn the rear wheel by hand, and make sure there
align the nut by loosening it. is no interference between the driveshaft and
surrounding parts.
NOTE: Make sure the ball joint boot is not damaged
or cracked. 13. Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if
BACK
16-36
Propeller Shaft Inspection
Universal Joint and Boots Propeller Shaft Runout
1. Shift the transmission to the N position. 6. Install a dial indicator with its needle on the center
of No.1 propeller shaft or No.2 propeller shaft.
2. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-7).
7. Turn the other propeller shaft slowly and check the
3. Check the center support bearing (A) for excessive runout. Repeat this procedure for the other
play or rattle. If the center support has excessive propeller shaft.
play or rattle, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
No.1 Propeller Shaft Runout
B
A
4. Check the rubber portion of the mount (B) for

No.2 Propeller Shaft Runout
damage and deterioration. Ifthe rubber portion is Service Limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
damaged or deteriorated, replace the propeller
shaft assembly.
5. Check the universal joints for excessive play or

rattle. Ifthe universal joints have excessive play or
rattle, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
8. If the runout on either propeller shaft exceeds the

service limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
BACK 16-37
':,'i""
DrilleUne/Axle
Propeller Shaft Removal
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-7). 5. Remove the center support bearing mounting bolts.
2. Remove the propeller shaft protector.
6. Make a reference mark (A) across the No.2

propeller shaft (8) and rear differential companion
3. Make a reference mark (A) acro'5s the No.1 flange (C).
propeller shaft (8) and transfer companion flange
(e).
7. Separate the No.2 propeller shaft from the rear

differential, then remove the propeller shaft.
4. Separate the No.1 propeller shaft from the transfer
assembly.
16-38 BACK
Propeller Shaft Installation
1. If you are installing a new propeller shaft, go to 5. Install the center support bearing mounting bolts.
step 2. Make sure you use new bolts.
If you reinstalling the original propeller shaft, go to
step 3.
2. Install the new propeller shaft (A) onto the rear

differential (B), by aligning the reference mark (e)
on the new propeller shaft with the factory
reference mark (D) on the companion flange (E). Do
not use the marks you made on the companion
from the removal procedure. If there are no factory
marks on the companion flange, go to step 4.
B
A
\ 10 x 1.25 mm
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 Ibf·tt)
6. Install the No.1 propeller shaft (A) onto the transfer

companion flange (B) by aligning the reference
mark (e). Make sure you use new mounting bolts.
10 x 1.25 mm
72 N·m (7.3 kgf·m, 53 Ibf·tt)
3. Reinstall the No.2 propeller shaft (A) to the rear

differential (B) by aligning the reference marks (e)
you made during the removal procedure.
4. Attach the No.2 propeller shaft to the rear

differential with new mounting bolts. Tighten the
bolt to the specified torque.
(cont'd)
BACK 16-39
Drivelinel Axle
Propeller Shaft Installation (cont'd)
7. Install the propeller shaft protector.
8x 1.25mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
8. If you installed a new propeller shaft, test drive the

vehicle at 55 mph (88 kph) and check for noise or
vibration .
• If there is no noise or vibration, the repair is

complete .
• If there is a noise or vibration, go to step 9.
9. Remove the mounting bolts from the propeller

shaft at the rear differential companion flange.
Note the current alignment of the propeller shaft to
rear differential companion flange.
10. Rotate the propeller shaft 180 degrees from its

current alignment with the rear differential
companion flange.
11. Install new mounting bolts and tighten them to the

specified torque.
16-40 BACK
Steering
Power Steering
Special Tools ................................................................. 17-2
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Check ....................... 17-8
Power Assist Check ...................................................... 17-8
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection ................. 17-9
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-0010001 ........... 17-10
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A or
T/N 07406-001A101 ................................................... 17-11
Fluid Leakage Inspection ............................................. 17-12
Fluid Replacement ........................................................ 17-13
Power Steering Hose, Line, and
Pressure Switch Replacement ................................. 17-14
Pump Replacement ...................................................... 17-15
Pump Overhaul ............................................................. 17-16
* Steering Wheel Removal ............................................. 17-22
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly ................ 17-23
* Steering Wheel Installation ......................................... 17-24
* Steering Column Removal and Installation ............... 17-25
Steering Column Position Memorization ................... 17-28
Steering Column/Tilt/Telescopic Inspection .............. 17-29
Steering Lock Replacement ......................................... 17-29
Rack Guide Adjustment ............................................... 17-30
Steering Gearbox Removal ......................................... 17-31
Steering Gearbox Overhaul ......................................... 17-39
Steering Gearbox Installation ..................................... 17-52
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement .......................... 17-58
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement ....... ~ .............. 17-59
Power Steering
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number DescrIPtion Oty

CD 07LAG-SM40100 Piston Seal Ring Guide ' 1
® 07LAG-SM40200 Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
® 07MAA-SL00200 Locknut Wrench, 43 mm 1
0 07MAC-SLOA202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
® 07RAK-S040122 PIS Joint Adapter (Hose) 1
® 07VAK-P8A011A PIS Joint Adapter (Pump) 1
(j) 07VAK-P8A012B PIS Joint Adapter Plate (Pump) 1
® 07ZAB-S5A0100 Pulley Holder 1
® 070GD-001 01 00 Driver Handle, 480 mm 1
@ 07406-0010001 or 07406-001 OOOA PIS Pressure Gauge 1
or 07406-001A101
® 077 46-001()300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
@ 077 49-00 10000 Driver 1
@ 07946-MJ00201 Driver Head 1
@ 07946-1870100 Attachment, 28 x 30 mm 1
@ 07965-SA50500 Front Hub Dis/assembly Tool 1
CD
tJ ® ®
~
..
0
~
~
Ss
®
~
~ ~~
(j)
® ® ® @
~ ® @
tJ ~
@ @ @
17-2 BACK
DRIVER'S AIRBAG
Replacement, page ~4-137
POWER STEERING FLUID RESERVOIR

Fluid Leakage Inspection, page 17-12
Fluid Replacement, page 17-13 STEERING WHEEL
Power Steering Hose, Line, and Removal, page 17-22
Pressure Switch Replacement, page 17-14 Disassembly/Reassembly,
page 17-23 '
POWER STEERING PUMP Installation, page 17-24
Drive Belt Inspection, page 4-33
Drive Belt Replacement, page 4-33
Pump Pressure Test .
with T/N 07406-0010001, page 17-10 "
Pump Pressure Test
with T/N 07406-001000A or 07406-001A 101,
page 17-11
Pump Replacement, page 17-15
Pump Overhaul, page 17-16
STEERING COLUMN
Removal and Installation,
page 17-25
Position Memorization,
page 17-28
Steering Column/Tilt/Telescopic Inspection,
page 17-29 .
Steering Lock Replacement,
page 17-29
POWER STEERING GEARBOX

Rack Guide Adjustment, page 17-30
Removal, page 17-31
Overhaul, page 17-39
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement, page 17-58
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement, page 17-59
BACK 17-3
Power Steering
Find the symptom in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the order liste d untl·1 you f In d t he cause.
Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for
Hard steering Troubleshoot the system (see page 17-6). • Modified
suspension
• Damaged
suspension
• Tire sizes, tire
varieties, and air
pressure
Assist (excessively Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-30). Front wheel
light steering at high alignment
speed) (see page 18-5)
Shock or vibration 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-30).
when the steering 2. Check the drive belt for slippage (see page 4-33).
wheel is turned to 3. Check the power steering pump fluid pressure with TIN 07406-
full lock 001000.1 (see page 17-10), TIN 07406-001000A or TIN 07406-
001AH)1 (see page 17-11).
4. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see page 17-39).
Steering wheel will 1. Check cylinder lines for deformation.
not return smoothly 2. Check the ball joints for binding.
3. Check wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
4. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see step 2 on page 17-40).
Uneven or rough 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-30).
steering 2. Check the drive belt (see page 4-33).
3. Check for low or erratic engine idle speed (see page 11-310).
4. Check for air in the power steering system due to air entering
inlet side of pump.
5. Check for low fluid level in the power steering reservoir due to
possible leaks in system (see page 17-14).
6. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see step 2 on page 17-40).
Steering wheel kicks 1. Check the drive belt (see page 4-33).
back during wide 2. Check the power steering pump fluid pressure with TIN 07406-
turns 0010001 (see page 17-10), TIN 07406-001000A or TIN 07406-
001A101 (see page 17-11).
Humming noise from 1. Check when the noise occurs: Pump pressure
the power steering • Ifthe noise is heard 2-3 minutes after starting the engine in
system cold weather, this is normal.
• If the noise is heard when the wheel is turned with the vehicle
stopped, this is normal due to the fluid pulsation.
2. Check for the high-pressure hose touching the subframe or body.
3. Check for automatic transmission converter noise.
4. Check for air bubbles in the power steering fluid, leak on inlet
side of pump.
5. Check for particle contamination of fluid and restricted filter in
the reservoir.
Power steering rack 1. Check for loose steering components (tie-rod and ball joints).
rattle or chattering Tighten or replace as necessary.
2. Check the steering column shaft for wobbling. If the steering
column wobbles, replace the steering column assembly
(see page 17-25).
3. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-30).
4. Check the power steering pump pulley:
• If the pulley is loose, tighten it (see step 33 on page 17-21).
• Ifthe pump shaft is loose, replace the pump (see page 17-15).
BACK
17-4
Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for
Hissing from the • Check the fluid level. If low, fill the reservoir to the proper level Air in the PIS fluid
power steering and check for leaks (see page 17-13).
system/foaming fluid • Check the reservoir for leaks.
• Check for crushed inlet hose or loose hose clamp allowing air into
the suction side of the system (see page 17-12).
• Check the power steering pump shaft oil seal for leaks.
Noise from the • Compare the pump noise at normal operating temperature to • PIS pump
power steering pump another like vehicle (pump noise for 2-3 minutes after starting pressure
the engine in cold weather is normal). • Air in the PIS
• Remove and inspect the pump for wear and damage (see page fluid
17-15). . ..
Squeaking from the Check the drive belt (see page 4-33).
power steering pump
Fluid leaks from the • Fluid leaks from the top ofthe valve body unit. Replace the valve
steering gearbox 'body unit (see page 17-39).
• Fluid leaks from the driver's side boot. Replace the valve oil seal
on the pinion shaft. Replace the cylinder end seal on the gearbox
side.
• Fluid leaks from the passenger's side boot. Replace the cylinder
end seal on the cylinder side.
• Fluid leaks from pinion shaft near the lower steering joint bolt.
Replace the valvebodY'unit (see page 17-39).
• Fluid leaks from the steering damping valve covers on the valve
body unit. Replace the valve housing.
Fluid leaks from the • Fluid leaks from the cylinder line connections (flare nuts). Tighten
power steering line the connection and retest (see page 17-14).
• Fluid leaks from a damaged cylinder lines. Replace the cylinder
line (see page 17-14).
• Fluid leaks from the pump outlet hose or return line fitting on the
valve body unit (flare nuts). Tighten the fitting and retest. If it still
leaks, replace the hose, the line, or valve body unit as necessary.
Fluid leaks from the • Fluid leaks from the front oil seal. Replace the front oil seal.
power steering pump • Fluid leaks from the power steering pump housing. Replace the
leaking O-rings or seals (see page 17-12), and if necessary replace
the power steering pump (see page 17-15).
Fluid leaks from the • Fluid leaks from around the reservoir cap because fluid level is too
power steering high. Drain the reservoir to the proper level. If the fluid is aerated
reservoir check for an air leak on the inlet side of pump.
• Fluid leaks from reservoir. Check for the reservoir for cracks and
replace as necessary.
Fluid leaks from the • Check the fitting for loose bolts. If the bolts are tight, replace the
power steering pump fitting O-ring.
outlet hose • Fluid leaks at the swagged joint. Replace the pump outlet hose.
(high-pressure)
Fluid leaks from the Check the hose for damage, deterioration, or improper assembly.
power steering pump Replace or repair as necessary.
inlet hose
(low-pressure)
BACK 17-5
Power 'Steering
Hard Steering 5. With a spring scale, measure the power assist in

both directions, to the left and to the right.
1. Check the power assist (see page 17-8).
Are the two measurements within 5.0 N (0.51 kgf,
Is the initial turning load more than 29 N (3.0 kgf, 1.12Ibf) of each other?
6.6Ibf) ?
YES-Go to step 6.
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-::Go to step 11.
NO-Power assist is OK.•
6. Measure the fluid pressure with both pressure
2. Connect the PIS joint adapter (pump), PIS joint gauge valves open (if so equipped), while turning
adapter (hose), and PIS pressure gauge TIN 07406- the steering wheel fully to the left and fully to the
0010001 (see page 17-10), TIN 07406-001000A or right.
TIN 07406-001A101 (see page 17-11) to the pump.
Is the pressure 8,920-9,420 kPa (91-96 kgflcrrr.,
3. Measure steady-state fluid pressure from the pump . 1,290- 1,370 psi) or more?
at idle.
YES-Go to step 7.
Is the pressure 1,470 kPa(15kgflprrf,213 psi) or
less? NO-::Faulty steering gearbox.•
YES-Go to step 4. 7. Adjust the rack guide (see page 17-30), and retest.
NO-Go to step 8. Is the steering OK?
4. Measure the pump relief pressure at idle. YES-Repair is completed .•
Is the pressure 8,920- 9,420 kPa (91- 96 kgflcrrf, NO-Faulty steering gearbox.•
1,290- 1,370 psi) or more? ,
8. Check the outlet and return hoses and lines
YES-Go to step 5. between the pump and the steering gearbox for
clogging and deformation.
NO-Go to step 9.
Are the lines clogged or deformed?
YES-Repair or replace the lines,.
NO-Faulty valve body unit.•
17-6 BACK
9. Disassemble the pump (see page 17-16).
10. Check the flow control valve for smooth movement

and leaks (see step 13 on page 17-18).
Is the flow control valve OK?
YES-Faulty pump assembly.•
NO-Faulty flow control valve.•
11. Check the cylinder lines for deformation (see page

17-14).
Are any of the lines deformed?
YES-Replace the deformed line .•
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted rack

guide (too tight).
Is the rack shaft bent or the rack guide adjusted

too tight?
YES-Replace the rack shaft, or readjust the rack

guide .•
NO-Faulty valve body unit.•
BACK 17-7
Power Steering
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Power Assist Check

Check
NOTE: This test should be done with original equipment
tires and wheels at the correct tire pressure.
1. Turn the front wheels to the straight ahead position.
1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page
2. Measure how far you can turn the steering wheel 17-13).
left and right without moving the front wheels.
2. Start the engine, let it idle, and turn the steering
• Ifthe play is within the limit, the steering gearbox wheel from lock-to-Iock several times to warm up
and linkages are OK. the fluid .
• If the play exceeds the limit, adjust the rack guide
(see page 17-30). Ifthe play is still excessive after 3. Attach a commercially available spring scale to the
rack guide adjustment, inspectthe steering steering wheel. With the engine idling and the
linkage and steering gearbox (see page 17-9). vehicle on a clean, dry floor, pull the scale as
shown and read it as soon as the tires begin to turn.
Rotational play: 0-10 mm (0-0.39 in.)
• Ifthe scale reads no more than the specification,
the steering gearbox and pump are OK .
• If the scale reads more than the specification,
troubleshoot the steering system (see page 17-6).
Initial turning load: 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf)
17-8 BACK
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
STEERING JOINTS
Check for loose joint bolt,
or faulty movement.
STEERING GEARBOX
Inspect for loose mounting hardware. TIE-ROD END BALL JOINT
GEARBOX MOUNTING CUSHIONS . Inspect for faulty movement
Inspect for deterioration. and damage.
BALL JOINT BOOT

BOOT Inspect for damage and deterioration.
Inspect for damage and deterioration.
BACK 17-9
Power Steering
Pump Pressure Test with TIN 07406·0010001
Special Tools Required 5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A).

• PIS joint adapter (pump) 07VAK-P8A011A
• PIS joint adapter plate (pump) 07VAK-P8A012B
• PIS joint adapter (hose) 07RAK-S040122
• PIS pressure gauge 07406-0010001
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the pump or steering gearbox. A

B
17-13).
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the

pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then
install the PIS joint adapter (pump) on the pump
outlet (B) with the PIS joint outlet plate.
6x1.0mm
11 N·m 6. Fully open the pressure control valve (B).
(1.1 kgf.m,
S.O Ibf·ft) 7. Start the engine and let it idle.
8. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several

times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at
158 "F (70 "C).
~6x1.0mm
l--"i§~-fI~1 grk~f.m,
S.O Ibf·ft)
9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the
engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition,
the gauge should read no more than 1,470 kPa
07VAK-PSA012B
(15 kgf/cm 2, 213 psi).
If it reads high, check for:
• Clogged or deformed feed or return line between

the pump and the steering gearbox.
3. Connect the PIS joint adapter (hose) to the PIS • Clogged valve body unit.
pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose
to the PIS joint adapter (hose). 10. Close the shut-off valve, then close the pressure
control valve gradually until the pressure gauge
4. Install the PIS pressure gauge to the PIS joint needle is stable. Read the pressure.
adapter (pump).
INOTICEI
Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more
than 5 seconds or the pump could be
damaged by over-heating.
11. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully. If the

pump is in good condition, the gauge should read
at least 8,920-9,420 kPa (91-96 kgf/cm2,
1,290-1,370 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the pump.
17-10 BACK
Pump Pressure Test with TIN 07406-001000A or T/N07406-001A'101
Special Tools Required 5. Open the shut-off valve (A) fully.

• PIS joint adapter (pump) 07VAK-P8A011A
• PIS joint adapter plate (pump) 07VAK-P8A012B
• PIS joint adapter (hose) 07RAK-S040122
• PIS pressure gauge 07406-001000A
or07406-001A101
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the pump or steering gearbox.

17-13).
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the

pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then
install the PIS joint adapter (pump) on the pump
outlet (B) with the PIS joint outlet plate.
6. Start the engine and let it idle.
07RAK-S040122
6x 1.0mm
11 N·m 7. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several
11.1 kgf·m, times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at
8.0Ibf.ft)
158"F (70 "C).
A
8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the
engine is idling. If the pump is in good condition,
the gauge should read no more than 1,470 kPa
6x1.0mm
11 N·m (15 kgf/cm 2, 213 psi).
(1.1 kgf·m, If it reads high, check for:
8.0Ibf.ft)
• Clogged or deformed feed or return line between
the pump and the steering gearbox.
• Clogged valve body unit.
9. let the engine idle, and gradually close the shut-off

valve and immediately read the pressure.
3. Connect the PIS joint adapter (hose) to the PIS
pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose INOTICE I
to the PIS joint adapter (hose). Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more
than 5 seconds or the pump could be
4. Install the PIS pressure gauge to the PIS joint· damaged by over-heating.
adapter (pump).
10. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully. If the
pump is in good condition, the gauge should read
at least 8,920-9,420 kPa (91-96 kgf/cm 2 ,
1,290-1,370 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the pump.
BACK 17-11
Power Steering
Fluid Leakage InspeCtion
PUMP ASSEMBLY
Check for leaks at the pump
seal, inlet and outlet fittings.
L GEARBOX and VALVE BODY UNIT.

Check for leaks at the mating surface
and flare nut connections.
HOSES and LINES

Inspect hoses for damage, leaks, interference, and twisting.
Inspect fluid lines for damage, rusting, and leakage.
Check for leaks at hose and line joints, and connections.
BACK
Fluid Replacement
Check the reservoir (A) at regular intervals, and add the 1. Remove the reservoir from its holder. Raise the
recommended fluid as necessary. Always use Acura reservoir, then disconnect the return hose (A) to
Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power drain the reservoir. Take care not to spill the fluid
steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at
increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. once..
NOTE: If the fluid is contaminated, the screen in the NOTE: Inspect the reservoir screen for any debris. If
reservoir may be partially blocked. Replace the the reservoir screen is clogged, replace the
reservoir if necessary. reservoir.
System capacity:
1.03 L (1.09 US. qt) at disassembly
Reservoir capacity: B
0.34 L (0.36 US. qt)
c
2. Connecta hose (B) of suitable diameter to the

disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a
suitable container.
3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the

steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several times.
When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off
the engine. Discard the fluid.
4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir.
5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (C).
6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the
steering from lock-to-Iock several times to bleed air
from the system.
7. Recheck the fluid level and add some if necessary.

Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line.
8. If the fluid is contaminated, dark, or discolored,

repeat the procedure as necessary.
BACK 17-13
Power Steering
Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement
Note these items during installation:

• Connect each hose to the corresponding line securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or
adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown .
• Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones if necessary .
• Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks.
ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP (A) HOSE CLAMP (B)
2.S-S.Smm
(0.10-0.22 in.)
2.S-S.Smm 2.0-4.0mm
(0.10-0.22 in.) . (.0.08-0.16 in.)
6 x 1.0 mm POWER STEERING

11 N·m PRESSURE SWITCH
(1.1 kgf·m, 8.0 Ibf·ft) 12 N·m
PUMP OUTLET HOSE (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
INLET LINE
16x1.Smm
42N·m
(4.3 kgf·m, 31 Ibf·ft) RETURN LINE JOINT
16x1.Smm
28N·m
(2.9 kgf·m, 21 Ibf.ft)
RETURN HOSE
PUMP INLET HOSE
CYLINDER LINES A
13 N·m (1.3 kgf·m, 9.4Ibf·ft)
CYLINDER LINES
13 N·m 11.3 kgf.m, 9.4Ibf·ft)
RETURN HOSE
RETURN LINE
A A
17-14 BACK
Pump Replacement
1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle. 10. Tighten the pump mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
2. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir
(see page 17-13). 11. Install the drive belt (A).
3. Remove the engine cover. Note these items during belt installation:
• Make sure that the belt is properly positioned on
4. Remove the drive belt (A) from the pump pulley the pulleys (B).
(see page 4-33). • Do not get power steering fluid or grease on the
auto-tensioner, alternator, AlC compressor, and
drive belt or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or
grease before installation.
12. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (see page
5. Cover the auto-tensioner, alternator, and AlC 17-13).
compressor with several shop towels to protect
them from spilled power steering fluid. Disconnect
the pump inlet hose (B) and pump outlet hose (C)
from the pump (D), and plug them. Take care not to
spill the fluid on the . body or parts. Wipe off any
spilled fluid at once. Do not turn the steering wheel
with the pump removed.
6. Remove the pump mounting bolts (E).
7. Cover the opening of the pump with a piece of tape

to prevent foreign material from entering the pump.
8. Connect the pump inlet hose and pump outlet hose

onto the new pump with a new O-ring (F).
9. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with

the mounting bolts, then tighten the pump fittings
securely.
BACK 17-15
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
Replace the pump as an assembly if the parts indicated with an asterisk (*) are worn or damaged.
8x 1.25 mm
20N·m
PUMP COVER
SEAL
Replace.
*SNAPRING
15.2x2.4mm
*ROTOR
j ;BVALVE
O·RING
Replace.
*PUMP HOUSING
V 51 x 2.4 mm O·RING
Replace.
DRIVESHAFT
\ 6x1.0mm
11 N·m
(1.1 kgf·m,
8.0Ibf.ftl
PULLEY NUT
64N·m
17-16 BACK
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the inlet joint and O-ring.
• Attachment, 28 x 30 mm 07946-1870100
• Driver 07749-0010000 5. Loosen the flow control valve cap with a hex
• Pulley holder 07ZAB-S5A0100 wrench, and remove it and the O-ring, the flow
control valve and spring.
Disassembly
6. Remove the pump cover and pump cover seal.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
following procedure. 7. Remove the outer side plate, cam ring, rotor, vanes,
side plate and O-rings.
1. Drain the fluid from the pump (see page 17-13).
8. Remove the snap ring, then remove the subvalve
2. Remove the power steering pump (see page 17-15). from the pump housing.
3. Hold the power steering pump (A) in a vise with 9. Remove the snap ring, then remove the pump
soft jaws (B), then hold the pulley (e) with the driveshaft by tapping the shaft end with a plastic
pulley holder (D), and remove the pulley nut (E) and hammer.
pulley. Be careful not to damage the pump housing
with the jaws of the vise. 10. Remove the pump seal from the pump housing.
A-___
(cont'd)
BACK 17-17
Power··Steering
Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Inspection 14. Attach a hose (A) to the end of the flow control
valve (B) as shown. Then submerge the flow
11. Check the flow. control valve for wear, burrs, and control valve in a container of power steering fluid
other damage to the edges of the grooves in the or solvent (C), and blow in the hose.
valve.
• If air bubbles leak through the valve at Jess than
98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm 2, 14.2 psi), replace the pump
as an assembly. The flow control valve is not
available separately.
• If the flow control valve is OK, set it aside for
reassembly later.
12. Inspect the bore of the flow control valve on the

B
pump housing for scratches and wear.
13. Slip the flow control valve back in the pump

housing, and check that it moves in and out
smoothly. If OK, go to step 14; if not, replace the
pump as an assembly. The flow control valve (A) is 15. Inspect the ball bearing by rotating the outer race
not available separately. slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or
roughness, remove the faulty ball bearing (A) and
install a new one (B).
A
"'
A
"'
16. Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in the

Exploded View. If any of them are worn or
damaged, replace the pump as an assembly.
17-18 BACK
Reassembly 18. Install the new pump seal (A) (with its grooved side
facing in) into the pump housing (8) by hand first,
17. Align the pin (A) ofthe subvalve (8) with the oil then drive it in using the driver and attachment
passage (C) in the pump housing, and push the until there is no step at the top of the pump seal,
subvalve into place, then install the snap ring (0). and the seal is fully seated in the pump housing.
07749-0010000
19. Position the pump driveshaft (A) in the pump

housing, then press it in with the appropriate size
socket wrench (8) as shown.
20. Install the 40 mm snap ring (C) with its beveled

edge facing out.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-19
PQwer~~Steering
Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
21.eoat the new pump cdver seal '(A) with power 24. Install the rotor (A) to the pump cover (B) with its .
steering fluid, and install it into the groove in"the "." mark (e) facing up.
pump cover (B).
. '
22. Install the outer side plate (e) over the two roll pins 25. Set the 10 vanes (0) in the grooves in the rotor.
(O)"with its arrow marks stamped (E) facing down. Make sure that the round ends (E) of the vanes are
in contact with the sliding surface of the cam ring.
23. Set the cam ring (A) over the two roll pins with the
".".marks ~B) facing down .. "', 26. eoatthe new 15.2 mm O-ring (A) with power
steering fluid, and install it into the groove in the
side plate (B).
27. Install the side plate on the cam ring (e) by aligning
the roll pin set holes (0) in the side plate with the
roll pins (E).
17-20 BACK
28. Coat the new 51 mm O-ring ,(A) with ,power steering 32. Coatthenew 13 mmO-ring (A) with power steering
c
fluid, and position it inthe bottom ofthe pump fluid, and install. it on the. inlet joint UU. Install the
housing. inlet joint on the pump hou~ing.
8x1.2Smm
20N·m
(2.0 kgf·m, 14Ibf·tt)
B _____k"<S:l~d:;:);JJ
"-\ i.
29. Install the pump cover assembly (B) in the pump 33. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley
housing. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque nut (B). Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft
alternating in two or more steps. jaws. Be careful not to damage the pump housing
with the jaws of the vise.
30. Coat the flow control valve (A) with power steering .. . B
fluid, then install it and the spring (B) in the pump
- - - - 64N·m
housing. ~~§F::;~",,- (6.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·tt)
34. Hold the pulley with the pulley holder, and tighten
the pulley nut to the specified torque.
35. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the

31. Coat the new 16.7 mm O-ring (C)with power pulley by hand. If it turns hard, loosen the four
steering fluid, and install it on the flow control flange bolts on the cover, then retighten them in
valve cap (0), then install the cap on the pump same manner as in step 29. Turn the pump again
housing. Tighten it to the specified torque. by hand.
BACK 17-21
Power··Steering
Steering Wheel Removal
SRScomponents are located in this area. Review the 6. Install a commercially available steering wheel
SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the puller (A) on the steering wheel (8). Free the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before steering wheel from the steering column shaft by
doing repairs or service. turning the pressure bolt (C) of the puller.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the Note these items when removing the steering
audio system and the navigation system (if wheel:
equipped). • Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering
column shaft when removing the steering wheel.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then • If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel
disconnect the negCitive cable from the battery. hub more tha.n five threads, the bolts will hit the
cable reel and damage it. To prevent this, install
3. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove a pair of jam nuts five threads up on each puller
the driver'sairbag from the steering wheel bolt.
(see page 24-13?).
A
4. Disconnect the cable reel subharness connector (A).
7. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the

steering wheel bolt and steering wheel from the
steering column.
5. Loosen the steering wheel bolt (8).
17-22 BACK
Steering Wheel DisassemblyIReassembly
HFL· AUDIO REMOTE

VOICE CONTROL SWITCH
SWITCH
(If equipped) CRUISE CONTROL
COMBINATION SWITCH
STEERING WHEEL
/ STEERING WHEEL
REAR COVER
/
--,.~~"'"
MULTI·INFORMATION
SWITCH
Iff equipped)
CORD GUIDE
SEL/RESET
~
SWITCH
~
ACCESS PANEL
COVER
BACK 17-23
Power Steering
Steering Wheel Installation
1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the 3. Install the steering wheel bolt (A), and tighten it to
front wheels are aligned straight ahead, then center the specified torque. Connect the cable reel
the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable subharness connector (B). Make sure the wire
reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it harness is routed and fastened properly.
counterclockwise about three full turns. The arrow
mark (B) on the cable reel label should point
straight up.
B A
A
39N·m
(4.0 kgf·m,
29Ibf·ft)
4. Install the driver's airbag, and confirm that the

system is operating properly (see page 24-137).
2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal
cancelling sleeve (B) as shown. Install the steering 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable to the battery,
wheel on to the steering column shaft, making sure and do these tasks:
the steering wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of
the cable reel and tabs of the turn signal cancelling o Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator
sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering should come on for about 6 seconds and then go
column shaft when installing the steering wheel. off.
o Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and
c the navigation system (if equipped).
o Make sure the horn and turn signal switches
work properly.
o Make sure the steering wheel switches work
A
properly.
o Make sure the steering wheel is centered.
o Do the steering column position memorization
(see page 17-28).
B D
17-24 BACK
Steering Column Removal and Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Reviewthe '6. Remove the steering joint cover (A).
SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and the
doing repairs or service.
Removal

equipped).
2. Adjust the steering column to full tilt down position,

and to the full telescopic out position.
3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then

disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
4. Remove the driver's airbag assembly and the

steering wheel (see page 17-22).
5. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover

(see page 20-120).
(cont'd)
BACK 17-25
Power Steering
Steering Column Removal and Installation (cont'd)
7. Remove the. upper column cover (see page 20-129), and disconnect the connectors from the power tilt/telescopic
switch (A) (see page 22-488).
F
8x1.2Smm
28N·m
8x1.2Smm
16N·m
11.6 kgf·m, 12lbf·ftl
8. Disconnect the wire harness connectors from the combination switch assembly (8).
9. Remove the combination switch assembly from the steering column shaft by removing the three screws (e).
10. Disconnect the connectors from the ignition switch, and release the wire harness clips from the steering column.
11. Disconnect the connectors (D) from the tilt/telescopic motors.
12. Disconnect the connectors from the tilt/telescopic control unit (E).
13. Remove the steering joint bolts (F), then disconnect the steering joint (G) from the pinion shaft and the steering
column shaft.
14. Remove the steering column (H) by removing the attaching nuts and bolts.
15. Remove the center guide (I) (if equipped) from the top of the pinion shaft, and discard it. The center guide is for
factory assembly use only.
17-26 BACK
Installation 2. Center the steering rack within its stroke.
1. Install the steering column in the reverse order of 3. Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the
removal, and note these items: steering shaft (A) (line up the bolt hole (8) with the
flat portion (C) on the shaft), and loosely install the
• Take care not to let the sliding plates (A) fall out upper joint bolt (D).
of position during column installation.
• Make sure the wires are not caught or pinched by
any parts.
• Make sure that there is no gap (8) between
bracket (C), sliding plates, and absorbing plate
(D) once column is mounted in place and fixing
bolts and nuts are tightened.
4. Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the

pinion shaft taking care to align the gap (E) within
the angle.
5. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the
o
groove (8) around the pinion shaft then loosely
B install the lower joint bolt (C).
8x 1.2Smm
28N·m
12.9 kgf·m,
21Ibf·ft)
A
(cont'd)
BACK 17-27
;
Power, Steering
Steering Column Removal and Steering Column Position

Installation (cont'd) Memorization
6. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the NOTE: If the battery is disconnected, the power tilt and
steering joint is fully seated, then tighten the lower telescopic steering wheel system needs to be reset
joint bolt to the specified torque. when you reconnect the battery.
7. Tighten the upper joint bolt to the specified torque. 1. Insert the built-in key into the ignition switch, and
remove it.
8. Install the steering joint cover (A).
2. The steering wheel automatically moves fully in
and up to let you know the system is reset.
9. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-24).
10. Reconnect the negative battery cable to the battery,

and do these tasks:
o Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator

should come on for about 6 seconds and then go
off.
o Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and
the navigation system (if equipped).

o Make sure the horn and turn signal switches
work properly.
o Make sure the steering w~eel switches work
properly.
o Make sure the steering wheel is centered .
• Do the steering column position memorization

(see page 17-28).
17-28 BACK
Steering Column/Tilt/Telescopic Steering Lock Replacement
Inspection
1. Remove the steering column (seepage 17-25).
• Check the steering column ball bearing (A) and the 2. Center-punch each ofthe two shear bolts, and drill
steering joint bearings (B) for play and proper their heads off with a 5 mm (3/16 in.) drill bit. Be
movement. If any bearing is noisy or has excessive careful not to damage the switch body and steering
play, replace the steering column as an assembly. column when removing the shear bolts.
• Check the sliding capsules (C) for distortion or
breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace
the steering column as an assembly.
• Check the tilt mechanism and telescopic mechanism
for movement and damage.
• Check the absorbing plates (0) for distortion or
breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace
the steering column as an assembly.
A
3. Remove the shear bolts from the switch body.
B c 4. Install the switch body without the key inserted.
5. Loosely tighten the new shear.bolts.
6. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper

operation of the steering wheel lock and that the
ignition key turns freely.
7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B)
twist off.
I
o FlW)\\\\\\\m
/B
8. Register the immobilizer-keyless control unit

(see page 22-410), and make sure the immobilizer
system works properly.
BACK 17-29
Power Steering
Rack Guide Adjustment
Special Tools Required 4. Tighten the rack guide screw (A) to 25 N·m
Locknut wrench, 43 mm 07MAA-SL00200 (2.5 kgf·m, 18Ibf·ft), then loosen it.
15 0±5 °
1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position.
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the

locknut wrench, then remove the rack guide screw
(B).
B
69N·m
(7.0 kgf·m,
51lbf·ft)
5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 N·m

(0.4 kgf·m, 4 Ibf·ft), then back it off to the specified
angle ..
Specified return angle: 15 0±5 0
6. Hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench,

3. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw and tighten the locknut by hand until it's fully
(A), and apply new sealant (Loctite 565) to the seated.
middle of the threads (B). Loosely install the rack
guide screw on the steering gearbox. 7. Install the locknut wrench on the locknut (B), and
hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench.
Tighten the locknut to the specified torque.
8. Check for unusual steering effort through the

complete turning range.
9. Check the steering wheel rotation play (see page

17-8) and the power assist (see page 17-8).
\ B
17-30 BACK
Steering Gearbox Removal
Special Tools Required 8. Remove steering joint cover (A).

• Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
• Front subframe adapter EQS02BMDXSBO *
• Front subframe adapter VSB02C000016 *
• Engine support hanger, A and Reds
AAR-T-12566 *
• Engine hanger balance bar VSB02C000019 *
• Engine hanger adapter set VSB02C000031 *
* Available through the American Honda Tool and
Equipment program, 1-888-424-6857.
Note these items during removal:

• Using solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off
the valve body unit, it's lines, and the end ofthe
steering gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air.
• Be sure to remove the steering wheel before
disconnecting the steering joint. Damage to the cable 9. Remove the steering joint bolts, disconnect the
reel can occur. steering joint by moving the steering joint (A)
• Lower the front subframe from the body and remove toward the column.
the steering gearbox through the gap produced by
lowering the front subframe. A·
1. Drain the power steering fluid (see page 17-13).

equipped).
3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then

disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
4. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety

stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
5. Remove the front wheels.

(see page 20-120).
7. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22).
(cont'd)
BACK 17-31
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Removal (cont'd)
10. Remove the center guide (A)(if equipped),and 14. Install the engine hanger balancer bar (VSB02e
discard it. The center guide is for factory assembly 000019); attach the front arm (A) to the front
use only. cylinder head with a spacer (B) and 10 x 1.25 mm
bolt (e), attach the rear arm (D) to the rear cylinder
VSB02C000031
11. Apply vinyl tape to the splines on the pinion shaft

(B).
12. Remove the air cleaner housing (see page 11-363).
flange nuts from the cowl cover (B). Position the 15. Install the engine support hanger (AAR-T-12566) to
engine hanger adapters (VSB02e000031) with the the vehicle, and attach the hook to the slotted hole
"FRONT" mark facing forward over the damper in the engine hanger balancer bar. Tighten the wing
flange nuts. nut (F) by hand to lift and support the enginel
transmission.
17-32 BACK
16. Loosen the adjustable hose clamp (A), and 21. Disconnect the stabilizer links (A) from the lower
disconnect the return hose (B). arm on the right and left sides (see page 18-20).
B
22. Remove the front undercover (see page 20-219)
and the front splash shield (see page 20-218).
17. Loosen the 16 mm flare nut (e), and disconnect the
inlet line (D). 23. Remove the front subframe stiffener plate (A).
18. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the 12 mm nut (B),
and loosen the nut.
B
A
07MAC-SL0A202
19. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and knuckle using the
ball joint remover (see page 18-11).
20. Disconnect the lower arm ball joints (see page

18-17).
(cont'd)
BACK 17-33
Power Steering
24. Remove exhaust pipe B (see page 9-9). 28. Remove the rear engine mount (A) from the base
bracket, and move it aside.
25. Remove the propeller shaft and propeller shaft
protectors (see page 16-38).
26. Remove the inlet line clamp bolts (A).
29. Removethe base bracket (A) from the front

subframe.
27. Remove the rear mount stop (A) from the rear
engine mount.
17-34 BACK
30. Remove the ground cable bolt (A) from the 32. Loosen the four bolts (A) holding the adjustable
transmission. arms (B) of the front subframe adapter to its center
plate.
EQS02BMDXSBO
A
-----------
r-=:
B
31. Make reference marks (A) on the body across the

marks (B) on the edge ofthe front subframe (C). 33. Line up the slots in the arms with the bolt holes on
the corner of the jack base, then attach the front
c subframe adapter (A) to the jack base with the bolts
(B) that camewith the jack. Tighten all bolts
securely~
c------
10x 1.25 mm
\A
EQS02BMDXSBO
54N·m
34. Raise the jack to vehicle height, then attach the

front subframe adapter to the front subframe using
the subframe stiffener mounting bolts (C) and bolt
holes.
35. Support the front subframe securely by raising the

transmission jack.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-35
Power Steering
36. Remove the mounting bolts (A) from the front 40. Lower the transmission jack slowly until the front
subframe front brackets (B). subframe has dropped about 40 mm (19/16 in.).
41. Remove the mounting bolts (A) from the left side of
the steering gearbox.
37. Loosen the special bolts (C) on the front subframe

front brackets so they are about 40.mm (19/16 in.) 42. Remove the gearbox stiffener bracket (A) from the
from the mounting surface. Do not loosen the left side of the front subframe.
special bolts more than necessary.
38. Remove the mounting bolts (A) from the front

subframe rear brackets (B).
B A
39. Loosen the special bolts (C) on the front subframe

rear brackets so they are about 40 mm (19/16 in.)
from the mounting surface. Do not loosen the
special bolts more than necessary.
17-36 BACK
43. Remove the mounting bolts from the right side of 45. Remove the steering gearbox through the
the steering gearbox, then remove the mounting wheelwell opening on the driver's side.
bracket (A) and cushion (8).
46. Remove the pinion shaft grommet 8 from the top of

B the valve housing.
44. Carefully move the steering gearbox (A) toward the B

driver's side until the pinion shaft clears the
wheelwell opening on the frame.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-37
Power Steering
47. Replace the pinion shaft grommet A if necessa'ry.
48. After removing the steering gearbox, make sure

that no power steering fluid gets on the gearbox
mount cushions, gearbox housing, surface of the
front subframe and stiffener. Wipe off any spilled
fluid at once.
17-38 BACK
Steering Gearbox Overhaul
Exploded View
FLARE NUTS
13N·m FLANGE BOLTS
11.3 kgf·m, 9.4Ibf·ft) 18N·m
11.8 kgf.m, 13Ibf·ft)
o
RETURN LINE JOINT

28N·m
GASKET
~ Replace.
(2.9kgf·m,
21Ibf·ft)
CIRCLIP
CYLINDER END SEAL
-=--
/
I' I
v@@~
7'' '· . / ""'NG
Replace.
@)o~
~\ ~ LOCKNUT
/ ~
/00
,\ RACK GUIDE SCREW
SPRING
DAMPER VALVE
RACK moP / 25N·m RACK GUIDE
(2.5kgf·m,
~~NUT
18Ibf·ft)
RACK BUSHING
~~ ·25N.1J'!
PISTON SEAL RING ---........ (2.5 kgf·m, 18 Ibf·ft)
Replace. END PLUG
59N·m
STEERING RACK
/@
CYLINDER END SEAL
Replace.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-39
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 3. Unbend the lock washer (A).

• Driver handle, 480 mm 070GD-0010100
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
• Driver head 07946~MJ00201 ..
• Piston seal ring guide 07LAG~SM40100
• Piston seal ringsiiing tool OiLAG-SM40200
• Pincer Oetiker 1098, or equivalent, commercially
available
NOTE: Re'er to the Exploded View as needed during the

Removal
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-31).

4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the steering
Disassembly rack (B) with a wrench, and unscrew both rack ends
(e) with a wrench. Be careful not to damage the
2. Remove the boot bands (A) and tie-rod clips (B). rack surface with the wrench.
Pull the boots away from the ends of the steering
gearbox.
5. Remove the lock washer (D) and stop washer (E).
17-40 BACK
6. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide 9. Remove the damper valves (C) and O"rings (D)
screw (8). from the steering gearbox.
NOTE: Do not loosen the A and 8 connectors.
7. Remove the spring (C) and the rack guide (D) from 10. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly
the gearbox housing. moving the steering rack back and forth.
8. Remove the cylinder lines from the steering 11. Remove the end plug (A) from the gearbox housing,
gearbox. then remove the nut (8) from the pinion shaft end.
NOTE: Use a second wrench when loosening the

cylinder lines to avoid damage to the fittings on the
steering gearbox. Do not loosen the A and 8
connectors.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-41
Power Steering
12. Loosen the 16 mm flare nut (A), and remove the 15. Turn the rack stop (A) counterclockwise until the
return line joint (8). end (8) of the circlip (C) sticks out from the hole (D)
in the cylinder housing. Then turn it clockwise to
remove the circlip.
c
13. Remove the two flange bolts, the valve body unit
(A), and gasket (8) from the steering gearbox.
. Check that the valve turns smoothly by turning the
pinion shaft. If any play or roughness is felt, replace
the valve body unit with a new part. Do not try to
disassemble the valve body unit.
16. Remove the rack stop (A), rack bushing (8), and
steering rack (C) from the steering gearbox.
14. Slide the steering rack all the way towards the
valve body end of the gearbox housing.
17-42 BACK
17. Remove the O-ring (A) and cylinder end seal (B) 19. Insert the driver handle and driver head, and
from the rack bushing (C). carefully place them on the cylinder end seal (A) as
shown. Make sure that the driver head is securely
positioned on the cylinder end seal.
~A
18. Carefully pry the piston seal ring (A) and O-ring (B)
off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the
inside ofthe seal ring groove and piston edges
when removing the seal ring.
07946-MJ00201
20. Install the bearing separator (B) on the gearbox

housing. Set the steering gearbox in a press so the
gearbox housing points upward, then push out the
cylinder end seal by pressing on the end ofthe
driver handle and driver head.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-43
Power Steering
21. Remove the steering gearbox from the press, and Reassembly
set a driver extension (A) on the driver handle.
Place the steering gearbox in a press, then remove 22. Coat the piston seal ring guide with power steering
the cylinder end seal (8) from the gearbox housing fluid, then slide it onto the rack, big end first.
by pressing on the end of the extension.
23. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal
Note these items when pressing the cylinder end ring (8) on the ring guide, then slide them down
seal: toward the big end of the tool.
• Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the
cylinder wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it Note these items during reassembly:
if necessary, when removing the cylinder end • Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install
seal. the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage
• Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do them. After installation, make sure you contract
not try to remove the seal by striking the tool; the seal ring using the sizing tool.
striking the tool would break the cylinder end • Replace the piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set.
seal, and the seal would remain in the gearbox.
.
Press
i
A
~~G~"'00
24. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull
the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on
top of the O-ring.
B
17-44 BACK
25. Coat the piston seal ring (A) and the inside of the 27. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack teeth and rack end
piston seal ring sizing tool with power steering fluid, edges, then coat the surface of the tape with power
then carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over steering fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is
the piston seal ring. wrapped carefully so that there is no stepped
portion.
g
07LAG-SM40200
26. Move the sizing tool back and forth several times to
make sure the piston seal ring fits snugly in the 28. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
piston. (A) with power steering fluid, then install it onto the
steering rack with its grooved side toward the
piston. When installing the cylinder end seal, be
careful not to damage the lip of the seal with the
edges or teeth of the steering rack.
29. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
remove any adhesive residue.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-45
Power Steering
30. Apply mUltipurpose grease to the steering rack 34. Wrap vinyl tape around the rack end edges, and
teeth, then insert the steering rack into the gearbox coat the surface of the tape with power steering
housing. Be careful not to damage the inner fluid. Make sure that the vinyl tape is wrapped
surface of the cylinder wall with the rack edges. carefully so that there is no stepped portion.
31. Insert an appropriate sized deep socket (A) onto the

steering rack as shown. 35. Coat the inside surface of the new cylinder end seal
(A) with power steering fluid, then press it into the
Press rack bushing (B) using the driver and attachment.
07749-0010000
07746-0010300
36. Coatthe new O-ring (C) with power steering fluid,

32. Install the cylinder end seal (B) into the bottom of and carefully fit it in the groove of the rack bushing.
the cylinder by pressing on the tool with a press.
Do not push on the tool with excessive force as it
may damage the cylinder end seal.
33. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack.
17-46 BACK
37. Install the rack bushing onto the steering rack with 40. Insert the end of the circlip (A) into the hole (8) of
the cylinder end seal grooved side toward the the rack stop (C). Turn the rack stop
piston. Push in the rack bushing with your finger. counterclockwise until the circlip is fully seated in
the rack stop.
38. Remove the vinyl tape from the steering rack, then
remove any adhesive residue.
39. Install the rack stop (A) onto the steering rack so the
hole (8) is aligned with the slot (C) on the cylinder
housing.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-47
Power Steering
41. Apply mUltipurpose grease to the bearings (A) in 42. Install the new self-locking nut (A) onto the pinion
the gearbox housing, and install the valve body shaft end, and tighten to the specified torque.
unit (8) and new gasket (e) by engaging the gears.
Note the valve body unit installation position B
59N·m
(direction of line connections). Then loosely install (6.0 kgf·m, 43 Ibf·ft)
the two flange bolts.
A
/ 25N·m
18N·m (2.5 kgf·m, 18Ibf·ft)
~ 11.8 kgf.m,
13Ibf·ft)
43. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque.
44. Apply new sealant (Loctite 565) all the way around
the threads on the end plug (8), install the end plug
onto the gearbox housing, and tighten it to the
specified torque.
45. After tightening, use a drift to stake (A) the end plug
shoulder against the gearbox housing.
17-48 BACK
46. Install the return line joint (A), and tighten the 49. Before installing the cylinder lines, coat the new
16 mm flare nut (B). . O-rings with power steering fluid, then install the
lines.
Note these items during reassembly:

• Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines.
The joints must be free of foreign material .
• Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare
nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to
NOTE: Use a second wrench when tightening the

cylinder lines to avoid damaging the fittings on the
steering gearbox.
28N·m 13N·m
(2.9 kgf·m, 21 Ibf·ft) (1.3 kgf·m, 9.4Ibf·ft)
47. Coat the new O-rings (A) with power steering fluid,
then install the damper valves (B).
B
25N·m
(2.5 kgf·m,
18lbf·ftl
50. Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding surface of

the rack guide (A), and install it onto the gearbox
25N·m housing.
(2.5kgf·m,
18Ibf·ft)
48. Install the damper valve to the steering gearbox.
51. Apply new sealant (Loctite 565) to the middle of the

threads ofthe rack guide screw (B), then install the
spring (C), rack guide screw, and locknut (D).
(cont'd)
BACK 17-49
Power· Steering
52. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-30). After 56. Apply mUltipurpose grease to the circumference of
adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by the rack end joint housing (A).
sliding it right and left.
53. Install the new stop washer (A) and lock washer (B).
Align the lock washer tabs (C) with the slots (D).
Install the rack end (E) while holding the lock
washer in place. Repeat this step for the other side
of the rack.
\ ~m
IPIN 08798-90131
57. Apply a light coat of silicone grease to the boot
grooves (B) on the rack ends.
58. Center the steering rack within its stroke.
59. Clean off any grease or contamination from the

boot installation surfaces (A) on the gearbox
housing. Install the boots (B) on the rack ends with
the tie-rod clips (C), and fit the boot end on the
E housing properly.
88N·m
o
54. Hold the flat surface sections of the steering rack
with a wrench, and tighten both rack ends. Be
careful notto damage the rack surface with the
wrench ..
55. Bend the lock washer (A) back against the flat spots
on the rack end joint housing.
o
60. After installing the boots, wipe the grease off the
threaded section (D) of the rack end.
17-50 BACK
61. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A)
with the holes (8) of the band.
62. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with a

commercially available Oetiker 1098 pincer or
equivalent (8).
63. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the
boots are not deformed or twisted.
BACK 17-51
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Installation
1. Before installing the steering gearbox, make sure 5. Careful'ly move the steering gearbox (A) toward the
that no power steering fluid is on the mating passenger's side until the pinion shaft clears the
surface of the steering gearbox and front subframe. wheelwell opening on the body.
To prevent the gearbox mounting bolts from
loosening after the installation, remove any power
steering fluid from the mount cushions and bolt
holes.
2. Apply vinyl tape to the splines on the pinion shaft

(A).
6. Continue moving the gearbox toward the

passenger's side until the steering gearbox is in
position.
3. Install the pinion shaft grommet B on the top of the

valve housing.
4. Slide the steering gearbox (A) between the front

subframe and body from the driver's side.
17-52 BACK
7. Install the gearbox stiffener bracket (A) on the left 9. Position thEl c!Jtout (A) on the.mounting:cushion (8)
side of the front subframe, and tighten the bolts as shown, and install it on the right side of the
and nut to the specified torque. steering gearbox.
10x 1.25mm
38 N·m (3.9 kgf·m, 28 Ibf·ft)
"Y
"FRONT
A
10x 1.25 mm
38N·m
(3.9kgf·m,
28Ibf·ft)
c
8. Loosely install the new mounting bolts (A) on the
B
left side of the steering gearbox.
10. Install the gearbox mounting bracket (e) over the
mounting cushion, and loosely install the mounting
bolts.
A 11. Tighten the mounting bolts on the both sides of the

12x 1.25 mm steering gearbox to specified torque alternately in
50N·m· two or more steps.
(5.1 kgf·m,
37Ibf·ft)
Replace.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-53
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Installation (cont'd)
12. Carefully raise the front subframe with the 15. Install the front subframe rear brackets (A) with
subframe adapter and the transmission jack or the mounting bolts (8) and the new special bolts (C),
powertrain lift until the subfrarl1e is it position. and tighten to the specified torque.
A
13. Align all reference marks (A) on the front subframe
(8) with the body.
C B
14x1.5mm 12 x 1.25 mm
103N·m 117 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 75.9Ibf·ft) (11.9 kgf·m, 86.1Ibf·ft)
Replace.
14. Install the front subframe front brackets (A) with 16. Lower the transmission jack supporting the front
mounting bolts (8) and the new special bolts (C), subframe.
and tighten to the specified torque.
17. Install the ground cable bolt (A) to the transmission.
A
A
38N·m
(3.9kgf·m,
28lbf·ft)
B C
12 x 1.25 mm 14x1.5mm
74N·m 103N·m
(7.5 kgf·m, (10.5 kgf·m,
54lbf·ft) 75.9 Ibf.ft)
Replace.
17-54 BACK
18. Install the base bracket (A) with new mounting 20. Install the rear mount stop (A) with new mounting
bolts (8) and mounting bolts (C), and tighten to the nuts (8), and tighten to the specified torque.
specified torque.
B
12x 1.25mm
A 74N·m
17.5 kgf·m,
54lbf·ftl
Replace.
B C
10x 1.25mm 10x 1.25mm
42N·m 42N·m 21. Install the inlet line clamp bolts (A), and tighten to
14.3 kgf·m, 14.3 kgf·m, the specified torque.
31lbf·ftl 31lbf·ftl
Replace.
19. Install the rear engine mount (A) with new

mounting bolts (8), and tighten to the specified
torque.
B
10x 1.25mm
54N·m
15.5 kgf·m,
40lbf·ftl
Replace.
B
10 x 1.25 mm
38N·m
13.9 kgf·m,
28lbf·ftl
Replace.
A
22. Install exhaust pipe 8 (see page 9-9).
23. Install the propeller shaft and propeller shaft

protectors (see page 16-39).
(cont'd)
BACK 17-55
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Installation (cont'd)
24. Install the front subframe stiffener plate (A) with 28. Wipe off any grease contamination from the ball·
new mounting bolts (B), and tighten to the specified joint tapered section and threads. Reconnect the
torque. tie-rod ends (A) to the steering knuckles. Install the
12 mm nut (B) and tighten it.
B A
lOx 1.25 mm
54N·m
(5.5 kgf·m. 40 Ibf·tt)
Replace.
25. Install the front undercover (see page 20-219) and
the front splash shield (see page 20-218).
26. Connect the stabilizer links (A) to the lower arm

(see page 18-20). 29. Install the new cotter pin (C) and bend it as shown.
30. Remove the engine support hanger. the hanger

balance bar. and the hanger adapter set.
31. Connect the return hose (A) securely. and tighten

the adjustable hose clamp (B) (see page 17-14).
27. Connectthe lower arm ball joints (see page 18-17). B

D
16xl.5mm
42N·m
(4.3 kgf·m. 31 Ibf·tt) A
32. Connect the inlet line (C). and tighten the 16 mm

flare nut (D) to the specified torque.
17-56 BACK
33. Center the steering rack within its stroke. 39. Install the steering joint cover (A).
34. Insert the upper end of the steering joint onto the
steering shaft (A) (line up the bolt hole (8) with the
flat portion (C) on the shaft), and loosely install the
upper joint bolt (D).
o A
8x1.2Smm
c
40. Install the front wheel, then set the wheels in the
straight ahead position.
41. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-24).
42. Reconnect the negative battery cable to the battery,

and do these tasks:
o Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator

should come on for about 6 seconds and then go
off.
35. Slip the lower end of the steering joint onto the o Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and
pinion shaft taking care to align the gap (E) within the navigation system (if equipped).
the angle. o Make sure the horn and turn signal switches
work properly.
36. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the o Make sure the steering wheel switches work
groove (8) around the pinion shaft then loosely properly.
install the joint bolt (C). o Make sure the steering wheel is centered.
o Do the steering column position memorization
(see page 17-28).
43. Fill the system with power steering fluid, and bleed
C airfrom the system (see page 17-13).
8x1.2Smm
28N·m
(2.9kgf·m, 44. After installation, do these checks.
21Ibf·ft)
o Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the
steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several times to
warm up the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks
(see page 17-12).
o Do the front toe inspection (see page 18-5).
A o Check the steering wheel spoke angle. If steering
spoke angles to the right and left are not equal
37. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that the (steering wheel and rack are not centered),
steering joint is fully seated, then tighten the lower correct the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft
joint bolt to the specified torque. serrations, then adjust the front toe by turning
the tie-rod ends, if necessary.
38. Tighten the upper joint bolt (D) to the specified
torque.
BACK 17-57
Power Steering
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Special Tools Required 6. Install a new boot (A) using the front hub dis/
Front hub dis/assembly tool 07965-SA50500 assembly tool. The boot must not have a gap at the
boot installation sections (8). After installing the
1. Disconnect the tie~rod ball joint from the knuckle boot, checkthe ball pin tapered section for grease
(see step 18 on page 17-33). contamination, and wipe it if necessary.
2. Remove the tie-rod end from the rack end.
3. Remove the boot from the tie-rod end, and wipe the
old grease off the ball pin.
4. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) with fresh
mUltipurpose grease.
7. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end.
8. Connect the tie-rod ball joint to the knuckle (see


5. Pack the interior of a new boot (8) and lip (C) with
fresh mUltipurpose grease.
Note these items when installing new grease:

• Keep grease off the boot mounting area (D) and
the tapered section (E) ofthe ball pin .
• Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials
to enter the boot.
17-58 BACK
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-31).
2. Position the 34 mm socket wrench (A) on the flange

part of the gearbox housing with a washer (8), a
10 x 105 mm flange bolt (C) and a 10 mm nut (D) as
shown.
3. Hold the flange bolt with a wrench, and tighten the

nut with a wrench. Remove the gearbox mount
cushion (E).
4. Apply a mild soap and water solution to the new

gearbox mount cushion surface (A), then place it on
the gearbox mounting cushion hole.
5. Position the 34 mm socket wrench on the flange

part of the gearbox housing with a washer, a flange
bolt, and a nut as shown.
6. Install the gearbox mount cushion by tightening the

nut until the mount cushion edges (8) contact the
gearbox flange surface.
7. Install the steering gearbox (see page 17-52).
BACK 17-59
BACK
Suspension.
Front and Rear Suspension

Special Tools ................................................................. 18-2
Wheel Alignment .......................................................... 18-5
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection ............................ 18-8
Wheel Runout Inspection ............................................ 18-9
Wheel Bolt Replacement ............................................. 18-10
Ball Joint Removal ....................................................... 18-11
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement .................... 18-12
Ball Joint Boot Replacement ....................................... 18-16
Lower Arm Removal/Installation ................................ 18-17
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation ........................... 18-20
Stabilizer Bar Replacement ......................................... 18-20
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation .................. 18-21
Damper/Spring Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly .................................... 18-24
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement ....................
Ball Joint Boot Replacement .......................................
18-29
18-34
\1
Upper Arm Removal/Installation ................................ 18-34
Lower Arm A Removal/Installation ............................. 18-36
Lower Arm B Removal/Installation ............................. 18-37
Trailing Arm Removal/Installation .............................. 18-39
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation ........................... 18-40
Stabilizer Bar Replacement ......................................... 18-41
Damper Replacement .................................................. 18-42
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation ................... 18-45
Active Damper System ........ ....... ........ ............. 18-49
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ...... 18-123

Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description aty

Q) 07 GAF-SD40200 Hub Dis/Assembly Tool 1
® 07GAG-SD40700 Ball Joint Boot Clip Guide 1
® 07 MAC-SLOA102 Ball Joint Remover, 32 mm 1
CD 07MAC-SLOA202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
® 071AF-S3VAOOO Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 1
Q) ®,CD
18-2 BACK
Front Suspension
DAMPER/SPRING
Removal, page 18-21
Disassem bly/I nspectio n/
KNUCKLE/
HUB BEARING UNIT
STABILIZER BAR
STABILIZER LINK
page 18-20
LOWER ARM
WHEEL BOLT
The illustration shows without active damper system.
(cant'd)
BACK
18-3
Rear Suspension
DAMPER
Removal, page 18-42
Insepction, page 18-43
SPRING I
BUMP STOP
Removal, page 18-46
UPPER ARM
page 18-34
STABILIZER BAR
STABILIZER LINK
page 18-40
LOWERARMB
page 18-37
~
LOWER ARM A
page 18-36
TRAILING ARM
Removal/Installation, KNUCKLEI
page 18-39 HUB BEARING UNIT
The illustration shows without active damper system.
18-4 BACK
Wheel Alignment
The suspension can be adjusted for front camber, front Caster Inspection
toe, and rear toe. However, each ofthese adjustments
are related to each other. For example, when" you adjust Use commercially available computerized four wheel
camber, the toe will change. Therefore, you must adjust alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
the front wheel alignment whenever you adjust camber (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
or toe. equipment manufacturer's instructions.
Pre-Alignment Checks Check the caster angle.
For proper inspection and adjustment ofthe wheel Caster angle: 4 0 12' ±35 '
alignment, do these checks:
• If the measurement is within specifications, measure
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect the camber angle.
measurement. • If the measurement is not within specifications, check
for bent or damaged suspension components.
2. Make sure the suspension is not modified.
3. Check the tire size and pressure.
Tire size:
Front/Rear: P255/55R18104H
Tire pressure:
Front/Rear: 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm 2, 32 psi), cold
4. Check the runout ofthe wheels and tires (see page

18-9).
5. Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a tire with

your hands, and move it up and down and right and
left to check for wobbling.)
6. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times to

settle the suspension.
(cont'd)
BACK
18-5
Wheel Alignment (cont'd)
Camber Inspection Front Camber Adjustment

Use commercially avai.lable computerized four wheel 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment safety stands in the proper locations (see page '-7).
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Remove the front wheels.
Check the camber angle. 3. Loosen the damper pinch bolts (A) and bolts, and
adjust the camber angle by moving the bottom of
Camber angle: the damper within the range of the damper pinch
Front: -0 °30 '±1 ° bolt free play.
Rear: -0 °30' ±45'
A
• If the measurement for the front camber is outside
8+ 18x1.5mm
211 N·m
the specification, go to front camber adjustment. 121.5 kgf·m,
156Ibf·ft)
• If the measurement for the rear camber is outside the
specification, check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
4. Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified

torque.
5. Reinstall the front wheels. Lower the front of the

vehicle to the ground, and bounce the front of the
vehicle up and down several times to stabilize the
suspension.
6. Measure the camber angle .
• Ifthe measurement is within specification,

measure the toe-in .
• Ifthe measurement is not within specification,
check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
18-6 BACK
Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment
Use commercially available computerized four wheel Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions. equipment manufacturer's instructions.
1. Center the steering wheel spokes, and install a 1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect
steering wheel holder tool. measurement.
2. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight 2. Check the toe.
ahead.
Rear toe-in: 2±2 mm (O.08±O.08 in.)
Front toe-in: O±2 mm (O±O.08 in.)
• If adjustment is required, go to step 3.
• If adjustment is required, go to step 3. • If no adjustment is required, remove the
• If no adjustment is required, go to rear toe alignment equipment.
inspection/adjustment.
3. Hold the adjusting bolt (A) on the trailing arm (B),
3. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts (A) while holding the and remove the self-locking nut (C).
flat surface sections (B) of the tie-rod end with a
wrench, and turn both tie-rods (C) until the front toe
is within specifications.
A
C
A 14x1.5mm
B 14x 1.5 mm 132 N·m (13.5 kgf·m, 97.6Ibf·ft)
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·tt) Replace.
4. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts. 4. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and
Reposition the rack-end boot if it is twisted or lightly tighten it.
displaced.
NOTE:
5. Go to rear toe inspection/adjustment. • Always use a new self-locking nut whenever it
has been loosened.
• Reassemble the adjusting bolt and camplate with
the eccentric facing up.
5. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt

until the toe is correct.
6. Tighten the new self-locking nut while holding the

adjusting bolt.
(cont'd)
BACK
18-7
Wheel Alignment (cont'd) Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection
Turning Angle Inspection 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands
in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment 2. Remove the wheels.
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions. 3. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts.
Tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the
1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the brake disc securely against the hub.
brake, and measure the turning angle of both.
wheels. Front
Turning angle:
Inward wheel: 38 012' ±2 0
Outward wheel: 31 044' (reference)
\~~~~w~ 14x 1.5 mm

127 N·m
(13.0kgf·m, 94.0 Ibf·ft)
Rear
2. If the turning angle is not within the specifications,

check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
14x 1.5 mm
127 N·m
(13.0 kgf·m, 94.0 Ibf·ft)
4. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against

the hub flange.
Front/Rear:
Standard: 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
5. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc

inward and outward.
6. If the bearing end play measurement is more than

the standard, replace the wheel bearing.
18-8 BACK
Wheel Runout Inspection
NOTE: When measuring the front wheel runout, turn 5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification,
the back side of the wheel slowly by hand. check the wheel bearing end play (see page 18-8),
and make sure the mating surfaces on the brake
1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands disc and the inside ofthe wheel are clean.
in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
6. If the bearing end play is within the specification
2. Check for bent or deformed wheels. but the wheel runout is more than the service limit,
replace the wheel.
3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure axial
runout by turning the wheel.
Front and rear wheel axial runout:

Standard: 0-0.3 mm (0-0.01 in.)
Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown, and

measure the radial runout.
Front and rear wheel radial runout:

Standard: 0-0.3 mm (0-0.01 in.)
BACK
18-9
Wheel Bolt Replacement
INOTICE I 3. Insert the new wheel bolt into the hubwhile

• Do not use a hammer or.air or electric impact aligning the splined surfaces on the hub hole with .
tools to remove and install the wheel bolts . the wheel bolt.
• Be careful notto damage the threads ofthe
wheel bolts. NOTE:
• Degrease all around the wheel bolt and the
1. Remove the front or rear hub bearing unit: front threaded section of the nut.
(see page 18-13), rear (see page 18-30). • Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in
relation to the hub disc surface.
2. Separate the wheel bolt (A) from the hub (B) using
a hydraulic press. Support the hub with hydraulic 4. Install the wheel bolt using a hydraulic press until
press attachments (C) or equivalent tools. the wheel bolt shoulder is fully seated.
NOTE: Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean 5. Install the front or rear hub bearing unit: front
the mating surface on the bolt and the hub. (see page 18-13), rear (see page 18-30).
Press NOTE: If you cannot tighten the wheel nut to the

specified torque value when installing the wheel,
replace the hub or hub bearing unit as an assembly.
1,8-10 BACK
Ball Joint Removal
Special Tools Required 3. Loosen the pressure bolt (A), and install the ball
• Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAe·SLOA102 joint remover as shown. Insert the jaws carefully,
• Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAe·SLOA202 making sure not to damage the ball joint boot.
Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the adjusting bolt
INOTICE I (B).
Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball
joint. Do not strike the housing or any other part of NOTE: Fasten the safety chain (e) securely to a
the ball joint connection to disconnect it. suspension arm or the subframe (D). Do not fasten
it to a brake line or wire harness.
07MAC·SLOA102 or 07MAC·SL0A202
1. Install a hex nut (A) onto the threads oftheball joint

(B). Make sure the nut is flush with the ball joint pin B
end to prevent damage to the thread end of the ball
joint pin.
I
4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the

head of the adjusting bolt is in the position shown
to allow the jaw (E) to pivot.
5. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the

2. Apply grease to the ball joint remover on the areas ball joint pin pops loose from the ball joint pin hole.
shown (A). This will ease installation of the tool and If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to
prevent damage to the pressure bolt, (B) threads. loosen the ball joint pin.
NOTE: Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on

the pressure bolt.
6. Remove the ball joint remover, then remove the

nutfrom the end ofthe ball joint pin, and pull the
ball joint out of the ball joint pin hole. Inspect the
ball joint boot, and replace it if damaged.
07MAC-SLOA102 or
07MAC-SL0A202
BACK 18-11
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement
Exploded View
12x1.25mm
98.1 N·m '
(10.0 kgf·m, 72.3Ibf·ft) DAMPER PINCHBOLT
Replace.
18x1'.5mm
211 N·m
(21.5 kgf·m, 156Ibf·ft)
KNUCKLE
Check for deformation and
damage.
6x1.0mm
9.8N.m
(1.0 kgf·m,
FLANGE NUT 7.2Ibf·ft)
Replace;
SPINDLE UNIT
Replace.
26x1.5mm
328N·m
(33.5 kgf·m. 242 Ibf·ft)
"71
Apply a smali amount of engine oil
to the seating surface of the nut.
18-12 BACK
•
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut
• Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07 MAe-s LOA 102 (B) .
• Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAe-SLOA202
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement

B
1. Raise the front ofthe vehicle, and support it with 26X1.5mm
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). 328N·m
(33.5 kgf·m,
/ .
. 242 Ibf·tt)
2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the front wheel. Replace.
6. Remove the flat screws (A).
A
/
14x1.5mm
127 N·m
(13.0 kgf.m, 94.0 Ibf·tt)
3. Remove the brake hose (A).
A
/Sx1.25mm
,- 22N·m
,C,>II\TI\---<llII!'JJI (2.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf.tt)
A------
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·tt)
7. Release the brake disc (B) from the hub.
B
NOTE: If the brake disc is stuck to the hub. Screw
14x 1.5mm two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (e) into the brake disc to
137 N·m push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 90
(14.0 kgf.m, 101 Ibf·tt)
degrees to prevent the brake disc from binding.
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts

(B), and remove the caliper assembly (e) from the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper
assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire
to hang the caliper assembly from the
undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose
excessively.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-13
Fronf Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement (cont'd)
8. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the splash 10. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of
guard (B) from the knuckle. removal, and note these items:
o Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified

torque values.
o Use a new spindle nut, apply a small amount of
engine oil to the seating surface of the nut. After
tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
shoulder against the driveshaft.
o Before installing the brake disc, clean the
matching surfaces of the hub bearing unit and
the inside ofthe brake disc.
o Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surface of the brake disc and the inside of the
12x1.25mm wheel.
98.1 N·m o Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
(10.0 kgf·m, 72.3 Ibf·ft) . necessary (see page 18-5).
9. Check the hub bearing unit for damage and cracks.
18-14 BACK
Knuckle Replacement 5. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the lower arm ball
joint pin (8), then remove the nut (C).
1. Remove the hub bearing unit.
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin after
2. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (8). tightening new castle nut.
Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector.
B
6x1.0mm A
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ttl
A
Ie
@;;i;;=/ 103-113
14 x2.0 mm
N·m
110.5-11.5 kgf·m,
75.9-83.2 Ibf·ttl
Replace.
07MAC-SLOA102
3. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod ball joint, o
then remove the nut (8). 071AF-S3VAOOO
NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin 6. Install the ball joint thread protector (D).
after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown.
7. Disconnect the lower arm ball joint from the
knuckle using the ball joint remover (see page
18-11).
B
12x1.25mm 8. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and flange nuts
54N·m (8) from the damper, then remove the knuckle (C).
15.5 kgf·m,
40lbf·ttl
NOTE: During installation, install new damper
pinch bolts and new flange nuts.
A
18x 1.5 mm
211 N·m
121.5 kgf·m,
1561bf·ttl
Replace.
07MAC-SL0A202
4. Disconnect the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle

using the ball joint remover (see page 18-11).
(cont'd)
BACK 18-15
Front :Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Ball Joint Boot Replacement

Replacement (cont'd)
Hub Dis/Assembly Tool 07GAF-SD40200
9. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal,
and note these items: 1. Remove the lower arm (see page 18-17).
o Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when 2. Remove the boot.
installing the knuckle.
o Before connecting the lower ball joint to the 3. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with
knuckle, degrease the threaded section and grease. Keep the grease off of the boot-to-Iower
tapered portion ofthe ball joint pin, thelbwer arm mating surfaces (B).
arm connecting hole, the threaded section and
rfiating surface ofthe castle nut.
o First install all the components and lightly tighten
the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to
load it with the vehicle's weight before fully
tightening to the specified torque values.
torque values. B
o Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
align the.slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
align the castle nut by loosening it.
o Before installing the brake.disc, clean the mating
surface of the front hub and the inside of the
brake disc.
o Before installing the wheel, clean the mating 4. Wipe the grease off the tapered portion of the pin
surface ofthe brake disc and the inside ofthe (C), and pack fresh grease into the base (D). Do not
wheel. let dirt or other foreign materials get into the boot.
o Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
necessary (see page 18-5). 5, Install the boot on the ball joint, then squeeze it
gently to force out any air.
6. Pressthe boot with the hub dis/assembly tool until

the. bottom seats on the lower arm (A) all the way
around.
Press
~
07GAF-SD40200
7. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the

exposed portion of the ball joint pin.
8. Install the lower arm (see page 18-17),
18-16 BACK
Lower Arm Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower arm ball
• Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC~SLOA102 joint, then remove the nut (B) .
• Ball joint thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VAOOO
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin after
Removal/Installation tightening new castle nut.
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support itwith

safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
2. Remove the front wheel.
3. With active damper system: Remove the

suspension stroke sensor (A) from the lower arm
(B). 14x2.0mm
103-113 N·m
(10.5-11.5 kgf.m,
75.9-83.2 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
B
C
071AF-S3VAOOO
5. Install the ball joint thread protector (C).
6. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the knuckle

using the ball joint remover (see page 18-11), then
remove the lower ball joint.
7. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt and the 10

6x1.0mm mm flange bolt, then remove the lower arm (A)
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ttl from the front subframe.
NOTE: Use the new mounting bolts during

reassembly.
16x1.5mm
162N·m
(16.5 kgf·m,
119Ibf·ft)
Replace. 14x1.5mm
93N·m
(9.5kgf.m,
69Ibf·ft)
Replace.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-17
Front Suspension
lower Arm Removal/Installation (cont'd)
8. Remove the lower arm stops (A). 9. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items:
NOTE: During installation, align the slot (B) on the
lower arm stop with the lug portion (C) on the lower • Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
arm bushing. . installing the knuckle.
• Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
B c torque values.
• Before connecting the lower ball joint to the
knuckle, degrease the threaded section and
tapered portion ofthe ball joint pin, the knuckle
connecting hole, the threaded section, and
mating surface of the castle nut.
• First install allthe components, and lightly
tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the
suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
before fully tightening to the specified torque
values.
• Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
• Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surface of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
• Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
10. With active damper system/Left side: Do the

headlight initial position learning procedure
(see page 22-231).
18-18 BACK
Bushing Replacement
1. Remove the self-locking nut (A), then remove the
bushing with bracket (B).
A
16x1.5mm
162N·m
(16.5 kgf·m, 1191bf·ftl
Replace.
2. Align the angle of the lower arm (A) and the tab
portion (B) ofthe bushing.
3. Install a new self-locking nut, then tighten the

flange nut to the specified torque value.
BACK 18~19
Front Suspension
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation Stabilizer Bar Replacement
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support,it with
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
2. Remove the front wheel. 2. Remove the front wheels.
3. Remove the flange nuts (A) while holding the 3. Disconnect both stabilizer links from the stabilizer
respective joint pin (B) with a hex wrench (C), then bar (see page 18-20).
remove the stabilizer link (D).
4. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing
F holders (B), then remove the bushings (C) and the
stabilizer bar (D) from the front subframe (E) .
......-----~O x 1.25 mm
39N·m
~O kgf·m, 29lbf·ftl
E
12x 1.25 mm
78N·m l--ii!~~ B
(8.0kgf·m,
581bf·ftl
E
c A
12x1.25mm
78N·m
4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (E) and

the damper (F) with the joint pins set at the center 5. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of
oftheir range of movement. removal, and note these items:
NOTE: The stabilizer link has a paint mark (G). Align • Note the right and left direction ofthe stabilizer
the stabilizer link with the paint mark facing inward. bar.
• Align the paint marks (F) on the stabilizer bar
5. Install the flange nuts, and lightly tighten them. with the sides of the bushings.
• Note the fore/aft direction ofthe bushing.
6. Clean the mating surface ofthe brake disc and the • Refer to the stabilizer link removal/installation to
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel. connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page
18-20).
7. Tighten the flange nuts to the specified torque • Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and
values while holding the respective joint pin with a the inside of the wheel, then install the front
hex wrench. wheel.
8. Test-drive the vehicle. necessary (see page 18-5).
18-20 BACK
DamperISpring Removal and Installation
NOTE: Except where called out, the illustrations show 5. Remove theflange nut (A), while holding the joint
without active damper system. pin (B) with a hex wrench (e), and disconnect the
stabilizer link (D) from the damper.
Removal
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with

3. With active damper system: Disconnect the damper

coil connector (A), and remove the flange bolt (B),
and the harness clip (e).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage or contaminate the

damper coil connector.
c A
12 x 1.25 mm
c
6. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and flange nuts
(B) from the damper..
4. Remove the wheel sensor harness (A) and the

brake hose (B) from the damper (e). Do not
disconnect the wheel sensor connector.
8x 1.25 mm
(cont'd)
BACK
18-21
Front Suspension
DamperISpring Removal and Installation (co nt'd)
7. Remove the cover (A) and the service caps (B). Installation
1. Install the damper assembly (A) on to the frame.

Note the direction of the damper mounting base as
shown.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body.
B
10x1.25mm
59N·m
16.0kgf·m,
43lbf·ftl
Replace.
8. Remove the flange nuts (C) from the top of the

damper.
9. Remove the damper assembly (0).
NOTE: FRONT FRONT

• The damper springs are different, left and right.
Mark the springs Land R before you continue . t t
• Be careful not to damage the body.
Without active With active

damper system damper system
2. Loosely install the new flange nuts (B) to the top of

the damper.
NOTE: Install the cover (C) and the service caps (0)
after tightening the flange nuts to the specified
torque value.
18-22 BACK
3. Loosely install new damper pinch bolts (A) and new 9. Install the wheel sensor harness (A) and the brake
flange nuts (B) to the damper (C). hose (B) to the damper (C).
.01.
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
12.2kgf·m, c
16lbf·ft)
\ A
18x 1.5 mm 6x1.0mm
211 N·m 9.8N·m
(21.5 kgf·m, 11.0kgf·m,
1561bf·ft) 7.2Ibf.ft)
Replace.
4. Connect the stabilizer link (A) to the damper (B),

and loosely install new flange nut (C), while holding 10. With active damper system: Connect the damper
the joint pin (D) with the hex wrench (E). coil connector (A), and install the flange bolt (B),
and the harness clip (C).
B
damper coil connecter.
c
./
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
11.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ib~·ft)
C
12x 1.25 mm
E 78N·m
(8.0 kgf·m,
o 581bf·ft)
A
5. Raise the front suspension with a floor jack to load 11. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the
the suspension with the vehicle's weight. inside of the wheel, then install the rear wheel.
6. Tighten the damper pinch bolts and the flange nuts 12. With active damper system/Left side: Start the
to the specified torque value. engine, then make sure there are no active damper
systemDTCs with the HDS (see page 18-53).
7. Tighten the flange nuts on top of the damper to the
specified torque value. 13. With active damper system/Left side: Do the
DAMPER FORCE OPERATION in the ACTIVE
8. Install the cover and the service caps. DAMPER SYSTEM INSPECTION MENU with the
HDS, then make sure the all four damper units
function normally.

BACK
18-23
,', , ,":)
Fronf,Suspension
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
Exploded View-Without active damper system

, I
DAMPER MOUN,TIN"G, WASHER ~ SELF-LOCKING NUT

12x1.25mm
~ " ,
,
, @\
~
76N·m
Replace.
DAMPER MOUNTING BASE 0
~~ BUMP STop SLEEVE
~
6>'
BUMP STOP
0' ," / Check for weakness and damage.
~
~ rough~ess.
DAMPER MOUNTING BEARING
o
' / Check for any play or
/UPPER .... NGSEAT
~6
. '
~
UPPER SPRING MOUNTING CUSHION
Check for deterioration
and damage.
DAMPER SPRING
Check for weakened
compression and damage.
DAMPER UNIT '
' Check for oil leaks, gas leaks,
, and smooth operation.
/ ,
LOWER SPRING SEAT

Check for deterioration and damage.
18-24
BACK
Exploded View-With active damper system
DAMPER MOUNTING WASI1ER ..SELF-LOCKING NUT
~
~
..
14X1.25mm
71N·m·
.
~ . . Replace. .
~I::.==~ DUST COVER END
~... .. DAMPER MOUNTING BEARING

~ Check for any play or roughness.
e
~ UPPER SPRING SEAT
UPPER SP.,NG MOUNTING CUSHION

. ~ Check for deterioration and damage.
~
DUST COVER SLEEVE
DAMPER SPRING
Check for weakened
compression and damage.
. DAMPER UNIT
. / Check for oil leaks, gas leaks,
/ and smooth operation.
LOWER SPRING SEAT

Check for deterioration and damage.
(cont'd)
BACK 18.. 25
;F~Orit."Suspension
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
NOTE: Inspection
• When compressing the damper spring, use a
commercially available strut spring compressor 1. Reassemble all parts, except for the upper spring
(Bra nick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent) mounting cushion, the bump stop, and the damper
according to the manufacturer's instructions. spring .
• Except where called out, the illustrations shown are
without active damper system. 2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and
check for smooth operation through a full stroke,
Disassembly both compression and extension. The damper
should extend smoothly and constantly when
1. Compress the damper spring, then remove the nut compression is released. If it does not, the gas is
(A) while holding the damper shaft with a hex leaking and the damper should be replaced.
wrench or TORX wrench (B). Do not compress the
damper spring more than necessary to remove the
nut.
B
A
Without active
damper system
12x1.25mm
With active
damper system
14x1.5mm
3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding

during these tests.
2. Release the pressure from the strut spring

compressor, then disassemble the damper as
shown inthe Exploded View.
BACK
18-26
Reassembly 2. Install the tab (A) on the lower spring cushion (8) in
the locating hole (C) on the damper unit (0).
1. Install the damper spring (A) on the upper spring
mounting cushion (8), then align the upper end (C) Without active damper system
of the damper spring with the cushion stop (0) or
the cushion end (E).
Without active damper system
With active damper system
A
D~
c
3. Align the lower end (E) of the spring with the

stepped part (F) of the lower spring seat.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-27
Front· Suspension
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
4. Align the angle ofthe stud bolt (A) on the damper 5. Compress the damper spring.
mounting base (B) and the damper bracket (e) as
shown. 6. Install all the parts except the damper mounting
washer and self-locking nut onto the damper unit
Without active damper system (A) by referring to the Exploded View.
Left: Right:

Left: Right:
FRONT FRONT
7. Install the damper mounting washer (A) and a new

self-locking nut (B).
D
B
Without active
damper system
12x 1.25mm
A 76N·m
17.7 kgf.m,
B 56Ibf·ft)
Replace.
With active
damper system
14x1.5mm
71 N·m
17.2kgf·m,
52Ibf·ft)
Replace.
8. Hold the damper shaft (C) using a hex wrench or

TORX wrench (O), and tighten the new self-locking
nut to the specified torque value.
18-28 BACK
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement

Exploded View
12x1.25mm
98.1 N·m
(10.0 kgf.m, 72.3 Ibf·ftl
PARKING BRAKE SHOE

ASSEMBLY
BRAKE DISC/DRUM
Check for wear and rust.
SPINDLE NUT
Replace.
24x1.5mm
245N·m
(25.0 kgf·m, 181 Ibf.ftl
~
Apply a small amount of
engine oil to the seating surface
ofthe nut.
(cont'd)
BACK
18-29
Rear ,Suspension
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the two washers (A).

Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement

1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and front wheel.
5. Raise the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut (B).
B
24x 1.5mm
245N·m
(25.0 kgf·m,
181Ibf·ft)
Replace.
14x1.5mm
127N·m
3. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts

(A), and remove the caliper assembly (B) from the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper
assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire A
to hang the caliper assembly from the
undercarriage. Do not twistthe brake hose
excessively.
A
12x 1.25mm
88N·m
(9.0kgf.m,
65lbf·ft)
BACK
18-30
6. Remove the two 6 x 1.0 mm screws (A) attaching 9. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of
the disc/drum to the hub bearing unit. Release the removal, and note these items:
parking brake, and remove the brake disc/drum
from the hub bearing unit. • Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.
NOTE: • Use a new spindle nut during reassembly.
• It may be necessary to back-off the parking brake • Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
adjuster nut (B) to remove the disc/drum from amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the
the hub bearing unit (see step 5 on page 19-8). nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the
• If the brake disc/drum has clung to the h~b spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
bearing unit. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (C) • Before installing the brake disc/drum, clean the
into the brake disc/drum to push it away from the mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the
hub bearing unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a inside of the brake disc/drum.
time to prevent cocking the brake disc/drum. • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
• After installation, check the parking brake, and surface of the brake disc/drum and the inside of
adjust it necessary (see page 19-7). the wheel.
A
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0kgf·m,
7.2Ibf.ft)
7. Remove the hub bearing unit (A).
12x1.25mm
98.1 N·m
8. Check the hub bearing unit for damage and cracks.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-31
Rear Suspension
Knuckle Replacement 5. Remove the lock pin (A) from the upper arm ball
joint, and loosen the nut (B).
1. Remove the hub bearing unit.
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin and
2. Remove the brake hose bracket mounting bolts (A) nut after tightening the nut as shown.
from the knuckle.
Ii:
12x1.25mm
·98.1 N·m
(10.0 kgf.m,
·72.3 Ibf·ft)
A
8x1.25mm
22N·m B
(2.2kgf·m, 12x1.2Smm
16Ibf·ft) 59-69N·m
(6.0-7.0 kgf·m,
43-51Ibf·ft)
3. Remove the flange nuts (B), then remove the
backing plate (C). 6. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the
knuckle using the ball joint remover (see page
4. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (B). 18-11).
Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector.
7. Remove the self-locking nut (B), washer, and flange
bolt (C), then remove the lower arm A.
NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut and the new

flange bolt, during reassembly.
C
14x1.5mm
93N·m
Replace.
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
B \1 ~ r-'7T=':;::S)#l~2~
A
B
14x1.5mm
123N·m
(12.5 kgf·m, 90.4Ibf·ft)
Replace.
18-32 BACK
8. Remove the flange nuts (A), and separate the 10. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal,
knuckle from the trailing arm (B). and note these items:
NOTE: Use new flange nuts during reassembly. o Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
connecting the upper arm to the knuckle.
A o Before connecting the ball joint to the knuckle,
12x1.25 mm
64.N·m 16.5kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ft) degrease the threaded section and tapered
Replace. portion of the ball joint pin, the connecting hole,
~ and the threaded section and mating surface of

the castle nut.
cC
align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not
the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to
load it with the vehicle's weight before fully
tightening to the specified torque values.
torque values.
o Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surface on the brake disc and the inside ofthe
wheel.
o Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
9. Place a floor jack under lower arm B, and remove necessary (see pag,e 18-5).
the flange bolt(A), then remove the knuckle (C);
NOTE: Use the new flange bolt during reassembly.
A
14x1.5mm
113 N·m
111.5 kgf·m, 83.2Ibf·ft)
Replace.
BACK 18-33
Rear Suspension
Ball Joint Boot Replacement Upper Arm Removal/Installation

Ball joint boot clip guide 07GAG-SD40700 Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SLOA102
1. Remove the boot clip and the boot. 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
2. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with
grease. Keep the grease off of the boot-to-knuckle 2. Remove the rear wheel.
mating surfaces (B).
3. Position a floor jack under the lower arm B. Raise
the floor jack until the suspension begins to
compress.
3. Wipe the grease off the tapered portion of the pin

(C), and pack fresh grease into the base (D). Do not 4. With active damper system: Remove the
let dirt or other foreign materials get into the boot. suspension stroke sensor from the upper arm (B)
(see page 22-229).
4. Install the boot on the ball joint, then squeeze it
gently to force out any air.
5. Adjust the special tool with the adjusting bolt (A)

until its base is just above the groove around the
bottom of the boot. Then slide the clip (B) over the
tool and into position on the boot.
6. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the

exposed portion ofthe ball joint pin.
18-34 BACK
5. Remove the lock pin (A) from the upper arm ball 8. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of
joint, then remove the nut (B). removal, and note these items:
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin after o Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
tightening the castle nut. connecting the upper arm to the knuckle.
o Before connecting the ball joint to the knuckle,
07MAC-SL0A202 degrease the threaded section and tapered
portion ofthe ball joint pin, the connecting hole,
and the threaded section and mating surface of
the castle nut.
the flange bolt and the castle nut, then raise the
before fully tightening to the specified torque
values.
-~
align the slot with the hole in the stud. Do not
o Refer to the stroke and stroke/headlight leveling
/ 12x1.25mm sensor replacement to install the stroke sensor to
A 59-69N·m the upper arm (see page 22-229).
(6.0-7.0 kgf·m,
43-51 Ibf·ftl o Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surface of the brake disc/drum and the inside of
6. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the the wheel.
knuckle using the ball joint remover (see page o Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust if
18-11). necessary (see page 18-5).
7. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the vehicle, and 9. With active damper system: Do the memorizing
remove the upper arm (B). rear suspension full rebound position (see page
18-54).
NOTE: Use new flange bolt during reassembly.
10. With active damper system/Left side: Do the
headlight initial position learning procedure
(see page 22-231).
A
14x 1.5 mm
93N·m
Replace.
BACK 18-35
Rear Suspension
Lower Arm A Removal/Installation
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 5. Remove the flange bolt (B) from the vehicle.
NOTE: Use a new flange bolt during assembly.
2. Remove the rear wheel.
C
14x 1.5 mm
3. Position a floor jack under the lower arm B. Raise 123N·m
the floor jack until the suspension begins to 112.5 kgf·m,
90.4 Ibf·ft)
compress. Replace.
o
B
/
14x1.5mm
93N·m
19.5 kgf·m,
B 69Ibf·ft)
Replace.
A
6. Remove the self-locking nut (C) and the washer (D)

4. Remove the flange bolts (A) from the trailing arm. from the knuckle, then remove the lower arm A.
NOTE: Use new flange bolts during reassembly. NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut during
reassembly.
7. Install the lower arm A in the reverse order of


the wheel.
/
14x 1.5 mm
103N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
18-36 BACK
Lower Arm B Removal/Installation
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 5. Position the floor jack under the lower arm B.
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). Raise the floor jack until the suspension begins to
compress.
3. Remove the muffler hanger (A).
'\ C
B 14x1.5mm
Replace.
6. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the bottom of the

damper.
4. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the 7. Remove the flange bolt (C) from the knuckle.
respective joint pin (C) with a hex wrench, then
remove the stabilizer link from the lower arm B. 8. Lower the floor jack gradually.
9. Remove the spring (A) and the lower spring seat (B).
A
10x 1.25 mm
Replace.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-37
Rear Suspension
Lower Arm B Removal/Installation (cont'd)
10. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and adjusting bolt 11. Install the lower arm B in the reverse order of
(C), then remove the lower arm B. removal, and note these items:
NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut and a new • First install all the suspension components, and
adjusting bolt during reassembly. lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then place a
floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the
C suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
Replace.
before fully tightening the bolts and nuts to the
specified torque values.
• Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and
the adjusting cam with the marked positions
when tightening.
• Before installing the brake disc/drum, clean the
mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the
inside ofthe brake disc/drum.
A
14x1.5mm
132N·m
(13.5 kgf·m, 97.6Ibf·ft)
Replace.
18-38 BACK
Trailing Arm Removal/Installation
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 7. Remove the flange bolts (A) from thetrailing arm,
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). then remove the trailing arm.
2. Remove the rear wheel. NOTE: Use new flange bolts during reassembly.
3. Remove the parking brake cable (A) from the

trailing arm (B).
C 8x1.25mm
22N·m A
(2.2 kgf·m. 16 Ibf·ttl 14x 1.5 mm
103N·m
(10.5 kgf·m. 75.9 Ibf·ttl
4. Disconnect the brake line (C) from the brake hose Replace.
(D), then remove the retaining clip (E).
8. Install the trailing arm in the reverse order of
5. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the removal, and note these items:
parking brake lever (see page 19-30).
• First install all the suspension components, and
6. Remove the flange nuts (A) from the trailing arm lightly tighten the bolts and nuts, then place a
(B). floor jack under the lower arm, and raise the
NOTE: Use new flange nuts during reassembly. before fully tightening the bolts and nuts to the
specified torque values.
A
12x 1.25 mm • Before installing the brake disc/drum, clean the
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m. 47 Ibf·ttl mating surface ofthe hub bearing unit and the
Replace. inside ofthe brake disc/drum.
the wheel.
• Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX
(upper) level line, and bleed the brake system
(see page 19-9). Check for a leak at the brake line
to the brake hose, and retighten it if necessary.
BACK
18-39
Rear Suspension
Stabilizer link Removal/Installation
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 5. Install a new self-locking nut and a new flange nut,
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). and lightly tighten them.
2. Remove the center cap and the rear wheel. 6. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc/drum
and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
3. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and the flange nut wheel.
(8) while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a
hex wrench (D), then remove the stabilizer link (E). 7. Tighten the self-locking nut and flange nut to the
specified torque values while holding the
A respective joint pin with a hex wrench.
10x1.25mm
37 N·m (3.S kgf·m, 27 Ibf·tt)
------..
Replace. 8. Test-drive the vehicle.
9. After 5 minutes of driving, tighten the self-locking

nut again to the specified torque value.
o
c
~G
4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (F) and
lower arm (G) with the joint pins set at the center of
their range of movement.
NOTE: The left stabilizer link has a yellow paint

mark (H), while the right stabilizer link has a white
mark. Align the paint mark to the outside.
BACK
18-40
Stabilizer Bar Replacement
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 7. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). removal, and note these items:
2. Remove the rear wheels. • Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer
bar.
3. Remove the spare tire from the vehicle. • Note the fore/aft direction of the bushing holders.
• Refer to stabilizer link removal/installation to
4. Remove the spare tire support bracket (A). connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page
18-40).
• Clean the mating surface ofthe brake disc/drum
the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
A wheel.
~6X1.0mm
9.& N·m (1.0 kgf~m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
5. Disconnect both stabilizer links from the stabilizer

bar (see page 18-40).
6. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing

holders (8), then remove the bushings (C) and the
stabilizer bar (D) from the front suspension
subframe (E).
NOTE: Align the paint marks (F) on the stabilizer

bar with the sides of the bushings during
reassembly.
A
c &x1.25mm
22N·m
I
E
BACK
18-41
Re~r Suspension
Damper Replacement
Removal 6. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the bottom of the
damper.
3. With active damper system: Disconnect the damper

coil connector (A).

damper coil connector;
7. Remove the flange bolt (B) from the knuckle.
8. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the top of the

damper.
A
12x 1.25mm
Replace.
4. Position a floor jack under the lower arm B.

Raise the floor jack until the suspension begins to
compress.
5. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the

respective joint pin (e) with a hex wrench, then
remove the stabilizer link from the lower arm B.
A
10x 1.25mm
Replace.
-----8 9. Lower the floor jack gradually, then remove the

damper (B) from the vehicle.
BACK
18-42
Inspection Installation
1. Push on the damper as shown. 1. Position the damper (A) between the body and the
lower arm B.
C
12x1.2Smm
64N·m
(6.S kgf'm, 47 Ibf·ttl
Replace.
2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and

check for smooth operation through a full stroke,
both compression and extension. The damper
should extend smoothly and constantly when
compression is released. If it does not, the gas. is
leaking and the damper should be replaced.
2. Loosely install a new flange bolt (C) to the top of
3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding the damper.
during these tests.
3. Loosely install the new flange bolt (A) to the bottom
of the damper.
A
12x1.2Smm
64N·m
(6.Skgf·m,
47lbf·ttl
Replace.
~/
B
14x1.Smm
113N·m
111.S kgf·m, 83.2 Ibf·ttl
Replace.
4. Loosely install a new flange bolt (B) to the knuckle.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-43
Rear Suspension
Damper Replacement (cont'd)
5. Install the stabilizer link on the lower arm B, then 9. With active damper system: Connect the damper
loosely install a new flange nut (A). coil connector (A).

damper coil connector.
A
10 x 1.25 mm
49N·m
(5.0 kgf·m,
36Ibf·ft)
Replace.
6. Raise the floor jack until the hole in the trailing arm
aligns with the hole in the damper.
7. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque 10. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc/drum
values. and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
wheel.
8. Tighten the flange nut to the specified torque value,
while holding the respective joint pin with a hex 11. With active damper system: Do the memorizing
wrench. rear suspension full rebound position (see page
18-54).
12. With active damper system: Start the engine, then

make sure there are no active damper system DTCs
with the HDS (see page 18-53).
13. With active damper system: Do the DAMPER

FORCE OPERATION in the ACTIVE DAMPER
SYSTEM INSPECTION MENU with the HDS, then
make sure the all four damper units function
normally.

18-44 BACK
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation
Exploded View
_____ BUMP STOP
~ ~ Check for vveakness

and damage.
10x1.25mm
~
_____ 59 N·m
I~ (6.0 kgf·m, 43lbf·ft)
~~ S~~GUm·
~ Check for deterioration
~ and damage.
g ~ /
/'" SPRING MOUNTING CUSHION
Chook 1o. doterio.atio,
and damage.
SPRING
~ Check for vveakened compression
and damage.
SPRING LOWER SEAT

~ Ch.ok 1o. doterio.at;o,
and damage.
(cant'd)
BACK 18-45
Rear Suspension
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Removal 5. Position the floor jack under the lower arm B.

Raise the floor jack until the suspension begins to
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with compress.
3. Remove the muffler hanger (A).
'\ C
B 14x1.5mm
Replace.
6. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the bottom of the

damper.
7. Remove the flange bolt (C) from the knuckle.
4. Remove the flange nut (A) while holding the 8. Lower the floor jack gradually.
respective joint pin (C) with a hex wrench, then
remove the stabilizer link from the lower arm B. 9. Remove the spring (A) and the lower spring seat (B).
A
10x 1.25 mm
Replace.
18-46 BACK
10. Remove the flange bolt (A) that connects the body, Installation
and remove the bump stop (B), the spring guide (e),
and the spring mounting cushion (D) if necessary. 1. Install the bump stop (A), the spring guide (B), and
the mounting cushion (e), then tighten the flange
bolt (D) to the specified torque value if removed.
D
10x1.25mm
59N·m
(6.0kgf.m,
43lbf·ftl
2. Install the spring (A) and the lower spring seat (e).
Align the bottom of the spring and the lower spring
seat with lower arm B as shown.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-47
Rear Suspension
Spring/Bump Stop Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. Position a floor jack under the lower arm B.' 5. Install the stabilizer link on the lower arm B, then
loosely install the new flange nut (A).
12x1.2Smm
64N·m
(6.Skgf·m,
47Ibf·ft)
Replace.
A
10x1.2Smm
49N·m
(S.O kgf·m,
36Ibf·ft)
14x1.Smm Replace.
B 113N·m
(11.S kgf.m,
83.2 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
-----B
6. Raise the floor jack until the hole in the trailing arm
4. Slowly raise the floor jack until you can align the aligns with the hole in the damper.
bolt hole with the holes in the lower arm B and the
knuckle and install the new flange bolts. 7. Tighten the flange bolts to the specified torque
values.
8. Tighten the flange nut to the specified torque

values, while holding the respective joint pin with a
hex wrench.
9. Install the muffler hanger (A).
10. Clean the mating surface ofthe brake disc/drum

wheel.

18-48 BACK
Suspension
Front and Rear Suspension 18-2
Front Susp~nsion ............................................. 18-12
Rear Suspension .... ........ ...... ....... ........ ...... ........ 18-29
Active Damper System

General Troubleshooting Information ....................... 18-51 .
Memorizing Rear Suspension
Full Rebound Position .............................................. 18-54
Circuit Diagram ..................................•.......................... 18-64
DTC Troubleshooting ...........................•....................... 18-69
Active Damper Control Unit Replacement ................. 18-118
Vertical Acceleration Sensor Replacement ................ 18-119
Vertical Acceleration Sensor Inspection ....................
Active Damper System Switch Test .............. ;............
18-120
18-121 \1
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ...... 18-123
BACK
FRONT VERTICAL ACCELERATION SENSOR


ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM SWITCH

Test, page 18-121
RIGHT-REAR VERTICAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
Repla(:ement, page 18-119
RIGHT REAR DAMPER COIL

Damper Replacement, page 18-42
LEFT· REAR VERTICAL

ACCELERATION SENSOR
ACTIVE DAMPER
CONTROL UNIT
. Replacement, page 18-118
I·. LEFT·REAR DAMPER COIL

Damper Replacement,
page 18-42
LEFT-REAR SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
RIGHT·REAR SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
RIGHT·FRONT SUSPENSION LEFT·FRONT DAMPER COIL

STROKE SENSOR Damper/Spring Removal and Installation,
Replacement, page 22-229 page 18-21
RIGHT·FRONT DAMPER COIL LEFT·FRONT SUSPENSION

Damper/Spring Removal and Installation, STROKE SENSOR
18-50 BACK
System Indicator Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
This system has an active damper system indicator (A). • The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However,
when the same DTC is detected more than once, the
A B most recent DTC is written over the earlier one.
Therefore, when the same problem is detected
repeatedly, it is memorized as a single DTC.
• The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order,
not in the order they occur.
• The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM. Therefore,
the memorized DTCs cannot be cancelled by
disconnecting the battery. Do the specified
procedures to clear the DTCs.
Self-diagnosis
• Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories:

- Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch
is turned ON (II) and until the active damper system
When the active damper system is working correctly, indicator goes off.
the active damper system indicator comes on after - Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial
turning the ignition switch ON (11), and it goes off when diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
the engine is started. • When the system detects a problem, it will go into fail
The indicator will stay on until the ignition switch is safe mode which turns off the active damper function.
turned OFF, or until the problem goes away (system When in this mode, handling characteristics are
returns to norma!), the indicator will then go off. limited, and the vehicle speed should be reduced to
60 mph (96 km/h) or less, and driven no more than
NOTE: The damper system mode is controlled by the 200 miles (321 km).
active damper system switch and is indicated on the
MID (multi-information display). Mode Select Switch
The system has two damping modes. Comfort and

sport mode. Modes are changed using the mode
selector switch.
Active Damper System Damper Units
The active damper system has four individual damper

units, one on each suspension corner. These dampers
function same as conventional dampers, but they
should only be replaced as a single unit when indicated
by a DTC. Do not replace the dampers units as a set.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-51
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)·
How to Troubleshoot DTCs Intermittent Failures
DTC troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause The term "Intermittent failure"means a system may
ofthe problem is still present and the active damper have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the active
system indicator is still on. Following a troubleshooting damper system indicator does not come on, check for
procedure for a code that has been cleared and does poor connections or loose terminals at all connectors
not reset can result in incorrect diagnosis. related to the circuit that you are troubleshooting. If the
indicator was on but then went out, the original
1. Question the client about the conditions that were problem may have been intermittent.
present when the problem occurred, such as speed,
turning, road conditions, and which mode the
active damper system was selected. Try to
duplicated the DTC by test-driving the vehicle
under the same conditions.
2. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI, AfT, and VSA system

related to F-CAN stored at the same time.
Troubleshoot these codes first, before
troubleshooting the active damper system.
3. After troubleshooting, or repairs are done, clear the

DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same
conditions that originally set the DTCs. Make sure
the active damper system indicator does not come
on.
18-52 BACK
How to Retrieve DTCs and Freeze Data with How to Clear DTCs
the HDS (Honda Diagnostic System)
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to
1. Ifthe active damper system indicator stays on, the data link connector (DLC) under the driver's
connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) side of the dashboard.
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II.).

and the active damper system control unit. If it
doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-223).
4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts

onthe HDS.

and the active damper system control unit. If it
doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-223).
4. Check for and note any stored DTCs. Also check the
on-board snapshot data, and download any data
found. Then refer to the indicated DTC's
troubleshooting, and begin the appropriate
troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE:
• The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, snapshot,
current data, and other system data .
• For specific operations, refer to the Help menu on
the HDS.
BACK
18-53
. .-,
Activ~ Damper System
Memorizing Rear Suspension Full Rebound Position
Do the rear suspension full rebound position 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
memorizing whenever you do any of these actions:
• Replace the active damper control unit. safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1~8).
• Replace the rear damper unit.
• Replace the rear suspension stroke sensor. NOTE: Verify the rear tires are suspended off the
• In the specific DTC troublesho.oting. ground.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to 7. Make sure the rea r suspension stroke sensors are
the data link connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's installed correctly, and the linkages are properly
side of the dashboard. connected (see page 22-229).
9. Follow the screen prompts on the HDS to memorize

the rear suspension full rebound position.
NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the Help

menu that came with the HDS.

and the active damper control unit. If it doesn't,
4. Check for DTCs and make sure no DTC is indicated.
NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the Help

menu that came with the HDS.
BACK
18-54
OTC Troubleshooting Index
•
DTC Detection Item Active Note
Damper
System
Indicator
1-1 Front vertical acceleration sensor circuit high voltage ON (see page 18-69)
1-2 RiQht-rear vertical acceleration sensor circuit hiQh voltaQe ON . (see paQe 18-69)
1-3 Left-rear vertical acceleration sensor circuit high voltage ON (see·page 18-69)
1-4 Front vertical acceleration sensor rallge/performance problem ON (see j:>age 18-71)
1-5 Right-rear vertical acceleration sensor range/performance problem ON (see page 18-71)
1-6 Left-rear vertical acceleration sensor range/performance problem ON (see ~age 18-71)
1-7 Front vertical acceleration sensor circuit low voltage ON (see page 18-72)
1-8 Right-rear vertical acceleration sensor circuit low voltage ON (see page 18-72)
1-9 Left-rear vertical acceleration sensor circuit low voltage ON (see page 18-72)
2-1 Right-front suspension stroke sensor circuit high voltage ON (see page 18-75)
2-2 Left-front suspension stroke sensor circuit high voltage ON (see page 18-77)
2-3 Right-rear suspension stroke sensor circuit high voltage ON (see page 18-75)
2-4 Left-rear suspension stroke sensor circuit high voltage ON (see page 18-79)
2-5 Right-frontlright-rear suspension stroke sensor range/performance ON (see page 18-81)
problem
2-6 Left-frontlleft-rear suspension stroke sensor range/performance ON (see page 18-81)
problem
2-8 RiQht-front suspension stroke sensor siQnal circuit low voltaQe ON (see QajJe 18-82)
2-9 Left-front suspension stroke sensor signal circuit low voltage ON (see page 18-84)
2-A RiQht-rear suspension stroke sensor signal circuit low voltage ON (see page 18-82)
2~B Left-rear suspension stroke sensor signal circuit low voltage ON . (see page 18-87)
2-C Right-rear/left-rear suspension stroke sensor incorrect correlation ON (see page 18-90)
3-1 Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor range/performance ON (see page 18-91)
problem (yaw rate signal-lateral acceleration signal incorrect
correlation)
3-3 Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor malfunction (lateral ON (see page 18-91)
acceleration sensor)
3-4 Wheel speed signal malfunction (from VSA modulator-control unit ON (see page 18-92)
by F-CAN)
3-6 Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor malfunction (yaw ON (see page 18-91)
rate sensor)
3-7 Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor range/performance ON (seepage 18-91)
problem (wheel speed signal-longitudinal acceleration signal
incorrect correlation)
3-9 Yaw rate~lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor malfunction ON (see page 18-91)
(longitudinal acceleration sensor) ....
3-A Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor malfunction ON (see page 18-91)

5-1 Active damper control unit internal right-front damper coil drive ON (see page 18-93)
circuit stuck ON
5-2 Active damper control unit internal left-front damper coil drive ON (see page 18-93)
circuit stuck ON
5-3 Active damper control unit internal right-rear damper coil drive ON (see page 18-93)
circuit stuck ON
5-4 Active damper control unit internal left-rear damper coil drive circuit ON (see page 18-93)
stuck ON
(cont'd)
BACK
18-55
DTe Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
DTC Detection Item Active Note

Damper
System
Indicator
5-5 .Active damper control unit internal right-front damper coil drive ON (see page 18-94)
circuit stuck OFF
5-6, Active.damper control unit internal left-front damper coil drive ON (see page 18-94)
ci(cuit stuck OFF ..
5-7 Active damper control unit internal right-rear damper coil drive ON (see page 18-94)
circuitstuck OFF
stuck'OFF
circuit current lower than expected
6-2 Active damper control unit internal left-front damper coil drive ON (see page 18-97)
circuit ,current lowerthan expected
6-3 Active.damper control unit internal right-rear damper coil drive ON (see page 18-97)
circuit current lower than expected
current lower than expected ,
circuit current higher than expected
6·6 Active damper control unit internal left-front damper coil drive ON (see page 18-99)
circuit current higher than expected " . ' ..
6~7 Active damper control unit internal right-rear damper·coil drive ON (see page 18-99)
circuit current higher-than expected
current higher than expected
6-9 Active damper control unit power source circuit (+8) low voltage ON (see page·18-102)
7-1 .Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-93)
7-2 Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-93)
7~3 ' Active damper control' unit internal circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-93)
7-6 Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction (fail safe relay ON (see page 18-104)
stuckON) "
7-9 Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction' .,'

ON (see page 18-105)
8-2 Sensor reference voltage malfunction (SVCC line) ON (see page 18-107)
8-3 SensoHeference voltage malfunction (HVCC line) ON (see page 18-108)
8-5 F-CAN malfunction (active damper control unit lost communication ON (see page 18-110)
with yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor)
8-6 F-CAN malfunction (active damper control unit lost communication ON (see page 18-111)
with VSA modulator-control unit)
14-1' Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-93)
14-7 : Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-93)
14-A Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-93)
14-8 Active damper control unit power supply circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-113)
14-C Active damper control unit internal circuit malfunction ON (see page 18-93)
BACK
18-56
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic troubJe co"d~ (OTC) with the HOS. If there is no
. proced ure f or t he symptom, .In t he sequence rIsted, until'1 you f In d t he cause.
OTC , dothe d'lagnostlc
Symptom Diagnostic procedure
HOS does not communicate with the active Troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page 11-223)
damper control unit or the vehicle
Active damper system indicator does not 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page 22-315)
come on 2. Substitute a known-good active damper control unit, then
recheck. If it is OK, replace the original active damper control
unit (see page 18-118)
Active damper system indicator does.not 1. Start the engine
go off, and no OTCs are stored 2. Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-114)
3. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page 22-315)
Active damper system switch does not SymptomTroubleshooting (see page 18-116)
work (damper mode cannot be selected)
Active damper system switch lamp blinks 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page 22-315)
2. Substitute a known-good active damper control unit, then
recheck. If it is OK, replace the original active damper control.
unit (see page 18-118)
BACK
18-57
System Description
Active Damper Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (20P)
c;---)
1 2/ 4 V V V
6 8 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 IV
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description Signal

number Terminals Conditions Voltage
1 RED CRLH Left-rear damper 1-11 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive power
2 GRN CRRH Right-rear damper 2-12 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive power
4 BLK CFLH Left-front damper 4-14 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive power
6 RED CFRH Right-front damper 6-16 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive power
8 GRN IG1 IG1 power supply 8-GND Ignition switch Battery voltage
ON (II)
10 LTBLU VB Battery power 10-GND At all times Battery voltage
supply
18-58 BACK
11 WHT CRLL Left-rear damper 1-11 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive ground
12 VEL CRRL Right-rear damper 2-12 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive ground
13 ORN RRST Detects right-rear 13-GND Damper stroking About 0-5 V
stroke sensor
signal
14 WHT CFLL Left-front damper 4-14 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive ground
15 PUR FLST Detests left-front 15-GND Damper stroking About 0-5 V
.stroke sensor
signal
16 BLU CFRL Right-front damper 6-16 Drive the vehicle Variable
coil drive ground
17 BLU FRST Detects right-front 17-GND Damper stroking About 0-5 V
stroke sensor
signal
18 BLK LG Ground for the 18-GND At all times 0.1 Vor less
logic circuit
19 BLK PG Ground for the 19-GND At all times 0.1 Vor less
damper coil drive
(cont'd)
BACK
18-59
Active,Damper System
Active Damper Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (14P)
c;--;>
1 1/ 3 4, ~ 6 7
8 V 10 11 12 14 /

1 WHT CANH CAN -- -- --
communication
circuit
3 LTBLU K-LiNE Communication 3-GND HDS not About 5 V
with HDS connected
4 PNK SVCC Supply power to 4-GND Ignition switch About 5 V
the sensors ON (II)
6 PNK HVCC Supply power to 6-GND Ignition switch About 5 V
the sensor and the ON (II)
other unit
7 LTBLU RLST Detects left-rear 7-GND Damper stroking About 0-5 V
stroke sensor
signal
8 RED CAN L CAN -- -- --
communication
circuit
10 LTGRN RLG Detects left-rear 10-GND Move the vehicle About 0-5 V
acceleration upand down
sensor signal
11 GRV SG G rou nd for the 11-GND At all times 0.1 Vor less
sensors
12 BRN RRG Detects right-rear 12-GND Move the vehicle About 0-5 V
acceleration up and down
sensor signal
14 VEL FCG Detects front 14-GND Move the vehicle About 0-5 V
acceleration up and down
sensor signal
18-60 BACK
Active Damper System Controls
The active damper control unit continuously monitors inputs from various sensors and the mode select switch. The
control unit will adjust each damper's force by controlling current to them.
The active damper system requires a special damper that is capable of quick response and action. This allows them to
respond quickly for changes in conditions.
Active dan;'lper system damping character

Sporty
(lay weight on handling)
Piston speed'
Comfort
Damping force
(absolute)
~ ./:J
V . Sporty
(lay weight on handling)
.
Comfort
(cont'd)
BACK
18-61
System Communication
The active damper system has an active damper control unit; four quick-reacting damper units with internal damper
coil, three vertical acceleration sensors, four suspension stroke sensors, a mode select switch, and an active damper
system indicator. In addition, the active damper system receives signals from the VSA system,the PCM, and relates
information with the headlight leveling control system.
The active damper control unit performs an arithmetical operation from various vehicle conditions pitching, roll, bump,
, _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___ _ _ _ _ _ ,
vehicle speed, and driver's mode selection, then selects the most suitable damping characteristics or setting.
.. .. .. .. - .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
i VSAsys em !
I·. Yaw rate-Iaterall !
longitudinal VSA
Headlight
leveling I Ii
PCM
1
.
acceleration
sensor
m'!dulator-control ~
Unit
Wheel speed
sensors
!.
i
too L-~---4t-oo--- ____ J
control unit
'.,
Damper Vertical Damper
unit acceleration unit
sensor (j) Active damper
'~suspension ~
system mode select
Gauge control module signal.
Indicator (LED and suspensio' ® Vertical acceleration

stroke multi-information stroke sensor signal.
~-J ~ ~® 'C~
® Suspension stroke
position signal.
00 d. .; ' : ; 00 ® Active damper
system damper
J ®
ii
Hi
Active damper
system switch
i;
';i.
[ )I=>
®
operate signal.
@ Indicator drive
signal.
I'.:.. ?<:......•• ? ."' . :::?'·C. @ VSA function signal.

wheel speed signal.
I:ji) (j) Yaw rate.laterall
longitudinal
Vertical Vertical acceleration sensor
acceleration signal.
acceleration
I1
senso r
® ®
sensor
® Vehicle speed
signal.
n®
Suspension Suspension
f
®
:::'--p stroke stroke

sensor
[~
~J ,
H )I::> H
'-../ ® ® '-../
Damper Damper
unit Active damper unit
control unit
18-62 BACK
MRF (Magneto Rheological Fluid) in the Damper Unit
Variable suspension damping force is achieved by controlling the intensity of magnetic flux in the damper piston. The
orientation of iron particles suspended in the damper oil is changed as the fluid flows through the magnetic field,
thereby changing the effective viscosity of the fluid. The amount of change in the fluid's behavior is proportional to the
amount of electrical current supplied to the windings in the piston.
CURRENT _ ....
w.;;;:"""""r-r----I
OFF (without current)

Laminar flow
(parabolic velocity profile)
ON (with current)
Magnetic field lines
Plug (shear stress > yield stress)
Shear layer (shear. stress < yield stress)
BACK
18-63
Active' Damper System
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
+ MAIN UNDER.HOOD
FUSE BOX UNDER·DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.1 No.3 IGNITION SWITCH
(120 A, (50 A, ~ 6 No. 21(7.5 A'
A6
"\.D---CT\.P--+---WHT ~ PNK
h X34
IG1 HOT In ON (II, and START (III, ,

~(7.5A' ~
hFB
No.5 ~
(30A'
ACTIVE DAMPER
CONTROL UNIT
...._____--1I-:A-::1:;0_ _ _ _ LTBLU
VB
...._ _ _ _~ ~A~B~---_GRN
IG1
ACTIVEDAMPER
SYSTEMSWITCH
2
YEL
4 GAUGECONTROLMODU~
LTBLU ---<J +B
SVCC vee B2
5 POWER CIRCUIT
RED
. PUR
B19 ACTIVE DAMPER
SYSTEM INDICATOR
3 A3
RED
B1 A12
WHT WHT
CANH
BB A6
RED RED
CANL
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT PCM
~: ~
A4B
WHT WHT
A49
I
YAW RATE·LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
RED RED
DATAUNK
ACCE~RAnON SENSOR CONNECTOR (DLC,
~:
6
WHT WHT
14
I RED RED
B3 7
LTBLU
K·LlNE
A1B 5
BLK BLK
LG
A19 4
'~L
BLK
PG
';
G302 G401 G503
18-64 BACK
ACTIVE DAMPER
CONTROL UNIT
DAMPER COIL
~ '.M",",.'
A6
CFRH
RED • WHT
A16 2
CFRL
BLU • BLK
DAMPER COIL
~Uh",",m
A4
CFLH
BLK • WHT
A14 2
CFLL
WHT • BLK
DAMPER COIL
~m_ _
A2
CRRH
GRN • WHT
A12 2
CRRL
VEL • BLK
DAMPER COIL
~Uft,_
A1
CRLH
RED • WHT
A11 2
CRLL
WHT • BLK
VERTICAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
B4 1
SVCC
PNK PNK • ORN Front
B11 2
GRV GRV
SG
B14 3
VEL
FCG
VERTICAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
1 Right-rear
PNK
2
GRV
B12 3
!-+----~ r.R==R===G:---- BRN
VERTICAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
1 Left-rear
PNK
2
GRV
B10 3
!-~--------~ ~R-L-G---LTGRN
GRV PNK
t~
(cont'd)
BACK
18-65
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
ACTIVE DAMPER
CONTROL UNIT
rr
GRY PNK
ORN
1
SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
Right-front
1-....._--1 ~A.;.;1.;..7_ _ _ BLU 2

FRST
3
GRY
SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
~.-_ _~_~ r.B~6~_ _ _ PNK 1 Left-front
PNK
HVCC
1-....._--1 ~A.;.;1.;;.5_ _ _ PUR PUR
2
FLST
3
BLU
SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
1
PNK Right-rear
A13 2
~"'-----i r.R~R~ST~-- ORN
3
GRY
SUSPENSION
STROKE SENSOR
1 Left-rear
PUR
B7 2
1-.....---1 r.R;"'L~ST--- LT BLU LTBLU
3
LTGRN
HEADLIGHT LEVELING
___ : 12V CONTROL UNIT
4
-0- :5V
~
RED
5 1
7
LTBLU
BLU
12
~
J.
6
PUR
PNK
13
~J.r
BACK
18-66
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR X (39P) CONNECTOR F (14P)
~ ....----.
L.......J
6
V/2131 [I]
15V/7V/ 191101111
HEADLIGHT LEVELING
CONTROL UNIT
16P CONNECTOR
li~'1
1121/1
[EJQTI
116117VV\201
h I,...,
t::: illJ 0&320341351 t: DAMPER COIL 2P CONNECTOR

[g[]
13613711381/1
In
SUSPENSION STROKE VERTICAL ACCELERATION ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM

SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT

CONNECTOR A (20P) CONNECTOR B (14P)
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

CONNECTOR A (12P) CONNECTOR B (24P)
(cont'd)
BACK
18-67
YAW RATE·LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
VSA MODULATOR·CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
Ir 11
1 1 2 314151617 819110 I.
~ 11 12 13 I/V 16 1/118 19 20 21
22 / 24 >< ><
25 26 27 28 •
-~ 29 30 31 321/ 1/ 1/136 37 38 39 \-
140 41 42 143144VI46 471481491
18-68
BACK
OTC Troubleshooting
DTC 1-1: Front Vertical Acceleration Sensor 9. Measure voltage between body ground and the
Circuit High Voltage appropriate active damper control unit connector 8
(14P) terminal (see table).
DTC 1-2: Right-rear Vertical Acceleration
Sensor Circuit High Voltage DTC Active Damper Control Unit
Connector Terminal
DTC 1-3: Left-rear Vertical Acceleration 1-1 No. 14
Sensor Circuit High Voltage 1-2 No. 12
1-3 No. 10
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
4. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds.
Is OTe 1-1, 1-2, or 1-3 indicated?

= = =
NO-Intermittent failure at this time. Check for

poor or loose connections between the vertical Is there more than 0.5 V?
acceleration sensor and the active damper control
unit.. YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
the appropriate vertical acceleration sensor and the
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. active damper control unit.•
7. Disconnect active damper control unit connector 8 NO-Go to step 10.

(14P).
(cont'd)
BACK
18-69
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Disconnect active damper control unit connector
B (14P).
11. Reconnect active damper control unit connector
B (14P). 16. Check for continuity between the appropriate
vertical acceleration sensor terminals No.1 and
12. Do the appropriate vertical acceleration sensor No.3.
inspection (see page 18-120).
DTC 1-1
DTC Appropriate Vertical
FRONT VERTICAL ACCELERATION
Acceleration Sensor SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
1-1 Front
~
1-2 Right-rear
1-3 Left-rear
svee (OR~FCG (YEU
Is the vertical acceleration sensor indicate OK?
YES-Replace the active damper control unit Wire side of female terminals
(see page 18-118) .•
DTC 1-2
NO-Go to step 13.
RIGHT-REAR VERTICAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
14. Disconnect the appropriate vertical acceleration

~
svee (PN~G (BRN]
DTC Appropriate Vertical·

Acceleration Sensor. Wire side of female terminals
1-1 Front
1-2 Right-rear DTC 1-3
1-3 Left-rear
LEFT-REAR VERTICAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
~
svee (PN~LG III GRN]

appropriate vertical acceleration sensor and the
active damper control unit..
NO-Go to step 17.
BACK
18-70
17. Check for continuity between active damper control DTC 1-4: Front Vertical Acceleration Sensor
unit connector B·(14P).terminal No. 11 and Range/Performance Problem
appropriate vertical acceleration sensor 3P
connector terminal No.2 (see table). DTC 1.:.5: Right-rear Vertical Acceleration
Sensor Range/Performance Problem
Acceleration Sensor DTC 1-6: Left-rear Vertical Acceleration
1-1 Front Sensor Range/Performance Problem
1-2 Right-rear
1-3 Left-rear 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P) 2. Do the appropriate vertical acceleration sensor
Wire side offemale terminals inspection (see page 18-120).

Acceleration Sensor
1-4 Front
1-5 Right-rear
1-6 Left-rear
Is the vertical acceleration sensor indicate OK?
YES-Replace the active damper control unit

(see page 18-118).•
VERTICAL ACCELERATION NO-Replace the appropriate vertical acceleration

SENSOR3P CONNECTOR sensor (see page 18-119).•
YES-Replace the appropriate vertical acceleration

sensor (see page 18-119).•

active damper contro) unit.•
BACK
18-71
DTC 1-7: FrontVertical Acceleration Sensor 9. Check for continuity between body ground and the
Circuit Low Voltage appropriate active damper control unit connector B
DTC 1-8: Right-rearVertical Acceleration
DTC Active Damper Control
Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Unit Connector Terminal
1-7 No. 14
DTC 1-9: Left-rear Vertical Acceleration
1-8 No. 12
Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
1-9 No. 10
1. Turn the ignition switth ON (II).
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 114P)
Is DTC 1-7, 1-8, or 1-9 indicated? = = =

YES-Go to step 6.
poor or loose connections between the vertical YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire
acceleration sensor and the active damper control between the appropriate vertical acceleration
unit.• sensor and the active dampe(control unit..
6. Do the appropriate vertical acceleration sensor NO-Go to step 10.

inspection (see page 18-120).
10. Disconnect the appropriate vertical acceleration
DTC Appropriate Vertical sensor 3P connector ..
Acceleration Sensor
1-7 Front
Acceleration Sensor
1-8 Right-rear
1-7 Front
1-9 Left-rear
1-8 Right-rear
1-9 Left-rear
8. Disconnect active damper control unit connector A 11. Check for continuity between the appropriate
(20P) and connector B (14P). vertical acceleration sensor terminals No.2 and No.3.
LEFT-REAR RIGHT-REAR FRONT
~GRN ~N ~L

appropriate vertical acceleration sensor and
the active damper control unit.•
NO-Go to step 12.
BACK
18-72
12. Check for continuity between the appropriate active 13. Check for continuity between active damper control
damper control unit connector B (14P) terminal and unit connector B (14P) terminal No.4 and
the appropriate vertical acceleration sensor 3P appropriate vertical acceleration sensor 3P
connector terminal No.3 (see table). connector terminal No.1 (see table).
DTC Active Damper Appropriate DTC Appropriate Vertical

Control Unit Vertical Acceleration Sensor
Connector Acceleration 1-7 Front
Terminal Sensor 1-8 Right-rear
1-7 No.14 Front 1-9 Left-rear
1-8 No. 12 Right-rear
1-9 No. 10 Left-rear VERTICAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR3PCONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals LEFT-REAR RIGHT-REAR FRONT
LEFT-REAR ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)

VERTICAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 13. NO-Repair open in the wire between the

NO-Repair open in the wire between the active damper control unit.•
(cont'd)
BACK 18-73
14. Reconnect active damper control unit connector A

(20P) and connector B (14P).
16. Measure voltage between body ground and

appropriate vertical acceleration sensor 3P

Acceleration Sensor
1-7 Front
1-8 Right-rear
1-9 Left-rear
FRONT REAR
= =
VERTICAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR3PCONNECTOR
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the appropriate vertical acceleration

NO-Replace the active damper control unit

(see page 18-118).•
18-74 BACK
DTC 2-1: Right-front Suspension Stroke 9. Measure voltage between body ground and the
Sensor Circuit High Voltage appropriate active damper control unit connector A
DTC 2-3: Right-rear Suspension Stroke,
Sensor Circuit High Voltage DTC Active Damper Control
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2-1 No. 17
2-3 No. 13
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
Is DTC 2-1, or 2-3 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Intermittent failure at this time. Check for Wire side of female terminals
poor or loose connections between the suspensiOn
stroke sensor and the active damper control unit..
7. Disconnect active damper control unit connector A the appropriate suspension stroke sensor and the
(20P). active damper control unit.•
(cont'd)
BACK 18-75
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 17. Check for continuity between the appropriate
suspension stroke sensor 3P connector terminals
11. Reconnect active damper cqntrol unit connector No.1 and No.2.
A (20P).
SUSPENSION STROKE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
12. Remove the appropriate suspension stroke sensor Wire side of female terminals
(see page 22-229). Do not disconnect the sensor FRONT REAR
connector.
DTC Appropriate Suspension ~ ~
Stroke Sensor P~C P~
2-1
2-3
Right-front
RiQht-rear
~N ~U
13. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds. Is there continuity?·
14. Check the SUS STROKE_S VOLTAGE (RF), or (RR) YES-Repair short in the wires between the
in the ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM DATA LIST with appropriate suspsnesion stroke sensor and
the HDS while moving the suspension stroke the active damper control unit. •
sensor arm through a complete stroke. Compare
the voltage/rotation angle between the chart and NO-Go to step 18.
the measurements.
NOTE: The voltage should increase (decrease)
unit connector 8 (14P) terminal No. 11 and
within 90 degrees ofthe sensor arm rotation
appropriate suspension stroke sensor 3P connector
from the first voltage change point.
terminal No.3 (see table).
Suspension stroke sensor specified
voltage/rotationangle chart DTC Appropriate Suspension
Range of sensor arm rotation 1 Stroke Sensor
4.5 2-1 Right-front
2-3 Right-rear
Sensor
output Voltage change ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
~~~~~~
wr:', tP::::\::::n::::t _ _ __
o Rotation angle (degree)
Is the voltage as specified?
YES-Substitute a known-good active damper

control unit and retest. If the DTC goes away,
replace the original active damper control unit (see RIGHT-REAR RIGHT·FRONT
page 18-118).• SUSPENSION STROKE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 15.
16. Disconnect the appropriate suspension stroke YES-Replace the appropriate suspension stroke
sensor 3P connector. sensor (see page 22-229) .•
DTC Appropriate Suspension
Stroke Sensor
appropriate suspension stroke sensor and the
2-1 Right-front
active damper control unit.•
2-3 Right-rear
18-76 BACK
DTC 2-2: Left-front Suspension Stroke Sensor 10. Measure voltage between body ground and active
Circuit High Voltage damper control unit connector A (20P) terminal
No. 15.

poor or loose connections between the suspension Is there more than 0.5 V?
stroke sensor and the active damper control unit.•
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. the left-front suspension stroke sensor, the
headlight leveling control unit, and the active
7. Disconnect active damper control unit connector A damper control unit.
(20P).
NO-Go to step 11.
8. Disconnect the headlight leveling control unit
connector (16P).
(cont'd)
BACK 18-77
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF .. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
12. Reconnect active damper control unit connector A 17. Disconnect active damper control unit connector A
(20P) and the headlight leveling control unit (20P).
connector (16P).
18. Disconnect the headlight leveling control unit 16P
13. Remove the left- front suspension stroke sensor connector.
(see page.22-229). Do not disconnect the sensor
connector. 19. Disconnect the left-front suspension stroke sensor
3P connector.
NOTE: After troubleshooting, do the headlight
initial position learning procedure (see page 20. Check for continuity between headlight leveling
22-229). control unit 16P connector terminal No. 12 and left-
front suspension stroke sensor 3P connector
14. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds. terminal No.3.
15. Check the SUS STROKE_S VOLTAGE (LF) in the HEADLIGHT LEVELING CONTROL
ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM DATA LIST with the UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
HDS while moving the suspension stroke sensor Wire side of female terminals
arm through a complete stroke. Compare the
voltage/rotation angle between the chart and the
measurements.
NOTE: The voltage increase (decrease) within 90

degrees of the sensor arm rotation from the first
voltage change point.
voltage/rotation angle chart
LEFT-FRONT SUSPNSION STROKE
Range of sensor arm rotation: SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
4.5 ................................................ . Wire side of femaleterminals
Sensor Is there continuity?

output
voltage
(V) YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the left-front

0.5 t==t~~~L;_ _ . suspension stroke sensor and the headlight
leveling control unit.•
o
Rotation angle (degree)

replace the original active damper control unit (see
page 18-118).•
NO-Go to step 16.
18-78 BACK
21. Check for continuity between the left-front DTC 2-4: Left-rear Suspension Stroke Sensor
suspension stroke sensor 3P connector terminals Circuit High Voltage
No.1 and No.2.
LEFT-FRONT SUSPENSION STROKE
SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

Is there continuity? Is DTC 2-4 indicated?
YES-Repair short in the wires between the left- YES-Go to step 6.

front suspension stroke sensor and the active
damper control unit.• NO-Intermittentfailure atthistime. Check for
poor or loose connections between the suspension
NO-Go to step 22. stroke sensor and the active damper control unit.•
22. Check for continuity betweEBl the No.9 terminal of 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
the headlight leveling control unit connector (16P)
and body ground. 7. Disconnect active damper control unit connector B
. (14P).
HEADUGHT LEVEUNG CONTROL
UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals 8. Disconnect the headlight leveling control unit
connector (16P).
10. Measure voltage between body ground and active

= damper control unit connector B (14P) terminal
Is there continuity? No.7.

YES-Replace the left-front suspension stroke
sensor (see page 22-229) .• RLST (LT BLU)

headlight leveling control unit and body ground
(G401) .•
=

the left-rear suspension stroke sensor, the
damper control unit.•
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-79
Active, Damper System
12. Reconnect active damper control unit connector 17. Disconnect active damper control unit connector
B (14P) and the headlight leveling.controlunit B (14P).
connector (16P).
18. Disconnectthe headlight leveling control unit 16P
13. Remove the left- rear suspension stroke sensor connector.
(see page 22-229). Do not disconnect the sensor
connector. 19. Disconnectthe left-rear suspension stroke sensor
3P connector.
NOTE: After troubleshooting, do the headlight
initial position learning procedure (see page 20. Check for continuity between headlight leveling
22-229). control unit 16P connector terminal No.4 and left-
rear suspension stroke sensor 3P connector
14. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds. terminal No.3.
15. Check the SUS STROKE_S VOLTAGE (LR) in the LEFT-REAR SUSPNSION STROKE
ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM DATA LIST with the SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
HDS while moving the suspension stroke sensor Wire side of female terminals
arm through a complete stroke. Compare the
voltage/rotation angle between the chart and the
measurements.

within 90 degrees of the sensor arm rotation from
the first voltage change point.
Suspension stroke sensor speCified HEADLIGHT LEVELING CONTROL

Yoltage/rotation angle chart UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
Range of sensor arm rotation:
4.5 o. '
Sensor
output Voltage change
YES-Go to step 21.
~\
yoltage
(V)
1
NO-Repair open in the wire between the left-rear
suspension stroke sensor and the headlight
0.5 : .. leveling control unit..
o

replace the original active damper control unit (see
page 18-118).•
NO-Go to step 16.
18-80 BACK
21. Check for continuity between the left-rear DTC 2-5: Right-front/Right-rear Suspension
suspension stroke sensor 3P connector terminals Stroke Sensor Range/Performance Problem
No.1 and No.2.
DTC 2-6: Left-front/Left-rear Suspension
LEFT-FRONT SUSPENSION STROKE Stroke Sensor Range/Performance Problem
SENSOR3PCONNECTOR
2. Remove the appropriate suspension stroke sensor

(see page 22-229). Do not disconnect the sensor
connector.
NOTE: After troubleshooting for the left side

Is there continuity? suspension stroke sensor, do the headlight initial
position learning procedure (see page 22-229).
YES-Repair short in the wires between the left-
rear suspension stroke sensor and the active DTC Appropriate·Suspension
damper control unit.• Stroke Sensor
2-5 Rl9.ht-front and Right-rear
NO-Go to step 22. 2-6 Left-front and Left-rear
22. Check for continuity betweerethe No.9 terminal of 3. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds.
the headlight leveling control unit connector (16P)
and body ground. 4. Check the SUS STROKE_S VOLTAGE (RF), (LF),
(RR), or (LR) in the ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM
HEADLIGHT LEVELING CONTROL
UNIT 16P CONNECTOR DATA LIST with the HDS while moving the
Wire side of female terminals suspension stroke sensor arm through a complete
stroke. Compare the voltage/rotation angle
between the chart and the measurements.

within 90 degrees of the sensor arm rotation from
= the first voltage change point.
voltage/rotation angle chart
YES-Replace the left-front suspension stroke
Range of sensor arm rotation.
sensor (see page 22-229) .• 4.5 .................................................' r - - - -

Sensor
headlight leveling control unit and body ground output Voltage change
~I~ tP=o\=n:::Jt~~~~~
(G401) .•
•• ..:L;_ _ __
o

(see page 18-118) .•
NO-Replace the suspension stroke sensor

(see page 22-229) .•
BACK 18-81
DTC2-8: Right-front Suspension Stroke 9. Check for continuity between body ground and the
Sensor Signal Circuit Low Voltage appropriate active damper control unit connector A
DTC 2-A: Right-rear Suspension Stroke
Sensor Signal Circuit Low Voltage DTC Active Damper Control
NOTE: If DTC 8-2 is stored at the same time as DTC 2-8 No. 17
2-8 and DTC 2-A, troubleshoot DTC 8-2 first, then 2-A No.13
recheck for DTC 2-8 and 2-A.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS,

=
Is DTe 2-8, or 2-A indicated? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 6.
poor or-loose connections between the suspension YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire
stroke sensor and the active damper control unit.• between the appropriate suspension stroke sensor
and the active damper control unit..
NO-Go to step 10.
7. Disconnect the appropriate suspension stroke
DTC Appropriate Suspension

Stroke Sensor
2-8 Right-front
2-A Right-rear
8. Disconnect active damper control unit connector A

(20P).
18-82 BACK
10. Check for continuity between appropriate 12. Check for continuity between active damper control
suspension stroke sensor 3P connector terminal unit connector B (14P) terminal No.4 and
No.2 and the appropriate active damper control appropriate suspension stroke sensor 3P connector
unit connector A (20P) terminal (see table). terminal No.1 (see table).
DTC Active Damper Appropriate DTC Appropria~e Suspension

Control Unit Suspension Stroke Sensor
Connector Stroke 2-8 Right-front
Terminal Sensor 2-A Right-rear
2-8 No. 17 Right-front
2-A No. 13 Right-rear
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20PI
Wire side of female terminals RIGHT·FRONT RIGHT·REAR
RIGHT-REAR RIGHT·FRONT
SUSPENSION STROKE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14PI
NO-Repair open in the wire between the NO-Repair open in the wire between the
appropriate suspension stroke sensor and the appropriate suspension stroke sensor and the
active damper control unit.• active damper control unit.•
11. Check for continuity between the appropriate

suspension strok sensor terminals No.2 and
No.3.

RIGHT·FRONT RIGHT·REAR
~
~Y

(cont'd)
NO-Go to step 12.
BACK 18-83
13. Reconnect active damper control unit connector B DTC 2-9: Left-front Suspension Stroke Sensor
(14P). Signal Circuit Low Voltage
14. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds. NOTE: If DTC 8-3 is stored at the same time as DTe
2-9, troubleshoot DTC 8-3 first, then recheck for
15. Measure voltage between body ground and DTC 2-9.
appropriate suspension stroke sensor 3P connector
terminal No.1. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
DTC Appropriate Suspension 2. Clear theDTC with the HDS.

Stroke Sensor
2-8 Right-front 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2-A Right-rear
RIGHT-REAR RIGHT-FRONT
Is OTe 2-9 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.

= poor or loose connections between the suspension
SUSPENSION STROKE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR stroke sensor and the active damper control unit.•
Is there about 5 V? 7. Disconnect the left-front suspension stroke sensor

3P connector.
YES-Replace the suspension stroke sensor
(see page 22-229) .• 8. Disconnect active damper control unit connector A
(20P).
(see page 18-118) .• 9. Disconnect the headlight leveling control unit
connector (16P). .
18-84
BACK
10. Check for continuity between body ground and 12. Check for continuity between left-front suspension
active damper control unit connector A (20P) stroke sensor 3P connector terminal No.2 and
terminal No. 15. active damper control unit connector A (20P)
terminal No. 15.
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)

Is there continuity? SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Repair short to body in the wire between the
left-front suspension stroke sensor and the active Is there continuity?
damper control unit.•
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Check for continuity between the appropriate suspension stroke sensor and the active damper
suspension stroke sensor terminals No.2 and control unit.•
No.3.

SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-85
13. Disconnect active damper control unit connector B 15. Reconnect the headlight leveling control unit 16P
(14P). connector.
14. Check for continuity between headlight leveling 16. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds.
control unit 16P connector terminal No. 13 and left-
front suspension stroke sensor 3P connector 17. Measure voltage between body ground and left-
terminal No.1, and between active damper control front suspension stroke sensor 3P connector
unit connector B (14P) terminal No.6 and left-front terminal No.1.
suspension stroke sensor 3P connector terminal
No.1 individually.

UNIT 16P CONNECTOR

SENSOR3PCONNECTOR
Is there about 5 V?
SENSOR3PCONNECTOR YES-Replace the suspension stroke sensor
(see page 22-229) .•
ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P) NO-Check the headlight leveling control system. If
necessary, substitute a known-good headlight
HVCC(PNK)
leveling control unit..

SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 15.

suspension stroke sensor and the headlight
leveling control unit, or between active damper
control unit and the left-front suspension stroke
sensor.•
BACK
18-86
DTe 2-8: Left-rear Suspension Stroke Sensor 10. Check for continuity betwe~n body ground and
Signal Circuit Low Voltage active damper control unit connector B (14P)
terminal No.7.
NOTE: If DTC 8-3 is stored at the same time as DTC
2-8, troubleshoot DTC 8-3 first, then recheck for DTC ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
2-B.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). RLST (LT BLU)

Q
4. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds. =
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Wire'side of female terminals
/s DTC 2:8 indicated?

YES-Go to step 6.
YES-Go to step 11.
poor or loose connections between the suspension NO-Repair short to body ground in the wire
stroke sensor and the active damper control unit.. between the left-rear suspension stroke sensor, the
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. damper control unit.•
7. Disconnect the headlight leveling control unit 16P

connector.
8. Disconnect the left-rear suspension stroke sensor

3P connector.
9. Disconnect active damper control unit connector B

(14P).
(cont'd)
BACK
18-87
11. Check for continuity between left-rear suspension 13. Check for continuity between headlight leveling
stroke sensor 3P connector terminal No.2 and control unit 16P connector terminal No.5 and left"
active damper control unit connector B (14P) rear suspension stroke sensor 3P connector
LEFT-REAR SUSPENSION STROKE LEFT-REAR SUSPENSION STROKE

SENSOR3PCONNECTOR SENSOR3PCONNECTOR

ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P) UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
YES-Go'to step 12. , YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the left-rear NO-Repair open in the wire between the left-rear
suspension stroke sensor, and the active damper suspension stroke sensor and the headlight
control unit.• leveling control unit.•
12. Check for continuity between the appropriate

suspension stroke sensor terminals No.2 and
No.3.
LEFT-REAR SUSPENSION STROKE

SENSOR3PCONNECTOR
~
L~U~
QGRN

NO-Go to step 13.
BACK
18-88
14. Reconnectthe headlight leveling control unit 16P
connector.
16. Measure voltage between body ground and left-

rear suspension stroke sensor 3P connector
terminal No.1.
LEFT-REAR SUSPENSION STROKE

SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the suspension stroke sensor

(see page 22-229) .•
NO-Check the headlight leveling control system. If

necessary, substitute a known-good headlight
leveling control unit..
BACK
18-89
OTC 2-C: Right-rear/Left-rear Suspension 5. Check the SUS STROKE_S VOLTAGE (RR), or (LR)
Stroke Sensor Incorrect Correlation in the ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM DATA LIST with
the HDS while moving the suspension stroke
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. sensor arm through a complete stroke. Compare
the voltage/rotation angle between the chart and
2. Check that the right-rear and left-rear suspension the measurements.
stroke sensors are properly mounted (see page
22-229), and check for bent to damaged sensor NOTE: The voltage should increase (decrease)
links. within 90 degrees of the sensor arm rotation from
the first voltage change point.
NOTE: After troubleshooting for the left side
suspension stroke sensor, do the headlight initial ..
position learning procedure (see page 22-231). voltage/rotation angle chart
Are they OK? Range of sensor arm rotation:

4.5
YES-Go to step 3.
Sensor
NO-Reinstall or replace the appropriate output Voltage change
WI~:~ tPo=\=nt=1~~~~~
suspension stroke sensor, or linkage (see page
22-229) .•
•.
L :_ _ _ _
3. Remove the right-rear and left-rear suspension

stroke sensors (see page 22-229). Do not
disconnect the sensor connector. o

(see page 18-118) .•
NO-Replace the suspension stroke sensor

(see page 22-229) .•
BACK
18-90
DTC 3-1: Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal 6. Check for VSA system OTCs with the HOS
Acceleration Sensor Range/Performance (see page 19-43).
Problem (Yaw Rate Signal-Lateral
Acceleration Signal Incorrect Correlation) Is any OTC indicated?
DTC 3-3: Yaw Rate-Lateral/LongitLidinal YES-Go to the indicated VSA system OTC's
Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (Lateral troubleshooting ••
Acceleration Sensor)
NO-Go to step 7.
DTC 3-6: Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal
Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (Yaw Rate 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Sensor)
8. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral!
DTC 3-7: Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal longitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-100).
Acceleration Sensor Range/Performance
Problem (Wheel Speed Signeal-Longitudinal 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Acceleration Signal Incorrect Correlation)
DTC 3-9: Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal
Acceleration Sensor Malfunction 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(Longitudinal Acceleration Sensor)
12. Test-drive the vehicle around a corner for 2
DTC 3-A: Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal seconds or more.
Acceleration Sensor Malfunction
13. Check for OTCs with the HOS.
NOTE: If OTC 8-6 is stored at the same time,
troubleshoot OTC 8-6 first. Is OTC'3-1, 3-3, 3-6, 3-7, 3-9, or 3-A indicated?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES-Replace the active damper control unit
(see page 18-118).•
NO-Replace the original yaw rate-lateral!
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. logitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-100).•
4. Test-drive the vehicle around a corner for 2

seconds or more.
Is OTC 3-1,3-3,3-6,3-7,3-9, or 3-A indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.

poor or loose connections between the yaw rate-
lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor and the
BACK
18-91
DTC 3-4: Wheel Speed Signal Malfunction 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(from VSA Modulator-control Unit by F-CAN)
8. Substitute a konwn-good active damper control
NOTE: If DTC 8-6 is stored at the same time, unit (see page 18-118).
troubleshoot DTC 8-6 first.
12. Test-drive the vehicle around corners at 10 mph
4. Test-drive the vehicle around corners at 10 mph (15 kim) or more.
(15 kim) or more.'
YES-Go to step 6. (see page 19-102).•
NO-Intermittent failure at this time. Check for NO-Replace the original active damper control
poor or loose connections between the VSA unit (see page 18-118).•
medulator-control unit and the active damper
control unit.. '
6. Check for VSA system DTCs with the DTS (see page
19-43).
Is any DTC indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated VSA system DTC's

troubleShooting .•
NO-Go to step 7.
BACK
18-92
DTC 5-1: Active Damper Control Unit Internal 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Right-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck
ON 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
DTC 5-2: Active Damper Control Unit Internal 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Left-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck ON
DTC 5-3: Active Damper Control Unit Internal
Right-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
ON
Is DTC 5-1,5-2,5-3,5-4,7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5,
DTC 5-4: Active Damper Control Unit Internal 14-1, 14-2, 14-5, 14-6, 14-7, 14-8, 14-A, or 14-C
Left-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck ON indicated?
DTC 7-1: Active Damper Control Unit Internal YES-Replace the active damper control unit
Circuit Malfunction (see page 18-118).•
DTC 7-2: Active Damper Control Unit Internal NO-Intermittent failure at this time. Check for
Circuit Malfunction poor or loose connections at the active damper
control unit.
Circuit Malfunction
Circuit Malfunction
Circuit Malfunction
DTC 14-1: Active Damper Control Unit
Internal Circuit Malfunction

DTC 14-A: Active Damper Control Unit
DTC 14-C: Active Damper Control Unit
BACK
18-93
DTC 5-5: Active Damper Control Unit Internal 10. Disconnect active damper control unit connector A
Right-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck (20P).
OFF
Left-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck 12. Measure voltage between body groLind and the
OFF appropriate active damper control unit connector A
(20P) 'terminal.
Right-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck DTC Active Damper Control Unit
OFF Connector Terminal
5-5 No.6
DTC 5-8: Active Damper Control Unit Internal 5-6 No.4
Left-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Stuck OFF 5-7 No.2
5-8 No.1
2. Disconnect the appropriate damper coil 2P
connector, then reconnect the com'lector.
DTC Appropriate Damper Coil

5-5 Right-front
5-6 Left-front
5-7 Right-rear
5-8 Left-rear

5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. /s there battery voltage?
6. Start the engine. YES-Repair short to power in the wire between

the appropriate damper coil and the active damper
7. Do the DAMPER FORCE OPERATION in the ACTIVE control unit, then go to step 18.
DAMPER SYSTEM INSPECTION MENU with the
HDS. NO-Go to step 13.
Is OTe 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, or 5-8 indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.

poor or loose connections between the damper coil
and the active damper control unit.•
BACK
18-94
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 16. Check for continuity between the appropriate active
damper control unit connector A (20P) terminal and
14. Measure resistance between the appropriate active the appropriate damper coil 2P connector terminal
damper control unit connector A (20P) terminals No.1 (see table).
(see table).
DTC Active Damper Appropriate
DTC Active Damper Control Unit Control Unit Damper Coil
. Connector Terminal Connector
5-5 No.6 No. 16 Terminal
5-6 No.4 No.14 5-5 No.6 Right-front
5-7 No.2 No. 12 5-6 No.4 Left-front
5-8 No.1 No.11 5-7 No.2 Right-rear
5-8 No.1 Left-rear
DAMPER COIL 2P CONNECTOR
CRRL(YEL) CFLL(WHT)
Is the resistance between 0.6- 2.0 Q ?
YES-Check for loose terminals in the active ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
damper control unit connector A (20P). Ifthe Wire side of female terminals
terminals are OK, replace the active damper control
unit (see page 18-118), then go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 15.
YES-Go to step 17.
connector. NO-Repair open in the wire between the damper
coil and the active damper control unit, then go to
DTC Appropriate Damper Coil step 19.
5-5 Right-front
5-6 Left-front
5-7 Right-rear
5-8 Left-rear
(cont'd)
BACK
18-95
17. Check for continuity between the appropriate active 18. On the damper, check for continuity betweem the
damper control unit connector A (20P) terminal and appropriate damper coil terminals No.1 and No.2.
the appropriate damper coil 2P connector terminal
No.2 (see table).
DTC Appropriate Damp_er Coil
DTC Active Damper Appropriate 5-5 Right-front
Control Unit Damper Coil 5-6 Left-front
Connector 5-7 Right-rear
Terminal 5-8 Left-rear
5-5 No. 16 Right-front
5-6 No.14 Left-front DAMPER COIL 2P CONNECTOR
5-7 No. 12 Right-rear
5-8 No.11 Left-rear

~ ~ ~ ~
BLK BLK BLK BLK Terminal side of male terminals
YES-Repair open in the wire (CFRL, CFLL, CRRL,

Q or CRLL line) between the damper coil and active
damper control unit, then go to step 19.
NO-Replace the appropriate damper unit: Front

CRRL (YEll
(see page 18-24), rear (see page 18-42) then go to
step 20.
19. Turn the.ignition switch OFF.

YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the damper
step 20.
24. Do the DAMPER FORCE OPERATION in the ACTIVE
HDS.
Is any OTe indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. III
18..96
BACK
DTC 6-1: Active Damper Control Unit Internal 10. Disconnect the appropriate damper coil2P
Right-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current connector.
Lower Than Expected
DTC Ap~of)riate Damper Coil
DTC 6-2: Active Damper Control Unit Internal 6-1 Right-front
Left-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current 6-2 Left-front
Lower Than Expected 6-3 Right-rear
6-4 Left-rear
Right-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current 11. On the damper, measure the resistance between
Lower Than Expected the appropriate damper coil terminals No.1 and
No.2.
Left-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current DAMPER COIL 2P CONNECTOR
Lower Than Expected

connector, then reconnect the connector.

6-1 Right-front
6-2 Left-front
6-3 Right-rear Terminal side of male terminals
6-4 Left-rear
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the resistance between 0.6 - 2.0 Q ?
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES-Repair open or high resistance in the wires
between the damper coil and the active damper
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. control unit, then go to step 12.
6. Start the engine. NO-Replace the appropriate damper unit: Front

(see page 18-24), rear (see page 18-42) then go to
7. Do the DAMPER FORCE OPERATION in the ACTIVE step 12.
HDS.
Is DTe 6-1,6-2,6-3, or 6-4 indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.

poor or lose connections between the damper coil
(cont'd)
BACK
18-97

HDS.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete.•
18-98 BACK
DTC 6-5: Active Damper Control Unit Internal 10. Disconnect active damper control unit connector A
Right-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current (20P).
Higher Than Expected
11. Measure resistance between the appropriate active
DTC 6-6: Active Damper Control Unit Internal damper control unit connector A (20P) terminals
Left-front Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current (see table).
Higher Than Expected
DlC Active Damper Control Unit
DTC 6-7: Active Damper Control Unit Internal Connector Terminal
Right-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current 6-5 No.6 No.16
Higher Than Expected 6-6 No.4 No.14
6-7 No.2 No.12
DTC 6-8: Active Damper Control Unit Internal 6-8 No.1 No.11
Left-rear Damper Coil Drive Circuit Current
Higher Than Expected ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. CRRH(GRN)

connector, then reconnect the connector.
Q
6-5 Right-front
6-6 Left-front
CRRL(VEL) CFLL(WHT)
6-7 Right-rear
6-8 Left-rear Wire side of female terminals

Is the resistance between 0.6-2.09. ?
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (see page 18-118), then go to step 16.
6. Start the engine. NO-Go to step 12.
7. Do the DAMPER FORCE OPERATION in the ACTIVE 12. Disconnect the appropriate damper coil 2P
DAMPER SYSTEM INSPECTION MENU with the connector.
HDS.
8. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 6-5 Right-front
6-6 Left-front
Is DTC 6-5, 6-6, 6-7, or 6-8 indicated? 6-7 Right-rear
6-8 Left-rear
YES-Go to step 9.

poor or loose connections between the damper
coil and the active damper control unit.•
(cont'd)
BACK 18-99
13. Check for continuity between body ground and the 14. Check for continuity between the appropriate active
appropriate damper coil 2P connector terminals damper control unit connector A (20P) terminal and
No.1 and No.2 individually (see table). the appropriate damper coil 2P connector terminal
No.1 (see table).
DTC Damper Coil
Sign/Terminal Sign/Terminal DTC Active Damper Appropriate Damper
6-5 CFRH/No.1 CFRL/No.2 Control Unit Coil
6-6 CFLH/No.1 CFLL/No.2 Connector Terminal
6-7 CRRH/No.1 CRRL/No.2 6-5 No.6 Right-front
6-8 CRLH/No.1 CRLL/No.2 6-6 No.4 . Left-front
6-7 No.2 Right-rear
DAMPER COIL 2P CONNECTOR 6-8 No.1 Left-rear

Is there cqntinuity?
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the appropriate damper coil and active ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
damper control unit, then go to step 16. Wire side of female terminals
NO-Go to step 14.

YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the damper

step 16.
18-100 BACK
15. Check for continuity between the appropriate 16. Reconnect all connectors.
damper coil 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2
(see table). 17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
DTC DamJler Coil 18. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Sign/Terminal Sign/Terminal
6-5 CFRH/No.1 CFRLJNo.2 19. Start the engine.
6-6 CFLH/No.1 CFLLJNo.2
6-7 CRRH/No.1 CRRLJNo.2 20. Do the DAMPER FORCE OPERATION in the ACTIVE
6-8 CRLH/No.1 CRLLJNo.2 DAMPER SYSTEM.lNSPECTION MENU with the
HDS.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete.'.

appropriate damper coil and the active damper
control unit, then go to step 16.
NO-Replace the appropriate damper unit: Front

(see page 18-24), rear (see page 18-42), then go to
step 16.
BACK 18-101
DTC 6-9: Active Damper Control Unit Power 8. Measure voltage between active damper control
Source Circuit (+8) Low Voltage unit connector A (20P) terminals No. 10 and No 18.

ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A 120PI
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. VB ILT BLUI
4. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds;

poor or loose connections between the main under- Is there battery voltage?
hood fuse box and the active damper control unit.
Check for a loose or poor ground at G302 and YES-Replace the active damper control unit
G401 .• (see page 18-118), then go to step 9.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO-Repair open in the wire between the active
damper control unit and the No.5 (30 A) fuse in the
7. Check the No.5 (30 A) fuse in the main under-hood main under-hood fuse box, or an open or poor
fuse box. connection between active damper control unit
connector A terminal No. 18 and body ground
Is the fuse blown? (G302), then go to step 9.
YES-Check for short to ground in the LT BLU wire

between the main under-hood fuse box and the
active damper control unit, then replace the fuse .•
NO-Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 8.
18-102 BACK

HDS.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete .•
BACK
18-103
Act iv.e Damper System
DTC 7·6: Active Damper Control Unit Internal 10. Check for continuity between the active damper
Circuit Malfunction (Fail Safe Relay Stuck On) control unit connector A (20P) terminals
individually.
NOTE: The fail safe relay is built into the active damper
control unit. ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
2. Check that the all four damper coil 2P connectors

are properly connected.
.Q
Are the connectors OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
CRRL(YEL)
NO-Reconnect and check the connectors, then go Wire side of female terminals
to step 12.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES-Check for poor or loose connections in the
active damper control unit, clean body ground
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. terminals G302 and G401. If the connections and
the terminal are OK, replace the active damper
6. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds. control unit (see page 18-118), then go to step 11.
7. Check for DTCs with the HDS. NO-Repair open in the wires between the damper
coil and active damper control unit, then go to
Is DTC 7-6 indicated? step 11.
NO-Intermittent failure at this time. Check for 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
and the active damper control unit.• 13. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Start the engine.
9. Disconnect active damper control unit connector A 15. Do the DAMPER FORCE OPERATION in the ACTIVE
(20P). DAMPER SYSTEM INSPECTION MENU with the
HDS.
16. Check for DTC's with the HDS.
18-104 BACK
DTC 7-9: Active Damper Control Unit Internal 8. Check for continuity between the active damper
Circuit Malfunction control unit connector A (20P) terminals
individually.
NOTE: If DTC 5-5, DTC 5-6, DTC 5-7, or DTC 5-8 stored at
the same time as DTC 7-9; troubleshoot DTC 5-5, DTC ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
5-6, DTC 5-7, or DTC 5-8 first, then recheck for DTC 7-9.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Intermittent failure at this time. Check for (see page 18-118), then go to step 11.
and the active damper control unit.• NO-Go to step 9.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Disconnect the appropriate damper coil 2P
connector.
(20P).
(cont'd)
BACK
18-105
Active·Damper System
10. On the damper, check for continuity between 11. Reconnect all connectors.
damper coil 2P connect or terminals No.1
and No.2 for all four dampers. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).


HDS.
Is any ore indicated?

Terminal side of male terminals YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
YES-Repair open in the wire between the damper

coil and active damper control unit, then go to
step 11.
NO-Replace the damper unit: Front (see page

18-24), rear (see page 18-42), then go to step 11.
18-106 BACK
DTC 8-2: Sensor Reference Voltage 16. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Malfunction (SVCC Line)
18. Disconnect the front vertical acceleration sensor 3P
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 19. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds.
4. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds. 20. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is DTC 8-2 indicated?
Is DTC 8-2 indicated? YES-Go to step 21.
YES-Go to step 6. NO-Replace the front vertical acceleration sensor

(see page 18-119).•
poor or loose connections between the vertical 21. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
acceleration sensor, the suspension stroke sensor,
and the active damper control unit.• 22. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 23. Disconnect the right-rear vertical acceleration
8. Disconnect the right-front suspension stroke sensor
3P connector. 25. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
9. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds. Is DTC 8-2 indicated?
10. Check for DTCs with the HDS. YES-Go to step 26.
Is DTC 8-2 indicated? NO-Replace the right-rear vertical acceleration

YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Replace the right-front suspension stroke
sensor (see page 22-229) .• 27. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 28. Disconnect the left-rear vertical acceleration sensor
3P connector.
13. Disconnect the right-rear suspension stroke sensor
3P connector. 30. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
14. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds. Is DTC 8-2 indicated?
Is DTC 8-2 indicated? NO-Replace the left-rear vertical acceleration

YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Replace the right-rear suspension stroke (cont'd)

BACK
18-107
Active~Damper System
31. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC 8-3: Sensor Reference Voltage
Malfunction (HVCC Line)
(14P). 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
33. Check for continuity between body ground and 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
active damper control unit connector B (14P)
terminal No.4. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
SVCC(PNK)
Q YES-Go to step 6.
= NO-Intermittent failure at this time. Check for

Wire side of female terminals poor or loose connections between the suspension
stroke sensor, the headlight leveling control unit,
Is there continuity? and the active damper control unit.•
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
between the right-front/right-rear suspension
stroke sensors, the front/right-rear/left-rear vertical 7. Disconnect the headlight leveling control unit 16P
acceleration sensors, and the active damper control connector.
unit..
8. Disconnect the left-front suspension stroke sensor
NO-Go to step 34. 3P connector.
34. Check for continuity between active damper control 9. Disconnect active damper control unit connector B
unit connector B (14P) terminals No.4 and No. 11. (14P) connector.
SVCC(PNK)
SG(GRY)
YES-Repair short in the wires.•

(see page 18-118).•
BACK
18-108
10. Check for continuity between body ground and 14. Check the HVCC VOLTAGE in the ACTIVE DAMPER
active damper control unit connector B (14P) SYSTEM DATA LIST with the HDS.
terminal No.6.
Is there 4.36 V or more indicated?
HVCC(PNK)
(see page 18-118) .•
NO-Go to step 15.

Q
16. Substitute a known-good headlight leveling control
Wire side of female terminals unit.

between the left-front suspension stroke sensor,
the headlight leveling control unit, and the active
damper control unit..
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Check for continuity between the headlight leveling
control unit connector (16P) terminal No. 13 and
terminals No.4 and No. 12 individually.
(see page 18-118).•
UNIT 16P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals NO-Replace the original headlight leveling control
unit.•
YES-Repair short between the wires .•
NO-Go to step 12.
BACK 18-109
DTC 8-5: F-CAN Malfunction (Active Damper 11. Check for continuity between the active damper
Control Unit Lost Communication with Yaw control unit connector B (14P) terminals and the
Rate-lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P
Sensor) connector terminals individually (see table).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Sign Active Damper Yaw Rate-lateral
Control Unit ILongitudinal
2. Clear the active damper system, and VSA system Connector Acceleration
DTC with the HDS. Terminal Sensor Terminal
CAN L No.8 No.2
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. CANH No.1 No.3
4. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds. ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Intermittent failure at this time. Check for .Q

poor or loose connections between the yaw rate-
lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor and the
CANH
(WHT)
6. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS
(see page 19-43).
Are any VSA system OTCs indicated? ACCELERATION SENSOR
4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to the indicated VSA DTC's
NO-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the yaw rate-
8. Wait 30 seconds or more. lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor and the
acceleration sensor 4P connector.

(14P) connector.
18-110 BACK
12. Substitute a known-good active damper control DTC 8-6: F-CAN Malfunction (Active Damper
unit (see page 18-118). Control Unit Lost Communication with VSA
Modulator-control Unit)
Is orc 8-5 indicated?
Is orc 8-6 indicated?
YES-Replace the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor (see page 19-100) .• YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the original active damper control NO-Intermittent failure at this time. Check for
unit (see page 18-118).• poor or loose connections between the VSA
modulator-control unit and the active damper
control unit.•
6. Check for VSA system DTCs with the HDS

(see page 19-43).
Are any VSA system orcs indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting,

then go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 7.
8. Wait 30 seconds or more.

connector.

(14P) connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-111
11. Check for continuity between the active damper' 12. Substitute a known-good active damper control
control unit connector B (14P) terminals and the unit (see page 18-118).
VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
terminals individually (see table). 13. Reconnect all connectors.
Sign Active Damper VSA Modulator- 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Control Unit control Unit
Connector Terminal 15. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Terminal
CAN L No.8 No. 38 16. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds.
CANH No.1 No. 39
Wire side of female terminals Is OTe 8-6 indicated?
8 8 101112 16
:182830 84 1I1388940 YES-Replacement the VSA modulatorccontrol unit
(see page 19-102).•
NO-Replacement the original active damper

control unit (see page 18-118) .•

YES-Go to step 12

modulator-control unit and the active damper
control unit..
18-112 BACK
DTC 14-8: Active Damper Control Unit Power 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Supply Circuit Malfunction
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. DAMPER SYSTEM INSPECTION MENU with the
HDS.
3. Start the engine, and raise the engine speed to
2,000 rpm. 11. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
4. Check and note IG1 VOLTAGE in the ACTIVE Is any DTC indicated?
DAMPER SYSTEM DATA LIST with the HDS within
40 seconds after starting the engine. YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
Was there within 9.:r 17.5 V for 30 seconds NO-Troubleshooting is complete .•

continuously?
YES-Go to step 9
NO-Go to step 5.
5. Wait 40 seconds.
6. Start the engine, then raise the engine speed to

2,000 rpms.
7. Measure voltage between active damper

control unit connector A (20P) terminal No.8
and terminal No. 18.
IG1 (GRN)
YES-If the voltage is above 17.5 V, check the

battery (see page 22-76) and troubleshoot the
alternator regulator circuit (see page 4-30), then
go to step 8. If the voltage is normal, replace
the active damper control unit (see page 18-118).
NO-Repair poor connection between under-dash

fuse/relay box connector F (14P) terminal No.8,
and active damper control unit connector A (20P)
terminal No.8, or poor ground at G302 and G401,
then go to step 8.
BACK 18-113
Active damper system indicator does not go 5. Measure voltage between body ground and active
off, and no DTCs are stored damper control unit connector A (20P) terminals
No.8, and No. 10.
NOTE: Check for gauges DTCs with the HDS (see page
22-3). If gauges DTCs are stored, troubleshoot those ACTIVE DAMPER CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
DTCs first.
1. Check for the communication between the vehicle IG1 (GRN)

and the HDS.
Is there communication with al/ vehicle systems?
YES-Check for loose terminals in the gauge

control module connector A (12P). If necessary,
substitute a known-good gauge control module, =
then recheck. If it is OK, replace the original gauge
control module (see page 22-337) .•
NO-If the HDS does not communicate with all the Is there battery voltage?
systems of the vehicle, troubleshoot the DLC circuit
(see page 11-223). If the HDS does not YES-Go to step 6.
communicate with only the active damper control
unit, go to step 2. NO-Repair open in the wire between the active
damper control unit and the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse in
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. the under-dash fuse/relay box or between the
active damper control unit and the under-dash
3. Check the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse fuse/relay box.•
/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Install the No.20 (7.5 A) fuse, and recheck. If

the fuse continues to blow, check for short to body
ground in the wire between the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse
18-114 BACK
6. Measure voltage between body ground and active 10. Check for continuity between the active damper
damper control unit connector A (20P) terminal control unit connector B (14P) terminals and the
No. 18 and No. 19 individually. gauge control module connector A (12P) terminals
individually (see table).
Sign Active Damper Gauge Control
Control Unit Module Terminal
Connector
Terminal
CAN L No.8 No.6
CANH No.1 No.12

=
YES-Go to step 7. Q
NO-Repair open in the wire between the active

damper control unit and body ground (G401 or
G302) .•

(12P).
(20P). YES-Check for loose terminals in the active
damper control unit connectors A (20P)/B (14P). If
necessary, substitute a known-good active damper
control unit, then recheck. If it is OK, replace the
original active damper control unit (see page
18-118).•

control module and the active damper control
unit.•
BACK
18-115
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd)
Active damper system switch does not work 8. Measure voltage between body ground and gauge
(damper mode cannot be selected) control module 'connector B (24P) terminal No. 19.

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR B 124P)
2. Check for the ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM SWITCH

in the ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM DATA LIST with
the HDS when pushing the active damper system
switch.
Does the indicator change from ON (OFF) to OFF

(ON)?
=
YES-Check for loose tei-minals in the gauge
control module connector B (24P). If necessary, Wire side of female terminals
substitute a known-good gauge control :module,
then recheck. If it is OK, replace the original gauge
control module (see page 22-337) .• Is there battery voltage?
NO-Go to step 3. YES-Check for loose terminals in the gauge

control module connector B (24P). If necessarY,
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. substitute a known-good gauge control module,
thEm recheck. If it is OK, replace the original gauge
4. Check the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse control module (see page 22-337).•
/relay box.
NO-Go to step 9.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the blown fuse .•
5. Disconnect gauge control module connector B

(24P).
7. Push the active damper system switch, and turn it

ON.
BACK
18-116
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Check for continuity between gauge control module
connector B (24P) terminal No. 19 and the active
10. Disconnect active damper system switch 5P damper system switch 5P connector terminal No.1.
connector.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR B (24P)
11. Check the active damper system switch (see page
18-121).
Is the active damper system switch OK?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Replace the active damper system switch

(see page 18-121) .•
13. Measure voltage between body ground and active ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
damper system switch 5P connector terminal No.2. Wire side of female terminals
ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 15.

control modulator and the active damper system
switch .•
= 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
16. Measure voltage between body ground and active
damper system switch 5P connector terminal No.1.
ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 14.

under-dash fuse/relay box and the active damper
switch .•
=

the gauge control module and the active damper
system switch .•
NO-Check for loose terminals in the active

damper control unit connectors A (20P)/B (14P). If
necessary, substitute a known-good active damper
control unit, then recheck. If it is OK, replace the
original active damper control unit (see page
18-118).•
BACK
18-117
Active Damper Control Unit Replacement
2. Remove the cargo rear trim panel (see page 20-90).
3. Remove the mounting bolts ,and move the active

damper control unit (A).
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf.ftl
4. Disconnect the active damper control unit

connectors (B).
5. Install the active damper control unit in the reverse

order of removal.
NOTE: Do not pinch the wire harnesses between

the frame and the active damper control unit.
6. Do the memorizing rear suspension full rebound

position (see page 18-54).
7. Start the engine, then make sure there are no active

damper system DTCs with the HDS (see page
18-53).

HDS, then make sure the all four damper units
function normally.
9. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the active

damper system indicator does not come on
(see page 18-51).
BACK
18-118
Vertical Acceleration Sensor Replacement
NOTE: This vehicle has one front vertical acceleration Rear

sensor, and two rear vertical acceleration sensors on
both right and left sides. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Front 2. Remove the appropriate side of the rear side trim

panel (see page 20-92).
3. Remove the sensor mounting nuts, and move the
2. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover vertical acceleration sensor (A).
(see page 20-120).
NOTE: The illustration shows the left side of the
3. Remove the TPMS control unit (see page 18-162). vehicle, the right side is similar.
4. Remove the sensor mounting nuts, and move the

vertical acceleration sensor (A).
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
4. Disconnect the vertical acceleration sensor

connector (8).
5. Install the vertical acceleration sensor in the

5. Disconnect the vertical acceleration sensor
connector (8). 6. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the active
6. Install the vertical acceleration sensor in the (see page 18-51).
7. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the active

(see page 18-51).
BACK 18-119
·. .

Vertical Acceleration Sensor Inspectio'n
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 6. Ifthe voltages shown on the HDS are within the
specified voltage in the all positions, the sensor is
2. Remove the vertical acceleration sensor (see page OK. If the voltages are out of specification in only
18-119). Do not disconnect the sensor connector. one position, the sensor is fault.
3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(see page 18-53).
8. Install the vertical acceleration sensor in the proper
4. Start the engine, and wait 5 seconds. position (see page 18-119).
5. With the HDS, check the VERTICAL_S VOLTAGE (F),

(RR), or (LR) in the active damper system DATA
LIST at a "normal", "lay down", and "top down"
each sensor positions by moving it (see table).
NORMAL POSITION
UPPER
LAY DOWN POSITION

UPPER
t ~.~
TOP DOWN POSITION
UPPER
,t
Sensor position Specified voltage

Normal 2.2-2.8 V
Lay down 3.2-3.8 V
Top down 4.2-4.8 V
18~120
BACK
Active Damper System Switch Test
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Check for continuity between the active damper
system switch terminals in each switch position
2. Remove the center console (see page 20-107). according to the table.
3. Push out the active damper system switch (A) from ACTIVE DAMPER SYSTEM
SWITCH 5P CONNECTTOR
the back of center console.
Terminal
Position
OFF
ON
6. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the

illumination bulb or the switch.
4. Disconnect the active damper system switch

connector (8).
BACK 18-121
BACK
Suspension
Front and Rear Suspension ............................. 18-2
Front Suspension ............................................. 18-12
Rear Suspension ............................................... 18-29
Active Damper System .. .................................. 18-49
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor 10 ................... 18-128
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 18-136
DTC Troubleshooting ............................................... ~ ... 18-139
TPMS Control Unit Replacement ................................ 18-162
Initiator Replacement ................................................... 18-163
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement ............................ 18-164
BACK
TPMS
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
RIGHT-REAR INITIATOR
MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
::
I
.
LEFT-REAR INITIATOR
Replacement,
page 18-163
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR

Replacement,
page 18-164
RIGHT-FRONT
INITIATOR
Replacement,
page 18-163
TPMS CONTROL UNIT

LEFT-FRONT INITIATOR
18-124 BACK
General Troubleshooting Inform~tion
System Indicator Location. Ifthe system is OK, the low pressure indieator: should
come on when you turn the ignition switch ON (11), and
The system hass!x indicators. then go off 2 seconds later. If it doesn't, there is a
problem with the system.
• The low pressure indicator (A)
• The TPMS indicator (B) If the system detects low pressure in any of the four
• The right-front (RF) til;e indicator (C) tires, the low pressure indicator and the appropriate tire
• The left-front (LF) tire indicator (D) indicator(s) will come on, and the control unit will set
• The right-rear (RR) tire indicator (E) one or more of these codes:
• The left-rear (LR) tire indicator (F) DTC 11, 13, 15, 17. When the tire pressure returns to
normal, the control unit will turn off the indicators and
store the DTC(s). However, if the control unit detects a
problem in the system during an indication. of low tire
pressure, it will turn off the low pressure indicator and
tire indicators, store the DTC(s), and turn on the TPMS
indicator.
NOTE: Tire pressures will increase slightly as the

temperature in the tires rises during driving at highway
speeds. Pressures will also increase or decrease
slightly with changes in outside air temperature.
A temperature change of about 18 of (10°C) will change
tire pressure by about 10 kPa (0.1 kgf/cm2, 1.5 psi). If the
temperature drops, tire pressure could decrease just
enough to turn on the low pressure indicator and tire
indicator(s), but later as tire temperature increases, the
tire pressure could increase enough to turn them off. To
resolve a complaint of such intermittent indications,
confirm and clear the stored DTC(s) and check the tire
pressures. Then explain to the customer how
temperature changes can affect the system, especially
when tire pressures are near the low end ofthe TPMS
A normal range - 168 to 220 kPa (1.7 to 2~2 kgf/cm2, 24 to
32 psi).
How TPMS Works If a problem i~ detected in the system, most DTCs will
cause the TPMS indicatortocome on and stay on until
The TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) has six the system returns to normal. If DTC 45, 61, 63, 65, 67,
indicators: four tire indicators (on the multi-information 81,83, or 85 is set, the TPMS indicator will go off only
display), a low pressure indicator (LED indicator), and a when the ignition switch is turned off.
TPMS indicator (on the multi-information display).
When the TPMS control unit detects low pressure in a If a flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, and the flat
tire, or a problem in the system, it turns on the tire is stored in the trunk area or the cabin, the low
appropriate indicator(s). pressure indicator will stay on, but the appropriate tire
indicator will go off. This prevents the client from
• If low tire pressure is detected, the low pressure thinking there is a problem with the spare tire. When
indicator and the appropriate tire indicator(s) come the flat tire is taken out of the vehicle for repair, the
on. TPMS indicator will come on (DTC 32, 34, 36, or 38)
• If a problem in the system is detected, the TPMS because the system is no longer receiving the signal
indicator comes on. from the tire's transmitter.
• If low tire pressure and a problem in the system are
detected, only the TPMS indicator comes on.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-125
TPMS
Problems That Are Not System Faults How to Troubleshoot DTCs
o Tire Sealant DTC troubleshooting procedures assume the cause of .

Fluid sealant used to repair a punctured tire can the problem is still present and the TPMS indicator is
damage the tire pressure sensor mounted on each still on. (NOTE: The TPMS indicator comes on for DTCs
wheel. It can prevent the system from detecting the 11,13,15, and 17 only if the low tire pressure indication
correcttire pressure, which sets a DTC 11, 13, 15, or is false, caused by a problem in the system.) Do not use
17 even though the system is normal. a troubleshooting procedure unless the system has set
o Cold Weather the DTC listed for it.
When the weather is extremely cold - about -40 'f
(-40 "C) or colder -the output of the lithium battery 1. Ask the customer to describe the conditions when
in each tire pressure sensor may drop far enough that the indicator came on, and try to reproduce the
the control unit sets a DTC for low battery voltage (31, same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out ifthe
33,35, or 37) even though the system is normal. customer checked and/or adjusted tire pressures
o Non-TPMS Wheels since the indicator came on.
Vehicles equipped with TPMS must use wheels made
for the system. Every TPMS wheel has an exclusive 2. If an indicator does not come on during the test-
mark; do not use any other type of wheel. drive, check for loose terminals, poor contact due
to damaged terminals, etc. before you start
How a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)is Set troubleshooting.
o When the system detects a problem, the TPMS 3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs, and test-
control unit sets a code, but shifts to fail-safe mode, drive the vehicle. Make sure no indicators come on.
andwill not alert the driver to low tire pressures.
o If the TPMS control unit loses power, or fails; the 4. Check for other unit DTCs which are connected via
TPMS indicator will come on, but no DTC will be set. F-CAN.lfthere are DTCs that are related to F-CAN,
o The memory can hold all the DTCs that could the most likely cause was that the ignition switch
possibly be set. However, when the same DTC is was turned ON (II) with the TPMS control unit
detected more than once, the most recent one connector disconnected. Clear the DTCs. Check for
overwrites the previous one, so only the latest DTC of PGM-FI and TPMS codes, and troubleshoot those
each type is stored. first.
o DTCsare indicated in ascending order, not in the·
order they occurred.
o Set DTCs are stored in the EEPROM (nonvolatile
memory), they cannot be cleared by disconnecting
the battery. To clear a DTC, connectthe HDS (Honda
Diagnostic System) to the data link connector (DLC),
and follow the screen prompts.
18-126 BACK
How to Retrieve DTCs How to Clear .DTCs
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to
(Honda Diagnostic System) to the data link the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the
connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side dash on the driver's side of the dashboard.
ofthe dashboard.

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't,
and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-223).
4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the onthe HDS.
DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC,
refer to the DTC Troubleshooting. NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
instructions.
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
instructions. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
BACK 18-127
,z·
TPMS
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor 10
Memorizing a Tire Pressure Sensor 10 Memorize the 10 with the HOS
When a tire pressure sensor is replaced, the sensor 10 The HOS can memorize the 10 of a new tire pressure
must be memorized by the TPMS control unit sensor or a previously memorized 10.
NOTE: To ensure the control unit memorizes the correct 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HOS to
10, the vehicle with the new sensor must be at least 10 ft the data link connector (OLC) (A) located under the
(3 m) from any other TPMS pressure sensor not driver's side of the dashboard.
installed on that vehicle.
Memorizing a Sensor 10 Automatically
After rotating the tires or replacing a tire pressure

sensor, drive the vehicle for at least 40 seconds at a
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or more, and all the sensor
IDs will be memorized automatically.
NOTE:
• When replacing the TPMS control unit, use the HOS
to memorize IDs.
• After the IDs are memorized, reduce the pressure in
all four tires to less than the appropriate specification,
and check to see that the four tire indicators come on.
3. Make sure the HOS communicates with thevehicle

and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't,
troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page 11-223).
4. Memorize the 10 of the tire pressure sensor by

following the screen prompts on the HOS.
NOTE:
• See the HOS Help menu for specific instructions.
• When replacing the TPMS control unit, use the
HOS to memorize IDs.
• After the IDs are memorized, reduce the pressure
in all four tires to less than the appropriate
specification, and check to see that the four tire
indicators come on.
18-128 BACK
DTe Troubleshooting Index
DTC Detection Item Troubleshooting

11 Right-front low tire pressure (see page 18-139)
13 Left-front low tire pressure (see page 18-139)
15 Right-rear low tire pressure (see page 18-139)
17 Left-rear low tire pressure (see page 18-139)
21 Right-front abnormally high tire sensor temperature (see page 18-140)
22 Left-front abnormally high tire sensor temperature (see page 18-140)
23 Right-rear abnormally high tire sensor temperature (see page 18-140)
24 Left-rear abnormally high tire sensor temperature (see page 18~140)
31 Right-front tire pressure sensor low battery voltage (see page 18-140)
32 Right-front tire pressure sensor transmitting failure (see page 18-141)
33 Left-front tire pressure sensor low battery voltage (see page 18-140)
34 Left-front tire pressure sensor transmitting failure (see page 18-141)
35 Right-rear tire pressure sensor low battery voltage (see page 18-140)
36 Right-rear tire pressure sensor transmitting failure (see page 18-141)
37 Left-rear tire pressure sensor low battery voltage (see page 18-140)
38 Left-rear tire pressure sensor transmitting failure (see page 18-141)
41 Abnormal signal reception error (see page 18-145)
45 Initiator circuit short detection (see page 18-146)
51 Right-front initialization status ofTPMS control unit is not completed (see page 18-148)
53 Left-front initialization status ofTPMS control unit is not completed (see page 18-148)
55 Right-rear initialization status of TPMS control unit is not completed (see page 18-148)
57 Left-rear initialization status ofTPMS control unit is not completed (see page 18-148)
61 Right-front initiator circuit open detection (see page 18-152)
63 Left-front initiator circuit open detection (see page 18-152)
65 Right-rear initiator circuit open detection (see page 18-152)
67 Left-rear initiator circuit open detection (see page 18-152)
81 TPMS control unit failure check (see page 18-155)
83 No VSP signal (see page 18-155)
85 CAN data error (see page 18-156)
91 Right-front tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-157)
93 Left-front tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-157)
95 Right-rear tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-157)
97 Left-rear tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-157)
BACK 18-129
TPMS

HDS does not communicate with the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-223)
TPMS control unit or the vehicle
Low pressure indicator does not come on, Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-158)
and no DTCs are stored
Low pressure indicator does not go off, SymptomTroubleshooting (see page 18-159)
and no DTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not come on, and no Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-159)
DTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-160)
DTCs are stored
18-130 BACK
System Description
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs 20P Connector

number (Terminal name) Terminal Conditions Voltage
1 WHT CAN H(CAN Sends the -- Ignition switch Pulses
communication communication ON (II)
signal high) signal
4 BLK GND (Ground) Ground for the 4-GND At all times Less than 0.1 V
TPMS control unit
5 GRV LF LFSIG. Sends the signal to 5-GND For the first 5- PulsesO-2V
(LFlow the left-front 16 seconds after
frequency initiator turning the
signal) ignition switch
ON (II)
With ignition Less than 0.1 V
switch ON (II) for
more than 5-16
seconds
6 LTGRN RF LFSIG. Sends the signal to 6-GND For the first 5- PulsesO-2V
(RF low the right-front 16 seconds after
ON (II)
switch ON (II) for
more than 5-16
seconds
7 LTBLU K-UNE (Data link Communications -- -- --
connector) with the HDS
8 VEL IG1 (Ignition Power source for 8-GND Ignition switch Battery voltage
switch 1) activating the ON (II)
system Ignition switch Less than 0.1 V
OFF
10 WHT +B (Battery Power source for 10-GND At all times Battery voltage
positive) the TPMS control
unit
(cont'd)
BACK 18-131
TPMS
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs 20P Connector (cont'd)

number' (Terminal name) Terminal Conditions Voltage
11 RED CAN L(CAN Sends the -.- Ignition switch Pulses
communication communication ON (II)
signal low) signal
15 LTBLU LFGND Ground for the 15-GND Ignition switch Less than 0.1 V
(LFlow initiators ON (II)
frequency
ground)
16 PNK LR LF SIG. Sends the signal to 16-GND For the first 5- Pulses 0-2V
(LR low the left-rear 16 seconds after
ON (II)
switch ON (II) for
more than 5-16
seconds
17 GRY RR LF SIG. Sends the signal to 17-GND For the first 5- Pulses 0-2V
(RR low the right-rear 16 seconds after
ON (II)
switch ON (II) for
more than 5-16
seconds
20 BRN LF PWR. Power source for 20-GND For 5 seconds About7V
(LF low the initiators with ignition
frequency switch ON (II)
power) After 5 seconds --
with ignition
switch ON (II)
18-132 BACK
System Structure
Whenever the engine is running, the TPMScontrol unit continuously monitors all four tires and the system. If it detects
low pressure in a tire, it alerts the driver by turning on the low pressure indicator and the appropriate tire indicator. If it
detects a problem in the system, it turns on the TPMS indicator. '
Initiators
Mounted on each wheel well, each initiator sends a start/stop signal to the tire pressure sensor in the tire below it.
Control unit
Mounted on the brake pedal bracket, the control unit sends signals to the initiators and receives signals from them to
verify pressure sensor IDs every time the engine starts. It also receives signals from the transmitters in the tire
pressure sensors, and it continuously monitors and controls the system.
Indicators
All indicators are in the gauge control module: The low pressure indicator (LED indicator), four tire indicators (on the
multi-information display) to show which tire is affected, and the TPMS indicator (on the multi-information display)
that comes on only if there's a problem with the system. When two or more tire pressures are low, the low pressure
indicator comes on about 5 seconds before the appropriate tire indicator. Once low pressure is detected, the system
scans all four pressure sensors to ensure that it turns onthe correct tire indicator.
Initiator Initiator
(low frequency) Vehicle (low frequency)
Gauge Control Module
Indicators
(LED and multi-
-------
Tire Pressure Sensor
(sensor-transmitter)
information
display drive) ~Tire Pressure Sensor
Wheel Control Unit Wheel

(TPMStype) (with radio (TPMStype)
frequency antenna)
-------
Tire Pressure Sensor
~Tire Pressure Sensor
/
Wheel
Initiator
(low frequency)
Initiator
(low frequency)
Wheel
(TPMStype) (TPMStype)
(cont'd)
BACK 18-133
TPMS "
Tire pressure sensor

Each sensor is an integrated unit made up ofthe tire valve stem, a pressure sensor, and a transmitter. The unit is
attached to the .insideofthe wheel, around the valve stem. The sensor transmits the internal tire information to the.
control unit once every eo. seconds. When the TPMS control unit receives tire.pressure of less than 175 kPa
(1.8 kgf/cm2, 25 psi), the control unit then turns on the low pressure indicator and the appropriate tire(s) indicator.
When that tire's pressure is increased to more than 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2, 29 psi), the transmitter sends tire pressure to
the control unit, and then the control unit turns the indicators off.
Wheels
The TPMS will not work unless TPMS type wheels are installed on the vehicle. The original equipment wheels have a
''TPMS'' stamp (A) on the back of the wheel and counterweights (B) cast into the opposite side of the spoke to balance
the weightof the tire pressure sensor (C).
NOTE: The vehicle is equipped with either wheel as shown.

..- ..- .. .. """"
~ -
(.~c
A
".-- .. - .. _ ..- ..........

( ~c
18-134 BACK
System Communication
• When the vehicle is running, a RF (radio frequency) band wave signal is continuously transmitted from each tire
pressure sensor to the control unit.
• When the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the initiators send a LF (low frequency) band wave signal to the tire
pressure sensors, switching them from sleep mode to normal function mode. When the ignition switch is turned
OFF, the sensors switch from normal function mode back to sleep mode to extend their battery life.
• Each tire pressure sensor has its own 10 to prevent jamming by similar systems on other vehicles. After memorizing
all the sensor IDs, the control unit receives only those specific signals.
• An 10 can be memorized manually or automatically. Each initiator is hardwired to the control unit. Every time the
ignition is turned ON (11), the control unit asks each initiator for a sensor 10. The initiators then transmit the sensor
IDs, and the control unit receives and memorizes them. The control unit then knows which 10 belongs to each tire
location. This recurring 10 confirmation prevents any confusion in the system as a result of normal tire rotation.
NOTE: Be careful not to bend the brackets on the TPMS control unit and the front initiators. Misalignment of the
control unit and initiators could interfere with sending and receiving signals.
Control Unit
(with Radio Frequency Antenna)
Initiator Tire Pressure Sensor

(Low Frequency Initiatorl (Sensor-transmitter)
BACK 18-135
TPMS·
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
+ MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 2 (40 Al B2 No.1 (7.5 A) -,X23
PUR ,..J
WHT----
IGNmON SWrrCH
~
No.1 (120 A) No.3 (50 A) A6 No. 21 (7.5 Al
--cT\. WHT PNK
i C3
,..J YEL - - - - -
IG1 HOTIn ON ()
II and START (III)
ri POWER CIRCUrr
LOW PRESSURE INDICATOR

~ INDICATOR
- A12
WHT - - - - -. .- - - - - W H T - - - - -
~
DRIVER
CIRcurr
,J,.
- A6
RED -----+-..- - - R E D - - - - -
@ TPMS INDICATOR
@ LFTIRE INDICATOR
@ RF TIRE INDICATOR
@ LR TIRE INDICATOR
@ RR TIRE INDICATOR
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY
n
PCM
~:
WHT
RED
- 6
WHT
14
RED
LTBLU
DATAUNK
CONNECTOR (DLC) 5
-
4
~==v
BLK
G503
18-136 BACK
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
--------------------------------------------------WHT 10 ~
+B
----------------------------------------------------VEL
8
IG1
-cl 7Jr
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
I
1
--------------------------------------------------WHT CANH
~
CAN
CONTROLLER
-------------------------------------------------------RED
11
CANL -
INITIATOR
I
LEFT-FRONT
LFSIGNAL
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
r 1
LFPWR.
2
3
BRN
LTBLU
BRN
GRV
20
LFPWR.
5
LFLFSIG.
LFGND
INITIATOR
r
RIGHT-FRONT 1
BRN
LFPWR.
[ LFSIGNAL 2 6
DRIVER LTGRN
CIRCUIT RFLFSIG.
3
LTBLU
LFGND
~
INITIATOR
I
LEFT-REAR
LFSIGNAL
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
r 1
LFPWR.
2
3
BRN
LTBLU
PNK
16
LRLFSIG.
LFGND
INITIATOR
I
RIGHT-REAR
LFSIGNAL
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
r 1
LFPWR.
2
BRN
GRV
17
RRLFSIG.
3
LFGND
LTBLU LTBLU
------------------------------------------------------LTBLU
15
LFGND
7
W
T tt
~:rt
K-UNE
4
!r---------BLK GND
....... : 12V
G401 -0- :5V
(cont'd)
BACK
18-137
TPMS
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAV BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAV BOX

CONNECTOR C (12P) CONNECTOR X (39P)
s-L ~
L--J
1/12131 [I]
151/17VI 191101111

CONNECTOR A (12P)
~:211~ I
I
116117VI/1201
ji jl23l
IZIZI
1,-,
Int:. [ill VVVI321/134135 1 t:.
1281
1 36 1 37 1 1381/1
U\
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
PCM CONNECTOR A(49P)

If II
1 1 1 2 314151617 8 1 9 110 I.
• 11 12 13 1/1/ 16 /118 19 20 21
,-. 22 V 24 X 25 >< 26 27 28
29 30 31 32V / /136 37 38 39
I
II-
140J 41 42!43144VI46 471481491
18-138 BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17: Low Tire Pressure 7. Check the, tire pressure of the appropriate tire with
the HDS.
NOTE: If low tire pressure is detected, the control unit
will set one or more of these DTCs, and turn on the low NOTE: If the HDS screen shows not defined for
pressure indicator and the appropriate tire indicator(s). sensor status, turn the ignition switch OFF, rotate
If the low pressure and tire indicators come on due to the tire 1/4 turn, thenturn the ignition switch ON (II),
true low tire pressure, and the customer corrects it and try again. If not defined is still shown, repeat
before bringing the vehicle in, the DTCs will have been the procedure in the previous'sentence until
stored, but all the indicators will be off. NORMAL is shown.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is the indicated tire pressure on the HOS within
40 kPa (0.4 kgflcrrr, 6 psi) of the actual tire
2. Check which tire indicator is on. pressure?
NOTE: If no tire indicators are on, retrieve the DTCs YES-Check for loose terminals and poor
with the HDS. connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
Ole Tire location (see page 18-162), and recheck .•
11 Right-front
13 Left-front NO-Check that the tire-pressure sensor is properly
15 Right-rear mounted. Replace the appropriate tire pressure
17 Left-rear sensor (see page 18-164).•
4. Check the pressure of the indicated tire.
Is there 175 kPa (1.8 kgflcrrr, 25 psi) or less?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
5. Check for and repair the cause of air loss, and then
inflate the tire (see page 18-5).
Do the tire indicators go off within one minute?
YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC

with the HDS .•
NO-Go to step 7.
BACK 18-139
TPMS
OTC 21, 22, 23, 24: Abnormally High Tire OTC 31, 33, 35, 37: Tire Pressure Sensor Low
Sensor Temperature Battery Voltage
1. Make sure the tires have cooled down. NOTE: This problem occurs when the temperature
around the sensor is -40 'f ( -40 "C) or less. Note that
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). the diagnosis must be made in a place where ambient
temperatureiis -4 'f (-20 "C) or more.
3. Check the tire indicated by the DTCs you retrieved.
NOTE: An abnormal rise in the internal temperature
of the tir,es can be caused by: Does the TPMS indicator go off within one
• Excessive braking minute?
• Failure to release the parking brake (rear tires
only) YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC
• Leaving the vehicle running while parked with the HDS .•
• Improper assembly of a wheel and tire
NO-Go to step 2.
OTC Tire location'
21 Right-front 2. Check the FR, FL, RR, or RL in the TPMS DATA LIST
22 Left-front with the HDS.
23 . Right-rear
24 Left-rear. NOTE: Ifthe HDS screen shows not defined for
sensor status, turn the ignition switch OFF, rotate
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition switch ON (II),
and try again. If not defined is still shown, repeat
Does the TPMS indicator go off within one the procedure in the previous sentence until
minute? NORMAL is shown.
YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC OTC Tire location
with the HDS .• 31 Right-front
33 Left-front
NO-Go to step 5. 35 Right-rear
37 Left-rear
5. Read the internal temperature of the tire with the
HDS. Is LOW indicated?
NOTE: If the HDS screen shows not defined for YES-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
sensor status, turn the ignition switch OFF, rotate (see page 18-164) .•
the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition switch ON (II),
and try again. If not defined is still shown, repeat NO-Check for loose terminals and poor
the procedure in the previous sentence until connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
NORMAL is shown. substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
(see page 18-162), and recheck .•
Is 176 of (80°C) or more indicated?
YES-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor

(see page 18-164) .•
NO-Check for loose terminals and poor

connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
(see page 18-162), and recheck.•
18-140 BACK
DTC 32, 34, 36, 38:Tire Pressure Sensor 8. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Transmitting Failure
Is DTC 85 indicated?
NOTE:
• Inspect for an aftermarket device interfering with the YES-Go to the DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page
RF signal from the sensors when turning the ignition 18-156).•
switch ON (II).
• Vehicle must be driven for 3 minutes at 15 mph NO-Check for loose terminals and poor
(24 km/h) or more for DTC 32, 34, 36, or 38 to set. connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
1. Check the indicated location to make sure the (see page 18-162), and recheck.•
wheel is a TPMS type with the tire pressure sensor.
DTC Tire location
32 Right-front 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
34 Left-front
36 Right-rear 11. With the HDS,check the indicated tire for the tire
38 Left-rear sensor status changing to normal.
Is a TPMS type wheel with a tire pressure sensor NOTE: If the HDS screen shows not defined for
mounted on the vehicle? sensor status, turn the ignition switch OFF, rotate
the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition switch ON (11),
YES-Go to step 4. and try again. If the status does not change to
normal, repeatthe procedure in the previous
NO-Go to step 2. sentence until NORMAL is shown.
2. Install a known-good TPMS wheel. DTC Tire location

32 Right-front
3. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above 34 Left-front
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or 36 Right-rear
memorize the ID with the HDS (see page 18-128). 38 Left-rear
4. Test-drive the vehicle. Is NORMAL indicated within one fu/l turn of the
tire?
5. Check the VSP in the TPMS DATA LIST with the
HDS. YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC
with the HDS .•
Is the vehicle speed indicated?
NO-Go to step 12.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
BACK
1.8-141
TPMS
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 20. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
13. Install a wheel with a known-good tire pressure 21. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit
sensor on the vehicle .. 20P connector terminal No. 20 and the appropriate
initiator 3P connector terminal No.1.
14. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or DTC Initiator location
memorize the ID with the HDS (see page 18-128). 32 Right-front
34 Left-front
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
17. With the HDS, check the indicated tire for a normal
pressure sensor signal.
NOTE: If the HDS screen shows not defined for

the procedure in the previous sentence until
NORMAL is shown.
DTC Tire location

32 Right-front
34 Left-front
36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
Is NORMAL indicated within one full turn of the

tire? ~--'-'-" RIGHT-FRONT
YES-Replace the tire pressure sensor on the LF PWR. (BRN)

customer's wheel (see page 18-164).•
NO-Go to step 18. INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR

19. Disconnect the appropriate initiator 3P connector.
YES-Go to step 22.
DTC Initiator location
32 Right-front NO-Repair open in the wire between the TPMS
34 Left-front control unit and the appropriate initiator.•
36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
18-142 BACK
22. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit 23. Check for continuity between the appropriate TPMS
20P connector terminal No. 15 and appropriate control unit 20P connector terminal and
initiator 3P connector terminal No.3. appropriate initiator 3P connector terminal No.2
(see table).
32 Right-front DTC TPMS control Initiator location
34 Left-front unit terminal
36 Right-rear 32 No.6 Right-front
38 Left-rear 34 No.5 Left-front
36 No. 17 Right-rear
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR 38 No.16 Left-rear
INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
LEFT-FRONT RIGHT-FRONT
TPMS CONTROL UNIT

20P CONNECTOR
LEFT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT
LEFT-REAR
LF GND (LT BLUI

RIGHT-REAR
LEFT-REAR RIGHT-REAR
Is there continuity? INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the TPMS
control unit and the appropriate initiator.• YES-Go to step 24.

control unit and the appropriate initiator.•
(cont'd)
BACK 18-143
TPMS
24. Check for continuity between body ground and the 25. Measure voltage between body ground and the
appropriate TPMS control unit 20P connector appropriate TPMS control unit 20P connector
terminal (see table). terminal (see table).
DTC TPMS control unit terminal DTC TPMS control unit terminal
32 No.6 32 No.6
34 No.5 34 No.5
36 No. 17 36 No. 17
38 No. 16 38 No.16
TPMS CONmOL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
LF LF SIG. IGRYI RF LF SIG. ILT GRNI LF LF SIG. IGRYI RF LF SIG. ILT GRNI
.Q .Q
= = = = = = = =
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
between the TPMS control unit and the appropriate the TPMS control unit and the appropriate
initiator.• initiator.•
NO-Go to step 25. NO-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page

18-163) .•
18-144 BACK
Ole 41: Abnormal Signal Reception Error 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)~
NOTE: Inspect for an aftermarket device interfering with 8. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
the RF signal from the sensors when turning the
ignition switch ON (II). Is DTC 85 indicated?
1. Check all four wheels to make sure they are the YES-Go to the DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page
TPMS type with the tire pressure sensor. 18-156).•
Is each wheel a TPMS type with a tire pressure NO-Check for loose terminals and poor
sensor mounted on the vehicle? connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
YES-Go to step 4. (see page 18-162), and recheck.•
NO-Go to step 2. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Install known-good TPMS wheel(s). 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. To memorize the sensor ID(s), drive the vehicle 11. CheckTPMS DATA LIST for LF, RF, LR, RR sensor
above 15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, status changing to "NORMAL".
or memorize the ID(s) with the HDS (see page
18-128). NOTE: If the HDS screen shows not defined for
4. Test-drive the vehicle. the tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition switch ON (II),
5. Check the VSP in the TPMS DATA LIST with the the procedure in the previous sentence until
HDS. NORMAL is shown.
Is the vehicle speed indicated? Is NORMAL indicated within one full turn of the
tire?
YES-Go to step 9.
YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC
NO-Go to step 6. with the HDS .•
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO-Check for loose terminals and poor
BACK 18-145
TPMS
OTC 45: Initiator Circuit Short Detection 9. Check for continuity between body ground and
TPMS control unit 20P connector terminal No. 20.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn the ignition

switch ON (II) again.
YES-Go to step 5. =
NO-The system is OK at this time .•
6. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector. YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire·
between the TPMS control unit and the initiators .•
TPMS control unit 20P connector terminal No. 20. NO-Go to step 10.

10. On each individual initiator, check for continuity
between body ground and initiator 3P connector
terminal No.1.
NOTE: Check the initiators when mounted on the

vehicle.
=
YES-Go to step 8. =
NO-Go to step 11. Terminal side of male terminals
8. Disconnect all four of the initiator 3P connectors.

YES-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page

18-163) .•

18-146 BACK
11. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit 14. On the initiator side, check for continuity between
20P connector terminals No. 15and No. 20. all four initiator 3P connector terminals No.1 and
No.3 individually.
LF GND LF PWR. IBRNI

ILTBLUI

YES-Go to step 12.
YES-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page
NO-Go to step 15. 18-163).•
12. Disconnect all four of the initiator 3P connectors. NO-Check for loose terminals and poor
13. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
20P connector terminals No. 15 and No. 20. (see page 18-162), and recheck.•
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
16. Measure voltage between body ground and TPMS

control unit 20P connector terminal No. 15.
LF GND LF PWR. IBRNI TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR

ILTBLUI
YES-Repair short in the wire between TPMS

control unit 20P connector terminals No. 15 (LF
GND line) and No. 20 (LF PWR. line) .•
NO-Go to step 14. Is there battery voltage?

the TPMS control unit and the initiators.•

BACK 18-147
TPMS
DTC 51, 53, 55, 57: Initialization Status of 6. With the HOS, check the indicated tire for the
TPMS Control Unit is Not Completed normal sensor signal.
NOTE: These OTCs will only set during initialization with NOTE: If the HOS screen shows not defined for
the HOS. sensor status, turn the ignition switch OFF, rotate
1. Check the OTC indicated to the tire location to and try again. If nqt defined is still shown, repeat
make sure the wheel is a TPMS type with the tire the procedure in the previous sentence until
pressure sensor. NORMAL is shown.
OTC Tire location OTC Tire location

51 Right-front 51 Right-front
53 Left-front 53 Left-front
55 Right-rear 55 Right-rear
57 Left-rear 57 Left-rear
Is a TPMS type wheel with a tire pressure sensor Is NORMAL indicated within one full turn of the
mounted on the vehicle? tire?
YES-Go to step 7. YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the OTC

with the HOS .•
NO-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to step 12.
2. Install a known-good TPMS wheel.
3. To memorize the sensor 10, drive the vehicle above
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or 8. Install a wheel with a known-good tire pressure
memorize the 10 with the HOS (see page 18-128). sensor on the vehicle.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. To memorize the sensor 10, drive the vehicle above
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). memorize the 10 with the HOS(see page 18-128).
18-148 BACK
12. With the HDS, check the indicated tire for a normal 15. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
pressure sensor signal.
16. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit
NOTE: If the HDS screen shows not defined for 20P connector terminal No. 20 and appropriate
sensor status, turn the ignition switch OFF, rotate initiator 3P connector terminal No.1.
and try again. If not defined is still shown, repeat OTC Initiator location
the procedure in the previous sentence until 51 Right-front
NORMAL is shown. 53 Left-front
55 Right-rear
DTC .Tire location 57 Left-rear
51 RiQht-front
53 Left-front TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
55 Right-rear
57 Left-rear
Is NORMAL indicated within one full turn of the

tire? LFPWR.
(BRN)
YES-Replace the tire pressure sensor on the
customer's wheel (see page 18-164).•
NO-Go to step 13.
14. Disconnect the appropriate initiator 3P connector.

Q
OTC Initiator location
51 Right-front
53 Left-front ""=!,==':...., RIGHT-FRONT
55 Right-rear
57 Left-rear LF PWR. (BRN)
YES-Go to step 17.

(cont'd)
BACK 18-149
TPMS
(see table).
51 Right-front DTC TPMS control Initiator location
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR 57 No. 16 Left-rear
Wi're side of female terminals
LEFT-FRONT RIGHT-FRONT
TPMS CONTROL UNIT

20P CONNECTOR
LEFT-FRONT
LEFT-REAR
LF GND (LT BLU)

RIGHT-REAR
LEFT-REAR RIGHT-REAR
YES-Go to step 18.

18-150 BACK
19. Check for continuity between body ground and the 20. Measure voltage between body ground and the
appropriate TPMS control unit 20P connector appropriate TPMS control unit 20P connector·
terminal (see table). terminal (see table).
DTC TPMS control unit terminal DTC TPMS control unit terminal
51 No.6 51 No.6
53 No.5 53 No.5
55 No. 17 55 No. 17
57 No. 16 57 No. 16
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
LF LF SIG. IGRVI RF LF SIG. ILT GRNI LF LF SIG. IGRVI RF LF SIG. ILT GRNI
Q Q
= = = = = =
between the TPMS control unit and the appropriate the TPMS control unit and the appropriate
initiator.• initiator.•
NO-Goto step 20. NO-Repair the appropriate initiator (see page

18-163) .•
BACK
18-151
TPMS
DTC 61, 63, 65, 67: Initiator Circuit Open 8. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit
Detection 20P connector terminal No. 20 and appropriate
initiator 3P connector terminal No.1.
DlC Initiator location
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 61 Right-front
63 Left-front
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn the ignition 65 Right-rear
switch ON (II) again. 67 Left-rear
4. Check for DTCs with theHDS, and note the TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
indicated DTC(s).
Is DTC 61,63,65, and/or 67 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-The system is OK at this time.•
6. Disconnect the appropriate initiator 3P connector. 1 2 3 RIGHT-

~,.::....L..,;..<REAR

61 Right-front
63 Left-front Q
65 Right-rear
67 Left-rear
,-,--,--=...L;;,.I RIGHT-FRONT
7. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
LF PWR. (BRN)
YES-Go to step 9.

BACK
18-152
(see table).
61 Riaht-front DTC TPMS control Initiator location
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR 67 No.16 Left-rear
LEFT·FRONT RIGHT·FRONT
TPMS CONTROL UNIT

20P CONNECTOR
LEFT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT
LEFT-REAR
LF GND (LT BLU)
RIGHT-REAR
LEFT·REAR RIGHT·REAR
YES-Go to step 10.

(cont'd)
BACK 18-153
TPMS'
11. Check for noted DTC(s) in step 4. 17. Check for DTCs with the HDS, and compare the
indicated DTC with the noted DTC(s) in step 4.
Were DTC 61,63,65, and 67 indicated at the
same time? OTC Initiator location
61 Right-front
YES-Check for loose terminals and poor 63 Left-front
connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, 65 Right-rear
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit 67 Left-rear
Does the indicated DTC change between the
NO-Go to step 12. initiators that were rep/aced in step 12?
12. Swap a known-good initiator with the initiator YES-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page
indicated by the DTC (see page 18-163). 18-163).•
OTC Initiator location NO-Check for loose terminals and poor

61 Right-front ," connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
63 Left-front substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
65 Right-rear . , (see page 18-162), and recheck .•
67 Left-rear
15. Clear the DTC withthe HDS.
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn the ignition
18-154 BACK
OTC 81: TPMS Control Unit Failure (RAMI OTC 83: No VSP Signal
ROM/ADC/EEPROM/ALU) Check
NOTE: Check the fuel and emission systems OTCs with
NOTE: Low battery voltage can cause this OTC. Make the HOS, and troubleshoot the PCM and F-CAN
sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition. communication errors first (see page 11-3).
2. Clear the OTC with the HOS. 2. Clear the OTC with the HOS.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) 3. Test-drive the vehicle.
again.
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Replace the TPMS control unit (see page
18-162).• NO-The system is OK at this time .•
NO-The system is OK at this time.• 5. Check for OTCs with the HOS.
YES-Go to OTC 85 troubleshooting (see page

18-156).•
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Test-drive the vehicle.
7. Check the VSP in the TPMS OATA LIST with the

HOS.
Is the vehicle speed indicated?
YES-Check for loose terminals and poor

connections at the TPMScontrol unit. If necessary,
(see page 18-162), and recheck ••
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Check the speedometer.
Does the speedometer register speed?
YES-Replace the TPMS control unit (see page

18-162).•
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8),

and retest. If no codes are shown, replace the
original PCM .•
BACK
TPMS
OTe 85: CAN Data Error 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Check the fuel and emission systems DTCs with 11. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
the HDS, and troubleshoot the PCM and F-CAN
communication errors first (see page 11-3). 12. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 14. Check for continuity between the TPMS control unit
20P connector terminals and the PCM connector A
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn the ignition (49P) terminals individually (see table).
Terminal TPMS control PCMA
4. Wait about 5 seconds. name unit terminal terminal
CAN L No.11 No. 49
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. CANH No.1 No. 48
Is ore 85 indicated? TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
CANH(WHT)
YES-Go to step 6.
Does the speedometer work? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 10.

.Q .Q
NO-Go to step 7. PCM CONNECTOR A(49P)
Does the speedometer work?

CAN H (WHT) CAN L (RED)
YES-Check for loose terminals and poor
(see page 18-162), and recheck .• Is there continuity?
NO-Turn the ignition switch OFF, and reconnect YES-Check for loose terminals and poor
all connectors, then check and troubleshoot the fuel connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
and emissions systems (see page 11-3).• substitute a known-good TPMS control unit

control unit and the PCM .•
18-156 BACK
DTC 91, 93, 95, 97: Tire Pressure Sensor
Internal Error
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)

again.
4. Wait about 1 minute.
NOTE: The tire pressure sensor of the appropriate

wheel is shown.
DTC Tire location

91 Right-front
93 Left-front
95 Right-rear
97 Left-rear
Is DTC 91,93,95 or 97 indicated?
YES-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor

(see page 18-164).•
BACK 18-157
TPMS
Low pressure indicator does not come on, 7. Wait about 5 seconds with the ignition switcfl
and no DTCs are stored turned ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Check for gauge DTCs with the HDS (see page 22-3).
2. Check the low pressure indicator for several Is any gauge DTC indicated?
seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
YES-Troubleshoot the indicated gauge DTC.•
Did the indicator come on and then go off?
NO-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 7.
11. Measure voltage between TPMS control unit 20P
4. Check the pressure in all four tires. connector terminals No.4 and No.8.
Is the tire pressure 175 kPa (1.B kgflcrrf, 25 psi)

or less? TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 5.
GNDIBLK) IG11YELI
NO-The system is OK at this time.•
6. Check the TIRE PRESSURE in the TPMS DATA LIST

with the HDS, and compare with measured actual
tire pressure. Wire side of female terminals
NOTE: If the HDS screen shows not defined for

sensor status, turn the ignition switch OFF, rotate Is there battery voltage?
the appropriate tire 1/4 turn, then turn the ignition
switch ON (11), and try again. If not defined is still YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
shown, repeat the procedure in the previous the TPMS control unit and the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in
sentence until NORMAL is shown. the under-dash fuse/relay box.•
Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within NO-Check for loose terminals and poor
40 kPa (0.4 kgflcrrf, 6 psi) of the actual tire connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
pressure? substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the tire pressure sensor (see page

18-164).•
18-158 BACK
Low pressure indicator does not go off, and TPMS indicator does not come on, and no
no DTCs are stored DTCs are stored
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector. 2. Check the TPMS indicator for several seconds
when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
4. Check the low pressure indicator for several
seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II). YES-The system is OK at this time .•
Did the indicator come on and then go off? NO-Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control
module (see page 22-3). If necessary, substitute a
YES-Replace the TPMS control unit (see page known-good gauge control module (see page
18-162).• 22-337), and recheck .•
NO-Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control

module (see page 22-3). If necessary, substitute a
known-good gauge control module (seepage
22-337), and recheck .•
BACK 18-159
TPMS
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs 6. Measure,voltage between body ground and TPMS
are stored control unit 20P connector terminal No. 10.
NOTE: Check for gauge DTCs with the HDS (see page
22-3). If gauges DTCs are stored, troubleshoot those TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
DTCsfirst.
+B(WHT)
2. Check the TPMS indicator for several seconds

when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
YES-The system is OK at this time .• Wire side of female terminals
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 7.
4. Check the No.1 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box. NO-Repair open in the wire between the TPMS
control unit and the No.1 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
Is the fuse blown? dash fuse/relay box.•
YES-Replace the No.1 (7.5 A) fuse, and recheck.• 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO-Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 5. 8. Measure voltage between body ground and TPMS
control unit 20P connector terminal No.8.
5. Check the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
IG1 (YEll
YES-Replace the No. 21 0.5 A) fuse, and
recheck.•
YES-Go to step 9.

control unit and the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box.•
18-160 BACK
9. Measure voltage between body ground and TPMS
control unit 20P connector terminal No.4.
GND(BLK)
=
Is there o. 1 V or more? '
YES-Repair open or high resistance in the wire

between the TPMS control unit and body ground
(G401) .•
NO-Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control

module (see page 22-3). If the gauge control
module is OK, check for loose terminals and poor
connections atthe TPMS control unit. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control (see page
18-162), and recheck.•
BACK 18-161
TP·MS'
TPMS Control Unit Replacement
NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit mounting 5. Remove the TPMS control unit (A) from the bracket
bracket is not bent or twisted as this may affect its (8).
communication with the initiators and the tire pressure
sensors. NOTE: While separating the TPMS control unit
from the bracket, release the hook (e) on the TPMS
1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover control unit using a flat-tipped screwdriver (D), and
(see page 20-120). push up to release it from the bracket.
2. Disconnect the TPMS control unit connector (A).
NOTE: The TPMS control unit is located on the

brake pedal bracket.
B
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
6. Install the TPMS control unit in the reverse order of

removal.
NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit is properly

installed. You will hear a click when the TPMS
D
control unit is securely mounted on the bracket.
3. Remove the flange bolt (8) from the brake pedal 7. Connect the HDS and memorize the tire pressure
bracket. sensor IDs (see page 18-128). Do not memorize the
IDs automatically.
4. Remove the TPMS control unit (C) from the bracket
(D).
18-162 BACK
Initiator Replacement
NOTE: Make sure the initiator mounting bracket is not Rear

bent or twisted as this may affect its communication
with the TPMS control unit and the tire pressure sensor. 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
Front
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). 3. Remove the rear fender cover (see page 20-221).
2. Remove the front wheel. 4. Disconnect the initiator connector (A).
3. Remove the front inner fender (see page 20-217).
4. Disconnect the initiator connector (A).
A ~B
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m 5. Remove the initiator (8) from the inner side of the
11.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) wheelwell.
5. Remove the initiator (8) from the inner side of the 6. Install the initiator in the reverse order of removal.
wheelwell.
6. Install the initiator in the reverse order of removal.
BACK 18-163
"'
TPMS
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement
Removal 5. Position the wheel so the tire machine (A) and tire
iron (8) are next to the valve stem (C) and will move
1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands away from it when the machine starts. Then
in the proper locations (see page 1-7). remove the tire from the wheel.
2. Remove the wheel with the faulty sensor.
3. Remove the tire valve cap and the valve core, and
let the tire deflate.
4. Remove any balance weights, and then break the

bead loose from the wheel with a commercially
available tire changer (A).
INOTICE I
Note these items to avoid damaging the tire
pressure sensor:
• Do the outside of the wheel first.
• Position the wheel as shown so the valve
stem (8) is 90 degrees from the bead
breaker (C) as shown. 6. Remove the valve stem nut (A) and washer (8),
• Do not position the bead breaker of the tire then remove the tire pressure sensor with valve
changer too close to the rim. stem (C) from the wheel.
____ A
18-164 BACK
7. Remove and discard the valve stem grommet (A), Installation
from the tire pressure sensor (B).
NOTE:
NOTE: o Use only wheels that have a "TPMS" stamp (A) on
o The valve stem grommet might stay in the wheel; them.

make sure you remove it. o This vehicle may be equipped with either type 1 or
o Always use a new valve stem grommet type 2 wheels.

whenever the tire pressure sensor has been
removed from the wheel. When only removing a TYPE 1
tire from the wheel, replace the valve stem
grommet if it is possible.
TYPE 2
(cont'd)
BACK 18-165
· J.•
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
1. Before installing the tire pressure sensor, clean the 4. Lube the tire bead, and position the wheel so the
mating surfaces on the sensor and the wheel. tire machine (A) and tire iron (B) are next to the
valve stem (C) and will move away from it when
2. Install the tire pressure sensor (A) and the washer the machine starts. Then install the tire onto the
(B) to the wheel (C), and tighten the valve stem nut wheel.
(D) finger tight. Make sure the pressure sensor is
resting on the wheel.
"'OUTSIDE
WHEEL CENTER
D
4N·m
(0.4 kgf·m. 3 Ibf.ft) 5. Inflate the tire to 300 kPa (3.1 kgf/cm2, 44 psi) to seat
the tire bead to the rim, then adjust the tire
3. Tighten the valve stem nut to the specified torque pressure (see page 18-5).
while holding the tire pressure sensor.
NOTE: Make sure the tire bead is uniformly seated
NOTE: Do not use air or electric impact tools to on both sides of the rim.
tighten a valve stem nut.
6. Check the valve stem nut tightening torque, then
install the valve stem cap.
7. Check and adjustthe wheel balance, then install the

wheels on the vehicle. Torque the wheels to
specifications.
8. Remove the jack stands, and lower the vehicle.
9. Connect the HDS and memorize the tire pressure

sensor ID(s) (see page 18-128).
18-166 BACK
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components

Special Tools ................................................................. 19-2
Brake System Inspection and Test .............................. 19-4
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch
Adjustment ................................................................ 19-6
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment ................. 19-7
Brake System Bleeding ................................................ 19-9
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram .................... 19-10
Parking Brake Switch Test ........................................... 19-11
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test ...................................... 19-11
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement ........... 19-12
Front Brake Disc Inspection ......................................... 19-16
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul ...................................... 19-17
Master Cylinder Replacement ..................................... 19-18
Master Cylinder Inspection .......................................... 19-19
Brake Booster Test ....................................................... 19-20
Brake Booster Pushrod Clearance Adjustment ......... 19-21
Brake Booster Replacement ........................................ 19-22
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement ............ 19-23
Rear Brake Disc Inspection .......................................... 19-26
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul ....................................... 19-27
Parking Brake Inspection ............................................. 19-28
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement ............................... 19-30
Parking Brake Shoe Lining Break-in ........................... 19-33
Brake Pedal Replacement ............................................ 19-34
Brake Hose and Line Inspection .................................. 19-35
Brake Hose Replacement ............................................. 19-36
Parking Brake Cable Replacement .............................. 19-38
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist)

System Components .... ......... .......... ...... ....... 19-41
Special Tools

CD 07AAE-SEPA101 Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 1
® 070AB-SJA0100 Booster Piston Holder 1
CD
19-2 BACK
BRAKE BOOSTER
Test, page 19-20
Push rod Clearance Adjustment, page 19-21
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

Circuit Diagram, page 19-10
Parking Brake Switch Test, page 19-11
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test, page 19-11
BRAKE HOSE and LINE

Brake Hose
. PARKING BRAKE
Inspection,
page 19-28
Shoe Replacement,
page 19-30
Shoe Lining
Break-in,
page 19-33
REAR BRAKE
Pad Inspection and
Disc Inspection, page 19-26
Caliper Overhaul, page 19-27
MASTER CYLINDER
Brake System Bleeding,
page 19-9 PARKING BRAKE
Replacement, page 19-18 Inspection and Adjustment, page 19-7
Inspection, page 19-19 Cable Replacement, page 19-38
FRONT BRAKE
Pad Inspection and Replacement, page 19-12
Disc Inspection, page 19-16
Caliper Overhaul, page 19-17
BRAKE PEDAL
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal
Position Switch Adjustment, page 19-6
BACK
19-3
Brake System Inspection and Test
Inspect the brake system components listed. Repair or replace any parts that are leaking or damaged.
Component Inspections:
Component Procedure Also check for
Master Cylinder Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging seat at reservoir cap. This is a
• Reservoir or reservoir grommets. sign offluid contamination.
• Line joints.
• Between mastercvlinder and booster.
Brake Hoses Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging, twisted, or bent lines.
• Line joints and banjo bolt connections.
• Hoses and lines, also inspect for twisting or
damaae.
Caliper Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Seized or sticking caliper pins.
• Piston seal.
• Banjo bolt connections.
• Bleed screw.
VSA Modulator- Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at:
control Unit • Line joints.
• Modulator-control unit.
Brake System Test
Brake pedal sinks/fades when braking
1. Set the parking brake, and start the engine, then turn off the Ale switch. Allow the engine to warm up to normal
operating temperature (radiator fan comes on twice).
2. Attach a 50 mm (2 in.) piece of masking tape along the bottom of the steering wheel, and draw a horizontal
reference mark across it. ..
3. With the transmission in P or N position, press and hold the brake pedal lightly (about the same pressure needed
to keep an AfT-equipped vehicle from creeping), then release the parking brake.
4. While still holding the brake pedal, hook the end of the tape measure behind the brake pedal, then pull the tape up
to the steering wheel. Note the measurement between the brake pedal and the reference mark on the steering
wheel.
5. Apply steady pressure to the brake pedal for 3 minutes.
6. Watch the tape measure .
• If the measurement increases 10 mm (3/8 in.) or less, the master cylinder is OK .

• If the measurement increases more than 10 mm(3/8 in.),·replace the master cylinder.
BACK
19-4
Rapid brake pad wear, vehicle vibration 5. Loosen the hydraulic lines at the master cylinder,
(after a long drive), or high, hard brake pedal then spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
NOTE: Make sure thatthe caliper pins are installed Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
correctly.
The upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are YES-Go to step 6.
different. If the pins are installed in the wrong location,
it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid brake pad wear, NO-Check the master cylinder reservoir for
and possibly uneven tire wear. For proper caliper pin contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
location (see page 19-17). contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
contaminated fluid. Ifthe brake fluid is OK, replace
1. Drive the vehicle until the brakes drag or until the the master cylinder (see page 19-18).•
pedal is high and hard. This can take 20 or more
brake pedal applications during an extended test- 6. Loosen the bleed screws at each caliper, then spin
drive. the wheels to check for brake drag.
2. With the engine running, raise the vehicle on a lift, Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
and spin all four wheels by hand.
YES-Check the master cylinder reservoir for
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels? contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
YES-Go to step 3. contaminated fluid. Ifthe brake fluid is OK,
disassemble and repair the caliper on the wheel(s)
NO- Look for other causes of the pad wear, high with brake drag .•
pedal, or vehicle vibration .•
NO-Look for and replace any damaged brake lines.
3. Turn the engine off, press the brake pedal several If all brake lines are OK, replace the VSA
times to deplete the vacuum in the brake booster, modulator-control unit (see page 19-102).•
and then spin the wheels again to check for brake
drag.
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the brake booster (see page 19-22).•
4. Without removing the brake lines, unbolt and

separate the master cylinder from the booster, then
spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Check the brake pedal position switch

adjustment and pedal free play (see page 19-6).•
BACK
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
Pedal Height Brake Pedal Position Switch Clearance
1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) 4. Lift up on the brake pedal by hand. Push in the
counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully
longer touching the brake pedal. pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (8) on
the pedal arm). Then, turn the switch 45 0 clockwise
to lock it. The gap between the brake pedal position
switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to
0.7 mm (0.028 in.) by locking the switch. Make sure
the brake lights go off when the pedal is released.
0.7 mm (0.028 in)
2. Pull backthe carpet andfind the cutout (8) in the

insulator. Measure the pedal height (C) at the
center of the pedal pad (D) to the floor without the
insulator.
Standard pedal height (with carpet removed): 5. Check the brake pedal free play.
178 mm (7 in.)
3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the

pushrod (8) in or out with pliers until the standard
pedal height from the floor is reached. After
adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not
adjust the pedal height with the push rod pressed.
BACK
19-6
Parking Brake Inspection and
Adjustment
Pedal Free Play
1. With the engine off, inspect the play (A) on the Inspection
brake pedal pad (8) by pushing the brake pedal by
hand. If the brake pedal free play is out of 1. Press the parking brake pedal (A) with 294 N (30 kgf,
specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch 66 Ibf) of force to fully apply the parking brake. The
(C). If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, it parking brake pedal should be locked within the
may result in brake drag. specified number of clicks.
Free play: 1-5 mm (1/16-3/16 in.) Pedal locked clicks: 9 to 11
c A
Pressed with
294N
(30 Kgf, 661bf)
B
I
\ I
\
, ['
Ii
\ \
'\ f r '
\-...\,-
,- ,/"/
.
2. Adjust the parking brake if the pedal clicks are not

within the specification.
NOTE: Minor parking brake pedal adjustments

(1 to 2 clicks) can be made with the adjusting nut
(see parking brake minor adjustment, page 19-8).
If a larger adjustment is required, follow the major
adjustment procedure using the adjuster nut at the
parking brake drum (see parking brake major
adjustment, page 19-8).
After installing new parking brake shoes and/or
new brake disc/drum, make sure you drive the
vehicle for "break-in" (see page 19-33).
(cont'd)
BACK
19-7
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment (cont'd)
Minor Adjustment Major Adjustment (to be done when

replacing parking brake shoes and after
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with lining surface break-in)
2. Fully release the parking brake pedal. safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
3. Press the parking brake pedal 1 click. 2. Fully release the parking brake pedal.
4. Tighten the parking brake adjusting nut (A) until the 3. Back off the parking brake adjusting nut (A) in the
parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels parking brake pedal.
are turned.
5. Remove the access plug (A).

5. Release the parking brake pedal fully, and check
that the parking brakes do not drag when the rear
wheels are turned. Readjust if necessary.
6. Make sure the parking brakes are fully applied

when the parking brake pedal is pressed all the way.
B C
6. Turn the ratchet teeth on the adjuster nut (B) with a
flat-tip screwdriver (C) until the shoes lock against
the parking brake drum. Then back off the adjuster
10 clicks, and install the access plug.

wheels.
8. Do the minor adjustment procedure.
19-8
BACK
Brake System Bleeding
NOTE: 4. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed

• Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean Acura screw (B), then, loosen the bleed screw to allow air
DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed
Using a non-Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion screw securely.
and shorten the life of the system.
• Do not mix different brands of brake fluid; they may Front
not be compatible. .
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed B
9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 7 Ibf.ftl
to contaminate the brake fluid.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage
the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it
off immediately with water.
• The reservoir connected to the master cylinder must
be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the
bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each
brake circuit. Add fluid as required.
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir (A) ---A
is at the MAX (upper) level line (B).
/
B
Rear
2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal

several times, then apply steady pressure.
3. Start the bleeding at the driver's side of the front A~

brake system.
NOTE: Bleed the calipers or the wheel cylinders in \

the sequence shown.
BLEEDING SEQUENCE:
® Front Right @RearRight 5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX
(upper) level line.
6. Repeat the procedure for each brake circuit until

there are no air bubbles are in the fluid.
CD Front Left @RearLeft
BACK
19-9
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram
INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT

A12
WHT----t
VSA MODULATOR·
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR CONTROL UNIT
A6 lEBO INDICATOR)
RED----t
B9 Bl0
ORN ORN
BRAKEA.UID PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

, LEVEL SWITCH , CLOSED: Pariling brake applied
CLOSED: Roat down OPEN: Pariling brake released
OPEN: Roat up
IG302
BACK
19-10
Parking Brake Switch Test Brake Fluid Level Switch Test
NOTE: If both the ABSNSA indicator and the brake Check for continuity between the terminals (1) and (2)
system indicator come on at the same time, check the with the float in the down position and in the up
VSA system first (see page 19-43). position.
1. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) NOTE:

from the parking brake switch (B). • Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir.
With the float down, there should be continuity.
• Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX (upper)
level (A). With the float up, there should be no
continuity.
• If both the ABSNSA indicator and the brake system
indicator come on at the same time, check the VSA
system first (see page 19-43).
• Ifthe parking brake switch and fluid level switch are
OK, but the brake system indicator does not function,
do the gauge control module test (see page 22-315).
A
2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal

(C) and body ground .
• With the parking brake pedal pressed, there

should be continuity .
• With the parking brake pedal released, there
should be no continuity.
NOTE: If the parking brake switch and the fluid

level switch are OK, but the brake system indicator
does not function, do the gauge control module test
(see page 22-315).
BACK
19-11
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and
Brake caliper piston compressor 07 AAE-SEPA 101 outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
ACAUTION Brake pad thickness:

Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of Standard: 10.6-11.2 mm (0.42-0.44 in.'
material composition, could be hazardous to your Service limit: 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
health.
• Avoid breathing dust particles . Inner pad
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
Inspection

safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). B
Outer pad
4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service

limit, replace the front brake pads as a set.
5. Clean the mating surface ofthe brake disc and the

inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
BACK
19-12
Replacement 6. Remove the pad retainers (A).
1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder. NOTE: The upper and lower pad retainers are
different. During installation, make sure the pad
2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with retainers are in proper positions.
4. Remove the flange bolt (A), and pivot the caliper (8) A
up out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for
damage and deterioration.
7. Clean the caliper bracket (8) thoroughly; remove

any rust, and check for grooves and cracks.
8. Inspect the brake disc, and check for damage and

cracks (see page 19-16).
10x 1.25 mm 9. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly

paste off the retainers. Keep the assembly paste off
the discs and pads.
5. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (8).
(cont'd)
BACK 19-13
Co.nventional Brake Components
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
10. Mountthe brake caliper piston compressor (A) on 13. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (PIN
the caliper body (B). 08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the
back of the brake pads (8) and the other areas
B indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly
paste off the pad shims and brake pads;
Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce
stopping ability. Keep grease and assembly paste
off the brake discs and brake pads.
A
07AAE-SEPA101
11. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston

compressor so the caliper will fit over the brake
A
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper
down.
NOTE: Be careful when pressing in the piston;

brake fluid might overflow from the master ..
cylinder's reservoir. If brake fluid gets on any 14. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly.
painted surface, wash it off immediately with water. Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on
the upper inside. If you are reusing the brake pads,
12. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor. always reinstall the brake pads in their original
positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking
efficiency.
BACK
19-14
15. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the
flange bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque.
16. Clean the mating surface ofthe brake disc and the
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
17. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure

the brakes work.
NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal

stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake
pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
18. Add brake fluid as needed.
19. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line

joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks
(see page 19-35).
BACK
19-15
Front Brake Disc Inspection
Runout Thickness and Parallelism

1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
2. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the front wheels.
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-13). 3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-13).
4. Inspectthe brake disc surface for damage and 4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc
cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and thickness at eight points, about 45 0 apart and
remove all rust. 10 mm (3/8 in.) in from the outer edge of the brake
disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts (B), measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit.
and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque
to hold the brake disc securely against the hub. Brake disc thickness:
Standard: 27.9-28.1 mm (1.10-1.11 in.)
Max. refinishing limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 in.)
Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This isthe maximum allowable difference

between the thickness measurements.
B
14x1.5mm
127N·m
(13.0 kgf.m. 94.0 Ibf·ttl
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as

shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 in.)
from the outer edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout:

5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish parallelism, refinish the brake disc with an on-car
the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-Way
Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-Way Manufacturing Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc
Co. and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved
Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for this operation. for this operation.
Max. refinishing limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 in.) NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit
for refinishing, replace it. Remove the following
NOTE: items:
• If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
refinishing, replace it (see page 18-13) . • Front brake caliper bracket (see step 4 on page
• A new brake disc should be refinished if its 18-13) .
runout is greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 in.). • Front brake disc (see step 6 on page 18-13).
BACK
19-16
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul
ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health .
• Avoid breathing dust particles.
o Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different.
If these caliper pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid pad wear, and possibly
uneven tire wear.
o Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately with water.
o To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
o Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blowout all passages with compressed air.
o Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
o Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
o Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
o Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
o When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
o Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-
Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
o Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
o Coat the pistons, piston seal grooves, and caliper bores with clean brake fluid.
o Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled .
• After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
~ : Honda silicone grease (PIN 08C30-B0234M)

WEAR INDICATOR
Install inner pad with
O@
its wealndicator upward.
'd
~" OUTER PAD SHIM A
~F
"", OUTER PAD SHIM B
w,,';;;'::. Ii;
v\j 'if
~
INNER PAD SHIM A

(J
/'
CALlPE\ PIN B
14xl.5mm
~
BRAKE PADS ) 137N.m
,~ (14.0 kgf.m,
~ 1011bf·ftl
~
BANJO BOLT BRAKE BLEEDER SCREW
35 N·m HOSE 9 N.m
~
u~~
(3.6 k g
261bf ftl f . m ,} (09
. kgf·m,
~ 7lbf·ftl
/1~
CALIPER PIN A
CALIPER
~ i::' BRACKET
-d
RETAINER
~
SEALING WASHERS Q)
PISTON
Replace. /
PISTON BOOT LOWER PAD RETAINER
~ "'-0 /
10~mm~
Replace.
\ '--0 @ ~
~O~
72N·m
(7.3 kgf.m, 53lbf·ftl
CALIPER BODY
\ Clo ~
PISTON SEAL
SNAP RING
Replace.
Replace.
BACK
19-17
Master Cylinder Replacement
INOTICE I 8. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of

• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may removal, and note these items:
damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint,
wash it off immediately with water. • Check the brake booster push rod clearance
• Be careful not to damage or deform the brake (see page 19-21).
lines during removal and installation. • Coat the new O-ring with silicone oil (Shin-Etsu
• To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and KF 54).
cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel • Check the brake pedal height and free play after
or equivalent. installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if
1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (see page
11-364). 9. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
2. Remove the reservoir cap and the brake fluid from 10. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
the master cylinder reservoir with a syringe.
3. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector

(A).
B
22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf.ft)
4. Disconnect the brake lines (B) from the master

cylinder (C). To prevent spills, cover the hose joints
with rags or shop towels.
5. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (D).
6. Remove the master cylinder from the brake booster

(E). Be careful not to bend or damage the brake
lines when removing the master cylinder.
7. Remove the O-ring (F) from the master cylinder.
NOTE: Replace the O-ring whenever the master

cylinder is removed.
BACK
19-18
Master Cylinder Inspection
1. Inspect and note these items:
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free

of dirt and other foreign particles.
• Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder
assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly
with a new part if necessary.
• Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to
contaminate the brake fluid.
RESERVOIR CAP
Check for blockage
of vent holes.
STRAINER
Remove ~
«J
accumulated
sediment.
RESERVOIR~
~
Check for damage. \
RESERVOIR
SEAL
Check for
damage and
deterioration.
MASTER
CYLINDER
Check for leaks,
rust, and damage.
BACK 19-19
Brake Booster Test
Functional Test 3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A) at

the booster. The check valve is built into the hose.
1. With the engine off, press the brake pedal several
times to deplete the vacuum reservoir, then press
the brake pedal hard, and hold it for 15 seconds. If
the brake pedal sinks, either the master cylinder is
bypassing internally, or the brake system is leaking.
Inspect the brake hoses and lines (see page 19-35).
2. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. If the

brake pedal sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is
operating normally. If the brake pedal height does
not vary, do the brake system test (see page 19-4).
Leak Test
1. Press the brake pedal with the engine running, then
stop the engine. The brake pedal height should not 4. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be
vary while pressed for 30 seconds. If the pedal vacuum available. If no vacuum is available, the
height rises, go to step 6. If it does not rise, go to check valve is not working properly. Replace the
step 2. brake booster vacuum hose and check valve, and
retest. If vacuum is found, go to step 5.
2. Start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds. Turn
the ignition switch off, and wait 30 seconds. Press 5. With the engine off, reconnect the vacuum hose to
the brake pedal several times using normal the brake booster.
pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should
be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal 6. Start the engine, and then pinch the brake booster
height should gradually rise. Does the pedal rise on vacuum hose between the check valve and the
each consecutive application? If it rises, the booster booster.
is OK. If it does not, go to step 3.
7. Turn the ignition switch off, and wait 30 seconds.
Press the brake pedal several times using normal
pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should
be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal
height should gradually rise .
• Ifthe pedal position does not vary, inspectthe

seal between the master cylinder and booster. If
the seal is OK, replace the brake booster.
• If the pedal position varies, replace the brake
booster vacuum hose/check valve assembly.
19-20
BACK
Brake Booster Pushrod Clearance Adjustment
Special Tools Required 1. Measure the clearance between the plate (A)
Booster piston holder 070AB-SJA0100 supplied with master cylinder and brake booster
pushrod (B). Make sure that the tool is lying flat
NOTE: against the surface (C) of the brake booster, and
• Brake booster pushrod to piston clearance must be that the tip of the tool contacts the push rod. If the
checked and readjusted before installing a new tool will not lie flat (D) or there is a gap IE) between
master cylinder. the tool and the push rod, go to step 2 to adjust the
• The master cylinder assembly comes with a tool that push rod in or out.
must be used to adjust the clearance between the
brake booster push rod and the master cylinder piston.
• Use only the tool that comes with the new master
cylinder to check the push rod clearance. Do not use
any other tool.
• Make sure to discard the tool supplied with the
master cylinder after its use.
• The brake booster must be installed on the vehicle
before doing the push rod clearance adjustment.
• If the booster is removed, check the push rod length
(A) as shown. Ifthe length is incorrect, loosen the
push rod locknut (B), and turn the yoke (C) in or out to
adjust.
A
116 mm 14.6 in.)
Omm 10 in.)
2. If the clearance is incorrect, use the booster piston

holder to hold the push rod (A) and turn the
adjusting screw (B) clockwise to inward or
counterclockwise to outward.
070AB-SJA0100
\
B
26N·m
12.7 kgf·m, 20 Ibf·tt)
A
B
3. Install the master cylinder (see page 19-19).
BACK 19-21
Brake Booster Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-363). 8. Remove the brake booster (A) from the engine
compartment.
2. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-18).
INOTICE I
3. Remove the brake lines (A) from the VSA • Be careful not to damage the booster
modulator-control unit (B). surfaces and threads of the booster stud
bolts .
• Be careful not to bend or damage the
brake lines.
c
A
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m,
16lbf·ftl
4. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (C)

from the brake booster. 9. Install the brake booster in the reverse order of
(see page 20-120). • Adjust the pushrod clearance before installing
the brake booster (see page 19-21).
6. Remove the lock pin (A) and the joint pin (B), then • Install the master cylinder after installing the
disconnect the yoke from the brake pedal. brake booster (see page 19-18).
• Check the brake pedal height and free play after
C
8x1.25mm
B~
_~
installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if
13N·m
11.3 kgf·m,
~ • Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
9."\~
~
7. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts (C).
19'-22 BACK
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Special Tools Required , Replacement

Brake caliper piston compressor07AAE-SEPA101
1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
ACAUTION 2. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with

Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health . 3. Remove the rear wheels.
• Avoid breathing dust particles .
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake 4. Remove the flange bolt (A), and pivot the caliper (B)
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum up out ofthe way. Check the hose and pin boots for
cleaner. damage and deterioration.
Inspection
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and

outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:

Standard: 9.6-10.2 mm (0.38""'0.40 in.)
5. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (B).
4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service

limit, replace the rear brake pads as a set.

and the inside ofthe wheel, then install the rear
wheels.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-23
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
6. Remove the pad retainers (A). 10. Mount the brake caliper piston compressor (A) on
the caliper body (B).
NOTE: The upper and lower pad retainers are
different. During installation, make sure the pad
retainers are in their proper positions.
B
A
07 AA.E-SEPA 101
11. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston

compressor so the caliper will fit over the brake
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
7. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper
any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. down.
8. Inspect the brake disc/drum, and check for damage NOTE: Be careful when pressing in the piston;
and cracks (see page 19-26). brake fluid might overflow from the master
cylinder's reservoir. If brake fluid gets on any
9. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly painted surface, wash it off immediately with water.
paste off the retainers. Keep the assembly paste off
the discs and pads. 12. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor.
19-24 BACK
13. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N 15. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the
08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the flange bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque.
back of the brake pads (8), and the other areas
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly A
8x 1.0 mm
paste off the pad shims and brake pads. 37 N·m (3.8 kgf·m, 27 Ibf·tt)
Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce
stopping ability. Keep grease and assembly paste
off the brake discs and brake pads.
16. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc/drum

wheels.
14. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. 17. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure
Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on the brakes work.
the bottom inside. If you are reusing the brake pads,
always reinstall the brake pads in their original NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal
positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
efficiency. replaced as a set. Several applications ofthe brake
pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
18. Add brake fluid as needed.
19. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line

joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks
(see page 19-35).
BACK 19-25
Rear Brake Disc Inspection
Runout Thickness and Parallelism

1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
2. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the rear wheels ..
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-23). 3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-23).
4. Inspect the brake disc/drum surface for damage 4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc/drum
and cracks. Clean the brake disc/drum thoroughly, thickness at eight points, about 45 0 apart and
and remove all rust. 10 mm (3/8 in.) in from the outer edge of the brake
disc/drum. Replace the brake disc/drum if the
5. Install suitable flat.washers (A) and wheel nuts (B), smallest measurement is less than the max.
and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque refinishing limit.
to hold the brake disc/drum securely against the
hub. Brake disc/drum thickness:
Standard: 10.9-11.1 mm (0.43-0.44 in. I
Max. refinishing limit: 9.0 mm (0.35 in.l
Brake disc/drum parallelism:
0.015 mm (0.0006 in.l max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference

between the thickness measurements.
B
14x 1.5 mm
127N·m
11.3.0 kgf.m, 94.0 Ibf.ftl
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc/drum

as shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 in.)
from the outer edge of the brake disc/drum.
Brake disc/drum runout:

Service limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 in.l
7. Ifthe brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit, 5. If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit
refinish the brake disc/drum with an on-car brake for parallelism, refinish the brake disc/drum with an
lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-Way on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by
Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake Disc Kwik-Way Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake
Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are
for this operation. approved for this operation.
Max. refinishing limit: 9.0 mm (0.35 in. I NOTE: If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service
limit for refinishing, replace it. Remove the
NOTE: following items:
• If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit
for refinishing, replace it (see page 18-30) . • Rear brake caliper bracket (see step 3 on page
• A new brake disc/drum should be refinished if its 18-30).
runout is greater than 0.10 mm (0.004 in.). • Rear brake disc/drum (see step 6 on page 18-31).
19-26 BACK
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul
~CAUTION
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use. an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these. items:
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
• To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
• Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blowout all passages with compressed air.
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
• Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
• When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-
Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
• Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
• Coat the pistons, piston seal grooves, and caliper bores with clean brake fluid.
• Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled.
• After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
~ : Honda silicone grease (PIN 0~O-B0234M)

ax 1.0mm
37N·m
(3.a kgf·m, 27 Ibf·ft)
BLEED SCREW
9N·m
PIN BOOT (0.9 kgf.m, 7 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
~ PISTON
~
~~J~~.BOOT
~
O~
INNERPAD& I/) ~
PISTON SEAL
Replace.
~ SNAP RING
~_ Replace.
~
UPPER PAD
RETAINER
OUTER PAD SHIM
~ WEAR INDICATOR
Install inner brake pad
with its wea r
indicator downward.
12x1.2Smm
~LOWERPAD RETAINER
88N·m ., CAUPER BRACKET
BACK
19-27
Parking Brake Inspection
ACAUTION
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the following items:
• Rear brake caliper bracket (see step 3 on page 18~30) .

• Rear brake disc/drum (see step 6 on page 18-31).
FLANGE NUT
12x1.25mm
98.1 N·m
BACKING PLATE U-CLIP
/
Check for deformation. Replace.
~/ ,,!/
/
WAVE WASHER
PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Ma<ked loft and right
RETAINER SPRING
Check for weakness
and damage.
TENSION PIN RETAINER

Install securely
on tension pin.
STRUT
~
BRAKE SHOE BOSSES
Check for deep ..-~--- CONNECTING ROD A
grooves and rust.
BRAKE SHOE
If brake shoes are
\ ~ LOWEll RETURN SPRING
Check for weakness
ADJUSTER NUT and damage.
to be reused, mark Check ratchet teeth
and reassemble in for wear and damage.
the same position.
CONNECTING ROD B
UPPER RETURN SPRING

Check for weakness
and damage.
BACK
19-28
4. Check the parking brake linings (A) for cracking, 8. Measure the inside diameter of the parking brake
glazing, wear, and contamination. drum with inside vernier calipers.
Parking brake drum inside diameter:

Standard: 210.0-210.1 mm
(8.268-8.272 in.)
c Service limit: 211.0 mm (8.307 in.)
5. Measure the parking brake lining thickness (8).

Measurement does not include brake shoe
thickness.
Parking brake lining thickness:

Standard: 3.9 mm (0.15 in.) 9. If the inside diameter of the parking brake drum is
Service limit: 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) more than service limit, replace the brake disci
drum.
6. If the parking brake lining thickness is less than the
service limit, replace all the parking brake shoes as 10. Check the parking brake disc/drum for scoring,·
a set (see page 19-30). grooves, and cracks.
7. Check the hub (C) for smooth operation. If it 11. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc/drum
requires servicing, replace the hub bearing unit and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
(see page 18-30). wheels.
BACK
19-29
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement
6. Remove the strut (A).

ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health .
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
Disassembly
2. Remove the rear wheels. 7. Lower the parking brake shoe assembly.
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the 8. Remove the forward brake shoe (A) and the
following items: adjuster assembly (8) by removing the lower return
spring (e) .
• Rear brake caliper bracket (see step 3 on page
18-30) •
• Rear brake disc/drum (see step 6 on page 18-31).
4. Disconnect and remove the upper return

springs (A).
c
A
5. Remove the tension pins (A) by pushing the

respective retainer (8) and turning the pin.
A
19-30
BACK
9. Remove the rearward brake shoe by disconnecting Reassembly
the parking brake cable (A) from the parking brake
lever (B). 1. Apply Molykote Plastilube # 2 grease to the sliding
surface of the pivot pin (A) of the rearward brake
shoe (B).
10. Remove the U-clip (A), wave washer (B), and

parking brake lever (C) from the brake shoe (0).
2. Install the parking brake lever (C) and wave washer

(0) on the pivot pin, and secure with a new U-clip
(E).
o Install the wave washer with its convex side

facing out.
o Pinch the U-clip securely to prevent the parking
brake lever from coming off the brake shoe.
3. Connect the parking brake cable (A) to the parking

brake lever (B). Apply Plastilube # 2 grease to the
cable contact surface (C) on the backing plate.
(cont'd)
BACK
19-31
I',·
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement (cont'd)
4. Apply a thin coat of Plastilube # 2 grease to the 6. Install connecting rods A and B on the adjuster nut
shoe ends and strut ends (A), sliding surfaces (B), (C).
and opposite edges of the parking brake shoe (C) as
shown. Wipe off any excess. Keep the grease off NOTE:
the brake linings. • Clean the threaded portions of connecting rod A
and the sliding surface of connecting rod B, then
coat them with rubber grease .
• Shorten connecting rod A by fully turning the
adjuster nut.
Greasing symbols:
. . . Brake shoe ends and strut ends
~ :: -0 Opposite edge of the shoe
c::>- Sliding surface
5. Install the tension pin (A), the retainer spring (B),

and the retainer (C) on the rearward brake shoe (0).
Make sure the tension pin does not contactthe A
parking brake lever.
7. Position the brake shoe adjuster assembly (0) on
the parking brake shoes.
8. Hook the lower return spring (E) on the parking

brake shoes.
D
9. Install the rod spring (A) to the strut (B) first. Then
install the strut on the parking brake shoes.
19-32 BACK
Parking Brake Shoe Lining Break-in
10. Install the tension pin (A), the retainer spring (B),
and the retainer (C) on the forward brake shoe (D).
NOTE:
• Do the brake lining surface break-in when replacing
shoes with new brake linings and/or new rear brake
disc/drum .
• Check the number of parking brake lever clicks.
Adjust the parking brake before lining surface break-
in (see page 19-8) •.
A
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
2. Release the parking brake pedal.
3. Press the parking brake pedal 5 clicks.
11. Install the forward upper return spring (A) as 4. Drive the vehicle for 1/4 mile (400 m) at about
shown. 31 mph (50 km/h).
5. Stop the vehicle, and release the parking brake for

5-10 minutes to allow the brake disc/drum to cool.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 two more times.
7. Check the parking brake pedal adjustment

(see page 19-7).
12. Install the rearward upper return spring (B) as

shown.
13. Install the rear brake disc/drum and the rear brake
caliper bracket in the reverse order of removal.
14. Do the major parking brake adjustment (see page

19-8).
BACK
19-33
Brake·Pedal Replacement
1.Removeth~ driver's dashboard Ur'ldercover

(see page 20-120);
2. Remove the TPMS control unit (see page 18-162).
3. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch

connector (A), and remove the harness clips.
4. Remove the lock pin (8) and joint pin (C).
5. Remove the harness and connector clips.
6. Remove the brake pedal bracket mounting bolt (D)

and nuts (E).
7. Remove the brake pedal with bracket (F).
8. Install in the reverse order of removal.
9. Do the brake pedal and brake pedal position switch

adjustment (see page 19-6).
BACK
19-34
Brake Hose and Line Inspection
1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting.
2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leaks. Also check for bent brake lines.
3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
4. Check the master cylinder and the VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leaks.
Connection Component Connected to Specified Torque Value Note

Point
A Front brake caliper Brake hose 34 N·m (3.5 kaf·m, 25 Ibf·ft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 9 N·m (0.9 kaf·m, 7 Ibf·ft)
B Rear brake caliper Brake hose 34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 Ibf·ft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 9 N·m (0.9 kaf·m, 7 Ibf·ft)
C Brake hose Brake line 15 N·m (1.5 kaf·m, 11 Ibf·ft) Flare nut
D Master cylinder Brake line 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft) Flare nut
E VSA modulator-control unit Brake line 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m,16Ibf·ft) Flare nut
(12 mm nut)
Brake line 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 Ibf·ft) Flare nut
(10 mm nut)
C A
BACK
19-35
Brake Hose Replacement
NOTE: Installation - Front

• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of
dirt and other foreign particles. 1. Install the brake hose (A) with the mounting bolt (B).
• Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to
do so. C
10x1.0mm . /:x1.25mm
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage 34N·m 22N·m
(3.5 kgf·m, 25 Ibf.ft~)~~ (2.2kgf.m,
the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off 16Ibf·ft)
• To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and· A
cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or
equivalent material.
Removal - Front
2. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the brake hose

(B), then remove the brake hose clip (C).
2. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with the

banjo bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D).
3. Install a new brake hose clip (A) to the brake hose

(B) on the bracket, then connect the brake line (C).
Do not twist the brake hose.
B
c~
10x1.0mm
15N·m
(1.5 kgf.m.
11 Ibf._ftl'-----:::=.--It:
3. Remove the banjo bolt (A), and disconnect the B

brake hose (B) from the caliper.
4. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake

system (see page 19-9).
5. Do the following checks:
• Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary .
• Check the brake hoses for interference and
twisting.
6. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc and the

4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (C), then inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
remove the brake hose.
19-36 BACK
Removal- Rear Installation - Rear
1. Remove the rear wheel. 1. Connect the rear side brake hose to the caliper with
the banjo bolt (A) and new sealing washers (8).
2. Disconnect the brake lines (A) from the brake hoses
A
(8), then remove the brake hose clips (C). 10x1.0mm
34N·m
2. Install new brake hose clip (A) to the brake hoses

(8) on the brackets, then connect the brake lines (C).
3. Remove the front side brake hose (D). Do not twist the brake hoses.
4. Remove the banjo bolt (A), and disconnect the

brake hose from the caliper. C
10x1.0mm
15N·m
(1.5kgf.m,
11lbf·ft)
B
3. After installing the brake hoses, bleed the brake

system (see page 19-9).
5. Remove the rear side brake hose (8).
4. Do the following checks:
• Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary .
• Check the brake hoses for interference and
twisting.
5. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc/drum

wheel.
BACK 19-37
Parking Brake Cable Replacement
Exploded View
PARKING
1Nm BRAKE· PARKING BRAKE
(0.1 kgf·m, 1 Ibf.ft) SWITCH. _ _ _ PEDAL ASSEMBLV
~~1i
8 x 1 25 mm ~Multipurpose /PARKINGBRAKE
CABLE A
22 N:m (Sliding surface) Check for
12.2 kgf.m.l. ~ !,"tty movomeot.
- - - - / 1 - - 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
LEFT PARKING BRAKE CABLE
Check for faulty movement.
8x 1.25 mm
\ 22N·m
6.x1.0 mm RIGHT PARKING BRAKE CABLE

9.8N·m Check for faulty movement.
19-38 BACK
NOTE: 5. Reinstall the parking brake cable in the reverse
• The parking brake cables must not be bent or order of removal, and note these items:
distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and
premature failure. • Be careful not to bend or distort the cable .
• Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this • Connect the parking brake cable to the brake
procedure. lever, and install the parking brake shoes and
drum (see page 19-31).
1. Loosen the parking brake cable adjusting nut • Do the parking brake adjustment (see page 19-8).
(see page 19-8). Apply the parking brake firmly 10 times then
adjust it again.
2. Remove the parking brake shoes, and disconnect
the parking brake cable from the parking brake
lever (see page 19-30).
3. Remove the parking brake cable mounting bolts

from the backing plate (A).
4. Pull the parking brake cable (B) and remove it from

the backing plate.
BACK
19-39
BACK
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components ................... 19-1
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) System Components

Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 19-58
DTC Troubleshooting ................................................... 19-61
Symptom Troubleshooting ............................ ~ ............ 19-96
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement ......................... 19-99
Steering Angle Sensor Center Point Writing ............. 19-100
Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration
. Sensor Replacement ................................................ 19-100
VSA Off Switch Test ..................................................... 19-101
VSA Modulator-Control Unit
Removal and Installation ......................................... 19-102
@VSA
Wheel Sensor Replacement ........................................ 19-104
VSA System Components
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

BRAKE LIGHT RELAY

RIGHT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
LEFT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR

HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR

Replac;ement, page 19-104
HUB BEARING UNIT .
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
VSA MODULATOR- LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR

CONTROL UNIT Replacement, page 19-104
Removal and HUB BEARING UNIT
Installation, (MAGNETIC ENCODER)
ACCELERATION SENSOR
19-42 BACK
System Indicator VSA Activation Indicator
This system has four indicators and one warning: The VSA activation indicator blinks, when the VSA
function is activating. The VSA activation indicator
• ABS indicator (A) comes on, when the VSA is turned OFF by using the
• Brake system indicator (B) VSA OFF switch, or the VSAfunction is lost. The VSA
• VSA indicator (C) activation indicator is on until the steering angle sensor
• VSA activation indicator (D) center point writing is done (see page 19-100).
• Trailer stability assist warning (E)
Trailer Stability Assist Warning
Trailer stability assist warning comes on, when brake

light relay has malfunctioned or when VSA function is
lost.
ABS, VSA Indicators, and Trailer Stability Assist

Warning go off
Each indicator or warning will go off after a problem

goes away, but the timing which the VSA modulator-
control unit turns off the indicators or warning varies
between DTCs.
• DTC 61, 62:

The indicators go off automatically when the system
When the system detects a problem, it will turn the returns to normal.
appropriate indicators on or warning indicate. • DTC 11, 13, 15, 17,21',22,25,26,27,31,32,33,34,
Depending on the failure, the VSA modulator-control 35,36,37,38,45,46,47,48,54,59,65,66,67,68,69,
unit determines which indicators are turned on or 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 81, 84,91,92, or 97' ':
warning indicate. The indicators stay on until the ignition switch is
When the system is OK, each indicator comes on for turned OFF whether or not the system returns to
about 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON (11), normal.
then goes off. * : There are some cases that the indicators stay on
until the vehicle is driven after the system returns to
ABS Indicator normal.
* *: There are some cases that the indicators go off
The ABS indicator comes on when the ABS function is automatically when the system returns to normal.
lost. The brakes still work like a conventional system. • DTC 12, 14, 16, 18,51,52, or 53:
The indicators stay on until the vehicle is driven after
Brake System Indicator the system returns to normal.
The brake system indicator comes on when the EBD

function is lost, the parking brake is applied, and/or the
brake fluid level is low.
VSA Indicator
The VSA indicator comes on, when VSA function is lost.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-43
VSASystem Components
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) How to Troubleshoot DTCs
• The memory can hold up to 10 DTCs. However, when The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause
the same DTC is detected more than once, the more of the problem is still present and the ABS, VSA
recent DTC is written over the earlier one. Therefore, indicators, and/or trailer stability assist warning are still
When the same problem is detected repeatedly, it is on. Following a troubleshooting procedure for a code
memorized as a single DTC. that has been cleared but does not reset can result in
• The DTCs are indicated intheorder they occur. incorrect diagnosis.
• The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM. Therefore,
the memorized DTCs cannot be cancelled by 1. Question the client about the conditions when the
disconnecting the battery. Do the specified problem occurred, i'Jnd try to reproduce the same
procedures to clear the DTCs. conditions for troubleshooting. Find out when the
ABS, VSA indicators, and/or trailer stability assist
Self-diagnosis warning came on, such as during activation, after
activation, when the vehicle was traveling at a
• Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories: certain speed, etc. If necessary, have the client
-Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch demonstrate the concern.
is turned ON (II) and until the ABS and VSA
indicators go off. 2. When the ABS, VSA indicators, ortrailer stability
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial assist warning does not come on during the test-
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF. drive, but troubleshooting is done based on the
• When the system detects. a problem, theVSA DTC, check for loose connectors, poor contact of
modulator-control unit shifts to the fail-safe mode. the terminals, etc. before you start troubleshooting.
Kickback 3. After troubleshooting, or the repairs are done, clear

the DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same
The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator- conditions that originally set the DTCs. Make sure
control unit is functioning, and the fluid in the reservoir the ABS, VSA indicators, and trailer stability assist
is forced out to the master cylinder, causing a kickback warning do not come on.
at the brake pedal.
4. Check for DTCs from other control unit DTCs which
Pump Motor connected viaF-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
related to F-CAN, the most likely cause was that the
• The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator- ignition switch was turned ON (II) with the VSA
control unit is functioning. modulator-control unit connector disconnected.
• The VSA modulator-control unit checks the pump Clear the DTCs. Check for fuel and emissions, and
motor operation during regular diagnosis when the VSA codes, first., Be sure to troubleshoot those first.
vehicle is driven over 10 mph (15 km/h) and at
19 mph (30 km/h) the first time after the ignition Intermittent Failures
switch is turned ON (II). You may hear the motor
operate at this time and feel some vibration, but it is The term "intermittent failure" means a system may
normal. have had a failure, but it checks OK now. Ifthe
i ndicator(s) of the system does not come on, check for
Brake Fluid Replacementl Air Bleeding loose connectors or poor contacts in the terminals
related to the circuit that you are troubleshooting. If the
Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures indicators were on, but then went out, the original
are identical to the procedures used on vehicles without problem may have been intermittent.
the VSA system (see page 19-9).
19-44 BACK
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic How to Retrieve DTCs
System)
1. If the system indicators stay on, connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) under the driver's
the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the side of the dashboard.
driver's side of the dashboard.

and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't,
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the

DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC,
refer to the DTC troubleshooting.
How to Clear DTCs

the data link connector (DLC) under the driver's
side of the dashboard.
and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't, 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-223). and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't,
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
Also check the on-board snapshot data, and 4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts
download any data found. Then refer to the onthe HDS.
indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and do the
appropriate troubleshooting procedure. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
• The HDS can read the DTC, the current data, and
other system data .
• For specific operations, refer to the Help menu
that came with the HDS.
BACK 19-45
DTe Troubleshooting Index

DTC Detection Item ASS Brake VSA VSA Trailer Note
Indicator System Indicator Activation Stability
Indicator Indicator Assist
Warnina
11 Right-front wheel sensor ON ON or OFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-61)
(open/short to body ground/short to
power)
12 Right-front wheel sensor ON ON orOFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-66)
(electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
13 Left-front wheel sensor ON ONorOFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-61)
power)
14 Left-front wheel sensor ON ON orOFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-66)
(ele'ctrical noise/intermittent interruotion)
15 Right-rear wheel sensor ON ONorOFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-61)
power)
16 Right-rear wheel sensor ON ONorOFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-66)
(electrical noiselintermittent interruotion)
17 Left-rear wheel sensor ON ON or OFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-61)
oower)
18 Left-rear wheel sensor ON ON orOFF' ON ON ON (see page 19-66)
(electrical noise/intermittent interruption)
21 Difference in wheel speed ON ON orOFF ON ON ON (see page 19-67)
22 Currentflow into wheel sensor input ON ,OFF ON ON ON (see page 19-68)
amplifier
25 Yaw rate sensor (sensor unit) OFF 'OFF ON ON ON (seepa~e 19-68)
26 Lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor OFF OFF ON ON ON (see page 19-68)
(sensor unit)
27 Steering angle sensor (hardware) OFF OFF ON ON ON (see oaae 19-69)
31 ABS solenoid ON ON ON ON ON (see oaae 19-69)
36 ABS solenoid ON ON ON ON ON (see page 19-69)
37 ABS solenoid ON ON ON ON ON (see page 19-69)
38 ABS solenoid ON ON ON ON ON JseepaJle 19-69t
*: Brake system IndIcator turns ON when three or more wheel sensors fall.
19-46 BACK
DTe Detection Item ABS Brake VSA VSA Trailer Note
Indicator System Indicator Activation Stability
Indicator Indicator Assist
Warning
45 VSA solenoid ON ON ON ON ON (see pag~ 19-70)
46 VSA solenoid ON ON ON ON ON (see oaoe 19-70)
47 VSA solenoid ON ON ON ON ON (see oaoe 19-70)
48 VSA solenoid ON ON ON ON ON Jsee oaoe 19-701
51 Motor Locked ON ON ON ON ON (see oaoe 19-70)
52 Motor stuck OFF ON ON ON ON ON (see page 19-711
53 Motor stuck ON ON ON ON ON ON (see page 19-73)
54 Valve relav ON ON orOFF ON ON ON (see page 19-74)
59 BRKDIAG high OFF OFF OFF OFF ON (see page 19-75)
61 IG1 voltage low ON ON orOFF ON ON ON (see page 19-771
62 IG1 voltage high ON ON ON ON ON (see page 19-78)
65 VSA pressure sensor (hardware) ON OFF ON ON ON (see page 19-78)
66 VSA pressure sensor (software) ON OFF ON ON ON (see page 19-79)
67 Brake pedal position switch stuck ON OFF OFF ON ON ON (see page 19-80)
(hardware)
68 Brake pedal position switch stuck OFF ON OFF ON ON ON (see page 19-81)
(software)
69 BRKDIAG low OFF OFF OFF OFF ON (see oage 19-83)
72 Steering angle sensor (software) OFF OFF ON ON ON (see oage 19-87)
73 Yaw rate sensor (Dower suoolv) OFF OFF ON ON ON (see pa~e 19-88)
74 Yaw rate sensor (software) OFF OFF ON ON ON (see oaoe 19-891
(joint failure)
(software)
81 Central processing unit (CPU) ON orOFF ON orOFF ONorOFF ON orOFF ON or OFF (see page 19-91)
84 Steering angle sensor No center point OFF OFF ON orOFF ON ON (see page 19-91)
writing
91 F-CAN communication OFF OFF ON ON ON or OFF (see page 19-92)
92 F-CAN svstem (bus-off) ON orOFF ON or OFF ON orOFF ON orOFF ONorOFF (see page 19-94)
97 VSAsvstem ON OFF ON ON ON (see page 19-95)
.: Brake system mdlcator turns ON when three or more wheel sensors fall.
BACK 19-47
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the HDS. If there is no
DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.

HDS does not communicate with the VSA modulator- Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-223).
control unit or the vehicle
VSA activation indicator does not come on at start-up 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
(bulb check) (see page 22-315).
2. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit,
then recheck. If it is OK, replace the original VSA
modulator-control unit (see page 19-102).
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and no DTCs 1. Do the Steering Angle Sensor center point writing
are stored procedure.
2. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 19-96).
3. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
(see page 22-315).
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
indicator do not come on at the same time (see page 22-315).
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA 1. Check for F-CAN DTCs, and troubleshoot and repair
indicator do not go off at the same time those first.
2. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 19-97).
3. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
(see page 22-315).
19-48 BACK
System Description
VSA Modulator-control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 46P Connector
L=============~~~~====~IL
Terminal Wire Terminal Description Measurement (Disconnect the VSA modulator-control

number color sign unit 46P connector)
Terminal Conditions Result
6 ORN BRKDIAG Detects brake light 6-GND Trailer stability assist brake Battery
relay operated or brake pedal voltage
pressed
8 GRV RR-GND Detects right-rear -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
10 RED RL-GND Detects left-rear -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
11 VEL RL+B Detects left-rear -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
12 ORN FL+B Detects left-front -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
15 LT K-LiNE Communicates with -- -- --
BLU HDS
(cont'd)
BACK 19-49
VSA Modulator-control Unit Inputs-and Outputs for 46P Connector (cont'd)
L=============~~~~======~IL
Terminal - Wire Terminal-·. Description Measurement (Disconnect the VSA modulator-control

number color sign unit 46P connector)
Terminal Conditions Result
28 PNK FR-GND Detects right-front -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
29 GRN FR+B Detects right-front -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
30 IT RR+B Detects right-rear -- -- --
BLU wheel sensor signal
34 GRY Fl-GND Detects left-front -- --
wheel sensor signal
37 YEl BRK LAMP Drives the brake light 37-GND Ignition switch ON (II) Battery
relay voltage
38 RED CANol F-CAN
communication
-- -- --
circuit
39 WHT CAN-H F-CAN -- -- --
communication
circuit
40 ORN IG1 Power source for 40-GND Ignition switch ON (II) Battery
activating the system voltage
43 BRN GND2 Ground for the VSA 43-GND At all times Continuity to
modulator-control ground
unit
44 IT +BSOl Power source for the 44-GND At all times Battery
GRN valve relay voltage
45 RED +BMOT Power source for the 45-GND At all times Battery
motor relay voltage
46 BlK GND1 Ground for the pump 46-GND Atal! times Continuity to
motor ground
19-50 BACK
System Outline
This system is composed of the VSA modulator-control unit, the wheel sensors, the steering angle sensor, and the
yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor, and the system indicators in the gauge control module. TheVSA
modulator-control unit controls the ABS, EBD, TeS, VSA, TSA, and brake assist with the brake pressure of each wheel
and the engine torque.
BRAKE BRAKE
VSA PARKING FLUID PEDAL
OFF BRAKE LEVEL PosmON
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
I I I T
I PCM
l
.. .VSA off switch signal
~=?n~~o~~~~rlgnal
.. ~
·VSA control enable/disable
-Throttle open angle signal
<Engine revolutfon signal
""' ~ear position signal
=::a.!:r=~ switch signal

dicator drive signal
er request signal
I YAW RATE-LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION
SENSOR
I
-Yaw rate signal
olateral/longitudlnal acceleratfon signal I WHEEL SENSOR
I
lr l
Wheel rotation pulse signal
IF ERING
SENSOR ANGLE
r
1--- I SH·AWD
CONTROL TPMS
CONTROL
UNIT UNIT
'II ,.~ ,.
~gin8 torque control request
.control mode signal
~~v= :t J lowpressure
signal
I
CONTROL UNIT
I
-SOlenoid control
-Mo1or control
~~ Brake pressure
signal
VSA MODULATOR·
CONTROL UNIT
I MODULATOR UNIT
I
~ Communication via F-CAN
(cont'd)
BACK 19-51
ABS Features
Anti-lock control
Without ABS, when the brake pedal is pressed while driving, the wheels sometimes lock before the vehicle comes to a
stop. In such an event, the maneuverability ofthe vehicle is reducedifthe frontwheels are locked, and the stability of
the vehicle is reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. With ABS, the system
precisely controls the slip rate of the wheels to ensure maximum grip force from the tires, and it thereby ensures
maneuverability and stability of the vehicle. The ABS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the four wheel
speeds, and then it controls the brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip force of tire and road surface

COEFFICIENT OF
FRICTION
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
SLIP RATE
Main Control
The control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signals it receives, then it calculates the vehicle
speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based on the
wheel speeds.
The control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid
valve when the slip rate is high.
The hydraulic control has three modes: Pressure intensifying, pressure reducing, and pressure retaining.
CONTROL UNIT
r " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " - " _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. - .. ,
L.._ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. ..J
19-52 BACK
EBO Features
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) feature helps control vehicle braking by adjusting the rear brake force in
accordance with the rear wheel load before the ABS operates. Based on the wheel sensor signals, the control unit uses
the modulator to control the rear brakes individually. When the rear wheel speed is less than the front wheel speed,
the VSA modulator-control unit retains the current rear brake fluid pressure by closing the inlet valve in the modulator.
As the rear wheel speed increases and approaches the front wheel speed, the VSA modulator-control unit increases
the rear brake fluid pressure by momentarily opening the inlet valve. This whole process is repeated very rapidly.
While this is happening, kickback may be felt at the brake pedal.
With EBD under HEAVY LOAD
REAR WHEEL
at REAR WHEELS
BRAKE PRESSURE
With EBD under LIGHT LOAD

at REAR WHEELS
WithoutEBD
FRONT WHEEL BRAKE PRESSURE
TCS Features
When a drive wheel loses traction on a slippery road surface and starts to spin, the VSA modulator-control unit applies
brake pressure to the spinning wheel and sends an engine torque control request to the PCM to slow the spinning
wheel and keep traction.
DRIVING POWER
TOTAL TRACTION
TOTAL TRACTION
BRAKE FORCE
I
NORMAL ROAD SURFACE SLIPPERY ROAD SURFACE
(cont'd)
BACK 19-53
VSA System Features

Oversteer control
Applies the brake to the front and rear outside wheels
The brake makes the yaw rate opposite

to the turning direction
Understeer control
• Applies the brake to the front and rear inside wheels
• Controls the engine torque when accelerating
The brake increases the yaw rate toward

the turning direction
The throttle control effect:
• reduces vehicle speed
• increases cornering force
19-54 BACK
Brake Assist Features
Brake assist helps ensure that any driver can achieve the full braking potential of the vehicle by increasing brake
system pressure in a panic situation, bringing the vehicle into a full ABS stop.
If during a panic stop the VSA modulator-control unit determines that the brake system pressure increases above a
threshold in less than a certain amount of time, the VSA modulator-control unit engages brake assist.
Because the brake system pressure crossed the pressure threshold before the time threshold had expired, the VSA
modulator-control unit goes into brake assist mode.
Brake Pedal
Effort Reduced
:~
I
I
Panic Stop with Brake Assist I
I
Pressure
I Panic Stop without Brake Assist I
Pressure ~.. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
Threshold h...,.....,...,.....,"""';::;;1<-+ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~-
Normal Stop
Time
Threshold Time
(cont'd)
BACK 19-55
Modulator Unit
The modulator unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, the outlet solenoid valve, the VSA NO (normally open)
solenoid valve, the VSA NC (normally closed) solenoid valve, the reservoir, the pump, the pump motor, and the
damping chamber.
The hydraulic control has three modes of ABS action; pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing.
Pressure adding mode is a combination of at TCS, VSA, and brake assist action.
The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type; one channel for each wheel.
MASTER CYUNDER
FL RR RL FR
MODULATOR UNIT
i
i
i IN
i
i
i
i
i '
,
1.._--------------_ RESERVOIR RESERVOIR
.. _-----------------------------------________________________ -'I
IN: INLET SOLENOID VALVE (NORMAU Y OPEN)
OUT: OUTLET SOLENO)D VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED)
Mode VSANO VSANC Inlet Outlet Brake Fluid

Valve Valve Solenoid Solenoid
Valve Valve
Pressure open closed open closed Master cylinderfluid is pumped out to
intensifying the caliper.
mode
Pressure open closed closed closed Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet
retaining and outlet valves.
mode
Pressure open closed closed open• Caliper fluid flows through the
reducing outlet valve to the reservoir.
mode • The motor pumps the reservoir fluid
through the damping chamber to
the master cylinder'.
Pressure closed open open closed • Master cylinder fluid is pumped out
intensifying by pump with motor through VSA
mode (VSA) NC valve to the caliper.
• Caliper fluid pressure exceed
master ~Iindergressure.
..
*: The motor Will continue running until the operation of the one anti-lock brake control IS finished with the first
pressure reducing mode.
19-56 BACK
Trailer Stability Assist Features
While towing a trailer, factors, such as a lane change, inappropriate tongue weight, and crosswind, can cause trailer
sway. This may also cause the vehicle to sway. The trailer stability assist helps stabilize the vehicle, using the same
system as VSA (VSA modulator-control unit and sensors). With signals from each sensor, the trailer stability assist
detects when trailer sway affects the vehicle, and then reduces vehicle speed while stabilizing the vehicle. The rear
brake lights automatically turn on when the trailer stability assist activates.
Without
Trailer
Stability
Assist
With
Trailer
Stability
Assist
,
Increase vehicle
, ,.,'
yaw rate. ..'
,.~.,.
I,
Vehicle yaw rate
.. " .'.' ,,<,~;,'

" • .<" .!) ~:.<",,::
, . ;'{P Control complete

Trailer stability~i~ :.'
J
col)frdt"····""··.:" ';';:'." "';s:/'

;",'/:'." ", .~' "~i h '
BACK 19-57
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDEJI.HOOD RISE BOX

BAmRV
No. 1212llAl
+r-~-C~-----+-- LTGRN LTGRN
No. 2 140 AI
RED RED
UNDER·DASH
IGNmON SWITCH RJSE/R8.AY BOX
No. 11120 AI No. 3 ~o AI
WHT~ PNK IGI
AS X20
C5
ORN
IGI HOT In ON lUI GRN

and START nlll
BRAKE PEDALPOSmON Swm:tI

WHT
No. 11 115 AI
WHT~-
CIosod: Brakepedalpnssed
LTGRN LTGRN
YAW RATE-IATERALJ
LONGIIUDINAL
ACCELERA110N SENSOR
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE ORN
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR RED WHT------'-...,
@ RED RED-'----...,
ABSINDICATOR
@ r BLK BLK~
VSA INDICATOR
@
WHT---------~-----------~~~----WHT-------
G501 G506
REO -----------------r-------------------~_r------RED-------------
VSAACTIVA1l0N INDICATOR PCM
[J~ :-------+-+
@ ORN
ORN
LTBLU - - - - - - -
r'~~~'! AS LTGRN
L~.S~~~'~.j
MULTJ.lNFORMAll0N
DiSPlAY
DATA LiNK
CONNECTOR IDLeI
6
14
WHT
REO
BRAKE FLUID PARKING
LEVEL SWITCH BRAKE SWITCH LTBLU
Closed: Lowfluid Closed: Parking
brak.ap~/od 16
WHT <J +B
BLK
BLK
BLK
G302 G503
19-58 BACK
------LTGRN~-~~~~~_ -~~~~~~_ RED
-_'_-_-_'_-_-_-_-:_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_ LTGAN ~-:-:::-tt-- 1===71
- - - - - RED
i
------GRN
-----"
WIlT
ORN
RED
4
2
1
"
tJ
ORN
"
,
i
I
i
\tCi
IlK
! ~SENSOR
l.-----------l~_t------ ""moc~
G5II6
6
~--tt-~YEL
ORN
WIlT
----- RED-----
LTBLU
rr ORN
GRY
GAN
12
FltB
34
Fl-GND
29
IIItB
IIll
~
mHSENSOR 28
~r
PNK
ifi-
il
r LTBLU
GRY
IlK
-
30
RAtB
46
B
GNUI
BRN
.:12Y
-o-:5Y
G303
(cant'd)
BACK 19-59
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C(12P) UNDER·DASH FUSE/RElAY BOX CONNECTOR X(39P) STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
5P CONNECTOR
1,121/14161
~ [!]
15 1717 171 EEE1
VSA OFF SWITCH
5P CONNECTOR
GJZI L,f52m 6 J
YAW RATE·LATERAL/
LONGITUDINAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
00
4P CONNECTOR 1,611717171201
I, I,
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
2P CONNECTOR
0 vl/I/132IZI3413SI
I:-
0 I 36 I 37 II:!!JZI
I:-
t±r
Lr\
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION PARKING BRAKE SWITCH WHEEL SENSOR
SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR lPCONNECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
~
~
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR A(12P) GAUGE CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR B(24P)
DATA UNK CONNECTOR (DLC) PCM CONNECTOR A (49P) BRAKE UGHT RELAY 5P CONNECTOR
19-60 BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17: Wheel Sensor (Open/Short 7. Check for loose terminals between the wheel
to Body Ground/Short to Power) sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector.
Are their connections OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
Is ore 22 indicated with ore 11, 13, 15, and/or
17 at the same time? NO-Reconnect the connector and retest..
YES-Go to step 9. 8. Check that the appropriate wheel sensor is properly

mounted (see page 19-104).
NO-Go to step 3.
DTC A~~iate Wheel Sensor
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 11 Right-front
13 Left-front
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) 15 Right-rear
again. 17 Left-rear
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Is the wheel sensor installation OK?
Is ore 11, 13, 15, and/or 17 indicated? YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 6. NO-Reinstall the wheel sensor, and check the

mounting position (see page 19-104).•
time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector. Check for a loose 10. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connection at G303. Refer to intermittent failures connector.
troubleshooting (see page 19-44).•
(cont'd)
BACK
19-61
12. Measure the voltage between body ground and the 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
appropriate wheel sensor +B and GND terminals
of the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector 14. Check for continuity between body ground and the
respectively (see table). appropriate wheel sensor +B and GND terminals
of the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
DTC Appropriate Terminal respectively (see table).
+8 GND
11 (Right-front) FR+B: FR-GND: DTC ~cmriate Terminal
No. 29 No. 28 +8 GND
13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND: 11 (Right-front) FR+B: FR-GND:
No. 12 No. 34 No.29 No. 28
15 (Right-rear) RR+B: RR-GND: 13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND:
No. 30 No.8 No.12 No. 34
17 (Left-rear) RL+B: RL-GND: 15 (Right-rear) RR+B: RR-GND:
No.11 No. 10 No. 30 No.8
17 (Left-rear) RL+B: RL-GND:
No.11 No.10
RL-GND (RED) RL +B (VEl) VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
.-~~~------~
RR-GND (GRV) FL +B (ORN)
8 8 101112 16
FL-GND (GRV)
RR +B (LT BLU)
FR+B(GRN)
= Q
=
Is there 0.1 V or more? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Repair short to power in the wire between Is there continuity?

the VSA modulator-control unit and the appropriate
wheel sensor.• YES-Go to step 15.
19-62 BACK
15.. Disconnectthe appropriate wheel sensor 2P 17. Measure the resistance between the appropriate
connector. VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector wheel
sensor +B and GND terminals (see table), then
16. Check for continuity between body ground and the measure the resistance between the same
appropriate wheel sensor +B and GND terminals terminals and reverse the positive and negative
of the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector . tester probes.
respectively (see table).
DTC . Appropriate Terminal
DTC Appropriate Terminal +8 GND
+8 GND 11 (Right-front) FR+B: FR-GND:
11 (Right-front) FR+B: FR-GND: No. 29 No. 28
No. 29 No. 28 13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND:
13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND: No. 12 No. 34
No. 12 No. 34 15 (Right-rear) RR+B: RR-GND:
15 (Right-rear) RR+B: RR-GND: No. 30 No.8
No. 30 No.8 17 (Left-rear) RL+B: RL-GND:
17 (Left-rear) RL+B: RL-GND: No.11 No. 10
No.11 No. 10
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
RL-GND (RED) RL+B(VEL)

~~~~------~
RR-GND (GRV) FL+B (ORN)
6 8
FL-GND (GRV)
RR +B (LT BLU) FR +B (GRN) FL-GND (GRV)
FR +B (GRN) RR +B (LT BLU)
Q
= -=- -=
Is the resistance infinity (ohmmeter may read OL)
Is there continuity? in both directions?
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire YES-Go to step 18.

between the VSA modulator-control unit and the
appropriate wheel sensor.• NO-Go to step 20.
NO-Replace the appropriate wheel sensor

(see page 19-104).•
(cont'd)
BACK
19-63
18.. Disconnect the appropriate wheel sensor 2P 20. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA
connector. modulator-control unit 46P connector wheel sensor
+B and GND terminals (see table), then check for
19. On the sensor side, measure the resistance continuity between the same terminals and reverse
between appropriate wheel sensor 2P connector the positive and negative tester probes.
terminals No.1 and No.2, then measure resistance
between the same terminals and reverse the DTe Appropriate·Terminal
positive and negative tester probes. +8 GND
11 (Right-front) , FR+B: FR-GND:
WHEEL SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR No. 29 No. 28
13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND:
No.12 No. 34
15 (Right-rear) RR+B: RR-GND:
No. 30 No.8
No.11 No. 10
'-----{QI----' VSA MODULATOR·CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
Terminal side of. male terminals
Is the resistance infinity (ohmmeter may read OL)

in both directions?
YES-Replace the appropriate wheel sensor

(see page 19-104).•
appropriate wheel sensor and the VSA modulator-
control unit.• Is there continuity in both directions?
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Check for loose terminals in the VSA

modulator-control unit 46P connector. Check for a
loose connection at G303. If necessary, substitute a
known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
19-102) and retest.•
BACK
'·9-64
21. Disconnect the appropriate wheel sensor 2P
connector.
22. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA

modulator-control unit 46P connector wheel sensor
+B and GND terminals (see table), then check for
continuity between the same terminals and reverse
the positive and negative tester probes.
OTC Appropriate Terminal

+8 GNO
11 (Right-front) FR+B: FR-GND:
No. 29 No. 28
13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND:
No. 12 No. 34
15 (Right-rear) RR+B: RR-GND:
No. 30 No.8
No.11 No.10
Fl-GND (GRYI
Is there continuity in both directions?
YES-Repair short in the wires between the VSA

modulator-control unit and the appropriate wheel
sensor.•
NO-Replace the appropriate wheel sensor

(see page 19-104) .•
BACK 19-65

DTC 12, 14, 16, 18: Wheel Sensor (Electrical 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Noise/Intermittent Interruption)
Is DTC 12, 14, 16, and/or 18 indicated?
NOTE:
• If the ABS and other indicators come on because of YES-Go to step 8..
electrical noise, the indicators will go off when you
test-drive the vehicle speed at 10 mph (15 km/h) or NO-Replace the original wheel sensor (see page
more and the noise is gone. 19-104).•
• An incorrectly installed wheel bearing can cause one
of these DTCs. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Substitute an appropriate known-good hub bearing
unit: Front (see page 18-12), rear (see page 18-29).
2. Check the appropriate wheel sensor and inspect the
magnetic encoder on the appropriate hub bearing 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
for debris: Front (see page 18-12), rear (see page
18-29). 11. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor and 12. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more.
Magnetic Encoder
12 Right-front 13. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
14 Left-front
16 Right-rear Is DTC 12, 14, 16, and/or 18 indicated?
18 Left-rear
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
Are they installed correctly in good condition, and modulator-control unit 46P connector. Check for a
free of debris? loose connection at G303. If necessary, substitute a
YES-Go to step 3. 19-102) and retest.•
NO-Reinstall or replace the appropriate wheel NO-Replace the original hub bearing unit:
sensor, hub bearing unit, and recheck by test-
driving .• • Front: Replace the original front hub bearing unit
(see page 18-12).•
3. Substitute an appropriate known-good wheel • Rear: Replace the original rear hub bearing unit
sensor (see page 19-104). (see page 18-29).•
6. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) or more.
19-66 BACK
DTC 21: Difference in Wheel Speed 4. Check all magnetic encoders on the hub bearing
units: Front (see page 18-12), rear (see page 18-29).
NOTE: A wheel bearing that is installed backwards can
cause this OTC. . Are they installed correctly and in good condition?
1. Check all four tires for size, inflation, and wear. YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
Are all four tires the correct size, properly inflated, loose connection at G303. If necessary, substitute a
and worn evenly? known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the hub bearing unit(s), and recheck
NO-Install the correct tires, a known-good set of by test-driving:
tires, or set the tires to the correct pressure, and
retest by test-driving .• • Front: Replace the front hub bearing unit
(see page 18-12).•
2. Test-drive the vehicle. • Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit (see page
18-29).•
3. Check the RF, LF, RR, LR WHEEL SPO in the VSA
OATA LIST with the HOS.
Are all four the same indicated value?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Reinstall or replace the wheel sensor(s)

(see page 19-104), and recheck by test-driving .•
BACK 19-67
DTC 22: Current Flow into Wheel Sensor DTC 25: Yaw Rate Sensor (Sensor Unit)
Input Amplifier
DTC 26: Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Sensor (Sensor Unit)
2. Clear the OTC with the HOS. NOTE: These code(s) will set after a test drive if the
sensor is installed incorrectly.
3, Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Check for OTCs with the HOS. 2. Check for OTCs with the HOS.
Is OTC 22 indicated? Is OTC 91 or 92 indicated with OTC25 or 26 at

the same time?
YES-Do the OTC 11, 13, 15, and/or 17
troubleshooting (see page 19-61) .• YES-Do the OTC 91 or 92 troubleshooting: OTC 91
(see page 19-92), OTC 92 (see page 19-94).•
time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel NO-Go to step 3.
sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector. Check for a loose 3. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-Iateral/
connection at G303. Refer to intermittent failures longitudinal acceleration sensor.
troubleshooting (see page 19-44) .•
5. Clear the OTC with the HOS ..
6. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 19 mph

(30 km/h) or more, and go a distance of 985 ft
(300 m) or more.
Is OTe 25 or 26 indicated?

19-102) and retest..
NO-Replace the original yaw rate-Iateral/

longitudinal acceleration sensor..
19-68 BACK
DlC 27: Steering Angle Sensor (Hardware) DlC 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38: ABS
Solenoid
Is DTC 91 or 92 indicated with DTC 27 at the
same time? 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again.
YES-Do the DTC 91 or 92 troubleshooting: DTC 91
(see page 19-92), DTC 92 (see page 19-94).• 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 3. Is DTC 31,32,33,34,35,36,37, and/or 38

indicated?
3. Check the steering angle sensor installation.
Is the steering angle sensor installed correctly? (see page 19-102).•
YES-Replace the steering angle sensor, then do NO-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK at this
the steering angle sensor center point write time. Check for a loose connection at G303.•
procedure .•
NO-Reinstall the steering angle sensor correctly

(see page 19-99), then do the steering angle sensor
center point writing procedure.•
BACK 19-69
DTC 45, 46, 47,48: VSA Solenoid DTC 51: Motor Locked
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) 3. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 10 mph
again. (15 km/h) or more, with the engine speed at
2,500 rpm or higher.
Is DTC 45,46,47, and/or 48 indicated?
(see page 19-102) .• YES-Inspect G303for loose or poor connection,
then replace the VSA modulator-control unit
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this (see page 19-102) .•
time. Check for a loose connection at G303.•
time. Check for a loose connection at G303 .•
19-70 BACK
DTC 52: Motor Stuck OFF 5. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector.
6. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-
2. Check the No.2 (40 A) fuse in the main under-hood control unit 46P connector terminal No. 45 and
fuse box. body ground.
Is the fuse blown? VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 5.

connector.
4. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- =

body ground. Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.2

(40 A) fuse in the main under-hood fuse box and
the VSA modulator-control unit.•
=

between the No.2 (40 A) fuse in the main under-
hood fuse box and the VSA modulator-control
unit..
NO-Install a new No.2 (40 A) fuse, then go to

step 6.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-71

connector.
10. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 10 mph

(15 km/h) or more, with the engine speed at
2,500 rpm or higher.

NO-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK atthis

time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA
loose connection at G303. Refer to intermittent
failures troubleshooting (see page 19-44).•
19-72 BACK
DTC 53: Motor Stuck ON 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 10 mph
(15 km/h) or more, with the engine speed at
Is the pump motor running? 2,500 rpm or higher.
YES-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit 9. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
(see page 19-102) .•
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. modulator-control unit 46P connector. Check for a
3. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P known-good VSA modulator-control unit (see page
connector. 19-102) and retest..
4. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis
control unit 46P connector terminal No. 46 and time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA
body ground. modulator-control unit 46P connector. Check for a
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR failures troubleshooting (see page 19-44) .•
YES-Go to step 5.

modulator-control unit and body ground (G303) .•

connector.
BACK 19-73
DTC 54: Valve Relay 5. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector.
6. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-
2. Check the No. 12 (20 A) fuse in the main under- control unit 46P connector terminal No. 44 and
hood fuse box. body ground.
Is the fuse blown? VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 5.

connector.
4. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- =

body ground. Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 7.

the VSA modulator-control unit .•

between the No. 12 (20 A) fuse in the main under-
hood fuse box and the VSA modulator-control
unit..
NO-Install a new No. 12 (20 A) fuse, then go to

step 6.
19-7.4 BACK
7. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P DTC 59: BRKDIAG High
connector.
2. Check the brake lights without pressing the brake
9. Clear the DTC with the HDS. pedal.
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) Are the brake fights on?
again.
YES-Replace the brake light relay.•
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Check for loose terminals between terminal
No. 20 of the driver's under-dash fuselrelay box 4. Check the brake lights without pressing the brake
connector X (38P) and in the VSA modulator-control pedal.
unit 46P connector. Check for a loose connection at
G303. If necessary, substitute a known-good VSA Are the brake fights on?
modulator-control unit (see page 19-102) and
retest .• YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO-Go to step 9.

modulator-control unit 46P connector. Check for a 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
failures troubleshooting (see page 19-44) .• 6. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-75
8. Check the brake lights without pressing the brake 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
pedal.
14. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
Are the brake lights on?
15. Disconnect the PCM connector A (49P), and the
YES-Go to step 9. brake pedal position switch 4P connector.
NO-Check for loose terminals in the VSA 16. Check for continuity between brake pedal position
modulator-control unit 46P connector. Check for a switch 4P connector terminal No.2 and PCM
loose connection at G303. If necessary, substitute a connector A (49P) terminal No.8.
19-102) and retest.. Terminal side of female terminals
10. Press the brake pedal for 3 seconds or more.
Is OTe 59 indicated?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Check for loose terminals in the VSA

modulator-control unit 46P connector. Check for a BKSW (LT GRN)
.--....L,.-L..L...,
19-102) and retest .•
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
12. Measure the voltage between the brake pedal
position switch 4P connector terminal No.2 and
body ground with the headlights OFF and ON. Is there continuity?
YES-Replace the PCM (see page 11-244) .•


the brake pedal position switch .•
=
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Disconnect the taillight assemblies one at a

time and recheck. If the voltage is OK, check the
taillight ground connection and then replace the
faulty taillight.•
19-76 BACK
DTC 61: IG1 Voltage Low
YES-Go to step 5.

5. Test the battery and connections.
Are the battery and battery connections OK?
YES-Check for a poor connection at the battery

terminals, and alllG1 circuit connections between
the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
terminal No. 40 and the under-dash fuse/relay box
No. 29 (10A) fuse. If the connections are good, go to
the Alternator and Regulator Circuit
Troubleshooting (see page 4-30) .•
NO-Replace or charge the battery (see page

22-76), or repair the connections.•
BACK 19-77
vsA System Components
DTC 62: IG1 Voltage High DTC 65: VSA Pressure Sensor (Hardware)·
NOTE: An overcharging a alternator can cause this DTC. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again.
Is orc 65 indicated?
YES-Check for a poor connection at the battery (see page 19~102) .•
terminals. Check for a loose connection at G303. If
the connections are good, go to the Alternator and NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting (see page 4-30) . time. Check for a loose connection at G303 .•
•
19-78 BACK
DTC 66: VSA Pressure Sensor (Software) 9. Measure the voltage between PCM connector A
(49P) terminal No.8 and body ground.
Is OTe 91 or 92 indicated with OTe 66 at the

same time?

(see page 19-92), DTC 92 (~ee page 19-94) .•
NO-Go to step 3.

Terminal side of female terminals =
4. Disconnectthe brake pedal position switch 4P .
connector. Is there 0.1 V or more when the brake pedal is
released?
5. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page
22-214). YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
the brake pedal position switch and the PCM .•
Is the switch OK?
NO-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the brake pedal position switch
(see page 19-6).• 11. Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-244).
6. Short the SCS line with the HDS. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Disconnect the PCM connector A (49P). 13. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 14. Test-drive the vehicle at 8 mph (12 km/h) for
60 seconds or more.

modulator-control-unit 46P connector. Check for a
19-102), and retest..
NO-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-244) .•
BACK 19-79
DTe 67: Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
ON (Hardware)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector.
2. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 9. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page
22-214).
Is DTC 91 or 92 indicated with DTC 67 at the
same time? Is the switch OK?
YES-Do the DTC 91 or 92 troubleshooting: DTC 91 YES-Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs,
(see page 19-92), DTC 92 (see page 19-94) .• and troubleshoot those DTCs first, if no fuel and
emissions DTCs are found troubleshoot the brake
NO-Go to step 3. pedal position switch signal circuit (see page
11-308).•
3. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST
with the HDS while moving the brake pedal. NO-Replace the brake pedal position switch
(see page 19-6).•
Does it indicate ON when the pedal is pressed,
and OFF when the pedal is released?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 7.
5. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) for

60 seconds or more.


failures troubleshooting (see page 19-44) .•
19-80 BACK
DTC 68: Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck 5. Short the SCS line withthe HDS.
OFF (Software)
6. Disconnect the PCM connector A (49P).
7. Check for continuity between brake pedal position
2. Check the No. 11 (15 A) fuse in the main under- switch 4P connector terminal No.2 and PCM
hood fuse box. connector A (49P) terminal No.8.
/s the fuse OK? Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Reinstall the fuse, and go to step 3.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse is

blown, check for a short to body ground in the
brake pedal position switch circuit..

connector.
4. Measure the voltage between brake pedal position

switch 4P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground. BKSW (LT GRN)

YES-Go to step 8.

= the brake pedal position switch .•
YES-Go to step 5.

the brake pedal position switch .•
(cont'd)
BACK 19-81
8. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page

22-214).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the brake pedal position switch

(see page 19-6).•
9. Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-244).
10. Start the engine, then press the brake pedal slowly
and hard.

NO-Replace the original PCM (see page 11 c244) .•
19-82 BACK
DTC 69: BRKDIAG Low 9. Check for continuity between the brake pedal
position switch 4P connector terminal No.2 and the
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). brake light relay 5P connector No.4.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR

again.
4. After the VSA indicator goes off, press the brake

pedal for 3 seconds or more.
.Q
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 19.

BRAKE LIGHT RELAY 5P CONNECTOR
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Terminal side of female terminals
7. Remove the brake light relay. Is there continuity?
8. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P YES-Go to step 10.

connector.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the brake
pedal position switch and the brake light relay.•
(cont'd)
BACK 19-83
10. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P 12. Substitute a known-good brake light relay .
. connector.
13. Connect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
11. Check for continuity between the VSA mOOlJlator- connector.
control unit 46P connector terminal No.6 and the
brake light relay 5P connector No.1. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR 15. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
BRK DIAG (ORN) 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
6 6 101112 16 again.
2980
17. After the VSA indicator goes off, press the brake
Q pedal for 3 seconds or more.

modulator-control unit 46Pconnector. Check for a
Terminal side of female terminals loose connection at G303. If necessary, substitute a
Is there continuity? 19-102) and retest.•
YES-Go to step 12. NO-Replace the original brake light relay .•

modulator-control unit and the brake light relay .•
19-84 BACK
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 26. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector terminal No. 37 and the
20. Remove the brake light relay. brake light relay 5P connector No.3.
21. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P VSA MODULATOR·CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
connector.
8 8 1 11
.--_ _ _ _ _ _ _- ' BRK LAMP (YEll
23. Connect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector terminal No. 37 to body ground with a Q
jumper wire.
8 8 1 11
BRK LAMP (YEll
JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 27.
Wire side of female terminals NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA
modulator-control unit and the brake light relay.•
24. Check the brake lights without pressing the brake

pedal.
Are the brake lights on?
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Go to step 29.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-85
28. Measure the voltage between brake light relay 5P 30. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-
connector terminal No. 5.and body ground. control unit 46P connector terminal No.6 and the
brake light relay 5P connector No.1.
BRAKE LIGHT RELAY 5P CONNECTOR VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
BRK DIAG lORN)
16
Q
=
Is there battery voltage? BRAKE LIGHT RELAY 5P CONNECTOR

YES-Replace the brake light relay .•
(7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
the brake light relay .• modulator-control unit 46P connector. Check for a

modulator-control unit and the brake light relay .•
19-86 BACK
DTC 72: Steering Angle Sensor (Software) 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 8. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
Is OTe 91 or 92 indicated with OTe 72 at the 9. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
same time?
(see page 19-92), DTC 92 (see page 19-94).• YES-Repl~ce the VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-102).•
NO-Go to step 3.
NO-Th~ system is OK at this time.•
3. Put the vehicle on a level surface, and center the
steering wheel spokes.
4. Check STEERING ANGLE in the VSA DATA LIST

with the HDS.
With steering wheel in the straight ahead position,

is STEERING ANGLE within ± 5 ~
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Check for installation of the steering angle

sensor. If installation is good, do the steering angle
sensor center point writing (see page 19-100).•
5. Check for wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
Is the wheel alignment within the specification?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Make sure the suspension is not modified,

and adjust the wheel alignment correctly, and
recheck by test-driving the vehicle .•
BACK 19-87
OTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC 73: Yaw Rate Sensor (Power Supply)

1. Turn the ignition switch OFF..'
2. Disconnect the yaw rate-Iateral/longitudi'nal

4. Measure the voltage between body ground and

yaW rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor 4P
connector terminal No.1. .
YAW RATE-LATERAL/LONGITUDINAL·


(10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor.•
19-88 BACK
DTC 74: Yaw Rate Sensor (Software) 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NOTE: Driving on an extremely angled road can cause 9. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
this DTC.
YES-Go to step 11.
Is OTe 97 indicated with OTe 74 at the same
time? NO-Intermittent failure; the most probable cause
is the vehicle has been driven on an extremely
YES-Do the DTC 97 troubleshooting (see page angled road. The system is OK at this time .•
19-95) .•
NO-Go to step 3.
12. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-Iateral/
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. longitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-100).
4. Check that the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
acceleration sensor is properly mounted (see page
19-100). 14. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Is the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration 15. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
sensor installation OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Reinstall the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
acceleration sensor, and recheck by test-driving .• YES-Check for loose terminal in the VSA
modulator-control unit 46P connector. If necessary,
5. Put the vehicle on a level surface. substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
unit (see page 19-102) and retest .•
NO-Replace the original yaw rate-Iateral/
7. Check the YAW RATE S in the VSA DATA LIST with longitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-100).
the HDS.
•
Is it indicated within ± 5°/s?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal

acceleration sensor (see page 19-100).•
BACK 19-89
DTC 75: Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Sensor (Joint Failure)
9. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
DTC 76: Lateral/Longitudinal Acceleration
Sensor (Software) 10. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NOTE: Driving on an extremely angled road can cause Is DTC 75 or 76 indicated?

this DTC.
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Intermittent failure; the most probable cause
2. Check for DTCs with the HDS. is the vehicle has been driven on an extremely
angled road. The system is OK at this time .•
Is DTC 97 indicated with DTC 75 or 76 at the
same time? 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES-Do the DTC 97 troubleshooting (see page 12. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral!
19-95) .• longitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-100).
NO-Go to step 3. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
4. Check that the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal 15. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
acceleration sensor is properly mounted (see page
19-100). 16. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration Is DTC 75 or 76 indicated?

sensor installation OK?
YES-Go to step 5. (see page 19-102).•
NO-Reinstall the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal NO-Replace the original yaw rate-lateral!

acceleration sensor, and recheck by test-driving .• longitudinal acceleration sensor (see page 19-100).
5. Put the vehicle on a level surface.

•
7. Check the LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR in

the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is it indicated within ± 1 m/s?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal

acceleration sensor (see page 19-100) .•
19-90 BACK
OTC 81: Central Processing Unit (CPU) OTC 84: Steering Angle Sensor No Center
Point Writing
again. Are any orcs indicated with orc 84 at the same
time?
YES-Troubleshoot any other OTCs, and recheck .•
NO-Go to step 3.
(see page 19-102) .• 3. 00 the steering angle sensor center point writing
with the HOS (see page 19-100).
time. Check for loose terminals in the VSA 4. Clear the OTC with the HOS.
loose connection at G303.• 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again.
YES-Replace the steering angle sensor (see page

19-99), then do the steering angle sensor center
point writing (see page 19-100).•

time. Check for loose terminals between the
steering angle sensor 5P connector and the VSA
BACK 19-91
DTC 91: F-CAN Communication 9. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector terminal No. 38, and
NOTE: Check the PCM for DTCs. Ifthere are DTCs No. 39 and PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 49,
present, troubleshoot them first. and No. 48 respectively.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
--'
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CAN-L (RED) I
I,
~JI
8 8 lOll ~&
~
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) I"
again. I CAN-H (WHT)
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. @ Q
Is DTC 92 indicated with DTC 91 at the same
time? 1111 12 3 4161617 8 19 110 I.
l 1112 18iLlL 11 1Li18 1920 21
YES-Do the DTC 92 troubleshooting (see page zzv Z4X zsX 2827 28
..... 2930 31 S2JL [L1Li36 3736 89 'r-
I
19-94).•
11 40 141 42 43144VI46 471461491
"'-----'
NO-If only DTC 91 is indicated, go to step 5. If no
DTCs are indicated, intermittentfailure, the system
l
CAN-H (WHT) CAN-L (RED)
is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals
between the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal Terminal side of female terminals
acceleration sensor 4P connector; the PCM
connector A (49P), and the VSA modulator-control Is there continuity?
unit 46P connector. Check for a loose connection at
G303. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting YES-Go to step 10.
(see page 19-44).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. the VSA modulator-control unit.•
6. Shortthe SCS line with the HDS. 10. Disconnectthe yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
7. Disconnect the PCMconnector A (49P).
connector.
19-92 BACK
12. Measure the voltage between yaw rate-Iateral/ 15. Reconnect all connectors.
terminal No.1 and body ground. 16. Test-drive the vehicle. Check the YAW RATE S in
the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS while driving in
ACCELERATION SENSOR 4P CONNE;CTOR corners.
Are there 0 °/5 indicated?
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Check the fuel and emissions DTCs (see page

11-3), and troubleshoot the indicated DTC.•
17. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-

= No. 39 and yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal
Wire side of female terminals acceleration sensor 4P connector terminal No.2,
and No.3 respectively.
/5 there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 13.

yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor.•
14. Check for continuity between yaw rate-Iateral/


acceleration sensor (see page 19-100).•

= lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor and the
Wire side offemale terminals VSA modulator-control unit.•
YES-Go to step 15.

lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor and body
ground (G506) .•
BACK 19-93
DTC 92: F-CAN System (Bus-off) 9. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
NOTE: Check the PCM for DTCs. If there are DTCs No. 39 and PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 49,
present, troubleshoot them first. and No. 48 respectively.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CAN-L (RED) I M
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) I( e 8 101112 6

~JII ~
again. CAN·H(WHT)
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. @ Q

YES-Go to step 5.
III 12 3 4161617 819110L
1112 13 /1/131/118 19 20 21
zzv Z4X 26X 262728
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this '- 2930 31321/ /1/136 373639 r-
time. Check for loose terminals between the PCM 11 40 141 42 431441/146 471461491
l.....--.....J
connector A (49P), and the VSA modulator-control
unit 46P connector. Check for a loose connection at CAN·H (WHT)
ICAN-L (RED)
G303. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting
(see page 19-44).• Terminal side of female terminals
6. Short the SCS line with the HDS. YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
7. Disconnect the PCM connector A (44P). loose connection at G303. If necessary, substitute a
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P 19-102) and retest..
connector.
the VSA modulator-control unit.•
19-94 BACK
DTC 97: VSA System
1. Check the brake system for leaks or mechanical

problems.
Is the brake system OK? (No brake fluid leakage,

no air trapped in the brake system, no brake pads
worn out.)
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair the brake system, then recheck.•
4. Test-drive the vehicle in a straight line. Accelerate

the vehicle up to 6 mph (10 km/h), and stop, then
accelerate up to 6 mph (10 km/h).
Is DTe 97 indicated?


BACK 19-95
VSA, System Components
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and 7. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P
no DTCs are stored connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the VSA VSA OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
activation indicator.
Does VSA activation indicator go off within

2 seconds?
YES-The system is OK at this time .•
NO-Go to step 2.
=
3. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 5P connector.
4. Check the VSA OFF switch (see page 19-101). Is there continuity?
Is the VSA OFF switch OK? YES-Repair short to body ground between the
gauge control module and the VSA OFF switch .•
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Substitute a known-good gauge control
NO-Replace the VSA OFF switch (see page module, then go to step 1 and recheck. If it is OK,
19-101).• replace the original gauge control module
(see page 22-337) .•
22-337).
6. Disconnect gauge control module connector

B (24P).
19-96 BACK
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and 7. Check for.continuity between VSA modulator-
VSA indicator do not go off at the same time control unit 46P connector terminal No. 43 and
body ground.
2. Check the No. 29 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Install a new No. 29 (10 A) fuse, and

recheck .•
NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 3. =

3. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P Wire side of female terminals
connector.
5. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator- YES-Go to step 8.

body ground. NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA
modulator-control unit and body ground (G303) .•
(12P).
6 8 101112
80
IG1 (ORN)
Y..
=
YES-Go to step 6.

VSA modulator-control unit..
(cont'd)
BACK 19-97
9. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-

No. 39 and gauge control module connector A (12P)
No.6, and No. 12 respectively.
VSA MODULATOR.CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR


modulator-control unit 46P connector. Check· for a

control module and the VSA modulator-control
unit..
19-98 BACK
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
NOTE: Do not damage or drop the combination switch as the steering angle sensor is sensitive to shock and vibration.
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22).
2. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-129) and the cable reel (see page 24-149).
3. Remove the combination switch assembly (see step 9 on page 17-26).
4. Remove the combination light switch (A) and the wiper/washer switch (8).
5. Replace the combination switch body assembly (e).
6. Install the combination switch in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
• Do not remove the steering angle sensor from the combination switch body.
• When installing the cable reel, set the turn signal canceling sleeve position (see page 24-150).
BACK 19-99
Steering Angle Sensor Center Point Yaw Rate-Lateral/Longitudinal

Writing Acceleration Sensor Replacement
NOTE: Before doing the steering angle sensor center NOTE:

point writing, place the vehicle on a flat level surface, • Do not damage or drop the sensor as it is sensitive.
and turn the steering wheel to the straight ahead • Do not use power tools.
position while moving the vehicle.
the data link connector (DLe) (A) underthe driver's 2. Remove the driver's center console trim (see step 5
side ofthe dashboard. on page 20-107).

acceleration sensor 4P connector (A).
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)

and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't,
troubleshoot the DLe circuit (see page 11-223).
4. Remove the sensor mounting nuts, and remove the
4. Do the steering angle sensor center point writing in yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor
the VSA ADJUSTMENT menu with the HDS. (B).
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific 5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
instructions.
6. Do the yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal acceleration
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. neutral position memorization (see page 15-7).
6. Verify DTe 84 clears and does not return. If DTe 84

is indicated, do the appropriate troubleshooting.
19-100 BACK
VSA Off Switch Test
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover 5. Check for continuity between the VSA OFF switch
(see page 20-119). 5P connector terminal No.4 and No.5. There
should be continuity at all times.
2. Push out the VSA OFF switch (A) from the back of
the instrument panel. VSA OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
3. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 5P connector (8).
4. Check for continuity between the VSA OFF switch

5P connector terminal No.1 and No.2. There
should be continuity when the switch is pressed,
and no continuity when the switch is released.
VSA OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
BACK 19-101
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation
NOTE:
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately with water;'
• Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
• To prevenUhe brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent
material.
Removal
2. Remove the air cleaner box (see page 11-363).
3. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector (A) by pulling up the lock (B); the connector disconnects
itself.
G
E
I ~15N.m
____ (1.5 kgf.m, 11 Ibf·ft)
22N·m
J
8N·m
(0.8 kgf.m, 6Ibf·ft)
4. Disconnect the six brake lines from the VSA modulator-control unit.
NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (e) and to the right-front (D), the left-rear (E), the right-rear
(F), and the left-front (G) brake systems.
5. Remove the VSA modulator-control unit (H) with the bracket (I) from the body.
6. Remove the locknuts (J), then remove the VSA modulator-control unit from the bracket.
NOTE: During installation, install a new bushing (K) and new grommets (L). Otherwise, unwanted noise and
vibration may be transmitted to the vehicle.
19-102 BACK
Installation
1. Install the new bushing and new grommets. (Otherwise, unwanted noise and vibration may be transmitted to the
vehicle.)
2. Install the VSA modulator-control unit on the bracket, then install new locknuts.
3. Install the bracket with the VSA modulator-control unit.
4. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts with the specified torque.
5. Align the connecting surface of the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector to the VSA modulator-control unit.
6. Lower the lock of the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated.
7. Reinstall the air cleaner box (see page 11-363).
8. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
9. Do the steering angle center point write procedure (see page 19-100).
10. Start the engine, and check that the ABS, the VSA indicators, and the trailer stability assist warning goes off.
11. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS, the VSA indicators, and the trailer stability assist warning do not
come on.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator which could then be induced into
the normal brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system again (see page 19-9).
BACK 19-103
Wheel Sensor Replacement
Front
2. Remove the clip (A), then disconnect the wheel sensor connector (B).
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
--~~
~~/ /,~a.r.: =J
I --'-----"\
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
3. Remove the bolts and the wheel sensor (e).
4. Install the wheel sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires .

• If the wheel sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing unit, it is faulty.
come on.
19-104 BACK
Rear
2. Disconnect the wheel sensor connector (A).
3. Remove the clips, the bolt, and the wheel sensor (B).
4. Install the wheel sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires .

• If the wheel sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing unit, it is faulty.
come on.
BACK 19-105
BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) Uf body maintenance is required)
or side collision, all SRS service work should be done by an authorized Acura dealer.
caused by unintentional deployment ofthe airbags and/or side airbags.
collision, orthe airbags may deploy.
BACK
Body
Doors Interior Trim
Component Location Index-Front Door .... 20-2 Component Location Index ....................... 20-75
Component Location Index-Rear Door ..... 20-5 Trim Removal/Installation-Door Areas ..... 20-76
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation ..... 20-8 * Trim Removal/lristallation-Pillar Areas ..... 20-86
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement .... 20-12 Trim Removal/Installation-Cargo Area ..... 20-90
Front Door Latch Replacement ................. 20-14 Trim Removal/Installation
Front Door Glass and Regulator -Rear Side Area ....................................... 20-92
Replacement ............................................ 20-16 Trim Removal/Installation
Front Door Sash Inner Trim -Tailgate Area .......................................... 20-96
Replacement ............................................ 20-18 Sunvisor Removal/Installation .................. 20-98
Front Door Sash Outer Trim Grab Handle Removal/Installation ............ 20-99
Replacement ............................................ 20-18 * Headliner Removal/Installation ................. 20-101
Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip * Carpet Replacement ................................... 20-105
Replacement ............................................ 20-19
Front Door Outer Molding Consoles
Replacement ............................................ 20-20 * Center Console Removal/Installation ....... 20-107
Front Door Weatherstrip Center Console Rear Trim
Replacement ............................................ 20-20 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-110
Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement .... 20-21 Center Console Rear Trim
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation ...... 20-22 Disassembly/Reassembly ..................... : 20-110
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement ..... 20-26 Console Armrest Removal/Installation ..... 20-112
Rear Door Latch Replacement ................... 20-28 Center Console Latch Panel.
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Removal/Installation ............................... 20-113
Replacement ............................................ 20-30 Center Console Beverage Holder
Rear Door Sash Inner Trim . Replacement ............................................ 20-114
Replacement ............................................ 20-32 Center Console Box Replacement ............ 20-115
Rear Door Sash Outer Trim Center Console Side Pocket
Replacement ............................................ 20-33 Replacement ............................................ 20-116
Rear Door Rear Sash Outer Trim
Replacement ............................................ 20-34 Dashboard
Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Driver's Outer Dashboard Trim
Replacement ............................................ 20-34 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-117
Rear Door Outer Molding Replacement ... 20-35 Driver's Inner Dashboard Trim
Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement ...... 20-36 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-118
Rear Door Side Sill Seal Replacement ...... 20-37 Instrument Fascia Removal/Installation ... 20-118
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment ... 20-38 Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover
Front and Rear Door Position Removal/Installation ............................... 20-119
Adjustment .............................................. 20-39 Driver's Dashboard Undercover
I .Front and Rear Door Striker Removal/Installation ............................... 20-120

Adjustment .............................................. 20-41 Center Upper Panel
Removal/Installation ............................... 20-120
Mirrors Dashboard Center Panel Removal/
Component Location Index ....................... 20-42 Installation ............................................... 20-121
Power Mirror Replacement ....................... 20-43 Center Pocket Removal/Installation .......... 20-123
Mirror Holder Replacement ....................... 20-43 Passenger's Dashboard Trim
Rearview Mirror Replacement .................. 20-44 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-123
Glove Box Lock Cylinder Replacement .... 20-124
Glass * Glove Box Removal/Installation ................ 20-125
Component Location Index ....................... 20-46 * Glove Box Striker Replacement ................ 20-126
Windshield Replacement ........................... 20-48 Passenger's Dashboard Undercover
Rear Window Replacement ....................... 20-53 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-127
Quarter Glass Replacement ....................... 20-57 Dashboard Side Vent Removal/
Installation ............................................... 20-127
Moonroof Side Defogger Vent Trim Removal/
Component Location Index ....................... 20-63 Installation ............................................... 20-128
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 20-64 Front Defogger Vent Trim Removal/
Glass Height Adjustment ........................... 20-65 Installation ............................................... 20-128
Glass Replacement ..................................... 20-65 Column Cover Removal/Installation ......... 20-129
Wind Deflector Replacement ..................... 20-66 * Dashboard Replacement ........................... 20-130
Drain Channel Replacement ...................... 20-66 * Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam
Sunshade Replacement ............................. 20-67 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-134
Motor Replacement .................................... 20-69
* Frame and Drain Tube Replacement ........ 20-69
Drain Channel Slider and Cable
Assembly Replacement .......................... 20-72
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check ... 20-74
Seats Fuel Fill Door
Component Location Index ....................... 20-139 Fuel Fill Door/Adapter Replacement ......... 20-201
Front Seat Active Head Restraint Fuel Fill Door Replacement ........................ 20-202
Inspection ................................................ 20-140
* Front Seat Removal/Installation ................ 20-141 Exterior Trim
* Front Seat Disassembly/Reassembly ....... 20-144 Front Bulkhead Cover Replacement ......... 20-203
* Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/ Front Grille Replacement ........................... 20-203
Reassembly ............................................. 20-146 Cowl Cover Replacement ........................... 20-205
* Front Seat Recline Motor Replacement .... 20-148 A-Pillar Corner Trim Replacement ............ 20-206
* Front Seat Lumbar Support Roof Rail Replacement ............................... 20-207
Replacement ....................................,........ 20~149 Roof Molding Replacement ....................... 20-208
Front Seat-back Cover Replacement ........ 20-150 Side Sill Panel Replacement ...................... 20-212
* Front Seat Cushion Cover Tailgate Spoiler Him Replacement .......... 20-213
Replacement ............................................ 20-154 Rear License Trim Replacement ............... 20-214
Second Row Seat Removal/Installation ... 20-156 Rear Gutter Cover Replacement ............... 20-215
Second Row Seat Emblem/Sticker Replacement ................... 20-216
Disassembly/Reassembly ....................... 20-158
Second Row Seat-back Recline Lever Fenderwell
Replacement ............................................ 20-165 Front Inner Fender Replacement .............. 20-217
Second Row Seat-back Recline Splash Shield Replacement ....................... 20-218
Cable Replacement ................................. 20-167 Front UnQercover Replacement ................ 20-219
Third Row Seat Access Cable Front Strake Replacement ......................... 20-219
Replacement ............................................ 20-167 Front Fender Fairing Replacement ........... 20-220
Second Row Seat Armrest . Left Front Splash Guard Reinforcement
Replacement ............................................ 20-168 Replacement ............... :......... ~.................. 20-220
Second Row Seat Armrest Rear Fender Cover Replacement .............. 20-221
Beverage Holder Replacement .............. 20-169 Rear Strake Replacement .......................... 20-222
Second Row Seat Armrest Panel Rear Air Outlet Replacement ..................... 20-222
Replacement ............................................ 20-170
Second Row Seat Cover Replacement ..... 20-171, Openers
Second Row Seat Armrest Cover Component Location Index ....................... 20-223
Replacement ............................................ 20-178 Hood Opener Cable Replacement ............. 20-224
Third Row Seat Removal/Installation ....... 20-179 Hood Latch Replacement ........................... 20-225
Third Row Seat Disassembly/Reassembly .20-180 Hood Release Handle Replacement .......... 20-226
Third Row Seat Latch Replacement .......... 20-181 Fuel Fill Door Latch Replacement .............. 20-226
Third Row Seat Pivot Replacement .......... 20-182 Fuel Fill Door Actuator Replacement ........ 20-227
Third Row Seat-back Recline Lever Tailgate Latch Replacement ...................... 20-228
Replacement ............................................ 20-183
Third Row Seat-back Recline Cable Frame
Replacement ....................................., .. ~.... 20-184 Spare Tire Hoist Replacement ................... 20-231
Third Row Seat Cover Replacement :........ 20-184 Spare Tire Support Bracket ..
Replacement ................ :................ .'.......... 20-231
Bumpers Rear Wheelhouse Gusset Replacement .. , 20-232
Front Bumper Removal/Installation .......... 20-188 Cargo Lid Support Replacement ............... 20-232
Front Bumper Skid Trim Replacement ..... 20-190 Subframe Replacement ............................. 20-233
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation ........... 20-190 Frame Repair Chart .................................... 20-236
Rear Bumper Skid Trim Replacement ...... 20-192
Rear Bumper Air Spoiler Replacement .... 20-193
Rear Bumper Reflector Replacement ....... 20-193
Hood
Hood Adjustment ....................................... 20-194
Hood Support Strut Replacement ............. 20-195
Hood Seal Replacement ............................. ·20-196
Hood Insulator Replacement ..................... 20-196
Tailgate
Tailgate Adjustment ................................... 20-197
Tailgate Support Strut Replacement ........ 20-198
Tailgate Weatherstrip Replacement ......... 20-199
Doors
Component Location Index- Front Door
POWER DOOR
I POYS~~~CH. 0E~~~ERSTRIP
WOO~~~~_'I~ ~
lOCK SWITCH
MEMOR
SEAT W
.D
LASS INNER
iB" .Ji)
AR~DOOw~ R GRIP ~
~ Wo \!1 . ~ MUlTIPlEXCONTROl
UNIT
.
\
.
~\.'~
AR MREST COVER .
-
POWERTA
SWITCH IlGATE
e models)
~ . Remo
PANEL.
DOORval/lnstaliatlon, pag
. ,...
~ ~~o ~
(forsom. .
/ &
.
COURTESY LIGHT .
P...._ · .
~
DOORGRIP COVER
I
OR
.. POWER DO
~
~.
/
SWITCH PANEL· / / LOCK SWITCH
&j & ...

~r,
ARMREST
POWER WINDOW SWITCH / ~~
WOOD TRIM ff!; SWITCH PANEL
/
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
20-2 BACK
DOOR SASH OUTER TRIM
DOOR OUTER MOLDING

/
DOOR GLASS
OUTER WETHERSTRIP
, Replacement, page 20-19
~ ~fII@
~HINGE
SPEAKER
DOOR SIDE SILL SEAL

DOOR WEATHERSTRIP
PLASTIC COVER DOOR SASH INNER TRIM

(cont'd)
BACK 20-3
Doors
Component Location Index - Front Door (cont'd)
GLASS RUN CHANNEL
IMMOBILIZER and
SECURITY LABEL / ~GLASSSTOP
GLASS
Adjustment, page 20-38
OUTER HANDLE
Replacement,
page 20-12
<'1',
OUTER HANDLE
SPACER
~PROTECTER
~ Q
~
DOOR CYLINDER
~ (Driver's)
()Ilm 0
STRIKER LATCH CABLE RETAINER
~D ~~~&
/ ef \~: aIIJ/ - ~
LATCH PROTECTER
LATCH
INNER HANDLE
INNER HANDLE CAP
20-4
BACK
Component Location Index - Rear Door
DOOR GLASS
INNER WEATHERSTRIP
~
WOOD TRIM
ARMREST «Z
ARMREST COVER
~
DOOR GRIP COVER ~ \ COURTEST UGHT
SWITCH PANEL
DOOR PANEL
page 20-22
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
(cont'd)
BACK 20-5
Doors
Component Location Index - Rear Door (cont'd)
DOOR REAR SASH OUTER TRIM

DOOR SASH INNER TRIM

ADAPTER
PLASTIC COVER
DOOR WEATHERSTRIP SPEAKER
BACK
20-6
GLASS RUN CHANNEL
o
/
REAR LOWER CHANNEL
~ GLASS
OUTER HANDLE
Replacement,
/ . page 20-26
JiQ )\'5.)l[ll,:\.-i::::::~
STRIKER
OUTER HANDLE
SPACER
CHILD LOCK CAP
INNER HANDLE CAP
BACK 20-7
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Pry out the bottom edge of the grip cover (A) at the
• KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * notches with the trim tool to detach the clips and to
• Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, release the hooks (B). Then remove the cover.
* Available through the American Honda Tool and Fastener Locations
B
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool
set to avoid damage when removing components.
1. Using a trim tool, push on the upper hook (A) and

pivot the inner handle cap (B) on the bottom hooks
(e), then remove the cap and the screw securing
the inner handle (0).
Fastener Locations
~:Screw,2
~
3. Remove the screws.
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
20-8 BACK
4. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as 5. While holding,the door panel (A) away from the
possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. door, remove the inner handle (8) from the door
panel by detaching the clips.
-1 Start at the bottom edge of the door panel,
release the clips with a commercially available Fastener Locations
trim pad remover.
-2 Detach the upper clips.
-a Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward.
NOTE: The inner handle cable (8) and latch
cable (C) are connected to the inner handle (D).
Do not pull the door panel up too far, or these
cables will be damaged.
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 11
~ 6. Disconnect the door subharness connector (A) and

power mirror switch connector (8), then remove
the door panel (C).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-9
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
7. Remove the latch cable fastener (A) from the inner 9. Remove the screws, then remove the grip(A),
handle (B), and then disconnect the latch cable (C) armrest assembly (B), armrest cover (C), and the
from the cable fastener (D). Disconnect the inner wood trim (D) from the door panel (E).
handle cable (E) from the cable fastener (F), then
remove the inner handle. Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 17
NOTE: Check if the cable fasteners are damaged or
stress-whitened.
8. Disconnect the power window switch connector (A),

and on the driver's side, disconnect the power door
lock switch connector (B) and the seat position
memory switch connector (C).
C B A
20-10 BACK
10. Remove the screws (A, 8), then separate the 11. Install the door panel in the reverse order of
armrest (e), the power window switch panel (0), removal, and note these items:
and the power window switch (E).
o If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
Fastener Locations
replace them with new ones.
A~:Screw,3 B ~:Screw,4 o Replace any damaged cable fasteners with new
ones.
o The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable
fastener (8) with the latch in the unlocked
position as shown.
o Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly, and the cables are connected securely.
o Make sure the window and power door lock
operate properly.
47 mm 11.9 in.) B
BACK 20-11
Doors
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 6. With a clip remover, disconnect the outer handle
'rod (A). '
1. Raise the glass fully.
2. Remove the door panel (see page 20~8).
3. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector

(A).
A
B
A-:::::':
)
7. Driver's side: Pull ~oth side flanges (A) ofthe
retainer (8) outward, and pull the middle flange
portion (C) -of the outer casing cover (D) out, then
disconnect the cylinder cable (E) from the latch.
4. Remove the plug cap (8), then remove the plastic

cover (C), as needed.
NOTE: Remove the glue from the door surface. If

the plastic cover is damaged or torn, replace it.
5. Detach the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle.
A
Replace.
20-12 BACK
8. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A). 10. If necessary, cut a slot in each screwhead ofthe
special screws with a saw, remove the special
Fastener Location screws with a flat-tip screwdriver, then separate the
~: Bolt, 1 door cylinder (A) and outer handle protector (8). If
~
the retainer (C) is damaged, release the hooks (D),
and replace it.
NOTE: If removed, the special screws must be

replaced.
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
~
9. Remove the maintenance cap (A). Remove the bolt
securing the outer handle protector (8), then
remove the protector by releasing the hook (C).
Fastener Location
~: Bolt, 1
D
~IA
)~~~--- 11. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the
handle from the holes in the door panel. Take care
not to scratch the door.
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
11.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) c
(cont'd)
BACK 20-13
Doors·
Front Door Outer Handle Front Door Latch Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
12. Remove the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle 1. Raise the glass fully.
(B), then replace it with a new one.
2. Remove the door panel and inner handle (see page
20-8).
3. Remove the plastic cover, as needed (see step 3 on

page 20-12).
4. Detach the rod fastener (see step 5 on page 20-12).
5. Disconnect the outer handle rod from the outer

handle (see step 6 on page 20-12).
6. Disconnect the cylinder cable from the latch (see

Replace.
7. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed, and
remove the bolt, then remove the center lower
13. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, channel (B) by pulling it downward.
and note these items:
Fastener Location
• Make sure that the actuator connector is plugged ~: Bolt, 1
~
in properly, and that the cylinder cable and the
outer handle rod are connected securely.
• Make sure the door key cylinder/door locks
operate properly.
• Make sure the door handle works properly.
• When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed .
around its outside perimeter to seal out water. B
A
6x1.0mm
8N·m
20-14 BACK
8. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the latch (C), 9. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector
then remove the latch through the hole in the door. (A) by releasing the hook (B).
Take care not to bend the outer handle rod (D);
latch cable (E), and inner handle cable (F). Fastener Location
~:Screw,1
Fastener Locations
A ~: Screw, 3 B~: Screw, 1 tpxcmm> I
@mmID t»- A
6x1.0mm
6N·m
(0.6 kgf·m, 4' Ibf·ft) 10. Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle
cable (B) from the latch (C).
(cont'd)
BACK
20-15
Doors
Front Door Latch Replacement Front Door Glass and Regulator

(cont'd) Replacement
11. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
note these items:
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-8).
• Make sure that the actuator connector is plugged
in properly, and that the cylinder cable and the 2. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector
outer handle rod are connected securely. (A), and remove the plug caps (8).
• Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
3. Pass the cables (C) and the harnesses (D) through

the slits (E) in the plastic cover (F),then remove the
plastic cover.

4. Carefully raise the glass (A) until you can see the
bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass
out through the window slot. Take care not to drop
the glass inside the door.
Fastener Locations
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m. 7.2 Ibf·ft)
20-16 BACK
5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (8). 7. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding
surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown.
Fastener Locations
C ~ : Bolt, 4 D ~ : Bolt, 2
(Silver) (Black) .
C D
~B
~
AUfu/ 8. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order
~cO of removal, and note these items:
• Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves

C freely without binding.
• Make sure that there is no clearance between the
6x 1.0 mm glass and glass run channel when the glass is
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
closed.
• Adjust the position of the glass as necessary
6. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolts (D), then (see page 20-38).
remove the regulator through the hole in the door. • Do the power window control unit reset
• Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-39).
• Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles.
• Make sure the power door locks, windows and
power mirror operate properly.
BACK 20-17
Doors
Front Door Sash Inner Trim Front Door Sash Outer Trim
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door. NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door.
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-8). 1. Lower the glass fully.'
2. Using a clip remover, detach the clips fastening the 2. Remove the door sash outer trim (A).
front door sash inner trim (A).
-1 Pull back the door weatherstrip (8), then
Fastener Locations
remove the screw.
-2 Pull the trim up to release the hook (C) from the
door. Take care not to damage the door glass
outer weatherstrip (D).
Fastener Location B
~ : Screw, 1
3. Pull the door glass opening side of the trim back to

release the hooks (8, C) from the door,glass
opening flange of the door sash.
4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,

replace them with new ones .
• Push the hooks and clips into place securely.

make sure the glass run channel (E) is installed in
the door sash securely.
20-18 BACK
Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Starting at the rear, pull the door glass outer
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * weatherstrip (A) up at each portion where the inner
* Available through the American Honda Tool and molding (8) catches the inside edge of the window
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 slot.
NOTE:
• If you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip,
replace it with '8 new one because it will bend.
• Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Take care not to scratch the door.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
avoid damage when removing components.
2. Remove the screw from the rear edge of the door.
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 2
~I 4. Pull the rear of the glass outer weatherstrip (A)

away from the door, then pull the front end of it out
from under the power mirror (8).
5. Install new weatherstrip in the reverse order of

removal.
BACK 20-19
Doors
Front Door Outer Molding Front Door Weatherstrip

Special Tools Required NOTE: .

KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
* Available through the American Honda Tool and • Take care not to scratch the door.
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 • Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
NOTE: 1. At the A-pillar, remove the door checker mounting

• If you remove the door outer molding, replace it with bolt (A).
a new one because it will bend during removal.
Fastener Locations
• Take care not to scratch the door. A ~: Bolt. 1 B 1>: Clip. 28. C 1>: Clip. 2
(Left: Pink) (White)
1. Remove the power mirror (see page 20-43).

@=
D 1>: Clip. 1
:t WOOI
~I
~I
2. Remove the door outer molding (A):
-1 Push out the rear clip (B).

-2 While removing the upper edge ofthe door E
outer molding from the edge ofthe sash, cut
the double-sided adhesive tape (C) with a
utility knife, then remove the molding.
B
2. Detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the door

3. Scrape off the remaining double-sided adhesive weatherstrip (E).
tape from the sash, then clean the sash surface
with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol. 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of
4. Install new door outer molding in the reverse order
of removal, and note these items: • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
• Push the clip and the adhesive portions into place • Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to
securely. the door checker mounting bolt before
• Make sure the upper and lower sides of the installation .
molding are catching the edges of the sash • Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-39).
properly.
20-20 BACK
Front Door Side Sill Seal Replacement
NOTE:
• Use a'clip remover to remove the clips.
1. Detach the clips, then remove the door side sill seal
(A).
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 12
iii
"A
2. Install the side sill seal in the reverse order of
• Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened,

• Push the clips into place securely.
BACK 20-21
Doors,;,
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Pry out the bottom edge of the grip cover (A) at the
• KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * notches with the trim tool to detach the clips and to
• Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, release the hooks (B). Then remove the cover.
Fastener Locations
A B
NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool
set to avoid damage when removing components.
1. Using a trim tool, push on the upper hook (A) and

pivot the inner handle cap (B) on the bottom hooks
(e), then remove the cap and the screws securing
the inner handle (0).
Fastener Locations B
~ : Screw, 2
~
D
3. Remove the screws.
Fastener Locations
~:Screw,2
Om» I
20-22 BACK
4. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as 5. While holding the door panel (A) away from the
possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. door, remove the inner handle (B) from the door
panel by detaching the clips.
~ Start at the bottom edge of the door panel,
Fastener Locations
release the clips with a commercially available
trim pad remover. .
-2 Detach the upper clips.
-3 Stating at the rear, pull the door panel upward.
NOTE: The inner handle cable (B) and latch

cable (C) are connected to the inner handle (D).
Do not pull the door panel up too far, or the
cables will be damaged.
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 11
JiJ 6. Disconnect the power window switch connector (A)

and courtesy light connector (B), detach the
harness clips (C), then remove the door panel (D).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-23
Doors
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
7. Remove the latch cable fastener (A) from the inner 8. Remove the screws and release the hooks (A), then
handle (B), and then disconnectthe latch cable (C) remove the wood trim (B), the door grip (C),
from the cable fastener (D). Disconnect the inner armrest cover (D) and the armrest assembly (E)
handle cable (E) from the cable fastener (F), then from the door panel (F).
remove the inner handle.
Fastener Locations
NOTE: Check if the cable fasteners are damaged or ~: Screw, 17
~
stress-whitened.
A
A
~ B
20-24 BACK
9. Remove the screws (A, B) and release the pins (C), 10. Install the door panel in the reverse order of
then separate the armrest (0), the power window removal, and note these items:
switch panel (E), and the power window switch (F).
Fastener Locations replace themwith new ones.
A ~ : Screw, 3 B ~ : Screw, 3 • Replace any damaged cable fasteners with new
ones.
• The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable
fastener (B) with the latch in the unlocked
position as shown.
• Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly, and the cables are connected securely.
• Make sure the window and power door lock
operate properly.
47 mm 11.9 in.)
BACK 20-25
Doors
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 6. Remove the maintenance cap (A) with a clip
remover, then disconnect the outer handle rod (8)
1. Raise the glass fully. from the outer handle (e).
3. Detach the harness clip (A), and disconnect the

power door lock actuator connector (8).
7. Remove the screws (A, 8) securing the latch (e),

then lower it.
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 3 B ~ : Screw, 1
®mnn» t»- I
4. Remove the rear plug cap (e), then remove the

plastic cover (D), as needed.

5. Detach the rod fastener (A).
A
Replace.
20-26 BACK
8. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A). 10. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the
handle from the holes in the door panel. Take care
Fastener Location
not to scratch the door.
~: Bolt, 1
~
I
~""_ 0 -::-'
~~
~~A --Sx1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
9. Remove the bolt securing the outer handle

protector (A), then remove the protector by 11. Remove the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle
releasing the hook (8). (8), then replace it with a new one.
Fastener Location
~: Bolt, 1
@)ni
Replace.
6x 1.0mm 12. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal,

9.8N·m and note these items:
B
• Make sure the outer handle rod is connected
securely.
• Make sure the door locks operate properly.
• Make sure the door handle works properly.
BACK 20-27
Doors
Rear Door Latch Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 7. Remove the bolt, then remove the collar (A) from
the rear lower channel (8).
1. Raise the glass fully.
Fastener Location
3. Remove the plastic cover, as needed (see step 3 on

page 20-26).
4. Remove the screws (A, 8) securing the latch (C),

then lower it.
Fastener Locations
@mlmD ~ I
\
8. Remove the latch (A) out from between the rear
lower channel (8) and the door. Take care not to
bend the outer handle rod (C), latch cable (D), and
inner handle cable (E).
5. Detach the rod fastener {see step 5 on page 20-26).
6. Disconnect the outer handle rod from the outer

handle (see step 6 on page 20-26).
20-28 BACK
9. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector 11. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
(A) by releasing the hook (8). note these items:
Fastener Location
• Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in
~:Screw, 1 properly, and the outer handle rod is connected
securely.
Omrmrol A
• Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
I
B
10. Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle
cable (8) from the latch (e).
BACK 20-29
Doors
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands, 5. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed.
Loosen the nut (B), and'remove the bolt (C) and
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-22). collar (D) from the rear lower channel (E).
2. Detach the harness clip (A), and disconnect the Fastener Locations
power door lock actuator connector (B). Remove B • : Nut, 1 C ~ : Bolt, 1
the plug caps (C).
®) ©$=mm I
F
3. Pass the cables (D) and the harnesses (E) through

the slits (F) in the plastic cover (H), then remove it.

4. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the
bolts, then remove them. Release the glass from
the holder (B), then remove it from the regulator (C),
and carefully lower the glass. Take care not to drop
the glass inside the door.
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt, 2
@1I1111)) I
-:":::===:::=:79l.. 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
20-30' BACK
6. Pull the rear lower channel (A) forward, then 8. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the
remove the nut portion (8) from the door. Release window slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside
the channel from the glass (C), then pull the the door.
channel upward to remove it through the window
slot. Take care not to scratch the door.
9. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (8).
Fas1ener Locations
C~:Bolt,3 D ~: Bolt, 2
(Silver)
@mm 0):1
6x1.Omm
9.8N·m
7. Remove the rear lower channel (A) from the glass (1.0 kgf·m,
run channel (8). 7.2Ibf·ft)
6x1.Omm
9.8N·m
(1.Okgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
10. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolt (D), then
remove the regulator through the hole in the door.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-31
Doors
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Rear Door Sash Inner Trim
Replacement (cont'd) Replacement
11. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding Special Tools Required
surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown. KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
NOTE:
avoid damage when removing components .
2. Using a clip remover, detach the clips fastening the

rear door sash inner trim (A).
Fastener Locations
12. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order

of removal, and note these items:
• Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves

freely without binding.
• Make sure that there is no clearance between the
glass and glass run channel when the glass is
closed.
• Adjustthe position of the glass as necessary
(see page 20-38).
• Do the power window control unit reset
• Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles .
.. When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
3. Pull the door glass opening side of the trim back to

release the hooks (8) from the door glass opening
flange of the door sash.

note these items:

• Push the hooks and clips into place securely.
20-32 BACK
Rear Door Sash Outer Trim Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door. 3. Remove the door sash outer trim (A).
1. Lower the glass fully. ...!J Pull back the door weatherstrip (8), then
remove the screw.
2. Using a clip remover, detach the clips fastening the -2 Pull the trim up to release the hooks (e) from
door weatherstrip (A) from the door sash outer trim the door. Take care not to damage the door
(8). glass outer weatherstrip (D).
Fastener Locations Fastener Location

1>: Clip, 5 ~ : Screw, 1
~ ~

note these items:
o Make sure the glass run channel (E) is installed in

replace them with newones.
o Push the clips into place securely.
BACK 20-33
Doors
Rear Door Rear Sash Outer Trim Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door. Special Tools Required
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
1. Lower the glass fully. * Available through the American Honda Tool and
2. Remove the door rear sash outer trim (A).
NOTE:
-1 Pull back the door weatherstrip (B), then • If you remove the door glass outer weatherstrip,
remove the screw. replace it with a new one because it will bend.
-:2 Pull the trim up to release the hooks (C) from • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
the door. Take care not to damage the door • Take care not to scratch the door.
glass outer weatherstrip (D). • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1 1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-22).
~ 2. Remove the screws from both side edges of the

door.
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
~I
E
c 3. Starting at the rear, pull the door glass outer

weatherstrip (A) up at each portion where the inner
molding (B) catches the inside edge of the window
slot.
make sure the glass run channel (E) is installed in
20-34
BACK
Rear Door Outer Molding
Replacement
4. Remove the door glass outer weatherstrip (A). Special Tools Required
KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
A
NOTE:
~ • If you remove the door outer molding, replace it with

a new one because it will bend during removal.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to
1. Release the rear clip (A).

B
B
5. Install a new weatherstrip in the reverse order of
removal.
c
I
2. While removing the upper edge of the door outer

molding (8) from the edge of the sash, cut the
double-sided adhesive tape (e) with a utility knife,
release the front clip (D), then remove the molding.
3. Scrape off the remaining double-sided adhesive

tape from the sash, then clean the sash surface
with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
4. Install a new· door outer molding in the reverse

order of removal, and note these items:
• Push the clips and the adhesive portions into

place securely .
• Make sure the upper and lower sides of the
molding are catching the edges ofthe sash
properly.
BACK
20-35
Doors
Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE: 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of

• Put on gloves to protect your hands. removal, and note these items:
• Use a clip remover to remove the clips. • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
1. At the B-pillar, remove the door checker mounting • Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to
bolt (A). the door checker mounting bolt before
installation.
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Bolt, 1 B [> : Clip, 34 C [> : Clip, 5
(Left: Yellow) (White)
IR;~on)
D [>: Clip, 1 E [>: Clip, 1

(Black)
~I ~T I
2. Detach the clips (B, C, D, E), then remove the door

weatherstrip (F).
20-36 BACK
Rear Door Side Sill Seal Replacement
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the door .
• Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
1. Detach the clips, then remove the door side sill seal
(A).
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip. 8
j[J
.2. Install the side sill seal in the reverse order of


BACK 20-37
[loors
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment
NOTE: Check the weatherstrip and glass run channel for Rear
damage or deterioration, and replace them if necessary.
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
2. Remove these items:
• Door panel:
- Front door (see page 20-8)
- Rear door (see page 20-22)
• Plastic cover: c
- Front door (see step 3 on page 20-16)
- Rear door (see step 3 on page 20-30)
3. Carefully move the glass (A) until you can see the
glass mounting bolts (B), then loosen them.
Front
B
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 Ibf·ft)
4. Push the glass against the channel (C), then tighten

the glass mounting bolts.
5. Check that the glass moves smoothly.
6. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Also make
sure that the glass (A) contacts the glass run
channel (B) evenly.
B
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
20-38 BACK
Front and Rear Door Position
Adjustment
7. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and NOTE: Check for a fl,ush fit with the body, then check for
on the sealing area as shown, and note these items: equal gaps betWeeh:the front, rear, and bottom door
edges and the body. Check that the door and body
o Use a 12 mm (1/2 in.) diameter hose (A). edges are parallel.
o Adjust the rate of water flow as shown (8).
o Do not use a nozzle. 1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when
o Hold the hose about 300 mm (12 in.) away from adjusting the doors.
the door (C).
2. Adjust at the hinges (A):
12 mm (1/2 in.)
'''lllY;O''~
I
o Pad a floor jack (8) with shop towels (C), then use
1f~
0.5 m (19 in.) the jack to support the door to prevent damage to
the door while adjusting it.
On the front door: Remove the front inner fender
~B
A o
(see page 20-217). Loosen the hinge mounting

bolts (D) slightly, and move the door backward or
forward, up or down as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
300 mm (12 in.) o On the rear door: Loosen the hinge mounting
bolts (E) slightly, and move the door backward or
forward, up or down as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
Front door
D
8x 1.25 mm
30N·m
8. Attach the plastic cover, making sure it is sealed
around its outside perimeter to seal out water, then
install the door panel:
o Front door (see page 20-8) F

o Rear door (see page 20-22) 8x 1.25 mm
30N·m
(3.1 kgf·m,22 Ibf·ft)
F
8x1.25mm
30N·m
(3.1 kgf·m,22 Ibf·ft)
D
8x1.25mm
30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m,22 Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 20-39
Doors
Front and Rear Door Position Adjustment (cont'd)
Rear door 4. Check that the door and body edges are parallel. If
necessary, adjust the door cushions (A) to make the
A F rear of the doors flush with the body.
8x 1.25 mm
30N·m
E
8x1.2Smm
30N·m
(,...gl.m.",,] IIC-------_
~""""1":~I81r:..._J'- F
8x1.2Smm
30 N·m
E
8x1.2Smm
30 N·m (3.1 kgf.m, 22 Ibf·ft) 5. Apply touch-Up paint to the hinge mounting bolts,
and around the hinges.
3. If necessary, replace the door mounting bolts with
the adjusting bolts (PIN 90102-SFA-305) made 6. Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-39).
specifically for door adjustment, then adjust at the
door: Loosen the door mounting bolts (F) slightly,
and move the door up or down as necessary to
equalize the gaps, and move it in or out until it's
flush with the body.
20-40 BACK
Front and Rear Door Striker Adjustment
Make sure the door latches securely without slamming

it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker nuts
are fixed, but the striker can be adjusted slightly up or
down, and in or out.
1. Loosen the screws (8).
B
8x 1.25mm
18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13Ibf·ft)
2. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the

striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (e). Do
not tap the striker too hard.
3. Lightly tighten the screws.
4. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door

against the body to be sure the striker allows a
flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten the
screws and recheck.
BACK 20-41
Mirrors
POWER MIRROR
/ Replacement, page 20-43
MIRROR HOLDER
Without automatic dimming mirror With automatic dimming mirror
~----HARNESS
~ J COVER BASE
~
~~HAANESS ~~ UPPER COVER
~ \ MIRROR HARNESS
" ,,~ COVER
~~
REARVIEW MIRROR REARVIEW MIRROR
20-42 BACK
Power Mirror Replacement Mirror Holder Replacement
1. Lower the door glass fully. NOTE: When prying with a flat-tipped screwdriver,
wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Adjustthe mirror fully to the upward position .
• 'Front door panel (see page 20-8)
• Front door sash inner trim (see page 20-18) 2. Insert a long, thin flat-tipped screwdriver under the
mirror holder (A). Slide the tip of the screwdriver
3. While holding the mirror (A), pull back the door between the mirror holder and the actuator (8).
weatherstrip (8) as needed, then remove the nuts.
A
Fastener Locations
.:Nut,3
3. Quickly twist the screwdriver to separate the mirror

4. Remove the mirror (A). Take care not to scratch the holder from the mirror actuator.
door.
4. Insert the screwdriver further under the mirror
holder and twist it again.
NOTE: Do not pry up on the mirror holder to

separate the two parts, as this can cause either the
mirror glass or actuator to break.
5. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-43
Mirrors
Mirror Holder Replacement (cont'd) Rearview Mirror Replacement
5. Separate the mirror holder (A) from the actuator (B). Without automatic dimming mirror
Disconnect the mirror defogger connectors (C)
from the heater pad terminals. 1. Turn the rearview mirror base (A) 90 0.
D
2. Slide the rearview mirror (A) down toward the

bottom of the windshield to detach it from the
6. Reconnect the mirror defogger connector. spring (B) in the mount (C).
7. Align the tabs (D) on the mirror holder so they line

up on each side of the actuator tabs (E). Carefully
push on the mirror holder until it locks into place.
8. Check the operation of the actuator.
3. If necessary, remove the spring from the mount.
4. Install the rearview mirror in the reverse order of

removal.
20-44 BACK
With automatic dimming mirror
1. Disconnect the connector (A).

c
2. Slide the mirror harness upper cover (B) forward,

then remove the mirror harness cover (e) from the
mirror base (D).
3. Using a T20 TORX bit, loosen the screw, then slide

the rearview mirror (A) rearward and off the mount
(B).
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
6x 1.Omm
4N·m
10.4 kgf·m, 3 Ibf·ft)
4. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal,

• Before installing the mirror, remove the TORX

screw, and apply medium strength type liquid
thread lock to it.
o Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
BACK
20-45
Glass
DASHBOARD SEAL
LOWER RUBBER DAM '
WINDSHIELD
UPPER FASTENER, 2
(SeH-adhesive-type, glass side)
l~R"
(Required for replacement or reinstallation)
~
~Q
REARWINDOW
/
FASTENER,4
(Self-adhesive-type, body side)
(Required for replacement or
REAR WIPER SEAL LOWER RUBBER DAM reinstallation)
20-46 BACK
QUARTER GLASS
FRONT SEAL
ULEV STICKER
BACK 20-47
Glass
Windshield Replacement
NOTE: 6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
• Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive wire as close to the windshield (8) as possible to
with a piano wire. prevent damage to the body and dashboard.
• Use seat covers to avoid damaging the seat. Carefully cut through the rubber dam and adhesive
• When replacing a broken windshield, a commercially (C) around the entire windshield.
available windshield cutter can be efficiently used for
cutting the adhesive. For details, follow the
instructions of the tool manufacturer.

c
• Cowl cover (see page 20-205)
• Rearview mirror
- Without automatic dimming mirror (see page
20-44).
- With automatic dimming mirror (see page
20-45).
• A-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-78)
• Roof moldings (see page 20-208) Cutting positions .
2. Remove the molding (A) from the upper edge ofthe

windshield (8). If necessary, cut the molding with a
utility knife.
7. Carefully remove the windshield.
3. If the old windshield will be reinstalled, make

alignment marks across the glass and body with a
grease pencil.
4. Pull down the front portion of the headliner

(see page 20-101). Take care not to bend the
headliner excessively, or you may crease or break
it.
5. Apply protective tape along the edge of the

dashboard and body. Using an awl, make a hole
through the rubber dam and adhesive from inside
the vehicle atthe corner portion ofthe windshield.
Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and
wrap each end around a piece of wood.
20-48 BACK
S. With a knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a 11. Attach the upper rubber dam (A), lower rubber dam
thickness of about 2 mm (O.OS in.) on the bonding (B), and clips (C) with adhesive tape to the inside
surface around the entire windshield opening face ofthe windshield (D) as shown:
flange:
• Be sure the rubber dam and clips line up with the
• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the alignment marks (E) .
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper • Be sure the convex portion (F) of the left and right
bonding. clips toward left.
• Remove the rubber dam and fasteners from the • Be careful not to touch the windshield where
body. adhesive will be applied.
9. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge Rubber dams adhesive tape:
dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, Thickness 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
keep oil, grease and water from getting on the Width 3.5 mm (0.14 in.)
clean surface. Clips adhesive tape:
Thickness 0.4 mm (0.016 in.)
10. Ifthe old windshield will be reinstalled, use a putty Width 10 mm (0.39 in.)
knife to scrape off the old adhesive, the clips the
rubber dam, and the dashboard seal from the
windshield. Clean the inside face and the edge of
the windshield with isopropyl alcohol where new E
adhesive will be applied. Make sure the bonding
surface is kept free of water, oil, and grease.
11 mm
(0.43 in.' B
~de
o
I
27.Smm
(1.08 in.'
InSa'de
B---.,.
~D 12mm
32mm ~~:::::e~r--' (0.47 in.'
(1.31 in.'
32mm
(1.31 in.'
1\
1S2.Smm
62.Smm
(2.46 in.'
(6.0 in.'
(cont'd)
BACK 20-49
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
12. Attach the dashboard seal (A) with adhesive tape to 14. Attach the molding upper seal (A) with adhesive
the inside surface of the windshield (B) as shown. tape to the inside surface of the molding (B) as
shown.
_ :Apply primer here.
Inside
15. Set the windshield in the opening, and center it.

13. Attach the molding (A) with adhesive tape (B) to the Make alignment marks (A) across the windshield
upper edge of the windshield (C). Be careful not to and body with a grease pencil at the four points
touch the windshield where adhesive will be shown. Make sure both clips (B) contact with the
applied. edge of the body holes. Be careful not to touch the
windshield where adhesive will be applied.
Molding adhesive tape:Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
Width 4 mm (0.16 in.)
A
16. Remove the windshield.
20-50 BACK
17. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer 18. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body
around the edge of the windshield (A) between the primer to any exposed paint or metal around the
dams (B) and molding (C) as shown, then lightly flange where new adhesive will be applied. Letthe
wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: primer dry for at least 10 minutes:
• Apply glass primer to the molding. • Do not apply body primer to any remaining
• Do not apply body primer to the windshield, and original adhesive on the flange.
do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed • Be careful not to mix up the body and glass
up. primer sponges.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. • Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
windshield properly, causing a leak after the _ :Apply body primer to exposed paint as shown.
windshield is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
from primed surfaces.
_ :Apply glass primer here.
11mm
(0.43 in.) ~----c
Inside / ---A
11 mm B,
· (0.43 in.) B
~~s:~e
A/
19. Cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) on the
adhesive cartridge as shown.
11 mm
(0.43 in.) "'A
8 mm (0.31 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK 20-51
G'lass
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
20. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets 21. Use suction cups to hold the windshield over the
to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a opening, align it with the alignment marks made in
caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) step 15, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly
around the edge of the windshield (B) between the push on the windshield until its edges are fully
dams (C) and molding (D) as shown. Apply the seated on the adhesive all the way around.
adhesive within 30 minutes after applying the glass
primer. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner. NOTE: Do not open or close the doors for about an
hour until the adhesive is dry.
2 mm (0.08 in.)
,+Ir- A 22. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty
l::.:rn.) I~ knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted
surface or the windshield, wipe with a soft shop
H
8 mm (0.31 in.) towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
23. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the
2mm windshield and check for leaks. Mark leaking areas,
T
and let the windshield dry, then seal with sealant.
A,,~ Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after
windshield installation. Ifthe vehicle has to be used
d within the first 4 hours, it must be driven slowly.
•
24. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
B
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following
things for 2 to 3 days: ' '
• Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up.

• Twist the body excessively (such as when going
in and out of driveways at an angle or driving
over rough, uneven roads).
B
20-52 BACK
Rear Window Replacement
NOTE: 3. If the old rear window will be reinstalled, make

• Put on gloves to protect your hands. alignment marks across the glass and body with a
• Wear eye protection when removing the glass with grease pencil.
piano wire.
• Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces. 4. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside
• Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines edges of the tailgate. Using an awl, make a hole
and terminals. through the adhesive from inside the vehicle at the
corner portion of the rear window. Push the piano
1. Remove these items: wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a
piece of wood.
• Tailgate spoiler trim (see page 20-213)
• Tailgate lower trim panel (see page 20-96) 5. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
• Rear window wiper motor (see page 22-306) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
wire as close to the rear window (8) as possible to
2. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors prevent damage to the tailgate, and carefully cut
(A). through the adhesive (C) around the entire rear
window.
Cutting positions
6. Carefully remove the rear window.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-53
Gla~ss
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
7. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth 12. Attach the rubber dam (A), fasteners (B, C), and
to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the spacer (0) with adhesive tape to the inside face of
bonding surface around the entire rear window the rear window (E) as shown. Before installing the
opening flange: rubber dam, apply primer to the area where the
adhesive tape will be applied to the inside face of
• 00 not scrape down to the painted surface of the the rear window:
body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
bonding. • Be sure the fasteners and rubber dam line up
• Remove the fasteners from the tailgate. with alignment marks (F) .
• Be careful not to touch the rear window where
8. Clean the tailgate bonding surface with a sponge adhesive will be applied.
dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning,
keep oil, grease and water from getting on the Rubber dam adhesive tape:
surface. Thickness 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
Width 3.5 mm (0.14 in.)
Fasteners adhesive tape:
9. If a new rear window is to be installed, install the Thickness 0.6 mm (0.024 in.)
rear wiper seal (A) to the rear window (B) with its Width 7.5 mm (0.3 in.)
alignment mark (C) being aligned with the mark (0) Spacer adhesive tape:
on the rear window. Thickness 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
Width 6.5 mm (0.26 in.)
~ :Apply primer here.
=======:====l\
B
10. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, check for

,F
~
a damaged rear wiper seal, and replace it with a
new one.
11. Ifthe old rear window is to be reinstalled, use a E' E

putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the 4mm ~ A / F C
fasteners and the rubber dams from the rear
window. Clean the inside face and the edge of the
rear window with alcohol where new adhesive is to
be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept
free of water, oil and grease.
(0.18 in.) (0.18 in.) A
20-54 BACK
13. Attach the fasteners (A, B) with adhesive tape to the 15. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer to
tailgate as shown. the rear window (A) along the edge of the rubber
dam (B) as shown, then lightly wipe it off with
Fasteners adhesive tape: gauze or cheesecloth:
Thickness 0.6 mm (0.024 in.)
Width 7.5 mm (0.3 in.) • With the printed dots (e) on the rear window as a
guide, apply the glass primer to both side
Fastener Locations portions of the rear window.
A [> : Fastener, 2 B [>: Fastener, 2 • Do not apply body primer to the rear window,
_~ 1] _~i~
and do notget body and glass primer sponges
mixed up.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear
window properly, causing a leak after the rear
window is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials; away
from the primed surface.
_ :Apply glass primer here.
4mm
(0'16in.'~
~
___ /A
14. Set the rear window (A) in the opening, and center
it. Make alignment marks (B) across the rear 12mm / 12mm
(0.47 in.' (0.47 in.'
window and body with a grease pencil at the four Inside
points shown. Be careful not to touch the rear I
window where adhesive will be applied.
B A
I~nide
12mm
(0.47 in.' '"
/ A
B
(cont'd)
BACK
20-55
Glass
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
16. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body 18. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets
primer to any exposed paint around the flange to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
where new adhesive will be applied. Let the body caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) on the
primer dry for at least 10 minutes: rear window (B) around the edge of the lower
rubber dam (C) as shown. With the printed dots (D)
• Do not apply body primer to any remaining on the rear window as a guide, apply the adhesive
original adhesive on the flange. to both side portions of the quarter glass.
• Be careful not to mix up glass and body primer Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after
sponges. applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. bead at each corner.
_ :Apply body primer to any exposed paint as shown. 2 mm (0.08 in.)

-+1- A
·20mm
(0.79 in.)
13mm
(0.51 in.)
I"~
..
20mm
(0.79 in.) f-j
8 mm (0.31 in.)
Inside
(0.24 in.)
6mm ~/B
A/
I
17. Cut a "v" in the endofthe nozzle (A) on the

i A~~lnSide B c
2mm /
(0.08in.) ; /
C
8 mm (0.31 in.)
20-56 BACK
Quarter Glass Replacement
19. Use suction cups to hold the rear window over the NOTE:
opening, align it with the alignment marks you • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
made in step 14, and set it down on the adhesive. • Wear eye protection when removing the glass with
Lightly push on the rear window until its edges are piano wire.
fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. • Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surface.
NOTE: Do not open or close the doors for about an 1. Remove the quarter pillar trim (see page 20-85).
hour until the adhesive is dry.
2. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside
20. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty edges ofthe body. Using an awl, make a hole
knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted through the adhesive from inside the vehicle. Push
surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap
dampened with alcohol. each end around a piece of wood.
21. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the 3. Remove the front seal (A) from the front edge of the
rear window and check for leaks. Mark the leaking quarter glass (8). If necessary, cut the front seal
areas, and let the rear window dry, then seal with with a utility knife.
sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours
after rear window installation. If the vehicle has to
be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.

things for 2 to 3 days:
• Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up .

(cont'd)
BACK 20-57
Glass'
Quarter Glass Replacement (cont'd)
4. Carefully cut through the adhesive (A) at the rear 6. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth
corner portion ofthe quarter glass (8) with a utility to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the
knife. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano bonding surface around the entire quarter glass
wire (C) back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold opening flange:
the piano wire as close to the quarter glass as
possible to prevent damage to the body, and • Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the
carefully cut through the adhesive around the body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
entire quarter glass: bonding.
• Remove the clips and fastener from the body.
• If the quarter glass will be reinstalled, take care
not to damage the molding (D); 7. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge
• Ifthe molding is damaged, replace the quarter dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning,
glass, molding, and clips (E) as an assembly. keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the
• If any of the clips are broken, the quarter glass surface.
can be reinstalled using butyl tape (refer to
step 9). 8. Ifthe old quarter glass will be reinstalled, use a
putty knife to scrape off the old adhesive, any
C E
broken clips from the quarter glass. Clean the
inside face and the edge of the quarter glass with
isopropyl ,alcohol where new adhesive will be
applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept free
of water, oil, and grease.
From inside
Cutting positions
5. Carefully remove the quarter glass.
20-58 BACK
9. If the old quarter glass will be reinstalled (and 10. Attach the front seal (A) with adhesive tape (B) onto
either clip is broken off the molding), apply a light the molding (C).
coat of primer, then apply butyl tape (A) to the
molding (B) as shown. Attach the clip (C) with Seal adhesive tape: Thickness 0.8 mm (0.031 in.)
adhesive tape to the inside face of the quarter glass Width 7 mm (0.28 in.)
(D):
_ :Apply primer here .
• Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where
adhesive will be applied .
• Do not peel the separator off the butyl tape.
Clip adhesive tape: Thickness 0.4 mm (0.016 in.)

Width 7.5 mm (0.3 in.)
B~t---A
D~
Inside
300mm
(11.8 in.)
D~ 14mm
(0.55 in.)
C
______ A
(cont'd)
BACK 20-59
Glass
11. If the old quarteJ glass will be reinstalled (and 13. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer
either clip is broken off the molding), seal the body along the edge of the front seal (A) and molding (B)
holes with pieces of urethane tape (A). Then set the as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or
quarter glass upright in the opening, and make cheesecloth:
alignment marks (B) across the quarter glass and
body with a grease pencil at the three points shown. • With the printed dots (C) on the quarter glass (D)
Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where as a guide, apply the glass primer to the front
adhesive will be applied. portion of the quarter glass.
• Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass,
and do not get body and glass primer sponges
mixed up.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
quarter glass properly, causing a leak after the
quarter glass is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
from primed surfaces.
_ :Apply body primer here.
12mm
(0.47 in.' 5
12. Remove the quarter glass. "_ X 1 mm
(0.59 in.'
"mm
(0.47 in.'
,In.,d. ~~
..... """" D ! i J
.~fIl
s/ / ,IS" LfI'A
D
20-60 BACK
14. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body 16. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets
primer to any exposed paint or metal around the to ensure continuous delivery. Putthe cartridge in a
flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A)
primer dry for at least 10 minutes: around the edge of the front seal (8) and molding
(C) as shown. With the glass primer (D) you applied
• Do not apply body primer to any remaining in step 13 on the quarter glass (E) as a guide, apply
original adhesive on the flange. the adhesive to the upper and lower corner
• 8e careful not to mix up the body and glass portions of the quarter glass. Apply the adhesive
primer sponges. within 30 minutes after applying the glass primer.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. Make a slightly thicker bead at each corner.
_ :Apply glass primer to exposed paint as shown. 2 mm (0.08 in.'

-H-
13mm I~---A A
(0.51 in.' Ii
h-i
8 mm (0.31 in.'
20mm
(0.79 in.'
15. Cut a "V" in the end ofthe nozzle (A) on the

8 mm (0.31 in.'
(cont'd)
BACK
20-61
Glass
17. Use suction cups (A) to hold the quarter glass (8)
over the opening, align the.clips or the alignment
marks (e) made in step 11 ,and set it down on the
adhesive. Lightly push on the quarter glass until its
edges are fully seated on the adhesive all the way
around.
NOTE: Do not open or close the doors for an hour

until the adhesive is dry.
B
18. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty

knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted
surface or the quarter glass, wipe with a soft shop
towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
19. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the
quarter glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking
areas, and let the quarter glass dry, then seal with
sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours
after quarter glass installation. If the vehicle has to
be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.

things for 2 to 3 days:
• Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up.

20-62 BACK
Moonroof
GLASS
Height Adjustment, page 20-65
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check,
page 20-74
DRAIN CHANNEL
~~
~ 4fIlP - ~~I~I:'RCHANNEL
WIND DEFLECTOR
~ ~_ Replacement,
~ ~ . ~~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ page 20-72
.~I ~IDE STOP DRAIN CHANNEL ROD
/
GLASS BRACKET 4Jl
I 'ifdf).------ SUNSHADE REAR STOP
Replacement, ~ ____ REAR MIDDLE

page 20-72 ...----- DRAIN TUBE
CABLE
Replacement, F~
~
~ REAR DRAIN TUBE
Replacement,
~~ ~~ ~~
F~~7 _:~~
MOTOR
~ REAR DRAIN TUBE

FRONT DRAIN TUBE
BACK
20-63
Moonroof

Water leaks from moon roof 1. Check for a clogged drain tube.
2. Check for a gap between the glass weatherstrip and the roof panel.
3. Check for a defective or an improperly installed glass weatherstrip or drain
channel.
4. Check for a gap between the drain seal and the roof panel.
Wind noise from moonroof Check for excessive clearance between the glass weatherstrip and the roof
panel.
Motor noise from moon roof 1. Check for a loose motor.
2. Check for a worn gear or bearing.
3. Check for a deformed cable assembly.
Moonroof glass does not move, 1. Check for a defective gear or inner cable.
but motor turns 2. Check for foreign matter stuck between the guide rail and the slider.
3. Check for a loose inner cable.
4. Make sure the cable assembly is attached properly.
Moonroof glass does not move 1. Check for a blown fuse.
and motor does not turn (glass 2. Check for a faulty moonroof switch.
can be moved with 5 mm 3. Check for a run down battery.
hexagonal wrench) 4. Check for a defective motor control unit.
Moonroof glass does not stop at 1. Reset the moon roof control unit (see page 22-357).
proper flush closed position 2. Check glass height adjustment.
Moonroof glass moves in a Reset the moon roof control unit (see page 22-357).
jerking motion (moves 40 mm
(1.57 in.), stops for 0.4 seconds,
and repeats)
During auto close operation, Check for dirt and debris in the track. Reset the moonroof control unit (see page
moon roof glass reverses when 22-357).
no object is trapped
Moonroof glass moves, but Reset the moon roof control unit (see page 22-357).
there is no AUTO function
20-64 BACK
Glass Height Adjustment Glass Replacement
The roof panel (A) should be even with the glass 1. Tilt the glass all the way up.
weatherstrip (8), to within 0+1/-1 mm (0+0.04/
-0.04 in.) all the way around. If not, make the following 2. Slide the sunshade all the way back.
adjustment:
3. Pry out the cap (A), remove the screw (8), release
the hooks (C), and remove the bracket cover (D).
Repeat on opposite side. Use a T25 TORX bit to
remove the bolts (E) from the glass brackets (F) on
both sides.
Fastener Locations
B ~: Screw. 2 E ~: Bolt. 4
~ Q)mm 6X1.0mm
LJa
1 9.8N·m
~ (1.0 kgf·m. 7.2 Ibf.ftl
--------'E
~",-~
~c:'mm\
1. Remove the bracket cover.
2. With a T25 TORX bit, loosen the bolts on each side,

and adjust the glass (A).
Fastener Locations
4. Remove the glass (A) by lifting it up. Do not
~: Bolt, 2 damage the roof panel.
Q»mmi
d Front 5. Install the glass in the reverse order of removal,

• Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to

3. If necessary, repeat on the opposite side. the glass mounting bolts before reinstallation.
• Reset the moonroof control unit (see page
22-357).
• Adjust the glass height alignment.
6. Check for water leaks. Use free-flowing water from

a hose without a nozzle. Do not use high-pressure
water.
NOTE: It is normal for some water to seep past the

moon roof into the moonroof frame, and exit
through the drains.
BACK 20-65
Moonroof
Wind Deflector Replacement Drain Channel Replacement
1. Open the glass fully. 1. Remove the glass (see page 20-65).
2. Disconnect the deflector springs (A) from the 2. Move both glass brackets (A) to the position where
bushings (8) on both sides. the moonroof normally pivots down, and remove
the screws securing the drain channel (8).
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
Omi B
3. Remove the wind deflector (A).
A 3. Release the drain channel (A) from both hooks (8)

ofthe drain channel slider by pulling the drain
channel forward.
4. Install the deflector in the reverse order of removal.
5. Reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-357).
20-66 BACK
Sunshade Replacement
4. Remove the drain channel (A). 1. Remove the drain channel (see page 20-66).
2. Slide the sunshade all the way forward.
3. Disconnect both drain channel rods (A) from both

glass brackets (B) by pulling the front of them
inside, then remove the rods from both drain
channel sliders (C) by lifting them up.
5. Install the channel in the reverse order of removal,

• Push the drain channel onto the hooks until a

faint click is heard .
• Check the glass height adjustment (see page
20-65).
4. Slide both drain channel sliders (A) forward until!
6. Reset the rrioonroof control unit (see page 22-357). they contact both glass brackets (B).
7. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from A
a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure
spray.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-67
Moonroof
Sunshade Replacement (cont'd)
5. Remove the screws, then remove both sunshade 8. Remove the sunshade (A).
slider spacers (A).
Fastener Locations
9. Remove both front sunshade base sliders (A) and

both rear sunshade base sliders (8).
6. While lifting the front portion of the sunshade (A),

move the sunshade forward until you can see both
sunshade rear hooks (8). Do not damage the
sunshade and hooks.
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 4
~
B
10. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal,

and check the glass height adjustment (see page
20-65).
11. Reset the moon roof control unit (see page 22-357).
A
12. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from
spray.
7. Remove the screws, then remove both hooks.
20-68 BACK
Motor Replacement Frame and Drain Tube Replacement
1. Remove these items: SRS components are located in this area. Review the
SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the
• Roof console (see page 22-239) precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
• Roof console bezel (see step 2 on page 20-101) doing repairs or service.
2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the 1. Remove these items:
connector (A), and remove the bolts, then remove
the motor (8). • Headliner (see page 20-101)
• Moonroof glass (see page 20-65)
Fastener Locations
• With rear entertainment system: Rear controller
and display (see page 23-215)
2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the

motor connector (A), and detach the moonroofwire
harness connector (8) from the moonroof frame.
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal,

3. Disconnect the drain tubes (A).
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
A--_ _ _ ~
• Reset the moonroof control unit (see page
22-357).
• Check the motor operation.
(cont'd)
BACK
20-69
Moonroof
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement (cont'd)
4. With an assistant holding the frame (A), remove the 7. Driver's side: Remove the bolts, then move the
bolts and release the rear middle drain tube clip (8), under-dash fuse/relay box (A) as needed.
then remove the frame.
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations
~ : Bolt, 8
~
B
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ftl
A
6x1.Omm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl 8. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body, tie
a string to the top end of the drain tube, then pull
Front Drain Tube the front drain tube (8) down out of the A-pillar.
Leave the string in the pillar to use when
5. Remove these items: reinstalling the drain tube.
• Front door sill trim (see page 20-76)

• Kick panel (see page 20-76)
• Driver's dashboard undercover (see page 20-120)
• Passenger's dashboard undercover (see page
20-127)
6. Passenger's side: Remove the glove box damper

from the pivot on the glove box (see step 3 on page
20-125). While holding the glove box, release the
glove box stop on each side from the dashboard by
pushing them in, then lower the glove box (see step
6 on page 20-126).
BACK
20-70
Rear Drain Tube 11. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order
• Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes
• Rear side trim panel (see page 20-92) and drain valves using compressed air.
• Left side: Subwoofer box (see page 23-94) • When installing, tie the string that was left in the
pillar to the top end of the new drain tube and
10. Tie a string to the top end of the rear drain tube (A), pull it up into the roof.
then pull the drain tube down out of the pillar. • Check the frame seal.
Leave the string in the pillar to use when • Clean the surface of the frame.
reinstalling the drain tube. • Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly.
• When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the
frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.).
• Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as
shown.
• After all parts are installed, including the
headliner, reset the moonroof control unit
(see page 22-357).
• Adjust the glass height alignment (see page
20-65).
Upward
r
B
12. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from
spray.
BACK 20-71
Moonroof
Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement
1. Remove the frame (see page 20-69). 5. Remove the slide stop (A) and the drain channel
slider (B).
2. Remove these parts from the frame:
• Sunshade (see page 20-67)

• Moonroof motor (see page 20-69)
3. Disconnect and remove the rear middle drain tube

(A).
6. Pivot the glass bracket (A) down by sliding the link

lifter (B) back, then slide the glass bracket back with
the link lifter.
4. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the

screw securing the sunshade rear stop (A), and
remove it from the frame (B). Release the rear hook
of the slide stop (e) by pushing it forward, and
pivot the stop up.
Fastener Location
20-72 BACK
7. Slide the glass bracket (A) along with the cable (B) 8. Install the slider and cable assembly in the reverse
back, then remove them from the frame (e). order of removal, and note these items:
• Damaged parts should be replaced.

• Apply molybdenum grease to the glass bracket
(A) and guide rail portion of the frame (B)
indicated by the arrows.
• Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both
link lifters are parallel, and in the tilt-up position.
• Before· reinstalling the motor, install the frame
and glass, then check the opening drag (see page
20-74).
• After reinstalling the motor reset the moonroof
control unit (see page 22-357).
.. /
~
..
BACK 20-73
Moonroof
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-101). 4. Opening drag check: Protect the leading edge of the
glass with a shop towel (A). Measure the effort
2. Closing force check: required to open the glass using a spring scale (8)
as shown.
• With a shop towel (A) on the leading edge of the
glass (8), attach a spring scale (C) as shown.
o Have an assistant hold the switch to close the
glass while you measure the force required to

stop it.
o Read the force as soon as the glass stops moving,
then immediately release the switch and spring

scale.
Closing force: 200-290 N (20-30 kgf, 44-66Ibf)
5. Ifthe load is over 40 N (4 kgf, 9 Ibf), check:
o The side clearance and glass height adjustment

(see page 20-65) .
• For broken or damaged sliding parts. If any
sliding parts are damaged, replace them.
6. Reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-357)

after reinstalling the moonroof motor.
3. If the force in not within specification, remove the

moonroof motor (see page 20-69), then check:
o The gear teeth and the inner cable for breakage

and damage. Ifthe gear teeth are broken, replace
the motor. If the inner cable is damaged, remove
the frame (see page 20-69), and replace the cable
(see page 20-72).
o Do the moonroof control unit input test (see page
22-354). If the motor fails to run or doesn't turn
smoothly, replace it.
o The opening drag. Go to step 4.
20-74 BACK
Interior Trim
SUNVISOR
HEADLINER
A-PILLAR TRIM
FRONT DOOR OPENING SEAL
B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM
REAR DOOR OPENING SEAL
QUARTER PILLAR TRIM
REAR SIDE TRIM PANEL
page 20-92
TAILGATE SIDE TRIM
page 20-92
TAILGATE TRIM PANEL
page 20-96
GRAB HANDLE
page 20-99
TAILGATE UPPER TRIM

KICK PANEL page 20-96
page 20-76 REAR TRIM PANEL
page 20-90
CARGO FLOOR LID

CARGO REAR TRIM PANEL

FRONT DOOR Removal/Installation, page 20-90
SILL TRIM
Removal/Installation, TOOL SET HOLDER
page 20-76 Removal/Installation, page 20-90
REAR SIDE OUTER TRIM

Removal/lnstallation, page 20-77
FRONT SIDE
OUTER TRIM
Removal/Installation, REAR DOOR SILL TRIM
page 20-76 Removal/Installation, page 20-77
B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM

BACK 20-75
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the left kick panel (A) or the right kick
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * panel (8).
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 -1 Pull out the door opening seal (C) as needed
from the kick panel hooks (D) and the door
Front Door Sill Area opening flange.
-2 Remove the clip (E).
NOTE: -a Pull the kick panel back by hand to detach the
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. clip (F), then remove it.
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to Driver's
Fastener Locations
1. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (8) from the kick E I> : Clip, 1 F 1>: Clip, 1
panel (C) and 8-pi.llar lower trim (D), and pull the
front door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the
clips (F), then remove it from the front door
opening seal (G).
1i ofY'1
Fastener Locations
F 1>: Clip, 4
~Y' A
C Passenger's
Fastener Locations
E I> : Clip, 1 F 1>: Clip, 1
(Gray)
2. If necessary, pull the front side outer trim (H) up to

detach the clips (I), then remove the trim.
20-76 BACK
4. Pull out the front door opening seal (A) from the Special Tools Required
trim hooks (8) and around the front door opening KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
flange, then remove the seal. * Available through the American Honda Tool and
Rear Door Sill Area
NOTE:
1. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (8) from the 8-pillar
lower trim (e) and rear side trim panel (D), and pull
the rear door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the
clips (F, G), then remove it from the rear door
opening seal (H).
Fastener Locations
F [>: Clip, 2 G [> : Clip, 1 J [>: Clip, 3
~I .. ~ I
5. Install thetrim in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items: E

• Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
2. If necessary, pull the rear side outer trim (I) up to

detach the clips (J), then remove the trim.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-77
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar

Areas (cont'd) Areas
3. Pull out the rear door opening seal (A) from the Special Tools Required
trim hooks (8) and around the rear door opening KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
flange, then remove the seal. * Available through the American Honda Tool and
.B.........·--- \ A-pillar Trim
" .. .. II \\I
SRS components are located in this area. Review the
I I
I SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the
NOTE:
o Follow the A-pillar trim installation procedure
carefully; improper installation could cause the side

curtain airbags to deploy improperly and possibly
cause injury.
o Put on gloves to protect your hands .
• Take care not to scratch the trim and panels.
o The upper clip in the A-pillar trim (A) consists of a
resin grommet (8) and a metal pin (e). The groove (0)
in the grommet secures it to the body panel (E). The
shoulder (F) on the grommet is broken during
removal, so the clip must be replaced with a new one
when the trim is reinstalled.
note these items: A

D
o Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
F -----E
20-78 BACK
1. Pull the front door opening seal away from the 3. Pull the top of the A-pillar trim (A) back by hand to
A-pillar as needed (see' step 4 on page 20-77). remove the pin (a) from the grommet (C) remaining
in the body (D).
2. Hit the surface of the A-pillar trim (A) with a rubber
mallet. The clip is located under the top of· the A- NOTE: The edge of the headliner (E) lies betWeen
pillar trim near the "SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG" mark the A-pillar trim and the guide bracket (F) of the
(B). Hitting the trim surface breaks the shoulder (C) trim. The A-pillar trim shouldn't be pulled out too
on the grommet (D) and pushes the pin (E)"and far at a time, or the guide bracket might catch the
grommet againstthe body (F). headliner and bend it.
NOTE: The clip must be replaced with a new one

when the A-pillar trim is reinstalled.
B ,.. F
'\S\ F
D
._._+
._-+
D
(cont'd)
BACK 20-79
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas (cont'd)
4. Remove the A-pillar trim (A) by hand to detach the 7. Ifthe side curtain airbag has not been deployed,
remaining clips, then pull the trim up from the check the A-pillar trim (A) and note the following:
dashboard (8).
• To prevent the side curtain airbags from
Fastener Locations deploying improperly and possibly causing
[>: Clip, 2 injury, inspect the A-pillar trim and replace it if it
~
has any of these types of damage:
- Any cracks, deformations, or stress-whitened
areas in the A-pillar trim
- Any cracks or stress-whitening in the clip and
pin seating surfaces (8)
- Damaged guide bracket (C)
• Replace the upper grommet with a new one
because it will be damaged during removal.
• Check if the clips (D) are damaged or stress-
whitened, and if replace, replace them with new
ones.
B D
5. Remove the grommet from the body.
NOTE: The upper grommet must be replaced with a

new one because the grommet is damaged during
removal.
6. Ifthe side curtain airbag has been deployed,

replace the A-pillar trim with a new one (see page
24-134).
20-80 BACK
8. Before installing the A-pillar trim (A), carefully 11. Reinstall the A-pillar trim (A).
remove the grommet (B) from the pin (C) on the , "
upper clip. -!J Insert the bottom of the trim into the
dashboard (B).
-2 Place the trim over the A-pillar (C), and fit its
upper clip (0), the other clips (E) and the pin (F)
into holes (G) in the A-pillar, then lightly push
the trim into place.
NOTE:
• Make sure that the side curtain airbag tether
(H) is below the clip.
• Make sure the side curtain airbag isn't tucked
down under the clips and ribs.
• Apply pressure to the aJ7eas ofthe trim on the
upper clip until these clip fittings are felt. If
9. Check the overlap between the headliner and you push too hard, the clip will be damaged,
A-pillar trim, and if necessary, adjust it (see page and it will not hold the trim properly.
24-136). • Make sure the upper clip portions of the trim
don't come off the body by tugging on the
10. Carefully reinstall the grommet (A) on the pin (B) trim.
and seat them on the A-pillar trim (C) as shown.
Fastener Locations
E 1>: Clip, 2
j[J F
12. Reinstall the front door opening seal.
BACK 20-81
Interior Trim
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (A).

* Available through the American Honda Tool and -1 Detach the lower clips by pulling the middle of
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 the trim back by hand.
-2. While releasing the upper tabs (B), pull the
B-Pillar Upper/Lower Trim upper portion of the trim back to release the
upper hooks (e).
SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the Fastener Locations
precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before I> : Clip, 2
NOTE:
jJ
• Front door sill trim (see page 20-76) .

• Rear door sill trim (see page 20-77)
• Front door opening seal, as needed (see step 4
on page 20-77)
• Rear door opening seal, as needed (see step 3 on
page 20-78)
2. Slide the front seat fully forward.
4. Remove the front seat belt lower anchor (see page

24-4).
20-82 BACK
5. Pull the bottom of the B-pillar upper trim (A) back 7. Pass the front seat belt (A) lower anchor out
by hand to detach the lower hooks (B). through a hole in the slider (B), then remove the
B-pillar upper trim (C).
Fastener Location
[>: Clip, 1
~
D
6. Detach the upper clip by pulling the top of the

B-pillar upper trim. Pull the trim down to release
the upper hooks (C) from the side curtain airbag
B-pillar bracket (D).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-83
Interio'r Trim
8. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and Slider engagement with shoulder anchor adjuster
note these items:
o Replace any damaged clips (A) with newones.

o Ifthe side curtain airbag has deployed, replace
the B-pillar upper and lower trim and all clips on
the trim with new ones (see page 24-134).
o To prevent the side curtain airbags from H
deploying improperly and possibly causing
injury, inspect the trim and replace it if it has any
of these types of damage:
- Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar
upper trim (B) and the upper hook (e), and any
stress-whitened areas in the upper part of the
trim
- Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar
lower trim (D), and any b~eakages in the part
(E) fitted with the B-pillaruppertrim
- Any cracks or stress-whitened areas in the clips
seating surface (F)
o Replace any damaged parts with newones.
o Make sure the top ofthe trim overlaps with the
headliner correctly (see page 24-136).
o Make sure the pin (G) on the front seat belt
shoulder anchor adjuster (H) and the hole (I) on
the back ofthe slider are engaged when
installing the B-pillar upper trim.
o Make sure the trim hook is installed into the side
curtain airbag B-pillar bracket securely.
o Push the clip and hooks into place securely.
o Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there
are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
Trim Inspection
20-84 BACK
Special Tools Required 1. Remove these items:
* Available through the American Honda Tool and • Rear door opening seal, as needed (see step 3 on
Equipment Program; call 888-424~6857 page 20-78)
• Tailgate weatherstrip, as needed (see page
Quarter Pillar Trim 20-199)
• Second row seat belt lower anchor (see step 3 on
SRS components are located in this area. Review the page 24-7)
SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the • Seat belt exit e-pillar cap (see step 4 on page
precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before 24-7)
doing repairs or service. • Seat belt exit D-pillar cap (see step 3 on page
24-13)
NOTE: • With power tailgate: Left tailgate side trim
• Follow the quarter pillar trim installation procedure (see page 20-96)
carefully; improper installation could cause the side
curtain airbag to deploy improperly and possibly 2. Remove the upper portion of the rear side trim
cause injury. panel, as needed (see page 20-92).
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to 3. With power tailgate: Use a flat-tip screwdriver (A)
avoid damage when removing components. to pry the clip (8) downward from the power
• Take care not to scratch the trim and panels. tailgate rod (e), then release the rod from the pivot
• The upper clip in the quarter pillar trim (A) consists of bracket (D) and push it in the quarter pillar trim (E).
a grommet (8) and a pin (e). The grommet expanded Do not remove the clip from the rod.
with the pin secures it to the body panel (D). The
projections (E) on the pin is broken during removal,
so the clip must be replaced with a new one when the
trim is reinstalled.
A
B
(cont'd)
BACK 20-85
Interior Trim
4. Hit the surface of the quarter piilar trim (A) with a 5. Hit the surface of the quarter pillar trim (A) with a
rubber mallet. The clip is located in the top of the C- rubber mallet. The clip is located in the seat belt
pillar near the "SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG" mark (B). exit D-pillar cap opening. Hitting the trim surface
Hitting the trim surface breaks the projections (C) breaks the projections (B) on the pin (C) and pushes
on the pin (D) and pushes it into the grommet (E) it into the grommet (D) and against the body (E).
and against the body (F).
NOTE: The clip must be replaced with a new one when the quarter pillar is reinstalled.
when the quarter pillar trim is reinstalled.
c
B
20-86 BACK
6. While pulling the upper portion of the rear side trim 7. While pulling the lower portion of the quarter pillar
panel (A) back, detach the clips, then release the trim (A) away from the body, hit the surface of the
lower portion ofthe quarter pillar trim (B) away quarter pillar trim (A) with a rubber mallet. The clip
from the body. is located in the rear of the hollow (B) in the trim.
Hitting the trim surface breaks the projections (e)
NOTE: The quarter pillar is still fastened with two on the pin (0) and pushes it into the grommet (E)
upper clips located in the middle of it. and against the body (F).
Fastener Locations NOTE: The clip must be replaced with a new one
C>: Clip, 5 when the quarter pillar trim is reinstalled.
JiJ
8. Slide the upper clip portion (A) of the quarter pillar

trim (B) up at a 45 0 angle to remove the trim from
the clip. The clip can be removed once the trim is
clear.
(cont'd)
BACK
20-87
Interior Trim
9. Remove the quarter pillar trim (A). If equipped with 11. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, remove
the premium sound.system, disconnect the O-pillar the quarter pillar trim and all the clips on the trim
speaker connector (8). If equipped with power with new ones (see page 24-134).
tailgate, pull the power tailgate rod (C) out of the
slit (0) in the quarter pillar trim. 12. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, remove
the upper clips (A) from the removed quarter pillar
trim (8) and discard them. Then checkthe trim and
note the following:
• To prevent the side curtain airbags from

injury, inspect the quarter pillar trim and replace
it if it has any of these types of damage:
- Any cracks,deformations, or stress-whitened
areas in the quarter pillar trim
- Any cracks or stress-whitened areas in the clip
seating surfaces (C, 0)
• If any of the lower clips (E) are damaged or
stress-whitened, replace them.
• Replace the upper clips (A) with new ones.
D
10. Hit the remaining upper clip (A) with a rubber

mallet. Hitting the clip breaks the projections (8) on
the pin (C) and pushes it into the grommet (0) and
against the body (E).

when the quarter pillar trim is reinstalled.
20-88 BACK
13. Before installing the quarter pillar trim (A), whether 16. Reinstall the quarter pillar trim (A).
replaced or reinstalled, temporarily remove the
new clips (B). -1 If equipped with the premium sound system,
reconnect the O-pillar speaker connector (B).
-2 If equipped with power tailgate, pass the
power tailgate rod (C) through the slit (0) in the
quarter pillar trim.
-a Place the trim over the C-pillar/O-pillar (El, and
fit its upper clip (F), and all ofthe other clips (G)
into holes (H) in the body, then lightly push the
trim into place.
NOTE:
• Make sure the side curtain airbag isn't tucked
down ul"!der the clips and ribs.
• Apply pressure to the areas of the trim on the
upper clips until these clip fittings are felt. If
you push too hard, the clip will be damaged,
and it will not hold the trim properly.
• Make sure the upper clip portions of the trim
14. Check the overlap between the headliner and don't come off the body by tugging on the
quarter pillar trim, and if necessary, adjust it trim.
(see page 24-136).
Fastener Locations
15. Carefully reinstall the clips (A) to the quarter pillar G 1>: Clip,S
~H
trim (B). Make sure that the grommet (C) is nearest
to the top of the pin (0) as shown.
(cont'd)
BACK
20-89
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Trim Removal/Installation - Cargo

Areas (cont'd) Area
17. With power tailgate: Set the clip (A) .on the original Special Tools Required
position, then reattach the power tailgate rod (8) on KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
the pivot bracket (C) by pushing the rod onto the * Available through the American Honda Tool and
pivot. Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE:
1. Remove the cargo floor lid (A).
18. Reinstall all ofthe removed parts.
2. Detach the hooks (A) from the rear side trim panel
(8), and pull the rear trim panel (C) up by hand to
detach the clips (D, E), then remove it.
Fastener Locations
D [>: Clip, 3 E [>: Clip, 1
(Gray)
V ~'I C A
20~90
BACK
3. Turn the lock knobs (A) 90 0, then remove the tool 5. Remove the cargo rear trim panel (A).
set holder (8).

note these items:
A
4. Remove the screws, then remove the cargo lid replace them with new ones.
hinges (A). • Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
~I A
BACK 20-91
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Side Area
Special Tools Required 3. Fold the third row seat-back forward.

* Available through the American Honda Tool and 4. Pry out the cover (A) and remove the bolt (8), then
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 remove the tie down hook (C) (two places).
Rear Side Trim Panel Removal/Installation
NOTE:
• Rear door sill trim (see page 20-77)

.• Rear door opening seal, as needed (see step 3 on
page 20-78)
• Tailgate weatherstrip, as needed (see page
20-199)
• Cargo floor lid (see step 1 on page 20-90)
A
• Reanrim panel (see step 2 on page 20-90) B
• Cargo lid hinges (see step 4 on page 20-91) 6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
• Cargo rear trim panel (see step 5 on page 20-91) 11.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
2. Raise the third row seat up, and remove the clips 5. Right side: Pry out the lid (A) and remove the screw
from under the third row seat. in the pull pocket.
Fastener Locations Fastener Location

~ : Screw, 1
~:O)IO)j) I
20-92 BACK
6. Open the cargo hook (A). Pry out the cover (B) and 8. Pull out the rear upper edge of the rear side trim
remove the screw. panel (A) by hand to release the tabs (B) and hooks
(e) from the quarter pillar trim (0).
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
~WO> I
/; L=
~(\~.
B C
7. Pull out the front upper edge of the rear side trim
panel (A) by hand to release the tabs (B) and hooks 9. Pull the rear side trim panel (A) back by hand to
(e) from the quarter pillar trim (0). detach the clips (B, e).
Left side
Fastener Locations
B [>: Clip, 7 C [>: Clip, 2
(Gray)
D • ., I
A
(cont'd)
BACK 20-93
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Side Area (cont'd)
Right side 11. If necessary, remove the bolt (A), and on the left
side, remove the active damper unit mounting
Fastener Locations
bolts (8), then remove the rear side trim panel
B 1>: Clip, 6 support bracket (C).
(Gray)
~
Fastener Locations
A ~: Bolt, 1 B~:Bolt
Left side, 2
10. Pull the rear side trim panel (A) up, then remove it.
On the left side, disconnect the rear accessory
socket connector (C).
C·
note these items:
• Make sure the accessory socket connector is

plugged in properly.
• Push the clips, hooks and tabs into place securely.
20-94 BACK
Armrest Replacement Speaker Grille Replacement
1. Remove the rear side trim panel. 1. Remove the rear side trim panel.
2. Remove the screws and release the hooks (A), then 2. Remove the screws and release the hooks (A), then
remove the armrest (8). remove the speaker grille (8).
Left side Fastener Locations

~ : Screw, 8
~I
Fastener Locations
~:Screw,9
~I A
\:';.
A
3. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal.
Right side
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 9
~I
A
3. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal.
BACK
20-95
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Tailgate Area
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the left tailgate side trim (A) and the right
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * tailgate side trim (8).
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 -1 Pull out the top of the side trim to detach the
clips.
NOTE: -2 Detach the tabs (C) and hooks (D) from the
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. tailgate lower trim panel (E).
Fastener Locations
avoid damage when removing components. 1>: Clip, 4 E
~J
D
1. Remove the tailgate upper trim panel (A).
-1 Detach the hooks (8) and tabs (C) from the left
tailgate side trim (D) and right tailgate side trim
(E).
C
-2 Pull the tailgate upper trim panel back by hand
to detach the clips, then remove it.
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 4
B
£J
C D
C
A B
C
B
20-96 BACK
3. Remove the tailgate pull pocket (A). 4. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (A).
-1 Pry the hooks (8) with a trim tool. -1 Detach the clips (8) beside the tailgate latch.
-2 Carefully pull the edge of the tailgate lower -2 Pull down the panel to detach all of the clips (C).
trim panel (C) just beside the tailgate pull
Fastener Locations
pocket by hand, and push out the inside hooks
(D). 8, C 1>: Clip, 16 D 1>: Clip, 1
(Gray)
-a
;i;1
Pull down the upper edge of the pocket and
~
release the lower tabs (E).
-4 With power tailgate: Disconnect the power
tailgate close switch connector (F).
5. Install the trim and panel in the reverse order of

o Make sure the power tailgate close switch

connector is plugged in properly.
BACK
20-97
Interior Trim
Sunvisor Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the sunvisor (A).

* Available through the American Honda Tool and -1 Removethe screws.
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 -2 Remove the sunvisor from the body and holder
(B).
NOTE: -a Disconnect the vanity mirror light connector
• Take care not to scratch the headliner. (e).
• Be careful not to damage the dashboard and other
interior trim. Fastener Locations
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to ~ : Screw, 2
~~
avoid damage when removing components. B
~
• When using a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
protective tape to prevent damage.
1. Using a trim tool, release the tabs (A) of the

sunvisor cap (B) from the bracket (e). ----
5xO.8mm
5 N·m 10.5 kgf·m, 4 Ibf·ft)
3. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, push the hook (A), and

turn the holder (B) 90 0, then pull it out.
A ------
BACK
20-98
Grab Handle Removal/Installation
4. Ifthe side curtain airbag has deployed (see page Special Tools Required
24-134), replace the sunvisor with a new one. KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
5. Ifthe side curtain airbag has not deployed, to Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
preventthe side curtain airbags from deploying
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool
removed sunvisor and replace it if it has any cracks set to avoid damage when removing components.
or damage:
1. Lower the grab handle (A), then pull out the caps
• Any cracks in the sunvisor stay base (A) (8) by prying up at the notches (e) with a small flat-
• Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft (8) tip screwdriver.
• Any cracks in the sunvisor base (e)
• Any cracks in the vanity mirror base (D) c
6. Install the sunvisor in the reverse order of removal,

and make sure the vanity mirror light connector is
B
2. While pinching the clips (A), release the hooks (8),

then remove the grab handle (e).
(cont'd)
BACK
20-99
Interior Trim
Grab Handle Removal/Installation (cont'd)
3. Using a pair of pliers, remove all of the clips (A) by 6. Install the clips (A) to the grab handle (8), then
pinching its hooks. install the caps (C) fully into the clips.
A
c
4. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
grab handle with a new one (see page 24-134). 7. Position the grab handle (A) on the bracket (8), and
push on the grab handle until the clips (C) snap into
5. lfthe side curtain airbag has not deployed, to place securely.
prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect
removed pieces and replace them if they have any
of these types of damage:
• Any cracks or damage in the grab handle (A) .

• Any cracks or stress-whitening in the caps (8).
BACK
20-100
Headliner Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the screws, then remove the roof console
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * bezel (A).
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 Fastener Locations
~:Screw,4
B
NOTE:
• Take care not to bend and scratch the headliner.
interior trim.

• Front seat belt upper anchor, both sides (see step
7 on page 24-4)
• B-pillar lower trim, both sides (see page 20-82)
• B-pillar upper trim, both sides (see page 20-82) 3. If necessary, remove the remaining roof console
• Quarter pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-85) clips (A) from the body and the moonroofframe (8).
• Sunvisors, both sides (see page 20-98)
• Grab handles, four places (see page 20-99)
• Rear individual map light (see page 22-240)
• Rear ceiling light (see page 22-241)
• Center second row seat belt cover (see step 1 on
page 24-10)
• RES display cover (for some models) (see page
23-215)
• Roof console (see page 22-239)
(cont'd)
BACK 20-101
Interior Trim
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
4. Disconnect the roof wire harness connector (A). 6. With rear entertainment system: Disconnect the
rear entertainment wire harness connectors (A)
from the rear controller and display (B).
5. With rear entertainment system: Disconnect the 7. Lower the headliner (A). The vehicle with rear
rear entertainment system wire harness connectors entertainment system is shown; and without rear
(A) and detach the harness clips (B) from the left A- entertainment system is similar.
pillar (C).
-1 Remove the front door opening seals (B), rear
door opening seals (C), and tailgate
weatherstrip (D) from each roof portion.
-2 With the help of an assistant, detach the rear
clips by pulling the rear portion ofthe
headliner down.
-a With the help of an assistant, release the
fasteners (E) by lowering the headliner~
Fastener LQcations
I> : Clip, 6
AJ E
20-102 BACK
8. With the help of an assistant, pull the headliner (A) 10. If necessary, remove the cushion tapes (A)
along with the roof wire harness and rear fastening the roof wire harness (B) to the headliner
entertainment system wire harness (for some (C), detach the harness clips (D) and release the
models) out through the tailgate opening. Do not harness from the harness protector base (E), then
bend the liner. Bending the liner will crease and remove them from the headliner.
damage it.
Fastener Locations
A I> : Cushion tape, 8 D 1>: Clip, 5
~ ~
9. If necessary, detach the hooks, then remove the

roof side pad (A). C
Fastener Locations
11. With rear entertainment system: If necessary,
1>: Hook, 2 remove the cushion tape (A) fastening the rear
dbi entertainment system wire harness (B) to the

headliner (C), detach the harness clips (D) and
release the harness from the harness protector
base (E), then remove them from the headliner.
Fastener Locations
A I> : Cushion tape, 5 D 1>: Clip, 2
~ ~
A
B E
(cont'd)
BACK 20-103
Interior Trim
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
12. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal, Headliner

o Ifthe side curtain airbag has deployed, replace

the headliner and removed trim pieces with new "'@ ~'
ones (see page 24-134).
o To prevent the side curtain airbags from
injury, inspect removed pieces and replace them
if they have any of these types of damage:
- Any crease or tears in the headliner (A)
- Any cracks or breakages in the grab handle (8)
- Any damages around the grab handle holes (C)
or sunvisor holes in the headliner
- Any cracks in the sunvisor stay base (D)
- Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft
(E)
- Any cracks in the sunvisor base (F) c
j§)
- Any cracks or breakages in the vanity mirror
base (G) Grab handle
- Any fasteners (H) and clip bases (I) which have
come off the headliner
o When installing the grab handle, push on the B
handle against the bracket (J) until the clips (K)
snap into place securely.
o Check if the clips are damaged or stress-
whitened, and if necessary, replace them with
new ones.
o Replace the removed cushion tape with new
ones.
o Check that both sides of the headliner are
securely attached to the trim.
o Make sure the headliner overlaps the trim pieces
correctly (see page 24-136).
o When reinstalling the headliner through the
tailgate opening, be careful not to fold or bend it. Sunvisor
Also, be careful not to scratch the body.
20-104 BACK
Carpet Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the nut (A). Using a 6 mm socket wrench,
KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * release the clip (B), then remove the footrest (e).
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 Fastener Locations
A • : Nut, 1 B I> : Crip, 1
@ lirl
NOTE:
• Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet.
interior trim pieces.
1. Remove these items: 6x1.0mm

6N·m /
(O.6kgf·m,
• Front seats, both sides (see page 20-141) 4lbf·ft) C
• Second row seats, both sides (see page 20-156)
• Third row seats, both sides (see page 20-179)
• Front door sill trim, both sides (see page 20-76) 4. Remove the clips fastening both rear side trim
• Rear door sill trim, both sides (see page 20-77) panels (A). Pull out the edge of the carpet (B) from
• Kick panels, both sides (see step 3 on page 20-76) under the panels.
• Passenger's dashboard undercover (see page Fastener Locations
20-127)
• Steering joint cover (see page 17-25)
2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the footrest

plate (B).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-105
Interior Trim
Carpet Replacement (cont'd)
5. Remove the clips fastening the edge of the carpet 7. Release the fastener (A) on the front edge of the
(A) from both front door sill areas and both rear carpet (B), then pull back the carpet from under the
door sill areas. Pull out the edge of the carpet from dashboard.
under the B-pillar lower trim (B).
B
Fastener Locations
8. Remove the carpet.
6. Pull out the middle edge of the carpet (A) from 9. Install the carpet in the reverse order of removal,
under the center console (B), driver's/passenger's and note these items:
console trim (C), and console rear trim (D).
• Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the
carpet.
• Make sure the seat harnesses (A) are routed
correctly.·
• Slip the slits (B) in the carpet over the rear heater
duct (C) and the third row seat heater duct (D).
• Slip the carpet under the center console, both B-
pillar lower trim, and both rear side trim panels
properly.
B
20-106 BACK
Consoles
Center Console Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 5. :Detach the clips (A, B) by pulling the driver's center
KTC trim tool set SQJATP2014 * console trim (e), then remove it.
Fastener Locations
A [>: Clip,S
~
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the front seat, dashboard,
and related parts.

audio and the navigation system (if equipped).
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and

wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work. 6. Detach the clips (A, B) by pulling the passenger's
center console trim (e) out, and pull it forward to
3. Remove these items: release.its pin (D) from the center console, then
remove it.
• Driver's inner dashboard trim (see page 20-118)
Fastener Locations .
• Passenger's dashboard trim (see page 20-123)
• Console rear trim (see page 20-110) A [> : Clip, 5 B [> : Clip, 2
~ ~
• Front seats, both sides (see page 20-141)
4. Detach the clips by pulling the console lower trim

(A) back by hand, then remove it.
Fastener Locations
[> : Clip, 2
(cont'd)
BACK 20-107
Consoles
Center Console Removal/Installation (cont'dl
7. From driver's side, disconnect the parking pin shift 9. Disconnect the HandsFreeLink control unit
connector (A) and shift lock solenoid connector (8). connector (A), and detach the harness clips (8).
Remove the rear blower motor relay mounting bolt
(e), second row seat heater relay mounting bolt (D)
(for some models), and ground bolt (E).
Fastener Locations
• •
c ~: Bolt, 1 o ~: Bolt, 1 E ~: Bolt, 1
~
A
10. Open the beverage holder lid. Pull the beverage

holder inner case (A) up by hand to detach the clips,
then remove it.
Fastener Locations
6x1.0mm I> : Clip, 2
9.8N·m
IJ
6x 1.0mm
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
8. From passenger's side, disconnect the console

subharness connector (A).
11. Shift the shift lever into the R position, then

disconnect the AfT shift cable (see step 5 on page
14-309).
20-108 BACK
12. Pull back the carpet (A) as needed, then remove the 14. Install the console in the reverse order of removal,
bolts (B, C) securing the center console (D). and note these items:
Fastener Locations • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,

B ~ : Bolt, 2 C ~ : Bolt, 2 replace them with new ones .
• Push the clips intoplace securely.
• (©)m • Before tightening the bolts, make sure the
dashboard wire harness is not pinched.
properly.
• Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
• Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and
• Set the clock.
• Check for any DTCs that may have been set
C during repairs, and clear them.
• If necessary, adjust the shift cable (see page
14-311).
ax 1.25 mm (see page 17-28).
22N·m
6x 1.0mm
9.a N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
13. Pull back the carpet (A) as needed. Slide the center
console (B) backward to detach the clips and pins
(C) from the dashboard, lift the console up, then
carefully remove it.
Fastener Locations
~~ I c
BACK 20-109
Consoles
Center Console Rear Trim Removall Center Console Rear Trim

Installation DisassemblyIReassembly

KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
* Available through the American Honda Tool and * Available through the American Honda Tool and
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE: NOTE:
• Use the appropriate tool from the. KTe trim tool set to • Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to
avoid damage when removing components; avoid damage when removing components.
• Take care not to scratc.h the center. console and • Take care not to scratch the trim .
related parts.
1. Remove the center console rear trim (see page
1. Starting at the top, gently pull out the console rear 20-110).
trim (A) to detach the clips (8), then pull out the trim
to detach the remaining clips (e), and to release the 2. Remove the screws, then remove the center
lower tabs (D), disconnect the connectors, then console duct (A).
remove the trim:
• Rear heater-Ale passenger's control panel-unit

connector (E)
• With second row seat heater: Second row seat
heater switch connectors (F)
• Without rear entertainment system: Accessory
power socket connector (G)
• With rear entertainment system: Auxiliary jack
connector (G)
Fastener Locations
B, C [> : Clip, 7
~I
F
E
3. Remove the screws and release the hooks (A), then
remove the HVAe trim (8).
o Fastener Locations
~:Screw.2

note these items:
• Make sure all connectors are plugged in properly.

20-110 BACK
4. Remove the screws, then remove the rear upper lid 6. Remove the screws, then remove the rear console
(Al~ vent (A) from the rear console venttrim (B).
Fastener Locations Fastener Locations

~:Screw,2 ~:Screw,3
~XO> I ~m» I"
5. Remove the screws (AI and detach the clips (B, el, 7. Without rear entertainment system: Remove the
then remove the rear console vent/vent trim (0). screws and release the hooks (A), then remove the
accessory power socket panel (B).
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 2 B [> : Clip, 4 C [>:Clip, 1 Fastener Locations
~I
~:Screw,4
Om> ~ fPn~ I
8. Reassemble the rear trim in the reverse order of

disassembly, and note these items:

BACK 20-111
Consoles
Console Armrest Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the screws, then remove the armrest (A)
KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * from the space between the console frame (B) and
* Available through the American Honda Tool and the console latch trim (e).
Fastener Locations
NOTE: ~:Screw,3
• Take care not to scratch the console.
Om""'1 A
1. Remove the center console rear trim (see page

20-110).
~
2. Starting at the rear, pull out the wood panel (A) to
detach the clips, then ,remove it.
Fastener Locations
4. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal,


. replace them' with new ones .
20-112 BACK
Center Console Latch Panel Center Console Panel Removal/
Removal/Installation Installation

KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
NOTE: NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the console. • Take care not to scratch the console .
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to • Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to
avoid damage when removing components. avoid damage when removing components.
1. Remove the center console armrests from both 1. Remove the center console (see page 20-107).
sides (see page 20-112).
2. Remove the center console latch panel (see page
2. Remove the screws (A), and starting at the rear, 20-113).
pull out the center console latch panel (B) to detach
the clips (e), then remove it . 3. Pull the center console panel (A) out to detach the
clips (B, e). Disconnect the accessory power socket
Fastener Locations connector (D) and seat heater switch connectors (E),
A ~: Screw, 2 C 1>: Clip, 8 then remove the panel.
T I B
Fastener Locations
B [> : Clip, 2 C 1>: Clip, 7
~C~/. T 'VI
A
3. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal,


(cont'd)
BACK 20-113
Consol'es
Center Console Panel Removall Center Console Beverage Holder
Installation (cont'd) Replacement
4. If necessary, remove the screws, then remove the Special Tools Required
console pocket (A) from the console panel (8). KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
Fastener Locations Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE:
o Take care not to scratch the console.
o Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim toll set to
2. Remove the console panel (see page 20-113).
3. Remove the console beverage holder (A) and

passenger's console panel (8) as an assembly:
-1 Detach the console subharness connector (e).

-2 Remove the screws (D) securing the console
5. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal, beverage holder to the AfT gear position
and note these items: indicator panel (E) and console frame (F).
-3 Remove the screws (G) securing the
o Make sure each connector is plugged in properly. passenger's console panel to the console
o If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, frame.
replace them with new ones. -4 Pull out the passenger's console panel to
o Push the clips into place securely. detach the clips (H).
Fastener Locations
D,G~ : Screw, 4 HI>: Clip, 2
~I
20-114 BACK
Center Console Box Replacement
4. Remove the screws, then remove the center Special Tools Required
console beverage holder (A). KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014
* AVailable through the American Honda Tool and
Fastener Locations Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
~:Screw,2
B NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the center console •
2. Remove the beverage holder and passenger's

console panel as an assembly (see page 20-114).
3. Remove the screw (A), and detach the clips (B, C)

by pulling the driver's console panel (D) back, then
remove if from the console frame (E).
5. If necessary, separate both rails (A) from the outer Fastener Locations
case (B), then remove the shutter. A ~: Screw, 1 B 1>: Clip, 2 C 1>: Clip, 2
Fastener Locations
~:Screw,8
Om> ~ ~
B
6. Install the beverage holder in the reverse order of


(cont'd)
BACK 20-115
Consoles
Center Console Box Replacement Center Console Side Pocket
4. Remove the Hands Free Link control unit (see page 1. Remove the passenger's center console trim (see
23-273). step 6 on page 20-107).
5. Remove the screws, and if equipped with rear 2. Remove the screws, then remove the console side
entertainment system, disconnect the AC power pocket (A) from the passenger's center console trim
outlet connector (A), then remove the center (B).
console box (B) from the console frame (C).
Fastener Locations
~~41
3. Separate the box (A) and rail (B), then slide the
6. Install the box in the reverse order of removal, and console side lid (C) out.
note these items:
Fastener Locations
• If equipped, make sure the AC power outlet ~ : Screw, 5
~
4. Install the pocket in the reverse order of removal.
20-116 BACK
Dashboard
Driver's Outer Dashboard Trim Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Gently pull out the driver's outer dashboard trim
KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * (A) to detach the clips.
Equipment Prowam; call 888-424-6857 Fastener Locations
NOTE:
avoid damage when removing components. D
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related
parts.
1. Open the front door, and remove the driver's

dashboard side cover (A).
~ Pull out the front door opening seal (8), as B

needed.
-2 Gently pull out the front edge of the side cover,
and pry the rear edge with a trim tool to
release the hooks (e), then remove the side
cover.
3. Disconnect the power mirror switch connector (8),

VSA OFF switch connector (e), and if equipped,
headlight washer switch connector (D), then
remove the panel.

note these items:
• Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.

BACK 20-117
Dashboard
Driver's Inner Dashboard Trim Instrument Fascia Removall


KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
NOTE: NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related • Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related
parts. parts .
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
1. Remove the driver's inner dashboard trim (A). 1. Tiltthe steering column down, and telescope it out.
-1 Gently pull out along the edge beside the audio 2. Remove these items.
unit by hand to release the lower hooks (8) and
the clip (C). • Driver's outer dashboard trim (see page 20-117)
-2 Detach the upper clips (D). • D~iver's inner dashboard trim (see page 20-118)
Fastener Locations 3. Remove the instrument fascia (A).
-1 Gently pull out the bottom to release the clips

-2 Disconnect the select/reset switch connector
(8).
Fastener Locations
2. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and 4. Install the instrument fascia in the reverse order of
note these items: removal, and note these items:
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
replace them with newones. replace them with new ones.
• Position the hooks first on installation, then move • Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
the clips into place. • Push the clips into place securely.
20-118 BACK
Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,
KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * and note these items:
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 . o Make sure the humidity/in-cartemperature
sensor connector is plugged in properly, and
NOTE: the air hose is connected properly.
o Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related o If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
parts. replace them with newones.
o Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to o Push the clips into place securely.
1. Adjust the steering column upward.
o Driver's outer dashboard trim (see page 20-117)

o Driver's inner dashboard trim (see page 20-118)
3. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (A).
-1 Remove the screw (8).

-2 Pull out the bottom of the driver's dashboard
lower cover to release the clips (e).
-a Disconnect the humidity/in-car temperature
sensor connector (D) and the air hose (E).
Fastener Locations
B ~ : Screw, 1 C I> : Clip. 9
~ ~I E D
BACK 20-119
Dashboard
Driver's Dashboard Undercover Center Upper Panel Removall


KTetrimtool setSOJATP2014 * KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
NOTE: NOTE:
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to • Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related
avoid damage when removing components. parts .
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related • Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to
parts. avoid damage when removing components.
1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover (A). 1. Hold the middle of the center upper panel (A), and
pull the panel towards the rear of the vehicle to
-1 Turn the lock knob (8) 90 0. detach all of the clips from the dashboard, to
-2 Gently pull down the rear edge to detach the release the hooks (8) and pins (e) from the
clip. dashboard, and to release the hooks (D) from the
-a Disconnect the footwelllight connector (e) and center panel (E) and/or the display unit (F) (with
ambient light connector (D), then detach the navigation system).
harness clip (E).
-4 Pull the undercover away to release the pins (F) Without navigation system
from the holders (G).
Fastener Locations
Fastener Location
1>: Clip, 1
G
With navigation system
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 4
~
2. Install the undercover in the reverse order of
• Replace the clip if it's damaged. C

• Push the clip into place securely.
• Make sure that each connector is plugged in G C
properly.
• Make sure the pins on ofthe cover are securely 2. Disconnect the center speaker connector (G), then
seated. remove the center upper panel.
20-120 BACK
Dashboard Center Panel Removal!
Installation
3. Install the cover in the reverse order removal, and Special Tools Required
note these items: KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
o Make sure the center speaker connector is Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
o If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, NOTE:
replace them with new ones. o Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related
o Push the clips and hooks into place securely. parts.

o Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
1. Remove the center upper panel (see page 20-120).
2. Pull out the dashboard center panel (A) to detach

the clips (B, C, D) and to release the hooks (E)
(without navigation system), then remove the panel.
Without navigation system
Fastener Locations
B~C~ D~~21
(cont'd)
BACK 20-121
Dashboard
Dashboard Center Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
With navigation system 6. If necessary, remove the screws (A) securing the
center tray (B), then separate it from the dashboard
Fastener Locations center panel (C) by detaching the clips (0).
B I> : Clip, 4 C I> : Clip, 2
Fastener Locations
A ~: Screw, 3 D 1>: Clip, 2
~ ~ I
~~~--
E c
7. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal,

3. Oisconnectthe hazard warning switch/passenger's and note these items:
airbag off indicator connector (F), and on the
models without navigation system, center • If the removed tray mat is to be reinstalled,
information display connector (G). remove all of old adhesive tape from the mat,
and clean the back of the mat with isopropyl
Without navigation system alcohol where the three pieces of new adhesive
tape are to be attached. Attach the tray mat to the
4. Remove the center information display from the center tray with commercially available adhesive
dashboard center panel (see page 22-343). tape.
• Make sure all connectors are plugged in properly.
5. If necessary, peel three pieces of adhesive tape • Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
(A, B), then remove the tray mat (C), from the replace them with new ones.
center tray (0). • Make sure the tabs located between the bottom
clips line up with the slots in the dashboard
Adhesive tape A: Thickness 0.5 mm (0.02 in.) correctly.
Width 15 mm (0.59 in.) • Push the clips into place securely.
Length 50 mm (2.0 in.)
Adhesive tape B: Thickness 0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
Length 220 mm (8.66 in.)
20-122 BACK
Center Pocket Removal/Installation Passenger's Dashboard Trim
Removal/Installation
1. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-90).
2. Remove the bolts (A) and screws (8), then remove Special Tools Required
the radio brackets (e) from both sides of the audio KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
unit (0). * Available through the American Honda Tool and
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Bolt, 8 B ~: Screw, 2 NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related
parts .
1. Open the front door, and remove the passenger's

dashboard side cover (A) .
...!J Pull out the front door opening seal (8), as

needed.
-2 Gently pull out the front edge of the side cover,
and pry the rear edge with a trim tool to
release the hooks (e), then remove the side
cover.
3. Remove the screws, then remove the center pocket

(A).
Fastener Locations
~;:; I
2. Open the glove box.
4. Install the center pocket in the reverse order of

removal.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-123
Dashboard
Passenger's Dashboard Trim Glove Box Lock Cylinder

Removal/Installation (cont'd) Replacement
3. Remove the passenger's dashboard trim (A). NOTE: Take care not to scratch the glove .box.
-1 Remove the screw (B). 1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-125).
-2 Gently pull out the lower edge and the outside
edge of the trim by hand to detach all of the 2. Lift the glove box handle (A), and use a hook-
clips (e) and hooks (D). shaped tool to pull one end of the retainer (B) out of
its slot.
Fastener Locations
B ~ : Screw, 1 C [> : Clip, 10 NOTE: Do not remove the retainer entirely. Leave
~ ~i
one end ofthe retainer in its original position when
removing the lock cylinder.
B __-,=,,~,

B
note these items:
• Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, 3. Remove the glove box lock cylinder (A).
~I
• Position the hooks first on installation, then move
the clips into place.
20-124 BACK
Glove Box Removal/Installation
4. Reinstall the end of the retainer (A) in its slot, then SRS components are located in this area. Review the
reinstall the lock cylinder (8). Push the cylinder into SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the
place securely until the retainer snaps into place. precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its

related parts.
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover

(see page 20-127).
2. Open the glove box.
3. Remove the cap (A), then disconnect the glove box

damper (8) from the pivot (C) on the glove box.
4. Close the glove box.
5. Remove the bolts.

Fastener Locations
~: Bolt, 2
5xO.8mm
5N·m
(cont'd)
BACK 20-125
Dashboard
Glove Box Removal/Installation Glove Box Striker Replacement

(cont'd)
6. While holding the glove box (A), release the glove precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
box stop (8) on each side from the dashboard by doing repairs or service.
pushing them in, then remove the glove box.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its
related parts.
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-125).
2. Remove the bolts (A) and screws (8), disconnect

the glove box light bulb socket (e), and detach the
harness clip (0), then remove the glove box striker
(E).
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Bolt, 1 B ~ : Screw, 3
7. Remove the bolt, then remove the glove box

damper (A).
Fastener Location
~: Bolt, 1
.1 5xO.8mm
5N·m
10.5 kgf.m, 4 Ibf·ft)
A~
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf·m, 7.2 Ibf·ft)
3. Install the striker in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure the glove box light bulb socket is
connected securely.
8. Install the glove box in the reverse order of

removal.
20-126 BACK
Passenger's Dashboard Undercover Dashboard Side Vent Removal/
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its Special Tools Required
related parts. KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
1. Remove the Passenger's dashboard undercover (A). Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
-1 Gently pull down the rear edge to detach the NOTE:

clips. • Take care not to scrutch the dashboard and its related
-2 Disconnect the footwell light connector (8) and parts.
ambient light connector (e). • Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to
-3 Pull the undercover away to release the pins avoid damage when removing components.
(D) from the holders (E). • The driver's side vent is shown; the passenger's side
vent is similar.
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip. 3 1. Remove these items:
AJ B E • A-pillar trim (see page 20-78).

• Driver's side: Driver's dashboard outer trim
(see page 20-117).
• Passenger's side: Passenger's dashboard trim
(see page 20-123).
2. Remove the screws (A).
Fastener Locations
A.-:Screw.3

• Replace any damaged clips.

• Make sure that each connector is plugged in
properly.
• Make sure the pins of the undercover are
installed securely to the holders.
3. Pull out the side vent (8) to release the clip (e), then
remove the vent.
4. Install the side vent in the reverse order of removal,

and push the clip into place securely.
BACK 20-127
Dashboard
Side Defogger Vent Trim Removall Front Defogger Vent Trim Removall
Installation Installation

KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
NOTE: NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related • Take care not to scratch the dashboard and its related
parts. parts.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
• The driver's side deffoger vent trim is shown; the
passenger's side deffoger vent trim is similar. 1. Remove the sunlight sensor (see page 21-106).
1. Insert the trim tool into a gap between the side 2. Insert the trim tool into a gap between the front
defogger vent trim (A) and the dashboard (8), and defogger vent trim (A) and the dashboard (8), and
release the hooks (C). release all of the hooks (C).
2. Install the side defogger vent trim in the reverse 3. Install the front defogger vent trim in the reverse
order of removal, and push the hooks into place order of removal, and push the hooks into place
securely. securely.
20-128 BACK
Column Cover Removal/Installation
NOTE: 5. With the right side of the upper column cover (A)
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. slightly apart from the lower column cover (8),
• Take care not to scratch the column covers. releas\:l the tab (C) located on the left side of the
• Do not pry the cover surface with any tools. upper column cover with your finger.
F
1. Adjust the steering column to full tilt down position
and to the full telescopic pull position.
2. Remove the cover (A).
6. Remove the cover by lightly pulling it up by

3. Release the tab (A) locating on the right side of the releasing the left side tab (D) and the front tabs (E)
upper column cover (8) with your finger. ofthe upper column cover.
INOTICEI
Carefully release the tabs, and note the
hooks (F) may break when the upper column
cover is pulled up too hard.
4. Release the left tab (C) of the upper column cover

while pushing the lower column cover (D) from the
right side.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-129
Dashboard
Column Cover Removal/Installation Dashboard Replacement

(cont'd)
7. Remove the three screws (A, B) and disconnect the * Available through the American Honda Tool and
tilt/telescopic switch connector (C), then remove Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
the lower column cover (D).
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 1 B ~: Screw, 2 precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
~ ~~
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard, body, and
other related parts.
• Take care not to bend the brackets.
c 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the

wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
3. Remove these items from the dashboard:
• Driver's outer dashboard trim (see page 20-117)

• Driver's dashboard lower cover (see page
20-119)
• Passenger's dashboard undercover (see page
8. Install the upper and lower column cover in the 20-127)
reverse order of removal, and note these items: • Glove box and damper (see page 20-125)
• Glove box striker (see page 20-126)
• Make sure the tilt/telescopic switch connector is • Center upper panel (see page 20-120)
plugged in properly . • Center panel (see page 20-121)
. • Push the hooks into place securely. • Center console (see page 20-107)
• Tweeter, both sides (see page 23-92)
• Instrumentfascia (see page 20-118)
• Gauge control module (see page 22-337)
-Sunlight sensor (see page 21-106)
• Display unit, with navigation system (see page
23-180)
• GPS antenna (see page 23-180)
4. Adjust the steering column to full tilt down position

and to the full telescopic pull position.
20-130 BACK
5. Remove the screws (A, B), then remove the driver's 7. From the front of the dashboard, detach the
dashboard lower bracket (C) and the dashboard harness clip (A).
lower bracket (D).
A
Fastener Locations
LI
\ 8. Detach the connectors (A) from the dashboard duct

in the center upper panel opening. Tie a string to
the sunlight sensor harness connector (B), then pull
6. Remove the parking brake lever mounting bolts the connector out through the hole (C) in the
(A, B), then lower the lever. dashboard.
Fastener Locations c
A ~ : Bolt, 2 B ~ : Bolt, 1
@mmn ~ I 8x 1.25 mm
21 N·m
12.1 kgf·m, 15lbf·ttl
5xO.8mm
6N·m
10.6 kgf.m, 4 Ibf·ttl
(cont'd)
BACK 20-131
Dashboard
Dashboard Replacement (cont'd)
9. Disconnect and detach the passenger's airbag 11. Wrap the steeri ng wheel with a shop towel to
connector (A) from the steering hanger beam, and prevent damage.
detach the dashboard wire harness clip (8).
Remove the passenger's airbag mounting bolts. 12. Lift up on the dashboard (A). With an assistant
holding the dashboard up, detach the dashboard
Fastener Locations wire harness clips (8) from both sides of the
~: Bolt, 2 dashboard duct.
~ A
10. From the front of the dashboard, remove the

screws securing the dashboard (A).
Fastener Locations
~:Screw,9
5xO.8mm
0 iiiililID
I
5N·m
20-132 BACK
13. With the help of an assistant, remove the 14. From the front of the dashboard, remove the
dashboard (A). screws securing the dashboard duct (A).
~ Lift up on the dashboard to release it from the Fastener Locations

guide pins (8). ~ : Screw, 2
-2 Lift up on the dashboard until the driver's
outside portion will be higher than the steering O:O:m> I A
column.
-a While carefully moving the driver's outside
portion ofthe dashboard over the steering
column, rotate the dashboard toward the front
passenger's door opening, and lower the
passenger's side.
-4 Remove the dashboard through the passenger's
door opening.
NOTE: Lay the dashboard on its front or back.

Do not rest it on the lower console opening or
you may damage it.
B A 15. From the back of the dashboard, remove the

dashboard duct (A) from the dashboard (8).
Fastener Locations
~: Screw, 11
~I
(cont'd)
BACK
20-133
Dashboard
Dashboard Replacement (cont'd) Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam

16. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of
o Before tightening the bolts, make sure the KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
dashboard wire harness is not pinched. * Available through the American Honda Tool and
o Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
correctly.
o Replace the passenger's airbag mounting bolts SRS components are located in this area. Review the
with new ones. SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the
o Make sure the connectors are plugged in precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
properly. doing repairs or service.
o Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
o Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and NOTE:
navigation system (if equipped). o Put on gloves to protect your hands.
o Set the clock. o Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
o Check for any DTCs that may have been set avoid damage when removing components.
during repairs, and clear them. o Have an assistant help you when removing and
o Do the steering column position memorization installing the dashboard.

(see page 17-28). o Take care not to scratch the dashboard, body and
other related parts.

2. Disconnect the negative cable form the battery, and

wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
o Driver's dashboard lower cover (see page

20-119)
o Driver's dashboard undercover (see page 20-120)
o Passenger's dashboard undercover (see page
20-127)
o Center console (see page 20-107)
• Glove box (see page 20-125)

o Driver's dashboard outer trim (see page 20-117)
o Driver's dashboard lower bracket and dashboard
lower bracket (see step 5 on page 20-131)

o Kick panels, both sides (see page 20-76)
o A-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-78)
o A-pillar corner trim (see page 20-206)
o Steering column covers (see page 20-129)
20-134 BACK
4. Disconnect the combination switch connectors, 7. From under the dash, disconnectthe engine
ignition switch connectors, driver's airbag compartment wire harness connectors (A), floor
connector, cable reel connector, steering angle wire harness connector (B), parking brake switch
sensor connector, immobilizer control unit connector (C), and dashboard wire harness
connector, tilt/telescopic motor connectors, and tilt/ connectors (D) from the driver's under-dash fuse/
telescopic control unit connectors, detach the relay box (E), detach the fuse connector (F), and
harness clips and remove the mounting bolts, then then release the wire harness clips (G).
lower the steering column (see page 17-25). To
prevent damage to the steering column, wrap it NOTE: Lift the large wire harness connector locks
with a shop towel. (H) before trying to remove the connectors from the
fuse/relay box.
5. Remove the parking brake lever mounting bolt and
screw, then lower the lever (see step 6 on page c G
20-131).
Driver's side
6. Disconnect the moonroof wire harness connector

(A).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-135
Dashboard
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Middle portion 9. Disconnect the floor wire harness connector(s) (A),

rear mode control motor connector (8), rear
8. Detach the harness clips (A), and disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor connector (e), rear
SRS unit connectors (8); GPS antenna connectors air mix control motor connector (D), rear power
(e) (with navigation system), yaw rate-lateral transistor connector (E), rear blower motor
acceleration sensor connector (D), Ale subharness connector (F). Detach the harness clips (G).
connectors (E), and floor wire harness connector (F).
Passenger's side
10. With rear entertainment system: Disconnect the

rear entertainment system wire harness connectors
(A).
20-136 BACK
11. From under the dash, disconnect the passenger's 13. Open the driver's door, and remove the bolts (A, B,
door wire harness connectors (A), the floor wire e). Remove the remaining bolts (0, E, F) securing
harness connector (B), audio amplifier connectors the dashboard (G).
(e), engine compartment wire harness connector
Fastener Locations
(0), and radio antenna connectors (E).
A • : Bolt, 1 B . : Bolt, 1 C • : Bolt, 1
(Black) (Black) (Black)
@::@) lliiiiiiiD @::@)~::m:!!!!IllI!!!IlJlIID ~ I

D • : Bolt, 2 E . : Bolt, 2 F . : Bolt, 1
(Silver) (Silver) (Silver)
12. Remove the bolts (A, B) securing the dashboard (e)

and center bracket (0).
Fastener Locations
8x1.25mm
A.: Bolt,4 22N·m
(Silver) 6x 1.0 mm (2.2kgf·m,
9.8N·m 16Ibf·ft)
8x 1.25mm (1.0 kgf.m,
22N·m 7.2Ibf·ft)
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf.ft) D
(cont'd)
BACK 20-137
Dashboard
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation (cont'd)
14. Lift up on the dashboard (A) to release it,from the 17. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of
guide pins (B, C). removal, and note these items:
B A
• Position the center bracket on the body, then
reinstall the dashboard on the body. After
tightening the dashboard mounting bolts, tighten
the center bracket mounting bolts, and then
tighten the center frame mounting bolts.
• Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins
correctly.
• Before tightening the bolts, make sure the wire
harnesses are not pinched.
properly.
• Set the clock.
15. Carefully remove the dashboard thrOugh either during repairs, and clear them.
front door opening. • Do the steering column position memorization
(see page 17-28).
NOTE: Do not rest the dashboard on its lower
center cover opening, or it may be damaged. Lay it
on its front or back.
16. Remove the center bracket (D).
20-138 BACK
Seats
RIGHT SECOND .ROW SEAT

Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement, page 20-165
Seat-back Recline Cable Replacement, page 20-167
Third Row Access Cable Replacement, page 20-167
Seat Cover Replacement, page 20-171
THIRD ROW SEATS

page 20-179
Disassembly/Reassembly,
page 20-180
Latch Replacement,
page 20-181
Pivot Replacement,
page 20-182
Seat-back Recline Lever
Seat-back Recline Cable
Seat Cover Replacement,
page 20-184
LEFT SECOND ROW SEAT

Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement, page 20-165
Seat-back Recline Cable Replacement, page 20-167
Armrest Replacement, page 20-168
Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement, page 20-169
Armrest Panel Replacement, page 20-170
Seat Cover Replacement, page 20-171
Armrest Cover Replacement, page 20-178
FRONT SEAT (Passenger's)

Active Head Restraint Inspection, page 20-140 FRONT SEAT (Driver's)
Removal/Installation, page 20-141 Active Head Restraint Inspection, page 20-140
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-144 Removal/Installation, page 20-141
Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-147 Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-144
Seat Recline Motor Replacement, page 20-148 Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly, page 20-146
Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-150 Seat Recline Motor Replacement, page 20-148
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement, page 20-154 Lumbar Support Replacement, page 20-149
Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-150
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement, page 20-154
BACK 20-139
Seats
Front Seat Active Head Restraint Inspection
NOTE: If the vehicle has been in a collision, always Inspection

inspectthe active head restraint, even ifthey appear
reusable, by doing the following procedure. 3. Fold the seat-back forward, then recline the seat-
back to the first lock position, and adjust the head
Resetting Head Restraint Position restraint to the highest position.
1. Push the head restraint (A) forward fully from the 4. Apply masking tape on the top of the head restraint.
locked position to return the inside inertia lock (B).
5. Make marks (A) on both sides at 285 mm (11.2 in.)
upward from the roots of the head restraint frame
(B) along the back of the head restraint (C) surface.
Make a center ofthese points as a datum point (0).
A
Locked Full stroke Normal

B
\
~9~9~ B B B
2. Slowly raise the head restraint into the normal 6. Push the head restraint (A) forward, and check:
position. With a scale, measure the level amount ofthe head
restraint movement. The head restraint should
move more than 50 mm (2.0 in.) without resistance.
If it is less than 50 mm (2.0 in.), or the head restraint
doesn't move smoothly, replace the seat-back
frame (see page 20-150).
Above 50 mm (2.0 in.)
(Level)
20-140 BACK
Front Seat Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Adjust the seat to its minimum height, then remove
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014.* the lower anchor bolt (A).

NOTE:
) ,
~UNF
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
• Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat
covers.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to 32N·m
avoid damage when removing components. (3.3 kgf.m, 24Ibf·ft)
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the 5. Driver'S side with navigation system: Gently pull
audio or the navigation system (if equipped). the navigation unit cover (A) up to detach the clips,
then remove the cover.
2. Tilt the steering wheel all the way up, and telescope
it all the way in. Fastener Locations
t>: Clip, 2
3. Slide the front seat all the way forward, and adjust
the seat to its maximum height. Carefully pry up on
the bottom of the anchor cover (A) to release the
vii B
tab (8) with a small flat-tip screwdriverfrom below

inside the recline cover (C), then remove it.
6. Driver's side with navigation system: Disconnect

the navigation unit connectors (8).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-141
Seats
Front Seat Removal/Installation (cont'd)
7. Slide the seat all the way forward and remove the 9. Slide the seat all the way back, and remove the
rear outer seat track end cover (A) and the rear front outer seat track 'end cover (A) and the front
inner seat track end cover (8). inner seat track end cover (8).
~ A

Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations ~: Bolt, 2
~
~: Bolt,2
®»-
10x 1.25 mm
10x 1.25 mm

wait at least 3 minutes before removing the seat.
20-142 BACK
12. Lift up the front seat, then disconnect the power 14. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the
seat harness connector (A) and the side airbag front seat through the front door opening.
connector (8). Disconnect the ODS unit connector
(C) on the passenger's seat. 15. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
Driver's seat
8
the seat mounting bolts before reinstallation.
• Tighten the seat mounting bolts to the specified
torque in the sequence shown. Slide the seat all
the way back and tighten CD and (V, then slide it
forward and tighten ® and 0. The driver's seat is
shown; the passenger's seat is symmetrical.
• Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
• Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten them
to specification with a torque wrench.
• Set the clock.
during repairs, and clear them.
(see page 17-28).
Passenger's seat
Fastener Locations
~: 801t,2
CD--~..,.....,
13. Remove the head restraint.
/
10x 1.25 mm
47N·m
BACK 20-143
Seats
Front Seat DisassemblyIReassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the recline cover (A).

* Available through the American Honda Tool and -1 Remove the screw (B) and detach the clips (e)
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 and hooks (D).
-2 Pull up the cover, then detach the hooks (E, F).
SRS components are located in this area. Review the -a Disconnect the recline switch and up-down
SRS component lo.cations (see page 24-18) and the switch connector (G), and on the driver's seat,
precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before lumbar support switch connector (H).
doing repairs or service. -4 Remove the wire harness (I) from the hook (J).
NOTE: Fastener Locations

• Put on gloves to protect your hands. B ~ : Screw, 1 C I> : Clip, 1
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat
covers.
~
H
.1
• DTe codes will set if the ignition is turned ON (II) with
the seats removed.
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-141).

o
2. Remove the screws and release the hook (A), tabs
(B), then remove the front cover (e).
Fastener Locations
~:Screw,3
~I A
4. Remove the center cover (A).
-1 Release the hooks (B).

-2 Pull up the cover, then detach the hook (e).
20-144 BACK
5. From under the seat cushion, release the hook 6. Remove bolts, then remove the seat-back (A).
strips (A) and pull the seat cushion cover (8) back.
Disconnect or detach the connectors, detach the Fastener Locations
harness clips (C), release the wire ties (D), then pull ~: Bolt,4
~
out the harness(es) out through the harness sock
(E).
o Driver's seat
A
- Side airbag connector (F)
- Seat-back heater harness connector (G)
- Recline motor/lumbar support motor harness
connector (H)
o Passenger's seat
- Side airbag connector (F)
- ODS unit harness connector (I)
- Recline motor harness connector (J)
Driver's seat
c
E
7. Assemble the seat-back and seat cushion in the
~.I:.i=I:f-""/",...-D reverse order of disassembly, and note these
~~~
items:
o Passenger's seat: Calibrate the ODS unit

(see page 24-34).
o Check if the clips is damaged, and if necessary,
B
replace it with a new one.
o Push the clip and hooks on the covers into place
securely.
o Apply mUltipurpose grease to the moving parts
Passenger's seat of the seat track.

o Replace the wire ties you removed with new
c E
ones.
o Make sure each connector is plugged in properly .
• To prevent wrinkles in the seat cushion cover,

stretch the material evenly over the pad before
securing the hook strips.
BACK 20-145
Seats·
Front Seat Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the precautions
and procedures (see page 24-20) before doing repairs or service.
Driver's Seat
• Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor after any of these actions (see page 24-36):
- Driver's seat position sensor replacement
- Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) replacement
NOTE:
• Apply mUltipurpose grease to the sliding portions and pivot portions of the seat tracks.
SEAT CUSHION FRAME SEAT CUSHION SPRING
~/ / POWER SEAT HARNESS
~/
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
-------~ ~
CENTER INNER COVER
\ .•.. a-------- HARNESS SOCK

INNER HEIGHT COVER
~o
~
o
~ SLIDE/UP-DOWN . / RECLINE INNER COVER

~
-------~~
ADJUSTER /..IX
8x 1.2Smm
;rANCH:RmM
22N·m
~~
OUTER HEIGHT
COVER
HARNESS BRACKET
oo~~
@ NAVIGATION UNIT
FLOOR CONNECTOR 6x1.0mm BRACKET
BRACKET 9.8N·m (With navigation
(Without navigation system) (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) system)
20-146 BACK
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the precautions
Passenger's Seat
• Calibrate the ODS unit after any of these actions (see page 24-34):
- Front passenger's seat replacement (including any seat components)
- Replacement ofthe seat weight sensors
- Replacement of the ODS unit
NOTE:
• Apply mUltipurpose grease to the sliding portions of the seat tracks.
SEAT CUSHION FRAME SEAT CUSHION SPRING
\
POWER SEAT HARNESS
\~ .
.r f!lf . / HARNESS SOCK

V CENTER INNER COVER
/
INNER HEIGHT
COVER
~~
~
RECUNE INNER COVER "" /
OUTER HEIGIff '\ SLIDE/UP-DOWN

~~
COVER ~.~DJUSTER
ANCHOR WIRE
~~
HARNESS BRACKET
~ ~~ ""/
8x1.25mm
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m, 16lbf·ftl
BACK 20-147
Seats·
Front Seat Recline Motor Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Release the push nut (A) from the motor side end of
SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the the connecting rod (B), gently tap on the motor side
precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before of the connecting rod to remove itfrom the recline
doing repairs or service. motor (C) and both recline adjusters (D).
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Seat-back cover (see page 20-150)

• Lumbar support motor cover (see step 5 on page
20-149)
3. Driver's seat: Disconnect the lumbar support motor

connector (A), and remove thewire ties (B).
5. Remove the rod cover (E).
6. Remove the bolt, then remove the recline motor (A).
Fastener Location
~: Bolt, 1
A
~ :JD-::::::!.--~
I _
7. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal,

• Passenger's seat: Calibrate the ODS unit

(see page 24-34).
• Replace the wire ties you removed with new
ones.
• Replace the push nut with a new one. Make sure
the push nut is installed correctly.
the mounting bolt before reinstallation.
20-148 BACK
Front Seat Lumbar Support Replacement
Driver's seat 4. Release the hook strips (A), then turn over the seat-
back cover (8).
pre€;autions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
NOTE:
• Take care not to bend the cable.
covers.
1. Remove the back panel (see step 3 on page 20-151).
2. Release the hook of the yoke wi re (A) from the top

of the basket (8) to loosen the lumbar support cable
(e), then disconnect it.
c
5. Release the hooks (A), then remove the lumbar
support motor cover (8).
3. Release both lower springs (A) from inside the

seat-back. Release the lumbar support from both A
upper springs (8).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-149
Seats.
Front Seat Lumbar Support Front Seat-back Cover Replacement
6. Disconnect the power lumbar support motor * Available through the American Honda Tool and
connector (A) and remove the nuts, then remove Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
the lumbar support motor (B).
Fastener Locations SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the
.:Nut,2 precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
~
6x 1.0 mm doing repairs or service.
6N·m
(0.6kgf·m,
3=;;:'--:::::==~~
4\ffi o Check the operation ofthe driver's seat position
sensor after any ofthese actions (see page 24-36).
- Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail)
replacement
o Calibrate the ODS unit after any ofthe these actions
(see page 24-34).
- Front passenger's seat replacement (including any
seat components)
- Replacement of the seat weight sensors
A
- After a vehicle collision
NOTE:
o Put on gloves to protect your hands.
o Take care not to tear the seams of damage the seat
covers.
o On the passenger's seat, do not touch the OPDS
sensor in the seat-back pad, and keep it away from oil.

7. Install the lumbar support in the reverse order of Oil can corrode the sehsor causing it to fail.
removal, and note these items: o Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to

o Make sure the connector is plugged in properly,
and the cable is connected securely. 1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-141 )..
o To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly 2. Remove the seat-back (see page 20-144).
over the pad before securing the hook strips.
o Replace the back panel clips with new ones.
20-150 BACK
3. Detach the clips, release the hooks (A) by pulling 5. Pull the recline motor harness/lumbar support
the bottom ofthe back panel (8) back, then gently motor harness (A) (driver's seat) or recline motor
pull down the panel to release the hooks (C) from harness (8) (passenger's seat), seat-back heater
the seat-back frame, and remove the panel. harness (C), side airbag harness (0) and the ODS
unit harness (E) (passenger's seat) out through the
NOTE: Detach the clips and hooks in the numbered holes (F) in the seat-back cover.
sequence as shown.
Driver's seat-back
Fastener Locations
Passenger's seat-back
A
4. Release the hooks (A), then loosen the seat-back

cover (8).
F F
A
E
(cont'd)
BACK 20-151
Seats
Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (cont'd)
6. Passenger's 'seat: Turn over the seat-back cover (A), 8. Pull out the head restraint guides (A) while
.detach the hooks (8), then remove the ODS unit pinching the tabs on the end of the guides, and
cover (C). Disconnect the OPDS sensor connectors remove them.
(D), then detach the harness clips (E).
9. Remove the seat-back cover (A) and seat-back pad

(8) from the seat-back frame (C).
B 0
7. Release the front hook (A) and rear hook (8) ofthe
reinforcing cloth (C) from seat-back frame (D).
20-,152 BACK
10. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the
way around, and release the clips (A), then remove
the seat-back cover.
A
11. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,

and note these items: D
• Reinitialize the ODS unit (see page 24-33).

• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the clips, hooks,
and hook strips.
• Replace any clips you removed with new ones c
(A). Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers (8).
• Reinstall the front hook (C) and rear hook (D) of
the reinforcing cloth (E) securely.
• Use only original Acura replacement seat-back
covers.
• Make sure the recline motor harness/lumbar
support motor harness (driver's seat) or recline
motor harness (passenger's seat), side airbag
harness, seat-back heater harness, and ODS unit
harness (passenger's seat) are routed properly.
• Replace the back panel clips with new ones.
BACK 2o.~153
Seats
Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the clips and wire tie (A) and release the
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * hook strips (B) from both sides of the seat cushion.
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 Outside
Fastener Locations
• Check the operation ofthe driver's seat position

sensor after any of these actions (see page 24-36):
- Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail)
replacement
• Calibrate the ODS unit after any of the these actions
(see page 24-34):
- Front passenger's seat replacement (including any
seat components)
- Replacement of the se~t weight sensors
- After a vehicle collision
NOTE:
avoid damage when removing components. Inside
• Take care 'lot to tear the seams of damage the seat
Fastener Locations
covers.
2. Remove the seat-back (see page 20-144).
3. From under the seat cushion, disconnect the seat

cushion heater connector (A).
A
20-154 BACK
5. From under the seat cushion, release the hook 7. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the
strips (A), and pull back the seat cushion cover (8). way around, and release the clips (A), then remove
the seat cushion cover.
A

6. Remove the silencer (A) and seat cushion pad (8) and note these items:
from the seat cushion frame (e).
• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat
cushion cover, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing
the clips and hook strips .
• Replace any clips you removed with new ones
(A). Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers (8).
BACK 20-155
Seats
Second Row Seat Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the rear ISO fix bracket cover cap (A) (left
KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * second row seat), rear foot inner cover (B), and rear
* Available through the American Honda Tool and foot outer cover (e) from the back of the seat tracks.
Left seconds row seat
NOTE:
• Take care notto scratch the body or tear the seat
covers.
1. Ra ise the seat-back.
2. Remove the front foot inner cover (A) and front foot
outer cover (B) from the front of the seat tracks.
Right seconds row seat
3. Fold the seat-back forward.
20-156 BACK
5. From the front of the seat tracks, remove the bolts 7. With seat heater: Lift up the front seat, then detach
securing the second row seat (A). the harness clip (A), and disconnect the seat-back
heater connector (8).
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt,2 Left second row seat
~ A
10x1.25mm
6. From the back of the seat tracks, remove the bolts Right second row seat
securing the second row seat (A).
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt,
Left secand row seat, 3
Right secand row seat, 2
10x 1.25mm
(cont'd)
BACK 20-157
Seats 7
Second Row Seat Removal! Second Row Seat DisassemblyI

Installation (cont'd) Reassembly
8. With the help of an assistant; carefully remove the Special Tools Required
second row seat through the rear door opening. KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
9. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
note these items:
Left Second Row Seat
the seat mounting bolts before reinstallation. NOTE:
• Tighten the seat mounting bolts to the specified • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
torque in the sequence shown. Tighten CD and ®, • Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to
then tighten ® and G), and on the left second row avoid damage when removing components.
seat, also tighten ®. • Take care not to scratch the body or te.ar the seat
• If equipped, make sure the seat heater connector covers.
is plugged in properly.
• Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten them 1. Remove the second row seat (see page 20-156).
to specification with a torque wrench.
2. From under the seat cushion, release the hooks (A)
Fastener Locations of the back cover carpet (8) from the seat cushion
~: Bolt, frame, then pull then carpet back.
Left secand row seat, 5
Right secand row seat, 4 C
10x 1.25mm
47N·m
0.
A A
3. With seat heater: Disconnect the seat-back heater

connector (e), detach the seat heater connector (D),
and remove the wire ties (E).
20-158 BACK
, .~
4. Gently pull out the recline outer cover (A) to detach 6. Gently. pull out the ISO fix bracket outer cover (A) to
the clips and to release the hooks (8) of the recline detach the clip. Releasethe hookS (8) from the ISO
inner cover (e), then remove the cover while fix bracket inner cover (e), and release the hook (D)
releasing the inside edge of the cover from the of the inner cover from the outer cover, then
recline adjuster (D). remove the cover while releasing the inside edge of
it from the ISO fix bracket (E).
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip. 2 Fastener Location
--=tJ
[>: Clip. 1
--=tJ
D
J~~I\'~
A
7. Remove the screw (A) gently pull out the ISO fix
5. Remove the screw (A), gently pull out the recline bracket inner cover (8) to detach the clips (e). then
inner cover (8) to detach the clip (e), then remove it. remove it.
Fastener Locations Fastener Locations

A ~: Screw. 1 A ~: Screw, 1
(cont'd)
BACK 20-159
Seats
Second Row Seat DisassemblyIReassembly (cont'd)
8. Remove the screw, gently pull out the rear center 10. Remove the seat cuhsion (A).
outer cover (A) to release the hook (8) from the
center inner cover (C), and to release the hooks (D) -1 Remove the seat belt buckles (8) and seat belt
of the inner cover from the outer cover, the remove detachable anchor (C) from the elastic straps
it. (D).
-2 Remove the nuts (E). Using a T30 TORX bit,
Fastener Location remove the bolts (F).
~ : Screw, 1
~I
Fastener Locations
• : Nut, 2 ~ : Bolt, 2
@)) 0- o
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
11.,,\m. 7.2 Ib'·ftl
9. Gently pull out the center inner cover (A) to detach

the clip, then remove it.
Fastener Location
l>: Clip, 1
~~
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
B 12.2 kgf'm, 16Ibf·ft)
20-160 BACK
11. Remove the screw, then remove the front center 13. Assemble the seat-back and seat cushion in the
outer cover (A). reverse order of disassembly, and note these
items:
Fastener Location
~:Screw, 1 o If the bushing is damaged or stress-whitened,
~
replace it with a new one.
o Replace any damaged clips with newones.
o With seat heater: Replace the wire tie you
removed with a new one.
o With seat heater: Make sure the seat-back heater
12. Using a T40 TORX bit, remove the bolts (A, B), then
remove the seat-back (C) and bushing (D).
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Bolt, 4 A ~ : Bolt, 1
€)mn (0)P»
10x1.25mm C
47N·m
(4.8kgf·m,
35lbf·ftl
\ B
10x 1.25 mm
47N·m
(4.8kgf.m,
35Ibf·ft)
BACK 20-161
Seats
Second Row Seat Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 5. Gently pull out the recline outer cover (A) to detach
KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * the clips and to release the hooks (B) of the recline
* Available through the American Honda Tool and inner cover (e), then remove the cover while
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 releasing the inside edge of the cover frcim the
recline adjuster (D).
Right Second Row Seat
Fastener Locations
NOTE:
covers.
2. From under the seat cushion, release the hook (A)

of the back cover carpet from the seat cushion
frame, then pull the carpet (B) back.
C D
6. Remove the screw (A), gently pull out the recline
C.'
inner cover (B) to detach the clip (e), then remove it.
C
C Fastener Locations
A~;:., I
3. Release the wire ties (e) fastening the recline

cables (D).

connector (E) and detach the seat heater connector
(F).
20-162 BACK
7. Gently pull out the center outer cover (A) to remove 9. Remove the nuts (A). Using a T30 TORX bit,
the screw and to release the hooks (8) from the remove the bolts (8), then remove the seat cushion
center inner cover (C), then remove the cover while (C).
releasing the inside edge of it from the recline
adjuster (D). Fastener Locations
Ae : Nut, 4 B~: Bolt, 2
Oml
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1 @)
@WI c
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
8. Gently pull out the center inner cover (A) to detach

the clip, then remove it.
Fastener Location
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
(cont'd)
BACK 20-163
Seats
Second Row Seat DisassemblyIReassembly (cont'd)
10. Disconnect the recliner cables (A) and the third row 11. Using aT40 TORX bit, remove the bolts, then
seat access rods (B) on both sides, then remove the remove the seat-back (A).
cables from the clips (C).
Fastener Locations
~ : Bolt, 4
7m.
10 x 1.25 mm
47N·m
"'bf·ft)
12. Assemble the seat-back and seat cushion in the

reverse order of disassembly, and note these
items:
• If the cable clips and rod fasteners are damaged

or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
B • Replace any damaged clips with new ones.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the moving parts
of the seat track.
• Replace the wire ties you removed with new
ones.
• Make sure each cable is connected securely.
• With seat heater: Make sure the seat-back heater
20-164 BACK
Second Row Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement
Special Tools Required 5. Left second row seat: Detach the clips (A) and
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * disconnect the recline outer cable (B) and the
* Available through the American Honda Tool and recline inner cable (C).
A A
NOTE:
covers.
• Take care not to kink the cables.
2. Remove the seat-back cover/pad from the seat-

back frame (see page 20-171).
3. Right second row seat: Remove these items:
• Recline outer cover (see step 4 on page 20-162)

• Center outer cover (see step 6 on page 20-162)
4. Remove the screws securing the recline lever (A). c

B
Fastener Locations
~:Screw,2
(cont'd)
BACK 20-165
Seats
Second Row Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement (cont'd)·
6. Right second row seat: remove the wire ties (A) and 7. Install the recline lever in the reverse order of
detach the clips (B), disconnect the recline outer removal, and note these items:
cable (C) and the recline inner cable (D), then
remove the cables from the clips (E). • Make sure each cable is connected securely.
• Fix at the middle groove in the end of the recline
inner cable (A) securely to obtain no clearance
between the cable end and the recline lever
fitting.
• Fix at the middle groove in the end of the recline
outer cable (B) securely to obtain a clearance
between the cable end and the recline lever
fitting.
• Check the seat-back fold down operation:
- Left second row seat: When operating the
recline lever, the inner recline adjuster is
unlocked first, the outer recline adjuster is
unlocked next, then the seat-back is folded
down fully.
- Right second row seat: When operating the
recline lever, the inner recline adjuster is
unlocked first, the outer recline adjuster is
unlocked next, then the seat-back is folded
down fully without any interference in
movement, but the seat doesn't slide forward.
• The right second row seat is shown; the left
second row seat is similar.
20-166 BACK
Second Row Seat-back Recline Third Row Seat Access Cable
Cable Replacement Replacement
Special Tools Required NOTE:

KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * • Put on gloves to protect your hands .
* Available through the American Honda Tool and • Take care not to bend the cable.
1. Remove the right second row seat (see page
NOTE: 20-156).
avoid damage when removing components. ~ 2. Remove the right second row seat-back cover/pad
• Take care not to bend the cable. from the seat-back frame (see page 20-171) .
1. Remove the seat-back recline lever (see page 3. Disconnect the third row seat access cable (A) and
20-165). detach the clips (B), then remove the cable by
pinching the hooks (C) of the holder.
2. Carefully pry out the cover (A) with a flat-tip
screwdriver at the gap while holding the lever fully
open. Release the tabs (B), then remove the cover.
3. Disconnect the recline cables (A).
4. Install the second row seat-back recline cables in

the reverse order of removal, and make sure the
cables are connected securely.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-167
Seats
Third Row Seat Access Cable Second Row Seat Armrest
Replacement (cont'd) Replacement
4. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the
and note these items: seat covers.
• Make sure each cable is connected securely. 1. Remove the ISO fix bracket outer cover (see step 6
• If necessary, remove the clip (A), then adjust the on page 20-157).
inner side end of the third row seat access cable
(A) to obtain no clearance between the cable end 2. Using a T30 TORX bit, remove the bolt, then
and the recline lever fitting. remove the washer (A) and wave washer (8).
• Fix at the middle groove in the outer side end of
Fastener Location
the third row seat access cable to obtain a
clearance between the cable end and the recline ~: Bolt, 1
lever fitting.
• Check the third row seat access operation: When
€) •
operating the third row seat access knob, the
inner recline adjuster is unlocked first, the outer
recline adjuster is unlocked next, then the seat-
back is tilted forward and the seat is allowed to
slide forward.
3. Remove the armrest.
-1 Slide the armrest (A) toward the left side of the

vehicle.
-2 Remove the pivot shaft (8) from the bushing
(C) on the passenger's side ofthe vehicle by
pulling up on the armrest, and remove the
pivot shaft from the bushing (D) by pulling up
on the armrest.
20-168 BACK
Second Row Seat Armrest
Beverage Holder Replacement
4. Remove the armrest (A) and bushings (8).

NOTE:
covers .
avoid damage when prying components.
1. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the beverage

holder cover (8).
5. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal,

and check if the bushing are damaged or stress-
whitened, and if necessary, replace them with new
ones.
2. Remove the screws, then pull out on the beverage

holder (A) to release the hooks (8).
Fastener Locations
~: Screw, 2
~
B
3. Install the beverage holder in the reverse order of

removal.
BACK 20-169
Seats
Second Row Seat Armrest Panel Replacement
Special Tools Required 5. Pull back the ISO fix trim (A).
NOTE:
covers.
1. Remove the armrest (see page 20-168).
2. Remove the center head restraint.
3. Pull out the head restraint guides (A) while

pinching the end of the guides, and remove them. 6.. Remove the armrest panel (A).
-1 Remove the screws. (8).

-2 Gently pull out the armrest panel to detach the
clip (e) and to release the hooks (D).
Fastener Locations
.'
B ~ : Screw. 2 C [> : Clip. 1
~
o
4. Remove the screws, gently pull out the rear

armrest cover (A) to release the hooks (8) of the
armrest panel (e), then remove the cover.
Fastener Locations
7. Install the armrest panel in the reverse order of

• Replace the clip if it's damaged .

• Push the clip and hooks on the panel into place
securely.
20-170 BACK
Second Row Seat Cover Replacement
NOTE: Right second row seat

• Put on gloves to protect your hands•
covers.
Seat-back Cover o
2. Remove the head restraint.
3. From under the seat cushion, release the hooks (A)

of the back cover carpet (B) from the seat cushion
frame, then pull the carpet back.
Left second row seat

o C
4. With seat heater; Disconnect the seat cushion

heater connector (C) and remove the wire tie (D).
5. Remove the third row seat access knob (A). Peel off
the label (B) and remove the screw (C), then
remove the third row seat access trim (D) by
detaching the clips (E).
Fastener Locations
C ~ : Screw, 1 E [>: Clip. 2
0m- • I
(cont'd)
BACK 20-171
Seats
Second Row Seat Cover Replacement (cont'd)
6. Fold the seat-back forward fully, detach the clips, 7. Release all of the hooks (A) and remove the wire
and remove the back cover (A). ties (B) from the back ofthe seat-back, then pull
back the seat-back cover. If equipped, detach the
Left seat-back seat-back heater harness clip (e) from the seat-back
frame.
Fastener Locations
Left seat-back
A A
A
A
¥ ¥
¥ ¥
'A
Right seat-back
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 9
~ Right seat-back
A A
'fj
"
'! '1 '1 A

"'!" A
'! '!8'! A
20~172 BACK
8. While pulling the recline lever (A), gently pull out 10. Pull out the seat-back,pad (A) from the seat-back
the recliner lever upper housing (8) to release the frame (8), then pinch the end of the head restraint
hooks (C), then remove it. guides (C) to remove them.
9. Release the hook strips (A).
11. Pull out the head restraint guides (A).

_ _c.r
A
(cont'd)
BACK 20-173
Seats
12. Remove the seat-back cover/pad ·(A) from the seat- 13.. Pull back the edge ofthe. seat-back cover all the
back frame (B) .. way around, and release the clips (A), then remove
the seat-back cover.
Left seat-back
A
14. Right second row seat: If necessary, remove the

seat-back damper (A) from the seat-back frame.
Right seat-back Fastener Locations
20-174 BACK
15. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of Seat Cushion Cover
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly 2. Remove the recline outer cover:
over the pad before securing the hooks, hook
strips, and clips. • Left second row seat (see step 4 on page 20-159).
• Replace any clips (A) you removed with new • Right second row seat (see step 5 on page
ones using commercially available upholstery 20-162).
ring pliers (8).
• Replace the wire ties you removed with new 3. From under the seat cushion, release the hooks (A)
ones. of the back cover carpet (8) from the seat cushion
• With seat heater: Make sure the seat heater frame, then pull the carpet back.
Left second row seat
A
c E
(cont'd)
BACK 20-175
Seats·
Right second row seat Right seat cushion

E
B
B 6. Remove the seat cushion cover/pad (A) from the
seat cushion frame (8).

connector (C), detach the seat heater connector (0),
and remove the wire ties (E).
5. Release all of the clips (A) and hook strips (8) from
under the seat cushion (C).
Left seat cushion

B
o
~
o
F=======Io
\ c
A B
20-176 BACK
7. Pass the retainers (A) through the slots in the seat- 8. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of
back pad (left seat cushion). Pull back the edge of removal, and note these items:
the seat cushion cover all the way around, and
release the clips (8), then remove the seat cushion o To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back
cover. cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the hooks, hook
Left seat cushion strips, and clips.
o Replace any clips (A) you removed with new
ones using commercially available upholstery
ring pliers (8).
o Replace the wire ties you removed with new
ones.
o With seat heater: Make sure the seat-back heater
A
B
Right seat cushion
~
c - --- =>J
I
I
Ie 'LJ
I
I
--- -----::>:
I
I
I
I
BACK 20-177
Seats
Second Row Seat Armrest Cover Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the 5. Pull back the armrest cover (A) all the way around,
seat covers. then separate the armrest cover and pad (8).
1. Remove the armrest (see page 20-168).
2. Remove the armrest beverage holder from the

armrest (see page 20-169).
3. Unzip the armrest cover (A).

and to prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing the
hooks.
4. Release the hooks (A).
20-178 BACK
Third Row Seat Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Lift the seat cushion up.

* Available through the American Honda Tool and 5. Remove the rear mounting bolts while holding the
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 seat cushion •.
NOTE: Fastener Locations

covers.
1. Detach the third row seat-belt from the detachable

anchor.
2. Remove the front mounting bolt covers (A) from

both front links.
6. With the help of an assistant, remove the third row

seat through the tailgate opening.
7. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and

apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to
the seat mounting bolts before reinstallation.
3. Remove the front mounting bolts.
Fastener Locations
10x1.25mm
47N·m
(4.8 kgt.m, 35 Ibf·ftl
BACK 20-179
Seats
Third Row Seat DisassemblyIReassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Using a T30 TORX bit, remove the pivot bolt
KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * securing the seat-back (A) and sat cushion (8), then
* Available through the American Honda Tool and separate them.
Fastener Locations
NOTE: ~: Bolt, 2
~
• Take care notto scratch the body or tear the seat
covers.
1. Remove the third row seat (see page 20-179).
2. Release the hook (A) from under the seat cushion,

and pull back the seat cushon cover (8) as needed.
Remove the screw and Release the hooks (e), then
remove the pivot bolt cover (D) from both sides of
the seat.
Fastener Location 6x 1.0 mm

9.8N·m
~ : Screw, 1 (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
~ 4. If necessary, remove the front link cover (A) by

releasing the hooks (8).
5. Install the seat-back in the reverse order of removal,

• To prevent wrinkles in the seat cushion cover,

make sure the material is stretched evenly over
the pad before securing the hook strip .
• Push the hooks into place secu~ely.
20-180 BACK
Third Row Seat Latch Replacement
NOTE: 6. If necessary, remove the screws, then remove the

• Put on gloves to protect your hands. inner latch cover (A).
• Take care notto bend the seat-back recline cable.
Fastener Locations
• The left third row seat is shown, the right third row
seat is similar. ~:Screw,2
1. Remove the left third row seat or right third row

seat (see page 20-179).
~
3. Remove the screws securing the seat-back recline

lever (see step 3 on page 20-183).
4. Remove the back cover (see step 4 on page 20-184),

then release the hooks from behind the seat-back,
as needed (see step 5 on page 20-185).
5. Remove the screw and release the hook (A), then

remove the outer latch cover (8). A
Fastener Locations 7. Disconnectthe seat-back recline cable (A).
~:Screw,2
j8
(cont'd)
BACK 20-181
Seats
Third Row Seat Latch Replacement Third Row Seat Pivot Replacement
(cont'd)
NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands .
8. Remove the bolts, then remove the latch (A). • The left third row seat is shown; the right third row
seat is similar.
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt, 2 1. Remove the right third row seat (see page 20-179).
~ 2. Remove the seat-back (see page 20-180).
3. Remove the screws securing the seat-back recline

lever (see step 3 on page 20-183).
4. Remove the back cover (see step 4 on page 20-184),

then release the hooks from behind the seat-back,
5. If necessary, remove the screw, then remove the

pivot cover (A).
Fastener Locations
10x1.25mm
47N·m ~ : Screw, 2
~\
9. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Make sure the seat-back recline cable is

connected securely.
• Make sure the seat unlatches properly and
latches securely.
6. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat pivot (A).
Fastener Locations
8x1.25mm
31N·m
7. Install the pivot in the reverse order of removal.
20-182 BACK
Third Row Seat-back Recline Lever Replacement
Special Tools Required 7. Remove the clips, then remove the seat-back
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * recline lever (A) with the recline cable (B).
Fastener Locations
Equipment Program; call 888"424-6857
NOTE:
o Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to

o Take care not to kink the seat-back recline cable.
1. Remove the left third row seat or right third row

seat (see page 20-179).
3. Pry out the lid (A), and remove the screws securing
the third row seat-back recline lever (B).
Fastener Locations
~: Screw, 2
~I
A
8. Install the lever in the reverse order of removal,

o Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened,

o Make sure the recline cable is connected securely.
4. Remove the back cover (see step 4 on page 20-184), o Make sure the seat unlatches properly and
then release the hooks from behind the seat-back, latches securely.
5. Remove the outer latch cover (see step 5 on page

20-181).
6. Disconnect the seat-back recline cable (see step 7

on page 20-181).
BACK 20-183
Seats
Third Row Seat-back Recline Cable Third Row Seat Cover Replacement
Replacement
NOTE:
Special Tools Required • Take care not to scratch the interior trim.
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * • Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat
* Available through the American Honda Tool and covers.
Seat-back Cover
NOTE:
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to 1. Remove the third row seat (see page 20-179).
• Take care not to kink the cable. 2. Remove these items .
1. Remove the third row seat-back recline lever • Seat cushion (see page 20-180)
(see page 20-183). • Head restraint
2. While holding the lever (A) open, carefully pry out 3. Remove the screws securing the seat-back recline
the cover (B) with trim tool to release the tabs (C), lever (see step 3 on page 20-183).
then remove the cover.
4. Detach the clips (A, B), and remove the back cover
(C) from the frame, then turn the cover to pass the
recline lever (D) through a hole in the cover.
Fastener Locations
A I> : Clip, 10 B I> : Clip, 2
I~ ~ C
A
Y;
A I 'Y:A
A ¥ B "
A ¥ ¥ A
3. Disconnect the recline cable (A).
¥ ¥
D
~V- "
A
A
¥
A ¥ A
V
"
V
"
--------A
4. Install the third row seat-back recline cable in the
reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Make sure the cable is connected securely.

• Make sure the seat unlatches properly and
latches securely.
20-184 BACK
5. Release all of the hooks (A, 8) from behind the seat- 7. Pull out the head restraint guides (A) while
back (e). Unhook the edge of the seat-back cover pinching the tabs (8) on the end of the guides, and
(D) from the hook (E) of the seat-back frame. remove them.
8. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (A) from the seat-

back frame (8).
E
6. Pull the seat-back cover (A) back, and release the

hooks (8).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-185
Seats
Third Row Seat Cover Replacement (cont'd)
9. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the Seat Cushion Cover
way around, then release all ofthe clips (8).
Remove the seat-back cover. 1. Remove both front mounting bolts (see page
20-179).
~A
2. Release the hook strips (A) from under the seat
cushion (8).
A
10. Install the seat-back cover in the reverse order of

cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the hook and clips .
• Replace any clips (A) you removed with new
ones using commercially available upholstery
ring pliers (8).
A
3. Remove the pivot bolt cover from both sides (see
20-186 BACK
4. Detach the retainers (A) from both sides of the link 7. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover (A) all
(B), and release all of the hook strips (C) from under the way around, release all of the clips (B), under
the seat cushion (D). the right seat cushion cover, then remove the seat
cushion cover.
8. Install the seat cushion cover in the reverse order

• To prevent wrinkles, make sure the material is

stretched evenly over the pad before securing all
the clips.
A
• Replace all ofthe clips fastening the seat-back
5. Remove the seat cushion cover/pad (A) from the cover (A) and pad wire (B) with new ones (C)
seat cushion frame (B). using commercially available upholstery ring
pliers (D).
6. If necessary, release the hooks (C), then remove the

suspension mat (D).
BACK 20-187
Bu'mpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE: 3. Pull on the front bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. to release it from the hooks (B) on the side spacers
• Have an assistant help you when removing and (e).
installing the front bumper.
• Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body. B B
1. Remove the front bulkhead cover (see page 20-203).
2. Remove the bolts (A, B), screws (e), and clips (D, E,
F) securing the front bumper (G).
NOTE: To remove the clips E, pry the inner clip up

at the edge near the line (H) on its head.
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Bolt, 2 B ~ : Bolt,2 C ~ : Screw, 2
~~~
DC>: Clip, 2 E C>: Clip, 4 F C>: Clip, 5
4. With the help of an assistant, while pulling the
-~--.------j';!~\~--------'
wheel arch portion away from the side spacer (A),
pull the front bumper to release the bumper from
the hooks (B) on the corner upper beam (e).
H H 6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0kgf.m, 7.2 Ibf·ttl
D
F
F
F
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m F
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ttl B
20-188 BACK
5. With headlight washer: While pushing the retainer 7. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal,
(A), pull the headlight washer tube (B) to disconnect and note these items:
it from a nozzle (e) of the washer motor. Release
the washer tube from the tube clip (D). • Make sure the front fog light connectors are
plugged in properly, and the headlight washer
tube is connected properly.
• Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks
(of both center upper beams and side spacers) on
each side securely.
replace themwith new ones.
6. With the help of an assistant, disconnect the front

fog light connectors (A), then remove the front
bumper (B).
BACK 20-189
Bumpers
Front Bumper Skid Trim Rear Bumper Removal/Installation

Replacement
NOTE:
Special Tools Required • Have an assistant help you when removing and
KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * installing the rear bumper.
* Available through the American Honda Tool and • Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body.
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857, '
1. From the rear wheel arches on both sides, remove
NOTE: the screws (A, B, e) and clips (0) securing the rear
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. bumper (E), and rear fender cover (F).
• Take care not to scratch the front bumper
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to Fastener Locations
avoid damage when removing components. A ~ : Screw, 4 B ~:Screw,6 C ~: Screw, 2
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-188). ~ ~ ~

2. Remove all ofthe screws. Pry all ofthe hooks (A)
up with a trim tool, then remove the front bumper
skid trim (B) from the front bumper (e).
Fastener Locations
~:Screw,8
~I
E
A c

push the hooks into place securely.
20-190 BACK
2. Remove the caps (A). Remove the bolts (8) and 4. With the help of an assistant, while pulling the
clips (e) securing the rear bumper (D). wheel arch portion away from the side spacers (A),
pull the rear bumper to release the bumper from
NOTE: To remove the clips, pry the inner clip up at the hooks (8) on the side upper spacer (e), and
the edge near the line (E) on its head. from the hooks (D) on the side bracket (E).
Fastener Locations
B~. C~!J
E E
5. With the help of an assistant, pull out on the rear

bumper to release the bumper (A) from the hooks
(8) on both upper brackets (e).
c 6x1.0mm
9.8N·m B
(1.0 kgf·m. 7.2Ibf·ft)
3. Pull on the rear bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas

to release it from the hooks (8) on the side spacers
(e).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-191
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation Rear Bumper Skid Trim

6. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal, Special Tools Required
and note these items: KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
• Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
(of both the side bracket, side spacers, and side
upper spacers) on each side securely. NOTE:
• Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
replace them with newones. • Take care not to scratch the front bumper.
• Push the clips and hooks into place securely. • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-190).
2. Remove all of the bolts (A) and screws (B). Pry all of
the hooks (C) up with a trim tool, then remove the
rear bumper skid trim (D) from the rear bumper (E).
Fastener Locations
A": Bolt, 2 B .. : Screw, 7
6x 1.0mm
·9.8N·m

20-192 BACK
Rear Bumper Air Spoiler Rear Bumper Reflector
NOTE: NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Put on gloves to prevent damllge .
• Take care not to scratch the rear bumper. • Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body .
1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-190). 1. Push out the clip (A), release the hook (8), then
remove the rear bumper reflector (C).
2. Remove the bolts (A) and clips (8) then remove the
rear bumper air spoiler (0) from the rear bumper
(E). Take care notto scratch the rear bumper.
Fastener Locations
A~: Bolt,2 B C>: Clip, 2
t-I C
A ~
2. Reattach the hook to the rear bumper first, and
push the clip into place securely.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
3. Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal,


BACK 20-193
Hood
Hood Adjustment
• Front bulkhead cover (see page 20-203)

• Hood support strut, both -sides (see page 20-195)
2. Slightly loosen each bolt (A).
3. Adjust the hood alignment in this sequence:
• Adjust the hood right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes in the hood
hinges (8).
• Turn the hood edge cushions (C), as necessary, to make the hood fit flush with the body at the front and side
edges.
A
6x 1.0 mm
18N·m
A
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
4. Adjust the hood latch (0) to obtain the proper height at the forward edge, and move the hood latch right or left
until the striker (E) is centered in the hood latch.
5. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
20-194 BACK
Hood Support Strut Replacement
6. Check that the hood opens properly and closes 1. With the help of an assistant, use a flat-tip
securely. screwdriver (A) to pry the support strut clips (8) of
the support strut (C) on the hood and body, then
7. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts release the support strut from the pivot bolts (D).
and around the hinges, and letthe paint dry. Do not remove the clips from the support strut.
8. Apply mUltipurpose grease to the hood latch and NOTE: Use eye protection when doing this
hood hinges as indicated by the arrows. procedure.
2. Apply mUltipurpose grease to each pivot.
3. Set the clips (A) on the original position, then

reattach the support strut (8) on the pivot bolts (C)
by pushing on the support strut.
BACK 20-195
Hood
Hood Seal Replacement Hood Insulator Replacement
1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips, then remove 1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips. Release the
the hood seal (A). Take care not to scratch the hood. hooks (A), then remove the hood insulator (8). Take
care not to scratch the hood.
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip,S . Fastener Locations
Jf:J A
2. Install the seals in the reverse order of removal,


replace them with new ones. 2. Install the insulator in the reverse order of removal,
o Push the clips into place securely. and note these items:
;. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,

replace them with newones.
20-196 BACK
Tailgate
Tailgate Adjustment
Special Tools Required 5. Slightly loosen each bolt (A).

NOTE:
1. With power tailgate: Make sure you have the anti-

theft code for the audio and the navigation system
(if equipped).
2. With power tailgate: Disconnect the negative cable

from the battery.
NOTE: Open the tailgate by using the emergency

lever while adjusting the tailgate (see page 20-229).
3. Remove the Support strut from each side (see page

20-198).
4. Remove the striker cap (A) from the rear trim panel
(8).
A
8x 1.25 mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf.ft)
6. Adjust the tailgate (8) alignment in the following

sequence:
• Adjust the tailgate right and left, using the

elongated holes in the tailgate hinges (e).
• Turn the tailgate edge cushions (D), in or out as
necessary, to make the tailgate fit flush with the
B
body at the side edges.
• Adjust the fit between the tailgate and tailgate
opening by moving the striker (E), and adjust the
striker right or left until it is centered in the
tailgate latch (F).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-197
Tailgate
Tailgate Adjustment (cont'd) Tailgate Support Strut

Replacement
7. Tighten each bolt securely.
8. Check that the tailgate opens properly and locks 1. With the help of an assistant, use a flat-tip
securely. screwdriver (A) to pry the support strut clips (8)
from each end of the support strut (C) at the tailgate
9. Reinstall the support struts securely. and body, then release the support strut from the
pivot bolt (0) and from the pivot bracket (E). 00 not
10. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts remove the clips from the support strut.
and around the hinges, and let the paint dry.
NOTE: Use eye protection when doing this
11. Apply mUltipurpose grease to the pivot portion of procedure.
the tailgate hinges (A) as indicated by the arrows.
13. With power tailgate: Reconnect the negative cable

to the battery.
NOTE:
• Enter the·anti-thett code for the audio and the
navigation system (if equipped). 2. Remove the bolts, then remove the pivot bracket
• Set the clock. (A).
• Check for any OTCs that may have been set
during repairs, and clear them. Fastener Locations / 6 x 1.0 mm
• 00 the steering column position memorization
(see page 17-28).
~ : Bolt. 2
~ I rrr,l- 9.8 N·m
~ ~"~
3. Reinstall the pivot bracket.
20-198 BACK
Tailgate Weatherstrip Replacement
4. Set the clips (A) on the original position, then 1. With: power tailgate: Remove the left tailgate side
reattach the support strut (8) on the pivot bolt (C) trim (see page 20-96).
and pivot bracket (D) by pushing the support strut
onto the pivot. 2. With power tailgate: Use a flat-tip screwdriver (A)
to pry the clip (8) downward from the power
tailgate motor rod (C), then release the rod from the
pivot bracket (D) and push it in the quarter pillar
trim (E). Do not remove the clip from the rod.
c
D
(cont'd)
BACK 20-199
Tailgate
Tailgate Weatherstrip Replacement (cont'd)
3. Remove the tailgate weatherstrip (A) by pulling it 6. With power tailgate: Reinstall the left tailgate side
out. trim (see page 20-96).
7. Check for water leaks.
Outside..
4. Locate the painted alignment mark (B) on the

tailgate weatherstrip. Align the painted mark with
the alignment tab in the center of the tailgate
opening! and install the tailgate weatherstrip all the
way around. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the
weatherstrip.
5. With power tailgate: Set the clip (A) on the original

position, then reattach the power tailgate motor rod
(B) on the pivot bracket (C) by pushing the rod onto
the pivot.
20-200 BACK
Fuel Fill Door
Fuel Fill DoorI Adapter Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 4. Remove the fuel fill door/adapter (A) from the body.
1. Remove the fuel fill door latch (see page 20-226).
2. Remove the fuel filler cap (A) by turning it

counterclockwise.
5. Install the fuel fill door/adapter in the reverse order

of removal, and make sure the adapter lip (A) is
3. From inside the wheelhouse, carefully push up the fully seated on the fuel fill pipe (8).
adapter lip (A) around the fuel filler pipe (8), and
release the hooks (C) from the edge of the body
hole by hand.
c
BACK 20-201
Fuel Fill Door
Fuel Fill Door Replacement

NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the body.
• Use the appropril'lte tool from the KTC trim tool set to
1. While prying the hook (A) up with a trim tool, slide

the fuel fill door (8) back to release four wedges (C)
from the hooks (0) of the fuel fill door hinge (E),
then remove the fuel fill door.
2. Install the door in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Make sure the hooks are installed securely .

• Make sure there is no gap between the fuel fill
door and hinge.
20-202 BACK
Exterior Trim
Front Bulkhead Cover Replacement Front Grille Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the front bumper and Special Tools Required
body. KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
1. Remove the front bulkhead cover (A). Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
-1 Remove the clips. Grille Replacement

-2 Pass the hood latch knob (8) through the hole
in the cover. NOTE: Take care not to scratch the front bumper and
body.
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip, 8 1. Remove the front bulkhead cover (see page 20-203).
~ 2. Remove the front grille (A).
-1 Remove the bolts (8) and clips (C, D).

-2 Release the hooks (E) of the gr ille from the
front bumper (F) by pulling the grille upward.
NOTE: To remove the clips D, pry the inner clip

up at the edge near the line (G) on its head.
Fastener Locations
_B_~_~_B_OI_t'_2_C_[>_~_:B_o_'t'_2_D_I~ 4

and note these items; G G
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
A
F E
(Eight places)
(cont'd)
BACK 20-203
Exterior Trim
Front Grille Replacement (cont'd)
3. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal; Trim Replacement

NOTE:
• Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, • Take care not to scratch the front grille.
replace them with new ones. • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
• Push the clips and hooks into place securely. , , avoid damage when removing components.
1. Remove the front grille.
2. Remove the screw. From behind the grille, pry up

on the hooks (A) with a trim tool, then remove the
front grille trim (B), and the front grille seal (C) from
the front grille base (0). The left front grille trim is
shown; the right front grille trim is similar.
Fastener Location

20-204 BACK
Cowl Cover Replacement
Special Tools Required 5. Pull the cowl cover (A) forward to release the hooks
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * (B, C) of it from the windshield (D) and body. From
* Available through the American Honda Tool and both hood hinge portions, release the hooks (E, F)
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 of the hood hinge cover (G) from the frontfender
(H) and the roof molding (I).
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the cowl cover and body. H
avoid damage when prying components.
1. Remove the windshield wiper arms (see page

22-305).
2. Using a trim tool, remove the clips (A) from the

C
cowl cover (B).
Fastener Locations
9:
A I> : Clip, 3 F I> : Hook, 12
j
B
~.
C
/~ B
6. Remove the cowl cover.

C

3. Release the windshield wiper washer tube (C) from

the hooks (D).
4. If necessary, remove the hood rear seal (E) from all

ofthe hooks (F).
BACK 20-205
Exterior Trim
A-Pillar Corner Trim Replacement
Special Tools Required 5. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace

KTC trim toolset SOJATP2014 * them with new ones.
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6.857 6. Install the clips (A) on the A-pillar corner trim (B).
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the trim and body.
avoid damage when re!Tloving components.
1. Open the front door.
2. Using a trim tool, detach the bottom clip of the

A-pillar cornertrim (A).
Fasterier Location
1>: Clip. 1
j(J
7. Hold the A-pillar corner trim (A) up, and fit the clips
into the holes in the body, then push on the trim
until the clips snap into place securely.
Fastener Locations
I> : Clip, 3
j[J
3. Gently slide the A-pillar corner trim (A) up along
the A-pillar to release it from the clips.
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 2
4. Using a trim tool, remove the clips from the body.
20-206 BACK
Roof Rail Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the roof rail (A) and the center bracket (8).
* Available through the American Honda Tool and -4 Using a trim tool, pry the notch (e), then
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 remove the roof rail bar cap (0).
-2 Using a T30 TORX bit, remove the nuts (E)
For Some Models from the front bracket (F) and the rear bracket
(G).
NOTE: -a Using a T30 TORX bit, remove the bolts (H),
• Take care not to scratch the covers, roof rail, and the then remove the roof rail.
body. -4 Remove the center cover (I), and using a T30
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to TORX bit, remove the nuts (J), then remove the
avoid damage when prying components. center bracket.
• When using a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
Fastener Locations
E,J. :TORX Nut, 6 H ~ : TORX Bolt, 2
1. Pry up on the front cover (A) with a trim tool to
detach the clips and rib (8) from the front bracket
(e), then remove the cover by pulling the cover
®P ~I
forward. D 6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
Fastener Locations (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 Ibf·ft)
EE
/
6x1.0mm
13N·m H ~
11.3 kgf·m,
9.4Ibf·ft)
-----..... E
6x1.0mm
13N·m
(1.3 kgf·m,
2. Pry up on the rear cover (A) with a trim tool to 9.4Ibf·ft)
detach the clips from the rear bracket (8), then
remove the cover by pulling the cover rearward. 4. Install the roof rail in the reverse order of removal,
Fastener Locations
I> : Clip, 2
~JI replace them with newones.

BACK 20-207
Exterior Trim
Roof Molding Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the windshield portion ofthe roof molding
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * (A).
Equipment Program; call 888-424"6857 -1 Carefully insert the large trim tool (8) and
plastic spatula (C) in under the molding next to
Molding Removal the lower clip (D).
-2 While pulling the clip portion of the molding up
NOTE: by hand, push each of the eight small hook (E)
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. in numbered sequence shown to release the
• Take care not to damage the windshield. clip from the clip (F) on the A-pillar. Do not try
• Do not use any metallic toolsto remove the to pry up the clip if it is hard to release from the
windshield portion of the roof molding, or you may clip on the A-pillar.
chip the edge of the windshield and some cracks in -a Gradually work your way up to release each of
the windshield will occur. the upper clips (G, H, I).
Fastener Locations
• Take care not to bend the roof molding. D C> : Clip (Blue)
c:; C> : Clip (Green)
H C>: Clip (Yellow)
1. For some models: Remove the roof rail (see page
I C>: Clip (Orange)
20-207).
- 7mm
- I I (0.28 in.)
2. Detach the bottom clip (A) at the iower corner of the
windshield.
=='= 1mm
! (0.039 in.)
Fastener Location
A C>: Clip, 1
(Left: Yellow, Right: Pink)
20-208 BACK
4. Start from the front to the rear, carefully insert a 5. Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
trim tool in under the roof molding(s) (A) next to them with new ones.
each of the clips (8), and pry the molding(s) up to
release it with the clip from the stud bolt on the
body, then remove the roof portion of the
molding(s).
Without roof rail
Fastener Locations
A
B [> : Clip, 7
(Light blue)
With roof rail
Fastener Locations
B [>: Clip, 3
(Light blue)
A
(cont'd)
BACK 20-209
Exterior Trim
Roof Molding Replacement (cont'd)
Molding Installation 2. Install the roof molding(s) (A).
1. Install the clips (A, 8, C, D, E, F) on the roof -1 Ho.ld the roof molding(s) up on the roof, and
molding(s) (G). align each clip to the stud bolts.
-.2 From the rear to the front, fit the clips (8) to the
Without roof molding stud bolts (C), then push on the molding until
they snap into place.
A Clip (Left): Yellow F
A Clip (Right) : Pink
-a From the top to the bottom, push the clips (D)
in the windshield portion of the roof molding
BClip: Blue
until they snap into place to the clip (E) on the
C Clip: Green
D Clip: Yellow A-pillar.
E Clip: Orange -4 Push the bottom clip (F) to the front fender into
F Clip: Light blue place.
-6 Set the hook (G) ofthe hood hinge cover (H).
Without roof rail
B,C,D,E
With roof molding H
A Clip (Left): Yellow F

A Clip (Right) : Pink
BClip: Blue
C Clip: Green
D Clip: Yellow
E Clip: Orange
F Clip: Light blue
20-210 BACK
With roof rail Body Side Clip Replacement
1. Gradually scrape off the adhesive tape (A) under
the clips (8) while heating it with a heat gun to 212
-248 "F (100-120 "C).
NOTE:
• To prevent damage, do not heat the painted
surface around the clips too much .
• To keep the exterior resin parts near the A-pillar
from being overheated by the heat gun, wrap
them with aluminum foil.
3. Push the clip portions into place securely and

reinstall the roof rail (see page 20-207), if equipped.
2. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge

dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning,
keep oil, grease, and water from getting on the
surface.
3. Install the clips (A) .
...!I Peel the adhesive backing away from the clips.

-2 Line up the clips with the alignment marks (8)
on the body, and attach the clips with adhesive
tape (C).
-a Apply two-part epoxy adhesive (D) around the
edge of the clips as shown.
Adhesive tape: Thickness 1 mm (0.04 in.)

BACK 20-211
Exterior Trim
Side Sill Panel Replacement

* Available through the American Honda Tool and Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Open the front door and rear door.
2. Remove the side sill panel (A). .

I" ••
,-1Remove the screws.(B, C);then remove the splash guard (D).

-2 Remove the clips (E). fastening the rear fender cover (F) and the rear strake (G).
-3 Use the trim tool to pry out the front clips (H), then release the front of the side sill panel from the body.
-4 While pulling the front portion of the side sill panel away from the body, side the panel forward and remove it.
The side clips (I) will stay in the body.
-6 Remove the side clips by turning them 45°.
Fastener Locations
B ~: Screw, 4 C ~: Screw, 1 E [>: Clip, 1 [>: Clip, 11
~ ~ ~ .~ I
3. If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
4. Install the side clips on the side sill panel.
5. Hold the panel up, and fit the front clip and all the side clips into the holes in the body, then push on the panel until
the side clips snap into place.
6. Reinstall the front inner fender and front splash guard.
20-212 BACK
Tailgate Spoiler Trim Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the tailgate and body. 3. Gently close the tailgate, and lift up on the tailgate
spoiler trim (A) to detach the clips.
1. Open the tailgate. Disconnect the rear window
washer tube (A). Remove the radio antenna Fastener Locations
connector grommet (8) from the tailgate, and
disconnect the radio antenna connector (e).
B
2. Remove the access cap (A) from the tailgate, and

remove the nuts (8) and bolts (e) securing the 4. Remove the high mount brake light connector
tailgate spoiler trim. grommet (8) from the tailgate, and disconnect the
high mount brake light connector (e), then remove
Fastener Locations the tailgate spoiler trim.
B.:Nut,3 C ~: Bolt, 2
~ @=I 5. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Make sure the radio antenna connector and high

mount brake light connector are plugged in
properly and the rear window washer tube is
connected properly.
• Make sure the radio antenna connector grommet
and high mount brake light connector grommet
are installed securely.
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
BACK 20-213
Exterior Trim
Rear License Trim Replacement
NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 7
c
• Take care not to scratch the tailgate.
1. With navigation system: Remove the tailgate lower Omn> I

trim panel (see page 20-96).
2. With navigation system: From inside the tailgate,

disconnect the rear camera unit connector (A).
4. Remove the screw grommets (A) from the tailgate.
NOTE:
• If the screw grommets cracked excessively,
• If the screw grommets are damaged or stress-
whitened, replace them with new.ones.
3. Remove the screws, and release both ends ofthe • If a new rear license trim will be installed,
rear license trim (A) from the inner taillights (B), remove all of remaining screw grommets on the
then remove the trim. If equipped, pull the rear tailgate and discard them. The screw grommets
camera unit harness (e) out. have been installed to the new rear license trim
with screws.
Fastener Locations
~:Screw,6
{)roll"1 =
B
A
A
20-214 BACK
Rear Gutter Cover Replacement
5. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and Special Tools Required
note these items: KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
• With navigation system: Make sure the rear Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
camera unit connector is plugged in properly.
• If a new rear license trim assembly (A) is to be NOTE:
installed, hold the trim up, and fit all the screw • Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to
grommets (B) into the holes in the tailgate, then avoid damage when removing components.
push on the trim until the grommets snap into • Take care not to scratch the body.
place.
1. Open the tailgate.
New rear license trim installation
2. Use a trim tool to detach the clip (A) and pins (B) of
the rear gutter cover (e).
3. If the clip and grommets (D, E) are damaged or

stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
4. Install the corer in the reverse order of removal,

and push the clip and pins into place securely.
BACK 20-215
Exterior Trim
Emblem/Sticker Replacement
NOTE: When removing the emblems, take care not to scratch the body.
1. To remove the front "A" emblem, remove the front grille (see page 20-203).
2. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water
from getting on the surface.
3. Apply the emblems where shown .
• ACURA/MDX emblems: Remove the adhesive backing. Put the ACURA/MDX emblems with the application
guide foam on the tailgate as shown, then press the emblem into place. Remove the film and application guide
foam .
• When installing the ULEV sticker on the inside surface of the left quarter glass, align the sticker with the edge of
the black ceramic as shown, then press the sticker into place, and remove the application tape.
FRONT"A"EMBLEM REAR"A"EMBLEM
ULEV STICKER
SH-AWD EMBLEM
Unit: mm (in.) ACURA EMBLEM
Adhesive tape: Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in.' ADHESIVE TAPE
REAR"A"EMBLEM
FRONT
I
GRILLE
FRONT"A"
EMBLEM
MDXEMBLEM
Body line Body line
APPLICATION APPLICATION
GUIDE FORM ADHESIVE TAPE GUIDE FORM
ADHESIVE TAPE
APPLICATION Body line
TAPE
QUARTER
PILLAR
TRIM
Edge of the
black SH·AWD EMBLEM
~
ULEV ceramic
STICKER
0 ALIGNMENT
MARK
/
ADHESIVE TAPE
Edge of
the tailgate
REAR SIDE APPLICATION TAPE

TRIM PANEL
20-216 BACK
Fenderwell
Front Inner Fender Replacement
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the front inner fender (A).
-.!I On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (8, C), then remove the splash guard (D).
-2 From under the front bumper (E), remove the bolt (F) and clips (G) securing the front bumper and front inner
fender.
-a From the wheel arch, remove the clips (H) securing the front splash shield (I) and front inner fender, and
remove the clip (J) securing the front inner fender on the body.
-4 Pull out the front inner fender.
NOTE: To remove the clips G and H, pry the inner clip up at the edge near the line (K) on its head.
Fastener Locations
B ~ : Screw, 4 C ~ : Screw, 1 F ~:Bolt,1 G [> : Clip, 3 J [>: Clip, 7
~. . ~;
-------------------------/7~ ~
K K
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new one .
BACK 20-217
Fenderwell
Splash Shield Replacement
NOTE:
o Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the splash shield (A).
-1 Remove the clips (B) that secure the front inner fender (C) and splash shield.
-2, From under the front bumper (D), remove the clips (E).
-a From under the body, remove the clips (F) that secure the front undercover (G) and splash shield, and remove
the clips (H) that secure the splash shield on the front suspension subframe (I).
-4 Pull the splash shield out.
NOTE: To remove the clips B, pry the inner clip up at the edge near the line (J) on its head.
Fastener Locations
B I> : caip,2 E I> : Clip, 5 F 1>: Clip, 2 HI>: Clip, 4
-~~ ~ ~iti .~.

f\-·-·~-----'·
i
J J
2. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of· removal, and note these items:
o If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
20-218 BACK
Front Undercover Replacement Front Strake Replacement
NOTE: NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.

o Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the bolts, then remove the front strake (A)
from the front inner fender (B).
1. Remove the bolts (A), and clips (B), then remove
the front undercover (C) from the splash shield (D), Fastener Locations
front suspension subframe (E), and front subframe
stiffener (F).
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Bolt, 3 B t> : Clip, 3
~ ... 1
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
2. Install the strake in the reverse order of removal.
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m

o Ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened,

BACK 20-219
Fenderwell
Front Fender Fairing Replacement Left Front Splash Guard

Reinforcement Replacement
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the body;. 1. Remove these items:
1. Remove the front inner fender as needed (see page • Left front inner fender, as needed (see page
20-217). 20-217)
• Left side sill panel (see page 20-212)
2. Pull out and remove the front fender fairing (A).
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the left front splash
guard reinforcement (A). Take care notto scratch
the body.
Fastener Locations
3. Install the fender fairing in the reverse order of

removal.
10x 1.25 mm
38N·m
3. Install the reinforcement in the reverse order of

removal.
20..220 BACK
Rear Fender Cover Replacement
NOTE: Right
• Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. Fastener Locations
B I> : Clip, 1 D ~ : Screw, 2 E ~:Screw,1
1. Remove the rear fender cover (A) .
...!J Remove the clip (B) that secure the fender

~D ~I
F I> : Clip, 1 H~:Bolt,7
cover and the rear strake (C) from the front of
the rear wheel arch.
-2 Remove the screws (0, E) and clip (F) that aE1f ~
secure the rear bumper (G) and fender cover
from the rear of the rear wheel arch.
-3 Remove the bolts (H) and clip(s) (I) from the
rear wheel arch.
-4 Pull out the rear fender cover.
Left
Fastener Locations
B I> : Clip, 1 D ~ : Screw, 2 E ~:Screw, 1
4€f ~ ~I
1>: Clip, 2
F 1>: Clip, 1 H~:Bolt,6
~D ~ 41
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
2. Install the fender cover in the reverse order of

• If the clip are damaged or stress-whitened,

6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
BACK 20-221
Fendetwell
Rear Strake Replacement Rear "Air Outlet Replacement "
1. Remove the clips, then remove the rear strake(A) 1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-190).
from the rear fender cover (B) and side sill panel (e).
2. Detach the hooks· (A), then remove the rear air
Fastener Locations
outlet (B). Take care not to scratch the body.
~I A
B 3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook

portions until the hooks snap into place.
A
2. Install the strakein the reverse order of removal,

20-222 BACK
Openers
Component Location Index . I,'
TAILGATE LATCH
FUEL FILL DOOR ACTUATOR

FUEL FILL DOOR LATCH
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

HOOD OPENER CABLE

BACK 20-223
Openers
Hood Opener Cable Replacement
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the body and related parts.
• Front bulkhead cover (see page 20-203)

• Front inner fender, left side as needed (see page 20-217)
• Kick panel, driver's;side (see page 20-76)
2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the hood latch (8) (see page 20-225).
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip, 6 D
~I
3. Remove the hood release handle (e) (see page 20-226), and disconnect the hood opener cable.
4. Using a clip remover, detach the clips, and remove the grommet (D) from the body, then remove the hood opener
cable from the vehicle. Take care not to kink the cable.
5. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
20-224 BACK
Hood Latch Replacement
1. Remove the front bulkhead cover (see page 20-203). 5. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
2. Disconnect the hood latch switch connector (A),
then remove the connector clip from the body. • Apply multipurpose grease to the hood latch as
indicated by the arrows.
• Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly and the hood latch switch connector is
• Make sure the cable actuates the latch before you
close the hood.
• Adjust the hood latch alignment (see step 4 on
page 20-194).
• Make sure the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (A)

from the body.
Fastener Locations
S
~: Salt, 3
£J
4. Disconnect the hood opener cable (8) from the

hood latch. Take care not to kink the cable.
BACK 20-225
"
Openers
Hood Release Handle Replacement Fuel Fill Door Latch Replacement
1. Remove the driver's kick panel (see page 20-76). NOTE:

2. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood release • Take care not to scratch the rear bumper.
handle (A).
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt,,2 • Left rear side trim panel (see page 20-92).
• Left rear fender cover (see page 20-221).
@IlIII[1l1l) I
2. From inside the vehicle, disconnect the actuator
rod (A) from the fuel fill door latch (8).
, . 3. Remove the fuel door latch (A).

3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (8) from the
hood release handle.Take care not to kink the cable. -1 Turn the latch 45 ° counterclockwise.
-2 First pull out the end ofthe latch from the
4. Install the hood release handle in the reverse order grommet (8).
of removal, and note these items: -a Remove the latch from the fuel fill door adapter
(e) .
• Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly .
• Make sure the hood opens properly.
20-226' BACK
Fuel Fill Door Actuator Replacement
4. If necessary, remove the grommet (A) by releasing NOTE:

the tabs (B) from inside the vehicle. • Put on gloves to protect your hands .
• Take care notto scratch the rear bumper.
1. Remove the left rear side trim panel (see page

20-92).
2. Disconnect the actuator rod (A) and the actuator

connector (B).
5. Install the fuel door latch in the reverse order of

• Install the grommet with the arrow mark on the

B
grommet pointing up.
• Make sure the fuel fill door opens properly and
locks securely.
3. Loosen the bolts, then remove the actuator (A) and
the bracket (B) together by sliding it upward.
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt. 2 6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
@m))Jl) I (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
4. Install the fuel door actuator in the reverse order of

• Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in

properly, and the rod is connected securely.
• Make sure the fuel fill door opens properly and
locks securely.
BACK 20-227
Openers
Tailgate Latch Replacement
1. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page

Without Power Jailgate 20-96) .
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. 2. Disconnect the tailgate latch switch connector (A)
• If the tailgate latch can't be unlocked by using the and tailgate actuator connector (8).
keyless entry transmitter or the inside/outside tailgate
switches, or by unlocking the driver's door lock, Fastener Locations
B
remove the maintenance lid (A) from the tailgate ~: Bolt, 2
~
lower trim panel, then turn the emergency lever (8)
clockwise as shown.
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
4. Pull the tailgate latch (A) out, then remove it

note these items:

properly.
• Make sure the tailgate opens properly and locks
securely.
20-228 BACK
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the
With Power Tailgate audio and the navigation system (if equipped), and
then disconnect the negative cable from the battery .
• If the tailgate latch can't be unlocked by using the NOTE: If you remove the tailgate latch while the
keyless entry transmitter or the inside/outside tailgate negative battery cable is still connected, the vehicle
switches, remove the maintenance lid (A) from the goes into the failsafe mode.
tailgate lower trim panel, then turn the emergency
lever (B) clockwise as shown. 2. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page
20-96).
3. Disconnect the tailgate latch connector (A) and

actuator connector (B).
Fastener Locations
C ~ : Bolt, 2 D ~ : Bolt, 1
0)m» @nnnn
A
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
4. Remove the bolts (e, D).
5. Pull the tailgate latch (E) out, then remove it.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-229
Openers
Tailgate Latch Replacement (cont'd)

note these items:

. properly.
• Enter the anti-theft code for the audio and the
during repairs, and clear them.
(see page 17-28).
• Set the clock.
• Make sure the tailgate opens properly and locks
securely.
20-230 BACK
Frame
Spare Tire Hoist Replacement Spare Tire Support Bracket

Replacement
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the spare tire hoist Spare Tire Support Bracket Torque
(A). Take care not to bend the cable (8).
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations ~: Bolt,6
SPARE TIRE
~
~: Bolt, 7 SUPPORT BRACKET
.1 B
8x 1.2Smm 6x1.0mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·tt) 9.8N·m
11.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf.tt)
3. Install the hoist in the reverse order of removal.
BACK 20-231
Frame,
Rear Wheelhouse Gusset Cargo UdSupport Replacement

Replacement
NOTE:
NOTE: • Take care not to scratch the body and related parts .
• Take care not to scratch the body and related parts. 1. Remove these items:
1. Remove these items: • Rear side trim panel, both sides (see page 20-92)
• Rear side trim panel support bracket (see step 11
• Rear side trim panel (see page 20-92) on page 20-94)
• Third row seat (see page 20-179) • Cargo rear trim panel (see page 20-90)
• XM receiver (see page 23-96)
2. Pull the carpet back as needed. • Active damper control unit (see page 18-118)
3. Remove the rear wheelhouse gusset (A). 2. Remove the clips fastening the rear differential
breather box (see page 15-73).
-1 Remove the ground bolt (8) and release the
harness clip (C). 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the cargo lid
-2 Remove the bolts (D). support (A). '
-a From outside the vehicle, remove the nuts (E).
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations ~: Bolt,S
~
B ~ : Bolt, 1 D ~ : Bolt, 2 E .:Nut,4
@)TITIFJQ)mn ~I
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
4. Install the support in the reverse order of removal.
9.8N·m
4. Install the gusset in the reverse order of removal.
20-232 BACK
Subframe Replacement
Front Subframe Torque
After removing the subframe mounting bolts and front subframe stiffener mounting bolts, be sure to replace them
with new ones.
12x1.25mm
117N·m
(11.9 kgf·m,
86.1 Ibf.ft)
FRONT SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME REAR
FRONT SUSPENSION BRACKET
SUBFRAME
FRONT BRACKET
SPECIAL BOLT
14x1.5mm
/
SPECIAL BOLT
12x1.25mm
74N·m
103N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 76 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
14x1.5mm
103N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 76Ibf·ft) FRONT SUSPENSION
Replace. SUBFRAME STIFFENER 10x1.25mm
54N·m
Replace.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-233
Frame
Subframe Replacement (cont'd)
Front Subframe Alignment

NOTE:
• After mounting the subframe and brackets loosely, align all of the installation reference holes in the subframe, in the
subframe front bracket, and in the body using a screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide, then tighten the bolts .
• After reinstalling all removed parts, check and adjust the front wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
INSTALLATION
REFERENCE HOLE
(Subframe side)
FRONT SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME INSTALLATION
REAR BRACKET REFERENCE HOLE
(Bracket side)
SCREWDRIVER or
TAPERED PUNCH
FRONT SUSPENSION INSTALLATION

SUBFRAME REFERENCE HOLE
INSTALLATION
REFERENCE HOLE
20-234 BACK
Rear Subframe Torque
NOTE:
• When installing, align both installation reference hol.es in the subframe with the reference holes in the body ~sing a
screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide .
• After removing the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones.
Reference hole alignment
REFERENCE HOLE
(Body side)
INSTALLATION
REFERENCE HOLE
(Subframe side)
SCREWDRIVER or
TAPERED PUNCH
LOWER INSULATOR
REAR SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME
.. Front
SPECIAL BOLT SPECIAL BOLT

14x1.5mm 14x 1.5 mm
83 N·m (8.5 kgf·m, 61 Ibf·tt) 83 N·m (8.5 kgf·m, 61 Ibf·tt)
Replace. Replace.
BACK 20-235
Frame
Frame Repair Chart
Top View
Unit: mm (in.) a For bumper beam mount 811 (0.43)

8: Inner diameter b1 For front subframEl mount 815(0.59) forward
b2 For front subframe mount 815(0.59) rearward
c For engine side mount 813(0.51)
d Front damper center hole 880 (3.15)
e Side frame gusset locating hole 828(1.1)
VERTICAL LINE b2
c ("
268 (10.6)
rt-,
d
/ /
e
·0)~
~ ~c:::: \~ ~ ()/~
I
in
----------- ---- ~
rMl ( If
~
iIn
en.... ~
;;
In N N
~
iii
CENTER ... ~ ! !:i
en
iii
...m
!!
LINE !:1 s:!
'"~ ~ l::! !3
It I ~ l\
I ~~
~JZj ---- t~KJ .
-----
\j\r~
'------i
'/
I~
~
I >1
~
59 (2.32)
481 (18.9) 374 (14.7)
727 (28.6) 705 (27.76)
20-236 BACK
f For propeller shaft mount 612 (0.47) Rear frame locating hole 623 (0.91) forward
g1 For fuel tank mount 615 (0.59) left side forward k1 For rear subframe mount 616 (0.63) forward
g2 For fuel tank mount 615 (0.59) right side forward k2 For rear subframe mount 616 (0.63) rearward
g3 For fuel tank mount 615 (0.59)right side rearward I For rear damper mount center
g4 For fuel tank mount 615 (0.59) left side rearward m Lower arm stopper bracket locating hole 611 (0.43)
h1 For trailing arm mount 617 (0.67) outside n Rear frame locating hole 625 (0.98) rearward
h2 For trailing arm mount 617 (0.67) center side 0 For spare tire hoist mount 69 (0.35) forward
Floor frame extension locating hole 625 (0.98) p For spare tire hoist mount 69 (0.35) rearward
f k1
r- .......
N
r-- <;
...
.,;
.....,
CD
1530
(60.24)
1665 (65.55)
1786 (70.31)
2134 (84.02)
2166 (85.28)
2277 (89.65)
2365 (93.11)
2490 (98.03)
2514 (98.98)
2814 (110.8)
2868 (112.9) 3055
(120.3) 3297
(129.8)
3635 (143.1)
(cant'd)
BACK 20-237
Frame
Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)
Side View
Unit: mm (in.)
8: Inner diameter
a For bumper beam mount 811 (0.43)
b1 For front subframe mount 815 (0.59) forward
b2 For front subframe mount 815 (0.59) rearward
c For engine side mount'813 (0.51)
d Front damper center hole 880 (3.15)
e Side frame gusset locating hole 828 (1.1)
132 (5.20)
80
(3.15)
3-e11.5 (0.45)
[ SECTION: AA ]
c
M10x 1.25
N
...
~
M ;!
co co
~
..,
M
BASE
LINE
;:::
!i
.., III
~
'"
b2
b1 M14x 1.5
M14x 1.5
VERTICAL LINE e
20-238 BACK
f For propeller shaft mount 812 (0.47) Rear frame locating hole 823 (0.91) forward
g1 For fuel tank mount 815 (0.59) left side forward k1 For rear subfrarne mount 816 (0.63) forward
g2 For fuel tank mount 815 (0.59) right side forward k2 For rear subframe mount 816 (0.63) rearward
g3 For fuel tank mount 815 (0.59)right side rearward For rear damper mount center
g4 For fuel tank mount 815 (0.59) left side rearward m Lower arm stopper bracket locating hole 811 (0.43)
h1 For trailing arm mount 817 (0.67) outside n Rear frame locating hole 825 (0.98) rearward
h2 For trailing arm mount 817 (0.67) center side
Floor frame extension locating hole 825 (0.98)
[ SECTION: BB ]
BASELINE--~----------~~----------1-----------
CENTERLINE
h1 n
M14x 1.25
;:::: ;::::
in
0 co
N
;:::: ~ ii!
~
::f
~ ~ !i ~
N
In
...... ...
!:.
~ N
N
~
In
...
en l::!
!:.
...'" co
~
BACK 20-239
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If HVAC maintenance is required)
airbags in the front seat,backs. Information necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this Service Manual.
caused by unintentional deployment ofthe airbags and/or side airbags.
collision, or the airbags may deploy.
BACK
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)
HVACJ Heati,n g,. Vertilation, and Front Mode Control Motor Test ................ 21-112
Air ConditloIllng Front Mode Control Motor
Special Tools ............................................... 21-2 Replacement ............................................ 21-112
Recirculation Control Motor Test .............. 21-113
Recirculation Control Motor
Climate Control Replacement ............................................ 21-113
Component Location Index ....................... 21-3 Climate Control Unit
NC Service Tips and Precautions ............. 21-6 Removal/Installation ............................... 21-114
NC Refrigerant Oil Replacement .............. 21-6 Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement .......... 21-114
Front NC Line Replacement ...................... 21-7 Blower Unit Removal/Installation ............. 21-115
General Troubleshooting Information ...... 21-8 Blower Unit Component Replacement ..... 21-116
DTCTroubleshooting Index ....................... 21-15 Front Evaporator Core Replacement ........ 21-117
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 21-17 * Heater Unit/Core Replacement ................. 21-118
System Description .................................... 21-18 Heater Valve Cable Adjustment ................ 21-122
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 21-28 NC Compressor Replacement .................. 21-123
DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 21-32 NC Compressor Clutch Check .................. 21-125
Rear Mode Control Motor Circuit NC Compressor Clutch Overhaul ............. 21-126
Troubleshooting ...................................... 21-91 NC Compressor Relief Valve
Climate Control Unit Troubleshooting ..... 21-93 Replacement ............................................ 21-127
Radiator and NC Condenser Fan NC Condenser Replacement ..................... 21-128
Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting ...... 21-94 Receiver/Dryer Desiccant Replacement ... 21-129
NC Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit Refrigerant Recovery ................................. 21-130
Troubleshooting ...................................... 21-98 System Evacuation ..................................... 21-131
AlC Compressor Clutch Circuit System Charging ........................................ 21-132
Troubleshooting ...................................... 21-100 Refrigerant Leak Test ................................. 21-133
Humidity/In-car Temperature Sensor NC System Test ......................................... 21-134
Test ........................................................... 21-103
Humidity/In-car Temperature Sensor Rear Climate Control
Replacement ............................................ 21-104 Component Location Index ....................... 21-137
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Test ...... 21-105 System Description .................................... 21-138
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Rear NC Line Replacement ....................... 21-139
Replacement ............................................ 21-105 Rear Heater Line Replacement .................. 21-140
SunlightSensorTest .................................. 21-106 Rear Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Sunlight Sensor Replacement ................... 21-106 Test ........................................................... 21-141
Front Evaporator Temperature Sensor * Rear Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Test ........................................................... 21-107 Replacement ............................................ 21-141
Front Evaporator Temperature Sensor * Rear Power Transistor Test ....................... 21-142
Replacement ............................................ 21-107 Rear Air Mix Control Motor Test ............... 21-143
Front Power Transistor Test ...................... 21-108 * Rear Air Mix Control Motor
Driver's Air Mix Control Motor Test .......... 21-109 Replacement ............................................ 21-143
Driver's Air Mix Control Motor Rear Mode Control Motor Test .................. 21-144
Replacement ............................................ 21-110 * Rear Mode Control Motor
Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor Replacement ............................................ 21-144
Test ........................................................... 21-110 * Rear Climate Control Panel
Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor Removal/Installation ............................... 21-145
Replacement ............................................ 21-111 * Rear Blower Motor Replacement .............. 21-145
* Rear Heater Core Replacement ................. 21-146
* Rear HVAC Unit Removal/Installation ...... 21-147
* Rear HVAC Unit Component
Replacement ............................................ 21-149
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)
Special Tools
Tool Number Descri tion

07SAZ-001000A
CD
21-2 BACK
Climate Control
SERVICE VALVE .
(LQW.PRESSURE SIDE)
FRONT EVAPORATOR CORE

(Located·in the heater unit)
Replacement, page 21·117
RECEIVER/DRYER DESICCANT
Replacement, page 21·129
A/C COMPRESSOR
Clutch Check, page 21-125
Clutch Overhaul, page 21-126
Relief Valve Replacement, page 21-127
(cont'd)
BACK 21-3
Climate Control
FAN CONTROL RELAY

Test, page 22"77 '
AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
Test, page 22-77
AIC CONDENSER FAN RELAY
Test, page 22-77
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
Test, page 22-77
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
Test, page 22-77
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Test, page 21-105
RADIATOR FAN
AIC COI~"'DE:NSIER FAN
21-4 BACK
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
Test, page 21-106
HEATER VALVE FRONT EVAPORATOR CORE
CABLE (Located-in the heater unit)
Adjustment, Replacement, page 21-117
page 21-122
HEATER UNIT/CORE
Replacement, page 21-1 i8
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-112
BLOWER UNIT ,
/ page 21-115
Component Replacement,
page 21-116
DUST AND
POLLEN FILTER
Replacement,
page 21-114
RECIRCULATION
CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-113
DRIVER'S AIR MIX Replacement, page 21-113
CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-109
Replacement, PAS.SENGER'S AIR MIX
page 21-110 CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-110
FRONT EVAPORATOR Replacement, page 21-111
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Test, page 21-107
Replacement, CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
page 21-107 Removal/Installation,
page21-114
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR
Test, page 21-103 Test, page 21-108
BACK 21-5
Climate Control
A/C Service Tips and Precautions A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement

Recommended PAG oil: DENSO NO-OIL 8
~WARNING
• Compressed air mixed with the R-134a forms a • PIN 38897-PR7-A01AH: 120 mL (4 fl·oz)
combustible vapor. • PIN 38899-PR7-A01: 40 mL (1 1/3 fl·oz)
• The vapor can burn or explode causing serious
injury. Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount
• Never use compressed air to pressure test listed if you replace any of the following parts.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air
conditioning systems. • To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the
, container once dispensed, and never mix it with other
refrigerant oils.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on
~CAUTION the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
• Air conditioning refr,igerant or lubricant vapor absorption.
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. • Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. immediately.
NC condenser
The air conditioning system uses HFC-134a (R-134a) (including Dryer
refrigerant and polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrig~rant oil, Des~ccant) ................ 50 mL (1 2/3 fl·oz)
which are not compatible with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant Front Evaporator ..... 40 mL (1 1/3 fl·oz)
and mineral oil. Do not use R-12 refrigerant or mineral Rear Evaporator ...... 30 mL (1 fl·oz)
oil in this system, and do not attempt,to use R-12 Line or hose ............. 10 mL (1/3 fl·oz)
servicing equipment; damage to the air conditioning Receiver/Dryer
system or your servicing equipment will result. Desiccant ................. 10 mL (1/3 fl·oz)
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is Leakage repair ......... 25 mL (5/6 fl·oz)
certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to NC compressor .......For NC compressor replacement,
remove R-134a from the air conditioning system. subtract the volume of oil drained
from the removed NC
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work compressor from
area before resuming service. 125 mL (4 2/9 fl·oz), and drain the
calculated volume of oil from the
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning new NC compressor: 125 mL
systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested (42/9 fl·oz) - Volume of removed
with compressed air. NC compressor =Volume to
drain from new NC compressor.
Additional health and safety information may be
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant NOTE: Even if no oil is drained
manufacture'rs. from the removed NC
compressor, don't drain more
• Always disconnect the negative cable,from the than 50 mL (1 2/3 fl·oz) from the
battery whenever replacing air conditioning parts. new NC compressor,
• Keep moisture and dirt out of the system. When
disconnecting any lines, plug or cap the fittings REMOVED NEW
gogo
AIC COMPRESSOR AIC COMPRESSOR
immediately; don't remove the caps or plugs until
just before you reconnect each line.
• Before connecting any hose or line, apply a few drops
of refrigerant oil to the O-ring. 6 6 66
• When tightening or loosening a fitting, use a second

wrench to support the matching fitting.
• When discharging the system, use an R-134a
refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station; don't
H----i=:'}.
A: 125 mL 14 2/9 fl.G.)
release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
21-6 BACK
Front Ale Line Replacement
FRONT SUCTION LINE
®
(j)
A/C CONDENSER
A/C COMPRESSOR
BRACKET
A/C COMPRESSOR
®
CD Discharge hose to the A/C compressor 16 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf·m. 7.2Ibf·tt)
® Discharge hose to the A/C condenser 16 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf·m. 7.2 Ibf·tt)
® Front receiver line to the AlC condenser 16 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf.m. 7.2 Ibf·tt)
CD A/C pressure sensor to the front receiver line 111 x 1.0 mm): 10.8 N·m 11.1 kgf·m. 8.0 Ibf·tt)
® Front receiver line to the front evaporator (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m. 7.2 Ibf·tt)
® Front suction line to the front evaporator (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m. 7.2 Ibf·tt)
(j) Front suction line to the suction hose 16 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf·m. 7.2 Ibf·tt)
® Suction hose to the A/C compressor 16 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf·m. 7.2 Ibf.ft)
® A/C compressor to the A/C compressor bracket 18 x 1.25 mml: 22 N·m 12.2 kgf.m. 16.2 Ibf·ttl
®l A/C compressor to the engine block 110 x 1.25 mml: 45 N·m 14.6 kgf·m. 33.2Ibf·ttl
BACK 21-7
Climate Control
How to Check for OTCs with the HOS
1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the climate control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC
5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select DTCs in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL menu.
7. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are indicated, write down the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting. If
no DTCs are indicated, refer to symptom troubleshooting.
NOTE:
• After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs with the HDS .
• For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the HDS.
21-8 BACK
How to Use the Self-diagnostic Function with the HOS
1. Make sure the ignition.switch is OFF.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the climate control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC
5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select INSPECTION in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL menu.
7. Select CLIMATE CONTROL SELF TEST in the INSPECTION menu.
8. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are ·indicated, write down the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting.
NOTE:
• After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs with the HDS .
• For specific operations, refer to the u~er's manual that came with the HDS.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-9
Climate Control
How to Use the Self-diagnostic Function without the HDS
The climate control unit has a self-diagnostic function. To run the self-diagnostic function, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II).
2. Press and hold the OFF button, then press the RECIRCULATION CONTROL button five times within 10 seconds.
Release the OFF and RECIRCULATION CONTROL buttons; then the self-diagnostic begins.
NOTE:
• The blower motor will run at various speeds regardless of what the panel is displaying.
• Ifthere is any problem in the system, the system flashes "88 AUTO WINDSHIELD DEFROST"or alternately
flashes "88 AUTO WINDSHIELD DEFROST" and one or more ofthe 14 segments (A through Pl. Refer to
checking for DTCs.
• If there are no problems detected, the segments will not illuminate, and the system will appear to be turned off.
DRIVER'S TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR AUTO INDICATOR WINDSHIELD DEFROST INDICATOR
RECIRCULATION CONTROL BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Canceling the Self-diagnostic Function
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing repair work, run the self-
diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other DTCs.
21-10 BACK
Checking for DTCs
The temperature display indicates single or multiple DTCs. If indicator segments A, B, C, E, G, J, M, N, AUTO, and
WINDSHIELD DEFROST are on at the same time, there may be an open in the common ground wire. If no DTCs are
present, the indicator remains blank.
DRIVER'S TEMPERATURE INDICATOR AUTO INDICATOR WINDSHIELD DEFROST INDICATOR
AUTO
DTe (Driver's Detection Item

Temperature Indicator
Segment, AUTO, and
WINDSHIELD
DEFROST Indicator)
AandAUTO An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-41)
BandAUTO A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-43)
CandAUTO An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-44)
DandAUTO A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see paJ}e 21-45)
E and AUTO An open in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-46)
F and AUTO A short in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-47)
G and AUTO An open in the front evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see paQe 21-48)
H and AUTO A short in the front evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-50)
J and AUTO An open in the driver's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-51)
KandAUTO A short in the driver's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-52)
Land AUTO A problem in the driver's air mix control linkage, door, or motor circuit (see page
21-55)
M and AUTO An open in the passenger's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-56)
N and AUTO A short in the passenger's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-57)
PandAUTO A problem in the passenger's air mix control linkage, door, or motor circuit (see page
21-60)
(cont'd)
BACK 21-11
Climate Control
DTC (Driver's Detection Item

Temperature Indicator
Segment, AUTO, and
WINDSHIELD
DEFROST Indicator)
AUTO Climate control unit lost communication with gauge control module (ECT message)
(see page 21-32)
A An open or short in the front mode control motor circuit (see J!age 21-62)
B A problem in the front mode control linkage, doors, or motor circuit (see page 21-64)
C A problem in the front blower motor circuit (see page 21-65)
F An open in the rear air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-69)
G A short in the rear air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-70)
H Aproblem in the rear air mix control linkage, door, or motor circuit (see page 21-73)
J An open or short in the recirculation control motor circuit (see page 21-36)
K A problem in the recirculation control linkage, door, or motor circuit (see page 21-88)
M A problem in the rear blower motor circuit (see page 21-38)
N An open in the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-33)
p A short in the rear evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-34)
A and WINDSHIELD An open in the humidity sensor circuit (see page 21-76), a short in the humidity sensor
DEFROST circuit (see page 21-77)
B and WINDSHIELD An open in the AlC pressure sensor circuit (see page 21-81), a short in the AlC
DEFROST pressure sensor circuit (see page 21-83)
Displaying Sensor Inputs at the Climate Control Unit
The climate control unit has a mode that displays sensor inputs it receives. This mode shows you what the climate
control unit is receiving from each of the sensors, one at a time, and it can help you determine if a sensor is faulty.
Check these items before using the sensor input display mode
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and cheek the recirculation door function; press the recirculation button to switch
from FRESH to RECIRC. The air volume and sound should change slightly.
2. Set the temperature control knob to the desired test temperature. When selecting the test temperature, note these
items:
• "Lo" temperature setting will default to MAX COOL, VENT, and RECIRC.
• "Hi" temperature setting will default to MAX HOT, FLOOR, and FRESH.
• 58 through 86 "F settings will use the automatic.climate control logic.
21-12 BACK
To run the sensor input display mode, follow these steps
2. Press and hold both the AUTO and RECIRCULATION CONTROL buttons, then start the engine.
3. After the engine starts, release both buttons. The display panel control unit will flash the sensor number and then
the value for that sensor. Record the value displayed.
4. To advance to the next sensor, press the REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER button.
Sensor Item Displayed Value

1 In-car Temperature "C
2 Outside Air Temperature "C
3 Solar Radiation Sensor Value: Dark =00, Flashlight =04, Cloudy = 10, Sunny = kcal/m 2.h
65
4 Front Eva~orator Outlet Air Tem~erature "C
5 Driver's and Passenger's Air Mix Opening (Low value indicates cooler air % of opening
distribution, higher value indicates warmer air distribution)
6 Vent Temperature Air Out (TAO) "C
7 Vehicle Speed (Vehicle must be driven to display speed) km/h
8 AlC Pressure 10kPa
9 Rear Air Mix Opening % of opening
A Rear Vent Temperature Air Out (TAO) "C
B Rear Evaporator Outlet Air Temperature "C
C Humidity Sensor Value % rh
D Fog Margin "C
E Solar Radiation azimuth (With navigation system) 10°
F Solar Radiation angle of elevation (With navigation system) 10°
NOTE:
• The sensor values will be displayed in degrees Celsius ("C) or an alphanumeric code. Use the chart to convert
the value to degrees Fahrenheit (~).
• If the sensor value displays "Er" this indicates there is an open or short in the circuit or sensor. Check for DTCs
using the HDS, or refer to checking DTCs by DTC indication.
• If necessary, compare the sensor input display to a known-good vehicle under the same test conditions.
• If the sensor is out of the normal range, refer to the sensor test or substitute a known-good sensor, and recheck.
5. To cancel the sensor input display mode, press the AUTO button or turn the ignition switch OFF.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-13
Climate Control
Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion Table

'C 'f 'C 'f 'C 'f 'C 'f 'C 'f
0 32 10 50 20 68 30 86 40 104
1 34 11 52 21 70 31 88 41 106
2 36 12 54 22 72 32 90 42 108
3 37 13 55 23 73 33 91 43 109
4 39 14 57 24 75 34 93 44 111
5 41 15 59 25 77 35 95 45 113
6 43 16 61 26 79 36 97 46 115
7 45 17 . 63 27 81 37 99 47 117
8 46 18 64 28 82 38 100 48 118
9 48 19 66 29 84 39 102 49 120
'C 'f 'C 'f 'C 'f 'C 'f 'C 'f
50 122 60 140 70 158 80 176 90 194
51 124 61 142 71 160 81 178 91 196
52 126 62 144 72 162 82 180 92 198
53 127 63 145 73 163 83 181 93 199
54 128 64 147 74 165 84 183 94 201
55 131 65 149 75 167 85 185 95 203
56 133 66 151 76 169 86 187 96 205
57 135 67 152 77 170 87 188 97 207
58 136 68 154 78 172 88 190 98 208
59 139 69 158 79 174 89 192 99 210
·Converslon
AIIPIhanumerlc . T a ble
Display Reading 'C 'f %
(Alphanumeric)
A1 thru A9 -1 thru -9 30 thru 16 -1 thru-9
BOthru B9 -10thru -19 14thru-2 -10thru -19
COthru C9 -20thru -29 -4thru -20 -20thru -29
DOthru D9 -30thru -39 -22thru -38 -30thru -39
EO thru E9 -40thru -49 -40thru -58 -40thru -49
FO thru F9 -- -- +100 thru +109
21-14 BACK
Ch ec k"Ing t he DTCs b)y HDS

DTC Detection Item or Symptom ECU DTCtype Page
81200 Communication bus line error (bus-off) Climate control Loss of (see page 22-129)
unit communication
81202 Climate control unit internal error Climate control Internal error (see page 21-32)
unit
81205 Climate control unit lost communication Climate control Loss of (see page 21-32)
with gauge control module (VSP/NE unit communication
messag~)
with gauge control module (ECr unit communication
message)
with gauge control module (lLLUMI unit communication
message)
81213 An open in the rear evaporator Climate control Signal error (see page 21-33)
temperature sensor circuit unit
81214 A short in the rear evaporator Climate control Signal error (see page 21-34)
81215 An open or short in the recirculation Climate control Signal error (see page 21-36)
control motor circuit unit
81223 A problem in the rear blower motor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-38)
circuit unit
81225 An open in the in-car temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-41)
sensor circuit unit
81226 A short in the in-car temperature sensor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-43)
circuit unit
81227 An open in the outside air temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-44)
sensor circuit unit
81228 A short in the outside air temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-45)
sensor circuit unit
81229 An open in the sunlight sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-46)
unit
81230 A short in the sunlight sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-47)
unit
81231 An open in the front evaporator Climate control Signal error (see page 21-48)
81232 A short in the front evaporator Climate control Signal error (see page 21-50)
81233 An open in the driver's air mix control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-51)
motor circuit unit
81234 A short in the driver's air mix control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-52)
motor circuit unit
81235 A problem in the driver's air mix control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-55)
linkage, door, or motor circuit unit
81236 An open in the passenger's air mix Climate control Signal error (see page 21-56)
81237 A short in the passenger's air mix Climate control Signal error (see page 21-57)
81238 A problem in the passenger's air mix Climate control Signal error (see page 21-60)
control linkage, door, or motor circuit unit
(cont'd)
BACK 21-15
Climate Control
Checkingthe DlC5 b)y HDS

DlC Detection Item or Symptom ECU DlCtyp_e Page
81239 An open or short in the front mode Climate control Signal error (see page 21-62)
81240 A problem in the front mode control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-64)
linkage, doors, or motor circuit unit
81241 A problem in the front blower motor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-65)
circuit unit
81244 An open in the rear air mix control motor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-69)
circuit unit
81245 A short in the rear air mix control motor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-70)
circuit unit
81246 A problem in the rear air mix control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-73)
linkage, door, or motor circuit unit
with rear climate control panel unit communication
82967 An open in the humidity sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-76)
unit
82968 A short in the humidity sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-77)
unit
with combination switch control unit unit communication
(WIPSW message)
with relay control module (RM message) unit communication
82979 An open in the AlC pressure sensor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-81)
circuit unit
82980 A short in the AlC pressure sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-83)
unit
with navigation unit unit communication
82983 A problem in the recirculation control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-88)
Iink<!Re, door, or motor circuit unit
with audio unit unit communication
21-16 BACK
SYmptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
Rear mode control doors do not Rear mode control motor circuit troubleshooting • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
change between ceiling vents (see page 21-91) • Blown fuse No. 30 (10 A) in the under-dash
(cool) and floor vents (hot) fuse/relay box
• Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
Blower, heater controls, and AlC Climate control unittroubleshooting (see page • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
do not work 21-93) • Blown fuse No. 30 (10 A) in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
• Poor ground at G506 (see page 22-67)
• ,Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
Both fans do not run at low speed Radiator and AlC condenser fan low speed circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
with the AlC on (but the AlC troubleshooting (see page 21"94) • Blown fuse No. 15 (30 A) in the relay block,
compressor runs with the AlC on) and No. 30 (10 A) in the under-dash fuse/
relay box
• Poor ground at G301 (see page 22-67)
The AlC condenser fan does not AlC condenser fan high speed circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
run at high speed (but both fans troubleshooting (see page 21-98) • Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
run at low speed and the AlC
compressor operates with the AlC
on)
Both fans do not run at high speed ECT troubleshooting: ECT sensor 2 circuit low • Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
with the AlC on (but both fans run voltage (see page 11-175), ECT sensor 2 circuit high • Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
at low speed and the A/C voltage (see page 11-177)
compressor operates with the AlC
on)
The AlC compressor clutch does A/C compressor clutch circuit troubleshooting • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
not engage (but both fans run with (see page 21-100) • Blown fuse No.7 (7.5 A) in the relay block,
theA/C on) and No. 30 (10 A) in the under-dash fuse/
relay box
Blower fan(s) runs slower than ECT troubleshooting: ECT sensor 2 circuit low Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
expected in cold weather voltage (see page 11-175), ECT sensor 2 circuit high
voltage (see page 11-177)
NOTE: It is normal for the blower(s) to run slowly
until the angine coolant temperature begins to rise.
If the blower continues to run slowly for an
abnormal length oftime, continue to troubleshoot
the problem.
HDS does not communicate with Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-223)
the climate control unit or the
vehicle
BACK 21-17
Climate Control
System Description
The air conditioning system removes heat from the passenger compartment by transferring heat from the ambient air
to the evaporator. The evaporator cools the air with the refrigerant that is circulating through the evaporator. The
refrigerant expands in the evaporator, and the evaporator becomes very cold and absorbs the heat from the ambient
air. The blower fan pushes air across the evaporator where the heat is absorbed, and then it blows the cool air into the
passenger . compartment.
EXPANSION VALVE
(Meters the required amount of
refrigerant into the, evaporator)
IY FRONT BLOWER FAN

./ FRONT EVAPORATOR
~=~~~'" (Absorption of heat)
FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR

(Triple function)
t RELIEF VALVE
(Relieves pressure at the A/C compressor
when the pressure is too high)
When the refrigerantis below
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm', 28 psi)
or above 3,140 kPa (32 kgf/cm',
455 psi), the PCM turns the
com pressor relay off to protect
the AlC compressor. .
When the refrigerant is above
t
1,470 kPa (15.0 kgf/cm', 213 psi),
the AlC pressure sensor
switches the radiator and
AlC condenser fans to high speed.
HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR
HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID

AlC CONDENSER
(Radiation of heat)
RECEIVER/DRYER
III. LOW PRESSURE LIQUID
DESICCANT
(Traps debris, and
removes moisture)
Eli• •
1 HII' LOW PRESSURE VAPOR
This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant, which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the
following service items:
• Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
• Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil (DENSO NO-OIL 8) designed for the R-134a AlC
compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil with any other refrigerant oil will result in AlC
compressor failure.
• All AlC system parts (AIC compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, AlC condenser, receiver/dryer,
expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are designed for refrigerant R-134a. Do not exchange with R-12 parts.
• Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
• R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a recovery/recycling/charging
station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to service the R-134a air
conditioning systems.
• Always recover refrigerant R-134a with an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before disconnecting any
AlC fitting.
21-18 BACK
Humidity /In-car Temperature Sensor
The humidity sensor consists of two sensors. One is the humidity detection part and the other is the in-car
temperature detection part. When the climate control unit receives the signals of the in-car condition from the
humidity sensor, and judges that the humidity in the vehicle is very low, the climate control unit adjusts the
compressor. Engine power loss is kept to a minimum.
HUMIDITY
INSPECTION
SECTION
Humidity/In-car Temperature Sensor Quality
The capacitance of the humidity sensor changes by the adsorption and the evaporation of moisture. The resistance
change of the humidity sensor changes the output voltage.
5
4
./'
./
3
/
/'
VOLTAGE ./
(V)
2
/
V
./
/V
i-""
o
o 20 40 60 80 100
HUMIDITY LEVEL (0/0 rh)
(cont'd)
BACK 21-19
Climate Control
Ale Pressure Sensor

The AlC pressure sensor converts AlC pressure into electrical signals to the PCM.
NOTE: The pressures can be monitored using the HDS PGM-FI Data List.
SENSOR UNIT
The response of the AlC pressure sensor is shown in the graph.
v
4.575
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
(Vout)
0.684
0.425
0.2945
-99 o 196 3.138 kPa

(-1) (2) (32) (kgf/cm')
[ -14] [28] [455] [psi]
Ale PRESSURE
Vcc5V Vout GND
21-20 BACK
Climate Control Door Positions
_HOT
••
"
(VENTI
AIR MIX
DOORS
DEFROSTER
DOOR
HEATNENT
DOOR
(HEATNENTI
(HEATI
(cant'd)
BACK 21-21
Climate Control
"'HOT ¢::=JCOOL
(HEAT/DEF)
(DEF)
21-22 BACK
Dual Air Mix Control System
Driver's side: HOT Driver's side: COOL
Passenger's side: COOL Passenger's side: HOT
DRIVER'S AIR MIX DOOR
PASSENGER'S AIR MIX DOOR
(cont'd)
BACK 21-23
Climate Control
i-Dual and i-Tri Climate Control System (With navigation system)
The "i-Dual" climate control system automatically controls the temperature and the vent mode of the air direction to
the driver's and passenger's side, depending on the angle of the sun, and the direction of the vehicle. It calculates
information such as date, time, longitude, and latitude from the navigation system, as well as the radiant strength of
the sun from the sunlight sensor, to determine the appropriate mode position and temperature to be directed to each
side. The "i-Tri" climate control system is an addition of the automatic controls with the temperature and the vent
mode of the air direction to the rear section to the "i-Dual" climate control system.
,,
,
~AVIGATION SYSTEM
DATE
IRRADIATE STRENGTH LONGITUDE
LATITUDE
DIRECTION OF THE VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT

L -______________________________
~
~
~
.... .. REAR CLIMATE
CONTROL PANEL
With i-Tri
FRONT DUAL AIR MIX CONTROL REAR AIR MIX CONTROL
REAR AIR MIX DOOR
PASSENGER'S
AIR MIX DOOR
In the event that the navigation system malfunctions, or when driving in areas where the navigation system cannot
determine the vehicle position (non-coverage areas, tunnels, etc.), the climate control system will operate the same as
a vehicle without a navigation system.
21-24 BACK
Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
CONNECTOR A
Cavity Wire color Signal
1 WHT BACKUP INPUT
2 VEL NAVIGATION UNIT (S!)" INPUT
3 VEL IG2(Power) INPUT
4 LTGRN B-CAN INPUT/OUTPUT
5 LTBLU IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
6 GRV COMMON POTENTIAL 5V OUTPUT
8 RED SENSOR COMMON GROUND INPUT
9 BLU FRONT BLOWER FEEDBACK INPUT
10 RED FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR CONTROL OUTPUT
11 PUR DRIVER'S AIR MIX POTENTIAL OUTPUT
12 PNK DRIVER'S AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT
13 LTBLU DRIVER'S AIR MIX COOL OUTPUT
14 LTGRN PASSENGER'S AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT
15 VEL PASSENGER'S AIR MIX COOL OUTPUT
16 GRN FRONT MODE DEF OUTPUT
17 ORN FRONT MODE VENT OUTPUT
18 VEL FRESH OUTPUT
19 ORN RECIRCULATE OUTPUT
21 BLU NAVIGATION UNIT (CLK)" OUTPUT
22 RED NAVIGATION UNIT (SO)" OUTPUT
23 LTBLU ILLUMI(+) INPUT
24 BRN FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
25 PUR ACC INPUT
26 LTGRN AlC PRESSURE SENSOR OUTPUT
27 VEL HUMIDITY SENSOR OUTPUT
28 PNK OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
29 PUR SUNLIGHT SENSOR OUTPUT
30 BLU PASSENGER'S AIR MIX POTENTIAL OUTPUT
31 WHT FRONT MODE CONTROL MODE 1 OUTPUT
32 LTGRN FRONT MODE CONTROL MODE 2 OUTPUT
33 PUR FRONT MODE CONTROL MODE 3 OUTPUT
34 BLU FRONT MODE CONTROL MODE 4 OUTPUT
35 WHT RECIRCULATION CONTROL MODE 1 OUTPUT
36 BLK RECIRCULATION CONTROL MODE 2 OUTPUT
37 BLK GROUND (G506) OUTPUT
38 GRN RECIRCULATION CONTROL MODE 3 OUTPUT
*: With navigation system
(cont'd)
BACK 21-25
Climate Control
Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
CONNECTORB
1 GRN REAR AIR MIX COOL OUTPUT
2 PNK REAR AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT
3 VEL REAR MODE HEAT INPUT
4 BLK REAR MODE VENT INPUT
5 PUR REAR AIR MIX POTENTIAL OUTPUT
6 LTBLU REAR EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
8 BLU AUDIO UNIT (HVAC BUS) INPUT/OUTPUT
11 ORN REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL (AIC BUS RX) INPUT/OUTPUT
12 GRN REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL (AIC BUS TX) INPUT/OUTPUT
13 RED REAR BLOWER FEEDBACK INPUT
14 BLU REAR POWER TRANSISTOR CONTROL OUTPUT
Rear Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL 10P CONNECTOR
11 VI3 VI2131 1/191 1 7 10

1 VEL IG2 (Power) INPUT
3 BLK GROUND (G506) OUTPUT
7 LTBLU ILLUMI(+) INPUT
9 GRN CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT (AIC BUS TX) INPUT/OUTPUT
10 ORN CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT (AIC BUS RX) INPUT/OUTPUT
21-26 BACK
BACK
Climate Control
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER-HOOD RJSE BOX

SAIlEIIY
No.21RR BlOWERI130Al
+ PNK
IG2CUTRELAY UNDER-DASH RJSE/RELAY BOX
4
No.l~1120AI NoJIIGII50AI No.30ll0Al
no WHT , GRN
A4 N20
VEl
0':
07
VEl
PNK
AS NoJl 110 AI N39

YEl PUR
PCM
ISTRlY) [:>--lTGRN PNK
--[>- TRANSMISSION
RAGE SWITCH
IP,NI
No.4 140 AI 85 No.lll0AI Xl5
~ WHY WHY
NoJ
1R831
160 AI
No.7 ~.5A1 RJSE

IntheRELAY
CONTHOl MODULE
?PUR REO
RELAY BlOCK In the UNDER-HOOD RJSE/RElAY BOX
No.12 140 AI
-iT'
No.7~5AI
""""
I No~~~:A1======~~:;::=t________-rN1CDflG~D}EAir
1 r.:::1 2 ________ -t____1r-:::~-t__1-_____________ PUR
4
RADIATOR
FAN RElAY
i 1
No.1S
130 AI FAN
CONTROL
r-'1+...:.:RE=LA:::Y__--1..;;5., 1
NC
CONDENSER
FAN RElAY 4
I!.:.I
4
AlC
COMPRESSOR
ClUTCH RELAY 1 4
FIIONT
BLOWER
MOTOR
RELAY
I~---------~111 i\;------~ I I~,-----------{ II g-----------:111 g---------,11 2 3 2
BRN PUR RED BlU WHY RED PUR BLK WHT
f 1 I
REO
G202
~~
RADIATOR NC
M FAN CONDENSER
FAN MOTOR
MOTOR
COMPRESSOR
A4 A13 ClUTCH
FANlO ACCl
UNDER-DASH
5V
CANlO
CAN HI
"!!. RED.!6.
A48 A12
••• WHT···
~o= AS N22 •
fi;:iX27
1
•• ·lTGRN ••• •••••••• • ••• lTGRN ••••••••
ENGINE COOlANT
BlK tEMPERATURE IEC1J SENSOR 2
....;.;+A2.;;I;..PUR-----BlU~
TW2
1
0001
PCM
r
__
SG
A2l GRN--------------~------------
.....
21-28 BACK
•••••••••• : CAN line
-----------------P~------------------------------------------------------------------~®
-------------------~L----------------------------------------------------------------------~®
-------------------PUR------------------------------------------------------------------------~©
-----------------------wm----------------------------------------------------------------~@
AlONT AIONTPOWER
BLOWER MOTOR mANSlSTOR
wm _ _ _~' @l---GRNiffrl
Ifl1
BLU ~
G507
IS AID CUMATI CONTROL UNIT
A4
ORMNGCIRCUIT
LTG N
OUTSiDE AIR
TIMPERATIJRf
SENSOR
AlONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR RECIRCULAT10N CONTROL MOTOR
S-COM S-COM
7
RED ~ wm RED RED
1--I_RED-_I- - ---~I-----~---_I--~-----®
1..-
(cont'd)
BACK 21-29
Climate Control
~mK----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
~va----------------------------------------~~---------------------------------------YEL-----
!With navigation system)

r-"-~~o~~"-"l
I -~
c::J
AUDIO UNIT
I 51
J£
SO a.K
: C24
I A4 A14 A15
I
BLU WHT PUR YEL YEL RED BLU
I
I
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT : B8 Al f(JS AJ i A2 A22 A2l I
\ +BBACUP Ate
i I~~
:l.._-.. _ L..L!
.. _ .. _ .. ~
( DRMNGCIRCUIT
5V
..... ;>- -~ ..... ~ ..... ) -
A13 A12
..,
All A6 A15 A14
..,
AJO
lA2l AS A26
Gi
LTBLU mK PUR GRY GRY-----
J J J
GRY va LTBLU
J
GRY LTGRN
M-HOT AMO-P M-COOL M-HOT
HUMIDITY IN-CAR
SENSDR TEMPERATURE
DRIVER'S AIR MIX PASSENGER'S AIR MIX SENSOR
CONTROL MOTOR CONTROL MOTOR
S-COM S-COM
A/C
PRESSURE
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR SENSOR
TEMPERATURE
REO RED SENSOR RED WHT
®---REO I REO I REO I RED I REO-----
21-30 BACK
••••••••••••• :Otherc:ommunlcationline
--------P~------------------~
IG2
BIJ(----------------,
AfAR MOOE REAR POWER
eONlROL MOTOR TRANSISTOR
M-VENT M-HEAT -4ffrl

BlJ( VEL
Ifl REO BLU Bu( No22 n.5A) FUSE
in theRELAY BLOCK
IVlalntY'ghtrela~
VEL
G503
84 B3 ClIMATECONlROl UNIT B13 B14 PNK
----------~====lr====~~------~~~~~~~:::::t~~~--~=~~An~UBW~UBLU--_+--~
iH
REAR
DRIVING CIRCUIT ClIMATE
Bll 10 CONlROL
•••••••••••••••• ORN ••• • • • • • • • • • • • Ale BUZRX
PANEL
B12 9
5V ................ GRN ...... .. .. .. .. Afe BUS TX
AS
LTBLU REO BIJ( Bu(
. AfAR
EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE
AfAR AIR MIX SENSOR
eONlROL MOTOR
S-COM
REO
-------REO - - -..... 1---- REO - - - -_ _- - - - - - - -.....
G506
BACK 21-31
Climate Control
OTe Troubleshooting
DTe 81202: Climate Control Unit Internal DTe 81205: Climate Control Unit Lost
Error Communication with Gauge Control Module
(VSP/NE message)
NOTE: Check the battery condition (see page 22-76) and
the charging system (see page 4-28). DTe 81206 or DTe indicator AUTO: Climate
Control Unit Lost Communication with
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Gauge Control Module (ECT message)
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II). DTe 81207: Climate Control Unit Lost
Communication with Gauge Control Module
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more. (lLLUMI message)
4. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9). NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
sure to follow the instructions in 8-can diagnosis test
5. Check for DTCs. mode A (see page 22-112).
Is DTC 81202 indicated? 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
YES-The climate control unit is faulty, replace the 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II).
climate control unit.•
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more.
NO-Intermittent failure, the climate control unit is
OK at this time .• 4. Do the self-diagnostic with. the HDS (see page 21-9)
or climate control unit (see page 21-10).
5. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC 81205, and/or 81206 or AUTO, and/or

81207 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or

poor connections on the climate control unit
connector A (40P) .•
6. Check for DTCs using the HDS.
Are any of the following DTCs indicated; 81011,

8106~8216~8135~81805,81408,or82157?
YES-Do the gauge control module input test

(see page 22-334) ••
NO-Do the climate control unit troubleshooting

(see page 21-93) .•
21-32 BACK
OTC 81213 or OTC indicator N: An Open in 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit
the Rear Evaporator Temperature Sensor connector B (14P) terminal No. 6 and the rear
Circuit evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector
terminal No.2.
3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9)

4. Check for DTCs.
Is Dre 81213 or N indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

REAR EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
poor connections on the rear evaporator 2P CONNECTOR
temperature sensor circuit.. Wire side of female terminals
6. Remove the rear evaporator temperature sensor YES-Go to step 9.

(see page 21-141), and test it (see page 21-141).
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate
Is the rear evaporator temperature sensor OK? control unit and the rear evaporator temperature
sensor.•
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the rear evaporator temperature

sensor.•
7. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (14P).
(cont'd)
BACK 21-33
Cliln·ate Control
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit DTC 81214 or DTC indicator P: A Short in the
connector A (40P) terminal No: 8 and the rear Rear Evaporator Temperature. Sensor Circuit
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector
terminal No.1. 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II).
or climate control unit(see page 21-10).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81214 or P indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure .•
2P CONNECTOR 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is there continuity? 6. Remove the rear evaporator temperature sensor

YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
climate control unit connector A (40P), B (14P), and Is the rear evaporator temperature sensor OK?
at the rear evaporator temperature sensor 2P
connector.lfthe connections are good, substitute a YES-Go to step 7.
known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If
the symptom/indication goes away, replace the NO-Replace the rear evaporator temperature
original climate control unit.• sensor.•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate 7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P)
control unit and the rear evaporator temperature and B (14P).
sensor.•
21-34 BACK
8. Check for continuity between climate control unit 9. Check for continuity between climate control unit'
connector B (14P) terminal No.6 and body ground. connector A (40P) terminal No; 8 and climate
control unit connector B (14P) No.6.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P) CLIMATE CONTROl. UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)

between the climate control unit and the rear YES-Repair short in the wires between the climate
evaporator temperature sensor.• control unit and the rear evaporator temperature
~MO~. .'
NO-Go to step 9.
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control unit.•
BACK 21-35
Climate Control
OlC 81215 or OlC indicator J: An Open or 9. Check for continuity between the following
Short in the Recirculation Control Motor terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P)
Circuit and the recirculation control motor 7P connector.
40P: 7P:
1. Cleat the 'OTC witl'l'the HDS. No.8 No.7
No. 35 No.5
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II). No. 36 No.4
No. 38 No.3
3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS(see page 21-9)
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81215 or J indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent fail,ura, chec~ for loose wires or

poor connections on the recirculation control motor
circuit.•
6. Test the recirculation control motor (see page

21-113). RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
Is the recirculation control motor OK? Is there continuity?
NO-Replace the recirculation control motor NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the
(see page 21-113) .• climate control unit and the recirculation control
motor.•
7. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P
connector.
8. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).
21-36 BACK
10. Check for continuity between body ground and 12. Turn the ignition sWitch ON (11), and check the same
climate control unit connector A (40P) terminals terminals for voltage to body ground.
No. 35, 36, and 38 individually.
=
= =
Is there any voltage?

YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s) between
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire(s) the climate control unit and the recirculation
between the climate control unit and the control motor. This short may also damage the
recirculation control motor.• climate control unit: Repair the short to power
before replacing the climate control unit.•
NO-Go to step 11.
NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
11. Check for continuity between climate control unit climate control unit connector A (40P) and at the
connector A (40P) terminals as follows. recirculation control motor 7P connector. Ifthe
connections are good, substitute a known-good
From terminal To terminals climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
35 36,38 indication goes away, replace the original climate
36 38 control unit..
Is there continuity between any of the terminals?
YES-Repair the short in the wires.•
NO-Go to step 12.
BACK 21-37
Climate Control
DTC 81223 or DTC indicator M: A Problem in 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
the Rear Blower Motor Circuit
Does the rear blower motor run?
YES-Go to step 9..
NO-Go to step 24.
or climate control unit (see page 21-10). 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Check for DTCs. 10. Disconnect the jumper wire.
Is DTC 81223 or M indicated? 11. Disconnect the rear power transistor 4P connector.
YES-Go to step 5. 12. Check for continuity between the rear power
transistor 4P connector terminal No.2 and body
NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or ground.
poor connections on the rear blower motor
circuit.• REAR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
6. Check the No.2 (RR BLOWER) (30 A) fuse in the

under-hood fuse box, and the No. 30 (10 A)fuse in
the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?

=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. If fuse(s) Is there continuity?

blow again, check for a short in the No.2 (RR
BLOWER) (30 A) and No. 30 (10 A) fuse(s) circuit.• YES-Go to step 13.
7. Connect the rear blower motor 2P connector NO-Check for an open in the wire between the
terminal No.2 to body ground with a jumper wire. rear power transistor and body ground. If the wire
is OK, check for poor ground at G503 (see page
REAR BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR 22-67) .•
13. Connect the rear power transistor 4P connector

REAR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
~
= LK
1 2 JUMPER WIRE
8 4 ORN
21-38 BACK
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 19. Check for continuity between the following
terminals of climate control unit connector B (14P)
Does the rear blower motor run at high speed? and the rear power transistor 4P connector.
14P: 4P:
YES-Go to step 15. No. 13 No.3
No.14 No.1
NO-Repair open in the ORN wire between the rear
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14PI
power transistor and the rear blower motor.• Wire side of female terminals
16. Disconnectthe jumper wire.

climate control unit connector B (14P) terminals
No. 13 and No. 14 individually.
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the

climate control unit and the rear power
transistor. •

Wire side of female terminals climate control unit connector B (14P) terminals
Is there continuity? CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14PI
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)

between the climate control unit and the rear
power transistor.•
NO-Go to step 19.
YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s) .•
NO-Go to step 22.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-39
Climate Control
22. Reconnect climate control unit connector B (14P). 29. Measure the voltage between the rear blower
motor relay 4P socket terminal No.1 and body
23. Test the rear power transistor (see page 21-142). ground.
Is the rear power transistor OK? REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET

climate control unitconnector B (14P) and at the
rear power transistor 4P connector. If the
climate control unit; and recheck .. lf the symptom/
indication goes away, replace the original climate
control unit..
=
NO-Replace the rear power transistor (see page
21-142) .• Wire side of female terminals
24. Disconnect the jumperwire.

25. Disconnect the rear blower motor 2P connector.
YES-Go to step 30.
26. Measure the voltage between the rear blower
motor 2P connector terminal No.1 and body NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.2 (RR
ground. BLOWER) (30 A) in the under-hood fuse box and
rear blower motor relay .•
REAR BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
31. Measure the voltage between the rear blower

motor relay 4Psocket terminal No.2 and body
ground.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET

YES-Replace the rear blower motor (see page

21-145) .•
NO-Go to step 27. =

28. Remove the rear blower motor relay from the

dashboard wire harness, and test it (see page Is there battery voltage?
22-77).
YES-Go to step 32.
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 29. (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
rear blower motor relay .•
NO-Replace the rear blower motor relay .•
21-40 BACK
32. Turn the ignition switch OFF. DTC 81225 or DTC indicator A and AUTO: An
Open in the In.,car Temperature Sensor
33. Check for continuity between the rear blower motor Circuit
relay 4P socket terminal No.4 and body ground.
1. Clear the DTCwith the HDS.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
3. Do the self~diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9)

or climate control 'unit (see page 21-10).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81225 or A and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the in-car temperature sensor
Is there continuity? circuit.•
YES-Repair open in the GRY wire between the 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
rear blower motor relay and the blower motor.•
6. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the (see page 21-104), and test it (see page 21-103).
rear blower motor relay and body ground. If the
wire is OK, check for poor ground at G503 Is the in-car temperature sensor OK?
(see page 22-67) .•
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the humidity/in-car temperature

sensor.•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-41
Climate Control
8. Check for continuity betWeen Climate control unit 9. Check for continuity between climate control unit
connector A (40P) terminal No.5 and the connector A (40P) terminal No.8 and the
humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector humidity/inccar temperature sensor 4P connector
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR TEMPERATURE .SENSOR HUMIDITY/IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

4P CONNECTOR 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 9. YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at

climate control unit connector A (40P) and atthe
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector. If
control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.• the connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
control unit..

control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.•
21-42 BACK
OTC B1226 or OTC indicator B and AUTO: A 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit
Short in the In-car Temperature Sensor connector A (40P) terminal No.5 and body ground.
Circuit
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40PI

Q
4. Check for DTCs.
=
Is DTe 81226 or 8 and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure .• Is there continuity?
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the climate control unit and the in-car
6. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor temperature sensor.•
NO-Go to step 9.
Is the in-car temperature sensor OK?
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit
YES-Go to step 7. connector A (40P) terminals No.5 and No.8.
NO-Replace the humidity/in-car temperature CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40PI

sensor.•
YES-Repair short in the wires between the climate

control unit and the in-car temperature sensor..

replace the original climate control unit..
BACK 21-43
Climate Control
DTC 81227 or DTC indicator C and AUTO: An 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit
Open in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor connector A (40P) terminal No. 28 and the outside
Circuit air temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No.2.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81227 or C and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
poor connections on the outside air temperature Wire side of female terminals
sensor circuit.•
YES-Go to step 9.
6. Remove the outside air temperature sensor
(see page 21-105), and test it (see page 21-105). NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the outside air temperature
Is the outside air temperature sensor OK? sensor..
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the outside air temperature sensor.•
21-44 BACK
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit DTC 81228 or DTC indicator D and AUTO: A
connector A (40P) terminal No.8 and the outside air Short in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor
temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No.1. Circuit
Wire side of female terminals 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFFand then ON (II).

Q
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81228 or D and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR NO-Intermittent failure .•

YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at (see page 21-105), and test it (see page 21-105).
climate control unit connector A (40P) and at the
outside air temperature sensor 2P connector. If the Is the outside air temperature sensor OK?
climate control unit, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/ YES-Go to step 7.
control unit.. NO-Replace the outside air temperature sensor.•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate 7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).
sensor.•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-45
Climate Control
8. Check for continuity between climate control unit OTC 81229 or OTCindicator E and AUTO: An
connector A (40P) terminal No. 28 and body ground: Open in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit


4. Check for DTCs.
= Is DTC 81229 or E and AUTO indicated?
Wire side of female terminals YES-Go to step 5.

Is there continuity? poor connections on the sunlight sensor circuit..
between the climate control unit and the outside air
temperature sensor.• 6. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.
NO-Go to step 9. 7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit
connector A (40P) terminals No.8 and No. 28. connector A (40P) terminal No. 29 and the sunlight
sensor 5Pconnectorterminal No.4.

SUNLIGHT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
control unit and the outside air temperature YES-Go to step 9.
sensor.•
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit, control unit and the sunlight sensor.•
21-46 BACK
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit DTC 81230 or DTC indicator F and AUTO: A
connector A (40P) terminal No.8 and the sunlight Short in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
sensor 5P connector terminal No.2.

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81230 or F and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

6. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.
YES-Go to step 10.
control unit and the sunlight sensor.• 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit
connector A (40P) terminal No. 29 and body ground.
10. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.
11. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).
12. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-106).
Is the sunlight sensor OK?

sunlight sensor 5P connector. If the connections are =
good, substitute a known-good climate control unit,
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, Wire side of female terminals
NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-106) . Is there continuity?

• YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the climate control unit and the sunlight
sensor.•
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-47
Climate Control
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit OTC 81231 or OTC indicator G and AUTO: An
connector A (40P) ~erminals No.8 and No. 29. Open in the Front Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Circuit
3. Do the self"diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9)

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81231 or G and AUTO indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
Is there continuity? NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or

poor connections on the front evaporator
YES-Repair short in the wires between the climate temperature sensor circuit..
control unit and the sunlight sensor.•
NO-Goto step 10.
6. Remove the front evaporator temperature sensor
10. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector. (see page 21-107), and test it (see page 21-107).
11. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (40P). Is the front evaporator temperature sensor OK?
12. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-106). YES-Go to step 7.
Is the sunlight sensor OK? NO-Replace the front evaporator temperature

sensor..
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, 7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).
NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-106) .

•
21-48 BACK
connector A (40P) terminal No. 24 and the front connector A (40P) terminal No.8 and the front
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector

2P CONNECTOR .
Wire side of female terminals FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
control unit and the front evaporator temperature climate control unit connector A (40P) and at the
sensor.• front evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.
If the connections are good, substitute a known-
good climate control unit, and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original climate control unit.•

control unit and the front evaporator temperature
sensor.•
BACK 21-49
Climate Control
DTC 81232 or DTC indicator H and AUTO: A 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit
Short in the Front Evaporator Temperature connector A (40P) terminal No. 24 and body ground.
Sensor Circuit
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (ff).

4. Check for DTCs.

=
Is DTe 81232 or H and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
between the climate control unit and the front
6. Remove the front evaporator temperature sensor evaporator temperature sensor.•
NO-Go to step 9.
Is the.tront evaporator temperature sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 7. connector A (40P) terminals No.8 and No. 24.
NO-Replace the front evaporator temperature CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
sensor.•

sensor.•

21-50 BACK
DTC 81233 or DTC indicator J and AUTO: An 9. Check for continuity between the following
Open in the Driver's Air Mix Centrel Metor terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P)
Circuit and the driver's air mix control motor 7P connector.
40P: 7P:
1. Clea r the DTC with the HDS. No.6 No.7
No.8 No.5
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II). No.11 No.3
CLIMATE CeNTReL UNIT CeNNECTeR A (40P)

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81233 or J and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5. Q
poor connections on the driver's.air mix control
motor circuit .•
6. Test the driver's air mix control motor (see page DRIVER'S AIR MIX ceNTReL MeTeR 7P CeNNECTeR
21-109). Wire side offemale terminals
Is. the driver's air mix control motor OK? Is there continuity?

climate control unit connector A (40P) and atthe
NO-Replace the driver's air mix control motor driver's air mix control motor 7P connector. If the
(see page 21-110) .• connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit and recheck. If the symptom/
7. Disconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P indication goes away, replace the original climate
connector. control unit.•
8. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P). NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the
climate control unit and the driver's air mix control
motor.•
BACK 21-51
Climate Control
DTC 81234 or DTC indicator K and AUTO: A 10. Check for continuity between body ground and
Short in the Driver's Air Mix Control Motor climate control unit connector A (40P) terminal
Circuit No.11.
1. Clea r the DTC with the HDS. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)

4. Check for DTCs. Q

Is DTC 81234 or K and AUTO indicated? =
YES-Go to step 5. Wire side offemale terminals
5. Check for DTCs.
YES- Repair short to body ground in the wire
Are these DTCs also present; 81237 or Nand between the climate control unit and the driver's air
AUTO, and/or 81245 or G, and/or 82968 or A and mix control motor.•
WINDSHIELD DEFROST, and/or 82980 or 8 and
WINDSHIELD DEFROST? NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 13. 11. Check for continuity between climate control unit
connector A (40P) terminals No.6 and No. 11.
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Test the driver's air mix control motor (see page

21-109).
Is the driver's air mix control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the driver's air mix control motor

(see page 21-110) .• Wire side of female terminals
8. Disconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P

connector. Is there continuity?
9. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P). YES-Repairthe short in the wires .•
NO-Go to step 12.
21-52 BACK
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure the 15. Check for continuity between climate control unit
voltage between climate control unit connector A connector A (40P) terminal No.6 and body ground.
(40P) terminal No. 11 and body ground.

YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire.•
the climate control unit and the driver's air mix NO-Go to step 16.
control motor. This short may also damage the
climate control unit. Repair the short to power 16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same
before replacing the climate control unit. •. terminal for voltage to body ground.
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit, CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40PI
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control unit.•.

climate control unit.
14. Disconnect these items:
• Driver's air mix control motor =

• Passenger's air mix control motor
• Rear air mix control motor Wire side of female terminals
• Humidity/in-car temperature sensor
• AlC pressure sensor
YES-Repair short to power in the wire. This short

may have also damaged the climate control unit.
Repair the short to power before replacing the
climate control unit..
NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-53
Climate Control
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 20. While checking the same terminal for voltage to
ground, reconnect these items individually and
18. Reconnect climate control unit connector (40P). note the voltage reading each time:
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and measure the • Driver's air mix control motor
voltage between climate control unit connector A • Passenger's air mix control motor
(40P) terminal No.6 and body ground. • Rear air mix control motor
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) • AlC pressure sensor

Is there about 5 volts?
YES-Go to step 20. Does the voltage remain at about 5 volts?
NO-Check for a loo.se wire or poor connection at YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit
climate control unit connector A (40P). If the and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
connection is good, substitute a known-good replace the original climate control unit..
climate control unit and recheck. Ifthe symptom/
indication goes away, replace the original climate NO-Replace the component that caused the
control unit. voltage drop .•
21-54 BACK
DTC 81235 or ,DTC indicator L and AUTO: A 9. Check for continuity between the following
Problem in the Driver's Air Mix Control terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P)
Linkage, Door, or Motor Circuit and the driver's air mix control motor 7P connector.
40P: 7P:
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. No. 12 No.2
No. 13 No.1
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81235 or L and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

poor connections on the driver's air mix control
motor circuit..
DRIVER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
6. Test the driver's air mix control motor (see page Is there continuity?
21-109).
YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 7. climate control unit and the driver's air mix control
motor.•
(see page 21-110), or repair the driver's air mix
control linkage or door.•

connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-55
··',1
Climate Control
10. Check for continuity between body ground and OTC 81236 or OTC indicator M and AUTO: An
climate control unit connector A (40P) terminals Open in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
No. ,12 and No. 13 individually. Motor Circuit


4. Check for DTCs.
= Is DTC 81236 or M and AUTO indicated?

Is there continuity? poor connections on the passenger's air mix
control motor circuit .•
between the climate control unit and the driver's air 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
mix control motor.•
6. Test the passenger's air mix control motor
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit, (see page 21-110).
replace the original climate control unit.. Is the passenger's air mix control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the passenger's air mix control motor

(see page 21-111) .•
7. Disconnect the passenger's air mix control motor

7P connector.
21-56 BACK
9. Check for continuity between the following OTC 81237 or OTC indicator N and AUTO: A
terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P) Short in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
and the passenger's air mix control motor 7P Motor Circuit
connector.
40P: 7P: 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
No.6 No.7
No.8 No.5 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II).
No. 30 No.3
or climate control unit(see page 21-10).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81237 or N and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Check for DTCs.
Are these DTCs also present; 81234 or K and

AUTO, and/or 81245 or G, and/or 82968 or A and
WINDSHIELD DEFROST?
PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
Wire side offemale terminals YES-Go to step 13.
Is there continuity? NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
passenger's air mix control motor 7P connector. If 7. Test the passenger's air mix control motor
the connections are good, substitute a known-good (see page 21-110).
indication goes away, replace the original climate Is the passenger's air mix control motor OK?
control unit..
YES-Go to step 8.
climate control unit and the passenger's air mix NO-Replace the passenger's air mix control motor
control motor.• (see page 21-111) .•

7P connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-57
Climate Control
10. Check for continuity between body ground and 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure the
climate controlunitconnector A (40P) terminal voltage between climate control unit connector A
No. 30. (40P) terminal No. 30 and body ground.
= = =
Is there continuity? Is there any voltage?
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s) between
between the climate control unit and the the climate control unit and the passenger's air mix
passenger's air mix control motor.• control motor. This short may also damage the
climate control unit. Repair the short to power
NO-Go to step 11. before replacing the climate control unit.•
11. Check for continuity between climate control unit NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
connector A (40P) terminals No.6 and No. 30. and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
14. Disconnectthese items:
• Driver's air mix control motor

• Rear air mix control motor
YES-Repair the short in the wires .•
NO-Go to step 12.
21-58 BACK
15. Check for continuity between climate controi' unit 17. Tumthe ignition switch OFF.
connector A (40P) terminal No.6 and body ground:
18. Reconnect climate control unit connector (40P).
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure the
voltage between climate control unit connector A
Q
=
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire,. Wire side offemale terminals
NO-Go to step 16.

16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same
terminal for voltage to body ground. YES-Go to step 20.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) NO-Check for a loose wire or poor connection at
climate control unit connector A (40P). If the
connection is good, substitute a known-good
control unit.•

NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-59
Climate Control
20. While checking the same terminal for voltage to OTC 81238 or OTCindicator P and AUTO: A
ground, reconnect these items individually and Problem in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
note the voltage reading each time: Linkage, Door, or Motor Circuit
~ Driver's air mix control motor 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
• Rear air mix control motor 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II).
• AlC pressure sensor 3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9)
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81238 or P and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

poor connections on the passenger's air mix
= control motor circuit..
Wire side of female terminals 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

Does the voltage remain at about 5 volts? (see page 21-110).
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control; unit Is the passenger's air mix control motor OK?
replace the original climate control unit.• YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the component that caused the NO-Replace the passenger's air mix control motor
voltage drop.• (see page 21-111), or repair the passenger's air mix

7P connector.
21-60 BACK
9. Check for continuity between the following 10. Check for continuity between body ground and
terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P) climate control unit connector A (40P) terminals
and the passenger's air mix control motor 7P No. 14 and No. 15 individually.
connector.
40P: 7P: CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
No.14 No.2
No.15 No.1

Q Q
= =
Q Q Wire side of female terminals

PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR between the climate control unit and the
7P CONNECTOR passenger's air mix control motor.•
Is there continuity? and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
YES-Go to step 10.

climate control unit and the passenger's air mix
control motor.•
BACK 21-61
Climate Control
DTC 81239 or DTC indicator A: An Open or 9. Check for continuity between the following
Short in the Front Mode Control Motor Circuit terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P)
and the front mode control motor 7P connector.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 40P: 7P:
No.8 No.7
No. 32 No.5
3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9) No. 33 No.4
or climate control unit (see page 21-10). No. 34 No.3
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81239 or A indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or Q

poor connections on the front mode control motor
circuit. •
6. Test the front mode control motor (see page.

21-112).
Is the front mode control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the front mode control motor FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
7. Disconnect the front mode control motor 7P Is there continuity?

connector.
YES-Go to step 10.
climate control unit and the front mode control
motor.•
21-62 BACK
10. Check for continuity between body ground and 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and check the same
climate control unit connector A (40P) terminals terminals for voltage to body ground.
No. 31, 32, 33, and 34. individually.
- =
YES-Repair short to bodygrolJnd in the wire(s) the climate control unit and the front mode control
between the climate control unit and the front motor. This short may also damage the climate
mode control motor.• control unit. Repair the short to power before
replacing the climate control unit.•
NO-Go to step 11.
NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
11. Check for continuity between climate control unit climate control unit connector A (40P) and at the
connector A (40P) terminals as follows. front mode control motor 7P connector. If the
From terminal To terminals climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
31 32,33,34 indication goes away, replace the original climate
32 33,34 contrQI unit.•
33 34
/s there continuity between any of the terminals?
NO-Go to step 12.
BACK 21-63
Climate Control
Dle B1240 or Dle indicator B: AProblem in 9. Check for continuity between the following
the Front Mode Control Linkage, Doors, or terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P)
Motor Circuit and the front mode control motor 7P connector.
40P: 7P:
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. No. 16 No.2
No.17 No.1
2. Turn'the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81240 or 8 indicated? .Q

YES-Go to step 5.

poor connections on the mode control motor
circuit:.
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
6. Test the front mode control motor (see page Is there continuity?
21-112).
YES-Go to step 10.
Is the front mode control motdr OK?
YES-Go to step 7. climate control unit and the front mode control
motor.•
NO-Replace the front mode control motor
(see page 21-112), or repair the front mode control
linkage or doors.•
7. Disconnect the front mode control motor 7P

connector.
21-64 BACK
10. Check for continuity between body ground and OTC 81241 or OTC indicator C: A Problem in
climate control unit connector A (40P) terminals the Front Blower Motor Circuit
3. 00 the self-diagnostic with the HOS (see page 21-9)

4. Check for OTCs.
Is DTC 81241 or C indicated?

=
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the front blower motor
Is there continuity? circuit••
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire(s) 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
mode control motor.• 6. Check the No. 12 (40 A) fuse in the relay block, and
the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay
NO-Substitute a known~good climate control unit, box.
replace the original climate control unit.• Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. Iffuse(s)

blow again, check for a short in the No. 12 (40 A)
and No. 30 (10 A) fuse(s) circuit••
7. Connect the front blower motor 2P connector

FRONT BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
GRN
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
BACK 21-65
Climate Control
Does the front blower motor run? Does the front blower motor run at high speed?
NO-Go to step 24. NO-Repair open in the GRN wire between the
front power transistor and the front blower
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. motor.•
10. Disconnect the jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Disconnect the front power transistor 4P connector. 16. Disconnect the jumper wire.
12. Check for continuity between the front power 17. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).
transistor 4P connector terminal No.2 and body
ground. 18. Check for continuity between body ground and
climate control unit connector A (40P) terminals
FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR No.9 and No. 10 individually.
Q
-=
Wire side of female terminals .Q

= =
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the Is there continuity?

front power transistor and body ground. If the wire
is OK, check for poor ground at G507 (see page YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)
22-67) .• between the climate control unit and the front
power transistor.•
13. Connect the front power transistor 4P connector
terminals No.2 and No.4 with a jumper wire. NO-Go to step 19.
FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
~
2BLK
3 4 RED
JUMPER WIRE
21-66 BACK
19. Check for continuity between the following 22. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).
terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P)
and the front power transistor 4P connector. 23. Testthe front power transistor (see page 21-108).
40P: 4P:
No.9 No.3 Is the front power transistor OK?
No. 10 No.1
front power transistor 4P connector. If the
BLU RED connections are good, substitute a known-good
, 2a & 8
~ 88M U tt U m _ n m 18
~ climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
m.mM • • ~ • • • m.DM • • ~. indication goes away, replace the original climate
control unit.•
NO-Replace the front power transistor (see page

21-108) .•
24. Disconnect the jumper wire.
25. Disconnect the front blower motor 2P connector.

FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
26. Measure the voltage between the front blower
Is there continuity? motor_2P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground.
YES-Go to step 20.
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
climate control unit and the front power
transistor.•

climate control unit connector A (40P) terminals
No.9 and No. 10 individually. Wire side of female terminals

YES-Replace the front blower motor (see page

21-116) .•
NO-Go to step 27.
= = 27. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Wire side of female terminals 28. Remove the front blower motor relay from the
relay block, and test it (see page 22-77).
Is there any voltage? Is the relay OK?
YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s) .• YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Go to step 22. NO-Replace the front blower motor relay.•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-67
Clim.ate Control
29. Measure the voltage between the front blower 32. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
ground. 33. Check for continuity between the front blower
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET ground.
FRONT· BLOWER MOTOR RE,LAY 4P SOCKET
4 3 2
YES-Go to step 30. /s there continuity?
NO-Replace the relay block (see page 22-71).• YES-Repair open in the WHTwire between the
front blower motor relay and the blower motor.•
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the
31. Measure the voltage between the front blower front blower motor relay and body ground. Ifthe
motor relay 4P socket terminal No.4 and body wire is OK, check for poor ground at G202
ground. (see page 22-67) .•
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
YES-Go to step 32.

front blower motor relay.•
21-68 BACK
DTC B1244or DTC indicator F: An Open in 9. Check for continuity between the following
the Rear Air Mix Control Motor Circuit terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P),
B (14P), and the rear air mix control motor 7P
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. connector.
40P: 7P:
No.8 No.7
3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9) 14P: 7P:
or climate control unit (see page 21-10). No.5 No.3
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81244 or F indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or Q

poor connections on the rear air mix control motor
circuit .•
6. Test the rear air mix control motor (see page

21-143).
Is the rear air mix control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the rear air mix control motor CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
(see page 21-143) .• Wire side offemale terminals
7. Disconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P Is there continuity?

connector.
8. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P) climate control unit connector A (40P), B (14P), and
and B (14P). at the rear air mix control motor 7P connector. If the
control unit.•

climate control unit and the rear air mix control
motor.•
BACK 21-69
Climate Control
DTC 81245 or DTC indicator G: AShort in the 10. Check for continuity between climate control unit
Rear Air Mix Control Motor Circuit connector B (14P) terminal No.5 and body ground.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (11).

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81245 or G indicated? Q

=
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Check for DTCs. Is there continuity?
Are these DTCs also present; 81234 or K and YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire
AUTO, and/or 81237 or N and AUTO, and/or between the climate control unit and the rear air
82968 or A and WINDSHIELD DEFROST, and/or mix control motor.•
82980 or 8 and WINDSHIELD DEFROST?
NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 6. connector A (40P) terminal No.6 and climate
control unit connector B (14P) terminal No.5.
7. Test the rear air mix control motor (see page
21-143).
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the rear air mix control motor

(see page 21-143) .•
8. Disconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P

connector.
9. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P)
and B (14P). Is there continuity?
NO-Go to step 12.
21-70 BACK
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure the 15. Check for continuity between climate control unit
voltage between climate control unit connector B connector A (40P) terminal No.6 and body ground.
Q
=

/s there any voltage? YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire .•
YES-Repair short to power in the wire between NO-Go to step 16.

the climate control unit and the rear air mix control
motor. This short may also damage the climate 16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same
control unit. Repair the short to power before terminal for voltage to body ground.
replacing the climate control unit..

14. Disconnectthese items:

=
• Passenger's air mix control motor Wire side of female terminals
• AlC pressure sensor /s there any voltage?

climate control unit..
NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-71
Climate Control
ground, reconnectthese items individually and
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure the • Driver's air mix control motor
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) • Ale pressure sensor

NO-Check tor a loose wire or poor connection at YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit
climate control unit connector A (40P). If the and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
connection is good, substitute a known-good replace the original climate control unit..
climate control unit and recheck.·lfthe symptom/
control unit.• voltage drop .•
21-72 BACK
DTC 81246 or DTC indicator H: A Problem in 9. Check for continuity between the following
the Rear Air Mix Control Linkage, Door, or terminals of climate control unit connector B (14P)
Motor Circuit and the rear air mix control motor 7P connector.
14P: 7P:
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. No.1 No.2
No.2 No.1
3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9) Wire side of female terminals
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81246 or H indicated?

Q
YES-Go to step 5.

poor connections on the rear air mix control motor
circuit. •
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
6. Test the rear air mix control motor (see page Is there continuity?
21-143).
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) ·between the
YES-Go to step 7. climate control unit and the rear air mix control
motor.•
NO-Replace the rear air mix control motor
(see page 21-143), or repair the rear air mix control
linkage or door.•
7. Disconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P

connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-73
Climate Control
10. Check for continuity between body ground and DTCB2965: Climate Control Unit·Lost
climate control unit connector B (14P) terminals Communication with Rear Climate Control
No.1 and No.2 individually. Panel

3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9).
4. Check for DTCs.
= YES-Go to step 5.

Wire side of female terminals poor connections on the rear climate control panel
and climate control unit circuit..
Is there, continuity? 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire(s) 6. Disconnect the rear climate panel10P connector.
between the climate control unit and the rear air
mix control motor.• 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit, 8. Measure the voltage between the rear climate
and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away, control panel10P connector terminal No.1 and
replace the original climate control unit.• body ground.
=
YES-Go to step 9.

rear climate control panel..
21-74 BACK
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 12. Check for continuity between the following
terminals of climate control unit connector B (14P)
10. Check for continuity between the rear climate and the rear climate control panel10P connector.
control panel10P connector terminal No.3 and 14P: 10P:
body ground. No.11 No. 10
No.12 No.9
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL 10P CONNECTOR CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
.Q
.Q
=
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the Is there continuity?

rear climate control panel and body ground. If the
wire is OK, check for poor ground at G506 YES,-Go to step 13.
(see page 22-67) .•
11. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (14P). climate control unit and the rear climate control
panel..
(cont'd)
BACK 21-75
Climate Control
13. Check for continuity between body ground and DTC 82967 or DTC indicator A and
climate control unit connector B (14P) terminals WINDSHIELD DEFROST: An Open in the
No. 11 and No. 12 individually. Humidity Sensor Circuit
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P) 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 82967 or A and WINDSHIELD DEFROST

= = indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

poor connections on the humidity sensor circuit..
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire{s)
between the climate control unit and the rear 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
climate control panel..
NO-Go to step 14. (see page 21-104), and test it (see page 21-103).
14. Check for continuity between climate control unit Is the humidity sensor OK?
connector B (14P) terminals No. 11 and No. 12.
YES-Go to step 7.
sensor.•
7. Disconnect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor

4P connector.

control unit and the rear climate control panel..
NO-Substitute a known-good rear climate control

panel, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original rear climate control
panel..
21-76 BACK
9. Check for continuity between the following DTC 82968 or DTC indicator A and
terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P) WINDSHIELD DEFROST: A Short in the
and humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P Humidity Sensor Circuit
connector.
40P: 4P: 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
No.6 No.1
No.8 No.3 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II).
No. 27 No.2
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 82968 or A and WINDSHIELD DEFROST

indicated?
Q Q
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Check for DTCs.
HUMIDITYliN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR Are these DTCs also present; 81234 or K and
Wire side of female terminals AUTO, and/or 81237 or N and AUTO, and/or
81245 or G, and/or 82980 or 8 and WINDSHIELD
Is there continuity? DEFROST?
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at YES-Go to step 13.

humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector. If NO-Go to step 6.
the connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/ 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
control unit.• 7. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor
climate control unit and the humidity sensor.• Is the humidity sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 8.

sensor.•
8. Disconnect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor

4P connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-77
Climate Control
10. Check for continuity between body ground and 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure the
climate control unit connector A (40P) terminal voltage between climate control unit connector A
No. 27. (40P) terminal No. 27 and body ground.
= =
/s there continuity? /s there any voltage?
between the climate control unit and the humidity the climate control unit and the humidity sensor.
sensor.• This short may also damage the climate control
unit. Repair the short to power before replacing the
NO-Go to step 11. climate control unit..
11. Check for continuity between climate control unit NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
connector A (40P) terminals No.6 and No. 27. and recheck.lfthe symptom/indication goes away,

NO-Go to step 12.
21-78 BACK
15. Check for continuity between climate control unit 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
connector A (40P) terminal No.6 and body ground.
voltage betWeen climate control unit connector A
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire .• Wire side of female terminals
NO-Go to step 16.

16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same
climate control unit connector A (40P). Ifthe
control unit .•
=

NO-Goto step 17.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-79
Climate Control
20. While checking the same terminal for voltage to OTC 82969: Climate Control Unit Lost
ground, reconnect these items individually and Communication with Combination Switch
note the voltage reading each time: Control Unit (WIPSW message)
• Driver's air mix control motor NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
• Passenger's air mix control motor sure to follow the instructions in the 8-can system
• Rear air mix control motor diagnosis test mode A (see page 22-112).
• AlC pressure sensor 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

5. Check the DTCs.
Is OTC 82969 indicated?

=
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wire or
poor connection on the climate control unit
Does the voltage remain at about 5 volts? connector A (40P) .•
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit 6. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
replace the original climate control unit.• Are any of the fol/owing OTCs indicated; 81958,
81063, or 81156 indicated?
NO-Replace the component that caused the
voltage drop.• YES-Do the wiper/washer switch (combination
switch control unit) input test (see page 22-300) .•

(see page 21-93) .•
21-80 BACK
DTC B2970: Climate Control Unit Lost DTC B2979 or DTC indicator Band
Communication with Relay Control Module WINDSHIELD DEFROST: An Open in the AlC
(RM message) Pressure Sensor Circuit
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
sure to follow the instructions in the B-can system
diagnosis test mode A (see page 22-112). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II).
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9)
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 82979 or 8 and WINDSHIELD DEFROST
4. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9). indicated?
5. Check the DTCs. YES-Go to step 5.
Is DTC 82970 indicated? NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or

poor connections on the AlC pressure sensor
YES-Go to step 6. circuit.•
NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wire or 5. Turnthe ignition switch OFF.
poor connection on the climate control unit
connector A (40P) .• 6. Disconnect the AlC pressure sensor 3P connector.
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).
Are any of the following DTCs indicated; 81005,

81959,82162 or 81158 indicated?
YES-Do the relay control module input test

(see page 22-334) .•

(see page 21-93) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-81
jl~ I'.
Climate Control
8. Check for continuity between the following 9. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).
terminals of climate control unitconnector A (40P)
and the AlC pressure sensor 3P connector. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
40P: 3P:
No.6 No.1 11. Measure the voltage between climate control unit
No.8 No.3 connector A (40P) terminals No.6 and No.8, and
No. 26 ·No.2 between climate control unit connector A (40P)
terminals No.8 and No. 26.
Q Q
AIC PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

Wire side of female terminals Is there about 5 volts?
Is there continuity? YES-Replace the AlC pressure sensor.•
YES-Go to step 9. NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at

NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the AlC pressure sensor 3P connector. If the
climate control unit and the AlC pressure sensor.. connections are good, substitute a known-good
control unit..
21-82 BACK
DTC 82980 or DTC indicator Band 9. Check for continuity between body ground and
WINDSHIELD DEFROST: A short in the AlC climate control unit connector A (40P) terminal
Pressure Sensor Circuit No. 26.

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 82980 or 8 and WINDSHIELD DEFROST =

indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
5. Check for DTCs. YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the climate control unit and the AlC
Are these DTCs also present; 81234 or K and pressure sensor.•
AUTO, and/or 81237 or N and AUTO, and/or
81245 or G, and/or 82968 or A and WINDSHIELD NO-Go to step 10.
DEFROST?
YES-Go to step 16. connector A (40P) terminals No.6 and No. 26.
NO-Go to step 6. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
7. Disconnect the AlC pressure sensor 3P connector.
NO-Goto step 11.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-83
Climate Control
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure the 15. Measure the voltage between climate control unit
voltage between body ground and climate control connector A (40P) terminals No.6 and No.8, and
unit connector A (40P) terminal No. 26. between climate control unit connector A (40P)
terminals No.8 and No. 26.
=

YES-Repair.shorttopower in the w.ire between
the climate control unitand Ale pressure sensor. YES-Replace the AlC pressure sensor.•
This short may also damage the climate control
unit. Repair the short to power before replacing the NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
climate control unit.• climate control unit connector A (40P) and at the
AlC pressure sensor 3P connector. If the
NO-Go to step 12. connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. indication goes away, replace the original climate
control unit..
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). climate control unit.

21-84 BACK
18. Check for continuity between climate control unit 20. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
connector A (40P) terminal No.6 and body ground.
voltage between climate control unit connector A
Q
=
YES-Repair short to body ground in thewire .• Wire side of female terminals
NO-Go to step 19.

19. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and check the same
climate control unit connector A (40P). If the
control unit.•
=

NO-Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-85
Clinl,ate Control
23. While checking the same terminal for voltage to Ole 82981: Climate Control Unit Lost
ground, reconnect these items individually and Communication with Navigation Unit
note the voltage reading each time:
• Passenger's air mix control motor 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then ON (II).
• Humidity/in-car temperature sensor 3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9).
4. Check the DTCs.
YES-Go to step 5.

poor connections on the navigation unit and
climate control unit circuit..
= 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Wire side of female terminals 6. Disconnect navigation unit connector A (20P).

Does the voltage remain at about 5 volts?
YES-Substitute a known-good climate cbntrol unit

NO-Replace the,component that caused the

voltage drop.•
21-86 BACK
8. Check for continuity between the following 9. Check for continuity between body ground and
terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P) navigation unit connector A (20P) terminals No.4,
and navigation unit connector A (20P). 14, and 15 individually. '
40P: 20P:
"
No.2 No.4 NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)

No.21 No.15
No. 22 No.14

Q
=

between the climate control unit and the navigation
unit..
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)., ' NO-Go to step 10.

10. Check for continuity between navigation unit
/s there continuity? connector A (20P) terminals as follows.
YES-Go to step 9. From terminal To terminals

4 14,15
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the 14 15
climate control unit and the navigation unit.•
/s there continuity between any of the terminals?
NO-Substitute a known-good navigation unit, and

recheck. If the symptom goes away, replace the
original navigation unit. Ifthe symptom remains,
substitute a known-good climate control unit and
recheck. If the symptom goes away, replace the
BACK 21-87
Climate Control
OTC 82983 or OTC indicator K~ A problem in 9. Check for continuity between the following
the Recirculation Control Linkage, Door, or terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P)
Motor Circuit and the recirculation control motor 7P connector.
40P: 7P:
No.19 No.2
4. Check the DTCs.
Is ore 82983 or K indicated? Q Q

YES-Go to step 5.

poor connections on the recirculation control motor
circuit. • RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

6. Test the recirculation control motor (see page
21-113). YES-Go to step 10.
Is the recirculation control motor OK? NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the
climate control unit and the recirculation control
YES-Go to step 7. motor.•
NO-Replace the recirculation control motor

(see page 21-113), or repair the recirculation
7. Disconnectthe recirculation control motor 7P

connector.
21-88 BACK
10. Check for continuity between body ground and DTC 82991: Climate Control Unit Lost
climate control unit connector A (40P) terminals Communication with Audio Unit
No. 18 and 19 individually.
4. Check for DTCs.
Q Q Is OTe 82991 indicated?
= = YES-Go to step 5.
Wire side of female terminals NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or
poor connections on the rear climate control panel
and climate control unit circuit.•
between the climate control unit and the 6. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (14P).
recirculation control motor.•
7. Disconnect audio unit connector C (24P).
(cont'd)
BACK 21-89
Climate Control
connector B (14P) terminal No.8 and audio unit connector B (14P) terminal No.8 and body ground.
connector C (24P) terminal No. 24.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P) CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (24P) Is there continuity?

Is there continuity? 'between the climate control unit and the audio
unit.•
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate and recheck. 1fthe symptom/indication goes away,
control unit and the audio unit.. replace the original climate control unit. If the
symptom/indication remains, substitute a known-
good audio unit. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original audio unit.•
21-90 BACK
Rear Mode Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
relay box.
6. Test the rear mode control motor (see page 21-144).
Is the fuse OK?
Is the rear mode control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse
blows again, check for a short in the No. 30 (10 A) NO-Replace the rear mode control motor
fuse circuit .• (see page 21-144), or repair the rear mode control
linkage or door.•
2. Disconnect the rear mode control motor 7P
connector. 7. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (14P).
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Check for continuity between body ground and
climate control unit connector B (14P) terminals
4. Measure the voltage between the rear mode No.3 and No.4 individually.
control motor 7P connector No.1 and body ground.
REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
Q Q
= = =
YES-Go to step 5. between the climate control unit and the rear mode
control motor.•
(10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the NO-Go to step 9.
rear mode control motor.•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-91
Climate Control
Rear Mode Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same 11. Check for continuity between the following
wires for voltage to body ground. terminals of climate control unit connector B (14P)
and the rear mode control motor 7P connector.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P) 14P: 7P:
No.3 No.5
No.4 No.7

=
Wire side of female terminals Q

the climate control unit and the rear mode control REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
motor. This short may also damage the climate Wire side offemale terminals
control unit. Repair the short to power before
replacing the climate control unit.• Is there continuity?
NO-Go to step 10. YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at

climate control unit connector B (14P) and atthe
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. rear mode control motor 7P connector. If the
control unit.•

climate control unit and the rear mode control
motor.•
21-92 BACK
Climate Control Unit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
relay box.
5. Check for continuity between' climate control unit
Is the fuse OK? connector A (40P) terminal No. 37 and body ground.
YES-Go to step 2. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse

blows again, check for a short in the No. 30 (10 A)
fuse circuit..
3. Measure the voltage between climate control unit

connector A (40P) terminal No.3 and body ground. =
YES-Go to step 6.
.'
climate control unit and body ground. If the wire is
= OK, check for poor ground at G506 (see page 22-67).

Is there battery voltage? 7. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box

connector X (39P).
YES-Go to step 4.

(cont'd)
BACK 21-93
Climate Control
Climate Control Unit Radiator and AIC Condenser Fan

Troubleshooting (cont'd) Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
8. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay NOTE:

box connector X (39P) terminal No. 27 and climate • 00 not use this troubleshooting procedure if the AlC
control unit connector A (40P) terminal No.4. compressor is inoperative. Refer to the symptom
troubleshooting index.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR X (39P)
• Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check
for powertrain OTCs (see page 11-3).
1. Check the No. 15 (30 A) fuse in the relay blo(;k, and

the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay
box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck. If the fuse(s)

blow again, check for a short in the No. 15 (30 A)
and No. 30 (10 A) fuse(s) circuit.•
2. Remove the AlC condenser fan relay from the relay

block, and test it (see page 22-77).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) NO-Replace the AlC condenser fan relay.•
Wire side of female terminals .
3. Connect the HOS to the OLC.

YES-Check for loose wires and poor connections
at climate control unit connector A (40P). If 5. Turn on the AlC.
climate control unit and recheck. If the symptom/ 6. Check the FAN LOW CTRL in the PGM-FI Oata List
indication goes away, replace the original climate with the HOS.
control unit..
Is the FAN LOW CTRL on?
NO-Repair open in the wire between the MICU
and the climate control unit.. YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8),

and retest. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away
with a known-good PCM, replace the original PCM
(see page 11-244) .•
21-94 BACK
7. Measure the voltage between the AlC condenser 9. Disconnect the jumper wire.
fan relay 4P socket terminal No.1 and body ground.
AIC CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
11. Measure the voltage between the AlC condenser
fan relay 4P socke~ terminal No.4 and body ground.
2 AIC CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
4 3
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the relay block (see page 22-71).• Is there battery voltage?
8. Connect the AlC condenser fan relay 4P socket YES-Go to step 12.
terminals No.1 and No. 2with a jumper wire.
NO-Go to step 36.
AIC CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
13. Reinstall the AlC condenser fan relay.
~ JUMPERWIRE 14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

2 BLU
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the
4 3 powertrain control module (PCM) from damage.
Do the Ale condenser and radiator fans run on

low?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
BACK 21'-95
Climate Control
Radiator and AIC Condenser Fan Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting

(cont'd)
16. Connectthe PCM connector A (49P) terminal No.4 22. Measure the voltage between the AlC condenser
to body ground with a jumper wire. fan 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
...---------, AIC CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR
WHT
~
~BW
JUMPER WIRE
=
YES-Go to step 23.
Do the AlC condenser and radiator fans run on
low? NO-Repair open in the wire between the Ale
condenser fan relay and the AlC condenser fan .•
YES-Check for loose wi res or poor connections at
PCM connector A (49P) terminal No.4. If the 23. Set the AlC button and fan control button OFF, then
connections are good, substitute a known-good turn the ignition switch OFF.
PCM, and recheck.lfthe symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original PCM (see page 11-244). 24. Reconnect the AlC condenser fan 2P connector.
• 25. Connect the AlC condenser fan 2P connector
NO-Repair open in the wire between the AlC terminal No.1 to body ground with a jumper wire.
condenser fan relay and the PCM .•
AIC CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR
19. Reinstall the AlC condenser fan relay.
20. Disconnect the AlC condenser fan 2P connector. RED

JUMPER WIRE
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then set the AlC
button and fan control button ON. =
26. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then set the Ale
button and fan control button ON.
Does the AlC condenser fan run?
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Replace the AlC condenser fan motor

(see page 10-10) .•
21-96 BACK
27. Set the AlC button and fan control button OFF, then 33. Disconnect the radiator fan 2P connector.
34. Check for continuity between the fan control relay
28. Disconnect the jumper wire. 5P socket terminal No.4 and the radiator fan 2P
29. Remove the fan control relay from the relay block,
FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P SOCKET
and test it (see page 22-78).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 30.
NO-Replace the fan control relay .•
30. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), then set the AlC
button and fan control button ON.
31. Measure the voltage between the fan control relay

5P socket terminal No.1 and body ground. RADIATOR FAN 2P CONNECTOR

.----...,RED
YES-Go to step 35.
2
NO-Repair open in the wire between the fan
control relay and the radiator fan .•
35. Check for continuity between the radiator fan 2P

=
RADIATOR FAN 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 32.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the AlC

condenser fan and the fan control relay.•
32. Set the AlC button and fan control button OFF, then Wire side offemale terminals
YES-Replace the radiator fan motor (see page

10-10).•

radiator fan and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G301 (see page 22-67).•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-97
Climate Control
Radiator and AIC Condenser Fan AIC Condenser Fan High Speed
Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting Circuit Troubleshooting
(cont'd)
NOTE:
36. Turn the ignition switch OFF. • Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the
radiator fan and/or the AlC compressor is inoperative.
37. Remove AlC diode A from the relay block. Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index.
• Before doing any symptom troubleshooting, check
38. Using the diode setting (.,.....) on a DVOM, check for powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
for current flow in both directions between the AlC
diode A terminals No.1 and No.2. 1. Remove the fan control relay from the relay block,
and test it (see page 22-78).
A/C DIODE A
Is the relay OK?
I~
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fan control relay .•

1 2
3. Measure the voltage between the fancontrol relay
1 0 IIIIIIII 02 5P socket terminal No.5 and body ground.

Is there current flow in only one direction?
YES-Go to step 39.

2
NO-Replace AlC diode A..
40. Measure the voltage between the AlC diode A 2P

socket terminal No.2 and body ground. =
A/C DIODE A 2P SOCKET
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the relay block (see page 22-71) .•

=
YES-Replace the relay block (see page 22-71) .•

(10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
AlC diode A..
21-98 BACK
5. Check for continuity between the fan control relay 6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
5P socket terminal No.2 and body ground.
FAN CONT~OL RELAY SP SOCKET
powertrain control module (PCM) from damage.
1----1SLK 8. Check for continuity between the fan control relay

2
5P socket terminal No.3 and PCM connector A
(49P) terminal No.5.
FAN CONTROL RELAY SP SOCKET

.Q
2
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the fan

control relay and body ground. If the wire is OK,
check for poor ground at G202 (see page 22-67) .•

. Is there continuity?

PCM connector A (49P) terminal No.5. Ifthe
PCM, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original PCM (see page 11-244).
•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the fan
control relay and the PCM .•
BACK 21-99
Climate Control
AIC Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 6. Using the HDS, confirm the following-values in the

• It is normal for the AlC compressor to turn off under PGM-FI Data List at idle.
certain conditions, such as low idle, high engine
coolant temperature, hard acceleration, or high/low AlCSWITCH ON
pressure. AlC PRESSURE 196-3,138 kPa
• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the fans SENSOR (2-32 kgf/cm2)
are also inoperative with the AlC on. Refer to the [28-455 psi]
symptom troubleshooting index.
• Before doing any symptom troubleshooting, check Are all the values within specifications?
for powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
YES-Go to step 7.
1. Check the No.7 (7.5 A) fuse in the relay block, and
the No. 30 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay NO-Troubleshoot the value that is not within the
box. specifications.•
Are the fuses OK? 7. Remove the AlC compressor clutch relay from the
relay block, and test it (see page 22-77).
YES-Go to step 2.
Is the relay OK?
NO-Replace the fuse(s) and recheck. If the fuse(s)
blow again, check for a short in the No.7 (7.5 A) YES-Go to step 8.
and No. 30 (10A) fuse(s) circuit..
NO-Replace the AlC compressor clutch relay .•
2. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
8. Measure the voltage between the AlC compressor
3. Start the engine. clutch relay 4P socket terminal No.1 and body
ground.
4. Turn on the AlC.
AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET
5. Check the AlC CLUTCH in the PGM-FI Data List with
the HDS.
Is the AlC CLUTCH on? 2
YES-Go to step 7. 4 3
NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Replace the relay block (see page 22-71) .•
21-100 BACK
9. Connect the NC compressor clutch relay 4P socket 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
14. Reinstall the NC.compressor clutch relay.
W
powertrain control module (PCM) from damage.
JUMPERWIRE
PUR 2 16. Disconnect PCM connector A (49P).
4 3
17. Connect PCM connector A (49P) terminal No. 13 to
Does the AlC compressor clutch click?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 19. RED

JUMPER WIRE

=
12. Measure the voltage between the NC compressor
clutch relay 4P socket terminal No.4 and body 18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
ground.
Does the AlC compressor click?
PCM connector A (49P). If the connections are good,
check the PCM grounds. If the grounds are good,
2 substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. Ifthe
original PCM (see page 11-244).•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the NC

compressor clutch relay and the PCM .•
YES-Go to step 13.

NC compressor clutch relay.•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-101
Climate Control
AIC Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
20. Disconnect theAlC compressor clutch 1P connector.
21. Check for continuity between the AlC compressor

clutch relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and the AlC
compressor clutch 1P connector terminal No.1.
AlC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET
PUR
2
4 3
AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH 1P CONNECTOR

Wire side of female terminal
YES-Check the AlC compressor clutch clearance,

and the compressor clutch field coil (see page
21-125). Repair as needed .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the AlC

compressor clutch 'relay and the AlC compressor
clutch .•
21-102 BACK
Humidity/In-car Temperature Sensor Test
Humidity Sensor Test 4. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the

humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page
1. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 21-104).
(see page 21-104).
2. Connect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P

connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the

voltage between the terminals with the (+) probe
on the No.2 terminal and the (-) probe on the
No.3 terminal with the connector connected.
4
,/ V
3 V
VOLTAGE ./
V
(VI
2 V
/"
./ '"
1
'"
o 20 40 60 80 100
HUMIDITY LEVEL (% rhl
(cont'd)
BACK 21-103
Climate Control
Humiditylin-car Temperature Humiditylin-car Temperature

Sensor Test (cont'd) Sensor Replacement
In-car Temperature Sensor Test 1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover
(see page 20-119).
(see page 21-104). 2. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor (A)
from the driver's dashboard lower cover (B).
2. Connect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P
connector.
3. Test the humidity/in-car temperature sensor while

holding it in front of the dashboard center vent.
• Measure the resistance with the system set to

Max Cool.
• Measure the resistance with the system set to
Max Hot.
4. Compare the resistance reading between the No.4

and No.3 terminals of the humidity/in-car
temperature sensor with the specifications shown
in the graph; the resistance should be within the
specifications. 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
Be sure to connect the air hose securely.
HUMIDITYliN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
12
11
10
9
8
RESISTANCE 7
(kQ) 6 "-
5
4 " '" "- ........
-
3
2 .........
1
14 32 50 68 86 104 "F
-10 0 10 20 30 40 'C
TEMPERATURE
5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the

humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-104).
21-104 BACK
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Test Replacement
1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor 1. Remove the bulkhead cover (see page 20-203).
(see page 21-105).
2. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, then remove the
2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the outside air temperature sensor (8) from the back of
resistance. Then pour warm water on the sensor, the front bumper. Disconnect the 2P connector (C)
and check for a change in resistance. from the outside air temperature sensor.
3. Compare the resistance reading between the No.1

and No.2 terminals of the outside air temperature
sensor with the specifications shown in the graph;
the resistance should be within the specifications.
B
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
12
11 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
10
9
1\
\
8 \
RESISTANCE 7
(kQ) 6 1"\
5 '\.,
4
3 1""-
b.
2
t--
1
14 32 50 68 86 104 'F
-10 o 10 20 30 40 'C
TEMPERATURE

outside air temperature sensor (see page 21-105).
BACK 21-105
Climate Control
Sunlight Sensor Test Sunlight Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the sunlight sensor from the dashboard 1. Remove the sunlight sensor (A) from the
(see page 21-106). dashboard, then disconnect the 5P connector (B).
Be careful not to damage the sensor and the
2. Connect the sunlight sensor 5P connector. dashboard.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the

voltage between the terminals with the (+) probe
on the No.4 terminal and the (-) probe on the
No.2 terminal with the connector connected.
NOTE: The voltage readings will not change under

the light of a flashlight or a fluorescent lamp.
Voltage should be:

• 3.6-3.7 V ormore with the sensor out of direct
sunlight.
• 3.3-3.5 V or less with the sensor in direct
sunlight.
2. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
4. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the

sunlight sensor (see page 21-106).
21-106 BACK
Front Evaporator Temperature Front Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Test Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the evaporator front temperature sensor 1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover
(see page 21-107). (see page 20-120).
2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the 2. Remove the TPMS control unit (see page 18-162).
resistance between its terminals.
3. Disconnect the connector (A) from the front
FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR evaporator temperature sensor (8), then remove
the connector clip (C). Remove the self-tapping
screw and the front evaporator temperature sensor.
3. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for

a change in resistance.
4. Compare the resistance readings with the

specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
40
30
RESISTANCE
(kQ)
20
I~
~ r-.....
10
32 50 68
-
86 "F
o 10 20 30 'C
TEMPERATURE

front evaporator temperature sensor (see page
21-107).
BACK 21-107
Climate Control
Front Power Transistor Test
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover 4. Carefully release the lock tab on the No.1 terminal
(see page 20-127). (RED) (A) in the 4P connector, then remove the
terminal and insulate it from body ground.
2. Disconnect the 4P connector from the front power
A
transistor.
3. Measure the resistance between the No.3 and

No.4 terminals of the front power transistor. It
should be about 1.5 k Q •
• If the resistance is within the specifications, go to

step 4.
• If the resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the front power transistor.
NOTE: Also check the front blower motor. Front

power transistor failure can be caused by a
defective front blower motor. (To 12 V Power source on vehicle)
FRONT POWER TRANSISTOR

5. Reconnect the 4P connector to the front power
transistor.
6. Make sure the RED wire is completely isolated,

then supply 12 V to the No.1 cavity with a jumper
2 wire.
3 4 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the

front blower motor runs.
'--_---(Q)--_--I
• If the front blower motor does not run, replace
the front power transistor.
NOTE: A faulty front blower motor can cause the

front power transistor to fail. If the front power
transistor is replaced, also check the front blower
motor for binding, and replace it if necessary .
• If the front blower motor runs, the front power

transistor is OK.
21-108 BACK
Driver's Air Mix Control Motor Test
NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs (see page 4. Measure the resistance between the No.5 and
21-8). No.7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kQ.
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the driver's air 5. Reconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P
mix control motor. connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
INOTICE I 6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage

Incorrectly applying power and ground to between the No.3 and No.7 terminals.
the driver's air mix control motor will
damage it. Followthe instructions carefully. Max Cool: about 0.5 V
Max Hot: about 4.5 V
2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal of the
driver's air mix control motor, and ground the No.2 7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not
terminal; the driver's air mix control motor should as specified, replace the driver's air mix control
run, and stop at Max Cool. If it doesn't, reverse the motor (see page 21-110).
connections; the driver's air mix control motor
should run, and stop at Max Hot. When the driver's
air mix control motor stops running, disconnect
battery power immediately.
DRIVER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
~L
-
Ur-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. Ifthe driver's air mix control motor did not run in

step 2, remove it, then check the driver's air mix
control linkage and door for smooth movement.
• Ifthe linkage and door move smoothly, replace

the driver's air mix control motor (see page
21-110).
• If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them
as needed.
• If the driver's air mix control motor runs
smoothly, go to step 4.
BACK 21-109
Climate Control
Driver's Air Mix Control Motor Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor
Replacement Test
1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs (see page
(see page 20-120). 21-8).
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the driver's 1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the passenger's
air mix control motor (8). Remove the self-tapping air mix control motor.
screws and the driver's air mix control motor from
the heater unit. INOTICE I
Incorrectly applying power and ground to
the passenger's air mix control motor will
damage it. Follow the instructions carefully.

passenger's air mix control motor, and ground the
No.2 terminal; the passenger's air mix control
motor should run, and stop at Max Cool. If it
doesn't, reverse the connections; the passenger's
air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max
Hot. When the passenger's air mix control motor
stops running, disconnect battery power
immediately.
PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR

3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure the pin on the motor is properly
engaged with the linkage. After installation, make -
sure the motor runs smoothly.
r-L ~
Ur-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. If the passenger's air mix control motor did not run

in step 2, remove it, then check the. passenger's air
mix control linkage and door for smooth
movement.

the passenger's air mix control motor (see page
21-111).
• If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them
as needed.
• If the passenger's air mix control motor runs
smoothly, go to step 4.
21-110 BACK
Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor
Replacement
No.7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kQ.
5. Reconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 7P
connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the
passenger's air mix control motor (8). Remove the
6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage self-tapping screws and the passenger's air mix
between the No.3 and No.7 terminals. control motor from the heater unit.
Max Cool: about 1.5 V

7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not

as specified, replace the passenger's air mix
control motor (see page 21-111).

engaged with the linkage. After installation, make
BACK 21-111'
Climate Control
Front Mode Control Motor Test Front Mode Control Motor

Replacement
NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs (see page
21-8).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the front mode
control motor. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the front
mode control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping
INOTICE I screws and the front mode control motor from the
Incorrectly applying power and ground to heater unit.
the front mode control motor will damage it.
Follow the instructions carefully.

front mode control motor, and ground the No.2
terminal; the front mode control motor should run
smoothly, and stop at Vent. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the front mode control motor should
run smoothly, and stop at Defrost. When the front
mode control motor stops running, disconnect
battery power immediately.
FRONT MODE CONTROL MOTOR
2 3 4 5 6 7

3. If the front mode control motor did not run in step engaged with the linkage. After installation, make
2, remove it, then check the front mode control sure the motor runs smoothly.
linkage and doors for smooth movement.
• Ifthe linkage and doors move smoothly, replace

the front mode control motor (see page 21-112).
• If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them
as needed.
• If the front mode control motor runs smoothly,
go to step 4.
4. Use a digital multimeter with an output of 1 mA or

less at the 20 k Q range. With the front mode
control motor running as in step 2, check for
continuity between the No.3, 4, 5, and 6 terminals
and the No.7 terminal individually. There should
be continuity for a moment at each terminal as the
motor moves past the switch's terminal.
5. Ifthere is no continuity for a moment at each

terminal, replace the front mode control motor
(see page 21-112).
21-112 BACK
Recirculation Control 'Motor Test Recirculation Control Motor
Replacement
21-8).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the recirculation
control motor. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the
recirculation control motor (B). Remove the self-
INOTICE I tapping screws and the recirculation control motor
Incorrectly applying power and ground to from the heater unit.
the recirculation control motor will damage it.
Follow the instructions carefully.

recirculation control motor, and ground the No.2
terminal; the recirculation control motor should run
smoothly, and stop at Fresh. If it doesn't, reverse
the connections; the recircl,Jlation control motor
should run smoothly, and stop at Recirculate.
When the recirculation control motor stops running,
disconnect battery power immediately.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR
r-- ,----
-L '--
J~
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 sure the motor runs smoothly.
3. Ifthe recirculation control motor did not run in step

2, remove it, then check the recirculation control
linkage and door for smooth movement.
• If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace

the recirculation control motor (see page 21-113).
• If the linkage or door stick or bind, repair them as
needed.
• If the recirculation control motor runs smoothly,
goto step 4.
4. Use a digital multimeter with an output of 1 mA or

less at the 20 kQ range. With the recirculation
control motor running as in step 2, check for
continuity between the No.3, 4, and 5 terminals
and the No.7 terminal individually. There should
be continuity for a moment at each terminal as the
motor moves past the switch's terminal.
5. If there is no continuity for a moment at each

terminal, replace the recirculation control motor
(see page 21-113).
BACK 21-113
Climate Control
Climate Control Unit Removall Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement

Installation
1. Open the glove box. Remove the glove box stop on
right side, then let the glove box hang down
1. Remove the audio unit (see page 23-90). (see page 20-125).
2. Remove the self-tapping screws, bolt, brackets (A), 2. Remove the dust and pollen filter assembly (A)
and the climate control unit (8). from the evaporator.
A
A
3. Install the control unit in the reverse order of 3. Remove the filter (A) from the housing (8), and
removal. After installation, operate the various replace the filter.
functions to see whether works properly.
4. Run the self-diagnostic function to confirm that

there are no problems in the system (see page
21-10).
4. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure that there is no air leaking out of the
blower unit.
21-114 BACK
Blower Unit Removal/Installation
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-125). 4. Remove the wire harness clips (A), the self-tapping
screws, and the passenger's heater duct (8).
2. Remove the harness clips (A), the bolts, and the
glove box frame (8).
3. Cut the plastic cross brace (A) in the glove box

opening with diagonal cutters in the area shown,
and discard it. 5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the front blower
motor. Remove the wire harness clips (8).
Cut here.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-115
Climate Control
Blower Unit Removal/Installation Blower Unit Component

6. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the Note these items when overhauling the blower unit:
recirculation control motor and adaptive front
lighting control unit, then remove the harness clip • The recirculation control motor (A), front blower
(B). Remove the self-tapping screws, the mounting motor (B) and the dust and pollen filter (C) can be
nuts, and the blower unit (C). replaced without removing the blower unit.
• Before reassembly, make sure that the recirculation
control linkage and door move smoothly without
binding.
• After reassembly, make sure the recirculation control
motor runs smoothly (see page 21-113).
c
A
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
7. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure that there is no air leakage.
21-116 BACK
Front Evaporator Core Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ 5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the front power
charging station (see page 21-130). transistor, then remove the harness clip (8).
Remove the self-tapping screws, the expansion
2. Remove the bolts. valve cover (C), and the seal (D).
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
B
/
J //
, /i
.I
/
/
i
D--h...
3. Remove the bolts, then disconnect the front \.
receiver line (A) and the front suction line (8) from
the front evaporator core. c
A
6. Remove the bolts, the inlet and outlet pipes (A), and
expansion valve (8). Carefully pull out the front
evaporator core (C), then remove the plate (D).
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
J
4. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-115).
(cont'd)
BACK 21-117
Climate Control
Front Evaporator Core Replacement Heater Unit/Core Replacement

(cont'd)
7. Install the core in the reverse order of removal, and precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
note these items: doing repairs or service.
• If you're installing a new front evaporator core, 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the
add refrigerant oil (DENSO NO-OIL 8) (see page audio system and the navigation system (if
21-6). equipped).
• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before 2. Make sure the ignition is OFF, then disconnect the
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings negative cable from the battery.
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to ~void leakage.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap 3. Disconnect the front receiver line and front suction
on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture line from the front evaporator core (see page
absorption. 21-117).
• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil 4. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A),
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately. then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the
• Make sure that there is no air leakage. heater valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve arm to
• Charge the system (see page 21-132). the fully opened position as shown.
5. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant

from the radiator (see page 10-6).
21-118 BACK
6. Remove the clamp (A). Slide the hose clamps (B) 9, Disconnect the connector (A) from the front blower
back. Remove the nut and the water valve (e), then motor. Remove the wire harness clips (B).
disconnect the inlet heater hose (D) and the outlet
heater hose (E) from the heater unit.
Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are
disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure
not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the
painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off
immediately.
10. Disconnect the connector (A) from the adaptive

front lighting control unit, then remove the harness
clip (B).
6x 1.0 mm
c 9.8N·m A
D (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf.ft)
B
7. Remove the mounting nuts from the heater unit.
Take carenotto damage or bendthe fuel lines or
brake lines, etc.
8x 1.25 mm
12.3N·m
(1.3 kgf·m, 9.0 Ibf·ft)
8. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-130).
(cont'd)
BACK 21-119
Climate Control
Heater Unit/Core Replacement (cont'd)
11. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the front mode 13. Turn over the carpet. Remove the wire harness
control motor, the passenger's air mix control clips (A), the rear heater duct mounting clips (B),
motor, the recirculation control motor, and the and the rear heater duct (C).
front power transistor. Remove the wire harness
clips (B).
A B
14. Remove the mounting nuts. Slide the blower-

heater unit (A), then remove the drain hose (B) and
blower-heater unit.
12. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the driver's air

mix control motor and the front evaporator
temperature sensor. Remove the wire harness clips
(B) and the wire harness (C).
21-120 BACK
15. Remove the self-tapping screws and the passenger's 16. Install the front heater core, and the front
heater duct (A). Remove the self-tapping screws evaporator core in the reverse order of removal.
and the expansion valve cover (8). Remove the
self-tapping screw and the front heater core cover 17. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of
ee). Remove the self-tapping screws, the heater removal, and note these items:
pipe brackets (D), the grommets (E), and carefully
pull out the front heater core (F). • Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater
hoses, and install the hose clamps securely.
• Refill the cooling system with engine coolant
(see page 10-6).
• Adjust the heater valve cable (see page 21-122).
• Make sure that there is no coolant leakage.
• Make sure that there is no air leakage.
• Refer to the front evaporator core replacement
(see page 21-117).
• Reset the power window control unit (see page
22-259).
(see page 17-28).
• Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system
and the navigation system (if equipped).
• Set the clock.
BACK 21-121
Climate Control
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment
1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), 5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (C)
then disconnect the heater valve cable (8) from the to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it.
heater valve arm (C). Attach the heater valve cable (8) to the heater valve
arm, and gently pull on the heatervalve cable
housing to take up any slack, then install the heater
valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A).
2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve

cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and
disconnect the heater valve cable (8) from the
driver's air mix control linkage (C).
3. Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool (Lo)

with the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Attach the heater valve cable (8) to the driver's air

mix control linkage (C) as shown step 2. Snap the
heater valve cable housing into the cable clamp (A).
NOTE: Make sure the ring-end of the cable is

pushed all the way to the base of the pin on driver's
air mix control linkage.
21-122 BACK
AIC Compressor Replacement
NOTE: Do not install the Ale compressor into a system 6. Support the front subframe with the engine support.
unless you are completely sure that the system is free Remove the bolts and the front subframe stiffener
of contamination. Installing the Ale compressor into a (A).
contaminated system can result in premature Ale
compressor failure. NOTE: Install the new front subframe mounting
bolt (8).
·1. If the Ale compressor is marginally operable, run
the engine at idle speed, and let the air
conditioning work for a few minutes, then shut the
engine off.
2. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/

charging station (see page 21-130).

A
4. Remove the front splash shield (see page 20-218).
5. Remove the front undercover (see page 20-219).
14x1.5mm
103.0N·m
110.5 kgf·m, 75.9 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
7. Disconnect the Ale compressor clutch connector

(A). Remove the bolts and the nut, then disconnect
the suction hose (8) and discharge hose (e) from
the Ale compressor. Plug or cap the lines
immediately after disconnecting them to avoid
moisture and dust contamination.
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
11.0 kgf·m,
C 7.2 Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 21-123
Climate Control
AIC Compressor Replacement (cont'd)
8. Remove the mounting bolts and the AlC 9. Install the AlCcompressor in the reverse order of
compressor (A). Be careful not to damage the removal, and note these items:
radiator fins when removing the compressor.
• Inspect the AlC lines for any signs of
contamination.
• If you're installing a new AlC compressor, you
must calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be
removed from it (seepage 21-6). A new AlC
compressor comes with a full charge of oil.
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings
for HFC-134a (R"134a) to avoid leakage.
• Use refrigerant oil (DENSO NO-OIL 8) for
HFC-134a DENSO piston type AlC compressor
only.
• Tb avoid contamination, do not return the oil to
the container once dispensed, and never mix it
with other refrigerant oils.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap
on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
8x1.2Smm • Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
22N·m may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil
(2.2 kgf·m, contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.
16.2Ibf·ft)
• Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
installing the compressor and the AlC condenser
fan shroud.
• Charge the system (see page 21-132).
21-124 BACK
AIC Compressor Clutch Check
1. Check the pressure plate for discoloration, peeling, 4. Measure the resistance of the field coil. If the
or other damage. If there is damage, replace the resistance is not within specifications, replace the
clutch set (see page 21-126). field coil (see page 21-126).
2. Check the pulley bearing play and drag by rotating Field Coil Resistance: 3.9-4.3 Q at
the pulley by hand. Replace the clutch set with a 68° F (20 "C)
new one if it is noisy or has excessive play/drag
(see page 21-126).
c )
3. Measure the clearance between the pulley (A) and

the pressure plate (8) all the way around. If the
clearance is not within specified limits, remove the
pressure plate (see page 21-126) and add or
remove shims as needed to increase or decrease
clearance.
Clearance: 0.30-0.60 mm (0.012-0.024 in.)
NOTE: The shims are available in three

thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, and 0.5 mm.
BACK 21-125
Climat.e Control
AIC Compressor Clutch Overhaul
Special Tools Required 3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap
Ale clutch holder,Robinair 10204 or Kent-Moore ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the
J37872, or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939, pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the pulley or
commercially available the Ale compressor.
1. Remove the center bolt while holding the pressure

plate (A) with a commercially available Ale clutch
A
holder (B).
B B
2. Remove the pressure plate (A) and shim(s) (B), 4.. Remove the screw from the field coil ground
taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch terminal (A) and bracket (B). Disconnect the
needs adjustment, increase or decrease the connector (e) from the field coil, then remove the
number and thickness of shims as necessary, then wire harness clip (D). Remove the snap ring (E) with
reinstall the pressure plate, and recheck its snap ring pliers, then remove the field coil (F). Be
clearance (see page 21-125). careful not to damage the field coil or the Ale
compressor.
NOTE: The shims are available in three
thicknesses: 0.1 mm, 0.3 mm, and 0.5 mm.
21-126 BACK
AIC Compressor Relief Valve
Replacement
5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of
disassembly, and note these items:
• Install the field coil with the wire side facing charging station (see page 21-130).
down, and align the boss on the field coil with the
hole in the AlC compressor. 2. Remove the front splash shield (see page 20-218).
• Clean the pulley and AlC compressor sliding
surfaces with contact cleaner or other non- 3. Remove the front undercover (see page 20-219).
petroleum solvent.
• Install new snap rings, note the installation 4. Remove the relief valve (A) and the O-ring (8). Plug
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in the opening to keep foreign matter from entering
the groove. the system and the AlC compressor oil from
• Make sure that the pulley turns smoothly after it's running out.
reassembled.
• Route and clamp the wires properly or they can
be damaged by the pulley.
5. Clean the mating surfaces.
6. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief

valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing it.
7. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief

valve.
8. Charge the system (see page 21-132).
BACK 21-127
Climate Control
AIC Condenser'Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling 5. Remove the bolts, nut, and the ATF cooler bracket
charging station (see page 21-130). (A).
2. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-188).
3. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the discharge

hose (A) from the Ale condenser.
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) 6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
4. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the front receiver
line (A) from the Ale condenser. 6. Loosen the bolts, then remove the Ale condenser
upper mount brackets (A).
A
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 Ibf·ft)
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
7. Remove the hood latch (see page 20-225).
21-128 BACK
Receiver /Dryer Desiccant
Replacement
8. Remove the AlC condenser (A) by lifting it up. Be
careful not to damage the radiator and AlC
condenser fins when removing the AlC condenser. NOTE: Install the receiver/dryer as quickly as possible
to prevent the system from absorbing moisture from
the air.
A
1. Remove the AlC condenser (see page 21-128).
2. Remove the cap (A) from the bottom of the AlC

condenser. Remove the O-ring (B) and the
desiccant (C).
9. Install the AlC condenser in the reverse order of

c
• If you're installing a new AlC condenser, add
refrigerant oil (OENSO NO-OIL 8) (see page 21-6).
A
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before 2.9N·m
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings (0.3 kgf·m, 2.1 Ibf.ftl
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap 3. Install the receiver/dryer in the reverse order of
on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture removal, and note these items:
absorption.
• 00 not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it • Replace the O-rings with new ones, and apply a
may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil thin coat of refrigerant oil (OENSO NO-OIL 8)
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately. before installing them. Be sure to use the correct
• Be careful not to damage the radiator or the AlC O-rings for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
condenser fins when installing the AlC condenser. • Install the cap to the specified torque. It is made
• Charge the system (see page 21-132). of resin and can be easily stripped.
• Adjustthe hood latch (see page 20-194).
BACK 21-129
Climate Control
Refrigerant Recovery
2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed

ACAUTION from the Ale system after the recovery process is
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. refrigerant oil back into the AlC system before
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. charging.
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
NOTE:
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the
work area before resuming service .
• Additional health and safety information may be
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/

charging station (A) to the high-pressure service
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
shown, following the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
21-130 BACK
System Evacuation
3. If the low~pressure does not reach more than

ACAUTION 93.3 kPa (,700 mmHg, 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes,
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor there is probably a leak in the system. Partially
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. charge the system, and check for leaks (see step 3
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. on page 21-133).
NOTE:
• Additional health and safety information may be
manufacturers.
1. When an AlC System has been .opened to the

atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it
must be evacuated using an R-134a refrigerant
recovery/recycling/charging station. If the system
has been open for-several days, the receiver/dryer
should be replaced, and the system should be
evacuated for several hours.
2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/

port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
instructions. Evacuate the system.
BACK 21-131
Climate Control
System Charging
2. Evacuate the system (see page 21-131).

ACAUTION
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor 3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. system that was removed during recovery. Use
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. only OENSO NO-OIL 8 refrigerant oil.
4. Charge the system with the specified amount of
R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system;
NOTE: the AlC compressor will be damaged.
work area before resuming service. Select the appropriate units of measure for your
• Additional health and safety information may be refrigerant charging station.
manufacturers. Refrigerant Capacity:
600to650g
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/ 0.60 to 0.65 kg
charging station (A) to the high-pressure service 1.32 to 1.43 Ibs
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as 21.2 to 22.9 oz
instructions. 5. Check for refrigerant leaks (seepage 21-133).
6. Check the system performance (see page 21-134).
21-132 BACK
Refrigerant Leak Test
Special Tools Required 2. Open the high pressure valve to charge the system
Leak detector, Honda Tool and Equipment YGK-H-10PM to the specified capacity, then close the supply
or commercially available valve, and disconnect the charging station fittings.
Select the appropriate units of measurement for

ACAUTION your refrigerant charging station.
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. Refrigerant Capacity:
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. SOOtoS50 g
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. O.SO to 0.S5 kg
1.32 to 1.43 Ibs
21.2 to 22.9 oz
NOTE:
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the 3. Check the system for leaks using an R-134a
work area before resuming service. refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g
• Additional health and safety information may be (0.5 oz) per year or better.
manufacturers. 4. If you find leaks that require the system to be
opened (to repair or replace hoses, fittings, etc.), do
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/ a recovery of the system.
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as 5. After checking and repairing leaks, the system.
shown, following the equipment manufacturer's must be evacuated.
instructions.
./
.- .,..,"
..
/
\.
."...
BACK 21-133
cnm:ate Control
Ale System Test

Performance Test· 5. Place a thermometer (B) near the blower unit's
recirculation inlet duct.
~CAUTION 6. Test conditions:
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat.. ' • Avoid direct sunlight
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. • Open hood .
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. • Open front doors.
• Set the temperature control switch to Max Cool,
the mode control switch to Vent, and the
The performance test will help determine if the AlC recirculation control switch to Recirculate.
system is operating within specifications. • Turn the AlC switch ON and the fan switch to
Max.
NOTE: • Run the engine at 1,500 rpm.
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the • No driver or passengers in vehicle.
• Additional health and safety information may be 7. After running the air conditioning for 10 minutes
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant under the above test conditions, read the delivery
manufacturers. temperature from the thermometer in the center
vent, the intake temperature near the blower unit,
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery!recycling! and the discharge (high) and suction (low)
charging station to the high-pressure service port pressures on the AlC gauges.
and the low-pressure service ,port, following the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
2. Determine the relative humidity and air

temperature.
3. Open the glove box. Remove the glove box stop on

right side, then let the glove box hang down
(see page 20-125).
4. Insert a thermometer (A) in the center vent.
21-134 BACK
8. Refer to the inspection data.
Inspection data
Example Intake temperature (dry): 86'f (30 "C) Humidity level 70 %
Intake temperature (wet): 77.9 'f (25.5 "C)
Delivery temperature: 59.9 'f (15.5 "C)
Delivery pressure: 1,265 kPa (12.9 kgf/cm2) (184 psi)
Intake pressure: 280 kPa (2.9 kgf/cm2) (41 psi)
Results: Within normal range
kPa
(kgf/cm 2 ) HUMIDITY
[psi] LEVEL
400 kPa
800/0
(1J~] . . . . ~.~~j.:.~~............................................................................. 300/0
"F INTAKE
('C) PRESSURE
1,600
INTAKE (16.3) 800/0
PRESSURE 0 [232] 86
(30) 300/0
800/0
1,200
(12.2)
[174]
68 DELIVERY
(20) PRESSURE
800
(8.2)
[116] 300/0
50
(10)
400
(4.1) DELIVERY
[58] TEMPERATURE
DELIVERY
PRESSURE 0 0 i i i i
DELIVERY 68 77 86 95 104 "F
TEMPERATURE (20) (25) (30) (35) (40) ('C)
INTAKE TEMPERATURE
(cont'd)
BACK 21-135
Climate Control
Ale System Test (cont'd)

Pressure Test
Test results Related symptoms Probable cause Remedy
Discharge After stopping AlC compressor, pressure Air in system Recover, evacuate (see page 21-130), and
(high) pressure drops about 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm', 28 psi) recharge with specified amount (see page
abnormally Quickly, and then falls gradually. 21-132).
high Reduced or no airflow through AlC • Clogged condenser or • Clean.
condenser. radiator fins • Check voltage and fan rpm.
• AlC condenser or radiator • Check fan direction.
fan not working properly
Line to AlC condenser is excessively hot. Restricted flow of refrigerant Restricted lines.
in sYstem
Discharge High and low-pressures are balanced soon • Faulty AlC compressor Replace the AlC compressor.
pressure after stopping AlC compressor. Low side is discharge valve
abnormally hiaher than normal. • Faultv AlC comoressor seal
low Outlet of expansion valve is not frosted, • Faulty expansion valve • Replace.
low-pressure gauge indicates vacuum. • Moisture in system • Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
soecified amount.
Suction (low) Expansion valve is notfrosted, and low- • Frozen expansion valve • Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
pressure pressure line is not cold. Low-pressure (Moisture in system) specified amount.
abnormally gauge indicates vacuum. • Faultv expansion valve • Reolace the expansion valve.
low Discharge temperature is low, and the Frozen evaporator Run the fan with AlC compressor off, then
airflow from vents is restricted. check evaporator temperature sensor.
Expansion valve is frosted. Clogged expansion valve Clean or replace.
Receiver/dryer outlet is cool, and inlet is Clogged receiver/dryer Replace.
warmjshould be warm during operation).
Suction Low-pressure hose and service port are Expansion valve open too Repair or replace.
pressure cooler than the temperature around long
abnormally evaoorator.
high Suction pressure is lowered when AlC Excessive refrigerant in Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
condenser is cooled bv water. svstem specified amount.
High and low-pressures are equalized as • Faulty gasket Replace the AlC compressor.
soon as the AlC compressor is stopped, • Faulty high-pressure valve
and both gauges fluctuate while running. • Foreign particle stuck in
high-pressure valve
Suction and Reduced airflow through AlC condenser. • Clogged AlC condenser or • Clean.
discharge radiator fins • Check voltage and fan rpm.
pressures • AlC condenser or radiator • Check fan direction.
abnormally fan not working properly
high
Suction and Low-pressure hose and metal fittings are Clogged or kinked low- Repair or replace.
discharge cooler than evaporator. pressure hose parts
pressures Temperature around expansion valve is Clogged high-pressure line Repair or replace.
abnormally too low compared with that arolind
low receiver/dryer.
Refrigerant AlC compressor clutch is dirty. AlC compressor shaft seal Replace the AlC compressor.
leaks leakina
AlC compressor bolt(s) are dirty. Leakina around bolt(s) Tiahten bolt(s) or reolace AlC com~essor.
AlC compressor gasket is wet with oil. Gasket leaking Reolace the AlC comoressor.
AlC fitting is dirty. Leaking O-ring Clean the AlC fittina and reolace the O-rina.
21-136 BACK
Rear Climate Control
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL

REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-144
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-143
Test, page 21-141
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR
Test, page 21-142
REAR HEATER CORE

REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY

Test, page 22-77
REAR BLOWER MOTOR

REAR HVAC UNIT

Component Replacement, page 21-149
BACK 21-137
" :'
System Description
Rear Climate Control Door Positions
_HOT
••
"
(VENT)
REAR AIR MIX DOOR .
REAR HEAT/VENT DOOR
(HEAT)
21-138 BACK
Rear Ale Line Replacement
REAR SUCTION/RECEIVER LINES
CD Front receiver line to the rear receiver line (16 x 1.5 mm): 13.2 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 9.8Ibf·ft)
CD Rear suction/receiver lines to rear evaporator (6 x 1.0 mm): 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
® Front suction line to rear suction line (24 x 1.5 mm): 31.9 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 23.5 Ibf·ft)
BACK 21-139
Rear Heater Line Replacement
REAR OUTLET HEATER HOSE
REAR INLET HEATER LINE
REAR OUTLET HEATER LINE
21-140 BACK
Rear Evaporator Temperature Rear Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Test Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the rear evaporator temperature sensor SRS components are located in this area. Review the
(see page 21-141). SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the
2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the doing repairs or service.
resistance between its terminals.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the rear
evaporator temperature sensor (B), then remove
the connector clip (C). Remove the self-tapping
screw and the rear evaporator temperature sensor
from the rear HVAC unit.
3. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for

a change in resistance.
4. Compare the resistance readings with the

specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
40
30
~
RESISTANCE
(kQ)
20
~ r-.....
10
---
32 50 68 86 'F
o 10 20 30 'C
TEMPERATURE
5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the rear

evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-141).
BACK 21-141
RearClimate Control
Rear Power Transistor Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Carefully release the lock tab on the No.1 terminal
SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the (BLU) (A) in the 4P connector, then remove the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before terminal and insulate it from body ground.,
1. Remove the driver's seat (see page 20-141).
2. Remove the driver's center console trim (see page

20-107). A
3. Disconnect the 4P connector from the rear power

transistor.

No.4 terminals of the rear power transistor. It
should be about 1.5 k Q .
o If the resistance is within the specifications, go to

JUMPER WIRE
step 5.
o If the resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the rear power transistor. (To 12 V Power source on vehicle)
NOTE: Also check the rear blower motor. Rear 6. Reconnect the 4P connector to the rear power
power transistor failure can be caused by a transistor.
defective rear blower motor.
7. Make sure the BLU wire is completely isolated,
REAR POWER TRANSISTOR then supply 12Vto the No.1 cavity with a jumper
wire.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check that the

rear blower motor runs.
2
o If the rear blower motor does not run, replace the
3 4 rear power transistor.
'------{Ql---------' NOTE: A faulty rear blower motor can cause the

rear power transistor to fail. If the rear power
transistor is replaced, also check the rear blower
motor for binding, and replace it if necessary.
o If the rear blower motor runs, the rear power

transistor is OK.
21-142 BACK
Rear Air Mix Control Motor Test Rear Air Mix Control Motor
Replacement
21-8).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the rear air mix SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the
control motor. precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
INOTICE I
Incorrectly applying power and ground to 1. Remove the center console (see page 20-107).
the rear air mix control motor will damage it.
Follow the instructions carefully. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the rear air
mix control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping
2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal ofthe screws and the rear air mix control motor from the
rear air mix control motor, and ground the No.2 HVAC unit.
terminal; the rear air mix control motor should run,
and stop at Max Hot. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the rear air mix control motor should
run, and stop at Max Cool. When the rear air mix
control motor stops running, disconnect battery
power immediately.
REAR AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
2 3 4 5 6 7
B

3. If the rear air mix control motor did not run in step Make sure the pin on the motor is properly
2, remove it, then check the rear air mix control engaged with the linkage. After installation, make
linkage and door for smooth movement. sure the motor runs smoothly.

the rear air mix control motor (see page 21-143).
• Ifthe linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them
as needed.
• If the rear air mix control motor runs smoothly,
goto step 4.

No.7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 k Q.
5. Reconnect the rear air mix control motor 7P

connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage

between the No.3 and No.7 terminals.
Max Cool: about 0.5 V

7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not

as specified, replace the rear air mix control motor
(see page 21-143).
BACK 21-143
Rear Mode Control Motor Test Rear Mode Control Motor

Replacement
21-8).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the rear mode SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the
control motor. precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
INOTICE I
Incorrectly applying power and ground to 1. Remove the center console (see page 20-107).
the rear mode control motor will damage it.
Follow the instructions carefully. 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the rear
mode control motor (B). Remove the rod (C) of the
2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal of the rear mode control motor from the rear mode
rear mode control motor, and ground the No.5 and control linkage (D). Remove the self-tapping screws
No.7 terminals; the rear mode control motor and the rear mode control motor from the rear
should run smqothly. To avoid damaging the rear HVAC unit.
mode control motor, do not reverse power and
ground. Disconnect the No.5 or NO.7 terminals
from ground; the rear mode control motor should
stop at Vent (when the No.5 terminal is
disconnected) or Heat (when the No.7 terminal is
disconnected). Don't cycle the rear mode control
motor for a long time.
REAR MODE CONTROL MOTOR
r-L '--
Ur-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Make sure the pin on the motor is properly
3. If the rear mode control motor did not run in step 2,

remove it, then check the rear mode control linkage
and door for smooth movement.
• If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace

the rear mode control motor (see page 21-144) .
• If the linkage or door stick or bind, repair them as
needed.
21-144 BACK
Rear Climate Control Panel Rear Blower Motor Replacement
SRS components are located inthis area. Review the precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the doing repairs or service.
doing repairs or service. 1. Remove the center console (see page 20-107).
1. Remove the HVAe trim (see page 20-110). 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the rear
blower motor (8), then remove the wire harness
2. Remove the self-tapping screws and the rear clips (e). Remove the self-tapping screws and the
climate control panel (A). rear blower motor from the rear HVAe unit.
.I
./
'- .. _- .........
..
,/
c
3. Install the control panel in the reverse order of

removal. After installation, operate the various
functions to see whether works properly.
4. Run the self-diagnostic function to confirm that

there are no problems in the system (see page
21-10).
BACK 21-145
Rear Heater Core Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Turn over the carpet. Remove the self-tapping
SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and the screws and the clamps (A). Carefully pull out the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before rear heater core (B) without bending lines.

3. Slide the hose damps (A) back, then disconnect the

rear inlet heater hose (B) and the rear outlet heater
hose (C) from the rear heater core. Note the
A
orientation of the hose.
not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the
immediately. 5. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
c
• Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater
(see page 10-6).
21-146 BACK
Rear HVAC Unit Removal/Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Reviewthe 5. Turn over the carpet. Remove the bolt, then
SRS component locations (seepage 24-18) and the disconnect the rear suction/receiver lines (A).
6x 1.0 mm
doing repairs or service. 9.8N·m

charging station (see page 21-130).
3. Remove the center console (see page 20.. 107).

A
4. Slide the hose clamps (A) back, then disconnect the
rear inlet heater hose (B) and the rear outlet heater
hose (e) from the rear heater core. Note the
orientation of the hose.
not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the 6. Remove the harness clips (A).
A
immediately.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-147
Rear HVAC Unit Removal/Installation (cont'd)
7. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the rear mode 9. Install the rear heater core, and the rear evaporator
control motor, the rear air mix control motor, rear core in the reverse order of removal.
evaporator temperature sensor, rear power
transistor, and rear blower motor, then remove the 10. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal, and
harness clips (B) and connector clip (C). note these items:
B
• Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater
(see page 10-6).
• If you're installing a new rear evaporator, add
refrigerant oil (DENSO NO-OIL 8) (see. page 21-6).
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
• Immediately after using the oil, replace the cap
B on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
8. Remove the mounting bolts and rear HVAC unit (A). may damage the paint; If the refrigerant oil
Plug or cap the lines immediately after contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.
disconnecting them to avoid moisture and dust • Charge the system (see page 21-132).
contamination.
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
21-148 BACK
Rear HVAC Unit Component Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the SRS component locations (see page 24-18), and the precautions
NOTE: The rear blower motor (A), the rear heater core (B), the rear evaporator sensor (e), the rear power transistor (D),
the rear air mix control motor'(E),the rear mode control motor (Fl, and the rear expansion valve (G) can be replaced
without removing the rear HVAeunit.
1. Remove the self~tapping screw and the rear evaporator sensor. Remove the self-tapping screw and the clamp (H),
then remove the bolts and the rear evaporator lines (J) with the rear expansion valve. If necessary, remove the
rear expansion valve. Use a second wrench to hold the other fitting on the valve so the rear evaporator lines won't
twist. leave the first fitting loosely connected so you can use it to hold the valve while you loosen the second
fitting.
2. If necessary, remove the rear blower motor (see page 21-145), the rear heater core (see page 21-146), the rear
power transistor, the rear air mix control motor (see page 21-143), and the rear mode control motor (see page
21-144).
3. Remove the self-tapping screws, and carefully separate the left housing (K) from the right housing (l). Remove the
rear evaporator core (M) and plate (N).
4. Reassemble the unit in the reverse order of disassembly, and note these items;
• Replace all a-rings with new ones at each fitting and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them.
Be sure to use the correct a-rings for HFe-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture absorption.
• Make sure no air is leaking from the left upper housing and the right upper housing fitting and from the upper
housings and the lower housing fitting.
• Install the capillary tube (P) directly against the outlet line, and wrap it with electrical tape (Q).
• Before reassembly, make sure that the rear air mix control linkage and door move smoothly without binding.
• Before reassembly, make sure that the rear mode control linkage and door move smoothly without binding.
• After reassembly, make sure the rear air mix control motor runs smoothly (see page 21-143).
• After reassembly, make sure the rear mode control motor runs smoothly (see page 21-144).
BACK 21-149
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If electrical maintenance is required)
a
The Acura MDX SRS includes driver's airbag inthe steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbagin the dashboard above
Items marked with an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page i.nclude or are located near SRS components. Servicing,
disassembling, or replacing these. items requires special pre(fautions and tools, and should be done only by an
authorized Acura dealer. .... , .
caused by unintentional deployment oftheairbags and/or side airbags.
collision, or the airbags may deploy. .
• SRS electrical connectors are identified by ye'now color coding. Related components are located in the steering
BACK
Body Electrical
Body Electrical Keyless/Power Door Lock/Security
Special Tools ............................................... 22-2 System
General Troubleshooting Information ...... 22-3 Component Location Index ....................... 22-141
System Description .................................... 22-144
Relay and Control Unit Manual Keyless Programming/
Locations ................................... 22-7 Deleteing .................................................. 22-147
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-148
Connectors and Harnesses ......... 22-14 DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-152
Symptom Troubleshooting ....................... 22-156
Fuse/Relay Boxes ......................... 22-57 Control Unit Input Test ............................... 22-161
Door Lock Actuator Test ............................ 22-172
Power Distribution ....................... 22-61 Door Lock Knob Switch Test ...................... 22-173
Door Lock Switch Test ................................ 22-174
Ground Distribution ..................... 22-67 Door Key Cylinder Switch Test .................. 22-174
Hood Switch Test ........................................ 22-175
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Keyless Buzzer Test/Replacement ............ 22-175
DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-68 Tailgate Release Actuator
Removal and Installation ........................... 22-71 Test (Without Power Tailgate) ............... 22-176
Tailgate Outer Handle Switch
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Test/Replacement ................................... 22-176
Removal and Installation ........................... 22~72 Transmitter Test/Replacement .................. 22-177
Rear Fuse/Relay Box Horns

DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-73 Component Location Index ....................... 22-179
Removal and Installation ........................... 22-75 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-180
Horn Test/Replacement ............................. 22-180
Battery....... .................................... 22-76 Horn Switch Test ........................................ 22-181
Relays ............................................ 22-77 Exterior Lights

Component Location Index ....................... 22-182
Ignition Switch System Description ..................•................. 22-185
Test .............................................................. 22-79 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-186
Replacement ............................................... 22-79 DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-193
Combination Light Switch
Multiplex Integrated Control System Test/Replacement ................................... 22-200
Component Location Index ....................... 22-80 HID Lamp System Troubleshooting ......... 22-202
General Troubleshooting Information ...... 22-81 Headlight Adjustment ................................ 22-204
DTC Troubleshooting Index ....................... 22-84 Headlight Replacement .............................. 22-205
System Description .................................... 22-94 HID Unit Replacement ................................ 22-206
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Bulb Replacement ...................................... 22-207
Diagnosis Test Mode A .......................... 22-112 Fog Light/Daytime Running Light
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Replacement ............................................ 22-210
DiagnosisTestModeB ..•........................ 22-113 Fog Light Adjustment ................................. 22-210
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Fog Light/Daytime Running Light
Diagnosis Test Mode C .. ......................... 22-114 Bulb Replacement ................................... 22-211
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Taillight Replacement ................. , .............. 22-212
DiagnosisTestModeD .......................... 22-115 Taillight/Brake Light LED Replacement .... 22-213
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System License Plate Light Replacement .............. 22-213
Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test High Mount Brake Light Replacement ...... 22-214
Mode2 ..................................................... 22-116 Brake Pedal Position Switch Test .............. 22-214
Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test ................. 22-119
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-120 Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher
DTC Troubleshooting ............................... ;. 22-122 Component Location Index ....................... 22-215
~
MICU Input Test .......................................... 22-134 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-216
Relay Control Module Input Test .............. 22-136 Turn Signal/Hazard Relay Input Test ........ 22-218
Driver's MPCS Unit Input Test ... ,...............
Rear MICU Input Test .................................
22-137
22-139
Hazard Warning Switch
Test/Replacement .........•......................... 22-220 ~
Side Turn Signal Light Replacement ........ 22-220
Headlight Leveling System Wipers/Washers
Component Location Index ....................... 22-221 Component Location Index ....................... 22-289
System Description .................................... 22-222 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-292
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-223 DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-296
Suspension Stroke Sensor Circuit Wiper/Washer Switch
Troubleshooting ...................................... 22-224 (Combination Switch Control Unit)
Headlight Leveling Control Unit Input Test ................................................. 22-300
Input Test ................................................. 22-226 Wiper/Washer Switch Replacement ......... 22-302
Headlight Leveling Motor Input Test ........ 22-228 Wiper Motor Test ........................................ 22-303
Suspension Stroke Sensor Washer Motor Test ..................................... 22-304
Replacement ............................................ 22-229 Washer Fluid Level Switch Test ................ 22-304
Headlight Leveling Motor Replacement ... 22-230 Wiper Motor Replacement ........................ 22-305
Headlight Initial Position Learning Rear Window Wiper Motor
Procedure ................................................ 22-231 Replacement ............................................ 22-306
Washer Reservoir Replacement ................ 22-306
Dash Lights Brightness Controller Headlight Washer Motor
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-232 TesVReplacement ................................... 22-307
Dash Lights Brightness Controller Headlight Washer Nozzle Replacement ... 22-307
TesVReplacement ................................... 22-233 Wiper Blade Replacement ......................... 22-308
Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustment ................. 22-309
Interior Lights Washer Tube Replacement ....................... 22-311
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-236 Gauges
Interior Light Switch Component Location Index ....................... 22-313
TesVReplacement ................................... 22-239 Self-diagnostic Function ............................ 22-315
Front Individual Map Light Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-318
Replacement ............................................ 22-240 DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-322
Rear Individual Map Light Gauge Control Module Input Test ............. 22-334
TesVReplacement .................................... 22-240 Rewriting the ODO Data and Transferring
Rear Ceiling Light TesVReplacement ......... 22-241 Smart Maintenance on a New Gauge
Cargo Area Light TesVReplacement ......... 22-241 . Control Module ....................................... 22-336
Courtesy Light Replacement ..................... 22-242' . Gauge Control Module Replacement ....... 22-337
Glove Box Light TesVReplacement ........... 22-242 Multi-information Switch
Vanity Mirror Light TesVReplacement ..... 22-243 TesVReplacement ................................... 22-337
Ambient Light Test ..................................... 22-243 Outside Air Temperature Indicator
Footwell Light TesVReplacement .............. 22-244 Calibration ............................................... 22-338
Tailgate Latch Switch Test ................ ~ ........ 22-244
Electrical Compass
Entry Lights Control System Component Location Index ....................... 22-339
Component Location Index ....................... 22-245 System Description .................................... 22-340
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-246 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-342
Control Unit Input Test ............................... 22-248 Center Information Display Input Test ...... 22-343
Ignition Key Switch Test ............................ 22-254 Electrical Compass Unit Input Test ........... 22-344
Ignition Key Light Test ........ :...................... 22-254
Reminder Systems
HomeLink Remote Control System Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-345
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-255 Input Test ..................................................... 22-347
Test .............................................................. 22-255'
Moonroof
Power Windows Component Location Index ....................... 22-351
Component Location Index ....................... 22-256 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-352
System Description .................................... 22-258 Moonroof Control Unit Input Test ............. 22-354
Resetting the Power Window Moonroof Switch TesVReplacement ........ 22-356
I
Control Unit ............................................. 22-259 Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit ....... 22-357
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-261
DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-264 Accessory Power Sockets
Driver's MPCS Unit Input Test ................... 22-278 Component Location Index ....................... 22-358
Passenger's MPCS Unit Input Test ........... 22-281 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-360
Driver's Power Window Motor Test ......... 22-284 Front Accessory Power Socket
Front Passenger's Power Window Test/Replacement ................................... 22-361
Motor Test ............................................... 22-285 Rear Accessory Power Socket
Rear Power Window Motor Test ............... 22-286 TesVReplacement ................................... 22-362
Front Passenger's Power Window Cargo Area Accessory Power Socket
Switch Test .............................................. 22-287 TesVReplacement ................................... 22-363
Rear Power Window Switch
TesVReplacement ................................... 22-287
Master Switch Replacement ...................... 22-288
Front Passenger's Power Window Switch
Replacement ............................................ 22-288
AC Power Outlet Immobilizer System
Component Location Index ....................... 22-364 Component Location Index ....................... 22-398
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-365 System Description .................................... 22-399
AC Inverter Unit Input Test ........................ 22-366 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-400
Power Outlet Replacement ........................ 22-368 DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-401
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror Information .......•...................................... 22-403
Circuit Diagram ...................................•....... 22-369 Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 22-405
System Description .................................... 22-370 System Check ............................................. 22-406
Test/Replacement ....................................... 22-370 Status Log ................................................... 22-407
Symptom Troubleshooting ....................... 22-409
Power Mirrors Immobilizer Key Registration .................... 22-410
Component Location Index ....................... 22-371 Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-372 InputTest ................................................. 22-411
Power Mirror Switch Immobilizer-keyless Control Unit
Test/Replacement ................................... 22-374 Replacement ............................................ 22-413
Power Mirror Actuator Test ....................... 22-374
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement ........ 22-375 Drivinjl Position Memory System
(DPMsJ
Seat Heaters Component Location Index ....................... 22-414
Component Location Index ....................... 22-377 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-417
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-379 DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-424
Seat Heater Test ......................................... 22-381 System Input Test and Function Test ....... 22-471
Switch Test/Replacement .......................... 22-383 Power Seat Control Unit Input Test .......... 22-477
Power Mirror Circuit Input Test ................. 22-479
Power Lumbar Support Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering Control
Component Location Index ....................... 22-384 Unit Input Test ......................................... 22-482
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-385 Driving Position Memory Switch
Switch Test/Replacement .......................... 22-386 Test/Replacement ................................... 22-484
Motor Test ................................................... 22-386 Driver's Power Seat Adjustment Switch
Test/Replacement ................................... 22-485
Power Seats Driver's Power Seat Motor Test ................ 22-486
Component Location Index ....................... 22-387 Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering Switch
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-388 Test/Replacement ................................... 22-488
Switch Test/Replacement .......................... 22-389 Power Tilt/Telescopic Steering Motor
Front Passenger's Power Seat Motor Test ........................................................... 22-488
Test ........................................................... 22-390
Power Tailgate
Fuel Fill Door Opener Component Location Index ....................... 22-489
Component Location Index ....................... 22-391 System Description .................................... 22-491
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-392 Resetting the Power Tailgate
Fuel Fill Door Opener Solenoid Test ......... 22-393 Control Unit ............................................. 22-493
Fuel Fill Door Opener Switch Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-494
Test/Replacement .................................. 22-393 DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-496
Control Unit Input Test ............................... 22-522
Rear Window Defogger Power Tailgate Motor Test ........................ 22-524
Component Location Index ....................... 22-394 Power Tailgate Inside Beeper
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-395 Test/Replacement ................................... 22-524
Function Test ............................................... 22-396 Driver's Door Power Tailgate Switch
Defogger Repair .......................................... 22-397 Test/Replacement ................................... 22-525
Inside Tailgate Switch Test/
Replacement ............................................ 22-525
Power Tailgate Latch/Ratchet
~
Switch Test .............................................. 22-526
Power Tailgate Closer Motor Test ............. 22-526
Drive Unit Replacement .............................
Pinch Sensor Replacement ........................
22-527
22-527 ~
Clock
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-529
Body Electrical
Special Tools

CD 07WAZ-001010A MPCS (MCIC) Service Connector 1
® 07TAZ-001 020A Back Probe Adaptor 1
CD
22-2 BACK
~
I.!!:.I
Tips and Precautions • Some connectors have a clip on their side used to
attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on
Before Troubleshooting another component. This clip has a pull type lock.
• Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay unless you first release the lock and remove the
box. connector from its mount bracket (A).
2.. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and

clean and tight connections.
INOTice I
• Do not quick-charge a battery unless the
battery ground cable has been
disconnected, otherwise you will damage
the alternator diodes .
• Do not attempt to crank the engine with
the battery ground cable loosely
connected or you will severely damage the
wiring. '
Handling Connectors
• Make sure the connectors are clean and have no • Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their
loose wire terminals. wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
• Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with • Always reinstall plastic covers.
dielectric grease (except watertight connectors).
• All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).
• Before connecting connectors, make sure the

A terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-3
Body Electrical
• Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (8). Handling Wires and Harnesses
• Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with
their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
• Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).
• The backs of some connectors are packed with

dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. Ifthe • Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the
grease is contaminated, replace it. hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to
release the clip.
~
(PIN 08798·9001)
• After installing harness clips, make sure the harness

• Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is doesn't interfere with any moving parts.
securely locked. • Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust components
• Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and
down. holes, and from exposed screws and bolts.
• Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not
leave grommets distorted (8).
22-4 BACK
r--:'I
I.!:...I
Testing and Repairs Five-step Troubleshooting

• Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation.
Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break 1. Verify The Complaint:
with electrical tape. Turn on all the components in the problem circuit
• Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. to verify the client complaint. Note the symptoms.
If there is an open or damage is SRS wiring or Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have
terminals, replace the harness. narrowed down the problem area.
• After installing parts, make sure that no wires are
pinched under them. 2. Analyze The Schematic:
• When using electrical test equipment, follow the Look up the schematic for the problem circuit.
manufacturer's instructions and those described in Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
this manual. tracing the current paths from the power feed
• If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire through the circuit components to ground. If
side (except waterproof connector). several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or a
ground is a likely cause.
Based on the symptoms and your understanding of

the circuit operation, identify one or more possible
causes of the problem.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit:

Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made
in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting.
Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to
make tests at points that are easily accessible.
4. Fix The Problem:

Once the specific problem is identified, make the
• Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe
procedures.
5. Make Sure The Circuit Works:

Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all
modes to make sure you've fixed the entire
problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure
to test all of the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no
========L[---L-_
e:::::=.'
new problems turn up and the original problem
does not recur.
• Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for

identification and replacement of connector terminals.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-5
Body Electrical
Wire Color Codes How to Check for DTCs with the Honda
Diagnostic System (HDS)
The following abbreviations are usedto identify wire
colors in the circuit schematics: NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the user's
WHT ..................... ;....... :...... White manual that came with the Honda Diagnostic System
YEL...................................... Yellow (HDS).
BLK...................................... Black
BLU ..................................... Blue 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (A)
GRN..................................... Green located under the driver's side ofthe dashboard.
RED...................................... Red
ORN..................................... Orange
PNK..................................... Pink
BRN .................................. ".. Brown
GRY..................................... Gray
PUR ..................................... Purple
LT BLU ................................ Light Blue
LT GRN ............................... LightGreen
The wire insulation has one color or one color with

another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle,

if it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-223).
4. Enter the BODY ELECTRICAL then select the TEST

MODE menu.
6. If any DTCs are indicated, note them, and go to the

indicated DTC troubleshooting.
22-6 BACK
r--:'I
Relay and Control Unit Locations L=:.I
Engine Compartment
AIC CONDENSER FAN RELAY

[Wire colors: BLU, WHT and LT BLU ]
AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
[Wire colors: PUR, RED and PUR ] [Wire colors: BRN, PUR and ORN ]
FAN CONTROL RELAY HEADLIGHT LOW BEAM RELAY
[ Wire colors: RED, BLK, ] [Wire colors: LT BLU ]
PUR, BRN and LT GRN
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
[Wire colors: WHT, BLK and PUR]
'J.:----.:l>r-- FOG LIGHT RELAY

[Wire colors: BLU, PNK, PNK and BLU ]
INTERIOR LIGHT RELAY

[ Wire colors: PNK, LT BLU, ]
RED and PNK
MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
RELAY CONTROL MODULE
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE IRE LAY BOX
ELDUNIT
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
BACK 22-7
Relay and Control Unit Locations
Dashboard
COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT

(Built into the wiper/washer switch)
SRSUNIT
MICU
(Built into the
under-dash fuse/relay box)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
view of
front side
POWER WINDOW RELAY FRONT SEAT HEATER RELAY
22-8 BACK
~
l!!!!!..I
STARTER CUT RELAY 1

[Wire colors: WHT, BRN, PNK and LT GRN ]
STARTER CUT RELAY 2
[Wire colors: BRN, WHT, PNK and LT GRN ] HEADLIGHT WASHER RELAY
(Canada modelsl
AUXILIARY UNDER. [Wire colors: YEL, GRN, BLU and GRN ]
DASH RELAY BOX A
AUXILIARY UNDER·
DASH RELAY BOX C
BRAKE LIGHT RELAY

fWire colors: ORN, WHT, ]
LYEL, LT GRN and GRN
AUDIO UNIT
HEADLIGHT LEVELING
CONTROL UNIT
AUXILIARY UNDER·
DASH RELAY BOX B
JG2 CUT RELAY

LWire colors: GRN, PNK, ORN and LT GRN ]
,.ACC CUT RELAY
LWire colors: YEL, PNK, RED and LT GRN ]
BACK 22-9
Rear
ELECTRICAL COMPASS UNIT

(Canada models without Navigation)
POWER TAILGATE DRIVE UNIT
ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT

(XM RECEIVER)*'
XM RECEIVER*2
ACTIVE DAMPER
CONTROL UNIT
SH-AWD RELAY
REARMICU
(Built into the rear
fuse/relay box)
CARGO AREA ACCESSORY

POWER SOCKET RELAY REAR
FUSE/RELAY BOX
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
*' : USA models

*2 : Canada models and USA models without Acuralink
22-10 BACK
r:-:'I
t=:.I
Roof and Console
MOONROOF CONTROL UNIT/MOTOR
ROOF CONSOLE
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL PANEL
AC INVERTER UNIT
REAR SEAT HEATER RELAY

[Wire colors: GRY, BRN, BLK and VEL ] HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT
REAR BLOWER MOTOR RELAY

[ Wire colors: PNK, VEL, ]
GRY and BlK
BACK 22-11
Door
DRIVER'S DOOR
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR
PASSENGER'S MPCS UNIT
22-12 BACK
~
L::..I
Seat
DRIVER'S SEAT
NAVIGATION
UNIT
ODS UNIT
BACK 22-13
Connectors and Harnesses
Connector Index
Identification numbers have been assigned to in-line connectors, junction connectors, and terminals. The number is preceded by the letter "C"
for connectors 'G ' ,'for around termma
. Is or "T"for non-Qround ' Is.
termma
Harness Location
Engine Compartment Dashboard Others (Floor, Door, Notes
Tailaate, and Roof)
AlC wire harness C502 C503 (see oaQe 22-5S)
Batterv Qround cable ( ) G1 (see oaQe 22-15)
CKP sensor subharness C151 (see DaDe 22-1S)
Console subharness C901 C902 (see DaDe 22-47)
Dashboard wire harness C304, C305, C501, C510, (see page 22-26)
(View of driver's side) through C518, CS01
G501 G502
Dashboard wire harness C505 CS02,CS03 (see page 22-30)
(Center console) G503
Dashboard wire harness C201, C202, C203, C502, (see page 22-32)
(View of passenger's side) C503, C521, through
C530,CS04,CS05,CSOS,
C771, C901, C951
G504 G50S G507
Driver's door power mirror wire C753 (see page 22-48)
harness
Driver's door subharness C751 (see Da e 22-48)
Driver's door wire harness A C752 C753 (see DaDe 22-48)
Driver's door wire harness B C751 C752 (see Daae 22-48)
Driver's seat subharness C931 (see DaDe 22-54)
Driver's seat wire harness CS09 C931 (see DaDe 22-54)
ECT sensor subharness C205 (see DaDe 22-20)
Engine ground cable A T2 G2 (see DaDe 22-15)
Engine ground cable B T3 G3 (see DaDe 22-15)
Engine wire harness (Right side) C101,C103, C104, C105, (see page 22-1S)
C151,C152,T101,T102
G101
Engine wire harness (Left side) C102,C153 (see page 22-18)
T103 T104
Floor wire harness (Left branch) C303,CS01 CS02, CS03, C609, C611, (see page 22-34)
G601 CS12, C613, C781
G602 G603 G604
Floor wire harness (Right branch) C204, C604,C605, CSOS CS08, CS10, C614, CS15, (see page 22-38)
C616, C617, C791
GS05 G60S
Front passenger's door power mirror C773 (see page 22-50)
wire harness
FrontQassenaer's door subharness C772 C773 (see DaDe 22-50)
Front oassenaer's door wire harness C771 C772 (see DaDe 22-50)
Front oassenaer's seat wire harness CS10 (see DaDe 22-55)
Knocksensorsubharness C152 (see DaDe 22-1S)
Left engine compartment wire harness C102,C301 C20S, C207, C303, C304, (see page 22-24)
G302 G303 C305
Left rear door wire harness C781 (see Daae 22-52)
Left tailQate wire harness C701 C702 (see Daae 22-42)
Middle tailQate wire harness C702 C703 (see DaDe 22-42)
ODS unit harness C61S (see DaDe 22-55)
Rear wire harness CS11, CS14, C701, C704, (see page 22-40)
T701
G701 G702
Rear subframe wire harness CS13 G651 (see oaae 22-44)
RES wire harness C951 (see oaQe 22-46)
Right engine compartment wire C101,C205,C212,C301 (see page 22-20)
harness G201, G301
(Front of enQine comoartment)
Right engine compartment wire G202 C201 through C204, (see page 22-22)
harness C206 through C211
(Dash to rear of enQine comoartment) G401
Right rear door wire harness C791 (seeDaae 22-53)
Right tailgate wire harness C703 C704 (see oaae 22-43)
Roof subharness C851 (see DaDe 22-45)
Roof wire harness C501 C851 C852 C853 (see DaDe 22-45)
Shift solenoid subharness C153 (see Da e 22-18)
Starter cable (+) T1 T4 (see Dace 22-15)
Shift solenoid wire harness C104 (see oaae 22-18)
22-14 BACK
~
I.!!!!!..I
Connector to Harness Index
Starter Cable
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
T1 6 Left side of engine compartment Main under-hood fuse box
T4 5 Left side of enQine compartment Starter motor
(+1 9 Batterv Batterv positive terminal
Battery Ground Cable

(-I 1 Left side of enQine 'compartment Batterv neQative terminal
G1 2 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via battery
ground cable
Engine Ground Cable A

T2 3 Left side of engine compartment Transmission housinQ
G2 4 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via battery
Qround cable A
Engine Ground Cable B

T3 8 RiQht side of enQine compartment Emline mount bracket
G3 7 Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via battery
ground cable B
STARTER CABLE 2
BATTERY GROUND CABLE
BACK 22-15
Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness (Center to Right Side)

NC compressor clutch 28 1 Right side of engine compartment
Alternator 27 4 Middle of engine compartment
CMPsensor 34 3 Right side of engine
EGR valve and position sensor 16 6 Left side of engine compartment
ECTsensor 1 15 2 Middle of engine
EVAP canister purge valve 13 2 Left side of engine compartment
Front NF sensor (Bank 2, Sensor 1) 19 6 Exhaust manifold (frorit bank)
Front secondary heated oxygen sensor 18 4 Exhaust manifold (front bank)
(secondary H02S) (Bank 2, Sensor 2)
Ignition coil No.1 3 3 Middle of engine
Injector No.1 9 2 Middle of engine
Intake manifold turning (IMT) actuator 33 5 Middle of engine compartment
Oil pressure switch 29 1 Middle of engine compartment
PCM connector B 37 49 Right side of engine compartment
PCM connector C 36 49 Right side of engine compartment
Rear NF sensor (Bank 1, Sensor 1) 12 6 Exhaust manifold (rear bank)
Rear secondary heated oxygen sensor 14 4 Exhaust manifold (rear bank)
(secondary H02S) (Bank 1, Sensor 2)
Rocker arm oil control solenoid 1 1 Right side of engine
Rocker arm oil pressure switch 32 1 Right side of engine
C101 35 12 Right side of engine compartment Right engine compartment
wire harness (see page 22-20)
C103 (Junction connector) 4 24 Middle of engine compartment
C151 2 6 Middle of engine compartment CKP sensor subharness
C152 30 1 Riaht side of enaine comoartment Knock sensor subharness
T101 17 Right side of engine compartment Main under-hood fuse box
T102 26 Right side of ellgine com~artment Alternator
G101 39 Right side of engine Body ground, via engine wire
harness around cable
CKP Sensor Subharness
Connector or Terminal Connects to

CKP sensor AlB
C151 ine wire harness
Knock Sensor Subharness
Connector or Terminal Connects to

Knock sensor
C152 ine wire harness
22-16 BACK
r--:'I
I..!!:..I
11
CKPSENSOR 12
SUB HARNESS
13
14
38
15
16
37
36
17
18
30
29 28
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
KNOCK SENSOR
SUBHARNESS
BACK 22-17
Engine Wire Harness (Left Side)

AlC clutch pressure control valve A 12 2 Transmission housing
AlC clutch pressure control valve B 13 2 Transmission housing
AlC clutch pressure control valve C 10 2 Transmission housing
ATF temperature sensor 15 2 Transmission housing
Engine mount control solenoid 6 2 Left side of engine compartment
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 19 3 Transmission housing
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) 5 3 Right side of engine compartment
sensor
Mass air flow (MAF)/Intake air 7 5 Right side of engine compartment
temperature (lAT) sensor
Output shaft (countershaft) speed 17 3 Transmission housing
sensor
Starter solenoid 21 1 Left side of engine compartment
Throttle actuator and throttle position 4 6 Left side of engine compartment
sensor
Transmission range switch 16 10 Transmission housing
2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure 3 1 Transmission housing
switch
3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure 18 1 Transmission housing
switch
4th clutch transmission fluid pressure 9 1 Transmission housing
switch
C102 8 1 Left side of engine compartment Left engine compartment wire
harness (see page 22-24)
C153 20 5 On the transmission housina Shift solenoid wire harness
T103 (Thermal joint) (SG2) 1 Left side of engine compartment
T104 (Thermal joint) (LG2) 2 Left side of enaine comoartment
Shift Solenoid Wire Harness

Shift solenoid valve A 22 1 In the transmission
Shift solenoid valve B 14 1 In the transmission
Shift solenoid valve C 23 1 In the transmission
Shift solenoid valve D 11 1 In the transmission
C153 20 5 On the transmission housina Enaine wire harness
22-18 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!.I
ENGINE WIRE
HARNESS
21 17
18
20 19
BACK 22-19
Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Front of Engine Compartment)

AlC condenser fan motor 24 2 Front of engine compartment
Headlight washer motor 5 2 Behind right side offront bumper Canada
Hood switch 23 2 Front of engine compartment
Horn (High) 26 1 Front of engine compartment
Horn (Low) 31 1 Front of engine compartment
Left daytime running light 17 2 Behind left side of front bumper
Left fog light 16 2 Behind left side of front bumper
Left front parking light 10 2 Behind left headlight
Left front side marker light 9 2 Behind left headlight
Left-front suspension stroke sensor 14 3 Left front suspension *
Left front turn signal light 11 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight (high beam) 13 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight leveling motor 12 3 Behind left headlight
Left HID unit 8 2 Under left headlight
Outside air temperature sensor 20 2 Front of engine compartment
PCM 2 49 Right side of engine compartment
Radiator fan motor 21 2 Front of engine compartment
Right daytime running light 27 2 Behind right side offront bumper
Rightfog light 28 2 Behind right side of front bumper
Right front initiator 30 3 Behind right side of front bumper TPMS
Right front impact sensor 29 2 Behind right side offront bumper
Right front parking light 34 2 Behind right headlight
Right front side marker light 36 2 Behind right.headlight
Right-front suspension stroke sensor 38 3 Right front suspension *
Rightfrontturn signal light 32 2 Behind right headlight
Right front wheel sensor 37 2 Right side of engine compartment
Right headlight (high beam) 7 2 Behind right headlight
Right headlight leveling motor 6 3 Behind right headlight
Right HID unit 33 2 Under right headlight
Washer fluid level switch 4 2 Behind right side of front bumper
Windshield washer motor 35 2 Behind right side of front bumper
C101 3 13 Right side of engine compartment Engine wire harness
(see page 22-16)
C205 18 2 Front of engine compartment ECT sensor subharness
C212 (Junction connector) 1 24 Right side of engine compartment
C301 15 3 Left front of engine compartment Left engine compartment wire
harness (see Daoe 22-24)
G201 25 Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via right engine
compartment wire harness
G301 19 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via right engine
comoartment wire harness
*. With active damper system
ECT Sensor Subharness

ECTsensor2 22 2 Left side of engine compartment
C205 18 2 Left side of engine compartment Right engine compartment
wire harness
22-20 BACK
r--:'I
~
ECT SENSOR SUBHARNESS
RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WIRE HARNESS
1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
38
36
35
19
25
BACK 22-21
Right Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Dash to Rear of Engine Compartment)

AlC pressure sensor 1 3 Right side of engine compartment
APPsensor 9 6 Under left side of dash
Brake pedal position switch 10 4 Under left side of dash
Fog light relay 22 4 In the under-dash fuse/relay box Under-hood auxiliary relay
box (see page 22-57)
Front vertical acceleration sensor
Headlight leveling control unit
8
20
3 Under left side of dash •
16 Under right side of dash
Headlight washer relay 21 4 Under right side of dash Canada
Interior light relay 22 4 In the under-hood fuse/relay box Under-hood auxiliary relay
box (see page 22-57)
Power steering pressure (PSP) switch 2 2 Right side of engine compartment
Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay block) 22 1 In the under-hood fuse/relay box Relay block (see page 22-57)
connector A
Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay block) 22 1 In the under-hood fuse/relay box Relay block (see page 22-57)
connector B
Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay block) , 22 1 In the under-hood fuse/relay box Relay block (see page 22-57)
connector C
Right front damper coil 3 2 Right side of engine compartment •
TPMS control unit 11 20 Under left side of dash TPMS
Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay 22 4 In the under-hood fuse/relay box Relay control module
control module) connector A (see page 22-57)
control module) connector B (see page 22-57)
Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay , 22 2 In the under-hood fuse/relay box Relay control module
control module) connector C (see page 22-57)
control module) connector D (seepage 22-57)
control module) connector E (see page 22-57)
Under-hood fuse/relay box (Relay 22 1 In the under-hoodfuse/relay box Relay control module
control module) connector F (see page 22-57)
control module) connector G (see page 22-57)
control module) connector H (see page 22-57)
Windshield wiper motor 7 5 Left side of engine compartment
C201 16 34 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-32)
(see page 22-32)
(see page 22-32)
C204 14 23 Under right side of dash Floor wire harness (see page
22-38)
C206 5 14 Under right side of dash Left engine compartment wire
C207 6 20 Under right side of dash Left engine compartment wire
C208 (Junction connector) 19 12 Under right side of dash
C211 (Junction connector) 4 12 Under left side of dash
G202 23 Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via right engine
G401 18 Under right side of dash Body ground, via right engine
• With active damper system
22-22 BACK
r:-:'I
~
18
RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WIRE HARNESS
BACK 22-23

Left Engine Compartment Wire Harness
Brake fluid level switch 4 2 Left side of engine compartment
Brake light relay 9 5 Under left side of dash
ELD unit 24 3 In the main under-hood fuse box
Left front damper coil 17 2 Left side of engine compartment *
Left front impact sensor 20 2 Behind left side of front bumper
Left front initiator 21 3 Behind left side of front bumper TPMS
Left front wheel sensor 18 2 Left side of engine compartment
Main under-hood fuse box 14 -- Left side of engine compartment
Starter cut relay 1 10 4 Under left side of dash
Starter cut relay 2 8 4 Under left side of dash
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 12 6 left kick panel
B (see page 22-59)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 13 12 Left kick panel
C (see page 22-59)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 11 17 Left kick pa nel
D (see page 22-59)
W (see page 22-59)
VSA modulator-control unit 1 46 Left side of engine compartment
C102 5 1 Left side of engine compartment Engine wire harness
(see page 22-18)
C206 2 14 Under right side of dash Right engine compartment
C301 22 3 Left front of engine compartment Right engine compartment
C303 16 7 Under left side of dash Floor wire harness (see page
22-26)
C304 6 14 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-26)
C305 7 4 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-26)
G302 23 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via left engine
G303 19 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via left engine
*: With active damper system
22-24 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!::.J
LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WIRE HARNESS
~f-- _ _- - - 1 3
15
16
17
18
24
22
23
19
BACK 22-25
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of Driver's Side)

ACC cut relay 44 5 Under left side of dash
Cable reel connector A 16 20 In steering column cover
Combination switch control unit 15 8 In steering column cover
Dash lights brightness controller 17 6 Under left side of dash
Driver's airbag inflator 14 4 In steering column cover
Driver's ambient light 27 3 Under left side of dash
Driver's footwelllight 26 2 Under left side of dash
Gauge control module connector A 3 12 Behind gauge
Gauge control module connector B 6 23 Behind gauge
Headlight washer switch 5 5 Under left side of dash Canada
Ignition key switch/key light 13 6 In steering column cover
Ignition switch 19 6 In steering column cover
IG2 cut relay 45 5 Under left side of dash
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 18 7 In steering column cover
Left front tweeter 47 2 Under left side of dash
Optional connector (trailer brake) 29 5 Under left side of dash
Parking brake switch 43 1 Under left side of dash
Power mirror switch 28 10 Under left side of dash
Power telescopic motor/position 25 6 In steering column cover
sensor
Power tilt motor/position sensor 24 8 In steering column cover
Power tilt/telescopic steering control 22 16 In steering column cover
unit connector A
Power tilt/telescopic steering control 21 8 In steering column cover
unit connector B
Power tilt/telescopic steering switch 23 13 Left side of steering column
Steering angle sensor 20 5 In steering column cover
Under-dash auxiliarv fuse holder 35 2 Under left side of dash
22-26 BACK
r--:'I
L:::..I
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
47
14
45
44
43
42
41
40
3 9 - -_ _~~
38
37
36/\ 18
35 \ 19
20
33
34
(cant'd)
BACK 22-27
-
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of Driver's Side) (cont'd)

Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 38 6 Left kick pa nel
A (see page 22-59)
N (see page 22-59)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector P 37 30 Left kick panel
(MICU) (see page 22-59)
R (MES) (see page 22-59)
S (see page 22-59)
X (see page 22-59)
VSA OFF switch 4 5 Under left side of dash
C304 31 14 Under left side of dash Left engine compartment wire
C501 46 28 Under left side of dash Roof wire harness (see page
22-45)
C601 36 20 Under left side of dash Floor wire harness (see page
22-34)
G501 34 Under left side of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
G502 33 Under left side of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
22-28 BACK
r:-:'I
.~
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
47
14
45
44 ~/~~~z:=15
~ 16
43
42
41
40
3 9 - -_ _~~
18
19
20
33
34
BACK 22-29
Connector to Harness Index (co nt'd)

Dashboard Wire Harness (Center Console Branch)

AfT shift lock solenoid 6 2 Under center console
AfT shift lever console light/park-pin 7 8 Under center console
switch
Auxiliary jack assembly 15 14 Rear of center console *1
Data link connector 2 16 Under middle of dash
HandsFreeLink control unit 16 28 Under rear of center console
In-car temperature sensor 3 4 Under middle of dash
Left second row seat heater switch 14 6 Rear of center console *3
Rear accessory power socket 15 2 Rear of center console *2
Rear air mix control motor 11 7 Under center console
Rear blower motor 8 2 Under center console
Rear blower motor relay 10 4 Under center console
Rear climate control panel 13 10 Rear of center console
Rear evaporator temperature sensor 20 2 Under center console
Rear mode control motor 17 7 Under center console
Rear power transistor 9 4 Under center console
Right second row seat heater switch 12 6 Rear of center console *3
Second row seat heater relay 22 5 Under center console *3
SRS unit connector A 1 28 Under middle of dash
Yaw rate-lateral/longitudinal 5 4 Under middle of dash
acceleration sensor
C519 (Junction connector) 24 12 Under middle of dash
C602 18 20 Under center console Floor wire harness (see page
22-34)
C603 19 5 Under center console Floor wire harness (see page *3
22-34)
G503 21 Under console panel Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
G505 4 Under middle of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
* 1: With rear entertainment system
* 2: Without rear entertainment system
* 3: With second row seat heaters
22-30 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!:..I
21
BACK 22-31
Connector to Harness Index (co nt'd)
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of Passenger's Side)

AC inverter unit 36 12 Under center console
Audio unit connector A 39 17 Middle of dash
Audio unit connector B 40 32 Middle of dash
Audio unit connector C 41 24 Middle of dash
Audio unit connector D 42 16 Middle of dash *3
Audio unit connector E (for XM 43· 12 Middle of dash *3
receiver)
Audio unit connector E 45 -- Middle of dash *3
Center information display 11 12 Middle of dash *2
Center speaker 8 2 Middle of dash
Climate control unit connector A 1 40 Middle of dash
Climate control unit connector B 2 14 Middle of dash
Digital audio lead connector 19 -- Under right side of dash *3
Digital audio lead (audio unit side) 45 -- Middle of dash *3
Front passenger's airbag inflator 17 4 Under right side of dash
Glove box light 20 2 Under right side of dash
Hazard warning switch 3 6 Middle of dash
Interface dial 44 5 Middle of dash
Navigation display unit 6 20 Middle of dash *1
Right front tweeter 16 2 Under right side of dash
Stereo amplifier connector A 22 28 Under right side of dash *1
Stereo amplifier connector A 22 20 Under right side of dash *2
Stereo amplifier connector B 23 18 Under right side of dash
Sunlight sensor 9 5 Middle of dash
C502 32 12 Under middle of dash AlC wire harness (see page
22-56)
C503 33 16 Under middle of dash AlC wire harness (see page
22-56)
22-38)
22-38)
C606 35 24 Under middle of dash Floor wire harness (see page *1
22-38)
C771' 24 23 Under right side of dash Front passenger's door wire
C901 34 16 Under middle of dash Console subharness
(see page 22-47)
C951 18 20 Under right side of dash RES wire harness (see page *3
22-46)
wire harness
wire harness
G507 30 Under right side of dash Body ground, via dashboard
wire harness
* 1:Wlth navIgatIon
* 2: Without navigation
* 3: With rear entertainment system
22-32 BACK
r--:'I
t.=!..I
DASHBOARD WIRE HARNESS
10
21
43
42
41
40
39
27
28
37
38
30
BACK 22-33
Floor Wire Harness (Left Branch)

Active damper control unit connector 29 14 Left side of cargo area *4
A
Active damper control unit connector 30 20 Left side of cargo area *4
B
Cargo area accessory power socket 26 2 Left side of cargo area
Driver's door switch 46 1 Left B-pillar
Driver's seat belt tensioner 43 4 Left B-pillar
Driver's side airbag inflator 9 2 Under driver's seat
EVAP canister vent shut valve 17 2 Fuel tank
Fuel fill door opener solenoid 23 2 Left side of cargo area
Fuel pump control module 34 10 Left side cargo area
Fuel pump/fuel gauge sending unit 41 4 Fuel tank
Fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor 18 3 Fuel tank
Left rear damper coil 38 2 Under left rear floor *4
Left rear door switch 40 1 Left C-pillar
Left rear initiator 35 3 Under left rear floor TPMS
Left rear vertical acceleration sensor 36 3 Left side of cargo area *4
Left side impact sensor (FIRST) 45 4 Left B-pillar
Left side impact sensor (SECOND) 39 2 Left C-pillar
Left side curtain airbag inflator 19 2 Left C-pillar
Left second row seat heater 21 3 Under left second row seat *1
Navigation service check connector 42 2 Under driver's seat Navigation
Navigation unit connector A 10 20 Under driver's seat Navigation
Navigation unit connector B 11 7 Under driver's seat Navigation
Navigation unit connector C 12 8 Under driver's seat Navigation
Navigation unit connector D 13 14 Under driver's seat Navigation
Navigation unit connector E 14 5 Under driver's seat Navigation
Rear fuse/relay box connector A 28 2 Left side of cargo area
(see page 22-60)
Rear fuse/relay box connector B 27 34 Left side of cargo area
(see page 22-60)
Rear safi ng sensor 20 4 Middle offloor
SH-AWD control unit connector A 31 20 Left side of cargo area
SH-AWD control unit connector B 32 8 Left side of cargo area
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector E 3 16 Left kick panel
(see page 22-59)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector F 4 14 Left kick panel
(see page 22-59)
G (see page 22-59)
H (see page 22-59)
Q (see paQe 22-59)
* 2: With navigation or electrical compass
* 3: Without navigation and electrical compass
* 4: With active dam per system
22-34 BACK
FLOOR WIRE 22
HARNESS
(cent'd)
BACK 22-35

Floor Wire Harness (Left Branch) (cont'd)
C601 1 20 Left kick panel Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-26)
C602 15 20 Under center console Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-30)
C603 16 5 Under center console Dashboard wire harness *1
(see page 22-30)
C609 8 23 Under driver's seat Driver's seat wire harness
(see page 22-54)
C611 24 12 Left side of cargo area Rear wire harnl~ss (see page *2
22-40)
C611 24 4 Left side of cargo area Rear wire harness (see page *3
22-40)
C612 (Junction connector)' 33 12 Left kick panel
C613 25 23 Under left rearfloor Rear subframe wire harness
(see page 22-44)
C781 44 18 Left B-pillar Left rear door wire harness
(see oaae 22-52)
G601 48 Left kick panel Body ground, via floor wire
harness
G602 47 Under driver's seat Body ground, via floor wire
harness
G603 22 Left side of cargo area Body ground, via floor wire
harness
G604 37 Left side of cargo area Body ground, via floor wire
harness
* 1. With second row seat heaters
* 2: With navigation or electrical compass
* 3: Without navigation and electrical compass
* 4: With active damper system
22-36 BACK
r:-:'I
I.!!!!:.I
FLOOR WIRE 22
HARNESS
BACK 22-37

Floor Wire Harness (Right branch)
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) 21 20 Right side of cargo area USA
connector A
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) 22 16 Right side of cargo area USA
connector B
Front passenger's door switch 9 1 Right B-pillar
Front passenger's seat belttensioner 11 4 Right B-pillar
Front passenger's side airbag inflator 29 2 Right B-pillar
Right rear damper coil 17 2 Under right side offloor *2
Right rear door switch 14 1 Right C-pillar
Right rear initiator 16 3· Under right side of floor TPMS
Right-rear vertical acceleration sensor 20 3 Right side of cargo area *2
Right side curtain airbag inflator 27 4 Right C-pillar
Right second row seat cushion heater 25 3 Under right second row seat *1
Right side impact sensor IFIRST) 10 4 Right B-pillar
Right side impact sensor (SECOND) 15 2 Right C-pillar
Roll rate sensor 26 2 Middle offloor
SRS unit connector B 2 16 Under middle of dash
SRS unit connector C 1 28 Under middle of dash
Subwoofer 19 8 Under front passenger's seat
XM receiver 21 14 Right side of cargo area *4
C204 6 23 Right kick panel Right engine compartment
C604 4 12 Right kick pimel Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-32)
C605 5 18 Right kick panel Dashboard wire harness
. (see page 22-32)
C606 3 24 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness Navigation
(see page 22-32)
C610 8 14 Under front passenger's seat Front passenger's seat wire
C614 24 13 Right side of cargo area Rear wire harness (see page Navigation
22-40)
C614 24 2 Right side of cargo area Rear wire harness (see page Without
22-40) Navigation
C615 (Junction connector) 18 12 Right side of floor
C616 30 4 Under front passenger's seat ODS wire harness (see page
22-55)
C617 (Male connector) 23 5 Right side of cargo area *3
C617 (Female connector) 23 5 Right side of cargo area *3
C791 12 18 Right B-pillar Right rear door wire harness
(see page 22-53)
G605 7 Under front passenger's seat Body ground, via front wire
harness
G606 13 Mounted on B-pillar Body ground, via front wire
harness
* 2: With active damper system
* 3: With USA models with AcuraLink
* 4: Without AcuraLink
22-38 BACK
r--:'I
~
FLOOR WIRE HARNESS

30
23 22 21 20
13
BACK 22-39
Rear Wire Harness

Electrical compass unit 2 6 Left D-pillar *4
Keyless buzzer 13 2 Behind rear bumper
Left brake light/taillight 15 3 Left taillight assembly
Left rear side marker light 17 2 Left taillight assembly
Left rear turn signal light 16 2 Left taillight assembly
Left surround speaker 6 ·2 Left D-pillar Navigation
Power tailgate control unit connector A 23 5 Left D-pillar *1
Power tailgate control unit connector B 21 20 Left D-pillar *1
Power tailgate control unit connector C 22 14 Left D-pillar *1
Power tailgate driver unit connector A 4 2 Left D-pillar *1
Power tailgate dri~er unit connector B 5 8 Left D-pillar *1
Rear fuse/relay box connector C 19 42 Left side of cargo area
(see page 22-60)
Right brake light/taillight 11 3 Right taillight assembly
Right rear side marker light 10 2 Right taillight assembly
Right rear turn signal light 12 2 Right taillight assembly
Right surround speaker 9 2 Right D-pillar Navigation
C611 20 12 Left side of cargo area Floor wire harness (see page *2
22-34)
C611 20 4 Left side of cargo area Floor wire harness (see page *3
22-34)
C614 7 13 Right side of cargo area Floor wire harness (see page Navigation
22-38)
C614 7 2 Rightside of cargo area Floor wire harness (see page *4
22-38)
C701 3 18 Left D-pillar Left tailgate wire harness
(see page 22-42)
C704 8 12 Right D-pillar Right tailgate wire harness *1
(see page 22-43)
n01 (Weldina ioint) 18 Left D-oillar *1
G701 1 Left D-pillar Body ground. via rear wire
harness
G702 14 Center of cargo area Body ground. via rear wire
harness
* 1: WIth power tailgate
* 2: With navigation or compass
* 3: Without navigation and compass
* 4: Canada models without navigation
22-40, BACK
r--:,
L::..I
11
12
23
14
REAR WIRE HARNESS
BACK 22-41
Left Tailgate Wire Harness

High mount brake light 1 2 Roof spoiler
Rear window defogger connector A 21 1 Left side of rear window
(+)
C701 22 23 Left D-pillar Rear wire harness (see page
22-40)
C702 20 18 Left side of tailgate Middle tailgate wire harness
Middle Tailgate Wire Harness

Left cargo area light 17 2 Left side of tailgate
Left back-up light 18 2 Left side of tailgate
Left license plate light 12 2 Center of tailgate
Left power tailgate pinch sensor 19 2 Left side of tailgate
•1
Power tailgate closer motor 15 2 Center of tailgate •1
Power tailgate closer unit/latch and 16 6 Center of tailgate *1
ratchet switch
Power tailgate inside switch 10 5 Center of tailgate
•1
Rearview camera 7 6 Center oftailgate Navigation
Rear window defogger connector B 13 1 Right side of rear window *2
(-)
Rear window wiper motor 2 4 Center of tailgate
Right cargo area light 9 2 Right side of rear window
Right back-up light 5 2 Right side oftailgate
Right license plate light 8 2 Center of tailgate
Right power tailgate pinch sensor 6 2 Right side of tailgate *1
Tailgate latch switch 13 2 Center oftailgate *2
Tailgate outer handle switch 11 3 Center oftailgate
Tailgate release actuator 14 2 Center of tailgate *2
C702 20 18 Left side of tailgate Left tailgate wire harness
C703 4 18 Right side of tailgate Right tailgate wire harness •1
(see page 22-43)
'1. With power tailgate
• 2: Without power tailgate
11
22
21
17 16 15
LEFT TAILGATE WIRE HARNESS 20 19 18 MIDDLE TAILGATE WIRE HARNESS
22-42 BACK
~
1..::..1
Right Tailgate Wire Harness (With Power Tailgate)

Rear window defogger connector B 3 1 Rightside of rear window
(-)
C703 2 18 Right side of tailgate Middle tailgate wire harness
(see page 22-42)
C704 1 12 Right side of cargo area Floor wire harness (see page
22-40l
RIGHT TAILGATE WIRE HARNESS
BACK 22-43
Rear Subframe Wire Harness

Differential temperature sensor 4 2 . Reardifferential
Left clutch electromagnetic coil 5 4 Rear differential
Left rear wheel sensor . 7 2 Rear differential
Left rear suspension stroke sensor 9 3 Rear differential
Right clutch electromagnetic coil 3 4 Rear differential
Rightrear suspension stroke sensor 2 3 Rear differential
Right rear wheel sensor 1 2 Rear differential
C613 8 23 Under rear offloor Floor wire harness (see page
22-341
G651 6 Subframe Body ground, via rear
subframe wire harness
REAR SUBFRAME WIRE HARNESS
22-44 BACK
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit DTC 81228 or DTC indicator 0 and AUTO: A
connector A (40P) terminal No.8 and the outside air Short in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor
temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No.1. Circuit
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81228 or D and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR NO-Intermittent failure .•

YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at (see page 21-105), and test it (see page 21-105).
outside air temperature sensor 2P connector. If the Is the outside air temperature sensor OK?
climate control unit,and recheck. If the symptom/ YES-Go to step 7.
control unit.• NO-Replace the outside air temperature sensor.•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate 7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).
sensor.•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-45
Climate Control
8. Check for continuity between climate control unit DTC 81229 or DTC indicator E and AUTO: An
connector A (40P) terminal No. 28 and body ground~ Open in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit


4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81229 or E and AUTO indicated?

Is there continuity? poor connections on the sunlight sensor circuit.•
between the climate control unit and the outside air
temperature sensor.• 6. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.
NO-Go to step 9. 7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).
connector A (40P) terminals No.8 and No. 28. connector A (40P) terminal No. 29 and the sunlight
sensor 5Pconnector terminal No.4.

control unit and the outside air temperature YES-Go to step 9.
sensor.•
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit, control unit and the sunlight sensor.•
21-46 BACK
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit DTC 81230 or DTC indicator F and AUTO: A
connector A (40P) terminal No.8 and the sunlight Short in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
sensor 5P connector terminal No.2.
1. Clearthe Drc with the HDS.

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81230 or F and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
SUNLIGHT SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR NO-Intermittent failure .•

6. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.
YES-Go to step 10.
control unit and the sunlight sensor.• 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit
connector A (40P) terminal No. 29 and body ground.
10. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector.
12. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-106).
Is the sunlight sensor OK?

sunlight sensor 5P connector. If the connections are =
good, substitute a known-good climate control unit,
and recheck.lfthe symptom/indication goes away, Wire side of female terminals
NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-106). Is there continuity?

• YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the climate control unit and the sunlight
sensor.•
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-47
Climate Control
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit DTC 81231 or DTC indicator G and AUTO: An
connector A (40P) terminals No.8 and No. 29. Open in the Front Evaporator Temperature
Sensor Circuit
3. Do the self"diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-9)

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81231 or G and AUTO indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.

poor connections on the front evaporator
YES-Repair short in the wires between the climate temperature sensor circuit.•
control unit and the sunlight sensor.•
NO-Go to step 10.
6. Remove the front evaporator temperature sensor
10. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 5P connector. (see page 21-107), and test it (see page 21-107).
11. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (40P). Is the front evaporator temperature sensor OK?
12. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-106). YES-Go to step 7.
Is the sunlight sensor OK? NO-Replace the front evaporator temperature

sensor.•
YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, 7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P).
NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-106) .

•
21-48 BACK
connector A (40P) terminal No. 24 and the front connector A (40P) terminal No.8 and the front
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector

2P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals FRONT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
control unit and the front evaporator temperature climate control unit connector A (40P) and at the
sensor.• front evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector.
If the connections are good, substitute a known-
good climate control unit, and recheck. If the

sensor.•
BACK 21-49
Climate Control
OTC 81232 or OTC indicator H and AUTO: A 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit
Short in the Front Evaporator Temperature connector A (40P) terminal No. 24 and body ground.
Sensor Circuit

4. Check for DTCs.

=
Is DTe 81232 or H and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
6. Remove the front evaporator temperature sensor evaporator temperature sensor..
NO-Go to step 9.
Is therront evaporator temperature sensorOK?
YES-Goto step 7. connector A (40P) terminals No.8 and No. 24.
NO-Replace the front evaporator temperature CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)
sensor.•

sensor.•

21-50 BACK
DTC 81233 or DTC indicator J and AUTO: An 9. Check for continuity between the following
Open in the Driver's Air Mix Control Motor terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P)
Circuit and the driver's air mix control motor 7P connector.
40P: 7P:
No.8 No.5
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81233 or J and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
Q
poor connections on the driver's.air mix control
motor circuit.•
6. Test the driver's air mix control motor (see page DRIVER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
21-109). Wire side of female terminals
Is the driver's air mix control motor OK? . Is there continuity?

NO-Replace the driver's air mix control motor driver's air mix control motor 7P connector. If the
(see page 21-110) .• connections are good, substitute a known-good
7. Disconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P indication goes away, replace the original climate
connector. control unit.•
8. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P). NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the
climate control unit and the driver's air mix control
motor.•
BACK 21-51
Climate Control
OTC 81234 or OTC indicator K and AUTO: A 10. Check for continuity between body ground and
Short in theDriver's Air Mix Control Motor climate control unit connector A (40P) terminal
Circuit No.11.

4. Check for DTCs. Q

Is DTC 81234 or K and AUTO indicated? =
5. Check for DTCs.
Are these DTCs also present; 81237 or Nand between the climate control unit and the driver's air
AUTO, and/or 81245 or G, and/or 82968 or A and mix control motor.•
WINDSHIELD DEFROST? NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 13. 11. Check for continuity between climate control unit
connector A (40P) terminals No.6 and No. 11.
NO-Go to step 6.
7. Test the driver's air mix control motor (see page

21-109).
YES-Go to step 8.


connector. Is there continuity?
9. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (40P). YES-Repair the short in the wires .•
NO-Go to step 12.
21-52 BACK
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and measure the 15. Check for continuity between climate control unit
voltage between climate control unit connector A connector A (40P) terminal No.6 and body ground.
(40P) terminal No. 11 and body ground.
Q
=
= Wire side of female terminals
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire .•
the climate control unit and the driver's air mix NO-Go to step 16.
control motor. This short may also damage the
climate control unit. Repair the short to power 16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same
before replacing the climate control unit.• terminal for voltage to body ground.
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit, CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P)

• Driver's air mix control motor =

• Rear air mix control motor Wire side of female terminals

NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-53
Climate Control
ground, reconnect these items individually and
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure the • Driver's air mix control motor
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) • AlC pressure sensor

NO-Check for a loose wire or poor connection at YES-Substitute a known-good climate control unit
climate control unit connector A (40P). If the and recheck.lfthe symptom/indication goes away,
connection is good, substitute a known-good replace the original climate control unit.•
control unit.. voltage drop.•
21-54 BACK
OTC 81235 or .OTC indicator L and AUTO: A 9. Check for continuity between the fol/owing
Problem in the Driver's Air Mix Control terminals of climate control unit connector A (40P)
Linkage, Door, or Motor Circuit and the driver's air mix control motor 7P connector.
40P: 7P:
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. No. 12 , No.2
No.13' No.1
4. Check for DTCs.
Is OTe 81235 or L and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

poor connections on the driver's air mix control
motor circuit..
DRIVER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
6. Test the driver's air mix control motor,(see page Is there continuity?
21-109).
YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 7. climate control unit and the driver's air mix control
motor.•
(see page 21-110), or repair the driver's air mix

connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-55
Climate Control
10. Check for continuity between body ground and DTC 81236 or DTC indicator M and AUTO: An
climate control unit connector A (40P) terminals Open in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
No. '12 and No. 13 individually. Motor Circuit


4. Check for DTCs.
= = Is DTC 81236 or M and AUTO indicated?

Is there continuity? poor connections on the passenger's air mix
control motor circuit .•
. YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the climate control unit and the driver's air 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
mix control motor.•
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit, (see page 21-110).
replace the original climate control unit.• Is the passenger's air mix control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the passenger's air mix control motor

(see page 21-111) .•

7P connector.
21-56 BACK
r:-:'I
Fuse/Relay Boxes L=!.I
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (Auxiliary Under-hood Relay Box part)

Connects to
Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
Ri ht en ine com artment wire harness (see a e 22-22)
o
D
2
~DDDD DDoooool~D
0000 00 0 00 ~
ITil ~
[ [DDDDO [00000]
J
/
(cont'd)
BACK
22-57
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (Relay Control Module part) .

Socket Ref Terminal Connects to
A 5 4. Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
B 2 5 Right e'ngine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
C 3 2 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
0 8 10 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
E 7 14 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
F 6 1 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
G 1 4. Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
H 4. 9 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
2 3
~ RELAY CONTROL
~ MODULE
8 7 6 5
(Viewed from bottom)
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (Relay Block part)

A 9 1 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
AlC compressor clutch relay 2 4.
AlC condenser fan relay 3 4.
B 8 1 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
C 5 1 Right engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
Diode (for AlC condenser fan relay and 11 --
fan control relay)
Diode (for radiator fan relay) 10 --
Fan control relay 1 5
Front blower motor relay 7 4
Headlight low beam relay 6 4.
Radiator fan relav 4. 4.
9 8
(Viewed from bottom)
BACK
22-58
~
l!!:.I
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

A 6 6 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-26)
Accessory power socket relay 8 4
B 19 6 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-24)
C 18 12 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-24)
D 20 17 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-24)
E 25 16 Floor wire harness (see page 22-34)
F 26 14 Floor wire harness (see page 22-34)
Front seat heater relay 9 4
G 21 6 Floor wire harness (see page 22-34)
H 24 14 Floor wire harness (see page 22-34)
J 16 21 Driver's door subharness (see page 22-48)
K 15 12 Driver's door subharness (see page 22-48)
M 14 3 MICU service check connector
N 2 45 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-26)
P 23 30 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-26)
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 13 4
Power window relay 11 4
Q 22 14 Floor wire harness (see page 22-34)
R (for MES connector) 3 2 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-26)
S (forSRS) 5 2 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-26)
Short pin (for fuel pump) 10 --
Short pin (for lumber support) 12 --
T 7 6 Not used
Turn signal/hazard relay 4 6
W 17 5 Left engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-24)
X 1 39 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-26)
17 19 20
2 3
22
16---_ _oL
15 23
14
Not used
12 11 10 24
BACK
22-59
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)
Rear Fuse/Relay Box

A 6 2 Floor wire harness (see page 22-34)
B 5 34 Floor wire harness (see page 22-34)
C 4 42 Rear wire harness (see page 22-40)
Cargo area accessory power socket 1 4 Not used
relay
D (for trailer) 7 14
Rear window defogger relay 3 4
SH-AWD relay 2 4
1 2 3
7 6
BACK
22-60
~
Power Distribution I..!!:..I
Fuse to Components Index
Main Under-hood Fuse Box

Fuse Number AmDS Am~s Wire Color Com~onentls) or Circuitls) Protected
1 (BAT) 120A Batterv. Power SI!lmOC
-- -- Not used
2 (OP1) 40A No.1 No.2 No.3 and No.4 fuses in the under-dashfuswel~box
(OP1) 40A No. 12 No. 13 No. 14 No. 15 No. 16 and No. 17 fuses in the under-dash fuse/relaY box
(TRAILER) 40A No.1 No.2 No.3 and No.4 fuses in the rear fuswel~boxiOPJional trailer connectors)
(VSAMTR) 40A VSA modulator-control unit (MTR)
(RR BLOWER) 30A Rear blower motor
3 (lG) 50A Ignition switch (BAn
(P/W) 50A No. 24, No. 25, No. 26,No. 27, and No. 28 fuses inthe under-dash fuse/relay box, Power window
relay in the under-dash fuse/relay box
(RR F/B) 60A No.5 No.6 No.7 No.8 No.9 No. 10 and No. 11 fuses (in the rear fuse/relay box)
(RB1) 30A No.7 No.8 No.9 No. 10 and No. 11 fuses (in the under-hood fuse/relay box)
(RB2) 40A 'No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5 and No. 6 fuses (in the under-hood fuse/rel~box)
(RB3) 60A No. 14 No. 15 No.16 and No. 17 fuses (in the under-hood fuse/rel~bo&
(RB4) 60A No. 12 No. 13 and No. 22 fuses (in the under-hood fuse/rel~box)
4 40A Under-dash fuse/relay box (BACK-UP/ACC)
5 30A ActiYe damper control unit
6 Not used
7 -- Not used
8 30A Audio amplifier
9 7.5A Under-dash fuse/relay box (RES)
10 15A Under-dash fuse/relay box (HAZARD)
11 15A Brake liaht relay. Brake pedal position switch Relay control module (Horn relay circuit)
12 20A VSA modulator-control unit (FSR)
13 20A ODtional (for trailer)
14 20A Second row seat heaters
15 20A AC inverter unit
MAIN UNDER-HOOD
FUSE BOX
/
2
I
nnnnnnn
11 10 9 8 7 6 5
~ o
UUUUUUU [ ] 1
0 [12J
[13J
[
[
[
]
]
] o
[14J
[ ]
[] ~ I
[15J
(cont'd)
BACK
Power ,Distribution
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (Relay Control Module part)

Fuse Amps ',',' '. ,'I Al'IlpsWire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Number
1 1DA Left daytime running light
2 1DA Riaht daytime runnihgliaht
3 1DA Headlight leveling control,unit Left headlight (high beam)
4 1DA . Right headlight (higtibearn)
5 7.5A Front parking lights Front side marker lights
6 3DA Headlight low beam relav. No. 18 and No. 19 fuses (in the under-hood fuse/relay box)
7 7.5A AlF sensor relay. Radiator fan relay
8 15A CKP sensor AlB, CMPsensor,ETCS control relay, Ignition coil relay, Injectors, No.7 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box PCM (lGP) PCM (MRLY) PGM"FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
9 15A Ignition coils -,
1D .15A PCM (ETCSRLYOUn
11 15A EVAP canister vent shut valve, Front AlF sensor (bank2, sensor 1); Front SH02S (bank2, sensor 2), Rear A/F
sensor (bank1 sensor 1), Rear SH02S (bank1sensor 2)
, .-' .
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box (Relay Block part)
Fuse Amps Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Number
12 4DA Blower motor ,
13 2DA Fog lights Fog light relay
14 3DA Headlight washer motor
15 3DA AlC condenser fan motor
16 3DA Radiator fan motor _.
17 7.5A AlC compressor clutch
18 15A Left HID unit
19 15A Headlight washer motor relay, Right HID unit
22 7.5A Active damper system switch light, AfT gear position indicator panel light, Climate control unit light, Dash lights
!. brightness controller light, Driver's ambient light, Driver'S seat heater switch light, Front passenger's seat heater
switch light, Glove box light, Hazard warning switch light, Headlight washer switch light, Headphone jack,
Interior light relay, Left second row seat heater switch light, Moonroof switch light, Power mirror switch light,
Rear climate control panel light, Rear controller and screen, Right second row seat heater switch light, Roof
console Steering wheel switches lights VSA OFF switch light
RELA V BLOCK Part
~DDDD D D nnnl-,n~D
uuuuu
8BGG
nn
1918
LJLJ
Q
U
nn
2213
LJLJ
0
n n n n n
11 10 9 8 7
LJLJLJLJLJ
--~~
0 n~ ._- -I
o
RELA V CONTROL MODULE Part
BACK
22-62
~
.t=:.J
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

Fuse Amps Amps Wire Color Componentls) or Circuitls) Protected
Number
1 7.5A TPMS control unit
2 10A Driver's lumbar support motor
3 10A Moonroof control unit/motor
4 20A Driver's seat heater Front passenger's seat heater
5 10A AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) Audio unit Navigation unit XM receiver
6 7.5A Driver's footwelilight, Driver's vanity mirror light, Front individual map light, Front passenger's footwelilight,
Front passenger's vanity mirror light, Ignition key light, Left rear door courtesy light, Rear ceiling light, Rear
individual mao liaht Riaht rear door courtesy liaht Roof console
7 10A Climate control unit, Combination switch control unit, Data link connector, Center information display Driver's
MPCS unit, Gauge control module, Immobilizer-keyless control unit, MICU (VBU), Navigation display unit,
Passenger's MPCS unit Power til1/telescopic steering control unit
8 20A MICU (+B DOOR LOCK)
9 15A Front accessory Dower socket Rear accessory Dower socket
10 15A PCM(VBSOL)
11 30A EVAP canister vent shut valve, Front A/F sensor (bank2, sensor 1), Front SH02S (bank2, sensor 2), Rear A/F
sensor (bank1, sensor 1), Rear SH02S (bank1- sensor 2), Windshield wiper motor, Wiper/washer control circuit
lin the relay control module)
12 10A Subwoofer
13 20A Front Dassenaer's Dower seat motor (Recline Rear uD-down)
14 20A Driver's power seat motor (Slide Front up-down)
15 20A Powertilt/telescopic steering control unit
16 20A Driver's power seat motor (Recline Rear up-down)
17 20A Front passenger's power seat motor (Slide Front up-down)
18 10A AlF sensor, Alternator, Brake pedal position switch, ELD unit, Engine mount control solenoid, EVAP canister
Durae valve PCM
19 20A Fuel DumD. Immobilizer-kevless control unit PCM PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)
20 7.5A Active damper control unit Brake light relay, Hazard warnina switch ODS unit SH-AWD control unit SRS unit
21 7.5A AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver), Active damper system switch, Automatic dimming inside mirror, Center
information display, Combination switch control unit, Driver's MPCS unit, Electrical compass unit, Gauge control
module, MICU, Power seat control unit, Power tailgate control unit, Power tilt/telescopic steering control unit,
Rear MICU (Rear fuselrelay box) Relay control module Shift lock solenoid TPMS control unit XM receiver
22 10A SRS unit
24 20A Left rear Dower window motor
25 20A Right rear power window motor
26 30A Passenger's MPCS unit
27 30A Driver's MPCS unit
28 20A Power tilt/telescopic steering control unit
29 10A Steering angle sensor VSA modulator-control unit Yaw rate-Iateral/longitudinal acceleration sensor
30 10A AC inverter unit, Climate control unit, Front seat heater relay MICU, Rear climate control panel, Rear mode
control motor, Rear window defogger relay (in the rear fuse/relay box), Relay block (AiC compressor relay, A/C
condenser fan relay, Blower motor relay, Fan control relay), Second row seat heaters, Second row seat heater
relay
31 15A Headlight leveling control unit, Wiper/washer control circuit (in the relay control module), Rear MICU (Rear fuse/
rela~ box) Windshield wiper motor Windshield/rear window washer motor
32 15A Accessory power socket relay, AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver), Audio unit, Climate control unit, Ignition key
switch Center information display unit Interface dial MICU Navigation unit XM receiver
(cont'd)
BACK
22-63
Power Distribution
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
I
o
D
o
CJCJo D
ODDDD
DODD
nnnnnnnnnnn
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
uuuuuuuuuuu
nnnnnnnnnnn
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
uuuuuuuuuuu
nnnnnnnnnnn
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
uuuuuuuuuuu
BACK
22-64
r:'I
l!!:..I
Auxiliary Under-dash Fuse Holder 1

Fuse Amps Wire Color Amps Wire Color Componentls) or Circuitls) Protected
Number
STS 7.5A VEL IQnition switch (Sn
LTBLU PCM(STS)
. / AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH
/ FUSE HOLDER 1
[---[
ST-------"S
] )
Auxiliary Under-dash Fuse Holder 2

Fuse Amps Wire Color Amps Wire Color Componentls) or Circuitls) Protected
Number
STRLD 7.5A PNK PCM (STRLD)
BRN Starter cut relay 1 Starter cut relay 2
AUXILIARY UNDER-DASH
, / FUSE HOLDER 2
[----------..~
[srmoJ r
(cont'd)
BACK
22-65
Power Distribution
Rear Fuse/Relay Box

Fuse Amps Amps Wire Color Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected
Number
1 7.5A Optional (for trailer lighting connector)
2 20A
3 20A
4 7.5A
5 10A Cargo area accessorY Dower socket relav. Cargo area accessory power socket
6 20A Power tailgate control unit
7 15A RearMICU
8 7.5A Cargo area lights Rear MICU Tailgate inside switch (With power tailgate)
9 30A SH-AWD control unit
10 30A Rear window defoQQer
11 40A Power tailaate control unit
REAR FUSE/RELAY BOX
~o~-..../
GJ nnnnnnnn
12345 6 7 8
uuuuuuuu
DDD~
( )
( )
0
CJ CJ
BACK
2'2-66
r--:'I
Ground Distribution .I.!::..I
Ground to Components Index
Ground Component or Circuit Grounded

G1 Battery
G2 Enaine mount
G3 Transmission housina
G101 AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A. B, and C, CKP sensor AlB, CMP sensor, EGR valve, Ignition coils, PCM (PG, LG),
Rocker arm.oil pressure switch Transmission range switch
G201 Hood switch, Right daytime running light, Right fog light, Right front parking light, Right front side marker light, Right front
turn signal light .Rjght headlight (hiah beam~ Riaht HID unit Washer fluid level switch
G202 Fan control relay, Front blower motor relay, Headlight washer motor, Power steering pressure (PSP) switch, Relay control
module Windshield wiDer motor
G301 Left daytime running light, Left fog light, Left front parking light, Left front side marker light, Left front turn signal light, Left
headliaht (hiah beam) Left HID unit Radiator fan motor
G302 Active damper control unit Brake fluid level switch ELD unit
G303 VSA modulator-control unit (2 wires)
G401 Active damper control unit Headlight leveling control unit Relay control module TPMS control unit
G501 Dash lights brightness controller, Gauge control module (2 wires), Headlight washer switch, Memory erase signal (MES)
connector Moonroof.control unit/motor Power mirror switch VSA OFF switch
G502 MICU (BRN wire)
G503 AC inverter unit, AfT gear position indicator panel light, Data link connector (DLC) (2 wires), Left second row seat heater switch,
Park-pin switch, Power tilt/telescopic steering control unit, Rear blower motor relay, Rear power transistor, Rear accessory
power socket Right second row seat heater switch Second row seat heater relay
G504 Audio amplifier Audio unit
G505 SRS unit (2 wires)
G506 Center information display/Navigation display unit, Climate control unit, Front passenger's door lock knob switch,
HandsFreeLink control unit, Interface dial, Power tilt/telescopic steering control unit, Passenger's MPCS unit, Rear climate
control panel, Rear controller and screen, Right power mirror, Steering angle sensor, Steering wheel switches, Yaw rate-
lateral /Ionaitudinal acceleration sensor
G507 Driver's seat heater switch, Front accessory power socket, Front passenger's seat heater switch, Front power transistor, Glove
box light Passenger's MPCS unit Right power mirror (2 wires)
G601 Accessory power socket relay, Automatic inside dimming mirror, Combination switch control unit and combination light
switch, Driver's door lock knob switch, Driver's MPCS unit (2 wires), Driver's door power tailgate switch, Driver's vanity mirror
light, Driving position memory switch, Front passenger's vanity mirror light, Fuel fill door opener switch, Ignition key switch,
Left rear door lock knob switch, Left power mirror (3 wires), MICU (PG), MICU (SG), Multiplex control inspection connector,
Roof console Turn sidnal/hazard relay
G602 Driver's lumbar support switch (2 wires), Driver's seat belt buckle switch, Left second row seat heater, Power seat control unit
(4 wires) Right second row seat heater
G603 Rear fuse/relay box SH-AWD relay (via rear fuse/relay box) SH-AWD control unit (3 wires)
G604 Cargo area accessory power socket, Fuel fill door opener solenoid, Fuel pump control module, Rear differential, Rear fuse/
relav box (Rear MICU)
G605 Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, Front passenger's seat heater, Front passenger's power seat switch (2 wires),
Naviaation unit ODS unit
G606 AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) (2 wires), AcuraLink inspection connector 5P connector, Right rear door lock knob switch,
Subwoofer XM receiver (2 wires)
G701 High mount brake light, Left back-up light, Left brake light, Left taillights, Left license plate light, Left rear side marker light, Left
rear turn signal light, Power tailgate control unit (2 wires), Power tailgate drive unit, Rear window defogger, Right back-up
liaht Riaht license plate liaht Tailaate release actuator
G702 Electrical compass unit (Without navigation), Power tailgate control unit, Keyless buzzer, Right brake light, Right taillights,
Right rear side marker light, Right rear turn signal light, Tailgate latch switch, Tailgate outer handle switch (Without power
tailaate)
BACK 22-67
Under~hood Fuse/Relay Box
DTe Troubleshooting
DTe 81051: Relay Control Module Internal DTe 81055: Relay Control Module Lost
(CPU) Error Communication with MICU (MICU Message)
DTe 81052: Relay Control Module Internal DTe 81056: Relay Control Module Lost
(EEPROM) Error Communication with MICU (ALARM
Message)
DTe 81057: Relay Control Module Lost
1. Clear the OTCs with the HOS. Communication with MICU (DOORSW
Message)
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II).
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple OTCs, be
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more. sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112).
1. Clear the OTCs with the HOS.
Is DTC 81051 or 81052 indicated?
YES-Faulty relay control module, replace the
under-hood fuse/relay box.• 3. Wait for 6 seconds or more.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 4. Check for OTCs with the HOS.
time.•
Is DTC 81055,81056, or 81057 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

time. Check for loose or poor connection between
the relay control module and the MICU .•
5. Check for OTCs with the .HOS.
Are DTCs81055, 81056, 81057, 81157, 81159, 8

1180,81255,81955,82155,82156, and 82161 all
indicated?
YES-Do the MICU inputtest (seepage 22-132\ .•
NO-Do the relay control module input test

(see page 22-136) .•
22-68 BACK
~
1.:..1
DTC 81060: Relay Control Module Lost DTC 81062: Relay Control Module Lost
Communication with Gauge Control Module Communication with Combination Switch
(VPS/NE Message) Control Unit (HLSW Message)
DTC 81061: Relay Control Module Lost DTC 81063: Relay Control Module Lost
Communication with Gauge Control Module Communication with Combination Switch
(AfT Message) Control Unit (WIPSW Message)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112). Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II).
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more. 3. Wait for 6 seconds or more.
Is orc 81060 and/or 81061 indicated? Is orc 81062 and/or 81063 indicated?
time. Check for loose or poor connection between time. Check for loose or poor connection between
the relay control module and the gauge control the relay control module and the combination
module .• switch control unit.•
Are orcs 81011,81032,81060,81061,81205,8 Are orcs 81007,81062,81063,81155,81156,8

1206,81207,81906,81956,82157, and 82160 all 1957,81958, and 82969 all indicated?
indicated?
YES-Do the combination switch control unit input
YES-Do the gauge control module input test test (see page 22-300) .•
(see page 22-334) .•
NO-Do the relay control module input test (see page 22-136) .•
(see page 22-136) .•
BACK 22-69
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
OTC 81065: Relay Control Module Lost

Communication with Driver's MPCS Unit
(DRLOCKSW Message)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTCs 81065 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

time. Check for loose or poor connections between
the relay control module and the driver's MPCS
unit.•
Are DTCs 81013,81015,81065,81182, and 8

1905 all indicated?
YES-Do the driver's MPCS unit input test

(see page 22-137) .•

(see page 22-136) .•
22-70 BACK
r--:'I
L:::..I
Removal and Installation
1. Make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio 1. Install the relay control module and relays, then
and navigation system (if equipped). connect the connectors to the under-hood fuse/
relay box.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.
2. Install the cover to the bottom of the under-hood
3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then fuse/relay box.
disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3
minutes. 3. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box and the
removed parts in the reverse order of removal.
4. Remove the cover of the under-hood fuse/relay box,
and carefully remove the relays by prying under 4. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then
the base of the relay. connect the negative cable to the battery.
NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the 5. Enter the audio and navigation system anti-theft
relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not codes, and set the clock (if equipped).
start.
6. Confirm that all systems work properly.
5. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the

bracket.
6. Remove the relay block part (A) from the under-

hood fuse/relay box.
7. Remove the relay control module part (8) from the

under-hood fuse/relay box, then disconnect the
connectors from the relay control module.
BACK 22-71
U.nder-:dash Fuse/Relay Box
SRS components are located in this area. Reviewthe Installation

SRS component locations (see page 24-18). and
precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before NOTE: The MICU which is part ofthe under-dash fuse/
periormingrepairs or servicing. relay box is a component of the immobilizer system.
Because of this construction, the MICU must be
Removal registered when the under-dash fuse/relay box is
replaced, or the vehicle will not start.
,. Make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio
and navigation system (if equipped). 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal.
3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 removal.
minutes.
3. Connect the positive cable to battery, then connect
4. Remove the left kick panel (see page 20-76). the negative cable to the battery.
5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the 4. If the under-dash fuse/relay box is replaced, go to
under-dash fuse/relay box (A). step 5. Ifthe original under-dash fuse/relay box is
installed, go to step 10.
5. Connect the HDS to the data link connector.
7. Select the BODY ELECTRICAL, then enter the

IMMOBILIZER SETUP.
8. Select the REPLACE MPCS/MICU/IMOES, then

select the suitable menu from the HDS indications.
9. After registration, confirm that the vehicle will start.
10. Enter the audio and navigation system anti-theft

codes, and setthe clock.
6. Remove the mounting bolts, and pull the fuse/relay

box away from the body.
7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the

under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the under-
8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the

base of the relay.
NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the

relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not
start.
22-72 BACK
r--:'I
Rear Fuse/Relay Box I..:!::..I
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 81955: Rear MICU Lost Communication DTC 81956: Rear MICU Lost Communication
with MICU (MICU Message) with Gauge Control Module (AfT Message)
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112). Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22,112).
4. Check for DTCs with the HOS. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC 81955 indicated? Is DTC 81956 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.• YES-Go to step 5.•
time. Check for loose or poor connection between time. Check for loose or poor connections between
the rear fuse/relay box and the MICU .• the rear MICU and the gauge control module.•
Are DTCs 81055,81056,81057,81157,81159,8 Are DTCs 81011,81061, and 81906 also

118~81255,81955,82155,8215~and/or82161 indicated?
indicated?
YES-Do the MICU input test (see page 22-132).• (see page 22-334) .•
NO-Do the rear MICU input test (see page 22-139). NO-Do the rear MICU input test (see page 22-139) .
• •
BACK 22..73
Rear Fuse/Relay Box
DTC 81957: Rear MICU Lost Communication DTC 81959: Rear MICU Lost Communication
with Combination Switch Control Unit (HLSW with Relay Control Module (RM Message)
Message)
DTC 81958: Rear MICU Lost Communication NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
with Combination Switch Control Unit sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System
(WIPSW Message) Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112).
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 3. Wait for 6 seconds or more.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II). 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more. Is DTC 81959 indicated?
Is DTC 81957 and/or 81958 indicated? NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
YES-Go to step 5.. the rear MICU and the relay control module.•
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this· 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
the rear MICU and the combination switch control Are DTCs 81005,81058,81959,82162, and/or 8
unit.• 2970 all indicated?
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. YES-Do the relay control module input test
(see page 22-136) .•
Are DTCs81007, 81062, 81063, 81155, 81156, 8
1957,81958, and/or 82969 all indicated? NO-Do the rear MICU input test (see page 22-139).

•
test (see page 22-300) .•
NO-Do the rear MICU input test (see page 22-139) .

•
22-74 BACK
r--:'I
~
SRS components are located in this area. Review the Installation

SRS component locations (see page 24-18). and
precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
performing repairs or servicing. rear fuse/relay box, then install the rear fuse/relay
box in the reverse order of removal.
Removal
2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
1. Make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio removal.
and navigation system (if equipped).
3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. connectthe negative cable to the battery.
3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then 4. Enter the audio and navigation system anti-theft
disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3 codes, and set the clock.
minutes.
4. Remove the left rear side trim panel (see page
20-92).
5. Disconnect the connectors from the rear fuse/relay

box (A).
6. Remove the mounting nuts and the rear fuse/relay

box.
7. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the

base of the relay.
NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the

relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not
start.
BACK 22-75
Battery
Battery Test
AWARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow the
proper procedure, causing seriQUs injury to anyone
nearby. Follow all procedures carefully, and keep
sparks and open flames away from the battery.
Use an ED-18™ Battery Tester, and follow the

manufacturer's procedures. If you don't have one of
these computerized testers, follow this conventional
test procedure:
1. Be sure the temperature of the electrolyte is

between 70 "F (21 "C) and 100 "F (38 "C).
2. Inspect the battery case for cracks or leaks.
• If the case is damaged, replace the battery.•

• If the case looks OK, go to step 3.
3. Check the test indicator window.
• If the test indicator window indicates the battery

is charged, go to step 4.
• If the test indicator window indicates a low
charge, go to step 7.
4. Apply a 300 amp load for 15 seconds to remove the

surface charge.
5. Wait 15 seconds, then apply a test load of 280 amps

for 15 seconds.
6. Record battery voltage.
• If voltage is above 9.6 V, the battery is OK.•

• If voltage is below 9.6 V, go to step 7.
7. Charge the battery on High (40 amps) until the test

indicator window shows the battery is charged,
plus an additional 30 minutes. Ifthe battery charge
is very low, it may be necessary to bypass the
charger's polarity protection circuitry.

is charged within three hours, repeat steps 4
through 6. If the battery is still below 9.6 V,
replace the battery.•
is not charged within three hours, replace the
battery.•
22-76 BACK
r--:'I
Relays I.!!:..I
Power Relay Test
Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the Normally-open type
test listed for it.
Check for continuity between the terminals.
Relay Test
ACC cut relay Normally- • There should be continuity between the No.1 and
AlC compressor clutch relay open type No.2 terminals when battery positive terminal is
AlC condenser fan relay connected to the No. 4 terminal, and battery negative
Accessory power socket relay terminal is connected to the NO.3 terminal.
Brake light relay • There should be no continuity between the No.1 and
Cargo area accessory power No.2 terminals when power is disconnected.
socket relay
Front blower motor relay
Front seat heater relay
Fog light relay
IG2 cut relay 4 2 4 2
as
Interior light relay
Headlight low beam relay
Headlight washer relay
PGM-FI main relay 2
Power window relay
3 1 3 1
Radiator fan relay
Rear blower motor relay 8 8
Rear window defogger relay
SH-AWD relay
Starter cut relay 1, 2
Fan control relay Five-terminal
Second row seat heater relay type
(cont'd)
BACK 22-77
Relays
Power Relay Test (cont'd)
Five-terminal type PGM-FI main relay 1, Ignition coil relay, A/F

sensor Relay, ETCS relay
Check for continuity between the terminals.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then
• There should be continuity between the No. 1 and· disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box
No.2 terminals when battery positive terminal is connectors C (2P), E (14P), and H (9P).
connected to the No.5 terminal, and battery negative UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR C (2P)
terminal is connected to the No.3 terminal.
• There should be continuity between the No.1 and
No.4 terminals when power is disconnected.
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (14P)
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR H (9P)
n n
423
e 2. Connect battery power to the C2 terminal.
PGM-FI main relay 1:

• Connect the E5 terminal to body ground. There
should be battery voltage between the H1
• Disconnect the E5 terminal from the body ground.
There should be no voltage between the H1
terminal and the body ground.
Ignition coil relay:

• Connect the E5 terminal to body ground. There
should be battery voltage between the H6
A/F sensor relay:

• Connect the E5 and E13 terminals to body ground.
There should be battery voltage between the H9
ETCS relay:
• Connect the E5 and E14 terminals to body ground.
There should be battery voltage between the H7
22-78 BACK
r--:'I
Ignition Switch I!:..I
Test Replacement
SRS components are located in the area. Review the SRS components are located in the area. Review the
SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and SRS component locations (see page 24-18) and
precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before precautions and procedures (see page 24-20) before
performing repairs or servicing. performing repairs or servicing.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the
audio and navigation system (if equipped). audio and navigation system (if equipped).
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the steering column covers (see page 3. Remove the steering column covers (see page
20-129). 20-129).
4. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the ignition 4. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the ignition
switch (8). switch (8).
RED PNK
5. Remove the two screws and the ignition switch.
5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table. 6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
~ Terminal
RED WHT PNK ORN VEL 7. After reconnecting the battery, enter the audio and
(ACC) (BAT) (lG1) (102) (ST)
'" -
Position navigation system anti-theft codes, and set the
o (LOCK) clock.
I (ACC) " -
"
II (ON) R- f-o
III (START) ~~
6. If the continuity does not agree with the table,

replace the ignition switch (see page 22-79).
7. After reconnecting the battery, enter the audio and

navigation system anti-theft codes, and set the
clock.
BACK 22-79
'J\IIultiplex Integrated Control System
MICU
(Bui" into the under-
dash fuse/relay box)
InputTest, page 22-132
IGNITION KEY SWITCH

Test, page 22-254
IGNITION KEY LIGHT
Test, page 22-254
FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS
REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS

Test/Replacement,
page 22-240
REAR CEILING LIGHTS
Test/Replacement,
page 22-241
REARMICU
(Built into the rear fuse/relay box)
Input Test, page 22-139
22-80 BACK
r--:'I
t=!..I
Troubleshooting CAN Circuit Related Problems
NOTE: Check the powertrain control module (PCM) for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of
communication errors first.
Using the HDS (Preferred method)
1. Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A to check for "Connected units" and DTCs (see page 22-112).
2. If no DTCs are retrieved, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C (see page 22-114) or D (see page 22c 115).
Without HDS (Use only if the HDS is unavailable)
1. Check for communication circuit problems using B-CAN System Diagnostic Test (see page 22-112).
2. Check for DTCs.
3. Sort, and then troubleshoot the DTCs in this order:
-1 Battery voltage DTCs

-2 Internal error DTCs
-a Loss of communication DTCs (beginning with the lowest number first; for example, if 81008 and 81011.are
retrieved, troubleshoot 81008 first). Refer to loss of communication cross reference chart (see page 22-~3).
-4 Signal error DTCs .
4. If no DTCs are retrieved, use 8-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode 2 to check all inputs related to failure (see step
10 on page 22-116).
(cont'd)
BACK 22-81
- - - - - -
Multiplex Integrated Control System
How to display DTCs on the gauge control module

1. Setthe multiplex in Test Mode 1 (see page 22-116).
2. While in Test Mode 1, the DTCs which have been detected and stored individually by various 8-CAN units, will be
shown one by one on the multi-information display on the gauge control module when the communication
between the MICU and the gauge control module is normal. To scroll through the DTCs, press the select/reset
button.
DTC SERVICE
DlC detected (the lower four digits are
---------1..... a decimal number representing the DlC.)
------
I1Tc81150 PA50
123456
I
DTC SERVICE
I -----------------.. NoDlCsdetected
- -----
DTC NO
123456
DTC SERVICE
---------1..... ALL DlCs have been displayed
------
DTC End
123456
3. The unit that has stored the code can be identified ~ the number shown on the multi-inf ormation dl~ay (MID)
Unit Code (Control Unit I.D. Number)
MICU 10
Relay control module 11
Rear MICU 12
Power tailaate control unit 31
Driver's MPCS unit 35
Gauge control module 50
Climate control unit 51
Combination switch control unit 70
HANDSFREELINK control unit 94
Power seat control unit 95
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 96
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) 97
How to clear the DTC

While in DTC indication status, press and hold down the select/reset button for more than 10 seconds.
22-82 BACK
r--:'I
i.=!..I
Loss of Communication DTC cross-reference chart

When an engine control unit (ECU) is unable to communicate with the other ECUs on the CAN circuit, the other control units will set loss of
communication DTCs. Use this chart to find the control unit that is not communicating.
1. Find the Transmitting Control Unit that is in the same row as all of the loss of communication DTCs retrieved.
2. Do the input test for the transmitting control unit.
BUS OFF and Inter nal Error Codes

DTCtype Related Unit
MICU RearMICU Relay Driver's Combination Gauge Climate Immobilizer- Power Power Seat Hands AcuraUnk
Control MPCSUnit Switch Control Control Unit Keyless Tailgate Control Unit FreeLink Control Unit
Module Control Unit Module Control unit .Control Unit Control Unit lXM
Receiver)
8USOFF 81000 81950 81050 82150 81250 81150 81200 81900 81350 81800 81750 82200
ECU(CPU) 81001 81051 82209
Error
ECU (EEPROM) 81002 81052 82152 81252 81152 81202 81352 81802 81792
Error
Transmitting Message Receiving Unit/Loss of Communication DTC

Control Unit MICU Rear Relay Driver's ~ombina1 Gauge Climate mmobilizer• Power Power Hands AcuraLink Navigation
MICU Control MPCS ion Control Control Keyless Tailgate Seat FreeLink Control Unit
Module Unit Switch Unit Unit Control Unit Control Control Control UnitlXM
Control Unit Unit Unit Receiver)
Unit
MICU ALARM 81056
MICU 81955 81055 82155 81255 81157 81355 81806
DOORSW 81057 82161 81159 81811
MIRRORSW 82156 81810
AUTOLT 81180
RearMICU RJC 81012
Relay Control RM 81005 81959 82162 81158 82970
Module
Driver'S MPCS DRLOCKSW 81015 81065 81182 81905 81356
Unit ASLOCKSW 81013 81358
MENSW 81812
Combination HLSW 81007 81957 81062 81155
Switch Control WIPSW 81958 81063 81156 82969
Unit
Gauge Control VSP/NE 81011 81060 82160 81205 81357 81805 81408
Module AT 81956 81061 81906 81359 81808
ENGTEMP 81206
ILLUMI 82157 81207
SRS 81032
VEHINFO 81786
Power Tailgate PTG 81162
Control Unit
PCM ENG 81168
AT 81169
VSA Modulator- VSA 81170
Control Unit
TPMS Control TPMS 81173
Unit
SRSControl SRS 81187
Active Damper ACTIVE 81188
Control Unit DAMPER
SYSTEM
Navlllation Unit 82981
AcuraLink 82208 82207
Control Unit
HandsFreeLink
Control Unit
Audio Unit 82991
BACK 22-83
----------------- --
NOTE: Record all DTCs, and sort them by DTC type using the DTC troubleshooting index, then troubleshoot the DTC(s)
in this order:
• 8attery voltage DTCs

• Internal error DTCs
• Loss of communication DTCs (beginning with the lowest number first; for example, if 81005 and 81016 are retrieved,
troubleshoot 81005 first).
• Signal error DTCs
MICU
DTC Description DTCType Pajle
81000 Communication bus line error Loss of communication (see page 22-122)
81001 MICU internal error (CPU error) Internal error (see page 22-124)
81002 MICU internal error (EEPROM error) Internal error (see page 22-124)
81005 MICU lost communication with relay control Loss of communication (see page 22-124)
module (RM message)
81007 MICU lost communication with combination switch Loss of communication (see page 22-125)
control unit (HLSW message)
81011 MICU lost communication with gauge control Loss of communication (see page 22-125)
module (VSP/NE message)
81012 MICU lost communication with the rear fuse/relay Loss of communication (see page 22-126)
box (RJC message)
81013 MICU lost communication with driver's MPCS unit Loss of communication (see page 22-126)
(ASLOCKSW messa~e)
81015 MICU lost communication with driver's MPCS unit Loss of communication (see page 22-126)
(DRLOCKSW message)
81032 MICU lost communication with the SRS unit (CDS Signal error (see page 22-127)
message)
81575 Automatic lighting sensor circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-198)
22-84 BACK
r--:'I
L!::.J
e ay ontro 1Mod ue
RIC I
DTC Description DTCType Page
81050 Communication bus line error (8US-OFF) Loss of communication (see page 22-129)
81051 Relay control module internal (CPU) error Internal error (see page 22-68)
81052 Relay control module internal (EEPROM) error Internal error (see page 22-68)
81055 Relay control module lost communication with Loss of communication (see page 22-68)
MICU (MICU message)
MICU (ALARM message)
MICU (DOORSW message)
gauge control module (VSP/NE message)
gauge control module (AfT message)
combination switch control unit (HLSW message)
combination switch control unit (WIPSW message)
driver's MPCS unit (DRLOCKSW message)
81075 Headlight switch back-upcircuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-193)
81076 Windshield wiper switch back-up circuit Signal error (see page 22-296)
malfunction
81077 Windshield wiper (As) auto switch circuit Signal error (seepage 22-297)
malfunction
81078 Daytime running lights system error (Canada) Loss of communication, (see page 22-194)
81079 Daytime running lights system error (USA) Loss of communication (see page 22-194)
81080 Power supply circuit (lG1 line) input error for relay Signal error (see page 22-127)
control module and MICU
(cont'd)
BACK 22-85

Gauge Contro1Module
81150 Communication bos line error Loss of communication (see page 22-129)
81152 Gauge control module internal (EEPROM) error Internal error (see page 22-322)
81155 Gauge control module lost communication with Loss of communication (see page 22-322)
combination switch control unit (HLSW message)
combination switch control unit (WIPSW message)
MICU (MICU message)
relay control module (RM message)
81159 Gauge control module lost communication with Loss of .communication (see page 22-323)
Power tail9.-ate control unit(PTG message)
PCM (ENG messages)
PCM(A/T messages)
VSA modulator-control unit (VSA message)
TPMS control unit (TPMS message)
81175 Fuel level sensor (fuel gauge sending unit) circuit Signal error (see page 22-328)
open
81176 Fuel level sensor (fuel gauge sending unit) circuit Signal error (see page 22-329)
short
81177 Abnormal battery voltage 8attery voltage (see page 22-330)
81178 F-CAN communication line error Loss of communication (see page 22-325)
MICU (AUTOLT message)
driver'S MPCS unit (DRLOCKSW message)
SRS unit (SRS message)
active damper system control unit (active damper
system message)
22-86 BACK
r--:'I
~
Climate Control Unit

DTC Description DTCtype Page
81202 Climate control unit internal error Internal error (see page 21-32)
81205 Climate control unit lost communication with gauge Loss of communication (see page 21-32)
control module (VSP/NE massage)
control (ECT message)
control module (lLLUMI message)
81213 An open in the rear evaporator temperature sensor Signal error (see page 21-33)
circuit
81214 A short in the rear evaporator temperature sensor Signal error (see page 21-34)
circuit
81215 An open or short in the recirculation control motor Signal error (see page 21-36)
circuit
81223 A problem in the rear blower motor circuit Signal error (see page 21-38)
81225 An open in the in-car temperature circuit Signal error (see page 21-41)
81226 A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit SiRnal error (see page 21-43)
81227 An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-44)
81228 A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit SiRnal error (see page 21-45)
81229 An open in the sunlight sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-46)
81230 A short in the sunlight sensor circuit SiRnal error (see page 21-47)
81231 An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-48)
81232 A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit SiRnal error (see page 21-50)
81233 An open in the driver's air mix control motor circuit Signal error (see page 21-51)
81234 A short in the driver's air mix control motor circuit SiRnal error (see page 21-52)
81235 A problem in the driver's air mix control linkage, door, Signal error (see page 21-55)
motor or motor circuit
81236 An open in the passenger's air mix control motor Signal error (see page 21-56)
circuit
81237 A short in the passenger's air mix control motor Signal error (see page 21-57)
circuit
81238 A problem in the passenger's air mix control linkage, Signal error (see page 21-60)
door, motor or motor circuit
81239 An open or short in the mode control motor circuit Signal error (see page 21-62)
81240 A problem in the mode control linkage, doors, motor, Signal error (see page 21-64)
or motor circuit
81241 A problem in the blower motor circuit Signal error (see page 21-65)
(cont'd)
BACK 22-87
Climate Control Unit

81244 An open in the rear air mix control motor circuit Signal error (see page 21-69)
81245 An short in the rear air mix control motor circuit Signal error (see page 21-70)
81246 A problem in the rear air mix control linkage, door, Signal error (see page 21-73)
motor, or motor circuit
82965 Climate control unit lost communication with rear Loss of communication (see page 21-74)
climate control panel
82967 An open in the humidity sensor circuit Signal error (see paJle 21-76)
82968 A short in the humidi!Ysensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-77)
control module (WIPSW message)
control module (RM message)
82979 An ORen in the AlC pressure sensor circuit Signal error (see Pl!ge 21-81)
82980 A short in the AlC pressure sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-83)
82981 Climate control unit lost communication with Loss of communication (see page 21-86)
navigation unit
82983 A problem in the recirculation control linkage, door, Signal error (see page 21-88)
motor, or motor circuit
82991 Climate control unit lost communication with audio Loss of communication (see page 21-89)
unit
22-88 BACK
r:-:'I
l!!:.I
Combination Switch Control Unit

DTC Description DTCType· Page
81252 Combination switch control unit internal (EEPROM) Internal error (see page 22-195)
error
81255 Combination switch control unit lost Loss of communication (see page 22-196)
communication with MICU
81275 Combination light switch OFF position circuit Signal error (see page 22-196)
malfunction ,
81276 Combination light switch parking (SMALL) position Signal error (see page 22-196)
circuit malfunction
81277 Headlight switch AUTO position circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-196)
81278 . Headlight switch ON position circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-196)
81279 Headlight switch DIMMER position circuit Signal error (see page 22-197)
malfunction
81280 Turn signal switch circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-197)
81281 Windshield wiper switch MIST position circuit Signal error (see page 22-299)
malfunction
81282 Windshield wiper switch INT position circuit Signal error (see page 22-299)
malfunction
81283 Windshield wiper switch LOW position circuit Signal error (see page 22-299)
malfunction
81284 Windshield wiper switch HIGH position circuit Signal error (see page 22-299)
malfunction
(cont'd)
BACK 22-89
"I ate Contro IU mt

Power Tau, "
81350 Communication bus line error Loss of communication (seeJ)ag_e 22-129)
81352 Power tailgate control unit internal (EEPROM) error Internal error (see page 22-496)
81355 Power tailgate control unit lost communication Loss of communication (see page 22-496)
with MICU (MICU messaQe)
with driver's MPCS unit (DRLOCKSW message)
with gaUQe control module (VSP/NE messaQe)
with driver's MPCS unit (ASLOCKSW message)
with gauge control module (AfT message)
81375 Driver's door power tailgate switch circuit Signal error (see page 22-498)
malfunction
81376 Power tailgate outside handle switch circuit Signal error (see page 22-499)
malfunction
81377 Inside tailgate lid switch circuit malfunction Signal error (see paQe 22-500)
81378 Power tailgate right pinch sensor circuit Signal error (see page 22-501)
malfunction
81379 Power tailgate left pinch sensor circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-502)
81380 TailQate closer unit open switch circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-503)
81381 Tailgate closer unit close switch circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-505)
81382 Tailgate closer unit full latch switch circuit Signal error (see page 22-507)
malfunction
81383 Tailgate closer unit ratchet switch circuit Signal error (see page 22-509)
malfunction
81384 Tailgate closer unit half latch switch circuit Signal error (see page 22-511)
malfunction
81386 Power tailg_ate sensor pulse A circuit malfunction Signal error (seepage 22-513)
81387 Power tailgate sensor pulse 8 circuit malfunction Signal error (seepage 22-514)
81388 Power tailgate motor circuit malfunction Signal error (seepaQe 22-515)
81389 Power tailgate motor clutch circuit malfunction Signal error (seepage 22-518)
81390 Power tailgate closer function error Signal error (seeJ!a~e 22-519)
22-9.0 BACK
r--:'I
~
HandsFreeLink Control Unit

B1750 Communication bus line error (BUS-OFF) Loss of communication (see page 22-129)
B1775 Microphone input/output short to power/open Signal error (see page 23-262)
B1776 Microphone input/output short to ground/open Signal error (see page 23-263)
B1779 HFL switch or HFL-voice control switch (HFL talk! Signal error (see page 23-265)
HFL back buttons) circuit open/short
B1780 HFL-voice control switch (HFL talk!HFL back Signal error (see page 23-266)
buttons) circuit short
B1785 Incorrect configuration (VEHINFO Frame) Signal error (see page 23-267)
B1786 HandsFreeLink control unit lost communication Signal error (see page 23-268)
with gauge control module (VEHINFO Frame)
B1792 HandsFreeLink control unit internal error Internal error (see page 23-270)
mmobTIlzer-Keyless
I ControIU nit
.
DTC Descri~tion DTCtype Page
81900 Communication bus line error (8US-OFF) Signal error (see page 22-129)
81905 Immobilizer-keyless control unit lost Signal error (see page 22-401)
communication with driver's MPCS unit
(DRLOCKSW message)
81906 Immobilizer-keyless control unit lost Signal error (see page 22-402)
communication with gauge control module (Aff
message)
RearMICU
DTC Description DTCTYl!e Page
81950 Communication bus line error (8US-OFF) Loss of communication (see page 22-129)
81955 Rear MICU lost communication with MICU (MICU Loss of communication (see page 22-73)
messag_e)
81956 Rear MICU lost communication with gauge control Loss of communication (see page 22-73)
module (Aff message)
81957 Rear MICU lost communication with combination Loss of communication (see page 22-74)
switch control unit (HLSW message)
81958 Rear MICU lost communication with combination Loss of communication (see page 22-74)
switch control unit (WIPSW message)
81959 Rear MICU lost communication with relay control Loss of communication (see page 22-74)
module (RM message)
(cont'd)
BACK 22-91
Power Seat Control Unit

81802 Power seat control unit internal (EEPROM) error Internal error (see page 22-424)
81805 Power seat control unit lost communication with Loss of communication (see page 22-424)
gauge control module (VSP/NE message)
MICU (MICU message)
.. gauge control module (AfT message)
MICU (MIRRORSW message)
driver's MPCS unit (MEMSW message)
81825 Power seat slide motor pulse error Signal error (see page 22-426)
81826 Power seat front up-down motor pulse error Signal error (see page 22-430)
81827 Power seat rear up-down motor pulse error Signal error (see page 22-434)
81828 Power seat recline motor pulse error Signal error (see page 22-438)
81829 AfT P signal and VSS signal mismatch Signal error (see page 22-442)
81835 Tilt/telescopic switch signal input error Signal error (see page 22-443)
81836 Power seat position sensor circuit short Signal error (see page 22-445)
81837 Driving position memory recall timeout Signal error (see page 22-447)
81840 Tilt motor pulse error Signal error (see page 22-448)
81841 Telescopic motor pulse error . Signal error (see page 22-451)
81842 Power tilt/telescopic position sensor power supply Signal error (see page 22-455)
circuit (SVCC line) short
81843 Power seat control unit lost communication with Signal error (see page 22-457)
power tilt/telescopic steering control unit (UART
line)
81844 Power seat slide switch circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-459)
81845 Power seat recline switch circuit malfunction Signal error (seepage 22-460)
81846 Power seat front up-down switch circuit Signal error (see page 22-461)
malfunction
81847 Power seat rear up-down switch circuit malfunction· Signal error (see page 22-462)
22-92 BACK
~
~
Driver's MPCS Unit

B2150 Communication bus line error Loss of communication (see page 22-129)
B2152 Driver's MPCS unit internal (EEPROM) error Internal error (see page 22-130)
B2155 Driver's MPCS unit lost communication with MICU Loss of communication (see page 22-130)
(MICU message)
(MIRRORSW message)
B2157 Driver's MPCS unit lost communication with gauge Loss of communication (see page 22-131)
control module (lLLUMI message)
B2160 Driver's MPCS unit lost communication with gauge Loss of communication (see page 22-131)
control module (VSP/NE message)
(DOORSW message)
B2162 Driver's MPCS unit lost communication with Relay Loss of communication (see page 22-131)
control module (RM message)
B2175 Driver's window motor pulse A error Signal error (see page 22-264)
B2176 Driver's window motorpulse B error Signal error (see page 22-266)
B2177 Front passenger's window motor pulse A error Signal error (see page 22-268)
B2178 Front~assenger's window motor pulse B error Signal error (see page 22-270)
B2179 Driver's door key cylinder switch LOCK/UNLOCK Signal error (see page 22-152)
signal error
B2180 Driver's door lock switch LOCK/UNLOCK signal Signal error (see page 22-153)
error
B2181 Driver's door lock knob switch LOCK/UNLOCK Signal error (see page 22-154)
signal error
B2182 Left power mirror horizontal sensor signal error Signal error (see page 22-463)
B2183 Left power mirror vertical sensor signal error Signal error (see page 22-465)
B2184 Right power mirror horizontal sensor signal error Signal error (see page 22-467)
B2185 Hight~ower mirror vertical sensor signal error Signal error (see page 22-469)
B2186 Front passenger's door lock switch LOCK/UNLOCK Signal error (see page 22-155)
signal error
B2187 Communication line (UART line) communication Signal error (see page 22-272)
error (Driver's MPCS unit from Driver's MPCS unit)
B2188 Communication line (UART line) circuit open Signal error (see page 22-274)
B2189 Driver's window position detect circuit error Signal error (see page 22-275)
B2190 Front passenger's window position detect circuit Signal error (see page 22-276)
error
B2191 Passenger's MPCS unit internal (EEPROM) error Internal error (see page 22-277)
AcuraLink Control Unit

B2200 Communication bus line error Loss of communication (see page 22-129)
B2202 AcuraLink control unit EEPROM error Loss of communication (see page 23-241)
B2204 B-CAN communication line error Loss of communication (see page 23-241)
B2205 F-CAN communication line error Loss of communication (see page 23-242)
B2207 Navigation unit control unit lost communication Loss of communication (see page 23-243)
with AcuraLink control unit
B2208 HandsFreeLink control unit lost communication Loss of communication (see page 23-246)
with AcuraLink control unit
B2209 AcuraLink control unit internal error Loss of communication (see page 23-249)
B2240 XM antenna error Signal error (see page 23-250)
BACK 22-93
System Description
MICU Control Functions
The MICU (bui.l~ into the 'under-dash fuse/relay box) is one of the 8-CAN system components. The MICU controls many
systems related to the body controller area and a security system, and also works as a gateway to diagnose the other
8-CAN connected ECUs with the HDS.
The MICU also controls the function ofthese circuits:

Refer to each system circuit diagram for details.
• Entry lights control (individual map lights and ceiling light)

• Exterior lights control (including the daytime running lights control and back-up lights)
• Interlock system
• Keyless entry
• Power door locks
• Security alarm
• Turn signal/hazard flasher
• Tailgate actuator '
• Automatic lighting
• Impact sensing door lock release
• Door mirror switch
• S-NET (IMOCD)
22-94 BACK
~
I.!!!!!..I
Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) and Fast Controller Area Network (F-CAN)
The body controller area network (8-CAN) and the fast controller area network (F-CAN) share information between
multiple electronic control units (ECUs). 8-CAN communication moves at a slower speed (33.33 kbps) for convenience
related items and for other functions. F-CAN information moves at a faster speed (500 kbps) for "real time" functions
such as fuel and emissions data. To allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates
information from 8-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to 8-CAN.
GAUGE CONTROl. MODUlE
~~~~r~~~~-:~~~~~~~~~~~
~"
~1~:j ~ I
[
,,:-
[
,:
~-.CAN
TRANSCEIVER
,,
,
, .
.
•
,
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RElAY BOX
: :,
~
ACURAUNX
+
- - - -.
L...-_~_RECElVERI~U_NlT_--, --- ----7 t···········~~::::::~~II

•........... RELAY
CONTROL MODULf
• SRSUNIT
• VSA MODUlATOR-iXlNlROL UNIT
• DATAUNKCONNECTORIDLC)
• S1EEIIING iWiLf SENSOR
• YAWRAlE-lAmlALlLONGITUDINAL
.t. . . . . .~~:~:NIT:TE:CONTROL==~
ACCELfRA11ONSENSOR
• AClIVEDAMPEllCONTROLUNIT •........... COMBINA11ONswm:tt
· SH-AWD CDNIROI. UNIT
· CONTROLUNIT
~:
........... ~ UiMOB_KEYLESS
comOL UNIT
t·········· .~~=:~=U:NIT=~
•........... ~=:K
··
l...........~j':::'.::- I
11' • • • • • • • • • - . . •
I
r. . . . . .l =~k I
.....................I~~ .................... .1........... I =rit.~TE 1
• The single wire method is used between the units not requiring the communication to move at a fast speed .
• Using a single wire method reduces the number of the wires used on the body controller area network.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-95
Multip'lex Integrated Control System
Gateway Function
The gauge control module acts as a gateway to allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module
translates information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN.
CANH
i---+-'ocp-+--o-__. B-CAN
F-CAN
CANL
Network "Loss of Communication" Error Checking Function
The ECUs on the CAN circuit send messages to each other. If there are any malfunctions on the network, the odo/trip
display on the gauge control module can indicate the error messages by entering the gauge self-diagnostic function
(see page 22-315). There are three types of messagesas follows:
Error Code List

Error code Type of communication line(s) error
Error 1 F-CAN communication
Error 2 8-CAN communication
Error 12 F-CAN and B~CAN communication
Example: Error 1
,- ,
,-,-,- ,-,,- ,
- -
22,·96 BACK
~
I.!::..I
Self-diagnostic Function
By connecting the HDS to the data link connector (DLC), the HDS can retrieve the diagnostic results from the MICU via
a diagnostic BUS called the K-LiNE. The K-LiNE is different from the CAN line, and connected to the CAN related ECUs.
The MICU is a gateway between the HDS and B-CAN related ECUs, and sends B-CAN diagnostic results to the HDS.
When performing a function test with the HDS; the HDS sends an output signal through the K-LiNE to the MICU. The
MICU either relays the request to another ECU, or commands the function itself.
GAUGE CON11l0L MODULE
CANH CAN!. B-CAN
F-CAN 1500 kbpsl B-CAN 13333 kbpsl
PCM K-UNE
VSA MODULATOR-
CONlllOL UNIT
STEERING
ANGlE SENSOR
SH-AWD
CON11l0LUNIT
e-- ---
SRSUNIT
---,
r===~W
NAVIGAnON UNIT
TPMS
CON11l0LUNIT
YAWRATE-LATERALJ
LONGITUDINAl
ACCELERATION SENSOR
AcnvE DAMPER
CON11l0LUNIT
---~
ACURAllNK
CON11l0LUNIT
IXM RECEIVERI
- -- ~ AUDIO UNIT
(cont'd)
BACK 22-97
Wake-up and Sleep Function
The multiplex integrated control system has "wake-up" and "sleep" functions to decrease parasitic draw on the
battery when the ignition switch is OFF.
• In the sleep mode, the MICU stops functioning (communication and CPU control) when it is not necessary for the
system to operate.
• As soon as any operation is requested (for example, a door is unlocked), the related control unit in the sleep mode
immediately wakes up and begins to function.
• When the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the driver's door is opened, then closed, there is a delay about
40 seconds before the control unit goes from the wake-up mode to the sleep mode.
• The sleep mode will not function if any door is opened or ifthe ignition switch is turned ON (II).
• The draw is reduced from 200 mA to less than 35 mA when in the sleep mode.
NOTE: Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test (see page 22-119).
Fail-safe Function
To prevent improper operation, the MICU has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode, the output signal is fixed when
any part of the system malfunctions (for example, a faulty control unit or communication line).
Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that fixes the output signal when there is a CPU malfunction, and a
software fail-safe function that ignores the signal from a malfunctioning control unit, which allows the system to
operate normally.
Hardware Fail-safe Control
Fail-safe function
When a CPU problem or a abnormal power supply voltage is detected, the MICU moves to the hardware fail-safe
mode, and each system output load is set to the pre-programmed fail-safe value.
Software Fail-safe Control
When any of the data from the 8-CAN circuit cannot be received within a specified time, or an unusual combination of
the data is recognized, the MICU moves to the software fail-safe mode. The data that cannot be received is forced to a
pre-programmed value.
22-98 BACK
r:-:'I
~
Power Supply Voltage Monitoring Function

The MICU monitors the power supply voltage (back-up voltage). If the voltage goes below 10 V, the MICU sends a MICU message and will not
store DTCs.
In ut o ut
Entry Lights Control System (Ceiling Lights, Ignition Key Light)

The MICU controls the ceiling light and ignition key light ON/OFF based upon the input signals from each switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Interior lights
Ignition key switch Ignition key light
Driver's door switch
Front passenger's door switch
left rear door switch
Riaht rear door switch
B-CAN Driver's door lock knob switch (lOCK)
Keyless lOCK/UNLOCK signal
Tailaate latch switch
Back-up Lights
The MICU controls the back-up lights based upon the ignition switch (lG1) and the transmission range switch (R) signals.
o ut
Back-up lights
R)
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher

The MICU controls the turn signal/hazard flasher lights based upon the input signals from the turn signal switch and the hazard warning switch.
Input Outout
MICU Hazard warning switch Turn signal lights (left)
Turn sianalliahts (riaht)
B-CAN Turn signal switch (left)
Turn sianal switch (riaht)
Collision Detection Signal (CDS)

The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the IG1 and the SRS signals.
Input Outout
MICU IG1 power supply Door lock actuators (lOCK/UNLOCK)
Tailaate release actuator (UNLOCK)
B-CAN Front impact sensor
Side impact sensor (first)
Side impact sensor (second)
SRS unit rollover signal
Automatic Lighting System

The MICU controls the automatic lighting system based upon the IG1, IG2, automatic lighting sensor signals, and B-CAN signals.
Input Outout
MICU Ignition switch (lG1) Headlight back-up signal
Ignition switch (lG2)
Automatic lighting sensor signal
B-CAN Headlight switch (AUTO) AUTOlT messages
Vehicle speed pulse signal
Enaine soeed sianal
(confd)
BACK 22-99
Headlight Washer Operation

The MICU controls the headlight washer system based upon the headlight switch and washer switch signals.
In ut Out ut
Windshield washer switch
es
Key Interlock
The MICU controls the key interlock solenoid based upon the ignition switch (ACC), the transmission range switch, and the park-pin switch
signals.
Input Output
MICU Ignition switch (ACC) Key interlock solenoid
Transmission range switch (P)
Park-Din switch
Power Door Locks (Unlock all doors and tailgate at the same time)
The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the input signals of each switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Door lock actuators (LOCK)
Ignition key switch Door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Driver's door switch Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
Left rear door switch
Rioht rear door switch
B-CAN Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Tailgate latch switch
Power Door Locks (Unlock only the driver's door first)

Input Outout
Driver's door switch Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door switch Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
Rioht rear door switch
B-CAN Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch(LOCK/UNLOCK)
Tailoate latch switch
Door Lock Response Operation

The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the B-CAN signals.
Input Output
B-CAN Door lock signal Door lock actuators (LOCK)
Door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
22-100 BACK
r--:'I
~
Keyless Entry System (Unlock all doors and tailgate at the same time)
The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the input signals of each switch and the B-CAN signals.
Input Output
Driver's door switch Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
RiQht rear door switch
B-CAN Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Relock message
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Keyless LOCK/UNLOCK signal
Keyless Entry System (Unlock only the driver's door first)

The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the input signals of each switch and the B-CAN signals.
Input Output
Driver's door switch Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door switch Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
RiQht rear door switch
B-CAN Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) Relock message
Front passenger's door lock switch(LOCK/UNLOCK)
Keyless LOCK/UNLOCK signal
TailQate latch switch
Answer Back Response Operation

The MICU controls the turn signal lights based upon the B-CAN signals.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Turn signal lights (left)
Turn signal lights (rightl
B-CAN Answer back signal (buzzer)
Answer back signal (hazard)
Engine soeed sianal
(cont'd)
BACK 22-101
Auto Power Door Locks (LOCK operation)

Input Output
Ignition key switch
Transmission range switch (P position)
Right rear door switch
B-CAN Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch(UNLOCK)
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Engine speed signal
Auto Power Door Locks (UNLOCK operation)

InDut Output
MICU IG1 power supply Door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Transmission range switch (P position) Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Ignition key switch Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch(UNLOCK)
Tailgate latch switch
Tailgate Outer Handle Switch Operation (Unlock all doors and tailgate at the same time)
The MICU controls the tailgate release actuator based upon the tailgate outer handle switch and the B-CAN signals.
Input OutDut
MICU Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
B-CAN Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Door lock signal
Tailgate outer handle switch
Tailgate Outer Handle Switch Operation (Unlock only the driver's door first)
The MICU controls the tailgate release actuator based upon the tailgate outer handle switch and the B-CAN signals.
Input Output
MICU Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
B-CAN Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Tailgate outer handle switch
22-102 BACK
r--:'I
t=!.I
Security Alarm System

The MICU controls the lighting system and horn based upon the input signals of each switch and the B-CAN signals.
InDut OutDut
MICU IG1 power supply Inclining sensor
Ignition key switch
Audio switch
Driver'S door switch
B-CAN Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK) MICU (SET 1) message
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) MICU (SET 2) message
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) ALARM (ACTION) message
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) ALARM (HORN) message
Keyless LOCK/UNLOCK signal ALARM (H/L LOW) message
Door lock signal ALARM (SMALL LT) message
Relay control module (Hood switch) ALARM (CYCLE) message
Tailgate latch switch ANSWER BACK (SMALL LT) message
ANSWER BACK (BUZZER) message
Prevention of Key Locked Inside Vehicle

InDut OutDut
MICU Ignition key switch Door lock actuators (LOCK)
Driver's door switch Door lock actuators (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Tailgate release actuator (UNLOCK)
(cont'd)
BACK 22-103
Multip,lex Integrated Control System
HOS Inputs and Commands

Certain inputs happen so quickly that the HDS can not update fast enough. Hold the switch that is being tested while monitoring the Data List.
This should give the HDS time to update the signal on the Data List.
Because the HDS software is updated to support the release for newer vehicles it is not uncommon to see system function tests that are not
supported.
Make sure that the most current software is loaded.
Input:
System Menu Data List Data List Indication

Gauge Cruise Control Main Switch (ACC Switch) ON/OFF
Cruise Control Set Switch ON/OFF
Cruise Control Resume Switch ON/OFF
Washer Fluid Level Switch ON/OFF
VSA/TCS Off Switch ON/OFF
Parking Brake Switch , ON/OFF
Illumination Plus Switch ON/OFF
Illumination Minus Switch ON/OFF
Select/Reset Switch ON/OFF
INFO Previous Switch ON/OFF
INFO Next Switch ON/OFF
ACC Distance Switch ON/OFF
CMBS Cancel Switch ON/OFF
Fuel Sendina Unit Inout 1 dea
Fuel Sendina Unit Inout 2 V
VSA/TCS Active Indicator ON/OFF
VSA/TCS Indicator (Warning) ON/OFF
ABS Indicator ON/OFF
EBD Indicator (Electronic Brake Distribution) ON/OFF
Cruise Control Main Switch Indicator ON/OFF
MIL Indicator ON/OFF
Washer Fluid Level Indicator (Canada) ON/OFF
DRL Indicator ON/OFF
CMBS Indicator ON/OFF
ACC Indicator ON/OFF
Low Oil Pressure Indicator" ON/OFF
Chargina Svstem Indicator ON/OFF
Cruise Main Switch ON Indicator ON/OFF
Maintenance Minder Indicator ON/OFF
High Beam Indicator ON/OFF
Parkina Liaht ON Indicator ON/OFF
Low Fuel Warnina Indicator ON/OFF
Security Indicator ON/OFF
Foa Liaht Indicator ON/OFF
Master Warnina Indicator ON/OFF
Seatbelt Indicator ON/OFF
Low Tire Pressure Indicator ON/OFF
TPMS Indicator ON/OFF
Power Tailgate Indicator ON/OFF
SH-AWD Indicator ON/OFF
Door Open Indicator ON/OFF
Differential Oil Temp Indicator ON/OFF
Maintenance Minder Chanae Oil Indicator ON/OFF
Fuel Fill CaD Caution ON/OFF
A/T Indicator ON/OFF
SRS Indicator ON/OFF
Side Airbaa Cutoff Indicator ON/OFF
CMBS Radar Become Dirtv ON/OFF
Outside Temperarure Indicator ON/OFF
Radiator Fan Indicator ON/OFF
Starter Relay Indicator ON/OFF
NT Gear Position Switch (R) ON/OFF
A/T Gear Position Switch (P) ON/OFF
22-'·04 BACK
~
~

Input:
SvstemMenu Data List Data List Indication

Lighting Headlight Switch (OFF) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (PARKING) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (AUTO) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (High Beam) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (PASSING) OFF/ON
Turn Sianal Switch (LEFT) OFF/ON
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHn OFF/ON
Fog Light Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Ignition Kev Cvlinder Light Command OFF/ON
Interior Light Command OFF/ON
Left Turn Signal Command OFF/ON
Right Turn Signal Command OFF/ON
Autolight Small Command OFF/ON
Autolight Headlight Command OFF/ON
Autolight Warning Command V
Autolight Headliaht Back~~line Command OFF ON
Headlight Switch IBACK-UP) OFF ON
Ignition Switch IIG1) OFF ON
Headlight Command OFF ON
Headlight High Beam Command OFF ON
Parkina Light Command OFF/ON
Fog Light Command OFF/ON
DRLCommand OFF/ON
Interior Small Light Command OFF/ON
Inner Taillight Command OFF/ON
Rear Foa Liaht Command OFF/ON
Doors Driver's Door Lock Switch Illumination Command OFF/ON
Driver's Door Courtesv Light Command OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Courtesv Light Command OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Lock Switch Illumination OFF/ON
Command
Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Driver'S Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Passenger's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Door LOCK Command OFF/ON
Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Driver's Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Tailaate Switch OFF/ON.·
Tailaate Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Fuel Fill Door Command OFF/ON
Driver's Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Front Passenaer's Door Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Front Passenaer's Door Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Left Rear Door Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Right Rear Door Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
(cont'd)
BACK 22-105
Multiplex Integrated C,ontrol System

Input:
8vstemMenu ['ata List Data List Indication

Keyless Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Front PassenQer's Door Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Trunk Lid Release Command OFF/ON
lanition Switch (lG1) OFF/ON
Tailaate Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Kevless Buzzer Command OFF/ON
Driver's Kev Cvlinder Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Kev Cvlinder Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob ~,witch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Front Passenaer's Door SVI/itch (LOCK) OF.F/ON
Front Passenger's DoorSwitch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Left Rear Door Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Right Rear Door Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Power windows Power Window Main Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Driver's AUTO Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Ddver's UP Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Driver's DOWN Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Front Passenaer's UP Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Front Passenger's DOWN Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Loft Rear UP Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Loft Rear DOWN Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Right Rear UP Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Right Rear DOWN Switch OFF/ON
Power Window Master Passenger's AUTO Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Window Switch (UP) OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Window Switch (DOWN) OFF/ON
Front Passenaer's Window Switch (AUTO) OFF/ON
Driver's Window Motor A-ohase Pulse Sianal NONE/DETECT
Driver's Window MotorB-ohase Pulse Sianal NONE/DETECT
Front Passenger's Window Motor A-ohase Pulse SiQnal NONE/DETECT
Front Passenger's Window Motor B-ohase Pulse Signal NONE/DETECT
Driver's Window Motor Command OFF/UP/DOWN
Front Passenger's Window Motor Command OFF/UP/DOWN
22-106 BACK
r--:'I
l!:..I

Input:
SvstemMenu Data List Data List Indication

Power Seat/Power Power Mirror UP Switch OFF/ON
Mirror Power Mirror MOVE LEFT Switch OFF/ON
Power Mirror DOWN Switch OFF/ON
Power Mirror MOVE RIGHT Switch OFF/ON
Power Mirror LEFT Switch OFF/ON
Power Mirror RIGHT Switch OFF/ON
Slide Switch Backward OFF/ON
Slide Switch Forward OFF/ON
Recline Switch Backward OFF/ON
Recline Switch Forward OFF/ON
Front Up-Down Switch Down OFF/ON
Front Up-Down Switch Up OFF/ON
Rear Up-Down Switch Down OFF/ON
Rear Up-Down Switch Up OFF/ON
Ignition Switch for Power Seat Control OFF/ON
AfT Gear Position Switch (P) OFF/ON
Seat MEMO Switch OFF/ON
Driver 1 Position Switch OFF/ON
Driver 2 Position Switch OFF/ON
Headrest Switch OFF/ON
Column Tilt UP Switch OFF/ON
Column Tilt DOWN Switch OFF/ON
Column Telescopic Pull Switch OFF/ON
Column TelescoDic Push Switch OFF/ON
Column Auto Switch OFF/ON
lenition Switch (ETS) OFF/ON
Slide Sensor OFF/ON
Front UP-DOWN Sensor OFF/ON
Recline Sensor OFF/ON
Rear UP-DOWN Sensor OFF/ON
Column Tilt Sensor OFF/ON
Column Telescopic Sensor OFF/ON
Slide Motor Command OFF/FWD/RWD
Recline Motor Command OFF/FWD/RWD
Front Heieht Motor Command OFF/UP/DOWN
Rear Heieht Motor Command OFF/UP/DOWN
Power Seat Buzzer Command OFF/ON
Headrest Motor OFF/ON
Column Tilt Motor OFF/UP/DOWN
Column Telescopic Motor OFF/UP/DOWN
DPMS MEM Switch OFF/ON
DPMS POS1 Switch OFF/ON
DPMS POS2 Switch OFF/ON
Left Power Mirror Horizontal Sensor NORMAL/ABNORMAL
Left Power Mirror Vertical Sensor NORMAL/ABNORMAL
Rieht Power Mirror Horizontal Sensor NORMAL/ABNORMAL
Rieht Power Mirror Vertical Sensor NORMAL/ABNORMAL
Left Power Mirror UP-DOWN Motor Command OFF/UP/DOWN
Left Power Mirror LEFT-RIGHT Motor Command OFF/LEFT/RIGHT
Right Power Mirror UP-DOWN Motor Command OFF/UP/DOWN
Right Power Mirror LEFT-RIGHT Motor Command OFF/LEFT/RIGHT
Memory Switch Position 1 Indicator Command OFF/ON
Memory Switch Position 2 Indicator Command OFF/ON
Memory Switch Illumination Command OFF/ON
(cont'd)
BACK 22-107

Input:
System Menu " " Ilata List Data List Indication

Wipers Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) OFF/ON
Windshield WiDer Switch (MIST) OFF/ON
Rear WiDer Switch OFF/ON
Windshild Washer Switch OFF/ON
Rear Washer Switch OFF/ON
Intermittent WiDer Dwell Timer 1-255
Brake Pedal Position Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor PARK Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (BACK-UP) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor HI Command OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor LO Command OFF/ON
Windshield Washer Motor Command OFF/ON
Rear Window Washer Motor Command OFF/ON
Rear Window Wiper Switch OFF/ON
Rear Window WiDer Command OFF/ON
Security lenition Kev Cvlinder Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Radio Switch OFF/ON
Trunk Lid Release Command, OFF/ON
Hood Switch OFELON
lenition Switch (IG1) OFF/ON
Headlight Command OFF/ON
Headlight High Beam Command OFF/ON
Parking Light Command OFF/ON
Horn Command OFF/ON
Taileate Switch OFF/ON
Taileate Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Security Hazard Sie'nal Command OFF/ON
Driver's Kev Cvlinder Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Kev Cvlinder Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
22-108 BACK
~
I.!::.I

Input:.
SvstemMenu Data Ust Data Ust Indication

Power Tailgate Power Tailgate Switch OFF/ON
Power Tailaate Outer Handle Switch OFF/ON
Power Tailaate Inner Switch OFF/ON
AfT Shift Position Switch (P) OFF/ON
Latch Gear Position Switch (Neutral) OFF/ON
Latch Gear Position Switch (Release) OFF/ON
Full Latch Switch OFF/ON
Ratchet Switch OFF/ON
Half Latch Switch OFF/ON
Power Tailgate Drive Motor Pulse A NONE/DETECT
Power Tailgate Drive Motor Pulse B NONE/DETECT
Right Power Tailgate Upper Pinch Sensor NONE/DETECT
Left Power Tailgate Upper Pinch Sensor NONE/DETECT
Power Tailgate Motor Command OFF/OPEN/CLOSE
Power Tailaate Clutch Command OFF/ON
Closer Motor Command OFF/RELEASE/CLOSE
Power Tailgate Buzzer OFF/ON
(cont'd)
BACK 22-109

Output:
SvstemMenu Data List Data List Indication Operation Time

Gauge Speedometer displays value inputted Speedometer
Tachometer displays value inputted Tachometer
Fuel aauae displavs value inputted Fuel Level Gauge
Temperature aauae displavs value inputted Engine Temperature Ga~e
Turns VSA activation indicator on/off VSAf[CS Activation Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns VSA indicator on/off VSAfTCS Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns ABS indicator on/off ABS Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns EBD indicator on/off EBD Indicator (Electronic Brake Displav) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns cruise indicator on/off Cruise Activation Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns MIL on/off MIL Status Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns DRL indicator on/off Daytime Runnina Liaht indicator (Canada) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns low oil pressure indicator on/off Enaine Oil Pressure Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns charging system indicator on/off Charging System Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns cruise main indicator on/off Cruise Control Main Switch Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns maintenance reauired indicator on/off Maintenance Required Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns hiah beam indicator on/off Hiah Beam Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns liaht-on indicator on/off Liaht On Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns low fuel indicator on/off Low Fuel Level Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns security indicator on/off Security Indicator Illuminates for 10 sec.
Display inputted value Trip Meter
Turns AfT P position indicator on/off AfT Gear Position Indicator (P) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns AfT R position indicator on/off AfT Gear Position Indicator (R) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns AfT N position indicator on/off AfT Gear Position Indicator (N) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns AfT D position indicator on/off AfT Gear Position Indicator (D) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns AfT D3 position indicator on/off AfT Gear Position Indicator (D3) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Turns AfT 2 position indicator on/off AfT Gear Position Indicator (2) Illuminates for 10 sec.
Controls gauge illumination brightness to Illumination Brightness Control
inputted value
Turns key-in beeper on/off Key Alarm Chime Sounds alarm for
10 sec.
Turns light-on beeper on/off Headlight Alarm Chime Sounds alarm for
10 sec.
Turns seat belt reminder beeper on/off Seat belt Reminder Chime Sounds alarm for
10 sec.
Lighting Turns ignition key cylinder light on/off lanition Key Cylinder Liaht Command Illuminates for 30 sec.
Turns interior light on/off Interior Light Command Illuminates for 30 sec.
Turns left turn sianallights on/off Left Turn Signal Command Blinks for 5 sec.
Turns riahtturn sianalliahts on/off RiahtTurn Sianal Command Blinks for 5 sec.
Turns headliaht on/off Headliaht Command Operates for 15 sec.
Turns headliaht hiah beam on/off Headliaht Hiah Beam Command Operates for 15 sec.
Turns parkina liahts on/off Parkina Liaht Command Operates for 15 sec.
Turns front foa liahts on/off Front Foa Liaht Operates for 15 sec.
Turns daytime runnina liahts on/off Daytime Runnina Liaht Sianal (Canada) Operates for 15 sec.
Turns automatic headliahts on/off Automatic Liahtina Headliaht Operates for 15 sec.
Turns cargo area liahts on/off Carao Area Liaht Illuminates for 30 sec.
22-110 BACK
r:-:'I
~
Output:
System Menu Data List Data List Indication Operation Time

Power window Runs driver's window uo Driver's Window Uo Drives for 3 sec.
Runs driver's window down Driver's Window Down Drives for 3 sec.
Runs front oassenger's window uo Front Passenger's Window Uo Drives for 3 sec.
Runs front oassenger's window down Front Passenger's Window Down Drives for 3 sec.
Runs left rear window uo Left RearWindow Uo Drives for 3 sec.
Runs left rear window down Left Rear Window Down Drives for 3 sec.
Runs right rear window up Right Rear Window Up Drives for 3 sec.
Runs right rear window down Right Rear Window Down Drives for 3 sec.
Turns Dower window reillY on/off Power Window Relav Drives for 3 sec.
Wiper Turns wiDer low soeed on/off Windshield WiDer Motor Low Command ODe rates for 5 sec.
Turns wiDer high soeed on/off Windshield WiDer Motor High Command Ooerates for 5 sec.
Turns windshield washer on/off Windshield Washer Command Ooerates for 5 sec.
Turns rear window washer on/off Rear Window Washer Motor Command Ooerates for 5 sec.
Turns rear window wiDer on/off Rear WiDer Motor ODe rates for 5 sec.
Security Turn horns on/off Horn Command Operates horn for
1 sec.
Power Seat Turns power seat indicator on/off Memory Seat Indicator 1 Illuminates for 3 sec.
Memory Seat Indicator 2 Illuminates for 3 sec.
Runs power seat motors Power Seat: Slide Motor-Full Forward --
Power Seat: Slide Motor-Full Backward --
Power Seat: Front UP-DOWN Motor-Full Uo --
Power Seat: Front UP-DOWN Motor-Full --
Down
Power Seat: Rear UP-DOWN Motor-Full Uo --
Power Seat: Front UP-DOWN Motor-Full --
Down
Power Seat: Recline Motor-Full Forward --
Power Seat: Recline Motor-Full Backward --
Power Seat: Memory Buzzer-5 seconds Drives for 5 sec.
Power Sliding Operates left power sliding door Power Slide Door Motor: Ooen (2 sec.) Drives for 2 sec.
Door Power Slide Door Motor: Close (2 sec.) Drives for 2 sec.
Magnet Clutch (2 sec.) Drives for 2 sec.
Release Actuator (1.3 sec.) Drives for 1.3 sec.
Closer Motor --
Buzzer --
Operates right power sliding door Power Slide Door Motor: Open (2 sec.) Drives for 2 sec.
Power Slide Door Motor: Close (2 sec.) Drives for 2 sec.
Magnet Clutch (2 sec.) Drives for 2 sec.
Release Actuator (1.3 sec.) Drives for 1.3 sec.
Closer Motor --
Buzzer --
Door Outouts LOCK signal 1 time to all doors Lock All Doors O;Ssec.
Outouts LOCK signal 1 time to all doors Unlock All O.Ssec.
OutPuts UNLOCK signal 1 time to driver's door Unlock Driver's Side Door O.Ssec.
Runs left sliding door lock actuator Left Sliding Door Lock Lock signal 1 time
Left Sliding Door Unlock Unlock signal 1 time
Power Tailgate Runs power tailgate motor Full Open Position --
Full Close Position --
Operates power tailgate electromagnetic clutch Operates On For 1 sec. Operates for 1 sec.
Runs power tailgate release actuator Open --
Close --
AlC Turn rear window defogger relay on/off Rear Defogger Operates a relay for
SO sec.
BACK 22-111
Troubleshooting - 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshooting PCM 2. Connect the HDS, then turn the ignition switch ON
(see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors (II).
first, then perform this diagnosis if the symptom is
related to the 8-CAN system.
Perform this diagnosis first if the symptom is related to

the 8-CAN system.
NOTE: Always turn the ignition switch withih 3 seconds

when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting procedures
in this section.
1. Check the symptom against this list of 8-CAN

related systems:
• Gauge control module

• Exterior lights
• Turn signals 3. From the 80DY ELECTRICAL system select menu,
• Entry light control select UNIT INFORMATION, and then select
• Interior lights CONNECTED UNIT listed to see if it is
• Safety indicators communicating with the HDS.
• Rear window defogger
• HandsFreeLink • MICU
• Horns (security and panic) • Gauge control module
• Chimes (key-in, seat belt, lightscon and parking • Combination switch control unit
brake) • Relay control module
• Power windows • Power seat control unit
~ Power window/moonroof timer • HandsFreeLink control unit
• Wiper/washer • Driver's MPCS unit
• Security • Rear MICU
• Keyless entry • AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver)
• Power door locks • Power tailgate control unit
• Climate control • Climate control unit
• Key interlock • Immobilizer-keyless control unit
• Dash light b(ightness
• Driving position memory NOTE:
• Power tailgate • If the unit is communicating with the HDS,
• XM radio DETECT will be displayed.
• Immobilizer • If the unit is notcommunicating, "Not Available"
will be displayed.
Is the symptom related to the 8-CAN system?
Are al/ control units communicating with the HOS?
YES-Go to step 2.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to the system troubleshooting for the
system with the symptom .• NO-If any of the control unit are not
communicating, go to 8-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode 8 (see page 22-113). If all units are not
communicating or only the MICU is communicating,
go to DTC 81000 troubleshooting (see page 22-122).
•
22-112 BACK
~
~
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode B
4. Select the system that has the problem from BODY
ELECTRICAL system select menu, then select DTCs.
Perform this diagnosis if any ofthe control units are not
Are any DTCs indicated? communicating (Not Available is displayed in the HDS)
as found by the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
YES-Go to step 5. (see page 22-112).
NO-If the problem is related to one of the 1. Using the HDS,. select the system thathas the
following items, goto B-CAN System Diagnosis symptom from BODY ELECTRICAL.
Test Mode C (see page 22-114), if the system does
not stop or turn off. Go to Test Mode D (see page 2. Select DTCs, and then check for loss of
22-115) ifthe system does not run orturn on. communicationDTCs. Refer to loss of
communication DTC cross reference chart.
• Exterior lights
• Turn signals Are any loss of communication DTCs indicated?
• Entry light control
• Interior lights YES-Go to step 3.
• Horns (security and panic)
• Power windows NO-Replace the MICU .•
• Wiper/washer
• Power door locks 3. Perform the input test for the unit not
communicating with the HDS.
If the problem is related to one of the following
items, go to the troubleshooting for that individual NOTE: Troubleshoot Rear MICU loss of
system .• communication.DTCs before troubleshooting
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) the power
• Gauge control module tailgate control unit, and the power seat control
• Safety indicators unit DTC.
• Chimes (key-in, seat belt and lights-on)
• Rear window defogger (climate control) Unit not communicating ..
• Security MICU (see page 22-132)
• Keyless entry Gauge control module (see page 22-334)
• Climate control Relay control module (see page 22-136)
• Key interlock Driver's MPCS unit (see page 22-278)
• Dash light brightness Combination switch control unit (see page
• Audio system 22-300)
• Navigation Immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page
• Driving position memory 22-411 )
• HandsFreeLink Rear MICU (see page 22-139)
• Power tailgate Power seat control unit (see page 22-477)
• Immobilizer Power tailgate control unit (seepage 22-522)
Climate control unit troubleshooting (see page
5. Record all DTCs, and sort them by DTC type. 21-93)
6. Troubleshoot the DTC(s) in this order:
• Battery voltage DTCs.

• Internal error DTCs.
• Loss of communication DTCs. Begin
troubleshooting with the lowest number first
(Example: if DTC B1008 and B1011 are retrieved,
begin by troubleshooting B1008). Refer to loss of
communication DTC cross reference chart (see
page 22-83).
• Signal error DTCs.
BACK 22-113
Troubleshooting - 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C
Perform this diagnosis if a component that is controlled 5. Check the relay if applicable, then check for a short
by the 8-CAN system does not stop or turn off. in the wire between the relay and the component,
the relay and control unit, or the component and
NOTE: control unit.
• If the component does not turn ON, go to 8-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode D (see page 22-115). Are the relay and the wire harness OK?
• See the 8-CAN system unit input/output index for a
list of input and output devices and the control units YES-Replace the control unit that controls the
that monitor the input and controls the output devices component that will not turn OFF.•
(see page 22-94).
• Always turn the ignition switch within 3 seconds NO-Replace the relay or repair the wire
when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting harness.•
procedures in this section.
6. Check the switch, then check for a short in the wire
1. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE menu between the switch and the control unit that
from the HDS. monitors the switch.
Are any OTCs indicated? Is the switch and wire harness OK?
YES-Go to 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A YES-Replace the control unit that monitors the
(see page 22-112) .• switch .•
NO-Go to step 2. NO-Replace the switch or repair the wire

harness.•
2. Turn OFF the switch that controls the
malfunctioning component.
3. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE menu, and

check the input of the switch that controls the
component.
Does the HOS indicate the switch is OFF?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 6.
4. In DATA LIST, check the output signal ofthe

Is the output signal OFF?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the control unit that controls the

device that will not turn OFF .•
22-114 BACK
~
l=:.I
Troubleshooting - 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 0
Perform this diagnosis if a component that is controlled 6. Perform the function test for the malfunctioning
by the B-CAN system does not run or come on. component.
NOTE: Does the output device pass the function test?

• If the component does not turn off or stop, go to B-
CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C (see page YES-Go to step 7.
22-114).
• See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a NO-Replace the component.•
list of input and output devices and the control units
that monitor the input and controls the output devices 7. With the malfunctioning output device connected,
(see page 22-94). connect a voltmeter between the malfunctioning
• Always turn the ignition switch within 3 seconds output device and body ground on the wire that the
when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting control unit uses to control the output device circuit.
procedures in this section.
8. Select MISC. TEST from the TEST MODE menu,
1. Check the fuse of the malfunctioning output device. and do the forced operation test of the
Is the fuse OK?
Is there a change in voltage (12 V to 0 V or
YES-Go to step 2. o V to 12 V)?
NO-Replace the fuse and recheck .• YES-Replace the component.•
2. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE menu NO-Replace the control unit that controls the
from the HDS. malfunctioning component.•
Are any OTCs indicated? 9. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE menu, and
make sure the switch signal input for the
YES-Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A malfunctioning system indicates a change when
(see page 22-112) .• operated.
NO-Go to step 3. Does the switch input indicated ON when the

switch is ON?
3. Turn ON the switch that controls the
malfunctioning component. YES-Replace the control unit that controls the
malfunctioning component.•
4. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE menu, and
check output signal for the malfunctioning NO-Go to step 10.
component.
10. Check the switch and its ground (if applicable), then
Is there an output signal? check for an open or a short in the wire between
the switch and the control unit that monitors it.
YES-Go to step 5.
Are the switch and the wire harness OK?
NO-Go to step 9.
YES-Replace the control unit that monitors the
5. Check the relay and ground, then check for an open switch .•
or a short in the circuit for the malfunctioning
component. NO-Replace the switch or repair the wire
harness .•
Are the relay and circuit OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the relay or repair the wire circuit..
BACK 22-115
Troubleshooting - 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2

(without the HDS)
6. Check for B-CAN DTCs indicated by the gauge
Special Tools Required control module LCD display while still in Test Mode
MPCS (MCIC) service connector 07WAZ-001010A 1. Push the odometer select/reset button to display
the next code. After you get to the last code, the
Test Mode 1 display shows END. If no DTCs are stored, the
display will read NO.
Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM
(see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors Are any DTCs indicated?
first, then perform this diagnosis ifthe HDS is not
available. YES-Go to Step 7.
1. Check the No.7 (10 A) and No. 21 (7.5 A) fuses in NO-Go to Step 10.
the under-dash fuse/relay box.
7. Record all DTCs and sort them.
Are the fuses OK?
8. Troubleshoot the DTCs in this order:
YES-Go to step 2.
• Battery voltage DTCs
NO-Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse .• • Internal error DTCs
• Loss of communication DTCs (begin with the
2. Remove the left kick panel (see page 20-76). lowest number first; for example, if B1008 and
B1011 are retrieved, troubleshoot B1008 first).
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and move the Refer to less of communication DTC cross
ceiling light switch to the middle (door) position. reference chart (see page 22-83).
• Signal error DTCs
4. Connect the MPCS service connector (A) to the
MCIC socket (B) in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 9. Clear the DTCs by pressing and holding the select/
reset button for about 10 seconds. You will hear a
beep to confirm the codes have been cleared.
B Operate the devices that failed, and recheck for
codes.
Test Mode 2
10. Remove the MPCS service connector from the

under-dash fuse/relay box socket for 5-10 seconds,
then re-insert it to enter Mode 2. When the system
enters Mode 2, the ceiling light will flash two times
quickly and then go off.
A
(07WAZ-001 01 OA) NOTE: If the MPCS connector is disconnected for
too short or too long of a time, or the ignition
5. Wait 5 seconds, and watch the ceiling lights. When switch is turned OFF, the system will return to Test
the ceiling lights flash quickly once, and then go off, Mode 1.
the system is in Test Mode 1.
11. The following tables list the circuits that can be
checked in Test Mode 2. Operate the switch that is
most closely related to the problem. If the circuit is
OK, the ceiling lights will blink once. If the circuit is
faulty, there will be no indication.
22-116 BACK
~
I.!::..I
MICU DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT

Item Item
Driver's door switch (OPEN) Power window master switch
Front passenger's door switch (OPEN) (Driver's window UP)
Left rear door switch (OPEN) Power window master switch
Right rear door switch (OPEN) (Driver's window DOWN)
Audio security ground (when disconnected) Power window master switch
Mirror select switch (LEFT, CENTER, RIGHT) (Driver's window AUTO UP)
Mirror switch (LEFT, RIGHT, UP, DOWN) Power window master switch
* The front passenger's and door lock knob (Driver's window AUTO DOWN)
switches must be in the locked position when Power window master switch
beginning the test. (Front passenger's window UP)
Power window master switch
RELAY CONTROL MODULE (Front passenger's window DOWN)
Item Power window master switch
Windshield wiper switch (AUTO STOP/PARK) (Front passenger's window AUTO UP)
Hood switch (OPEN) Power window master switch
(Front passenger's window AUTO DOWN)
COMBINATION SWITCH CONTROL UNIT Power window master switch
Item (Left rear window UP)
Turn signal switch (LEFT) Power window master switch
Turn signal switch (RIGHT) (Left rear window DOWN)
Combination light switch (ON; each position) Power window master switch
Dimmer switch (ON) (Right rear window UP)
Passing switch (ON) Power window master switch
Windshield wiper switch (ON) (Right rear window DOWN)
Intermittent wiper dwell timer Driver's door key cylinder switch· (LOCK)
Windshield washer switch (ON) Driver's door key cylinder switch· (UNLOCK)
Fog light switch (ON) Driver's door lock switch (LOCK)
Rear window wiper switch (ON) Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK)
Rear window washer switch (ON) Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
REARMICU Left rear door lock knob switch··
Item (UNLOCK)
Tailgate latch switch (ON) Driving position memory switches
Tailgate outer handle switch (Without power (1,2, memo)
tailgate) (ON) Left rear power window switch (UP)
Left rear power window switch (DOWN)
Fuel fill door opener switch (ON)
* A second key IS necessary to check the key
cylinder inputs.
Be sure to rotate the key cylinder switch two
times to each position (lock and lock, unlock
and unlock) to ensure the door lock knob
switch is in the appropriate position.
* * The left rear door lock knob switches must be
in the locked position when beginning the test.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-117
Troubleshooting - 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2

(without the HDS) (cont'd)
Item
Parking brake switch (ON; parking brake
applied)
Cruise control main SET/RESUME/CANCEL
switch (ON; switchpressed)
Transmission range switch (P, R, N, D)
Washer fluid level switch (fluid removed)
(Canada)
Brake fluid level switch (fluid removed)
Illumination control switches (+, -)
MID switches (Select/Reset, <INFO, INFO»
POWER SEAT CONTROL UNIT

Item
Power seat slide switch (FORWARD,
BACKWARD)
Power seat front up-down switch (UP, DOWN)
Power seat rear up-down switch (UP, DOWN)
Power seat recline switch (FORWARD,
RECLINE)
Power tilt/telescopic steering switch (UP,
DOWN, PUSH, PULL)

Item
Front passenger's door lock knob
switch' (UNLOCK)
Right rear door lock knob switch'
(UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch
(LOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch
(UNLOCK)
Front passenger's power window switch
(UP, DOWN, AUTO)
Right rear power window switch
(UP, DOWN)
* The front passenger's and right rear door lock
knob switches must be in the locked position
when beginning the test.
Do the map lights indicate proper switch

operation?
YES-Go to function and input test for the system

related to the failure .•
NO-Repair the open, short, or replace the faulty

switch .•
22-118 BACK
r--:'I
~
Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test
1. Shift to the sleep mode:

Turn the ignition switch OFF, and remove the key, then open and close the driver's door. If the MICU receives no
signals from the inputs listed below, it will go into sleep mode in less than 40 seconds.
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)

Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Tailgate latch switch (Tailgate closed)
Hazard warning switch (OFF)
2. Confirm the sleep mode:

Measure the voltage on the 8-CAN communication line (PNK wires); there should be battery voltage in the sleep
mode. Check the parasitic draw at the battery while shifting into the sleep mode; amperage should change from
about 200 mA to less than 35 mA.
3. Shift to the wake up mode:

When the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the MICU, gauge control module, immobilizer-keyless control unit-
receiver, and PCM wake up at the same time without "talking" to each other through the communication lines.
When any switch in the multiplex integrated control system is turned on, it wakes Lip its related control unit which,
in turn, wakes up the other units. After confirming the sleep mode, look in the following table for the switch most
related to the problem. Operate that switch and see if its control unit wakes up.
NOTE: If any control unit is faulty and will not wake up, several circuits in the system will malfunction at the same
time. In the table below, the control unit is followed by a list of the switches and input signals that can wake it up.
Door switches (door open)

Driver's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Left rear door lock knob switch
Right rear door lock knob switch
Tailgate latch switch (Tailgate open)
Hood switch (hood open)
Hazard warning switch (ON)
Combination light switch (Parking, Headlight, Dimmer, Passing ON)
Ignition kElyswitch (key inserted)
BACK 22-119
Circuit Diagram
MAIN UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX IGNITION SWITCH UNDER-DASH FUSE/RElAY BOX

BAmRY
+
No.l(BAT) 1120 AI NoJ(lGI~OAI
~ I-WHT
Q PNK
A6 No2117HI
-u
1 No.4 140 AI
IGI
lGi HOT in ON 1111 and

START (111)
WHT
B4
012
No.7 110 AI
-u
I
06
, ........................... 011
................ ...... . .... ~ .... .............................•...............
· ·:N2B ·
·
: X27 )(35 X34 • N22
LTGRN ··
IMMOBWZER-
KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
4
+
B-CAN •••• LTGRN •••
•
t. :
·
~1T ~~
· ·
.
VEL LTGAN
..
YEL LTGRN CLIMATE
I
B-CAN 4•••• LTGRN •••
.: .,
I
CONTROL UNIT
·
.
~~ ~ ~
I AUD)OUNIT B-CAN •• LTGRN •••
·1 I VEL ....·
: J I
YEL LTGRN
HANDSfREEUNK
CONTROL UNIT
19
~ •
. B-CANI •••• LTGRN •••••: ·· ··
06 07 El 8 7 ·
'4 AI A7 :A5
..·· ·
VBU
RELAV
IGI
CONTROL MODULE
B-CAN VBU IGI
COMBINATION SWITCH
CONTROL UNIT
B-CAN
I
B-CAN
TRANSCEWER
I
I
SG VBU IGI
POWERSUPPULV CIRCUIT/
CONTROUER AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER
GND
04 UNDER-HOOD 3 WIPER/WASHER
SWITCH I
r =~L l
FUSE/RELAV BOX
F-CAN
HH
BK BK GAUGE A2 : A12 :A6
CONTROL
MODULE ·· ·
· ·
BK WHT RED
V
• PCM
V
• SRSUNIT
• VSA MOOULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
• DATAUNK
CONNECTOR IDLC)
• STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
• VAWRATE-LATERAL/
LONGITUDINAL
ACCElARATION SENSOR
• ACTIVE DAMPEJI
CONTROL UNIT
• SH-AWDCONTROLUNIT
• ACURAUNK CONTROL UNIT
JXM RECEIVER)
• WMS CONTROL UNIT
:l..
G401 G601 G501
22-120 BACK
r--:'I
~
••••••••• : CAN One
UNDER-DASH RJSE/RElAY BOX
161
VBU
MICU
K-UNE j!!-
SG2 POI
.............. .....•.............. .....•..... B-CAN

M3 Ml
I I PG2 SGI
K5 J9 :.14
··
G3 Fl
.
:G1 I
MULTIPlEX
r E!l 119 Q4 P1
LT
CONTROL
INSPECTKlN
CQ/jNECTOR
K-UNE
DATAUNK
CONNECTOR
WIlT VEL LTGIIN WIlT VEL LTGRN BLK BLK BLK BRN
REAR
RJSE/RELAY
Al A25 AZ8 BOX B4 823 82
VBU B-CAN
•......•........•.....C32
.
161
VBU IG1 B-CAN
DRMR'S MPCS UNIT REARMICU
A5 B14 B18 B29 B14 C16
BLK IlK BLK BLK

.:A40
LTGRN
.:C1
LTGRN
.:85
LTGRN
B--CAN B-CAN B--CAN
ACURAUNK
POWER POWER CONTROL
SEAT TAILGATE UNIT
CONTROL CONTROL IXM .
UNIT UNIT RECEIVBII
G601 6601 G604 6601 6601 6601 G502
BACK 22-121
DTe Troubleshooting
DTC 81000: Communication Bus Line Error Is DTC 81000 indicated with each individual unit
disconnected?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Replace the control unit that was
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more. disconnected when 81000 did not reset (lfthe unit
is the rear MICU, go to Step 8.).
Is DTC 81000 indicated? 8. Disconnect the rear fuse/relay box connectors 8
YES-Go to step 5. (34P) and C (42P).
NO-Intermittent failure, the communication bus
line is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor 9. Check for continuity between each of the rear fuse/
connections, or worn/shorted wires. If the relay box connector terminals listed in the table
connections are good, check the battery condition and body ground.
(see page 22-76) and the charging system .•
Connected control Rear fuse/relay box
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. unit connector terminal
Are DTCs 81000,81005,81007,81011,81012,8 Power seat control 814
1013,81015 and 81032 al/ indicated? unit
YES-Go to step 6. Powertailgate C16
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/ control unit
relay box.• AcuraLink control C32
unit (XM receiver)
7. Disconnect the appropriate connector at each
control unit in the table one at a time. Clear the DTC, YES-Repair the short to ground in the wire
then recheck for DTCs after each unit is 'between the rear fuse/relay box and the affected
disconnected. control unit.•
Control unit Connector NO-Go to step 10.

Relay control module Under-hqod fuse/relay
box connector E (14P)
Gauge control Connector A (12P)
module
Immobilizer-keyless 7P connector
control unit
Combination switch 8P connector
control unit
Driver's MPCS unit Connector A (40P)
Climate control unit 40P connector .
Audio unit Connector C (24P)
HandsFreeLink 28P connector
control unit
Power seat control Connector A (40P)
unit
Power tailgate Connector C (14P)
control unit
AcuraLink control Connector 8 (16P)
unit (XM receiver)
Rear MICU· Rear fuse/relay box
connector 8 (34P)
* : Disconnect thiS one last
22-122 BACK
r--:'I
t.=:..I
10. Measure the voltage between each of the rear fuse/ 12. Check for continuity between the under-dash fuse/
relay box connector terminals listed in the table relay box connector N (45P) No. 22 terminal and
and body ground. body ground.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR N (45P)

Connected control Rear fuse/relay box
unit connector terminal
Power seat control 814
unit
Power tailgate C16
control unit
AcuraLink control C32
unit (XM receiver)
Is there less than 1 V?
YES-Replace the rear fuse/relay box.• =
NO-Repair short to power in the wire between the

rear fuse/ relay box and the affected control unit.• Is there continuity?
11. Disconnect each control unit connectors in the YES-Repair short to ground in the wire .•
table.
NO-Go to step 13.
Control unit Connector
Relay control module Under-hood fuse/relay 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
box connector E (1 4P)
Gauge control Connector A (12P) 14. Measure the voltage between the under-dash fuse/
module relay box connector N (45P) No. 22 terminal and
Immobilizer-keyless 7P connector body ground.
control unit
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR N (45P)
Combination switch 8P connector
control unit
Driver's MPCS unit Connector A (40P)
Climate control unit 40P connector
Audio unit Connector C (24P)
HandsFreeLink 28P connector
control unit
YES-Repair short to power in the wire .•
NO-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/

relay box.•
BACK 22-123
DTC 81001: MICU Internal (CPU) Error DTC 81005: MICU Lost Communication with
Relay Control Module (RM Message)
DTC 81002: MICU Internal (EEPROM) Error
NOTE: I{you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System
sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112).
Is OTC 81005 indicated?
Is OTC 81001 and/or 81002 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/
relay box.• NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this the MICU and the relay control module .•
time .•
Are OTCs 81158,81959,82162, and 82970 a/so

indicated with 81005?
YES-Do the relay control module inputtest

(see page 22-136) .•
NO-Do the MICU inputtest (see page 22"132) .•
22-124 BACK
DTC 81007: MICU Lost Communication with DTC 81011: MICU Lost Communication with
Combination Switch Control Unit (HLSW. Gauge Control Module (VSP/NE Message)
Message)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be .'
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System,
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test ModeA (see page 22-112).
/s orc 81011 indicated?
/s orc 81007 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO--Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor connections between
time. Check for loose or poor connections between the MICU and the gauge control module.• "
the MICU and the combination switch control unit.
• 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS .
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Are orcs 81060,81205,81357,81408,81805,

and/or 82160 a/so indicated with orc 81011?
Are orcs 81062,81155, and 81957 a/so
indicated with orc 8100l? YES-Do the gauge control module input test
(see page 22-334) .•
test (see page 22-300).• NO-Do the MICU input test (see page 22-132) .•
NO-Do the MICU inputtest (see page 22-132) .•
BACK 22-125
OTC ,81012: MICU Lost Communication with OTC 81013: MICU Lost Communication with
RearMICU (RJC:Message) Driver's MPCS Unit (ASLOCKSW Message)
NOTE: Ityou are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be OTC 81015: MICU Lost Communication with
sure to follow the instructions in ,8-CAN System Driver's MPCS Unit (DRLOCKSW Message)
1. Clear the DTCs with,the HDS. sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System
2; Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. "
YES-Go to step 5.
Is DTC 81013 and/or 81015 indicated?
, NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for loose or poor connections between YES-Go to step 5.
the MICU and the rear MICU .•
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. time. Check for loose or poor connections between
the MICU and the driver's MPCS unit.•
Is DTC 81955 indicated with DTC 81012?
YES-Do the rear MICU input test (see page 22-139).
• Are DTCs 81065,81082,81356,81358, and/or 8
1905 also indicated with 81013 and/or 81015?
NO-Do the MICU input test (see page 22-132) .•
YES-Do the driver's MPCS ,unit input test
(see page 22-278) .•
NO-Do the MICU inputtest (see page 22-132) .•
22-126 BACK
r--:'I
~
DTC 81032: MICU Lost Communication with DTC 81080: Ignition Key Switch Circuit
the SRS Unit (CDS Message), Malfunction
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112). - Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112).
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 4. Check for DTCswith the HDS.
/s DTC 81032 indicated? /s DTC 81080 indicated?
time. Check for loose or poor connections.• time. Check for loose or poor connections.•
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
/s DTC 81011 a/so indicated with DTC 81032? 6. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box
connector D (10P).
YES-Check for an open in the wire between the
MICU and the gauge control module. If the circuit is 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
bad, repair the open .•
8. Measure the voltage between the under-hood fuse!
NO-Do the gauge control module input test relay box connector D (10P) No.7 terminal and
(see page 22-334) •• body ground.
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR D (10P)
2
5 6
YES-Substitute a known-good under-hood fuse/

relay box and recheck.•
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-127
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 13. Check for continuity between the under-hood fuse/
relay box connector D (10P)No. 7 terminal and
10. Check for continuity between the under-hood fuse/ body ground.
relay box connector D (10P) No.7 terminal and
body ground. UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR D (10P)
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR D (10P) 2

5 6
2 3 4
5 6 9
=
=
YES-Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/

Is there continuity? relay box and recheck .•
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire. After NO-Repair an open in the wire .•
repairing, replace the No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.•
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box

connector D (17P).
12. Connectthe under-dash fuse/relay box connector D

(17P) No.6 terminal and body ground.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR D (17P)
JUMPER
WIRE
=
22-128 BACK
r:-:'I
~
DTC 81050: Communication Bus Line Error 5. Check for DTCs with theHDS.
DTC 81150: Communication Bus Line Error Under-dash fusel 8-CAN connected unit
relay box connector
DTC 81200: Communication Bus Line Error connector
Connector D (17P) Under-hood fuse/relay
DTC 81250: Communication Bus Line Error No. 11 terminal box connector E (14P)
No.1 terminal
DTC 81350: Communication Bus Line Error Connector N (45P) Gauge control module
No. 22 terminal Connector A (12P) No.5
DTC 81750: Communication Bus Line Error terminal
Connector N (45P) Combination switch
DTC 81800: Communication Bus Line Error No. 28 terminal control unit 8P connector
No.4 terminal
DTC 81900: Communication Bus Line Error Connector J (21 P) Driver's MPCS unit
No.4 terminal connector A (40P) No. 28
DTC 81950: Communication Bus Line Error terminal
Connector X (39P) Immobilizer-keyless
DTC 82150: Communication Bus Line Error No. 27 terminal control unit 7P connector
No.4 terminal
DTC 82200: Communication Bus Line Error Connector X (39P) Climate control unit 40P
No. 27 terminal connector No.4 terminal
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be Connector X (39P) Audio unit connector C
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System No. 27 terminal (24P) No. 23 terminal
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112). Connector X (39P) HandsFreeLink control
No. 27 terminal unit 28P connector No. 19
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. terminal
Connector G (6P) Power seat control unit
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II). No.1 terminal connector A (40P) No. 40
terminal
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more. Connector G (6P) Power tailgate control
No.1 terminal unit connector C (14P)
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. No.7 terminal
Connector G (6P) AcuraLink control unit
Are OTCs 81050,81150,81200,81250,81350,8 No.1 terminal (XM receiver) connector
1750,8180~8190~8195~82150,and/or82200 B (16P) No.5 terminal
indicated? Connector G (6P) Rear MICU (rear fuse/
No.1 terminal relay box connector B
YES-Go to step 5. (34P)
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is OTC 81000 also indicated?

MICU and B-CAN connected units in the table .• YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 .•

MICU and B-CAN connected units in the table .•
BACK 22-129
DTC 82152: Driver's MPCS Unit Internal DTC 82155: Driver's MPCS Unit Lost
(EEPROM) Error Communication with MICU (MICU Message)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be DTC 82156: Driver's MPCS Unit Lost
sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System Communication with MICU(MIRRORSW
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112). Message)
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. DTC 82161: Driver's MPCS Unit Lost
Communication with MICU (DOORSW
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON ("). Message)
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more. NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112).
Is OTC 82152 indicated? 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Replace the driver's MPCS unit.• 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (").
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 3. Wait for 6 seconds or more.

time.•
Are OTCs 82155,82156, or 82161 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

the driver's MPCS unit and the MICU .•
Are OTCs 81055,81056,81157,81159,81255,8

1955,82156, and/or 82161also indicated?
YES-Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/

relay box (see page 22-72) .•
NO-Do the driver's MPCS unit input test (see page

22-137) .•
22-130 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!!!..I
DTC 82157: Driver's MPCS Unit Lost DTC 82162: Driver's MPCS Unit Lost
Communication with Gauge Control Module Communication with Relay Control Module
(lLLUMI Message) (RM Message)
DTC 82160: Driver's MPCS Unit Lost NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
Communication with Gauge Control Module sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System
(VSP/NE Message) Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112).
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 3. Wait for 6 seconds or more.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II). 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more. /s DTC 82162 indicated?
/s DTC 82157 and/or 82160 indicated? NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
YES-Go to step 5. the driver's MPCS unit and the relay control
module.•
time. Check for loose or poor connections between 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
the driver's MPCS unit and the gauge control
module.• Are DTCs 81005,81158, 81959, 82162, and/or 8
2970 a/so indicated?
YES-Do the relay control module input test
Are DTCs 81011,81060,81061,81205,81206,8 (see page 22-136).•
1207,81359,81906,81956,82157, and/or 82160
a/so indicated? NO-Do the driver's MPCS unit input test (see page
22-278) .•
(see page 22-334) .•
NO-Do the driver's MPCS unit input test (see page

22-278) .•
BACK 22-131
MICU Input Test
NOTE: Before testing, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-112).
2. Remove the left kick panel (see page 20-76).
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors 0, E, F, G, H, J, N, P, 0, W, and X.
NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals.
CONNECTOR D (17P) CONNECTOR J (21P)*

LTGRN
~,:00
LTGRN
CONNECTOR E (16P) CONNECTOR P (30P)
BLK
CONNECTOR F (14P) CONNECTOR Q (14P)
VEL
ORN
CONNECTOR G (6P) CONNECTOR W (5P)
,
LTGRN
~
I
WHT
CONNECTOR H (14P)
[ffi]997I<RW]
\
BLK
22-132 BACK
r--:'I
~
CONNECTOR N (45P)* CONNECTOR X (39P)* '
r---1 r-=:1
Vl2VVI 0ZI 0 2 13 1 IT]

I 7 I 8I 9 1/111 1/1 150 7 121 19 110 111 1
1131 14 1 115V117118V1
LTG RN ~
112 VI
~i'. [ill
IE]
123124V1~
l28 vl30VVI ~
gV n
....,1F1~1
1391401411421 I!:
LTG RN ~ 1/1441451
*Connector view shown rotated 180"from actual position in the under-dash fuse/relay box.
4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all makin"g good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
• If the terminals look OK, go to step 5.
5. With the connector still disconnect, make these input tests at the connectors.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6.
CavitY Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
D11 LTGRN Under all conditions (Under- Check for continuity between • An open in the wire
hood fuse/relay box connector E the D1 1 terminal and the under-
(14P) disconnected) hood fuse/relay box connector E
(14P) No.1 terminal:
Check for continuity between • A short to ground in the wire
the D1 1 terminal and body
ground:
G1 LTGRN Under all conditions (Rear fuse/ Check for continuity between An open in the wire
relay box connector B (34P) the G1 terminal and the rear
disconnected) fuse/relay box connector B (34P)
No.2 terminal:
Check for continuity between A short to ground in the wire
the G1 terminal and body
ground:
J4 LTGRN Under all conditions (Driver's Check for continuity between An open in the wire
MPCS unit connector A (40P) the J4 terminal and the driver's
disconnected) MPCS unit connector A (40P) No.
28 terminal:
the J4 terminal and body
ground:
(cont'd)
BACK 22-133
MICU Input Test (cont'd)

Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
P6 LTBLU Under all conditions (MICU Check for continuity between An open in the wire
connector P (30P) disconnected) the P6 terminal and the OLC
No.7 terminal:
the P6 terminal and body
ground:
N22 LTGRN Under all conditions (Gauge Check for continuity between An open in the wire
control module con,nector A (12 the N22 terminal and the gauge
P) discQnnected) control module connector A (12
P) No.5 terminal:
the N22 terminal and body
ground:
N28 LTGRN Under all conditions Check for continuity between An open in the wire
(Combination switch control the N28 terminal and the
unit 8P connector disconnected) combination switch control unit
8P connector No.4 terminal:
the N28terminal and body
ground:
X27 LTGRN Under all conditions Check for continuity between An open in the wire
(Immobilizer-keyless control the X27 terminal and the
unit 7P connector disconnected) immobilizer-keyless control unit
7P connector No.4 terminal:
the X27 terminal and body
ground:
There should be no continuLty.
X27 GRY Under all conditions (Climate Check for continuity between An open in the wire
control unit 40P connector the X27 terminal and the climate
disconnected) control unit 40P connector No.4
terminal:
ground:
X27 LTGRN Under all conditions (Audio unit Check for continuity between An open in the wire
connector C) (24P) the X27 terminal and the audio
disconnected) unit connector C (24P) No. 23
terminal:
ground:
X27 LTGRN Under all conditions Check for continuity between An open in the wire
(HandsFreeLink control unit 28P the X27 terminal and the
connector disconnected) HandsFreeLink control unit 28P
connector No. 19 terminal:
ground:
22-134 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!:..I
S. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connectors .
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system .
• If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-72).
E9 BlK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (GS01)
H9 There should be less than 0.5 V. • An open in the wire
Q4
P1 BRN Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
There should be less than 0.5 V. • An ODen in the wire
F1 VEL Ignition switch ON (II), (Rear Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
fuse/relay box connector B (34P) There should be battery voltage. dash fuse/relay box
disconnected) • Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
• A short to ground in the wire between
the MICU and rear fuse/relay box
G3 WHT Under all conditions, (Rear fuse/ Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
relay box connector B (34P) There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse box
disconnected) • Blown No.7 (10 AI fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty under-dash fuse/relay box
• A short to ground in the wire between
the MICU and rear fuse/relav box
F14 ORN Under all conditions Short connection to ground: • Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
The ignition key light should under-hood fuse box
come on. • Blown No. S 17.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty ignition key light
• An ODen in the wire
W4 lTGRN Under all conditions (Interior Short connection to ground: • Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
lights switch in DOOR position) The interior lights should come under-hood fuse box
on. • Blown No. S (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box
• Blown map lights or ceiling light bulb(s)
BACK 22-135
:Multiplex Integrated Control System
Relay Control Module Input Test

2. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 22-72).
3. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box connectors D (10P) andE (14P).
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

CONNECTOR D(10P) CONNECTOR E (14P)
BLK LTGRN
~
[:1I~Ircd
r
\
:[iJ u
1
7
/
/
3
9 10
F=I
1,11
4 5
12 13 14
6
WHT YEL
4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• , If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
• If the terminals look OK, go to step 5.
5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors
• If any'test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
'. If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6.
E1 lTGRN Under all Check for continuity between the E1 An open in the wire
conditions (Under- terminal and the under-dash fuse/
dash fuse/relaybox relay box connector D (17P) No. 11
connector D (17P) terminal:
disconnected There should be continuity.
Check for continuity between the E1 A short to ground in the wire
terminal and body ground:
6. Reconnect the connector, and make these input tests at the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, replace the relay control module.
D4 BlK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
conditions There should be less than 0.5 V. • An oeen in the wire
D6 WHT Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
conditions There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse box
• Blown No.7 (10 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box
• An oeen in the wire
D7 VEL Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
(II) There should be battery voltage. dash fuse/relay box
• An open in the wire
22-136 BACK
r--:'I
L::::..I
Driver's MPCS Unit Input Test
2. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-8).
3. Disconnect the driver's MPCS unit connectors A (40P) and B (14P).
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR A (40P) DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT CONNECTOR B (14P)
14
VEL LTGRN
I
BLK
• Ifthe terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system .
• Ifthe terminals look OK. go to step 5.
(cont'd)
BACK
Driver's MPCS Unit Input Test (cont'd)

5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors.
A28 lTGRN Under all Check for continuity between the A An open in the wire.
conditions (Under- 28 terminal and the under-dash fuse/
dash fuse/relay relay box connector J (21 P) No.4
box connector J terminal:
(21P) disconnected There should be continuity.
Check for continuity between the A A short to ground in the wire
28 terminal and body ground:
6. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connectors.
• If all the input tests prove OK, replace the driver's MPCS unit.
A5 BlK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
B14 conditions There should be less than 0.5 V. • An open in the wire
A7 WHT Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
dash fuse/relay box
A25 VEL Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
22-138 BACK
r:-:'I
1..::..1
Rear MICU Input Test
2. Remove the left rear trim (see page 20-92).
3. Disconnect the rear fuse/relay box connectors B (34P) and C (42P).
CONNECTOR B (34P)
LTGRN WHT BLK
~~~Ij@
~~
VEL BLK
CONNECTOR C (42P)
LTGRN
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system .
• If the terminals look OK, go to step 5. . ,
(cont'd)
BACK 22-139
Rear MICU Input Test (cont'd)

5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the connectors.
B2 lTGRN Under all Check for continuity between the B2 An open in the wire
conditions (Under- terminal and the under-dash fuse/
dash fuse/relay relay box connector G (6P)· No. 1
box connector G terminal:
(6P) There should be continuity.
Check for continuity between the B2 A short to ground in the wire
terminal and body ground:
B14 lTGRN Under all Check for continuity between the B An open in the wire
conditions (Power 14 terminal and the power seat
seat control unit control unit connector A (40P) No. 40
connector A (40P) terminal:
disconnected) There should be continuity.
Check for continuity between the B Ashort to ground in the wire
C16" lTGRN Under all Check for continuity between the C An open in the wire
conditions (Power 16 terminal and the power tailgate
tailgate control unit control unit connector C (14P) No.7
connector C (14P) terminal:
disconnected) There should be continuity.
Check for continuity between the C A short to ground in the wire
C32" lTGRN Under all Check for continuity between the C An open in the wire
conditions 32 terminal and the (AcuraLink
(Acurc;lLink control control unit (XMreceiver) connector
unit (XM receiver) B (16P) No.5 terminal: .
connector B (16P) There should be continuity.
disconnected) Check for continuity between the C A short to ground in the wire
• 1: With power tailgate
.2: With AcuraLink
6. Reconnect the connectors, and make these input tests at the connectors.
• If any test indicates a problem,find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the rear MICU must be faulty, replace the rear fuse/relay box (see page 22-75).
B18 BlK Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G603, G604)
B29 conditions There should be less than 0.5 V. • An open in the wire
B4 WHT Under all Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No.4 (40 A) fuse in the main
dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty rear fuse/relay box
B23 VEL Ignition switch ON Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 21 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
• Faulty rear fuse/relay box
22-140 BACK
~
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System .~
SECURITY INDICATOR
RELAY CONTROL MODULE

(Built into the under-
hood fuse/relay box)
Replacement,
page 22-71
HORNS GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

Test/Replacement,
page 22-180
MICU
(Built into the under-
HOOD SWITCH dash fuse/relay box)
Test, page 22-175 InputTest, page 22-132
LOCK BUTTON
POWER TAILGATE BUTTON
PANIC BUTTON
UNLOCK BUTTON
(cant'd)
BACK 22-141
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System
DRIVER'S MPCS UNIT

Input, page 22-278
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Test/Replacement, page 22-174
IGNITION KEY SWITCH
Test, page 22-79
LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR/KNOB SWITCH
Actuator Test, page 22-172
Knob Switch Test, page 22-173
LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH
DRIVER'S DOOR
KEY CYLINDER SWITCH·
Test, page 22-174
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/

KNOB SWITCH
KEYLESS BUZZER
Test/Replacement,
page 22-175
REARMICU
(Built into the rear fuse/relay box)
22-142 BACK
r:-:'I
~
TAILGATE OUTER HANDLE SWITCH

Test/Replacement,
page 22-176
RIGHT REAR DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR/KNOB SWITCH

FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Test, page 22-174
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR

LOCK ACTUATOR/KNOB SWITCH
POWER TAILGATE CLOSER UNIT

(Including FULL LATCH SWITCH) RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH
Latch/Ratchet Switch Test,
page 22-526
TAILGATE RELEASE ACTUATOR
(Without power tailgate)
TAILGATE LATCH SWITCH
(Without power tailgate)
Latch Switch Test, page 22-244
BACK 22-143
,.,
Keyl~ss/Power Door Locks/Security System
System Description
Security Alarm System
The security alarm system is integrated with the multiplex integrated control system. Forthe system to arm, the
ignition switch must be off, the key must be removed, and the MICU must receive signals that the doors, hood, and
tailgate are closed and locked. The alarm can be armed or disarmed at any time by locking or unlocking the driver's
door with the key or pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the transmitter, the alarm can also be armed by locking
(with the lock knob) then closing the driver's door.
When everything is closed and locked, the only inputs that are grounded, and have 0 V, are the driver's door lock knob
switch (LOCK position), and the audio unit. In other words, all of the other switches are open, and have about 5.0 V in
sleep mode or 12 V in awake mode, including the key cylinder switches. The security indicator in the gauge control
module begins to flash immediately after the doors, tailgate, and hood are closed and locked, and then, after 20
seconds, the flashing intervals of the security indicator change to indicate that the alarm is fully armed. If the security
indicator does not flash, the system is not arming. Ifthe LOCK button is pressed a second time within 5 seconds
(Keyless LOCK acknowledgement is turned ON) and the vehicle is completely closed and locked, a beep sounds and
parking lights flash one time to confirm the security alarm system is armed.
If one of the switches is misadjusted or shorted internally (0 V), or there is a short in the circuit (0 V), the security
system will not arm. A switch that is slightly misadjusted can cause the alarm to sound for no apparent reason. In this
case, a significant change in outside air temperature, the vibration of a passing vehicle, or something bumping into
the vehicle could cause the alarm to sound. There is no glass breakage or motion detector feature.
If anything is opened or improperly unlocked after the system is armed, the control unit receives a ground signal from
that switch, the 5-12 V reference drops to 0 V, and the system sounds the alarm. If the audio unit is disconnected, the
input loses its ground, and the input voltage goes to 5:"-12 V, and the system sounds the alarm.
The system sounds the alarm when any of following occur while the security system is armed:
• A door or the tailgate is forced open

• A door is unlocked without using the key or the transmitter
• The hood is opened
• The audio unit (or navigation unit, rear controller and screen) is disconnected
• The transmitter panic is operated
• The ignition switch is turned ON (II)
When the system sounds the alarm, the horns sound and the exterior lights flash for 2 minutes. The alarm can be
stopped at any time by unlocking the driver's door with the key or by pressing any button on the transmitter.
22-144 BACK
~
~
Panic Mode
The panic mode sounds the alarm in order to attract attention. When the PANIC button on the transmitter is pressed
and held for about 2 seconds, the alarm sounds and the exterior lights flash for about 20 seconds.
The panic mode can be cancelled at anytime by pressing any button on the remote or by turning the ignition switch
ON (II). The panic mode will notfunction ifthe ignition switch is ON (II). "
Keyless Entry System
The keyless entry system is integrated with the multiplex integrated control system. Transmitters ~ and 2 (Identified
on the back of each transmitter) are linked to the DPMS, the climate control settings, the custom memory settings (in
the MID), the audio, the navigation and the illumination settings. Depending on which transmitter unlocks the vehicle,
these settings are chosen.
Some functions of the security, keyless entry, and power door locks can be customized using the MID keyless memory
setting. They include:
• AUTO DOOR LOCK: Door locking can be turned off, or turned on when shifting from Park or at a speed above
15 mph.
• AUTO DOOR UNLOCK: Door unlocking can be turned off, or turned on when shifting to Park or turning the ignition
switch OFF.
• WHENEVER UNLOCKING: Door unlocking can be set to unlock all doors or only the driver's door on the first push.
• KEYLESS DOOR LOCK ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: The beep and the front parking lights can be turned on or off when
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the remote.
• SECURITY RELOCK TIMER: Select the time (30, 60, or 90 sec.) that the doors relock if you unlock the doorswith the
remote, but do not open any of them.
• HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER: Select time (0, 15,30, or 60 sec.) to turn the headlights off after removing the key
from the ignition opening, then closing the driver's door.
• AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY: Automatic lighting sensor sensitivity can be adjusted five steps (MIN/LOW/MID/HIGH/
MAX).
• INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIMER: Select the dimming time (15, 30, or 60 sec.) of the interior lights after closing the
door with the key removed from the ignition.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-145
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System
- METER SETUP:
Language-English/French/Espanol
Outside airtemperature-+5 +4 +3 +2 +10 -1 -2 -3 -4-5
Trip A an average Fuel Reset w/fill-ON/OFF
Adjust alarm volume-HIGH/MID/LOW
Elapsed time reset-manually only, IGN OFF, Trip A, Trip 8
Auto interior illumination-MAX MID LOW MIN OFF
- POSITION SETUP:
Memory position link ON/OFF
Auto tilt telescope steering wheel ON/OFF
NOTE: If either of these function is turned off, they will not function with a linked remote.
- LIGHTING SETUP:
Interior light dimming time (15, 30, 60 sec.)
Headlight auto OFF timer (0,15,30,60 sec.)
Auto light sensitivity MAX HIGH MID LOW MIN
- DOOR WINDOW SETUP:
Auto door lock-Shift from park with vehicle speed ON or OFF-Driver's door/All doors
Auto door unlock-Shift to park with ignition ON or OFF-Driver's door/All doors
Key and remote unlock mode-Driver's door/All doors
Keyless lock acknowledgement-ON/OFF
Security relock timer (90, 60, 30, sec)
- WIPER SETUP:
Wiper action intermittent/with speed
The transmitters can be linked and unlinked to the keyless memory settings by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons at the same time for about 1 second. The LED on the transmitter blinks twice when unlinked, and once when
linked.
The keyless entry system allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle with the transmitter. When yo,-, press the LOCK
button, all the'doors lock (unless anyone of the doors is not fully closed or the key is in the ignition switch).
When you press the UNLOCK button first time, only the driver's door unlocks, if keyless memory setting "WHENEVER
UNLOCKING" is set to Driver's Door. The other doors unlock when you press the UNLOCK button a second time. All
the doors unlock when you press the UNLOCK button first time if keyless memory setting "WHENEVER UNLOCKING"
is set to All Doors.
NOTE: The doors will not lock with the transmitter if a door is not fully closed, or if the ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
Ifthe UNLOCK button is pressed, released, then pressed and held, the windows and the moonroof begin to open. The
windows and the moon roof stop if the button is released. The windows and moonroof cannot be closed with the
remote. See power windows for more information and troubleshooting.
When the interior lights switch is in the "DOOR" position, the individual map lights will come on when the UNLOCK
button is pressed. If a door is not opened, the lights will go off in about 30, 60, or 90 seconds (depending on the
keyless memory setting "SECURITY RELOCK TIMER"), and the doors will relock. If the doors are locked wit

MDX 07

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

MDX 07

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

@

Chassis and Paint Codes ........................ .......... 1-2

Identification Number Locations ........ ............ 1-3

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations .... 1-4

Parts Marking .................................................... 1-10

Precautions for Super Handling All Wheel

Chassis and Paint Codes

Vehicle Identification Number En ine Number

2HN Y02 8 2 * 7 H 500001 J37A1 - 1000001

Vehicle Identification Number.

Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Transmission Number

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations

Front Passenger's Compartment:

FRONT SEAT BELT

Steering Wheel: Rear Passenger's Compartment:

CABLE REEL CAUTION DRIVER AIRBAG

AIR CONDITIONING SIDE AIRBAG CAUTION

RADIATOR CAP DANGER

Under-hood Emission Control Label

Example: Test Group:

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION 7 HNX T 03.7 XKR

LOADED 11M TESTING OF THIS VEHICLE MUST BE CONDUCTED

7 HNX R 0163 BBY

NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components Floor Jack

2. Raise the lift a few inches, and rock the vehicle

To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same

If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional Towing Hook Installation

2. Remove the towing hook placed behind a cover

3. Screw in the towing hook (8), and tighten it

Sling-type Equipment - The tow truck uses metal

The only recommended way oftowing the vehicle is on

Standards and Service Limits

Engme Assem blIV

Fuel and Emissions

in M position (9.5-10.3 kgf/cm', 135-147 psi) (9.0 kgf/cm', 128 psi)

Clutch Clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance 1st -- 1.15-1.35mm

shaft ., (1.4173-1.4179 in.)

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service limit

Standards and Service Limits

A"Ir Con dOt"

Evaporator (rear) 30 mL (1 fI·oz)

Item Measurement Qualification Specification

Rear map light 12V-6.2W

1,720 mm (67.7 in.'

.. 2,750 mm (108.3 in.'

Lubricants and Fluids ....................................... 3-2

Acura Motor Oil:

Honda Canada PIN CA66806 (5W-20)

B Automatic transmission Acura Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF-Z1): .

C Transfer assembly Hypoid gear oil GL4 or GL5

Viscosity SAE 90: above 0 'f (-18 'C)

0 Rear differential Acura Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF-Z1):

F Brake booster clevis Multipurpose grease

M Power steering system Honda Power Steering Fluid

0 Cooling system Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2

API CERTIFICATION SEAL Recommended Engine Oil

2. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,

General Information (cont'd)

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) position.

2. If system message(s) are displayed, press the Info

3. Push and release the Sel/Reset button repeatedly

4. Press and hold the Sel/Reset button for about 10

5. Press Info button repeatedly until the "RESET"